TURCOLOGICA

Herausgegeben von Lars Johanson

Ban d 34

1998
Harrassowitz Verlag • Wiesbaden
 Larry Clark

Türkmen Reference Gramırıar

1998
Harrassowitz Verlag • Wiesbaden
D ie Deutsche Bibliothek - CIP-Einheitsaııfnahme

Clark, Larry:
Türkmen reference grammar/ Larry Clark. - W ıesbaden:
Harrassowitz, 1998
(Turcologîca; Bd. 34)
ISBN 3-447-04019-X

© O tto Harrassowitz, Wiesbaden 1998

This work, i n c l u d î n g alİ o f i ts p a r t s , is p r o t e c t e d b y C o p y r ig h t.
Any use beyond the limits of C o p y r ig h t law without the p e r m i s s i o n
of the publisher is f o r b i d d e n and subjecc to p e n a lc y . This a p p lie s
p a r t i c u l a r l y to reproducrions, translations, microfilms a n d storage
a n d p r o c e s s in g in e le c t r o n i c systems.
Printing and binding by MZ-Verîagsdruckerei GmbH, Memmingen
Printed in Germany

ISSN 0177-4743
ISBN 3-447-04019-X
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Foreword......................................................................................................................... xvii
Ttanscription....................................................................................................................xxiii
Abbreviations.................................................................................................................. xxv

iNraoDucnoN....................................................................................... ı
The History of the Türkmen.............................................................................................. 2
TheSaljuks...................................................................................................................... 2
Tlıe Name "Türkmen"...................................................................................................... 3
Formation of the Modem Türkmen............................................................................... 4
Incorporation into Russia............................................................................................... 6
Soviet and Independerit Türkmenistan......................................................................... 6
The Distribution of the Türkmen....................................................................................... 8
Türkmen in Türkmenistan............................................................................................ 8
Türkmen Outside Türkmenistan.................................................................................... 9
The Turianen Language.......................................................................................................12
Written Sources of the Türkmen Language................................................................... 12
Türkmen Dialects.............................................................................................................16
Türkmen and the Oğuz Languages..................................................................................18
The Study of Türkmen....................................................................................................... 22
The Foundations of Türkmen Linguistics........................................................................;.......... 22
The Three Capstones of Türkmen Linguistics................ ............................................. 23
Türkmen Linguistics in the W est.................................................................................. 25

SOUND SYSTEM...................................................................................................- ......— 27

Phonology........................................................................................................................... 28
Descriprion of Vowels................................................................ -J.....................................28
The Vowels e le/ and s /a:/............................................................................................. 32
Long Vowels in Root Syilables............................................................ .........................33
Long Vowels in Non-Root Syilables............................................................................ 35
Descriprion of Consonants................................................................................................. 37
Pronunciation of Russian Consonants.......................................................................... 40
Syllable Structure................................................................................................................ 43
Stress............................................................................................................................ - • - 4 4
Morphophonology.................................................................................................... :.......47
Vowel Harmony.................................. ................................................................................ 47
Front-Back Harmony...................................................................................................... 48
Rounded-Unrounded Harmony....................................................................................... 49
Vowel Harmony Rules....................................................................................................49
vi Türkmen Reference Grammar

Vowel Harmony in Borrowed W ords........................................................................... 52

Vovvel Hannony in Suffbces.......................................................................................... 53
Vowel Lengthening........................................................................................................... 56
Fusion of Two Vowels ................................................................................................56
Fusion of Two Vowels with Loss of Consonant........................................................ 58
Vowel Lengthening with Case Sıiffbtes....................................................................... 59
Vowel Lengthening with Family Name Suffixes.........................................................59
Vowel Loss.........................................................................................................................60
"Consonant Hannony"........................................................................................................63
Consonant Voicing.............................................................................................................65
Adding the Consonants Mİyi, c /&/, h İn /....................................................................... 69
Syllable L oss......................................................................................................................71
Orthography.......................................................................................................................73
The Türkmen Alphabet...................................................................................................... 73
Letters of the Turîcmen Alphabet.................................................................................. 74
The Letters for Vowels............................................................................................... 76
The Letters for Consonants........................................................................................76
The Letters a, e, e and 10 ........................................................................................... 76
The Signs t and t ......................................................................................................77
Variant Spellings............................................................................................................78
Türkmen Orthography.......................... .............................................................................79
= Vowel Hannony..............................................................................................................79
Rounded Vovvel Hannony and the Letteıs a and e /s ................................................80
Rounded Vovvel Harmony and the Letters h and h .................................................80
Rounded Vowel Hannony and the Letters y and y .................................................. 81
Rounded Vowel Hannony in Suffbces...................................................................... 82
Consonant Assimilations..............................................................................................84
The "New Türkmen Alphabet"..........................................................................................86

GRAMMATICAL SYSTEM..................................................................................................87
Introduction........................................................................................................................ 88
Parts of Speech................................................................................................................... 88
Content Words............................................................................................................... 88
Structure Words..............................................................................................................90
Particles.......................................................................................................................... 90
Word Structure................................................................................................................... 91
Simple W ords.................................................................................................................91
Derived Words................................................................................................................ 92
Combined Woıdsç..........................................................................................................92
Words and Grammar.......................................................................................................... 93
Grammatical Su£Bxes..................................................................................................... 93
Grammadcai Categories................................................................................................. 94
 Table of Contents vii

Nouns.............................................................................................................................. 97
Types of No.uns.............................................................................................................. 98
Simple N ouns............................................................................................................. 98
Derived Nouns............................................................................................................ 98
Combined Nouns........................................................................................................ 98
Grammatical Categories of Nouns................................................................................ 99
Number............................................................................................................................100
Plural Suffîx............................................................................................................... 101
Fonns of the Plural Suffix.........................................................................................106
Peıson.............................................................................................................................. 107
Possessive Suffixes....................................................................................................107
Forms of the Possessive Suffixes............................................................................. 112
C ase.................................................................................................................................114
Nominative Case......................................................................................................... 114
GenitiveCase.............................................................................................................. 116
Definite Possession................................................................................................ 116
Indefmite Possession..............................................................................................119
Fonns of the Genitive Case....................................................................................121
Accusative Case.......................................................................................................... 121
Forms of the Accusative Case................................................................................125
Dative Case..................................................................................................................126
Forms of the Dative Case...................................................................................... 130
LocativeCase.............................................................................................................. 131
Forms of theLocative Case.............................................................. .....................135
AblativeCase.............................................................................................................. 135
Forms of the Ablative Case....................................................................................141
Adjectives........................................................................................................................143
Types of Adjectives........................................................................................................145
Simple Adjectives...................................................................................................... 145
Derived Adjectives..................................................................................................... 145
Combined A djectives................................................................................................145
Comparative Degree........................................................................................................147
Superlative Degree.......................................................................................................... 149
Quantifıers..................................................................................................................... 151
Numerals............................................................................................................................ 151
Cardinal Numerals...................................................................................................... 151
The Numeral 6wp /bir/................................................................................................ 154
Ordinal Numerals.......................................................................................................... 157
Collective Numerals..................................................................................................... 159
Distribution Numeıals...................................................................................................159
Appıoximation Numeıals...................................................................... ............... . 161
Fractions..................................................................................................................... 163
viii Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Fraction Words........................................................................ . 164

Percentages............................................................................... . 167
Arithmetic................................................................................ 167
Counting Word........................................................................ 169
Quantifying Pronouns................................................................. 170
Collccüve Pronouns................................................................ 170
Indefmite Pronouns................................................................. 173
Negative Pronouns.................................................................. 178
Pronouns...................................................................................... 181
Personal Pronouns....................................................................... 181
Personal Pronouns in the Genitive C ase............................... 187
Demonstrative Pronouns............................................................. 190
Demonstrative Pronouns in the Genitive Case..................... 195
Reflexive Pronoun....................................................................... 196
Reflexi ve Referenee................................................................. 197
Reflexive Possessive Referenee.............................................. 199
Reflexive Possessive Referenee in Object Phrases................ 199
Otber Uses of ea /ö:8/............................................................. 200
Inteırogative Pronouns................................................................ 202
Verbs............................................................................................ 209
Types of Verbs............................................................................ 210
Simple Verbs........................................................................... 210
Derived Verbs........................................................................... 210
Combined Verbs...................................................................... 210
Grammatical Categories of Verbs.............................................. 211
Voice......................................................................................... 211
Negation.................................................................................... 212
Tense/Aspect/Mood................................................................. 213
Person/Number........................................................................ 214
Question.................................................................................... 215
Tense and Aspect.......................................................................... 217
Present Indefinite Tense.............................................................. 219
Forms of the Present Indefinite Tense................................... 221
Present Indefinite Tense: Contracted Fonns.......................... 222
Present Continuous Tense........................................................... 224
Forms of the Contracted Verbs.............................................. 225
Subjective Present Continuous Tense........................................ 229
Forms of the Subjective Present Continuous Tense............. 230
Negative Present Perfect Tense................................................... 231
Odıer Uses of -aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/............................... 232
Contrasting Negative Forms of the Present and Past Tenses 233
Forms of the Negative Present Perfect Tense........................ 235
 Table of Contents ix

Subjective Present Perfect Tense.....................................................................................236

Fonns of the Subjective Present Perfect Tense.......................................................... 237
Past Indefinite Tense.........................................................................................................238
Other Uses of -flM/flH /-dı/di/.......................................................................................239
Forms of the Past Indefinite Tense.............................................................................240
Habitual Past Indefinite Tense.........................................................................................241
Other Uses of -apflu/epnn /-ardı/erdi/......................................................................... 242
Forms of the Habitual Past Indefinite Tense.......... ^ ...............................................243
Subjective Past Indefinite Tense......................................................................................244
Other Uses of -BnmHp/untuHp /-ıpdır/ipdir/................................................................ 244
Forms of the Subjective Past Indefinite Tense.......................................................... 246
Past Continuous Tense.....................................................................................................247
Other Uses of -apfltı/topjpt /-ya:tdı/yâ:rdi/............... .................................................250
Contrasting the Past Indefinite, Habitual and Continuous Tenses......................... 251
Foıms of the Past Continuous Tense..........................................................................251
Past Perfect Tense............................................................................................................ 253
Other Uses of -bihubi/ hiihh /-ıpdı/ipdl/.......................................................................255
Forms of the Past Perfect Tense................................................... .............................. 256
Unrealized Past Perfect Tense..........................................................................................257
Forms of the Unrealized Past Perfect Tense............................................................... 258
Futuıe Indefinite Tense.....................................................................................................259
Other Uses of -ap/ep /-ar/er/........................................................................................261
Contrasting the Future and Present Indefinite............................................................262
Fonns of the Future Indefinite Tense......................................................................... 262
Definite Future Tense....................................................................................................... 264
Contrasting the Definite Future and Future Indefinite............................................. 265
Forms of the Definite Future Tense............................................................................266
Mood.................................................................................................................... ............ 267
Imperative Mood.............................................................................................................. 267
First Person Imperative................................................................................................268
Forms of the First Person Imperative..................................................................... 269
Second Person Imperative............................................................................................ 270
Fonns of the Second Peıson Imperative................................................................274
Third Person Imperative.............................................................................................. 274
Foıms of the Third Person Imperative.................................................................... 276
Conditional Mood............................................................................................................ 277
Tenses in the Conditional Clause............................................................. T.............. 282
Other Uses of -ca/ce /-8a/0e/........................................................................................ 285
Forms of the Conditional M ood.................................................................................286
Subjunctive Mood............................................................................................................287
Forms of the Subjunctive M ood.................................................................................288
Desiderative M ood...........................................................................................................289

i
X Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Forms of the Desiderative Mood................................................................................ 290

Other Mood Suffixes........................................................................................................291
Suffix of Desire.............................................................................................................291
Forms of the Suffıx of Desire..................................................................................292
Suffix of Bıtention....................................................................................................... 293
Forms of the Suffix of Intention.............................................................................294
Suffix of Obligation.....................................................................................................294
Forms of the Suffix of Obligation.......................................................................... 296
Su£Bx of Permission....'............................................................................................... 297
Fornıs of the Suffix of Permission......................................................................... 300
Modal Formations.............................................................................................................301
Ability........................................................................................................................... 301
Affîrmation....................................................................................................................303
Benefit........................................................................................................................... 304
Conjecture.....................................................................................................................304
Desire............................................................................................................................ 305
Experiment....................................................................................................................305
Need...............................................................................................................................306
Possibility.....................................................................................................................307
Pıetense..........................................................................................................................310
Resolve..........................................................................................................................310
Descrjpitye Verbs..............................................................................................................311
Beginning of Action.........................................................................................................311
Process of Action............................................................................................................. 319
Direction of Action...........................................................................................................324
Completion of Action......................................................................................................326
V erbals...........................................................................................................................327
Infînidve........................................................................................................................... 327
Foıms of the ffifinitive Suffix......................................................................................332
Verbal Nouns................................................................................................................... 333
Verbal Noun in -Ma/Me /-ma/me/.................................................................................333
Foıms of the Verbal Noun in -Ma/Me /-ma/me/..................................................... 334
Verbal Noun in -hiu/hiu /-ıs/is/.................................................................................. 334
Forms of the Verbal Noun in -biıu/Miu /-ıs/is/....................................................335
Paıticiples..........................................................................................................................336
Present Paıticiple in - hh/ üsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/...................................................................336
Forms of the Present Participle................................................................................340
Past Participle in -m /eu /-an/en/..i........................................................................... 341
Forms of the Past Participle.................................................................................... 344
Future Participle in -tkak/ ^ sk /-jak/jek/.................................................................... 345
Forms of the Future Participle.................................................................................346
Future Indefinite Participle in -ap/ep /-ar/er/..............................................................347
 Table of Contents xi

Fonns of the Future Indefinite Participle............................................................... 348

Present Perfect Participle in -hmk/hhk /-dık/dik/...................................................... 348
Gerunds.................................................................................................................... ....... 350
Gerund in -un/nıı /-ıp/ip/..........................................................................................350
Fonns of the Gerund in -hm/mı /-ıp/ip/..................................................................357
Gerund in -a/e/# /-a/e/y/............................................................................................ 357
Gerund in -anu/enH /-alı/eli/ ................................................................................. 358
Gerund in -ara#a(H)/arefle(H) /-a:gada(n)/â:gede(n)/....................................................358
Adverbs............................................................................................................................. 359
Types of Adverbs............................................................................................................. 359
Simple Adverbs............................................................................................................359
Derived Adverbs.................................................................................................... ....359
Combined Adverbs....................................................................................................... 360
Classification of Adverbs................................................................................................. 361
Adverbs of Time...........................................................................................................361
Adverbs of Sequeaoe.................................................................................................... 364
Adverbs of Place................................................................................................ ..... 370
Adverbs of Direction.....................................................................................................371
Adverbs of Degree........................................................................................................ 373
Adverbs of Manner....................................................................................................... 375
Modal Words................................................................................................................... 377
Affkmation....................................................................................................................... 377
Negation............................................................................................................................ 382
Confirmation.....................................................................................................................386
Certainty........................................................................................................................... 388
Supposition......................................................................................................................389
M otivation....................................................................................................................... 391
Intensification................................................................................................................ 392
Limitation........................................................................................................................ 396
G eneralization................................................................................................................ 397
Demonstration.................................................................................................................. 401
Inıerjections......................................................................................................................403
Postpositions................................................................................................................... 405
Postpositions with the Nominative C ase...................................................................... 405
Postpositions with the Dative C ase............................................................................... 416
Postpositions vvith the Ablative Case.............................................................................421
Amdliary Nouns................................................................................................................427
C onjıtnctions............................................................................................................ 433
Coordinating Conjunctions.............................................................................................433
Connection................................................................................................................... 433
Contradiction............................................................................................................... 438
Coırelation....................................................................................................................444
ITM!IWLW,lW.lm .u U |j

xii Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Subordinating Conjunctions.........................................................................................450
Condition.................................................................................................................... 450
Contingency................................................................................................................ 451
Causadon.................................................................................................................... 451
Qnotation.......................................................................................................................453
Particles......................................................................................................................... 457
Particles That Express Attitudes.................................................................................. 459
Emphasis..................................................................................................................... 459
Speculation..................................................................................................................463
Confirmation....................................................................................... ....................... 465
Assertion........................................................................................................................467
Particles That Express Emotions...................................................................................470
Appeal......................................................................................................................... 470
Realization.................................................................................................................474
Surprise.........................................................................................................................475
Grammatical Particles....................................................................................................476
Question........................................................................................................................476
Negation..................................................................................................................... 478
Qualification............................................................................................................... 480

S YNTACnC SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 485

Phrases............................................................................................................................486
Noun Phrase Structure..................................................................................................487
Juxtaposition............................................................................................................. 487
Agreement........... :......................................................................................................488
Government.................................................................................................................. 489
Verb Phrase Structure.................................................................... ................................ 490
Juxtaposition............................................................................................................... 490
Government...................................................................................................................491
Semences......................................................................................................................... 492
Types of Sentences.........................................................................................................492
Classifîcation According to Purpose...........................................................................492
Classification Acoording to Structure......................................................................... 494
Simple Sentences............................................................................................................. 496
Parts of a Sentence....................................................................................................... 496
Order of the Parts of a Sentences................................................................................. 498
Agreement Betvveen Subject and Predicate.................................................................500
Words Not Connected with Parts of a Sentence....................................................... 500
Composite Sentences........................................................................................................501
Compound Sentences................................................... ..............................................501
Complex Sentences......................................................................................................502
 Table of Contents xiii

LEXICON................................................................ 505
Word Comppsition................................................ 506
Compound Words................................................. 506
Combination W ords............................................. 509
Intensified Words.................................................. 510
Reduplication..................................................... 510
Intensifying Syilables....................................... 511
Auxiliary Verbs.................................................... 512
Neologisms, Clipped Words and Acronyms...... 516
Word Derivation................................................... 517
Nouns from Nouns................................................ 518
Agent Suffibc...................................................... 518
Association Suffix........................................... 518
Industry Suffıx.................................................. 519
Companion Suffix........................................... 519
Diminutive Sufftxes......................................... 520
Petsian Suffixes................................................. 520
Russıan Suffixes................................................ 522
Nouns from Verbs................................................. 523
Process/Result of Action.................................. 523
Means/Place/Agent of Action.......................... 524
Other Suffixes................................................... 526
Verbs from Nouns, Adjectives and Other Words 527
The Suffix +na/ne- /+la/le-/......................... 527
Other Suffixes.......................... '........................ 528
Verbs from Verbs.................................................. 530
Voice Suffixes................................................... 530
Active Voice.................................................. 531
Passive Voice................................................. 531
Reflexive Voice............................................. 532
Cooperative Voice......................................... 533
Causative Voice............................................. 534
Compound Voice Suffîxes............................ 535
Descriptive Sufifcces.......................................... 536
Adjectives fitom Nouns......................................... 538
Attribute Suffix................................................. 538
Privation Suffix................................................. 539
Relation Sııffix.................................................. 540
Other Suffixes................................................... 540
Persian Suffixes................................................. 541
Persian Prefıxes................................................. 541
Russian Adjectives............................................ 542
xiv Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Adjectives from Verbs.................................................................................................... 543

Adverbs from Nouns, Adjectives and Other Words.....................................................545
Borrowing.......................................................................................................................548
Persian and Arabic.......................................................................................................... 548
Russian......................................................... ................................................................. 550
Thematic Groups........................................................................................................... 552
Verb Groups.................................................................................................................... 552
Verbs of Motion......................................................................................................... 552
Verbs of Speech.......................................................................................................... 554
Verbs of Emotion and Understanding....................................................................... 554
Time and Calendar......................................................................................................... 555
Time of the Day.......................................................................................................... 555
Days of the Week........................................................................................................556
Day of the Month........................................................................................................557
M onths........................................................................................................................557
Seasons........................................................................................................................557
Year............................................................................................................................. 558
Cardinal Directions.........................................................................................................558
Money, Weights and Measures.....................................................................................559
Money......................................................................................................................... 559
Weights and Measures................................................................................................ 559
Human Body...................................................................................................................561
Anatomy..................................................................................................................... 561
Senses and Bodily Functions....................................................................................561
Famiiies.......................................................................................................................... 563
Kinship........................................................................................................................563
Manıage...................................................................................................................... 563
Greetings, Faıewells and BestWishes..........................................................................565
Greetings and Farewells..............................................................................................565
Best Wishes and Odıer Phrases................................................................................. 567

PARADIGMS...................................................................................................................569
Noun Paradigms.............................................................................................................570
Pronoun Paradigms........................................................................................................577
Verb Paradigms..............................................................................................................582

BIBLIOGRAPHY..............................................................................................................661
Works in Türkmen and Russian Languages................................................................. 661
Works in Other Languages............................................................................................ 673

INDEX.................................................................................................. ;..........................679
 Table of Contents XV

TABLES

Short and Long Vovvels in Root Syilables.................. 34

Characterization of Vowels According to Oppositions 48
Consonant Assimilations.............................................. 64
The Türkmen Alphabet.................................................. 75
Indefinite and Definite Possession............................... 120
Arithmetic...................................................................... 168
Quantifying Pronouns................................................... 171
Verb Tenses/Aspects...................................................... 218
Contracted Verbs............................................................ 227
Modal Foımations.......................................................... 302
Descriptive Verbs........................................................... 312
Functions of Participles............................................... 337
Modal W ords................................................................. 378
Conjunctions.................................................................. 434
Particles.......................................................................... 458
Compound Words.......................................................... 508
Turianen Weights and Measures................................... 560
Turianen Anatomy........................................................ 562
 FOREWORD

This book is a referenee grammar of Standard Türkmen, as vvritten and spoken by

representative speakers of the Teke d iale ct in the Ashgabat-Marı region of the country of
Türkmenistan in Central Asia, where Standard Türkmen is the national language.

The Türkmen Referenee Grammar is intended to be an accessible, practical and

comprehensive referenee work for students, researehers and linguists. My chief goal has
been to present Türkmen grammar for foreigners, and specifically for speakers of
English. Although this is not a contrastive grammar, comparisons are made vvith
English at every ttım in order to bring the user’s prior knowledge of grammar into play
and thereby to highlight some of the main differences betvveen the two languages.
Because most learners lack familiarity vvith the linguistic terminology and framevvork of
the Latin grammatical tradition, I have tried to explain the terms of grammatical
deseription wherever it was deemed necessary and to avoid excessive use of Latin terms
that mean little if anything to such learners.
My second goal has been to make consultation of this referenee grarfitnar as practical
as possible for users. An important aspect of practicality is responding to the needs of
those kind of learners who relate structuıes of one language to those in their own
language through "equivalencies." In nearly every case, the presentation of a suffıx or
structure is accompanied by a suggestion of an English equivalent or equivalents. At the
same time, the less literal translations, supported by annotations, of the numerous
illustrative sentences may be of practical service to researehers who use Turkmen-
language sources. In addition, every example has been transeribed as an aid to those who
seek a guide to a broad pronunciation of the language, as well as to those who prefer to
work with transeription rather rhan with the Cyrillic alphabet of Standard Türkmen.
Other aspects of practicality inelude the numerous highlighted examples, eross-
references, and paradigms, and the extensive Table of Contents and Index.
By its nature, my third goal- that of comprehensiveness- is doomed to failure. No
grammar can store ali the complexity and variety of a language, but it should
incorporate ali of the Standard forms and meanings of its phonological, morphological,
syntactic and lexical systems. This referenee grammar claims to do this for the
phonological and morphological systems of Standard Türkmen, and contains an
introduetion to its other systems. Moreover, the Türkmen Referenee Grammar seeks to
suggest the richness of the Türkmen spoken and written languages through abundant
citations of examples which have been seleeted for their aptness, variety and clarity from
a vastly larger collection of examples. Since the deseriptions of Türkmen grammar rely
heavily on the interpretation of these illustrative sentences, it should be noted that any
one of them may lose some feature of its original context, such that, in some cases, the
translation provided might be open to an alternative interpretation.
xviii Türkmen Referenee Grammar

General linguists also may find in this grammar an additional source for their
comparative researehes, since they rarely cast their nets farther than Turkish among the
Tuı kic languages. The cohsequence of this has been that the modern language of Turkey
is regarded as the model of this language family. The truth is that no modern Turkic
language may serve as its structural model, let alone Turkish which has been in the
"shop" for centuries, being stripped dovvn and restored again and again. This referenee
grammar presents sufficient data to linguists who seek an altemate or additional example
in the Turkic language family. For the Turkologist who long has realized the importance
of Türkmen for this field of study, the Türkmen Referenee Grammar may disappoint in
its determined avoidance of the comparative-historical approach which is routine in
Turkology. Atcthe same time, the Turkologist will recognize that historical grammar
rests upon a thorough understanding of the synchronic systems of a language and,
equally, upon an exhaustive treatment of its dialeets. To have attempted to meet these
challenges here vvould have svvelled this work to an unacceptable size.

The first part of this book (Sound System) presents a deseription of the sound system,
changes and spelling rules of Standard Türkmen. Ali Türkmen examples in this referenee
grammar are given in the Türkmen alphabet based on Cyrillic seript, rather than in the
"new Türkmen alphabet" based on Latin seript, vvhich is many years away from full
implementation. Ali examples are accompanied by a morphophonemic transeription
whose principles are simple (see Transeription) and produce a gross realization of the
aetual pronunciation of any representative Teke speaker of Standard Türkmen. In this
transeription system, each phoneme is represented by a symbol commonly used in
grammars and linguistic deseriptions. In addition, changes vvhich occur vvithin a vvord or
at the boundary between vvord and suffix (but not between vvord and vvord) are
represented. No other phonetic or suprasegmental features are indicated. English
approximations or equivalents of Türkmen sounds are taken from my variety of
American English. Because such approximations are subject to nit-picking, symbols
from the International Phonetic Alphabet are provided as a kind of objeetive referenee.
In the second part of the book (Grammatical System), the grammatical categories and
suffîxes of Standard Türkmen are presented according to their usage with different parts
of speech. Each grammatical category begins with a general deseription and referenee to
English usage to facilitate passage from a knovvn to an unknovvn language. This is
foilowed by highlighted typical examples and then a presentation of the main
expressions of each jgrammatical category, accompanied by examples. Some seetions
also inelude contrasts betvveen vvays of expressing various categories, and each seetion
ends vvith a deseription of the forms of the suffixes or struetures used.
The third part of the book (Syntactic System) offers an all-too-brief deseription of the
main syntactic patterns-of Standard Türkmen, its purpose is to familiarize students of
Türkmen vvith the general struetures of phrases and sentences, and not to teach parsing
or to present a full analysis, a task that remains to be accomplished even by Türkmen
linguists.
 Foreword xix

In the fourth part of the book (Lexicon), a brief overview of the Türkmen lexicon
with emphasis on the means of vvord formation is provided. Selected themuic groups
(anatomy, kinship, formulaic sayings, ete.) are discussed, since they may present some
interest to students and some other users. Attention is devoted to compounding and
derivation as the majör means of vvord formation, and to borrovving as a source of
lexicai enrichment.
The last part of the book (Paradigms) offers full paradigms of noun an: pronoun
declension vvith plural, possessive and case forms, as well as verb conjugıtion vvith
declarative and interrogative forms in both positive and negative.
An extensive Bibliography is appended to encourage further research, but it should
be pointed out that many of the vvorks cited theıe have not been available or eonsulted
for this study. A full index of forms and constructions concludes this book.
This referenee grammar skimps on syntax, omits several phonological (phonotactics,
intonation) and lexical (phraseology) topics, and lacks historical and dialect data, surely
proper elements of referenee. Such shortcomings may be placed in the perspeetive of the
thousands of studies of majör languages like English that appear each year, as opposed
to the relative handful of studies that have ever appeared on Türkmen or oth:r Turkic
languages.

The Türkmen Referenee Grammar relies on four main sources (see Abbrevia: ons), its
grammatical deseriptions depend heavily on those contained in the tvvo-volume
FpaMMaTMKa TypKMeHCKoro st3 biıca (1970, 1977), a vvork of thoroughiy sound
scholarship that stores and deseribes the norms of the Standard language. The d ebt vvhich
every student of Türkmen ovves to its collective of authors is very great, and ] am glad
to acknovvledge my extensive use of this vvork.
The resources of the Türkmen Language Project conducted at Indiana Univsrsity in
1993-1995 constitute the second main source of the Türkmen Referenee Grammar. This
project vvas funded by the Çenter for the Advancement of Language Leaming
(Washington, D.C.) to prepare the Türkmen Language Course. That course vvas designed
and vvritten to enable learners at U.S. government language schools to gain
communicative competence in the Türkmen language at a profıciency level of 2+
(Interagency Language Roundtable scale), and to meet the specifıc needs and .sehedules
of those schools. The course package consisted of around four thousand printed pages in
eleven books, as vvell as forty hours of video- and audio-tapes in tvventy cassettes.
Türkmen members (Ejegız Sapaıova, Ogulsona Ishankulıyeva, Nıyazberdi Rejt:bov) of
the Türkmen Language Project provided its staff vvriters (Suzan Özel, Y/iilianı Dirks)
vvith examples for exercises, as vvell as various illustrative examples for this grammar
upon request. In addition, frequent discussions vvith them clarified aspects of Türkmen
grammar and usage.
The third main source of the Türkmen Referenee Grammar consists of Turkmen-
language materials printed in the last fîfty years. Examples extracted frorn these
materials represent Standard Türkmen in several varieties of its usage, rangirg from
XX Türkmen Referenee Grammar

literatüre to journalism to daily speech. These sources inelude literary works and
newspapers from which examples were cited in the TpaMManiKa TypKMeHcıcoro sobiıca
and Oskar Hanser’s Türkmen Manual, as well as literary and sociai Science works and
newspapers that appear as readings in the Türkmen Language Course. Finaily, a variety
of current iiterary, sociai science and popular works, as well as magazines and
newspapers, served as sources of examples.
The fourth source of the Türkmen Referenee Grammar consists of the spoken
materials recorded on video- or audio-cassettes by David Tyson of the Türkmen
Language Project. These inelude television and radio broadcasts, taped lectures, informal
intervievvs vvith Türkmen from a wide variety of socioeconomic levels, and prompted
(but not seripted!) dialogs with Türkmen in Ashgabat and other localities of the Ahal
and occasionaliy other provinces. Ali such video- and audio-taped segments were
transeribed and translated by Tyson in the "Transcripts" volüme of the Türkmen
Language Course.

Potential users of the present Türkmen Referenee Grammar should be aware of the
history of its composition. A first version of the grammar was vvritten in 1995 to
accompany the Türkmen Language Course prepared by the Türkmen Language Project.
The primary goals of that version were to satisfy demands of the government review
team regarding its structure and presentation, and to provide a deseription of the
language which wou!d be accessible to the wide range of learners vvithin the government
who potentially might use that course. Neither goal had anything to do with traditional
expeetations of grammatical deseription. Moreover, neither goal vvas fully met, as it vvas
impossible to finish the grammar by the deadline set by the funding ageney. In 1996,
when the funding ageney announced its intention to print the Türkmen Language Course
for internal govemmental use, I urged that ageney not to do so, as its deadline had
prevented effective editing of any of its volumes and, in particular, the grammar itself
vvas far from Fınished. Since it decided to do so över my protests, I vvas able to
introduce a limited amount of editing of the volumes, including of the grammar in the
form in which it then existed. Thus, two prior versions of this grammar came into
existence, neither of them in anything like the form I vvould have intended had there
been suffıcient time to complete the grammar for this ageney. Although the previous
versions may be useful to some kinds of learners, they are rough-hevvn and incomplete,
and they should not be used by those interested in the grammatical deseription of
Standard Türkmen. The present Türkmen Referenee Grammar is a thoroughly revised and
expanded work intended for such users.

In vvriting this grammar, I enjoyed the incredibly good luck of vvorking eloseiy vvith
Professor Ejegız Saparova of the Türkmen National Institute of World Languages in
Ashgabat. Her expertise in the contrastive analysis of Türkmen, Russian and English
grammar, as vvell as her resolute attention to detail, her experience in language teaching,
and her unflagging spirit vvere key ingredıents in its accomplishment. In the Summer of
 Foreword xxi

1995, she devoted long hours to helping me complete the first version of this grammar,
contributing-many of the grammatical understandings in Türkmen and English, as vvell
as the interpretations of Türkmen sentences. At the same time, she patiently taught me
the nuts-and-bolts of the kind of grammatical deseription that aims at accessibility. The
follovving Summer, she read through many seetions of the revised manuseript, spotting
numerous errors in deseription, transeription and translation. Any expression of my
respect and gratitude vvould be a poor substitute for my dedicating this vvork to her.
I also wish to express my appreciation to ali my friends who formed the Türkmen
Language Project at Indiana University. Dr. Nancy Clair of Brovvn University guided
me into the fıeld of language pedagogy and her natural elarity and wit never failed to
make our vvork together a revvarding experience. David Tyson of Indiana University vvas
more than a mainstay during the Project. His linguistic and cultural knovvledge, his
quiet strength and humor, and his friendship, have made our several collaborations
personally important. Ogulsona Ishankulıyeva of Türkmen State University collected
and helped me translate a large body of examples from grammatical vvorks. Nıyazberdı
Rejebov of the Türkmen Ministry of Education assembled a great quantity of examptes
from nevvspapers, as vvell as provided me with materials on specialized topics. Suzan
Özel and William Dirks of the Department of Central Eurasian Studies at Indiana
University, as other members of the Project, ciarifîed a number of points of Türkmen
usage, and Andrea Word and Sarah Sherry of the Department of Linguistics assisted in
phonetic analysis and in contrasting English and Türkmen. Professors Lars Johanson
and Eva Csatö of Johannes Gutenberg-Universitiit in Mainz, as vvell as Marcel Erdal of
Johann Wolfgang Goethe-Universitiit in Frankfurt, provided sound counsel regaıding
several points of grammatical deseription. I also benefıtted from conversations with
Professors Akı Gurdov of Chi\rjew Pedagogical Institute and Paul Nevvman of the
Department of Linguistics at Indiana University. To ali of these friends I say Thanks
for the memories."

In a vvork of this size, which contains vvhat has seemed like trillions of symbols in three
vvriting systems, errors must remain. Of these, I am the sole executor.
 TRANSCRIPTION

The transeription system used in this referenee grammar is based on a morphophonemic

principle. Only the basic pronunciations of Türkmen phonemes are transcr.bed, and
never their variants. Thus, c and 3 are transeribed /©/ and /S/, instead of [s] and [z], and
6 always appears as /b/, and never as its variant [v] that occurs in non-inidal positions.
The transeription symbols used are those whieh appear in the deseription of vowels and
consonants (see Phonology).
Long vowels are indicated by a colon (:). With a few exeeptions, the writirg system
of the Standard language does not distinguish betvveen the short and the lonj; vowels,
for the reason that Turkmen speakers do not need such visual distinetior.;;. These
exceptions inelude using the letters y for short /ü/ and yü for long /ü:/, and the letters
3/e for short /e/ and a for its nearly always long counterpart /â:/. This means that the
letter a represents both /a/ and /a:/, u both /ı/ and /ı:/, m both /i/ and /i:/, o both /o/
and /o:/, e both /ö/ and /ö:/, and y both /u/ and /u:/. Such dual representations are
indicated throııgh the convention a /a-a:/, u lı-v.l, h /i-i:/, o /o-o:/, e /ö-c:/, and y
/u-u:/. Long vowels were verified in the Standard dictionary of EacıcaKOB-K uppueB-
XaM3aeB 1968. In addition, long vovyels were corroborated, wherever possible, by
Turkmen members of the Turkmen Language Project, while those in propernames were
checked against the dictionary of proper names by ATara>iH30B 1992. Where n:cessary,
spellings of Turkmen words were verified in the orthographical dictionary edited by
BeMeos 1989.
Transcriptions are set within slashes (//> and mirror, so far as possible (capitals do
not exist for /8, 0/), the capitalization and punetuation of the Turkmen examplcs.
The transeription represents ali sound changes that take place between morphemes
within a word (vowel harmony, consonant assimilations) and at the juneture be tween a
word and a suffix (vowei loss, consonant voicing, consonant assimilations) (see
Morphophonology). Changes vvhich take place at the juneture between words are not
transeribed, for the reason that the great majority of illustrative examples ı cpresent
written and not spoken Turkmen.
There remain a few inconsistencies in the transeription of Russian vvords, since it
was difficult to establish a rule for variant pronunciations of certain sounds. Iııdividual
speakers vary in their pronunciation of Russian sounds and in their application of the
rounding rule of vowel hannony and certain consonant assimilations to Russian words
from one context to another (see 52). In general, the subject of the Russian cornponent
within the Turkmen phonological system requires a special study.
So far as could be determined, the official preseription that Russian words are
pronounced as in Russian is not observed consistently by any Turkmen speaksr. As a
consequence, the transeription may retain some inconsistencies; for example, the
transeription of Russian t}> /f/ may altemate between /p/ and /f/ ((jjeBpajit /pevvral/
'February', but TejıecJjoıı /telefon/ 'telephone'- both could be reversed), and the
xxiv Turkmen Referenee Grammar

transeription of h /ya/, e /yo/ and jo /yu/ after consonants (there is a spelling rule for
Russian e /ye/; see 76-77) also may vary (oKTSöpt /oktyabır/ 'October', but caıuoneT
/9amolot/ 'airplane', BajııoTa /waluto/ 'currency'- these also have variants).
In regard to vowel harmony, Russian words are treated as Turkmen words
throughout, according to the rule that vowel hannony follows the vowel of the last
syllable of borrowed words. In regard to consonant assimilations, these generally are
not observed at morpheme juneture within Russian words (HHCTMTyT /inötitut/ instead
of /in00itut/ 'institute'), although they usually are in the case of initial consonant
clusters with vowel prothesis (cTyjı /u00ul/ 'chair')- Final consonant clusters are
transeribed according to the convention - c t /-0[0]/ and -33 /-8[8]/ in both Russian and
Turkmen words (aBrycT /awgu0[0]/ 'August', noesn /poye8[8]/ 'train', flocT /do:0[0]/
'friend').
In the translations of Turkmen examples, and throughout this referenee grammar,
Turkmen words and names are transliterated with essentially the same symbols as those
used for transeription, except that long vowels, vowel harmony and consonant
assimilations are not indicated, and sh is used for s, ch for c, and j for j.
Grammatical and lexical suffixes are cited throughout the Turkmen Referenee
Grammar according to whether they are added to noun stems (preceded by the symbol
+) or verb stems (preceded by the symbol -, vvhich also is used vvith particles).
Some grammatical works represent the variant vowels of suffixes b y the Capital
letters A, I and U, or other sy m b o ls, where each letter stands for two or more vowels
(A = a /a-a:/, e /e/, s /a:/; I = u /ı-ı:/, h /i—i:/; U = u h-ı:/, H /i—i:/, y /u/, y /ü-ü:/).
Such sy m b o ls also are used for consonants. In this work, however, suffixes are cited in
their unrounded vowel and unassimilated consonant variants only. As an illustration,
the location case suffix is cited as +na/ae /+da/de/, even though this suffix potentially
has twenty variants, due to vovvel hannony and consonant assimilations (see 53, 62).
First, the suffix +fla/ne /+da/de/ p o te n tia lly has four variants according to its vovvel:
the unrounded back vowel form /+da/ for words containing unrounded back vowels; the
unrounded front vovvel form /+ de/ for words containing unrounded front vowels; the
rounded back vovvel form /+do/ for words containing unrounded back vowels; and the
rounded front vovvel form /+dö/ for vvords containing rounded front vowels. Second,
the suffix +fla/jje /+da/de/ potentially has five variants according to its consonant: the
variants /+Sa/8e/ when added to stems ending in 3 /S/; the variants /+0a/0e/ when added
to stems ending in c /©/; the variants /+na/ne/ when added to stems ending in H /n/;
the variants /+la/le/when added to stems ending in ji /!/; and the variants /+da/de/ in
ali other cases. Together, the four times five possibilities produce tvventy variants for
+fla/ne: /+da/de/do/dö/8a/8e/5o/5ö/0a/0e/0o/9ö/na/ne/no/nö/la/le/lo/lö/.
Such variants occur as the result of stable rules of the sound system vvhich are
detailed under Morphophonology. In addition, the variant vowels of suffixes are
indicated in the transeription (e.g. +na/j(e /+da-do/de-dö/) in the seetions on the forms
of suffixes in the Grammatical System and the Lexicon, and in the Index.
 ABBREVIATIONS

As briefly explained in the Forevvord, this referenee grammar leans on a number of the
grammatical deseriptions and illustrations provided in the rpaMMamum mypYMencmzo
R3HKa (cited as "G" or rpaMMamum; see "Abbreviations" below). Turkmen members of
the Turkmen Language Project also provided examples for this grammar and for the
"Lessons" volumes of the Turkmen Language Course (the latter cited as "T'). The
"Transcripts" volüme of that course served as the source of numerous examples
appearing in audio-taped and radio broadcast ('TA"), printed ('TP") and video-taped and
televised ("TV") materials. Citations of the latter type of materials inelude references to
the unit (1-18) and lesson (1-5) within each unit; for example, 'TV14.3" means that a
sentence derives from visual materials used in Lesson 3 of Unit 14 of this course.
Other printed sources from vvhich examples were derived included: articles in a variety
of Turkmen nevvspapers ("N"); pieces in popular magazines ("D," "O"); shoıt stories and
novels ("BG," "BH," T T ); the intelleetual nevvspaper 3de6um?ı ee Cynzam as cited by
Hanser in his Turkmen Manual ("H"); and the literary and other works vvhich served as
the sources of examples in the rpaMMamum mypKMetiCKOZo soum ("G"). Exact citations
of these sources are omitted.

BG EepflHMyxaMMeT T y n o B , reAHaAbiyçu, AmraSa-r: «TypKMeHMCTaH», 1990.

["The Bride-Taker": contemporary stories]

BH BepflHHa3ap XyflaöHa3apoB, CaûMHaH acepAep. AıuraSaT: «TypKMeHMCTaH»,

1990. ["Selected Works": pages 5-389]

D ffusıp. ["Country": general magazine about Türkmenistan]

G rpaMMamum mypKMeHCKOSO jutuca, I. 0onem um u Mopçfiojıozusı. [Pefl H.A.

BacKaKOB et al.], Amxa6^q: «LIjimm», 1970.
[Also cited as rpaMMamum.]

H Oskar Hanser. Turkmen Manual. Descripdve Grammar o f Contemporary

Literary Turkmen, Wien: Verlag des Verbandes der vvissenschaftlichen
Gesellschaften Österreichs, 1977.

N Nevvspapers [selected issues of various Turkmen nevvspapers published 1993-

1995]

O Oeadan. ["Beautifiır: magazine for women]

T "Lesson" volumes of the Turkmen Language Course prepared by the Türkmen

Language Project at Indiana University (1993-1995).
xxvi Türkmen Referenee Grammar

TA Audio-taped and radio broadcast materials in the "Transcripts" volüme of the

Turkmen Language Course.

TJ Thpkhiu 3^yMarejfflHeB, Tapa uuAdupuM. Auıraöa-r: «TypKMeHMCTaH», 1990.

["Black Lightning": contemporary novel]

TP Printed materials in the "Transcripts" volüme of the Turkmen Language

Course.

TV Video-taped and televised materials in the "Transcripts" volüme of the Turkmen

Language Course.
 INTRODUCTION

Türkmen is a member of the widespread Turkic language family of Eurasia. These

languages, vvhose speakers number around 125 million people, form the basis of
national languages in East Europe (Chuvash, Tatar, Bashkir, Gagauz), the Caucasus
(Azeri, Kumuk, Karachay, Balkar, Nogay), Siberia (Tuvan, Altay, Khakas, Yakut),
China (Uygur, Kazak), Central Asia (Kazak, Kirgiz, Türkmen, Uzbek, Karakalpak), and
the Near East (Turkish, Azeri). Turkic languages share a common grammar and
vocabulary, but only a few of them are similar enough today to eası: mutual
understanding. The closest relatives of Turkmen are the languages of the Turks in
Azerbayjan (Azeri) and Turkey (Turkish), and of a number of dialects in Afghanistan,
Iran, Iraq, Syria, the Balkans, Moldava and the Ukraine, ali of which beloııg to the
Oğuz group of the Turkic language family.
The majority of world Turkmen live in the country of Türkmenistan located in
Central Asia, and substantial numbers also live in Iran, Afghanistan and Uzbekistan.
Türkmenistan borders the Caspian sea in the west, and shares with Kazakistan the Ust-
Yurt plateau in the northwest, and some of the Amudarya delta around Da:>hhowuz
with Karakalpakistan (a part of Uzbekistan) in the north. The Amudarya river defines
its northeastem border with Uzbekistan, while the Murgab river, rising in its Southern
neighbor Afghanistan, forms the M an (ancient Merv) oasis in the southeasteın region
of Türkmenistan. The Köpetdag mountains and the Etrek river in the southvest run
along its southem border with Iran.
Historically, this territory comprised part of the fertile Khorezm region around the
Amudarya delta and Aral sea; the Khorasan region of northwestem Afghanistan,
northeastem Iran and the Murgab and Tejen oases, and the northern and southem
valleys of the Köpetdag with the Etrek and Gorgan rivers; the Balkhan mountains
extending northward from the westem end of the Köpetdag, the Caspian sea and
Mangıshlak peninsula (now in Kazakistan); and the Garagum desert which constitutes
around 70 percent of the territory of Türkmenistan.
9 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

The History of the Turkmen

The origins of the Turkmen may be traced back to the Oğuz confederatiön of nomadic
pastoral tribes of Antiquity and the early Middle Ages who were settled around Lake
Baikal and in present-day Mongolia. Known as the Nine Oğuz, this confederation was
composed of Turkic-speaking peoples who formed the basis o f powerfuI steppe empires
in Inner Asia, ineluding the First (552-612) and Second (692-742) Turk empires and
the Uygur Steppe (744-840) and Tienshan (866-1270) empires. A group of the Oğuz
that vvas interrelated with the Turk ruling families followed those families out of Inner
Asia after the Basmils, Uygurs and Karluks destroyed the Second Turk Empire in 742,
and moved fîrst into the Semirechye region and then by 775 into the steppe region
between the middle Syrdarya and the Ural rivers of Central Asia. The Turk-Oguz or
Syrdarya Oğuz ineluded twenty-two basic elans, the majority of whose names survive
among the modem Türkmen.1 These Oğuz took part in the destruetion of the Khazar
realm in 965, and groups of them began moving into the European steppe where they
were known as the Uz (from Oğuz) or the Torki in European sources until they became
absorbed by the Kipchak Turks of the region in the 12th century.2 In Central Asia,
lıovvever, Müslim sources referred to the Syrdarya Oğuz as Guzz, to dıstinguish them
from the Tokuzguzz (Nine Oğuz) of the Uygur realm in the Tienshan mountains.3

The Saljuks
By the late tenth century, the bonds of the Syrdarya Oğuz confederation began to
loosen due to a general lack of cohesiveness and to pressures from other steppe peoples.
At that time, a military commander named Saljuk who was a member of the
charismatic Kınık elan of the Oğuz, founded the Saljuk dynasty över those elements of

1 For the üst o f these cîans vvhich appeaıs in îhe 1 lth century dictionary of Mahmud al-Kashgari, see
Barthold 1962: 109-116, Dankoff 1972: 32-34, 1982: 101-102 and Golden 1992: 207-208. f a khkhcb:
1991: 68-69 provides a conveniem table of the names which survive in the Turkmen clan-tribal
structure. These inelude five modem tribes (Kashgari's Salgur = modem Salır, Eymür = Yemreîi,
Chawuldur = Chowdur, Bayat * Bayat and Igdir), six elans of the modem Gökleng ttibe (Kashgari’s
Kayjg, Bayundur, Bâktili, Bayat, Tuurka, Chapni), four elans o f the Teke (Ewâ - Yewa, Afshar,
Bügdüz, B'âchânâk), two cîans of the Yomut {Bügdüz, Chapni), and one elan of the Arsan (Kınık). Of
the seven elan names without established representation among the modem Turianen, Kashgari’s
Yazgır elan probably survives as the modem Garadashlı cribe (ATaımraae 1988: 42, £ xhk hcb: 1991:
109-123), while Kashgari’s Ak Bölük and Kara Bölük may be equated vvith the names Agöyli and
Garaöyîi, which are associated vvith the modem Sakar (flacKKHeB: 1991: 286-288).
2 Some o f these Oğuz groups became incorporated as 'Türkmen' elans within the Kipchak, Ay and
Küdey tribes o f the eastem Bashkir, see KysecB 1974: 183-184, 202, 210.
3 Conveniem revievvs o f early Oğuz histoıy may be found in Adamovjc 1981-82, Banhold 1962: 77-99,
Cahen 1968: 1-15, and Golden 1972, 1992:205-212.
 Introduction 3

the Oğuz peoples who became a dominant factor in Near Eastem history until eighty
years ago.4 -
Legends conflict regarding Saljuk’s role in the process, but under his sons and
grandsons, numerous Oğuz tribesmen converted to İslam, and began to battle with non-
Islamized Oğuz in the steppe between the Ural and Syrdarya rivers, as well as with the
Karakhanids in Transoxiana and the Gaznavids in Khorasan. In 1040, the Saljuks
defeated the Gaznavid ruler Mas’ud which opened the way to a majör migration of
Saljuk Oğuz into Khorasan. Subsequently, along vvith the expansion of the Saljuk
Sultanate, Oğuz tribesmen began migrating into the Near East. Saljuk aımies defeated
the Byzantines at Manzikert in 1071, confronted the European Crusaders for centuries,
and even withstood the first assaults of the Mongol conquest. However, after the battle
of Kösedağ in 1243, the Saljuks became a protectorate of the Mongol empire. During
this period (1243-1261), further migrations of Oğuz peoples from Khorasan to
Azerbayjan, Syria and Anatolia took place.
Between 1261 and 1320, Saljuk chiefs of Anatolia waged holy war against the
Byzantines, and it was from their midst that came a Saljuk chief named Osman (~
Othman) who founded the Ottoman dynasty. Between 1354 and 1402 the house of
Osman expanded into the Christian Balkans, until it suırounded Constantinople. After
the fail of this eity in 1453, vvhich ended the one thousand-year old Byzantine empire,
and after the incorporation of Arab lands in 1517, the Ottoman empire became the
largest Islamic empire ever, lasting until World War One.

The Name "Turkmen'

The term "Türkmen" first appeared in Müslim sources at the end of the İOth century as
a designation of those Oğuz groups who converted to İslam and in the middle of the
llth century migrated south from the Syrdarya region into Khorasan.5 Whether these
sources reported an ethnonym then in existence among the Oğuz remains unclear, but
they used the terms Oğuz and Turkmen, as well as the combinations Oguz-Turkmen
and Turkmen-Oguz, interchangeably as a designation for the Islamized Oğuz. By the
13th century, the term Türkmen possessed the properties of an ethnonym which, except
in historical legends, supplanted the ethnonym Oğuz, and came to refer to ali the
Saljuk Turks, particularly those who continued to pursue nomadic pastoralisin.
The exact origin of the vvord Türkmen has not been resolved. Some early scholars,
beguiled by the French spelling "Turcoman," made the unacceptable suggestion that
this vvord represented a compound of the ethnonyms Turk and Coman (that is, Kuman,
a group of the Kipchak Turks in eastem Europe). Other scholars feel that the formation

4 This historical summary is based on Agadshanow 1994 (= ArajjaçaHOB 1991), Barthold 1927, 1962: 99-
131, Bosworth 1968, 1995,Cahen 1965, 1968: 19-50, Golden 1992: 216-225,347-378 and İnalcık 1973:
3-58,
5 See Barthold 1962: 77-80, Golden 1992: 212 for this usage, and two possible earlier occuırences of the
name.
4 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Türk+matı must mean 'resembling Turks,' and refer to the folk etymology suggested
by contemporaries of the Oguz-Turkmen, ineluding the Aıab Iexicographer Mahmud al-
Kashgari who, in the 11th century, derived the word from Turk mânartd, which means
in Persian "These look like Turks."6 Hovvever, the most likely explanation of the word
is that it is derived from the ethnonym Türk plus an intensifying element +man, which
could mean 'most Turkish of the Turks' or 'pure-blooded Turks.'7

Formation o f the Modern Turkmen

During the Mongol conquest of Central Asia in the 13th century, the Oğuz tribes who
had remained in the Aral sea region between the Ural and Syrdarya rivers after the split
with the Saljuks were pushed farther into the Garagum desert and along the Caspian
sea, an area sparsely inhabited until that time. Until the early 16th century, they were
concentrated in four main regions: along the southeastem coast of the Caspian sea, on
the Mangıshlak peninsula, around the Balkhan mountains, and along the Uzboy river
bed running aeross north-central Türkmenistan. Here, in the İ4th-l6th centuries, the
Turkmen refomıed into the tribal groups vvhich exist today. Beginning in the 16th and
continuing into the 19th century, Turkmen tribes and groups migrated from this
vvestem region eastward and southeastvvard into Khorezm, Southern Türkmenistan and
Khorasan.8
In the 16th century, the Sahr, Ârsan, Sarık, Yomut and Teke tribes vvho form the
modem Türkmen people lived in the northvvestem area of their modem territory.
According to historical legends recounted by the 17th century Khivan nıler Abu’l-Gazi
in his "Genealogy of the Turkmen," these tribes formed a kind of "Sahr confederation,"
in that they were organized into the "outer Salır" (Salır proper, Teke, Yomut, Sank),
vvho nomadized on the coast of the Caspian, and the "inner Salır" (Salır of Khorasan,
Ârsan), most of vvhom nomadized from the Caspian east tovvard Khorezm.9
Multiple factors contributed to the subsequent migrations of these tribes from the
vvestem territory, ineluding pressure from northem nomadic neighbors like the Kalmyk
Mongols, the enticement of political povver and economic vvealth in neighboring

6 See Baıthold 1962: 80-82, Dankoff 1973: 235-237, 1984: 363, Golden 1992: 213; also cf. Agadzhanov-
Karryev 1978, AraHHflaoa 1988: 116-117, öyp&ueB 1991: 45-51.
7 The element -hman is virtually unknown in Turkic languages, occuning in a few words also restricted
to the Oğuz; for example, the name Karaman was bome by a Salır group, by an Oğuz hero in the Dede
Korkul eyele, and by a number o f settlements in Anatolia and the Balkana; see TeHHtoeB 1976: 461,
flacHKMeo 1991: 243-253.
8 For this period of Turkmen histoıy, see especially ıhe reconsuucüons of Bregel 1960 (= Bperen 1959),
1981, and flaîHKHeB 1991 £= Dshikijew 1994); also cf. Baıthold 1962: 131-170, EepAHea 1970: 16, 22-
24 and Doerfer 1975-76: 85, 1976b: 247-248, 1977: 193. BıegeTs studies appear to have been
unknovvn to Golden 1992: 400-401, some o f whose remarks on the fonnation of the modem Turkmen
are wide o f the mark.
9 Kohohob 1958: 73-74, 103; cf. Barthold 1962: 132-133, 137, Bregel 1981: 18, and 1991:132-
137,222-223. Leiser 1995: 1005 reveıses the composition of the two divisions of the Salır.
 Introduction 5

sedentary regions like Khorezm, the salinization and desiccation of vvestem pasturage
and consequent inter-tribal feuding, and others. While some elements of these groups
may have begun moving eastward in the late 16th century, the majör migrations of the
Sahr, Ârsan, Sank and Teke to the southeast occurred in the 17th century.
The Ârsan were the first to migrate, moving into southem Türkmenistan (Khorasan)
and Khorezm. By the early 18th century, most Ârsan had settled along the middle
course of the Amudarya from Sayat in the north to Kerki in the south. T.ıey were
joined by the Sank vvho moved betvveen Khiva, the Amudarya and the Murgab oasis,
settling in the latter at the beginning of the 19th century. The Salırs’ migration took
them to the middle course of the Amudarya in the early 17th century, from vvhich some
of them later vvent to the Murgab oasis and then to Saragt. That same century, the Teke
moved into the Ahal region along the Köpetdag mountains, and the Yomut split into
vvestem and eastem groups, as they expanded their grazing grounds from the. Gorgan
and Etrek in the southvvest to Khorezm in the east. In the 18th century, the Te.(e began
to occupy the Tejen and Murgab river basins, a process completed in the foLlovving
century. As a result of v/arfare with the Khiva Khanate and other factors, the Salır and
Sank gradually vvere subordinated to or dissolved in other groups, and the Teke, Ârsan
and Yomut became the most prominent and numerous of the Turkmen tribes. In the
course of these migrations and resettlements, the Turkmen also absorbed a v ariety of
local Iranian and Turkic peoples vvho subsequently became associated vvith the core
Turkmen tribes. In southeastem Türkmenistan, these ineluded the originally Iranian
peoples cailed the Nohur, Mürcheli, Ânevvli, Mehinli, Süncheli and Hasarlı, and the
originally Oguz-Turkmen groups of the Yemreli, Garadashlı and Alili.10
During this formative period, most of the Turkmen tribes fell under the control of
the Uzbek khanates of Khiva and Bukhara. Persian shahs also periodically attempted to
subdue and exact tribute from southem tribes. Uzbek khans and princes of both
khanates enlisted Turkmen military support in their mutual struggles and in campaigns
direeted against the Persians. Consequently, many Turkmen tribes migrated eloser to
the khanates’ urban centers vvhich came to depend heavily upon the Turkmen for their
military forces. The height of Turkmen influence in the affairs of their sedentary
neighbors came in the I8th century when on several occasions (1743, 1767-1770) the
Yomut invaded and controlled Khorezm. Such conflicts continued into tlıe 19tlı
century, until the Teke, Gökleng and Yomut became independent from Kh: va and
Persia in 1858-1861. One result of the constant hostiiities vvith these states was the
dissolution of the eastem Yomut, and the consolidation of their range in u-estem
Türkmenistan. With this, the modem distribution of the majör Turkmen tribes
essentially vvas fixed.

10 flacHKHea 1991:83-123.
6 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Incorporation into Russia

Russian encroachment upon Turkmen territory began in eamest in the latter part of the
19th century. Of ali the Central Asian peoples, the Turkmen put up the stiffest
resistance against Russian expansion. In 1869, the Russian Empire established a
foothold in present-day Türkmenistan with the foundation of the Caspian sea port of
Krasnovodsk (current Tiirkmenbashı). From there and other points they marehed on and
subdued the Khiva khanate in 1873, and subsequently conducted raids against Turkmen
tribes, especially the Yomut and Teke.
By the late 1870s, the Russians had advanced to one of the last Tnrkmen
strongholds, a fortress near the town of Gökdepe, northwest of Ashgabat. In 1879, a
Russian expeditionary force vvas tumed back by the Ahal Teke defenders of the fortress.
Hovvever, after a three-week siege and the loss of some 15,000 Türkmen lives, Gökdepe
fell to a Russian force under the command of General Skobelev in 1881. Annexation of
the remaining Turkmen territory follovved the Turkmen defeat, vvhich is novv marked by
the Turkmen as a national day of mouming and a symbol of national pride.
Later the same year, the Russians signed an agreement vvith the Persians and
established vvhat essentially remains the border betvveen Türkmenistan and Iran. After
the surrender of the Man Teke in 1884 and other aetions that brought Russia into
confrontation with Great Britain, a similar agreement vvas signed betvveen the tvvo
povvers in 1887, vvhich fixed the border vvith Afghanistan. Follovving annexation to
Russia, the area vvas administered as the Trans-Caspian District.! 1

Soviet and İndependent Türkmenistan

The Turkmen generally took little part in the revolutionary activities that established
Soviet rule in 1917. During the Civil War and later socioeconomic reform campaigns,
many Turkmen groups out-migrated to Afghanistan and Iran, vvhile others joined the
armed resistance to Soviet rule known as the Basmachi Rebellion throughout Central
Asia from the 1920s into the early 1930s.
In the national delimitation of October 1924, vvhen Central Asia vvas divided up
into union republics, the Trans-Caspian District and Turkmen Oblast of the Turkestan
Autonomous Soviet Socialist Republic became the Turkmen Soviet Socialist
Republic. By the late I930s, pastoral nomadism ceased to be an economic altemative
as the majority of Türkmen had become sedentary. Efforts by the Soviet State to
undermine tlıe traditional Turkmen way of life produced changes in familial and
political relationships, religious and cultural observances, and intelleetual
developments. Significant numbers of Russians and other Slavs migrated to urban
areas. Cotton cultivation vvas expanded vvith the construction of the Garagum canal,

1İ Bregel 1995: 202, Carrere d'Encausse 1994: 147-149, Saray 1984, 1989.
 Introduction 7

modest industrial capabilities were developed, and limited exploitation of

Türkmenistan^ natural resources was initiated.12
During its existence as Soviet Türkmenistan, Moscow kept the republic under fimi
control, and for the most part the Türkmen leadership staunchly supported Soviet
nationality policies which fostered education and literacy, emancipation of women, the
development of a Türkmen political elite and intelligentsia, and other modemist trends.
Türkmenistan reacted sluggishly to the policies of gîasnost and perestrojka, and found
itself rather unprepared for the dissolution of the Soviet Union and the independence
which follovved in 1991.
After the August 1991 coup attempt in Moscow, Türkmenistan’s communist leader
Saparmırat Nıyazov called for a popular referendum on independence. Because official
results of the referendum were 94 percent in favor of this move, the republic’s Supreme
Soviet had little choice other than to declare Turkmenistan’s independence from the
Soviet Union and the establishment of the state of Türkmenistan (TypKMenucmaH
deeAemu) on 27 October 1991.

12 For Soviet Türkmenistan, see Berdi Murar 1975.

8 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

The Distribution of the Turkmen

The majority of world Turkmen live in the state of Türkmenistan (1989 Soviet census:
2,537,000). Relatively large populations of peoples, most of whom identify
themselves as belonging to the same Turkmen groups as those in Türkmenistan, live in
Iran (low estimate: 400,000), Afghanistan (mean estimate: 400,000) and Uzbekistan
(1989: 121,600). Small groups also live in Russia, Kazakistan and Tajikistan (total in
1989: 71,400). Without counting the Turkmen of Iraq, Syria and Turkey, or the Salar
of China, the total number of Turkmen amounted to conservatively 3,500,000 in the
early 1990s.

Turkmen in Türkmenistan
According to Soviet censuses there were 766,000 Turkmen in the Soviet Union in
1926, 811,000 in 1939, 1,002,000 in 1959, 1,525,000 in 1970; 2,028,000 in 1979,
and 2,730,000 in 1989. The number of Turkmen living in Türkmenistan was
2,537,000 in 1989, with the remainder in other republics of the former Soviet Union.
Because Turkmen have maintained their affiliation with the former clan-tribal
organization, the distribution of modem Turkmen may be deseribed in terms of the
distribution of these tribes in Türkmenistan. Unfortunately, only the 1926 Soviet
census collected data on ethnic affiliation and distribution among the Turkmen, so that
even more current treatments of dıis question rely on those materials.13 The following
list also derives from this source, with the provisions that the names of some of the
districts may have undergone recent changes and that these data may be supplemented
by the distributions indicated for the dialeets (see below, 16-18).

1. Teke live compactly in the districts of Bâherden, Ashgabat, Bayramah, Man,

Tejen, Kirov, Wekilbazar, Sakarchâge, Türkmengala, and in groups in the
Kaka, Gızılarbat, Yerbent and Stalin (now Murgap) districts.
2. Yomut live in the Gızıletrek, Esengulı, Gazanjık, Köneürgench, Tagta and
Krasnovodsk (now Türkmenbashı) districts, and partially in the districts of
Yılanlı, Andreyev, Kalinin, Telman and Lenin.
3. Â rsan live compactly in the Burdalık, Garabekewiil, Sayat, Kerki, Gızılarbat,
Charshangı and Hojambaz districts, and in groups in the Garhk district.
4. S alır live in the Saragt district, and partially in the Charjew, Kaganovich
c (now Sakar) and Stalin (Murgap) districts.

13 See Wood 1990: 37. A summary o f ihe 1926 data vvas published by Karpov 1929, and some of its
materiaî on the distribution of Turkmen is repeated in J3ypflueB-Ka#wpoB 1991: 16. Bregel 1981 also
used Karpov and several other sources in deriving his estimates of historical changes in the trihal
demography o f the Türkmen.
 Introduction 9

5. S arık live in the Yolöten and Tagtabazar districts, and a few in the Stalin
(Murgap) district.
6. Chovfdur live compactly in the Kalinin and Porsı districts, and in gr:ups in
the Dashhov/uz district and in districts along the Etrek and Amudarya river s.
7. Gökleng live in the Garrıgala district, and a small group in Yılanlı disırict.
8. Ânevvli live in the Gongurgala village of Kaka district.
9. Bayatlar live in the Burdalık and other districts.
10. Ogurjalı live in the Cheleken district.
11. Yemreli live in the Yılanlı district.
12. Süncheli and Mûrcheli live in the Sünche and Mürche villages of Balıerden
district.
13. The "holy tribes" (Ata, H oja, M agtım, M üjew ür, Seyit, Shılı) live in the
Saragt, Darganata, Krasnovodsk (Türkmenbashı), Garrıgala, Gızılarbat and
other districts.14

Although reliable current figures for the number of members of each of tlıe.se etlınic
groups are lacking, data from the 1926 census indicated that the largest tribes were the
Teke (270, 254, or 39 percent of total), Arsan (151,483, or 22 percent), Yomut
(90,729, or 13 percent), Salır (35,541, or 5 percent) and Sarık (32, 729, or ıılmost 5
percent).15 Thus, the five tribes of the earlier "Salır confederation" accounted for almost
85 percent of the Turkmen at that time. It is unknown vvhether these tribes have
maintained their relative sizes or exact distributions to the present.

Turkmen Outside Türkmenistan

Outside of the State of Türkmenistan, Turkmen live in Russia, Kazakistan, Uz cekistan,
Tajikistan, Afganistan and Iran. In addition, some Turkmen scholars daim the
Turkmen of Irak, Syria and Turkey, as well as the Salar of China, as their own
The number of Turkmen in Russia does not exceed 12,000 or so, vvith th: largest
group living in the Stavropol region of the northem Caucasus, and very small groups
around Astrakhan and in Dagestan. These Turkmen cali themselves "Trukhmen' and are
descendants of Chowdur, Igdir and Söyünjajı tribal groups who migrated here from
vvestem Türkmenistan in small numbers in the 17th-18th centuries under pressure from
the Kalmyk Mongols.16 Turkmen also are thought to live in the Crimea of the Ukraine
Republic.17

14 For the six "holy tribes," see Basilov 1984 and fleMH^oB 1976.
15 flypfttıeB-KaflupoB 1991:15-16; but see Bregel 1981: 14-17 for refinements of these figures.
16 EacKüKOB 1949, KypeHOB 1962, flypflueB-KafltıpoB 1991: 36-38.
17 JJypAueB-KaflupoB 1991: 39-43.
 10 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

A very small number (3,800) of Türkmen live in Almatı and in villages of the
Gurjev, Chimkent and Karaganda prûvinces of Kazakistan, but their ethnohistory is
unknown,18
About half of the TuTkmen of Uzbekistan (1989: 121,600) live in greater Khorezm,
ineluding those in Karakalpakistan (60,200) and around the cities of Urgench, Khiva
and Khazarasp of Khorezm province (6,000), while other groups live along the
Amudarya and near Samarkand and Bukhara. These inelude perhaps a small number of
descendants of the medieval Oguz-Turkmen peoples who settled here, as well as
Turkmen groups vvhich began to settle along the Amudarya and in the delta in the
16th-17tlı centuries. Ethnically, the Turkmen of Karakalpakistan, Khorezm and the
Amudarya identify themselves with the Yomut, Chowdur, Arabachı, Hıdır-ili and
Olam tribes, and small numbers witlı the Hoja, Seyit and Shıh "holy tribes."19
Very little information is available on the Türkmen of southem Tajikistan (20,400,
with the majority in Jılıköl district), so that it is unclear vvhether they are descendants
of the medieval Oguz-Turkmen settlers, or more recent immigrants, or a mixfure of rhe
two.20
The Turkmen of Afghanistan live predominantly in its northvvestem region, moving
from the eastem province of Kunduz and the Bağlan province south of Kunduz, to the
northem provinces of Samangan, Balkh and Jauzjan, to the northern parts of Faryab,
Badgiz and Herat provinces, to small enelaves in Gilmend province, and to a
community in Kabul and its environs.21 Estimates of the number of Turkmen settled
in Afghanistan range from 300,000 to 900,000, although the most recent study of the
question placed their number at around 400,000.22 The greatest number reşide in
Jauzjan province (180,912), then in Kunduz (73,220), Faryab (50,820), Balkh (39,
036), Samangan (20,312), Herat (10,066), and other provinces. These groups ali
identify themselves as Turkmen and maintain their clan-tribal affiliations. The largest
group by far are the Arsan (around 350,000), and smaller groups are the Teke, Salır,
Sarık, Mavvrı, Mukri, Hatab, Alili, and a few Yomut. The oldest settlers from
medieval times are inciuded among the Ârsan, although the majority of these appear to
have migrated to Afghanistan since the 1670s and again in the 1930s. The other
Turkmen moved to Afghanistan in the later 19th century or follovving dıe inidation of
extreme reform policies in the Soviet Union in the 1920s,23

18 flypfltıeB-KaflbipoB 1991:33-35.
19 flypflueB-KaaupoB 1991: 25-33.
20 / I y r e ü - Ka;ıMpoB 1991: 22-24.
21 Ba6 aeBa 1992: 10-11.
22 EaBaesa 1992: 6-21. This seholar averaged figures from the 1979 Afghan census, data colleeted by
Franz 1971-1972, and interviews which she held with Türkmen villagers throughout northem
Afghanistan. HrMypoB 1993: 109, relying mainly on older sources, arrived at an estimate of 450,000 at
the beginning of the İ960s. İrons 1984: 804 estimated 380,000, while Hypa^eB-KajjtjpoB 1991: 46-48
offeTed 840,000.
23 Ea6 aeBa 1992: 22-47.
 Introducrion 11

The Turkmen of Iran are settled in districts (Gorgan, "Steppe" Gorgan) of the
northeastem part of Mazandaran province and in districts (Guchan, Bojnurt, Saragt) of
the northwestem part of the bordering Khorasan province. Estimates of their number
range from 400,000 to 1,100,000. Those of the Gorgan and Etrek area identify
themselves as Turkmen belonging primarily to the Yomut, Sahr, Sarık, Gökleng and
Atabay tribes, vvith an Ogurjah group living on a Caspian island, Turkmen of the
Bojnurt district belong to the Teke, Nohur, Yemreli, Igdir, Ânevvli, Mürche, Süncheli,
Hıdır-eli and other groups, and those of the northeastem part around Mashhad and
Saragt to the Salır, Sarık and other tribes.24
Those peoples in the Near East vvho are called or self-designated "Türkmen" are
descendants of the Oguz-Turkmen immigrants of the llth-13th centuries, and share
only their ethnonym with the modem Turkmen. They inelude the Turkmen settled in
the northeastem and partly central provinces of Iraq who may number more than
200,000, and vvho speak a westem Oğuz dialect eloser to Azeri than to Turkish.25 The
Turkmen of Syria iive in the northem regions from the Mediterranean to Aleppo on the
border vvith Turkey. Together with the Turkmen of Turkey (often designated by the
sociai term Yürük), they comprise more than 200,000 people and speak either Syrian
Arabic or a dialect of Turkish.26
In the 14th century, a large body of Salır Turkmen migrated from the Samarkand
region of Central Asia to the Gulja region of present-day Xinjiang and to the Gansu
and Qinghai provinces of northwest China where they constitute the modem Salar
minority of about 70,000 people. Although elearly of Oğuz origin, the culture and
language of the Salar are not recognizabiy Turkmen.27

24 JJypsuea-KaflkipoB 1991: 48-49, ATaeB 1993a: 21-23; also cf. Farmayan 1983, Irons 1975 and Menges
1951. Doerfer 1977: 129 gives the conservaüve figüre of 400,000 Turkmen in Iran, Irons 1984: 804 the
figüre of l . l million, and flypflueB-KaflupoB 1991:57 the figüre of 750,000.
25 C>Be30B-Kafl3Kap0B 1993: 141, 185-187; cf. Buluç İ966, 1979, Benderoğlu 1976, J^ypflueB-KaflfcipoB
1991: 50-53.
26 CaxarMbipaflOB 1993: 205-208, 213; cf. Doerfer 1991: 107-108, £(yp,n;fc>feB-KaflbipoB 1991: 53-55,
EpeMees 1969, Kapa6 ae& 1993, Riza 1931-33, Roux 1970.
27 For genealogical connections betvveen the Salar and Sahr, see J^^hrhcb 199i: 244-248; also cf.
^ypflueB 1992: 21-24, ATaeB 19936: 287. For recenı Lreaünenis o f the Salar language, see TeHMtneB
1976 and Hahn 1988.
 12 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

The Türkmen Language

The modem Standard Turkmen language is called TypaneH adeöu öuau 'the Turkmen
literary language' or Xs3upKu 3 omoh mypKMen öuau 'the modem Turkmen language'.
This language was formed in the Soviet period primarily on the basis of the dialect
spoken by members of the Teke tribal group in the Ahal and M an provinces of
Türkmenistan. Prior to 1917, literate Turkmen used the Chagatay literary language
written in Arabic seript. Afiler 1917, reforms of this seript were undertaken in 1922 and
in 1925 for the purpose of bringing it closer to the pronunciation of Turkmen, and
some publications appeared in that language.28
The main outlines of Standard Turkmen were formulated in the period 1928-1940,
when it vvas vvritten in a Latin alphabet. The First Linguistic Congress of
Türkmenistan held in 1936 refined Standard Turkmen in Latin seript, but by 1939
plans abeady were underway to svviteh to the Cyrillic-script, which offıcially became
the basis of the Standard language in 1940 (see 74). The Second Linguistic Congress of
Türkmenistan held in 1954 essentially confirmed the norms of the Standard language
stili in use today.29
Language policy in the State of Türkmenistan is marked by a determination to
affinn the position of Turkmen as the official language and to remove the heritage of
the Russian-dominated past. A parliamentary resolution of May 1990 that replaced
Russian vvith Turkmen as the official state language vvas institutionalized in the 1992
Constitution vvhich proelaimed Turkmen "the official language of inter-ethnic
communication." This vvas accompanied by restoring or applying Türkmen names to
cities, villages, farms, streets, stores and numerous other establishments, replacing
some Russian adminstrative terminology, and promoting Standard Turkmen as the
national language of ali Turkmen, regardless of their dialect. In 1993, the Turkmen
government resolved to switch the Standard language to a Latin-based seript (see 86).

Written Sources of the Turkmen Language

Prior to the 20th century, Turkmen vvas not a literary language, although some
Turkmen writers used the classical literary language of Central Asia called Chagatay
and their vvritings are referred to as TypKMen öuauhuiİ st3ye nduz3pAUKAepu 'vvritten
monuments of the Turkmen language'. Hovvever, the modem Turkmen language has a
history of more than a millennium of development from the original language of the
Syrdarya Oğuz people.
Recapturing that history is the province of historical linguistics and philology.
Historical linguists attempt to restore previous stages of a language until they reach an
ending-point at vvhich the language no longer is distinguishable from other languages

28 For a catalog of these early printed worfcs in Arabic seript, see JfaöepflHeB 1981.
29 See Maptmpos 1972,1973:205-207.
 Introduction 13

of the same genealogy. To accomplish this task, they rely primarily on the linguistic
features of the dialects o f a language, but also, if they are available, on prior texts
written in the language, as well as on loanwords made into and out of the language,
and the like. Philologists restore the exact pronunciations and meanings of texts, so
that when such texts exist for a language their vvork is essential to historical linguists.
In seeking earlier evidence of the Turkmen language in written sourc es, it is
imperative to keep in mind several points of the reconstruction of Oğuz history
revievved above. First, the basic split between Islamized and non-Islamized Oğuz tribes
that occurred toward the end of the lOth century left most of the non-Islamized tribes in
the westem part of the steppe betvveen the Ural and Syrdarya rivers. Especially after the
migration of the Saljuks into Khorasan in the 1040s, the medieval coııcept of
"Turkmen = Müslim" did not apply to those steppe tribes, and yet they formed the
nucleus of the modem Turkmen. Thus, they should be distinguished from the "Oguz-
Turkmen = Müslim" of Khorasan and other regions of the Near East. Second,
historians assume that the steppe tribes w ere pushed from the Aral sea area to-«aıd their
vvestem grazing grounds on the Mangıshlak peninsula, along the Caspian sea and
vvestem Türkmenistan in the 13th century. Apart from this movement, itself
conjectUTal, almost nothing is known of the Turkmen tribes in the steppe from the 1 lth
to the middle of the 16th centuries. Although the possibility that individuais or groups
of these tribes appeared in places in the Near East during this time cannot be cıccluded,
the steppe tribes become known to history as the modem Türkmen only after their
migrations into Khorezm and Khorasan in the 16th-17th centuries. Thus, vvith one
exception, it is a priori unlikely that any of the Oguz-Turkmen written sources prior to
that time are relevant to the history of the Turkmen language.
The exception consists of the Oguz-Turkmen linguistic materials vvh eh vvere
recorded by the llth century lexicographer Mahmud al-Kashgari. His Divan Lügat at-
Turk ("Compendium of Turkic Dialects"), vvhich vvas vvritten in Arabic and completed
in the 1070s, frequently opposes Oguz-Turkmen to the Khakani Turk language (a court
language based on the Chigil, Yağma and other Karluk dialects) vvhich is :he main
subject of his deseription.30 Kashgari left no room for doubt as to his understa nding of
the term Türkmen: 'Türkmen. They are the Oğuz," "Oğuz. A tribe of the Turks; the
Türkmen.”31 Most frequently, he cited Oğuz phonetic, grammatical and lexical features
under the term "Oğuz," but also used the terms "Oguz-Turkmen," "Turkmen-Oguz" and
simply Türkmen," ali of these apparently interchangeably.
Thus, Kashgari’s Oguz-Turkmen material potentially constitutes the earlieıt record
of the predecessor of modem Türkmen. Several considerations, hovvever, argu: against

30 For treatments o l Kashgari’s Oguz-Turkmen material, see A xannu 1958, Banguoğlu 1!)59, 1960,
Korkmaz 1972, Muxamedova 1973, and Dankoff 1982: 43-48, 1985: 275-289,333-336.
31 Dankoff 1982: 101-102, 1984:362.
 14 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

this conclusion.32 First, Kashgari indicates the existence of dialects in the Oguz-
Turkmen language of this period through characterizations like "Most of the Oğuz say
bard u k 'I went' for bardım ," and "Some of the Oğuz say ol tapratıgsak ârdi 'H e
should have hurried'...In another of their dialects they say ol tapiratıgsı ârdi."33 One of
those dialects appears to have been spoken by the Karluk Turkmen vvho vvere identifıed
by Kashgari as "A tribe of the Turks. They are nomads; not Oğuz, but they are also
Türkmen." He records the form âbâ 'mother' in the Oğuz dialect, and says that "among
the Karluk Turkmen it is âpâ."34 Such indications suggest that the Oguz-Turkmen
material in Kashgari may belong to three or more dialects, and that therefore any one of
these- or, equally, a dialect not recorded by Kashgari- could represent an earlier stage
of modem Turkmen.
The fact that several Oğuz dialects already existed in the llth century must be
viewed in the context of Oğuz history. Kashgari compiled his work in the 1070s, at a
time after the majör split in the Oğuz tribal union which sent the Saljuks into
Khorasan (1040s) and vvhen many of the Oguz-Turkmen tribes vvere migrating into the
Near East during the Saljuk expansion (1060s). Kashgari himself studied in Bagdad
then under Saljuk control, so that, in ali likelihood, he gathered most of his Oguz-
Turkmen data through contact vvith individuals of the Oğuz tribes in Khorasan vvhose
dialects över the course of time developed into vvestem Oğuz and into "Khorasan
Turkish" (see below). Although there is no evidence that he personaily joumeyed into
the steppe to collect data from the Oğuz betvveen the Ura! and Syrdarya rivers, it should
be remembered that his vvork ineludes linguistic information about numerous Turkic
dialects of the Eurasian steppe vvhich he could have recorded from merchants and other
individuals vvho took part in the trade betvveen the Near East, Khorezm and Volga
Bulgaria that traveled through the Oğuz steppe.35
Some portion, therefore, of Kashgari’s Oguz-Turkmen recordings potentially could
belong to early Turkmen. Hovvever, not to mention the probable dialect differences that
exist in this material, even a cursory examination of the majör phonological differences
vvhich Kashgari highlighted betvveen Oğuz and Turk does not provide any basis for
identifying them as Turkmen; such features as Oğuz d- ~ Turk t-, -v-----p- and -C- ~
-Cg- are found in many Oğuz dialects, vvhile b- - m- is found only in Turkish and j- ~
y- is not found in Oğuz. Much the same could be said about Kashgari’s morphological
and lexical material as vvell.

32 In addition to these, certain inconsistencies which affect the reliabiüty of Kashgari’s Oguz-Turkmen
recordings have been noted by Doerfer 1975-1976: 93-94, 1987: 107, 1990a: 29-30, and other scholars.
33 Dankoff 1982: 413, 1984: 145.
34 Dankoff 1982: 122, 353. The "Karluk Turkmen' probably can be identifıed as the predecessors of the
modem Ak Garlık and Gara Garhk elans o f the Arabachı group \vhich is part of the Chowdur mbal
union; see AraHHiöOB 1988: 15, 41, 46-47 and DacHKtteB 1991: 298-299.
35 See Pritsak 1959b.
 Introduction 15

If the promise of Kashgari’s Oğuz material stili has not produced any sound basis
for Turkmen historical linguistics, then the linguistic material labeled 'Türkmen" or
produced by Turkmen in the Near East in subsequent centuries should not raise any
expectations at ali. This applies, in the first place, to the several manuals vvritten in
Arabic whıch describe the Kipchak Turkic language of the military rulers of Mamluk
Egypt in the 13th-14th centuries. Particularly tovvard the end of the 14th century,
numerous Oguz-Turkmen of Anatolia joined their military ranks, so that these
grammars also inelude citations of features and vvords o f the language of these
"Turkmen." However, ali of this material belongs to westem Oğuz dialects and not to
Turkmen proper.36
Certain works written in what is called "Old Anatolian Turkish" in the 13th-15th
centuries display such eastem Oğuz features as bol- 'to be(come)' as opposed to
vvestem Oğuz ol-, In vievv of vvhat vvas said above regarding the basic contours of
Turkmen history, it is very unlikely that this language could have represented an earlier
stage of Turkmen. The Gennan seholar Gerhard Doerfer has argued that Old Anatolian
Turkish actually is an earlier stage of the eastem Oğuz dialect group vvhich he terms
"Khorasan Turkish" (see belovv), citing not only linguistic correspondences, but such
facts as the origin of some vvriters from Khorasan (for example, Jalâl ad-Dîn Rûmî,
1207-1273).37 Although the questions of its origin and development remain
unresolved, Old Anatolian Turkish clearly does not exhibit specifically Turkmen
linguistic features.38
On the basis of evidence in hand, it appears that ali of the linguistic material labeled
'Turkmen" or "Oğuz" and dating to the llth-17th centuries must be attributed to the
dialects spoken by the Oguz-Turkmen of Khorezm, Khorasan, Azerbayjan, Anatolia and
other areas of the Near East. Although the nucleus of the Turkmen tribes vvho form the
modem Turkmen people surely existed in the Middle Ages, first in the steppe from the
Syrdarya to the Ural rivers and then in the Mangıshlak-Balklıan region, there are no
Oğuz linguistic materials that can be shovvn to originate in these areas.39

36 Doerfer 1975-76: 92-93, 1976b: 246, İ990a: 24. For the Arab-Kipchak manuals, see Ermers 1995,
Hofman 1969: 6/183-185, 200-203, 220-223, M yxaM e,qoBa 1973, and Pritsak 1959a: 74-81.
37 Doerfer 1975-76, 1976a, 1977: 130-133 and 1990a: 20-27. This seholar also contends that the I4th
century Arab philologist Ibn Muhanna recorded material from early "Khorasan Turkish"; cf. Doerfer
1975-76: 132-133, 1976a: 145, 1976b. The Turkmen citations in a small pentaglot Arabic-Turkmen-
Mogoli-Pashıo-Persiatı glossary written since the 18th century in the area around Herat also probably
belong to ıhe Khorasan dialects; see Weiers 1973, Clark 1979: 80-82.
38 As Johanson 1993: 25-26 pointed out, there is no evidence that a literary form of Khorasan Turkish
existed in ıhe I3th century when Rûmî composed a few verses in Turkish, using forms of the eastem
Oğuz spoken in his native Balkh. Beller-Hann 1992: U 7 -U 8 , 121-126 also hesitated in accepting
Doerfer’s identification and explored the further development of Old Anatolian Turkish into 'Turk
Ajami" (early Azeri); also see Guzev 1990.
39 A few scholars (for example, Benzing 1964: 722) mainıain that the several written versions of the
"Ogaz Legend" (13ıh-i5ıh centuries) and ıhe "Book o f Dede Korkut” ( J5th-I6th centuries), which are
relevant to the ethnogenesis and subsequent history o f the Oguz-Turkmen, belong to the literatüre of
16 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

In the 16th-17th centuries, the core Turkmen tribes whose dialects form the modem
Turkmen language began their migrations into sedentary areas of Khorezm and
Khorasan and came into contact with the long-established cultural traditions of the
Turks and Iranians in these areas. Beginning in the 18th century, a number of Turkmen
poets studied in the religious schools of Khiva and Bukhara, where they leamed to
write the classical literary language of Central Asia called Chagatay. Famous poets who
wrote in this language and whose legacy helped mold Turkmen national consciousness,
inelude Azadi (1700-1760, Gökleng tribe), Magtımgulı (1733-1782, son of Azadi),
Mollanepes (ca.1810-1862), Kemine (1770-1840, Teke tribe), and others.40 While the
lyrical, religious, didactic and historical poetry of these writers constitutes the
beginnings of "classical Turkmen literatüre," the aetual language of their literary
produets is not an early representative of modem Turkmen. Indeed, Aleksandr
Samojlovich conducted a thorough analysis of the orthography, phonology, grammar,
syntax and lexicon of a 19th century historical poem written by a Teke poet in this
language, and could not find any feature that diverged significantly from late Chagatay
and that could be identified specifıcally as Turkmen.41 On the other hand, a substantial
component of Persian-Arabic vocabulary, suffixes and constructions, as well as a few
Chagatay elements, entered the Turkmen language primarily through the medium of
this late Chagatay literatüre.

Turkmen Dialects
Standard Turkmen is regarded as their national language by ali Turkmen living vvithin
Türkmenistan and, according to many Turkmen, by at least some of those living in
ııearby countries as vvell. This partly abstract Standard language stands elosest to the
real language of the Teke dialect, and specifically of its Ahal subdialect spoken in the
Ashgabat region,42 because many of the specialists who formulated the Standard
language in the 1930s were Ahal Teke, a n d the majority of officials, businessmen and
intellectuals who routinely use this S tandard language, are Ahal Teke or live in

ıhe Turkmen. Hov/ever, ıhe exisiing copies o f these works do not display Turkmen features; see the
references in Iz 1965, M elikoff 1995. For repuledly “Türkmen" passages in ıhe 17ıh century
"Genealogy of the Turkmen" writtcn by Abu’l-Gazi o f Khiva, see Benzing 1964: 722, Eckmann 1964:
383-384.
40 This literatüre was finst introduced to a European readership in the work of Chodzko 1842: 379-398,
who published three poems by Magümguh and poems by several other Turkmen poets. Subsequenüy,
one poem by Magtımgulı and one by ıhe Yemreli poet Magnıpı appeared in Bepe3HH 1857: 88, and
thirty-one poems by Magtımgulı in Vâmbery 1879. Cumoüjiobhh 1906-1929 founded the study of this
literatüre; also see Azmun 1966, 19K9, 1995, Benzing 1964, Beıtel’s 1964, Feldman 1992 and Köpriilü
Zade 1927.
41 Cumoüjiobhm 1914a: 011-053; cf. Doerfer 1995: 228. For modem studies of this language, see
Armana3apûB 1978, AtuıuııypoB 1977, 1984, Amıaeca 1985, İTa&sKapoBa 1968, 199Ü, TysuMHeB 1983,
1984, and Xtifltıpo 6 1958-62, 1959, and the recent primer on the Arabic seript by rypöaitOB 1992.
42 A3biM0B 1967; EepflHeB 1970: 20.
 Introduction 17

Ashgabat. At the same time, a variety of differences exist in the phonology, grammar
and lexicon of Ahal Teke, as well as in the speech of those Turkmen vvho are not Ahal
Teke. The whole of such differences for each group of speakers is characteıized as a
dialect, and their study is pursued as Turkmen dialectology.
A characteristic of Turkmen dialectology is that the definition of dialects is based
on tribal identities; for example, the "Teke dialect" essentially is regarded as the speech
of self-identified members of the 'Teke tribe," regardless of how that ethnos i:> defined
or where its members live.43 As a result of the adoption of this principle, Türkmen
dialects are classified as "sociai dialects" (in the sense of the ethnic history of Türkmen
sociai groups, rather than of their socioeconomic status) and their linguistic features are
extracted from these entities.
Turkmen dialectology was established in the pioneering work of A bksandr
Poceiujevskij and other scholars who conducted several expeditions to record dialects
in the years 1927-1936. On the basis of this research, Poceiujevskij distinguished two
basic groupings of dialects: those clustered around the core tribes vvithin Türkmenistan
(Teke, Yomut, Ârsan, Salır, Sarık, Gökleng, Garadashlı-Alili), and those distrı buted in
the valleys of the Köpetdag mountains and along the banks of the Amudarya river
(Nohur, Anew, Âski, Surhı, Arabachı, Kırach, Chandır, Mukn, Hatay, Bayat, Cheges).
The first group vvas regarded as closest to the norms of the Standard language, w hile üıe
second group was regarded as rarely divergent from those norms.44
Subseqiıent investigations, ineluding monographs and doctorates on ali of the
dialects of the core group and nearly ali of those of the marginal group, produced a
majör synthesis and a more detailed classification of Turkmen dialects.45 According to
this classification, Turkmen is composed of the follovving "majör dialects":

1. Teke dialect spoken by members of the Teke tribe settled in the soı.them
regions of Türkmenistan and along the northem skirt of the Köpetdag
mountains, from Gızılarbat to the banks of the Murgap and Tejen rivers This
dialect has two subdialects:
(a) Ahal: Tejen and Ashgabat districts up to Gızılarbat, ineluding Büzmeyin,
Gökdepe, Bâherdin, Bamı and Goch districts.
(b) Man: Man, Türkmengala, Sakarchâge, Murgap and Bayramalı districts.
2. Yomut dialect spoken by members of the Yomut tribe settled in the we:stem
and northem regions of Türkmenistan. This dialect has tvvo subdialects:
(a) VVestem: Some villages of the Gızılarbat district and a seetion of th<: city
of Gızılarbat; the Gazanjık, Nebitdag, Gumdag, Gızıletrek, Esengalı,
Cheleken, Türkmenbashı and Jebel districts.
(b) Northem: Köneürgench, Tagta and Telman districts.

43 For a discussıon o f Turianen clan-tribal organizaıion, see flxHKJieü 1991: 305-3X2.

44 rioueJiyeBCKHÜ 19366: 90-92, A3limob 1966:108-109.
45 EepHiıeB 1970:24-26.
18 Tnrkmen Referenee Grammar

3. Â rsarı dialect spoken by members of the Ârsan tribe settled along the
Amudarya river in the Halach, Garabekewül, Hojambaz, Gızılayak and
Charshangı districts, and partially in Sayat.
4. S alır dialect spoken by members of the Sahr tribe settled in the Saragt
(Sarakhs) district,
5. Sarık dialect spoken by members of the Salır tribe settled on the Central
course of the Murgap river in the Yolöten, Tagtabazar and Gushgı districts.
6. C how dur dialect spoken by members of the Chowdur tribe, mostly in the
Kalinüı district of the Khorezm oasis, and a few in Sayat.
7. Alili dialect spoken by members of the Alili tribe settled in Kaka district on
the northem skirt of the eastem seetion of the Köpetdag mountains.
8. Gökleng dialect spoken by members of the Gökleng tribe settled in Garrıgala
district along the Sumbar and Chandır rivers.
9. Nohur dialect spoken by members of the Nohur tribe living along the banks
of the Sumbar river in Nohur, Kürüzhdey, Tutlugala and Könekesir districts
in the Köpetdag mountains.
10. Ânew dialect spoken by members of the Ânew tribe living in the villages of
Manısh and Mehin.

In addition to these, Turkmen has "minör dialects," in the sense of those spoken by
less populous or less cohesive ethnic groups. These inelude the Garadashlı and Yemreli
subdialects spoken in Yılanlı and Lenin districts of the vvestem Khorezm oasis; the
Hasar dialect in. Kaka district; the Kırach dialect in villages of the Danew and Farap
districts; the Mürche subdialect in Dayna and Mürche; the Esgi subdialect in the Sayat
district; the Sakar dialect in Sakar; the Olam dialect in Charashangı district; the Burkaz
subdialect in the northem part of Man district; and the Ata subdialect in villages of the
Daraganata, Man, Tejen, Saragt and Gızılarbat districts.
The 1970 synthesis of Berdiyev and other scholars noted- but did not inelude in its
classification- the "marginal dialects" of the Turkmen living in Karakalpakistan; in the
Nurata district of Samarkand province and Garaköl district of Bukhara province in
Uzbekistan; in Tajikistan; in Stavropol (Chovvdur, Igdir, Söyünjajı), Astrakhan and
Dagestan of Russia; in Iran (Yomut, Salır, Sarık, Alili, Gökleng, Yemreli, and some
Nohur); and in Afghanistan (Ârsarı, Sank, Alili). Since its appearance, a majör nevv
understanding of the "minör" and "marginal" dialects has been proposed (see below, 19).

Turkmen and the Oğuz Languages

The classification of languages is one of the chief goals of historical linguistics, for it
ostensibly charts their divergence from related languages and thus clarifıes the history
of their speakers. The question of the classification of Turkmen as an Oğuz or as a
Turkic language also concems its historical trajectory from its modem form back to a
form from vvhich it began to diverge either from a "parem" Oğuz language or from an
 Introduction 19

"offspring" of that language. Charting such relationships between Oğuz languages and
their predecessor(s) produces their genealogy or "family tree."
The historical development of the Turkmen language remains virtually unstudied.
To be sure, a host of comparative studies by Turkologists çite Turkmen data as part of
their research either on the history of Turkic languages as a whole or on the history of
the Oğuz languages as a group.46 Although they bring vahıable clarifications to their
subjects, such studies put the cart before the horse in the sense that the history of each
Turkic language, ineluding Turkmen, must be thoroughly investigated before prior
relationships can be restored.
The classification of Türkmen within the Oğuz group of Turkic languages has never
been in dispute, but its position vvithin this group remained somewhat vague until
recently. Beginning in 1969, Gerhard Doerfer and his associates investigated a number
of the dialects of Turkmen and Oğuz groups living in Iran and Afghanistan, and
published their materials in several works.47 His analysis of the materials on the
dialects of Khorasan and Khorezm vvhich previously were classified as "minör" or
"marginal" Turkmen dialects, led him to the conclusion that these comprise an
independent group vvithin Oğuz to vvhich he applied the geographical teım "Khorasan
Turkish." At the same time, Doerfer proposed a substantively new classification of the
Oğuz group of Turkic languages. According to his "Oğuz genealogy," the Oğuz Turkic
"language" is divided into westem and eastem branehes comprising five Oğuz "dialect
groups," each shading into the other aeross the geographical speetrum.48

Westem Oğuz D. Eastem Oğuz

1. Turkish (= West Oğuz) 4. Khorasan Turkish (= East Oğuz)
(a) West Rumeli dialects 5. Turkmen (= North Oğuz)
(b) East Rumeli dialects
(c) West Anatolian dialects
(d) East Anatolian dialects
2. Azeri (= Central Oğuz)
(a) Northem Azerbayjan dialects
(b) Southem Azerbayjan dialects
3. Afshari (= South Oğuz)
(a) Afshar of Kabul
(b) Kashkay, Aynallu
(c) Sonkor (transitional to Azeri)

46 Here, it may suffice to mention the comparative Turkic studies of IHep 6 aK 1970-1994, which çite
Türkmen data. The works of Doerfer (especially 1975-76, 1976a, 1990a) and Johanson (1978-1993)
are essendal for Oğuz historical lingusitics.
47 Bozkurt 1975, Doerfer 1969, 1971, 1973-74, 1977, 1991, 1992-93, Doerfer-Hesche 1989, 1993,
Doerfer-Hesche-Ravanyar 1990, Fâszy 1977, Tulu 1989, 1993.
48 See the diagram in Doerfer 1990a: 19, as well as other specifications o f this classification in Doerfer
1975-76: 81-94, 1976a: 137-138, 1976b: 247-248, 1977: 191-197, 1990a: 13-20, 1991: 107-109, 1993:
20-21, and Doerfer-Hesche 1989: 62.
20 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Doerfer further classified the dialects of "Khorasan Turkish" into four groups: (l)
northwestem dialects of Bojnurd and surrounding areas of Khorasan province and the
Gorgan-Etrek region; (2) northeastem dialects of Zeyarat, Shirwan, Kuchan, Daragaz,
Jonk, Langar and other localities of Khorasan, ineluding dialects in southvvestem
Türkmenistan (Nohur, Ânew, Hasar), along the middle course of the Amudarya
(Kırach, Sayat, Mukn, and others), and in Karakalpakistan; (3) southem dialects of
Soltan-abad, Ruh-abad and surrounding areas of Khorasan province; and (4) the dialects
of Khorezm (Urgench, Khiva, Klıazarasp) vvhich Uzbek dialeetologists improperly cali
"Oguz-Uzbek."49
Doerfer’s classification of Oğuz in general and eastem Oğuz, in particular has much
to recommend it. His classifîcatory divisions are based on a geographical criterion
which captures the impression of many investigators that the Oğuz dialects form a
continuous speetrum from Türkmenistan to the Balkans in eastem Europe, and his
£ramework also refleets aspects of the ethnohistorical development of Oğuz peoples. At
the same time, this classification raises several questions that require further researeh.
First, it is diffîcult to distinguislı among the Oğuz peoples of Khorasan and
Khorezm between descendants of the medieval Oguz-Turkmen (whose dialects may
belong to "Khorasan Turkish") and modem Turkmen (whose dialects may belong to
Turkmen proper). It is the case that many, if not the great majority, of the Turkic-
speakers of Khorasan and Khorezm actually are Türkmen in the modem sense of that
vvord. They not only trace descent from the modem Turkmen tribes (Teke, Ârsan,
Yomut, Salır, Sank, ete.), but their movements from the vvestem half of the Trans-
Caspian plateau into areas of Khorasan and Khorezm since the 16th century has been
established. What has not been established is vvhether the Oğuz ethnic groups settled in
Khorasan and Khorezm at the time of the in-migration of the modem Turkmen groups
also identifıed vvith or vvere designated by the ethnonym Turkmen, and if so, vvhether
they were designated "Turkmen" according to the medieval concepts ("Oğuz =
Turkmen" and 'Turkmen = Müslim") or because they belonged to the same tribes as
thöse of some modem Turkmen groups (for example, Salır). From the ethnohistorical
perspeetive, then, many of the Turkmen of Khorasan and Khorezm in fact are modem
Türkmen in the same sense that the Teke, Yomut, and so on, of Türkmenistan are
modem Turkmen. Because Turkmen dialeetologists define their dialects as Turkmen on

49 Doerfer 1977: 183-204 (with map), Doerfer-Hesche 1993: 20-21, 24. The terms "Oguz-Uzbek" (an
Oğuz Turkic language), "Kipchak-Uzbek' (a Kipchak Turkic language) and "Karluk-Uzbek" (the
basis o f S ta n d ard Uzbek) were introduced by the Uzbek linguist V.V. Reshetov as a poliücal means of
consolidating ali the Turkic dialects spoken vvithin Uzbekistan under Standard Uzbek as a national
language; cf. PeuıenroB 1955, PenıeT0B-Eİ0a6flypa*M0H0B 1978: 36*42. The Oğuz dialects are spoken
in the eight southem districts o f Khorezm (Urgench, Khiwa, Khanka, Khazarasp, Bagat, Yanggi-arik,
KoshkÖpir, Shavvat), in the Törtköl district o f Karakalpakistan, in the Karakol and Alat districts of
Bukhara, and in the vicinity o f Turkestan and Chimkentin southem Kazakistan; see A 6&ynnaeB 1961,
1967, Dobos 1974; Doerfer 1977: 194-197, Magpa^HMOB 1983.
 Introduction 21

a tıibal basis, it may be that the dialects of the Türkmen of Khorasan and Khorezm also
could be defîned as Turkmen dialects on that basis.
Second, caution must be exercised toward ciassifications based on linguistic features
like those cited by Doerfer to characterize "Khorasan Turkish" as an eastem Oğuz
language or dialect group distinct from Turkmen.30 The inherent flaw in ali linguistic
ciassifications is that selection of any sıngle linguistic feature or any set of i'catures is
an entirely arbitraıy process, because a given linguistic feature of itself is not ınherently
more significant than any other linguistic feature. What proof could be advajıced that
the feature, say, of the use of the variant -ya:(r)/yâ:(r) (Teke, Yomut, Salır, Gökleng,
Alili) as opposed to the variants -yo:(r)/yö:(r) (Ârsan, Chowdur), -o:(r) (Sank) or
-(ı)ya(r)/(i)yâ(r) ("Khorasan") of the present indefinite tense suffixsı impedes mutual
intelligibility any more strongly than the interdental (apical) fricatives [0] and [8]
(Teke, Yomut, Salır, Sank, Gökleng) as opposed to the dental (dorsal) fricatives [s]
and [z] (Chowdur, "Khorasan')?52
These reservations aside, Doerfer’s classification of Oğuz is preferable to previous
ciassifications in the sense that it provides a framework which reflects geographical and
historical facts and, at the same time, provokes further research.

50 Doerfer 1977: 191.

51 EepAHeB 1970: 284-295; Doerfer 1977: 169-170.
52 According 10 EepAHeB İ970: 145-146, ıhe interdental fricatives [0] and [5] occurin ali dialeus except
Nohur, Ânew, Hasar, Kırach, Sakar, Esgi, Olam and Alili, and those in Karakalpakistan and S ıavropol,
vvhere ıhe dental fricatives [s] and [zj are found. However, according lo personal observatioıt at least
some Ârsan from around Chârjew use only {s] and [z], perhaps under the influence of nearby
'Khorasan" dialects. According to Euckukob İ949: 141, 162, the Stavropol Trukhmen use [s! and [z],
excepi in some cian-tribaî names (e.g. /Balar/for Salır).
22 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

The Study of Turkmen

The grammar of modem Turkmen and its dialects has been studied in a systematic way
only in the 20th century.53 Prior to that time, a few travelers in the region published
remarks on the Turkmen and their speech, but these lacked the accuracy of trained
observation and were insufficient to establish the study of Turkmen.54
Among such older recordings, hovvever, should be noted the works of the Russian
Turkologists Ilja Berezin (1818-1896), who collected material on the dialect spoken in
Astrabad province of Iran in the early I9th century, and Nikolaj Il’minskij (1822-
1891), who recorded some specimens of Yomut and Esen-ili (Chovvdur).55 Both
Berezin and the Hungarian Orientalist Armen Vâmbery published extracts from
manuseripts by Turkmen classical vvriters, but their remarks on this language possessed
little relevance to modem Turkmen.56
After the Russians had Consolidated their adminstrative hold on the Trans-Caspian
territory, manuals for leaming Turkmen, along with small glossaries and sample
folklore texts, began to appear at the end of the 19th century and in the fîrst decade of
the 20th century. However, the first grammar and dictionary (both based on the Ahal
Teke dialect) which retain a good reputation were published by Ivan Beljajev (?-
1920).57

The Foundations o f Turkmen Linguistics

The study of Turkmen gained a solid footing within the fıeld of Turkic studies when
Aleksandr Samojlovich (1880-1938) began his many years of study of spoken Turkmen
vvith a field trip to leam the Teke dialect in 1902. Thereafter, he published numerous
studies devoted to the monuments of classical Türkmen writers (vvritten in Chagatay),
as vvell as to folklore and historical legends (recorded in Chagatay), vvhich he often
supplemented vvith remarks on the spoken language.58
Aleksandr Poceiujevskij (1894-1948) and Nikolaj Dmitrijev (1898-1954) stand out
as two pioneers in the study of Turkmen in the early Soviet period. In the years 1927-
1936, Poceiujevskij conducted a series of field expeditions to record and deseribe

53 The history of Turkmen suıdies in Russia and ıhe Soviet Union is treated at length in Asumob 1969,
EacKaKOB 1965, EepflH eB İ'97Ö: 35-41 a n d IIouenyeBCKHİf 1975: 74-82; a ls o s e e K o hohob 1982: 240-
243, Muxamedova 1974, MyxueB-KypeHOB 1988, Mupa^oa 1989 and Maptmpoa 1977.
54 For example, word-îists from the dialect o f the Stavropol Tnıkhmen were recorded as early as the 18th
century and appeared in the travel account of 3.A. Güldenstâdt (1773) and in the comparative
dictionary of P.S. Pallas (1787); see the references in EacKaKOB İ965: 21, K o ho ho b 1982: 69, 89, 93,
101. In addition, A.V. Starchevskij published a word-lisı from Turkmen dialects (1878); see EepflueB
1970: 35-36.
55 Beresine 1845, Schiefner İ859.
56 E epeaH H 1849,1857: 88, Vâmbery 1879.
57 Eenflee 1913, 1915; also note IÜHMJceBHM 1899 and Ara 6 eKOB 1904.
58 CaMoünoBHU 1906-1929; see A ephhh l978a-6 and ^MirrpHeBa 1978.
 Introduction 23

Türkmen dialects, work which was summarized in his monographs on Turkmen

dialects and. Turkmen phonetics, both of which appeared in 1936. In addition, he
composed a detailed examination of Turkmen syntax and investigated comparative
aspects of case, tense and comparison in the Oğuz languages. Thanks to the re-
publication of these basic works in 1975, Poceiujevskij’s work continues to be highly
valued.59
Nikolaj Dmitrijev, basing himself on frequent investigation of the speech of
Turkmen students in Leningrad, published several early studies of aspects of Turkmen
phonology and lexicology, but his majör work on Turkmen syntax was published in a
posthumous collection of his articles.60 Othenvise, his study of Turkmen bore fruit in
his contributions to the first Soviet comparative grammar of Turkic languages vvhich
appeared after his death in 1954.61 Dmitrijev’s work is noted for its important role in
establishing a grammatical framework for the deseription of Turkic languages during
the Soviet period.
The Soviet Turkologist Nikolaj Baskakov also made significant contributions to
Turkmen studies, with his deseription of the dialect of the Stavropol Trukhmen, and
especially with his organizational and editorial participation in the compilation of
Russian-Turkmen and Turkmen-Russian dictionaries and the "Academy" grammar of
Standard Turkmen.62
In the 1950s and 1960s, a cadre of Turkmen linguists which included P. Azımov,
H. Baylıyev, D. Berdiyev, M. Hamzayev, M. Hıdırov, M. Hudaykulıyev, B. Kamyev,
K. Shamıradov and oth ers, investigated the grammar and lexicon of Standard Tıırkmen,
vvhile J. Amansanyev, S. Arazkulıyev, M. Afajanov, H. Bagıyev, R. Berdiyev, S.
Kiirenov, G. Mengeliyeva, N. Nartıyev and others, devoted dissertations and
publications to the deseription of Turkmen dialects.63

The Three Capstones o f Turkmen Linguistics

In the 1960s, the work of these Russian and Turkmen linguists began to culminate in
the appearance of three majör syntheses of the grammar, lexicon and dialects of
Standard Turkmen.
The rpaMMamum mypKMeucKozo st3um ("Grammar of the Turkmen Language"),
produced by a collective of scholars at the Institute of Linguistics of the Turkmen
Academy of Sciences in 1970 and 1977, represented the capstone of decades of

59 IIoıjenyeB C K K # 1936-1948, a n d 1975; s e e K o n o n o v 1975.

60 D m itr ije w 1928, 1929, İ933, 1962a. H e a ls o w r o ie ı h e im r o d u e tio n a n d lin g u is tic n o te s to Jleö eflO B
1954.
61 #MHrcpHeB 1955-1961; c f. C e B o p ra e 1971 and M yxaM efloB a 1971a.
62 EacKaKOB 1949, EacKaKOB-XaM 3aeB 1956, E acK aK O B -K appueB -X aM 3 aeB 1968, EacKaKOB-XaM 3 aeB-
M a p u a p o s 1970.
63 F o r b r ie f b io g ra p h ic a l s k e te h e s o f th e s e a n d o th e r T u r k m e n s c h o la rs , s e e M y xueB -K ypeH O B 1988.
24 Turkmen Referenee Grammar
O

grammatical studies.64 The first volüme of this grammar covered the phonology and
morphology of Standard Turkmen and was published in Russian. As a collective vvork,
its chapters on individual aspects (nouns, gerunds, and the like) of Turkmen grammar
were written by the leading Turkmen linguists of the time (B. Chanyarov, M.
Hamzayev, H. Baylıyev, M. Hudaykuhyev, S. Kürenov), or by their most promising
students (M. Charıyev, B. Hojayev, T. Tâchmıradov), and the work was edited by
N.A. Baskakov. The second volüme covered the syntax of phrases and simple
sentences and was published in Turkmen. its chapters were written by a collective of
leading Turkmen linguists (A. Borjakov, B. Chanyarov, M. Charıyev, B. Hojayev, M.
Hudayguüyev, T. Tâchmıradov) as vvell. The projected last volüme of this series on the
syntax of complex sentences never appeared. The rpaMMamum mypKMeHcmzo sa n m
not only established the essential deseriptive framevvork and grammatical categories of
Turkmen, but also defined (and continues to define) the official "Academy" view toward
the norms of Standard Turkmen.
The TypKMeHCKO-pyccıcuü cMeapb ("Turkmen-Russian Dictionary") of 1968 similarly
made the weaLth of the Türkmen lexicon available to ali non-Tmkmen students of the
language.65 Based on the earlier TypKMen duAUHutf ce3Ayzu ("Dictionary of the
Turkmen Language"),66 also produced by the collective of the Institute of Linguistics
of the Turkmen Academy of Sciences, this dictionary constinıtes a referenee lexicon
that houses ali of the vocabulary used in Standard Turkmen.67 At the same time, as its
predecessor, the TypKMeHcıco-pyccKuü cjıoeapb provides the great service to non-Tıarkmen
of indicating long vowels in brackets beside each entry.
As pointed out above (see 17-18), the TypKMen duAumaj duajıeKniAepuHuş ouepKu
("Sketehes of the Dialects of the Turkmen Language"), vvritten by R. Berdiyev, S.
Kürenov, K. Shamıradov and S. Arazkulıyev, built on the ground-breaking vvork of
Poceiujevskij and a series of dissertations vmtten by Turkmen linguists on mdividual
dialects, to summarize the comparative phonology, morphology and lexicon of ali
majör Turkmen dialects spoken vvithin Türkmenistan.
Since the publication of these three Capital works, Türkmen linguists like G.
Achılova, A. Annanurov, S. Aranazarov, Soltansha Atamyazov, B. Chanyarov, N.
Durdıyev, W. Mesgudov, A. Mollayev, A. Nurmuhammedov, A. Öwezov, M.
Penjiyev, T. Tâchmıradov, and others, have continued the study of the grammar,
lexicon and dialects of Turkmen.

64 EacK aK 0 B-X;iM3 acB-LIüpij>iP0 B 1970, H a p u s ıp o B -C a p u e B 1977a.

65 EacKaKOB-KappueB-XaM3aeB 1968.
66 XaM3aeB 1962.
67 The 1968 dictionary entered ali bul a dozen or so o f the words contained in the illustrative material of
ıhis referenee grammar, and ıhe 1962 dictionary cited only one of ıhese.
 Introduction 25

Turkmen Linguistics in the West

Outside of Türkmenistan and Russia, the Turkmen language has received relatively
little attention thus far. The first Turkmen grammar to appear in the West foımed a
chapter by the French Turkologist Louis Bazin in the Philologiae Turcicae
Fundamenta (1959), a basic referenee vvork which contains systematically presented
grammars of each of the Turkic languages.68 The fact that this seholar accomp sbed his
task in a mere nine pages may stand as an evaluation of its utility. Bazin cited
Turkmen examples in transeription only and appended a text for reading.
In 1960, G.K. Dulling of Great Britain, a vvorker at the Central Asian Research
Centre in Oxford which specialized in "Sovietology" as it applied to Turkic peoples and
languages of the Soviet Union, published a 47-page Introduction to the Türkmen
Language.69 Dulling’s approach to the study of Turkmen was refleeted from the
opening paragraphs in such judgments as the following: "Unfortunately, bonowing is
an essential feature of Turkmen, which is, basically, an extremely poor language...For
this reason, any of its dialects will be strongly influenced by other, and more
sophisticated languages spoken in the same area. Little vvonder, therefore, that
"Standard" Turkmen is rapidly becoming more and more russianized," and "Apırt from
the DIWAN of Maqdum Quli there has been little or no literatüre. This is yeı another
reason why the language is so impoverished, since it has little or nothing other than
oral tradition on which to fail back."70 Dulling regarded Turkmen as a poor relative of
Turkish and frequently couched his comments on Turkmen grammar in terms of its
deviation from that language. Fortunately, these comments are brief (35 pages), since
they contain errors of interpretation. Appended to the pamphlet are selected pasısages for
reading, which constitute the only useful portion of this work because they inelude
three samples of texts in Latin seript. In a word, Dulling’s pamphlet is offens :ve, and
amounts to a colonialist sneer peeking through the pretensions of Sovietology.
After this rocky start, the study of Turkmen in the West made progress with tlıe
appearance of Oskar Hanser’s Turkmen Manual.71 The grammatical deseription in this
manual is based on the rpaMMamum mypKMencKOzo sam a, but is presented in such a
laconic form that its elarity and accessibility are limited. The most useful feature of
this work is its citation of ali examples both in the Turkmen alphabet and in
transeription, vvhich were verified by linguists at the Institute of Linguistics of the
Turkmen Academy of Sciences during Hanser’s two trips to Türkmenistan in 1971 and
1974. The Turkmen Manual also ineludes a variety of sample texts in the Turkmen
alphabet, accompanied by a glossary, and an index. Since its appearance, Hanser’s
manual has represented the only work of any utility on Turkmen grammar for those
vvho do not read Russian or Turkmen.

68 Bazin 1959.
69 Dulling 1960.
70 Dulling 1960: ii.
71 Hanser 1977.
26 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Besides these grammars, only a few publications on individuai aspects of Türkmen

grammar,72 as well as a teaching manual73 and collecdons of texts,74 have appeared in
European languages other than Russian.

72 Aschnin 1961, Baitschura 1976, Benzing 1939, Dmiırijev 1929, 1933, Menges 1939, Rasânen 1960,
Zajqc2±owski 1971.
73 Tyson-Clark 1994. This manual vvas prepared for the U.S. Pcace Corps in Türkmenistan, and vvas
intended for use by Turkmen teachers ırained in communicatjve techniques, and not by students. It
ccmıalns cuîtural materials, samp]e diaiogs and grammatical explanations and paradigms.
74 Frank 1995, Gabain 1959, Reichl 1982.
 SOUND SYSTEM

In describing the sound system of a language, linguists establish the basic sounds,
vvhich usually are called phonemes, that distinguish meanings and then describe the
actual and variant pronunciations or allophones of those basic sounds. These variant
pronunciations may be explained as due to the influence of surrounding sounds, rather
than to changes in meanings.
The Türkmen sound system consists of sixteen basic vowels and nineteen basic
consonants. Another eight consonants exist for the component of Russian vvords in
Turkmen. Each of these meaningful sounds has variant pronunciations based on its
surroundings. As an example, the basic sound b (vvritten 6) is pronounced just as
English b vvhen it appears at the beginning of a vvord, but is pronounced like English v
wben it appears betvveen vovvels and in some other circumstances. This variant
pronunciation of b occurs under the influence of the surrounding vovvels vvhich are
voiced (like the consonant b), but vvhich are uttered as air escapes the mouth (unlike
the consonant b). When altemate pronunciations of a sound may be explained like this,
they are regarded as variants or allophones of the same basic sound or phoneme.
The sound system of a language is independent of its vvriting system. Many
alphabets, ineluding that of English, represent the basic sounds of a language rather
poorly (for example, in English 'fish' and 'rough' the basic sound f is spelled
differently). The current Türkmen alphabet (see 74-77), vvith only a few exceptions,
provides a coırespondence of one letter to one basic sound for most sounds of the
Turkmen sound system.
28 Turianen Referenee Grammar

PHONOLOGY
The Türkmen sound system consists of the follovving basic sotınds or phonemes,
which are presented here and throughout this referenee grammar vvithin slash marks:

Short vowels: /a, e, ı, i, o, ö, u, ü/

Long vovvels: /a: â:, ı:, i:, o , ö:, u:, ü:/
Consonants: /b, p, d, t g .k , m, n, i), 1, r, 5, 0, 5, j, c, h, y, w/
Russian consonants: /z, s, i , c, s’s’, f, X, V/

In the phonetic deseriptions that follow and throughout this referenee grammar, the
sounds of the Turkmen language are vvritten vvith transeription symbols that represent
the pronunciation of the basic sounds betvveen slash marks (/ /). The variant
pronunciations of basic sounds are vvritten betvveeen square brackets ([ ]), and the
International Phonetic Alphabet (= IPA) and Cyrillic letters of the Turkmen alphabet
vvithin parentheses.1 Comparisons to American English sounds are provided, but it
should be obvious that when a Turkmen basic sound does not exist in the American
English sound system, the comparison betvveen them can be only a rough
approximation and that even pronunciations of that approximation may vary from
speaker to speaker of American English.

Deseription of VoweIs
Turkmen has sixteen vowels, eight of vvhich are pronounced vvith short duration and
the other eight vvith long duration. Vovvels may be deseribed according to the
follovving features: the position of the tongue in the mouth (high, mid, lovv), the
movement of the tongue in the mouth (front, çenter, back) and the shape of the lips
(unrounded, rounded) during their pronunciation. The sixteen vovvels may be
represented in a chart such as the follovving.

Front Back
Unrounded Rounded Unrounded Rounded

High /i, i:/ /ü, ü:/ /i, ı:/ /u, u:/

Mid /e/ /ö, ö:/ /o, o:/
Lovv /a:/ /a, a:/

i The IPA symbols derive from a spectrographic study of the speech o f the Ahal Teke speaker
Ogulsona Ishankuîıyeva that was conducted by Andrea Word of the Department of linguistics at
Indiana University for the Türkmen Language Project.
 Phonology 29

/a/
The lovv back unrounded vovvel /a/ is pronounced similarly to English 'a ' in 'hah!',
and may occur in any position of a word (aT a /ata/ 'grandfather', canaK ,'0apak/
'lesson'. Variants o f this vovvel inelude the high centered vovvel p], pronounced
somewhat shorter, that occurs before /y/ in the suffixes -ap/Hap /-ya:r/yi:r/ and
-hh/üsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/ (acaap /ya0aya:r/ [ya6*ya:r] 'she creates'), and the mid rounded
vowel [o] that occurs before /w/ at the end of a word (n a n a s /palaw/ [palow] ’palaw
[rice dish]'). (IPA /a/, Cyrillic a)

/a:/
The low back unrounded vowel /a:/ is pronounced like /a/, but vvith long duration
(approximated by saying 'aaah', as at the doctor’s office), vvith the tongue low ;r in the
month and vvith the root of the tongue farther back than for short /a/. This long vovvel
may occur in any position of a vvord (a3UK /a:8ık/ 'provisions', Manana /makarla/
'article', jrçyfla /}uda:/ 'very, quite/). (IPA /aa/, Cyrillic a)

/e/
The high-mid front unrounded vovvel /e/is pronounced approximately as Englith 'e' in
'pet', and may occur in any position of a vvord (3rHH /eğin/ 'shoulders', Meflemı
g e d e n i:/ 'cultural', Kene /köcö/ 'Street'). Because long /e:/ occurs only as a ıesult of
contraction in tvvo vvords (6ep /be:r/ 'she vvill give', re p /ge:r/ 'he vvill coım'). the
long variant is not regarded as a distinet phoneme. Variants of this vovvel inelude the
high centered vovvel p], pronounced somevvhat shorter, that occurs before />/ in the
suffixes -ap/ttap /-ya:r/yâ:r/ and -aü/ttaıı /-ya:n/yâ:n/ (m ııjıettap /isleya-.r/ [i: iîl'-yâtr]
Tıe vvorks'), and the mid front rounded vovvel [ö] that occurs before /vv/ at the end of a
vvord (HapjrçeB /Cârjevv/ [Ğârjövv] 'Chârjevv'). (IPA /e/, Cyrillic 3, e)

/â:/
The lovv-mid front unrounded vovvel /â:/ is pronounced as English 'a ' in 'pat', but
vvith long duration. It may occur in any position of a vvord (ap /â:r/ 'man', Hane /na:ce/
'vvhat', HYHÜ3 /dünyâ:/ 'vvorld'). Short /â/ is pronounced vvith the lips spread vvider and
the tongue raised slightly higher in the mouth. It is not considered to be a distinet
phoneme because it occurs only in a fevv compound Turkmen vvords composed of tvvo
verb forms (anejiMeK /âkelmek/ 'to bring to' < anbin renMeK /ahp gelmek/ to take
and come', aKHTMen /âkitmek/ 'to take to' < ajibin mTMeK /alıp gitmek/ 'to take and
go') and in some of the borrovvings from Persian or Arabic (nıaxep /sâher/ 'city'.ı. (IPA
/jeje/, Cyrillic a)

hl
The high back-tovvard-center unrounded vovvel /ı/ is pronounced approximaıely as
English 'u ' in 'put', but vvith unrounded lips, and may occur in any position of a vvord
30 Turianen Referenee Grammar

(MHxa /inha:/ Tıere', rtlJTbm /gılıc/ 'sword', ç a p tı /6a:n/ 'yellow'). The variant [*],
which is a high centered vovvel that is pronoıınced very short, frequently occurs
betvveen consonants in unstressed syilables or in one-syllable words (cbirbip /6ıgır/
[0*gır] 'cow‘, ru T /git/ [gh] 'rare')- (IPA /ın/, Cyrillic bi)

hil
The high back-toward-center unrounded vovvel /ı:/ is pronounced like /ı/, but with long
duration. This long vovvel basically is a semi-diphthong [ıy], but vvith the tongue
farther tovvard the front of the mouth than for short /ı/. It may occur in any position of
a vvord, although it is confined to Persian-Arabic vvords in final position ( m c / ı : 9 /
'smell', y3MH /u8ı:n/ 'long', caxtı /öahı:/ 'generous'). (IPA /ınm/, Cyrillic w)

m
The high front unrounded vovvel /i/ is pronounced approximately as English T in 'pit',
and may occur in any position of a vvord ( h k h /iki/ 'tvvo', ü m j ih k /yilik/ 'marrow',
3jımı /elli/ 'fifty'). The variant [*], vvhich is a high centered vowel that is pronounced
very short, occurs betvveen consonants in unstressed syilables or in one-syllable vvords
( k h i d h / k i s i / [k%i] 'person', 6wp /bir/ [b’r] 'one'). (IPA / ı / , Cyrillic h )

İUI
Tlıe high front unrounded vovvel /i:/ is pronounced like /i/, but vvith long duration and
basically like a semi-diphthong [iy], vvith the tongue farther tovvard the front of the
mouth than for short /i/. This long vovvel may occur in any position of a vvord,
although it is confined to Persian-Arabic vvords in final position (Mm /i:?/ 'work',
HeTHJKe /neti:je/ 'result', MeaeHH /medeni:/ 'cultural'). (IPA İni, Cyrillic h)

Jol
The mid back rounded vovvel /o/ is pronounced approximately as English 'o a ' in
'coat', and may occur in any position of a vvord (opTa /orto/ 'middle', rojıatt /goloy/
'near'). The variant [*], vvhich is a high centered vovvel that is pronounced somevvhat
shorter, occurs before /y/ in the suffixes -ap/Hap /-ya:r/ya:r/ and - hh/Hsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/
(ro a ra sp /go:8goya:r/ [go:5g1ya:rl 'she moves'). (IPA /o/, Cyrillic o)

/o:/
The mid back rounded vovvel /o:/ is pronounced like /o/, but vvith long duration and
vvith the tongue farther back in the mouth than for short /o/. This long vovvel may
occur only in the root of a vvord ( o h /o:n/ 'ten', gogaK /do:dok/ 'lips'). (IPA /oo/,
Cyrillic o)
 Phonology 31

lol
The mid front rounded vowel /ö/ is pronounced approximately as English 'e' in 'pet'
but with rounded lips, and may occur in any position of a word (eKy3 /ökiiS/ 'ox',
k&mbk /köm ök/ Tıelp', KO'ie /köiö/ 'street'). The variant [a], which is a high front
rounded vowel that is pronounced somewhat shorter, occurs before İyi in the suffixes
-np/Hap /-ya:r/yâ:r/ and -sm/Raıı /-ya:n/ya:n/ (CenMeflap /bö:lmöya:r/ [bö:lm“yâ:r] lıe
does not drnde"). (IPA /ce/, Cyrillic e)

löıl
The mid front rounded vowel /ö:/ is pronounced like /ö/, but with long duration and
with the tongue farther back in the mouth than for short /ö/. This long vowel may
occur only in the root of a word (en /ö:l/ 'wet', tteHe /yö:nö/ 'but'). (IPA /<eoe/,
Cyrillic e)

lul
The high back rounded vowel /u/ is pronounced approximately as English 'u ' in 'put'
but vvith more rounded lips. It may occur at the beginning of and within, but not at the
end of a vvord (ynu /ulı/ 'big', 6ypyH /burun/ 'nose'). (IPA /u/, Cyrillic y)

/u:/

The high back rounded vowel /u:/ is pronounced like /u/, but with long duration and
essentially like a semi-diphthong [uw].2 This long vovvel may occur only in the root
syllable of a Turkmen word (yKM /u:kı/ 'sleep', rypT /gu:rt/ 'wolf') and in the second
syllable of Persian-Arabic vvords (ycyn /u0u:l/ 'method', Ma3iwyn /ma5mu:n/
'contents'). (IPA /wj/, Cyrillic y)

lâl
The high front rounded vovvel /ü/ is pronounced approximately as English 'i' in 'pit'
but with rounded lips, and may occur in any position of a vvord (Y3yıvı /iiSiim/ 'grapes',
kymydi /kümtis/ 'silver', nYPnu /dOrlii/ 'various'). (EPA /y/, Cyrillic y)

lû:l
The high front rounded voweI /ü:/ is pronounced like /ü/, but vvith long duration and
basically like a semi-diphthong [üw], This long vowel may occur at the beginning and
vvithin, but not at the end of a word (yön /ü:n/ 'voice', 6yrn n /büttirn/ 'vvlıole'). (IPA
/ vy/, Cyrillic yü)

2 See rpaMMamma 35 for üıe characterization of ju-.l and /ü:/ as "semi-diphthongs."

32 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The Vowels e lel and a lâ:l

The vowels e /e / and a /a :/ are distinct phonemes in ihe Türkmen sound system wMch
contrast according to their heighth of pronunciation (e /e/ is front high-mid and a /a:/ is
firont low-mid) and to their length (e /e/ is sbort and a /â:/ is long), Moreover, the short
vowel e /e/ has a iong variant e /e :/in two words (6ep /be:r/ < öepep /berer/, re p /ge:r/
< re jıe p /geler/), while the long vowel a /a:/ has a short variant a /â/ in several basic
words o f both Türkmen and Persian origin (aKMTMeK /âkitm ek/ 'to take to', aKejiMeK
/âkelm ek/ 'to bring to', axüH /ahli/ 'ali', axTHMa.ii /âhtim a:l/ 'probably', m a x e p
fsahe.il 'city'). Given these facts, it would be strictly correct to view the Türkmen
vowel system as consisting o f nine contrasting pairs of vowels:

Short: a /a / e /e/ a /â / m hl H /i/ 0 / 0/ e /ö / y /u / Y /“/

Long: a /a :/ e/e:/ a/â:/ ıı /ı:/ h /i:/ 0 / 0 :/ e /ö :/ yM Y« /ü:/

On the other hand, the vovvels e /e/ and a /â:/ possess certain characteristics that
make them appear to contrast in the same way as the other short-long pairs of vowels
in the sound system. One characteristic is that e /e/ regularly is replaced by a /â:/ when
a suffix beginning with a vowel is added to a noun or verb stem ending in the vovvels
a/e /a/e/, producing a long vowel a/a /a:/a:/; for example, rapa(MaK) /gara(mak)/ 'to
look at' > rap a p /gara:r/ Tıe will look at', umjıe(MeK> /i:sle(mek)/ 'to work' > ıımnap
/i:sla:r/ 'she wiU work'. In the same way that a /a/ is replaced by a /a:/ in these cases,
so e /e/ is replaced by a /â:/.
Another characteristic is that e /e/ and a /â:/ occur as part of the original sound
system, unlike e /e:/ and a /â/. It will be noted that e /e:/ represents secondary length
that results from contraction (6ep /be:r/ < 6epep /berer/, rep /ge:r/ < rejıep /geler/),
while a /’i / represents secondary shortness that results firom a few fusions of Türkmen
words (aKMTMeK Akitmek/ 'to take to' < ajıu n rHTMeK /ahp gitmek/ 'to take and go',
3Kejı.YieK /akelmek/ 'to bring to' < aiiu n reJiMeK /alıp gelmek/ 'to take and come')
and firom borrowing Persian-Arabic words which generally retain their vowel qualities
in Türkmen (axiin /ahli/ 'ali', axTHMan /âhtima:l/ 'probably', maxep /saher/ 'city',
ete,). For these reasons, it will facilitate the presentation and understanding of Türkmen
long vovvels and vowel harmony by treating the Türkmen vowel system as comprising
eight contrasting pairs o f vowels:

Short: a lal e /e / M hl H /i / 0 / 0/ e /ö / y /u / Y/ü/

Long: a /a :/ a/â:/ M /ı:/ h /i:/ 0 /o:/ e /ö:/ y /u:/ Y« /ü:/
 Phonology 33

Long Vowels in Root Syllables

Each of the eight Türkmen shoıt vowels may be said to have a long vowel coııtıterpart.
Seven of the eight long vowels are formed in the mouth in the same position.i as their
short counterparts, but they are pronounced with twice the duration. The eighth long
vowel a /a:/ is pronounced with the tongue positioned somevvhat lower than its short
counterpart e /e/. The long vowels are heard distinctly, although upon initiai « p o su ıe
to the language they may sound like a kind of stress placed on a syllable.
Linguists cali the long vowels in the roots of originally Türkmen words primary
long vowels" because this Length is a presetvation of the length that existeıi in the
language from which Türkmen and other related Turkic languages have develo red över
millennia.3 At the same time, some long vowels of one-syllable Türkmen wnrds are
"secondary long vowels," that is, they appear as the result of sound changes m at have
occurred över time. For example, the long vowel üı the word flajı /da:l/ 'i: not' (<
*dâgil) represents secondary length that arose when the consonant between che two
vowels w as lost. The change in this woıd belongs to the history of the Türkmen
language, but the same process operates today in several circumstances (see 'i 8). The
long vowels that appear in originally Persian or Arabic words also may be coıısidered
secondary long vowels or words with v/hat may be called "inherent length" (see 36).
Hovvever, regardless of their origin, such long vowels are inherent in Standard Türkmen
words and some suffixes.
Seven of the sets of Türkmen primaıy short and long voweis exist in a srries of
"minimal pairs," that is, two words whose meanings are distinguished only by the
length of their vowels. Such pairs comprise one-syllable words, including the
unsuffıxed roots of verbs which serve as the informal or second person singular
imperative (for example, reJiMeK /gelmek/ 'to come', Ten! /Gel!/ 'Come!'). As pointed
out above, the long vowel e /e:/ occurs only in two contracted verb forms, w hile the
short vovıiel a /a/ occurs only in two fused verbs and a few borrowings. Thus, cmly the
variants e /e/ and a /â:/ are contrasted in the list below, even though they do net exist
in minimal pairs (nor do e /e:/ and s /a/ or e /e:/ and a /â:/).
The table on the next page provides minimal pairs for words containing short and
long vowels in their roots. It will be obvious from the examples in this list (which
could not be extended much farther) that the potential for ambiguous readings of vvords
with long vowels is small in written Türkmen. Many of the minimal pairs contrast
noun and verb stems which normally appear with distinet elasses of suffixes and in
different funetions in a sentence. Moreover, a number of the contrasted vvords are
infrequently used or confined to certain contexts (for example, ayp /dür/ 'pearl' and
MYÜH /mii:n/ 'shyness' are confined to belles-lettres).

3 See, for example, Q]ep6 aK 1970: 47-59, 1994: 49-53, with full references lo the literatüre on this
subjecl.
34 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Short and Long Vowels in Root Syilables

Short Vowel Long Vowel
lal a r /at/ horse /a:/ aT /a:t/ n am e
aHMaK /aîmak/ to open a n /a:5 / h un gry
ra 3 MaK /gaSmak/ to d ig ra 3 /ga: 5/ g o o s e

lel öepMeK /bermek/ to give /§:/ 6 au ı /bâ:s/ f iv e

reH /jgerj/ strange r s a /ga: 5/ dirt
o t /el/ hand s p /a:r/ man

M rH3Maıc /gıSmak/ to heat /ı:/ rb i 3 /gı: 8/ g iri, d au gh ter

HCMaK /ıömak/ to move mc /ı:0/ sm e ll
r a p /gır/ barren steppe r a p /gı:r/ g r a y h orse

IV mt /it/ d o g /i:/ HTMeK /i:tm ek/ to push

6nnMeK /bilmek/ to know 5 mji /bîri/ w a ist
w ra e K /£igmek/ to tie a knot « m r/ci:g / ra w

lol ot /ot/ grass lo:l ot /o:t/ fire

H o m a K /£ogm ok/ to pour u o r /co:g/ heat
r o j i /gol/ arm r o n /go:l/ lo w p la ce

löl eMMeK /öCm ök/ to e xtin gu ish löıl e>ı /ö:£/ re v en g e

en M eK /ölm ök/ to d ie e n /ö:l/ w e t
eTMeıc /ötm ök/ to pass ot /ö:t/ b ile

lal yMMaK /ucm ok/ to fly lu:l y u /u:c/ tip, point

ry p T /gurt/ d ry e h ee se ry p T /gu:ıt/ w o lf; w orm
T yrM aK /tutm ok/ to h o ld T yT /tu:t/ m u lb e rry tre e

lül flyp /dür/ pearl lü:l AY^pMeK /dü:rmök/ to roll

HYUiMeK /düsmök/ to come down HY^ın /dü:s/ dream
MynMeK /m ünmök/ to get on MY^H /mii:n/ shyness

In a few cases, the primary long vowel of a Türkmen root becomes short in
combination with other elements, or the reverse. Loss of length is noted in the numeral
o h /o:n/ '10', whose vowel is short when combined with the numerals '1' to '9 ' in
counting: o h 6 n p /on bi:r/ '11', o h h k h /on iki/ '12', ete. It also is noted with the
modal vvord e n /yo:k/ 'there is/are not', whose vowel becomes short when the
conditional svffix is added: erca /yog0o/ 'if not', as well as when the word x h j i /hi:l/
 Phonology 35

'kind, quality' is part of the fonnations xep xhjih /her hiii/ 'ali soıts o f and h 3 XHJIm
/narhili/ 'how?, what?' The opposite case, or lengthening of a root vovvel, occnrs when
the third person possessive suffıx is added to the numeral 6 np /bir/ '1', resulting in
6Mpn /bi:ri/ 'someone, one of', and when this numeral is used in the combinations
'11, 21, 31, ete,' (oh 6 np /on bi:r/ '11', ete.). The vowels of the demonstrative
pronouns 6y /bu ~ bu:/ 'this' and my /su ~ su:/ 'that' are pronounced short in
combinations but long in isolation.

Long Vowels in Non-Rooı Syllables

In exceptional circumstances, long vowels occur in the non-root syllables of originally
Türkmen vvords, where it may be difficult to establish whether they are primary or
secondary in origin. One case involves the long vowels m /ı:/ and m /ii:/ which occur in
the second syllable of several Türkmen words, üıcluding y3tiH /u8ı:n/ 'long', hkm h
/yakım/ 'near', ÖyTMH /biitü:n/ 'whole' and y^HH /ii£ü:n/ 'for'. Here, the long vowels
probably resulted from a merger of the roots of these vvords with a suffix /*-m/m/ that
occurred long ago. Such a merger may be seen clearly in words of the type eftnaH
/öyla:n/ 'in the aftemoon', where the instrumental suffix + h h /h h /+ı:n/i:n/ has been
attached to otine /öylö/ 'aftemoon'.
Long vowels also occur in some Türkmen suffibces and particles. In some instances,
these long vowels clearly are secondary in origin; for example, the suffix +jıan/ji3n
/+la:p/lâ:p/, which forms approximate numerals, results from the merger of two
suffixes, one o f vvhich ends and the other begins in a vowel (-malne /+la/le/ plus
-un/un /-ıp/ip/). However, this explanation will not account for ali the suffixes and
particles in the following list whose vowels show inherent length.

instrumental suffix + h h /hh /+ı:n/i:n/

Directional suffix + lik /hk /+ı:k/i:k/
Relation suffix +flaKBl/fl3 KH /+da:kı/dâ:ki/
Comparative suffix +paK/psK /+ra:k/râ:k/
Approximation numeral +nan/j»n /+la:p/la:p/
Present indefinite -ap/üap /-ya:r/yâ:r/
Negative present perfect -aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/
1 plural imperative -ajn>m/enun /-ah:i)/eli:g/
Desiderative -asgıu/aem /-a:yadı/â:yedi/
Suffix of pennission -att/ait /-a:y/â:y/
Present participle -sm/iisH /-ya:n/yâ:n/
Negation partide -Maii/MSH /-ma:n/ma:n/
Qualification partide -Ka/K3 /-ka:/ka:/
Emphasis partide -«a f m /-da:/da:/
Appeal partide -a/s /-a:/â:/
36 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

With ıhe exceptions noted above, Turkmen words with long vovvels in non-root
syilables are Persian or Arabic in origin and reflect the vowel qualities of their Persian-
Arabic prototypes. The majority of Persian-Arabic words entered Türkmen through the
medium of the Central Asian literary language called Chagatay, which Turkmen writers
used from the 18th century through the early 20th centuıy. Written in Arabic seript,
that language incorporated the Persian-Arabic vocabulary associated vvith the Islamic
heritage of many Central Asian peoples.
The Arabic seript contains three letters (â, ı, û, where the maeron sign indicates
length) that were used to write long vowels in Persian and Arabic vvords in this literary
language. Just so, Turkmen vvords of Persian-Arabic origin have long vovvels in the
same positions; for example, TaKaT /ta:kat/ 'enduranee' (Persian t â q a l < Arabic
t â q a h ), aaıvıaH /8ama:n/ 'time' (A z a m a n ) , ö m ı a /bina:/ 'building' (A b i n â '); M iın e
/mi:wâ/ 'fruit' (P m i v a h ) , HeTHj^e /neti:je/ 'result' (A n a t î j a h ) , Meltemi /m edeni:/
'cultural' (A m a d a n î ) ; M33 MyH /ma5mu:n/ 'contents' (A m a 4 m û n ) , yMyMaH
/umu:mon/ 'generally' (A ‘u m ü m a r i) , and so on. In borrovvings that became integral
components of everyday speech, the vovvel fî/ became /ı:/ to confonn to the rules of
vovvel hannony, as in x a K M K a T /hakı:kat/ 'truth' and r a a l i m l i /gadı:mı/ 'ancient'.
Long vowels also are found in Persian prefıxes and suffixes (see 520, 541).
 Phonology 37

Description of Consonants
H e Standard Turkmen la n g u a g e , both w ritten and spoken, has nineteen consonants.
Speakers who pronounce Russian words as they are pronounced in Russian ha ve eight
additional consonants in their sound system (see 40-42).
Consonants may be described according to the following features: restriction of air
in forming the consonant (stop = closed passage followed by reiease, fricative =
restricted passage, affricate = closed then restricted), place vvhere the consonant is
fonned (bilabial = both lips, labiodental = lower lip and upper teeth, dental ~ teeth,
dentoalveolar = upper teeth and ridge above them, alveolar = ridge above upp;r teeth,
palatal = hard area in roof of mouth, velar = soft area in back of mouth beyoııd hard
palate), shape or movement of the tongue (liquid = air flowing around the tongııe, flap
= tongue striking alveolum), vibration of the "voice box" or larynx in the throat
(voiceless = no vibration, voiced = vibration), and others.
The consonants are presented in the following table (with Russian consonants in
parentheses) according to their primary place (labial, ete.) and manner (stop, ete.) of
articulation.

Labial Dental Alveolar Palatal Velar Gloıtal

Stops t. P d, t fi. k

j. c
Affricates
(c)

(v,f) 5, e s (x)
Fricatives
(z, s) (z, i ’s’)

Nasal stops m n t)

LiquidtFlap 1 r

Semivov/els w y
Aspirate t
38 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Jbl
The voiced bilabial stop /b/ is pronounced as English 'b ' in "b in ' only at the
beginning of a word (Bam /ba:s/ 'five'). The variant [v], vvhich is a voiced labiodental
fricative that is pronounced as English V in 'vine', occurs between vowels and after
consonants (06 a /o:bo/ [o:vo] 'village', Topöa /to:rbo/ [to:rvo] 'sack'). The variant [p]
occurs after the consonant /p/ within a word (randa /tapba/ [tappa] 'suddenly'). (IPA
fb/, Cyrillic 6 )

¥
The voiceless bilabial stop /p/ is pronounced as English 'p ' in 'spin' and occurs in al!
positions of a word (nec /pe0/ 'low', canaK /öapak/ 'lesson', Kon /köp/ 'much'). (IPA
/p/, Cyrillic n)

/d/
The voiced dental stop /d/ is pronounced similarly to English 'd ' in 'deep', except that
the tongue touches the teeth and not the ridge above the teeth. It occurs in ali but final
positions of a word (nanı /da:3/ 'stone', anarn /a:dam/ 'person', Hinna /iSda:/
'appetite'). The variant [t] occurs after the consonants /p/ and /t/ (nerıjjep /depder/
[depter] 'notebook', xarrjıa /hatda:/ [hatta:] 'also'). (IPA /d/, Cyrillic n)

m
The voiceless dental stop /t/ is pronounced similarly to English 't' in 'steep', except
that the tip of the tongue touches the teeth and not the ridge above the teeth, which
reduces the "explosion" of aır. This consonant occurs in ali positions o f a word (Taae
/ta:5e/ 'new', raTM /gatı/ 'hard, very', 3 T /et/ 'meat'). (IPA /t/, Cyrillic t )

>e/
The voiced velar stop Igl is pronounced as English 'g ' in 'geese' in initial position
only (r »3 /gö8/ 'eye'). The variant [7 ] is a voiced velar fricative that occurs non-initially
betvveen vowels and after consonants except /k / ( a r u 3 /agıS/ [ayıS] 'mouth', epraH
/yorgon/ [yoryon] 'bedding', 6 aTra /batğa/ [batya] 'dirt', Rar /da:g/ [da:^] 'mountain').
English lacks an equivalent or approximation to the sound [7 ]. It is produced by
holding the back of the tongue elose to the velum while emitting air with voicing. The
variant [k] occurs after the consonant /k/ within a word (neKra /pökgii/ [pökkü] 'ball').
(BPA /g/, Cyrillic r)

İki
The voiceless velar stop /k/ is pronounced as English 'k ' in 'sk i' and occurs in ali
positions of a vvord (Kon /kö:l/ 'lake', nKbin /yakı:n/ 'near', asK /ayak/ 'foot'). When
this sound occurs before back vowels, its articulation is farther back on the velum, just
as it is farther forvvard when it occurs before front vowels. (IPA /kİ, Cyrillic K)
 Phonology 39

İmi
The bilabial nasal stop /m/ is pronounced as English 'm ' in 'm eat' and occurs in ali
positions of a word (myh /mii 13/ 'thousand', kymyui /kümüs/ 'silver', T a r a m /tagam/
'taste'). (IPA /m/, Cyrillic m)

İn i

The dental nasal stop /n/ is pronounced as English 'n ' in 'neat' and occurs in ali
positions of a word (H axap /nahar/ 'meal', ©hym /ö:nüm/ 'product', 6 oh>h /boyun/
'neck'). (IPA /n/, Cyrillic h)

¥
The velar nasal stop /rj/ is pronounced as English 'ng' in 'sinğ' and occurs only within
and at the end of a word (flenıo /degiS/ 'sea', rnn /gi:rj/ 'wide'). (IPA /g/, Cyrillic u)

nı
The dental liquid /I/ is pronounced as English T in 'leap' and occurs in ali positions
of a word (jıafötiK /la:yık/ 'good', yjiM /ulı/ 'big', jjhji /dil/ 'tongue'). (IPA /I/,
Cyrillic ji)

M
The alveolar flap İri is pronounced approximately as English 'tt' in 'better' and occurs
in ali positions of a word ( p a s tı /ra:5ı/ 'satisfied', c a p u /0a:rı/ 'yellow', HCMHp
/demir/ 'iron'). This sound is produced by making one or more flaps of the tip of the
tongue against the roof of the mouth in initial and middle position, and two or more
flaps in final position. (IPA /r/, Cyrillic p)

İSİ
The voiced interdental fricative /S/ is pronounced as EngEsh 'th ' in 'then' and occurs
in ali positions of a word (3aT / 8a:t/ 'thing', y3MH /u 8ı:n/ 'long', ny3 /du:8/ 'salt ').4
(IPA 151, Cyrillic 3)

/e/
The voiceless interdental fricative /0/ is pronounced as English 'İh ' in 'thin' and occurs
in ali positions of the word (e y ü t / 0 ü:t/ 'milk', ycyjı /u 8 u:l/ 'method', HaMbic
/na:mı0/ 'honor, shame'). (IPA /0/, Cyrillic c)

4 The interdental fricatives /ö / and /5/ abo may be called "apical," since they aıe pronounced vvith the
öp (apex) o f the tongue, while the dental fricatives /s/ and /z/ may be called "dorsal," since they are
pronounced with the back (dorsuni) o f the tongue retraeted.
40 Türkmen Reference Gramın ar

İsi
The voiceless alveolar fricative /s/ is pronounced as English 'sh ' in 'shin' and occurs
in ali positions of a word (m axep /sâher/ 'city', auıun /ya:sıl/ 'green', nam /da:s/
'stone'). The consonant /s/ is lengthened to /ss/, which is written with the letter m, in
a few Türkmen vvords («meK /issek/ 'two-year old sheep', su^eK /essek/ 'ass! (curse)').
(IPA ///, CyriJlic ra)

İJİ
The voiced dental-alveolar affricate /]/ is pronounced as English 'j' in 'juice' and occurs
at the beginning of and within, but not at the end of a word (jrçaiı /ja:y/ 'place', rHaüe
/gi:je/ 'night'). (IPA /dj/, Cyriliic »,)

Icl
The voiceless dental-alveolar affricate /c/ is pronounced as English 'ch' in 'chin' and
occurs in ali positions of a word («ıejı /£öl/ 'desert', kumu /ki£i/ 'small', rtiJTtiM
/gdıc/ 'svvord'). The variant [s] occurs before the consonants /d/, /s/ and /l/ (renflH
/gecdi/ [gesdi] 's/he passed', ryÖMCY3 /gii:c0ü6/ [gü:s0ü5] 'povverless', caqjibi / 6 aclı/
[0aslı] "having hair'; see the preceding). (IPA /y/, Cyriliic lı)

Ihl
The voiceless aspirate /h/ is pronounced as English 'h ' in 'heat' and occurs in ali
positions of a vvord (xep /her/ 'every', ıuaxep /sâher/ 'city', pyx /ru:h/ (also [ururh])
'spirit'). (IPA Ihl, Cyriliic x)

¥
The palatal semivowel /y/ is pronounced as English 'y ' in 'yes' and occurs in ali
positions of a word (iituı /yıl/ 'year', Goioh /boyun/ 'neck', att /a:y/ 'month'). (IPA
Ijl, Cyriliic tt, and in combination with vowels a, e, e, 10; see 76-77)

M
The bilabial semivovvel /w/ is pronounced as English 'w ' in 'win' and occurs in ali
positions of a word (B a rT /wagt/ 'time', x a B a /hawa/ 'yes', nanaB /palaw/ 'palaw (rice
dish)'). (IPA /w/, Cyriliic b)

Pronunciation o f Russian Consonants

The sound systems of Türkmen and Russian differ impoıtantly in their inventories of
basic sounds. The Russian consonants /z, s, z, c, î ’î ’, x, f, v/ are not in the phonemic
inventory of Standard Türkmen. Hovvever, many Türkmen, particularly those who were
raised or who live in the Ashgabat tegion, also have studied m Russian schools or at
 Phonology 41

higher educational establishments where they have leamed to speak Russian vvell. They
not only employ a substantial component of Russian vvords when speaking Tjrkmen,
but they also pronounce them to greater or lesser degrees according to the Russian
sound system. Even those who have little or no knovvledge of Russian may use
Russian words, often in an approximately "correct" pronunciation. In these senses, then,
the consonants /z, s, z, c, S’s’, x, f, v/ are part of their inventory of phonemes.
Turianen speakers may pronounce these Russian consonants as such, or th ey may
pronounce the closest equivalents in the Turkmen inventory of sounds, a phonetic
process called approximation. Due to the varying levels of knovvledge and appropriate
use of Russian, as well as to factors that arise firom sociai situadons, it is impossible
to establish rules for use of the consonants /z, s, i, c, î ’5 \ x, f, v/ even for the speech
of an individual Turkmen. However, the follovving remarks may serve as a guideline.

İzi
The voiced dental fricative /z/ is pronounced as English 'z' in 'zoo' in Russiaıı words
by some speakers (Mara3Hiı /magaSin/ 'store') and in Turkmen words in some : ialects
(for example, those of the Chârjew area). Generally, however, Türkmen pronounce the 3
of Russian vvords as /8/ (3anofl /8awut/ 'plant', r a 3 e T /gaSet/ 'nevvspaper'). (IPA /z/,
Cyrillic 3)

İsi
The voiceless dental fricative /s/ is pronounced as English V in 'sin' in Russian vvords
by some speakers (caıvıojıeT /samolot - flamolot/ 'airplane') and in Turkmen words in
some dialects (for example, those of the Chârjevv area). For the most part, Turkmen
pronounce the c of Russian vvords as /0/ even in consonant clusters (ctoji /u00ol/
'table', Kacca /ka60a/ 'cashier', KoncTiiTyuHH /kon0titu0iya/ 'constitution'). (IPA /s/,
Cyrillic c)

lil
The voiced alveolar fricative İzi is pronounced as English 's' in 'treasure' in Russian
vvords by some speakers (* y p n a jı /zumal/ 'journal'), although many Turkmen
pronounce dıis sound as /J/ (« y p n ajı /jurnal/ 'journal'). Even though the sound /z/
occurs in a very few Turkmen onomatopoeic or sound symbolic vvords (m ujkjkuk
/mızzık/ 'pulp'), it is not vievved as a disdnct phoneme in the Turkmen sound system.
(IPA İzi, Cyrillic jk)

İd
The voiceless dental affricate /c/ is pronounced as English 'ts ' in 'cats' in Rııssian
vvords by some speakers (uupK /cirk/ 'circus'). Generally, hovvever, Turkmen
approximate the affricate n as /0/ (qwpK /©irk/ 'circus', yeMCHT /Bement/ 'cerrıent').
(IPA /ts/, Cyrillic ı<)
42 Türkmen Reference Grammar

ls’s’1
The voiceless and palatalized alveolar fricative /s’s’/ is pronounced approximately as
English 'sh sh ' in 'dısh sbaped'. Thıs consonant occurs in Russian words or proper
names in the speech of some speakers (hihhk /yas’s’ik/ 'box', lHeHpHH /5 ’s’edrin/).
(IPA ISSI, Cyrillic m)

1x1
The voiceless velar fricative /x/ is pronounced as 'ch ' iıi English-German 'Bach' and
occurs in the pronunciation of Russian words by many speakers of Turkmen
(maxMaTt>ı /saxmatı/ 'chess'), as well as in some dialects of Turkmen. This consonant
is common because even some speakers of the Teke dialect pronounce /x/ instead of /h/
before consonants and at the end of some words (MaxMan /maxmal/ 'velvet', m m x
/mı:x/ 'spike'). (IPA /xl, Cyrillic x)

M
The voiced labiodental fricative /v/ is pronounced as English V ûı 'vine' in Russian
vvords by some speakers (BaroH /vagon/ 'wagon'). Most Turkmen, however, pronounce
b as /w/ (BaroH /wagun/ 'wagon', 3ason / 8awut/ 'plant'). (IPA /v/, Cyrillic letter b)

lîl
The voiceless labiodental fricative /f/ is pronounced as English T in 'fish' in Russian
words by some speakers (TenetJjoH /telefon/ 'telephoneO, as well as in some dialects of
Turkmen (for example, Yomut). Many Türkmen pronounce cj> in Russian words as İp/,
but pronunciation of this sound in Russian vvords varies both by speaker and by word;
for example, few speakers would substitute /p/ for /f/ in the words /film/ 'film'
or MarHHT0 (}j0 H /magnitofon/ 'tape-player', while most do substitute /p/ for Hl in
4>a6pHK /pabrik/ 'factory', TeJie<J)OH /telepon - telpun/ 'telephone', map4> /sarp/
'scarf', and other words. The sound /f/ also occurs in two Turkmen onomatopoeic
vvords (Yt}).neMeK /üflömök/ 'to blow' < 'to make the noise ycjı /üf/', and yd<}> /üwf/
'ooph!'), but is not viewed as a distinct phoneme in the Turkmen sound system. (IPA
HL Cyrillic 4>)
 Phonology 43

Syliabie Structure
Each Türkmen word is composed of one or more syllables whose structure may be
described according to their sequences of vowels (= V) and consonants (= C). A basic
distinction may be made between syllables which are "öpen," that is, end in a vowel,
and those which are "closed," that is, end in a consonant. The follovving types of
syllables exist in Türkmen words:

V a-flaM /a:-dam/ person, 3 -x;e /e-je/ mother

vc aT /at/ horse, hü-m ut /iy-mit/ food, yc-ca /u0-0o/ master
cv 6y /bu:/this, Ka-Ka /ka:-ka/ father, cyM-apt /0ü:-jü/ sweet
cvc re3 /gö8/ eye, rtıc-ra /gı:0-ga/ short, MeK-^en /mek-dep/
school
vcc YHc /ünO/ attention, aJiT-MHiu /alt-mıs/ sixty, aÜT-MaK
/ayt-mak/ to teli
cvcc flepT /dö:rt/ four, Barr /wagt/ time, cohk / 0ör)k/ bone

Türkmen syliabie structure does not permit words to begin with two consonants.
Therefore, a vowel (usually /j/ or /i/, but also /uf) is inserted before or between
consonants in Russian borrowings that begin with two consonants (prothesis), or
occasionally, a consonant and a vowel change places (meıathesis). An inserted vovvel is
not represented in writmg, whereas a few cases of metathesis have become Standard
forms (for example, Typöa /türbo/ < Tpyfia /truba/ 'pipe')-

Russian Written Türkmen Spoken Türkmen

mıaH /plan/ plan iman /pılan/

MneH /elen/ member MIKH /çilen/
Knacc /klass/ chair Knac /kıla©/
KpoBaTt /krovat! bed KpOBST /kırawat/
cTyn /stul/ chair cıyn /u 00ul/
ctoji /stol/ table CTOJI /u 00ol/
44 Turkmen Reference Granunar

Stress
Stress is the pronunciation of one syllable of a word with greater force or energy than
the other syllable or syllables of a word. The strength of this stress may vary according
to intonation or to the quickness of speech.
Pronounced in isolation, the Turkmen vvord receives stress on the last syllable. If a
vvord consists of one-syllable, then no additional emphasis is placed on its
pronunciation. When suffîxes are added to a vvord, the stress falls on the last syllable .5
Exceptjpns to this rule of stress include some originally non-Turkmen words and a
few suffbces or particles which are not stressed. When a word consists of three or more
syllables, a secondary or expiratory stress is placed on the fîrst syllable, but as a rule
the short vowels of closed fîrst syllables are so reduced in length that this stress may
not be perceived. In the examples below, primary stress is indicated by the sign^ ahove
the affected syllable, and secondary stress by the sign' above the syllable.

yo u CH3 /0i5/
fro m yo u CH3fleH | /0iS8en/
clo u d ö y jıy T /bulut/
clo u d y S yn yT Jiu /bulutlı/

Street n en e /köcö/
streets Keuenep /k ocölör/
its streets KeuenepM /köcölöriî/
on its streets KeuçnepHHfle /köcölörünnö/

teli! aifr! /ayt!/

to te li aiİTMaK /aytm ak/
h e ’ 11 te li aflflap /aydâr/
see! rep! /gör!/
to se e repM eK /görm ök/
th ey s a w rep n y n ep /gördü lör/

Compound words consisting of grammatical constructions (see 506-507) receive

stress on the last syllable of the second component, vvhich is the regular placement. A
secondary stress usually falls on the first or second syllable of the first component of
compounds of three or more syllables.

old man auryntı /yâ:sulî/

east tynaorap /günnogor/
hospitable MtKMaHceep /mı:hn)â:n8öyör/

5 Upon initial exposure to spoken Türkmen, one may perceive ıhe daraiion of a long vowel in a root as
a kind o f scress, but ıhis is a natural emphasis rathcr ıhan stress (for example, ot }o:xj 'fire', but otjiu
/o :üî/ 'tıain').
 Phonology 45

Word combinations that are paired vvords receive stress on the last syllable of each
component.

night and day ru se-rp m ıe /gi:je-günnü:S/

big and small yntı-KMMH /ulı-kicı/
parents aTa-3He /ata-ene/

Set expressions show two pattems of stress. Those that consist of tvvo ur three
syilables receive stress on dıe first syllable, vvhereas combinations of more than three
syilables receive stress on the second syllable of the first component.

snow-white aıı-aK /ap-a:k/

no one xım kum /hı:c kim/
in no way xaitcu /hı:c hayöı/
to spend xapu otmck /hare etmek/
to supply yms,yn snıeK /üpjün etmek/
therefore wona repa /soıjo görâ:/

A number of suffixes and particles do not receive stress, so that the word str:ss falls
on the syllable before them. One group of these consists of the forms of the second
person imperative mood, vvhich emphasize command and request by stressing the root
of the verb. They inelude the suffixes of the 2 fonnal/plural imperative ( i,ih/hh
/-ırj/iıj/), the insistent imperative (-ruH İnm /-gm/gin/), the polite imperative (-c a n a /
ceHe /-0âna/0ene/) and the negation partide (-Ma/Me /-ma/me/).

please take it aman /â lırj/

please work Mimrarç /l:slâ:g/

you gotta take it ann.m /algın/

you gotta vvork MiıraerHH /i:slegin/

vvould you take it ancaHa /alOana/

would you vvork umneceHe /i;sle8ene/

don’t take it! ajaıa /alma/

don’t vvork! m inene /i:sleme/

don’t take it (plural) aswıan /âlma:i]/

don’t work (plural) mımsMsu /i:slemâ:q/
46 Türkmen Reference Grammar

The singular and plural personal endings that are added to the present indefînite
(-sp/ftap /-ya:r/ya:r/), the futııre indefinite (-ap/ep /-ar/erf), the subjective past
indefinite (-ungtıp/nnnMp /-ıpdır/ipdir/) and other tense suffixes do not receive stress.

Itake anapLiH /alyâ:nn/

you take ajwpciiH /alyâ:r8u)/
we take aımpuc /alyâ:n0/
you take ajıapcunti3 /alyâ:r0ırjı8/

Fil work HllDKpHH /ı:slâ:rin/

you'11 work HiımspcHH /i:slâ:r8it]/
we’ll work munspMc /i:slS:ri0/
you’U vvork mımspcHiflD /i:slâ:r6ii]i8/

A variety of particles never receive stress, including the quesrion partide (- m u / mm

/-mı/mi/), along with the particles of confirmation (-flup/aHp /-dır/dir/), assertion
(-MumİMMm /-mis/mis/), speculation (-MtiKa/MHKa /-mıka:/mikâ:/), emphasıs (-«a/fla
/-da:/dâ:/), and connection (xeM/-aM/eM /hem/-am/em/>. Other particles which do not
receive stress include -a/a /-a:/a:/, -xa/xa /-ha:/hâ:/, -Ka/ıca /-ka:/kâ:/, -fla/fle /-da/de/
and -jıa/ne /-la/le/.

Did she work? UumeamiM? /İrsledimi?/

Is he at home? Oji ettfleMH? /Ol öydomii?/

He is a teacher. On MyraJuıtiMfltıp. /Ol mugollıîmdur./

She must be busy. On mımHflitp. /Ol i:slidir./

Then I’ll take it. MeH anapMH-fla. /Men alânn-na:/

Then you’U work? CeH rauneaçeK-flo? /0en î:slejek-dâ:?/

Fil take it, too. MeHeM antapbin. /Menem alânn./

Bahar also vvorked. Eaxap xeM HiuneflH. /Bahar hem ırSIedı./

They say he’s vvorking. MııiJiefispMHUt. /î:sleyâ:rmis./

Stress is placed on the first syliabie of some Persian ■Arabic structure words and of
some interrogative pronouns of two syllables.

now X33Mp /hâ:5ir/

ali xeMMe /hemme/
likely MerepeM /meğerem/
where? HMpe? /ntre?/
how many? ııaqe? /nâ:ce?/
 MORPHOPHONOLOGY

Certain sounds of a Türkmen vvord ehange when its structure changes due to the
addition of lexical or grammatical suffixes. Typically, the last vowel and/or consonant
of the word and the first consonant and/or vowel of the suffix undergo these changes.
Becaııse such changes affect the phonemes (basic sounds) of the morphemes (stems and
suffixes) when these are combined, they belong to a distinct category of description,
that of morphophonology or morphophonemics.
In Turkmen, most morphophonemic changes take the form of assimilations. An
assimilation occurs vvhen phonemes of stems and sııffixes become more similar or
identical to one another, particularly at the juncture vvhere they meet. Some of these
changes are reflected in the Türkmen writing system and some are not. In this seetion,
morphophonemic rules are presented for the changes which Turkmen vowels and
consonants undergo. The spelling rules which do or do not represent these changes are
treated under Orthography (see 79-85).

Vcmel Harmony
One of the most distinctive features of the Turkmen sound system is vowel harmony.
According to this process, vowels of words are pronounced in a way that makes ehem
more similar to one another and thus in "harmony" with one another. Only a paıt of
such pronunciations are reflected in the Turkmen writing system.
Vowei harmony operates accorâmg to oppositions between vovvels, that is, to
contrasts in their place and manner of pronunciation. As pointed out above, Türkmen
vovvels may be classifıed according to vvhether they are pronounced in the front or in
th e back ("non-front") of the mouth, with the tongue high or low ("non-high") in the
mouth, or with rounded or unrounded ("non-rounded") lips. These oppositions are
represented in the foüovving chart, İt should be noted that the vovvels a ja:/ and e JeJ,
although distinct in pronunciation (the tongue is positioned lower and farther back in
the mouth in pronouncing a /a.:/ than in pronouncing e /e/, and the first voweI nearly
alvvays is long in opposition to the second short vovvel), have the same features from
among the oppositions that gövem vovvel harmony. Characterizations of the vovvels
according to these oppositions are provided in the chart (see 48).
48 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Characterization of Vowels According to Oppositions

Vovvels Front Back High Lovv Rounded Unrounded

a /a-a:/ a /a-a:/ . a /a-a:/ a /a-a:/

m h-v.l h /ı-ı:/ h /ı-ı:/ m /ı-ı:/

a /â:/ s /â :/ a /â:/ a/â:/

e/e/ e/e/ e/e/ e/e/

h /i-i:/ M/i-i:/ M /i-i:/ M/İ-i:/

o /o-o:/ o /o-o:/ o /o-o:/ o /o-o:/

o /ö-ö:/ e /ö-ö:/ e /ö -ö :/ e /ö-ö:/

y /u-u:/ y /u-u:/ y /u-u:/ y /u-u:/

Y/ü/ Y/ü/ Y/ü/ Y/ü/

Y« / 1i:/ yM/ü:/ Y» /ü:/ Yö /ü:/

Fronı-Back Harmony
Turkmen vvords typically contam vovvels belonging to one set (= one of the columns
above) or combination of sets of vovvels. The basic type of vovvel hannony that is
found in nearly ali Turkmen vvords may be called "front-back hannony," because these
vvords have vovvels that belong either to the set of front vovvels or to the set of back
vovvels.
Grammarians also refer to front-back vovvel hannony as "palatal hannony" or
"palatal-velar harmony" because front vovvels are articulated at the hard palate in the
front or "roof' of the mouth, vvhile back vovvels are articulated at the soft palate or
velum in the back of the mouth.
 Morphophonology 49

Front Vovvels Back Vovvels

a, e ,m, e , Y, yH a, bi, o, y
/a:, e, i—i:, ö-ö:, ii, ü:/ /a-a:, ı-ı:, o-o:, u-u:/

sneM /a:lem/universe, world raByH /ga:wun/ melon

ryH3 /güna:/ fault, sin C L irtıp /Sığır/ cow
ceMM3 /0emi6/ fat OKaMaK /okomok/ to read
mine / i q ı p / needle oioh /oyun/ game
Kene /köcö/ Street yjifci /uh/ big
r y ü m m /gü:£lü/ powerful, strong 6ynyT /bulut/ cloud

M eH 3»;eM e rYJinepH öepflHM. Oji OHyn KaKacbiıman copaflbi.

/Men ejeme güllörü berdim./ /Ol onurj ka:ka8ınnan 6 o:rodı./
I gave the flovvers to my mother. She asked her father.

Rounded-Unrounded Harmony
Many Türkmen vvords also observe "rounded-unrounded harmony," which is based on
the pronunciation of ali or some of the vowels in Turkmen words with or v/ithout
rounding of the mouth.
This type of vovvel harmony also is referred to as "labial harmony" becıuse it
involves changing the manner of pronunciation by rounding the lips or labiae.

Rounded Vovvels Unrounded Vovvels

o, y, e, y, yS a , a, e, bi, m
/o, o:, u, u:, ö, ö:, ü, ü:/ /a, a:, a:, e, ı, ı:, i, i:/

Tonap Aopor/ group canKMH /öalkın/ cool

6ypyn /burun/ nose Kace /kâ:0e/ teacup
KeHe /kö:nö/ oid repeK /gerek/ necessary
Y3yM /iiSüm/ grapes TMpe /ti:re/ tribe

OHyn ro3yHM ropsYM. CeH MaÖHeK caTMH anapcbiHMU?

/Onurj göSünü gördüm./ / 0en câ:ynek öatuı alaröıgmı?/
I saw her eyes. Will you buy a teapot?

Vovvel Harmony Rules

Vovvel harmony is govemed by two rules which, with the exceptions noted bel o w for
long vovvels in non-root syllables, apply to ali syllables of a vvord, including the
syllable(s) of its suffix(es). The first rule holds that if the first syllable of ;i vvord
contains a back vovvel, then ali subsequent syllables contain back vowels, or if the first
50 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

syllable of a vvord contains a front vowel, then ali subsequent syilables contain front
vovvels. The second rule holds that if the first syllable of a vvord contains a rounded
back or front vovvel, then ali subsequent syilables contain rounded back or front vovvels
("rounding rule").

horse aT /at/
on the horse axna /atda/
horses auıap /atlar/
your horses aTnapHHM3 /atlanrjıS/
on your horses aTnaptn<M3Ba /atlanrjıSSa/
request flaner /dileg/
in the request »tireme /dilegde/
requests flHJiemep /dilegler/
your requests HHneraepMHM3 /diIeglerirjiS/
in your requests flHnernepHHrafle /dileglerigiSSe/

house eM löyl
in the house ettfle /öydö/
houses eönep /öylör/
yourhouses ı eönepmtro /öylörür|ü5/
in your houses etaepmpoae /öylöriirjü55ö/
ear lyiBK /gulok/
in the ear zynaıcaa /gulokdo/
ears rynaıaıap /guloklor/
your ears lyjıaKuaptffiiBo /guloklorurju5/
in your ears rynaKnapunnsna /gulokloruıjuSSo/

Exceptions to the rounding rule of vovvel harmony involve the long vovvels a /a:/
and a /a:/, the vovvels u /ı-ı:/ and h /i-i:/, and borrowed vvords and suffixes. The
rounding rule does not apply to the long vovvels a /a:/ or a /a:/ or to vowels in
syilables follovving a syllable containing the long vovvels a /a:/ or a /a:/.

Türkmenistan TYpKMeımcTaH /Türkmönü00a:n/

Turkmenistan’s TYPKMeHHcraHMH /Tiirkmönü00a:nıq/
hereads oıcaap /okoya:r/
they read OKaapnap /okoya:rlar/
she had not finished ryTapMaımu /gutonna:nnı/
they had not finished ryrapMaHjjttnap /gutormatnnılar/
he laughs rynttap /gillyâ:r/
they laugh rynifspnep /gülya:rler/
vvhich is producing emiYpösH /ö:nnüryâ:n/
vvhich are producing GHflYpİtsHnep /ö:nnüryâ:nler/
 Morphophonology 51

Teke speakers of Standard Türkmen apply the nıle of rounded-unrounded harmony

differeatly to the vowels ti /ı-ı:/ and h /i—i:/. Generally, they apply Öle rounding rnle
consistently to the short vowels h /i—i:/ in ali syllables, whether open or closed, and to
the short vowel ti /ı/ in closed syllables.

neck 6 ohjh /boyun/

on her neck 5oıonbnma /boyununno/
ear lynaK /gulok/
in his ear ryjıariMfla /gulogunno/
big yjıtr /ulı/
size, bigness ynyjttK /ululuk/

section 6 en yM /bö:lüm/
in her section öenyMMHHe /b5:lümtinnö/
heaıt ttypeK /yürök/
in his heart ÜYperaHHe /yürögünnö/
sweet cyflaçH /0 ü:jü/
sweetness cyta^ynHK / 0ü:jülük/

for yuMH /ücü:n/

whole 6yTHH /bütii:n/
possible MYMKMH /mümkürn/
in the day ryHHH /günü:n/

corpse e jm /ölü/
pocket yçfîM /jübü/
various flYpJDf /dürlü/
her face 0Y3H /yü5ü/
hesaw repflH /gördü/

However, speakers of the Teke dialect generally do not apply the rounding rule to
the long vowel M /ı:/ in closed syllables or to the short vowel bi /ı/ in final, open
syllables.

lo n g . y3bIH {uhv.nl
c a p ab ility yK trn /ukı:p/
upw ard e ra p tK /yo k o n rk/

go o d roBM /gow ı/
b ig ym ı /u hl
train OTUM /o:tlı/
h is arm ronbi /golı/
sh e re a d OKaflM a /o k o d ı /
52 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Vowel Harmony in Borrowed Words

Turkmen has borrowed numerous words from Persian, Arabic and Russian, which are
languages without vowel harmony. The majority of the Persian-Aıabic borrovvings have
been assimilated into the Turkmen sound structure, so that they conform to the back-
front rule of vowel harmony. Few Russian words have been assimilated, although they
may happen to conform by their original structure. Nonetheless, the front-back rule of
vovvel harmony operates with the addition of suf&tes even to unassimilated borrowings
that contain both back and front vowels. In these words, if the last syllable contains a
back vowel, then back vowels follow in suffixes. Conversely, front vovvels follow a
front vowel of the last syllable.

our literatüre 3fle6HflTEIMİI3 /edebiya:tımıS/

our society x;eMruernMM3 /jemgıyetimiS/
in the building of ömıacHHua /bina:0 mna/
nevvspapers ra 3 em ep /gaSetler/
from the store MaraarameH /magaSinnen/
its director flMpeKTOpLZ /direkton/

In addition, vowels of syllables following a rounded vowel (o /o-o:/, o /ö-ö:/, y

/u-u:/, y /ü-ü:/) are rounded in Persian-Arabic vvords.

beautiful OBaflaH /owodon/

wish, desire xeB ec /höwö8/
in the period of M exnem H fle /möhlötünnö/
old K&üe /kö:nö/
opportunity n ypcaT /pur0ot/
traditions fleccypnap /de00u:rlor/
in the law of KaHynBinna /ka:nu:nunno/
joyless p y x cy 3 /ru:h0u5/
thankful myKYpnM /sükürlü/
directorship MyflHpJIHK /müdii:rliik/

Due to the several vaıiables that operate in the Russian component of Türkmen (see
40-42), even one and the same speaker may vary in the application of the rounding rule
to Russian vvords and the addition of suffûces to them. Some Russian borrowings have
been fully assimilated into Turkmen and are treated as Türkmen vvords (for example,
n o T p a T /potrot/ < noflpaa 'contract', Typöa /türbo/ < T pyfia '(water) pipe').
Generally, those vvords in broadest use for everyday purposes and for the longest period
have tended to conform more fully to the Türkmen sound system, and even very
Russianized speakers apply the rounding rule to them.
 Morphophouology 53

tons TOHHanap Aonnolor/

moyies KHHOJiap /kinolor/
days off oTflux ryHnepH /otduh günlörü/
at the plant of aaEOAtiHfla / 6awudunno/
at the farm of Konxo3UHfla /kolhoSunno/

Speakers vary firom situation to situation in their treatment of Russian wcırds that
typically appear in joumalistic or technical literatüre, or that have to do witb tlı; social
and political structure.

in the structure of cocraBMHHa /öo8tawjnna - 0 o8tow unno/

in the sector of ceK T opu nn a /0ektonnna - Oektorunno/
constitution KOHcnnyıytfl /kon0titu0iya ~ kon0tinı0uyo/

Vovvel Harmony in Suffvces

With the exception of sufSxes that contain the long vowels a/s /a:/â:/ or u /h /:./i:/, ali
Türkmen suffixes potentially have four variants according to their vowel(s), defending
on whether they are added to words with front or with back vowels, or to vvords vvith
rounded or vvith unrounded vovvels.
One group of suffixes vvith four variants consists of those whose only or first
vowels are the mid vovvels a/e /a-o/e-ö/.

Plural +nap/nep /+lar-lor/ler-lör/

Dative case +a/e /+a-o/e-ö/
Locative case +fla/fle /+da-do/de-dö/
Ablative case +flaH/flen /+dan-don/den-dön/
Equative suffix /+ca-co/£e-cö/
Companion suffix +flam/flexu /+das-dos/des-dös/
Verb-forming suffix +na/ne- /+la-lo-/le-lö-/
Adverb-forming suffix +apw/epH /+an-orı/eri-örii/
Defmite future /-jak-jok/Jek-]ök/
1 singular imperative -aîtbm/eiİMH /-ayın-oyun/eyin-öyün/
1 dual imperative -amı/ejiH /-alı-olı/eli-ölü/
1 plural imperative -anHu/erom /-alı:rj—olı: rj/eli: rj—ölü: g/
3 conditional -ca/ce /- 0a- 0o/0e - 0ö/
3 subjunctive -caflfcl/eeflH /- 0adı- 0odı/0edi- 0 ödü/
Suffix of obligation -Manu/MenM /-maü-moü/meli-mölü/
Verbal noun -ac/ec /-a0-o 0/e0 -ö 0/
Past participle -a«/eH /- an-on/en-ön/
54 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

A second group of suffixes with four variants consists of those whose only or first
vowels are the high vovvels u lu /ı-u/i-ü/.

Genitive case +mh/hh /+ırj-io/uıj-üi)/

1 singular possessive +mm/ hm /+ım-um/im-üm/
2 singular possessive + ım /m /+ııj-urj/ii)-üj]/
Ordinal numeral +biHa;tı/MH»;n /+mjı-unjı/in]i- 1injü/
Association suffxx +IJMK/J1MK /+Iık-luk/Iik-lii k/
Privation suffix +CM3/CH3 /+8ı5-eu8/ei5-0ü8/
Passive voice -ttn/raı- /-ıl-ul/il-ül-/
Reflexive voice -bm/m- /-ın-un/in-ün-/
Cooperative voice -bw/wm- /-ıs —us/is —ü5-/
Causative voice -m p /m p - /-dır-dur/dir-dür-/
Verbal noun -huu/um /-ıs-us/is-iis/
Gerund -hm/mı /-ıp-up/ip-üp/
2 plural imperative -uıt/m, /-ırj-urj/irj-tiıj/
3 singular imperative -CbIH/CHH /-0ın- 0un/0 in- 0 iin/
3 plural imperative -cbmnap/cMHnep /-0 mlar- 0unlor/0inler-0ünIör/

Because of the rule that the vovvel ti /ı/ is not rounded in open final syilables, the
following suffixes have only three variants.

Accusative case +hl/lf l+l/i-ü/

3 possessive +h / h /+I/İ-Ü/
Agent suffix + hm/*ih /+cı/ci-cü/
Attribute suffbc +ntı/nM /+ h/li-lü/
Relation suffbc +kh /kh /+kı/ki-kü/
3 past indefînite -m /m /-dı/di-dü/

Several suffixes that contain the long vovvel w /»:/, vvhich is never rounded, exist in
only three variants.

Directive suffix +hk/hk /+ı:k/i:k-ü:k /

Instrumental suffıx +mh/hh /+ı:n/i:n-ü:n/

Those suffixes vvhose first or only vovvel is one of the long vovvels a/a /a:/â:/,
vvhich are never rounded, have only tvvo variants.
 Morphophonology 55

Relation suffix +flaKtl/fl3KH /+da:kı/dâ:ki/

Comparative suffuc +pax/p3K /+ra:fc/ra:k/
Approximation numeral +nan/n3it /+la:p/lâ:p/
Approximation numeral +naıı/ji3iı /+la:n/la:n/
3 present indefînite -ap/ifsp /-ya:r/yâ:r/
3 desiderative -asHH/seflîi /-a:yadı/a:yedi/
Suffîx of permission -aft/sft /-a:y/a:y/
Infînitive in dative case -Mara/Msre /-ma:ga/ma:ge/
Present participle -sth/Msh /-ya:n/ya:n/
Negation partide /-ma:n/mâ:n/

Only a very few suffixes do not observe these rules of vovvel harmony, including
one or both vovvels of the negative present perfect (-aH O K /eH O K /-ano:k/eno:k/) and
noun-forming (-yBİ\B /-uw/iiw/, +}rçara3 /+jaga5j) suffîxes, and of various Persian
derivational suffîxes (+ı>ıcTan/ncTaH/YcTaH /+ı00a:n-i08a:n/ü00a:n/, -Ban /-wac/,
+aap /+da:r/, ete.).
56 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Vowel Lengthening

Secondary long vowels (see 33) arise under several conditions. First, if a suffix
beginning with a vowel is added to a word ending in a vowel, then the two vowels
fuse into a long vovvel, Second, loss of a consonant between two identical vowels
produces a long vowel. Hıird, the vovvel of a last syliabie becomes long upon the
addition of several case and family name suffixes. With the exception of the vowel a
/a:/, which nearly always represents a long vovvel, the length of these secondary long
vowels is not indicated in the spelling of Türkmen words.

Fusion ofTvvo Vovvels

Addition of the first and second person possessive suffixes (+hm(li3)/hm(h3) /+ım(ı8)/
im(i8)/, + u h (u 3)/mh(h3) /+ıi](ıS)/ii)(iS)/) in singular or plural to a vvord ending in a
vowel lengthens that vowel.

raim my door rantiM /gapı:m/

door our door ranMMH3 /gapı:mıS/
your door rantın /gapı:r)/
your door (plural) raımiHbB /gapı:qı8/

Kene my Street K0H3M /köcâ:m/

Street our Street Keq3M113 /köcâ:mi8/
your Street K0H3Iİ /köcâ:rj/
your Street (plural) K0M3HH3 /köcâ:i]i5/

For unclear reasons, this process does not occur vvith the addition of possessive
suffixes to most of the basic kinship terms: aııe /ene/ 'grandmother (father’s line)', aTa
/ata/ 'grandfather (father’s line)', MaMa /ma:ma/ 'grandmother (modıer’s line)', 6 a 6 a
/ba:ba/ 'grandfather (mother’s line)', 3W,e /eje/ 'mother', Kaıta /ka:ka/ 'father', naÜ3a
/daySa/ 'aunt (mother’s line)', naübi /da:yı/ 'uncle (mother’s line)', ara /a:ga/ 'older
brother' and eune /yegge/ 'wife of older brotlıer'.

3»;e my mother 33K,eM /ejem/

mother our mother a*;eMM3 /ejemiS/
your mother 3X.cn /ejeıj/
your mother (plural) 3JK,eHH3 /ejeıjiS/

KaKa my father KaKaM /ka:kam/

' father our fadıer KaKaMbB /ka:kamı8/
your father KaKan /ka:katj/
yoar father (plural) KaKanti3 /ka:kaıgıS/
 Morphophonology 57

Addition o f the fîrst and second person possessive suffixes to the verbal nc un suffix
(-Ma/Me /-ma/me/) also lengthens its vovvel.

S3Ma my vvriting SBMaM /ya 5ma:nı/

vvriting our vvriting SI3MaMbI3 /ya 8ma:mı8/
your vvriting H3Man /ya 8ma:ıj/
your vvriting (plural) «3MaHbI3 /yaSmaırjıS/

renMe my coming rejiM3M /gelma:m/

coming our coming reJiMSMjo /gelmâ:mi8/
your coming renMSH /gelma:ı]/
your coming (plural) rejiM3HM3 /gelmâ:rji5/

Addition o f the future indefînite tense (-ap /ep /-ar/er/), past participle (-aH/eH
/-an/en/), imperative mood (-aföbm/eiiHH /-ayuı/eyin/, -ajibi(n)/e.nM (n) /-alı(;g>/eli(:rj)/.
-mh / hh /-ır/it]/), gerund (-tın/ıın /-ıp/ip/) and other suffixes to a verb stem ending in a
vovvel results in a long vovvel.

snuaMaK s/he wili live souap /ya:sa:r/

to live vvho üved anıaH /ya:sa:n/
let me live amaitbLH /ya:5a:ym/
let us live »mantın /ya:sa:lı:i)/
live! (plural) sunan /ya:sa:i)/
living aman /ya:sa:p/

HiuneMeK s/he vvill vvork Muuıap /i:sla:r/

to vvork vvho worked HUIH3H /i:sla:n/
let me vvork MUinSÜHH /i:slâ:yin/
let us vvork HU1J13JIHH /i:sla:li:i)/
vvork! (plural) HUUI3H /i:sia:rj/
vvorking Huınsn /i:slâ:p/

Lı addition, the vovvels o f the suffixes + u k / h k /+ı:k/i:k/, + m h /h h /+ı:n/i:n/,

+naKu/p(3KM /+da:kı/dâ:ki/, +paif/paK /+ra:k/râ:k/, -ap/ftap /-ya:r/ya:r/, -ancii/eHOK
/-ano:k/eno:k/, -aJlun/ejiM H /-alı:i)/eli:r)/, -aü /aii /-a:y/â:y/, -aaflbr/aeflH /-a:yadı/
â:yedi/, -Hn/üaH /-ya:n/yâ:n/, + Jia n /n a n /+la:p/lâ:p/, +naH /naH /+la:n/lâ-.!t/, and
various particles, have inherent length vvhether they are added to a vvord end üıg in a
consonant or to one ending in a vovvel (see 35, 54). W hen added to a stem ending in a
vovvel, the initial vovvel o f the suffbces + l i k / h k /+ı:k/i:k/, + u h /m h /+ı:n/i:n/,
-anoK/enoK /-ano:k/eno:k/, -ajıtın/ejiH H /-alı:r)/eli:rj/, -afi/aft /-a:y/â:y/ and -aaflbi/
aejııı /-a:yadı/â:yedi/ may be said to replace that final vowel.
58 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Fusion ofTw o Vowels with Loss o f Consonant

Addition of the future indefmite suffix -ap/ep /-ar/er/ to a verb ending in n /!/ or p /r/
results in the loss of the ji /!/ or p /r/, leaving two vowels which fuse into a long
vowel. This long vovvel is not represented in writing. Each of the verbs in the tables
below may exist both in a foraı of the future indefmite with -ap/ep /-ar/er/ and in a
contracted form of the present continuous tense (see 225-228). At a stage intermediate
between the tvvo forms, the consonant drops and the resulting pair of vovvels fuses into
a long vovvel. The contracted present continuous tense forms of oTypMaK /oturmok/
and HTM3 K /yatmak/ are produced by adding the no longer produetive future indefinite
variant *-ır/ir to the root (thus OTbip /otı:r/ < *otur-ır, STbip /yatr.r/ < *yat-ır).
Hovvever, it is unclear why the long vovvel in H T bip /yatt:r/ developed from a form
(*yatır) in vvhich no contraction took place.

Verb Future Indefmite Present Continuous

auMaK /almak/ ajıap /alar/ ap /a:r/ < *a(l)ar
to take he’ll take he’s taking
SepMeK /bennek/ 6 epep /berer/ 6ep /be:r/ < *be(r)er
to give she’ll give she’s giving
SoJiMaK /bolmok/ öojıap /bolor/ 6op /bo:r/ < *bo(l)ar
to become it vvill be it’s being
r e ıiM e K /gelmek/ renep /geler/ rep /ge:r/ < *ge(ljer
to come he’ll come he’s coming
ıyrapMaK /gutormok/ lyrapap /gutoror/ ryrap /guta:r/ < *guta(r)ar
to fmısh he’ll finish he’s fînishing
flypMaK /durmok/ flypap /duror/ flyp /du:r/ < *du(r)ar
to stand she’ll stand she’s standing
MepMeK /yörmök/ itepep /yörör/ flep /yö:r/ < *yö(r)er
to vvalk he’ll vvalk he’s vvalking
OTypMaK /oturmok/ OTypap /oturor/ on»ıp /otı:r/ < *otu(r)ır
to sit he’ll sit he’s sitting
utncapMaK /çıkarmak/ rçbncapap /cıkarar/ Mtncap /cıka:r/ < *cika(r)ar
to take out she’ll take out she’s taking out
HTMaK /yatmak/ srrap /yatar/ jrrbip /yatı:r/ < *yatır
to lie dovvn she’ll lie dovvn she’s lying down

A few combinations of vvords nearly always are pronounced vvith a long vovvel that
results from contraction: 6 y ryn /bu:n/ 'today', my ryH /su:n/ 'today', and CHpHryn
/birü:n/ 'day after tomorrow'.
 Morphophonology 59

Vovvel Lengthening with Case Suffixes

Addition o f the genitive (+lih/hh /-j-ııj/iq/), accusative (+m/m /+ıfıf) and dative (+a/e
/+a/e/) case suffîxes to a word ending in a vowel lengthens that vowel. This process
also applies to those kinship terms which escape vowel lengthening vvith the addition
of possessive suffıxes (see 56). As noted elsevvhere, the shortened genitive case variant
+H /+i]/) is preferred in spoken Türkmen after a word ending in a vovvel ( ra n tın
/gapr.i}/, komsh /kö£a:ıj/, 3 JK.3H /ejâ:rj/, KaKaıj /ka:ka:i]/, and so on; see 1 2 1 ).

raıiLi Genitive ranMHBn* /gapımıt)/

door Accusative ranLiHLi /gapımı/
Dative rana /gapa:/
Kene Genitive K em m m /köcâ:niıj/
Street Accusative K6M3HK /köca:ni/
Dative /köcâ:/
33«;e Genitive 3^3100* /ejâ:nii)/
mother Accusative /eja:ni/
Dative 37KŞ /eja;/

Kana Genitive KZKamm /ka:ka:nır|/

father Accusative KaKfflhl /ka:ka:nı/
Dative KaKa /ka:ka:/

Addition of these case suffbces to the verbal noıın in -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ lengthens its
final vovvel.
H3Ma the vvriting’s H3Main.ru /ya8ma:nııj/
vvriting the vvriting 83MaHH /ya5ma:nı/
to the vvriting A3Ma /ya8ma:/
rejiMe the coming’s renMaHHH /gelmaınir)/
coming the coming renMaiffl /gelma:ni/
to the coming reımıa /gelmâ:/

Vowel Lengthening with Family Name Suffixes

Addition of the Russian family name suffixes +O B a/eB a /+owa/ewa/ (vvomen) and
+oB/ea /+ow/ew/ (men) results in the lengthening of the vovvel in the last syliabie of a
name.
MaMMer /Mâ:mmet/ MsMMeflOBa /Mâ:me:dowa/
Fenan/Gelli/ FemneBa /Gelli:yewa/
Pex;en /Rejep/ Pex;e6 oB /Reje:bow/
'lap tı /Cam/ ^aptıeB /Ca:n:yew/
60 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

VoweI Loss
In combination with certain consonants the high vowels u / m JıJi/ and y/y /u/ü/ (never
the mid vowels a/e /a/e/) of a second elosed syllable of a word may be dropped when a
suffbc consisting of or beginning with a vowel is added. This loss of a vowel also may
occur in the third syllable vvith the addition of the verbal noun suffbc -liiu/hui /-ıs/is/
to a verb stem (see 335). One way to deseribe this loss is that it occurs when the vovvel
in the vvord is preceded by one of the sonorants 6 /b/ [v], r /g/ [y], m /m/, H /rj/, p /r/,
B /w/ or H İyi, and occasionally by h /n/ and sı /l/.1

c+ v+ c Word + Suffix Vowel Lost

6 /b/[v] raötıp+tt /gabır+ı/ ra 6p n /gabn/his grave

r /g /M arH 3+ tiM /agı5+ım/ a ra u M /agSım/ my mouth

o ryn + H M/ogul+mı/ onıyM /oğlum/ my son
CUTBIP+HMH3 /0ıgır+ımıS/ CBirpBiM tB /0ıgnmı5/ our covv
srac-ep /egiö-er/ 3rcep /eg0 er/ it vvill diminish
m /m / raMtiaı+H /gamıs+ı/ raMiUH /gam sı/ its reeds
TOMyc+bi+Haa TOM cyıma AomSunno/
/tomu0 +ı+nda/ in its summer
KeMyp+H+HneH KeM pyHflen /kömrünnön/
/kömür+i+nden/ from its co a l

H/ıj/ ManM3+tı /marjı8+ı/ M3H3I.I /marjSı/ its kemel

ennn-ep /yerjil-er/ eHJiep /yerjler/ he’ll be defeated
P /r/ 6ypyH +B m /burun+ıi]/ öypHyn /bumur)/ your nose
repYH-Mn /görün-ip/ repHyn /gömüp/ appearing

1 The official formulaıion of ıhe vovvel loss rule was ıhe following: ~Wiıh ıhe addition of a suffix
beginning with a vovvel 10 stems of two-syllable vvords ending in 3 /5/, ji (il, H Mi, p A/, c /0/, uı /s/, and
vvith a high vovvel which is pronounced short and whose first syllable is open, the high vowel of the
last syllable drops out, if the preceding consonant is voiced" (Pe 30Aw ifiuı 1956: 6 , ^apuapoB 1973:
208). Azımov deseribed the vovvel loss rule more succinctly: ~If a suffbc beginning vvith a vowel is
added to two-syllable stems consisting o f a first open syllable vvith a short vovvel and a second elosed
syllahle wiüı a high vowel and final a /8 /, j i fil, h /tı/, p /r/, c / 0/, ın /s/, then the high vovvel of the second
syllable drops out' (A 3 u m o b 1966: 95). Hovvever, examples cited farther on for the retention of
vowels contradict both fonnulations, although the official version is very elose. The "Academy'
preseripdon held that a vowel is îost if it appeaıs ( t ) betv/een sonorants (M /m/, m /n/, *1 /tj/, ji /I/, p /r/, ti
/y/), (2) betvveen fricatives (c / 8/t 3 /§/, m fsl and also the fticative allophones [v] of 6 /b/ and b /w/, [7 ]
o f r /g/, and [x] of x /hf), (3) between a sonorant and a fricative, or (4) betvveen a fricative or
sonorant and voiced A /d/ or a ç ffl (TpaMMamuKa 61-62). EssentiaUy coırect, the complexity of this
formulaıion may be less accessible than the guidelline offered here.
 Morphophonology 61

b / vv/ xoay3+HH /howu8+ır)/ xoB3yn /how8uıj/

the artifıcial welTs
Ayoyn+H /düwün+i/ flY°HH /düvvnü/ its knot
K0BYUI+HHH3 /kÖWÜS+İr|İ8/ KeBUiynH3 /köwsüqü5/ your shoes

tt/y / roıoH+tı /goyun+ı/ roÜHM /goym/ his sheep

flyıon-ap /duyul-ar/ flyflnap /duylor/ it will be felt
6 aWup+u /bayır+ı/ 6 aöpu /bayn/ its hill
rapaÜLiııı+fci+Hfla rapaSuibiHHa /garaysmna/
/garayıs+ı+nda/ in her view

The vowels m /h /ıfı/ and y /y /u/ü/ of a second syllable do not drop when they are
preceded by one of the voiceless consonants n İp/, t /t/, K IkJ, c / 0/, or ın /s/, or by the
voiced consonants 3 181 or jk, /j/.

C+V+C Word+Suffix Vowel Retained

n /p / rony3+tuı /gopuS+ıg/ rony 3bm /gopuSuıj/

your mouth harp

T /t/ aTH3+HM /atı8+ım/ aTH3biM /atıSım/ my plot of la nd

TYTYH+HHH3 /tÜtÜn+İt)İ8/ TYTyHHHH3 /tütünür|ü8/
yoursmoke

K /k/ aKMfl+HM /akıl+ım/ aKboibiM /akılım/ my intelligence

fleKyH+H /dökün+i/ fleKyuH /dökünü/ its fertilizatioıı

c / 8/ 6 acbip-un /ba 0ır-ıp/ Bactıpbtn /ba0 ınp/ covering

UI /s/ roıuyjı-bin /gosul-ıp/ rouıynbin /gosulup/ joining

3/8/ si3buı-ap /ya8ıl-ar/ H3biJiap /yaSılar/ it will be writtcn

/]/ ryJKYK+M /güjük+i/ rya^Y™ /güjügü/ his puppy

Exceptions to Üıese guidelines regarding vovvel loss include the retention of the
vowels u / h Jı/il and y /y /u/ü/ of a second syllable when the first syllable conains a
long vowel.
62 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Word+Suffıx Vovve/ Retained

aran+H /a:gıl+ı/ arHJibi /a: gılı/ its corral
6anMK+H /ba:lık+ı/ Gasihiru /ba:lıgı/ its fish
öenyH-Mn /bö:lün-ip/ 6enyHYn /bö:lünüp/ being dıvided
öepyK+M /bö:rük+i/ 6epYTH /bö:rügü/ his skullcap
raByH+MUBra /ga:wun+ırjı5/ raBynyny3 /ga:wunurju6/ your melon
HaMtıc+H /na:mı0+ı/ HaMtıcM /na:mı9ı/ her honor
Marap-HH /£a:gır-ırj/ MartıptiH /ca:gınrj/ please invite
Mafltrp+H /ca:dtr+ı/ MajıtıpH /ca:dın/ their tent

The vovvels m / h /ı/i/ and y/y /u/ü/ in a second syliabie also are retained before the
consonants t /t/ and i /£/.

Word+Sufpx Vowel Retained

C8 BYT+H /0öwüt+i/ ceBYflM /0öwütü/ his willow tree
8hiht +h /yigit+i/ thınınu /yiğidi/her young man

MOMyn+u /coımıc+ı/ MOMy^H /£omujı/ its stinkvveed

mnH«j+H /gılıc+ı/ r t u ı u ^ u /gıhjı/ his sword

The vovvel loss nıle does not apply to the vowels m/ h /ı/i/ and y/y /u/ü/ in the
second syliabie of a word whose fîrst syliabie is closed.

Word+Suffix Vowel Retained

6 anflBip+w /ballır+ı/ 6 anflbipH /ballın/ his shin
YcrYp-un /İi0gür-ip/ YcrYpraı /ii0gürüp/ coughing
 Morphophonology 63

"Consonant Harmony"
Certain consonants in combination with certain other consonants become either more
similar or identical to one another. This process of becoming similar is called
assimilation and has the effect of bringing consonants closer in pronunciation with one
another, that is, in "harmony" with one another. In Turkmen, the sound changes
sometimes referred to as "consonant harmony" are a form of consonant assimilation.
Assimilation often occurs when two consonants meet at the juncture between vvord
and suffix or between word and word (sandhi). Such assimilation may be of two types:
Progressive, in the sense that the final consonant of the word affects the initial
consonant of the suffîx or next vvord ( c + t / 0+t/ > / 00/), or regressive, in that the initial
consonant of the suffbt or word affects the final consonant of the word ( t + c /t+ 0/ >
/00/). The rules for pronunciation of Standard Turkmen incorporate a number of
assimilations which operate in the majority of Turkmen dialects.2
A prominent group of these prescribed assimilations affect the consonant n /d / in
combination with the consonants h /n/, jı /1/3 /8/ and c /0/, (progressive assimilations:
H+fl /n+d/ > /nn/, Ji+fl fl+dj > /İl/, 3 +fl / 8+d/ > / 88/, c+a / 0+d/ > /00/), and the
consonant c /0/ in combination with the consonants 3 /S/ and t /t/ (regressive
assimilations: 3 +c /S+0/ > /00/, t + c /t+0/ > /00/). Assimilations also affect the
consonants m /£/ and w, /]/ when preceded by the consonant m f s / (progressive
assimilations: m+K, /s+jj/ > /ss/, h+'J /c+c/ > /ss/. m+jk, /c+J/ > /ss /).3 Such changes
are noted in the speech of nearly ali Türkmen speakers, although they are not reflected
in writing. Most of the regressive assimilations of consonants within the vvord at the
juncture betvveen syllables or betvveen vvords are reflected in the vvriting (see 84-85), but
there are a few exceptions ( c + t / 0+t/ > / 00/, m +6 /m+b/ > /mm/).
Standard assimilations that occur vvithin the word, at the juncture between word and
suffix, and at the juncture between word and word, are presented in the tabîe (see 64).
Even though prescrib ed for the Standard language, certain assimilations only occur
in a restricted number of dialects: M+H /m+d/ > /mn/ (3JlMMRe /elimne/ 'in my hand')
occurs only in the Teke, Kırach and Nohur dialects and in the northem subdialect of
Yomut; h + ji /n+1/ > /nn/ (rynnep /günnör/ 'days') occurs only in the Man subdialect
of Teke and in the Stavropol dialect; 3+Jl fz+lf > 155/ (ny3Jitı /du:S8ı/ 'salty') operates
only in the Yomut dialect; and h + 6 /n+b/ > /nm/ ( oh 6 np /onmi:r/ ~ [onvi:r] '11')
and h +6 /rj+b/ > /j]m/ (ceHMH ÖMJien / 0enirjmilen/ ~ [Oenirçvilen] 'with you') occur
only in the speech of those who do not consistently observe the rule that the consonant
6 /b/ is pronounced [v] betvveen vowels and after consonants (see 38).4

2 rpaMMamuKa 58-60, Sep^HeB İ9 7 0 :218-234.

3 Jn this case the phonetic rule that /c/ has the allophone [s] before /d/, /s/ and /!/ (see 40) extends to /c/
and /J/, so that first the combinations /c+c/ and /c+c/ become [sc] and second [sc] becomes
/ss/ through progressive assimilation.
4 rpaMMamuKa 59, Bep^neB 1970: 220-223.
 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Consonant Assimilations
H+fl /n+d/ becomes /nn/ stuıtnifla /ya:sınna/ at the age of
GenyHflH /bö:lünnü/ it was divided
rynaM3 /günnü:8/ daytime

n+a A+d/ becomes /İl/ KenRe /kö:llö/ in the lake

rennu /gelli/ she came
eıiflaıu /yo:llos/ companion

3+A /5+d/ becomes /SS/ re3fleH /gö 88ön/ from the eye
H3flUM /yaSSım/1 wrote
flY3fle>m /düSSeci/ non-domestic

c+fl / 0+d/ becomes /00/ 6acflbiM /ba00un/1 pressed

KJiacfla /kla00a/ in elass
ecflYPMeK /ööBürmök/ to grow (tr.)

3+c /8+0/ becomes /00/ repKe3cnH /görkö00ün/ let her show

H3ca /ya00a/ if he writes
bi3cw3 /ı:00ıS/ without trace

T+c /t+0/-becomes /00/ nrrcHH /gi00in/ let him go

nrree /gi00e/ if she goes
3TCH3 /e00i8/ without meat

rn+JK, /s+j/ becomes /ss/ ryıır*;ara3 /gussagaS/ little bird

aıras;aK /assak/ she will eross

m+ m /c+c/ becomes /ss/ aravibl /agassı/ carpenter

q+2K, /c+j/ becomes /ss/ reqjK,eK /gessek/ they will pass

yujfsâK /ussak/ it will fly

c+ t /0+t/ becomes /00/ flocryM /do:00um/ my friend

m +6 /m+b/ b e c o m e s /mm/ Xo^aM 6 a3 /Hojomma:8/ Hojambaz

 Morphophonology 65

Consonant Voicing
Another kind of assimilation occurs when a voiceless consonant becomes voict:d when
surrounded by vowels, which are always voiced. The unvoiced consonants n İp/, t /t/,
k İki and /£/ at the end of a one-syllable vvord containing a long vowel become
voiced 6 /bl, n /d/, r /g/ and jk /]/, respectively, with the addition of a suffix
consisting of or beginning with a vowel. This assimilation is reflected in the w:iting.

n İp/ becomes 6 /b/ ran+M /ga:p+ı/ r a ö t ı /ga:bı/ h is s a c k

flY®n+M /dü:p+i/ flyü öH /dü:bü/ its bottom
MY^n+e /dü:p+e/ AYÜöe /dü:bö/ to th e bottom

t /t/ b e c o m e s a / d / aT+H /a:t+ı/ a fltı /a:dı/ h e r nam e

o T + ii /o:t+ ı/ o flu /o:dı/ its fire
o t+m /o:t+a/ Ofla lo-.doj to the fire

k / k İ b e c o m e s r /g/ re K + e jıe /gö:k+ ele/ r e r e n e /gö:gölö/ green , r a ./

m k+m /i:k+ i/ htm /i:gi/ h e r sp in d le
MK+e /i:k+e/ Hre /i:ge/ to th e sp in d le

m /£/ becomes w, /j/ ryÜM+M /gü:c+i/ r y tt* ,n /gü:jü/ h er strengtlı

yn+M /u:c+ı/ y x , u /u'.ji/ it s tip
y u + a /u:£+a/ y aç a /u:jo/ to the tip

On the other hand, voiceless consonants remain unvoiced at the end of a one-
syllable word with a shoıt vowel.

n / p / re m a in s n /p/ T o n + H /top+ı/ T o n u /topı/ h e r b a ll

c a n + H /0ap+ı/ c a m .1 /0apı/ its h an d le
c a n + a /6ap+a/ ca n a /0 apa/to the h an d le

t /t/ re m ain s t /t/ aT+bi /at+ı/ a r a /atı/ h is h orse

ot+ m /ot+ı/ OTbi /otı/ its grass
oT + a /ot+a/ o r a /oto/ to the grass

k /kİ re m a in s k fkj MyK+H /yük+i/ MyKiî /yükü/ its lo a d

K6K+H /kök+ i/ K6KH /kökü/ its root
KOK+e /kök+e/ K eK e /kökö/ to th e root

1 16/ re m a in s lı /£/ cah+ u / 0a£+ı/ c a m ı /©acı/ h e r h air

roM+H /go£+ı/ tohh /gocı/ h is ram
ron+a /goc+a/ r o « a /goco/ to th e ram
66 Türkmen Reference Grammar

The unvoiced consonants n /p/, t /t/, K /k/ and m /£/ at the end of a two-syllable
word become voiced 6 /b/, a /d/, r /g/ and jk /}/, respectively, with the addition of a
suffix consisting of or beginning with a voweJ.

n /pl becomes 6 /b1 KHTan+M /kita:p+ ı/ KHTaötı /kita:bı/ her book

MeKflen+H /m ekdep+i/ MejmeÖH /mekdebi/ his
schooî
M eKflen+e /m ekdep+e/ MeKfleöe /mekdebe/ to the
school

t /t/ becomes n /d/ Mh it it + m /yigit+i/ üuntnu /yiğidi/ her

young man
6eBeT+H /böwöt+i/ ÖBBeflH /böwödü/ its dam

k /k/ becomes r /g/ rynaK+u /gulok+ı/ rynan .1/gulogı/his ear

epfleK + n /ö:rdök+ i/ epflern /ö:rdögü/her duck

M/£/ becomes jk 1)1 araM+M /aga£+ı/ a ra k tı /agajı/ its tree

rbinhm+u /gıhc+ı/ rmtHagM /gılıjı/ his sword

In the consonant clusters pT /rt/, hik /sk/, hm /nc/ and pM /rc/, the voiceless
consonants t A/, k /k/ and m/c/ become voiced v/ith the addition o f a suffix consisting
o f or beginning with a vowel.

pT /rt/ becomes pa /rd/ MepT+e /mert+e/ Mepne /merde/

to the brave man
rypT+a /gu:rt+a/ rypfla /gu:rdo/ to the wolf

iük /sk/ becomes m r /sg/ huik+ h /ısk+ı/ ttıu m /ısgı/ her love
kbuik+ m /kösk+i/ KeıurH /kösgü/ his palace

hm /nc/ becomes hjk. /nj/ flaflHH+BIM flaflHaçHM /dayanjı/

/dayanc+ı/ her support
em-ifep eH5K,tep /yenjyatr/
/yen£-ya:r/ he is beating

plı /rc/ becomes pjrç /rj/ 6oplı+bi /bo:r£+ı/ 6opx,Bi /bo:rjı/ her duty
öypn+M /bur£+ı/ Bypa^tı /burjı/ his pepper
 Morphophonology 67

The consonant voicing rule also applies to the final t /t/, k /k/ and m /c/ of an
adjective when the comparative suffbc (+paıc/p3K/+ra:k/ra:k/) is added, and the final T
/t/ and k M of a verb stem when the present indefinite (-np/top /-ya:r/yâ:r[) or present
participle (-sui/üsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/) suffbces are added.

+paK/paK /+ra:k/ra:k/ orçaT+paK onaflpaK /ox}odıa:k/

/orjot+ra:k/ finer, better
aK+paK /a:k+ıa:k/ arpaK /a:gra:k/ vvhiter
ceitpeK+paK ceöperpsK
/0eyrek+ra:k/ $eyregrâ:k/rarer
ntM+psK /gi:c+ra:k/ itokjisk /gijrâ:k/ later

-ap/ttap /-ya:r/yâ:r/ aÜT-ap /ayt-ya:r/ aflaHp /aydya:r/ she telis

flapHK-ap flaptcrap /da:ngya:r/
/da:nk-ya:r/ she vvorries
nrr-itap /git-ya:r/ ntfltop /gidyâ:r/ he goes

-sm/tim /-ya:n/ya:n/ aÜT-HH /ayt-ya:n/ aftflHH /aydya:n/vvho telis

flaptnc-SH flaptıraH /da:ngya:n/
/da:rik-ya:n/ vvho vvorries
niT-ifsH /git-yâ:n/ ntaftsH /gidyâ:n/ vvho goes

With the addition of a suffbc consisting of or beginning with a vovvel, the

consonant T /t/ becomes H /d/ at the end of one-syllable verb stems containing a long
vovvel and, for unclear reasons, at the end of the verbs rHT(MeK) /git(mek)/ '(to) go'
and 3 T(MeK) /et(mek)/ '(to) do', vvhich contain a short vovvel. This consonant remains
unvoiced vvith ali other verbs vvhose root vovvel is short.

t /t/ becomes 3 /d/ flaT-tm /da:t-ıp/ flafltm /dardıp/ tasting

TytİT-Hn /tü:t-ip/ Ty^ayn /tü:düp/ combing
nrr-Hn /git-ip/ ntHMn /gidip/ going
3T-MIT /et-ip/ 3flnn /edip/ doing

T /t/ remains t /t/ raT-Hn /gat-ıp/ raTtnı /gatıp/ mixing

TyT-BÜI /tut-ıp/ TyTyn /tutup/ holding
er-rat /yet-ip/ enin /yetip/ reaching
HT-Hn /it-ip/ hthit /itip/ pushing
car-tnı /8at-ıp/ ca ran /Satıp/ selling
68 Türkmen Reference Granunar

At the end of two-syllable verb stems, the consonants T İt/ and k IkJ become n /dİ
and r /g/ with the addition of a suffhc consisting of or beginning with a vowel or the
consonants M İyi and p /r/: OKa^np /okodya:r/ 's/he will have (someone) read' <
OKaTMan /okotmok/ 'to have (someone) read', » ap u ra p /da-.ngar/ 's/he wiü w ony' <
aaptiKMaK /dazrıkmak/ 'to worry'. However, if the combination Ji+fl /1+d/ results
from such voicing, then this combination does not assimilate to /İl/; for example,
HY3eJiflfiap /dü 8öldya:r/ 'he corrects' < HY3 ejiTMeK /düSöltmök/ 'to coırect' and
HY3eJWHJiMeK /düSöldülmök/ 'to be corrected'.
 Morphophonology 69

A d d in g th e C o n s o n a n ts ü İy i, c İQİ, h İn i

Türkmen syllables consist of sequences of (consonant plus) vowel plus consonant (plus
consonant), and never of vovvel plus vowel. Thus, when a suffix consisting of or
beginning vvith a vovvel is added to a word ending in a vovvel, generally that
combination results in the dropping of the final vowel or in the fusing of the two
vovvels into a long vovvel (see 56-57). In three cases, a consonant is inserted betvveen
the tvvo vovvels to avoid the unacceptable sequence, for which reason they a:s often
referred to as "buffer" consonants.
The consonant Wİyi is inserted between the final vovvel of a verb and the: verbal
noun suffbc +um/Hm /+ıs/is/.

+üum lim m snua+Hiıı /ya:sa+ıs/ fliuafemı /ya:sayıs/ living

/+yıs/yis/ Muıne+Miu /i:sle+is/ jnuneÜHiıı /i:sleyis/ vvorking

The consonant c /0/ appears betvveen the end of a noun ending in a vovvel and the
third person possessive suffbc +m/ h /+ı/i/.

+CU/CH Kana+tı /ka:ka+ı/ KaKacbi /ka:ka0ı/ her father

/+ 01/0İ/ nye+H /düyö+i/ flyecıt /diiyöBö/ his camel

The consonant h İn/ is inserted betvveen the final vovvel of a vvord and the genitive
(+lih/hh /+ıq/ii}D and accusative (+bi/n /+ı/i/) case sufîixes. As noted above, addition
of these case suffbces results in the lengthening of the final vowel of the vvord (see 59).

+hlih/ hhh KaKa+bin /ka:ka+ır)/ KaKanbin /ka:ka:nırj/

/+ nııj/nii]/ the father’s
otjem+hh /o:tlı+ırj/ otjimhmh /o:tlı:mi)/
the train’s
AYe+HH /düyö+i g/ flyftsHHn /düyâ:nii)/
the c a m e l’ s
:*;y 6 m+ mh /jübü+ii)/ 3k;y6hhhh /jübü:nüi]/
the pocket’s

+ hm/ hh KaKa+H /ka:ka+ı/ KaKaH u /ka:ka:nı/ th e father

l+m/m/ o t jim + h /o:tlı+ı/ otjihhm /o:th:nı/ th e train
aye+H /düyö+i/ BYK sh m /düya:ni/ the c a m e l
x ;y 6 m+ m /jübü+i/ JSyÖHHH /jübü:nü/ th e p o ck et
70 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The consonant h /n/ also appears before ali case suffixes when they are added to a
word ending in the third person possessive suffıx +bi/n /+ı/i/.

+ hu h / hhh KaKact[+btn /ka:ka9ı+tıj/ KaKacbiHMK /ka:ka6 mıi]/

herfather’s
nyscM+m /düyö9ü+irj/ flYecHHHn /düyö9ünüıj/
his camel’s

■fHu/HH KaKacu+u /ka:ka0ı+ı/ KaKacbiHbi /ka:ka0ını/

/+nı/ni / herfather
AYecH+H /diiyö0ü+i/ HyecHiiH /düyö0ünü/
his camel

+Ha/He KaKacbi+a /ka:ka8ı+a/ KaKacbtHa /ka:kaÖma/

/+na/ne/ to her father
flyecH+e /düyö9U+e/ nyecHHe /düyö9iinö/
to his camel

+Hjja/Hj|e KaKacbi+fla /ka:ka8 ı+da/ KaKacbiHfla /ka:ka9ınna/

/+nda/nde/ on her father
HyecH+fle /diiyö9ü+de/ KYecmme /düyö9ünnö/
on his camel

+Hnan/HHen KaKactı+flaH /ka:ka9ı+dan/ KaKactiHflaH /ka:ka8ınnan/

/+ndan/nden/ from her father
AyecH+fleH /düyö9ü+den/ ayecHHfleH /düyö9ünnön/
from his camel

In rare cases when a contracted form of the partide xeM/-aın/eM /hem/-am/em/ is

added to a vvord ending in a vovvel, the consonant h fn/ is inserted between the vovvels;
for example, HT+H+eM /it+i+em/ > HTHHeM /itinem/ 'his dog, too'.
 Morphophonology 71

Syllable Loss
In spoken Türkmen, it is common to drop certain syilables or sequences of consonants
and vowels in some combinations of words or words and suffixes or particles. Such
"clipped" pronunciations also may be found in printed materials, especially those vvhich
reflect spoken Türkmen. The follovving clipped fonns are vievved as acceptable norms
of Standard Turkmen.

here 6 y epne /bu yerde/ > Ebpfle /bâ:ıde/

afew Sup hkh /bir iki/ > SııpKM /birki/
a couple ÖHp h k m yM /bir iki üc/ > 6mpky*i /birküc/
after that oHnaH con /onnon 0orj/ > o h coh /onBor)/
doing so, thus ıııeftne 3flnn /leyle edip/ > uıeöjHHn /seydip/
to take to am in n r m e k /alıp gitmek/ > aKMTMeK/âkitmek/
to bring to anun renMes /alıp gelmek/ > sKenMeK /akelmek/
to serve, to give to ajibin öepMeK /alıp bermek/ > aSepMeK /abermek/

One of two identical syilables may be dropped in spoken Turkmen, especially vvhen
the second person possessive (+mh/ hh /+ıi)/ii)/) and genitive case (+mh/ hh /+ııj/ir|/)
suffixes are combined.

in the vveek xenfle+fle /hepde+de/ > xerme /hepde/

of your land ep+nn+MH /yer+irt+ii)/ > epn}( /yerio/
ofyourdress KeÜHeK+MH+HH /köynök+irj+ii]/ > KetaerıiH /köynögüi]/

Loss of the consonant h İni and first vovvel of the genitive case suffix + u h /h h
/'+ırj/ig/ is common in pronoun forms.

my MeH+nn /riien+İJ)/ > Men /mei)/

mine MeH+HH+KH /m en + ig+ ki/ > MeHKiı /meıjki/
your ceH + n n /0en+irj/ > cei( /0erj/
yours ceH+MH+KH /0en+irj+ki/ > ceHKM/0erjki/
hers, his, its OH+yn/on+urj/ > on /or)/
its, Üıis one’s Myn+yn /mun+ur)/ > M yn /mui)/
its, this one’s uıoH +yn /son+ut]/ > rn on /sorj/

This process also affects other forms of the pronouns, vvhich occasionally appear in
vvriting to reflect spoken Turkmen.

of these 6 ynap+wn /bulor+ırj/ > öynan /buloq/

also its/his/er onyn xeM /onur] hem/ > orçuaM /orjıjom/
those of yours o n a p + tın ti3 /olor+ıi]i5/ > onaunbi3/oloqrju8/
72 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The initial x Ih/ o f the partid e xeM/-anı/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'too, also' is lost and the
rem ainder is merged to the preceding word. Usually, this m erger is vvritten in the
Standard language.

I, too MeH xeM /men hem/ > MeHeM /menem/

the boy, too onıaH xeM /oglon hem/ > oraaHaM /oglonom/

When the partide xeM/-aıvı/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'too, also' follows a word with the
third person possessive suffix +li/m l+ı/ij or the past indefinite suffix -fltı/nn /-dı/di/,
both the voweI u lu /ı/i/ of these suffixes and the consonant x /h/ of the partide are lost
(see 113). Suchjnergers often are found in written Turkmen.

his wheat, too öyrflaiı+tı xeM /bugdoy+ı hem / > SyrflaaM /bugdoyom/
its good, too roBH+ctı xeM /gowı+0ı+ hem / > roBycaM /gowu0om/
there was, too Gapflbi xeM /ba:rdı hem/ > ĞapflaM /barrdam/

Most Turkmen speakers pronounce the present indefinite tense suffîx -np/Bap
/-ya:r/yâ:r/ in a short form with the loss of the final consonant p M and first vovvel
ulu /ı/i/ or sequence c u /ch /6ı/0i/ of the personal ending (see 222-223).

afiT-sp-im /ayt-ya:r-ın/ > aiiflHH /aydya:n/ I ’m speaking

aÜT-Hp-cun /ayt-ya:r-®ııj/ > aüflHH /aydya:ıj/ you ’re speaking
aÜT-ap/ayt-ya:r/ > aüfla /aydya:/ s/ he’s speaking
airr-sp-tıc /ayt-ya:r-ı0/ > aüflsc /aydya:0/ vve’re speaking
aÜT-Hp-ctn<H3 /ayt-ya:r-0ır)i5/ > aiiflanua /aydya:ıjı8/ you’re speaking
aöT-ap-nap /ayt-ya:r-lar/ > afiflsuıap /aydyarlar/ they’re speaking

As a rule, the final h /n/ of the past participle suffix - m im /-an/en/ plus the vovvel
u lu h h l of possessive suffixes is dropped in spoken Turkmen. Such clipped forms
also may affect the plural suffix +Jiap/nep /+lar/ler/ in some dialects of Türkmen.5

/gelemden 0oq/ < ren+eH+HMfleH con /gel+en+imden 0oq/ after I came

/aydamıSSa/ < aJİT+aH+HMti3+fla /ayt+an+ımı5+da/ vvhen we spoke
/remontcılai)/ < peMOHTHtı+jıap+tın /remontcı+lar+ııj/ of the repairmen

5 This loss is most typical o f noıthem Yomut, Gökleng, Alili and Nohur; see Eep^HeB 1970:238-240.
 ORTHOGRAPHY

Standard Türkmen serves as a national language for the peoples of diverse origin who
formerly identified themselves with tribal groupings and their distinct dialccts that
together form the Türkmen language. The writing system, grammar and lexicca of the
Standard language currently in use were formally instituted in the years arourıd 1940
and have remained the norm in social and cultural life up to the present.
That Standard language is based primarily on the speech of Türkmen who ıdentify
themselves as belonging to the Teke Türkmen in the Ahal and Man prov nces of
Türkmenistan, although it incorporates into its norms some linguistic features of
speakers of the Yomut Türkmen as vvell. However, even though its prescrib:d form
embodies mostly Teke and a few Yomut features, Standard Türkmen also di.splays a
certain level of abstractness that differs from these rcal spoken languages.
In formulating the rules of the writing system of Standard Türkmen, hmguage
planners realized that to represent exactly the speaking pattems of any single group in
the written and spoken forms of a national Standard could promote separatenes.'i among
the various groups of Türkmen. Consequently, they tried to "neutralize" the variant
speech patterns existing in the dialects, including even in that of the Teke, by adopting
spelling rules that would permit any speaker of Türkmen to pronounce a vvrittcn word
according to her or his own pattem. The rules which they adopted, vvith a few
subsequent tefinements, are consistent and regular, and constitute the orthography of
Standard Türkmen.

The Türkmen Alphabet

The national language of the Türkmen has been vvritten in three alphabets sincı: 1923,
and another change of script looms on the horizon. During the years 1923-1928,
Türkmen was written in the Arabic alphabet, but with various diacritics and spelling
rules that permitted this script to represent the Türkmen sound system. liecause
Türkmen inteliectuals had differing views on the spelling rules of this Standard and on
which of the dialects ought to serve as its basis, the lack of a unifying prınciple
actually impeded standardization, as well as the drive for literacy among the Tuı İçmen.1
Already in 1925, some Türkmen linguists had joined the Latinization movement,
which was then gaining momentum for the adoption of a single Latin alphabet as the
basis of vvriting the Turkic Standard languages of the Soviet Union. In Febru.ıry and
March 1926, Turkic-speaking inteliectuals assembled in Baku for the First Ali Union
Turkological Congress, where a "Unified Turkic Latin Alphabet" was formulatsd and
adopted for most Turkic languages of the Soviet Union.2 A Türkmen commiti.ce was

1 See Hapunpoa 1972: 149-150,155-156 (table of alphabets), and Fieıman 1991:57-68.

2 For the Baku conference, see Baldauf 1993: 387-457, Herman 1991: 79-81, 213-221.
74 Türkmen Reference Grammar

formed for the application of this alphabet to Türkmen in 1927, and samples of its
results began to appear that same year. The govemment of the Türkmen SSR formally
adopted the new alphabet in January 1928, and implemented its teaching in primary
grades in the 1928-1929 school year.
The Latin alphabet eonsisted of forty letters, including sixteen for vowels (with
long vovvels being represented by doubled letters) and thirty-four for consonants. In
May 1930, the principle of representing long vowels was removed from this alphabet,
and in June 1934, certain letters that represented letters in the Arabic script (q, o^)
instead of Türkmen sounds were removed. Because this alphabet already had the letter
h for the Türkmen sound /h/, the letter x was removed in 1936, leaving the Latin
alphabet vvith thirty letters. Generally, use of the Latin alphabet stimulated cultural
development in Türkmenistan, but did not promote leaming of the Russian language,
one of the primary goals of Soviet nationality policy.
By 1939, as vvith the other Turkic languages of the Soviet Union, measures were in
effect to svvitch Türkmen from the Latin to the Cyriliic alphabet. The govemment of
the Türkmen SSR formally d e c re e d the implementation of the new alphabet in
govemment affairs beginning in June and in the education system beginning in
September 1940. The new alphabet contained thirty-eight letters, including ali thirty-
three letters of the Cyriliic alphabet used to write Russian and five modified or new
letters to represent Türkmen sounds not in Russian. That alphabet has been used to
write Standard Türkmen ever since, and is presented in the table, along with the way
each letter is pronounced in alphabetical order (see 75).
In 1993, the Türkmen govemment officially adopted a new alphabet based on Latin
script, to be implemented gradually from 1996 until the year 2000 (see 86).

Letters o f the Türkmen Alphabet

The Türkmen alphabet currently in use consists of tbirty-six Cyriliic letters and two
signs. This alphabet includes twenty Cyriliic letters to represent Türkmen sounds that
have identical or close counterpaıts in the Russian sound system: a /a/, 6 /b/, r /g/, n
/d/, m Hl, vt IH, Wİyi, k /k/, n IH, m İm/, h /n/, o /o/, n İpi, p /r/, t /t/, y M q /c/,
in lî/, u /ı/, 3 /e/. Four Cyriliic letters representing sequences of /yİ plus vowel or
palatalization of preceding consonants in Russian were adopted to represent four
Türkmen sequences of İyi plus vovvel: e /ye/, e /yo/, to /yu/, fl /ya/. Four Cyriliic
letters represent different sounds in the Türkmen and Russian sound systems: b
/Türkmen w ~ Russian v/, 3 /6 ~ z/, c /6 ~ s/ and x /h ~ x/. Three CyriUic letters were
modified and two introduced to represent Türkmen sounds not in Russian: jrç fil, h /r)/,
o /ö/, and \ /ü/, 3 /a:/. Three Cyriliic letters and two signs represent sounds and
conventions found only in the Russian component of Türkmen: <f> /fI, q /c/, m /s’s’/,
and b I’I, % / ”/.
 Orthography 75

The Turkmen Alphabet

Letter Pronunciation Letter Pronunciation

A a a n n ne
B 6 6e P P 3p
B B ee C c 3C
r r ze T T me
fl de y y y
E e e Y Y Y
E e e <D $ 3g5
X X otce X X xa
3K, X otçe n n; ife
3 3 3e ne
M M u m m ma
İî M Übl m m U4a
K K m 'b t*

JI n 3A BI BI bl

M M 3M B B*

H H 3H 3 3 3

n n 3H 9 3 3

0 0 0 TO 10 m

e e e 51 H sı

*signs without soıınd value

76 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The Letters fo r Vovvels

The Cyrillic letters a , 3 (beginning a word) - e (after a consonant), a, bi, h , o, e , y, Y.
each represent a basic vovvel in Tuıkmen: /a, e, â:, ı, i, o, ö, u, ü/, respectively. At the
same time, the letters a , m , h , o , e , y, each represent a short and a corresponding long
vovvel: /a-a:, ı-ı:, i—i:, o-o:, ö-ö:, u-u:/, respectively. In two cases, the letter e may
represent long /e:/, and in a few cases the letter a may represent short /â/ (see 32). By
conventions of the Turkmen alphabet, the combination \Vı represents long /ü:/, and the
letters a , e , e , m represent /ya-ya :, ye, yo-yo:, yu-yu:/ (see below). The combination
yö always represents /ü:/ and never /üy/ when it ends a one-syllable vvord: Kyiî /kii:/,
not *küy 'thought', and Tyil /tü:/, not *tüy '(body) hair'. Finally, the letters a , e, m , h,
may represent rounded vowels in non-root syllables under the rounding rule of vovvel
harmony: /o, ö, u, ü-ü:/, respectively (see 49-51).

The Letters fo r Consonants

The Cyrillic letters 6 , n, r , t , r, k , m , h , h , n, p, m, m, it each represent a basic
consonant or phoneme: /b, p, d, t, g, k, m, n, rj, 1, r, s, j, c, yİ, respectively. Variants
or allophones of these consonants are vmtten with the same letters. The letters 3 , c, x,
b and each represent a consonant phoneme in the Turkmen system (/S, 6 , h, w, p/,
respectively), but also a different consonant for Russian words in the pronunciation of
some speakers (/z, s, x, v, f/, respectively) (see 41-42). The letters m, u and JK
represent phonemes for Russian vvords as pronounced by some speakers (/s’s \ c, z/,
respectively), although two of these are pronounced as basic Turkmen sounds by many
speakers (M/9/ and * /j'/; see 41), and the other appears in a few Turkmen vvords for a
lengthened /ss/ (nam u /passı/ 'smasher (soubriquet)', xamujiHaMaK /hassdlamak/ 'to
hiss'). The letters fl, e , e and jo at the beginning of vvords and after vovvel letters
represent the sound İyi combined with vovvels /ya, ye, yo, yu/, respectively (see
below). The "soft" and "hard" signs b and ’b of the Turkmen alphabet are used in
Russian vvords to reflect a modifîcation of the preceding consonant, but in Russian and
Persian-Arabic vvords to ensure that the letter e is pronounced /ye/ (see belovv).

The Letters jt, e, e and w

Adoption of the Cyrillic letters h , e , e and io introduced unnecessary difficulties for
Turkmen orthography. At the beginning of vvords these letters represent fl /ya-ya:/,
e /ye/, e /yo-yo:/ and io /yu-yu:/, vvhile after vovvels, they represent a /ya-yo-ya:/, e
/ye-yö/ and ıo /yu-yu:/.

m /ya:n/ side asıc /ayak/ foot

ep /yer/ earth flye /duyö/ camel
en /yo:l/ road (not in non-root syllables)
ıopT /yu:rt/ country 6okjh /boyun/ neck
 Orthography 77

Complications that arise firom the use of these letters inelude the fact that words
beginning vvith /y/ are entered separately in five (ineluding ft /yİ) different seetions of
dictionaries and other referenee works. Moreover, such combinations of /y/+ vovvel are
vvritten on the basis of tvvo different principles, one based on the representation of tvvo
sounds vvith one letter, and the other based on the representation of distincı sounds
vvith distinet letters:

a /ya-ya:/ e /ye/ e /yo-yo:/ w /yu-yu:/

Hu /yı-yı:/ ün /yi—
yi:/ Ha/yâ:/ fte /yö-yö:/ Uy /yü-yü:/

The most troublesome consequence of the employment of these letters, hov/ever, is

that addition of suffixes frequently requires revvriting letters for nev, sound
combinations. For example, the combination of the dative case suffix (+a/c /+a/e/)
vvith the final ii /y/ of a vvord is spelled vvith a/e /ya/ye/, as in /ja:y/ 'place' >
K,aa /ja:ya/ 'to the place', eti /öy/ Tıome' > ee /öyö/ 'to the home'. Similarly, the
combination of a final ti /y/ of a verb vvith the initial a/e /a/e/ of verb suffixes requires
revvriting, as in flyü(Maıc) /duy(mok)/ 'to feel' plus the future indefmite -ap /-ar/ >
nyap /duyor/ 's/he vvill feel'. When a noun ending in Mu /yı/ or e /ye/ appeaı;; in the
dative case, the result is spelled a /ya:/ and tia /ya:/, respectively, as in ryiiu /guyı/
'vvell' > rya /guya:/ 'to the vvell' and Aye /düyö/ 'camel' > /düyâ:/ 'to the camel'.
Another example of revvriting involves the combination of final İİ /y/ of a vvord vvith
initial y /u/ of a rounded variant of a suffix, as in ro ii(M aK ) /goy(mok)/ 'to place' plus
the second plural imperative -yu /-uq/ > foran /goyurj/ 'place (it)!' This type of
revvriting also is observed in reverse, âs in to io h /goyun/ 'sheep' plus tlıs third
possessive + u/h /+ıfi/ > roÜHbi /goynı/ 'his sheep'.
Such examples illustrate the many complications introduced into the orthography
by the use of the letters a , e , e and io , particularly in the vvriting system of a language
that has primary long vovvels, vovvel lengthening and rounded vovvel harmony, along
vvith orthographic rules for vvriting each of these.

The Signs b and t

The Cyrillic signs b and t» are used before the letters a , e , e , K) to indicate their
pronunciation as /ya, ye, yo, yu/ in the Russian vvriting system, a funetion vvhich they
continue before the letter e in the Turkmen vvriting system. In some compound s and in
Russian and Persian-Arabic borrovvings, the sign t. is preseribed (although either l o r ı
may appear in the spellings of individual vvriters) to indicate that e follcwing a
consonant is to be pronounced /ye/ instead of /e/.

aırterep /elyeter/ accessible Hecue /ne8ye/ credit

AyHteBM /dünyövvü/ secular *»pT>eK/câ:ıyek/ quarter
78 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Variam Spellings
The spelling of individual words may vary according to individuals, but also due to
decisions adopted över the course of the decades that Standard Türkmen has been in
use. Differences may be noted especially between official spellings and their spellings
in publications, although such variants do not always entaıl a difference in
pronunciation.

Standard Spelling Variant Spelling

Kefîan /kebarp/ skewered meat Ke6 a6 /kebarp/(Russian Ke6 a6 )

uuocsp /sikiiır/ hunt ııiHKap /sika:r/
OpcıeT /Oıöyet/ Russia OpctıeT /Oröuyet/
TyneH /tüpöi]/ gun TyneH /tüpön/
rmpeMeK /titremek/ to shudder TMTpMMeK /titrimek/
 Orthography 79

Turkmen Orthography
The Türkmen alphabet based on Cyrillic script has adequate means at its disposal to
spell Turkmen as it is pronounced by any defined group of Türkmen, for example, by
those who identify themselves as Teke. As an illustration of its potential, one may
consider that the vvords spelled o K aap n ap 'they read', repeHOKJiap 'they haven’t
seen', r83nepnHfle 'in her eyes' and rYHjjH3 'daytime' easily could be spelled
*0K0fiaapjıap /okoyaarlar/, * re p e H 0 0 K ji0 p /görönooklor/, *ro3JTepYHHe
/göSlörünnö/ and *ryHHYY3 /günüliS/, respectively, to represent their actual
pronunciation in the Teke dialect.
However, in seeking to avoid the appearance that Standard Turkmen actuaüy was the
offîcial language of only one group of Turkmen, language planners tried to "neutralize"
the various differences in pronunciation that typify the spoken varieties of Turkmen.
They did so by adopting a set of conventions or spelling rules for representing Standard
Turkmen words and, at the same time, proposed a set of pronunciation rules which, for
the most part, applied to the majority of Türkmen dialects.
The spelling rules or orthography of Standard Turkmen are taught in primary
schools throughout the country. They are presented in the Turkmen language primers
used in these classrooms, each progressively more complicated through the grade
levels. In the follovving section, these rules are described as they pertain to
morphophonologica] processes that affect spoken Turkmen.

Vowel Harmony
The spelling rules of the Standard language represent front-back harmony fully, but
with a few exceptions noted below do not represent rounded-unrounded harmony at ali.
However, a representative speaker of the Standard language knows how to pronounce
the vowels written to reflect the rounded vowel harmony operative in his or her dialect.
The following table presents a summary of these rules as they apply to the Teke dialect
(explanations and exceptions are provided below).

First Syllable Second Syllable Third+ Syllable

Written/Spoken Written Spoken Written Spoken

a /a/o-a:/ a /a/o-a:/
e /e/ö/ e /e/ö/
0. y. y/yft 3 /a:/ 3 /a:/
/o-o:, ö-ö:, u-u:, ü/ii:/ M M M /ı/u-ı:/
M /«:/ H /i/ü-i:/ü:/
y /u-u:/
Y /u/
80 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Rounded Vowel Harmony and the Letters a and ela

An orthographical rule o f the Standard language requires that the rounded vovvels /o-o:/
and /ö-ö:/ are written only in the first syllables o f Türkmen words. Thus, the rounded
vovvel harmony o f spoken Türkmen is'not represented in vvriting in regard to these
vovvels in non-fırst syllables, where they alvvays are written a/e /a-o/e-ö/.
o raaH /oglon/ boy onnaHJiapbiHa /oglonloruno/ to h is boys
ryap /guyor/ s/he will pour oT yp ay n c /oturjok/ (s/he) vvill sit
epfleK /ö:rdök/ duck epfleniMfleH /ö:rdögümdön/ fro m m y duck
fly e /düyö/ camel re p a çe K /görjök/ (s/he) vvill se e

Addition of the first and second person possessive suffîxes and the genitive and
accusative case suffixes to a vvord ending in /o/ or /ö/ lengthens these vovvels to /a:/ or
/a:/, which are vvritten a and a, respectively (see 56, 59). When the third person
possessive suffix and the locative and ablative case suffixes are added to a vvord ending
in /o/ or /ö/, these vovvels remain short and are vvritten a and e, respectively.
o 6 a /o:bo/ v illa g e o6aM /o:ba:m / my v illa g e
oöaHHH /o:ba:nuj/ the v illa g e ’ s o6arç /o:ba:r)/ y o u r v illa g e
oöaHH /o:ba:m / the v illa g e o â a c u /o: boöı/ his/her v illa g e
o6 a /o:ba:/ to th e v illa g e o6aM H3 /o:ba:mı8/ o u r v illa g e
o6 afla /o:bodo/ in th e v illa g e o 6 ai(ti3 /o:ba:r)i5/ y o u r v illa g e
oöaflaH /o:bodon/ fro m the v illa g e o 6 a cw /o:bo0ı/ th eir v illa g e

K en e /köcö/ Street koh sm /kö£â:m/ my Street

K8M3HMH /köcâ:nir)/ the street’ s K enan /koca: rj/ y o u r Street
KGH3HM/kö£â:ni/ the Street KenecH /kö£ö0ü/ her/his Street
K0M3 /köcâ:/ to the Street k s h 3MH3 /köcâ:mi8/ ou r Street
K en efle /köcödö/ on th e Street k o tsu iö /kö£a:rji8/ y o u r Street
KGMeflen /köcödön/ from th e Street KenecM /kö£ö0ü/ th eir Street

It should be recalled that these rules apply only partially to kinship terms (see 56,
59), and that the long vovvels /a:/a:/, vvhich are vvritten a/a, are never rounded in second
and fuıther syllableş, nor are the vovvels of suffixes foUovving them.

Rounded Vovvel Harmony and the Letters u and u

A Standard spelling rule *equires that the short high rounded vovvel /u/ be vvritten as y
in closed second syllables (ending in a consonant). The letter bi is vvritten in open
syllables (ending in a vovvel) to represent the short high unrounded vovvel /ı/, and in
closed second syllables to represent the long high unrounded vovvel /ı:/.
ronyufla /golunno/ on his arm fly3JiynbK /du:81uluk/ salinity
roBM /govvj/ good ynbi /uh/ big
erbiH /yogı:n/ thick y3biH /u 8ı:n/ long
 Orthography 81

Ih e rule for vvriting the short high rounded vovvel /ü/ requires that y be vvritten in
elosed second syilables. The letter H is vvritten to represent the short high rounded
vovvel /ii/ in open syilables and the long rounded vovvel /ü:/ in elosed second syilables.

My3YHfle /yiiSiinnö/ on her face CYÜTJrynHK / 0 U:tlülük/ milkino ss

asm /öİli/ corpse /jiibü/ pocket
YMHH/ücü:n/ for 6yTMH /bütü:n/ whole

Addition of the first and second person possessive suffbces and the genin ve and
accusative case suffixes to a word ending in jıj or /ü/ lengthens these vovvels to /ı:/ and
/ii:/, vvhich are vvritten ti and m, respectively (see 56, 59). When the third person
possessive suffîx and the locadve and ablative case suffbces are added to a worc ending
in /ı/ or /ü/, these vovvels remain short and are vvritten y and y, respectively.

roHUibi /gorjsı/ n e ig h b o r ronıııUM /gogsr.m / my n e ig h b o r

roHUibin /goıjsı:i)/ the n e ig h b o r’ s ro H iu tm /gor)sı:r|/ y o u r n eigh bı >r
ronııiHHM /gor)sı:nı/ the n e ig h b o r roH U iyctı /goıjsuOı/
his/her neighbor
ronuıa /gorjsa:/ to the neighbor ronuiLiMbi3 /gor|Sj:mı8/
our neighbor
ronuıyfla /gorjsudo/ on the neighbor ronuibinı>[3 /goj]Si:i]i5/
your neighbor
roHmyflaır /gorjsudon/ ronıuyctı /gotjsuOı/
from the neighbor her/his/their neighbor

x,y6 M/jiibü/ pocket * y 6 hm /jübü:m/ my pocket

5k;y6hhhh /jübü:nürj/ the pocket’s JK,y6 nn /jübü:rj/ your pocket
^YÖmhm /jübii:nii/ the pocket ^yöycH /jübü0 ü/ her/his pockeı
».yös /jüba:/ to the pocket 5k.y6 mmi.I3 /jübümUS/ our pockc:
açyöyae /jiibüdö/ in the pocket j^yönubB /jübüıjüg/ your pockc.:
j^yÖYfleH /jiibüdön/ from the pocket >k;y6 ycm/jübü0ü/ their pocket

Rounded Vowel Harmony and the Letters y and y

Standard Turkmen orthography provides that the rounded high vowels y /u/ (also /u:/
in borrovvings) and y /ü/ may be vvritten only in first and second syilables. Iıı such
cases, the vvriting of these rounded vovvels in second syilables refleets their rounded
vovvel hannony in spoken Turkmen.

ofly n /odun/ vvood t o io m /toyum / m y party ( t o ü /:oy/)

KöMyp /köm ür/ c o a l e ö y n /öyür)/ y o u r h ou se ( e ü /ö>/)
lOMyıu /yum uş/ ta s k ryuıyM /gusum / m y bird ( ry ın ,'gus/)
k y m y u i /küm üs/ s ilv e r { ifa y n /yü5ür)/ y o u r fa c e ( f r p İY° 5/)
82 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The high rounded vovvels y/y /u/ü/ are written in second or further syllables
following the semivovvel b / w / of a syllable with an unrounded vowel.

raByH /ga:wun/ melon reByuı /gii:wu5/ cud

TanaByT /tapa:wut/ difference rypjıeByıc /giirlöwük/ thunder

The high rounded vowels y/y /u/ü/ are written in third or further syllables of
compound words.

/Ogulluröun/ Oguldursun (< oryn+flypcyn

O ry n n y p c y H
/ogu]+dur0 un/ let the son stand [that is, may the son not die])
romaByM /gosavvuc/ handful (< rom+asy^ /gos+avvuc/ pair + palm)

The high rounded vovvels y /u-u:/ are written in the second and further syllables of
borrovved vvords.

KaHyH /karnini lavv MaKcMMyM /m aksim um / maximum

M a3M yH /ma5mu:n/ contents HHCTHTyT /in 8titut/ institute
fleccyp /de00u:r/ custom napaunoT /paraşüt/ parachute

Rounded Vovvel Harmony in Suffixes

Standard vvritten Turkmen does not represent rounded variants of suffıxes containing
the vovvels /o/ö/ under any condition, nor of rounded variants of suffbces containing the
vovvels /u, ü-ü:/ when they constitute the third or further syllable in a vvord. The
follovving lists provide the orthographic variants of grammatical and a fevv lexical
suffixes along with their pronunciations.

Suffixes Written With Two Variants

Plural +nap/nep /+lar-lor/ler-lör/
Dative case +a/e /+a-o/e-ö/
Locative case +fla/fle /+da-do/de-dö/
Ablative case +flan/flen /+dan-don/den-dön/
Equative case +>«Aıe /+ca-co/ce-cö/
Companion suffix +flaın/fleuı /+das-dos/des-dös/
Verb-forming suffix +na/ne- /+la-lo-/Ie-lö-/
Definite future -^an/açeK /-jak-jok/jek-jök/
1 singular imperative -atom/ettHH /-aym-oyun/eyin~öyün/
1 plural imperative -aJitm/eHHH /-alı: 13—olı: rj/eli :rj—ölü:rj/
3 conditional -ca/ce /- 0a- 0 o/0e- 0ö/
Past participle -aH/eH /-an-on/en-ön /
 Orthography 83

Suffixes Written With Four Variants in Closed Second Syllables

1 singular possessive +HM/HM/yM/yM /+un/im/um/üm/
2 singular possessive +fcm/Hn/yû/YH /+ırj/İJG/ux]/ürj/
3 possessive +M/H/y/y /+1/İ/U/Ü/
Genitive case +tm/nK/yH/yn /+ırj/iq/urj/Ui]/
Association suffbc +ntnc/nHK/nyK/nyK /+lık/lik/luk/lük/
Privation suffîx +CBI3/CH3/Cy3/Cy3 /+0ıS/0i8/0u8/0ü8/
Passive voice -tuT/MJi/yn/yn- /-ıl/il/ul/ül-/
Reflexive voice -HH/HH/yH/yH- /-ın/in/un/îin-/
Cooperative voice -HUi/HUi/ynı/ym- /-ıs/is/uS/iis-/
Causative voice -flMp/fliıp/flyp/flyp- /-dır/dir/dur/dür-/
Gerund -wn/ym]ynj'{n /-ıp/ip/up/üp/
2 plural imperative -MH/mt/yH/yn /-1I]/İI)/UI]/ÜI]/
3 singular imperative -cbm /cH H /cyH /cyH /- 0m/0 m/0nn/0ün/
3 plural imperative -ctmnap/cHHnep, /-0mlar/0inler/,
-cyHJiap/cyHnep /-0unlor/0ünlör/

Suffixes Written With Twa Variants in Closed Tfıird+ Syllables

1 singular possessive + l im /hm /+ım-um/im-üm/
2 singular possessive +bIH/wil /+ıxj-ur)/iq-1ii]/
3 possessive + m /h /+ 1 -U /İ-İİ/
Genitive case +hmjmı
Ordinal numeral + w h » ; i>i/iih 5k;m /+ınjı-unjı/inji-ünjii/
Association suffîx +nwK/jnnc /+lık-luk/lik-liik/
Privation suffix +Cbl3/CH3 /+0ı8-0uS/0iS-0ü8/
Passive voice -mji/ hti- /-ıl-ul/il-ül -/
Reflexive voice -m h /hh - /-ın-un/in-ün-/
Cooperative voice - m u i /hui- /-ıs-us/is-üs-/
Causative voice -flblp/flHp- /-drr-dur/dir-dür-/
Gerund' -btnjm /-ıp-up/ip-üp/
2 plural imperative -h m jm /-ıi]-u rj/irj-üjj/
3 singular imperative -cmh /chh /-0 m - 0un/0in- 0ün/
3 plural imperative -cMHJiap/cMHJiep /-0 uılar- 0unler/,
/-0 inlor- 0ünlör/
84 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Suffbces Written With Two Variants in Open Last Syllable

3 possessive + w/ m /+ 1/İ-Ü/
Accusative case +bi/n /+ 1/İ-Ü/
Agent suffix + hmAm /+cı/ci-cü/
Attribute suffix + s n jjm /+ 11/ 1İ-Üİ/
Relation suffix +kli/kh /+kı/ki-kü/
Adverb-forming suffix +apw/epM /+an-orı/eri-örü/
3 past indefinite -m im /-dı/di-dü/
1 dual imperative -aiDbi/enii /-ah-olı/eli-ölü/
3 subjunctive -cafltı/ceflM /- 0adı- 0odı/0edi/- 0ödü/
3 possessive verbal noun -actı/ecH /-a6ı-oQı/e9i-ö8ü/

Suffbces With Long Vowels Written wiıh al 3 la:lâ:l or ulu l+ı:l+i:l

Relation suffix +flaKL[/fl3KJl /+da:kı/dâ:ki/
Comparadve suffix +paK/p3K /+ra:k/ra:k/
Approximation numeral +nan/nan /+la:p/lâ:p/
Approximation numeral +JlaH/lI3H /+la:n/lâ:n/
3 present indefinite -ap/üap /-ya:r/yâ:r/
Infinitive in dative case -Mara/Msre /-ma:ga/ma:ge/
Present participle -HH/ÖSH /-ya:n/yâ:n/
Negative gerund -MaH/MSH /-ma:n/mâ:n/
3 desiderative -aflflbi/seflH /-a:yadı/a:yedi/
Suffix of permission -afi/aü /-a:y/â:y/
Instrumental suffix +MH, +HH /+ı:n/, /+i:n-ü:n/
Directive suffix +MK, +IİK /+ ı:k/, /+i:k-ü:k/
1 plural imperative -ajdbm/ejntH /-alı:ıj-oh: xj/eli: rj—ölü: r)/

Consonant Assimilations
The Standard assim ilatio n s o f con son an ts th at o c c u r in m ost d ialects and are p rescrib ed
fo r th e Standard sp o k e n la n g u a g e are n ot rep resen ted in th e vvriting system (se e 63-64).
Some o f th e p h o n e tic a ssim ila tio n s th at o c c u r a t th e ju n c tu re b e tw e e n s y lla b le s o f
vvords (Kenöe /kep be/ [kep p e] 'h u t', flenaep /depder/ [d ep ter] 'n o te b o o k ', n eıcra
/pökgü / [p ök kii] 'b a ll') are n o t rep resen ted in vvriting, a lth o u g h th e Standard la n g u a g e
h as adm itted se v e ra l su ch assimilated fo rm s.3

3 See MapuapoB 1973: 209.

 Orthography 85

*usıa) m a s t e r
y c c a /u 0 0 o / (< x a c c a /h a 0 0 a / ( < * hasta) s ic k
MiııeuHMp /i-.seîjrjir/ ( < *i:seygir) a c t iv is t a n n a ı ı /a g g a l/ ( < *ar)gat) s c y th e
TyM M eK /tlîm m ö k / ( < *ıümbek) m o u n d ryM M e3 /g ü m m ö S / ( < *gümbez) dom e

The rule of consonant voicing betvveen vovvels for the most part is represented in the
writing system (see 65-68). Exceptions are confined to bonowed vvords, some of vvhich
may be pronounced without consonant voicing by some speakers.

M arayM ara /maglu:ma:dı/ its infoımation

3fle6 nHTtı /edebiya:dı/ its literatüre
xeKVMeTH /hökiimödü/ its government
33ieTHU /eSyedii)/ your torment
KaHarara /kana:gadı/ her/his patience
ra3eTH /gaSedi/ its nevvspaper
ÖHJieTiın /bildijj/ your ticket

Occasionally, "correct" spellings of such words appear in various publications; for

example, 3 fle6 n flH b i /edebiya:dı/.
86 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

The "New Turkmen Alphabet"

In keeping with other steps to remove the legacy of Soviet policies that superficially
"Russianized" the Turkmen language, the Turkmen government has adopted a new
alphabet to serve a s the graphic basis of Standard Turkmen. According to a decision
ratifıed by the Turkmen Parliament in April 1993, the current Cyrillic alphabet will be
replaced by one based on Latin letters.4
Official plans adopted in June 1993 called for full implementation of the "new
Turkmen alphabet" by the end of 1996, but in practical terms this process may take
years to complete. In order to make the public aware of the new alphabet, the Turkmen
government began to introduce it on Street signs, names of buildings, newspaper
headings and the new currency. Turkmen State television began to offer elasses on the
new writing system, and the Ministry of Education introduced the new seript in the
first grades of primary schools and printed some new textbooks in this alphabet.
The new Turkmen alphabet marks a departure from the past, rather than a
continuation or reform of the "Unified Turkic Latin Alphabet" used to write Standard
Turkmen and other Turkic languages in the years 1928-1940. This is evident in the
modified forms of a number of letters which were not used in that alphabet.
The majority of the thirty letters in the new alphabet are identical in shape and
sound to their counterparts in the Latin alphabet as it is used to write several European
languages. Of the nine letters for vowels, five (a, e, i, o, u) are identical, three (â, ö, ü)
have familiar diacritics, and one (y = /ıf) is a known spelling convention. Of the
twenty-one letters for consonants, sixteen (b, d, f, g, b, j, k, 1, m, n, p, r, s, t, w, z)
are identical, three (ç = /c/, ş = /s/, ? = /z/, ii = /q/)s have familiar modifications, but
one (capital ¥, lower case y = /y/) is highly unconventional. Apart from the confusing
use of y for /i/ and y for /y/, the proposed new alphabet has a routine appearance.
The orthography of the "new alphabet," as represented thus far in publications, does
not deviate from the orthography of the current Turkmen alphabet. Therefore, the Latin
letters of this alphabet essentially constitute a transliteration of their Cyrillic
counterparts.

4 See CeeroB-Pe^e6oB 1993 for documentation on the adoption of the new alphabet, along with îessons
and sample texıs.
5 At the time of its initial promulgation in 1993, the new alphabet used the "dollars and cents* signs for
Capital and lower case /s/ and the "pound” signs for pzj (CeeroB-PeaçeÖoB 1993: 14, 27). These were
changed to ş and %in early !995.
 g r a m m a t ic a l Sy s t e m

The description of Türkmen grammar presented here is based on the analysıs of words
and the elements which create new words or relate them to one another within a
sentence. Those elements or forms which may be analyzed as expressing distinct lexical
or grammatical meanings commonly are called morphs, and their analysis is refeıred to
as morphology. As an iliustration, in English 'cats' and 'birds', the elements 'cat' and
'bird' have lexical meanings, while the element V indicates a plııral number. Ali three
elements may be called a morpheme because they consist of sounds or phonemes that
distinguish a grammatical meaning. The morpheme (s) is pronounced differently in
each word, as /s/ after the voiceless consonant /t/ and as /z/ after the voiced consonant
/d/. The description of such altemant pronunciations belongs to Morphophonology (see
47-72).
At the same time, in English 'mouse' and 'mice', we fînd a second way to express
the grammatical category of plural number in English, that is, through the replacement
of the diphthong /ou/ vvith the diphthong /ai/. This means that the English plural
morpheme has at least two variants or allomorphs: {s} and {ai}. Such an analysis also
may be perfoımed on the structure of vvords as they appear in dictionaries; for example,
the English adjective 'mousey' is formed by adding the lexıcal morpheme {y} to the
noun 'mouse' (cf. 'mud' > 'muddy', 'meal' > 'mealy', ete.), and the English noun
'mouser' is formed by adding the morpheme {er} to the homonymous verb '(to)
mouse' (cf. '(to) erase' > 'eraser', '(to) build' > 'builder', ete.).
The same principles of analysis are follovved in this reference grammar, but the
terms root or stem and suffix or prefix are used instead of the term morpheme. As an
iliustration, the Turkmen lexical morpheme {göz} 'eye' is called a root or stem when
grammatical or lexical suffixes are added to it; for example, /gözlör/ 'eyes', /gözlü/
'having eyes'. The Turkmen grammatical morpheme {1ar} is used to express the
grammatical category of plural number, but is called the plural suffix, and its
pronunciations /lar, 1er, lor, lor, nar, ner, nor, nör, Sar, Ser, Sor, Sör, ete./are referred to
as variants of the plural suffix. In the same way, the Turkmen lexical morpheme {lı} is
used to form adjectives from nouns and other adjectives, but is called the attribute
suffix, vvith its variants /lı, li, lü/. c
The distinct forms that express grammatical meanings are treated in this part of the
reference grammar, vvhereas those that express lexical meanings are presented in the
Lexicon.
88 Tuıkmen Referenee Grammar

INTRODUCTİON

This introduetion presents an overview of the structure of Türkmen vvords according to

their use as parts of speech and to their structure. Only brief deseriptions and a few
examples are provided, but references are given to those chapters where these subjects
are treated in greater detail.

Parts of Speech
Words may be divided into elasses according to their fonns, meanings and funetions
vvithin sentences. Most ciassifications of English vvords recognize articles, nouns,
pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjeetions as
distinet parts of speech, vvhile some add determiners or various other elasses.
Based on their forms and meanings, Turkmen vvords may be classified into nouns,
adjectives, quantifiers, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, modal vvords, interjeetions,
postpositions, auxiliary nouns, and conjunctions, vvhile particles constitute a distinet
elass. O f course, other ciassifications are possible.

Content Words
From the vievvpoint of their funetion, vvords may be divided into content vvords and
structure vvords. Content vvords are those vvhich have a meaning when they appear
alone, even vvhen their meaning derives solely from context (for example, T en.' in
response to the question 'How many fingers do you have?'). On the other hand,
structure vvords typically do not have an independent meaning. Content vvords inelude
the nouns, adjectives, quantifiers, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, modal vvords and
interjeetions.
Nouns name people, places, things, abstraetions, and so on. In Turkmen, nouns
exist as simple and derived vvords, and also as compound and combined vvords (see
97). Nouns do not have special shapes or elements that identify them as such, but
nouns and some other parts of speech may take number, person and case suffîxes. In
addition, certain derivational suffixes appear only vvith nouns.

3Ji /el/ hand, hands en /yo:l/ road

3J1HHK /ellik/ gloves enflaıu /yo:llos/ companion, mate
othtjihk /elya:glık/ handkerchief ejı6aıum,ı /yo:lbascı/ leader

Adjectives attribute qualities of color, shape, size, emotional characteristics, and so

on, to nouns. In Turkmen, adjectives do not have a distinetive marker and do not take
number, person and case suffixes, although certain lexical suffîxes appear only vvith
them (see 143). They precede the vvords they modify, but do not shovv agreement in
number. Adjectives also may appear as predicates of sentences.
 Grammatical System 89

6ynyrnH xoB a /bulutlı howa:/ cloudy weather

XoBa 6 ynynn,ı. /Howa: bulutlı./ The weather is cloudy.

Numerals as well as pronouns for 'ali', 'some' and 'none' deteımine the q»antity of
persons, places, things, and so on, and thus may be called "quantifiers." Türkmen
quantifiers behave as adjectives in appearing before the nouns they quanti::y and in
lacking agreement in nıımber (see 151). Quantifıers are distinguished only by their
lexical meanings and functions within a sentence, although ordinal numerals have a
special marker. Numerals and quantifying pronouns cannot be formed from other parts
of speech.
hkh /iki/ tw o h km id ^ m /ikinji/ secon d
x e p aflaM /her a:dam / e v e ry person xhm xa*ıaH /hi:c hacan/ n ever

Pronouns substitute for nouns and adjectives except that they do not rııme the
persons, things, qualities and so on. Türkmen pronouns are distinct lexical items, and
include personal, demonstrative, reflexive and interrogative pronouns (see 181).
Türkmen lacks distinct words for Tıe, she, it'. Instead, it expresses ali of these vvith the
third person pronoun on /ol/. The reference must be determined from other t/ords in
the sentence or from context. Most, but not ali pronouns may take number, person and
case suffixes.
MeH /men/1 6y /bu:/ this H3Me? Aıâme?/ what?
6 h 3 /biS/ w e 63 /ö:6/ s e lf khm? /kim ?/ w h o ?

Verbs typically are the words that convey the action of a sentence. Turkırun verbs
include both simple and derived verbs, as well as compounds consisting of nouns and
auxiliary verbs (see 209). Formally, a verb may be distinguished by the facı that its
root or stem functions as the informal or second person imperative. In additicn, verbs
may take tense/aspect, mood and personal suffîxes.
iiopMeK /görmök/ to see repeııiMeK /görösmök/ to struggle
Fep! /Gör!/ See! Tepem! /Görös!/Fight!
roBtı repMeK /gowı görmök/ to like repeıu 3Tmck /görös etmek/
j to struggle

Ad verbs associate qualides of manner, degree, and so on, with verbs, adjectives and
other adverbs. Türkmen adverbs lack distinctive formal markers, but they always
precede the words they modify (see 359).
r a r a rw 3raH /gatı gıSgm/ extremely hot
epeH aKtınnbi /örön akıllı/ very intelügent
MeH muHMH SyTHHJiei} ryTapflUM. /Men i:simi bütü:nlöy gutordum./
I have completely finished my work.
90 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Modal words express the speaker’s attitude and emotional stance toward statements,
ranging from affîrmation and negation to certainty and supposition. Turkmen modal
vvords have distinguishing lexical meanings, but no other formal markers (see 377).
Bap. /Ba:r./ Yes, there is. E k . /Yo:k./ No, there is not.
3n6eTfle. /Elbetde./ Certairily. EenKM. /Belki./ Perhaps.

interjeetions are utterances that express basic feelings or reactions tovvard a statement
or circumstances. Formulaic greetings and the like also may be called interjeetions.
Türkmen interjeetions are distinet lexical units that lack formal markers (see 403).
Bax! /VVah!/Aw! (regret) CanaMÎ /0ala:m!/ Hi!
Be! /Be!/ Wow! (wonder, disgust) Car 6 on! /0ag bol!/ Bye!

Structure Words
Structure vvords are those vvhich gain a meaning when they appear with other vvords. In
Turkmen, structure words are the postpositions, auxiliary nouns and conjunctions.
Turkmen postpositions form a part of speech that is equivalent to English
prepositions which express relationships betvveen parts of a sentence. Turkmen differs
from English in that postpositions are placed in the position after (post-) the nouns
they are related to rather than before (pre-). Postpositions do not have distinetive
formal markers (see 405). Auxiliary nouns properly are content words, but their lexical
meanings are connected vvith position and express relationships in space like those of
English prepositions (see 427).
floc-ryM 6nJien /do00um bilen/ with my friend
AMBffleps 6oıoHfla /Amıderya: boyunno/ along the Amudarya
Meran antiHfla /menig yatnınna/ beside me

Conjunctions join two or more vvords, phrases or sentences together. The majority
of Turkmen conjunctions are distinet vvords borrovved from other languages and their
use tends to be confined to vvriting and formal speech (see 433).
3MMa /emma:/ but Be /we/ and
MyHKM/çünkü/ because 3 rep /eger/ if

Particles
Particles are one- or two-syllable elements that are added to vvords to express the
speaker’s attitude and feeling about a statement. Such nuances of mood range from
assertion to confirmation. Most Turkmen particles share characteristics with suffîxes,
and a [ew appear as separate elements (see 457).
KeÜHera ra su n . /Köynögü gıSıl./ Her dress is red. [statement of fact]
KeÜHera r-bratmntıp. /Köynögü gıSıllır./ Her dress is red. [confirmation]
 Grammatical System 91
O

Word Structure
From the point-of-view of their structure, Türkmen words may be regarded as simple,
derived or combined. Except for verbs, which are cited vvith the infinitive suffix
(-MaK/MeK /-mak/mek/), this shape is the foraı in vvhich they appear in a dictionary.
Turkmen words are composed of roots or stems to vvhich may be added one or more
elements that are called "suffîxes" because they are attached after (sttf-fıx) as opposed to
before (pre-fix) or within (in-fix) the word. Each suffix typically has a single meaning
and cannot occur alone. its meaning may be lexical in the sense of forming words vvith
nevv meanings (lexical suffixes like +jıtı /+lı/ in ay 3 /ibi /du:Slı/ 'salty' < Ay3 /du: 8/
'salt'), or grammatical in the sense of marking the functions and relationships of vvords
vvithin a phrase or sentence (grammatical suffixes like +fle /+de/ in Kenene /köcödö/
'in the Street' < Kene /köcö/ 'street').
The root of a noun, verb or other part of speech is its most basic element vvhich
carries its primary lexical meaning. The root may serve as a part of speech by itself
(simple noun, verb, ete.), or as the basis from vvhich a vvord vvith a nevv meaning is
formed through the addition of lexical suffixes (derived noun, verb, ete.) or through its
combination vvith another root or stem (combined noun, verb, ete.).
The stem of a noun, verb or other part of speech is that element- vvhether equivalent
to a root or to a derived form of the root or a combination vvord- to vvhich grammatical
or further lexical suffixes are attached (see belovv), or vvhich forms combinations vvith
other roots or stems.

Simple Words
In Turkmen, simple vvords may consist of a single syllable and be nouns, adjectives,
quantifiers, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, modal vvords, interjectıons, postpositions and
conjunctions.
flauı /da:s/ stone Ken /köp/ much
aK /a:k/ vvhite 6 ap /ba:r/ there is
6 am /bâ:s/ fiv e Baıc! /Wa:k!/Ow!
6 m3 /biS/ vve co h /Sor)/ a fter

rırr(M eK) /git(m ek)/ (to) g o Be /vve/ and

A few tvvo-syllable Turkmen vvords vvhose second syllable is not a recognizable

suffıx also serve as simple vvords.
araM/agac/tree r o B tı /govvı/ g o o d
rapa(M3K) /gara(mak)/ (to) look Mepe(MeK) /yörö(mök)/ (to) vvalk

In addition, Turkmen vvords borrovved from other languages may have two or more
syllables, but also may be regarded as simple vvords: KHTan /kita:p/ 'book' (Arabic),
Mauıuıı /masırn/ 'car' (Russian), «})0T0 rpacJj /fotoğraf/ 'photographer' (Russian).
92 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Derived Words
Derived words are composed of roots plus one or more suffixes whose forms are
distinct and whose lexical meanings are recognizable. When lexical (or grammatical)
suffixes are added to a root, it may be called a stem.

Root Stem
r©3 /g ö 8 / e ye IB 3/göS/ eye
(n oun root: r e 3 /gö8/) (noun stem: r e 3 /göS/)
re3CY3 /gö 00ü8/ blind
(noun stem: r e 3 c y 3 /gö00U8D
re3JieM eK /göSlömök/ to look for
(verb stem: reane- /gö81ö-/)

repMeK /görm ök/ to see repM eK /g ö rm ö k / to se e

(verb root: r e p - /gör-/) (ve rb stem : r e p - /gör-/)
repyH M eK /görünm ök/ to appear
(ve rb stem : rep yH - /görün-/)
r e p e n /görö£/ p u p il ( o f e ye )
(n oun stem : T ep en /göröc [)

The addition of suffixes such as those in the above examples affects the meanings of
the vvords themselves, and not (vvith a fevv exceptions) their relationship vvith other
words that are components of a phrase or sentence. For that reason, they are called
lexical suffixes (see 517).

Combined Words
Compound, combination and other types of words act as vvords in the same way as
sünple and derived words (see 506). True compounds represent the fusion of two vvords
and their meanings into a word vvith a nevv reference; for example, flysTopöa
/du:Sto:rbo/ 'salt shaker' (< ny3 /du:8/ + T o p ö a /to:rbo/ 'salt sack'), Keımeöaın
/kepcebas/ 'cobra' (< Keıme /kepçe/ + 6 am /bas/ 'spade head'), and others.
Combination words also may be treated as whole words with distinct meanings
based on their components; for example, o t - h Hm /ot-iym/ 'fodder' (= o t /ot/ 'grass' +
mİİm /iym/ 'food'), aiium - 6 epnm /alıs-beris/ 'trade' (= an uın /alış/ 'taking' + 6 epıım
/beris/ 'giving'), c y B - n y B /0uw-puw/ 'vvater and such' (cy B /0uw/ 'water' + rhyming
pair-vvord n yB /puw/), and others.
Türkmen words also may be formed by other means. For example, rednplicated
vvords contain two components, the first or second of which partially or fully repeats
elements of the other component (for example, an-aK /ap-a:k/ 'snow vvhite' < a n /a:k/
'vvhite'). These and other cases are discussed in the Lexicon (see 510).
 Grammatical System 93

Words and Grammar

Many grammatical meanings are expressed through the forms of vvords, eitheı in their
simple, derived or combined forms, or in their grammatical forms. Grammatical
meanings may be grouped into grammatical categories, many of vvhich are expressed by
adding grammatical suffixes to words.

Grammatical Suffixes
When words appear in phrases and sentences, they form relationships vvith other vvords
and components in order to express grammatical meanings. The grammatical funetions
of Turkmen words within phrases and sentences are indicated by adding sul'fixes to
them. These endings are called grammatical suffixes because they add grammatical
meaning or establish the relationships of words to one another as members of phrases
and sentences, but they do not change the Iexical meanings of the vvords. Such ;uffrxes
indicate number, person, case, tense, aspect, mood and other grammatical categories.

Lexical Meaning Grammatical Meaning

Hin /i:s/ work Hiu+fle /i:s+de/ at vvork (locative)

HiuneMeK /i:slemek/ to work Hurjıeiısp /i:sleya:r/ s/he works
mu™ /îrsci/ worker humh Hiunetop /i:sci i:sleyâ:r/
the worker works

In addition to using grammatical suffixes, Turkmen expresses the meanings of

various grammatical categories through vvord order and other means such as
compounding, verbal constructions, and the like.
Turkmen grammatical suffixes added to nouns express only one grammatical
funetion; for example, the accusative case suffix +bi/n /+ı/i/ marks only the ıJefinite
object of a sentence (and not its number, person, and so on).
On the other hand, most grammatical suffixes added to verbs refer to several
grammatical categories; for example, the suffîx - u h / h h /-ın/in/ marks the sin g u la r
number and first person, as opposed to the suffix -bic/nc /- 10/İ 0/ vvhich marks the
plural number and first person in tense suffixes (rejıü a p n H /gelyâ:rin/ 'I go' vs.
re jıtiap u c /gelyâ:ri0/ 'we go'). Indeed, it is a convention to çite verb tense suffixes
according to their third person singular form; for example, the past indefinitf: suffix
-Atı/flH /-dı/di/ is the same as its third person singular form.
Despite their expression of several categories in one form, Turkmen gram raaticai
suffixes retain their basic forms because their vovvels do not change to expres; those
categories, as in English (for example, number in 'mouse-mice', tense in 'ruıı-ran',
ete.).
94 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Grammatical Categories
The various ways in vvhich vvords relate to and depend on one another vvithin a phrase
or sentence may be described in teıms o f grammatical categories. Such categories
indicate whether a word has one or more references (number), distinguishes between
speaker and those spoken about (person), marks the relationship of one noun or phrase
to another noun or phrase (case), specifies the time of an action or State expressed by a
verb (tense), expresses the duration of an action (aspect), reflects the attitude of a
speaker toward an action or State (mood), or makes other distinctions. While
grammatical categories are the same for ali languages, a given language expresses each
of them in its individual fashion.
Turkmen nouns may have inherently collective (cy Ü T /0ii:t/ 'milk') or fixed (rhdi
/di:s/ 'tooth, teeth') references, but most are inherently singular in number and may be
made plural through the attachment of the suffix +jıap/jıep /+lar/ler/. In addition,
Turkmen possessive suffixes and pronouns exist in singular and plural forms (for
example, + u m /h m /+ un/im/ 'my' vs. +HMM3/HMH3 /+ımı8/imi8/ 'our', and M eH
/men/ T vs. 6 m /biS/ 'we'). Verb suffixes also exist in singular and plural forms that
usually differ for each person (see 214).

Tw3nap rMTOH(nep). /Gı:81ar gitdi(ler)./ The girls left.

T£>!3Jiapw repnynep. /Gı:51an gördiilör./ They saw the girls.

Turkmen indicates first, second and third persons in the pronouns, as well as in
nouns by adding possessive endings and in verbs by adding personal endings.

n>i3 /gı:8/ d au gh ter rtrafciM m y d au gh ter

eü /öy/ house enyn /oyüıj/ your house (singular)
KHTan /kita:p/ book KirraStı /kita:bı/ her/his book
OKaMaK /okomok/ to read OKafltrM . /Okodum./1 read. (past)
SepMeK /bermek/ to give BepflHU. /Berdii)./ You gave. (singular past)
mTMeK /gitmek/ to go I htuk. /Gitdi./ He/she/it went.

Turkmen expresses five cases by means of suffixes and a sixth by the lack of a
suffix. The nominative case (without suffix) marks the subject, either indefinite or
definite, while the accusative case marks only the definite object with a suffuc (+tı/n
l+ı/İD. The genitive case indicates the possessor of a thing, person or action, and is
marked by a suffuc (+mh/hh /+ıi]/ii]/) only when possession is definite or specific. The
dative case indicates purpose or direction tovvard a goal and marks the indirect object of
a sentence with a suffix (+a/e /+a/e/). The relationship of an action to a place or time is
indicated by the locative case (suffîx +nalne l+da/de/), while direction away from the
source of a quality or an action is indicated by the ablative case (suffix +H'aH/p(eH
/+dan/den/).
 Grammatical System 95

KHTan rbi3biKntı. The book is interesting.

/Kitâ:p gıSıklı./ [nominative case-subject]
KHTan oKaap. He’s reading a book.
/Kita:p okoya:r./ [accusative case-indefinite object]

KüTafibi OKafltı. She read the book.

/Kita:bı okodı./ [accusative case-defînite object]
Oııyn Kjrra6ı,ı n>i3Hioıw. His book is interesting.
/Onur) kita:bı gıSıklı./ [genitive case]
ÎK,opactiHa KHTa6tı 6 epflH. She gave the book to her friend.
/To:ro0uno kita:bı berdi./ [dative case]

K nT anxanaaa KirraStı oKafltı. He read the book at the library.

/Kita:pha:nada kita:bı okodı./ [locative case]
KHTanxaHaqaH KHTa6u She got the book from the library.
/Kita:pha:nadan kita:bı allım./ [ablative case]

Türkmen expresses past, present, and future tenses of verbs through the addition of
suffixes (see 217). Ali of these suffixes also inherently express the aspects of indefinite,
continuous or perfect duration of action; for example, the past indefinite (-/j m / r u
/-dı/diD, past continuous (-HpBbi/MapnH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/) and past perfect (-u rm u /
unun /-ıpdı/ipdi/) tenses.

On OKaflH. /Ol okodı./ She read.

On OKaapflii. /Ol okoya:rdı./ He was reading.
On OKarmtı. /Ol oka:pdı./ She had read.

Türkmen indicates the aspect of duration of action within the tense suffixes added to
verbs (for example, onap /oka:r/ in the following example), but also describes the
beginning, process, cessation and other characteristics of action through constructions
consisting of two verbs that may be called descriptive fonnations (see 311). The first
verb in such a formation indicates the main action (for example, onan /oka:p/ <
oKaıuaK /okomok/ 'to read' in the following examples), while the second verb
describes the action (for example, Gongu /boldı/ 'it became' = finished action in the
follovving example).
96 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Oji a p rn p Kirra6 H o K ap. He’ll read the book tomorrow.

/Ol erti:r kita:bı oka:r./ [indefinite aspect]

On Kirra6H o n a n ayp. She’s reading the book.

/Ol kita:bı oka:p du:r./ [continuous/regular action]

On KMTaöH oKan fionjjıj. He finished reading the book.

/Ol kitarbı oka:p bollı./ [finished action]

Turkmen expresses action in the indicative mood through the addition of tense
suffixes (for example, present indefinite -n p / to p /-ya:r/yâ:r/>, but also in the imperative
(for example, informal/plural command - m h /h h /-ırj/ir)/), conditional (-ca /ce /-0 a/6 e/),
subjunctive (-ca n u / ce flH /- 0adı/0edi/), desiderative (-a a jıu /a en H /-a:yadı/a:yedi/) and
other moods with suffixes for each of these (see 267). In addition, various kinds and
nuances of mood are expressed with modal formations, words and particles (see 301,
377, 457).

repMeıc /görmök/ to see (infinitive)

Oji repfop. /Ol göryârr./ He sees.
Tep! /Gör!/ See, look!
Tep YU-1 /Görü]]!/ Please see!
repee /gör0ö/ if she sees
repceflH /görâödü/ if he vvould only see
 NOUNS

Nouns are words that name people, places, things, phenomena, states, processe:,, ideas,
and so on. They may be grouped into nouns designating items and notions tha: may be
counted (couru nouns like 'apple', 'idea', ete.) and those that, typically, may not
because they designate some inherently indivisibie substance or notion (mas.; nouns
like 'water', 'happiness', ete.).
In general, Türkmen nouns behave as English nouns. They may funetion as nny paıt
of a sentence, that is, as subject, attribute, object or predicate.

SUBJECT

MeıgjeımeH nrrflH.
M y ra jijib iM
/Mugollum mekdepden gitdi./
The teacher left sehool.

ATTRİBUTE

By M y ra ju jb iM tın canatcnapu ru sb iıcn b i.

/Bu mugollumui) öapaklan gıSıklı./
This t e a c h e r ’s lessons are interesting.

OBJECT

MeH M y ra JiJifc iM u repflyM. /Men mugollumı gördüm./

I saw t h e t e a c h e r .

PREDİCATE

/Gurba:n mugollum./
T y p ö a n M y r a ju ıtiM .
Gurban is a teacher.
98 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Types of Nouns
According to their meaning and ııse, nouns may be grouped into common (aam /da:5/
'stone', aKMJi /akıl/ 'intelligence') versus proper (ry jı /gül/ 'Göl' [female name]),
3ftpan /Eyran/ 'Iran') nouns, and concrete (cyB /0uw/ 'water', MaıntiH /masx:n/ 'car')
versus abstract (caH / 0a:n/ 'number', yırnır /am vt/ Tıope') nouns. In structure,
Turkmen nouns may be simple (en /yo:l/ 'road'), derived from nouns or verbs (e m u
/yo:lcı/ 'road-worker') or combined with other words (enCaniMbi /yo:lba5cı/ 'leader' <
eii /yo:l/ + Banmu /basçı/ 'leader').

Simple Nouns
In Turkmen, simple nouns consist of one syllable and (when a root and suffîx are not
recognizable) two-sy!lables, or one or more syllables in the case of a bonrovved vvord.
Simple nouns express common (nar /da:g/ 'mountain', a c u p /a0ır/ 'century') and
proper (Ep /Yer/ 'Earth', M upaT /Mıra:t/ 'Mırat' [male name]) nouns, as well as
concrete (meM /sem/ 'candle', ryjıaK /gulok/ 'ear') and abstract (ott /o:y/ 'thought',
raxap /gahar/ 'anger') nouns.

Derived Nouns
Turkmen nouns also may be derived from other nouns (co 3 jıy K /0öSlük/ 'dictionary'<
C83 /0ö5/ 'word', huimm /i:§£i/ 'worker' < Mm /i:§/ 'work') or from verbs (ra n tı /gapı/
'door' < ran(Maıc) /gap(mak)/ '(to) close', 6 hximm /bilim/ 'knowledge' < 6 HJi(MeK)
/bil(mek)/ '(to) know') through the addition of lexical suffixes (see 518-526). Such
derived nouns express common/proper and concrete/abstract notions as well.

Combined Nouns
Many Turkmen nouns consist of compound (anKran /ayakga:p/ 'shoes' < aaK /ayak/
'foot' + ra n /ga:p/ 'sack') or combination (ru3-ornaH /gı:8-oglon/ 'children' < ru 3
/gı:S/ 'girl' + oriiaH /oglon/ 'boy') words (see 506-508). The latter type may consist of
two words of independent meaning ( a y s - T a r a M /du:5-tagam/ 'food' < ny3 /du:8/ 'salt'
+ Taraıu /tagam/ 'taste'), two words of vvhich one possesses an independent meaning
and the second is a partially reduplicated form of the first (nara-Myra /5a:ga-cu:ga/
liftle ones, children' < Hara /£a:ga/ 'child'), or two words neither of which either
occurs indenpendently or has an independent meaning (aübijj-catiujı /ayıl-9ayıl/
'clear', ceTaHna-cettpaHna /9eta:nna-0eyra:nna/ 'sometimes').
 Nouns 99

Grammatical Categories of Nouns

Türkmen nouns may express three grammatical categories through the addition of three
kinds of grammatical sufixes. These suffixes express the grammatical categories of
number, person and case. Number refers to the number of persons speaking, of persons
spoken to, and persons or items spoken about; person identifies the referenee of the
speaker to persons, things, states or aetions spoken about; and case relates nouns to one
another as parts of a sentence.

NUMBER Plural suffix xam>uıap /harlılar/ carpets

PERSON Possessive suffixes XaJILtHapi>IMM3

/ha:lılanmı5/ our carpets

CASE Case suffixes xanunapna /harlılarda/

on the carpets

These grammatical suffixeş each have a distinetive form and are added in a specific
order to the noun stem: number, person, case.

XajiE,ınapfciMbi3Aa.
/Ha:lılannu 68a./

Noun Number Person Case

x a jıtı -f-nap +BIMH3 +«a
/ha:h +lar -Hım5 +da/
carpet -s our on

It is on our carpets.
100 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Number
Number is a grammatical category that expresses the number of persons, places or
things, or eveff the number of speakers involved in a statement. Number may be
singular (one of something), dual (two and only two of something) or plural (two or
more of something).
The Turkmen language expresses singular and plural number in nouns. Without a
plural suffix, a Turkmen noun typically is singular. Moreover, some Turkmen nouns
are inherently singular because they designate items or places that are unique.

AmraöaT /Asgabat/ Ashgabat Mapc/Maıfl/ Mars

TypKMe /Türkiye/ Turkey TyH /Gün/ (the) Sun

Other Turkmen nouns may have an inherently plural meaning because they refer to
collectives or to items that come in pairs or sets, or they designate a whole that cannot
be divided into units or that cannot be counted more than once. These nouns include
names of body parts, articles of clothing, dry products, liquids, metals, grains, food,
fruit, berries, and various living or lifeless things.

arı /el/ hand, hands KSByuı /köwüs/ shoe, shoes

fly3 /du:5/ salt anı /y a :s/' tear, tears
yH /u:n/ üour cyB /0uw/ water
cyÜ T /0ü:t/ milk flauı /d a:s/ stone
öyrflali /bugdoy/ wheat fleMHp /demir/ iron
y3yM /ü8üm/ grape, grapes HeÖMT /nebit/ oil

Such nouns may be made concrete or divided into parts by placing an attribute
before them.
Hap3K,aH an a eT e reMeHflHTHHM öııımn, a m a K tı noflarbiHbi flHuuıeflH. (G)
/Narjan apa ötö ge£ennigini bilip, asa:kı do:dogum di:sledi./
Realizing that she had given away too much, Narjan-apa bit her lower lip.

Paired noun combinations express a general plurality of the corresponding paired

subjects, especially when preceded by an adjective or quantifier.

K en a a n -n ,i3 /köp a ya:l-gı:8 / m a n y w o m e n and girls

ÖHpHane orjıaH-rti3 /bim a:£e oglon-gı:8/ s e v e ra l b o y s and girls

Reduplicated words such as K3H /kan/ 'much' or M yaan /cuwol/ 'sack' denote an
indefinite plurality that can be equivalent to English 'a lot of'.
K3H-K3H ryppYH /ka:n-ka:n gü m iıj/ a lo t o f ta lk
M yBan-nyBan yH /£ uw o l-£ uw ol u:n/ a lo t o f flo u r
 Nouns 101

Plural Suffbc
In Turkmen, a plural noun or pronoun may serve as any part (subject, object, predicate,
ete.) of a sentence. The most common means of expressing the plural num :er is by
adding the plural suffbc +jıap/jıep /-flar/ler/ to a noun or pronoun.

Mhjdih flan-fleccypjıap 6 m m nporpaMMaMbi3bin 3 cactum a aypap. (N)

/Milli: dâ:p-de06u:rlor biSirj programma:mızır) e6 a:0ınna durya:r./
National traditions lie at the base of our program.

Tamım Ea6 axaH0 Bflartı

İIp a H M oM M afloB , fle p - n y ıiB i E a6 ax aH O B ,
aııcaM6 ntlMti3tın HJieHJiepH. (N) /Yaran Momma:dov, Dörtgulı Ba:baha:nov,
Tâ:sli Ba:baha:nov dağı anöamblımıSır] cilenleri./
Yaran Mommadov, Dörtgulı Babahanov, Tâshli Babahanov, and people like that,
are the members of our ensemble.

Marajıap 6 h3hh reJi*;eniMM3 axtıptı! (BG) /Ca:galar biSirj geljegimiz a:hm./

Children are our future, after ali!

On KacejıepM floımypfltı. (BG) /Ol kâ:6 eleri do:llurdı./

He filled up the bowls.

On artıp ryunep remtn rMTflM. (O) /Ol ağır güniör geçip gitdi/
Those difficult days did pass.

rynjıep rbicraıibin, rH*,e/ıep y3aap. (TP2.3) /Güniör gı:ögalıp gi:jeler u5cya:r./

The days are getting shorter, the nights longer.

When serving as the subject of a sentence, a noun without suffixes usually is

interpreted as singular and indefinite or definite. However, when serving as the object
of a sentence a noun vvithout suffıxes is singular or plural and indefinite.

KMTan rtBtncıibi. The book is interesdng.

/Kita:p gıSıklı./ ~ A book is interesting.

KüTannap rtrabiKnu. Books are interesting.

/Kita:plar gıSıklı./ ~ The books are interesting.

Kurran OKaaptm. I’m reading a book.

/Kita:p okoya:nn./ ~ I’m reading books.

KHTaıuıapu oKaaptm. I’m reading the books.

/Kita:plan okoya:nn./
102 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Unlike in English, the plural suffîx is not added to a Turkmen noun when it is
preceded by a numeral or by an indefinite pronoun in a fixed combination.

Mkh anaM H6epraı, 06a xa 6 ap 3T. (G) /İki ardam i:berip, o:ba: habar et./
Send two men and let the village know.

Yn ryH rence-fle, 3mpeT 06a flonaHMafltı. (TJ)

/Üc gün ge£0e-de, Esret o:ba: dolonmodı./
Although three days have passed Eshret has not retumed to the village.

ypyıu typantı öapu, 6 wp Tonap ryH rettnnlıjH. (BH)

/UruŞ turolı bâ:ri, bir topor gün gecipdi./
A lot of days had passed since the war began.

fl,HHe 6h3hh MeflHiınHa HHCTjnymMM3fla oKyBiıap ajrrbr ütiJi novau 3fliisp.

(TP12.3) /Dirje bi8ir) mediOina in0titutumu86o okuwlor altı yıl dowa:m edya:r/
Only in our medical institute do studies continue for six years.

Adding the plural suffix to a noun denoting a general category expresses a general,
uncounted number.

3 mm3 aflaMJiap O H yn r t r a M a u ı r a u ı ^ t f n . n a ı fle p p e B T a H a fltm a p . (G)

/Emma: ardamlar onuıj gı:5 masgaladıgmı derrew tanadılar./
But people understood immediately that this was a girl.

E a T tıp flb rp M ep T Jie p xeM x o b ii j ih s n n a f tn a p n a T a H a n a p . (G)

/Ba:tırdır mertler hem howp!ı yagdaylarda tanalya:r./
The heroıc and the brave are both recognized in times of danger.

3ne TonpaKÎ ATa BaTaıı! lOp-r! Ey 6 aKtun.in.iH euyTOe xeMMejıep fleiianp. (N)
/Ene toprok! Ata vvatan! Yu:rt! Bu ba:kılıgıi] örjiinnö hemmeler değdir./
Motherland! Fatherlandl Country! One and ali are equal before this etemity.

Hfy e p fle a x m TypKMenjıep Taüna-Tatina 6onyn amaımupnap. (TV 10.1)

/Su yerde â:hli türkmdnlör ta:ypa-ta:ypa bolup ya:sa:pdırlar./
Here, ali the Turkm en lived as dans and tribes.

3n6eıae, 6 y m r a otaaHHUitncntı arceK, xeMMejıepHrç 63x 6nflioıe 6 onap.

(TV12.4) /Elbetde, bu i:si oylonusukh e00ek, hemmelerii] bâ:hbi:dine bolor./
Of course, if we do this in a vvell-thought out way, it will be to the benefit of
everyone.

Some speakers may attach a plural to a noun designating a body part or a collective,
vvhile others may not. Such a case may occur in one and the same sentence.
 Nouns 103

AflaMJiaptm My3H YifrraifflH. (G) /A:damlanrj yüSü ü:tga:pdi./

The faces of the people had changed.

O rarun 6wp 6yp>ryHfla fty3H-re3H ennerom, neıcrejıepH, HOflaKJiapu rapa raH

6 ojmh rojK,a hkm 6yKYnHn orbipflH. (N) /Otogug bir burcunno yü8ü-göSü yellenip,
cekgeleri, do:dokIorx gara ga:n bolon gojo iki bükülüp otıtrdı./
In one of the comers of the room an old man whose face and eyes were swollen,
whose cheeks and lips were bloodied, sat bent över.

MeHe 6h3 ıusxep aflaMJiaptma ceperrceK, onna a3ax;MK YİhnreuiHK 3aT repyn
6nnepMC. (TV13.2)
/Yö:nö bi8 saher a:damlanna 0ere00ek, onno a:8ajık ü:tgösük 8a:t görüp bileriG./
But if we take a look at city people we can see then that some things are a little
different.

When attached to a noun denoting a liquid, plant product, metal, berry or the like,
the plural suffıx expresses the totality or whole complex of the homogeneous iteni.
Without the plural suffix, the noun indicates only a portion of the item.

3pTHp Hpflen MattnaptiHtı ıpmn yrpaMara X33Mp 6onflynap. (G)

/Erti:r i:rden ca:ylannı içip ugroma:ga hâ:8ir bollulor./
Having had their tea early in the moming, they were ready to start off. [sense: 'tea
and the things eaten with the tea']

IHom a ranna amıaK y^hh my BarrflaH epjıep 3Kuııre TaSap 6onMaın>r. (N)
fSonco galla almak ücü:n Su vvagtdan yerler ekiie tayya:r bolmoh./
To get such a yield the land should be ready for planting starting now.

By j w t h h h HcaMaK ym m h orçaT u c n u Be caranfliraçM omaptiH (SyanBiH, eB U ianıiH ,

amnaruH, 6eMneKnnepnn) s m b ip tm a ıı cyBnapu ynaHtmflH. (N)
/Bu icgi:ni yaOamak ü6ü:n oıjot ı:01ı we Oagaldıjı otlorurj (buyonur), yowsonur|,
yannagııg, beylekilerirj) yatınlan 0uwlon ulonullı./
W ater in which fragrant herbs (liquorice, absinth, cameltlıom, and such) were
placed was used to prepare this drink.

Bm3 Mat} mıifenMsK nanaB, ıuexnaT, rapa3, MftrM-HMrHncpfleH flYpnH-OTMeH 3aT

renim Gauuıaflbi. (TV16.2) /BiS ca:y icyâ:ncâ:k palaw, söhla:t, garaS, iygi-
icgilerden dürlü-dümön Sa:t gelip başladı./
While we were drinking tea, palaw, shöhlat [mutton dish], in a word, ali kinds of
food and drink started coming.

Ilarra SaaactiHfla narT ajıap ceprannı rypaflbmap. (TV7.3)

/Pagta baSa0mna pagtalar Gerilip gu:rodulya:r./
At the cotton collection point the cotton is spread out and dried.
104 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

The plural suffix +Jiap/nep /+lar/ler/ may intensify the meaning of a noun by
indicating that it has a repetitive nature; for example, 'colds' in the sentence below
signifies that repeated cold spells add up to severely cold weather.

TbnntiH coByKJiapHUfla 6y öaTrantiKJiap flonapfliinap. (G)

/Gısırj 6owuklorunno bu batgalıklar dorjya:rdılar./
In the severe cold of winter these bogs became frozen.

Iltmıtıpflamtın aniHiitaH i'YppYHJiep 6ynapı>ın reBHyHe apaMafltı. (G)

/Pısırdasıp edilyâ:n gürrürjlor buloruıj göwniinö yaramadı./
They didn’t like the whispering and talking going on.

Attaching the plural suffix to a sumame expresses the totality of family members
and the household associated with that name. The same meaning may be created by
attaching the plural to a noun belonging to a person.

Ü iirH aıc 6ojihh ep TypöaH aram ın eüJiepnHfleH 6np a3aagbtK aHbirpaKfltı. (G)
/Yıgnak bolyam yer Gurba:n a:gamıg öylörünnön bir a:8ajık acıgra:kdı./
The place where the meeting was taking place was a little bit farther from Gurban-
aga’s lıome.

“MeHHn BaTaHBiM T YpKMeHJicTaH11aTJU>ı caxbina#a Xo*aM6a3 3Tpa6Bnn.cn

BypflanHK o6acbinfla suııasiH Il0A0CHJibHHK0Bnapun Mauırajıacbi öapafla ryppyn
33Hnep. (N)
/'Menii) Watanım Türkniönü00a:n" a:tlı 0ahı:pada Hojomma:5 etra:bmıi] Burdoluk
o:bo0unno ya:saya:n PodoOiInikovlani] masgalaOı ba:rada gürrürj ediler./
On the page entitled "My Homeland is Türkmenistan," there’ll be a discussion
about the Podosilnikov family who live in Burdalık village of Hojambaz district.

Specific shades of meaning are created when the plural suffix is used vvith nouns
designating parts of the body or items associated with the body. Usually, this suffix
heightens the effect of expressions involving those body parts or other items that
commonly are not thought of as plural.

IIfoxflH-meKep flnjuıepflen ce3ne rapa re3 renıın. (G)

/5â:hdi-seker dillerden 0ÖSİÖ gara gö5 gelin./
Speak with a cheerfiıl, sweet tongue, black-eyed young vvoman.

Eteap 6aMbin caqnaptnn.ı yönıypıın, re3yHM TerejıeflaHflim t msjdimhm . (G)

/NaSar ba:yıq ©açlarını ir.sürüp, göSünü tegeleya-.nnigi mâılimdi./
One could sense that Nazar-bay’s hair vvas standing on end and his eyes were
becoming round. [sense: 'each hair on his head']
 Nouns 105

Addition of the plural suffîx to the end of reduplicated sets of vvords inıensifies
their inherent plural meaning.

xapMaa-xapMaH raByH -rapntranap /harm an-harm an ga:wun-garpı81ar/

piles of m elons and vvatermelons

A new meaning that includes the meanings of both nouns is created when the plural
suffix is attached to the second component of paired or redundant noun combıjıations
that denote general categories of items.

K p o B a n .m xeM y c r y u n e e p ra H -flc c tiK J ia p u p e ^ e n a n ro ü fly n a p . (G )

/Kerevvatırj hem ü06Unnö yorgon-ya09ıklan rejelâ:p goydulor./
And they also placed the bedding in proper order on the bed. ['covering(s) and
pillovvs']

When attached to a concrete, specific noun, or to a noun denoting an indissoluble

unit with a collective meaning, the plural suffix denotes an indefinite quantity.

MeMflaıuıap MHC-aq.mccı>i3 ıınnsn HTtıpfltınap. (G)

/Meydarnlar m0-jin00ı8 ii)lâ:p yatı:rdüar./
Fields lay sighing vvithout any sign of life.

flaıuapfla 6onca ra3aanap aTapbimpflbi. (G) /Dasarda bol0o ga:8anlar atarılyarrdı./

And outside, kettles were being set up.

Approximation may be indicated through the plural suffix. In such cases, the noun
to vvhich it is attached is understood as singular, but its occurrence is not specific.

By BarTJiap ryÜ3 aönaptiHbin öamjıapLiflbi. (G)

/Bu vvagtlar gü:8 a:ylanmi] başlandı./
This time vvas the beginning of the Autumn months. ['these times vvere ths
beginnings']

SMMaKbi con-conJiap KenyH cyBbi 6wp ryjtıpaT öHiıeH 6ynaın,m 6aıujıaHMbiuı.

(BH) /Emma:kı 0oi)-0or|lor kö:lür| Ouvvı bir gudrot bilen bulonup basla:nm ıs./
But then later on, by some povver, the vvater of the lake apparently started to mm
muddy.

MeH 6y aflaMbi e^jıep Ken re36K repyıiflitM. (BH)

/Men bu ardamı örjlör köp geSek göriipdüm./
I had seen this man many times before. [sense: 'at some previous time']
106 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

IIIojı epnepne repcenH3, HeMe, copanmuptm, S e n ıo M xyflaft 6apflbip-fla, öejncsM

Tantmctm-fla, xob. (TV13.3) /Sol yerlerde görf)ör)ü5, neme, 0o:rosdurur), belkâ:m
huda:y ba:rdır-da:, belkâ:m tapıl9mna, ho:w./
If you see him anyw here, you know, ask around, maybe there really is a god,
hey-maybe he really should be found.

E hshh nMKpMMH3Me, TypKMeH co3M 6H3HH 3paMti3bin 6 mphie«;h MYHfcmnbm.nn>rH

opTanaptum a, raKMtınan 1,5 Myn ütuı veMecst MyH/faH en 6onca repeK.
(TV13.5) /BiSirj pikrimiSce, türkmön 0ö8ü biSir] era:mı8ıi) birinji mürjyıllıgımi]
ortolorunno, takmı:nan 1,5 müıj yıl cemeOi munnon öi] Sıkan botöo gerek./
In our opinion, the word Turkmen probably evolved in the middle of the first
millennium A.D. or about 1.5 tlıousand years ago. [sense: 'somewhere in the
middle']

Forms o f the Plural Suffu:

Türkmen forms the plural number by adding the suffbc +jıap/jıep /+lar-lor/ler-lör/ to
the stems of nouns and some other parts of speech.
For paradigms of nouns with plural, possessive and case suffixes, see 576.
 Nouns 107

Person
Person identifies the person speaking or an associated item (first person singular), the
person spoken to or an associated item (second person singular), or the thing or person
spoken about or an associated item (third person singular). In the plural number, person
refers to the speaker and one or more other persons or item associated with them (first
person plural), the persons spoken to or an item associated with them (second person
plural), or the things or persons spoken about or an item associated vvith them (third
person plural).
Turkmen distinguishes first, second and third persons in both singular and plural
number in several ways. The indication of person in a sentence may be expressed
through personal pronouns, possessive suffixes, personal pronouns in the genitive case,
and/or personal endings added to verbs.

MeH T a n tm . /Men ta:lı:p./ l a n a student.

MeKfleöHM ynbi. /Mekdebim ulı./ My school is large.

MeHHH MeKfleöHM yjıtı. /Meniıj mekdebim ulı./ My school is large.
MeKfle6e rnqMspHH. /Mekdebe gidyâ:rin./ I go to school.
MeH MeKfleöe rHflftapMH. /Men mekdebe gidyâ:rin./ I go to school.

Possessive Suffuces
Turkmen indicates possession of a thing or action through the addition of possessive
suffixes that vary according to singular and plural, and to first ('my' and our'), second
('your') and third person singular and plural ('her/his/its' and 'their'). In the second
person, distinctions are made betvveen singular and plural, formal and informal, while
in the third person, the suffix is the same for both singular and plural.
The first person possessive suffixes (+ mm / hm /+ım/im/ and +m m m 3 / h m h 3
/+unı8/imi8/) indicate that a thing belongs to the person or persons speaking.

ranaMMM /galamım/ my pencii flocTyMbt3 /do:88umu8/ our friend

ry/ıyM /gölüm/ my flower flenjıepMMJO /depderimiB/ our notebook

A noun vvith a first person possessive suffix may function as the subject, object or
predicate of a sentence.

MeHHH mhhm my ifcuı yHHBepcMTeTM ıyrapap. (G )

/Meniıj inim su yıl univer8iteti gutoryarr./
My younger brother graduates from the university this year.
108 Türkmen Reference Grammar

CanaıcrıaptiMa KeMeK 6 epepB(H. (H) /©apaklanma kömök bererdi./

She used to help me vvith my lessons.

Yh MaraM 6ap. Yıibi orayM eüneneH, n.i3biMfc[ flypMyma iftncapnMM. (O)

/Uc ca:gam ba:r. Ulı oğlum öylönön, gr.Bımı durmuso çıkardım./
I have three children. My oldest son is married, I married off my daughter.

MHe uıy ajjaM 6jq h h y n tı floıcropuM ta. (G) /İne su a:dam biSirj ulı doktorumuS./
And this man is our great doctor.

- Konxo3tiMM3fla Yn MYHneH roBparayaK xojK,annrfciMti3 6 ap. (TP12.2)

/"KolhoSumuSSo üc müıjdön gowra:gJık hojolugumuS ba:r."/
"We have a bit better than 3,000 farms on our collective faım."

The second person possessive suffbces (+ u n lm \ /-4-ırj/irj/ and +bmbi3/nı<H3

/+ııgı8/ir)i5/) indicate that a thing belongs to the person or persons spoken to. Besides a
distinction between singular and plural (compare older English 'thine' and 'your'), the
usually singular suffix (+ mh / hh /+ırj/irj/) also may be used to refer infonnally to more
than one person.

ranaMHH /galamıi)/ your pencil flocTyuta /do:60ur)u5/ your friend

mumu /i:sixj/ your
work 3*;enM3 /ejerjig/ your mother

Nouns ending in the second person possessive suffix may serve as the subject,
object or predicate of a sentence.

Athhi eneH Sonca, on Hiuyjibi flHeHHn khm 6ojwp? (G)

/Ata: q ölörj bol0o, ol ya:sulı diyenii) kim bolya:r?/
If your faüıer died, who is that old man you’re talking about?

KaıcaM sadene ö y n e K coBcaHM SauıaTTbm MÖepflM. (G)

/Ka:kam ejeıje yüpök 0ow0onı basatgıc i:berdi./
My father sent your mother a silk fabric for a head coveıing.

-.Shkbi renim raaeH khm? - Oji cemin hiuhh asii, x,oBnyflan »ibik. (N)
/T aıjkı gelip giden kim?" "Ol Oenii) i:sii) da:l, hovvludon cık."/
"Who’s that vvho just left?" "It’s none of your business, get out of my yard."

MtıxMaHbin hht cyB HneHflHp eflMaıı. (TV 17.3)

/Mı:hma:mi) ci:g 0uw icennir ödyâ:n./
I think your guest must have drank some untreated water.
 Nouns 109

Ch3kh rynep üy3YH113 XMlJ Barr mchiih re3yMMH enY«fleH nrrMe3. (G)
/0İ5İI) gülör yüSüıjüB hi:c wagt menit) göSümüıj öıjünnön gitmeS./
Your laıighing face will never disappear from my eyes.

Eonsp, car 6onyn. X@KMaH roıonti3a BapaptiH. (N)

/Bolya:r, 0ag bolurj. Hökmarn toyui]u5o barann./
Goodbye, then. I’ll defınitely come to your wedding.

The third person suffix (+u / h /+ı/i/) is the same for both singular and plural and
indicates that a thing belongs to a person or persons spoken about. To dişti r.guish a
plural possessive 'their', the pronoun forms ojıapurç /olorur)/, uıojıapun /soiorur)/ or
m yjıapun /sulorurj/ 'their' may be placed before the vvord.

MaınuHU /masıtnı/ his/her car

onapiin MamtiHU /oloruıj ması:nı/ their car
MauiLiHJiapu /ması:nları/ her/his ears
o jıa p u H Maıubimıaptı /oloruıj m ası:nnan/ their ears

OHyn e t e /onug öyü/ h is/her h o u se

on ap bin eJİH /olorui) öyü/ their house
oHyn eÖJiepH /onug öylörü/ her/his houses
o jıa p b iH eftnepM /olorui] ö ylö rü / th eir h ouses

A noun ending in a third person possessive suffix may appear as the subject, object
or predicate of a sentence.

Pyxbi reTepRiiflH, ÜYperw xp u m u . (G) /Ru:hı götöriillü, yürögü jo:sdı./

His spirits were lifted, his heart was filled with joy.

AMaııtm ennaııuıapu önneH 6«ne yrpaMaftıibiHa OHyn 3»;ecıı tu o ^ a jıtiK c tı 3nanflfci.

(G) /Ama:nırj yorlloslon bilen bile ugromoysuno onur] eje0i ı:njalık0ı81annı./
A man’s not going off togedıer vvith his companions has his mother vvorrkd. ['his
not going off']

OHyn 6axactı söbUiMaımtıp. (G) /Onuq baha0ı yaSılmannır./

Ils price must not have been vvritten.

-EepeKennaî-flHİfaın, aflaMCtı rBirtıptmatıp. - JHııltMeK, cen omqa, 3*;eMMn

6ıi3KHKiifle HiuaMarbraa rapniH flan-R3. (N) /"Berekella:!," diyip, a:dam0ı
gı:gırıpdır. "Diymek, 0en onno, ejemirj biSirjkide ya:samagına garsı dâ:l-dâ:.7
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. "That means you really don’t mind my mother
living vvith us, then?"
110 Türkmen Reference Grammar

AMaHryn 3>se am.naiapi.iHa ryBaHap. (O) /Ama:ngül eje agtıklanna guwonya:r./

Amangül-eje is proud of her grandchildren.
MeH oHyn ca3biHa x ö k m 3 h (BH)
/Men onurj 0a:8ma hökma:n diisüna:ymeli./
Ht’s absolutely necessary that I understand his music.
BenKH, o jıa p tiH ce3uepnrçneH ry jıara n a sacantr 6onap. (G)
/Belki, olorurj 0ö8lörünnön gulogurjo yakam bolor./
Perhaps, there’ll be something pleasant for your ears in their words.
MeH o n a p t ın eityufle flH n .i-iltin .w a H öonapflbiM . (N)
/Men olorurj öyünnö yıgı-yıgıdan bolya:rdım./
I was at their house frequently.
Ch3 öspfle repÜ3nn3 onapun nara BamJHfla oMnasnı oiİHaBa>nıaptntti repifaiflö.
(TV13.3)
/0i8 bârrde göryâ:rjiS olorui] ca:ga wagtınna oynoya:n oynowa:clanıu görya:r)i5./
You see here, you see the toys with which they played in their childhood.
3 a T TeneM enH flan cy B ynMH. 3M M a u ıy cyB re m ıp e n jıe p n ynHH, u ıy jıa p t m
6 m TeneMenH 6onaptıc. (TV17.2)
Typ 6acb m a, ıpaH Tbm a, ın o n a
/8a:t tölömölü dâ:l 0uw ücü:n. Emma: su 0uw geçirenleri ücü:n, sulonır)
turbo0uno, kırantma, sorjo bi8 tölömölü bolya:n0./
We don’t have to pay a thing for vvater. But for th e ir bringing in this water, and
their pipes and th eir faucets, for this we have to pay.

Turkmen expresses 'to have' through a construction in which a noun ending in a

first or second person possessive suffix co-occurs with the modal word 6ap /ba:r/
'exists, there is/are' or its corresponding negative eK /yo:k/ 'does not exist, there are/ıs
not'. Literally, such a construction may be translated 'my (your, ete.) X exists' = 'I
(you, ete.) have', or 'my (your, ete.) X does not exist' = 'I (you, ete.) don’t have'.

By epfle 6H3HH :*;aMl>lMU3 6ap. (G) /Bu yerde biSig ja:yımı8 ba:r./
Here, w e h a v e o u r house.
- Cch n ypM yuıa HbiKflbiHMbi?- flHÖıın, on TynnapnaH copaflbi.
- Ü eH e eTeH ilt m attpbmbnıiflHK. Ce6s6H naraM bra eK^bi. (H)
/'0en durmuSo îıkdırjmı?" diyip, ol Gülna:rdan 0o:rodı.
"Cıkıpdım. Yö:nö ötön yıl ayrılısdık. 0ebâ:bi Sa:ga:mı8 yo:kdı."/
"Are you married?" he asked Gülnar.
"I was married. But last year we got divorced. The reason is we had no children."
- T o b m KapMU 6 ap, flepMaıtnH. (BG) /"Gowı kâ:riq ba:r, d erm a:ncı."/
'T o u h a v e a good profession, druggist."
 Nouns 111

Baranına Bejin, my ann>nDK,M ryH Mernm muihm 6ap, Saptın 6nn:*;eK flan.
(TV3.4) /Bağışla weli, sn altınjı gün menirj i:sim ba:r, banp biljek da:l./
Sorry, but Fm busy this Saturday, and I won’t be able to go. [1 have bıısiness' =
T m busy']

This same constıuction is used when a noun ending in the third person possessive
suffix +m/h /+ı/i/ enters into possessive relationship with a preceding noun or pronoun
ending in the genitive case suffix + tın/ hh /+li]/ir|/ (see 116).

0M secıtHHH Maflfltı Saöntıru 6ap, MeHe pyxtı Taüflan BenHH x;yfla raptm. (N)
/Öy eyeöinii] maddi ba:yhgı ba:r, yö:nö ru:hı ta:ydan weli:n juda: gan:p./
The home-owner has material wealth, nonetheless, he’s very poor from the
spiritual point-of-view. c

ByjıapflaH 6amra-fla MycyjiMaHUH 6ep»;aü stmcjim nap3napu öapfltıp. (TP 13.4)

/Bulordon basga-da mu9ulma:nııj berja:y etmeli parSlan ba:rdır./
Muslims also have other obligations they must fulfill besides these.

- UletaMH? CeHfloıptı 6HjrftopcnnMH ouyu 6apflbirbiHH? (TV17.5)

/'Seylemi? 0en dogn bilyâ:r9iıjmi onur) batrdıgını?"/
"Really? Do you know for certain that they have one?"

- Tapa3, x e p aflbin, aflaMbiH afliiH tıu aM , ui3X epnn aflbiHbinaM 6wp TapbiXbi
Öap-fla. (TV8.1)
/'Gara8, her a:dıi), a:damıi) atdınırjam, saherii] a:dmııjam birta:rı:hı ba:r-da:."/
'İn shott, every name, both a person’s name and a city’s name, has some history."

When a demonstrative pronoun (6y/my /bu:/su:/ 'this', on/nıoJi /ol/sol/ 'that')

precedes a noun ending in a possessive suffix, the most appropriate English equivalents
are 'this/that o f mine (yours, ours, ete.)'.

By nHKHpım roBbi mncHp. (G) /Bu pikirii) gowı pikır./

This idea of yours is a good idea.

Ouyu AMepHKa 6y canapbi Tapw xM c a n a p fliip . (N )

/Onui) Amerika: bu: 0apan ta:rı:hı 0apardır./
This trip of his to America is a historic trip.

Xep a » M en my * ,a iib iM a c t m h u i 6sm M aııaT T e n e ite H . (TV9.3)

/Her a:y men su ja:yıma yetmiş ba:s manat tölöyâ:n./
Each month I pay seventy-five manats for this place of mine.
112 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

By xaJlbiJiapuMH3 6H3fle enaeH 6spi(, actıpnap 6spıı floKamm renmı, 6m3HH 6y

3HenepMMH3flen, MaManaptLMBBflaH r a n a H 6 m s 6np 3n-xyHspn 6onap. (TV10.2)
/Bu ha:lılanmıS biS5e öıjdön bâ:ri, aöırlar bâ:ri dokolup gelip, bi5irj bu
enelerimiSSen, ma:malamm5San ga:lan bi5e bir el-hitaâ:ri bolya:r./
These carpets of ours have been woven among us since olden times, for
centuries, and have been left to us as a handicraft by our motheıs and
grandmothers.

Forms o f the Possessive Suffixes

Türkmen indicates the first person possessive by adding the suffix +um/hm /+ım-
um/im-iim/ to the stems of nouns in the singular and +mmli3/hmm3 /+ ım ı8 -
umu5/imi8-ümü8/ in the plural. The second person possessive suffbc is +uh/mk( /+ıi)-
ur)/ir)-üq/ in the singular, and +MHM3/HHH3 /+ıi}i8—ur|u8/irjiS— iirjtiS/ in the plural. In
contrast, the third person possessive suffbc is +bi/n /+ı-u/i-ü/ after words ending in a
consonant and + c m / ch /+0ı/0i-0ü/ after words ending in vowels for both the singular
and the plural. The element c /0/ appears only in this suffbc (see 69).'
The rules of Standard Turkmen orthography apply to the representation of long
vovvels that arise vvith the addition of the first and second person possessive suffbces
(see 56). When these suffbces are added to nouns ending in a/e /a/e/ or m/ h /ı/i/, these
final vovvels become long a/a /a:/a:/ or bi/n /ı:/i:/. With the addition of the third person
suffbc, these final vowels remain short.
When the first person plural suffbc is added to a front vowel word ending in the
letter M /y/, the vowel of the suffbc is dropped (not eftyMH3 /öyiimüS/, but ettıyıy3
/öymüS/ 'our home'). Although this spelling rule vvas not applied to the second person
plural suffbc, such forms appear by analogy to the first person plural (both etiynH3
/öyürjüS/ and eöny3 /öyrjüS/ 'your home' may be found).2
The partide xeM/-aın/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'too, also, and' frequently is placed after a
noun vvith a possessive suffix; for example, Men KaKaMaM /men ka:kamam/ 'my

1 Turkmen has several unexpected third person possessive foım s. The word aflaıncu /a:dam0ı/ 'her
husband' probably represents a contraction o f a double possessive *a:dam +ı+st, vvhich developed
över the course o f Turkmen language history. Because of the frequency of usage of an expression
like *a:damt 'her husband' in Turkmen society where wives often addressed their husbands by this
circumlocation, the form may have come to designate 'husband' by itself. This led to the new
formation with the third person possessive *a:damısı, later contracted to the present form (through the
vowel loss nıle, see 60). Several other words also show this exceptional feature, possibly as a result of
analogous developments: a rm a M C U /ağsamBı/ 'the evening before' (< *agsam +ı+sı), 6npcB /bir6i/
'someone' (< * b i:r+ i+ si), x a licu /hayBı/ 'which one' (< *hay+t+sı), xepcu /herfli/ 'each one' (<
*her+i+si).
2 This spelling rule appears to have been adopted as a concession to the Yomut component in the
Standard language, as the loss of the connecting vowel is typical only of the northem subdialect of
Yomut, the dialects o f Âısan, Gökleng, Sarık, Alili, Ânew and Karakalpakistan; see EepflHeB 1970:
241-242.
 Nouns 113

father, too' is a merged form from MeHHH KanaM xeM /meniıj ka:kam hem/. When
placed after -the third person possessive suffix, this suffix essentially "disiippears,"
making it difficult to recognize the possessive reiationship. The following t:xample
contains four such merged forms (o H yn KeınÖeıu /onurı kesbem/ < OHyn nem 6u xeM
/onurı kesbi hem/, KajıöaM /kalbam/ < (oHyıö Kajıöbi xeM /(onuıj) kalbı hem/, re3eıvı
/göSöm/ < (onyn) re3H xeM /(onurj) gö8ü hem/, Ky3eM /yüSöm/ < (onyn) ti \ 31ı xeM
/(onuıj) yüSü hem/:

AflaMHH lopflbi Hane re3en 6onca, 0Hyn KeıııGeM, K ajifiaM , My3eM, re3eM u ıo m a
3cce rs3ejı 6oJiap. (N ) /A:damııj yu:rdı nâ:ce göSöl bol0o, onur) kesbem, kulbam,
yüSöm, göSöm sonfio e00e göBöl bolya:r./
However beautiful is the country of a person, that’s how beautiful is h e r sotıl and
h e r h e a r t a n d h e r fa c e a n d h e r e y e s.

For paradigms o f nouns vvith plural, possessive and case suffixes, see 570, fi 75-576.
For the use o f the third person possessive suffîx + li/m /+ı/i/ in the possessive
reiationship, see 116-121.
114 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Case
The grammatical category of case expresses the relationships between parts of a
sentence, that is, between the subject, object, predicate, attribute and adverbiai
modifier. English has the vestige of a dative case in the pronominal form 'Whom?' that
indicates 'of who' or 'to who' ('Whom do you vvish to see?')-however, few speakers
actuaily use this form.
In contrast, five cases may be distinguished formally in Turkmen through the
addition of suffixes, while a sixth case (the nominative case) is distinguished by its
lack of a formal marker. Three of these cases (nominative, genitive, accusative) indicate
relationships between components of phrases or sentences, while three (dative, locative,
ablative) specify relationships in space and time between these components.

Nominative Case
The nominative case identifies the subject of the predicate of a sentence, and answers
the questions 'Who?', 'What?' and 'Where?' Turkmen does not add a suffix to the
nominative case. Because both subject and indefinite object lack a formal marker,
sometimes word order, context or other clues must be used to distinguish between the
two in a sentence (see 122).

O nap HMfliuıep. /Olor icdiler./ They drank.

~ Hmptnep. /~ İcdiler./ [subject]

Onap naft HMflMnep. /Olor ca:y icdiler./ They drank tea.

~ HaH MHHHnep. / - Ca:y icdiler./ [indefinite object]

The subject in the nominative case may be understood as either indefinite or definite
depending on the Iexical meaning of a word, the presence of attributes, or the context.
There may be one or more (homogeneous) subjects of a sentence.

Maranap 6 h3MH rera;erM M H 3 axb ipw ! (BG) /C atgalar biSii] g e ije g im iS a :h ın !/

Children are o u r future, after a lil [in d efin ite su b ject]
Anjınap KDpflaMaHtiH ettyHe nıpannep. (BH)
/Aya:llar Yu:rdoma:nıg öyünö girrdiler./
The women entered Yurdaman’s lıome. [definite subject]
E h 3 MaJÎ MMİİ3HM3K n a n a a , m o x n a T , r a p a 3 , n ü rn -n q rn J ie p fle H HYPJn*-OTMeH 3aT
rejiHn öauiJiafltı. (TV16.2) /Bi8 ca:y i£yâ:nca:k palaw, söhla:t, garaS, iygi-
icgilerden dürlü-dümön 8a:t gelip baSladı./
While we were drinking tea, palaw, shöhlat [mutton dish] in a word, ali kinds of
food and drink started coming. [homogeneous subjects]
 Nouns 115

When a noun appears as the predicate of a sentence, it also stands in the nominative
case.

3rep 6apcan, uıo Taöfla ranwm.ru ca m u c u MeHHH floranbiMflup. (G)

/Eger baı6ar), so ta:yda gapırmrj Oakcıöı meniıj dogonumdur./
If you get there, the guard at the door there is my brother.

XaKMKaTHaHaM, xeKyMflap caxbt aaaM. (N)

/Hakı:katdanam, hökümda:r 0ahı: ardam./
As a matter of fact, the sovereign is a generous person.

Bh3 6up ap3yBHHJi aftarmıap, msm anaıvuıap. (N)

/Bi6 bir ar5uwcul ardamlar, yaSyarn ardamlar./
We are a people full of fantasies, people who write.

When a speaker addresses another person, the name or proper name of the one
addressed stands in the nominative case.

AHxanbiM, MeH uıy suctiHfla oöaM boa n rra;e K . (G)

/Aryharnun, men su yakırnna orbarmıSa gitjek./
Ayhanım, Fil go to our village very soon.

C h 3 , H3U>K,binap, BaTaH flHeH nyftraHU flepeTMejiM. (N)

/9i8, yaSıjılar, Watan diyen duygırm dörötmölii./
You writers have to create the feeling called Homeland.

HeMen, MeH cöhh Ken Barrnan repMeflHM. (TV7.1)

/Ğemen, men 0eni köp wagtlarp görmödüm./
Chemen, I lıaven’t seen you for a long time.

Proper names may be followed by a noun in the nominative case that fuıther
identifıes the status, occupation or qualities of the person. These "sobriquets" are part of
the proper names and take possessive and case suffixes.

Typ6aH ysbm /Gurbarn-uSırn/ Tali Gurban

tîapbt ara /Carn-arga/Older Brother Chan
Te3en flafea /Gö8öl-day8a/ Aunt Gözel
Hypflbt cepflap /Durdı-Öerdarr/ Leader Durdı
MbipaT Ken /Mırart-kel/ Bald Murat
Perden HaMantHHK /Rejep-na£alnik/ Boss Rejep

Many nouns which form part of noun-plus-verb combinations stand in the

nominative case; for example, the compound agoran /Jogarp/ 'answer' and GepıvteK
116 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

/bermek/ 'to give' = 'to answer', or u ru m /yagıs/ 'rain' and a r a a K /yağmak/ 'to
precipitate' = 'to rain'.

reıiHH arnaK 6aıcun, oBaflaH KennecHHH hsotm cumcmı, OHyn coparnaptma agoran
GepiıapflH. (G) /Gelin asa:k bakıp, owodon kelle9ini nâ:Sli öilkip, onuıj
6o:rogloruno joga:p beryâ:rdi./
The young woman was answering his questions, looking downward and shaking
her pretty head flirtatiously.

By ftbuı nruuı Ken arRbi. (T) /Bu yıl yagıs kop yağdı./
It rained a lot this year.

Genitive Case
The genitive case identifies the possessor of a person, place, thing, action or State, and
answers the questions /Whose?/Of who?', 'What’s?/Of what?' and 'Of where?' When
the possessor is made specific, the possession is definite ('the cigarette’s smoke' or 'the
smoke of the cigarette'). When the possessor is not further identified or specified, the
possession is indefinite ('cigarette smoke' or 'smoke of cigarettes').
Turkmen indicates the genitive case through a construction of two nouns, with the
first noun aeting as the possessor and the second noun as the possessed. The genitive
case suffix +bin/nn /+ıi)/ir)/ is added to the first noun in order to identify the definite
possessor in this "possessive relationship" of the two nouns.
Stated in another way, the possessive relationship has definite and indefinite
variants. The definite variant of the possessive relationship indicates that the possessor
is a known, specific or identified person, place, thing, state or action. Use of the
indefinite variant of the possessive relationship indicates that the possessor belongs to
a class but is not a diserete, specific or identified member of the elass.

Definite Possession
As a general rule, the genitive case suffix is added to the noun which serves as the
possessor in the possessive relationship when that noun is specified, identified or
othervvise deflned. Thus, in tlıe definite variant of the possessive relationship, the first
noun receives the genitive case suffix +bii(/nu /+ıq/irj/ and the second noun the third
person possessive suffix +bi/n /+ı/i/.

Ona MnaçajiMK 6epMetoH, yıcycbmu TyTflypMaaıt flepT-axBaııaT AHHaryn aratı

ru3bin biuiKbifltı. (N ) /Orjo ı:njalık bermeyam, u:ku6unı tutdurmoyam dert-
ahwa:lat A:nnagül a:tlı gı:8ıi] ıskıdı./
The torment vvhich gave him no peace and would not let him sleep vvas his love
for the girl named Annagül.
 Nouns 117

flauıapfla 6ouca meMajıtiH ryBBYJiflucH ryüımemm, etıyn upan,vıacbi apTflpfltı.

(G) /Dasarda bol0o sema:lır) giiwwüllii0ü gü:clönüp, öyürj uanma0ı artya-.ıdı./
As the ro ar of the wind rose outside, the vibration of the house was becoming
stronger and stronger.

IIM n e narram .1 flennuran 6acı»iJiaıma, narTaHtnf reopYMH Kimenflsp, xc:vi-fle oji

roBbi epneuıüsp. (TV7.3) /Şeyle pagtanı depgilâ:p baOılanna, pagtamıi) gcwrümü
kicelyâ:r, hem-de ol gowı yerle§ya:r./
When the cotton is stamped down like this, the volüme of the cotton decı cases
and it sits well.

When either the first noun or the second noun in a possessive relaticııship is
preceded by an attribute that makes its meaning more concrete or specifîc, :he first
noun receives the genitive case suffix +u ii J h h /+uj/ii)/.

aran îtnpataıapbi /agac yapraklan/ tree leaves

6y a r a c ı n Hnpaıcnapbi this tree’s leaves
/bu agajıi] yaprakları/
6m3hh 0ÜYMM3KH HHMHaaKbt araagbm the leaves of the tree
Hnpaıcnapbi /bi5ir) öyümüSüi] beside our house
ya:nınna:kı agajıi] yapraklan/
araktın rypaH smpaKJiapbi the dry leaves of the tre s
/agajıq gu:ra:n yapraklan/

MaıuuHnapun pe3MHnepM a ctfıajıtT tın ks epıiH^e ti3 rajifltıpapfltı. (G)

/Ması:nlanıj reBinleri aSfaltıi] ka: yerinne ı:S ga:llırya:rdı./
The wheels of the cars were leaving tracks in some spots of the asphalt.

T o B p y jıaH Gajıurtın bicbi renMspm- (BG) /Gowrulon ba:lıgıq ı:0ı gelyâ:rdi./

There was the s m e ll o f fr ie d fish.

By yrypaa ra p a ıııc b i3 ıopayMi,i3i>ın Te.neKeqHJiepH-fle Ken mim öHnıpun Gıuıa^eK.

(TV 11.4) /Bu ugurdo garasBiS yu:rdumu8ui) telekecileri-de köp i:s bitirip bi ljek./
In this regard, the e n tr e p r e n e u r s o f o u r in d e p e n d e n t c o u n t r y also will bc able
to accomplish many things.

raflbiMbi AMyJi, X33HpKM ni3xepn, ui3xepınme eTMHiu MMJiJieTHn

BeKMJiH aınaHp. (TV12.5) /Gadı:mı Amu:l, hâ:5irki Ca:rjew saheri, sâherinııe
yetmiş milletig weki:li ya:saya:r./
Ancient Amul, the modem city of Charjew-representatives of seven ty
nationalities live in the city.
118 Turkmen Reference Grammar

On epfle TypKMcHiın mhjijih TaramnapM 6onap. (TV3.5)

/Ol yerde türkmönüi] milli: tagamlan bolor./
There vvill be Turkm en national dishes there.

When proper names are the possessor in a possessive reiationship they receive the
genitive case suffix.

Illon xa6ap Aftnajıapbin ettyHe 6aptm eT^M. (G)

/Sol habar A:ynalarıq öyünö barıp yetdi./
That news reached the house of Ayna and her famiiy.

ATantifl3biH nHKHpH Kaöyn KMJitmmı. (TJ)

/Atanıya:8ırj pikiri kabu:l kılmnı./
The opinıon o f A tanıyaz was accepted.

WHxa, tam u BenaHUH orıibi enmıep. O h h eftneıiflupMeım 6onap, rtısnaptı

eroıuep, onapM jjypMyıua MbiKapManu 6onap. (TV16.3)
/inha:, inni Wepa:mi] ogh yetiser. Onu öylönnürmölü bolör, gı:81an yetiser, olort
durmuio çıkarmalı bolor./
Now W epa’s son here will come of age. It vvill be necessary to get him married,
and his daughters will come of age, and it vvill be necessary to marry them off.

Two or more noun phrases may be linked together in a possessive reiationship.

When this occurs, the presence of a third person possessive suffix +m/ h /+ı/i/ followed
by a genitive case suffix + lih/hh /+ır]/it]/ indicates that the noun vvith the possessive
suffix is possessed by a preceding noun.
In the first of the following examples, the presence of + c u /+6ı/ in the noun phrase
TYPKMeH xa/ibicb!Htm /türkmön ha:lı0mır)/ indicates that xajibi /ha:lı/ 'carpet' is
possessed by the indefinite possessor TypKMeH /türkmön/ 'Turkmen'. At the same
time, the presence of + h h h /+nır|/ indicates that the vvhole phrase TypKMeH
x ajıu cb i+ n b in /türkmön ha:lı0ı+nır|/ 'Turkmen carpet' is the definite possessor of
HymeK+H /düsök+ü/ 'background'.

A xaKMKbt TypKMeıı xajjLictiHUU aymera ruattn 6ojiMantı. (TV12.4)

/A hakı:kı türkmön ha:lı0mıi] düsögü gıSıl bolmoh./
But the background of a genuine Turkm en carpet should be red.

3HMeMe KMTa6biH aBTopii H3bi2K;bi lOcyn Xa{ibiaonbin nornaH ryHyHHH 60

tibuınuruııa öartcurnan, KHTan cepnfcif ryparmtı. (N )
/Enceme kita:bırj avvton yaSıjı Yu0up Hayı:dovui] doglon gününü i] 60 yıllığına
bagısla:p, kita:p 0ergi0i gurollı./
In honor of the 60th anniversary of the birthday of the w riter Yusup Hayıdov,
author of several books, a book display was organized.
 Nouns 119

3jiiih MaHaflBin apKa itYsyHRe TYpKMeHHCTaHUH rep6n, metfne xeM ranbiMbi

»AtırapjiHKJiepHHHH öııpn epnemaMpıuıeH. (TP2.2) /Elli manadır) arka yü8ünnö
Törlanönü00a:nırj gerbi, şeyle hem gadıırnı yardıgârrliklerinii] birri yerlesdirilen./
On the back face of the 50 manat are placed the seal of Türkmenistan as vvell as
one of its ancıent monuments. ['one of Türkmenistan’s ancient monuments']

İndefinite Possession
As a general rule, the genitive case suffix is not added to the noun which serves as the
possessor in the possessive relationship vvhen that noun is not specified, identified or
othervvise defined. Thus, in the indefinite variant of the possessive relationship, the
first noun stands vvithout a suffix, while the second noun receives the third person
possessive suffix +m/m /+ı/i/.

K ojtxo3 Gauınurbi MbixManbin muoıp flepactnma {tYsMsımHnöiH (G)

/KolhoS baslığı mırhmarnıi) pikir derya:0ınna yüSyârnligini billi./
The collective farm head understood that the guest was lost in his thoughts.
[Tıead of an (unspecified) collective farm']

K ojixo3bih 6amjibirbi khmmmhimh - ATaMtıuiMH. (G)

/KolhoSurj baslığı kimmisin - Atamışın./
They say Ata Somebody is head of the collective farm. ['head of the collective
farm' under discussion]

TyÜHYKfleH HYiııfisH ryHYH mexnecM OHyn flapaiibi KeMHentufle, an ninnime

oJ?Haapflbr. (G) /Tiirnükdön düsyârn giinüi] söhiöSü onug dara:yı köynögünnö, el
irSinne oynoya:rdı./
The ray of sunlight, coming from the smoke hole of the yurt, was playing on her
silk dress and needlevvork. ['work that bands do']

fleBneT enöani'ibi/ıapbi Barnibr-BamiKaa rejıep-reuep aypap. BaTaH Sonca

ranap. (N)
/Döwlöt yorlbascılan wagtlı-wagtmna geler-gecer duror. Watan bol0o garlar./
State leaders will come and go in their time. As for the Homeland, it vvill remain.
['leaders of a State']

Formations of this type are a common way to create lexical items in Turkmen. In
the table (see 120), phrases that express indefinite possession are contrasted vvith their
counterparts that express definite possession.
120 Turkmen Reference Grammar

indefinite and Definite Possession

indefinite Possession Definite Possession

ryn uxexJiecM ryuyn ıııoxnecn

/gün söhlö 0ü/ /günüıj söhlöOii/
sun beam ray of the sun

Tyccecn •dudimhh Tyccecn

/Silim tü80ö0ü/ /cilimii] tü 00ö 0ü/
- cigarette smoke smoke of the cigarette

Hye uajıtı flyüaHHH Mantı

/düyö ca:lı/ /diiyâ:nir) ca:h/
camel's milk the camel's milk

flepa cyBfci flepsiHbin cyBbi

/derya: 0uwı/ /derya:nırj 0uwı/
river water water of the river

MeKflen flifpeKTopbi MeKfleÖHH flHpeKTOpbi

/mekdep direkton/ /mekdebii] direkton/
school director director of the school

n t*;e apbi raajaHHH spbi

/gi:je ya:n/ /gi:jâ:niıj ya:n/
midnight half of the jıight

M ocraa TeaTpnapu MocKBaHbin TeaTpnapu

/Moskwa teatırlan/ /Moskwa:nırj teatırları/
Moscovv theaters the theaters of Moscow

fleMMpra3tiK enn fleMsıpra3birbin eım

/demirga 8ık yeli/ /demirgaSıgıi] yeli/
north wind wind of the north

EBpona fleBJiernepM EBponaHbiH fleBnemepM

/Yevropa döwlötlörü/ /Yevropa:mrj döwlötlörü/
European states states ofEurope
 Nouns 121

Some phrases created by indefinite possession may occur only or predomiııantly in

the indefinite construction without the genitive case suffix.

OKyB ÜMJIfcl ra3 ne^çn flHlU flOKTOpH

/okuw yılı/ /ga5 peji/ /di:s dokton/
school year gas stove dentist (= doctor of t>:eth)

THKHH MaiUblHbl Maranap Şartı 06a xoac,ajıtırt[

/tikin ması:nı/ /ca:ga]ar ba:gj/ /o:bo hojolugı/
sewing-machine kindergarten agriculture

Some formations of indefinite possession are perceived as compound vvords; for

example aTar3tı /atagSı/ 'wire-cutter' (< aT + arbi3+tı /at+agı8+ı/ 'horse’s moı ch') and
caq 6 aru / 0acba:gı/ 'hair-band' (< can + 6 ar+bi /0ac+ba:g+ı/ 'hair’s bandı. Such
formations differ from true compounds like asKran /ayakga:p/ 'foot-wear, sîıoes' (<
aHK + r a n /ayak+ga:p/ 'foot vessel') (see 506).

Forms o f the Genitive Case

The forms of the genitive case suffix are + bli(/n n /+ıxj-ur|/ii)-ür)/ after one-syllable
nouns ending in consonants and +hmh/hhh /+mr)-nur)/nig-nür)/ after nouns ending in
vowels. Addition of the variant + h u h / h m h /+mıj-nur)/nir)-nüg/ lengthens the final
vowel of a vvord (see 59).
In the spoken language, the variant +u /+q/ is the preferred form for nouns ending
in a vowel; for example, Kanan r u 3 bi /ka:ka:i) gı:Sı/ 'the father’s daughter', 3 w,an
n»i3bi /ejâ:i) gı:8ı/ 'the mother’s daughter'.
For paradigms of nouns vvith plural, possessive and case suffixes, see 571-576.

Accusative Case
The accusative case identifies the direct object of a sentence, and ansvvers the qıiîstions
‘The who?', 'The what?' and 'The where?' When the direct object is not further
identified or specified, it is an indefinite object (T see birds' or 'I see a bird'). When
the direct object is identified as a specific person, place, thing, State or action, it is a
definite object ('I see the bird' or 'I see the birds').
Turkmen adds the suffix +bi/n /+ı/i/ to a noun in order to ıdentify the ıJefmite
object of a sentence, whereas an indefinite object stands without this suffix.

3pTHp arıuaMflaıı rn*,3 roÜMaıı, orjıaııu 6n3e erop. (O)

/Erti:r agsamdan gi:ja: goyma:n, oglom biSe yetir./
Not later tlıan tomorrow night, bring the boy to us.
122 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

EryMa-6eüjıeKHMe rapaM aH, nyjıtı 3mme T yrn ypflbi-fla: - MeH XöKMaH aflaM
- flHitflH. (N) /Yo:gumo-beylekime garama:n, pulı elime
ÖonapbtH, rep ep c H n !
tutdurdı-da: "Men höfcmarn a:dam bolorun, göröröüıjî" diydi./
Disregarding my "no"s and such, he put the money in my hand and said T ll
definitely become a man, you’ll see!"

Word order or other clues usually distinguish between the subject and indefmite
object of a sentence, both of vvhich stand vvithout a formal marker in Turkmen (see
114). As a rule, the subject stands at the head of a sentence, while the object follovvs it.
When the subject is expressed in the person marker of the verb, then the grammatical or
the lexical meanings of the words identify the object.

Ojıap HtiflHiıep. /Olor iddiler./ They drank.

- M’mmıep. /~ icdiler./ [subject]

Onap 'JaM Hununep. /Olor ca:y icdiler./ They drank tea.

~ Mali HMflHJiep. /~ Ğa:y icdiler./ [indefinite object]

Onap nattbi mfliınep. /Olor ca:yı icdiler./ They drank the tea.
~ H aüu mçiHJiep. /~ Ca:yı icdiler./ [definite object]

Turkmen makes a regular distinetion betvveen a definite and an indefmite object, as

illustrated in the following sets of examples.

E m3 narTanbi öbiraMboaaH con narra Meramflap. (TV7.3) [öbiraMbra <

{ii>ıraHbiMM3] /BiS pagta:nı yıgamıSSan 0or) pagta cekilyâ:r./ [yıgamıS < yıganımıS]
After vve’ve picked the cotton, the cotton is vveighed. [definite: 'the cotton' being
discussed]
OHfla x e p ryHfle n s q e KHnopaK n a rr a Hbiranbe? (TV7.3)
/Onno her günnö na:ce kilora:k pagta yıgya:rjı8?/
Then about how many kilos of c o tto n do you pick each day? [indefinite: the
specific amount picked out of 'cotton as a vvhole']
ÜeHe MeH cemin TeneıjıoH HOMepmvı 6nJieM0K-na. (TV3.3)
/Yö:nö men 8enirj telefon nomerirji bilemo:k-da:./
But I don’t know your telephone number. [definite: specifically 'your telephone
number']
anenMMjıe ııajjorpbi Hovıep antmflttpbm. (T17.5)
/Dü:n jatj edenimde nâ:dogn nomer ahpdınn./
When I called yesterday, I apparently got a vvrong number. [indefmite: 'a vvrong
number' out of ali the possible wrong numbers]
 Nouns 123

Illon KapTOMKaHUSM a n u n , «L im a, MeH nbuıaH epfle snuasrn. MeH CH3e

flenonnM. IlbuıaH epuMeM arap ap » mittim Saptarı aUnaUMaıaı. (TV9.4)
/Sol kartocka:i]i5ı alıp, "inha:, men pıla:n yerde ya:saya:n. Men 8iSe degisli. Pıla:n
yerimem a:gırya:r" diyip banp ayda:ymah./
You should take th a t card o f yours (to the doctor) and go and say "Here, I live in
such-and-such a place. I’m supposed to see you. And my such-and-such a place
hurts." [definite: specifically 'that card of yours']

Ohcoh moHfla, rapa3, nm epfle Goncan uıynyn $BiBi>*;aK MepeK KapTOMKa Gepitap,
öepepjjMJiep. (TV13.3) /On9or] sonno, garaS, sâlıerde bol9oq sunuıj ya:lıjak cörök
kartoSka beryâ:r, bererdiler./
And then, in short, if you’re in the city, they give bread ration card s about this
size, they used to give them. [indefinite: 'cards' as a category]

Y3YJKH 3a n u con c e ım e c e n e M , BaptıGııp, eHKH flypıcyHH 6epM e3. OnjjaH ©ıpH

OHfcl 6aııifla Y3Me3nMre ManbnıiMajiM. (N) /ÜSülön 5a:dı 0og 0eple0ei]em, barnbir,
örjkii durkunı bermeS. Onnon ötrü onı basda Ü8mö51iigö çalışmalı./
Even if you attach th e broken-ofî thing later, it won’t produce the former shape.
Because of this, you should try not to break it to begin with. [definite: specifically
'the broken-off thing']

rennanti5K,bi renH M anan 6apaHfla, onyn ycryHUeH 3aT ce«ıifepnep: c y ^ n , ıceıce,

rotııme, OBHyK ınaHtı, otaBaM. (TV15.3) /Gelna:üjı gelni ahp baranna, onuıj
ü00ünnön 8a:t 0ecya:rler: 0ü:jü, kö:kö, pişme, ownuk sayı, oynowa:c./
When those taldng the bride have brought the bride, they strew things över her:
candy, cookies, pastries, coins and toys. [indefinite: 'things']

Cen xaücbi waiibi otmshh x anasın? Tokmh, rapaMH? (TV17.3)

/0en hay9t ca:yı icmârni ha:laya:ıj? Gö:kmü, garamı?/
W hich kind o f tea do you like to drink? Green or black? [definite:'vvhich
(specifıc kind of) tea']

Eh3 Mail jmMohhsk naJiaB, mexnaT, rapa3, Hİtra-ırarunepneH flYP™"flYMeH 3aT

r e n r a 6 aumaflbi. (TV16.2) /Bi5 ca:y icya:ncâ:k palavv, söhla:t, garaS, iygi-
icgilerden dürlü-dümön 8a:t gelip başladı./
While we were drinking tea, palaw, shöhlat [mutton dish, in a word, ali kinds of
food and drink started coming. [indefinite: unspecifîed 'tea']

Xa3Hp ep«n KeırycM 06a xoac;ajn>ırtma xbi3MaT Bflfcp, ceSsÖH cyB 6ap. By cyBbi
TaparyM KaHantı re ıu p te p . (TP12.2) /Hâ:8ir yeril] köpü0ii o:bo hojoluguno
hıSmat edyâ:r, 0eba:bi 0uw ba:r. Bu 0uwı Garagum kanalı getiryâ:r./
Now most of the land serves agriculture, because there is vvater. The Garagum
Canal brings this w ater. [definite: 'this water' just referred to]
124 Turkmen Reference Grammar

MbixMam>m mır cyB ımeHflHp eflHsu. (TV17.3)

/Mı:hma:nu] ci:g 0uw icennir ödyârn./
I tlıink your guest must have drunk some u n treated w ater. [indefinite: not an
identified poıtion of 'untreated water']

If a numeral precedes a noun serving as object of a predicate and the noun stands
without the accusative case suffix + u/n /+ı/i/, then the object is understood as
indefinite.

- 0 3 y M e 6np T33e caraT a n actiM renfiap. (TV5.4)

/'ÖSümö bir ta:Se 0a:gat ala9ım gelyâ:r."/
1 feel like buying myself a new watch."

Xep afi MeH my açaübiMa eTMHin 6am MaHaT ToneöaH. (TV9.3)

/Her a:y men su ja:yıma yetmiş bâ:s manat tölöyâ:n./
Each month I pay seventy-fi ve m anats for this place of mine.

If a numeral precedes a noun serving as object of a predicate and the noun stands
with the accusative case suffix +m/h /+ı/i/, then the object is understood as definite.

OHyn ca3M 6wp aaaMbi rynflYP1511 oTbip, önp aj*aMbi araaflbin o ra p . (BH)
/Onur) 0a:8ı b ir a :d am ı gü llü riip otı:r, b ir a :d am ı a :g la d ıp otı:r./
His music is making one person smile and an o th e r person cry. ['one person' of
a specific audience]

TapbixMHJiapun MaKnaMartına repa, renepan CKOöenes Feıcflene ranacmma oh

fom m yu a^aMU ruptınfltıp flutİHiı naıc sflmıfiap. (TVI3.3)
/Ta:n:hcılanr| caklamağına görâ:, general ökobelev Gö:kdepe gala:0mna on ba:s
müi) a:damı gırıpdır diyip cak edilyâ:r./
According to historians, it is surmised that General Skobelev slauglıtered 15,000
people at the fortress of Gökdepe. ['15,000 people' of Gökdepe’s population]

Nouns that caıry a first, second or third person possessive suffix are definite and
marked vvith the accusative case suffix +bl/n /+ı/i/.

Tapa3, aTacuHbi e ıo ıp e p e 6 ax ajta TarmtıpMaj^aK öojıapflbiM . (N)

/GaraS, ataöını yekirere bahana tapdırmajak bo!ya:rdım./
In short, I was trying not to let him find an excuse to torment his grandfather.

Eh3hh 6aünbiKJiapuMbi3bi e3yMM3fleH copaMaH, anten rMflüapflHJiep. (N)

/BiSirj ba:ylıklanmı8ı ö:8ümü88ön 0o:roma:n, ahp gidyâ:rdiler./
They were taking away o u r riches without asking us.
 Nouns 125

Apacca<]biiiı>iK aY3rYHnepnnn M aran tum an eBperM enn. O hcoh ynarıaııcon sjhhhk

öonyn ranap. (BH) /Ara60acılık düSgiinlörünü £a:galıkdan övvrötmöiü. On9oq
ulolon0orj ennik bolup ga:lya:r./
One must teach t h e r u l e s o f c l e a n l i n e s s from childhood. Later, after one j;rows
up, it becomes a habit.

MeueM HeMOflaHbiMbi anfltiM. (BG) /Menem cemoda.-nımı acdım./

I also opened my suitcase.

When preceded by a definite pronoun (6y /bu:/ 'this', 03 /ö:8/ 'own', H3Mi /na:me/
'what', 3XJIH /â:hli/ 'ali', ete.), a noun serving as an object receives the accusative case
suffbc.

9 x j ih r o H iH jıa p ij «ara cypaynep. (G) /Â:hli goyunlorı da:ga öürdülör./

They drove a l i out to the mountains.
o f th e sh e e p

MeH 6y aflaMLi ennep Kerı reaeK repyı^HM. (BH)

/Men bu a:damı öıjlör köp geSek görüpdüm./
I had seen this m a n many times before.
KeteK H3M e w ,o r a n S ep^ernun 6nnMeflM. (BH)
/Keyik nâ.-me jogarp berjegini bilmedi./
Keyik didn’t know w h a t t o a n s w e r . ['what answer he should give']

M ene M y n a fle p e K o n fle B iıe m e p n n 03 n y n y ııt ı n tiK a p M a » ;a K fltırn öapafla

KeımnHaM a T an an 3T.au. (N) /Yo:nö m u g o d ere k ol d ö w lö tlö riiq ö:8 pulum
cık a rm a ja k d ıg ı barrada k ep i:ln a :m a talap e td i./
But instead of this they demanded a guarantee that other states vvould not issue
th e ir ow n m oney.

Forms of ıhe Accusative Case

The accusative case is formed by adding the suffbc +tı/n /+j/i-ü/ to stems ending in a
consonant and + h u / h h /+nı/ni-nü/ to those ending in a vovvel. Addition of this suffix
to nouns ending in a vovvel lengthens that vovvel (see 59).
When the partide xeM/-aın/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'also, too' is added to a vvord ending
in the accusative case suffix, both the suffbc itself and the x /h/ of the partide oıay be
lost.

TejiHHKSH reÖMejM, * ,o p a 6 a M . (TV 13.2) [açopaöaM < açopaöM xeM]

/Geliııkâ:r| geymeli, jora:bam./ [jora:bam < jorarbı hem]
While you’re a bride, you have to wear it, the socks too.

For paradigms of nouns ending in plural, possessive and case suffbces, see 571-576.
126 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Dative Case
The dative case identifies the indirect object of a sentence, and answers the questions
'To whom?', 'To what?' and 'To where?' its most common functions are to express the
goal or purpose of the action described by the main verb, whether the goal or purpose
is a person, place (destination), thing, State of beüıg or another action.
Turkmen indicates the dative case by adding the suffix +a/e /+a/e/ to a noun serving
as the indirect object of a sentence. It may function to express action directed 'to', 'in'
or 'on' a person, place or thing.

MvepjpKH oTyparaapMH öapMHbin carraırtnıa Hnmtnep. (G)

/î£erdâ:ki oturonlorut) ba:rınır) Sağlığına icdiler./
They drank to the health of ali those sitting inside.

AHHarymm T bi3bi;ı Touıyn ryjınyrbnıa niflenmıe Mbin aptiM SonyrmH. (G)

/A:nnagulı:i] G 181I Gosur) gulluguno gidenine yıl ya:run bolupdı./
It had been one and a half years since Annagulı went to serve in the Red Army.
['to the service of the Red Army']
IIIoji Maxan floııyHbt arrome acrbiHX,aK aTbiııan Xomnbt Monna HlUHKfleH rap flH.
(G) /Sol mahal do:num eğnine yaögmjak atman Hoslı mo:llo i:sikden girrdi./
At this moment Hoshh-molla came through the door with his coat draped on his
shoulders.

EHe KennecmiH flccura roıon, TYKeroaccHa ronoıpe nrrflH. (G)

/Yene kelleOini ya00ıga goyup, tiikönükSiiS pikire gitdi./
He put his head on the pillow again and became absorbed in endless thought.

TyHyn r a 3n.n 1 uoryııa xep xhjih açaımapnap xeM epyn 6auraanflbi. (N)
/Günüg gıSgın corguno her hi:li ja:nna:rlar hem ö:rüp basla:pdı./
And every son of living thing had begun to appear in the warm rays of tlıe sun.

ryuycTaH Meım koms 'ibiKHimaM yrpaTflbi. (BG)

/GiilU00a:n meni koca: cıkyatncam ugrotdı./
GUlüstan saw me off to the Street, ['until going out to the Street']

On "Auıra6 aT” MbiXMaıtxaHacbiıifla epneumn, 'iafi Hnencon, uıaxepe resenen^e

'ibiKflbi. (BH)
/Ol "Asgabat" mı:hma:nha:na0mna yerleşip, ca:y icenOoi), sahere geSelenje cıkdı./
After he settled in at the Ashgabat Hotel and drank some tea, he went for a walk in
the city.

When the action is directed toward a person or thing, tlıe typical English equivalent
of the dative case may be 'for'.
 Nouns 127

E h3 öaöpaMa TaMspjifcK repyn flepyc. (G) /Bi8 bayrama tayya:rlık görüp yö:rü9./
We’re making preparations for the holiday.
M e n e o n x h m xaH aH , x m KHMe T a u p tm n K a c tın a KeMeıc GepM eifapflH. (O )
/Yö:nö ol hi:5 hacan, hi:c kime tarjrıyalkaOına kömök bermeyâ:rdi./
But he never helped anyone for a "Thank you."
Xep aM MeH my *;aMuMa cm m u 6suı MaHaT TeneüaH. (TV9.3)
/Her a:y men su jaryıma yetmiş ba:s manat tölöya:n./
Each month I pay seventy-five manats for this place of mine.
BenaHMH M am ran a cu H axapa, hthbi mK m u tc rapj(e3c;HHHH aptıctiH M xapax;aT
BflüsHHHp. (TV16.3) /W epa:nıi] m a sg a la ö ı nahara, y a g n ı iy m ite gi:rdeji:nir)
y a :n 0 m ı h araja:t edyârnnir./
Wepa’s wife probably spends half of the income on meals, that is, on food. [or:
'for meals', 'for food']

When the predicate of a sentence is a transitive verb like ajiMaK /almak/ 'to take, to
buy', caTMaK /Satmak/ 'to seli' or others, then the noun in the dative case denotes the
price of the item and the preceding word its value.

Opa3 6y k o c t k >m h KtıpK MaHafla anutı. (T) /Ora:8 bu koötumı kırk manada allı./
Oraz bought this suit for forty manats.

In time expressions, placing the dative case suffîx on the nouns aif /a:y/ 'month',
İİm ji /yıl/ 'year', r y H /gün/ 'day', xenne /hepde/ 'week', caraT /9a:gat/ 'hour' or
MMHyT /minut/ 'minute' indicates the period during vvhich the action will take place.
its English equivalent is 'for (a period of)'.

B y KHTaöH KHTanxaHaflaH 6am ryH e an^tiM . (N)

/Bu kita:bı kita:pha:nadan ba:s günö allım./
I took this book from the library for (a period of) five days.

Turkmen also expresses the goal of an action in the sense of 'in order to do
(something)' by means of the construction (Verb)-Mara/Mare (Verb) /(Verb)-ma:ga/
ma:ge (Verb)/, which consists of the infinitive suffix -Man/MeK /-mak/mek/ plus the
dative case suffix +a/e /+a/e/, whose addition results in the lengthening of the vowel.
A less common but equivalent construction is a verb with the infinitive suffix
-MaK/MeK /-mak/mek/ (without the dative case suffîx) followed by the postposition
YMHH /ücü:n/ '(in order) to' (see 331, 411).

On f ln n e 6 axtiM paK o6a e T M are xoBnyrstpBfci. (BH)

/Ol diqe bahımra:k o:ba: yetma:ge howlugya:rdı./
He was rushing to get to the village even sooner.
128 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Taptın n>i3binM eüyHe rerapeıı ryuyufleH 6y ana aantıntı 6aünapa xajıtı

flO K aM ara H6epM3HHMp. (G) /Gan:p gıSılı öyiinö getiren gününnön bu yaıja:
ayaıimı barylara ha:lı dokoma:ga i:bermâ:nnir./
Starting from the day the old man brought home the gold, he didn’t send his wife
to the rich people to weave carpets.

In this construction, the verb in the infinitive suffıx may stand with a possessive
suffix followed by a dative case suffıx (for example, -M artiMa, -M a ru fa , - M a r t ı n a
/-magıma, -magııja, -magma/, ete.). The English equivalent of this formation is 'for
(my/your/its, ete.)'.

IHy K a p H ca&ıan ajnvıartına u s M e ceGan ö o j i h h , k m m H T e p r a ö ep flM ? (O)

/Su ka:ri 6ayla:p almagırja nâ:me 0ebâ:p bolh, kim itergi berdi?/
What was the reason you chose this profession, who gave you a push? ['for your
choosing']

3pTMp MepxeMeTJm MHXMaHtni JIe6an BenaaTtına canapa yrpaMartiHa

rapaıııtuıap. (TP12.5)
/Eıti:r merhemetli mx:hma:nıi] Lebap weia:yatına Sapara ugromoguno garasılya:r./
Tomorrow it is expected that the gracious guest vvill set off on a trip to Lebap
province. ['waiting for his setting off']

The dative case most frequently is used to indicate the goal of action expressed by
certain verbs, especially those of motion, action, vision and the like. In addition,
several verbs consisting of a noun and the auxiliary verbs GepMeK /bermek/ 'to give
(to)' and 3TMeK /etmek/ 'to do (to, for)' require the use of the dative case. English
equivalents o f such formations sometimes do not inelude the prepositions 'to/for/in/
at/on'. Common verbs of this type inelude the following:

6aKMaK /bakmak/ to look at AYiUYHMeK /düsünmök/ to understand

6apMaK /barınak/ to go/come to eTMes /yetmek/ to reach, to get to
öejiMeK /böılmök/ to divide into 5f;an 3TMeK /jaq etm ek/ to cali
rapaınMaK /garasmak/ to wait for MÖepMeK /i:bermek/ to send to
renMeK /gelmek/ to come to canMaK /öalmak/ to put in
mpMeK /gi-.rmek/ to go in cepeTMSK /öeretmek/ to look at
nmneK /gitmek/ to go to c tiH 3TMeK /0ı:n etmek/ to keep
an eye on
remıeK /göcmök/ to move to MartıpMaK /c a :g ırm a k / to invite
flonaHMa /dolonmok/ to retum to MtlKMaK /ç ık m a k / to go out (to)
 Nouns 129

By xaH 6ojıan Munise 6aK-a. (G) /Bu ham bolon yiğide bak-a:./
Just look at this young man who became khan.
- Cm3 Mapa 6apapcLinti3MLi mUpyml (TV2.1)
/'0İ5 Mara: baıya:r0ırjıSmı diydim?"/
"I said are you going to Marı?"

flHHJieMeK xaKMHfla aöflaHtiMfla xhm ö itp m m Tonapnapa fiojlMeüapuH. (N )

/Dirjlemek hakınna aydanımda hi:c bi:rini toporloro bö:lmöyâ:rin./
When I teli them about listening, I don’t divide any of them into groups.
Mne, utOHyn on Mupafla ıınepsen rapamaputı. (G)
/İne, sonur) ücü:n-nö ol Mıra:da ilerden garasya:rdı./
You see, that’s why he was expecting M ırat from the south.
TyTyıu 06 a 6 onyrı onap t o h rejiflMJiep. (G) /Tutuş o:bo bolup olor toyo gelliler./
They came to the toy as an entire village.
Aaımap lOpflaMaıikin eMyHe rifpftHJiep. (BH)
/Ayarllar Yu:rdoma:nııj öytinö gi:rdiler./
The women entered Yurdaman’s home. ['entered into']
iK.au mu - ceH cupKaB, OKan ömiMepcMH, 6ap florropa tht. (G)
/farjcı, 0en 0 ırkaw, oka:p biLmeröis], bar doktoro git./
Jangchı, you’re sick and you vvon’t be able to study. Go on, go to the doctor.
- XaBa, Ajcflene 3Tpa6tma reqyn renflHK ceGaSn oryjuıaptrM my epfle n a m
3aB0fltmfla HiUJieiisp. (TVİ 1.3) /"Hawa, A:kdepe etra:bma göçüp gellik öebaıbi
ogullorum su yerde pagta Sawodunna i:sleya:r."/
"Yes, we moved to Akdepe district because my sons vvork in the cotton plant
here."
Ym ryH reqce-fle, SuıpeT 06a aonanM aatı. (TJ)
/Ü£ gün gec9e-de, Esret o:ba: dolonmodı./
Although three days have passed, Eshret has not returned to the village.
JHypflbi ApTbirbtH öonmyna nvulYllMeffl1: «On flsuMpsn iıepeH 6 onMaca-fla
ÖMpHflHp?» (G)
/Durdı Artıgıg bolsuno dülünmödü: "Ol da:lirâ:p yörön bolmo8 o-do bkridu '"/
Durdı didn’t understand Artık’s behavior: "I wonder if he’s gone out of hi;;
mind?"
On K6M3HMH «jaTpuraHa eTMn caKJiaHfltı. (BG)
/Ol köcâ:niıj catngına yetip Saklarını./
He reached the intersection of the Street and stopped. ['reaclıing to']
130 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Emce, ceH Tost nrraçeK öojıcan, Mana »çaH 3T, öonapMM? (Tl 5.3)
/Bi:ke, öen toyo gitjek bol0og, marja jarj et, bolya:ımı?/
Bike, if you’re gonna go to the toy, cali me, okay? ['make a cali to me']

Tobh MeKfleöe nfiepceMMHKSM? Cnop-r 6am » rbi3tnuıaHHbipcaMMbncaM?

(Tl 6.4) /Gowı mekdebe i:ber6emmikâ:m? IBport bilen gı5ıklannn8ammıka:m?/
I wonder if I should send him off to a good school? Should I get him interested
in sports?
O hh iuoji caraflHtı e 3yHfle ca-n>ırm>ı apaGacuna canbin, ee 6 aKaH yrpaTflbinap.
(G) /Om sol 0a:gadırj ö:8ünnö Batıgcı araba0ına 0ahp, öyö bakan ugrotdulor./
They put him in the seller’s cart at that same hour and sent him toward home.

İîeHe ÖH3 nrexep aflaMuapuna cepeTceK, oıtna a3ax;tiK yihTeımtK aaT repyn
6nnepnc. (TV13.2)
/Yömö bi8 saher a:damlanna 0ere00ek, onno a:8ajık ü:tgösük 8a:t görüp bileri©./
But if we take a look at city people, then we can see that some things are a little
different.

flypflbiT03en 6 ıuıeH rypneuıwn oTbtpKaM, 6np re3yM 6ımeH flaıu-TOBepere xeM

chh anttapüHM. (TV16.2) /DurdugöSöl bilen gürlösüp otı:rka:m, bir göSüm bilen
das-töwörögö hem 0ı:n edyâ:rdim./
Wlıile sitting there talking with Durdıgözel, I also k ep t one eye on the
suıroundings.

Men ceHH anrbm*;bi ry n nornan ryHyMe MarupMaKMbi. (TV3.4)

/Men 0eni altınjı gün doglon günümö £a:gırmakcı./
I wouid like to invite you to my birthday (party) on Saturday.

X hm xaücbmn3 K6M3 MbiKMaH. (G) /Hic hay0ır)i8 koca: cjkma:i)./

None of you should go outside. ['Don’t any of you go out to the Street'.]

Forms o f the Dative Case

To mark the dative case, the suffix +a/e /+a-o/e-ö/ is added to words ending in
consonants and the variant +ah /+a:/â:/ to words ending in vowels. The long vowel of
the latter variant represents a fusion of the dative case suffıx with the final vowel of the
word (see 56). In borrowed words ending in o /o/ this vovvel is lengthened to /o:/.
When the dative case suffıx is added to a vvord ending in the third person possessive
suffix + m / h l+ı/ü, the variant +Ha/He /+na-no/ne-nö/ is used (see 69).
For paradigms o f nouns with plural, possessive and case suffîxes, see 571-576.
Some postpositions require the use of the dative case on the preceding noun (see 416).
The dative case also appears vvith the past participle to form a time phrase ('since...';
see 502).
 Nouns 131

Locative Case
The locative case identifıes the location of a person, place, thing, state or action in time
or space, ancTanswers the questions 'In/on whom?', In/on what?' and 'In/on where?'
Türkmen expresses the locative case by attaching the suffix +ga/fle /+da/de/ to a
noun, pronoun, adjective, numeral, verbal noun or participle serving as the subject,
object or adverb modifier of a sentence. One of its basic functions is to indicate 'where'
the action takes place, for which the English equivalents 'in', 'on' or 'at' are
appropriate.

TyH H iutm rapaHKbi flyııiflH, acMaHfla UbinuM3nap n arp aK a n t t 6onn w . (G )

/Gün yasıp gararjkı düsdü, a8ma:nna yıllıSlar patrak ya:h bollı./
The sun set, it became dark and the stars began twinkling in the sky like popcom.
E Y p ry T ım epm c ntpeH öaflbiHa, rapanıcH fla Bep^ a orçaT c m h 3flifn ÖHJiMeflK. (G)
/Bürgüt ice rirk girren bardına, g a ra g k ıd a Berdâ: oıjot 0ı:n e d ip b ilm ed i./
The moment Bürgüt came into the room, he couldn’t see Berdi well in the
darkness.

Hly ryHJiep 6onca, 3aaoflbin TapbKU H fla yıaı 6up BaKa 6onyn renilsp. (N)
/Su güniör bo!0o, 8awodui) ta:n:hınna ulı bir wa:ka bolup gecyâ:r./
And these days, a great event is taking place in the history of our plant.

M eH onaptiH eifyH ne übirbi-ifbirbiaaH 6onapfli>iM. (N )

/Men oloruıj öyünnö yıgı-yıgıdan bolya.-rdım./
I was at their house frequently.

On “AuıraSaT" M bixM anxanacbm na epneıunn, ^ati Hnencou, ıım epe reseneıraçe

MbiKflbi. (BH)
/Ol "Asgabat" mı:hma:nha:na0mna yerleîip, ca:y icenSorj, sahere geSelenje cıkdı./
After he settled in at the Ashgabat Hotel and drank some tea, he went for a walk in
the city.

I la r r a fturuM BiH oa s n r y t i ^ n xeM MauiHH r y ü x ,u y m m m u p . (TV7.3)

/Pagta yıgımmna el gü:jü hem ması:n gü:jü ulonulyatr./
Both manual labor and machine povver are used in the cotton harvest.

TÖHimcHfle maxepHH enantfei TpaııcnopTbiHaa raraaM aK ymhh TS3e r e n e r n e p

nfpH3H/mn. (TV 11.2)
/TibiliÖide sâheriıj yo:logcı tranOpoıtunno gatnamak ücü:n ta:8e tölöglör gi:ri8illi./
New fees have been introduced for travel on city passenger transport in Tbilisi.
132 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The locacive case suffix +Aa/fle /+da/de/ also is added to nouns or noun phrases to
indicate relationships in time vvhich ansvver the question 'when does the action take
place?' English equivalents are 'in', 'on' and 'at'.

5K,aMaJi HypflbieBHa, sprap florpii caraT Y^fle Mana rapam un. (G)
/İama:l Durdı:yevna, erti:r dogrı 0a:gat ücdö marja garasırj./
Jamal Durdıyevna, wait for me at three o’clock sharp tomonovv.

Onapbm ÖMpM - «Tapa anTMH» MMXMaHxaHactı 2 1 - hjkji OKTHĞpfla aMMüHtı. (N)

/Olorurç bi:ri-"Gata altm " nu:hma:nha:na0ı 21-nji oktyabrda acilli./
One of them-the Black Gold Hotel-was opened on October 21.

OKymap 1993-ks;h ftbuihm, 15-idk;m ceırraöpb iH n a Saııraarap. OıcyBHH M e x n e n ı

2 - 5 afi. (N) /Okuwlor 1993-njü yılııj 15-nji öentyabrınna baslanya:r. Okuvvurj
möhlötü 2-5 a:y./
Classes begin on the 15th of September, 1993. The study period is 2-5 months.

O ji 6a3appap, 5aüpaM'n.uıtiK ryunepMuge HJiaTa xti3MaT 3flep. (N)

/Ol ba:5arlar, bayramcılık günlörünnö i:la:ta hıSmat eder./
It will serve the people on Sundays and holidays.

Illon Mmuıapfla Maranap 6enyMMHe MyflHpjiHK 3TflM. (N)

/Sol yıllarda ca:galar bö:lümiinö mUdü:rliik etdi./
In those years, he was director of the children’s department.

M ap T fla flyp M ym ryp flyjc: M aiıjja o K y B tı ry T a p fltiK . (O )

/Martda durmuş gurduk: mayda okuwı gutorduk./
We got married in March, we graduated in May.

- M eH 19 4 0 -k x;m ü b in u n ceHTflöpb a ü tn iA a , y p m y n e p a n s h l i m n ı m fly p a n

B a rriiH R a apMHH fh t a h m . ( T V 1 1 .3 ) /“M e n 19 4 0 -n jı yılır) 0 entyab r a :yın n a,
urusurj örâ:n yarjı g id ip duron w ag tın n a a ım iy a : gitd im ."/
"I left for the arnıy in September, 1940, just when the war was starting to get
going." ['at a time when the war']

C o B e r fleBpyHAe ra3eTJiepfle aabuiMaflbiK MaKananap H3XMJBfflH? (T l2.5)

/0owet döwrünnö gaSederde yaSılmadık maka:lalar nâ:hilidi?/
What kind of articles were not written in newspapers in the Soviet period?

The locative case suffıx + 3 a/fle /+da/de/ may be attached to the vvords ryH /gün/
'day', x e n jje /bepde/ 'week', a ft /a:y/ 'month' and f it in /yıl/ 'year' to indicate that an
action is performed 'every (day, month, year)', or that the same result is achieved
'each/a (day, month, year)'.
 Nouns 133

Atina rencen aaK HepcHH, ryHHe rencen Tasnc. (G)

/A:yda gelOeıj ayak iyerflirj, günnö gelSei) tayak./
If you come every month you’ll be a guest, if you come every day you’U be a
pest. [ I f you come every month, you’ll eat a leg, if you come every day, iı ’ll be a
stick'.]
Cm3 xenaefle Hane ryn ıımneiıanıo? (TV12.3) /Öi5 hepdede nâ:£e gün i:sley ı :j]i5?/
How many days a week do you work?

MeH xeM MaııırajıaMii3fla ynycu SoııanbiM cefisıum, mue nrrMSHKsM, ryH le

etaepM cynypjın, Haxap 6HiiDipHn, eMnaarotre Haxap Taflbmnan raaösH. (TM 6.2)
/Men hem masgala:mıS8a ulu0ı bolonum 0eba:pli, i:se gitmâ:nka:m, günnö öylörü
Süpürüp, nahar bisirip, öylâ:nlige nahar ta:yuıla:p gidyâ:n./
And because I’m the oldest in our family, each day before I go to work, I s weep
the rooms, cook, and start preparing food for the aftemoon.

The suffbc +JiaKbi/flaKH /+da:kı/dâ:ki/, which combines the locative case su::fix and
the relation suffix + kli/ kh /+kı/ki/ (see 540), links two words together, such (hat the
second person or item is located 'in/on/at' the first person or item. The consıraction
may be understood literally as 'X which is in/on/at Y'.

3İİÖ3M KopHflopfla npHMycbuı ycryHflaKM natoeK naKbip-jıaKbip 3flnn raftHaı.ıara

öaıunaflu. (G) /Eyya:m koridorda primu0ui) Ü00iinnâ:ki cârynek lalar-iakır ı:dip
gaynama:ga başladı./
The kettle on top of the primus in the hallway already started to boil with a
hissing sound.
K hto orayM EaiipaM MocKBanbin LL(eıiK}tH aflbiHflaKM Teaıp ynHimmecmue
OKan fiep. (O) /Kici oğlum Bayram Moskwa:mi) Ssepkin a:dmna:kı teatır
uciliseOinne oka:p yö:r./
My youngest son Bayram is snıdying at the Theater Studio named Shchepkin in
Moscow. [literally: 'the one in the name of']
Pecny6jDocaHWn nrıaTtuibin m m ju im cocTaBbinaaKbi e3repHiıuıepM 4-iok;h
Ta6nımaflaH repMeK 6onap. (TV13.1) /Rc6publika:mq i:Ia:tmıi] milli:
0o6towunna:kı öSgörüslörü 4-njü tabii8adan görmök bolor./
One may see the changes in the national composition of the population of th s
republic in Table 4.
Hly ryHKH ryıı MeH eme TypKMeHHcraHjıaKU öhjihm eHereMa öapafla 6npKiı a r ta
ryppyn 3flnn 6ep:x;eK. (TP12.3) /Su:nkı gün men 0i8e Türkmönü80a:nna:kı bilim
0i0tema baırada birici agı8 gürriiıj edip berjek./
Today, I vvill make a brief presentation to you about the educatiönal system in
Türkmenistan.
134 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

TypKMeHHCTaHfla e n - e w ıe p r t r a n a p a opaH auiK a, xaT«a oh flepT-oH 6aux

H u m aptın jjaK a #ypM ym a utacapaH 3iceHnep. (TVI 6.1)
/Türkmönü09a:nna ög-öıjlör gı:51arı örâ:n ya:ska:, hatda: on dö:rt-on bâ:s
ya:slannna:ka: durmuso cıkarya:n ekenler./
In the past in Türkmenistan, they vvould many off girls while very young, even
those vvho vvere fourteen- or fifteen-years old. ['while at the ages of fourteen or
fifteen']

The locative case suffix also occurs as part of a constnıction indicating possession
of an iteni, equivalent to English 'to have'. A common way to express 'to have'
involves adding a possessive suffix to a noun or pronoun in a sentence vvith 6 a p /ba:r/
'there is' or eK /yo:k/ 'there is not' ('A' belovv; see 379, 383). The same formation
vvith a personal pronoun in the locative case can express a general fact of possession or
existenee ('B' belovv) or a sense of immediacy in the sense of possessing something
now or to emphasize possession ('C' belovv). Use of these variant constructions varies
from speaker to speaker.

A B C

IlyjıyM S ap . Menne nyn 6ap. Menfle nyjıyM 6ap.

/Pulum ba:r./ /Menne pul ba:r./ /Menne pulum ba:r./
I have (some) money. I h av e m oney. I have my money.

KHTaöHM 6ap. MeHjje KHTan 6ap. Menne KHTaöbiM Sap.

/Kita.-bım ba:r./ /Menne k ita :p b a:r./ /Menne k ita:b ım ba:r./
I h ave a book. I h a v e a b ook. I h a v e m y b ook.

E r a n e c a n a ö o p n y K 6 o ıu o T a r 6 ap. (BG) /BiSSe 0arja b o :rlu k bos o tog ba:r./

We h a v e a sp are room fo r y o u .

En3fle TypKMeH 3JBin6 MÜnrçqe 38 caH tı x ap n , 36 c a m ı c e c 6 ap. (TV1.1)

/BiSSe türkmön elipbiyiıuıe 38 Banı harp, 36 0anı 0e0 ba:r./
We have 38 letters and 36 sounds in the Turkmen alphabet.

- CoHantın Tenec|)OH HOMepHHH aüfltın öepceHe. MeH^e eK. (TV17.4)

/'0ona:mi) telefon nomerini aydıp beröene. Menne yo:k./
"Would you teli me Sona’s telephone number? I don’t have it."

CH3fle aBToöycnap Barrtmua yrpaapMM? (T9.2)

/9i68e aw tob u 0 1or vvagtınna ugroyarrm ı?/
Do the buses leave on time in your country? ['among you']
 Nouns 135

When follovved by the postposition hum /ya:iı/ 'like', a noun with the suffix
+flaKtı/flaKH /+da:kı/da:ki/ indicates a situation 'as that in/on/at X ' or 'like that
in/on/at X'.

florptı, ıueftne Hoöaraap GeMnetcH flYKaHJiapMH xeM KaGMpmme ra6aT renttspjpt,

fieHe «uıeKep» AyKaHbiHRaKU hjim a n tı^ tm a p tm (caTic*;6inapHH xeM )
HepBHcıme flertian noöaTa, MerepeM, 6auıra epfle as raöaT rejuıen 6onca repeıc. (N)
/Dogn, şeyle no:botlor beyleki düka:nlanq hem kâ:birinne gabat gelyâ:rdi, yö:nö
"seker" dükarnınnarkı ya:lı alıjılanrj (0atıjılani] hem) nerviöine degya:n no:boto,
megerem, basga yerde a:8 gabat gelnen bol0o gerek./
True, such lines also have been encountered in some other shops, but probably
lines like those in the "sugar" shops vvhich make buyers nervous (salespersons too)
are being encountered rarely in other places.
Antı-TynaHMH cohm 1991-ıragn ütınnajaı u n u xej»KtntntH ium xaflj>ıcanap SıuıeH
ryTapMara 3XTMMajı. (TV11.2) /A:pı-tupa:nuq 0oqı 1991-nJi yılla.-kı ya:h
hela:k£ilikli ha:dı:0alar bilen gutormogı ahtima:l./
It’s probable that the results of the hurricane will end with dısastrous events like
those in 1991.

Forms o f the Locative Case

To express the locative case, the sufîix +fla/fle /+da-do/de-dö/ is added to words
ending in consonants or vowels, except that the variant +Hfla/Hae /+nna-nno/nne-nnö/
is added to those ending in the third person posssessive suffix + u /n /+ı/i/ (see 69).
For paradigms of nouns with plural, possessive and case suffıxes, see 571-576. The
locative case also may be added to the past participle to form a time phrase ('when...';
see 503).

Ablative Case
The ablative case identifies the source, origin or starting-point of an action, State or
quality, and answers the questions Trom whom?', Trom what?' and Trom where?' its
fimctions have in common the idea of separating or distinguishing two or more
persons, places, things, states or actions.
Turkmen expresses the ablative case by adding the suffix +nan/p(eH /+dan/den/ to a
noun, pronoun, adjective, numeral, verbal noun or participle serving as object or adverb
modifîer of a sentence. its basic function is to indicate the concrete source, place of
origin or starting point 'from' which an idea, action or motion comes.

Ara o ryn jjaH , 3He rtranaH aMptuifltı.(G)

/Ata ogullon, ene gı:88an aynili./
Father was separated from the son, mother from the daughter.
136 Türkmen Reference Grammar

MHe, my r a n tm a n r a p , x j w 3aTflan ropKM a. (G)

/İne, su gapıdan gi:r, hi:c 6a:tdan gorkmo./
Now, go through this door and don’t be afraid of anything. ['fear from anything']

Y r y p c tr a BojıaÜM actm a-#a ceH 03y u x a K re a y n ^ e n suihtahhm m ? (G)

/Ugur6 u8 bola:yma0ın ya:-da 0en ö:Sürj hak göSünnön esitdirçmi?/
Maybe it’s not true, or did you hear it yourself from reliable sources?

Bonca epHHfleH T yp y n , xouınauibin MbiKbin niTflM. (H)

ü ıiK a n
/Yalka:p bolöo yerinnen turup, hoslosup çıkıp gitdi./
Yalkap, however, stood up and went out to welcome them. ['got up from his
place']

ApaccaMWJU.ncflY3ryHJiepnHH qarajıUKflaıı OBpeTMemf. Oncorç yjıanaHCOH sufliiK

6onyn r a n a p . (BH) /Ara00acıhk düSgünlörünü ca:galıkdan öwrötmölü. onBorj
ulolon0oıj ennik bolup ga:lya:r./
One must teach tlıe rules of cleanliness from childhood. Later, after one grows up,
it will be a habit.

ApaflaH yn -flep T flbin re*fflH, oBaflaH o n ıa n fla n x a6 ap eK. (O )

/A:radan üc-dö:rt yıl gecdi, owodon oglonnon habar yo:k./
Three or four years passed in the meantüne, and there was no news from the
handsome young man.

BejıaartınAan Hbucap. HeÖMT^arflMÖMBeM rnonyn

S cacan aM ra 3 -n e 6 n r BaJiKaH
y'ttiH flMÜHJiMsp. (TV8.1) /E0a:0a:nam ga8-nebit Balkan wela:yatınnan cıkya:r.
Nebitda:g diyibem sonurj ücü:n diyilyâ:r./
And gas and oil basically come out of tlıe Balkan province. That’s why they also
cali it Nebitdag ("Oil Mountain").
By x a n t n ıt ı Susun xajibi’ i t ı rbi3JiapbiMbi3 AtviepıiKaHbin 63111 üy 3 Mbumbirbina
S arb im n an , c o b r i t flOKaflbnıap. E y ııy n e3ymne, HeMe, ry p x a n fla H c e 3 n e p a3binn>ı.
(TV12.4) /Bu h a:lı:n ı biSir) h a :lıc ı gı:61arımı8 Amerika:nıi] bâ:s yü 8 y ıllığ ın a
b agıslarp, 0owgot d o k o d u lo r. Bunui] ö:Sün n ö, n em e, Gurha:nnan 0ö81ör yaS ılg ı./
Our c a rp e t-w e a v in g girls w o v e this carp et as a g ift in h o n o r o f the 500-year
a n n iversa ry o f America. On this v e r y on e, umm, w o rd s from th e Koran are
vvritten.

M ıue rHTM3HK3M on ap bi MBMara BarrbiM öonM aap, Miufleıı reneM fleH coh
lOBapbUt. (T16.2) [reneM flen < reneHMMflen] /İ:se gitm â:n kâ:m o lo n y u w m a :g a
vvagtım b o lm o yarr, i:sd en ge le m d e n 0otj y u w y a :n n ./ [ge le m d e n < gelen im d en ]
I don’t have time to wash tlıem before I go to work, I wash them after I come fr o m
work.
 Nouns 137

By xajıtuıapLiMM3 6w3fle eımeH Gap», acbipnap 6apjt flOKantm remin, 6 m3 hh 6y

3HenepHMH3fleH, MaManapLiMbi3flaH ranaH ÖH3e 6mp 3Ji-xyn3pM 6onap. (TV10.2)
/Bu ha:Manmı5 biSSe örjdön bâ:ri, a6ırlar bâ:ri dokolup gelip, biSirj bu
enelerimiSSen, ma:malanmıSSan ga:lan biSe bir el-bünâ:ri bolyarr./
These carpets of ours have been woven among us since olden times, for centuries,
and have been left to us as a handicraft by our mothers and grandmothers. ['left to
us from our mothers and grandmothers']

In their primary meanings, certain of the verbs in the examples cited abovı: requiıe
the use of the ablative case.

agupMaK/ayırmak/to separate (from) copaMaK / 6o:romok/ to ask (from)

reJiMeK /gelmek/ to come (from) TypMaK /turm ok/ to get up (from)
ropKMaK/gorkmok/to be afraid (of) mbikmsk /çık m ak / to com e out
(from)

One of the functions of the ablative case is to indicate that a person or thing
'originates from' or 'stems from' a certain people, place or thing.

EejiKH, CH3 an ım MHcaHJiapflaHctmiB. (G) /Belki, 0i8 yagsı m0a:nlardanthr)iS./

Maybe you’re from good people.

CM3e MsjııiMflMp, 6h3mh TypKMeH 6eÜMK maxtıpbiMLi3 6onaH Mam.iMryıxı.[

reıcnen TnpecHHHeH öonaıı. (TV4.2) /0i6e mâ:limdir, biSirj tiirkmön beyik
sa:hı:nmı8 bolon Magtımgulı gö:klöıj ti:reöinnen bolon./
You might know that Magtımgulı, our great Turkmen poet, was from the Gökleng
tribe.

A noun ending in the ablative case suffix +Ran/Ren /+dan/den/ may be \mcerstood
as the cause of a condition or action.

- Aü Mene, mnacH aflajıapMu, H3Me-MM? (G)

/'Ay yö:nö, i:sden ya:dalya:rmı, nâ:me-mi?7
"Oh, maybe he’s tired from work or something."
03eM 'JbtM-rM3Lin, yTaHx;MHflaH ahiim TyTyntnmbip. (N)
/Ö:8öm cım-gıSıl, utonjunnon dili tutulupdur./
And she was beet-red and apparently couldn’t speak because of her shame.

The ablative case suffix +flaH/jjeH /+dan/den/ is added to a noun to indicate that the
item or person it designates is made out of or consists of some material or qualiıy. The
word biöapaT /ıba:rat/ 'consists of' also may be placed after a noun ending in the
ablative case suffix.
138 Türkmen Reference Grammar

FaScactı nuıaütmaii. His shutters are made o f tin.

/Gab0a9ı gala:yıdan,/
Ceproınt flapaJh>maH. His door curtain is made of biue silk.
/Serpigi dara:yıdan./
A t ra stım KYMyu^eH. His horse stake is made of silver.
/At gaSıgı kümüsdön/
En a3Hrii ıriİMHiufleH. (G) His road provision consists of fruit.
/Yol a:5ıgı iymisden./
Hecwn 6onca, Kspxana Hine 6aumarçna flyHÜs cTarçuapTbiHa raöaT renösH rronaTnan
ra n tı Be neiDKjıpe SnoKnaptiHH TaüapjıaMaK’iH. (N)
/Ne9i:p bolöo, ka:rha:na i:se baslanna dünya: ı89andartına gabat gelya:n polotdon
gapı we penjire bloklorum tayya:rlamakcı./
God willing, when the enterprise starts to work, it intends to produce Steel door
and vvindovv units which will accord with world standards. ['doors and windows
made from Steel']

Xs3H p rajjaHMH flMBaptnn.1 flHKenflifeH 6pHrananaptm 4-CHHHeH 3 -chhhh

MUiMKnepH epjra rypnymtiKMtmapfltı. (N) /Ha:5ir ga la:m q d i:w a :n m d ik e ld y a :n
b rig a d a la n ıj, 4-9ün n ön 3-0Unüxj i:sc ile ri y e rli gu rlu su k cu lord ı./
Now, the workers of 3 o u t o f 4 of the brigades who are restoring the walls of the
fortress are local builders.

E h3 ıa ü ırqfl3OT3K nanaB, mexnaT, rapa3, HHrH-HMrHflepaeH flYP™-flYMeH 3aT

renun 6anmafltı. (TV16.2) /BiS ca:y icya:nca:k palaw, söhlatt, garaS, iygi-
icgilerden dürlii-dümön 5a:t gelip başladı./
While vve were drinking tea, palaw, shöhlat [mutton dish], in a word, ali kinds of
food and drink started coming.

TypKMeHHCTaHtm TeppsiTopHHCbiHtın eTMinıı nponeırm usrenmcneH, hthm

TaparyM MennyrMuaen tıG apar. (TV8.5) /Türkmönü98a:nııj tenitoriya9ınıi]
yetmiş pro8enti ca:gelikden, yagm Garagum cölliigünnön ıba:rat./
Seventy percent of Turkmenistan’s territory consists of sand, that is, of the
Garagum desert.

Illy ryHKM oöa ctracaTMHtm ayftn Ma3Mym>ı flaiixaHtın, MapBaHttn anHHfleıı anHaH
3aTnapw, 3pkhhjihthhh raitraptm 6 epMeKf(en u6apaT. (TV11.5)
/Su:nkı o:bo 0ıya:9atınıq dü:p ma 8mu:nı dayharnıg, carwa:nır) elinnen alnan
8a:tlan, erkinliğini gaytanp bermekden ıba:rat./
The fundamental concept of today’s agricultural policy consists o f giving back the
things taken from the hands of the farmer and the livestock-breeder and their
freedom.
 Nouns 139

The ablative case in the meaning 'than' also is used to form comparative
expressions. The item compared to is placed in the ablative case (see 147).

By KetİHEK ıny KeüııeKfleH oh MaHaT rtiMMaT.

/Bu köynök su köynökdön o:n manat gımmat./
this shirt that shirt-than ten manat expensive
This shirt costs 10 manats more than that shirt.

©3H afltnmaH xeM y n u .

/Ö:8ü ardm nan hem u h ./
self-his name-his-than even big
His person is even greater than his name.

C m e TennefleH-ae rtiMMaT aa m a p tı SepflMM. (G)

/0i5e teıjrjeden-de gımmat 8a:tlan berdim./
I gave you things even more valuable than money.
HYKaHjjaH KapTOtnca ÖoıoHMa 11.400-nen K e n p s K aflaM aatnc ajrap. (N)
/Diika:nnan kartofika boyunco 11,400-Sön köprâ:k a:dam a:8ık alya:r./
More than 11,400 people get food with ration cards at the store.

İtene, flHKbi n»B minen xac yÜTTeııiHK, asçecH 6nnen (N)

/Yö:nö, yaıjkı gı:8 illen ha:0 ü:tgösiik, eje0i bilen gidipdir./
But that girl is quite different than the others, it seems she left with her
mother.
- Konxo3biMfci3fla yn Myıınen roBparaçMK xo:x;anHrbiMi>i3 6ap. (TP12.2)
/"KolhoBumuSSo üc mütjdön gowra:gjık lıojoiugumuS ba:r."/
"We have a bit better than 3,000 farms on our collective farm."

In forming fractions and decimal numerals, the numerator stands in the nominative
case and the denominator in the ablative case (see 163).

jjepTflen yH /dörrtdön üc/ three-fourths

four-from three = three (parts) from (the vvhole number) four

OHflan 6sıu /omnon bâ:5/ point five (0.5)

ten-fromfive = fıve (tenths) fitim (one and ten) tenths
140 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

OKOHHaTenBHO, ıuyHM K en e öonaH fla m y rfie-T o yq$eH 6 n p n sjh >

i 6 on a p .
K m e n e p . (TV10.2)
/Okoncatelno, sum keçe bolonno su gde-to üedön bi:ri ya:lı bolor. Kiceler./
In the end, when it becomes felt, it vvill be around one-third (in size). It vvill
shrink. [Russian oKOHuaTenfcHO 'fmally, in the end', rfle-T o 'around']

The ablative case expresses the degree or limit of an action or motion. Often, the
noun ending with this suffbc is preceded by a numeral.

Typ öaH r a n Ke^a flyuıyn, TorcaH KMJiOMeTpnen cyp fliı. (G)

/Gurba:n gi:rj köcâ: düşüp, tog0on kilometirden 0ürdü./
Gurban, fin d in g h im s e lf in a w id e Street, d ro v e at n in e ty k ilo m ete rs.

Another funetion of the ablative case occurs when buying or selling amounts or
individual items of goods that are sold in bulk or numbers. When asking 'how much' a
given item costs, the seller figures the cost per kilo or other unit, so that the
approximate English equivalent would be 'each' or 'per (kilo)'.

- A, my narraHLin khjiocei Hsvte, xs3itp narra 6axacw? - Eaxacii mkh MaHaTnaıı

(TV7.3) /"A, su pagta:mr) kilo8ı na:ce, hâ:5ir pagta bahaöı?" "Baha0ı
T e n s n OTBip.
iki manatdan töla:p otı:r."/
"And how much is a kilo of this cotton, the price of cotton now?" "They’re paying
the price of two manats per kilo."

I H e itn e 3 T ceı\, o 3 a n , ceırraöpt a ü fla m k h M aH aT»aH 6ep3s,eK flHMflMHep r a ı n o c t r a a .

M u m OKTflöpt aflfla y i M anaTflaH 6 e p x ;e K m ü n n o r u p n a p . (TV7.2)
/Şeyle e00er), o5ol, ©entyabr a:yda iki manatdan berjek diydiler kiloOuno. İnni
oktyabr a:yda üc manatdan berjek diyip otı:rlar./
So, before, in September, they said they would pay tvvo manats for each kilo.
Now, in October, they’re saying they’ll pay three manats per kilo.

When it is used in a time construction with the word ene-^e /yene-de/ 'and more',
the ablative case suffbc +flaH/fleH /+dan/den/ denotes 'in another (space of time)'.

E H e-a e 6np aüjjaH 6 h 3m»( rapamcti3ntımMH3 m k h s ıu a a p . (N )

/Yene-de bir a:ydan bi5ir| Garas0ı81ıgımı5 iki ya:saya:r./
In another month, our independence will be two-years old.

To express the starting- and ending-points of an action ('from X to Y') Türkmen

adds the ablative case suffbc to the first noun of the construction and the dative case
suffbc to the second noun.
 Nouns 141

ApTHK AÜHaHH 6oünan-6ama cinuıan MbiKaHflan con, ene 6npa3 flypaçarüHbi,

artiHBi cyp^eniHM Shjimsh, hkm apa#a cepre^eH raımM. (G)
/Artık A:ynam boydon-basa 0ı:nla:p cıkannan 0og, yene bira:5 durjogum, .ıtını
öürjögünü bilmâ:n, iki a:rada 0erge8Sa:n ga:llı./
After examining Ayna from head to foot, Artık remained in doubt, not knowing
whether to ride off on his horse or to stay for a while. ['from body to head ]

CoBeT KocMoııaBTJiapbiHbm. flaöapacbi artonaH-araa, MJifleH-HJie, lopTAaıı-ıopfla

eTflH. (G)
/0owet ko0monowtlorunurj dabaraOı agı58an-ag6a, ilien-ile, yu:rtdon-yu:rdo yetdi./
The triumph of the Soviet cosmonauts passed from mouth to mouth, from people
to people, from country to country.

The combination of certain verbs vvith nouns ending in the ablative case have
meanings that cannot be predicted from the meanings of their components. Such
combinations are similar to English verbs like 'to put up with', 'to get down un', and
so on. For example, the Turkmen equivalent to English 'to hug him around tlıe neck'
is OHyrç öoiİHynaaH ry}K,aKjiaMaK /onurj boynunnon gujoklomok/ 'to hug from his
neck', and its equivalent to English 'to enter through the door' is ranuflaıı i'hpmck
/gapıdan gi:rmek/ 'to enlet from the door'. The meanings of such combinations are
provided in dicdonaries.

Forms o f the Ablative Case

To mark the ablative case, the suffix +nan/jteu /+dan-don/den-dön/ is added to words
ending in consonants or vovvels, except that the variant +HnaH/ıınen /t n n an -
nııon/nnen-nnön/ is added to those ending in the third person posssessive sufiix +ulu
/+ı/i/ (see 69).
For paradigms of nouns vvith plural, possessive and case suffixes, see f '71-576.
Some postpositions require the use of the ablative case on the preceding noun (see
421). Tlıe ablative case also appears v/ith the past participle to form a time, phrase
('after...'; see 425, 503).
 ADJECTİVES

Adjectives form a paıt of speech that expresses attributes or qualities of persons, places
and things. They may indicate color, shape, size, feel, taste and other features;
relationships in space or time; the presence or absence of some quality; emotional and
physiological states; and many other features that answer questions like 'What kind
of?' m i c h ? ' /What?' and 'How?'
In Turkmen, adjectives behave very much as they do in English. Generally, an
adjective functions as an attribute which is placed before the noun it qualifies.

r a p a M a n a n ı /g a ra m a s ı:n / re 3 e n m ra /göSöl c a :g a /
b la c k c a r b e a u t if u l c h ild
K e n r e c a n / k e lte 0 a c / c y f ta y t an M a /6 ü :jü a lm a /
sh o rt h a ir s w e e t a p p le
aM aflaM /a :c a :d a m / T 33e 3 n H n 6 w ii /ta:Se e lip b iy /
hungıy p e r s o n n e w a lp h a b e t
y sa K » p T /u 8 o k y u :r t / y 3aK r y H /u S o k g ü n /
d is ta n t c o u n tr y lo n g d a y
lOM nıaK MepeK / y u m s o k c ö r ö k / r a n O T ar /g i:r j o to g /
s o f i b re a d s p a c io u s ro o m

As in English, an adjective or adjectives may modify the noun expressing the

subject or the object of a sentence.

©UKH anqaK, reımeMceıc KaıcaarçaH flsn sjihhm. (N)

/Öykü alçak, geplemOek Ka:kaja:n dâ:l ya:lıdı./
He didn’t seem like the old sociable, talkatıve Kakajan.

On a ru p r-yımep retim ntTflH. (O) /Ol ağır günlör geçip gitdi./

Those difficult days did pass.
LlHxa, MenMH rapııiMMfla opTa Gottntı, rapare3ejıeK ü h th t oTiip. (N)
/inha:, menir) garsımda orto boylı, garagöSölök yiğit otı:r./
Here in front of me sits a black-eyed young man of medium heîght.

0 nflYpw n»;eK 6eH3HH tuiMbi 3cacnanaı>ıpManapa re p a , 3KonorwKH Taiiflan x;yna

ap acca , aıuaitbmı yıiHH 3tt«ucw3 6 onap. (N)
/Ö:nniirüljök benSin ilmi e0a:01anmrmalara göra:, ekologiki ta:ydan juda: ara00a,
ya:sayıs ü£ü:n 8ıya:n0ı8 bolor./
According to scientiffc tests, the gasoline that will be produced will be very clean
ecologically and will not be harmful for the living.
144 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Onyn AMepHKa 6y canapbi T a p u x u canapfltıp. (N)

/Onur) Amerika: bu 0apan ta:n:hı Sapardır./
This trip of his to America is a historic trip.

An adjective also may serve as the predicate of a sentence ( O H y n c a H b i K e jr r e

/Onurj ©acı kelte/ H is hair is short'), or as an adverb ( O j i n p p s K reJiflM /Ol irrâ:k
gelli/ 'She came sooner'), but very rarely as a subject or object.

XoBntmttn ınm rapanKbi. (G) /Howh:mıj ici gararjkı./

I t ’s d a rk inside of the courtyard.

TapnaBan yuypcu3 OBaflaH aT 6 onyn eTHiıiflM. Ö3eM ynyrtra kmmmh onaT

runbiKjjMAbi. (N)
/Garlawa:c ucur0u5 owodon at bolup yetisdi. Ö:8öm ulugı:8 kimi:n oqot gdtklıdı./
Garlavach grew up as an extremely beautiful horse. She also was weli-behaved
like a grown girl.
By ryH xoB a canKUH. (BG) /Bu:n howa: 0alkm./
The weather is cool today.

When Turkmen adjectives serve as attributes, they do not take suffixes of number,
person or case. When they fiınction as subjects or objects of a sentence, they may take
these suffixes.

floKyn aıjflaH xa6apbf eK. (G) /Dokui) a:edan haban yo:k./

The full know nothing of hunger.

rbi3UJiJiap aıuıapbi ennMnep. (G) /GıSıllar a:klan yerjdiler./

The reds beat the whites.
 Adjectives 145

Types of Adjectives
Türkmen a d je c tiv e s m a y be sim p le a d je c tiv e s ( flo r p u /d ogn / 'tru e '), a d jectives d erived
fro m n o u n s, v e r b s and o th e r a d je c tiv e s th ro u gh d e r iv a tio n a l s u ff ix e s ( ö y jıy T J it ı
/b u lu tlı/ 'c lo u d y ' < öyjıyT /b u lu t/ 'c lo u d ') , or c o m b in e d words (K w T iır e 3 J iM
/yitigöS lii/ 'v ig ila n t ' < ü h t h /yiti/ 'sh a r p ' + re a .iH /göSlü/ 'e y e d ') .

Simple Adjectives
Turkmen has a wide range of one- or two-syllable adjectives, along w:ıh those
borrowed from Persian and Arabic, that may be called simple adjectives. They
designate colors ( a n /a:k/ 'white', r a p a /gara/ 'black'), densities (ıOMiuaK /yumsok/
'soft', ra T b i /gatı/ Tıard'), tastes (avK,u /a:jı/ 'bitter', cyft}K,n /6ü:jü/ 'sweet'), physical
characteristics ( K e p /kö:r/ 'blind', a r c a K /agSak/ 'lame'), location in spacc ( y a a n
/u6ok/ 'far', h k u h /yakı:n/ 'near'), character (M eıcu p /mekir/ 'clever', c a x ı,; /0ahı:/
'generous'), ete.

Derived Adjectives
In addition to simple vvords vvithout suffixes, Turkmen adjectives may be cre:.ıed vvith
derivational suffixes. Some of the most common of these suffixes are thosı: vvhich
indicate the presence of a quality (+ Jitı/nn /+lı/li/), the absence of a quality (+ı:bi3/cn3
/+0ı8/8i5/), the reiationship of a quality ( + k m /k h /+kı/ki/), the result of an action
(- l ik /h k /-ık/ik/) or the quality of an action (-a p /ep ) (see 538-544).

ryÜH /gü:c/ strength rYÖHJiM /gü:clii/ stron g

cyB /0uw/ vvater cyB cy3 /0uw0u8/ a n d
en /öi)/ front part eHKM /örjkü/ p rev io u s, past
aHMaK /açmak/ to open anbiK /acık/ op en , clear
rynMeK /gülmök/ to laugh ry n e p / g ü lö r / la u g h in g

Combined Adjectives
Turkmen adjectives also may be formed through combinations of vvords, eitheı of two
adjectives vvith or vvithout adjectival suffixes, or of compound adjectives and other
parts of speech.

KyMYiıı chmjih aÜHeK /kümiiS 0i:mli â:ynek/ silver-rimmed glasses

yuH-KHMii aflaMnap /ulı-kiöi a:damlar/ people big and small
e3MrTbfflpnH asm /ö:8ıgtıya:rh aya:l/ independent vvoman

Some nouns and compounds also behave like adjectives because they c itribute
qualities to other nouns that they precede.
146 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Bam übmjikiK raıaıt /ba:5 yıllık pılan/ fıve-year plan

m kh raT / i k i g a t ja :y / tw o -s to ry b u ild in g
3MTÖ3 aflaM /a:£gö8 a:dam/ greedy person (Tıungry-eyed person")

Tıırkmen has a construction (borrowed İroni Persian) that places an adjective after a
noun ending in the third person possessive suffbc +m/h /+ı/i/. For example, when
serving as an adjective, the phrase caqw Kejrre /0acı kelte/ in cam>ı Kejrre aajı /Sacı
kelte aya:l/ 'short-haired woman' may be interpreted as '(woman) whose hair is short' =
'short-haired'. English equivalents like 'short-haired', 'long-tailed', lıigh-handed', ete.,
often may be found for this construction.

caMM K ejrre asın /öacı k e lte aya :l/ short-haired w om a n

('w o m a n w h o se h a iris sh o rt')
3JIH ryÖMJDi aflaM /eli g ü :c lü atdam/ stron g-h an d ed m an
('m an w h o s e hands are strö n g')
aarfci yJibi o n ıa H /ay a ğı u lı go lo n / b o y w id ı b ig fe e t
( 'b o y vvhose fe e t are b ig ')

Besides such formations, Turkmen also may create adjectives through the process of
partial reduplication of the form of an adjective (an-aK /ap-a:k/ 'snow white'; see 150,
510).
 Adjectives 147

Comparative Degree
The comparative degree of adjectives is used to compare two persons or things and to
indicate the one vvhich possesses the greatest amount of a compared quality or attribute.
Türkmen forms the comparative degree in three ways: one vvith a suffix that expresses
the possession of more of the quality of an adjective; a second by vvord order that
indicates the possession of more of the quality of an adjective than the compared item;
and the third through a combination of the fîrst two vvhich expresses the possession of
more of the quality of an adjective and more of that quality than the compared item.
Adding the suffix + p a n : / p 3 K /+ra:k/ra:k/ to an adjective or adverb forms a
comparative adjective possessing 'a little' or 'somevvhat' more of the quality expressed
by the adjective.

cyii»;H /0ü:jü/ svveet cyft^ypaK /0ü:jürâ:k/ a little svveeter

yntt /ulı/ big, old yjibtpaıc /ulıra;k/ a little bigger, older
Ken /köp/ much KenpsK /köpra:k/ a little more
rtiMMaT /gımmat/ expensive rfctMMaflpaıc /gımmadrark/ a litde more expensive

Use of an adjective with the suffix + p a n / p a K /+ra:k/râ:k/ by itself implies

comparison, although the compared item need not be stated.

I a p n t ,i 3 cyibî;n, raByH c y iİJK y p aK . (T)

/GarpıS 8ü:jü, ga:wun eü:jürâ:k./
Watermelon is svveet, but melon is svveeter.
Mene «HflH 6y HcnenHMJra M a jrrp a K Me3yn3flMece, Meran TaıcaflHM eTeHOKflbi.
(H) /Yö:nö inni bu İ01egimi8 caltra:k cö5üla:yme0e, menit) ta:kadım yetenorkdı./
But if this wish of ours is not fulfılled a little more quickly, my patience is just
going to run out. ['isn’t going to be sufficient']
A3paK JurrapaK flHÖMecen, OKyBbiıihi tobu OKaap. (TV4.4)
/A:8ra:k yaltara;k diymeOeg, okuvvum govvı okoya:r./
He might be a little bit too lazy, but he studies vvell.

A second comparative formation consists of the item of comparison follovved by the

compared item vvith the ablative case suffix +flan/floıı /+dan/den/, follovved by an
adjective vvithout tlıe suffix +paK/paK /+ra;k/râ:k/.

On flHBaH rantmaıı ran. On Meıifleıı yntı.

/Ol diwan gapıdan gi:ıj./ /Ol mennen ulı./
that couch door-ıhan wide he I-ıhan big
That couch is wider dian the door. He is older than me.
148 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

This structure stresses the fact that the item of comparison possesses more of the
quality of the adjective than the compared item.

TaByH rapntoaaH cyüjk,». (T) /Ga:wun garpıSSan 9ü:jü./

Melon is s w e e t e r th a n watemıelon. [~ Melon is more sweet than watermelon.]

Cıee Tenneflen-fle rbiMMaT 3aTJiapbi öepflHM. (G)

/0iSe ter|i)eden-de gımmat Sa:tlan berdim./
I gave you things even m o r e v a lu a b le t h a n money.

A third formation combines features of the previous two foımations. In this

construction, the item of comparison is followed by the compared item with the
ablative case suffix + gan /fleH /+dan/den/ and then by the adjective with the
comparative suffîx + paıc/p3K /+ra:k/râ:k/.

Oji MenfleH y3HH. On Mennen y3tmpaK.

/Ol mennen u5ı:n./ /Ol mennen u8ı:nra:k./
he l-than tali he l-than tall-er
He is taller than me. He is (a little) taller than me.

Ysym anMaflan riiMMaT. Y3yM anMaflaH mMMaflpaK.

/ÜSüm almadan gımmat./ /Ü8üm almadan gımmadra:k./
grapes apple-than expensive grapes apple-than expensive-a little
Grapes are more expensive Grapes are (a little) more expensive
than apples. than apples.

This formation stresses the fact that the item of comparison itself possesses 'a
little', 'rather' or 'somewhat' more of the quality of the adjective in addition to
possessing more of that quality than the compared item.

TaByn rapntBflaH CYİİJKyp3K.(T) /Ga:wun garpıSSan 9ii:jiirâ:k./

Melon is (a little) sweeter than watermelon.

MtırnaK 6oimh ep Typ6an arantın eönepHHflen 6«p a3a»;wK a<ıtırpaKfli,ı. (G)

/Yıgnak bolya:n yer Gurba:n a:ga:nır) öylörünnön bir a:8ajık acıgrarkdı./
The place vvhere the meeting was taking place was a little bit more open than
Gurban-aga’s home.
 Adjectives 149

Superlative Degree

The superlative degree is used for comparison betvveen more than two persons cır things
in order to identify the one vvhich possesses the greatest amount of the compared
quality. The most common way to form the superlative degree in Turkmen consists of
placing the vvord hu /ir)/ 'most' before an adjective that usually precedes a noun

By Aıura6axna un 6eibuc
/Bu Asgabatda ir) beyik ja:y./
this Ashgabat-in most tali building
This is the tallest building in Ashgabat.

As a rule, the best English equivalent to this construction is the suffij; '-est',
although an expression like 'most X ' sometimes is appropriate.

By - my tumhh hmiihh3KH hh ynw (G) /Bu: - su ta:mır) icinna:ki iq v.U ja:y./

This is the largest room in this house.
Gtifle un khmhm TYJiYCTaH JfsaH rajiflLi. (BG)
/Öydö it) kicim Giilü00a:n ja:n ga:llı./
My littlest one, dear Giilüstan, stayed at home.

MepKe3HH mh repH YK m ı epnepHHfle epneınflsH ÖMpHsue K3pxaHaJiapbin flaııibiHM

MepMep flanibi ÖHJieH 6e3eHapHC. (N) /MerkeSirj ir) gö rn liklü yerlerin n e yerl£-..iyâ:n
b im â :c e kâ:rh a:n alarııj d asu ıı m erm e r d a:sı bilen be5eya:ri8./
We are decorating vvith marble the exteriors of several enterprises located in ıhe
most prominent places of the Çenter.

The modal vvord xac /ha:6/ 'most' often indicates that an adjective or ndverb,
especially one ending in the comparative suffix +pan/p3K /+ra:k/râ:k/, possesses the
superlative degree of a quality.

xac onaapaK /lıa:0 oıjodra-.k/ most excei!ent, finest

xax OBaflaHpaK /ha:8 owodonra:k1 most beautiful, loveliest

This formation is equivalent to English 'the most X' or to the 'most' in an

expression like 'most interesting' or 'most delightful'.

Xac nrabK epH-fle, rnon Saiıntırtm xeMMecn Opa36M6nHHH Mauırajıacbma

flermunH. (G)
/Ha:0 gı5ık yeri-de, sol ba:ylıgır) hemmeöi Ora:8bi:bi:nir) masgalaSına degiiili./
The most interesting thing is that ali that vvealth belongs to Orazbibi’s fam; ly.
150 Turkmen Reference Grammar

OHyn 6apMarı.iHfla xac oeaaaHpaK üy3YK Sapflbi. (T)

/Onur) barmagınna ha:9 owodonra:k yü8ük ba:rdı,/
She had the most beautiful ring on her finger.

Several adverbs may be used to indicate the superlative degree or various heightened
degrees of a quality. These include especially mman /i/jıjârn/ 'really, very', but also
o p a n /örâ:n/ 'very' and raTbi /gatı/ 'extremely, quite'.

nnH3M öeftmc x;aM /iggârn beyik/ a really tali building

epsn kmmh mt /örârn kici it/ a very small dog
raTbi inme 6nn /gatı imce bi:l/ an extremely thin waist

Another way to express an intensified quality of an adjective is through the lexica!

device of partial reduplication (see 510). In this process, the first syllable of an
adjective is partially duplicated, and the resulting syllable is placed before the
adjective.

aK / a : k / vvhite an-aK /a p - a :k / snow-white

capw /0a:n/ yellow can-capbl /0ap-6a:n/ bright yellow
florpbi /dogrı/ correct noc-florptı /do0-dogn/ absolutely correct

Sometimes an adjective may be fully reduplicated and placed before a noun to stress
the heightened degree of a quality. Many such nouns may be understood as coliectives
equivalent to English plurals.

cY ^H -cyS^n mMmht /Öü:jü-6ü:jü iymit/sweet, sweet food (extremely sweet)

6eöKK-6eÖHK *;aîf /beyik-beyik ja:y/ tali, tali buildings (extremely tali)
ym ı-ynu flaın /uh-uh dars/ big, big rocks (extremely big)

Eepan ara 6onca ouyu sniiaH Manbuibi-Maıibuibi ryppYHnepHne anK-TanK Bonyn

ranflbi. (G).
/Berdi a:ga bol0o onuıj edyârn marmlı-marmlı gümirçlörünö aıjk-tarjk bolup ga:llı./
As for Berdi-aga, he was stili amazed by the extremely profound conversations
he’d had. ['meaningful-meaningfur]
- Ey apTCKMHH OKaMaflbiK a 3iıınTMeflMK TYpKMeH a 3 -a 3 n u p . (N)
/'Bu ertekini okomoduk ya: esilmedik türkmön a:5-a:S8ır.7
"There are extremely few Türkmen who have not either read or heard this fairy
tale," ['few-few']
GMjraHfleH c o n r e r y n M y sy u e T o n 6 a K -T o n 6 a K aK 6 y n y r n a p renflH. (BG)
/Ö y lâ :n n e n ö o q g ö rg ü r j y ü S ü n ö to p b o k - t o p b o k a rk b u lu tlo r g e lli./
In the aftemoon, big bunches of white clouds covered the face of the sky.
['bunch-bunch']
 QUANTIFIERS

The term "quantifiers" refers to numerals, pronouns and other vvords that function to
determine the quantity, whether definite or indefinite, of a person, place or thing.

Numerals
The Turkmen numeral system consists of Cardinal (6Hp /bir/ '1', hkh /iki/ '2', ete.)
and ordinal (fiupıiH^H /birinji/ 'first', h k h h ^ h /ikinji/ 'second', ete.) numerals, as
well as forms for expressing collectives (hkmmh3 /ikimiS/ 'two of us', ete.),
distributions (ıiKHReH /ikiden/ 'in tvvos', ete.) and approximations (Garnnep /bârsler/
'about five', ete.), its means of counting numbers is the same as that of English
(fturptiMH 6wp /yigrimi bi:r/ '20 and 1' = '21', ete.).

Cardinal Numerals
Cardinal numbers identify vvhether a noun, pronoun or adjective refer to one or more
units. They are the primary (or "cardinal") units of a number system.
Turkmen has a zero-based number system vvith distinet vvords for the primary
numerals (1-9), units of ten (10-90) and units for multiples of ten (100, 1,000,
1, 000 ,000).

1 6 ııp /bir/ 10 oh /o:n/

2 hkm /iki/ 20 üıırpHMH /yigrimi/
3 YM/ü£/ 30 OTy3 /otu 8/
4 flepT /dö:rt/ 40 KBipK /kırk/
5 6 sııl /bâ:s/ 50 3jniH /elli/
6 a n r a /altı/ 60 anTHtnıı /altm ış/
7 eflH /yedi/ 70 eTMHîiı /yetmiş/
8 ceKH3 /6eki8/ 80 eerceH /0eg0en/
9 flOKy3 /dokuS/ 90 ToreaH /togdon/

The vvords M y3 'h u n d r e d ', M y n 'th o u s a n d ', m h jijih o h 'm illio n ', M M n jiM a p n
'billion' and TpH JiJiH O H 'tr illio n ' also serve as C ard in al n u m e ra ls. Counting in th e
hun d red s o r thousan d s req u ires plaeing a simple unit b e fo re üy3 or MYH-
The construction for counting units ('one, two', ete.) betvveen tens ('ten, tvventy',
ete.) consists of a decade number follovved by a primary number. Generally, numbers
betvveen tens are pronounced as one vvord. The numeral oh /o:n/ in the combinations
for '11-19' is pronounced vvithout long vovvel as /on/, vvhereas the numeral 6np /bir/ in
the combinations '11, 21, 31', ete. is pronounced vvith long vovvel as /bi:r/.
152 Turkmen Reference Granunar

11 oh 6ııp /on bi:r/ 21 ÜHrpMMH 6wp /yigrimi bi:r/

12 oh mkm /on iki/ 22 Bmiphmm mkm /yigrimi iki/
13 oh yH /on üc/ 33 0Ty3 y i /otug ü£/
14 oh flepT /on dö:rt/ 44 KtıpK flepT /kırk dö:rt/
15 oh 63iii /on ba:s/ 55 3iınM 6sm /elli bâ:s/
16 oh anTbi /on altı/ 66 anTMum a n r a /altmış altı/
17 oh eflH /on yedi/ 77 eTMMiu eflH /yetmiş yedi/
18 oh ceKH3 /on 0ekiö/ 88 cerceH ceKH3 /0eg6en 0eki6/
o 19 oh floKy3 /on dokuS / 99 TorcaH floxy3 /togSon dokuS/

Unlike in English, Turkmen has distinct vvords for the tens from 20 to 50 that are
not based on the simple units.

two HKM/İkİ/ twen-ty flıırpHMM /yigrimi/

three YM/üc/ thir- ty OTy3 /otuS/
four flepT /dö:rt/ for- ty KJbipK /kırk/
five 6sm /bâ:s/ fif -ty 3HJIM/elü/

Hovvever, one may detect common elements betvveen the units 6-9 and the tens 60-
90 in both Turkmen and English.

six ajiT-M /alt-»/ six-ty anT-Miim /alt-m ıs/

seven efl-M /yed-i/ seven-ty er-Miım /yet-mis/
eight ceKM3 /0eki6/ eight-y cerc-eH /0eg0-en/
nine flOKy3 /doku 8/ nine- ty Torc-aH /togö-an/

As quantifiers, the Cardinal numerals for the primary units serve to count the
number or specific quantity o f things or persons. They may take possessive and case
suffixes, Unlike in English, nouns preceded by numbers do not take the plural suffbc.

Ory3-KbipK rc K T a p TeBepeıc epe my üfcin ryÜMiYK öyrflafi 3KMenı

njıaımamflbipun o n ıp u c . (TVİ 1.4)
/Otu5-kırk gektar tövvörök yere su yıl gü:51ük bugdoy ekmeği pılanlasdınp otı:n0./
This year we’re planning to plant Autumn vvheat on about th irty o r forty hectares
of the land.
 Quantifiers 153

TaflHMH AMyn, xa3HpKH tfepjçeB ni3xepH, ıımepHHfle ctmmiii MMJiJieTMn

BerauiM auıaap. (TV12.5) /Gadı:mı Amu:l, hâ:5irki Câ:rjew sâheri, saherkne
yetmiş milletirj weki:li ya:saya:r./
Ancient Amul, modem Chârjew, representatives of seventy nationalities ve in
the city.

TapuxHunapHn MaKiıaMartiHa repo, reHepan CKOöeneB TeK^ene raııactıı ma o h

6a m myu aflaMU m ptıım bip ahümh to k Bfliuıtop. (TV13.3)
/Ta:rı:hcılanı] caklamagına görâ:, general Skobelev Gö:kdepe gala:0ınna on ba:s
mürj a:damı gırıpdır diyip cak edilyâ:r./
According to historians, it’s surmised that General Skobelev slaughtered 15 ,000
p e o p le at the foıtress of Gokdepe.

The Cardinal numbers are used in expressions for telling amounts of moııey (see
559), weights (see 559), ages, dates, time (see 555), and number of m inme; hours,
days and years.

ü leitne 3Tcen, 03an, ceırra6pb aöfla hkm ManaTflaH 6ep^eK flHÖflMJiep Kjı. joctuıa.
Mhhh ojcra6pb aiifla yn ManaTflan 6ep»;eK fliıömı OTbipnap. (TV7.2)
/Şeyle e00eıj, oSol, öentyabr a:yda iki manatdan berjek diydiler kilo0uno. İnni
oktyabr aryda il£ manatdan berjek diyip otı:rlar./
So, before, in September, they said they would pay tw o m a n a t s per one kilo.
Now, in October, they’re saying they’U pay th r e e m a n a ts (per kilo).
Xep ait MeH my ;*;afciM a eTMiıuı 6anı ManaT Teııeüsn. (TV9.3)
/Her a:y men su ja:yıma yetmiş bats manat tölöyâ:n./
Each month I pay s e v e n ty - fiv e m a n a ts for this place of mine.

Hem*;efle, sıpan 6oıoıma aftfla ceKH3 mhiijihoh Manana 6apa6ap xaptır

flOJiaHUHibirbi SflHJiöap. (TV11.4) /Netiyede, etra:p boyunco a:yda 0eki5 million
manada barabar han:t dolonusugı edilyâ:r./
As a result, each month throughout the district there is a circulation of goocls
equivalent to e ig lıt m illio n m a n a ts .

AS, 6wp cerceH Toııııa, TorcaH Tomıa narra renttap 6ııp ryıifle. (TV7.3)
/Ay, bir öegöen tonno, togöon tonno pagta gelyâtr bir günnö./
Oh, some e ig h t y to n s, n in e ty to n s of cotton come each day.

Ouyu raımajibuma 5 au ı-ajiT bi auııibi orJiaHx;tiK öjtneH ÜÇeMan 6np aamap öapafla
xe3«n 3flnn rypjıeuröspflHnep. (TV16.2) /Onurj gapdaluına bâ:s-altı ya:slı oglonjuk
bilen Iema:l bir 5a:tlar ba:rada heSil edip gürlösyâ-.rdiler./
Next to her the fiv e - o r s ix - y e a r o ld boy and Jemal were having fun talking about
some things.
154 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

OrnaHH xeM oh nepT-oH a j r r u am napuım a etfneHflnpnnflnp:nep. (TV16.1)

/Oglonı hem on dö:rt-on altı ya:slannna öylönnüriipdürlör,/
But they married off boys, too, at ih e a g e o f fo u r t e e n to s ix te e n .
flH Ue ÖH3HH M e ffm m ıa H H c n n y n m b m s oKyBJiap aJiTU ft u jı flOBaM
(TP12.3) /Diıje biSirj mediöina İn0titutumu88o okuwlor altı yıl dowa:m edyatr./
Only in our medical institute do studies continue for six years.
n a rra nyH KTa anrycTHH ttıırpHMH ceKHSHHneH f o p ıı re m in n y p . (TV7.3)
/Pagta punkta awgu0tui] yigrimi ÖekiSinnen bâ:ri gelip duar./
Cotton has been coming to the point since August 28th.
KaıcaM ypıua rurm , Men KaxaM. KttpK smıtrHfla. ©3w 6ııp myh HOKya ttys
YHyHJKM ÜLiüfla 6onan. (TV13.3) /Ka:kam urso gitdi, meıj karkam. Kırk yarsınna.
Ö:5ü bir mürj doku8 yii8 ücünjjü yılla bolon./
My father went to war, my father. At the age of forty. He was bom in 1903.
B su iH H ayı r y n e , c a r a T ö a u ıe MeH K on n epTe Bnner ajifltîM. (TV3.3)
/Barsinji günö, 0a:gat bâ:se men kon0erte bilet allım./
I got tickets for a concert on Friday at 5 o’clock.
A B T o ö y c m y epfleH o h CııpneH o h MHHyT H Uinaııne y r p a a p . (TV3.2)
/Awtobu0 su yerden on bi:rden o:n minut i:sla:nne ugroya:r./
The bus leaves here at 10 minutes past 10.
JÎMÜMeK, o h ceKH3 c a ra T -fla ? (TV2.3) /Diymek, on 0ekiS 0a:gat-da:?/
That means it [the tıain] just takes eighteen hours?
X opM aTJitı flM n n eö*;nn ep, c a ra T ceKM3Hen floKy3 MHHyT HinjıenH. (TA2.3)
/H orm oth d ig le y jile r, 0 a:gat 0eki88en dokuS m in u t irsledi./
Dear listeners, the time is 7:09.

Each unit of a telephone number is said separately; for example, 13-33-41 is said oh
yM 0Ty3 y n K u p K 6w p /on üc otuS üc kırk bi:r/. A price consisting of manats and
tengges may be said in two different ways; for example, 30.50 MaHaT /30.50 manat/
may be said o T y 3 M aHaT 3Jinn T e lin e /otuS manat elli teıjtje/ or OTy3 nyıib 3Ju ih
(MaHaT) /otu8 nul elli (manat)/.

The Numeral 6up /bir/

The Turkmen numeral Cwp /bir/ '1' has several usages. As a numeral, it specifıes 'one'
person, unit or instance.

- Bnp e3repıını 6auıra onnap»ıa e s re p m u flepeflHap - ahİîhii, rynflorapbnc cepeTflH.

(G) /"Bir öSgöriis basga o:nlorco öSgöriis dörödya:r" diyip, günnogonrk 0eretdi./
He looked to the east and said "One change creates a dozen other changes."
 Quantifıers 155

A n n a My3 aflaM tııj rero tu e tmaHapMM, 6w p ajıaM bin renıiH e? (N )

/Alla: yiiS a.'damıi) gepine ınanarmı, bir a:damıq gepine?/
Will God believe the word of a hundred people or the vvord of one person?

This numeral also may act as a noun referrring to 'one' as a person or thing,
especially in the phrases 6wpM fbv.n/ 'one of (something)' and 6Mpn-6npn /bi:ri-bi:ri/
'one another'.

Ojiûm 3cacw ra3 hmkhh epneprot 6ııpn 6onyn raıiflbi xa3np. Mre moHyn yhhh
ra305K,aK flMüBapnep. (TV8.1) /Olom e0a:0ı ga8 cıkyatn yerlerir) bi:ri bolup ga:ilı
hâ:Sir. îne sonug ücürn GaSorjok diyyâ.-rler,/
Now it’s also götten to be one of the basic places for producing gas. And that’s
why they cali it Gazojak ("Gas Hearth").

Enpn-6npHM H3H rspM3HMMH3e S u p T o n a p B a rr 6 ojihh . (TV7.5)

/Bi:ri-bi:rimi8i görmâ:nimi8e bir topor wagt bollı./
It’s been quite a while since we’ve seen one another.

Mkh caHM apKeK aflaM 6Hpıı-6MpnHG carıaM SepeHfle, huibikhto sımyjıa

«CajjaBMaueMKHMİ» s-fla «SccanaBManeÖKHM!» flHİİMn {tyanenilsp. (TA15.1)
/İki 0a:m erkek a:dam bi:ri-bi:rine 0ala:m berenne, ya:5ıkici ya:sula:
"0alawma:leykijn!" ya:-da "E00alawma:leykim!" diyip yiiSlönyâ:r./
When two men greet one another, the younger one addresses the older with
"Salawmaleykim!" or "Essalawmaleykim!"

In an extended meaning of 'one', the numeral Sup /bir/ is equivalent to 'same' in

the sense of '(they are) one' = 'same'.

BenaHtın, M3xpKX,eMzntm Be KejraçsHHH rHTMejm yıypnaptı ÖHpflM. (G)

/Wepa:nıi), Mâhrijema:lıi] we Keljâ:nir) gitmeli ugurlon birdi./
Vepa, Mâhrijemal and Kelje were to go in the same direction. ['their directions
were the same']

O h KbUiflaH 6spn 6np xojıonn.m>HnrHMH3 6ap. (Tl 7.2)

/O:n yıllan bâ:ri bir holodilnigimiS ba:r./
We’ve had the sam e refrigerator for ten years,

The numeral 6wp /bir/ also may be placed before successive nouns in the meaning
'one X and another X '. The phrase ene 6np /yene bir/ 'another' literally means 'one
more'.

OıryH ca3bi 6np anaMbi rynflYP^n o n ıp , 6wp ajjaMbi arnaflbnı OTiip. (BH)
/Onut) 0a:8i bir ardamı güllürüp otı:r, bir a:damı a:gladıp otı:r./
His music makes one person smile and another person cry.
156 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Enp rem in HaH an tın flyp, 6wp rti3 xeM ohm acan, öepnn on>ıp. (N)
/Bir gelin nam yapıp du:r, bir gı:8 hem om ya0ap, dürtüp berip otı:r./
One young vvoman is placing bread [on the walls of a tamdır-oven], and
another girl is making the bread and handing it to her.

- Xanflypfli>ı, m c h cana e H e 6 n p c o p a r SepjK.eK. (TV12.4)

/Ha:nnurdı, men 0ai)a yene bir 8o:rog berjek./
Handurdı, I want to ask you another question. [or: 'one more question']

Turkmen does not have an indefinite article 'a/an'. Although Sup /bir/ may be
translated by the English indefinite article 'a/an' in some contexts, it does not fiınction
as an indefinite article in Turkmen. Rather, it may be understood as a numeral 'one' in
nearly every case; as an example, the phrase 6 w p T o n a p Barr /bir topor wagt/ 'a while'
literally means 'one accumulation of time'. A similar interpretation also applies to the
following cases.

lOpflaMaH S o n c a y jıy flaH 6np aeM aüflfci-fla, c o p a r u H b i ra Ö T a jıa M a flu . (BH)

/Yu:rdama:n bolflo uİudon bir dem aliı-da, 0o:rogum gaytalamadı./
Yurdaman took a deep breath and did not repeat his question. ['one deep breath']

anmursM io fleByıCHH. Ycca Gııp xenne rapaumtiM, rejiMeflH. (T17.2)

/Âpisgâ:mi8 dövvükdü. U00a: bir hepde garaşdun, gelmedi./
Our window was broken. I waited for the repairman for a week, he didn’t come.
['one week']

However, the numeral 6wp /bir/ may designate an indefinite number in the sense of
'some'. This meaning also occurs in indefinite expressions treated below (see 173).

AH, ÖHp c e r c e n TOHHa, T o r c a H TOHHa n a r T a renüsp 6np ryHfle. (TV7.3)

/Ay, bir 0eg0en tonno, togOon tonno pagta gelyâ:r bir günnö./
Oh, some eighty tons, ninety tons of cotton come each day.

Hly flepManxanajıapfla ennep-o K o n flepMaH öapflaM Beım, uıy Barr 6 n p a e p .\ıa n

eTMe3MHimreM ö o n a p . (TV9.4) [öapflaM < 6apflu xeM]
/Su denna;nha:nalarda öi)lör-a: köp denna:n ba:rdam weli, su wagt bir derma:n
yetmeSciligem bolya:r./ [ba;rdam < ba:rdı hem]
Whereas at least before, there were a lot of medicines in these drugstores, these
days there’s a shortage of some medicines.
 Quantifiers 157

Ordinal Numerals
Ordinal numerals assign an order, rank or position within a series to counted persons,
things or dates. They are equivalent to English 'first', 'second', and so on.
Turkmen forms ordinal numerals by adding the suffix + u h İK,u / hh ^ h /+ınjı-
unjı/inji-ünjü/ to Cardinal numerals.

Cardinal Ordinal

ÖHp /bir/ one 6upnn3K,n /birinji/ first

mkh /iki/ tvvo HKHiayi /ikinji/ second
yu /üc/ three YMYH*;H /üciinjfü/ third
»epT /dö:ıt / four aapaYHX,H /dö:ıdünjü/ fo\mh
6aıu /bâ:s/ five öauiHHJfÇH /baısinji/ fifth
anTtı /altı/ six aJiTtiH^bi /altınjı/ sixth
eflw /yedi/ seven eflHJC^H /yedinji/ seventh
ceKH3 /öekiS/ eight ceKH3HHJK?f /0eki8inji/ eighth
flOKy3 /doku8/ nine flOKy3MH*;H /dokuSunjı/ ninth
oh lo-.nl ten 0Hynaç,M /o:nunjı/ tenth
JİHipMMH /yigrim i/ tw e n ty ^HipHMHiOKiH /yigriminji/ tvventieth
0Ty3 /otuS/ th irty 0Ty3tnr*;u /ornSunJı/ thirtieth
KtıpK /kırk/ fo rty K tıpK M K *,u /kırkmjı/ fortieth
3JIJIM /elli/ fift y 3Jlhhh3«;h /ellinji/ fiftieth
anTMLiuı / a ltm ış / s ix ty anTMtıuıuHatiLi /altmısmjı/ sixtieth
eTMHiıı /yetm iş/ se v e n ty eTMHiıiHHjsiH /yetmisinji/ seventieth
c e r c e ıı /Begâen/ e ig h ty cercenHHJKjı /0eg0eninji/ eightieth
T o rca n /tog0on/ n in e ty TorcaHLiiDK;u /togöonunjı/ nintieth
ÜY3 /yiiS/ hundred flYsyıı*;» /yüSünjü/ hundredth
my u /mürj/ thousand myhyhx;h /mügiinjii/ thousandth

Ordinal numerals may be printed as Arabic numerals separated by a lıyphen wıth the
spelling variants +iijk,ij/h2KH /+ınjı-unjı/inji-iinjü/ in its appropriate form according
to whetlıer the numeral has back or front vovvels. The variant + h * ,u /+mjı/ is
pronounced /+unjı/ with the numeral '10' and the variant +ıurçn /+inji/ is pronoanced
/+ünjii/ with the numerals '3', '4', '100' and '1,000'.

+H2C.H /+ m jı/ + iuk;h /+ unjı/ + id *;k /+ in ji/ + 1DK.H /+iinjii/

6, 9, 10 1. 2, 5, 7, 8, 3, 4.
30, 40, 60, 90 20, 50, 70, 80 100, 1,000
158 Türkmen Reference Grammar

One of the main functions of ordinal numerals is to designate building numbers,

school grades and ranks-and positions.

Mene on xa3np no6ar«a 1-hw;h 6onyn san-fle, IO-hj^ m Sonyrr nyp. (N)
/Yö:nö ol hâ:Sir no:botdo 1-nji bolup dâ:l-le, 10-njı bolup du:r./
But now he’s not İst in line, he’s lOth.
E ü 3 on Barrnap 8 -h » ;h Knac^a oKastpfltnc. (O)
/Bi8 ol wagtlar 8-nji kxla00a okoya:rdık./
We were in the 8th grade then.
MeH Amra6afltnı M arruM rynH KeHecnHHH iiurpuMH jjepHYHjrçH j^aifemfla
sruıasîpbiH. (TV1.4)
/Men Asgabadırj Magtımgulı köcöOünüg yigrimi dörrdünjü ja:ymna ya:saya:nn./
1 live in Ashgabat, building Twenty-four of Magtunguh Street.
OrnyM Mapbifla M yrajınH M 6onyn KiııneMap, ÖammiiHH opTa Metmenfle. (TV2.1)
/Oğlum Manda mugollum bolup i:sleyâ:r, ba:sinji orto mekdepd e./
My son vvorks as a teacher in Man, in school (Number) Five.
PecnyönMKaHLin MjjaTbutbm mioitoi cacraBbmmKht e3repnnmepM 4-mnn
TaÖJiHitaflaH repMeK 6onap.(TVI3.1) /Re0publika:mg i:la:tmır) milli:
0o0towunna:kı öSgörüslörü 4-njjü tabli0adan görmök bolor./
One may see the changes in the national composition of the population of the
republic in Table 4.

The ordinal numerals İst through 6th are used to designate Monday through
Saturday (see 556), while ordinal numerals İst through 3İst are used to designate the
days of the month. In addition, the ordinal suffix is added to the final numeral of a
year.

OKyBJiap 1993-hx;m ü b u ih h 15-n jrçn ceHTaöpttHHa öaumaHap. OKyBttH M e x n e n t

2 - 5 afi. (N) /Okuwlor 1993-njü yüııj 15-nji Bentyabrmna baslanya:r. Okuwuıj
möhlötü 2-5 a:y./
Ciasses begin on the 15th of September, 1993. The study period is 2-5 months.
MeH ceHH auTbiH^tı ryH flo m a H ryuyMe MartıpMaK^bt. (TV3.4)
/Men 0eni altmjı gün doglon günümö £a:gırmak£ı./
I wou!d like to invite you to my birthday party on Saturday.
A n tt-ıy n a H tm corçtı 1991-hw,h übiJTflaKH strtM xen 3K w n H K n H xafl6tcanap G ıoıen
r y r a p M a r a 3XTHMan. ( T V 1 1 .2 ) /A :pı-tup a:n uq 0oi]i 1 9 9 1 -n ji y ılla :k ı y a :lı
h e lâ :k c ilik li h a:d ı:0 alar b ile n g u to rm o g ı ahtim a:l./
It’s probable that the results of the hurricane wil] end with disastrous events like
those in 1991.
 Quantifieıs 159

Collective Numerals
Collective numerals designate a certain number or amount of persons or items from a
whole. These persons or items act as a unit or collective.
In Türkmen, the most common way to form collective numerals is by adding a
possessive suffîx to a Cardinal numeral. The collective numeral h k h ch /ifciöi/ 'the two
(of them)' is equivalent to English 'both'.

Hkhchhhh xeM flysH mbm n a u n 6ojwh. (G)

/lldöinii] hem yüSü crnı gıSıl bollı./
Both their faces tumed bright red. ['their two faces']
3 p T n p Y *iY W 3'He oKyna renenH 3fle r a n .1 t s m j o 6 o n y n re m in . (G)
/Erti:r üciij)ü8-8ö okuwo gelerjiSSe gatı tâ:mi:8 bolup gelir)./
And when the three of you come to school tomorrovv, come very clean.
BH3HH HKHMH3eM MyrannMM. IİKHMH3eM snu Hecne 6humm öepttapMC. (O)
/BiSirj iki:miSem mugollum. Ikimi8em ya:s neöle bilim beryâ:ri9./
Both of us are teachers. Both of us also impart knowledge to the young
generation. ['the two of us']
BİHXa, repftsHMH: h k h c h a ilp u . (TV10.2) /inha:, göryâ:rjm i: ikiB i a yn ./
Here, do you see: both are different. ['the two are different']

A parallel co n stru ctio n m a y b e fo rm e d by co m b in in g a C ardin al numeral vvith the

gerund Gonytı /bolup/ 'being'.

OHRa y*« 6onyn ranepnc. (G) /Onno iic bolup gideriö./

Then the three of us will go. ['we will go as three']

However, numerals with the third person possessive suffix that are in possessive
relationship with a preceding noun do not have a collective meaning.

IIIoji ra*;aHHH aprapH oktsi6phh ÜHrpHMHCMflM. (G)

/Sol gi:ja:nir) erti:ri oktyabni] yigrimiöidi./
The next day was the twentieth of October. ['moming of that night' = 'next day']

Distribution Numerals
Distribution numerals are used when the members of a group are treated individually or
in sets. In English, a group of twenty people may perform some action 'by fıves' or 'in
fives', or the like.
Turkmen forms distributive numerals in several ways. A common means of
indicating the distribution of persons or things in sets is by adding the ablative case
suffix +flan/neH /+dan/den/ to a Cardinal number.
160 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Eh3 xep CTojma ıiKHfleH oTypflMK, (G)

/BiS her u00ollo ikiden oturduk./
We sat in pairs at each table. ['in twos']

SceHamı KeHfliıpfleH xajrran rbipacbiHbi opTa cumam, GauifteH-öomften nyn

canaapfltı. (G)
/E0ena:lı kennirden haltarıj gıraöım orta: Silkip, bâ:§den-bâ:sden pul 0a:naya:rdı./
Esenalı shook out the money from the mouth of the hemp bag into the çenter and
began to count it by fîves.

The distribution of individuals of a group or of steps in a series may be expressed

by repetition of the vvords eK e /yeke/ 'single (one)' or 6 n p /bir/ 'one'.

TepiteH ryHYM 6 n p -6 n p cana aüflafiiiH. (G)

/Göryâ:n günüm bir-bir 9ai)a aydayın./
I shall teli you about my life step by step, ['one by one']

On eHe raımajıttUKaKtuıapa flyüflypMaH, rentfaH n.i3irapbi ene-cKe reayımen

reMMpflH. (G) /Ol yene gapdahnna:kılara duydurmam, gelyâ:n gı:81an yeke-yeke
göSünnön geçirdi./
Again, without letting those standing next to him be avvare of it, o n e by o n e he
examined the girls coming by.

The words M KHÖııp /ikibi:r/ 'in twos, in pairs' and y H Ö n p /ü2bi:r/ 'in threes'
combine the meanings of collective action and distribution. They are compounds of the
Cardinal numerals m kh /iki/ 'two' and y n /üc/ 'three' vvith 6 « p /bi:r/ 'one', which is
pronounced vvith a long vowel in these combinations.

AflaMJiapun CTaHHiısma sünsK-öeUnsK HKiıönp ftepeumepH 5K,yMaryjı flara ran>t

TacHp 3flHn, ts c h h 6onyn repyıröap. (G) /A:damlani) x0tan9iyada eyla:k-beylâ:k
ikibi:r yöröllörü Juma:gül dağa: gatı tâ:0i:r edip, tâ:0i:n bolup görünya:r./
The pacing back and fonh in pairs of the people in the station greatly affects
Jumagül and her group, and seems strange to them.

The same vvords may be used in repetition or in combination with the ablative case
suffîx.

IIIoHflaH con TaMbtn m im e nKii6ııp-HKn6npfleH ırnoHepnep n tp u n 6aııuıaflbinap.

(G) /Soımoa 0oq ta:mıq içine ikibi:r-ikibi:rden pionerler gi:rip./
After that, the pioneers started coming into the house t w o b y tw o .
Mkm6hp-ym6hp Bonıuyn, ^ati öambiHfla e3apa ryppyunepıtHe öanmaflbuıap. (G)
/İkibi:r-ücbi:r bolsup, ca:y basınna ö:5a:ra gürrüglörünö başladılar./
Över tea they started talking among themselves in twos and threes.
 Quantifiers 161

Approximaıion Numerals
Approximation numerals express an indefinite or estimated quantity of persons or
things. Türkmen forms such numerals and numeral phrases through the addition of
suffûces, compounding or the use of words that denote approximation.
A common means of indicating approximations of time or age is through addition
of the plural suffix + j ı a p / j ı e p /+lar/ler/ to a Cardinal numeral or to tlıe noun which it
specifies.

Onap fleKaSptm iİHrpuMHjıepMUfle renepnep. (G)

/Olor dekabnrj yigrimilerinne gelerler./
They will aırive around the t w e n t i e t h of December. ['in the twenties']

AHHarynH ııton B a r r n a p 3flnn o h c e m » a n u ıa p tiH f la f lb i. (G)

/Arnnagulı sol wagtlar edil on 8ekiS ya:slarınnadı./
At that time Annagulı was j u s t a b o u t e ig h t e e n .

Türkmen also expresses approximation with the suffix + j ı a n / j ı a n /+la:p/lâ:p/,

which consists of the verb-forming suffix + jıa - / jıe - /+la/le-/ and the gerund suffix
- L in / ıın /-ıp/ip/. When added to vvords like MHHyT /minut/ 'minute', caraT /9a:gat/
Tıour' or ryn /gün/ 'day', indefinite or approximate expressions are formcd. The
addition of + jıa n / jıa n /+la:p/la:p/ or + J ia p W .n e p H e /+lar£a/ler£e/ to 'ten' creates a
word ('about ten, in tens') that is equivalent to English 'dozens'.

MeHKH a-raivi r a m K.aftıuuK.eH, &np KsÜMHMsre 6auınaca, 6wp caraTJian Ksiimtep

OTypap. (G) /Menirj atam gatı ka:yinjer|, bir ka:yinmâ:ge baslaOa, bir 0a:gaıja:p
ka:yiner oturor./
My grandfather is a big grumbler, if he starts to grumble he’ll be grumblinf; for
h o u rs.

Keıınc aflaMJiaptı mkh ryunan onapii xep xnrm 6 a x a n a SraıeH caK Jiafltm ap, (G)
/Köşk a:damlan iki günlâ:p olorı her hi:li bahana bilen 0akladılar./
Courtiers detained them for a couple of days on various pretexts.

ÛHiıan TaMflup nepem xeM xa3vıp öonyrmu. (G)

/0:nla:p tamdır cörögü hem hâ:Sir bolupdı./
They also prepared tamdır bread by the dozens.

- Enp 03repHuı 6auıra OHiiap<ıa e3repHiu flepeflifop -fliıMmı, ryHfloraptiK ceperflH.

(G) /'Bir Ö5göriis basga o:nlor£o öBgönis dörödyâ:r" diyip, günnogon:k Sere idi./'
He looked to the east and said "One change creates a dozen other changes."
162 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

IIIoHyn yuHH ropmmmfK ynamanu3 6onap. İÎT*;aK GonaHfla 6wp o h 6ara - o h

ropTOTOHK roMcanH3, (TV 17.3) /Sonuç üctttn gorcicnik ulonOoguS
M H H y T jıan
bolyarr. Yatjak boloıjdo bir on bâ:s-o:n minutla:p gorcicnik goy0oqu8./
For that you can use mustard powder. You would apply mustard powder for a
fifteen or ten minute period when you’re getting ready to go to bed.

Combining two Cardinal numerals also expresses approximation. Such

combinations must reflect some ordinary grouping ('two or three', ete., but not 'eight
or sixty-one', or the like).

ApaflaH Y^-nopT ftbin reıtffu, osaflan ornatman xa6ap ek. (O)

/A:radan üc-dörrt yıl gecdi, owodon oglonnon habar yo:k./
In the meantime, three or four years have passed and there’s no news from the
handsome young man.

The vvords TOBepeK /töwörök/ 'environs' and MeMecıı /cemeOi/ 'about' may be
placed after and the word TaKMUHaH /takmıman/ 'approximately' before a numeral or a
numeral phrase to indicate 'about, around (so many)'.

CefoÖM erçeM MeH 6suı itbin Tooepmı saunap 6nneH HmneuifliiM. (N)
/0ebâ:bi öi]öm men ba:s yıl töwörögü ya:slar bilen i:slesdim./
The reason is that I worked with youths before for about five years.

Ewp übiıı qeMecM oaan 6onaH BaKa. (Xac florpycbi, TpareflHH RHİtMenH.) (N)
/Bir yıl cemeBi o8ol bolon wa:ka. (Ha:0 dogruOı, tıragediya diymeli.)/
This is an event that happened about a year ago. (More precisely, we should cali it
a tragedy.)

Ory3-KbipK reKTap TOBepeK epe uıy übiji ryfiajıyK Gyrnaü 3KMern nJTaHnaınnwpwn
OTbipbic. (TVI 1.4)
/Otu8-kırk gektar töwörök yere su yıl gürSJük bugdoy ekmeği pılanlasdınp otı:rı0./
This year we’re planning to plant Autumn wheat on about rhirty or forty heetares
of the land.
Bm3HH nnKpnMif3we, rypKMeH co3i« 5H3HH 3paMM3tnı önpHH^n M Y H tİ M T m u m m m
1.5 Myn Wb in n c M e c H M y H fla ıı en n b iK a H 6onca repeK.
o p T a n a p u ı i f l a , T a K M b iııa ıı
(TV 13.5) /BiSirj pikrimiSce, tilrkmön 088ü biöiıj era:mıSırj birinji müıjyılhgmıg
ortolorunno, takmıman 1.5 müıj yıl cemeOİ munnon ör) çıkan bol0o gerek./
In our opinion, the word Türkmen probably evolved in the middle of the first
millennium A.D. or about 1.5 thousand years ago.

Other numeral expressions that indicate approximation inelude MyHiiepMe

/münlörcö/ 'thousands of', öHp/iMi-MKHJiaıı /birla:n-ikila:n/ 'one or two', Bnpflitp-
 Qaantifiers 163

H K H flH p /birdir-tkidir/ 'one or two' and h k m m h - y h m h /ikimi-ücmü/ 'two or three'.

Othervvise, approximation may be expressed with the word gartr /dağı/ (see 177) or
vvith the comparative suffîx + p a K /p a K /+ra:k/ra:k/ (see 147).

Ahmk ÖKneMOK, Mene TaKMimaH Sam ity3 MaHaT R am Sap m U m - (TV5.4)

/Anık bilemo.'k, yö:nö takmı:nan bâ:5 yü6 manat dağı ba:r diydi./
I don't knovv for sure, but she said it’s around 500 manats or so.

O H fla x e p r y n n e n s ^ e K n u o p a K n a r r a Mm t h h h 3? (TV7.3)
/Onno her günnö nâ:ce kilora:k pagta yıgya:ıjıS?/
Then about how many kilos of cotton do you pick each day?

Fractions
A fractional numeral expresses a part of a whole number, and may indicate a fraction of
a number or a decimal fraction. In Turkmen, a fraction of a whole number is formed
with two Cardinal numerals. The first numeral, or denominator, is placed in the ablative
case ( + a a n / f l e n /+dan/den/), while the second, or numerator, stands in the nominative
case. The denominator indicates the whole number which is divided into parts and the
numerator indicates the quantity of these parts taken from the whole number.

Y^îfleH 6«p /ücdön bir/ one-third

three-from one = one (paıt) from (the whole number) three

SsııtneH mkm /barsden iki/ two-fifths

fıve-from two = two (parts) from (the whole number) five

When a whole number appears before a fractional numeral, the word S h t h h /bitim/
'who!e, not broken' is placed betvveen the two. (Because of their similarity, even some
Turkmen confuse Gh t h h /biti:n/ 'whole, not broken' with 6 y t h h /bütü:n/ 'whole,
entire'.)

mkm 6 hthh flepı^eH Sup two and one-fourth

/iki bitim dö:rtdön bir/
two who!e four-from one = two whole (numbers) and one-fourth

To form a decimal fraction like '2.25', Türkmen uses a construction with the vvords
Üy3 /yüS/ '100' preceded by S m t h h /biti:n/ 'vvhole, not broken' and follovved by the
fraction numerals. The follovving decimal fractions vvould be vvritten 2,25 and 2,254 in
Turkmen, that is, vvith a comma rather than vvith a period.
164 Türkmen Reference Grammar

HKH ÖHTKH My3fleH ÜHTpHMH fonı 2.25

/iki bitim yii8Sön yigrimi bâ:s/
rvvo whole hundreds-from twentyfive
= twenty-five (parts) from two whole hundreds

hkm Shtmh MynfleH «KM üy3 flepr 2.254

/iki bitim müıjdön iki yüS elli dö:ıt/
ıwo whole thousands-from two hundred fifty four
= two hundred fifty four (paıts) from two whole thousands

With one exception, fractional constructions do not take plural or case suffbces. The
fractional numeral may take the genitive case suffbc when it serves as the possessor in
the possessive relationship with a following fraction word.

CeKH3j(eH y«ryn « pucu H3*ra flenanp? (G)

/0eki58en ü£üi) ya:n0ı na:ca: değdir?/
What does h alf of three-eighths equal?

Otherwise, a fraction may be in possessive relationship with a preceding noun. If

the words öeJien /bö:lök/ 'part' or yiiym /ülüs/ 'portion' follow a fractional numeral,
the third person possessive suffbc is added to them instead of to the numeral.

FanaH n y n y n y h a e h mkh öeJierHHe ctoii c ara H a n a tu ıa p . (G)

/Ga:lan pulug ücdön iki bö:lögünö u00ol 0atm allılar./
They bought a table for two-thirds of the money they had left. ['for the two-thirds
part o f]

0K0HMaTem>H0, ınyH H K en e 6 o n a ım a m y rfle-TO yM^eHSupu h jih 6 on a p .

Kvraenep. (TV10.2)
/Okoncatelno, suni keçe bolonno su gde-to ücdön bi:ri ya:lı bolor. Kiceler./
In the end, when it becomes felt, it will be around one-third (in size). It will
shrink. [Russian OKOHMaTentHO 'finally, in the end', rfle-TO 'around']

Fraction Words
Turkmen also has the fractional vvords MapteK /câ:ryek/ 'quarter' and apbiM /ya:nm/,
ap tı /ya:n/, apTM /ya:rtı/, a p n u /ya:rpı/ 'half'. The first denotes one of four equal
parts of a whole, while the second indicates one of two equal halves of a whole.
The word n ap ıeK /ca:ryek/ (from Persian) has limited usage and commonly refers
to one of the four equal quarters of a school year, although occasionally it may be used
in time expressions.
 Quantifîers 165

The words apbiM /ya:ran/, aptı /ya:rı/, a p r a /ya:ıtı/ and apnbi /ya:rpı,' for the
most part, are interchangeable variants which are piaced before nouns denoting time,
measurement or items to indicate half of a whole.

IIoe3fl flypanu, apU M c a r a T öojifltı. (G)

/Poye5[8] duroh, ya:nm 0a:gat bollı./
ITıe train has been standing for h a l f a n hour.

Aios,aryn a p u M Kiıno Tbuuıa ıııaiicenmıvı 3 jithh Taöuibipflbi. (G)

/A:kjagül ya:rım kilo tılla sayOepini eltip tabsırdı./
Akjagül brought and tumed över half a kilo of her gold jevvelry.
M kh OMpyn ap T b i v e p e n t a n im e a jifltı. (G )
/İki omrup ya:rtı cörögii eline allı./
He broke the bread in two and took a half in his hand,

This word also receives the third person possessive suffix vvhen it stand s in the
possessive relationship.

Benanbm M a u ır a jıa c b i Haxapa, a ra tı MÜMure m p n e m m m n sp tıctm u x a p t* ;a T

(TV16.3)
3fltt3HflHp.
/Wepa:nıi) ma8gala0ı nahara, yagnı iymite girrdejinij] ya:n0ım harajart edyii.nnir./
Wepa’s wife probably spends h a l f o f t h e in c o m e on meals, that is, on food.

C oh y B e n eıı s t h a m in , c o M c a ııu u a p u c b in a ro flap b m . ( T V 5 .3 )

/0oq üwölön eti alıp, 0om0a:nıq ya:n0ma goyya:nn./
Then I take the ground meat and put it o n o n e h a l f o f th e somsa.

C eK H 3 flen y^yn a p u c u m n s fleHflsıp? (G) /0eki56en ücüıj ya:n0ı na:câ: derdir?/

What does h a l f o f t h r e e - e i g h t h s equal?

In such constructions, the words f l e n /der)/ 'equal', /edil/ 'exactl>, ju st',

/gılla/ 'sharp, equally', JiaübiK /la:yık/ 'exactly' or xyT /hut/ 'exactly, nam ely'
r b iju ıa
may stand betvveen the first and second components to intensify the meaning of apbiM
/ya:rım/, a p u /ya:rı/, a p T b i /ya:rtı/ and apnbi /ya:rpı/.

ü b ecaH b in n en apbiM bi a3biju>m ryra p flb i. (G )

/Pye0a:mrj derj ya:nmı yaSılıp gutordı./
Exactly half of the play has finished being vvritten.

Ca3 K p y * o m n a 0 KyBltbinapfcin rbijuıa apbicbi ramauıap. (G)

/0a:5 kıruzoguno okuw£ulonır) gılla ya:n0ı gatnasya:r./
Exactly half of the students attend the musical circle.
166 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Wben aptiM /yaırım/ appears before some nouns and adjectives, it denotes that the
content, action or quality vvhich they express is not as full or as powerful as it should
or could be.

2Çoran Sepim, ona aptiM cec önnen, Mmx3hjt MtuiTtıptm, epıınfleH ramjii. (G)
/Joga:p berip, 050 ya:rım 0e9 bilen, Mihail yılgm p, yerinnen ga:llı./
Answering in a low voice to him, Michael smiled and stood up from his place.

Aitlıough Ghp spuM /bir ya:nm/ is a common way of saying 'one and a lıalf, the
same may be expressed by using Bythh /biitü:n/ 'whole', scce /e 00e/ 'times', or any
name of a measure before tlıe word sıptiM /ya:rım/ or variants.

E nyna ÖyrHH apTbi HaH. (G) /Yo:luqo biitü:n ya:rtı na:n./

(Here’s) one and a half flat breads for your trip.

T?5K,HrYn ryTaıı rypHyraHflaH nnaıiflan 3 cce apbiM ap-rbiK ım ne anjıu. (G)

/Tâ:jigül tuton gurcugunnon pılannan e00e ya:nm artık pi:le allı./
Tâjigül got from the silkworms she was keeping one an d a half tim es cocoons in
excess of the plan.

AHHarynbin Tbi3bin Toıııyn rynnyrMHa maemme tibin apbiM Conyımtı. (G)

/A:nnaguh:o G 181I Gosun gulluguno gidenine yıl ya:nm bolupdı./
It had been one and a half years since Annaguh went to serve in the Red Army.

The variant apTM /ya:rtı/ can only precede Myrç /mili)/ 'thousand', m hjijih oh
/million/ 'million' or MHJumapR /milliard/ 'billion', while the variant apw /ya:rı/ can
only follow them in the possessive reiationship.

apTbi mhjijihoh /yaııtı million/ half a million

MHiniMOHbin apbt /millionır) y a:n/ a half million

When apuM /ya:nm/ follovvs any Cardinal numeral, it denotes an additional one-
half of its quantity. When aptiM /ya:rım/ precedes MYH /müq/ 'thousand', mhjijihoh
/million/ 'million' or MMJinHapfl /m illiard/ 'billion', then it indicates one-half of its
quantity.

eTMMin 6aııı aptiM /yetmiş bâ:s ya:rım/ seventy-fıve and a half

apHM MYH /yarnm mü rj/ half a thousand, fi ve hundred
MyH aptiM /müıj ya:nm / one and a half thousand, one thousand-five hundred
üpbiM MHnJiHOH /ya:nm m illion/ half a million, five hundred dıousand
mhjijihoh apbiM /million ya:nm / one and a half million, one million-fıve hundred
thousand
 Qnantifiers 167

In teliing time, the variant « ptı /ya:rı/ is used to indicate the half-hour. Because it
contains the third person possessive suffbc +w /+]/, it stands in possessive relationship
with the numeral expressing the whole hour.

CaraTHS'ie? /0a:gat na:ce?/ What time is it?

- CaraT y^YH sptı. /0a:gat ücürj ya:n./ Half past 2 o’clock.

The word MeTÖep /cetber/ was borrowed from Russian MeTBepTb 'quarter'. In
Turkmen, one MCTÖep /cetber/ is a weight of 100 grams, approximately equivalent to
one-quarter of an English pound (373 grams). The term is used to measure certain
goods, the most typical of which is tea. Usually sold in 50 gram packages, one
package of tea is measured as npbiM MeTÖep /ya:nm cetber/ 'one half chetber (= 50
grams)', and two packages of tea as Cup «teTÖep /bir cetber/'one chetber (= 100
grams)'.

fclHxa Mafl - auttun, mkh qeTÖep Maütt asmiiHhin e^yHe OKJiaflM. (G)
/'inha: ca:y" diyip, iki cetber ca:yı aya:hnır| öi]ünö oklodı./
Saying "Here is tea," he tossed 200 grams of tea in front of his wife.

Percentages
The fractional c o n stru c tio n with the numeral Hy3 /yüS/ "hundred' may be used to
e x p res s a percentage of a whole. However, the locative case suffbc in stead of the
a b la tiv e case suffıx is added to the numeral. The bo rrovved Russian w o r d n p o u en r
/proSent/ 'percent' also is used after a Cardinal number to indicate a percentage.

üy3fle 6wp /yüSSö bir/ 1 percent

tiysfle İİHrpKMH ffepr /yüSSö yigrimi dö:ıt/ 24 percent
oh nponeıiT /o:n proSent/ 10 percent

Myuyrç 83M reuen übinnaıca rapanuıifla ou npoueırr eıifle 6 apHHj(wrbmu anna^np.

(TV8.3)
/Munurj ö:8ü gecen yılla:ka: gara:nıi]da o:n proBent örjdö barya:nnıgını a:i]!adya:r./
This shows that it [the cotton yield] is 10 percent ahead compared to that of last
year.

Arithmetic
Turkmen may express each of the arithmetical operations in several different ways.
These constructions use the verbs ro m ın a K /gosmok/ 'to add', a tiu p M a K /ayırmak/ 'to
subtract', öojimck /bö:lmök/ 'to divide', KonenTMeK /köpöltmök/ 'to multiply' and
the word nenuHp /değdir/ 'is equal to'.
168 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Arithmetic
12 + 14 = 26 ~
O h mkh roııiMaK oh flepT flenanp ÜHrpıiMH am a.
/O n iki gosmok on dö:rt değdir yigrimi alta:./
12 plus 14 is equal to 26.
Oh hkh roııiMaK oh flepr 6onap üurpuMH ajra>ı.
/O n iki gosmok on dö:rt bolor yigrimi altı./
12 plus 14 is 26.
Oh hks oh flopflu rouıcan ühtpmmm ajrrtı Sojıap.
/On ifâ : on dö:rdü gosSoi) yigrimi altı bolor./
If you add 14 to 12 it vvill be 26.
Oh hkhhhh ycTyHe oh flepflH romca n Mhtphmm ajrrtı 6onap.
/On iki:nii] ü00ünö on dö:rdü gosöor] yigrimi altı bolor./
If you add 14 on top o f 12 it will be 26._________________
_____________________ 32 - 8 = 24_____________________
O ıy3 hkh afttrpMaK ceKH3 fleHHHp ifaopHMH flepfle.
/OtuS iki ayırmak OekiS değdir yigrimi döardö./
32 minus 8 is equal to 24.
O ry3 h k h aötıpMaK cerai3 6onap it a p m o t flepr.
/OnıS iki ayırmak 0eki5 bolor yigrimi dö:rt./
32 minus 8 is 24.
Oıy3 HKHfleH ceKH3H a&ıpcan ÜHrpHMM flepT 6onap.
/OtuS üdden 0ekiSi ayırSag yigrimi dö:rt bolor./
If you subtract 8 from 32 it will be 24.___________________
______________________64 * 8 = 8______________________
AnTMtnu flepT 6enMeK ceraıs flenanp ceKioe.
/Altmış dö:rt bö:lmök OekiS değdir 0ekiSe./
8 into 64 is equal to 8.
A htm m u flepflM ceKH3e Gencen ceKH3 öonap.
/Altmış dö:rdü OekiSe bö:10öi) OekiS bolor./
If yoıı.divide 64 by 8 it will be 8._______________________
_____________________12 x 4 = 48______________ .
Oh hk h KeneırrMeK flepr 6onap KBipK ceıao.
/On iki köpöltmök dö:rt bolor kırk 0ekiS./
12 times 4 will be 48.
Oh mkh KenejrrMeK flepne fleımHp KtıpK ceKM3e,
/On iki köpöltmök dö:rdö değdir kırk OekiSe./
12 multiplied by 4 is equal to 48.
Oh hkhhh flepfle Kerıejrrcen KtrpK ceKM3 6onap.
/On ikini dö:rdö köpöltöörj kırk 0ekiS bolor./
If you multiply 12 by 4 it will be 48.
fle p r scce oh hkh KttpK ceKH3 öonap.
/Dö:rt e00e on iki kırk 0ekiS bolor./
4 12s will be 48.
 Quantifieıs 169

Counting Word
Türkmen speakers often add a counting vvord caHbi /0a:nı/ (literally: a count') betvveen
the numeral and the item counted vvhich could be translated 'X counts of Y'. Hovvever,
use of this vvord is optional and its translation into English is unnecessary. English
also uses 'count' in a technicai sense to indicate a number of items determint.d by an
actual count, as vvhen a box is labeled '50 count'.

CryfleırrcıepHMHn 6sm caHbicbi flamapflaflyp.

/0tudentlerimir) bârs 0a:nı0ı dasarda du:r./
studem-s-my ftve counts-of outside standing
Five of my students are standing outside.
M eH y*i caHbi Kotmenı YTyıcneflHM.
/Men üc 0a:nı köynögü ütüklödüm./
I three counts-of shirt iron I did
I ironed three shirts.

EarrnH 6onMaK ymm agaMa 6aps>ı-erbi yn canu 3ax repeKMMuı. (N )

/Bagtlı bolmok ücürn ardama barn-yorgı üc 0a:m 8a:t gerekmiş./
They say that a person needs only th r e e th in g s to be happy.

TypKMeH 3jmıı6nÜMHfle OTy3 ceKM3 caHbi xapn, OTy3 ajiTbi caHbi a:c 6ap.
E n 3 fle
(TVl.l) /BiSSe türkmön elipbiyinne otuS 0eki5 0a:m harp, otu6 altı 0arnı 0c 6 barr./
We have 38 letters and 36 sounds in the Turkmen alphabet.

- flepT caHbi öeüıiK ToxyM a m a p 6ap flMÜiîspnep-fla. (TV12.4)

/D örıt 0a:m beyik tohum atlar barr diyyârrler-dâr."/
'They say there are just four great breeds of horses."

The vvord caHaK /0arnak/ is a variant of caHbi /0arnı/ in function, but may ı:;ıke the
third person possessive suffbc vvhen in possessive reiationship vvith a preceding noun.

Kecepjıepıtn ıiMMHfle mkh canarbi aüpartiH roByflbt. (G)

/KeOerlerii] icinne iki öarnagı ayratırn gowudı./
Among the knives tvvo were particularly fine.

Xycycbi MeKfleıuıep Gapafla atocaK, flMne 6n3fle, TypKMeHHCTaHbiMböfla ceı-Ji3

caHaK TypKiteflen reJieH TypKJiepHn aqan MeKfleımepn 6ap. CeKH3 caHaK.
(TP12.3) /Hu0ur0ı mekdepler barrada ay00ak, dirje biSSe, Türkmönü00arnmıı58a
0eki5 Oarnak Türküyödön gelen türklörür) acan mekdepleri barr. 0eki5 0arnal;./
If we talk about private schools, then just among us, in our Türkmenistan, there
are eight schools opened by Turks vvho came from Turkey. Eight.
170 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Quantifying Pronouns
Collective, indefinite and negative pronouns substitute for nouns that designate groups
(for example, 'people') or wholes (for example, 'land'). They refer to an individual (for
example, 'someone') or to ali individuals (for example, 'everyone') within a group
without identifying or specifying a given individual.
In Turkmen, the words xep /her/ 'every', 6np /bir/ 'one, some' and xhm /hi:c/
'no(ne)' form the basis of collective pronouns ("every/all" vvords), indefinite pronouns
("some/severa!" words) and negative pronouns ("none/no" words). In addition, various
adjectives and adverbs fulfıll these functions. Most quantifying pronouns and words are
placed before the nouns they modify, but some act as nouns and may appear in the
possessive relationship (6apu /ba:n/, 3XJ1H /ahli/).

Collective Pronouns
Placing xep /her/ 'every, each' (variant: xepcH /herOi/) before a noun, the numeral 6up
/bir/ 'one' or an interrogative pronoun produces combinations that indicate every one or
any single one of a group of persons or things. Such combinations are: xep Cup /her
bir/ 'every', xep Haine /her na:me/ 'everything, anything, whatever', xep Hane /ha:r
nâ:ce/ 'however mııch, as many as', xep iihmhk /her nicik/ 'no matter what,
nevertheless', xep xaifctı /he hay0ı/ 'every, each, vvhichever' and xep xıınn /her hirli/
'alJ sorts of'.

Myııyn xep 6np ce3H 6np flerttaHflHp. (G)

/Munui] her bir 0ö6ü bir düyâ: degyâ:nnir./
Every word of this [book] could be vvorth a camel. [= 'is precious']

Xep ııaMe 3TceneM, ceHHHKM suiHbuıı. (G)

/Her nâm e e00eıjem, Oenirjki yalıjıs./
Whatever you do, you are vvrong.

Xep Hane aflTcanaM, on ceının cesnepHne rynaK acMastp. (G)

/Hernâ:£e ay00ar|am, ol 0enig 0ö81öriiıjö gulok aömaya:r./
He doesn’t listen to what you say, however many times you teli him. ['listen to
your words']

Xep xaflcbt Sup aflflbtM aÖTMajibt. (G) /Her hayflj bir aydım aytmah./
Everybody should sing a song.
ASfltiM aUflsu 3HTeK Hin öoncyH H-fla un cofirycmm ra3aHaH öoncyH, onapbirç
xepciinfle 036o.r1y 111nbi.riMK öonap. (N) /Aydım aydya:n entek ya:s botöun ya:-da
i:l 8öygü0ünü gaSanan bolOun, oloruıj heröinne ö:8bolusluluk bolya:r./
Whether someone who sings is stili young or has gained the love of the people,
each one of them has individuality.
 Quantifiers 171

Quantifying Pronouns
Collecıive Pronouns: 'Every!Ali'

x e p /her/ e v e ry , each , x e p S u p /her bir/ e v e ry , x e p H3Me /her nâ:m e/

e ve ry th in g , anyth in g, w h ate ve r, x e p m n e /her n a:ce/ h o w e v e r m uch,
x e p ro ro n c /her n icik / n o m atter w h at, n everth eless, x e p xaü cb i /her
hayBı/ e v e ry , each , w h ic h e v e r, x e p x n r o ı /her hi:li/ a li sorts o f

xeM M e /lıem m e/ e v e ry , a li, xeMMe 3aT /hem m e 8a:t/ eve ryth in g,

s x n n /âhli/ a li, 6 y n iH /biltü.-n/ w h o le , en tire, KynJDi /külü/ w h o le ,
Tyrym /tutuş/ entire, 6 ap H /ba:n/ a li

indefinite Pronouns: 'Some/Severaf

6«p /bir/ some, 6Hpı»He /bimâce/ some, several, ĞMpeırreK /birentek/

several, 6np Tonap /bir topor/ a group of, 6>ıpHeMe /birneme/ some,
a little, 6MpxHnH /birhirli/ somewhat, 6ııpKM /birki/ a few, 6npKyM
/birküc/ a couple of, önpas /bira:8/ some, a little, a few, Ksönp /ka:bir/
some, difîerent

6wpH /bi:ri/ somebody, one of, KifMflHp 6upn /kimdir bi:ri/ somebody,
xaöctmbip öiîpn /hay0ıdır/ something, a ceıtain one, 6Hp 3aT /bir 8a:t/
something, HSMefliıp 6np 3aT /nam edir bir 8a:t/ something or other,
whatever

TenHM /telim/ several, s m e /ence/ several, a few, smeM e /enceme/

a number of, n tu ıa n /pıla:n/ such-and-such, ntuıaHH...ın>maHM
/pıla:nı...pıla:nı/ so-and-so, n iin a ım a /pılamca/ and so on, 3aT /8a:t/
thing, something, stuff, n a ra /dağı/ or so, and such

Negative Pronouns: 'NonelNo'

xmh /hi:c/ n on e, a n y , n e v e r, at ali, xhu khm /hi:c k im / n oon e, xhm

xauaH /hi:c hacan/ n e ve r, xhm x a ü c t ı /hi:c hay0 ı/ n on e of

xmm 6npH /hi:c bi:ri/ n o, n o n e, xh*i 3aT /hi:c Sa:t/ n oth in g , xh»i 6 mp
3aT /hi:c b ir 8a:t/ n o o n e th in g , xhm TyftcnH /h i:c tü:011i/ n o fo rm o f,
xmm XHjm /hi:c hirli/ n o k in d o f, xhm Kec /hi:2 ke0/ n o b o d y , xhm ep
/hi:£ yer/ n ow h ere, xmm B a rr /hi:£ w ag t/ n e v e r
172 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Xep h m h h k 6 o n ca -fla renM enM S on ap cH i*. (G)

/Her nicik bol0o-do gelmeli bolorflur)./
No m atter what, you will have to come.

Ce6s6n CanapMtıpaTTYpKMeH6auiHHtm ınon Sesim HbiKbiuibiHfla aiîflLtuıtı onu,

6 h3« h xep 6npnMH3 aTa BaTana ryjınyK 3TMeıiHflMpMc. (N)
/âebârbi 0apaımıra:t Türkmönbası:nır) Sol belli cıkısuına aydısı ya:lı, biSİJ] her
bi:ri:mi8 ata Watana gulluk etmelidiriS./
Because, as Saparmırat Türkmenbashı said when he made that speech, every one
of us should serve the Fatherland.

Xep ati Men my i^aübiMa eTMMiu 6 mh MaHaT ren efo n . (TV9.3)

/Her a:y men su jaryıma yetmiş bâ:s manat tölöyâ:n./
Each month I pay seventy-five manats for this place of mine.

Haxap 6 a m u ıifla xep ryppyH SflMiMap: yM yM aH a rfla & ıa p öapafla, m u

x h j im

Bapafla, M aıurana öapafla Be morça MeH3em. (TA15.2)

/Hahar basınna her hi:li gürrüi) edilya:r: umu:mon yagdaylar ba:rada, i:s ba:rada,
masgala ba:rada we soıjo meıjSes./
Över dinner, ali sorts of thıngs are talked about: about conditions in general,
about vvork, about the family, and so forth.

The w o rd s xcm m c /hemme/ 'e v e r y , a li', xeM M e 3a T /hem m e 5a:t/ 'e v e r y th in g ', 3XJ1H
/ahli/ 'a li, w h o le ', 6 yT M H /bütü:n/ 'a li, th e w h o le ', K y n n H /küllü/ 'w h o le ', T y T y ı n
/tutuş/ 'e n tire , w h o le ' and Capu /ba:rı/ 'a li' s e r v e to d e sig n a te c o lle c t iv e s o r fo r m part
o f o th e r construction s in the m ea n in g 'e v e r y , a li'.

XeMMe ıuyıiM MaKyn Bunan. (G) /Hemme sum ma:ku:l billi./

Everybody approved it.

Xac n>t3MK epn-fle, ınon öaüjibirbiıt xgmmgcm Opa36nÖHHKH Mauırajıacbma

flentuıım. (G)
/Ha:0 gıSık yeri-de, sol ba:ylıgıq hemmeOi Ora:8bi:bi:nirj masgalaöma degisli./
Tiı& most interesting thing w as that ali of that wealth belonged to Orazbibi’s
family.

Mbiuı-Mbuımap xeMMe epe aüpanflMp. (G) /Mıs-mıslar hemme yer yayra:pdır./

Rumors have spread everyvvhere.

XeMMe 3aT 6np6afla smuiiflan MbiKbinflu. (G)

/Hemme Sa:t birba:da ya:dınnan cıkıpdı./
He forgot everything at once.
 Quantifiers 173

XeMM3HH3e car 6 on ata ra , carjıtrefla repıuennn! Ken car 6 ony«. (N)

/Hemmâ:ıji8e 0ag bol aydya:n, Oaglıkda görsöli:jrj! Köp 0ag boluıj./
I say so'long to ali o f you, let’s meet again soon. Thank you very much.

XeMMe r e n e n jıe p xoınan 6 onyn muflap. (TV8.4)

/Hemme gelenler hosa:l bolup gidyâ:r./
Everyone who comes goes away satisfied.

IIIeHÖe ryHM M am rana ö o n y n , x « vim3MH3 Bune m it ınıüspMC. (Tl 7.1)

/Senbe günü masgala bolup, hemma:mi8 bile £a:y icyâ:ri0./
On Saturdays ali o f us drink tea together as a family.

B ythh 06 a yıcyflaflii. (G) /Bütü:n o:bo u:kudodı./

The whoie village was asleep.

TyTynı 06 a öonyn onap to h renflimep. (G) /Tutuş o:bo bolup olor toyo gr.lliler./
They came to the toy as an en t ir e village.

CyB SKMJieH epnepKH C a p t u ıu cyBapflfci. (G)

/0uw ekilen yerlerijj ba:n:nı 0 uwordı./
Water irrigated ali the land under cultivation.
3pTH p 3X/iMUH3 MeKfleöe renepcMHH3. (G) /Erti:r ahli:jgi8 mekdebe geler0iyi8./
AH of you shall come to school tomorrow.
CeöaöH axjiM ıiLiKflajtcibi 03 öoJmyıtga-flbi. (N)
/0eba:bi ahli cıkdajı ö:S boynui]do-dı./
Because ali the expenses were on your own head. ['on your neck']

indefinite Pronouns
Compounds and combination words with the numeral 6 n p /bir/ 'one, some' (see 156)
form the indefinite pronouns 6ttpH3<ıe /bimâ:ce/ 'some, several', SupeıiTeK /birentek/
'several', 6 n p Tonap /bir topor/ 'a group of, a lot of' 6 tfpH eM e /birneme/ 'sonıewhat,
a bit o f, 5npxnjııı /birhirli/ 'somewhat', Ghpkh /birki/ 'a few' (< 6 tıp m k u /bir iki/
'one-two'), 6 ııp K Y 4 /birküc/ 'some, a couple' (< 6w p h k h y*1 /bir iki üc/ 'one-tvvo-
threeO, ö n p a a /bira:8/ 'some, a little, a few, a bit' and Ka6H p /kâ:bir/ 'some, different',
vvhich express 'some' or 'a few' persons or things.

AM, 6 n p cerceH TOHHa, TorcaH to h h e n a r r a r e n ü s p 6 ııp ry u fle . ( T V 7 .3 )

/Ay, bir 0eg0en tonno, tog0on tonno pagta gelyarr bir günnö, günnö./
Oh, some eighty tons, ninety tons of cotton come each day.
Eh 3 Kenefle 6 n p Tonap a#aM repflyK. (G) /Bİ8 köcödö bir topor a:dam gördük./
We saw a g r o u p of people in the Street.
174 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Ypyuı TypajiM SspH, 6«p Tonap ryH renifrmH. (BH)

/Urus turolı ba:ri, bir topor gün gecipdi./
A lot of days had passed since the war began.

XeKyMeT HiurspnepHHMH ÖHpHanecH MUifleH 6ouıafltmj3Bi. (G)

/Hökümöt i:Sga:rIerinii) bimâ:ce0i i:sden bosodullı./
Several of the government officials were fired.

Ten ona 6npa3 rapaıuajibi. (G) /Gel orjo bira:8 garasah./

C’mon, let’s wait for him a bit.
By 6ojıyıu shshm 6 n p x n j u ı raMnatmtıpfltı. (G)
/Bu bolu? ena:ni birhi:li gamlanmrdı./
This behavior made the mother s o m e v v h a t sad.

flapra K36npjıepı«nın cajıaMUHa qana*;a 6aıu smeK 6ımen js;oran 6epitspflH. (G)
/Darga kâ:birlerinirj 0ala:mma calaja bas eğmek bilen jogarp beryâ:rdi./
The chief of market security vvas retuming the greetings o f s o m e o f t h e m by
nodding his head slightly.

Meıte BeroiH, muaHcaK-fla, MyrannbiMnapbin KaÖHpHHfle metine ctmaTJiaptiH

eKflyrbtHbi 6enneMenn Gormp. (G) /Yö:nö weli:n, gı:nan0ak-da, mugollumlorur)
ka:birinne şeyle Oıpatlarıtj yo:kdugunı bellemeli bolyarr./
Hovvever, one must note, unfortunately, that such qualities do not exist among
some teachers.
Mana ÖHpHeMe Maü ryftcaHa. (G) /Maıja bimeme ca:y guyOono./
Will you pour me a b i t o f tea?

BHpHeMe KyBBa-raaHaHHaH coh 6onca, on e3yHH rapamcw3 xeKyMflapnap«ıa

repKe3«n yrpariflbip. (N) /Bimeme kuwwa:tlanannan 0oi) bol0o, ol ö.-Sünü garasOıS
hökümda.-rlarca görköSiip ugra:pdır./
After grovving somewhat stronger, he began to show himself to be like the
independent rulers.

MyuynaM Ö H p e ırre K ce6annepH 6ap. (N) /Munurjom birentek 0ebâ:pleri ba:r./

And this has several causes.

YMyMaH, flen-flyuınapbiMbn( apactrnfla nrrapafla cas ’iajıtın öepepflHM, K3

e a r T J i a p xmyıeHHn GepepflKM. (N) /Umu:moa, detj-duslorumug a:ra0uına gitarada
0a:6 calip bererdim, ka: vvagtlar hislenip bererdim./
In general, I used to play guitar among people my own age and sometimes I would
sing in a lovv voice.
 Quantifieıs 175

üleünenuK ÖHnen, MeH TeneBiifleıııritaHH 6npKY<ı ö tra s o n a SBpeHeMcon,

eaöaıubiMa renneuiHK aMfltiM. (N) [eBpeneMcon < eBpeneroiMfleH xeM coh]
/Seyielik bilen, men teiewideniyâ:ni birküc yıl do:lı öwrönömöor) ö:8basıma
geplesik acdım./ [öwrönöm6oq < öwrönönümdön hem 0orj]
As a result, after I leamed ali about television for a couple of years, I had my own
program.
Uly ryHKM ryn Men em e T YpKMenKCTaHaaKtı 6hjimm cucreMa Sapafla 6npKiı artıa
ryppyn Bffun gepaçeıc. (TP12.3) /5u:nkii gün men 0i6e Türkmönü60a:nna:kı bilim
0i0tema ba:rada birki agıS gürrüi] edip berjek./
Today, I will make a brief presentation to you about the educational system in
Türkmenistan, ['a speech of a few mouthsfull']
Bh3U 6 a p e p e xoumauiHK anuaMtiHM rempMeK yutfH ajn.ni nrrx;eKflnnep. (H)
/Bi8i bir yere hoslosuk agsamım geçirmek ücü:n alıp gitjekdiler./
They had vvanted to take us somewhere in order to have a going-away party.

Expressions formed with interrogative pronouns and the numeral 6 ııp /bir/ 'one,
some' act as indefinite pronouns with the general meaning of 'some, certain'. These
expressions include: 6 h p m /bi:ri/ 'somebody, one of', k h m h h p 6wpH /kimdir bi:ri/
'somebody', x a i i c u n u p 6npM /hayOıdır bi:ri/ 'something, a certain one', 6 u p 3aT /bir
8a:t/ 'something, anything' and H aM egup 6 n p 3 aT /nâ:medir bir 8a:t/ 'something or
other, a certain thing, whatever'.

XaMana, IIlMpHH 6npn 6nneH xanaını.nı rnflnnMHniMiı. (G)

/Hama:la, Şirin bi:ri bilen ha:lasıp gidipmisin./
Let’s assume Shirin has gone off with somebody she likes. ['liked
somebody and gone off']
OrypaHJiapMH Supu apuHHHH cesyu H KecflH. (G)
/Oturonlorur) bi:ri arcımi] 0ö8ünü ke00i./
One of those sitting there intemıpted the village elder.
Cana canMaH, 6npMne 6epwn roft6epıt6epMeKHHflnp. (G)
/0ala: 0alma:n, bi:rine berip goyberibermekcidir./
He actually intends to give (his daughter) to somebody without getting any
advice.
HaMeaııp 6up 3aT ÖHinupMeJîM. (G) /Na:medir bir 8a:t bisirmeli./
We should cook something or other.
- ryp6aHMyxaMMeT, MeH Craflen 6u p 3aT copafem -na. (TV12.4)
/"Gurba:nmuhommet, men BiSSen bir 8a:t 0o:ra:ym-la.'7
"Gurbanmuhammet, let me ask you something, ali right?"
176 Turkmen Reference Grammar

«XaH H repeJDi, cHHaHMUiim re p ce M , 6 n p 3aT Mtncca, HHtına renepıiH» flnöflh.

(N ) /"H am g ö rö lü , 0 ı:nan ısıp gör0 ö m , b ir Sa:t cıkO a, ya:n ııja g e le rin " d iyd i./
He said "Well, we’ll see. When I give it a try, if anything happens, Pli come to
you."

The vvords TenHM /telim/ 'several, many' 3HHe /ence/ 'several, a few', 3H*ıeMe
/enceme/ 'a number of, a couple of', nun aH /pıla:n/ 'such', nb(naH b i...n u jıaH U
/pıla:nı...pıla:nı/ 'such-and-such, so-and-so' and n tın aH n a /pıla:nca/ 'several, and so
on' designate indefinite quantities equivalent to 'several' persons or things.

Oıiflan 6apn TejiMM BaKanap öonfltı. (G) /Onnon ba:ri telim wa:kalar bollı./
Several events have happened since then.
- BpHraflHpnepH h 3 x h jih caftn afltm H 3? - ü b ijıa H U 6oncyH , nunaH u 6oncyH
flMÜMn öejuıefliiK. (G)
/"Brigadirleri nâ:hili 0ayladıgı5?" "Pılamı bol0un, pıla-.nı bolöun diyip belledik."/
"How did you elect brigade-leaders?" "We appointed them by saying 'So-and-so
shall be one, so-and-so shall be one.'"
fclHxa, my ftbin n m ıaH H a Myn TOHHa n a r r a , n b ijıa ım a Myn TOHHa xeM flaHe
eHUypepHc. (N) /inha:, su yıl p ıla:n c a müq tonno pa gta, p ıla:n ca mürj ton n o hem
da:ne Ö:nnürörü8./
So, this year we'll grow several thousand tons of cotton, and several thousand
tons of vvheat.
- lOpa, MeH HptiM c a ra T lıeiviecH c e m in HHbinna o r a p u H . 3Mİİ3M 3HMCMe
MyufflepHJiepHn r e n im rHTfliı. (TP13.2) /T u ra, m en ya:ru n 0 a:ga t ce m e 0 i 0 eniq
ya:nıi)da otı:rın . Eyyâ:m en ce m e m üsd öriilöriii) g e lip gitd i."/
"Tura, I’ve been sitting by your side for about half an hour. Already, several of
your customers have come in."
MeHe TaKCH TyT2K,ax 6 oncan w 3 car 3jw hh3H rajiflbipbin, o h co h flyp an n a MeH
nbiJian epHK öapsH puftun aHflaMMauH. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö takSİ tu tjo k bol0or)u6
0ag elii]i5i g a lh n p , on0or) duronno m e n pıla:n y e r i:k b arya:n d iy ip ayd a :y m ah ./
But i f y o u vvant to sto p a tax i, you sh o u ld ra ise y o u r rig h t hand, then w h en it
sto ps, y o u sh o u ld s a y y o u ’ re g o in g to such-and-such a place.

The vvord 3aT /Sa:t/ 'thing' may be placed after a noun vvith the same suffixes as the
noun to indicate 'and things like that', 'stuff like that' and 'and so on'.

A3biran saflbin Bojimm? CeH Ken öojiManbi Bonapcun. (G)

/A:8ıgıi) 8a:dıi] bolmı? 0en köp bolmoh bolorSui]./
Have you got enough food and stuff like that? You vvill have to be there for a
long time.
 Quantifiers 177

EeÜJie 3p6eT sarnapa cıo neHen en 6epflHHH3, ötırHaKJiapı,mti3 3ajıunLi3

SoıiMaapMU? (G)
/Beyle erbet Sanlara 6İ5 nener) yo:l berdirjiS, yıgnaklanrjıS SardııjıS bolmoy a:rmı?/
How could you have let such bad things happen, don’t you have any meetmgs or
anything like that?

The vvord flaru /dağı/ adds indefbıiteness or approximation to the vvord v/hich it
follovvs, and also takes the same suffbces as that word. English equivalents inciude 'or
so', 'and such', 'things like that', 'someone like that', 'somevvhere like t l ı a t ' and
'something like that'.

IIIohm flaru ııtı ceH ajıaücan, ohcoh, ceıifle apMaH ranMa3. (G)
/Som dağını 6en ala:y8aq, on0oq, âenne aıma:n garlmaS./
I think if you marry someone like this, then you’ll never wish for anything.

Ak>, ceH 6ap, s:*;en eüyııe flarucbiHa cepeT. (G)

/Ayu, 0 e n bar, ejerj öyünö dagıöma O e r e t ./
Ah, you go and look for him in the house of your mother or somevvhere like that.

- 9-xa, iiıırpHMH MHiıyr flarbi STtıımbiptın. BecflHp! (G)

r Â:-hâ:, yigrimi minut dağı yatıpdınn. Be00iri'7
"Uh-huh, I slept 20 minutes or so. That’s enough!"

HpaH MoMMaflOB, flep-rrynbi E a 6a x a H 0B, Tsııum B a 6a x a H 0B a a ru

aııcaM6jiHMU3tm MJiemıepH. ( N ) /Yaran M o m m a : d o v , Dörtgulı Ba:baha:nov,
Tâ:sli Ba:baha:nov dağı an0amblmu5ıi) Silenleri./
Yaran Mommadov, Dörtgulı Babahanov, Tâshli Babahanov, and people İi ke
tlıat, are the members of our ensemble.

- M eHe e 6apanbiMflaıı c o n c a ra T eflH fle flartı HÜmı-mAaH, oımaıı co n x e M eıi

HiııuMH 3flÜ3H. (TV5.5) /'Men öyö baranımdan 0oj] 0a:gat yedide d a ğ ı iyip-icyârn,
onnon 0orj hem öy irsimi edyânj."/
"After I come home, I eat at 7 o’clock or so, and then I do my house work."

Baıura Tponııeitöyc ftaru on TaiîflaH SepaııoK. (TV 12.3)

/Basga tırolleybuO dağı ol ta.-ydan yörâ:no:k./
No other trolleybuses and things like that run from there.
IIl3xep epnepıııifle opc MHJineTO - oh 6suı npoyeıiT flarbi SapMbiıca AHÜtteıı.
(TV 13.1) /Salıer yerlerinne or6 milleti - on bâ:s pro0ent dağı barrmıka: diyyarn./
Tlıe Russian nationality in city places- I guess there’s 15 percent or so.
178 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Negaüve Pronouns
The negative vvord xhh /hirc/ may occur by itself in the meanings 'none, no, never,
any, at ali' or in combination with interrogative pronouns to create the negative
pronouns xh«j kum /hirc kim/ 'noone, anyone' xhm xaqaH /hirc hacan/ 'never, at no
time' and xhh xaiicbi /hirS haySı/ 'none of'. The verbs in such sentences appear in
their negative forms.

X h h h h M3 T a 6 u ıtıp w rH e p m e eTHpMSHCMura. (G)

/HircigiS tabsıngı yerine yetirmârnOirjiS./
None of you completed the assignment.

C ep 6 a 3 6 a ittm xhm r a x a p t ı re n M e tte p flM . (G)

/âerba :8 baryırj hirc gahan gelmeyârrdi./
Serbaz-bay never got angry.

M e H x h m 6 a x a fla H r a Ü T M a p t u ı . (G) / M e n h i r c b a h a d a n g a y t m a n n . /
I won’t say "No" to any price. ['I won’t tum away from any price']

x m KHMflen ropK M aca öojraçaK. (G)

0 3 y u » 6 y ep e aTan#aıı co n , xhm 3aTflaH,
bu y e re ataıjdan 0ojg, h irc 8a:tdan, hi:£ k im d en gorkm oO o b o ljo k ./
/Ö:8iir)ii
After you get to this place, you shouldn’t be afraid of anything or anyone.

(G) /HirS hayOırgıS köcâr cıkmari)./

X h m x a ttc L irç u 3 K0M3 n tiK M a n .
None of you should go outside. ['Don’t any of you go out to tlıe Street']

Ueue r n o m a nynbi 6ms x h m k h m S e p M e flH . ( N )

/Yö:nö sonco puh bi8e hirc kim bermedi./
But noone gave us this much money.

Û 3 a n X H M -xanaH ıueiine 3aT Jiap 6 o n M aH flb i. (N)

/O 80I hirc-hacan şeyle Şartlar bolnıarnm./
Such things had never happened before.

M eH uıoH jpH c o n oımaH xhm x a 6 a p -x a n .tp aum fleM O K . (H)

/Men sonnon 0or) onnon hirî habar-hatırr esidemork./
I h a v e n ’ t heard n e w s o f a n y kind a b o u t it s in c e then.

Men 03yMHrç H3Me y'nm cy^a Martıptnı®iflun>iMa xh«i aKbin enjpHn SjuiMeflHM.
(O) /Men örSiimürj nârme üciirn 0udo cargınlyarnnıgıma hirc akıl yetirip
bilmedim./
I couldn’t comprehend at ali why I was being summoned to court.
İ4 ö H e o n xh*i x a q a H , xhm KHMe T arçpbism K acbm a KeM eK 6epM eÖ 3pj[H . (O )
/Yörnö ol hirc hacan, hic kime tarjnyalkaOma kömök bermeyârrdi./
But he never helped anyone for a "Thank you."
 Quantifiers 179

The negative word xhm /hi:c/ also combines with other words to form the follovving
negative pronouns: x h h 6 m p h /hi:c bi:ri/ 'noone, anyone' x n q 3 a T /hi:c 6a:t/ 'nothing,
anything' xh m 6 w p 3 a T /hi:c bir Sa:t/ 'no one thing', x h h t y ü c j ih /hi:c tü:01ü/ 'no
form o f , xmm xm jih /hi:c hi:li/ 'no kind of, nothing', xn>! K ec /hi:c ke0/ 'nobody',
xm h e p /hi:c yer/ 'nowhere, anywhere' and x m B a rT /hi:c wagt/ 'no time, never'.

Bh3MH xvih GnpıiMii3 xa6apm>ı najiflHK. (G) /BiSii) hi:S bi:ri:miS habarlı dâ:llik./
None of us knew about it.

A 5 fliiK ep n M 3Ke 6y ryH xhm e p e rnTMe#M. (G)

/Abdıkerim eke bu:n hi:c yere gitmedi./
Abdıkerim-eke did not go anywhere today.

On xhm Barr metine maTntncııtt ryunepH H maafltr 6onapBiH flHtoın

ıiHKHpneHMeiispflM. (G)
/Ol hi:c wagt şeyle sa:tlıkh günlörüi] sa:ya:dı bolorun diyip pikirlenmeyâ:rdi./
He never thought that he would be a witness to such happy days.

Ttıs x m 3ar ffKİİMenH. (G) /Gı:S hi:c Sa:t diymedi./

Tlıe girl said nothing.

MHe, ıny ra n tm a n m p , xhm 3aT flan ropKM a. (G)

/İne, su gapıdan gi:r, hi:6 5a:tdan gorkmo./
Now, go through this door and don’t be afraid of anything.
« E h 3MH no3HHMaMBi3fla x h h xhjim T33e Be rapauıtm M aflbiK 3 ax eK». (N)
/'BiSirj po8i0iyamı58a hi:c hi:li ta:8e we garasılmadık Ba:t yo:k."/
'There’s nothing new or unexpected in our position."

3 m m 3 xhm 3&t 3m nflnnenoKflt,ı. (H) /Emma: hi:c Sa:t esidi)eno:kdı./

But nothing was heard.

IIIoHHa-fla o n ap xhm 3aT BunMeibımvnaıepHHH aÜTflbmap. (O )

/Sonno-do olor hi:£ 8a:t bilmeyâ:nniklerini aytdılar./
Even then, they said that they didn’t know anything.
 PRONOUNS

Pronouns take the place of nouns, but do not give the names of persons, place;,, things,
states, processes, ideas, and so on. They may serve as the subject, object or atribute,
but rarely as the predicate of a sentence.
Türkmen has personal pronouns (Men /men/ 'I', cen /0en/ 'you , ete.),
demonstrative pronouns (6y /bu:/ 'this', nıojı /Sol/ 'that', ete.), a reflexive pronoun (es
/ö:8/ 'self) and inteırogative pronouns (khm /kim/ 'who', naıvıe /nâ:me/ 'what\ ete.).

Personal Pronouns

Personal pronouns substitute for nouns designating persons and things. Türkmen
pronouns reflect person (first, second, third) and number (singular, plural) and uppear in
case forms, but rarely take possessive and plural endings.

MeH /men/1 Ö H3/bi8/ we

ceH /0en/ you CH3 /0i8/ you
o n /o l/h e, she, it onap/olor/they

The first person pronouns MeH /men/ T and 6«3 /biS/ 'w e' funetion as their
counterparts in English.

MeH KJiacMMtüflaH ÖMp oraaHH xajıaHpfltiM. OraaH repMereöflH.

(O) /Men kıla0xmı85an bir oglonı ha:laya:rdım. Oglon görmögöydü./
I used to like a boy in our elass. The boy was good-looking.

T y u ConTanceM yıııtn a n im e KaKtın: - *IeK b u h u h ! M eH rbipnaK xeM G o n ca n ,

m ep n raT K a n y n u n a r e p a HMKajraıUMacan, MeHHH snıtiMa rejiM epcm ı! - flHtiıınflMp.
(N ) /G ü l 0 olta:n 8 öyü n ü q e lin e k a k ıp " C e k e liğ i! M e n g ım a k h e m bol0 om , seri:gat
kan u :n u n o görii: nika:lasm a0arj, menir) yarn u n a gelm erSir)!"/
Slapping Soltansöyün’s hand, Gül said "Hands offl Even though I’m a slave, if
you don’t marry me according to the laws of the Shariat, you won’t get near me!"
['come to the side of me']

Xa3Mp on huihhm ıyrapbin rejmnflH. Meıuı repyn epaH öereıiflH. (TV16.2)

/HâSir ol i:îini gutorup gelipdi. Meni görüp öra:n begenni./
Now she had finished work and had come home. Seeing me she was very hnppy.

Xa, KHflH M a n a flyıifflYKJiM. (G) /Ha:, in n i marja dülnüklü./

Yes, now it’s clear to me.
182 Turkmen Reference Grammar

BeMjıe 6epK tmaM Mcnge HKpeflen, Haflitn flepsSıumıre-s? (N)

/Beyle berk mam menne nireden, nâ:dip dörâ:billik-â:?/
But from vvhere and how could such deep tnıst in me arise?

Oji MeHfien yTamm nyp. (G) /Ol mennen utonup du:r./

She’s shy with me.

Bh3 x,33Mp uıy Taöfla MuuıeüsH MacTep 6wneH cex6eTflem 6onMaKMtı.

(TV7.4) /Bi5 hâ:Sir su ta:yda i:sleyâ:n maöter bilen ööhbötdös bolmokcı./
We now vvould like to have a conversation with the boss who vvorks here.

Bh3MH HKMMH3CM MyrajuibiM. JİKHMM3eM stuı Hecne 6 hjihm öepflapHc.

(O) /BiSig iki:mi5em mugollum. Îki:mi8em ya:s neöle bilim beryârriS./
Both of us are teachers. The two of us impart knowledge to the young generation.

Oji 6»î 3h epsn 6epK Tympnu. (N) /Ol bi8i örâ:n berk tutya:rdı./
He was very strict with us. ['He held us very fitmly']

3pTHp anuaMflan rottMan, oraantı 6nae eTMp. (G)

/Erti:r agsamdan gi:jâ: goymarn, oglom biSe yetir./
Not later than tomorrow night, bring the boy to us.

EH3ae TYpKMen anHnöMÜHHfle 38 camı xapn, 36 canbi cec 6ap. (TV1.1)

/BiSSe türkmön elipbiyinne 38 0a:m harp, 36 0a:nı 0e0 ba:r./
We have 38 letters and 36 sounds in the Turkmen alphabet.

Em3 6wp apayBMbin aflaMnap, H3(tH aflaMnap, renıiH ap3yB 3flennn, roK, ÖHsneHeM
6wp C03, 6wp ceTMp rajıctm! (N) /Bİ5 bir ar8uwcul a:damlar, ya8ya:n ardamlar,
gelig ar8uw edeli:r), goy, biSSenem bir 0ö8, bir detir ga:10ın!/
We are people full of fantasies, people who write: come, let’s spin our fantasies,
let them go, and may just one word, one line remain behind us. ['from us']

The use of the second person singular and plural pronouns is govemed more by the
degree of formality in an exchange than by the number of persons. Ceıı /0en/ is used to
address persons wlıo are either close acquaintances or younger than the speaker, or by a
male addressing a younger female. Ch3 /0i8/ is used in situations of formality when a
speaker addresses adult strangers, or when a junior addresses a senior or a female
addresses an older male. Cn3 /0İ8/ functions also as the plural of ceH /0en/. This means
that one vvould address two or more close friends or children by c m /0i5/.

Mapajı, ceH A M aH bi, florpyflanaM Mbuı itypeKflen ceftüsH 3KeHHH- (G)

/Maral, 0en Ama-.nı, dogrudonom cin yürökdön 0öyya:n ekenirj./
Maral, it looks like you really do love Aman with ali your heart.
 Pronouns 183

Bax, öanaM, cemin epHHe Men eneH taıcaM 6ojiMaaMH?! (G)

/Wah, ba:lam, 0enig yerirje men ölön bolOom bolmoya:mı?!/
Oh, my child, vrouldn’t it have been better had I died instead of you!
TfeMeH, MeH ceHH Ken Barrnan repMeflHM. (TV7.1)
/Çemen, men Beni köp wagtla:p göımödüm./
Chemen, I haven’t seen you for a long time.
3ii naram aM , cana ese flepMaH 6 ap, u io h h 3Tcen ryTynapcHH, ercaM enüspcMH.
(G) /Ey pa:tısam, Oarja yeke derma:n ba:r, som eBBer) gutulya:r0ırj, yogBom
ölyâ:ı0ii]./
Hey, my king, there’s only one medicine for you, if you take it, then you’ll
recover, othenvise, you’ll die.
IIIoHbi flartiHbi ceH anatican, ohcoh, ceHfle apMan ranM33. (G )
/Som dagmt Ben ala:y0ar], on0oi), 0enne armam ga:ImaS-/
I think if you marry someone like this, then you’ll never wish for anything.
['no wish vvill remain in you']
C m Mana en xapx>ı Tam.ni 6epHH-fls. (G)
/0İ8 maga yo:l harjı tapıp berir)-dâ:./
Just fınd me some money for my trip. [plural: 'you fînd for me']
MHe, luoH yn Y'JMH xeM « H a rç HHHUbra reımHM. (N )
/İne, sonuç 1icii:n hem 0İSİjqyamııjıSa gellim./
So that’s also why I came to you. [plural: 'to the side of you']
CM 3H flomaH ryHYHM3 6HneH M3XHpnH ıyrnaaptıc. (N)
/0i8i doglon güniiıjüS bilen mahirli gutloya:n0./
I sincerely congratulate you on your biıthday. [formal]
MeH CH3H X33Mp TypKMeH 3JIHn6HİİH ÖHJieH TaH L[m flblp»;aK . (TV 1.1)
/Men 0i8i hâ:Sir tiirkmön elipbiyi bilen tanısdırjak./
Fil acquaint you now with the Turkmen alphabet. [plural]
0 3 a n K tı fly3rYHHHH3fle cH3 6m e 6aptm 5H nen aoK flin ibi3, 6m eu « 13e reımn
6nneM30KflMK. (N) /08olkı dü8günür]üB8ö 0i8 biSe barıp biler)8o:kdui)u8, bi8em
0i8e gelip biIem8o:kduk./
Under your previous regime you couldn’t come to us and we couldn’t come to
you. [plural]
MeH X33Hp cH3e TypKMeHMifnMKfle Haxili salam bermelidigini ajdyp
SepeifıtH. (TA15.1) /Men ha:8ir 0iSe türkmöncülükdö na:hili 0ala:m
bermelidigini aydıp bereyin./
Let me now teli you about how one should greet in Turkmen culture. [formal]
184 Türkmen Reference Grammar

- ryp6aHMyxaMMer, MeH CtofleH önp 3aT copaütiH-Jia. (TV12.4)

/'Gurbatnmuhommet, men öiSSen bir 5a:t 8o:royun-lo.'7
"Gurbanmuhammet, let me ask you something, ali right?" [tespectful
(capital letter) and formal: 'ask from you']

Because there is no grammatical gender in Türkmen, the third person singular

pronoun oji /ol/ substitutes for ali nouns and for ali male and female proper names.
Because o j i /ol/ is equivalent to English 'she, he, it', gender must be determined from
context. As m English, the third person plural pronoun ojıap /olor/ refers to 'they'
without regard to gender.

- On etaeHflapMH? - E k , eıc, o ji eüJieHenoK. (G)

/'O l öylönyâ:rmi?" 'To:k, yo:k, ol öylönöno:k."/
'İs he getting married?" "No, no, he isn’t getting married."

Ouyrç ajiMaa;aK raııactı SapMtı? (G) /Onuıj almajak gala:8ı barrmı?/

Is there any fortress that he won’t take? ['a fortress of his not taking']

Xs3wp OHbi-fla resnefepMHUHiep. (G) /Ha:Sir onı-da gö51öyâ:rmisler./

Now apparently they’re looking for him, too.

9xjih 3aT ona h t ropyıiflH. (G) /Âhli 6a:t 0130 ya:t göriinnü./
Ali these things seemed unfamiliar to him.

Onflaıı raMiin ryıynttıı ösmaçeK flsn skchsim. (N)

/Onnon gacıp gutulup biljek dâ:l ekenim./
It tumed out that I couldn’t escape by nınning away from him.

Ojıap yK,aKrtuiflanıtın rynYuiflHnep, Orynre3enM MyiİHypreTflHJiep. (G)

/Olor jakgıllasıp gülüsdülör, OgulgöSölii mü:nürgötdülör./
They laughed uproariously, and they embaırassed Ogulgözel.

O napun 6ijpH - «rapa aıro m » MMXMaHxaHacbi 21-k*;m oKTflöpfla aw jifltı. (N)

/Olorur) bi:ri - "Gara altın" mı:hma:nha:na0ı 21-nji oktyabrda acılh./
One of them-the Black Gold Hotel-was opened on October 21.

blHxa, HimH BenaHBiH orm ı enıınep. O hh eflneHHHpMejiM 6onap, rtıanaptı

eTHiuep, oııapu nypMyuıa MHKapManu 6onap. (TV16.3)
/inha:, inni Wepa:mi] oglı yetiser. Onı öylönnünnölü bolor, gı:81an yetiser, olorı
durmuso çıkarmalı bolor./
Now Wepa’s son here will come of age. It will be necessary to get him married,
and his daughters will come of age, and it will be necessary to marry them off.
 Pronouns 185

XaÜHiu sflüapjıepM H , flHÜMeK, Meının aüfltrM aöfltnıiBiM o n a p a apasm 6oıiM ajuu.

(N) /Ha:yıs edyâ:rlermi, diymek, menir) aydım aydısım oloro yaraya:n bolm olı./
If they ask (me to sing this song), that means the way I sing this song mu st be
pleasing to them.

Onapaa B m u fe n anneni öonapflH . Mecenevi,

x e p 6wp H axapw n e 3 B a ı r it Be
xenj(8HMH eKLUenGe ryHM aruıaM ra3am>ı ox;ara arajıapflBi. (H)
/Olordo bisyâ:n her bir naharıg ö:8 wagtı we ölcögü bolordı. Meöelem, hi'.pdâtnig
yeksenbe günü ağsam ga:8anı o:jogo atalardı./
With them, every cooked meal would have its own time and scale. For example,
on Sunday evenings the kettle would be put on the hearth. ['in them' = 'aıııong
them, vvith them']

Tanfcnuıapa tsjih m GepMeK s-fla onap^aH Tan an stmğk y^mh ojıapbi repeıciH OKyB
acöannapu SımeHeM-a yie*;yh 3TMejıımnp. (N)
/T a:h :p lara tâ:lim b e rm e k y a :-d a o lord o n talap e tm e k ü cü :n o lo n g e r e k li o k ııw
e 0 b a :p la n b ilen em -â: ü p jü n etm elidir./
In o rd e r to e d u ca te studen ts o r to m a k e d em an d s o n them , vve m u st su p p ly ıhem at
least vvith th e te x tb o o k s th ey n e ed . ['dem an d s from them']

Beside oji /ol/, the demonstrative pronouns Gy/ıuy /bu:/su:/ 'this' and uıon /sol/
'that' also may refer to 'he' and 'she', and beside on ap /olor/ the demonstrative
pronouns 6 yiiap/uıyjıap/ui0jıap /bulor/sulor/solor/ may refer both to 'they (persons)'
and to 'these/those (things)'.

Con H3Me öonaHM ÖHnitaH eıc. Dlon n m ıa m u p . (TV 13.3)

/0oi) nâ:me bolom bilyâ:n yo:k. Sol gidipdir./
Noone knovvs vvhat happened after that. Appaıently he left.

33M3 xam.m &tn>tıraK ütırnarabiHtt auiHRun, morça 6aptm romynMaKlibu.MM.

(G) /E8i:8 hatmi] yıgıncak yıgnayarnını esidip, soıjo barıp gosulmokcudum.'
Hearing that Eziz Khan vvas gathering the people, I decided to go and join him.
['go to him and join up']

T e n , MeH reneHHMH C y n a p a BnnflHpMatiHH. (G )

/Gel, men gelenimi buloro billirmâ:yin./
So, I shouldn’t let them know I’m here. ['Why don’t I not let them knovv I’ ve
come']

Byjıap u ıeflflio ı, ıtjo ç e ütuı fleB p aH -su ıpeifle Hİtaan re a a n n e p . (N)

/Bulor seydip, nije yıl döwra:n-e!retde yayna:p geSSiler./
They p a sse d se v era l years lik e this in h ap p in ess and prosperity.
186 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

MHe, cepeflim, aKHnnu-xyıııny*;a Maranap, myjıaptı TauuıaMara HeHeH 3He-

aranapu fle3fly-K3? (N) /İne, Seredir), akılh-hu:slujo ca:galar, sulon ta§lama:ga
neneıj ene-atalan dö55ü-ka:?/
Look at these smart, elever children. How could their parents ever abandon them?

florpyetr, MeH nıoJiapuH aTJiapMHaM aflfciMflaH MMKapBiriflbipMH. (H)

/DogruSı, men soloruj] a.'tlanrjam yardımdan cıkanpdırm./
Indeed, it seems I’ve also forgotten their names.

Personal pronouns frequently occur vvith certain particles and suffixes. When the
partide xeM/-aıvı/eM /lıem/-am/em/ 'too, also' occurs after a pronoun, it is fused to it in
spelling and pronunciation: MeHeM /menem/ 'I, too', ÖH3eM /biSem/ 'we, too',
ceHeM/cH3eM /0enem/0i8em/ 'you, too', onaM /onom/ 's/he/it, too', ojıapaM /olorom/
'they, too'. The adverb-forming suffix +Ma/qe /+£a/£e/ is found in vvords Jike ıvıeH'ie
/mence/ 'like me', MeHHHHe /meniıjce/ 'in my opinion', and CH3HG /0i8ce/ 'like you'.
The diminutive-forming suffix +açara3 /+jaga8/ appears in cem rçaras /0enjaga8/ 'just
you' and o>K.ara3 /ojogoS/ 'just s/he/it'. The association (+jimk/jjmk /+lık/lik/) and
privation (+ cu3/cm /+0ıS/0iS/ 'without, not having') suffixes occur in MeHJiHK
/menlik/ 'on my side, with me', MencH3 /men0i8/ 'without me', o jıap ctıs /olor0u8/
'vvithout them', and other vvords. The suffix +flaKbi/naKH /+da:kı/dâ:ki/ ('the one
vvhich is in/at/with') also may be added to the personal pronouns; for example,
ceHflaKH /0endâ:ki/ 'that which belongs to you', 'the one which is with you',
ojıapflaKM /olorda:kı/ 'that vvhich belongs to them', 'the one which is vvith them'.
These forms also appear in the plural; for example, MeııaaKHnep /mendâ:kiier/ 'those
vvho belong to me', 'those vvho are with me', 'my family'.

XaBa, rapaıııctra TypKMeHHCTaHMn acyfla arTjaöiiHa, ene ntnmıiHHe, xauKapa

aöpaftbiHa MeneM cn3qe ryBaHHpMH. (N) /Hawa, garas0ı8 Türkmönii80a:mıj
a:0u:do yagdayma, ör)ö gidisine, halka:ra a:brayına menem 0i8ce guwonya:nn./
Yes, like you, I too am proud of the stable situation in independent
Türkmenistan, of its progress and intemational stature.

MeHJHiK huih 6ap anaMnap caraT 5-ne rencjm. (N)

/Menlik i:§i ba:r a:damlar 0a:gat 5-de geI0in./
Let those persons vvho have business with me come at 5:00.

Ce6s6n 0Jiapcu3 Hiımn OHMa:x;arH repHyn flyp ax6eTOH. (O)

/0eba:bi olor0u8 irsirj ogmojogı gömüp du:r a:hbeti:n./
The reason is it’s obvious that the vvork is not going to be managed wıthout
them.
 Pronouns 187

The declined forms of personal pronouns differ in several respects from those of
nouns. The root vowel e /e/ of the first and second person singular pronouns is replaced
by a /a/ ( M a n a /mağa/, c a rç a /Şarja/) with the addition of the dative case suffîx. In
addition, the declined foraıs of the third person pronoun oji /ol/ are based on the steın
oh- /on-/ (see 193) and its dative case form is ona /oıjo/.
Variant pronuncıations of personal pronouns and pronoun formations are heard in
spoken Türkmen. Forms with a double plural in 6n3Jiep /bi51er/ 'we (ali)' and cHsuep
/0i81er/ 'you (ali)' occur in some dialects and occasionally appear in print.

Personal Pronouns in the Genime Case

The genitive case forms o f the personal pronouns are MeHHij /menii)/, çentin /Benirj/,
on yu /onul)/, 6H3HH /bi5irj/, CH3HH /Qi8irj/ and o n a p u n /olorurj/. These forms are
equivalent to the conjoined form o f English possessive pronouns 'm y', 'your',
Tıis/her/its', 'our', 'your', and 'th eir'. To such fornıs m ay be added ö y n a p t ı n
/bulorui]/ and nıynaptııt /sulorui)/ 'their', when referring to persons.
When they are used, pronouns in the genitive case always stand before nouns, verbal
nouns or participles with possessive suffixes. The addition o f such a pronoun may
serve to emphasize or to ensure the identifîcation of the possessor. However, usage
varies from speaker to speaker and from context to context.

MeıiHH on ce3nepjı CH3e aöflactiM reırifep. (G)

/Menig ol 0ö81örü 0i8e aydaOım gelyârr./
I feel like saying those words to you. [literally: 'My saying those words to you']

Bhsuh 6aüJH.narapbiıvıU3H e3yMM3fleH copaMaH, aram rmtiap/ftmep. (N)

/Bi8ir) ba:ylıklarımı5ı ö:SümüS8ön 0o:roma:n, alıp gidyâ:rdiler./
Tfıey were taking away our riches without asking us.

fîoHe Men ceıiHH Tenecjıon HOMepHrçıı 6nneMOK-fla. (TV3.3)

/Yötnö men 0eniıj telefon nomerirji bilemo:k-da:./
But I don’t even knovv your telephone number.

Y33K enyn xyn6aTbinqaıı, aMJiı.K-xopnyrtnmaH con 6y ıııaxep ouyrç resyıte

*;eHHeTJn( TepM 6onyn repyıifliı. (N) /U8ok yo:luıj hupbotunnon, a:clık-
ho:rlugunnon 0og bu saher onur) göSünö jennetirj tö:ru bolup görünnii./
After the long road’s sufferings and hardships, this city seemed to her eyes like
the seat of honor in Paradise.

Ilfctıutıpflamtrn sRtmttm ryppynjıep 6yjıaptıi( resHYHe apaMüflU. (G)

/Pısırdasıp ediiyârn gürrürjlör buloruıj gövvniinö yaramadı./
They didn’t like the whispering and talking going on. ['did not please their
breast']
188 Turkmen Reference Grammar

T e p , ıvıynyn K an ötın fla hoxmjim ryBaHM 6 ap. (N )

/Gör, munuıj kalbınna nârhili guvvonc ba:r./
See what pride there is in her heart.

3 a T TeneMeJiH flaJi cyB y a ı n .

3M M a my cyB reıınpeıuıtepH y^ h h , m yjıa p u rç
tim TeneMem öonapuc. (TV17.2)
ry p G a c tm a , KpaH Ttm a, morça
/5a:t tölömölü da;l 0uw ücü:n. Emma: su 0uw geçirenleri iicü:n, sulorui]
turboSuno, kırantma, sorjo bi8 tölömöLii bolya:nö./
We don’t have to pay a thing for water. But for their bringing in this vvater, and
their pipes and their faucets, for this vve have to pay.

Generally, the pronouns in the genitive case are used vvith verbal nouns, participles
and particles as a means of making clear the possessor of such actions and states.

MeH cenHH B on m yn a ayiuy™11 öifneMOK. (G)

/Men 0enirj bolsuıjo düşünüp bilemo:k./
I cannot understand your behavior. ['your (vvay of) being']

OHyn araMflttrtiHtı fleppeB TaHafltnu. (H)

/Onui] a:gamdıgını deırevv tanadım./
I recognized immediately that he vvas my older brother. ['his being my older
brother']

06auapbiMM3a, maxepjıepMMH3e Ha3ap aiinacan, OJiapurç aöaflaHJiaıuflLipfcin-

HHfltıruHH repMeK 6onap. (TV 12.5) /0:bolorumu8o, sâherierimiBe naSar aylaöar),
olorui) abadanla!dınlya:ndıgmı görmök bolya:r./
If you take a look at our villages and our cities, you can see that they are being
made to prosper. ['see their being made to prosper']

In the spoken language and in some styles of vvriting, some of the possessive forms
of the pronouns are clipped or abbreviated. Thus, the forms Men /mei]/ 'my', cen /0ei)/
'your' and on /oq/ 'his, her, its' are used instead of MeHHH /menirj/, cemin /Oenirj/ and
QHyn /onurj/ (see 71). Similarly, for some speakers the fonn 6h3 /biS/ 'our' may stand
for 6m3hi( /biSij]/ and the form CH3 /0i8/ 'your' for cıi3nn /0iSir|/; for example, 6 m3
ofia /bi8 o:bo/ 'our village' instead of 6m3HH oSaMbis /biSLg o:ba:mı8/.

Oji Men flypMyma ntiKaHbiMM ömıeHOK 3KeH. (O)

/Ol met) durmuso çıkanımı bileno:k eken./
It tumed out he didn’t know I’d götten married. [’about m y getting manied']

KaKaM ypma niTflH, Men KaKaM. Ktıpfc aııiHHfla. 03H 6np Myn flOKy3 My3
Y^rcayı Mtuifla öonaH. (TV 13.3) /Ka:kam urso gitdi, mer) ka:kam. Kırk yarsınna.
Ö:8ü bir nriiıj dokuS yüS ücünjü yılla bolon./
My father vvent to war, my father. At the age of forty. He vvas bom in 1903.
 Pronouns 189

- CeH H3M3 ;x;ı>iKi,[p:*;£irLin TyTH? (N) /"0en nâ:mâ: jıkırjıgıjrj tutya:?"/

"What are you laughing at?" ['your laughing at what?']

- SL OH H3MeflHTHHeM ÖIUleHOKMbl? (N)

/T a : orj nâ:mediginem bilerjo:kmı?"/
"Or don’t you know what it is, either?" ['its what']

OnuaM 63 TapfciXLi 6ap. (N) [ourçaM < onyn xeM]

/Orjıjom ö:8 ta:n:hı ba:r./ [ojgıjom (< *onurjgam) < onug hem]
It has its own history.

Turkmen adds the relation suffbc + k m /k h /+kı/ki/ 'that is, which is' to the şenitive
case form of the personal pronouns to avoid the repetition of a noun. Such foıms are
equivalent to the absolute form of English possessive pronouns in the meaning s 'mine,
yours, his, hers, its, ours, yours, theirs'. In the spoken language, these foraıs may be
abbreviated to Meı<KH /meıjki/, ceHKiı /0ei)ki/, ohkli /oıjkı/ and ona^Ktı /olorıkı/.

MeH BaüpaMa xep BarT xeM “MeH ceıiHHKH, ceH xeM MeHHHKH” flHİiıtn
aöflapttH. (G )
/Men Bayrama her wagt hem "Men 0enir)ki, Öen hem meniıjki" diyip aydya 'in./
I’m always telling Bayram 'I ’m yours and you’re mine."

- EepeKejuıal-flKÜHn, aflaMCU rbirBipbumtıp.-JlİHÖMeK, ceH oma, ax;eMHn

6H3HHKHfle auıaMartma rapuiM flan-fls. (N) /'Berekella:!" diyip, a:dam0ı
gı:gmpdır. "Diymek, 0en onno, ejemiıj iSigkide yarsamagına garsı da:l-la:."/
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. "That means you really don’t mind my mother
living vvith us." ['in (the home vvhich is) ours']

- Xo-oji rynSaTap neTKiı HaÖ3amı 3yppy*;eK eti 6n3HHKHflHp. (N)

/"Ho-ol günbatar Cetki naySalı Sürrüjök öy biSirjkidir."/
'That conical-shaped house vvith the spire to the west över there might be ours."

For paradigms of the personal pronouns vvith case suffixes, see 577.
190 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Demonstrative Pronouns
Demonstrative pronouns distinguish locations of objects or persons, cali attention to
objects and persons, or substitute for nouns.
In Türkmen, the demonstratives 6y /bu:/ and ray /su:/ 'this' generally qualify
objects close to the speaker, while on /ol/ and mo/uıojı /5o:/sol/ 'that' generally draw
attention to those farther away. In the speech of many Türkmen, 6y /bu:/ and uıy /su:/
are interchangeable, while the pronouns oji /ol/ and uıon /sol/ also may be used
interchangeably with distinctions indicated only by intonation and style. The
demonstrative pronouns also may be used to qualify or designate a person or persons.

6y /bu:/ this o ji /ol/ that

my /Su:/ this mo/nıon /So:/?ol/ that

One of the functions o f the demonstrative pronouns is to draw attention to topics or

objects in the range of vision or hearing of the speaker and the person spoken to. In
this case, the pronoun is placed before the noun designating the object.

MHe, my rantfflaH rap, x m 3amaH ro p m a. (G)

/İne, su gapıdan gi:r, hi:c Sa:tdan gorkmo./
Novv, go through this door and don’t be afraid of anything.

By florptı, Mm 6y ceanep 6wıeH MJianaııiMaH flypyn GmiMepHH. (N)

/Bu dogn, men bu 9ö51ör bilen ılalasma:n durup bilmerin./
This is true, I can’t disagree with these words.

- A, my narraHbm khjiocm m ne, X33np n a rra 6axacu? (TV7.3)

('A, su pagtamır) kilo0ı nâ:ce, hâ:8ir pagta bahaSı?"/
"And how much is a kilo of this cotton- the price of cotton now?"

When the existence of the topics or objects is known only to the speaker or writer-
that is, within her or his "internal" range of vision or hearing- usually the person being
addressed imagines and accepts their existence.

By cfcmar 6wpmve. reaeK raHTanaHHM, 3MMa neftfla 6epMefln. (G)

/Bu 0ı:nag bimâ:ce geSek gaytalannı, emma: peyda: bermedi./
This experiment has been repeated several times, but hasn’t given any results.

On arbip ryHJiep reınm rHTflK. (O) /Ol ağır güntör gedip gitdi./
Those difficult days dıd pass.
 Pronouns 191

In another usage, the topics or objects referred to may not be in the range of vision
or hearing, but both speaker and spoken to accept their existence.

IHeiix Hes^MeflflMH Ky6pa 6 y ce B e u ıe bjih aparan raT H aıu tırm u p Be M OHronnap

TapanuHRaH enflypHJiMnflMp. (N) /S e y b Nejmeddin K u b ra: bu 0öwösö eli y a ra g lı
gatn asıpd ır w e mongollor tarapınnan öllürülüpdür./
Sheyh Nejmedin Kubra apparently took part in this fight with weapon in hand and
vvas killed by the Mongols.

«Illy aparaTHaıuMKJiapMn Mynqan öettnsK-na ocnypımMerum my6xmemıece

6onap.» (TV14.3)
/"Su aragatnasıManrj munnon beyla:k-da: ö60ürülnıögünö siibhölönmöOö bolor."/
'Tt may not be doubted that these relations really will develop in the future."

The pronouns 6y /bu:/ and my /su:/ also are used to refer to a topic, object or
phenomenon that stands at the çenter of attention. Oji /ol/ and mosı /sol/ are used to
indicate topics, objects or phenomena just mentioned or mentioned in previous talk. In
this case, the pronoun substitutes for the noun designating the object.

MyHaan cn u p T xeM sM ene re-mpMeıc m y m k h h . (G)

/Munnon i0pirt hem emele getirmek mümkü:n./
One could also produce alcohol from this.

A h th öh otm k XQKMeH repeK .Mufliı m y 3ar ra$TajıaHMa3 msu iho hm jpraÜMejjM.

(TV17.3)
/Antibiotik hökma:n gerek. înni su 5a:t gaytalanmaS ya:h som icâ:ymeli./
You definitely need antibiotics. Now you should take them so that this thing
won’t come back.

I II oji BaTaHH xeMM3MH3 üypeK flen ceÜM eım , on flaK tı 3 flw rib H n u ın ep e fleı? re 3
örnıeH rapaM aJiii. (N) /Sol W ata m h em m â:m i8 yü rö k d ö n O öym ölü, on n a:kı
ed ily a :n i:sle re det] gö8 b ilen gara m alı./
Each of us has to sincerely love that Homeland and at the same time look at the
vvork being done there.

M ine rHTM3HK3M o j ıa p u KJBMara B a rru M öonMaap, m ım e n reneHHMflen con

K B ap tiH . (T16.2) /l: se gitm a:n kâ :m o lo n y u w m a :g a w a g tu n bolm oyarr, i:sden
g e le n im d e n 0 o g y u w y a:rm ./
I don’t have time to wash them before I go to vvork, I wash them after I come
(home) from vvork.
3as;e, ohm stm ü k 6ojra;aK BenMH, U ene Cana H3Me flnepK 3? (G)
/Eje, onı etmek boljok welin, yö:nö 0apa: nâ:me diyerka:?/
Mother, we can do that, but only- what will Sapa say?
192 Türkmen Reference Granımar

floraHoraaHJiapHM toh remıecHH-s raiMeflHJiep BeıiHH, «Ohum orypnaHfltı,

MyHbiM itHTflH» flHtİKn, toMli 6ynan ömmuııep. (N)
/Dogonoglonlorum toyo gelme0in-â: gelmediler welin, "Onum ogurlonm, munum
yitdi" diyip, toyı bula:p billiler./
My cousins didn’t even come to the toy, and yet, they were able to spoil the toy
by saying "That of mine was stolen, this of mine was stolen."

Beside the Standard forms on /ol/ and m on /sol/ exist the less commonly used
variants o /o/ and mo/ıuyjı /so:/sui/, which do not differ in meaning.

EflH auıtiHflaH 6amnan, MHe, MeKflen Mtınnaptı Saıujıaap. O-fla o h fttuıa ronatî
anap. (TV16.1) /Yedi ya:smnan basla:p, ine, mekdep, mekdep yıllan baslaya:r.
O-do o:n yıla goloy alya:r./
Starting from age seven, you see, school years start. And that takes close to ten
years.

MeH ceH Y'flineM oflyp-6yftyp anuS-a ÖHJiepflHM. (H)

/Men 0en ücü:nöm odur-budur ahb-a: bilerdim./
I could at least bring this or that for you, too. ['that or this']

Açtın ÖH3HH 6aıııapaM>K,arHMBi3 uıo-fla. (G)

/A0ıl bi8ir| basara:yjagımı5 so-do./
And that is the very thing we can manage to do.

n io fleBypne Meımn roıııyH ryjınyrbiHa nartıpbnifltuıap. (N)

/So döwürdö menii) gıjakcımı gosun gulluguno ca:gırıpdılar./
At that time my gıjak-player had been called up to army service, [the rtı»;aK
/gıjak/ is a type of fiddle]

Mh flnMcei( ıuyjı flypaH HaüflaH 6»ıp Kace MueüıiH. (TV15.5)

/İc diy0er) sul duron ca:ydan bir kâ:0e iceyin./
If you want me to drink, Fil have a cup of that tea sitting there.

For many speakers of Türkmen, when 6y /bu:/ and my /su:/ are used one after the
other in a sentence they indicate two objects in immediate proximity, but the object
referred to as 6y /bu:/ is closer to the speaker than the object referred to as my /su:/.

By - my TaMtm hmhhaskm hh yıibi x,ati. (G)

/Bu: - su ta:ımi) icinnii:ki irj ulı ja:y./
This is the largest room in this house.

When the vowel in on /ol/ and uıon /sol/ is pronounced longer and accompanied by
a gesture, the pronoun refers to the farthest object indicated.
 Pronouns 193

Dlon flenaHH repüspMMU? Do you se e that hill?

/Sol d ep aın i göryâ:rm ii]?/
H I oji flensH iı repifopMMn? Do you se e t h a t h ill, ö v e r there?
/So:l d ep â :n i göryâ.-roıirj?/

The pronoun x o j i /horl/ 'that' is used primarily when gesturing or motioning

toward objects in the field of vision.

AH a, KaKa, x o ji rantiHWU( a rattım a rapaByn flypaH A m ıa r y jıtm tıp , a h ü h ii, ona

3JIHHM y3aT fltı.(G) /Ana, ka:ka, h o :l gapr.mrj agSınna garawul duron
A:nnaguludur, diyip, oıjo elini uSotdı./
"There he is, father, the sentry, standing at that door there, is Annaguh," lıe said,
gesturing at him. ['extending his hand at him']

- X o -o ji ryHÖarap mctkh Hatoantı 3yppya;eK eit 6M3HHKHHHp. (N)

/“Ho-ol günbatar cetki naySalı Büırüjök öy biöirjkidİT,"/
'T h at conical-shaped house with the spire to the west över there might be ours."

The demonstrative pronouns take plural, possessive and case suffixes. Possessive
and case suffixes are added to altered stems:

Pronoun Possessive/Case Stem Plural

6y /bu:/ MyH- /m un-/ öyjıap /bulor/

my /su:/ myH- /sun-/ ıuynap /sulor/
on /o l/ oh- /on-/ onap /olor/
ihoji /sol/ uioh- /son-/ uıonap isolor/

The demonstrative pronoun 6y /bu:/ forms the basis of the adverbs Seüne /beyle/
'such', 6 eK(jnp /beydir/ 'thus, in this way, such' and GeftnaK /beylâ:k/ (=
6eiijıernrnnc /beylegigine/, 6y epuK /bu yeri:kD Tiere, in this direction, this way',
and the postposition öeÜJieKM /beyleki/ 'other (than), except'. The pronoun ray /;u:/ is
the basis of similar constructions, including uıeftjıe /şeyle/ 'such, like this',
uıeünejiMK Cmıen /seylelik bilen/ 'in this/that way; as a result', uıeiıaıın /seycıp/ or
uıefiueflM n /seyledip/ (< meiijıe 3^nrı /şeyle edip/) 'in this way, like so',
ıneüjıejiHKfle /seylelikde/ 'so, as a result', mefîjıaK /seylâ:k/ (= raojt epnı< /sol
yeri:k/) 'here/there, in this/that direction, this/that way' and meüjıe-ne 6onca /seyle-de
bolöo/ 'nonetheless'.
194 Türkmen Reference Gramınar

Eeftfie 3p6eT santapa cm H enen e n 6epflHnn3, ftbrruaKnaptntbia saflbtubo

ÖOJIMaHpMbl? (G)
/Beyle erbet Şartlara 0i8 n e n e ı j yo:l berdiıjiS, yıgnaklarırjıS 8a:dıp8 bohnoya:rmı?/
How could you have let such bad things happen, haven’t you had any meetings or
anything like that?

03an xıw-xaMaH nıeüne 3aTixap öojiMaHflbi. (N)

/O8ol hkc-hacan şeyle 8a:tlar bolma:nm./
Such things had never ever happened before.

illetine aflmıce Hccbncnapbtnbt3 ^aırr khp ^ hkmsh , onapflaH onaT h c renep flypap.
(N ) /Şeyle edilOe ya00ıklanrjı8 calt kir]ıkmâ:n, olordon orpt ı:0 geler duror./
If done in this way, your pillows won’t get dirty quickly, and a fine scent will
come from them.

Illy narraH bt fibiriin my Taiifla YÜmypHn roıoncHHbra. U lonapbt hdmb ymiH

uıettnnn yihnypHn roitffyubra? (TV7.3) /Su pagtaını yığıp Su ta:yda ii:süriip
goyııpOuıjuS. Solon nii:me ücü:n Seydip iksürüp goyduıjuS?/
It looks like you’ve harvested this cotton and bunched it ali up here. Why did you
bunch it ali up like this? ['these (bolls of) cotton' = 'it']

The demonstrative pronouns also combine with various derivational suffixes; for
example, +flaKbi/33KM /+da:kı/dâ:ki/ forms MyunaKbi/nıyHaaKbi /munna:kı/sunna:kı/
'which is in this' and onaaKbi/ınonAaKbi /onna:kı/sonna:kı/ 'vvhich is in that';
+w,ara3 forms 6y*;ara3/ınyjrçara3 /bujogoS/sujogoS/ 'this little one' and o ^ a r a 3
/ojogo8/ 'that little one' (the final jj drops from ınyn /sul/ and oji /ol/); +Ha/ne
/+ca/ce/ forms ıwyHIta/ıuyH«ıa /mun£o/sunco/ 'like this, such, this much' and
onna/monMa /onco/sonSo/ 'like that, such'; and +Jibi/nn /+lı/li/ forms on'iaKJibi
/oncoklı/ 'so much'.

H lyuna xaroc apKacbmfla nypKa, smı flemeTH asra MSKepHn 6omna3. (G)
/Sunco halk arkaOmna du;rka:, ya;s döwlötii ayağa cököriip bolmoS./
It’s impossible to force a young State to its knees when so many people support it.
['this much of the people']

Mene m onna nyntı 6n3e xmic kum SepMeffM. (N)

/Yö:nö sonCo puh biSe hi:c kim bennedi./
But no one gave us that much money.

MyH«ıa-MyHqa gonca, e3YMK3 onapapuc. (N )

/Munco-munco bo!0o, ö:8ümti5 orjororu0./
If it’s this much, we ’U manage it ourselves.
 Pronouns 195

i t e , flwne m y ^ ara3 eıcex;e Mttcarma-fla flypMyıua r e m p m ü m Miunepfle khmhh

63x6MflMHMn eıme roıonsHflfcirbi aJtflMH repYHÜap. (N)
/İne, dirçe-sujogoS yekeje mı0a:lla-da durmuso gecirilya:n irslerde kimirj
barhbkdinii] örjdö goyulya:nnıgı a:ydıt) görünyârr./
Here, j u s t i n t h i s single little example is clearly visible whose interests are being
promoted in the vvork being carried mit.

Xa3Hp 6onca MeH CH3e MaHaTJiaptı repKe3epHH Be onaaKbi SeıunncnepH

AYiUYHflHpepHH. (TP2.2)
/Hâ:5ir bolöo men 0i8e manatlan görköSöriin we onna:kı bellikleri düsünnüröriin./
And now I’U shovv you the manats and explain the symbols on them.

Omtanjibt flapttTLrGepMsn! (G) /Oncoklı da:ngıbermâ:i}!/

You shouldn’t vvoıry s o much!

The locative and ablative case forms of the demonstrative pronouns form the
conjunction OHfla /onno/ 'but, stili' (see 444, 450) and the adverbs Oiiga /onno/ 'there'
and oHflaH/moHHaH (coh) /onnon/sonnon (0orj)/ 'after that, from then on' (see 366).
The genitive case forms are used with ceıtain postpositions; for example, ınoHyn Y™'f
/sonurj ücürn/ 'therefore, that’s why' (see 399).

Demonstrative Pronouns in the Genitive Case

The demonstrative pronouns M y u y if /munug/, m yııyn /sunuıj/, oH yrç /omt}/, m o n y n
/sonui]/, in their genitive case forms, may be placed before nouns, verbal nouns or
participles ending in the third person possessive suffix to express the meaning 'its',
vvhile the forms 6 y j ı a p u n /bulorurj/, u ı y j ı a p t r u /sulorug/, o n a p u n /olorug/ and
m o n a p u H /soloruıj/ have the meaning 'their'.
The demonstrative pronouns in their genitive case forms (except xoji /ho:l/) may
behave as nouns vvhen the suffix + k u / kh /+kı/ki/ is added to them: MyııynKtr/
uıynyuKbi /munurjkı/sunuıjkı/ 'this one’s' and 0HynKu/ui0HynKtı /onurjkı/sonuıjkı/
'that one’s'. These forms usually are pronounced MynKH /murjkı/, mynKbi /suıjkı/,
ohku /or|kı/ and uiohkm /sotjkı/.
For paradigms of the demonstrative pronouns vvith possessive and case suffixes, see
578.
196 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Reflexive Pronoun
A reflexive pronoun substinıtes for a person or thing and is used as an object to refer to
the subject of a sentence. In English, 'myself', 'itself', and so on, are reflexive
pronouns.
The Turkmen reflexive pronoun is «3 /ö:ö/ 'self', which takes both possessive and
case suffixes. In terms of their referenee, use of the Turkmen pronoun conforms rather
closely to that of English 'self'.

Reflexive Referenee

On 83H MaııiHH Se^epMsp. On eayHH ycca xacanjıaap.

/Ol ö:Sü masr.n bejeryâ:r./ /Ol ö:8ünü u06o ha0a:playa:r./
He himself repairs ears. He considers himself a repairman.

Reflexive Possessive Referenee

On 63 MauiMHBi fleBynflH. On 63 MamuHtiHH öe^epHsp.

/Ol ö:8 ma5ı:m döwüllü./ /Ol ö:S ması:mm bejeryârr./
His own car is broken. He repairs his own car.

Reflexive Possessive Referenee in Object Phrases

Oji 63 rbi3bfflHH MaıııtiHBi cypeHHHH repflH.

/Ol ö:8 gı:8ınıj) ması:nı Oürönünü gördü./
He saw his own daughter driving the car.

Oji rtobiHMrç 63 MauıtmuHM cypeHHHH repflH.

/Ol gr.Sınıi) ö:S m asımım Oürönünü gördü./
He saw his daughter driving her own car.

On e3 rti3tnn,ın 03 MamuHUHM cypfeHHHM repn».

/Ol ö:5 gı:Sjnıq ö:8 ması:nııu 0üryâ:nini gördü./
He saw his own daughter driving her own car.

In its possessive forms, e3 /ö:8/ may stand after the subject (oji e3H /ol ö:8ü/ 's/he
herself/himself [repairs ears]') or as the object (on 83yHH /ol ö:Sünü/ 's/he [considers]
her/himself) of a sentence as a means of referring action to the subject. This usage may
be referred to as "reflexive referenee."
 Pronouns 197

In its simple form, ea may stand before a noun vvith a possessive suffix serving as
subject or object of a sentence to refer possession of that noun to the sub;ect (03
MauibiHbi /öt8 masr.m/ 'his/her own car [is broken]', on 63 M a m u ıı u n t ı /ol ö:8
masırnım/ 's/he [repairs] her/his own car"). This may be called "reflexive po;; sessive
referenee."
The reflexive pronoun also may appear before a noun vvith a possessive suffix
serving as the subject or object of a predicate in an object phrase to refer possession
back to the subject of the sentence (on 83 rbi3U M auıuH biH bi /ol ö:8 gı:8ı m£.;ı:nını/
's/he [saw] her/his own daughter [driving] the car', on ru3bi 03 MauibiHUHU /ol gı:8ı
ö:S ması:nını/ 's/he [saw] the daughter [driving] her/his own car', on 03 n.i3bi 03
MaulUHUHU /ol ö:8 gı:Sı ö:8 masımını/ 's/he [savv] her/his own daughter [driving]
her/his car"). This may be called "reflexive possessive referenee in an object phra;;;."

Reflexive Referenee
The reflexive pronoun 03 /ö:8/ with a possessive ending may appear after the subject of
a sentence to specify that subject as the performer of the action. Frequenlly, the
reflexive pronoun itself serves as the subject of a sentence.

MeHeM M npan BenH, florpycbtH H aÜTcaM, m sh -s iiioh m c a T u n fltmMacaM, 03

h ö h m h 63YM sKrepM n 6nnjK;eK lyM aııtiM eK. (G)
/Menem mi:ra:p vveli, dogruOunı ay00am, men-â: som 0atıp dı:nma0am, ö:J.
ya:bımı ö:8üm eygerip biljek guma:nun yo:k./
I’m an irrigationist too, however, to teli the truth, I-well, if I don’t seli it and get
rid of it, I don’t guess I can handle my own canal. ['I myself can handle']

3üceM ceH 03YH raüflbin 6 n ro ;eK -fla? (G)

/Ey0em 0en ö:8ür) gaydıp biljek-dâ:?/
But can you really go back yourself? ['you yourself can go back']

C e 3 aüflbin re n e n 6 o n can w 3,6 axaM M 03YM K ecx,eK . (N )

/0ö8 aydıp gelen bol0or|uS, bahamı ö:8iim ke0jek./
If you came seeking marriage, I vvould set my price myself. [1 myself woukl set
my price']

Myıma-Myıma 6onca, 03YMH3 onapapbic. (N)

/Muneo-munco bolöo, ö:8ümü8 oıjororuö./
If it’s this much, we’ll manage it ourselves. [ 'w e ourselves will manage it']

Oıibi 03YH flY3e™ ece,t- x m KMMflY3e™ e3>xaH oryn. (BH)

/Om ö:8iir) dü5ötmö0ör|, hi:c kim dü8ötmö8, ha:n oğul./
If you don’t correct it yourself, no one else vvill correct it, dear son. ['if you
yourself don't correct it']
198 Türkmen Reference Grammar

KaKaM ypma nrrflH, Men KaKaM. Kupıc suiHHaa. 03H 6np Myn flOKy3 ffy3
y ıp ra t# Hhinjıa öonan. (TV13.3) /Ka:kam ıırso gitdi, meıj ka:kam. Kırk ya:sınna.
Ö:8ti bir müıj doku5 yti8 ücünjü yılla bolon./
My father went to war, my father. At the age of forty. He was bom in 1903. ['He
himself]

The reflexive pronoun ®3 /ö:5/ with a possessive ending also may appear as the
direct (accusadve case) or indirect (dative or ablative case) object of the predicate of a
sentence to refer the action back to the subject.

MHflH axjnı 3aT ÖK3HH 03yMH3e Saratı. (N)

/İsmi âhli 8a:t biSirj ö:8iimü8ö baıglı./
Now everything depends on us ourselves.

BHJiennKfl3KM K3pxana Hiııe 6aum an , raim i n-fla neHDKjıpe S n o r t ııa ı TaflnpnaHaa

oJiapttu xeM oBaflan, xeM enwn, B3yHe HYinitsu n.iM M an.1 GoıoHtıa xeM
öefljıeRHHepaeH ap3aH 5oJi*;aKflb[rbuttı üy3yMHH y ıp y H a aiiflatİMH. (N )
/Bilelikdarki kâ:rha:na i:se basla:p, gapı ya:-da penjire bulogum tayya:rlanna
olorui] hem owodon, hem yerçil, ö:Sünö düsyâ:n gımmatı boyunco hem
beylekilerden arSarn boljokdugunı yiiSiimüi) ugnıno aydayın./
Let me say at once that when the joint enterprise starts to work and produces door
or window units, they will be both attractive and easy (to install) and, relative to
their value, also cheaper than similar ones. ['value placed on them themselves']

Ewp 3afla x,yfla Gereıriisu Be K3Te 03- 03yM aen a3ax,uraM Sonca pastı öojih h . (N)
/Bir Sa:da juda: begenyâ:n we kâ:te ö:8-ö;8ümdön a:8ajıgam bolBo ra:8ı bolya:n./
I’m very happy about on e thing and sometimes I’m even a little bit satisfied with
myself. ['with me myself]

03YMH nynitofle h u 6 a rrn b i anaM x a c a n sflMspflMM. ^ a r a ran#H bstimh, e3yMHH

ftn u h im a m n ır h iM h i nıoHfla S jm h h m . (N) /Ö :8üm ü d ün yârd e ig b a g tlı a:d am h a8 a:p
e d y â :rd im . Ğ a :g a g a :llı w e lin , ö:8üm iii] yalrçısan h gım ı son n o b illim ./
I considered myself the happiest person in the world. I became pregnant, however,
and I realized then that I had made a mistake.

Mhhh B h 6 h 03YHH 6arrjıı>ı caünpM MKa? (O )

/İnni Bi:bi ö:Siinü bagtlı Oayyatmuka:?/
Does Bibi really consider herselî happy now?
 Pronouns 199

Reflexive Possessive Reference

When the reflexive pronoun 03 /ö:5/ is placed before a noun vvith a possessive suffix
vvhich serves as the subject of a sentence, it specifies that the subject possesses that
noun.

3K,. Typ6aHTfcuıtı»;oBaHi,ın moBnu nmneMerHHe rapaMa3flaH, 0Hyn ©3

npoGneManaptı, e3yHH TOJtrynmiipHH Mecenenepu 6ap. (N)
ff. Gurba:ngılı:jowa:nır) sovvlı i:slemegine garamaSSan, onur) ö:S probIema:lan,
ö:8ünü tolgunnuryam meOeleleri ba:r./
In spite of her successful work, J. Gurbangıhjova has her o t o problems and
concems that trouble her.

Onapaa GmıttsH xep Gnp Haxapı,ın 03 B a m ı Be e m e n i öompffhi. Meceneu,

xerm3HMH eranenee r p m anuaM naaHH ox;ara aTanapfltı. (H)
/Olordo bisyârn her bir nahani) ö:8 wagtı we öKögü bolordı. Meöelem, hepdâ:nir)
yekîenbe gtinü ağsam ga:Sam o:jogo atalardı./
With them, every cooked meal vvould have its own time and scale. For example,
on Sunday evenings the kettle vvould be put on the hearth. ['its own time and
scale vvould be']

The reflexive pronoun 03 /ö:8/ also may appear before a noun vvith a possessive
suffıx serving as the direct (accusative case) or indirect (dative case) object of a sentence
to specify that the noun is possessed by the subject.

nyuiMaHHMbirç 03 aorbiMbin amartmflaj(BirtiHH 6HJiM3HflMpMiı. (G)

/Dusmamımııj 8:8 ayagımırj asa.-gınnadıgım bilma:nnirin./
It seems I didn’t knovv that the enemy vvas under my own feet.

SnöeTfle, on R esner 63 nynym.1 raMMaımnc xaKMYHHe caTMara rtratiKnaHap.

(N) /Elbetde, ol dövvlöt ö:8 pulum gımmathk hökmünnö 6atma:ga./
Of course, that State is interested in selling its own money at value.

Onap cana rynep My3 Cepöapnep, 83 anagaJiapuHM, tiMKMpnepHHM nattnauıapnap.

(N) /Olor Barja gülör yü8 berya:rler, ö:8 aladalannı, pikirierini pa:ylasya:rlar./
They look at you with smiling faces, and they share their own concems and
thoughts.

Reflexive Possessive Reference in Object Phrases

To indicate that the subject of a sentence possesses the subject in an object phrase,
Turkmen places the reflexive pronoun 03 16:8/ vvith genitive case suffix (Standard) or
vvithout genitive case suffbc (spoken) before the possessed noun or participle in the
object phrase.
200 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

OHconaM, 83YHH3HH| aöflHM flepeflfen 6ojiMan.ınti3aM axMan? (N)

/Onöorjom, örStirjüBür) aydım dörödya:n bolmoguıjuSom ahma:l?/
So then, maybe you also composed songs yourself? ['your own composing']

CTajiMH b3yhhh Bepııa SapaflaKtı KapapbiHM srriipflbi nu&ım nmcHp sTMeıc

caganiiK Sonapan. (N) /I88alin ö:6ünür) Beriya ba:rada:kı kara:nnı yatındı diyip
pikir etmek 0a:dalık bolordı./
It would have been naive to think that Stalin was going to lay aside his own
decision regarding Beriya.

MeH B3YMHH H3Me y' imh cyfla MartıptiJMimurLiMa xmt aKbin empMn SitnMeflHM.
(O) /Men ö:8ümür) na:me 1icii:n 8udo ca:gınlya:nmgıma hi:c akıl yetirip
bilmedim./
I couldn’t comprehend at ali why I was being summoned to court. ['my own being
summoned']

Barr renep, Memtn rtotiMaM ynanap. 0 3 KaKactiHtm GitBenaıiBiK aflenfliırHue

flYiUYHep. (O) /Wagt geçer, menirj gı:8ımam ulolor. 0:8 ka:ka8ınır| bi:wepa:lık
edennigine düsiinör./
Time will pass and my daughter will grow up, too. She will understand that her
father was unfaithful. ['her own father’s being unfaithful']

Oıher Uses o f 03 lö:SI

The third person form (e3H /ö:Sü/) of the reflexive pronoun may appear in possessive
relationship with a preceding noun, pronoun or adverb in the meaning of 'the X itself',
'the very X ' or 'the same X'.

Ohm i u o j i carafltiH 03YHHe caTbirnbi apaöacbiHa cantm , ee CaKan yrpaTflbinap. (G)

/Om Sol 8a:gadııj ö:8ünnö 8atıgcı arabaöma 8ahp, öyö bakam ugıotdulor./
They put him on the seller’s cart at the same hour and sent him tovvard home.

E hjihhh, 6a6a, xyT moHyn 83H MeH. (G)

/Biilirj, ba:ba, hut sonur) ö:Stt men./
You guessed it, grandpa, I’m that very person.

MyHyn 03MxeM :*;eMraeTHMH3MT33enex;eK ryümiH cuacaTflbip. (N)

/Munurj ö:8ü hem JemgıyetimiSi ta:8ele]ek gü:clü 0ıya:8atdır./
This itself is also a strong policy that vvill renevv our society.

M ch nrrx;eK! Xa3npıiH oayune nrraçeKİ (H)

/Men gitjek! Hâ:Siriıj ö:8ünnö gitjek!/
I will go! I'll go this very moment!
 Pronouns 201

O h c o h 3 *;eM iın e3H x e w , m y IleB pH 3e flH M sp jıe p , m y TaMfla K ypopT e p , a c jıtı

m o n TaüflaH. (TV13.1) /On0orj ejem ir) ö:8ii h em , su Pöwrü:8ö d iy y â :rle r, :iu ta:yd a
kurort y e r, a01ı s o l ta:ydan ./
And my mother herself- this they cali Pöwrize, a vacation spot here- is oıiginaüy
from there.

By xajiLiHtı 6m3hh xam.wtı raranaptiMbra AMepMKaıiiin 6sm öys fii,umı>ın.iHa

6an>nujıan, coBrar flOKaflbinap. EyHyn e3yHe, HeMe, rypxanqaH ce3Jiep sriujırtı.
(TV12.4) /Bu ha:lı:m biSig hadıcı gı:81anmıS Amerikamıi) bâ:s yü8 yıllığına
bagısla:p, 0owgot dokodulor. Bunuıj ö:8iinnö, neme, Gurha:nnan OöSlör yaSıIgı./
Our caıpet-weaving girls wove this carpet as a gift in honor of the 500-yeaı
anniversary of America. On this very one, you know, words from the Koran are
written.
MyHyn o3M reqen ötuiflaKa rapaubiHfla oh npoyeırr eHfle SapanUbirtiHtı anrıaflap.
(TV8.3)
/Munui) ö:8ü gecen yıllaka: gara:mrjda o:n proöent örjdö barya:nmgmı ar)ladya:r./
This itself shows that it [the cotton yield] is 10 percent ahead compared to that of
last year.

The reflexive pronoun 63 /ö:8/ 'self' serves as a member of compourıis; for

example, 836onyuiJibiJiLiK /ö:8bolusluluk/ 'individuality' (< 'self-behavior'), L3Öauı-
jiaKiibiK /ö:8basdaklık/ 'independence' (< 'self-leading), osapa/oaapacunaa /ü:8a:ra/
ö:8a:ıa0ınna/ 'among themselves' (< 'self-between'), and others.
For paradigms of the reflexive pronovm with possessive and case suffixes, see 579.
202 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Interrogative Pronouns
Interrogative or question pronouns are used to ask questions vvhose answers are not
'yes' or 'no' or the selection of an alternative. In Türkmen, most of the interrogative
pronouns take possessive suffıxes and can be declined with case endings.

km m /kim / w h o ? H3XMJIM /nâ:hili/ h o w ? , w hat?

H3Me /nâ:me/ w hat? x a itcw /hay0ı/ w h ich (one)?
H3Me y «ih h /nâ:m e ü£ü:n/ why? x a 'ia n /hacan/ w hen?
HMpe /nire/ w here? hm«w k /nicik/ h o w ?
H3Me /nâ:ce/ h o w m uch/m any? HeneH frenerj/ h ow ?
H3MeH>K,ii /nâ:cenji/ w h ich (num ber)? Ha /nâ:/ w hat?

The interrogative pronoun kmm /kim/ asks the question 'who?', and may appear in
declined forms, including the genitive case form khmmh /kimirj/ 'whose?'

Oji KHMK3H-eW? (G) /Ol kimkâ:n-ey?/

Now, who could that be?

M m , m ya ça ra 3 e K e ^ e M tıcan ga-fla flypM yıua remıpHJiJfoıı mujıepıje khmmh

53x6ifflMHMn e ıifle rojoiMHflbiru aHflbin r e p y ııib p . (N )
/İne, dirje sujogoS yekeje mı0a:lla-da durmuso gecirilyatn irslerde kimii]
ba:hbi:dinirj öqdö goyulyaaımgı a:ydıi] görünyâ'.r./
Here, just in this single little example is clearly vısibie whose interests are being
promoted in the work being carried out.

Uly Kapıı caünan ajiMarana ıısMe ce6sn 6onfltı, kum ırrepnt 6epnH? (O)
/Su kârri 0ayla:p almagırja na:me 0eba:p bolh, kim itergi berdi?/
What was the reason you chose this profession, who gave you a push?

The interrogative pronoun ııaıvıc /nâ.-me/ asks the question 'what?' and frequently is
used with case forms. The ablative case form iidmcuch /nârmeden/, literally 'from
what?', is equivalent to English 'why?'.

(G) /N a:m e
H s m c fliıftceMKSM? d iy0 em ka:m ?/
I wonder w hat I should say?

Xa3iıpKH flOBypfle napTMsmım H3XMJIH MaKcaTnaptı SojiManbi, ii3M3iihh YCTyHfle

muneMejlM? (N) /Hii:8irki döwürdö paıtiyarnır) narhili mak0atları bolmoh,
nâ:mâ:nir) ü00ünnö i:slemeli?/
Wlıich goals should the party have at the presem time, on what should it work?
['on top of what?']
 Pronouns 203

- Ceii H3M3 x£nchipx,hm,w ryrnl (N) / ’0erj na:ma: jıkırjıgıi) tutya:?"/

"What are yon laughing at?"

By H 3M eneH K 3? (O) /Bu na:medenkâ:?/

And why is this so?

By H3M3HHH ypmyKa? (BH) /Bu nâ:ma:nii) ursuka:?/

What kind of war is this anyway? ['this is a war o f what?']

Mhhm Men H3Me s m e m ? fcfatiMa eBpynjfn, canaM 6epMenHMM?

(BG) /İnni men nâ:me etmeli? I:5ıma öwrülüp, 8ala:m bermelimi?/
Now w hat am I to do? Should I tum around and say hello?

Con H3Me 6 o n m u 6wı&m ex. IİIon nmunflMp. (TV 13.3)

/9oq na:me bolom bilyâ:n yo:k. Sol gidipdir./
Noone knows what happened after that. Apparently he left.

The variant H eM e /neme/ (without long vowel) is used as a hesitation word,

approximately equivalent to English 'uh', 'umm' or 'you know'.

IIIoji epnepge repcenro, HeMe, copaııınuptrn, 6 bjik3M xyflail 6apfltıp-fla, 6ejiK3M

TaıiHJicHH-fla, xob. (TV13.3) /Sol yerlerde gör0öıjü8, nâme, 0o:rosdurui], belka:m
huda:y ba:rdır-da:, belka:m tapıl0ınna, ho:w./
If you see him anywhere, y o u k n o w , ask around, maybe there really is a god,
hey-maybe he really should be found.
OHconaM, HeMe, ene-fle 6vıp acactt 6H3HH X33np ync öepiîsH 3antiMti3 - Byrflaö.
(TV12.4)
/OnÖorjom, neme, yene-de bir e0a:0ı biSir) hâ:8ir ün0 berya:n 5a:dımı8 - bugdoy./
And then, uh, there’s one more basic thing which we devote attention to novv-
wheat.

The question pronoun H3Me /na:me/ 'what?' combines with the postposition yhhh
/iicü:n/ 'for' into H3Me ym ın /nâ:me ücü:n/ 'what for?' as a pronoun vvhich asks the
question 'why?'

Bh3 oya H3Me y'JH H car 6 o n atİTMa n t i M t m ı t i M t o . (G)

/BiS oıjo nâ:me ücü:n 0ag bol aytmalımısımıS./
W hat are we supposed to thank him for?

Be-e, enflauiMM H3Me ynnn ona «nrrMe» flitMflHKs? (N)

/Be-ye, yo:llosum nâ:me ü£ü:n oıjo "gitme" diydika:?/
Hmm, I wonder why my husband told him not to leave?
204 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Bax, Ketaıc, ceH HaMe yiHH MeHH TaHaMaflHK öojıan? (H)

/Walı, Keyik, 0en nâ:me ü£ü:n meni tanamadık bolya:rj?/
Oh, Keyik! Why are you aeting like someone who doesn’t know me?

M eH e3yMHH Hawe y h h h c y fla M an.ipbuiaHflwn.iM a xhm a r a r a e r o p a n 6juiMeflHM.

(O ) /Men ö:Süm üıj n a:m e ü cü :n Budo £ a :g ın ly a :n n ıg ım a h i:c a k ıl y e tirip
b ilm ed im ./
I couldn’t comprehend at ali why I vvas being summoned to court.

The interrogative pronoun Hane /nâ:ce/ asks the questions 'how many?' or 'how
much?' and occurs frequently in questions about age (Haqe Hiutınbi3? /Nâ:£e ya:sır)i5?/
'How old are you?'), price (HaMe 6axacu? /Nâ:ce bahaOı?/ 'What’s its price?', 'How
much is it?0 and time (C a ra t H3Mej(e? /0a:gat nâ:£ede?/ 'At what time?').

A, oji HaMe MaııaT flypap-fla? (TV5.4) /A, ol nâ:ce manat durya:r-da:?/

But how much does it cost, I wonder?

Cm3 ıny K9pfle HaMe uarTflan 6apu HUUieÖ3HH3? (TV7.3)

/0İ8 su kâ:rde nâ:ce wagtdan ba:ri i:Sleya: qi5?/
How long have you been in this profession?
Ch3 xenflefle nane ryH muneManm'/ (TV12.3)
/0İ5 hepdedenâ:ce gün i:sleyâ:ıji8?/
How many days a week do you vvork?

The interrogative pronoun H3MeuK,H /nâ'.cesıji/ asks the question 'which one?' and
usually refers to the numbers of addresses,of buildings, floors of buildings, numbers of
buses and the like.

- MeH eaniHH*;» sKiaüfla HmaspuH. - HaMeııa^Hfle? (T)

/'Men ba:sinji jaryda ya:saya:rın." "Nâ:cenjide?"/
"I live in building Nr. 5." 'İn vvhich one?"

The interrogative pronoun HHpe /nire/ asks the question 'where?' and occurs in
questions about location and direction.

A m b , MepeT, HHflM HHpa öapapcun, Maitan öojıca rafaan flyp-jıa. (G )

/Ayuw, Meret, inni niıa: barya:r6ıq, ca:yırj bol0o gayna:p du:r-la./
Whoa, Meret, where are you going now, you knovv your tea is boiling.

Möepüau k m m ? Haöejum! Hape^en n6epnnÜ3p? HaBejım! (N)

/İ:beryâ:n kim? Nâ:belli! Nireden i:berilyâ:r? Nâ:belli!/
Who is the sender? Unknovvn! Where is it from? Unknown!
 Pronouns 205

TyjiYCTaH afltiMa nyınnu.. On ıuyuı-ıuy Barr HupefleKa? (BG)

/Gülü00a:n ya:dmıa diisdü. Ol sus-su wagt niıedekâ:?/
Gülüstan fell into my memory. I wonder where she is right now?

The interrogative pronoun xaücu /hay0ı/ asks the question 'which one?' and does
not take case suffixes. One of its uses is to ask the day of the vveek (Xenaannn xaiicu
tyhh? /Hepdarnii] hay0ı günü?/ 'What day of the week?').

CeH xaöcu qaübi xanaan? Tormm, rapaMH? (TV 17.3)

/8en hay0ı ca:yı icmami ha:laya:q? Gö:kmü, garamı?/
Which kind of tea do you like to drink? Green or black?

Ten 6y hkm waxcbin xaücbicbiHBU< Ahilik Aüfltın roıpuHrKHfle flsjı-fl.e, 30ı:eM

Anibnc Aüflbnı rmp fliıtanMaH maxcbm ameMe acLipnapflan 6spn ara-
6a6anapbiMbi3 TapanuHflaH KepaMaTOM aflaM xeKMYHfle, fliıiıcen xopMam Jta»raı»m
rejnnıüsımurMHHe. (N)
/Gep bu iki Sah0ıi) hayBıBınıg A:sık A:ydıi) pi:rdiginne dâ:l-le, ey0em A:i.ık
A:yduj pi:r diyilyâ:n 5ah0ır] enîeme aOırlardan ba:ri ata-ba:balanmıS tarapınnan
kera:matlı a:dam hökmunnö, diy0eıj hormotlonulup gelinyâ:nliginne./
The question is not which of these two persons is Ashık Aydıng-pir, rathe: it is
that the person called Ashık Ayduıg-pir has been respected in his capacity as a
holy man by our ancestors for many centuries.

The interrogative pronoun xaqaH /hacan/ asks the question 'when?' and lioes not
decline or change in form.

- E r c a M a M , ApTbuc, A ita cana rapamun O T y p a H flb ip . XaHH, HHflMt o k u );aqan

3flepwc? (G)
/"Yogöomom, Artık, A:yna öarja garaiıp oturonnur. Hanı, inni toyı hacan etleri0?'7
"By the way, Artık, it looks like Ayna has been waiting for you. So, when shall
we make the wedding?"

E h p rappu-xa ypuıyn xaqaıı ryrapx;an.iHU copaflbi - ahMm i , Men 6oioh a rmtiM.

(BH) /Bir garrı-ha: ursui] hacan gutorjogunı 0o:rodı - diyip, men boyun ali m./
I nodded and said "Yeah, an old man did ask me when the war would end.'

The interrogative pronoun h3xmjih /nâ:hili/ asks the questions 'how?' and 'what
kind of?' One of its most common usages is in the greeting formulas HaKHJiıı?
/Nâ:hili?/ 'How is it?', Huınep ıi3XHJin? /î:51er nâ:hili?/ 'How are things?' and
Haxnjın 03yu? /Nâ:hili ö:8ürj?/ 'How is it with you?'

HIy ryH xoBa H3Xmjim? (T2.4) /Su:n howa: nâ:hili?/

How is the weather today?
206 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

C m o n ap naxnjın 6 a x a ajıaHRbip eftflüsHio? (G)

/9iS olor nârhili baha alannır öydyâ:ıji8?/
W hal kind of marks do you think they got?

- E p u ra fliıp n e p ıı H3XHJIH ca ö jıa flb in b a ? - ü t m a H tı ö o n cy jt, n tın a n tr öoiicyH

m U m 6enneflHK. (G)
/'Brigadirleri nâ:hili 8ayladıqı5?" "Pıla:m bolBun, pıla:nı bol9un diyip belledik."/
"How did you elect brigade-leaders?" "We appointed them by saying 'So-and-so
shall be one, so-and-so shall be one.'"

The intetrogative pronouns also may be used in constructions with verbs ending in
the conditional suffbc -ca/ce /-0a/0e/ to form expressions equivalent to English
'vvhatever', 'whoever', 'whichever', 'however', 'vvhenever' and 'wherever'.

Xep H3Me OTcerçeM , cerom KH suihmih. (G) /Her nâ:me e00ei]em, 0eniqki yalrjıs./
W hatever you do, what you do is vvrong.

Xep HaMe atirrca rç a M , o n c e m m ce3Jiepnne ry n a K acM aap. (G)

/Her na:£e ay00aqam, ol 0eniq 0ö81örüi]ö gulok a0maya:r,/
He doesn’t listen to your vvords, hovvever many times you teli him.

B y n a p M a jın a p b i ra T b i ro B b t S a K a p fltın a p , H H p en e oT nyK ep 6 o n c a , u ıo n epuK

(G) /Bulor m a :lla n ga tı g o w ı bakardılar, n ired e o tlu k y e r
c y p y n 3KMflepnnnep.
0üriip âkid erd iler./
b ol0 o , so l y e r i:k
They tended cattle very vvell. W herever there was pasture land, they would drive
them to that place.

AflaMtrH rapfltı Hane reaejı öojıca, oHyn Kem öeM , KajıSaM, ify3eM , re3eM momıa
scce re3ejx Sojıap. (N) /A:damıg yu:rdı na:ce göSöl bolOo, onurj kesbetn, kalbam,
yüSöm, göSöm sonco e00e göSöl bolya:r./
However beautiful is the country of a person, that’s how beautiful is her soul and
her heart and her face and her eyes.

O hm Hupefle-jje Gonca, TartMaK rep eK . (G) /Om n ired e-d e bol0o, tap m a k gerek./
W e m u st fin d h im , vvherever he is.

Hııps rH T M ejiH B o jıcaK , M am tm aM , BeraıneM Barranfla renflM. (N)

/Nira: gitmeli bol0ok, ma5ı:nam, weki:lem vvagtınna gelli./
W herever we had t o g o , both the car and the representative vvere there on time.

IIIoHfla Ha^ıe MMHyr rYpJienıeH 6ojıcaHbi3, xeMeM H3Me TeneMejiHflHnı uıon

raüffa aifflbiJiHp. (TV17.2) /Sonno na:ce minut gürlösön bol0ogu5, hemem nâm e
tölömölüdügü sol ta:yda aydılya:r./
Then, however many minutes you spoke, it is said there vvhat you have to pay.
 Pronouns 207

IOpflyMH3HH xaftcbi 6n p epune 6apcan, MKflHcaflueTfle, MefleHueıne, sxroı

6a6aınapna epan ym>ı 6MHanapbiıı rypynaHflbin>nn>ı, epsn y ıra e3repjmijDnaıepHn
flepeflMrieHHMrMHH repMeK 6oJiap. (TV11.3) /Yu:rdumu8ur) hay0ı bir yerine
barOar), ıkdıöa:dıyetde, medeniyetde, ahli batbatlarda örâ:n ulı bina:lanq
gurulonnugunı, örârn uh öSgörüslüklörürj dörödülönnügünii görmök bolya:r./
W herever you go in our country, you can see that very large buildings have been
constructed and great changes have been created in economics, in culture and in ali
fields.

Less commonly used interrogative pronouns are HH4HK /nicik/ 'how ?', Heııei{
/nenei]/ 'how ?' (variant: Heııeifcıı /nenerjSi/), HaTyifcjiH /na:tti:01ü/ 'what kind of?' and
Ha /na:/ 'what?'.

Hhmmkmh a ö b i c b i r y n a r b i H b i KeiİKepfliıGepcc a - f l a r b t p m , ı 6 e p c e , üyperHHe x o B c a n a

flyurBapflH. (G) /Nicikmi y a b ıO ı gulogunı keykerdiberöe ya:-da gırpıberöe,
yürögünö how9olo düsyâ:rdi./
W henever bis horse would prick up its ears or lay them back, fear would fiil his
heart.

Ara, eKe>K;e e3yn ıuytma rouıyH Bnuıen nenen ypyuıaçaK, cen xeHH3eM nsnmmeıı
raii-rcarç Hsflüs? (G) /A:ga, yekeje ö:8ürj sunco gosun bilen neneıj urussok, 0en
heni:8em pa:lii)den gay00ai] nâ:dya:?/
Older brother, how will you fıght such an army by yourself? Shouldn’t you give
up your idea before it’s too late?

Ten-eii, Cyxan ran.nn.in smbina 6acı>iMpaK 6apaftbm-fla, HeııeHCH BoJica-aa, umun

aHbipcMHa eTeîîMH-jıe. (G) /Gel-ey, 0u:ha:n gatı:nıi) ya:nma ba0ımra:k baraym-da:,
nenegOi bol9o-do, i:siıj arjırfhna yeteyin-le./
C ’mon now, why don’t I just go to Suhan-gatı right away, a n d n o m a tte r w h at it
is, let me get to the bottom of this business, ali right?

İ l e n e M eıiH H 3c a c t ı ry p p Y H 'fM T y p K M e H H C T a n n a K y ı u r r a y r y H H a flepe>K ;efle b c

re n x ;e K H e H3x n n n H U iJiep 3/ ı n n c e e n e r n n ı m m iK r a 3a ı n ,n ı S o jr ^ a K f l b ir b i 6ap a .u a
Conap. (N)
/Yo:nö menif) e9a:0ı giirrüıjiim Türkmönü06a:nna kiist su:n na: derejede we
geljekde na:hili i:sler edil0e örjö gidislik gaSanıp boljokdugı ba:rada bolor./
But my main talk will be about ehess in Türkmenistan: at what level is it and
w h at kind o f work should be done so that it will achieve progress.

The pronoun ita /nâ:/ 'w hat?' (the root o f ııa M e /nâ:m e/ 'w hat?') combines with
3TMeK /etmek/ 'to do' to form the verb iistm ck /nâ:tmek/ 'to do what?' whicb also is
used in the greeting H azftan osyu? /Na:dyâ:i] ö:8ür|?/ 'How are you doing?' and the
expressions H an«n /nâ:dip/ 1ıow, what a' and ıtaTflMH /nâ:tdir|/ 'you see'.
208 Türkmen Reference Grammar

HaTflHH, Meram aüflaHMM reımn repeK. (G) /Nâ:tdirj, menii) aydanım gelli gerek./
You see, what I said must have happened.

Epıt, ütııırbipMaHtı öam apM acan ııanıın öm ırapM iı re3*;eK. (N)

/Yeri, yılgırmatnı basarma0ar) natdip yılgınp geSjek./
Well, if you can’t manage a smile, how will you go through life smilûıg?

For paradigms of question pronouns with possessive and case suffixes, see 580-581.
Question pronouns also combine with words like xep /her/ 'every', 6ıı p /bir/ 'one,
some' and xhm /hi:c/ no(ne)' to form quantifying pronouns; see 170, 172,178.
 VERBS

Verbs are words which convey the action of a semence. They may be clescribed
according to the trnıe of the action (tense), the duration of the action (aspect), and the
speaker’s attitude toward the action (mood).
The forms of Türkmen verbs may be divided into two basic groups: tlıose verb
foıms which appear at the end of a sentence to indicate its predicate and those which do
not appear at the end of a sentence. The final verbs (also called "finite verbs”) bear
sufflxes of tense, aspect and mood, as well as o f person and number.
The non-final verbs (also called "non-finite verbs") lack one or more of these
categories and thus cannot appear at the end of a sentence, except in special
circumstances (see 344). In the following illustration, the word repyn /görüp/ is a non-
final verb since it stands in the gerund form -u n /u n /-»p/ip/, which does not express
tense, aspect, mood, person or number. On the other hand, the word MbiKgu /cıkdı/ is
a final verb since it stands in the tense form -Hm/ rh /-dı/di/, which expresses, the past
tense in the indefinite aspect and indicative mood, as well as the third person singular.
The verb repyn /görüp/ cannot appear at the end of the sentence, whereas :he verb
HbiKflbi /cıkdı/ may do so.

On ohli rep^H. /Ol onı gördü./ He saw her.

flauıapii HtiKjibi. /Dasan Cıkdı./ He went outside.

O ji ohh repyn, flauıaptı m-ınatı. He saw her and went outsiüı:.

/Ol onı görüp, dasan cıkdı./

*O ji .ohm repyn. *He seeing her.

/*01 onı görüp./ (not a permissible sentence)

The group of final verbs includes ali those treated under Tense/Aspect (prese nt, past,
future/indefinite, continuous, perfect) and Mood (imperative, conditional, sub unetive,
desiderative) below, as well as the formations dealt with under Descriptivc Verbs
below.
The group of non-final verbs, or verbals includes the indefinite infiniıive (in
English 'to go'; in Türkmen indicated by -Man/Men /-mak/mek/), participles (going',
'gone'; -HH/MaH /-ya:n/yâ:n/, -aH/eH /-an/en/, -ataıc/jKeK /-jak/jek/, -ap/ep /-ar/er/,
-AHK/aviK /-dık/dik/) and gerunds ('going, having gone'; -hin/un i-ıpfıpl, -a/«: /-a/e/).
Although they funetion as nominals in a sentence, the verbal nouns ('a going'; -Ma/ıue
/-ma/me/, -liiu/miii /-ıs/is/) also may be ineluded in this group for convenience of
deseripdon. These forms are treated under Verbals belovv.
210 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Types of Verbs
Türkmen verbs may be simple verbs consisting o f one- or two-syllables (anMaK
/almak/ 'to take', ttopreıvıeK /yörömök/ 'to walk'), verbs derived from nouns, verbs and
other parts o f speech (cyBcaMaK /0uw 0om ok/ 'to thirst' < e y s /0uw / 'w ater'), or
combinations of nouns or verbs (noBaM 3TMeK /dowa:m etmek/ 'to continue').
It should be noted that, in Turkmen, the infinitive suffix -Maıc/MeK /-m ak/m ek/
serves as the form o f citation for verb entries in dictionaries and grammatical works,
and that removal of this suffix isolates the verb root or stem (for example, re p /gör/ is
the stem of Tepinen /görmök/ 'to see'). This form is identical to English 'to (go, ete.)'.
re p M e n /görm ök/ to se e repyH M eK /göriinm ök/ to be v isib le , to a p p ear
ra p a M a n /garm ak/ to lo o k at rapanM aK /garalm ak/ to b e lo o k e d at

Simple Verbs
A Turkmen simple verb typically consists o f one syllable, but also may have tvvo
syilables if its root and suffix cannot be isolated. Simple verbs express very basic
aetions, ineluding motion (rHTMeK /gitm ek/ 'to go', rejiMeK /gelm ek/ 'to com e'),
sensation (rep M e n /görm ök/ 'to see', aniMTMeK /esitm ek/ 'to hear'), operation
(öepMeK /bermek/ 'to give', ajiMaK /almak/ 'to take'), emotion (ryjiMeK /giilmök/ 'to
laugh', ceÜMeK /Söymök/ 'to love'), use o f instruments (KecMeK /keOmek/ 'to cut',
aapaınaK /daram ak/ 'to comb'), existence (6 o jim 3 k /bolmok/ 'to be(come)', anıaMaK
/ya:sam ak/ 'to live'), and so on.

Derived Verbs
A common type of verb in Turkmen consists o f those derived from verbs and other
parts o f speech through the addition o f lexical suffîxes (see 527-537). Verbs derived
from verbs inelude those which express the grammatical category o f voice (6epnnMeK
/berilm ek/ 'to be given' < GeprueK /berm ek/ 'to give', GmiHupMeK /billirm ek/ 'to
inform (cause to know )' < GmiMeK /bilm ek/ 'to know ') and those which deseribe
degrees of intensity (GacrbinaMaK /baögılamak/ 'to tram ple' < GacMaK /baömak/ 'to
step on', arJiaM5KupaMaK /atglam jıram ak/ 'to whimper' < ar/ıaM aK /a:glam ak/ 'to
cry'). Verbs also may be derived from nouns (cyBJiaMaK /0uwlom ok/ 'to irrigate' <
cyB /0uw / 'water'), adjectives (rappaM aK /garramak/ 'to grow old' < r a p p u /g a rn /
'old') and other parts of speech (KenenMeK /köpölmök/ < Ken /köp/ 'much, a lot').

Combined Verbs
Strictly speaking, Turkmen does not have true combined verbs, although it may create
new verbs by combining a noun with an auxiliary verb (nem anMaK /dem alm ak/ 'to
breathe (to take a breath)'; see 512-515). In addition, certain verb phases have fused to
form new verbs (aKenMeK /âkelmek/ 'to bring to' < ajibin renMeK /alıp gelmek/ 'to
take and come'.
 Verbs 211

Grammatical Categories of Verbs

In addition to its lexical meaning, the root or stem of a verb also may convey the
grammatical categories of voice and mood. The root or stem of a verb by ıtself may
express the category of voice (see beiow) and also may serve as the informal command
of the imperative mood.

Tep! /Gör!/See! Te3ne! /GöSlö!/Look for it!

Tapa! /Gara!/Look! CepeTÎ /0eret!/ Watch out! Look!

Except for these cases, grammatical meanings are indicated through the addition of
suffixes and particles to the stem of a verb. Suffixes and particles are added in a certain
order to the stem.

TepYHM eflKJiepM HKa?

/Görünmödtilönnükâ:?/

Root Voice Negation Tense/Mood/Aspect Person/Number Question

rep- -YH- -Me- -m - -nep- -MM-K3
/gör- -ün- -mö- -dü- -lör- -mü-kâ:/
see self not past plural I wonder?

Haven’t they appeared, I wonder?

There are a few exceptions to this general rule (for example, see 222). Also, it
should be kept in mind that not every verb will include ali of these suffixes and
particles.

Voice
Voice functions to place the focus of a sentence on the actor (active) or on the object
which is acted upon (passive). In addition to the active and passive voices, Turkmen
also marks action that one performs on oneself (reflexive), action that one performs
with or in the aid o f another (cooperative) and action that one causes another to perform
(causative).
Turkmen indicates voice by adding lexical suffixes to the stem of a verb, thereby
forming new verb stems that incorporate expression of voice and at the same time may
serve as the informal command or 2nd person singular of the imperative mood.
Although Turkmen does not mark the active voice with a suffix, it marks the passive
with -mji/h/i- /-ıl/il-/, reflexive with - m h /m h - /-m/in-/, cooperative with -bim/mn-
212 Türkmen Reference Grammar

/-ıs/is-/ and causative with -ffup/flHp- /-dır/dir-/, ete. (see 530). Two or more voice
suffixes may appear together.

Active: cep eT -(zero)-M eK/0eret-mek/

to take care of, to look after, to watch
Passive: cepefl-Hjı-MeK /6ered-il-mekj
to be taken care of
Rejlexive: cepefl-HH-MeK /0ered-in-mek/
to take care of oneself
Cooperaıive: cepefl-Hiu-M eK /0ered-is-mek/
to help take care of
Causative: ceper-flHp-Meıc /0eret-dir-mek/
to have someone take care of
Cooperative-Causative: cepefl-Huı-flHp-T-MeK/0ered-is-dir-t-mek/
to have someone help take care of
Causative-Passive: cepeT-flHp-Kn-MeK /9eret-dir-il-mek/
to have someone taken care of

Because their meanings often are predietable, many of the derived verbs that express
voice are not entered separately in dictionaries.

Negation
Nearly every verb may appear in a positive or a negative form in statements (deciarative
sentences), commands (imperative sentences) and questions (interrogative sentences).
Türkmen does not mark positive sentences, but has several means of marking the verb
to form negative sentences.
Türkmen forms the negative of many verbs by inserting the negation partide
-M a / M t /-ma/me/ directly after the root or stem (see 478). This partide negates the
present indefinite (-ap/Map /-ya:r/yâ:r/), past indefinite (-fliı/flu /-dı/di/) and past
continuous (-H p au /iiap aH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/) tenses; ali persons of the imperative mood
( - a ü u ı ı / e ü m ı /-ayın/eyin/, - u h / h h /-ın/in/, - c u h / c h h /-8ın/0in/, ete.); ali forms of the
conditional (-ca/cc /-0a/0e/), subjunctive (-caflbi/ceflu /-0adı/0edi/) and desiderative
(-aaau/aeRH /-a:yadı/â:yedi/) moods; and the. pıesent and futnre (-sh/İîoh /-ya:n/ya:n/,
-w,aK/*,cK /-jalesek/) participles.
Variants of the partide -Ma/ine /-ma/me/ are used for most other verb tenses. These
inelude the replacement with -Map/Mep /-mar/mer/ (first and second persons) or
-Ma3/Me3 /-maS/meS/ (third person) of the future indefinite (-ap/ep /-ar/er/) and habitual
past indefinite (-apfua/epnn /-ardı/erdi/) tenses; the replacement with -MaH/Maıı
 Verbs 213

/-mam/mâm/ of ıhe gerund (-tm /nn /-ıp/ip/) in the past perfect (-binflu/HnjiH /-ıpdı/
ipdi/) and subjective past perfect ( - b i n f l b i p / H n n ı ı p /-ıpdır/ipdir/) tense, and of the
element -a ü /e c ı /-an/en/in the subjective present perfect tense (-aHnup/eHJtup /-annır/
ennir/) and past participle (-a H /e H /-an/en/). Tlıe negative present perfect tensı: (-anon/
enoK /-ano:k/eno:k/, ete.) has its o r a negative form.
To fornı th e n e g a tiv e of th e d efin ite fu tu re tense, th e Standard la n g u a g e p ıe scrib es
the p la ce m e n t of th e n e g a tiv e m o d a l vvord a a n /dâ:l/ 'is/are n o t' a fte r -a ça K /» eK /-jak/
jek/, alth o u gh th e in sertio n of th e n e g a tiv e p a r tid e -M a/M e /-ma/me/ b e tw e e n ıhe stem
and s u ffte may b e used in th e sp o k e n la n g u a g e . The m o d a l word fla;ı /da: K also is
o p tio n a l ( a lo n g w it h -M a/M e /-m a/m e/) a fte r th e s u b je c tiv e p resen t c o ü tin u o u s
(-flH au p/Ö 3im n p /-ya:nnır/yâ:nnir/), su b je c tiv e present p e rfe c t (-auBbip/eH nup /-annır/
ennir/) and u n realized past p e rfec t (-^aKflbi/w,eKAH /-jakdı/jekdi/) tenses (see 383).

Tense!AspecılMood
Turkmen expresses most types of tense, aspect and mood by means of :ıuffixes,
although modal formations, words and particles also may be used to indicate
modalities. Action is refleeted in the present, past and future tenses; in the indefinite,
continuous and perfect aspects; and in the indicative, imperative, conditional,
subjunctive and desiderative moods.
An individual suffix may reflect ali three or only one of these categories. Tlıs suffix
- m i m /-dı/di/ reflects the third person singular past tense in the indefinite aspect and
indicative mood. In contrast, the suffix -aübm/eiİHH /-aym/eyin/ reflects ıhe first
person singular of the imperative mood only.
Generally, tense is expressed through diserete suffixes that reflect time anc aspect.
Hovvever, some tense suffîxes also reflect certain attitudes of the speaker or doer tovvard
the action (for example, -}K,aKUbi/}K,eKan /-jakdı/jekdi/ 'intended to do (somc:hing)';
see 257).
Turkmen indicates the aspect of the duration of action inherently in tense suffixes
(for example, past continuous action in -apabi/ftapuH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/ 'w a; doing
(something)'; see 247). Other characteristics of action are expressed vvith the nelp of
deseriptive verbs (for example, H biK M aK /çıkmak/ 'to go out' in - b i n / w ı Mi.iKMaK
/-ıp/ip çıkmak/ 'to do (something) completely'; see 326).
Turkmen expresses the indicative, imperative, conditional, subjunctive, desiderative
and other moods largely through suffixes (see 267). Because mood iııvolves
relationships betvveen verbal action and conditions like ability, certainty, desire,
possibility, and so forth, Turkmen also may express nuances of various moods vvith
the help of modal foımations (for example, - b i n / n r ı ö h u m c k /-ıp/ip bilmek/ 'to be
able'; see 301), modal vvords (for example, xokm3H /hökma:n/ 'definitely, absciutely';
see 388) and particles (for example, -M bm a/M M K a /-mıka:/mikâ:/1 vvonder'; see 464).
214 Türkmen Reference Grammar

PersonJNumber
Türkmen indicates person and singular or plural number in verb forms in several ways.
Person and number are expressed in most verb forms by suffixation of personal endings
which fuse person and number markers. However, in the definite future tense and vvith
some other predicates, person is indicated only by personal pronouns or by context.
The plural suffix +jıap/jıep /+lar/ler/ may be added to tense/aspect/mood endings
to express number in the third person.

Ejurifep. /Bilyâ:r./ S/he knows. Ennitapnep. /Bilya:rler./ They know.

OKap. /Oka:r./ S/he will read. OKapnap. /Oka.-rlar./ They will read.
TspflH. /Gördü.? S/he saw. Tepaynep. /Gördülör./They saw.
T h tcm h . /Gieein./ Let him go. rVrcH H Jiep. /Gi00inler./ Let them go.

The first, second and third persons are indicated by suffixation or by the presence of
personal pronouns in the sentence. Endings for the first, second and third persons are
added to most tense forms. The follovving personal endings are added to the present
indefinite (-np/ftap /-ya:r/yâ:r/, present continuous (flyp /du:r/, ete.), subjective present
continuous (-auntıp/üananp /-ya:nmr/yâ:nnir/, subjective present perfect (-aHjibip/
engııp /-annır/ennir/), subjective past perfect (-unnup/unnup /-ıpdır/ipdir/) and future
indefinite (-ap/ep /-ar/er/) tense suffixes:

Person Singular Plural

1 -tu r , - hh /-ın, -in / -blC, -HC /-10, -İ0/

2 - e tin , - c h h /-9ırj, -0iq/ -CMHH3, -CHHH3 /-01I)l8, -0irji8/
3 - -nap, -n ep /-1ar, - 1er/

The following personal endings are added to the past indefinite (-nu/flH /-dı/di/),
habitual past indefinite (-apflbi/epflH /-ardı/erdi/), past continuous (-Hpflbi/ttapHH
/-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/), past perfect (-binuM/nnnu /-ıpdı/ipdi/) and unrealized past perfect
(-JKaKHbi/jK,eKHH /-jakdı/jekdi/) tense suffixes, as vvell as to the conditional (-ca/ce
/-0a/0e/) and the subjunctive (-caflbi/ceflH /-0adı/0edi/) mood suffixes:

Person Singular Plural

1 - m /-m/ - k /-k/
2 - h /-fj/ -HM3, -HH3 /-rjl5, -fJİ5/
3 - -nap, -n ep /-1ar, - 1er/
 Verbs 215

Another set of personal endings appears in the forms of the negative present perfect
tense (-aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/). The follovving endings are the the same as the
personal possessive suffixes, except that the element -an/en- /-an/en-/ instead of -H- /-i-
/ appears in the third person:

Person Singıtlar Plural

1 -aM-, -eM- /-am-, -em-/ -3M(h )3-, -eM(H)3-

/-am(ı)5-, -em(i)8-/
2 -an-, -en- /-arj-, -eq-/ -an(ıı)3-, -en(n>3-
/-ai](ı)S-, -er)(i)S-/
3 -aH-, -CH- /-an-, -en-/ -aH(oK)nap, -eH(oK)nap
/-an(ok)lar, -en(ok)ler/

Question
Every statement may appear in the form of a question, which may be of several types.
One type of question is indicated by adding the question partide -mm / mm /-mı/mi/ to
tbe end of the verb (see 476).

annaM MeH TeneBH3opa cepeı^MM. I watched television last

/Dü:n ağsam men telewiSoro öeretdim./ night.

HY«h annaM ceH TeneBH3opa cepeTflHHMH? Did you watch television

/Dii:n ağsam 0en telewiSoro Beretdijjmi?/ last night?

A second type of question is formed by using an interrogative pronoun in the

sentence without the question partide.

annaM ceH H3M3 cepeTflUH? W h at drd you watch last night?

/Dü:n ağsam 0en nâ:mâ: Seretdir)?/

In the spoken language, the question partide -mm / mm /-mı/mi/ frequently may
appear before the tense/aspect/mood süffix.

reOTeHspflMHMH? /Gö81öya:rdijr3nıi?/ W ere you looking for it?

~ T63neÜ3pMHflHH? /~ Gö81öyâ:rmidiıj?/
216 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Basically, the question partide may not stand in the place of the negation partide
-Ma/Me /-ma/nıe/. Thus, *F 83JieMHflHM? /*Gö61ömüdüm?/ 'Did I look for it?' is not a
permissible form, most probably because of its similarity to the negative form
reaneMejuiM /GöSlömödüm/ 'I didn’t look for it'. Similarly, *re3JieM ntt3pann?
/*Gö81ömüyâ:rdii]?/ 'Were you looking for it?' is not permissible, probably because the
negative form Tea JieMeiiapAHH /Gö81ömöyâ:rdiıj/ 'You were not looking for it'
actually is pronounced [Gö8iömüyâ:rdig] (for the raising of the vowels /a/e/ to [ı/i]
before /y/, see 29).
Besides the negation and question particles, several other particles may be added to
the end of verbs to express nuances of mood. The most common of these are the
particles -H up/nup /dır/dir/ and -muih / mhih /-mıs/mis/ (see 465, 467).
Tense and Aspect
Verbs vvhich serve as predicates of sentences typically express both tense a»i aspect.
The category of tense concems the correspondence betvveen the verb form and the
concept of time. It refers to the time in vvhich the action takes place, vvhether i: occurs
in present, past or future time.
In addition to its tense, the action may be viewed according to its aspect that is,
vvhether its occurrence is indefinite, continuous or perfect (completed) in duration. An
indefinite action is one that takes place habitually or repeatedly ('I vvork, 1 vvorked'),
rather than at some specific point in time, or one that is not continuous or coıııpleted.
A continuous action is one that is in progress at a specific point in tüne (T am ıvorking
[now], I vvas vvorking [then]'). A perfect action is one that is or vvas completed before a
time when another action occurred ('I had vvorked'), or one that vvas begun at a .specific
time and which may continue so that its results are relevant to the present ('I have
vvorked').
Thus, tense may be described according to time (present, past, future) and to aspect
(indefmite, continuous, perfect), and, in some cases, according to various modalities of
action (definite, habitual, subjective, unrealized). These tense and aspect suffixes and
forms are presented in the table (see 218).
218 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Verb Tenses/Aspects
INtiEHNTIE CONTINUOUS' PERFECT
-Hp/üap /-ya:r/yâ:r/ flyp /du:r/ Negative -aH0Jc/eH0K
does, is doing, is is standing /-ano:k/eno:k/
going to do OTHp /otı:r/ has not done
is sıtting,
sım p /yatı:r/
PRESENT is lying

Subjective -smfliip/ Subjective -aımtıp/

üa«m p /-ya:nnır/ eHHHp /-annır/ennir/
ya:nnir/ must have done
probably is doing,
does

-Shilm /-dı/di/ -stpflM/itepnH -BinflH/HimH

did, has done /-ya:rdı/ya:rdi/ /-ıpdı/ipdi/
was doing, did had done, did

Habitual -apfltı/ Unrealized -x;aKfli>ı/

PAST epflH /-ardı/erdi/ »;eKflM /-jakdı/jekdi/
used to do, wou!d intended/wanted/
do liked to do

Subjective -u m u p !
MnflHp /-ıpdır/ipdir/
apparently did

Unceıtain -ap/ep
/-ar/er/
will do, is going to
do
FUTURE
Ceıtain -jK,aıc/x,eK
/-jak/Jek/
will do
 Tense/Aspect 219

Present indefinite Tense

The present indefinite tense expresses an action that occurs habitually or regularly
without referenee to a specific point in tim e.1 its English equivalent is 'does
(something)'.

MeH Hiue ryHfle CapnpuH. I go to vvork everyday.

/Men i:se günnö barya:nn./

On 3aBOflfla HinneiSap. She works at the plant.

/Ol 8awoddo i:sleyâ:r./

In Turkmen, the present indefinite tense is indicated by adding the suffix -flp/üap
/-ya:r/yâ:r/ in the positive and -Manp/Meftap /-maya:r/meyâ:r/ in the negative to the
stem of the verb. The basic funetion of this tense is to express an action that occurs
habitually or repeatedly or that exists as a historical fact or universal truth ('does').

Onap cana rynep üys Geptopnep, 03 anaflanapHHH, nMKHpnepHHH

natijıamnpjıap. (N)
/Olor 0ai)a gülör yü8 beryâ:rler, ö:8 aladalannı, pikirlerini pa:ylasya:rlar./
They look at you with smiling faces, and they share their concems and thoughts.
['they give you face' = 'they look at you']

- IZIeitneMH? CeH florpH 6wjJİiapcMHMH ouyn 6ap,z?ı>rranM? (TV5.4)

/'Seylemi? 0en dogrı bilyâ:r0igmi onur) bardıgmı?"/
"Really? Do you know for certain that there’s one there?"

Xa3Hp epnH Kenycu 06a xo3K,anHTHHa xu3MaT 3Hfep, cefisÖH cyB 6ap. Ey cyBR
TaparyM KaHamt rem p itep . (TP12.2) /Hâ:Sir yerir) köpüOii o:bo hojoluguno
hıSmat edya:r, 0eba:bi 0uw ba:r. Bu 0uwı Garagum kanalı getiryârr./
Now most of the land serves agriculture, because there is water. The Garagum
Canal brings this water.

MeH Aurraöafltıiî M a m a a y m ı Kenecmmu flmpuMH flepayHym şa to m sa

amanpuH. (TV1.4)
/Men Asgabadıi] Magtımgulı köcöOünürj yigrimi dö:rdünjü ja:yınna ya:saya:rm./
I live in building Nr. 24 on Magtımgulı Street in Ashgabat.

1 Because it is equivalent to several tenses in Russian, Soviet linguists called this tense the Hacmosutee
offıyee epeMS (Russian) or yMyMu xsjupKU 3aMaH (Turkmen) “general present tense"; see
TpaMMCtmuKa 272-275 (also Hanser 1977: 93: "comprehensive present tense"). TypflOB 1983: 78
properiy termed it the "present indefinite" tense for its basic funetion.
220 Turkmen Reference Grammar

- XaBa, AKflene aıpaÖHHa reMyn renflMK, ceSsÖM orynjıapLiM my epfle narra

3aBOflMHfla HniJieöap. (TV11.3) /"Hawa, Arkdepe etra:bma göçüp gellik, 0ebâ:bi
ogullorum su yerde pagta 8awodunno isleyâ:r."/
"Yes, we moved to Akdepe district because my sons work in the cotton plant
here,"

XeMMe reneıuıep xoman Sonyn niflMap. (TV8.4)

/Hemme gelenler hosa:l bolup gidyâ:r./
Everyone who comes goes away satisfied.

Illeüjıe narraHLi flennuıan Bactmaıifla, narraH tın reBpyMH Kimenitop, xeM-fle on

roBH epjıeuıttap. (TV7.3) /Şeyle pagta:m depgila:p baOılaruıa, pagtarmr) göwriimü
ki£elyâ:r, hem-de ol gowı yerlesyâ:r./
When the cotton is stamped down like this, the volüme of the cotton decreases
and it sits vveli.

TypKMeHMH flaÖHHe reps 6h3 epfle HİİMn-HMİıapHc. (TA 15.2)

/Türkmönürj da:bine göra: biS yerde İyip-icyâ:ri0./
According to Turkmen custom, we eat and drink on the floor.

IUeHÖe ryHH Mamrana öonyn, xeMM3MM3 6ıme naft nqiİ3pnc. (T17.1)

/Senbe günü masgala bolup, hemmâ:mi8 bile ca:y icya:ri0./
On Saturdays ali of us d rin k tea together as a family.

The action expressed by the present indefinite tense in Turkmen also may be
understood in English as the present continuous tense ('is doing') (see 224), that is, an
action that is occurring generally at the moment of speech, although not necessarily as
an observed action.

Mucan y^kh, X33«p aflnaBfla peKOHcrpyKKHa ıtuınepH reqnpnnüap. (N)

/Mı0a:l ücü:n, hâ:8ir aylawda rekon0truk0iya irsleri gecirilyâ:r./
For example, reconstruction work is being c arried o u t at the race-track now.

ryHnep rucrajiL in, nDK,enep y3aap. (TP 2.3) /Günlör gı:0gahp, gi:jeler u8oya:r./
The days a re getting sh o rter, and the nights longer.

In addition, the present indefinite suffix -a p /fla p /-ya:r/yâ:r/ indicates action

equivalent to the future indefinite tense ('going to do') in English (see 259), that is, an
action that the speaker regards as planned or arranged beforehand to occur at some
uncertain time in the near or even distant future.

- On eitJieHÜapMH? - Ek, Sk, on eftneHenoK. (G)

/"Ol öylönyârnni?" "Yo:k, yo:k, ol öylönöno:k."/
'Is he getting married?" "No, no, he isn’t getting married."
 Tense/Aspect 221

3 ü nannuaM , cana eıce flepMan 6ap, u ioh li 3Tcen ryTyjıapcbirç, ercaM ejıftapcHrç.
(G) /Ey pa:tısa:m, öarja yeke derma:n ba:r, som e00eıj gutulya:r0ır), yogSom
ölya:röiq./
Ah, my king, there’s only one medicine for you, if you take it, then you’ll
recover, otherwise you’re going to die.

Tep-BaK, MyHyn, cohh H3Me 6vıneH tyrapap? (N)

/Gör-bak, munui] 0ogı narme bilen gutoryarr?/
Wait and see what this is going to end with.

Cm3 Mapa 6apapctiHti3MU flifftflHM. (TV2.1) /0i8 Mara: barya:r0ırjıSmı diydim./

I said are you going to Man? ['going to go to']

Another usage of the present indefinite tense in Türkmen is to express the

equivalent to the present perfect continuous in English, that is, an action that began in
the past and continues into the present vvithout any implied interruption ('Jı as been
doing').

Eeüne apöeT 3aTJiapa cıi3 nenen en 6epnnnM3, itbtTHaKnapbmtB 3aflbmfct3

öonMaspMbi? (G) /Beyle erbet Sa-.tlara 0i8 neneg yo:l berdigiS, yıgnaklanıjıo
Sa:dıi]i5 bolmoyarrmı?/
How could you have let such bad things happen, haven’t there been any nıeetings
or anything like that?

6apn o n
ry p p Y H iu 6 y ornaH ö a p a c tu m a 6 on ca, o « n a o n m eftne: k s h BarrflaH
ornaHLm aarbiıtnaH 6113e M aTepıtajı rejıüap. (G)
/Giirrüi)ii8 bu oglon ba:ra8ınna bolöo, onno ol Şeyle: kâ:n wagtdan bâ:ri ol
oglonurj ayagmnan bi8e material gelyâ:r./
If your talk concems this young man, then the situation is this: for a long time
materials have been gathering about that young man. [literally: materials are
coming from the feet of']

MeH my cJjaöpiiKfte ÜHrpHMH Roıcy3 ittin SapH nuıneiîapnn. IIIoHyn üıırpHAtıı 6up
übinttHLi xanbi floKaflHM. (TV12.4) /Men su fabrikde yigrimi dokuS yd bâ:n
i:sleyâ:rin. Sonurj yigrimi bi:r yılını ha:lı dokodum./
I ’ve been working in this factory for twenty-nine years. I wove carpets for nventy-
one of those years.

Forms o f the Presem indefinite Tense

Türkmen indicates the present indefinite tense by adding the suffixes -apuıı/ftapHH
/-ya:nn/yâ:rin/ and -npbic/üapHc /-ya:n0/yâ:ri0/ in the first person singular and plural,
-apcbiH/üapcnn /-ya:r0ırj/yâ:r8iıj/ and -apcunu3/tt3pcMH(H3 /-ya:ı0ııjı5/ya:r0i rıi6/ in
the second person singular and plural, and -ap/Kap /-ya:r/yâ:r/ and -apnap/öapjıep
222 Turkmen Reference Grammar

/-ya:rlar/yâ:rler/ in the third person singular and plural, to verb stems. The vowel of
this suffix has inherent length (/a:/â:/).
When a verb stem ends with the consonant T /t/ or K fk/, these consonants become
voiced to h /d/ and r /g/ with the addition of this sufîîx.

aiİTMaK /aytmak/ to teli> aft/*np /aydya:r/ she telis

flapbiKMaK /datnkmak/ to worry > naptırap /da:ngya:r/ he vvorries

To form the negative, the negation partide -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ is placed between the
stem and this suffix. Questions are formed by adding the question partide -m h / mb
/-mı/mi/ after the tense suffix except in the second person, where it may be placed
either before or after the personal ending.

C m 6H3HHK3 uıy ryn anuaM ren#3pMHCHHH3 (~ rejıftspcmtfraMH)? (T)

/0iS biSigka: su gün ağsam gelya:rmi0irji8 (~ gelyâ:r0ii]i8mi)?/
Are you coming to our place this evening?

When the question partide is inserted between the suffixes of the pesent indefinite
tense and the personal ending of the second person, the latter may be contracted to
-HpMbin/iiapMsııt /-ya:rmıi]/yâ:rmİ!]/ (< -sıpMUcuH/ftapMHCHH /-ya:rmıi)/ya:rmii] <
/-ya:rmı0ıi]/yâ:rnıi8ii)/).

- AMna, HaMe agoran öepenoK? H-fla MeHMHTxaean 9HüopMHi{? (G) OfltöapMHH <
3«Ü3pMMCHn] /A:yna, na:me joga:p bereıjotk? Ya:-da meni ya:t ha0a:p
edya:rmii3?'7 [edyâ:rmii] < edya:rmi0io]
"Ayna, why haven’t you answered? Or do you consider me a stranger?"

Present İndefinite Tense: Contracted Forms

Many Turkmen speakers use the form -st/Ha /-ya:/ya:/ as a contraction of the present
indefinite tense suffix in their daily speech. Essentially, they omit the final consonant
p /r/ of -n p /H a p /-ya:r/ya:r/ in ali persons, along with the initial c /0/ of the personal
ending - chu(u 3)/chh( h3) /-0ıo(ı5)/0irj(i8)/ in the second person (see 72).
Except for this omission, the function and conjugation of the short form -s/Ba
/-ya:/ya:/ correspond exactly to that of the full form -ap/Map /-ya:r/ya:r/. The contracted
present indefinite also may be noted in the speech of characters in fiction and heard in
the speech o f television and radio announcers.

MeH öoncaM onapLr xanaMamı, flartı Meıınn xanaMaHHi>iMa cepefljoı

HypMa3nap. (G) /Men bo!9om olon ha:lamaya:n, ejem dağı menii] ha:lamaya:nıma
Oeredip durmoSlor./
As for me, I don’t like them, but my mother and people like her won*t even take
into consideration that I don’t.
 Tense/Aspect 223

Bnp 3afla JKyfla ö e re H Ü a n Be K3Te 03-e3yMfleH a3aaçbiraM 6onca pa3bi ö o jih h . (N)
/Bir Sa:da jada: begenyâ:n we kâ:te ö:8-ö:8ümdön a.-Sajjıgam bolBo ra:Sı bolya:n./
F m very happy about one thing and sometimes I ’m even a little bit satisfied
with myself.

Ona aflaMnap eMyp Meramın rayıe flypnjı-flYpjiH srrflalifla e T Ü a p jıe p . (N)

/'Oi]o a:damlar ömür menSillikde dürlö-dürlö yagdayda yetyâ:rler./
People reach it in different ways during the course of life.

Eonca-fla, roBH «hhh ausc. (BG) /Bol0o-do, gowı dırnc alya:6./

Anyway, w e ’r e h a v i n g a g o o d r e s t .

Xep aü MeH ıuy jçaütiMa eTMHUl 6aıı MaHaT TO JieöaH . (TV9.3)

/Her a:y men su ja:yıma yetmiş bas manat tölöyâ:n./
Each month I pay seventy-five manats for this place of mine.

Üene yaaK Barrnafem 6np epıoc nrrs,eK 6oncan, caMoneTroı nrrceH roBtı 6onap
eü/ftiac 6m-a. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö uSok wagtlaym bir yerirk gitjek bol0oi), Bamolotb
giflöei] gowı bolor öydyâ:0 bi8-â:./
But if you want to go somewhere for a long time, us, w e t h i n k it’s better to go
by plane.

fclırea, ropüaHMH: hkhch aftp&ı. (TV10.2) /inha:, görya:ıjmi: iki0i ayn./

Here, d o y o u s e e : the two are different.

Cff3 xenj?efle m ne ryH HumeüaniB? (TV12.3) /0İ8 hepdede nâ:ce gün i:sleya:j)iS?/
How many days a week d o y o u w o r k ?

O hcoh uıy narraHtı {fttrj(btnt»i3, Ta6ıutıpflHnı.i3, TaKMbman rone aümnc a n s n ib ia ?

(TV12.3)
/On8oi) su pagta:nı yıgdııjıg, tabsırdırjıS, takmı:nan na:ce a:ylık alya:ıjıS?/
Then you picked this cotton and you tumed it in, approximately how much salary
d o y o u g e t?

For paradigms of the full and contracted forms of the present indefinite tense, see
582-585, 586-587.
224 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Present Continuous Tense

The present continuous tense expresses action in progress at the moment of speech.
English indicates this tense with 'is doing (something now)'.

O ji xoBnyfla nyp. He’s standing in the courtyard

/Ol howludo du:r./ (now).

Oji xoBJiyfla OTbip. He’s sitting in the courtyard

/Ol hovvludo otı:r./ (now).

O n KOBiıyaa a r u p . He’s lying down in the courtyard

/Ol howludo yatı.T./ (now).

Türkmen indicates the present continuous tense by a set of contracted or special verb
forms: n y p /du:r/ 'is standing' (< R y p ıv ta K /durmok/ 'to stand'), O T b ip /otı:r/ 'is
sitting' (< O T y p M a K /otuımok/ 'to sit') and H T t ı p /yatı:r/ 'is lying' (< flTMaK
/yatmak/ 'to lie'). When used by themselves in their primary lexical meanings, these
three forms refer only to action in progress at the moment of speech.

EpH xaB, ApTMK, ceH H3Me jjy p c yH ? (G) /Yeri ha:w, Artık, flen nâ:me du:r0uq?/
Well hey, Artık, what are y o u standing here for? [flyp /du:r/ used as present
continuous: 'standing (now)']
Opa3 KJiacfla xacan ntncapun OTbip. (G) /Ora:5 kla06a ha6a:p cıkanp otı:r./
Oraz is sitting in class solving a problem, [onap /otr.r/ used as present
continuous: 'is sitting (now) solving a problem']

Menim nıpıuHMfla opTa öoüjili, rapare3ejıeıc M h th t O T u p . (N)

t lH x a ,
/inha:, menirj garsımda orto boylı, garagöSölök yiğit otı:r./
Here in front of me sits a black-eyed young man of medium height. [onjp /otı:r/
used as present continuous: 'is sitting (now)' = 'sits']

- K)pa, MeH iiptiM c a ra T neM ecH cemin su a n m a o t t i p t i n . SMüsm sHMCMe

Myıuflepmıepiin rennn niTflM. (TP13.2) rY ura, men yanım 0a:gat cemeSi Oenit)
ya:nır|da otı:nn. Eyyâ:m enceme müsderilerii) gelip gitdi."/
'Y ura, I ’ve been sitting by your side for about half an hour. Already, many o f your
customers have come in." [oTttp /otı:r/ used as present continuous: 'am sitting
(now)' = 'been sitting']

Cerom K a r a n e n y M x a n u n fla H TU p. (G) /0eniıj ka:karj ölü m h a :lın n a yatı:r./

Your father is on the verge of death. [an ıp /yatı:r/ used as present continuous:
'is lying (now) in a State of death' = 'on the verge of death']
 Tense/Aspect 225

K ojixo3 ejıöaımbicMHbDt aÜTMartnıa repa, Meflem: 3ouafla 50 reKTap ep

ynaHtülMaH OTbip. (N) /KolhoS yo:lbascı0ımq aytmagına görâ:, medeni: £nnodo
50 gektar yer ulonulma:n yatı:r./
According to what the collective farm leader says, 50 hectares of land are lying
fallow in the cultivated zone. [« rap /yatı:r/ used as present continuous: 'are lying
(now) without being used']

At the same time, the special forms flyp /du:r/, OTtıp /otı:r/ and JlTbip /yaı ı:r/ may
appear in descriptive fonnations with other verbs ending in the gerund suffix -un/un
/-ıp/ip/ (see 321) to express the present or past continuous tenses of the actions
expressed by the other verbs.

On KMTan o n a n oTbip. He’s reading a book. [now]

/Ol kita:p oka:p otı:r./
O ji xoBnyaa MinJian flyp. She’s working in the courtyard.
/Ol howludo i:slâ:p du:r./ [now]
CeH H3Me y«dih a r j ı a n jrrbipcbtH? Why are you (lying there) crying?
/öen nâ:me ücü:n a:gla:p yatı:r0ır)?/ [now]

A iob, MepeT, hhah HHps 6apapcbm,«ıaflMH Sonca ra imarı flyp-jıa. (O)

/Ayuw, Meret, inni nirâ: barya:r0ıi], £a:yıi) bolöo gayna:p du:r-lo./
Whoa, Meret, where are you going now, you know your tea is boiling.

Eh3 uio Barr 6wne naü nmın OTLipfltiK. (BH)

/Bi5 so wagt bile ca:y içip otı:rdık./
At that time w e w e r e d r i n k i n g tea together.

In many cases, the action expressed in such descriptive fonnations is underslood as

constant, continuous or regular action that is or was in progress, although not
necessarily in progress at the moment of speech or at the time spoken about (see 319).
Turkmen commonly indicates the equivalent of the present continuous tense in English
('is doing (now)') with the present indefinite tense suffix -ap/Map /-ya:r/yâ:r/ (set-. 220).

Forms o f ıhe Contracted Verbs

The contracted verbs (nyp /du:r/, OTbip /otı:r/, a r t ıp /yatı:r/) of the present conuıuous
tense in both their functions as verbs expressing tense and as descriptive verbs (see
321) take personal endings like those of the present indefinite tense.
The verb forms ay p /du:r/, OTbip /otı:r/, HTbip /yatı:r/ and a fourth form used in
descriptive fonnations, itap /yö:r/ (< İtepMeK /yörmök/ 'to walk'), are pronounced
with long vowels. This length vvas produced by adding the future indefinite tense
226 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

suffix -ap/ep /-ar/er/ or its no longer used variant *-ır/ir to the roots of the verbs. Över
the course of time, the p /r/ between the vowe!s of the forms *durar, *oıurır and
*yörör was lost, vvith the result that the vowels of the contracted forms are pronounced
as long vovvels. The form HTbip /yatı:r/may be grouped with the contracted verb forms
because it has gained a long vovvel (probably by analogy vvith oTbip /otı:r/), even
though it is not a contracted form.

flypMaK /durmok/ to stop > *dur+ar > nyp /du:r/

OTypMaK /oturmok/ to sit > *otur+ır > OTbip /otı:r/
ttepMeK /yörmök/ to walk > *yör+er > Kep /yö:r/
HTMaK /yatmak/ to lie down > *yat+ır > HTbip /yatı:r/

In their primary lexical meanings only, the third person singular forms of these
contracted verbs may be used to express the past continuous tense ('was
standing/sitting/lying (then, at that time)') with the addition of the suffix -hm/hm
/-dı/di/, whereas the past continuous tense suffix -Hpflbi/tıapgH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/ is used
for other verbs (see 247). in this usage, the form flypnbi is vvritten exactly like the past
indefinite tense form of the verb. Hovvever, the past continuous tense form is
pronounced with a long vovvel (fiypffbi /du:rdı/), unlike the past indefinite tense form
(HypHbi /durdı/). The spellings of the past continuous forms O Tbipau /otı:rdı/ and
H Tbipnu /yatındı/ distinguish them from the past indefinite tense forms O Typpu
/oturdı/ and hthm /yatdı/.

flypflbt /durdı < *dur+dıf S/he stood.

flypnbi /du:rdı < *dur+ar+dıl S/he was standing (then).

Because the spellings and the definitions of these commonly used verb forms may
be confusing, their forms and funetions are set out in the table (see 227-228). It will be
noted that the variant fte p M e K /yörmök/ is used only for deseriptive verb formations,
while the variant üopeMeK /yörömök/ is used only as the main verb of tense
formations. Only the form ü e p e i i a p /yöröya:r/ is used in the present indefinite and
continuous tenses for ÜopeMeK /yörömök/. In addition, the lexical meaning of the verb
HTMaK /yatmak/ 'to lie (down)' restricts its past indefinite usage in deseriptive verb
formations to the meaning 'was tired of doing (something), did (something) to
exhaustion', as in E a T a p e t t H T jtu /Batarey yatdı/ 'The battery is dead (= vvom out,
exhausted)'.
The present continuous tense exists only in the positive and cannot form a negative
by the addition of the negation partide -Ma/me /-ma/me/. Questions in this tense are
formed by adding the partide - m m / m h /-mı/mi/ to the contracted form of the verb.
For paradigms of the contracted verbs in the present and past continuous tenses, see
588-589.
 Tense/Aspect 227

Contracted Verbs
Present Presem Past Past Future
indefinite Continuous İndefinite Continuous İndefinite
HypMaK /durmok/ to stand
Tense: flypap WP «ypfltı aypflH flypap
/durya:r/ /du:r/ /durdı/ /du:rdı/ /duror/
stands, is is standing stood was will stand
standing (now) standing
(then)
Descriptive: -n nypap -n nyp -n flypflM -n nypnu -n flypap
/-p darya:r/ /-p du:r/ /-p durdı/ /-p du:rdı/ /-p duror/
does, is is doing, did was doing vvill do
doing has been (constantly) (regularly) (constantly)
(constantly) doing
(regularly)
oTypMaK /otunnok/ to sit
Tense: oTypap OTbip OTypflM OTbipfltI OTypap
/oturya:r/ /otı:r/ /oturdı/ /otı:rdı/ /oturor/
sits, is is sitting sat was sitting will sit
sitting (now) (then)
Descriptive: -n OTypap -n oTfcip -n oTypnbi -n OTMpfltı -n OTypap
/-p oturya:r/ /-p otı:r/ /-p oturdı/ /-p otı:rdı/ l-p oturor/
does, is is doing, did was doing will do
doing has been (constantly) (regularly) (constantly)
(constantly) doing
(regularly)
STMaK /yatmak/ to lie
Tense: HTHp STbtp HTflbl STtlpfltl srrap
/yatya:r/ /yatı:r/ /yatdı/ /yatı:rdı/ /yatar/
lies, is lying is lying did (to was lying will lie
(now) exhaustion) (then)
Descriptive: -n HTHp -n a n ıp -H ÎITflLI -H STTİlpflbt -jı jrrap
/-p yatya:r/ t-p yatı :r/ /-p yatdı/ /-p yatı:rdı/ /-p yatar/
does, is is doing, did was doing will do
doing has been (constantly) (regularly) (constantly)
(constantly) doing
(regularly)
228 Turkmen Reference Grammar

HopMeK /yöimök/ to walk

Tense: (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used)

Descriptive: (-n Hep -n Mep -n fiepflH -n üepflM -n îtepep

/-P yö:r/ is /-pyö:r/ /-p yördü/ /-p yö:rdü/ /- p yörör/
used) is doing, did was doing will do
has been (constantly) (regularly) (constantly)
doing
(regularly)
fiepeMeK /yörömök/ to walk
Tense: MepeMap (ifepeüsp {îepeflH tıepetopflH Mepsp
/yöröyâ:r/ /yöröyâ:r/ is /yörödü/ /yöröya:rdi/ /yöra:r/
walks, is used) walked was walking will walk
walking (then)

Descriptive: (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used)
 Tense/Aspect 229

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

The present continuous tense expresses an action that is in progress at the mo.-nent of
speech. In its subjective form, the speaker does not vvitness this action at the time of
speech but uses his or her experience, senses and feeiings as the basis of a conjecture
that the action is taking place or is true. Appropriate English equivalents are 'probably
one is doing (something now)' and 'it looks like one is doing (something nowV.

On X33Hp oKaHHflup. She’s probably reading now.

/Ol hâ:6ir okoya:nnır./

O ji OKaannananp. H e’s pro b ab ly n o t reading.

/Ol okoya:nnâ:llir./

Türkmen indicates the subjective present continuous by attaching the suffix

-HHRtıp/tiaHjjııp /-ya:nmr/yâ:nnir/ in the positive and -MaHHUtıp/ıuejinHAMp
/-maya.unır/meyâ:nnir/ in the negative to the stem of a verb.

- Oiifla ceHHU-fle nıocupMH s^eHKM ÖHJieH nen CoJlHp-fla. - flei( 6onca 6 ojm Hflup,
MeH om actrutı ÖHJieMOK. (G) /"Onno 0enii)-de pikim) ejerjki bilen deıj
bolya:r-da:." "Der) bolSo bolya:nnır, men onco0unı bilemork."/
"Then your opinion also is the same as your mother’s." "It’s probably the. same,
but I don’t know for sure."

BenaHMH Mamrajıacbi Haxapa, s im i HÜMKre rHpfleaçHHHH flpbictmH xapa»;iT

3flÖ3HflHp. (TV16.3)
/Wepa:nır) masgalaöı nahara, yagnı iymite gi:rdejinii] ya:rı0ını haraja:t edya:ımir./
Wepa’s wife probably spends half of the income on meals, that is, on fooc

MHe, ıuonap hju.1 öonHHflbip eöfltöapHH MeH. (TV18.4)

/İne, Solor ya:lı bolya:nmr öydya:rin men./
You see, I think it’s probably like these.

This tense also may be used to express an action in progress about vvhich the
speaker has some sense of uncertainty, doubt, suspicion or caution. English equivalents
for this usage include 'usually one does (something)', 'maybe one does (someıhing)'
and 'one could be (something)'.

Bh3 acbuı-xa MbDCMaHBot xa6 apHHM öHp ryufleH coh ajınHflbipııc. (G)
/Bi5 a0ıl-ha ım:hma:mıj habarnu bir günnön 0og alya:nnırı0./
We usually ask a guest about his nevvs only after one day. ['get his news frcm a
guest' = 'ask a guest about his nevvs']
230 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Benıoı, on MyHfct ÖHJitiaHflHp. (G) /Belki, ol mum bilyâ-.nnir./

M aybe he knows this.

MyuyH xep 6np ce3H 6np nytt3 HerüaHHHp. (G)

/Munutj her bir 0ö5ü bir düyâ: degyâ.-nnir./
Every word of this [book] could be worth a camel.

Ü3HH aflaM, MerepeM, reTepMM Gonsmatıp. 0ByH3K;en öonsmabip. Ap3yB>n,tjı

CoJianaı>ıp. (N) /Ya8ya:n a:dam, megerem, götörüm bolya:nnır. Öwünjörj
bolyarnnır. ArSuwcul bolya:mur./
A person who writes, perhaps, probably is easily flattered. He’s probably
boastful. He’s probably full of fantasies.

repYH, on mchhh ereHHM, rean ep m e cepej(HH, Mana-fla MeH3etisHanp. (H)

/Görür), ol menig yeğenim, göSlöriinö 0eredii], matja-da mej[)5eyâ:nnir./
See, that’s my nephew. Look at his eyes, I think he looks like me too.

Forms o f the Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Turkmen indicates the subjective present continuous tense by adding the suffix
-flnatıp/tiaııaııp /-ya:nnır/yâ:nnir/ to verb stems. Personal endings used with the
general present also are attached to this suffix: 'jiHakipMH/üaHaHpHH /-ya:nnınn/
yâ-.nnirin/ and -HHaMpuc/üanaupHc /-ya:nmn6/yâ:nniri0/ in the first person singular
and plural, -HHahipcLiH/fisnaMpcHn /-ya:nmr0ıq/yâ:nnirâii]/ and -fliıabipcunti3/
UannupcıiHU3 /-ya.-nmröıi)i5/ya:nnir0ir)iS/ in the second person singular and plural,
and -HHHbip/ftsHjiMp /-ya:nnır/yâ:nnir/ and -HHnbipjlap/iteHflHpJlep /-ya:nnırlar/
ya:nnirler/ in the third person singular and plural.
The negative of this tense may be formed by adding the partide -Ma/ine /-ma/me/
directly to the stem of the verb or by inserting the negative modal vvord Ran /d3:1/
between -hh/ü3H /-ya:n/yâ:n/ and -aup/anp /-dır/dir/, resulting in the form -nıı/HaH
aannHp /-ya:n/yâ:n nâ:llir/. Questions in this tense are formed by adding the partide
-mm/mh /-mı/mi/ to the end of the suffix.

Oji HiıiJieMan jjanflHp.

- On HiuJieMeiianaHp. H e’s pro b ab ly no t w orking.
/Ol İ51eya:ıı nâ:llir./
h Ol i:slemeyâ:nnir./

The suffix -jmabip/KanaHp /-ya:nnır/ya:nnir/ is a compound of the present

participle -HH/üaH /-ya:n/ya:n/, whose vowel has inherent length, and the confirmation
partide -Bbip/aHp /-dır/dir/.
For paradigms of the subjective present continuous tense, see 590-595.
 Tense/Aspect 231

Negative Present Perfect Tense

The present perfect tense expresses an action that was completed in the past but whose
results are related to the present. English indicates this tense by the formation 'has
done (something)'.

Mamın* xeHH3 reJieHOK. The car hasn’t co m e yet.

/MaSı:n heni:8 geleno:k./

Onyn aflpecHHH B h j m m o k . I don’t know her address.

/Onut] adre0ii]i bilemo:k./

M eH o h h 6 n p MaKflan Gspıı repeM OK. I haven’t seen him for a

/Men om bir cakdan bâ:ri görömo:k./ long time.

As may be obvious from the preceding exampies, Türkmen indicates the present
perfect tense only in the negative, by adding the suffix -a n o K / e n o K /-ano:k/eno:k/
(third person singular form) to a verb stem. The negative present perfect expresses an
action which did not occur in the past and does not occur in the present, although the
results of this inaction are felt or true in the present.2

«TeöMrH ra3M 1993-h :*;h Mtıntm 15-ıcsjf Hoa6ptma veHim MeKepsıc» - hhühit,
Bafla öepflHiıep. 3 h t b k xeM ry T ap a H O K n ap . (N) /'Tebi:gı gaSı 1993-njü yıhr)
15-nji noyobnmo cenli cekeriö," diyip, wa:da berdiler. Entek hem gutorono:klor./
They promised that they would extract natural gas by November 15,1993. They
stili h a v e n ’ t fin is h e d .

Kan B an n aH 6 spw K oırropa eKe3K;e-fle KJiHeHT reneHOK. (H)

/Köp wagtdan bâ:ri kontora: yekeje-de kliyent geleno:k./
Not a single customer has c o m e to the shop for a long time.

Baıura T p o n n eflS y c flartı o n ra^gan ü o p a n o K . (TV12.3)

/Basga tırolleybuO dağı ol ta:ydan yö:ra:no:k./
No other trolleybuses and such ran from there. [ 'h a v e not run']

rypflOB 1983: 79-80 âefineâ this fomı as ıhe negative of ıhe present continuous tense forms ;3.vp /du:r/,
OTUp /on:r/, and H T u p /yatı:r/, and cıted in suppon o f his view such questions and answeıs as Onan
O T iıp M u ? /Oka:p anıma!I İ s he reading?' and Ek, oksuok /Yo:k, oka:no:k/ 'No, he isn’t reading'.
However, Gurdov's examples reflect equivalenls in Russian and Engiish, rather than the structure of
Türkmen itself, and, as pointed ouı in TpaMMamuKa 276, the present continuous verb forms tîyp /du:r/,
o r u p /otı:r/ and ı r r u p /yatı:r/, do not occur in the negative.
232 Turkmen Reference Grammar

% 3 Myne ronatf Miıanj 6onaH Mypranfla x;opan xeM-fle 6eiineKH 3rnH-3uiMiaıep

raüpu KjpTnapflaH reTMpHneHOK. (TV11.4) /Yü8 mürjö goloy i:la:ü bolon
Murga:pda jora:p hem-de beyleki egin-esikler gayn yu:rtlordon getirilenotk./
In Murgap which has a population of close to 100,000, socks and other clothing
have not been imported from foreign countries.

Other Uses o f -anoKİenoK /-ano:k/eno:ki

The negative present perfect tense often is used for actions depictüıg states of mind and
sensations such as knowing, thinking, wanting, realizing, recognizing, hearing, and so
on. This usage is common especially vvith the verb ÖHJiıneK /bilmek/ 'to know; (as
descriptive verb) to be able'.

Men cemin 6oıımyna flyuiYHHn ÖmıeMOK. (G)

/Men Öeniıj bolsurjo düşünüp bilemo:k./
I cannot understand your behavior. ['your (way of) being']

rejiHiiMH-renMaHMH 6nneM30K. (G) /Gelipmi-gelma:nmi bilemSoık./

We don’t know vvhether she’s come or not.

- SI o n lOMeflitrıiHeM GııneuoKM U? (N ) [o n < 0Hyn]

/T a : oi) nâ:mediginem bilerjo:kmt?7 [oıj < onur)]
"So you don’t know what it is, either?"

I H e i t n e f l n i t i t e ı ı n e p K e M c u flu n iıs iifliın ııiH S m j is h o k , a j u ih h m h , c y H r a T b m u n

MefleHHeniHHn H a r u n Gapsruaiinbintı Gm uchok. (N )
/Şeyle diyyâ:nler kem0idilya:nnigini bi!eno:k, dilinii), öungotunuıj medeniyetinir)
yitip barya:ndıgmı bileno:k./
Those vvho say this don’t realize that they’re being humiliated, that their
language, art and culture is being lost.

3MMa fljuıöep oıibi HCjıanoK. (H) /Emma: Dilber onı i01â:no:k./

But Dilber doesn’t w ant this.

Kcümk! Ceıı Mejm TaııaHOKMU? (H) /Keyik! 8en meni tanar)o:kmu?/

Keyik! Don’t you recognize me?

Men uıoımaH con onflaH xwq xaöap-xaTbip siuhacmok. (H)

/Men sonnon 0oi] onnon hi:c ha:bar-hatı:r esidemo:k./
I haven’t heard news of any kind about it since then.

Bnp safla n>i3biKnaıWbipMajibi-fla, KseceneM 63H Mara fly3enep eüfleMOK. (TV16.4)

/Bir 6a:da gıSıklanmrmalı-da:, ka:ye0er)em ö:8ü ca:ga düSölör öydomo:k./
You really should get him interested in something- if you just punish him I
don’t think the kid will get straightened out by himself.
 Tense/Aspect 233

When the past indefinite suffîx - m i m /-dı/di/ is added to the third person singular
form -aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/, the action is regarded as not occurring in thu past on
a regular basıs.

03ajncw fly3ryHMHH3fle ch3 6113e 6apHn 6njıen30KJv>iHbi3, öıraeM cn3e remai

6HJieM30KflbiK. (N) /OSolkı düSgünttıjüSSö 6İ5 biSe banp biIeıjSo-.kduıjuS, biBem
8i8e gelip bilemSorkduk./
Under your previous regime you couldn’t come to us and we couldn’t come to
you. ['you/we couldn’t come at the time of the previous regime']

3MMa xmh 3aT 3UiHHHneııoKHbi. (H) /Emma: hi:c 8a:t esidileno-.kdı./

But nothing was heard.

ILIy epfle apacca cyB eKflyrbmtı 6nJieM0Kp(biM. (T17.3)

/Su yerde ara00a 0uw yo:kdugunı bilemorkdum./
I d id n ’t know that there wasn’t any clean water here.

In a sentence vvith a conditional clause, a main verb with the suffîx -aııoKflbi/
eHOKftu /-ano:kdı/eno:kdı/ has a subjunctive meaning.

Mene yomu 6y McneniMM3 rçajrrpaıc «e3yj»iİMece, mchkh TaıcaflbiM eTeHOKj(W.

(H) /Yö:nö inni bu ifllegimiS caltra:k Ğö8ülâ:yme8e, menis] ta:kadım yeteno.kdu./
But if this wish of ours is not fulfilled a little more quickly, my patience is going
to run out. ['w ould not be sufficient']

Contrasting Negative Forms o f ıhe Present and Past Tenses

In origin, the negative of the present perfect consists of the past participle -aH/en
/-an/en/ and the modal word eK /yo:k/ 'there is/are not', vvhich expressed the present
perfect tense. However, Türkmen often use the suffix -aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/ as a
negative statement or as a response to statements or questions foımed with the
indefinite or continuous aspects of the present and past tenses.
The follovrâıg example illustrates the distinction betvveen the present indefinite
(-ap/Hap /-ya:r/ya:r/) and present perfect (-aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k) tenses. The
statement 'you haven’t answered' (agoran 6epenoK /joga:p bereqo:k/) refeı:; to an
action that began in the past and is relevant to the present time, whereas the qııestion
'do you consider me?' (xacan 3fliiapMHH? /ha0a:p edya:rmii]?/) refers to a h.ıbitual
State of mind that characterizes the present without specifying the time.

- A iin a , HSMe a g o r a n 6 e p ei(O K ? H -fla Meım h t x a c a n 3fliiapM H H ? (G ) Ofli-: spN um

< 3flöspMHCHn] TA:yna, nâ:me Joga:p beregotk? Ya:-da meni ya:t ha0a:p
edya:rmir)?7 [edya:rmii] < edyâ:mıi0iıj]
'Ayna, why h aven’t you answ ered? Or do you consider me a stranger?"
234 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

The distinetion in aspect between the negative present perfect and the regular
negative formed for the present and past tenses with the negation partide -M a /M e
/-ma/me/ (except for the present continuous) cannot be aptly phrased in English in
most instances (for example, indefinite 'does not do' versus perfect Tıas not done'), so
that equivalents may be the same for both aspects (for example, 'does not do7).

Present indefmite

On 3aB 0jm a HinneüspMH? Does she vvork at the plant?

/Ol 8awoddo i:51eya:rmi?/
Ek, MiuneMeifap. No, she doesn’t (vvork there).
/Yo:k, i:slemeyâ:r./
EK, MUIJ73HOK. No, she doesn’t (vvork there,
/Yo:k, i:slâ:no:k./ and she hasn’t vvorked there).

Presem Continuous

On TeneBH3opa cepeaım orap. She’s vvatehing television.

/Ol telewi8oro öeredip otı:r./
E k, cepenneJtep. No, she isn’t (vvatehing it).
/Yo:k, 8eretmeya:r./
. Ek, cepeflaHOK. No, she isn’t (vvatehing it, and
/Yo:k, 8ereda:no:k./ she hasn’t been vvatehing it).

Past Indefmite

On KHTan oKan 6onflyMtı? Did he finish reading the book?

/Ol kita:p oka:p bollumı?/
Ek, oKan SojiMafltı. No, he didn’t finish (reading it).
/Y o :k , o k a : p b o l m o d ı ./
Ek, O Kan 6 o n a n o K . No, he hasn’t finished (reading it).
/Yo:k, okap bola:no:k./

Pası Continuous

CeH o h m 8H TaHasıpflbinMbi? Did you knovv her before?

/8en om örj tanaya:rdıqmı?/
Ek, TanaMaflbiM. No, I didn’t (knovv her).
/Yo:k, tanamadım./
Ek, TanaMOKHEtM. No, I didn’t (knovv her, and
/York, tana:mo:kdum./ I haven’t known her)
 Tense/Aspect 235

Forms o f the Negative Present Perfect Tense

Türkmen forms the negative of the present perfect tense by adding the suffixes
-aMOK/eMOK /-am o:k-om o:k/em o:k-öm o:k/ and - a M U 3 0 K /e M H 3 0 K /-am ıSo:k-
omu5o:k/emi8o:k-ömü5o:k/ in the first person singular and plural, -arçoK /enoK
/-aıjo:k-oi)o:k/eıjo:k-ör)o:k/ and -anti30K/eHH30K /-a(]i8o:k-oi]u5o:k/er)i8o:k-ör]üSo:k/
in the second person singular and plural, and -aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k-ono:k/eno:k-öno:k/
and -aHOKjıap/eHOKnap /-ano:klor-ono:klor/eno:klor-öno:klor/ in the third person
singular and plural, to the stem of a verb. Questions in this tense are formed by adding
the partide -mm/mh /-mı/mi/ after the suffix.
When added to a verb stem ending in a vowel, the vowel is lengthened and this
suffîx is vvritten -anoK /anoK /-a:no:k/a:no:k/; for example, oKanoK /oka:qo:k/ 'you
haven’t read' or hcji3MM30K /i91a:m(i)8o:k/ 'we don’t want'.
In the first and second person plurals, the voweI h /h /ı/i/ often disappears in speech
and occasionally in writing as vvell (-aM 3 0 K /e M 3 0 K /-amSo:k/em8o:k/, - a n 3 0 K /e u 3 0 K
/-ar]So:k/ei]8o:k/).
The forms of this tense are contractions of the past participle (-au/eH /-an/en/) plus
one of the possessive suffîxes ( - m m / m m /-ım/im/, - m h / h h /-ırj/iJj/, ete.) followed by the
negative vvord e K /yo:k/ 'there is not'. In these forms, the vovvel is pronounced as long
/o:/ because the vvord e K /yo:k/ itself has a long vovvel.

Singular

1 -aMOK/eMOK < -aH+HM/eH+HM eK

/-amo:k/emo:k/ /-an+ım/en+im yo:k/
2 -arçoK/enoK < -aH+inı/en+Mn tîK
/-aıjo:k/ei)o:k/ /-an+ıi]/en+ii] yo:k/
3 -aHOK/eHOK < -aH(+w)/eH(+M) eK
/-ano:k/eno:k/ /-an(+ı)/en(+i) yo:k/

Plural

1 -aMW30K/eMH30K < -aH+E[Mto/ejr+KMît3 eK

/-amı8o:k/emiSo:k/ . /-an+ımı8/en+imi8 yo:k/
2 -anti30K/enH30K < -aH +H H W 3/eH +H H M 3 eK
/-aqı5o:k/ei]iSo:k/ /-an+ıgıS/en+irjiS yo:k/
3 -aH O K nap/eH O K Jiap < -aH(+tı)/eH(+H) eK+nap
/-ano:klor/eno:klor/ /-an(+ı)/en(i) yo:k+lar/

For paradigms of the negative present perfect tense, see 596-597.

236 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

The present perfect tense expresses an action vvhich was completed at some unspecified
time in the past, but whose results are felt in the present, In its subjective form, the
speaker did not witness or could not have vvitnessed the action, but he or she believes
that it took place. English expresses this tense vvith the formation 'must have done
(something)'.

On X33Hp ee 6 a p a H H b ip . He must have reached home

/Ol ha:Sir öyö barannır./ by now.

Turkmen indicates the subjective present perfect tense vvith the suffix
-aH A ijp/enaııp /-anmr/ennir/ in the positive and -MaHHLip/MeHRHp /-ma:nnır/mâ:nnir/
or -aH/eH aa-fiH^P /-an/en datllir/ in the negative. Use of this suffîx indicates that the
speaker has no reason to doubt that an umvitnessed action occurred or believes that it
occurred because it is logical or performed out of habit.

- ErcaMaM, ApTMK, Aflua cana ra p a m tın oT ypaH nup. Xantı, mhah to ü h xa«ıaH
3flepHc?(G)
/"YogBomom, Artık, A:yna 0arja garasıp oturonnur. Hanı, inni toyı hacan ederiö?"/
"By the way, Aıtık, Ayna must have been waiting for you. Well now, when shall
we make the vvedding?"
OHyn 6axactt H3LiJlMaHp,Lip. (G) /Onurj bahaOı yaSılma:nnır./
its price m u st n o t h a v e b een w ritte n .
BerncH, Xanna3ap nyn oritti y^ hh ce3 atiTMara reneHHitp. (G)
/Belki, Ha:lnaSar dul oglı ü£ü:n 0ö8 aytma:ga gelennir./
Perhaps, Halnazar has come to speak on behalf of his son, the widower.
Onap MyHtı okjh 3flioı fluSce-fle MHenuMpnep. (G)
/Olor mum oyun edip diyfie-de diyennirler./
They must have said this as a joke.
E m3-s Gyumyra rejıenanpnc. (N) /Bi8-a: buslugo gelenniri0./
Us, we must have come vvith good nevvs.
MtıXMaHBm MMr cyB HHenfliıp efltoH. (TV17.3)
/Mı:hma:nırj öi:g 0uw i£ennir ödyam./
I think your guest m u st have d r u n k untreated vvater.
Hafearç X33Hp EaKyBa Gapanflbip. (Tl 8.4)
/DaySarj hâ:8ir Bakuvva barannır./
Your aunt must have reached Baku by now.
 Tense/Aspect 237

Forms o f the Subjective Present Perfect Tense

Türkmen indicates this tense by adding the suffixes -aHfluptiH/cHflMpHH /-anmrın-
onnurun/ennirin-önnürün/ and -aHflupLic/eHjiHpnc /-annm0-onnuru8/enniri0-
önniirüe/ in the first person singular and plural, -aHflbipcbiH/eHflHpcHH /-snnırOır)-
onnur6ui)/enniraii]-önnür0ürj/ and -anjjbipcuniJ3/eHflnpcHHH3 /-an rır0ii]i6-
Onnur9urju8/ennir6iıji8-önnür0ür)ü5/ in the second person singular and plural, and
-aHaup/eHAHp /-annır-onnur/ennir-önnür/ and -aHflbipjıap/eHflHp.nep /-annırlar-
onnurlor/ennirler-önniirlör/ in the third person singular and plural, to the stems o f
verbs.
Primarily in the written language, the negative of this tense may be f:rmed by
adding the negation partide -M a /ıu e /-ma/me/ directly to the verb stem, so that the
vowel of this suffbc is long (-Mannbip/Mannup /-ma:nnır/mâ:nnir/. However, speakers
nearly always form its negative by placing the negative modai word pnjı /d â:l/
separately after -a H /e ıı /-an/en/ to which the element -flHp /-dir/ is attached. The result
is written -a H /e H /-an/en nâ:lür/.

Mji Mana Maıuraua 3KJieıuen fl3jıjjnp. (G) /t;lmağa masgala eklesen nâdlir./
People really haven’t helped me raise a family.

The preference for -aH/eH naiiflHp /-a:n/a:n nârllir/ as the negative of this trnse may
arise from a need to avoid ambiguity between the negative of the more commonly used
subjective past indefinite suffix (-binaLip/nnanp /-ıpdır/ipdir/, negative -Mangbip/
M a n f lH p /-ma:nnır/mâ:nnir/) and the Standard negative of this tense ( - a H f l b i p / a H f ( H p
/-a:nnır/a:nnir/, negative -M a H ^ u p / M a n a ııp /-ma:annır/mâ:nnir/).
In the follovving example, it may be unclear whether the speaker intendod to say
that, as boys, they 'must not have known', or that, as adults who cannot remember
precisely, they 'probably didn’t know'. However, because of the preference spoken of
here, Türkmen speakers nearly alvvays would make the latter interpretation.

Bm3-s o n B a rr oraaH, o u u copaManbiflurtıııaM 6HJiM3iıp(npHC. (TV13.3)

/Bi8-â: ol wagt oglon, onı 0o:romoludugunom bilmâ:nniri0./
Us, we were boys then, and probably d i d n ’ t r e a l i z e ( ~ m u s t not have rı;alized)
that we should have asked about him.

The suffix -a H H u p /e H A n p /-annır/ennir/ is composed of the past participlı: - a n / e n

/-an/en/ plus the confirmation partide -atıp/«np /-dır/dır/. When a verb ends in a
vowel, that vowel is lengthened and this suffix is written -auHbip/ananp /-a:nnır/
â:nnir/.
For paradigms of the subjective present perfect tense, see 598-603.
238 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Past indefinite Tense

The past indefinite tense expresses the completion of an action in the past vvhich the
speaker either witnessed or is certain of. its English equivalents are 'did (something)'
and Tıas done (something)'.

KaKaM reJiflH. My father arrived yesterday.

/Dü:n ka:kam gelli./

MaıuMH rejjflH. The car has come. [ - The car is here.]

/Ması:n gelli./

Turkmen indicates the past indefinite tense by adding the suffix -hm/ hh /-dı/di/ in
the positive and -Manbi/MejjH /-madı/medi/ in the negative to the stem of a verb.

T y n x a c n raym tn H H , Myrça rapaMa3flan 6m erıa îjyhihyk- (G)

/Gün ha:0 gi:jigipdi, nuırjo garamaSSan bi8 yo:lo düsdük./
It had already become late, but w e s e t o f f anyway.

AöflfcncepHM 3K e 6 y r y n x h h e p e rH TM enH . (G)

/Abdıkeri:m eke bu:n hi:c yere gitmedi./
Abdıkerim-eke did n o t g o anywhere today.

MeH BeiİMK B aT a u M tm tiK y p rn y H a G am jjaH -aaK raraamubiM. (N)

/Men Beyik Watan£ılık urSuno baüdan-ayak gatnasdım./
I took p art in the Great Patriotic War from beginning to end.

- Bythh 3 T p e r n a n .13 cyB&t G ı t n e n s t s a p - fltıöım, cy M as^ı r y p p y n i e B a m m u u - -

BautiM, Auıra6aTflan reJlflMM AHİiflHUMH? (N) /"Bütüm Etregi agıS 0uwı bilen
yakya:r," diyip, 0ü:jü gürrürp başladı. "Balım, Asgabatdan gellim diydiıjmi?"/
He b e g a n the conversation pleasantly, saying 'İt supplies ali of Etrek vvith
drinking water-honey, did y o u s a y y o u c a m e from Ashgabat?" ['did you say "I
came"?']

O nap «paflKaTopttH xıaT aMiinfltıp» flHfflspJiep. « ^ a T aqan 6onca roBy-fla,

Se^epsJiıın» mhümhm. Ornp «paffuarop ex» nMÜfliuıep. (TV 17.2)
/Olor "radiatoruıj £at acıpdır" diyyâ:rler. "Cat acan bol0o gowu-da:, be]era:yiq"
diydim. Olor "radioator yo:k" diydiler./
They say "Your radiator’s cracked." I said "Fine, so it’s cracked. What about fixing
it?" They said "No radiators."
 Tense/Aspect 239

SronııreMira fleByKflH. Ycca 6np xenjje rapamnuM, rejiMeflH. Ohcojj sm au rsm

©3yM nY3entıGepnHivı. (T17.2) /Âpisgâ:mi8 döwükdü. U90a: birhepde garasdım,
gelmedi. On0orj âpi5gâ:ni ö:5üm dü8ödüberdim./
Our window was broken. I waited for the repairman for a week, he didn’t come.
So, I went ahead and fixed the window myself.

The past indefinite tense also may express an action indicated by the present perfect
in English, that is, an action completed in the past vvhose effects are felt or true in the
present (1ıas done)'.

T6nnncHfle msxepnn enambi ıpaHcnopTbmfla rantaMaK y v m T33S Tenernep

' rnpn3nnan. (TV 11.2) /TibiliOide saherii] yotlogcı ttranöportunno gatnamak iicütn
ta:5e tölöglör gi:ri5illi./
New fees have been introduced for travel on Tbilisi’s passenger transport.
Ch3 6y epw KapenRecmıe aj|RMHM3MM? (TV7.2)
/Öİ5 bu yeri kâ:renne8ine alhıjıSmı?/
Have you leased this land?
tîeMen, MeH cemt kot Barraan repMeflHM. (TV7.1)
/Çemen, men Beni köp wagtla:p görmödüm./
Chemen, I haven’t seen you for a long time.

Other Uses of-duldu l-dıldil

The past indefinite tense suffix -«tı/ffif /-dı/di/, along with personal endings, also may
be attached to nouns, adjectives, postpositions, participles and the modal words Gap
/ba:r/ 'there is' and eK /yo:k/ 'there is not' when they serve as the predicates of
sentences. In such cases, the suffbc -Rbi/flH /-dı/di/ does not receive stress.

ByTHH o6a yKyflaflM. (G) /Biitüın o:bo u:kudodı./

The whole village was asleep. ['was in sleep']
MyxaT 6nneH Tapsır#ı>ı hkhch snctm TaHtmiflM, acna oGaflamflu. (G)
/Muhat bilen Ga:ryagdı iki0i yakıın tanısdı, a01a: o:bodosdı./
Muhat and Garyagdı knew each other intimately, after ali, they were fellow
villagers.
A3 canHMMH HMHHne xobhmhi.ih hhh asuı-apKeK, ornaH-ytaaKnaH flOJiyflM. (G)
/A:5 öalmıır] içirme howlı:mıj ici aya:l-erkek, oglon-usokdon do:ludı./
In a moment, the courtyard was full of women and men, children and adults.
HIoji YÜıUMeran apacwnqa Apn.m xeM Öapjjbi. (G)
/Sol ihsmögürj a:ra0ınna Artık hem ba:rdı./
Artık was among that gathering too. ['Artık existed among']
240 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Ona HHaçamiK öepMeftaH, ytcycbiHii TymypMaaH flepT-axBaJiaT AHHaryn a ım ı

rti3t!n tııuKtı^bi. (N) /Orjo r.njalık bermeyâm, u:ku6um tutdurmayam dert-
ahwa:Iat A:nnagül a:th gı:Sıi) ısladı./
The toıment which gave him no peace and would not let him sleep was his love
for a girl named Annagül.

florpycbi, Men e3yM uıon ryppYnnepnn rani.iiiiMartnu.in TapannapuflbiM. (N)

/DogruSı, mer) ö:8üm sol gümirçlörüi] ga:lısmagmırj tarapdaındım./
The truth is, I myself supported the cessation of those talks. ['I was their
supporter']

Verbs in the past indefinite tense also are used as components of a number of proper
names.

Ajınaöepfliı /Alla:berdi/ God gave (a son)

Faparflbi /Ga:ryagdı/ It snowed (at time of birth)
Orynöonflu /Ogulbollı/ A son appeared (girl bom to parents desiring a boy)3

Forms o f the Past indefinite Tense

Türkmen indicates the past indefinite tense by adding the suffixes -aum / jihm /-dım-
dum/dim-düm/ and -h u k /ah k /-dık-duk/dik-dük/ in the first person singular and
plural, -h u h /rh h /-dııj—
dur(/dixj—
düq/ and /-dırjıS-durjuS/dirjiS-düıjüS/
in the second person singular and plural, and -Au / jjh /-dı/di-dii/ and -aMJiap/flHflep
/-dılar-dulor/diler-düiör/ in the third person singular and plural, to the stem of a verb.
The negation partide -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ is placed between the stem and this suffix,
while the question partide -mli/mh /-mı/mi/ is added after this suff!x.
Foı paradigms of the past indefinite tense, see 604-607.

3 Türkmen proper names whose first component is oryjı /oğul/ 'son' are given to femaîe infants in the
arcumstance that one or both o f the parents had expected or hoped for a male child; see ATaHbis30B
1992: 177-181.
 Tense/Aspect 241

Habitual Past indefinite Tense

The habitual past indefinite tense is used to express an action that occurred habitually
or repeatedly in the past. In this tense, the speaker vvitnessed the performarıce of the
same action habitually or repeatedly at different times in the past, but not at any one
definite time. The English equivalents to this tense are 'used to do (something)' and
'would do (something)'.

Men HHCTHTyrua huij» pahm. I used to work at the institute.

/Men inOtitutdo i:slâ:rdim./

On xeM 6a3ap ryuH HUiJiapuH. She also vvould vvork on Sunda).

/Ol hem ba:Sar günü i:slâ:rdi./

Turkmen indicates the habitual past indefinite tense by attaching the suffbc
/-ardı/erdi/ in the positive and - M a 3 flu /M e 3 f lH /-maSSı/meSoi/ in the
-a p a u /e p flH
negative to verb stems. Context determines whether its use is equivalent to English
'used to do (something)' or to 'would do (something)'.

Bynap Maımapu ran>ı roBbi SaKapfltuıap, Hupefle omyıc ep öonca, ıııon t p ıtK
cypyn sKHflepamıep. (G) /Bulor ma:llan gatı gowı bakardılar, nirede otluk yer
bolöo, sol yerr.k Sürüp â:kiderdiler./
They used to tend cattle very well. Wherever there was pasture land, they vvould
drive them to that place.

fly p c y H ui3xepfleK3 oöaıttı repMenı K o n a p 3 y n 3 fle p a w . (G)

/Durflun sâherdeka: o:ba:nı görmögü kop arSuw ederdi./
When in the city, Dursun vvould long to see the village.

O e Mana OpcueT 6a6aTfta ryppyn 6epepaw, MeneM ona TypKMeHMCTaH EıaöaTfla

afiftapAbiM. (N) /Ol marja OrOuyet ba:batda gürrür) bererdi, menem oıjo
Türkmönüö0a:n ba:batda aydardım./
He used to talk to me about Russia, and I used to teli him about Türkmenistan.

ürnyntı ona Bacap ahMhii aT flaKtınflu xeM xajut-ıııHHfln oHyn 6MneH oöha niMam.1
roBU repepAH. (N) /Ya:suh orjo BaBar diyip a:t dakıpdı hem hâ:li-sinni cmur]
bilen oynosma:m gowı görürdü./
The old man had stuck the name Basar on him and he used to like playinj; vvith
him from time to time.
Illonapun aiiflSH aöflHMnapuHM aÜTMartı tobu repepaMM.
(O) /S o loru rj aydya:n aydunlannı aytmagı gowı görördüm./
I used to like singing the songs they were singing.
242 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Onapfla GhiiiMsh xep 6wp Haxaptm 63 B am ı Be e m e n i Gonapatı. MeceneM,

xerw3HHH eKiueH6e ryHH arrnaM raaaHtt ox;ara aTapap^tı. (H)
/OJordo biSyarn her bir nahani) ö :8 wagtı we ölcögii bolordı. Me0elem, hepda:niq
yeksenbe günü ağsam ga:Sanı o:jogo atarardı./
With them every cooked meal would have its own time and scale. For example,
on Sunday evenings the kettle would be put on the hearth.

Other Uses o f -apdttlepdu l-ardılerdil

Adding the suffix -apRfcl/epnH /-ardı/erdi/ to the main verb or to the deseriptive verb of
a sentence may convey a conditional or subjunctive meaning.

On flHpH 6 o n a H G o n c a , MeH Gettne M a c r a p a q t i J i t ı r u n a m a r u H j j a rajiM a3H M M .

(G) /Ol di:ri bolon bol0o, men beyle maOgaracıIıgıi) asa:gmna ga:lma55ım./
If he were stili alive, I wou!dn’t feel so ashamed.

3rep KennsH JtMMHfle 6np aaT Sap Gonca, 6e{{ııe ran,r arbip,vıa33t>ı. (H)
/Eger keJla:ıj icinne bir 8a:t ba:r bol0o, beyle gatı a:gırmaS8ı./
If there were anything in your head, it wouldn’t h u rt so bad.

Men ceHMH yMMHeM oflyp-Gyayp a n b iG -a 6 n jıe p n n M . (H)

/Men 0eniıj ü5ü:nöm odur-budur alıb-a: bilerdim./
I could at least buy this or that for you, too.

When the habitual past tense forms Gojıapau /bolordı/ and 6 onMa3HU /bolmoSSı/
of the verb GoJiMaK /bolmok/ 'to be(come)' serve as the main verb of a sentence with a
conditional clause, they have a conditional meaning, as in English 'v/ould (not)'.

Foıonnapu car-aMaıı 06a 3nnm Gonca, 6m3i«( ynbi hiii 6ırrapflMrHMH3 Cojıapnu.
(G) /Goyunlon 0ag-ama:n o:ba: eltip bol0o, bi5iq ulı i:s bitirdigimiS bolordı./
Ifh e can get the sheep to the village safely, this would prove to be a great success
for us.
A^aGbi OKaflaıı Goncan, 6y Barra a/jaM GoJiapnbi, oHyn eKe 6 wp CH3e nan, öenKH
6yTHH o6 a-fla KOMeru eTepflM. (G) /Ajabı okodon bolOorj, bu wagta a:dam bolordı,
onur) yeke bir 0 iSe da:[, belki bütüm o:ba:-da: kömögü yeterdi./
If you had made it possible for Ajap to study, then she would have made her way
m life by this time, she would have been of use not only to you but even more to
the vvhole village. ['she would have become a person']

IIIoji canapunbo, uıon cneıcraıcn xaKbt»fla ryppyn sflMnaKce, KeM 6onMa3Htı.

(O) /Sol 0apanr)iS, sol iöpektakıl hakınna gürriii) edilâ:y0e, kem bolmoSSı./
it would be good to talk about that trip of yours and that play. ['it would not be
a f!aw ir]
 Tense/Aspect 243

Forms o f the Habitual Past İndefinite Tense

Türkmen indicates this tense by adding the suffixes -apauM/epmM /-ardım -ordum/
erdim-ördüm/ and - a p a tiK /e p f jH K /-ardık-orduk/erdik-ördük/ in the first person
singular and plural, -apuuH/epHHH /-ardıi]-ordui)/erdii]-ördür)/ and -apnbiK(W3/
epRHHHS /-ardujı8-ordurju5/erdii)i5-ördür)ü5/ in the second person singular and plural,
and -a p flL i/e p g M /-ardı-ordı/erdi-ördü/ and - a p f lb u ı a p /e p f lH J ie p /-ardılar-ordulor/
erdiler-ördülör/ in the third person singular and plural, to verb stems. When a verb
stem ends in a vowel, that vowel is lengthened and this suffix is written - a p j i b i / a p a ı ı
/-a:rdı/â:rdi/.
Negation of this tense requires replacing - a p / e p /-ar/er/ with the partide -M a 3 /ın e 3
/-maS/me5/. Questiohs in this tense are asked by placing the partide -mm/mh /-mı/mi/
after the suffix - a p n u / e p u i i /-ardı/erdi/.
The suffix - a p n b i/ e p n K /-ardı/erdi/ is composed o f the future indefinite suffix
- a p / e p /-ar/er/ and the past indefinite suffix - h m / a h /-dı/dı/.
For paradigms of the habitual past indefinite tense, see 608-611.
244 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Past indefinite Tense

The past indefinite tense expresses an action that occurred at some unspecified point in
the past. In its subjective use, the speaker is not aware of having performed or
witnessed this action even though the speaker actually did perform or witness the
action. This tense may be used when the speaker,becomes consciousiy aware of having
done something, or the like, and when reporting historical events. English equivalents
include 'apparently', 'it tums out', 'it looks like', 'it seems', 'I guess', and others.

On rHTM3HaHp. Apparently he didn’t go.

/Ol gitmârnnir./

On cana süüom aÖRbinflbip. It looks like she told you already.

/Ol Oaıja eyyâ:m aydıpdır./

Türkmen indicates the subjective past indefinite tense with the suffix
-binabip/urm up /-ıpdır/ipdir/ in the positive and -MaHflbip/MBHAHp /-ma:nnır/
mâ:nnir/ in the negative. its basic function is to express an action of. vvhich the speaker
was not consciousiy aware until the time of speech.

fly iU M a H İIM M U 0 3 aSTB IM H H aiHarfclHflafliirblHbl 6 H IlM 3 IIflH p H H . (G)

/Dusma:nımu) ö:5 ayagımır) aia:guınadıgım bilmâ:nnirin./
It seems I didn’t realize that the enemy was right under my feet.

AÜTcaHa, H3Me Öonynflbip? (H) /Ay00ana, na:me bolupdur?/

W ould you teli m e what happened?

3 jihm flOBYJiHnflHp. (O) /Elim döwülüpdür./

It turns out my hand was broken.

Con H3Me öonanbt öıtnitan eK. Illon raflunaHp. (TV13.3)

/0oq nâ:m e bolonı bilyâ:n yo:k. Sol gidipdir./
No one knovvs what happened after that. A pparently he left.

Ayöi[ 3AeHHMfle HaflorpH HOMep anunfu.ıptiH. (T17.5)

/Dü:n jaıj edenimde nâ:dogn nomer ahpdınn./
When I called yesterday, I apparently got a wrong number.

Other Uses o f -unduplundup l-ıpdırlipdirl

The subjective past indefinite tense is used to State historical events, biographical facts
or authoritative statements which, as a rule, cannot have been witnessed by the person
making the statement.
 Tense/Aspect 245

MojınaHenec 1810-iok,m Munfla noryn, 1862-K*,tı fitınfla xeM apanaıı

4biKtınabip. On eMpyHHrç KenycıtHH Caparr xeM Maptı ceÖHTHHfle reı;npıınflnp.
(G) /Mö:llonepe0 1810-njı yılla doğup, 1862-nji yılla hem anadan cıkıpdır. Ol
ömrünü i] köpüSUnü öaragt hem Man Oebitinne geciripdir./
Mollanepes was bora in 1810 and died in 1862. He passed most of his life in
the region o f Saragt and Man.

IIIeMneıuiKfle, öııp Barr re^eHHHflen con, M ycyroıaH tm Be3JtnaHM x a c roBbi

öamapaHflbirbi msjihm Gojıyriflbip. (N) /Seylelikde, bir wagt geceninnen 9oi),
mu6ulma:nııj we8i:pâ:ni ha:0 gowı basarya:nmgı mâ:lim bolupdur./
As a result, after some time had passed, it beeame clear that a Müslim could
fulfill his obligations much better.

iHcraHa afiflbinaHfla, h3M*,m ama:*;biK MarrbiMrynfcmtı yccam tiK 6mjkh

Hiıpenantıanp. (H)
/Gı:0gaca aydılnna, yaSıJı ya:sajık Magtımgulımı u00a:tlık bilen di:reldipdir./
In short, the writer brought to life in a masterfiıl fashion the youthful
Magtımgulı.
TaptttMbtnapbiH HaKnaMarbina reps, renepan CKoöeneB ToKflene ranacbuma oh
6sıu Myn aflaMtı n jpbinaup flHftıın «aK 3amliap. (TVI3.3)
/Ta:n:hcılariQ Saklamağına görâ:, general Okobelev Gö:kdepe gala:0ınna c>n ba:s
mür) a:damı gmpdır diyip cak edilya:r./
According to historians, it is surmised that General Skobelev slaughtercd 15,000
people at the fortress of Gökdepe.

In addition, the subjective past indâfinite tense is used in the narration cif a story
whose action, by its nature, cannot have been vvitnessed.

Tapun rti3binbi eMyııe rersıpen ryuynııeH 6y ana aanuHbi öaünapa xaıibi jıoKaMara
ııGepM3H3np. (G) /Gan:p gıSılı öyünö getiren gününnön bu yaıja: aya-.lını ba:ylara
ha:h dokoma.-ga i:beımâ:nnir./
Starting vvith the day the old man brought home the gold, he didn’t send his
wife to the rich people to weave carpets.

Tyn ConraHce^YHMn sjiHHe Kamm: -^eK otmhh! MeH rupHaK xeM 6oncaM,
HiepHraT KaHyHbtna repa HMKajıauiMacan, Meıtni( HHtiMa rejiMepcHi(! - HuiİHnflHp.
(N) /Gül 6olta:n0öyünürj eline kakıp: "Cek elirji! Men gımak hem bolOom, seri:gat
ka:nu:nma görâ: nika:lasma0ai), menir) ya:nıma gelmerOir)!" diyipdir./
Slapping Soltansöyün’s hand. Gül said: "Hands off! Although I’m a slavu, if you
don’t marry me according to the laws of the Shariat, you won’t get near me!"
246 Turianen Referenee Grammar

Another usage o f the subjective past tense is to communicate the spoken (vvith
3HÖMCK /diymek/ 'to say', atİTMaK /aytmak/ 'to teli, to say') or vvritten (vvith s3MaK
/yaSmak/ 'to vvrite') vvords of another person.
Mbipamı roıoHiraptı necıe caT5K;aıCflbirbiHbi atİHbinnup. (N)
/Mıra:lı goyunlorı ne0ye Oatjakdıguıı aydıpdır./
Mıralı said that he’ll seli the sheep on credit.
Onyn Maıuranacbi fliıne eKmeHÖe ryHH ÖHJieıiHKjıe H axapjıansnm tın,iH tı JBbinflbip.
CT1Î.1)
tOnuıj maîgala0ı dige yeksenbe günü bilelikde naharlanya:nnıguıı yaSıpdır./
He vvrote that his family eats together only on Sundays.

Forms of the Subjective Past Indefinite Tense

Turkmen forms the subjective past indefinite tense by adding the suffixes
-binabipuH/HnaHpMH /-ıpdınn-updurun/ipdirin-üpdürün/ and -unflbipuc/Hnanrmc
/-ıpdırı0-upduru0/ipdiri0~üpdürü8/ in the first person singular and plural,
-hinflbipcMH/nnnHpcMH /-ıpdır0ıi)-updur0uq/ipdir0ii)-üpdüreüi]/ and -binabipcbinbi3/
ıınanpcHHH3 /-ıpdır8ıi]i8-updur0urju8/ipdir0iqi8-üpdür0Uıjü8/ in the second person
singular and plural, and -binflbip/unflHp /-ıpdır-updur/ipdir-üpdür/ and -binfltıpnap/
HnaHpuep /-ıpdtrlar-updurlor/ipdirler-üpdürlör/ in the third person singular and
plural, to the stems of verbs. When this suffıx is added to a stem ending in a vovvel,
that vovvel lengthens and this suffix is vvritten -annbip/annnp /-a:pdır/â:pdir/.
The negative of this tense is formed by replacing the gerund -bin/mı /-ıp/ip/ vvith
the negative partide -Man/ıvısH /-ma:n/mâ:n/, resulting in the form -MaHflbip/MSHflHp
/-ma:nnır/ma:nnir/. Questions are formed by adding the question partide - m u / mh
/-mı/mi/ to the personal ending, although replacing the partide -n u p lm p /-dır/dir/
vvith -mm/mh /-mı/mi/ in the second person is preferred by most speakers.

Ü3MaHflwpcbn<. /Ya8ma:raıır0ıi]./ It seems you didn’t vvrite.

SbhniMhicbtn? /Ya5ıpmı0ıi)?/ Did you vvrite?
^3MaHMbicbm? /Ya8ma:nmı0ıi]?/ Didn’t you vvrite?

This suffix is a compound composed of the gerund -bin/ıırı /-ıp/ip/ and the
confirmation partide -flbip/jiHp /-dır/dir/. Depending on the speaker, the partide
- m v lm p /-dır/dir/ may be omitted in the second person.

^l3fcm(fltıp)cLin. /Ya8ıp(dır)0ıg./ It seems you wrote.

53bmCnup)cwnM3. /Ya5ıp(dır)0ırjı8./It seems you vvrote. (plural)

For paradigms of the subjective past indefinite tense, see 612-615.

 Tense/Aspect 247

Past Continuous Tense

The past continuous tense expresses a past action of long duration that was continuous
or repetitive and that the speaker witnessed. Often, this tense is accompanied by
adverbs of time ('always', 'at times', 'day by day', ete.). This tense is indicated in
English by 'was doing (something)' or 'did (something)'.

CeH 2K,an 3fleHMHfle MeH Haxap MİfiispuHM. I was eating dinner

/0en jarj edenimde men iyyârrdim./ when you called.

Oıryn x h i i r a x a p u re jiM e tia p a H . He never got angry.

/Onurj hi:c gahan gelmeyâ:rdi./

Türkmen indicates the past continuous tense by adding the suffix -HpHbl/öapflH
/-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/ in the positive and -Masıputı/MeüapHH /-maya:rdı/meya:rdi/ in the
negative to verb stems. its basic funetion is to indicate that an action occurred in the
past in a continuous or repetitive way.

MambtHJiapMH pesHHnepH acc|>ajiKran ks epmffle ıra ranjitıpapnbi. (G)

/Ması:nlani) reginleri a0faltıi] ka: yerinne 1:8 ga:llırya:rdı./
The wheels of the cars were leaving tracks in some spots of the asphalt.
Onyn snnepn THTpHİfopnM. (G) /Onur| elleri titriyâ:rdi./
His hands were trembling.
TyMHYKfleH flYlu^3H r-yuyH ıııexnecH onyn flapaütı KeitaerMHfle, ot Muıımne
ofiHaHpdbi. (G) /Tü:nükdön düsyarn gönürj söhlö9U onuıj dararyı köynögünnö, el
irsinne oynoya:rdı./
The ray of sunlight, coming from the smoke hole of the yurt, was playing on her
silk dress and needlevvork.
On 6wp canap nanaB, 6wp ca n a p xeM Ke 6 a 6 ,3TJin MepeK - x e p xaücbMflaH
HİİİİDpnH. (G )
/Ol bir 0apar palaw, bir 0apar hem kebarb, etli cörök- her haydmnan iyyârrdi./
He was eating some of each kind- now palaw, now kebab and pastry stuffed with
meat.
Mhb , u ıo ııy n Y'fHH-fle o n M tıp a fla M uep^en r a p a m a p n ı ı. (G )
/İne, sonug ücü:n-nö ol Mııa:da ilerden garasya:rdı./
You see, that’s also why he was expecting Mırat from the south.
fla m a p fla 6o n c a ra 3aHnap aTapmiHpntı. (G)
/Dasarda bol0o ga:8anlar atanlya:rdı./
And outside, kettles were being set u p .
248 Turkmen Reference Grammar

By B a rrn ap Y3yK a r t ıp o it-ro a a ıp n e p jp n m fle, G a m m a a n r e p HSMenep rejimi

reniiapR H . (G)
/Bu wagtlar USuk ağır o:y-pikirler icinne, basınnan görna:meler gelip gecyaırdi./
At that time Uzuk was deep in her thoughts, vvho knows what vvas going through
her head. ['what vvas coming and going']

BH3im 6aMntDcnapMMfci3Bi eayM irafleH copaMaH, aiiun rnattap»«ıep. (N )

/BiSig ba:ylıklarımıSı ö:5ümii88ön 6 orroma:n, ahp gidyâ:rdiler./
They were takıng away our riches vvithout asking us.

rapa3, aTacbiHH eKHpepe 6axaHa Tarıatıp.Ma^aK Gojıapauıvı. (N)

/GaraS, ata0ını yekirere bahana tapdırmajak bolya:rdım./
Lı a vvord, I vvas trying not to let him find an excuse to torment his grandfather.

OnflHue 6 axtiM paK 06a em are x o B jıy rH p flu . (BH)

/Ol dirje bahımra:k o:ba: yetmâ:ge howlugya:rdı./
He vvas rushing to get to the village even sooner.

In combination vvith various time vvords and phrases, this tense refers to action that
occurred continuously or repetitively över a long period of time. Typical adverbs of
time that occur in such sentences include the followmg:

xeM m u e/hemi:se/ always Barr /hi:c wagt/ n e v e r

x h «i
oji /ol wagtlar/ then
B a rra a p x e p B a r r /her w a g t /
at tim es
on fleBYpfle /ol döwiirdö/ at that time TO3-TM3fleH /ü:8-ti:85en/ often
ryH-ryHfleH /gün-günnön/ ÜHTM-MBirbiflaH /yıgı-yıgıd an /
day by/to day frequently
MarantiKfla /ca'.galıkda/ in childhood KOHeflBH /kö:nödön/ sin ce e arly
tim es

O n x h h B a r r m e î t n e ıu a r ıiB i K j r tı ry H J ie p M n ıı ıa a ^ M 6 o n a p j> m f l ı t ü m ı
nHKHpjıeHMeHapflM. (G)
/O l h i:c vvagt ş e y le s a :tlık h g ü n lö rü ıj s a :y a :d ı b o lo r u n d iy ip p ü d r le n m e y â ır d i./
He never thougbt t h a t h e v v o u ld b e a w i t n e s s t o s u c h h a p p y d a y s .

Cep6 a3 öaiifcin x h m raxapu reJiMeHspAH. (G)

/ 0 e r b a : 8b a : y ı i ] h i : c g a h a n g e l m e y â : r d i . /
Serbaz-bay never got angry.

O j i n o B Y p n e 6 h 3MH a c M a m .iM tt 3fla h 3x h j b i 3a T n a p t m y v y n i ı e p e ı m u n i H i ı

6 n J iM e tia p a n K . (N)
/ O l d ö v v ü r d ö b iS ir j a 0m a : n ı m ı 88a n a r h i l i S a : t l a n i ] u c u p y ö r ö n n i i g ü n ü b i l m e y â ı r d i k . /
At that time, vve didn’t know w h a t s o r t o f t h i n g s v v e re f l y i n g i n o u r s k i e s .
 Tense/Aspect 249

©HKH'OHKyJiHK 6 o jıa n fla 6 h3 cecHMjoeM ibiK apun 6 n jiM eitap aıiK ,

YÜHyMiraeM. (N)
/Örjkü-öıjkülük bolonna bi8 0e0imiSem cıkanp bilmeyâ-.rdik, ü:nümü5öm /
The way it used to be, we could not utter even a word- even a sound.

MeH onapuH eöyHfle Murtı-iibiruflan CoJiapRtiM. (N)

/Men olorui) öyünnö yıgı-yıgıdan bolya:rdun./
I was at their house frequently.

B h3 o B a r T J ia p ^enflvıpfle a ra a a p R U K . (H)
/Bİ8 o wagtlar Cenni:rde ya:saya:rdık./
We were living in Chendir then.

B m3 oji B a r r u a p 8-ikk;h ıcnacfla o K aap A b iK . (O)

/BiS ol wagtlar 8-nji kla00a okoya:rdık./
We were in the 8th grade then. ['we were studying']

İleHe o n x h h x a q a H , xh>i KHMe TaHpbiHJiKacbma K B M eıt B epM eiiapflM . (O )

/Yö:nö ol hi:£ hacan, hi:c kime tagnyalka0ına kömök bermeya:rdi./
But he never helped anyone for a "Thank you."

The past continuous tense also may indicate that a process or repetitive actiorı which
heads toward a goal is becoming an actuality. This usage often occurs with verbs
meaning 'to increase'.

Mıııe ranıauiHH narajıapuH c a ıa ı ryH-ryHfleH Kenejıüspntı. (G)

/İrse gatnasya:n ca:galanq 0a:nı gün-günnön köpölyâ:rdi./
The number of children engaged in work was increasing day by day.

flaıuapfla 6onca uıeMajibiH ryBByjı^HCM rytömıeHMn, eMyn upaHMacu a p m p ^ u .

(G) /Dasarda bolOo sema:lır) giiwwiildü0ü gü:clön(ip, öyürj ııanmaSı artya:r;lı./
As the roar of the wind rose outside, the vibration of the house was getting
stronger and stronger.

O nyn ryöa;M KenenüapAH, rouiyHM ryftMneHttapjjH, xa3WHacbi ajrrbinaan

noJispflM. (N)
/Onuıj gü:jü köpölyâ:rdi, gosunı gü:clönyâ:rdi, haSımaOı altmnan do:lya:rdı./
His strength was increasing, his army was grovving stronger, and his treasury
was fiiling up.

- BaTutman reneH 3apbin 6y cec 3iuHTflHTHHue flyperHUH ajifltiM-öepflHMe

cajıapflfci. (N)
/“Ba:thdan gelen 8a:n:n bu 0e0 esitdigiçce yürögügü allım-berdime 0alya:rdı.'Y
"The more loudly this pitifiıl voice was heard, the more it tortured your hec.rt."
250 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

In addition, the past continuous tense indicates a process or State that was relentless
or pervasive.

F muimh coByKiıapMHua 6y öa-rrajıtncjıap ao^Hpabijıap. (G)

/Gı5ıq 0owukiorunno bu batgalıklar doqya:rdılar./
In the severe cold of winter these bogs became frozen.

3MMa on MyHyn MbipaT Tapantniflan M6epnneHflHrMHe binanapau. (G)

/Emma: ol munurj Mıra:t tarapmnan i:berilennigine ınanya:rdı./
But he believed that this had been sent by Mîrat.

roBpynaH östnunm. u c u rejıüspflH. (BG) /Gowrulon ba:Iıgır) ı:0ı gelyârdi./

There was the smell of fried fish. ['the smell came (and came)']

Ona flepeK Mapsctın, 3HrenbCMH, JleronotH enMea-ftımtea nne«naptiHM HHJK,an-

nHK,an HYulYHBHptt3pHHJiep. (TA16.4) /Orjo derek MarkOırj, Engdöirj, Leninirj
ölmöS-yitmeS ideyalanm ya;nja:p-ya:nja:p dusiinnüryâ:rdiler./
İn their place, they pounded the immoıtal, everlasting ideas of Marx, Engels and
Lenin into them. ['vvhile criticizing and criticizing, they explained']

Other Uses o f -stpdbdüapdu l-ya:rdılya:rdil

The sııffix -apflfci/tiapnH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/ also may be added to the main verb of a
sentence vvith a conditional clause to express a subjunctive meaning.

AÜTMafltiK 6oııcan, raflitapHHM. (H) /Aytmadık bol0oi], giyâ:rdim./

If you had not told me, I wou!d have gone.

This suffix also may be used when tvvo aetions are performed simultaneously,
especially when the first action is qua!ified by the partide -Ka/fO /-ka:/ka:/ 'vvhile'.
Hovvever, some speakers prefer to use deseriptive verb formations (-un/un aypatı
/-ıp/ip du:rdı/, -bin/un orbipatı /-ıp/ip otı:rdı/, -un/un nTbipau /-ıp/ip yatıtrdı/) to
express such action (see 225).

On m y ryppyunepH 3flöapKa annepMHM xepeKeT;ıeıınııpii3paH. (H)

/Ol su gürriir)lörü edyâ:rka: ellerini hereketlenniryâ:rdi./
While giving this account, he was gesticulating vvith his hands.

Hypflyre3en 6«neH rypnemMn orupKaM, Cmp rm yM ötıneH flauı-TSBepere xeM

cu h aatepaHM . (TVI6.2) /DurdugöSöl bilen gürlösüp otı:rka:m, bir göSiim bilen
das-tövvörögö hem 0ı:n edya:rdim./
While sitting there talking vvith Durdıgözel, I also vvas keeping one eye on the
surroundings. ['I was watching vvith one eye']
 Tense/Aspect 251

Contrasting the Past indefinite, Habitual and Continuous Tenses

The past continuous tense in - H p flu /S a p flH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/, which refers to an action
occurring repetitively över a long period in the past, should not be confused vvith the
habitual past indefinite tense in -a p fli> ı/ep j(H /-ardı/erdi/, which describes action that
occurred habitually in the past. In the following example, the speaker refers to an action
that occurred in the past in a constant state ('we used to live'); then, following a
clarification, he refers to the process that occurred in the past ('we were living' = 'we
lived').

Bira oöafla sraıapatiK. MbinrtiH fljtftH nifsH epfle...6HJiÜ3H MeH - M enflen k o t h c h 6 y

- ınorç SonaH epıiHfle. Illon Tayfla mnaHpnbiK. (TV13.3)
/BiS o:bodo ya:sa:rdık. Yılgın diyilyâ:n yerde...bilyâ:n men - mennen fciciei bu -
sog bolon yerinne. Sol taryda ya:saya:rdık./
We used to live in a village. In a place being called Yılgın... I know- this is my
younger brother- in the place where he vvas bom. We lived there.

The past indefinite tense in -flbi/flH /-dı/di/ refers to a single action that occurred at
some point in the past and did not occur again. In the following example, the speaker
uses the past continuous tense in -apau/ttapnH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/ to refer to a state of
mind that vvas occurring över a long period of time ('I was considering myself happy'
= 1 considered myself happy'). She uses the past indefinite tense in -hm/ah /-dı/di/ to
refer to two actions (1 became pregnant' and 'I realized') that were single events of the
past.

© 3YM H flYHÜ sfle hu S a r r j i H aflaM x a c a ı ı 3Hİİ3pnHM. * Ia r a ra jiflb i Bernm, e3yMHH

a n n b n n a H n u rtiM b i ıuoHHa 6 h j ih m m . ( N ) /Ö:8üm ii d ıin y â :d e iq b a g tlı a:dam ha6a:p
ed y â :rd im . C a :g a g a :Iiı w e ii:n , ö:5ümiir| y a lg ıs a n lıg ım ı so n n o billim ./
I considered myself the happiest person in the world. I became pregnant,
however, and realized then that I had made a mistake.

Forms o f the Past Continuous Tense

Turkmen indicates this tense by adding the suffixes -HpabiM/ftapjjHM /-yarrdım /
yâ:rdim/ and -H p flb iK /ttap n H K /-ya:rdık/ya:rdik/ in the first person singular and plural,
-spabiH/üspHHH /-ya:rdır)/ya:rdir)/ and -apnbmu3/tiapaHHH3 /-ya:rdır)i6/yâ:rdigi5/ in
the second person singular and plural, and -HpHbi/üapflH /-ya:rdı/ya:rdi/ and
-npnujıap/tfapaHnep /-ya:rdılar/ya:rdiler/ in the third persons singular and plural, to
the stems of verbs.
The negation partide -M a/M e /-ma/me/ is inserted after the verb stem and before
-»pftbi/üapflff /-ya:rdı/ya:rdi/. Especially in the written form of the Standard language,
the question partide - m m / m m /-mı/mi/ is placed at the end of the suffix. Hovvever, its
252 Türkmen Reference Grammar

placement between the -ap/iiap /-ya:r/ya:r/ and -Rhilm/-dı/di/ components is preferred

in spoken Türkmen.

Were you writing?

/Ya5ya:rdıqmı? ~ Ya5ya:mudııj?/

The suffix -apau/üapAH /-ya:rdt/yâ:rdi/ is a compound of the present indefinite

tense suffix -np/Hap /-ya:r/yâ:r/ and the past indefinite tense suffîx -uu/nıı /-dı/di/.
For paradigms of the past continuous tense, see 616-619.
 Tense/Aspect 253

Past Perfect Tense

The past perfect tense indicates a single action that was completed in the past and that
the speaker witnessed. This tense expresses an action that occurred long ago or,
generally, an action that occurred before another more recent action. English eqııivaients
for this tense are 'had done (something)' and 'did (something before doing something
else)'.

On miramı ryTapuriAM. She had finished work.

/Ol i:sini gutorupdı./
MeH e T e H Mtın Mapa rHHHnflHM. I went to Man last year.
/Men ötön yıl Mara: gidipdim./

Turkmen indicates the past perfect tense with the suffbc -unau/nrınH /-ıpdı/ipdi/ in
the positive and -MaHflu/MSHAH /-ma:nnı/ma:nni/ in the negative. This tense is used
to express actions that occurred in the past before other, more recent actions occurred.
Sometimes, words that refer to a time prior to the immediate past are used in sentences
whose verbs carry this tense marker.

AifflaryjiiiH Tfci3BUi Tomyıı ryuJiyrtına nifleroiHe fttuı apbiM GoJiynntı. (Cl)

/A:nnagulı:i) G 181I GoSun gulluguno gidenine yıl ya:nm bolupdı./
I t had been a year and a half since Annaguh went to serve in the Red Anny.

Tyn xac rnw,nrnnnM, Myna rapaMaşaan 6 h3 ena flYluOTK- (G)

/Gün ha:0 gi:jigipdi, murjo garamaSSan biS yo:lo düsdiik./
It had already become late, but we set off anyvvay. ['the day had become quite
late']

MepeT ara etîfle 6onca, ıııoıtLi rep eteH flHİıra rejıunnuM. (G)
/Meret a:ga öydö bol0o, sonı göröyün diyip gelipdim./
I had come thinking that if Meret-aga were home I would see him.

Oaajı XHM-xaMan nıeftne 3axnap G o jiM aH fltı. (N)

/OSol hi:c-ha£an şeyle 5a:tlar bobna:nm./
Such things had never happened before at ali.

MeH 6 y aflaMM ennep nen re 3eK re p y ıiH H M . (BH)

/Men bu a:damı öıjlör köp geSek göriipdüm./
I had seen this man many times before.

Ypyııı Typanu 6spn, 6np Tonap ryH re>«ınan. (BH)

/Urus turolı bâ:ri, bir topor gün geöipdi./
Many days had passed since the vvar began.
254 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Xs3Hp on mhimhm ryTapun reroınnH. M era repyn e p m 6erei{qn.

(TV16.2) /Hâ:8ir ol i:sini gutorup gelipdi. Meni görüp örâ:n begenni./
Now she had finished work and had come home. Seeing me she was very
happy.

AMepHKantiH BnpnemeH IIlTaTnapHHMH fleBJteT ceıcpeTapM BoppeH

KpHcTo4>opHH fclcpaütın xeKYMeTHHHn en6aniMJ>mapw öjuıeH flyıuyuiHrbiHHa
Hcpaönbin Be C hphhhhh ncoHUHanapbnma ronaitnaıuMaHH rasamm öMiiMe&H.
Hlonyn en »HUHJia KpHcro<})op CHpHHHbin IIpe3HneHTH XacJ)ec Acer 6nnen hkm
re3eK flymytnunflM. (TV11.2) /Amerika-.nu) Birlelen ıstatlannıg Döwlöt Oekretan
Worren KiriOtofonıi) lörayıl hökümötünüç yo:lbascılan bilen dusuîugunno
IOrayüıj we 9iriyanuj poSi0iyalannna goloylosmarm gaSanıp bilmedi. Sonur) öq
ya:mnna Kirifltofor Oiriyamrj PreSidenti Hafe0 A0et bilen iki geSek dmsusupdı./
While meeting leaders of the Israeli govemment, the United States of America
Secretary of State Warren Christopher was not able to get the pösitions of Israel
and Syria to move closer. Prior to this, Christopher had met twice vvith Syrian
President Hafez Asad.

When used vvith time words that set an action in the past, after which other actions
are sure to have occurred, this tense may be equivalent to a simple past tense 'did
(something)' in English.

M aM M eT 6aü flyJİH x a p M a H a rM flM iınH. (G)

/Mâ:mmetba:y dü:n harmana gidipdi./
Mâmmet-bay went to the harvest yesterday.

MeH 6y S a p a fla 0 3 a /iK b i «JH K M iıınapH M aa a ö n b in n b iM , r a ö T a n a n oTypM aJİM H. (N)

/Men b u b a tr a d a o S o lk ı ç ık ış la r ım d a a y d ıp d ım , g a y ta la :p o tu r m a :y ın ./
I told about this in my previous speeches, don’t let me keep repeating myself.

n i o n n a - . u a y p y ıu fleB pyH H n re n H H n e p H H u n a p M a c b i-H jiT a H M a c u 6oJiM aH flbi. (N )

/S o n n o - d o u ru 5 d ö w r ü n u ıj g e lin le rin ir j a :r m a 0 ı- y a lta n m a 0 ı b o lm a r n n ı./
Then, too, wartime brides didn’t get weary or complain.

- CeH nypNiyma MbiKflbiHMM? - fliıMnn, on rynıcapflaıı copafltı.

- HbiKbinjtbiM. fİene oTeH iibin atfpbmbmıniiK. CefoöH «taraMtra efcflbi. (H)
/'0en durmuso cıkdııjmı?" diyip, ol Gülna:rdan 0o:rodı. "(Üıkıpdım. Yö:nö ötön
yıl aynlısdık. 0ebâ:bi £a:ga:mı5 yo:kdı."/
"Are you married?" he asked Gülnar. '1 w a s m a r r i e d . But l a s t y e a r we got
divorced. The reason is we had no children

Ey Baıca Mana enpsK, eren ü b ijı ra6aT remmjjn. (H)

/Bu wa:ka marja ötjrâ:k, ötön yıl gabat gelipdi./
This event befell me earlier, last year.
 Tense/Aspect 255

Other Uses o f -undulundu l-ıpdılipdil

The suffîx -Mnnı>l/nnflM /-ıpdı/ipdi/ is used in the narration of stories to place action in
the fictional past.

MaBtı spcaptiflu, AMbtflepa 6owHfla «Hyn-ecYnnM. (G )

/Ma:wı â:r8andı, Amıderya: boyunno ö:niip-ö0üpdü./
Mawı was Ârsan. He was born and grevv up along the Amudarya.

rıc*;e stpbiM 6oJiynnu. 06a o t u iih u . Arnıe XanHa3apHH xaTapw HTMauntı.

BaruıtiHbin cecw renıtn nypfltı. (G ) /Gi:je ya:nm bolupdı. O:bo yatıpdı. Dirçe
Ha:lna8anıj hatan yatma:nnı. Bagsımi) 0e0i gelip du:rdı./
It was midnight. The encampment was asleep. Only in the tents of Halnazar were
they not asleep. The voice of the singer was coming (from there).

- CoırraHHM, ceH uımcapnaKaH ceBflarsp örnıeH KyuiT oünanMtıaMu?

/'0olta:nım, 0en sika:rdaka:ıj 0öwda:gâ:r bilen küst oynarpmıdıi)?"/
"My lord, did you play chess with the merchant while on hunt?"
- OiinanauM. /"Oynarpdım."/
1 did."
- Yıynamıa H3Me CepnnflHH? /"Utuloıjdo nâ:me beripdirj?"/
"What did you give when you lost?"
- Tapa a-rtiM 6wjıeH T3* , hmm BcpmıHHM.
/‘Gara atım bilen ta:jimi beripdim."/
"I gave my black horse and my crown."
- yTarçqa HSMe anunj(un? /"Utogdo na:me alıpdıg?"/
"What did you get when you won?"
- CeB^arepKH rapHaraHM a/ıun^UM.
/”0öwda:ga:rir| gırnagmı alıpdım."/
'1 got the merchant’s slave girl."
- CeH on mpHara an ypMaKMtı Sonantnma, H3Me Tanan sanrımı?
/"0en ol gımaga el urmok£ı bolonugdo, na:me talap edipdi?"/
"When you wanted to put a hand on that slave girl, what did she demand?"
- 3xTHaMa. f Âhtna:ma."/
"A vvritten agreement."
-CeH oHtr öepHHMHflMH? /"0e n om beripmidij)?"/
"Did you give it?"
- XaBa, 6epwnaHM. (N ) f Hawa, beripdim."/
"Yes, I did."

Following a conditional clause, the suffix - L i n n b i / n ı ı n n /-ıpdı/ipdi/ indicates that

'(something) wouId have been done'.

Tenen Goncanı.», tobh 3anncnnn3. (H ) /Gelen bol0or)uS, gowı edip0ii)i5./

If you had come, you would have done vvell.
256 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Forms o f the Past Perfect Tense

Turkmen indicates this tense by adding the suffbces -tınabiıvı/nnflHM /-ıpdım-updum/
ipdim-üpdüm/ and -unaiiK/ıınAHK /-ıpdık-upduk/ipdik-lipdük/ in the first person
singular and plural, -uaffutf/nnuMH /-ıpdıg— updurj/ipdirj—iipdilrj/ and -u n n u n u 3 /
ununu!» /-ıpdır)i5-updur)u5/ipdii)i5-1ipdiir)üB/ in the second person singular and
plural, and -bin « b i/n n an /-ıpdı-updı/ipdi-üpdü/ and -M im u n a p /rn ıp ın e p /-ıpdılar-
updulor/ipdiler-üpdülör/ in the third person singular and plural, to the stems of verbs.
When this suffbc is added to a stem ending in a vowel, that vovvel is lengthened and
this suffbc is vvritten -anflbi/anflH /-a:pdı/â:pdi/.
The negative of this tense is formed by replacing -bin /u n /-ıp/ip/ vvith the partide
-M an/M 3H /-ma:n/mâ:n/, resulting in the form -MaHfltı/MaHflH /-ma:nm/mâ:nni/.
Questions in this tense may be formed by adding the partide -mm/mm /-mı/mi/ to this
suffbc, or by inseıting it betvveen -bin/un /-ıp/ip/ and -flu/flH /-dı/di/.
The suffbc -unst>ı/(innn /-ıpdı/ipdi/ is a compound consisting of the gerund suffbc
-bin/un /-ıp/ip/ and the past indefinite suffbc -Hbi/flH /-dı/di/.
For paradigms of the past perfect tense, see 620-623.
 Tense/Aspect 257

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

The past perfect tense expresses an action that was completed in the past prior to
undertaking a subsequent action. In its 'unrealized' form, this tense refers to an action
which the speaker or another person intended to perform or wanted to perfomı or said
she or he would perform in the past, but for some reason has not carried ouı by the
time of speech. English equivalents to this tense include 'wanted to do (something)',
'intended to do (something)' and 's/he said s/he would do (something)'.

On TypKMeHMCTaHa rm x ,e n w - He had wanted to go

/Ol Türkmönü88a:na gitjekdi./ to Türkmenistan.

In Türkmen, the unrealized past perfect tense is indicated by adding the suffix
->K,aKau/jK,eKaM /-jakdı/jekdi/ in the positive and -»aK/»çeK flajıjyı /-jak/jek da:lli/ in
the negative to the stems of verbs.4

Eh3 OTeH İtbm nam.br KenH MHpan 3jtnıUK,eKRiiK, 6h3hh hmchhmso reMflUMtı
H3Me? MHpanntuc HyHHa IlaKa eTflH. (G) /Bi6 ötön yıl Passı Keli mi:ra:p
edinjekdik, biöirj diyenimiS gecdimi nâ-.me? Mi:ra:plık Nunna Paka yetdi./
We had vvanted to make Pashshı-kel the irrigator last year, but did what wc
wanted count? The position of irrigator went to Nunna Pak.

E h 3 h 6 Hp epe xoumaun>iK arnıaMbiHM rem ıpM eK ymmh a jıu n raT^ eK flM Jiej). (H)
/Bi8i bir yere hoslusuk agsammı geçirmek ücü:n ahp gitjekdiler./
They had wanted to take us some place in order to have a going-away pany.

The unrealized past perfect tense also indicates the speaker’s supposition ıJıat an
action occurred because a condition was met.

IUoBcy3 ’ttiKan eKeaçe arw3 C03 xeM MspeKsım MaKitirnmtıpMara ceösn Bojıyn
(G) /Sow0u8 çıkan yekeje agıS 0ö8 hem mâ:reka:ni caknısdırma:ga
0ebâ:p bolup biljekdi./
Even one inappropriate word uttered could have been the reason for making the
mob start fighting each other.

4 TypfloB 1983: 91 tenned this lense ıhe 'future in ıhe pası" and differentiaied "future indefıniıe in ıhe
pası' (O ji Maı<a xaT a'J^aK/îLl /Ol nıaıja hal yaSjakdı/ 'He said he wou!d wriıe me a leıter'), fuıure
conıinuous in ıhe pası' (On Hnuran OTypirçaKfliJ /Ol i:slâ:p oıurjokdj/ "He said he would he working')
and "future perfect in the past" (Oji mil ilan fioJiaçaKflu /Ol i:S1a:p boljokdı/ 'He said he »ould’ve
worked'). However, ıhe tenn 'future in ıhe pası" usually refers to a completed action equivalent to
English *will have done (something)" (as Hanser 1977: 125 presented this form), whereas ali of the
dislinclions made by Gurdov imply "unrealized action' or a "past o f intention (HUMcpcH ;■:i)" (as
rpaMMamuKa 264).
258 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Speakers also may use this tense to express a wish that arose in the past and that
has become more pressing in the present. English equivalents to this ıısage are 'would
have liked to do (something)' or 1ıad wanted to do (something)'.

MeH xantı ajijrçaKflMM. I would have liked to buy a rug.

/Men ha:h aljakdım./ (~ I’d been wanting to buy a rug.)

Forms o f the Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Tıırkmen indicates this tense by adding the suffîxes -^aKflbiM/a^eKjjMM /-jakdım -
jokdum/jekdim-jökdüm/ and -JK,aKHUK/w,eKUHK /-jakdık-jokduk/jekdik-jökdük/ in
the first person singular and plural, -oı^aKfiurç/^eKHHHt /-jakdırj-jokdurı/jekdiıj-
jökdüg/ and -jrçaKHMHM3/jrçeKnHrçH3 /-jakdıqıS-jokdugu8/jekdiqiS-jökdür)ii8/ in the
second person singular and plural, and -3K,aKHki/:>K,eKj(H /-jakdı-jokdı/jekdi-jökdü/ and
-w,aKHtuıap/3K,eKaHnep /-jakdılar-jokdulor/jekdiler-jökdülör/ in the third person
singular and plural, to verb stems.
Negation of this tense is formed by placing the modal word H3JI /dâ:l/ after
-JKaK/w,eK /-jak/jek/ and in combination with - rh /-di/, resulting in the form
-JKaıc/3KeK flaıiflM /-jak/jek dâ:lli/. Questions in this tense are formed by placing the
partide - m m / m h /-mı/mi/ after this suffix, although the insertion of this partide
betvveen -açaif/açeK /-jak/jek/ and -flfci/flH /-dı/di/ is prefetred in the spoken language.
This suffix is a compound formed from the definite future suffix -a^aK/«,CK
/-jak/jek/ and the past indefinite suffix -n u lm /-dı/di/. Use of the suffix -irçaK/açeK
/-jak/jek/ conveys the certainty with which intentions are made.
For paradigms of the unrealized past perfect tense, see 624-629.
 Tense/Aspect 259

Future indefinite Tense

The future indefinite tense expresses the speaker’s knowledge or intention that an action
will take place, but that its actuai or its exact time of occurrence is not certain. This
tense is indicated in English by 'wiU do (something)'.

On apntp Mapa ranep. He will go to Man tomorrow.

/Ol erti:r Mara: gider./

MeH floKTop 6onyn HinjrapHH. I will work as a doctor.

/Men doktor bolup i:siâ:rin./

Tıırkmen indicates the future indefinite tense vvith the suffix - a p / e p /-ar/er/ in the
positive and - M a p /v ıe p /-mar/mer/ (first and second persons) or -M a a /M e a /-maS/rneS/
(third person) in the negative. its basic function is to express an action that wiil take
place at some uncertain time in the future, vvhether near or distant.

Onap fleK aöpM H ttm p H M H n e p H u n e r e n e p n e p . (G)

/Olor dekabni) yigrimilerinne gelerler./
They’H arrive around the twentieth of December.

©HYHHeH.'n.ncaın.ın rappfcictm a, suruH a c ep eT M e3 . (G)

/Ötjünnön cıkanıg gamflma, ya:sına OeretmeS./
He won’t look at either old or young people whom he meets.

3K,aıpiM - cen ctıpjcaB, O K an G n JlM e p c n n , 6ap floKTopa ™t . (G)

/Jaıgcı - 0en 0ırkaw, oka:p bilmer0ır), bar doktoro git./
Jangchı, you’re sick, and you won’t be able to study. Go on, go to the doctor.

t e p e n i n , cyÜHYH. M aranap yunm HÜMirrcıepHn 6 a x a n a p u eKap/ıaH abrptıxiM a3. (N )

/(Üörögüıj, 0ü:dürj, c a :g a la r ü cü :n iy m itle riıj bah aları y o k o rlon n u ru lm o S./
The prices of bread, milk and food for children will not be raised.

B ta a , m y ittu ı n tu ıa ıra a M yn TOHHa naıra, m m am a M yn roıma xeM nane

O H aypep H c. (N ) /inha:, su y ıl pıia:nca müg tonno pagta, pıla:nca mtirj tonno hem
d â:n e ö:nnürörü 0 ./
So, this year w e ’ll g r o w several thousand tons of cotton, and several thousand
tons of wheat as well.

Mnı 6apana apTHp c e s n e m e p H c . (H) /İ:s ba:rada erti:r OöSlösörüO./

We’H talk about vvork tomorrow.

B arr re * ıe p , M e n ıın rtB U M a M y ı ı a j ı a p . (O) /Wagt geçer, menir) gı:Sımam ıılolor./

Time will p a s s and my daughter also will g r o w u p .
260 Turianen Referenee Grammar

Xa3np G onca MeH cH3e MaHaTnapH repKesepuH Be ou flaK tı 6ennHKnepM

flYUiYH3HPePHH- (TP2.2)
/Hâ:5ir bolöo men 0iSe manadan görköSörün we onnarkı bellikleri düsünnüröriin./
And now I ’U s h o w y o u the manats and explain the symbols on them.

OK O H HaTentH O , ıu y H H K e n e G o n a ım a ıu y rfle --ro y 'ffle H 6 n p n a n u 6 o n a p .

K ı m e n e p . (TV10.2)
/Okoncatelno, sum keçe bolonno su gde-to üedön bi:ri ya:lı bolor. Kiceler./
In the end, when it becomes fek, it will be around one-third (in size). I t vvill
shrink. [Russian oKonqaTentHo 'finally, in the end', rfle-To 'around']

MeHe y3aK BarrnaM tiH Gnp epMK n rra ç e K G oncan, c a M o n e ra tı r a r c e n to b m Go/ıap

e fiflitec 6 ıi 3- 3. (TV9.2) /Yoaıö u6ok w a g tla y ın b ir y e r i:k g itje k bolöorı, O am olotlı
g i 00e q g o w ı b o lo r ö y d y â :0 b i 8-â:./
But if you want to go somewhere for a long time, us, we think it’s better to go by
plane. [ 'i t w i l l b e g o o d İF = 'it’s better i f ]

HeGHTflarufci xaJifcPttDiap 0 3nepn m ın m hjuih T o ü n a p tm n 4>a6pnrHH

MeHflaHMaciiHHa renupepnep. (TV10.2) /N eb itd a:glı h a :lıc ıla r ö :5lörü n ü q m illi:
to y lo ru n ı pabrigir) m ey d a:n ca 0ın n a gecirerler./
The carpet weavers of Nebitdag will h o l d their national toys on the factory’s
grounds.

Even when a speaker uses vvords like 'definitely', 'certainly' or 'never' to deseribe
an intention in this tense, the fact or exact time of the completion of the action may be
uncertain or unknovra.

O j i ömtht Meırn ceen Gonca, x@KMaH Tanap. (G)

/Ol yiğit meni 0öyön bol0o, hökma:n tapar./
If that young man loves me, h e ’ll certainly find me. ['if he loved me']

Eojıap, car Gonyrç. XeKMaH ToraHboa Gapapun. (N)

/Bolya:r, 0ag boluıj. Hökma:n toyurjuSo barann./
Okay, goodbye. F i l definitely c o m e to your vvedding.

C h 3 hh r y n e p My3yHH3 xhm B a rr M eım n re3YMHH en yufleH rHTMea. (G)

/OiSirj gülör yüfiüıjüS hi:c wagt menit) göSiimürj ögünnön gitmeS./
Your laughing face wlll never disappear from my eyes.

The suffix -ap/ep /-ar/er/ sometimes expresses an action which is about to

commence, and thus is equivalent to an Engüsh present continuous tense.

MeH x33Hp re jıe p H H . (H) /Men hâ:8ir gelerin./

I ’m coming now.
 Tense/Aspect 261

Other Uses o f -ap/ep l-arlerl

A frequent usage of the suffîx - a p / e p /-ar/er/ is to express habitually or historically true
actions which are equivaient to the present indefinite tense ('does') in Engli sh. This
usage appears in set phrases, sayings, proverbs and modal formations with reı;ularity;
for example, E o j ı a p ( ~ B o j ı n p ) /Bolor (~ Bolya:r)/ 'Okay ('it will be') . K m m
ö o j ı a p c t i H L o ? /Kim bolorâıııjuS?/ 'Who are you?'

Sup KeMCH3 re3en 6onMa3. (G) /Bir kem0i8 gö8öl bolmoS./

There is no beauty without a flaw.
3 ji 3jih MBap. (H) /El eli yuwor./
One hand washes the other.
O t H HM aca, T y c c e H tiK M a3 . (H) /0 :t y a n m a O a , tü00ö c ık m a S ./
Where there’s no fire, there’s no smoke. ['If a fire does not bum, smoke does not
appear']
Xaüctt T ypK M en n a p a x a T o r y p u n ÖMJiep? (H)
/Hay0x türkmen para:hat oturup biler?/
What Türkmen can sit stili?

Another usage of the suffix -ap/ep /-ar/er/ is to express a nuance of uncertainty or

possibility which, in English, may be interpreted as 'should', 'I think that', may',
'likely to', or the like.

Mhah Miunep e j ı a H Y iuep. (G) /İnni itsler yo:lo düiör./

Now things should fail into place.
3 p nıp dxjihhh3 MeKfleöe renepcHHH3. (G) /Erti:r a:hli:r)i8 mekdebe geler0iı;ı5./
Ali of you should come to school tomorrow.
A j i t h h x ;aH , onap p a 3 U J ia m M a 3 n a p . (G) /Altın ]a:n, olor ra:SılasmaSlar./
A lü n - j a n , I d o n ’ t t b i n k t h e y ’l l a g r e e w i t h u s .

M tıx M a H , H c n e c e Ken u t i n n 6 u n e p . (TV15.5) /Mı:hma:n, İ0le0e köp iyip b ile r ./

A guest m a y eat a lot if he wishes.

The words G o n a p /bolor/ and C o /iM a 3 /bolmoS/ may funetion as predicates in a

sentence in the meanings 'it will be' and 'ıt will not be', or they may funet on as
modal words to confirm the existence or non-existence of something in the meanings
'there will be' and 'there will not be/there is not' (similarly to G a p /ba:r/ and eK /vo:k/;
see 377, 382).

O j i e p fle TypKMeHHH m h j i j ih T a ra M J ia p u Ö o jıa p . (TV3.5)

/Ol yerde tiirkmönüi] milli: tagamları bolor./
There w ill be Türkmen national dishes there.
262 Turkmen Reference Grammar

MyMKitHranap, n a r a m ı e 3 SHecKHHH SMflHpMenf xeKMaHflbip. ^ ym cn , 'ia r a yMHH

3He cyflflH a n ı .1 m eitn e a rn ibi H apce GoJiMaa. (N)
/Mümkü:ngadar, ca:ganı ö:S ene0inirj emdirmeği hökma:nmr. dünkü, £a:ga ücü:n
ene 6ü:dü ya:lı Şeyle yagsi na:röe bolmo8./
As far as possible, the breast-feeding of a child by its ovvn mother is mandatory.
Because, there is nothing as good for a child as mother’s milk.

Contrasting the Future and Present İndefinite

The future indefinite tense in -ap/ep /-ar/er/ and the present indefinite tense in -sp/Map
/-ya:r/yâ:r/ share the usage of expressing an action that is going to take place in the near
future. Hovvever, the future indefinite denotes uncertainty about the completion of an
action, even if the speaker intends to complete it in the future. The present indefinite
conveys a sense of immediacy or certainty that an action will occur in the future.

Future indefinite Present indefinite

M eH ToıoMa ceHH MarupapbiH. MeH ToıoMa ceHH MarbipsrpMH.

Men toyumo 0eni ca:gırarm./ /Men toyumo 0eni ca:gırya:rm.
Fil invite you to my paıty. I’m inviting you to my party.
[for example, next week] [now]

Bh3 6actiM Mapa niflepHc. Ehs X33Hp Mapa rMflüapHC.

Bİ8 ba0un Mara: gideriO./ /BiS hâ:8ir Mara: gidyâ:ri0.
We’re going to Man soon. We’re going to Man now.

Men spnıp TeaTpa niflepıııı. M eH 3pTKp T e a ıp a nifltopHH.

Men erti:r teatra giderin./ /Men erti:r teatra giya:rin.
I’ll go to the theater tomorrow. I’m going to the theater
[probability] tomorrovv. [ceıtainty]

Forms o f the Future indefinite Tense

To indicate this tense, Turkmen adds the suffixes -a p u ıı/ c p ıiH /-arın-orun/erin-örün/
and - a p u c / e p n c /-arı0-oru0/eri0-örü0/ in the first person singular and plural, -a p cb ih /
epcHH /-ar0ıi]-or0ui)/er0it)-ör0ür)/ and - a p c b in u 3/epcHHH 3 /-ar0ır)i8-or0ui]u5/er0ir)i8-
Ör0üj]ü5/ in the second person singular and plural, and - a p / e p /-ar-or/er-ör/ and
- a p jıa p / e p jıe p /-arlar-orlor/erler-örlör/ in the third person singular and plural, to verb
stems. Wlıen a stem ends in a long vowel, that vowel is lengthened and this suffıx is
written -ap /a p /-a:r/a:r/.
Wlıen this suffıx is added to a verb stem ending in a voiceless consonant t /t/ or K
/k/, this consonant becomes voiced A /d/ or r /g/. When a stem ends in ii İyi the
combination of the stem and suffix is written as u p /yar/ or e p /yer/.
 Tense/Aspect 263

nrm eK /gitmek/ to go niflep /gider/ she will go

flapHKMaK /da:nkmak/ to worry flapttrap /da:ngar/ he will wotry
ryÜMaK /guymok/ to pour ryap /guyor/ she will pour
HÜMeK /iymek/ to eat wep /iyer/ he will eat

Adding the suffix - a p / e p /-ar/er/ to a verb whose stem ends in p /r/, results in the
loss of p /r/ and the lengthening of the vowel of the stem to a / s /a:/a:/ or m / h /ı:/i:/.
When this suffix is added to a fevv verb stems ending in p /r/ or j i A/, the final
consonant disappears with a lengthening of the vowels to a / a / o /a:/â:/o:/. However,
both full and contracted forms exist side-by-side in speech and even in vvritten
reflections of speech.

ajmaK /almak/ to take anap/ap /alar/a:r/ s/he will take

6e3^epMeK /bejermek/ to fix 6ex;epep/6exi3p /bejerer/beja:r/
s/he will fıx
6epMeK /bermek/ to give 6epep/6ep /berer/be:r/ s/he will give
öojiMaK /bolmok/ to become 6onap/6op /bolor/bo:r/
s/he will become
renMeK /gelmek/ to come renep/rep /gerer/ge:r/ s/he will come
reTepMeK /götörmök/ reTepep/re-rep /götörör/göta:r/
to bring s/he will bring
re'iypMeK /göcürmök/ renYpep/re’Ofp /göcürör/göci:r/
to move s/he will move (tr.)
ryrapMaK /gutormok/ lyrapap/ıyrap /gutoror/guta:r/
to fınish s/he wül Fınish
flonflypMaK /do:llurmok/ HOJiflypap/flOJiflfeip /do:lluror/do:lh:r/
to fiil s/he will fiil
ÜMTMpMeK /yitirmek/ MnTnpep/MnTKp /yitirer/yiti:r/
to lose s/he will lose
MarbipMaK /ca-.gırmak/ Marbtpap/uarbip /ca:gu-ar/ca:gı:r/
to üıvite s/he will invite
MbncapMaK /çıkarmak/ Ta.iKapap/m,iKap /cıkarar/cıka:r/
to take out s/he will take out

The negative of this suffbc is formed with - M a p /M e p /-mar-mor/mer-mör/ in the

first and second person, but with -Maa/Mea /-maS-moS/meS-möS/ in the third person.
However, the forms -M a n /M a n /-ma:n/mâ:n/ also appear in the first person singular in
the speech of many Türkmen; for example, H3Man /ya8ma:n/ 'I won’t vmte', rMTMaH
/gitmâ:n/ 'I won’t go'. The question partide - m u / m m /-mı/mi/ is added after - a p / e p
/-ar/er/.
For paradigms of the future indefinite tense, see 630-633.
264 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Definite Future Tense

The definite future tense expresses an action that is not realized as yet, but that
certainly will take place, often on a specified date. This tense stresses the certainty,
conviction, finn intention, will, desire or resolve that the action will or will not occur.
In English, this tense is indicated by 'vvill do (something)'.

On aprrap Mapa HiTJK,eK. She’U go to M an tomorrow.

/Ol erti:r Mara: gitjek./

Turkmen indicates the definite future tense by adding the stıffix -M;aK/*;eK /jak/jek/
in the positive and -jrçaK/açeK flajı /jak/jek dâ:l/ in the negative to the stem of a verb.
its main function is to express an action that the speaker is certain will occur in the
future.

A üxaH M M , MeH m y HKHHfla o ö a M m a rHTW ,eK. (G)

/A:yha:nım, men su yakı:nna o:ba:mı6a gitjek./
Ayhamm, I ’ll go to our village very soon.

O H y n r e n e H H H H - r e n M e f lH T H H H B e j u ı M e H 6 n n 3 K ,e K R a n . (G)
/Onui] gelenini-gelmediğini weli men biljek da:l./
However, I w o n ’t k n o w whether he came or not.

Xa tmaii, xa-fla HHaHMa, cemin »MiııynM 6MTHp»;eK flajı, flsjiHflejı florpu xa6ap.
(G) /Ha: man, ha:-da inanma, Oeniıj yumsuıjı bitirjek da:l, dâ:liden dogn habar./
Whether you believe it or not, I won’t finish your work for you, and this is
definite. [flsjiHfleH florptı xa6ap /dâ:liden dogn habar/ '(this is) correct infoımation
from a crazy man' = 'this is definite']

Epn, ÜHnrupMaHM 6aıuapMacan HSflHn übm rtıptın re3i^eK. (N)

/Yeri, yılguxna:m basanna0ar| nâ:dip ydgınp geSjek./
Well, if you can’t manage a smile, how will you go through life smiling?

XoBa 6y ryHeM rarfct rbi3JK,aK eilfliiaH. (H) /Howa: bu:nom gatı gıSjak öydyâ:n./
I tlıink today also will g e t pretty h o t .

MHHH 6wp Myn flOKy3 Aya TorcaH öaunoDfÇH-TorcaH ajrrbiHaçM oKyB ütmHHflaH
öauınan, 6n3m( flYHieBH MeKflermepnMH3KH oıcyB ötuibiHHif floBaMirara floıcy3
ü u n 6on}K,aK. (TPI2.3)
/İnni bir miiıj dokuö yüS tog0on ba:sinji-tog0on altınjı okuw yıünnan basla:p,
biSirj dünyewi mekdeplerimiSirj okuw yjhnırj dowa:mügı dokuS yıl boljok./
Now, starting from the 1995-96 school year, the number of school years of our
secular schools will b e nine years.
 Tense/Aspect 265

MeH rımrçeKİ Xs3Mpnn 03ynne rıiT^eK! (H)

/Men gitjek! Ha:8irirj ö:8ünnö gitjek!/
I m il g a ! I ’ H g o this very moment!

IUy ryHKiı ryn MeH CH3e TYpKMeıuıCTaHflaKbr Bmjimm CHCTeMa Bapafla 6np.<M arfci3
rYPPYH »»un GcpjK,eK. (TP12.3) /Su:nkı gün men 8i5e Türkmönüe6a:nra:kj
bilim diStema ba.'rada birki agıS gürrürj edip berjek./
Today, P il m a k e a b r i e f p r e s e n t a t i o n to you about the educational system in
Türkmenistan.

- Xanqypflu, MeH cana eH e 6wp c o p a r 6 e p * ,e K . (TVI2.4)

/'Haamurdı, men 0arja yene bir 0o:rog berjek."/
"Handurdı, P il ask you one more question."

MeH CH3M X33Hp TypKMeH anMnÖM&I ÖHJieH TaHbIUIALip}K,aK. (TV 1.1)

/Men 0İ8İ hâ:8ir türkmön elipbiyi bilen tanısdırjak./
P il acquaint you now with the Turkmen alphabet.

Baranına Beıuı, my a ım iH ^ u ryn Memen m iuhm Sap, Gapun OHil^eK n;ıfi.

(TV3.4) /Bağışla weli, su altmjı gün menii) irsim ba:r, banp biljek dâ:l./
Soıry, but I ’m busy this Saturday, and I w o n ’ t b e able l o g o .

XaK*;ara3btnb[ eıcex;e ry H n w Tenecen TenecjjoHirnbi K ecjrçeK f ln ö n n , flu s s u iB in

flypjıap. (TV17.2)
/HakjagaSııjı yekeje gün gi:c tölö0ör) telefonui)i ke0jek diyip, dıSasıp du:rlor./
If you pay your bili just one day late, they keep after you, saying tlıey’11 cut off
your telephone.

Contrasting the Definite Future and Future indefinite

The basic distinetion betvveen the definite future and the indefinite future tens; s is the
attitude of the speaker toward the certainty that the action vvill occur. With the definite
future, the speaker regards the completion of the stili unrealized action as a o:rtainty,
vvhereas vvith the future indefinite, the speaker may be equally certain about the
completion of the action in the future, but has not focused on the timi: of its
completion, such that its completion cannot be regarded as certain or knovvn.5

The terms "definite future" and "future indefinite" represent a provisional solution to the problem of
labding the distinetion betvveen these tenses. Both -H^aK/^eıc /-jak/jek/ and -ap/ep /-ar/er/ er.Dress the
future tense and the indefinite aspect, with the distinetion that -açaıt/açeK /-jak/jek/ indicatıis certain
action at some indefinite poinı in the future and ~ap/ep /-ar/er/ uncertain action at some mdefînite
point in the future. Thus, the first properly would be termed "definite future indefinite" or "certain
future indefinite" and the second "indefinite future indefinite" or "uncertain future indefinite,” any of
which might prove more confiısing than the terms adopted here.
266 Türkmen Reference Grammar

There are other distinctions in the use of the two tenses. Often, the future indefinite
is used vvhen an action is performed out of a sense of duty or obligation, vvhereas the
definite future is used when a future action is regarded simply as a fact. The defınite
future tends to be used more often in the negative than in the positive. Another factor
in its usage is that whereas ali speakers use the future indefinite, even for actions which
they may regard as cenain to occur, only some speakers use the definite future and only
in some situations.

Definite Future Future indefinite

MeH a p T H p MeK#e6e nrnseıc. M eH 3prHp MeKfleSe ntnepHH.

/Men ertirr mekdebe gitjek./ /Men erti:r mekdebe giderin./
I’!! go to school tomorrow. FU go to school tomorrow.
[fact] [duty]

Bh3 eKUienöe ryHH TeaTpa E h 3 eraueHÖe ryH M TeaTpa

n rn ç e K fls jı. n rrM e p H C .
/Bi8 yeksenbe gtinii teatra /BiS yeksenbe günü teatra
gitjek da:l./ gitmeriö./
We won’t go to the theater We won’t go to the theater
Sunday. [fact] Sunday. [not an obligation]

Forms o f ıhe Definite Future Tense

To indicate the definite future tense, Türkmen adds the suffıx -jrçaK/jrçeK /-jak-jok/Jek-
jök/ in the positive to the stem of a verb. This suffix does not take personal endings.
Person and number are stated in the proper name, noun or pronoun that serves as
subject of the sentence, or is understood from context.
As a rule, the negative modal word Han /da:]/ is placed after the tense suffix and
written separately; however, some Türkmen may insert the negation partide -Ma/Me
/-ma/me/ after the stem and before this suffix in their writing and speech. The question
partide - m u / m h /-mı/mi/ is attached directly to the tense suffix or to the negation
partide.
For paradigms of the definite future tense, see 634-637.
Mood
The category of mood concems the way action is presented, whether it is presented as a
fact (indicative), or as a suggested, commanded or requested action (imperative), or as
an attitude toward real action (conditional) or toward unreal action (subjunctive), or as a
desired or hoped-for action (desiderative). The indicative mood is reflected in the
present, past and futııre tenses which are treated above (see 217). The conditional and
subjunctive moods also may be reflected in the present, past and future tenses. On the
other hand, the imperative and desiderative moods refer to an immediate present or
future. This section treats the imperative, conditional, subjunctive and desiderative
moods, as well as the suffixes of desire, intention, obligation and permission vvhich
express nuances of mood, and various modai formations vvhich reflect the speaker’s
attitude or ability regarding the action.

imperative Mood
The imperative mood expresses the speaker’s suggestion, urging, command, request,
vvish or instruction regarding the perfoımance of an action. One way to characterize the
functions of this mood is that the first person imperative mood conveys a suggestion
or urging (also called voluntative-hortative mood), the second person a command or
request (imperative mood proper), and the third person a vvish or instruction (optaıive-
instructive mood). Of course, other nuances are possible.
Turkmen possesses the follovving basic forms for the first, second and third persons,
both singular and plural, of the imperative mood. Other forms and distinctions are
described below.

Person Singular Plural

1 -aMbnt/eÜMH /-aym/eyin/ -ajıt[(n)/emf(n) /-alı(:rj)/eli(:ıj)/

2 (no ending) -hh / hh /-ıqArj/

3 -cuh/ chh /-Öın/Oin/ -CMHJiap/cmmep /-0ınlar/0inler/

268 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

First Person Imperative

The first person imperative mood usually expresses a suggestion or an urging to
perform an action.

MeH CH3H 3HeM-aTaM 6ıuıeH Let me introduce you to my parents.

TaHbiıuAtıpaiiuH. /Men 0i5i
enem-ata:m bilen tanısdıraym./

Cw3e rwann, TeneBH3op repMaım. Let’s (two) go to your place and

/0i8e gidip, te!ewi8or göreli./ watch television.
reJBtn my c a 3t ı 6ıme ahhji3ühh. Come on, let’s (ali) listen to this
/Gelii) su 8a:5ı bile dirjla:li:ıj./ music together.

Türkmen forms the first person imperative by addition of suffixes to the stems of
verbs for the singular (-a ü tiH /e Ö H H /-ayuı/eyin/), dual ( - a n u / e j ı u /-alı/eli/) and plural
( - a j ı u n / e J i H n /-alı:q/eli:q/) numbers in the positive, and -M a ö b in /M a İİH H /-ma:ym/
mâryin/, - M a jib i/M a jiH /-ma:lı/mâ:li/, -M a J ib tr ç /M 3 J U iq /-ma:lı:i)/mâ:U:i)/) in the
negative. In this person, a speaker suggests doing something alone (singular), or
suggests or urges one person (dual) or more than one person (plural) to do something
vvith him or her. The plural also may be used as a polite form for two persons (dual).
English equivalents for the first person are 'let me/shall I/should I/why don’t I do
(something)?' (singular), 'let us/shall we/should we/why don’t vve do (something)'
(dual/plural).

MeH cana T33e flypMyuı yrpynna repeuıfisH a^aMnaptt repKe3eitUH. (G)

/Men öaıja ta:Se durmuş ugrunno görösyâ:n ardamlan göritöSeyin./
Let me show you men vvho are struggling for a nevv life.
- ry p ö a H M y x a M M e fr , M eH CH 3fleH 6np 3 a r copattbiH-Jia. (TV 12.4)
/"Gurba-.nmuhommet, men 6i58en bir 8a:t 8o:ra:ym-la."/
"Gurbanmuhammet, let me ask you something, ali right?"
M eH 6y ö a p a f l a o 3 a n K b i H b iK H iu jıa p tiM fla a tif lb u if ltiM , raitTaiian o T y p M a i i u ı ı .
(N) /Men bu ba:rada oSolkı çıkışlarımda aydıpdım, gaytaia:p otuımatyın./
I told about this in my previous speeches, don’t let me keep repeating myself.
Mm flH f lc e n m y j i f l y p a H v a i f a a H 6 n p ıc a c e iimcühh. (TV15.5)
/İ£ diyöei) sul duron £a:ydan bir kâ:0e iceyin./
If you vvant me to drink, Fil have a cup of this tea sitting here. ['Let me drink']
M e H ... e H e 6 u p r a i h u ı ı a c a H a . M e H X 3 3 n p m a f i b i n - a u ı y H t ı . (TV3.3)
/Men...yene bir gaytalaOana. Men ha:Sir ya8ayın-a: sum./
I...would you say it again? Let me vvrite it dovvn now.
 Mood 269

Oh ütuiflaH SspM 6np xonofliuıı>HMrnMH3 6ap. By xerwe MiuneMecMHH tohum.

HsMe 3TceMK3M? Ts3ecıiHH a jıa ftu H M b i a peMOHT 3 T n n p e ftn n M iı? (Tl 7 2)
/0:n yıllan bâ:ri bir holodilnigimiS ba:r. Bu hepde İ:sleme0ini goydı. Nâ:me
e00emka:m? Tâ:5e0ini alayınmı ya: remont etdireyinmi?/
We’ve had our refrigerator for ten years. ît stopped vvoıking this week. I vvonder
what I should do? Should I get a new one or have it repaired?

Ten, ona 6 H p a 3 r a p a o ı a j ı u . (G) /Gel, oıjo bira:6 garasalı./

C’mon, let’s wait for him a bit.

Ten, tok vaü ypajıu! (BG) /Gel, gö:k ca:y urolı!/

C’mon, let’s grab some green tea!

Bm3 6«p ap3yBWHjı «maMJiap, 5I3HH aflaMJiap, rejine ap3yn afleJiMH, roiJ, C:ofleneM
6mp ce3, 6np ceTup ranctm! (N) /Bİ8 bir arSuwcul a:damlar, ya8ya:n a:darnlar,
gelil) aröuw edeli:ıj, goy, biSSenem bir 0Ö8, bir 0etir ga:10ın!/
We are people full of fantasies, people who write- come, let’s spin our faınasies,
let them go, and may one word, even one line remaiıı behind us. ['Let’s
fantasize']

Suggestion or urging may be expressed in the second person (with moda 1 words)
and in the third person of the imperative as well.

C eH m y h iu h r y T a p , G o n a p ıu tı? F i n i s h th is w o r k , o k a y ?
/0 e n s u i:s i g u to r , b o ly a :r m ı? /

O n n ıy h îiih ry T a p c b iH . L e t h im f in i s h th is w o rk .
/O l s u i:s i g u to r ö u n ./

Forms o f ıhe First Person imperative

Türkmen indicates the singular imperative by adding the suffix - a ttu H /e Ü M H /-aym-
oyun/eyin-öyün/ to verb stems. When the stem ends in a vovvel, this vovvel Jcngthens
tp a/a /a:/a:/, and the suffix is written -aiiLiıı/ainııı /-a:ym/â:yin/. The 1 dual
imperative is -anu/ejiH /-alı-olı/eli-ölii/ for verbs ending in a consonant, but -a;ıtı/
ajiH /-a:lı/â:li/ for verbs ending in a vovvel; and the 1 plural imperative is -aJibin/e.riMH
/-ah:g-olı:i]/eli:rj-ölü:q/, and -anun/anun /-a:lı:q/a:Ii:rj/, respectively.
The plural first person imperative has an inherent long vovvel in the second syllable
(-ajibnı/enuii /-alı:ıj-oh:i]/eh:j]~ölü:i]/). Moreover, addition of these suffixes te verbal
stems ending in the vovvels a /a/ or e /e/ lengthens those vowels to /a:/ and /a:/. The
same process applies when these suffixes are added to the negation partide -Ma/ıvıe
/-ma/me/.
270 Turkmen Reference Grammar

let me look at reaiMÜHH /göSlâryin/

let’s (two) look at resnramt /gö81â:li/
let’s (ali) look at resrranMit /göSlâ:li:r)/
let me not look at rearıeM atim ı /gö81emâ:yin/
let’s (two) not look at resneMmm /göSlemaüi/
let’s (ali) not look at reaneMsımn /göSlemâ:li:i]/

In the written language, addition of these suffîxes to verbal stems with final ii /y/
results in the letter combinations Ha /ya/ and Se /ye/ which must be spelled as n /ya/
and e /ye/; for example, ro^iibiıı /goyoyun/ 'let me put' < roû+flÜMH, itesin /iyeli/
'let’s (two) eat' < Hü+esı», ete.
To form the negative, the partide -M a /M e /-ma/me/ is added directly to the verbal
stem, and in combination with these suffixes is written -MatftiH/MaiiHH /-m a:yın/
ma:yin/, -MaJibi/MaJiH /-ma:lı/mâ:li/ and -Majıtın/M a/ııın /-ma:lı:rj/mâ:li:rj/. The
question partide -mu/mu /-mı/mi/ is placed after the imperative suffix.

Second Person imperative

The second person imperative mood expresses a command or a request for one or more
persons to perform an action.

CeH B am ınfla ren! Come on time!

/0en wagtınna gel!/

On oTypn>wfla OTypıvıa! Don’t sit in that chair!

/Ol oturgucdo oturmo!/

CeH BarrtiHfla renrHHİ You gotta come on time!

/9en wagtuma gelgin!/

Y sa K re 3 M e ra H ! You mustn’t walk too long!

/U8ok geSmegin!/

Cm3 uamuıma rejıwn! Please come on time!

/0İ8 wagtuına gelir)!/ [or plural: Come on time!]

^Ihhhm MeKMaıt! Please don’t smoke!

/Çilim cekmârr)!/ [or plural: Don’t smoke!]

Turkmen indicates three degrees of formality or intensity of command through the

use of suffıxes or intonation. The least formal or sometimes most urgent command is
indicated vvith the verb stem alone, that is, without the addition of any suffix
(ineluding the infinitive suffix - M a s / M e n /-mak/mek/), in the positive, and the
 Mood 271

negation partide -M a /ın e /-ma/me/ in the negative. This level corresponds to English
'do (something)', where intonation and context moderates the urgency of command.

Mkh aflaM n 6 e p n n , 06 a x a 6 a p 3 T. (G) /İki a:dam i:berip, o:ba: habar et./

Send two men and let the village know.

Mite, m y ra m ım n rap, xjf'î 3aıjjaH ropKMa. (G)

/İne, su gapıdan gi:r, hi:2 5a:tdan gorkmo./
Now, g o t h r o u g h this door and d o n ’t b e a f r a i d of anything.

- Jî k k b i r e n im r a a e n k u m ? - O ji c e m m m ıın n flaJi, x o B jıy fla n MbtK. (N )

/'Yagkı gelip giden kim?" "Ol Benirj i:siıj dâ:l, howludon cık."/
"Who’s that who just came and left?" "It’s none of your business, get out o f my
yard."

Bince, ceH to h r a r ^ e K G on can, M ana 3K.au 3 T , GonapMH? (T15.3)

/Bi:ke, Ben toyo gitjek bolöoi], mai]a Jaq et, bolya:rmı?/
Bike, if you’re gonna go to the toy, cali me, okay?

To express insistence, although not impolitely, Turkmen adds the suffix -nm /m H
/-gın/gin/ in the positive and - M a r u n / M e r a H /-magm/megin/ in the negative to verb
stems. An appropriate English equivalent is the colloquial 'you gotta do (something)'.

6m e Ban, nypcaT G ep rH H . By c o B a n a n c a T fla n .

X h - i >im , 6 o - x o ! I I a T tm ıa x iiM ,
(N) /Hı-ım, bo-ho! Pa:tılahım, biSe wagt, puröot bergin. Bu 0owa:l ar)0a:t da:l./
Wow-eeI Y o u g o t t a g iv e us some time, a moment, my ruler. This question isn’t
easy.

To address a command or request to more than one person, or a more formal or

polite level of command to one or more persons, Turkmen adds the suffix - mh/ hh
/-ırj/irj/ in the positive and -Man/Man /-ma:r)/mâ:r)/ in the negative to stems of verbs.

3 p r o p y*iYHH3-fle oKyBa r e n e n ra fle r a m T 3MH3 6 o n y n r e jm n . (G)

/Ertirr ücüi]ü8-Sö okuwo gelerjiSSe gatı ta:mi:8 bolup gelir;./
And when the three of you come to school tomorrow, come very clean.

^aM ajı flypfltıeBHa, 3pnıp florptı c a ra T y ^ e Mana rapambirç. (G)

flamaıl Durdı-.yevna, ertr.r dogn 0a:gat iiödö marja garaîıi)./
Jamal Durdıyevna, wait for me at three o’clock sharp tomorrow.

Ey Mecenene Taarttn hk h yaçyıaın 6apjn.in.iHH xn'i xavaH stTflaH 'junapMan.

(N) /Bu meOelede tayagıg iki u:junug ba:rlıgmı hi:c hacan ya.'tdan çıkarma: rj,/
In this problem, n e v e r f o r g e t that a stick has two points.
272 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Ü 3i>DK;ı>iJiap, c ı r a H iy H H x a n ı c a M IIaT a p a c t r a f l a B a r U 3 - H e c H x a T
3«hh, rapamctra JopnyMtrabin eHYHUe aypaH a n tp r y ıra Be3nnenepw M©3M3re
HineHHHp raTHaiBUH. Cn3MH C03YHM3HH TSCMpHHim HHH3H yjlyflMTİIHH yHJTMaH.
C h 3 03 B a T a H tın M S b i r o j i f l a n , ıu o r ç a B e n a j i b i 6onyn. ( N )
/YaSıjdar, 6İ8 sum halka düsünnürür), i:la:t a:ra6ınna wagı8-ne0i:hat edii), garas0ı5
yu:rdumu8ui) öıjünnö duron â:giıt ulı we5i:peleri £ö8mâ:ge i:sei)r)ir gatnasu). 0i5irj
6ö8ürjüSüi) tâ:6r.riniq isjijâ-.n uluduğum unutma-,rj. 6İ8 5:8 Watamr)i8ı golla:i), soıjo
wepa:lı bolug./
Writers, explain this to the people, spread the word among the population, take
an active part in resolving the very great tasks that face our independent country.
Don’t forget what a great influence your words have. You must support and be
loyal to your Homeland.

TepYH, on Menim ereHMM, re3JiepHHe cepejmn, Mana-fla Men3e$3HflMp. (H)

/Görür), ol menii] yeğenim, göSlörünö ©eredir), maıja-da mer|Seya:nnir./
See, that’s my nephew. Look at his eyes, I think he looks like me too.

Hlon epjıepfle repcenH3, HaMe, copawAupun, 6enıc3M xyflafi 6apfltıp-fla, öeıncsM

TanttnctiH-fla, xob. (TV13.3) /Sol yerlerde gör€öi]ü5, nâme, 0o:rosdurui), belkâ:m
hudary ba:rdır-da:, belkarm tapılOınna, ho:w,/
If you see him anywhere, you know, ask around, maybe there really is a god,
hey-maybe he really should be found.

In addition to these three degrees of formality, intensity or number, Turkmen may

add the suffixes - c a H b i3 J ia n /c e n M 3 .n a n /-0arjı81a:r)/0erji51a:x)/ or - c a H a /c e H e /-0ana/
Sene/, the suffix of permission - a f t / a i i /-a:y/â:y/ (see 297), or the partide - H a /f la
/-da:/dâ:/ (see 459) to the forms of the second person imperative to express various
shades of command and request.

rejıceı<H3Ji3H. /Gel0exji81â:i)./ Would you please come?

IejıceHe. /Getöene./ Would you come?
Tensü. /Gelâ:y./ Why not come?
Tensüım. /Gelâ:yii)./ Why don’t you come?
renHH-fls. /Gelirj-da:./ Come, okay?

To tum a command into a very polite request when speaking in formal situations or
in asking strangers to do something, Turkmen may add the suffix -canbiajıarç/
ceuıi3Ji3H /-0ar)iSla:r)-0oi)u81a:i)/0ei]i81â:r)-0öi)ü81â:r)/ (variant: -cantl3-jıa/ceHM3-ne
/-0ar)i8-la-0or)u8-lo/0er|i8-le-0öi)ü8-lö/), which is composed of the second person plural
of the conditional mood sufftx plus the partide -jıa/jıe /-la/le/, to the stem of a verb.
 Mood 273

With the suffix -cana/cene /-0ana/0ene/, which is based on the second person singular
pronoun ceH-/0en/ 'you', a speaker encourages a family member or familiar person to
do something, as in English 'wouid yoıı do (something)?'

Mana öHpHeMe Mafl rytöcana. (G) /Marja bimeme £a:y guyöono./

Would you pour me a bit of tea?

AÖTcana, H3Me öojıynfltıp? (H) /Ay00ana, nâ:me bolupdur?/

Would you teli me what’s happened?

- ConaHLiH Tene4>oH HOMepHHH aüfltm Gepcoııe. MeHfle eıc. (TV17.4)

/"âonatnııj telefon nomerini aydıp beı0ene. Menne yo:k."/
"Would you teli me Soııa’s telephone number? I don’t have it."

These degrees of intensity are illustrated in the following series of commands made
by an insistent host to his guest.

E ııp a3ax;ı>iK H Ü c e ııe . WouId you eat a little?

/Bir a:5ajık iyöene./
Onsa 6ııp Kace nail nq-aa. In that case, drink a cup of tea, oka j ?
/Onno bir ka:0e ca:y i£-dâ:./
tJaS MM3Ö 6ııp Kace. Why not drink some tea, one cup?
/Ca:y ica:y bir ka:0e./
Cyü^Y11311. 't3® mh! (TV18.3) Have some sweets, drink some tea!
/0ü:jıilâ:p, ca:y ic!/

A command also may be made using the first and third person imperative ;,uffixes.
In the first person, such a command may be addressed to oneself as a form of resolve
and dedication, while in the third person, the command may be a form of insistance
that one or more persons perform an action. Usually, the modal word x o K M a n
/hökma:n/ 'definitely, certainly', vvhich expresses obligation, is used wi:n such
commands.

Men my hiuh xoKMan I definitely must finish

/Men su
ry r a p a ü tiH -jıa ! this work!
i:§i hökma:n gutoroyun-lo!/
CeH my hiuh xoKMaH ryTap! You definitely must finish
/0en 5u i:5i hökma:n gutor!/ this workl
O ji my hiuh xökm3h She definitely must fınish
/Ol 5u i:si
ry r a p c M H ! this work!
hökma:n gutoröun!/
274 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Forms o f the Second Person imperative

Türkmen indicates the informal/singular imperative through the use of the stem of the
verb without any suffix in the positive and the addition o f the negation partide -Ma/Me
/-ma/me/ in the negative.
The suffix of insistence is -ruH/rHH /-gm -gun/gun-gün/ in the positive and
-MaruH/MeruH /-magm-mogun/megin-mögün/ in the negative.
The second person formal/plural is indicated by adding -mh/hh /-ııj-ug/ig-ür)/ to
the stem of a verb. When the stem ends in a vowel, that vowel lengthens to a / a /a:/â:/t
and the suffix is written -an/an /-a:rj/â:ı]/. The same process applies with the addition
of the negation partide -Ma/nıe /-ma/me/, which is written -Malt/Man /-ma:r|/ma:rj/.

Third Person imperative

The third person imperative expresses a wish, suggestion or instruction that someone
perform an action. English equivalents incinde 'let/may (someone) do' and 's/he/it/they
should do (something)'.

ToJİ, on X33npnn a3Yitne Let him go to school right now.

MeKfleöe rırrcHH. [or: 'He should go to school right now']
/Goy, ol ha:5irir) ö:Sünnö
mekdebe gi00in./

Eııyn aK 6oncyn! Good luck! ~ Have a good tripî

/Yo:lui] a:k bol0un!/ ['May your road be white!']

Onap 6y oiohm repcyıınep. They should see this play.

/Olor bu 03mnı gör0ünlör./ [or: 'Let them see this play']

Türkmen indicates the third person imperative with the suffix -c b iıı/c H iı /-em/0in/
in the singular and -c w H Jia p /c M H Jie p /-0jnlar/6inler/ in the plural, with the negative
forms -M a c b iH /M e c H H /-ma0m/me0in/ and •M acuıiJiap/M ecH iınep /-m aöınlar/
meOinler/, respectively. The basic function of the third person imperative is to express
the wish, suggestion or instruction that someone will perform an action or that an
action will occur. Most commonly, its English equivalent is 'may/let (someone/
something) do'.

Eh3 6wp ap3yB<n.m aflaMJiap, sm n aflaMnap, renim ap3yB Sflenmı, roif, 6n3fleneM
6wp C03, Sup cerop rajıcbiıı! (N) /Bİ8 bir ar8uwcul a:damlar, ya8ya:n ardamlar,
gelii} arSuvv edelirj, goy, biSSenem bir 0öS, bir Setir ga:10ın!/
We are people fiili of fantasies, people who write, come, let’s spin our fantasies,
let them go, and may one word, even one üne remain behind us. ['Let’s
fantasize']
 Mood 275

FoS, H H ca h h cu h , 6M3e H3Me. (G) /Goy, yanBa yanOın, biSe nâ:me./

So, let it burn, what do we care?

- BpuraflMpnepH H9Xmhh caJ}nafltmH3? - Ilim aıar doncyıı, nunantt BojıcyH

jprifHn GeııneflHK. (G)
/'Brigadirieri nâ:hili 0ayladıjjı5?" "Pılarnı boldun, pıla:nı bolBun diyip belledik."/
"How did you elect brigate-leaders?" "We appointed them by saying, 'Let so-and-
so be one, let so-and-so be another one'."

Mite Xyflaa ıuyKYP ®aP hiuhmh3, xeMMe flHiuıepHn daptıctm a trrrtıa p 6ep.nn.
Ö n M e c H H , y 3aK a m a ç t ı n . (TV18.1) /İne Hudarya şükür ba:r i:simiS, hemme
di:nlerii] ba:rı0uıa ıgtıyarr berdi. ÖlmöOün, u8ok ya:sa0m./
Well, thank God, he [S. Nıyazov] gave us freedom for everything, for each and
every religion. May he not die, may he live long.

cana 6y ^aH iiM -T eH H M İ (TV18.2)

TypKMeHMCTaH ATa-BaTaHMM , r y p S a n 6 o n c y H
/Türkmönü00a:n Ata-watanım, gurba:n bol0un 0aıja bu jarnrnı-tenim!/
Türkmenistan, my Fatherland, let my soul and body be a sacrifîce for you!

The third person imperative also expresses an instruction or indirect command that
someone should perform an action. Since this usage often entails making a suggestion
or giving advice, it may be seen as an extension of the primary funetion of wishing or
suggesting that some action vvill occur. In these cases, appropriate English equivalents
are 's/he/it/they should do (something)' or 'let him/her/it/they do (something)'.

On 6H3HIÎ 6pHraflaMti3tın narra MettflaHJiaptiHM repMeKTO 6onca, spntp ıny epe

re n c H H . (G) /Ol biSig brigada:nu8ır) pagta meydanlarını gönnökcü bol0o, erti:r su
yere gelOin./
If he vvould like to see the cotton fıelds of our brigade, he should come here
tomorrow.

Mbipar renx,eKflnp- On rence, Mana rapaıubin nypcyn. (G)

/Eje, Mırart geljekdir. Ol gelöe, marja garasıp duıBun./
Mother, Mırat is supposed to come. When he does, have him vvait for me.
['he should vvait for me']

roücana, ra3, MaMtiHH 6«p MMCHH-ne. (G)

/Goy0ono, gı:8, caryuıı bir ic0in-le./
Leave him be, girl, and at least let him have his tea, ali right? ['he shoııld
drink']

Xa3Hp xoBnyKMan, p a c a rn c H M n a n re n c H H . (G)

/Ha:8ir howlukma:rj, ra:0 alkımlarp gel0in./
Now, don’t rush it, just let him come a little eloser. ['he should come']
276 Turkmen Reference Grammar

CopacbiHJiap, uıon Sup flnttx;ernMM flHepHH flypapHH. (G)

/0o:ro0unlor, sol bir diyjegimi diyerin durorun./
Let them ask, Fil keep saying the same thing I intended to say. ['they should
ask']

MemiHK miuh 6 ap a#atnjıap c a ra T 5-fle rejiCH H . (N )

/Menlik i:si ba:r a:damlar 0a:gat 5-de gel0in./
People who have business with me s h o u l d c o m e at 5.

HIoji epnepfle repcenm, HeMe, copaıufltıpun, 6enK3M xy#aif Sapfliip-fla, öejncaM

TanbiJicLiH-fla, xob. (TV13.3) /Sol yerlerde gör0öıjii8, neme, 0o:rosdurur),
belka:m hudaty ba:rdır-da:, belka:m tapılOınna, ho:w./
If you see him anywhere, you know, ask around, maybe there really is a god, hey-
maybe h e really s h o u l d b e f o u n d .

Forms o f the Third Person imperative

To form the third person singular imperative, Turkmen adds the suföx - c u h / c h h /-0ın-
6un/0in-0ün/ to stems of verbs. The plural is formed by adding + j ı a p / j ı e p /+ lar-
lor/ler-lör/ to this suffix.
The negative of the third person imperative is formed by adding the partide -M a/& ıe
/-ma/me/ between the verb stem and - c m h / c h h /-0m/0in/, - c L i H J ia p /c m u ıe p /-Omlar/
Sinler/, while a question is formed by adding the partide -mu/mh /-mı/mi/ to these
suffbces.
For paradigms of the imperative mood suffixes, see 638-641. The suffixes - a i i / a t i
/-a:y/â:y/, - u 6 e p / n 6 e p /-ıber/iber/ and - a B e p ( H )/e B e p (n ) /-awer(i)/ewer(i)/ freqquently
appear wiüı forms of the imperative mood (see 297, 316).
 Mood 277

Conditional Mood
The conditional mood indicates the speaker’s attitude toward the perfonnar.ee of real
action. In this mood, a condition is placed on an action; if the condition can be met or
will be met, then the action is regarded as real. Real action must be distingui.shed from
unreal or unfulfillable action which is expressed in the subjunctive mood (see 287).

On copaca, Men aflflaptiH. If he asks, I’ll teli him.

/Ol 0o:ro0o, men aydann./

Copaca/ıap, aü,aapuH. If they ask, I teli them.

/8o:ro8olor, aydyatrın./

Türkmen indicates the conditional mood by adding the suffıx - c a /c e /- 8a/'3e/ in the
positive and -M a c a /M e c e /-ma8a/me0e/ in the negative, plus personal endings, to the
verb stem. As in English, the clause containing a verb in tlıe conditional mood is
subordinated to the clause expressing the main action. The verb of the ma in clause
carries the suffix indicating the present indefinite ( - a p / ü a p /-ya:r/yâ:r/) or future
indefinite ( - a p / e p /-ar/er/, rarely -JK,aK/iK,eK /-jak/jek/) tense, or occasioııally the
imperative mood suffixes.

X aB a, c fc in a r ÖepM Jice, 6 ji3 n n ıu y xanH M M 3 a n a l ı c a r e p e K . (G )

/Havva, 8 ı:lag berilöe, biBiıj su ha'.lr.mıS ala:y6 a gerek./
Yes, i f a prize is g iv e n , this carpet of ours i s l i k e l y t o g e t it.

06an o M eTH imeıı r e j ı n n T a j ı a n rM T c e jıe p H a fim u rç e ıı. (G)

/0 :ba:tj o cetinnen gelip ta:la:p gi98eler nâ;biljek./
How w ill you know i f they come from that side of the village, break in and
run away?

« X a ı m r e p e jııı, cL U iaH tm ıtm rep ce M , 6 np 3aT H biK ca, HHbiHa re n e p M H » flilöflM.

(N) /"Ham gö rö lü , 6 ı:nanısıp g ö rö ö m , b ir Sa:t cıköa, ya:nııja ge le rin " diydi./
He said "Well, we’ll see. When I give it a try, if anything happens, I ’ll coıne to
you."

- M tıp a jib i, 6 y A ü T ry ü b iH b iH x a H U r a p p a n f ltıp . Onu a M u p c a n , e p jo ıe k m m a

r o s p u c ? (H )
/"Mıra:h, bu Aytgnyı:mq ha:ni garraıpdır. Onı ayır8 ak, yerine kimi goyoruı3?"/
"Mırah, this Khan of Aytguyı has grown old. I f we remove him, who are 've
going to put in his place?"
278 Turkmen Reference Grammar

EpK, 6h HiıifleH xeM aüptmeaM, e n e e n ıo t rapaM tnu flo n a n ap n u t t m

o ü n a n sıp u H . (N ) [6 h = 6 y ] / Y e ri, b i irsden h em a y n lö a m , y e n e öıjkü ga ra yıs
d o io n o r d iy ip o y lo n y a rn n ./ [b i = b u :]
Well, îf I q u it this job, I thin k that the previous outlook is going to retum again.

O h h B3YH aY3eTMeceH, xmm khm nY3eTMe3>xaH oryn. (BH)

/Om ö:8ürj diiSötmöööi], hi:£ kim dü5ötmö5, ham oğul./
I f you do n ’t co rrect it yourself, no one else will co rrect it, dear son.

XaBa, 3cacbi h i o j i 3dxmct HeKeeK, to b h HimıeceK, roBtı ıım nan nypcaK,

flypMaH majıan flypcaK, aÜJiMK, xyaaa myKyp, eTİiap. (TV7.4)
/Hawa, e0a:8ı sol 8â:hmet cek0ek, gowı i:sle0ek, gowı i:sla:p durOok, durmam
i:sla:p duröok, a:ylık huda:ya Şükür, yetyâ:r./
Yes, basically if we do that labor, if we vvork well, if we keep vrarking well, if
we keep vvorking without stopping, the salary, thank God, is enough.

Ilîon epjıepfle ropcerjua, Heıne, copamjjbipbnı, gejncsM xyflaö Bap/jtıp-fla, 6ejiK3M

TantmcEm-fla, xob. (TV13.3) /Sol yerlerde gör0örjü8, neme, 0o:rosduruq, belkâ:m
huda:y ba:rdır-da:, belka:m tapılOınna, ho:w./
I f you see him anywhere, you know, ask around, maybe there really is a god, h ey -
maybe he really should be found.

Xa*c*;ara3Em&ı elcejfçe ryn n n TOJieceif Tenecponhiiibi KecaçeK RMÜm, nbn anıtın

Aypnap. (TV17.2)
/HakjagaSırjı yekeje gün gi:c tölöOör) telefonurjı ke0jek diyip dıSasıp du:rlor./
I f you pay your bili just one day late, tbey keep after you, saying they’il cut off
your telephone.

3jı6exne, 6y m m oünanbnıibiKjibi 3TceK, xeMMenepnn 63x6nz?MHe Cojıap.

(TV12.4) /Elbetde, bu i:si o:ylonusukh e00ek, hemmelerir) bâ:hbi:dine bolor./
O f course, if we do this in a weli thought out way then it wi!l be to the benefit of
everyone.

The main verbs o f sentences with conditional clauses usually are in the present and
future tenses because the past cannot be changed, so that m ost condıtions o f the past
would refer to unreal action (subjunctive mood). However, the conditional clause may
be placed in the past if speaking of a specific action in the past.

C o p a c a M , aÜTMaflHH. I f I a s k e d , y o u d id n ’ t te li m e .
/9o:ro0om , aytmadııj./ [sense: 1 don’t re m em b er i f I asked ]
C o p a n c a , aüxa;aK flbi. I f a s k e d , h e plan n ed to te li them .
/0o :ro l 0o, aytja kd ı./
 Mood 279

TypKM eH nepun r a p a n ıc t B i r a m r y ro ıe 6jtn en flan-ne r y n 6ıraeH r a p m tı a n M a r u

6 o n c a , 6y xajna>m T eıcflen e ÜHKtmaHjıaH co n p a, ra p a m c tra jıtırirn r e iM e n m e
ryHyHH ca n a n r a p a ıu a n n tır tı ymmh m etin e öoJTMaraM axM aım tıp. (N )
/T ürkm önlörürj gara50ı81ıgı g ü llö b ile n d â :l-le g ü l b ile n g a rsı a lm a ğ ı bo!0 o, bu
h alkırj G ö :k d e p e y ık ıla n n a n 0oi]ro, garas0ı6h gıi] g e h n e g in e gününü 8a:na:p
g a ra sa n lıg ı ü£ü:n ş e y le b o lm o g o m ahm a:llır./
I f the Türkmen met independence with flowers and not with bullets, probably it
was so because this people had been counting the days waiting for independence to
come since Gökdepe was destroyed. [past tense because of the past participle in
rapamannEtK /garasanlık/]

A Türkmen conditional clause also may be equivalent to an English subordinate

clause of time in the sense of 'when one does (something)', rather than of 'if one does
(something)'.

3*;e, M tıp a T reıt*;eKflHp. O n r e n c e , M ana ra p a ın tın flypcyH . (G )

/Eje, Mıra:t geljekdir. Ol gel0e, marja garasıp duröun./
Mother, Mırat is supposed to come. W hen he does, have him wait for me.

«Xam>t repejm , c t m a n t ı m b i n r e p c e M , 6«p 3ar vtiKca, m am a renepnH»

(N) /"Hanı görölü, Oırnanısıp görOöm, bir 8a:t cık0a, ya:nırja gelerin" diydi./
He said "Well, we’ll see. When I give it a try, if anything happens, Fil come to
you."

F o k eHYM nepHH, Hp-MÜMHiunepMH K e n 6 o n c a , M a n fla p M u n u K xeM ocMsp.

(TP12.2) /Gö:k ö:nümlörür), i:r-iymisleriq köp bo!0o, ma:lla:rcılık hem ö0yar./
When you have a lot of crops and fruit, animal husbandry also develops.

3rep peMOHT MiujıepH remıpsıjıce, cyB KecHre*;eK 6o n ca , erçYHneH ra 3 e rn e p fle a

(TV17.2) /Eger remont iısleri gecirilO e,
TeneBJtqeHHefle xam ca x a 6 ap öepMJiüsp.
0uw keSiljek bolOo, örjünnön gaSetlerde ya: telewideniyede halka habar berilyâ:r./
When repair works are done, if the water is to be tumed off, word is given
beforehand to the people in the nevvspapers or on television.

Addition of the habitual past tense suffix -apuu/epnn /-ardı/erdi/ and occasionally
of the definite future suffix -«.an/jKen /-jak/jek/ to the main verb forms the equivalent
to English 'if it does (something), it would do (something)'.

Dlonap a r a t oöıeıcrnep K o n ejiH öep ce uıon nporpaMMaHM xeM aypMyma

npaaM 3 ftepfltı. (TV9.4) /Solor ya:lı obyektler köpöliiberöe sol
re T O p M e ıa n ıre
programma:m hem durmuso geciımeklige yarrdam ederdi./
I f projects like these keep increasing, it also would assist in the realization of
this program.
280 Türkmen Reference Grammar

3rep Kejııran mıiHfle 6«p 3aT 6ap Gonca, Betine r a r a arupM a3flu. (H)
/Eger kellâ:q i£iıme bir 5a:t ba:r bo!0o, beyle gatı a:gırmaS8ı./
If there was anything in your head, it wouldn’t h u rt so bad.

Eomıaca, snu TypKMeH #eBneTHMH3HH HnaTtiHa uıy epfle enııuflHpHneH reK

BHYMnepM aJiTHJiHn 6epwıee xeM, GHyM S om y jıtın ı flepeflmt*;eK, xeMeM ap3aH
6axajıap,naH 6a3apnapfla enyM Tan^up^KaK. (TP12.2)
/Bolmoöo, ya:s ttirkmön döwlötümiiSüi) i:la:tma Su yerde yetisdirilen gö:k
ö:nümlörü ekilip beril0e hem, ö:nüm bolculugı dörödüljök, hemem ar8a:n
bahalardan ba:8arlarda ö:nüm tapdırjak./
Otherwise, if the produce raised here was delivered to the population of our young
Türkmen State, an abundance of produce wou!d be created and it would be
possibie to fînd produce in the markets at a cheaper price.

When the main verb of a sentence ends in the conditional suffix -ca/ce /-0a/0e/, a
question is formed that is more polite or less direct. its English equivalent is 'vvould
one please do (something)?' When the suffix of permission -afi/afö /-a:y/â:y/ is added
to this construction, a more polite offer or suggestion is intended, in the sense of
'would one be so kind as to do (something)?'

CH 3 G3YHM3 6MneH TaHblIU 3TCeHH3. (TV7.4)

/0iS ö:8üi)ü8 bilen tanıS e00eıji8./
Would you please introduce yourself.
- KepHM, aÜHMM-ca3 flyHÜacHHe rHpmunnM3, hukukim 3flMMJiepnnn3 6apa#a
ryppYH Gepattcenm. (N) /"Keri:m, aydun-0a:8 diinyâ:0ine gi:risirji5, ilkinji
â:dimlerir)i8 ba:rada gürriir) bera:y0ei)i8.7
"Kerim, would you be so kind to talk about how you entered the world of songs
and music, about your first steps?"
- ATa, X33Mp ceH ryp*;aK TeaıptuıtiH flHpeKToptı. Typ*;aK TeaTptrattu hiuh
xaKHHfla-fla aftaafican? (O) /"Ata, hâ:8ir 0en gurjok teatnnıi) direkton. Gurjok
teatnmi) i:si hakuna-da ayda:y0ai)?7
"Ata, now you are Director of the Puppet Theater. Would you be so kind to
speak about the vvork of the Puppet Theater, too?"

For expressing the conditional with nouns, adjectives and participles, the word
Sonca /bol0o/ 'if it is' is used.

Küp aflaM 6aü Gonca, My3 aflaM rap tm . Bap aflaM naTbnua Taparmapu Gonca, öy3
aflaM ona rapuibi. (G) /Bir a:dam ba:y bolGo, yüS a:dam gan:p. Bir a:dam pa:tısa
tarapda:n bol0o, yüS a:dam oıjo garsı./
If one man Is rich, a hundred men are poor. If one man is for the Tsar, a hundred
men are against him.
 Mood 281

3rep-fle, aTa-6a6axtaptmfla a ö f lb i M cyııraTEina eMpyHH Sarm ujıan 6ap (fonca,

oıifla ouyu e3 TSCHpHHJtn reJDK,eKKH Hecrame enıpfeHfliırHHe 03yM-3 UHaHsnbiH.
(N) /Eger-de, ata-ba:balaruına aydım Bungotuna: ömrünü bagısla:n ba:r bol6>o,
onno onuq ö:S tâ:0i:rinirj geljekki neSline yetiryâ-.nnigine ö:8üm-â: ınanya:rm./
If, then, among his ancestors there was someone who dedicated his life to the art
of singing, then I myself believe that he will leave his influence on the futu rs
generation.

In a usage confined primarily to the written language, the conjunction are]) /eger/
'if' may be placed at the beginning of a conditional clause, and OHfla /onno/ 'ı.hen' at
the beginning of the main clause. Use of either element is optional, but neither element
changes the meaning of a conditional clause (see 450).

IYPPYHH3 6y ornaH 6apactnma Gonca, OHfla on metine: ksh BarTflaH 6apıı on

orjıantm aartiHflaH 6n3e MaTepnan rerrösp. (G)
/GürrüıjüS bu oglon ba:ra0ınna bol0o, onno ol şeyle: kâ:n wagtdan ba:ri ol
oglonui) ayagınnan bi8e material gelyâ:r./
If your talk concems this young man, then the situation is this: for a long time
materials have been gathering about that young man. [literally: 'materials have
been coming from the feet of']
3 re p Gapcarç, ıno TaMfla ranbiHbm caKMUctı noraHbiMnup. (G)
/Eger baröai], so ta:yda gapı:nırj 0akcı0ı menii] dogonumdur./
If you get there, the guard at the door there is my brother.

Clauses which contain a verb with the conditional suffix -ca/ce /-0a/0e/ plus one of
the particles -fla/ne /-da/de/ (vvritten with a hyphen) or xeM/-aıw/eM /hem/-a m/em/
express concession, whose English equivalents are 'although/even though 0x12 does
(something)' and 'even if one does (something)'.

CopacaM-na, aÜTM aflbi. Al though I asked, he didn’t teli me.

/0o:ro0om-do, aytmadı./
CopacaMaM, aÖTMaflbi. Even if I asked, he didn’t teli me.
/0o:ro0omom, aytmadı./ (~ Although I asked...)

Eoccaıı 33«,e orayHbffli nrrMerHHe flYluYilMe3JII1K 3flnn, öamnaH rapuibinbiK

ropReann yrpan fiojıca xeM cona6aıca on-fla pa3btm.nc 6epfln. (G)
/Bo00a:n eje oglunui] gitmegine dü5ünmö51ük edip, basdan garsılık görköSıip
ugra:n bol0o hem Ooıjobaka: ol-lo ra:8ıhk berdi./
Although Bossan-eje started protesting at fîrst, aeting as though she didn 1:
understand her son’s leaving, in the end she also agreed.
282 Turianen Referenee Grammar

Ym ryH r e n c e - n e , S u ıp e T 06a flOJianMaflbi. (TJ)

/Ü£ gün ge£0e-de, Esret o:ba: dolonmodı./
Although three days have passed, Eshret has not retumed to the village.

Y 3 y n eH 3aflLi c o n c e n n e c e n e M , G a p tıS ıip , b u k h flypıcyH H 6epMe3. OHflaH e ıp M

ohm 6auifla Y 3Me3Jinre M antnıiM anu. ( N ) /Ü Sülön S a:d ı Ö oq 0eple0 erjem , barn b ir,
örjkü d u rku m berm eS. O n n o n ötril o n ı baSda ü Sm öfilü gö ça lışm alı./
Even if you attach the broken-off thing later, it won’t produce the former shape.
Because of this, you should just try not to break it to begin with.

Tenses in the Conditional Clause

Formations that combine participle and gerund forms of verbs with the word Gonca
/bol0o/ express present, past and future tenses in the conditional clause of a sentence.
Turkmen forms the present tense by.combining a verb ending in the present
participle suffbc -sm/ftaıı /-ya:n/ya:n/ and the word Sonca /bol0o/.

IloMTa rnnüaH Goncan, ıny xaTaM skht. If you’re going to the post
/Pocta: gidyâ:n bolOorj, su hatam akit./ office, take this letter, too.

3 rep EeMmc BaTannhinLiK y p m y ım a n o n 6h 3h h k o jix o 3HMH 3 400 re ıcra p epe

n a r r a 3KÜ3H 6oJica, x s 3n p 170 0 reK T ap e p e n a r r a 3KİÎ3p .
(G)
' /Eger Beyik Watancılık ursunnon ör) biSir) kolhoSumuS 400 gektar yere pagta
ekya:n bol0o, ha:8ir 1700 gektar yere pagta ekya:r./
Whereas our collective farm has been cultivating cotton on 400 heetares of land
since before the Great Patriotic War, now it cultivates cotton on 1,700 heetares of
land.

3 r e p ÖHJieT 6 wp a-fla 6 n p ıi 3He r y n e n y n fle n anuHHH Gonca, oHâa roııiM a*ıa 0 ,50
MaHaT MeuöepHHfle kom hccm oh ü u r U M a jıu ııa p . (TP2.1 )
/Eger bilet bir ya:-da bimarce gün örjünnön almyatn bol0o, onno gosmoco 0.50
manat möcbörünnö komi00ion yıgım alınya:r./
I f a ticket is p u r e h a s e d one or several days prior (to departure), then an additional
.50 manat is c o lle c t e d as commission.

nettjja GepHaıı Gonca, 6eöneKH n yjjaıoıapbt xeM

3 r e p - fle xycy cu eT 'tM n n K 6ı o e
(TV8.4)
x y c y c u c tte -n iH n H re rem ıpM em iH K re p e n .
/Eger-de hu0u:0uyet£ilik biSe peyda: beryâ:n bol0o, beyleki pu:dokIon hem
hu0u0u0uyet£ilige geçilmeklik gerek./
And if privatization is to benefit us, it is necessary to transfer the other branehes
(of industry) to private ovvnership as well.
 Mood 283

The past tense is fonned by a verb ending in the past participle suffix -aH/eH
/-an/en/ pius the word Gonca /bolöo/. The main verb may be in the imperative mood or
in the present indefinite (-sp/Ksp /-ya:r/yâ:r/) or future indefinite (-ap/ep /-ar/er/)
tenses.

On aBTOöyc rııaen Gonca, 6 h3 nraçs ranaptıc. If that bus left, we’ll be late.
/Ol awtobu0 giden boi0o, bi8 gi:]â: ga:lan0./

A î a n e n e H 6ojıca, on sn n y n tı fliıeHHH k h m Gojınp? (G)

/Atar) ölön bol0o, ol ya:sulı diyenii) kim bolya:r?/
If your grandfather died, then who is that old man you’re talking about?

On ö m th t MeHH c e e H S o n c a , x ö k m 3h T a n a p . (G)
/Ol yiğit meni 0öyön bolOo, hökma:n tapar./
If that young man loves me, he’ll certainly find me. ['if he loved me']

3 rep H3biJiMantiK Goncan, oHna X0Bnyıd (H)

/Eger yaSılmadık boföorj, onno howluk!/
I f you have not subscribed, then hurry!

In th e co n stru ctio n 'i f o n e d id (so m eth in g), o n e vvould h a v e d o n e (so m eth in g )', th e
m a in v e r b stan d s in th e h a b itu a l p a st (-a p R u / e p H H /-ardı/erdi/) o r d e fin ite fu tu re
(-)v& K Jx£K /-jak/jek) ten se, w h erea s th e con stru ction ' i f o n e h a d d o n e (som eth in g), o n e
vvould h a v e d o n e (so m e th in g )' re q u ire s th e p a st p e rfe c t te n se (-tın g b i/ n n n n /-ıpdı/
ipdi/).

On flHpH Gonan Gonca, MeH 6eiine M acrapanunurun am aruııaa ranMaafltiM.

(G) /Ol di:ri bolon bol0o, men beyle ma9garacıhgıt) asa:gınna ga:lma88un./
If he w e re stili a liv e , I vvould not have felt s o ashamed.

CoırraHceîfy h ra n m u n m c 6n p B a r r Gonan Gonca, 6enKH, o h h xapeM e

Tam na^apH M , 3MMa X93Hp oH yn m ep -n m e 6 o io h a m a r e M e ^ ö y p ö o n y n fltı. (N )
/0 olta:n 9öyün gi:t)islik b ir vvagt b o lo n b o l 0o, b e lk i, o n ı h a re m e taslad ardı, em m a:
h a: 8ir onur) sertin e b o y u n e g m â :g e m ejb u :r b olu pd ı./
If there had been sufficient time, probably Soltansöyün vvould have throvvn her
into his harem, but he vvas obliged to submit to her condition now.

Ce3 aöflbm renen Goncanbre,6axaMLi 03yM KecjReK. (N)

/08S a y d ıp g e le n bofâorjuS, b a h a m ı ö : 8ü m k eö jek ./
I f y o u c a m e se e k in g m arriage, I vvou ld s e t m y p r ic e m y s e lf.

Goncamjs, t o b h s u h i i c h h i o . (H) /Gelen bol0orju8, gowı edip0iqi8./

re n e n
If you had come, you vvould have done well.
284 Türkmen Reference Grammar

The future tense is fonned by a verb ending in the future participle suffbc -jrçaıc/aneK
/-jak/jek/ plus the word Gonca /bolöo/. Because the future conditional is not used in
English, its equivalents to the use of the Türkmen future tense in the conditional clause
may be expressed as 'if one wants to, do (something)', 'if one intends to do
(something)' or 'if one’s gonna do (something)'.

On c o p a w ,a K G on ca, copacH H . If h e’s gon n a ask, let h im ask.

/Ol 0o:röjok bol0o, 0o:rö0un./

CeH 6a3apa rH TaçeK Goncan, If y o u ’ r e g o n n a go to the market,

M en H ax a p u a rap ap tra . I’ll start dinner.
/0en ba:8ara gitjek bolöoıj,
men nahan atararm./

Mhjimc roınyHH ıopaa ra#aM öac^aK Gonca, 6H3HH rena;erMMH3 narbmıa

flGBpyHe rapaıifla-fla xac naa^jrajıtı repyuttsp! (G)
/İj]li0 gosum yu:rdo gadam baOjak bol0o, biSiıj geljegimiS pa:tısa döwrünö
gararjda-da ha:0 pa:jıgalı görünyarr!/
I f the English artny in te n d s to s te p foot in the country, then our future a p p e a r s
to be more tragic even than it was in the Tsarist period!

Man caKJia3K,aK Goncan, mjikh ÖMnen ot- hMm repeK. (TVI 1.4)
/Ma:l 0aklajak bolOoıj, ilki bilen ot-iym gerek./
I f y o u w a n t to r a is e livestock, first of ali you need feed.

İleHe y3aK BarrnaöHH 6np epHK nn 'A \C K G on can , caMoneTntı n rrc e n roBbi
6 o n a p eHflitec ÖH3-3. (TV9.2) /Yörnö u5ok wagtlaym bir yeri:k gitjek boföorj,
öamolotlı gi00ei) gowı bolor öydyâ:0 bi8-â:./
But i f y o u w a n t to g o somevvhere for a long time, us, we think i t ’ s b e t te r if you
go by plane.
3 re p peMOHT MiımepM ı-emıpıuıce, cyB K ecH Ji^ eK 6 o n c a , enyHfleH rasernepfle a
TeneBHfleımefle xanKa xa6ap G epn n ii3p. (TV17.2)
/Eger remont ksleri gecirilOe, 0uw keOiljek bol0o, örjünnön gaSetlerde ya:
telewideniyede halka habar berilyâ:r./
When repair works are done, i f the water is g o n n a b e t u r n e d o ff, word is g iv e n
beforehand to the people in the newspapers or on television.

Emce, ceH T o a rn T » ,e K Goncan, M ana jrçan 3T, 6 onapMW ? (T15.3)

/Bi:ke, 0en toyo gitjek bolOoıj, marja jarj et, bolya:rmx?/
Bike, if y o u ’ r e g o n n a g o to the toy, cali me, okay?
 Mood 285

Other Uses o f -calce I-Bal6el

The suffix -ca/ce /-0a/8e/ combines with a variety of particles and verb fonns to ;xpress
nuances of moods. Some of these formations are treated under Modal Formations (see
304, 309, 310) and Particles (see 463).
The vvord BoıiMaca /bolmoöo/ 'if it is not' by itself may express speculatio» in the
sense of 'I suppose' or 'I think', or it may be used with ÖHpHflHp /bi:ridir/ 'maybe it
is one o f as an equivalent for T vvonder i f .

f l y p f l t ı ApTH TM H 6 o jııu y H a flyuiYHM eflH: « O j i n a j ı ı ı p a n B o p e ıı 6 o jiM a c a -;ıa

CİHpMRHp?» (G)
/Durdı Artıgır) boisuno düşünmedi: "Ol dâ:lirâ:p yörön bolmo8o-do bhridir?"/
Durdı didn’t understand Artık’s behavior: '1 vvonder if he’s gone out of his
mind?"

Eııp M yn &Y3 M aHaT B o Jia iiM a c a . (TA2.2)

/Bir müi) ü£ yü5 manat bola:yma0a./
I suppose it’s one thousand three hundred manats.

Use of the conditional suffix with the verb AHiiîneK /diymek/ 'to say' indicates
uncertainty.

O ji AHÜcerç can a aflaM fltı. (G) /Ol diyOeıj 0a:da a:dam dı./
If you mean him, he was a simple man.

O n a p M y H tı o w h 3 fln n f ln t îc e - n e a n e n n M p jıe p . (G )
/Olor mum oyun edip diy0e-de diyennirler./
Maybe they said this as a joke. ['even if they said it as a joke, they nonetbeless
said it']

A3paK HjrrapaK «HtİMeceH oKyBbiHbi t o b u OKaap. (TV4.4)

/A:8ra:k yaltara:k diyme0ei) okuwum gowı okoya:r./
He might be a little bit too lazy, but he studies vvell. ['if you don’t say he’s a
little too lazy']
Hq RHİıceH u ıy n nypaH HaüflaH 6 n p Kace HlıeÜMH. (TV15.5)
/lc d iy 0er) 5ul duron c a :y d a n b ir k a : 0e ic e y in ./
If you w ant me to drink, I’U have a cup of this tea sitting here.

Turkmen expresses 'it is/would be better i f by means of a construction witlı a verb

ending in the conditional suffix -ca/ce /-0a/0e/ followed by the word roBbi /gowı/
'good' and often by a form of 6onMaK /bolmok/ 'to be'.
286 Türkmen Reference Grammar

3n 6eT# e, npfle-ra«m e6y 3 a T Jia p tm aY3elra^erHHM6hjiM 3h. İ îe n e nppsK

HY3enflHJice roBbi-fla. (O) /Elbetde, i:rde-gi:cde bu 8a:tlanr) düSöljögtinü bilyâ:n.
Y8:nö i:rrâ:k düSöldülOö gowu-da:./
Of course I know that sooner or later these things will be cörrected. However, it’s
much better if they’re cörrected sooner.

BeünsK 036erMcraımaH remm ajıapjıap, Sene 6h3Uh 03ymh3KH öeiineKu

BenafrrnapbiHflaH reıran a j ı c a j ı a p r a r a ro B b i G o n c a n . (TP12.2)
/Beyla:k Ö:8bögü00a:nnan gelip alya:rlar, yö:nö biSirj ö:8ümü8üq beyleki
wela:yatlarmnan gelip alOalar gatı gowı boljok./
They come here from Uzbekistan and buy (vegetables), but it would be much
better if people came from our own other provinces and bought them.

KeHe y3aK Barrnattbra 6iip eprac nroneK Goncan, caMonerabi rırrcen ro B b i Gonap
eiiflftac 6h3-s. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö u8ok wagtlayuı bir yeri:k gitjek bol0orj, Oamolotlı
gi00ei] gowı bolor öydya:0 bi8-a:./
But if you want to go somewhere for a long time, us, we think it would be better
if you go by plane,

The combination of a verb in the conditional with the word HaaMa(p)? /nâ:dya:(r)?/
'what is one doing?' expresses an appeal.

Ara, etceaçe B3YH nıy m a roıuyıl GnneH HeHeH ypyuıat;aK, ceH xeHH3eM narotıifleH
raÜTcan Haatta? (G) /A:ga, yekeje ö:Süıj Sunco gosun bilen nenerj urussok, 0en
heni:8em patliıjden gaytöai] nâ:dya:?/
Older brother, how will you fîght such an army by yourself? Shouldn’t you give
up this idea before it’s too late?

Forms o f the Conditional Mood

Türkmen indicates the conditional mood by attaching the suffix -ca/ce /-9a-0o/0e-0ö/
to the stem of a verb. Person and number are expressed by adding the same endings as
for the past indefinite -a b i/flH /-dı/di/. The singular first person suffix is -caM/ceM
/-0am-0om/0em-0öm/, the second person is -cai(/cen /-0aıj-0oi)/0er)-0öi]/ and the
third person is -ca/ce /-0a-0o/0e-0ö/. The plural first person suffix is -can/ceK /-0ak-
0ok/0ek-0ök/, the second person is -canbn/ceHio /-0axjı8-8oıju8/0er]i8-0öi)U8/ and the
third person is -cajıap/cejıep /-0alar-6olor/0eler-0ölör/.
To form the negative, the negation partide -M a /ıu e /-ma/me/ is added directly to the
verb stem. Questions may not be formed in the conditional clause.
For paradigms of the conditional mood, see 642-643. Constructions of interrogative
pronouns and verbs ending in - c a / c e /-0a/0e/ form meanings like 'whatever' (see 206).
The forms 6 o j ı c a /bol0o/ 'as for', O o j i M a c a /bolmoOo/ 'otherwise' and e r c a M
/yog0om/ 'if not' are used as conjunctions (see 443).
 Mood 287

Subjunctive Mood

The subjunctive mood expresses the speaker’s attitude tovvard unreal action. In this
mood, the action has not been performed in the past and it cannot be performed in the
future. In the subjunctive mood, the speaker speculates or wishes that an action would
or could have occuıred.

copacanntın, aüflapflbiM. If you had asked me yesterday,

/Dü:n 0o:ro0oqdug, aydardım./ I vvould have told you.
[~ 'If only you had asked']

copaH G o jıc a a u n , aöflapnH M . Ifyou would have asked me

/Dü:n 0o:ra:n yesterday, I would have told you.
bol0odug, aydardun./ [~ "If only you would have asked']

3 r e p MeH <])HpMafla HirnıeftaH If I were working at the fiım,

6oncaflbiM, MeH X33np on ep e I’d go there right now.
ntnepnHM. /Eger men firmada [~ 'If only I were working']
i:sleyâ:n bolOodum, men hâ:8ir
ol yere giderdim./

On copajrçaK Concaabi, copapflbi. I f he had vvanted to ask me,

/Ol 0o:rojok bolOodı, 9o:ra:rdj./ he would have asked me.
[~ 'If only he had wanted to']

B h 3 6 y huih MppaK SaıunaH I wish we’d started this work

6ojıcagbiK! /BiS bu i:si i:rra:k sooner! [~ İ f only we’d started']
basla:n bolOoduk!./

Turkmen indicates the subjunctive mood vvith the suffix -caatt/ceaH /-9adı/0edi/ in
the positive and -Macaabi/ıvıeceaM /-ma0adı/me0edi/ in the negative. This suffix may
be attached to the verb of a subordinate clause to indicate 'if one had/would have done
(something), (then)', or to the verb of a simple sentence to express 'I wish one
had/would have done (something)'.

0ÜMY3e reneıı 6oncaabiuu3,6wp waK 6nnep rnqepflHnn3. (G)

/ÖymüSö gelen bol8odur)u8, bir cak biler giderdirjiS./
I f you would have come to our home, Fm sure you vvould have knovvn long ago.

r bimtnibi Me{İHe»;eKflH.
3 r e p MeH eTHUlMeaHK 6ojıcaMaı>ı, oıtfla o n mt M onna
(G) /Eger men yetişmedik botöomdı, onno ol it mo:llo Gücını ceynejekdi./
I f I vvouldn’t have come in time, then that dog vvould have chewed up the molla,
Gılchı.
288 Türkmen Reference Grammar

«MeHHHKH öoncaHM...», flHÖflupep. (N) /"Menigki boI0odı...", diydirer./

It will aıake me wish 'İ f it were only mine..."

3rep CTaıiHH ohh Tyccar 3TMsre ctınaHtııuaH Gojıcagu, oHfla tıeKHcraep

ro 3ranan rypysapflbuıap. (N) /Eger 6calin om tu00og etmârge 0ı:namsan bol0odı,
onno ceki001er go:8golor| turuSordulor./
If Stalin would have poisoned him, then the Chekists would have risen in
rebellion.

flamxoBy3a n o p a c eTceKfltiK.! (H) /Dashowu8a: ti:5ra:k ye00ekdik!/

I wish we would reach Dashhowuz as quickly as possible!

Kanan uıy rYHnepHMJOH repcegH, flyuifofleH apMaıuiH raiMeşıpf. (H)

/Ka:kai) su günlörümüSü görtödü, dilnyâ:den arma:nlı gitmeSSi./
If your father had seen these days of ours, he would not have left the world with
unfulfilled desires.

Forms of the Subjunctive Mood

Türkmen indicates the subjunctive mood by adding the suffix -capıu/ceuıı /-0adı-
0odı/0edi-0ödü/ to the verb at the end of the subordinate clause of the sentence or of
the main clause. This suffbc consists of the conditional suffbc -ca/ce /-0a/0e/ and the
past indefinite suffbc -flbi/flH /-dı/di/.
The personal endings may be added to both or to only one of the elements - c a / c e
/-0a/0e/ or -Hm/jjh /-dı/di/. The preferred first person forms are -caMnbiM/ceMUHM
/-0amdım-0omdum/0emdim-0ömdüm/ (also -cap(MM/ceAHM /-0adım-0odum/0edim-
0ödüm/, but rarely -caMflbl/ceMJiıı /-0amdı-0omdı/0emdi-05mdü/) in the singular and
-caK flbiK /ceK A H K /-0akdık-0okduk/0ekdik-0ökdük/ (also -c a flU K /c e flH K /-0adık-
0oduk/0edik-0ödiik/, rarely -caKjibt/ceKAH /-0akdı-0okdı/0ekdi-0ökdii/) in the plural.
The third person forms are - c a flb i/c e flH /-0adı-0odı/0edi-0ödü/ in the singular and
- c a jjb ijıa p /c e A H jıe p /-0adılar-0odulor/0ediler-0ödiilör/ in the plural. However, in the
second person, the singular form -caRbin/cejj(HH /-0adıjj-0odurj/0edij)-0ödüi)/ and
plural form -caftbinbi3/cenHHH3 /-0adıgı5-0oduqu8/0edii]i6-0ödür)ü5/ are preferred över
-cai(aı»ın/cei(AHH /-0aqdı/]-0of]dur)/0egdig-0öi)döi]/ (and -canflbi/cenflu /-0aıjdı-0oıjdı/
0er|di-0ör)dü/) and -canu3flbiHbi3/cenH3j(HHH3 /-0ai)i88ıi)i8-0ojju88ui)u8/0er)i88irji8-
0öi]üS5ür]ü8/ (rarely -cat<bl3j(bi/cenM 3A H /-0arjıS8ı-0oi]u88ı/0ei)i88i-0öi)ii8Sli/).
The negative and the interrogative are not formed in the subjunctive mood.
For paradigms of the subjunctive mood, see 644-645.
 Mood 289

Desiderative Mood
The desiderative mood expresses the speaker’s desire or hope that an action will be
perfonned by her/himself or others. English indicates this mood by formatiom; like 'I
wish one does (something)' or 1 hope one does (something)'.

MeH my xam,iHM caTMH anaaguM! I wish I could buy this rug!

/Men 5u ha:k:m 0atm ala:yadun!/ (~ I hope I can buy this rug!)

CeH ona KOMeK ajuaeoHH-fla! I really wish you’d help her!

/0en oıjo kömök eda:yedii)-dâ:!/ (~ I really hope you’ll help her!)

In Türkmen, the desiderative mood is indicated by adding the suffixes -aafli.ı/aejjM

/-a:yadı/â:yedi/ in the positive and -MaHflbi/ıvıaeAH /-ma:yadı/mâ:yedi/ in the negative
to verb stems. The word Gcjikh /belki/ 'maybe, perhaps, hopefully' and/or the partide
-fla/na /-da:/dâ:/ typically appear in sentences with verbs in this mood.

X y fla Ü M M , s f le H H u e m y K y p . EemcM, n ı y f l w n 6 n p 6o.n-3nHH.nHK Ö o jıa n f lb i- A a ! ( G )

/H u d a : y ım , e d e n ig e ş ü k ü r . B e lk i, s u y ıl b i r b o l- e li: n lik b o la :y a d ı- d a :! /
Oh God, thanks for what you’ve done, and we really hope that, if possible for
once this year will be plentiful.

In addition to fornıs in the desiderative mood, Türkmen has several mcans of

expressing the idea of 'to hope that one will do (something)'. The word yMHT /umı:t/
Tıope' may appear with a possessive suffix followed by 6 ap /ba:r/ 'there is' to mean
'to have hope', or the verb yMbiT 3TMeK /umı:t etmek/ 'to hope' may be us; d in a
construction with nııönn /diyip/ 'that' to mean 'to hope, saying that...'

MeH ceHM ene-fle ropaeAHM-fla! I really hope I ’ll see you again!)
/Men Seni yene-de görâ:yedim-dâ:!/ (~ I really wish 1*11 see you again!)

CeHM eHe-fle repıvısre yMtıfibiM 6ap! I hope I ’ll see you again!
/8en yene-de görmâıge umudını ba:r!/

CeHM ene-fle repepMH «HÖıın I hope I ’ll see you again!

yMbiT aaKapmı! /âeni yene-de
görörün diyip umı:t edyâ:rin!/
290 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Forms o f the Desiderative Mood

Turkmen indicates the desiderative mood by adding the suffix -asiflbih e m /-a:yadı/
â:yedi/ to the stem of a verb. Person and number are shown with the same endings as
for the past indefinite tense suffix -flu/nh /-dı/di/. The first person suffixes are
-anflUM/aeHHM /-a:yadun/â:yedim/ and -aanbiK/aeHHK /-a:yadık/â:yedik/ in singular
and plural; the second person suffîxes are -annMH/aeflni{ /-a:yadır)/a:yedirj/ and
-aHabinbo/aenMHHs /-a:yadıi]i8/â:yedir|i5/ in singular and plural; and the third person
suffixes are -annu/senn /-a:yadı/â:yedi/ and -aanuJiap/ae^HJiep /-a:yadılar/a:yediler/ in
singular and plural.
When the stem ends in a vowel, the first vowel of this suffix, which has inherent
length, replaces that vowel. The same process applies vvith the addition of this suffıx to
the negation partide -Ma/Me /-ma/me/, which results in -Maanbi/Maenn /-ma:yadı/
mâ:yedi/. Questions are rarely formed in the desiderative mood.
For paradigms of the desiderative mood, see 646-647.
 Mood 291

Other Mood Suffixes

Türkmen has several suffixes that indicate nuances of mood, including those of desire
(-ac/ec /-a0/e0/), intention (-MaKMu/MeıCMH /-makcı/mekci/), obligation (-Majıtı/MejiM
/-mah/meli/) and permission (-aü/ait /-a:y/â:y/). The suffix of desire functions only in
a verbal formation, while the suffıxes of intention, obligation and permission produce
verb forms that appear as the final verbs of sentences.

Suffıx o f Desire
In Türkmen, the most common means of indicating the desire to perform an action
consists of a formation with a verb ending in the verbal noun suffıx -ac/ec /-a0/e0/,
plus one of the possessive suffixes, followed by the verb renıneK /gelmek/ 'to come' in
the third person of several tense forms. For example, the third person present indefinite
tense form -acbi/ecH re n ü a p /-a0ı/e0i geiyarr/ literally means 'his/her desire to do
(something) comes', but is equivalent to English 'he/she wants to do (something)' or
'she/he feels like doing (something)'.

On 6wp T33e Maıuun anacu rejıföap. He wants to buy a new car.

/Ol bir ta:Se maSıtn ala0ı gelyâ:r./

Ara, MeHMH Monna GapacbiM renenoK, ce6s6n oKaMaK kmh . (G)

/Ata, menirj mo:lla: baraöım geleno:k, 0eba:bi okomok kı:n./
Father, I don’t w ant to go to the molla, because studying is hard.
X hm KHMMU-fle S3 a a ra SuneH enyMHH YCTY*le rHfliecH rejiMes. (G)
/Hi:c kimiıj-de ö:8 ayağı bilen ölümürj ti00iinö gide0i gelmeS./
No one in his right mind wants to go to his death.
MeHMH on ceanepM cH3e a ü fla c u M renttap. (G)
/Menir) ol 0ö81örii 0i6e aydaGım gelya:r./
I feel like saying those words to you.
OpcrenflH 6nneH Hs3hk ©3jıepHHHH Kopne orynnaptmtı r e p e c n e p n renüapflH . (G)
/Or0gelli bilen Na:8ik ö:81örünüq körpö ogullorunı göröGlörü gelyâ:rdi./
Orsgeldi and Nazik wanted to see their younger son.
ApTtrrbi Ayanacu, oHflaH aptnm anacu rejınu. (G)
/Artığı du:8Ia:0ı, onnon a:nnı ala0ı gelli./
She felt like punishing Artık and taking her revenge on him.
OHyn TH3p3K eityHe eTecH renüapflH. (G)
/Onur] ti:8râ:k öyünö yete0i gelyarrdi./
He w as eager to get home as quickly as possible.
292 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

CeHHH H3XHJBi penKfle K eüııeK caTtm anacbirç reniiap? (TV5.4)

/0enirj nâ:hili rerjkde köynök öatrn alaGıi] gelya:r?/
What color dress do you w ant to buy?

- ©3yMe 6ııp -rese caraT anacuM rejıiıap. (TV5.4)

/"Ö:Sümö bir ta:8e 0a:gat ala0ım gelyârr."/
'T feel like buying myself a new watch."

The third person form of this suffix also appears in the word Gojıacbi /bolo0ı/
which expresses the speaker’s surprise ('it would seem/appear that') at some
development.

C ohkm Ban-fla AMaH MeKflenfle re p y H M e fe p -n e Gonacu. (G)

/0oqkı wagtda Amam mekdepde görünmöyâ:r-le bolo0ı./
It would appear that Aman has not been in school lately.

BM3e xjıq 3aT Öojıacu eK. (G) /BiSe hi:c 8a:t bolo0ı yo:k./
I t would seem that there is nothing for us.

Forms o f the Suffbc o f Desire

To indicate the desire or lack of desire to perform an action, the possessive suffbces are
added to a verb ending in the verbal noun suffbc -ac/ec /-a0/e0/,‘ vvhich is followed by
the verb ren inen /gelmek/ 'to come' in its third person singular form in a given tense
(rejıiiap /gelyâ:r/ 'it comes', rejin» /gelli/ 'it came', and so on). This results in the
formations -acbiM/ecıiM rejiMeK /-a0ım-o0um/e0im-ö0üm gelmek/ and -acbiMU3/
ecMMH3 rejiMeK /-a0ımı8-o0umu8/e0imi8-ö0ümü8 gelmek/ in the first person singular
and plural, -acu n /ecıın rejiMeK /-a0ıi)-o0ui)/e0iıj-ö0üi] gelmek/ and -acbinti3/ccnnn3
rejiMeK /-a8ırjı8-o0ur)u8/e6iıjiS-ö0ür)üS gelmek/ in the second person singular and
plural, and -acbi/ecu rejiMeK /-a0ı-o0ı/e0i-ö0ü gelmek/ and -acnapu/ecnepH rejiMeK
/-a01an-o01orı/e01eri-ö01örü gelmek/ in the third person singular and plural.
Addition of the suffbc -ac/ec /-a0/e0/ to a verb stem ending in a vowel lengthens
that vovvel, and this suffbc is vvritten -ac/ac /-a:0/a:0/.
To indicate a negative, the appropriate negation partide is added to the tense form
of the verb rejiMeK /gelmek/.
For paradigms of the suffbc of desire, see 648.

1 The ıh ir d person p lu ra l fonm i n - a c j ıa p u / e c j ı e p H /-a81an/e01eri/ shovvs that th e b a s e f o rm m u s t b e

-ac/ec /-a8/eB/ (ü s rp a M M a m u K a 337-338) to v vhich the third person p l u r a l p o s s e s s i v e suffix
-JiaptlAncpH / - l a n /l e r i / h a s b e e n a d d e d .
 Mood 293

Suffbc o f Intention
Turkmen indicates an intention or plan to perform an action by adding tb>: suffbc
-MaKHbi/MeKHH /-makcı/mekci/ to the stem of the main verb of a sentence, cr to the
verb of a conditional clause. English equivalents to this formation include 'woııld like
to do (something)', 'intend to do (something)', 'plan to do (something)' and 'want to
do (something)'.

M eH TeneBH3opa cepeTMeKHH. I w o u ld like to w a tch

/Men telewiSoro öeretmekci./ television.
MeH my r y H aruıaM TeneBH30pa I p la n to w a tc h television thi:;
cepeTMeKHH. /Men sü:n agSam evening.
telewi5oro Oeretmekci./

M eH nıy h u i h hhhhkh x e n f l e f le I in te n d to fin ish this jo b

ryTapM aKHbi. /Men su i:si next week.
inniki hepdede gutormokcı./

On 6H3HH 6pnraflaMU3bm narra MeföflaHJiapbmtı repMeKHH Gojıca, s p n ıp ıuy epe

rencra. (G) /Ol biSii] brigada:mı6uj pagta meydarnlannı görmökcü bol0o, ı:rti:r su
yere gelOin./
If he would like to see the cotton fields of our brigade, he should come here
tomorrow.

Ey ryn-3pTe KepKü capu yrpaMaKMU. (N) /Bu:n-eıte Kerki 8a:n ugromoktı./

He pians to set off for Kerki today or tomorrow.

M e H ceH H ajiTLnt*,tı ry H f lo r u an ry H y M e M artrpM am bi. (TV3.4)

/Men 8eni altınjı gün doglon günümü ca:gırmak£ı./
I would like to invite you to my birthday (party) on Saturday.

The tense of -MaKqbi/MeKHH /-makcı/mek2i/ refers to immediate action s or to

actions in the near future. Forms of the past indefinite tense suffbc -fltı/flM /-dı/di/ may
be added to the verb CojiMaK /bolmok/ 'to be', or occasionally to -MaKibi/ı.ıeıoiH
/-makcı/mekci/ itself to express the past tense.

Ey ryH x y M a p T y r y n , eH e yjıneTJiepH M H H a ıib m a rHTMeKHM OojlJtyM. (N)

/Bu:n humaır tutup, yene tilpötlörümür) ya:nuıa gitmekci bollum./
I got this strong desire today and wanted to go to my friends again.

3 3 H 3 xaH H H übETbiHMaK ilbiTH asm biH bi auiHflHn, rnona Bapbin ro m y n M a K H U flb iM .

(G) /E8i:8 ha:n:ır) yıgıncak yıgnaya:nmı esidıp, Sogo banp gosuknokcudum /
Hearing that Eziz Khan was gathering the people, I decided to go and join him.
294 Türkmen Reference Grammar

The partide -nbip/nııp /-dır/dir/ also may appear after -MaKMu/MeKMH /-makfiı/
mekci/ to add the nuance of confirmation to the intention, in the sense of 'one actually
intends to do (something)'.
Cana canMan, 6Mpnııe 6epnn rofi6epn6epMeKMU(nnp. (G)
/0ala: 0alma:n, bi:rine berip goyberibennekcidir./
He actually intends to go ahead and give (his daughter in rnamage) to someone
without getting any advice.

AMepmcajöiaH reneH 6n3HecMennep jjoKMa ceHaraTHHtm, raüraflan mımeiiaH

ceHaraTMH K3pxaHanapbnu>ı rypMara Mas roıOMnaptiHbi
reHYKnııpMeKHHflHpnep. (N)
/Amerikadan gelen bi5ne9menler dokmo 0ena:gatınu), gaytadan i:sleyâ:n
0ena:gaur) ka:rha:nalanm gurma:ga ma:ya goyumlorunı gönükdüımökcüdüriör./
Businessmen from America actually are planning to launch their first
investments for the construction of weaving and recycling industrial enterprises.

Forms o f the Suffix o f İntention

To indicate intention, the suffîx -MaKHbi/MeKMH /-makcı-mokcı/mek£i-mök£ü/ is
added to the stems of verbs. Number and person are indicated by the noun or pronoun
that serves as subject of the sentence. its negative is formed by adding hsji /dâ:l/
separately after a verb vvith this suffix.
For paradigms of the suffix of intention, see 649.

Suffix o f Obligation
To indicate a moral or factual obligation to perform an action, Türkmen adds the suffix
-Manbi/MenH /-malı/meli/ to the stem of a verb. This formation is equivalent to
English 'have to do (something)', 'should do (something)' and sometimes 'must do
(something)'. By itself, this suffix is understood as expressing the future indefinite
tense, while its person and number are indicated by the noun or pronoun which serves
as subject. This suffix may be added to the predicate or to the attribute of a sentence.

M eu 6y muim stmciih . I have to do this work.

/Men bu i:si etmeli./

Xa3npKn flOBypne napnMHtın naxmın MaKcaınapu 6ojiManbi, hsmshhh ycTyKUe

HinjıeMejiH? (N) /Hâ:5irki döwürdö paıtiyamr) na:hili mak0atlan bolmolı,
na:ma:nii) ü00ünnö i:slemeli?/
Which goals should the party have at the present time, what should it be
working on?
 Mood 295

By Hn?a«fla 6 m m em-ne uıon öhkm MrapaMa xaüfla rajraçaKflHraMBisa ch3,

H3MX,MJiap, xac aöflbm re3 eTnpMenHCHHH3. (N) /Bu yagdayda biSirj yene-de Sol
örjkü elgarama ha:IIa ga:ljakdıgunıBa 0i6, yaSıjılar, ha:0 aydııj göS yetirmeli0iqi5./
You vvriters have to see most clearly of ali that, under these conditions, we would
remain longer in that former dependent condition.

3n6eTfle, MapenepHH epMHe eTHpujiMe.™ MexncTnepHHHn amaıc

repKe3MnMerM tobm 3aT. (N) /Elbetde, £â:releriq yerine yetirilmeli möhlötlörünüi]
anık görköSülmögü gowı 8a:t./
Of course, it’s a good thing that the times when the measures have to be carried
out are clearly indicated.

Mıifln MeH HaMe stmcjih? U suM a eBpynHn, canaM BepMejiMMH? (BG)

/İnni men nâ:me etmeli? I:8una öwrülüp, 0ala:m bermelimi?/
Now what am I to do? Should I turn around and say hello?

HaMas oKaMa3flan oaan rsper rbiJibin, 3HflaMwnı,ı apaccajıaMajibl.

(TP13.4) /Nama :8 okomoSSon 080i ta:ret gıhp, enna:rmi]i ara00alamalx./
Before praying, you must perform ablutions and cleanse your body.

Eynapflan 6 amra-fla M y cy jiM a m iH Öepjrçaii 3TM eiiM napsnapu Sapflbip. (TP13.4)

/Bulordon basga-da mu0ulma:mr) berja:y etmeli parSlan ba:rdır./
And besides these, Muslims have (other) obligations they m ust fulfill.

3aT TeneMeJlM Han cyB y^hh. 3MMa ıuy c y B re^HpennepM y^ını, raynapttH
Typöacbffla, KpaHTbraa, ıuona 6h3 TejıeMejiH Gonapuc. (TV17.2)
/ 8a:t tölömölü dâ:l 0uw ücü:n. Emma: su 0uw geçirenleri iicikn, sulorui]
turboOuno, tarantına, sogo biS töiömölii bolya:n0./
We don’t have to pay a thing for water. But for their bringing in this water, and
their pipes and their faucets, for this we do have to pay.

To express the definite future tense, this suffix is used together with thefuture
indefinite form of the verb ö o jiM a K /bolmok/.

Xep humhk Bonca-fla rejiMejiM 6ojıapcbiH. (G)

/Her nicik bol0o-do gelmeli bolorOurj./
Nevertheless, you will have to come.

Llroca, mm» Benamun orm ı ermııep. O m ı oiincıınupMemı 6ojıap, rtranapii

eromep, onapu nypMyma mjKapıvıanbi Gojıap. (TV16.3)
/inha:, inni Wepa:nıi) oglı yetiîer. Om öylönniirmölii bolor, gı:81an yetiser, olon
durmuso çıkarmalı bolor./
Now Wepa’s son here will come of age. It will be necessary to get him m arried,
and the girls will come of age, and it vvill be necessary to m arry them off.
296 Türkmen Reference Grammar

For obligations that appeared in the past, the past indefinite tense marker -flbi/flu
/-dı/di/ with personal endings may be added to a verb.

Ahjim KecenjB aneTMenıiflu, oh eflH snuaH AKaçaryj^eH re3rynaK öojiMajibiflbi, oh

flepT anutu HypflyMHpafla rapaMajıunıı. (G)
/Aya:h ke0ellâ: ârjetmelidi, on yedi ya:sa:n A:kjagüUön gö5gulok bolmohıdı, on
dö:rt yarslı Durdumıraıda garamalıdı./
His wife h a d t o t e n d t o the sick person, s h e h a d t o look after seventeen-year old
Akjagül, and s h e h a d t o look in on fouıteen-year old Durdumırat.

When the suffix -Majıu/rvıejııı /-mah/meli/ is used in combination with the

conditional form 6 o j j c a /bol0o/ or the subjunctive form G o jıc a flb i /bol0odı/, it also
means 'to have to do (something)'.

3rep 6apMajibi S o n c a , tmji KaKapctm. (G) /Eger barmalı bol0o, til kakarOııj./
If she has to go, please give me a Cali.

The confirmation partide -flLip/ftnp /-dır/dir/ also may be added to this suffix to
confirm an obligation in the sense of 'really should/have to do (something)'.

MeH X33Hp raflim, flyKaHH aHMajibiHbipbiH. (G)

/Men hâ:8ir gidip, dükamı acmalıdınn./
I really have to go now and open the shop.

Forms o f the Suffix o f Obligation

Türkmen indicates obligation by adding the suffix -Manu/ıuejiM /-m alı-m olı/m eli-
mölü/ to the stem of a verb. Number and person are indicated by the noun or pronoun
that serves as subject of the sentence. This suffix is a compound of the verbal noun
suffix -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ and the attribute suffix /+lı/li/. Therefore, a negative
-Macu3/MecH3 /-ma6ıS-mo8uS/me8iS-mö0üS/ may be formed by attaching the
privation suffix + c u 3 / c n 3 /+0ı6/0i5/ to the verbal noun (see 539); however, placement
of the modal word flan /da:l/ 'is/are not' after this suffîx is more common.
Verbs with the suffîx of obligation -M ajibi/ıvıenH /-mah/meli/ share with participles
the function of serving as attributes (o K a J iM a n tı KHTan /okomolı kita:p/ 'a book
which should be read'); unlike paniciples, however, such verbs freeiy function as
predicates (M e H 6y K H T a fiu o K a M a n u /Men bu kita:bı okomolı/ 1 should read this
book').
For paradigms of the suffix of obligation, see 650.
 Mood 297

Suffbc o f Permission
Turkmen expresses permission or a request for permission to perform an action by
adding the suffbc -aü/aü /-a:y/â:y/ to the stems of verbs. When used in combination
vvith suffbces of the imperative, this suffbc usually is equivalent to English fonnations
for both permission ('may do') and suggestion ('why not do?'), depending on :ontext.
In combination with mood and other suffixes, this suffix contıibutes to the formation
of new meanings that are related to permission, such as suggestion, advice, im istence,
caution or premonition.

Bemcu MeH ona 6y T33ejiHra Maybe I shouldn’t teli him

aüT M aafibiH ./Belki men oqo bu this nevvs.
ta:8eligi ayuna:yaym./
E m3 flam ap u K r a ^ a e n » ? May we (two) go outside?
/Bİ8 dasan:k gidâ:yeli?/
Illy KHTaötl OKatıcaH, Ken 3aflbi I think if you read this
eBpeHepcHH- /Su kita:bı oka:y0ai), book, you’11 leam a lot.
köp Sadi öwrönör8iiıj./
C m3 TypKMeHHCTana rejiDÜMCJiH. You should come to
/0İ8 Türkmönü00a:na gelâ:ymeli./ Türkmenistan.

In combination vvith the imperative suffbces, the suffbc -aH/afi /-a:y/â:y/ may be
understood as asking or granting permission or making a suggestion relaied to a
request or command, depending on the conteat. English equivalents to suc.ı fornıs
include 'I/we/you/she/he/they may do (something)', 'may I/we/you/she/he/they do
(something)', 'vvhat about doing (something)?', 'why not do (something)?', and 'why
don’t I/we/you/she/lıe/they do (something)?'

Uly KMTaötı OKantibiH? May I read this book?

/Su kita:bı okaryaym?/ (~ Wlıy don’t I read this book?)
E m3 CM3MH önnen Mapa May we (ali) go to Man vvith you?
rHflaejmn? /Bi8 0i8ir) bilen (~ W hat about us (ali) going to
Mara: gidâ:yeli:rj?/ Man vvith you?)
CH3 KMHO rHH3İİH!(. You may go to the movies.
/8i8 kino: gidâ:yi:r5-/ (~ W hat about going to the movies?)
O ji ö n s e re jıa ü c ııu . She may visit us.
/Ol biSe gelâ:y0in./ (~ Why doesn’t she visit us?)
298 Turianen Referenee Grammar

A xaB, aflaMiıap! By Mtrn MHparamm AHHa6ere öepsejiHn! (G)

/A ha:w, a:damlar! Bu yıl mi:ra:plıgı Arnnabege berâ:yeli:jj!/
But hey, gentlemen! W hat about giving the post of irrigator to Annabek this
year!

Onap «paflHaTopttn vaT aMtmnMp» flHJMspnep. «^aT a^aıt 6onca roBy-fla,

6e%,ep3ÜHH» hhM#mm. Onap «paflHaTop eK» flHÜflHnep. (TV17.2)
/Olor "radiatorui] cat acıpdır" diyya:rler. "Ğat acan bol0o gowu-da:, bejerâ:yirj"
diydim, Olor "radiator yo:k" diydiler./
They say "Your radiator’s cracked." I said Tine, so it’s cracked. W hat about
fixing it?" They said "No radiators."

Oıtfla moHyn öıuıeH aKtiJitrnti3bt jıenan rapaünn! (N)

/Onno sonuıj bilen akıhrjiSı deıja:p görâ:yii]!/
Then why don’t you try to compare your intellect with his! [or: 'you may try to
compare']

The suffix -aö/aii /-a:y/â:y/ may be combined with the conditional suffix (-ca/ce
/-8a/0e/) to express a suggestion or advice that is equivalent to English 'I think' or 'I
suppose'.

IIIohm flartiHb! ceH anatican, ohcoh, ceHHe apMan rajiMa3. (G)

/Som dağımı 0en ala:y0aıj, onöorj, Oenne armam ga:lmaS./
I think if you m arry someone like this, then you’ll never wish for
anything.

Ewp Myn ^Y3 MaHaT 6oJiaÜMaca. (TA2.2)

/Bir müi] iic yü8 manat bola:yma0a./
I suppose it’s one thousand three hundred manats.

Use of the suffix -ati/ati /-a:y/â:y/ with the suffix of obligation (-ManM/MeJiH
/-malı/meli/) adds personal conviction to the obligation, in the sense of suggesting,
advising or insisting on the right or sensible course of action to follow, and may be
equivalent to English 'should do (something)' or '(properly) would want to do
(something)'.

IIIoji KapTouKantBH ajibin, « t t a a , MeH ıtbinaH epjje sunam. MeH cH3e flenfmnif.
. nbinan epHMeM am pap» Ruftun Ö apun aftaaiİMajibi. (TV9.4)
/Sol kartocka.-ıjıSı alıp, "inha:, men pıla:n yerde ya:saya:n. Men 0i5e degisli. Pıla:n
yerimem a:gırya:r" diyip banp ayda:ymalı./
You should take that card of yours (to the doctor) an d go an d say "Here, I live
in such-and-such a place. I’m supposed to see you. And my such-and-such a place
huıts." [advice]
 Mood 299

A hthG hothk x©KMeH repeK. H h^h my 3aT raiİTanaHMa3 onu uiohh HMaÜMejiH.
(TV17.3)
/Antibiotik hökma:n gerek. İnni su 8a:t gaytalanmaS ya:lı Som icarymeli./
You definitely need antibiotics. Now you should take them so that this thing
won’t come back. [sensible action, not obligation]

İle n e TaKCH Tyraçajc 6oncanH3 car 3idihh3h ra.ıntıptın, o h c o h flypaHfla MeH

ram an epmc 6apsw jpriijm aü^atİManu. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö tak0i tutjok bol0or)u8 0ag
eliıjiSi gallınp, on0oıj duroıuıo men pılarn yeri:k barya:n diyip aydarymah./
But if you want to stop a taxi, you should raise your right hand, then when it
stops, you would w ant to say you’re going to such-and-such a place. [sensible
action, not obligation]

Enp aflaM stpaMaca, flOKTopa rHaaiİMenıı. (T9.4)

/Bir ardam yaramaSa, doktoro gidarymeli./
When a person is sick, he should go to the doctor. [sensible action, not
obligation]

In the negative, the suffix -Majııı/MejiH flan /-mah/meli dârl/ implies only that one
is not obiigated to do something, as in 'I don’t have to do (something)' (for example,
because someone else will, or because it is not necessary)'. Combined with the suffîx
-aii/ati /-a:y/âry/, the formation -aÜ M anu/attM ejıu «ajı /-arymah/ârymeli dârl/
indicates insistence that one should not do something due to personal conviction or
cautiousness, as in 'I don’t think I should do (something)' or 'I shouldn’t do
(something)' (for example, because it is vvrong, or because I am concemed about the
results or effects of the act).

MeH 6y xanMHtı caTManu «an. I d o n ’t have to seli this rug.

/Men bu harlımı 0atmah dârl./

MeH 6y xajiNHH caTaÜMajıu flan. I d o n ’t th in k we should seli this

/Men bu harlımı 0ata:yma!ı dârl./ rug. (~ I shouldn’t seli this rug.)

When the modal word xoKMan /hökmarn/ 'definitely, absolutely' is used with
-aiİM ajıtı/aiİM eım /-arymalı/iirymeli/, the urgency or necessity of the obligation is
stressed, in the sense of insistence. This construction is equivalent to English 'it’s
necessary/mandatory to do (something)'.

MeH oHyn ca3tma xeKMan HymYHaiİMenH. (BH)

/Men onuq 0ar8ma hökmarn düsünârymeli./
I t ’s absolutely necessary th a t I u n d erstan d his music.
300 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Illy h u m x ö k m 3 h e p m ı e e r a p a Ö M e jiH . (TV 12.3)

/Su i:si hökmaaı yerine yetirâ:ymeli./
I t’s mandatory that we complete this work.

The suffix -aft/ait /-a:y/â:y/ may be combined with the descriptive suffix
-anep/eBep /-awer/ewer/ (see 316) or with suffixes of the infinitive or participies to
express a premonition that an action should not or will not be performed.

THflaÜMSBepcifHİ /Gida:ymâ:wer0in!/ I don’t think she should go on!

renaü>K,eK eK. /Gelâ:jek yo:k./ Noone vvill even come.

Xa3iıp iuoji c0BX03a aflunu H3fl6ipttn, araa 6onaÖMaıma mui 6ap. (N)
/Hâ:8ir sol 0owho5o a:dıgı ya58ınp, agöa: bola:ymakda i:s ba:r./
Now there may be a problem even in signing up for that state farm and becoming a
member.

Forms o f the Suffix o f Permission

For the indication of permission, Turkmen adds the suffix -aft/afi /-a:y/â:y/ to the
stems of verbs. When added to a stem that ends in a vowel, this suffix replaces that
vovvel. Combination of the suffix -ati/aii /-a:y/â:y/ and the imperative suffixes of the
fîrst person (-aübiH/eünH /-aym/eyin/, -ajıw(n)/ejiH(ıö /-ah(:rj)/eli(:i))/) results in the
pronunciations /-a: yayı n/â: yeyin/ and /-a:yalı(:rj)/a:yeli(:rj)/, which must be written
-asiibiH/aeiİHH and -aflnu(q)/aejiH(ıO-
To form the negative, the negation partide -Maİme /-ma/me/ may be added either
before (-Maü/Maö /-ma:y/mâ:y/) or after (-aÖMa/aÜMe /-a:yma/â:yme/) the suffix
-ati/atı /-a:y/â:y/.
For paradigms of the suffîx of permission, see 651-653.
 Mood 301

Modal Formations
Türkmen expresses many nuances of mood by means of formations constructed of tvvo
or more vvords, one or both of vvhich is a verb. These formations indicate the s peaker’s
attitude tovvard the action. In addition to the varieties listed belovv, Turkmen expresses
some nuances of mood by means of modal vvords (see 377) and particles (see 4,‘İ7).

Abiliıy
To indicate the physical or mental ability to perform an action, Turkmen uses a
formation with two verbs, the first of vvhich expresses the main action and entls in the
gerund -u n lım /-ıp/ip/, and the second of vvhich is the verb ÖHJiMeK /bilmek/ 'to
know, to know how (to do)', vvhich carries the tense, negation, person and number
markers. The most common English equivalents for this formation are 'can/able to do
(something)' and 'can’t/couldn’t/ vvon’t be able to do (something)'.

5fÇanH fei - c e H c u p ı c a B , onan G ı i J i M e p a m , 6 a p f l o ı c r o p a rHT. (G)

/Jarjcı - 0en 0ırkaw, oka:p bilmerOii), bar doktoro git./
Jangchı, you’re sick and you vvon’t be able to study. Go on, go to the dcetor.
By florpbi, MeH 6y ce3Jiep 6ııneH unajıaıuMaH nypyn GmiMepmı. (N)
/Bu dogn, men bu 0ö51ör bilen ıla:lasma:n durup bilmerin./
This is true, I can’t disagree vvith these vvords. ['I can’t stand vvithout agn:eing']
©HKM-euKynHK 6onanga 6 h 3 cecM M H 3eM MbiKapbin ÖHJiMeüapflHK, yM H yM H 3eM .
(N) /Öıjkü-örjkülük bolonno bi5 0e0imi5em çıkarıp bilmeyârrdik, ü:nümüîom./
The way it used to be, we could not utter even a vvord, even a sound.
O H f la n r a v b i n r j n r y j i b i n G m iijk ,c k f la jı 3KennM. ( N )
/Onnon ga£ıp gutulup biljek dâ:l ekenim./
It tumed out that I couldn’t escape him by running avvay.
MeH 63yMMH H3Me y>niH cyfla »larbipbinannbirbiMa x h m aKtuı eTtıpun
GmiMenHM. (O)
/Men ö:8ümüi) na:me iicü:n 0udo ca:gmlya:nnıgıma hi:c akıl yetirip bilmedim./
I couldn’t com prehend at ali why I vvas being summoned to court.

CaraT hsto -ks , aftAbin GmiMepcHHMH? (TV3.2)

/0a:gat nâ:ce-ka:, aydıp bilmerOiıjmi?/
I vvonder, could you teli me what time it is?
Bananına, M eH r a n a n ÖHJiîrçeK R a n - a a , Gsııifle m u i h m 6ap-na. (TV3.3)
/Bağışla, men gidip biljek da:l-lâ:, bâ:îde i:sim ba:r-da:./
Sorry, I really w on’t be able to go, I ’m really busy at five (o’clock).
302 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Moda! Formations
-Hn/raı öHUMeK to b e a b le
Ability
/-ıp/ip bilmek/
-Mam>ı/M3HH tobm repMeK to li k e to d o ( s o m e th in g )
/-ma:nı/mâ:rii gowı görmök/,
Affirmation
-Maıaı/MSUH xanaMaK to lik e to d o (s o m e th in g )
/-ma:nı/mâ:ni ha:lamak/

-tm/nn 6epMeK to d o f o r s o m e o n e
/-ıp/ip bermek/
Beneflt
-tm/raı aıiMaK to d o f o r o n e s e lf
/-ıp/ip almak/

-ca/ce repeK probably do, likely t o do

Conjecture
/-0a/0e gerek/

-M artı/M era HcneMeK to w a n t to d o

Desire
/-m agı/m egi iO lem ek/

-un/un re p M e K to tr y to d o
Experimeru
/-ıp/ip g ö r m ö k /

-M aKjn>nc/MeKHKK r e p e K to n e e d to d o (s o m e th in g )
/-m aklık /m ek lik gerek/

Need -M asc/M eK repeK tö n e e d to d o (s o m e th in g )

/-mak/mek gerek/
(+a/e repeK to n e e d (s o m e th in g )
/+ a /e g e re k /)

-un/mı S o n M a K c a n d o , p o s s ib le to d o
/-ıp/ip b o l m o k /
-M aıc/M eK S o n M a K o k a y to d o , p r o p e r to d o
/- m a k /m e k b o lm o k /
Possibility
- c a / c e 6ojTM aK can d o, m ay do
/- 0 a /0 e bolmok/
-M aK /M eK MyMKHH p o s s ib le to d o
/- m a k /m e k miimkihn/
-aH /eH S o n M a K to p re te n d to d o
Pretense
/ - a n / e n b olm ok/

-Maca/Mece 6onMaK to h a v e to d o ,
Resolve
/-ma0a/me0e bolmok/ to r e s o lv e to d o
 Mood 303

İ t e H e 6 h 3 n r a x e p a fla M J ia p H H a c ep e T ce K , o H fla a 3 a * ; t i K y ü iT e ıı m K 3 a T r e p y n
6 n n e p ı ı c . (TV13.2)
/Yö:nö bi8 sâher ardamlanna 6 ere88ek, onno a:8ajık ürtgösük 8a:t görüp bileriB./
But if we take a look at city people, then w e c a n s e e that some things are just a
little bit different.
By yrypfla r a p a u ı c t i 3 K >pflyM M 3Bm T e n e ıc e ıiH n e p H - f le ıceıı ınu 6nTMpmı GnnJueK.
(TV11.4) /Bu u g u r d o g a r a s 8 ı 8 y u : r d u m u 8 u i ] t e l e k e c i l e r i - d e köp i : s b i t i r i p b i l j e k . /
In t h i s r e g a r d , t h e n , t h e e n t r e p r e n e u r s of o u r i n d e p e n d e n t c o u n t r y a l s o will b e a b l e
to accomplish m a n y t h i n g s .

Affirmation
Türkmen expresses 'to like to do (something)' by adding the verbal noun in the
accusative case -MaHbi/MaHH /-ma:nı/mâ:ni/ to a verb stem followed by the phrase
roBbi re p M e K /gowı gönnök/ 'to like ('to see well')'. The idea of 'to like (something
or someone)' is expressed by a noun in the accusative case followed by t o b u re p M e K
/gowı görmök/ 'to like'.

M eH ohm t o b u r a p iia p H H . I lik e h im .

/M e n o n ı g o w ı g ö r y a r r in ./

C eH MemtHr s a e KBİhıenmn D o y o u lik e m y n e w d re ss?

r o B t ı re p ü a H M H ? /8 e n m e n ir)
ti i:8 e k ö y n ö g ü m ü g o w ı g ö r y a r ı j m i ? /

M e H r a H T J it ı r a p a r a f i t i iw m 3hh I l i k e t o d r in k b la c k te a w ith
tobh re p ü a p H H . /M e n g a n tlı g a ra su g ar.
c a :y ı i£ m â :n i g o w ı g ö r y a r r in ./

Another common way of expressing 'to like' is with the verb xanaMaK /harlamak/
'to like to do (something)', whose object is a verb ending in a verbal noun in the
accusative case (-Manbi/M3nn /-ma:nı/mâ:ni/). The same verb expresses 'to like
(something)' when the object is a noun in the accusative case.

MeH OKaMaHM xaüanpı,iH. I like to read.

/Men okomarnı ha:laya:nn./
E h3 6y nura raTH xajıaaptıc. We İlke this work a lot.
/BiS bu i:5i gatı ha:laya:n0./
Onap xanamHpnap. They like each other.
/Olor ha:lasya:rlar./
304 Turkmen Reference Grammar

M e H c o M c a 3TM3HH t o b u r e p iia p ıiH . (TV5.3)

/Men 6om0o etmâ:ni govvı göryâ:rin./
I like to make so m a . [coMca /0om0o/ is a pie usually filled with meat]
CeH xaücH naitu hmmbhh xanaan? I okmh, rapaMtı? (TV17.3)
/0en hay0x ca:yı icmâ:ni ha:laya:i)? Gö:kmü, garamı?/
Which kind of tea do you like to drink? Green or black?

Benefît
When placed after another verb ending in -tın/un /-ıp/ip/, the verb öepMeK /bermek/
'to give (to)' indicates that an action is performed for the benefît of someone else,
while the same formation with aJiMaK /almak/ 'to take (from)' indicates an action
performed for oneself.

AMaH xaiM 3*;ecHne onan Öepan. (G) /Ama:n hatı ejeOine oka:p berdi./
Aman read the letter for his mother.
Xep T33e 3aT Kene 3aTflaH flepsn, ouyu repeKjm xeM riiMMarabi Tapannapuıibi
Kaöyjı 3flM n a j ı a p , e 3 y H e cıiHflHpüap. (N) /Her tâ:5e 8a:t kö:nö 5a:tdan dörâ:p,
onur] gerekli hem gımmath taraplarını kabu:l edip alya:r, ö:Sünö 0irjdiryâ:r./
Each new thing arises from an old thing; it adopts its necessary and valuable
aspects and absorbs them into itself. [ 'i t a d o p t s f o r i t s e l f ]
- C o n a H b in Tene4)O H HOMepuHH attjjLin 6 e p c e H e . Meıifle eK. (TV17.4)
/'0ona:nır| telefon nomerini aydıp berflene. Menne yo:k."/
"Would you teli me Sona’s telephone number? I don’t have it." ['Would you say
for me']

Conjecture
Turkmen expresses conjecture vvith a verb ending in the conditional suffix - c a / c e
/-0a/0e/ follovved by the vvord r e p e K /gerekJ 'need'. its English equivalents are 'likely
do (something)', 'surely do (something)' and 'probably do (something)'.

X a B a , c b u ı a r 6 e p n n c e , 6 m 3HH m y xajiM MBi3 a j ı a t t c a r e p e K . (G)

/Havva, 0ı:lag berilGe, bi8iq su ha:lı:mıS ala:y0a gerek./
Yes, if a prize is given, then this carpet of ours is lik e l y to g e t it.
E h 3 h h nnKpMMM3ne, TypKM eH CG3H ÖM3HH 3paM bi3M H 6ııpM H »^i M Y n i l i m n t ı r t ı n t m
opTajrapbiHfla, TaKMbmaH 1,5 Myn f a n «leMecH MyHflaH en H U K aH f o n c a r e p e K .
(TV13.5) /BİSİ13 pikrimigce, türkmön OöSii biSir) era:mıSır| birinji müljyılligmır)
oıtolorunno, takmı:nan 1,5 mürj yd cemeöi munnon ör) çıkan bolOo gerek./
In our opinion, the vvord Turkmen p r o b a b l y e v o lv e d in the middle of the first
millennium A.D. or about 1.5 thousand years ago.
 Mood 305

MeHMH co3yMe ceH AYiUYHeH Goncan repeK? (G)

/Menirj ööSümö 0en düşünün bol0oi) gerek?/
Surely you understood what I said?

Meix M an tı ctuıaM aHH, ona xopMaT roÖMasH xanK , 3XTMMan, eK Gonca repeK. (N)
/Mı:hma:m 0ı:lamaya:n, orjo hoımot goymoya:n halk, âhtima:l, yo:k bolöo
gerek./
A people that does not respect the guest or honor the guest probably does not
e x ist.

Desire
Türkmen has several means of indicating the desire to perform an action. The most
common formation for expressing a desire to perform an action consists of the. verbal
noun suffix - a c / e c /-a0/e0/ plus a possessive suffix, follovved by the verb re jiM e K
/gelmek/ 'to come' in the third person of several tense forms (see 291).
In addition, the verb HcrıeM eK /i01emek/ 'to want, to wish' may be used v/ith the
infinitive suffix in the accusative case ( - M a r t ı / M e n i /-magı/megi/) to express a desire to
do something. Rarely is this verb used to express a desire for an iteni (e.g., Müh cyÜT
H C jıe ü a p M H /Men 0ü:t i01eyâ:rin./ 'I want/wish milk'); rather, that idea is exprc;sed by
a noun or pronoun in the dative case follovved by r e p e K /gerek/ 'necessary'.

MeH eyto HMMerM HCJieüapHH. I w ant some milk.

/Men 0ü:t icmegi İ01eyâ:rin./ ['I want to drink milk.']

Mana cyÜT r e p e K . I w ant milk. ['I need milk.']

/Mağa 0ü:t gerek./

A verb ending in the second person singular form of the conditional suffix -:an/cen
/-0ar)/0eıj/ expresses an expectation, as in English 'if you want to do (some thing),
then...'

rHTceH, MaıuuH rejmH. (G) /Gi00eıj, ması:n gelli./

If you want to go, the car is here.

(G) /İy O e rj, n a h a r t a y y a : r . /

M iiceH , u a x a p T a ü a p .
I f y o u w a n t to eat, the food is ready.

Experimerıt
The formation -budun r e p M e K /-ıp/ip görmök/ indicates that someone 'trie s to do
(something)' or 'gives (something) a try'. English has a colloquial formation 'see if
you can do (something)' that is very similar.
306 Turianen Referenee Grammar

Ü3un repflu. /YaSıp gördü./ He tried to write.

Hmnan repn». /İ:51a:p gördü./ He tried to work.

By O T y p m m ja o T y p u n ropAyıvt B ena, y e n i ran >ı M M iııaK 3KeHK. (G)

/Bu oturguCdo oturup gördüm weli, ü00ü gatı yumSok ekeni./
I tried sitting in this clıair, however, its seat tumed out to be too soft.

«XaHM repenM, c u H a ı ı u m u n r e p e e M , 6h p 3aT u tiK ca , HHtına re n e p H H » flHÜflH.

(N) /"Hanı görölü, 0ı:nanısıp görflöm, bir 5a:t cık0a, ya:mıja gelerin" diydi./
He said "Well, we’ll see. When I give it a try, if anything happens, I’Il come to
you."

Need
Standard Turkmen uses a formation that consists of a verb ending in the noun-forming
suffix -M aKJiM K /M eK JiH K /-maklık/meklik/ followed by r e p e K /gerek/ to express 'it is
necessary to do (something)' or 'need to do (something)'.

U Io H y n y ıw H xeM öeöneK M BenasrrnaptmaM en6anı»n.uıaptnn.tn 6y M ecenefle

oK jıaH M aK Jibirbi r e p e K . (TP12.2) /Sonug ü2ü:n hem b e y le k i w ela:yatlarııgam
yo-.lbascılarunıj bu m eO e led e o :y lo n m o k lu g ı gerek./
That’s why it’s also necessary for leaders of the other provinces to think about
this issue.
3 r e p -fle xycyct.ıeT»oınH K 6H3e n eüfla SepSsu 6onca, SeSneKM nyflaK n apH xeM
x ycycbictıe-niHnHre re m ıp M e m iH K r e p e K . (TV8.4)
/Eger-de hu0u:0uyetcilik bi8e peyda: beryâ:n bol0o, beyleki pudoklon hem
hu0u0uyetcilige geçirmeklik gerek./
If privatization is to benefit us, it w ill b e n e c e s s a r y t o t r a n s f e r the other branehes
(of industry) to private ownership as well.

Some Türkmen may use a non-standard formation consisting of a verb ending in the
infinitive suffix -M aıt/M eK /-mak/mek/ followed by the word r e p e K /gerek/ 'necessity,
need, (it is) necessary'. Possessive suffixes are added to -Man/MeK /-mak/mek/ to
indicate number and person. This is equivalent to the formation in -M aK JiH K /M eK JiH K
r e p e K /-maklık/meklik gerek/.

Ths Barıca miuhhh3h ny3rYHe cajiMaK r e p e K . (G)

/Ti:5 w a g td a i:Siıji8i düBgünö Salm ak gerek./
You need to put your affairs in order as quickly as possible.
 Mood 307

Tauna 6h3hh 03ymh3iihkh: ohei xeKMaH naHjıamMaruMb» repeK! (G)

/Galla biSiq ö:6timü8ügkü: om hökma:n pa:ylasmagımıS gerek!/
The grain belongs to us: we definitely need to share it!

Turkmen uses the word repeK /gerek/ '(it is) necessary' as the predicate of a
sentence to express a need for something. As an equivalent to English 'to need
(something)', a noun or personal pronoun is placed in the dative case (+ a/e /+a/e/),
followed by r e p e K /gerek/. In impersonal constructions, the best English equivalents
are 'one needs, you need'.

EarmM SojiMaK yMHH a^aMa 6apu-en>ı yn caHH 3aT repeKMHnı. (N)

/Bagtlı bolmok Ucü:n a:dama ba:n-yo:gı üc 0a:m 5a:t gerekmiş./
They say that a person needs only three things to be happy.
M yna cy6brnibi c y fiy ıu a M a repeK Han. (N)
/Murjo 0ubı:th 0ubu:tna:ma gerek dâ:l./
This doesn’t need the slightest proof.
CyB f l i o j e 3 K e p a H w n M K flan, 3 İ t c e \ ı M a jifla p v M J ib rn .ı, M ü B e m ı m r n ,
6ajn.ocMttni.irbi ocflypMeK yMHH xeM repeK. (H) /0uw dirje ekera:ncılık dâ:l, ey0em
ma:lla:rcılıgı, mi:weciligi, ba:lık£ılıgı ö00ürmök ücü:n hem gerek./
W ater is necessary not only for developing agriculture, but also animal
husbandry, horticulture and the fishing industry.

Possibility
There are several ways to indicate the possibility of doing an action in Turkmen. The
most common of these is a formation consisting of two verbs in which the first verb
communicates the action performed and ends in -un/an /-ıp/ip/, and the second verb is
a form of GoiiMaK /bolmok/ 'to become' which expresses the possibility. The latter
verb appears in the third person of the present or future tense. This formation expresses
both possibility and permission in Turkmen. The typical English equivalents are 'you
can do (something)', 'one can do (something)', 'it’s okay to do (something)' and 'it’s
possible to do (something)'.

H hJIIIM M CKM n ÖOJİSPMH? Can one smoke

/Çilim çekip bolya:rmı?/ [~ Is it okay to smoke?]
5K,birbinflbiKfla t o b m x am .ı ajıwn öojıap. You can buy good rugs
/Iıgıllıkda gowı ha:h ahp bolya:r./ at th e Jıgıldık.

Ey en ra ra 6a-rra. Myırflaıı üykj™ apaSaHbt eypyn 6onMa3. (G)

/Bu yo:l gatı batğa. Munnon yiiklii arabamı 0ürüp bolmo5./
This road is very muddy. You can’t drive a loaded cart along it.
308 Türkmen Reference Grammar

roıoıuıapii car-aMaH 06a a n ra n öojıca, 6h3hh yntı joıt 6HTHpflHTHMM3 Gonapatı.

(G) /Goyunlon 0ag-ama:n o:ba: ekip bo!0o, biSii) ulı i:s bitirdigimiS bolordı./
I f h e c a n g e t th e sh e e p to th e v illa g e s a fe ly , this w o u ld p ro v e to b e a g re a t su cce ss
fo r us.

Snöeifle 6 y 3 a ra a p öapafla m e ra B a rrtm m o u m e xeMMeTapannaÜHH aHftkuı

6 o jı* ,a K Ran. (TP12.2) /Elbetde bu Sa:tlar barrada gı:0ga wagtır| icinne
h e m m eta ra p lay m a y d ıp b o ljo k dâ:l./
Of course it will n o t be possible in a short period of tüne to speak
comprehensively about these things.
C o M ca 3flHJienne a -fla c u r p t r n sthhm s-fla r o it a y n sthhh y jıa H tın 6 o n a p . (TV5.3)
/0om 0o e d ile n n e y a:-d a 0 ıgn i) e tin i y a :-d a g o y n u g e tin i u lo n u p b olya :r./
W h e n s o m s a is m ad e, o n e c a n u se e ith er b e e f o r la m b .

A fo rm a tio n w ith th e in fin itiv e s u ffix -M an/M eK /-m ak/m ek/ a n d a th ird p erso n
form o f öon rn aK /bolm ok/ a lso e x p re sse s p o s sib iiity .

H hJIMM HCKMeK ÖOJlHp. One may smoke here.

/Ğilim Çekmek bolya:r./

tJaii MMMeK 6ojiflp. You can drink tea.

/Ca:y içmek bolya:r./

Pecny6 nıiKaHBm HJiaTtiHHH m h jh ih cocraBUHnaKH e 3repnmnepM 4-ick^i

Taörom aflaH rep M eK ö o ııa p . (TV13.1) /Re0publika:mi) i:la:tınıi] milli:
0o0towunna:kı öSgörüSlörü 4-n|ii tabliGadan görmök bolor./
One may see the changes in the national composition of the population of the
republic in Table 4.
EiTMias;eKnepMMM3H m hjuim p y x fla TepG uejıeM eK GojıaHOKjıtı. (TA16.4)
/ Y e tg in je k le rim iS i m illi: ru :hd o te rb iy e le m e k b o lo n o :kd ı./
It wasn’t possible to raise our youngsters in a national spirit.
OöanapuMH3a, nrexepnepHMH3e Ha3ap aünacan, onapım aöaflaHnauiflbipbin-
(TV12.5) /0:bolorumu6o, saherlerimi8e naSar aylaöar),
h h h h tb ih b i re p M e K ö o n a p .
oloruıj abada:nlasdınlya:nnıgını görmök bolya:r./
If you take a look at our villages and our cities, you can see that they are being
made to prosper.

Türkmen also uses the formation -MaK/MeK 6on M aK /-mak/mek bolmok/ 'to be
okay to do (something)' for the expression of social proprieties, in the sense of 'to be
proper to do (something)'.
 Mood 309

©e rwpeHHHM3fle KOBUiyHM3MutucapMaH rapMeK öoJiaHOK. (T15.2)

/Öyö gi:renii)i55e kövvsüıjüSü £ıkamıa:n gi:nnek bolono:k./
It isn’t proper to enter a house without removing your shoes.

Kupunun GÖyne nffleHHHae enyHfleH btmsh rHTMeK öojıap. (T l5.2)

/Bi:rinii) öyünö gideniıjde ötjünnön jarj etmâ:n gitmek bolya:r./
It’s okay to go to someone’s house vvithout calling beforehand.

The combination of a verb ending in the conditional suffbc -ca/ce /-0a/6e,' follovved
by the vvord fiojıap /bolya:r/ also expresses possibility. its English equivalents are
'you can do (something)' and 'it may be done'.

3 tjim öepera rtortiH TaMfltıpa sunun a-fla ne^ıuı flyxc«KacbiHa canwn

6ııııiHpceHeM 6onap. (TP5.5) /Etli börögü gıSgın tamdıra yapıp ya:-da jejir)
duhovvkoöuno 0ahp bisirflerjem bolor./
You can bake meat böreks either by lining them in a hot tamdır or by putting
them in the öven of a gas stove. [öepeK /börök/ is a pastry usually filled vvith meat
or cheese]

«TYpKMeHMCTaHbin 03anKH CCCPfle mkh rpaxflaHJU,ıra pa3bPiMJitiK 6epcn eıce-

T3K fleBJie-mHniHH Gejuıan rcnceK 6ojıap.» (TV14.5)
/Türkmönü00a:mt) o6olkı e0-0-0erde iki gıraSdanhga ra:8ıcılık beren yekî-tâ:k
dövvlötdiigünü bellâ:p gec0ek bolor."/
'İ t may be noted that Türkmenistan is the only state in the former USSR vvhich
greed to dual citizenship."

«HIy aparaTHaıutnaıapbm MyrçuaH 6eiinaK-fle ecflypsuiMenme uiY6xejıemıece

6onap.» (TV 14.3)
/"Su a:ragatnasıklarır) munnon beyla:k-de ö00üriilmögünö siibhölönmöOö bolor."/
"It may not be doubted that from now on these relations vvill be developed."

Another formation for indicating the possibility to perform an action consists of a

verb ending in -M aıc/M eK /-mak/mek/ follovved by the vvord m y m k h h /münıkü:n/ '(it
is) possible'. Appropriate English equivalents for this formation are 'it’s possible to do
(something)' and 'one can do (something)'.

KûMiibiOTepHH KOMern ÖHneHCM öefijıe 6a%rn>iK 6apa#a Hen-MaK 3TMeK

MYMKHH. (N)
/Kompyuteriıj kömögii bilenem beyle ba:ylık ba:rada cen-cak etmek mürrıldi:n./
With the help of a Computer it’s possible to speculate about such riches.

Ey Taöflan W3xepn cumraıuan mymkhh. (TV4.4)

/Bu ta:ydan saheri 0ı:nlamak mümküın./
From here one can observe the city.
310 Turkmen Reference Grammar

By Taüfla MtıxMaH renen^e, MtıxMaH-3aT rence, w ih m neıcMare MtiKMarbi

m y m k h h . (TV4.4) /Bu ta:yda mı:hma:n gelenne, mı:hma:n-6a:t gel0e, çilim

cekmâ:ge çıkmağı mümkü:n./

When a guest comes, if a guest or the like comes, he can come ou t to smoke a
cigarette here.

Pretense
The formation -aH/eH öonıvıaK /-an/en bolmok/, which consists of the past participle
suffix -aH /en /-an/en/ and the verb ö o n ın a K /bolmok/ 'to be', expresses the idea 'to
pretend to do (something)'.

H aM e, H3Me flHÖMn, ceH ÖHnMeflHK 60/ıan ö on ap cb iH . (G )

/Nâ:me, nâ:me diyip, 0en bilmedik bolon bolya:r0ır)./
You keep saying "What? What?", p r e t e n d in g y o u d o n ’ t know .

3 * ; e r a 3 cyEyH 6 auibiHfla MOMMantın OTypbm, s n m m lOBymnfcipaH 6 o n y n ,

x ,o r a 6 a rapauiflb i. (G ) /E]egı:5 0uwurj basın n a c o m m o lu p oturup, e lin i
yuvvusduron b olu p , jo g a :b a garasdı./
Ejegız sat hunkered down över the water, p r e t e n d in g to wash her hands, and
waited for the answer.

Resolve
Forms of the verb 6 o n M a K /bolmok/ 'to be' in various tenses may combine vvith a
verb ending in the negative conditional suffix -M aca/M ece /-ma0a/me0e/ to express
confırmation of a possibility. When these forms stand in the negative, they express
decisiveness or resolve to realize a possibility.

©3yHH 6 y e p e aTaı® an co n , xhm 3aTflan, x m KMMfleH ro p K M a ca G o n c a n . (G )

/Ö:5üi)ü bu y e re atarjdan 0oi), h i:c 8a:tdan, h i:c k im d e n gorkm oO o b o ljo k ./
After you get to this place, y o u w o n ’ t have to be afraid of anything or anyone.
[literally: 'it won’t do if you’re afraid']

CeHH 6a3apnaflbm reHeıiMeflUM, HnuMKHne e3yM rMTMeceM GoJiMaflbi. (G)

/0eni ba:8arladıp gönönmödüm, innikile ö:8üm gitmeOem bolmodı./
I ’ m not pleased with letting you do the shopping, next time I ’ H h a v e to go
myself. [literally: 'it wouldn’t do if I don’t go']

Illy ryH OHyn SHtma rMTMeceM 6ojiMa3. (G )

/Su:n onuij ya:nına gitme©em bolmoS./
I ’ll have to g o to her today. [literally: 'It won’t do if I don’t go']
Descriptive Verbs
Türkmen describes many types of action by combining two verbs, the first of which
indicates the main action and ends in the gerund -un/un /-ıp/ip/ or, less frequently, in
the infinitive form with the dative case suffix -Mara/Mare /-ma:ga/mâ:ge/. The second
verb in this fonnation is one of fifteen or so common verbs which carry the tense,
negation, person and number markeıs.
Most o f these verbs which serve as the second component lose part of their primary
lexical meanings when they appear in such descriptive formations. They describe or
define the main action expressed by the preceding verbs by adding a nuance of their
primary meanings (see table, 312). For that reason, they may be called "descriptive
verbs,"1 and they may be categorized according to their function in describing the
beginning, duration, direction, completion and other characteristics of the action.

Beginning of Action
To express the idea of 'to start to do (something)' or 'to begin to do (something)',
Türkmen combines two verbs, the second of which may be a lexical expression with
6aniJiaMaK /başlamak/ 'to begin' or yrpaınaK /ugromok/ 'to leave, to start off (for
example, on a joumey)', or one of the descriptive verbs flypMan /durmok/ 'to stand, to
stop', O T y p M a K /oturmok/ 'to sit down' and 6 e p M e K /bermek/ 'to give'.
The verbs fiamnaMaK /başlamak/ 'to begin' and yrpaMaK /ugromok/ 'to leave, to
start off' may follow other verbs ending in -bin/Hn /-ıp/ip/ and indicate ali tenses
except the present indefinite (and, usually, the past indefinite), where the infinitive
suffix in the dative case (-Mara/Mare /-ma:ga/mâ:ge/) is used. Tlıese verbs retain their
primary lexical meaning in such formations.

AmorbiM anı>ra;a rypneMare GaniJiasıp. My grandson is just now starting

/Agtıgım yaıjıja gürlöma:ge baslaya:r./ to talk.
OKan öanuıaatı. He started to read.
/Oka:p başladı./ [at a specific time]
OKan fiaınnap. He’ll start to read.
/Oka:p basla:r./ ['I think' or 1 hope']
On HuraeMarc yrpaap. He’s going to work.
/Ol i:Slema:ge ugroya:r./ ['setting off for']

1 rpaMMamuKa 309-310 treated such formations under 'compound verbs," along with moda]
constnıctions (as -unlun ÖoiiMaK /-ıp/ip bolm ok 'to be possible to do') and auxiliary verb formations
with nouns (as raxap 3TMeK /gahar etmek/ 'to be angry'). Many scholars now use the German tenn
aktionsart or its English equivalent "actionality" for the category expressed by these formations.
312 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Deseriptive Verbs
6apMaK /barmak/ 'to go'; deseriptive: 'to do more and more'
SauuıaMaK /başlamak/ 'to.begin'; deseriptive: 'to begin to do'
6epMeK /bermek/ 'to give'; deseriptive: 'to go ahead and do, to keep
doing' [-bi6ep/H6ep /-ıber/iber/, -aBep(H)/eBep(H) /-awer(i)/ewer(i)/]
SoJiMaK /bolmok/ 'to be, to become'; deseriptive: 'to be in a finished
State'
rajiMaK /ga:lmak/ 'to remain, to stay'; deseriptive: 'to get in a State
of doing or being'
rejiMeK /gelmek/ 'to come'; deseriptive: (1) 'to have been doing';
(2) 'to move to/here/to us'
rupMeK /gi:rmek/ 'to enter, to come in'; deseriptive: 'to move in'
rMTMeK /gitmek/ 'to go to'; deseriptive: (1) 'to suddenly or abruptly do';
(2) 'to move to/there/away from us'
r o iİ M a K / g o y m o k / 't o p u t , t o p l a c e '; d e s e r i p t i v e : 't o d o q u i c k l y o r h a s t i l y '

ryTapMaK /gutormok/ 'to complete, to finish'; deseriptive: 'to finish

doing'
flypMaK /durmok/ 'to stand, to stop'; deseriptive: (1) 'to begin doing';
(2) 'to keep/continue doing'; (3) 'to be doing regularly/continuously'
[nyp /du:r/]
/yörmök/ 'to walk, to proceed'; deseriptive: (1) 'to haye been
iio p M C K
doing'; (2) 'to be doing regularly/continuously' [ i i o p /yö:r/]
OTypMaK /oturmok/ 'to sit down'; deseriptive: (1) 'to begin doing';
(2) 'to keep/continue doing'; (3) 'to be doing regularly/continuously'
[oTMp /otı:r/]
yrpaMas /ugromok/ 'to leave, to start off (for example, on a joumey)';
deseriptive: 'to begin to do'
MbiKMaK /çıkmak/ 'to go out'; deseriptive: (1) 'to move out'; (2) 'to do
completely, to finish doing'
HTMaK /yatmak/ 'to lie down'; deseriptive: 'to be doing regularly/
continuously' [HTbip /yatı:r/J
 Descriptive Verbs 313

3M sm KopMflopfla npMMycttn yctyhuskm HaflHeK JiaKtıp-naKtıp 3fljm raiinaM ara

6auiJianbi. (G) /Eyyâ:m koridordo primu0uıj ü00ünna:ki câ:ynek lakır-lakır edip
gaynama:ga bailadı./
The kettle on top of the primus in the hallway already began to boil vvith ;ı
hissing sound.
Ayenep birama 6aKbm ııeKflynep-fle, 6ypynjıapbiHbi aMuuiMara 6 aın n aaun ap .
(G) /Düyölör ı:guıa bakıp cökdülör-dö, burunlorunı acısma:ga bağladılar./
The camels sat down, tuming their heads to the leader, and b e g a n to dllate their
nostrils. [mk /ı:k/ 'lead animal o f a herd']
3 M s m M eflflanH n ö y 311 n r T t m u n C a ın n a n n u . (G )
/Eyyâ:m meyda:nıq yü8ü yagtıhp basla:pdı./
Already, the surface of the field h a d b e g u n t o g e t lig h t.

M eHeM n t e c a n y cT y u fle ım u ıa n C an iJiagu M . (O )

/Menem pye0a:ıj ü00ünnö isla:p başladım./
And I b e g a n w o r k in g on the play.
SM M aK H con-connap K e n y n cynbi 6np r y f l p a T ÖHneH 6y jıa n b in 6auuıaHMi,un.
(BH) /Emma:kı 0ot)-0oi]lor Jcölürj 0uwı bir gudrot bilen bulonup baSla:nmi5./
But then later on, b y some power, the water of the lake a p p a r e n t iy s t a r te d to
tu rn m u d d y .

B in Mafl HMÜ3HM3K nanaB, ınexnaT, rapa3, MfirH-HHnınepfleHflYPJiM-flYMeH 3aT

rejimi fiaıunanu. (TV16.2) /Bİ8 ca:y icyâ:nca:k palavv, söhla:t, garaS, iygi-
icgilerden dürlö-dümön Sa:t gelip başladı./
While we were drinking tea, palavv, shöhlat [mutton dish], in a word, ali kinds of
food and drink s ta r te d c o m in g .
- PİHe h io ji aK öyrflanM T33efleH raÜTapbtn, re T u p u n , aK öyrflaaM 3KM1
(TV12.4) [6 yrflaaM < öyraaübi xeM ]
ö a u ın a H tiJia p .
/"İne sol a:k bugdoyom tâ:8eden gaytanp, getirip, ark bugdoyom ekip baskdılar."/
[bugdoyom < bugdoyı hem]
"You see, they’ve brought back this white wheat again, and they’ve started to
plant white wheat."
Xa3np MeH coM ca 33 u n C aııiJiapu H . (TV5.3) /Hâ:8ir men 0om0o edip ba;.a:nn./
Now I ’Il s t a r t m a k in g somsa.
İIkm h narTfla A ın r a 6aT«a X33HpKM 3aMamn< TanaöbiHa n afttnc re n ü a n
nojfiHKjmHHKa mnjıan öauıjıap. (TV9.4) /Yakı:n vvagtda A s g a b a td a ha:Sirki
Sama:nıi] talab m a la :y ık g e ly a rn p o lik lin ik a i:slâ :p basla:r./
A polyclinic that meets modem demands soon w ill b e g in o p e r a t in g in Ashgabat.
314 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

EoccaH 32s;e ornyHHH n m ı e n m e AyuiYKM esıraK 3flm ı, öaıuflan r a p u ıu u t iK

re p n e a H n y rp a H O ojıca xeın corçafiaKa on-fla pa3«jiHK 6ep.au. (G)
/Bo96a:n eje oglunur) gitmegine düstinmöSlük edip, basdan garsılık görkö8üp
ugra:n boiöo hem Oogobaka: oi-io ra:8ılık berdi./
Although Bossan-eje started protesting at first, aeting as though she didn’t
understand her son’s leaving, in the end she also agreed.

On Hme MypeKnH sm biuiM ara a n a T 3 fln n y r p a n u . (G)

/Ol i:se yürüklü yapısma:ga a:dat edip ugrodı./
He started getting used to working with enthusiasm.

The deseriptive verbs nypMaK /durmok/ 'to stand, to stop' and OTypMaK /oturmok/
'to sit down' may be used to indicate the start and continuation of an action, especially
wlıen the main verb ends in -Mara/ıvrare /-ma:ga/mâ:ge/. The primary lexical meaning
of OTypMaK /oturmok/ 'to sit' also may be understood in such formations.

O K a M a ra n ypflbi. She started to read.

/Okoma:ga durdı./

O K a M a ra OTypnbi. He started reading.

/Okoma:ga oturdı./ [ - He sat down to read.]

3 a ; e n > i 3 O T y p b in , 6 e f lp e c n n w H m m m h m lO B M ara n y p n t ı . (G)

/Ejegı:8 oturup, bedreOinii) içini yuwma:ga durdı./
Ejegız sat dovvn and b e g a n t o w a s h the inside of her bucket.

flitiyim nbm artı 6 w ı e n 6 n p 3 a T n a p K e c m ıi3 w p M 3 re O T y p n u . (BG)

/Ya:sulı pıcagı bilen bir 8a:tlar ke0isdirmâ:ge oturdı./
The old man b e g a n c u t t i n g u p some things with his knife.

When used in deseriptive formations, the verbs n iT M e K /gitmek/ 'to go' and
rotİMaK /goymok/ 'to put' deseribe the suddenness, abruptness or quickness with
which an action is begun or performed.

Hly narraHM A h i m i uıy TaM fla yitniYptın ro ro n cu n u s. IHonapbi u s M e y ın iH

ıneüflHn yHuıypıtn roWaynu3? (TV7.3) /Su pagta:nı yığıp su tatyda ü:siirüp
goyupOuıjuS. Solon na:me ücü:n seydip ü:sürüp goydur)u8?/
It looks like you’ve harvested this cotton and b u n e h e d i t ali u p here. Why d i d
y o u b u n c h i t ali u p like this? ['these (bolls of cotton)' = 'it']

A K H a6aT 3 * ;e S e r e m in thtuh. (G) / A : k n a b a : t e j e b e ğ e n i p g i t d i . /

Aknabat-eje s u d d e n ly g o t happy. [similar to English 'she up and got happy']
 Descriptive Verbs 315

Onyn m oıyfm caHHttpan, Beflemt Tarpan rMTm - (G)

Onuıj i:njigi 0anmra:p, bedeni titrarp gitdi./
His knees suddenly trembled and his body shuddered.

MeH xeM MamranaMH3fla ynycbi SonaHtiM ceöaraiH, mue niTM3HK3M, ryHfle

eünepH cynYpHn, Haxap 6ınnnpjm, eönaHimre Haxap TaUuHiian rnaüaıı.
(TV16.2) /M en hem masgala:mı88a ulu9ı bolonum 0ebâ:pli, i:îe gitmâ:nkâ:m,
günnö öylörü öüpüriip, nahar bisirip, öylâ:nlige nahar ta:ymla:p gidyâ:n./
And because I’m the oldest in our family, each day before I go to work, I sweep
the rooms, cook, and start preparing food for the aftemoon.

The verb ÖepMeK /bermek/ 'to give' is used in a distinctive way to describe action.
Unlike other descriptive verbs, only the root of O epM eK /bermek/, fused with a gerund
suffix (either -bin/Hn /-ıp/ıp/ or - a / e /-a/e/), appears as a suffix, either as - w 6 e p / n 6 e p
/-ıber/iber/ or as -a B e p (H )/e B e p (M ) /-awer(i)-owör(ü)/ewer(i)-öwör(ü)/. These fused
suffıxes may be added directly to the stems of verbs before tense and mood suffixes to
indicate the start or the continuation of an action. Such forms are equivalent to English
'go ahead and do (something)', 'go on and do (something)', 'start doing (something)'
or Tteep/keep on doing (something)'.
When the suffix - u 6 e p / n 6 e p / y 6 e p / \ 6 e p /-ıber/iber/uber/über/ (-aöep/afiep /-a:ber/
a:ber/ after stems ending in a vowel) is inserted between verb stems and tense or mood
suffîxes, the resulting forms describe the inidation or continuation of an action.

Ycca on epHHH, 6y epHHH ro3raıımEipfltı Ben», caraT MopaBepatı. (G)

/U00o ol yerini, bu yerini go:5go5durdı weli, 0a:gat yörâ:berdi./
The master just touched this spot and that spot, and the watch started runnıng.
[üepe-HÖep-flH /yöre-iber-di/ 'started running']

On fleppeB Hiue 6 a m n a 6 ep } rç eK jjH . (G) /Ol detrew i:se basla:berjekdi./

He had intended to go ahead and start work at once.
[6auma-ii6ep-»;eKflH /basla-ıber-jekdi/ 'intended to start']

51 O K a6epceM M H K 3M , MbipaT? (G) /Ya: oka:ber0emmika:m, Mira:t?/

Or I wonder, Mırat, should I keep studying? [oKa-tıöep-ceM-MHKSM
/oka-ıber-0em-mika:m/1 wonder if I should keep studying']

Cana canMaH, öupm e 6epnn rotö6epn6epMeK'WUnp. (G)

/0ala: 0alma:n, bi:rine berip goyberibermekcidir./
He actually intends to go ahead and give (his daughter in maıriage) to someone
without getting any advice.

Illyuflan, my neMiıcnepH kobjti rwaH6epaHK. (TV11.3)

/Sunnon, su nemiOleri kowup gidiberdik./
From then on, w e k e p t p u r s u i n g the Germans.
316 Turkmen Reference Grammar

IH o n ap a r ın o 6 ıeK T J iep K o n e jın G e p ce iuoji nporpaM MaHU xeM flypM ym a

reHMpMejoiHre apflaM sflep fliı. (TV9.4) / S o lo r y a :lı o b y e k tle r k ö p ö lü b e rö e so l
p rogranıına:m h e m d urm u so g e c irm e k lig e ya:rd am ederdi./
If projects like these keep increasing, it also would assist in the realization of
this program.

my aceTOH a ıııaK rH fliisp. A H a. Mtom 6 o n ca

3 r e p - fle arçupfla a#aM TpyöKaH tı an ca ,
(TV17.4) /Eger-de acırda a:dam tırubka:m alöa, su zeton asa:k
r y p jıe m iiO e p M e jiH .
gidyâ:r. Ana. İnni bolöo giirlösübenneli./
And if a person on the other end picks up the phone, this token goes down. There
it is. And now you have to go ahead and talk.

F a ra Keçen 6 ojıcanM3-fla Hiııe rMflHGepiiapcHnıoMM? (T17.3)

/Gatı ke0el bol0orjuö-5o i:se gidiberyâ:r0ii)i8mi?/
Do you go ahead and go to work even if you’re really sick?

MaııiHHUM HuraeMecHHM roifflM. O hcoh MauibiHLiM HiujıaöepflM. (T17.2)

/Ması:nun İ:sleme0ini goydı. On0 oıj ması:nun i:sla:berdi./
My car stopped working. Then my car started working. [colloquial English:
'up and started'; Muuıe-n6 ep-flM/i:sle-iber-di/ 'started working']

Use of the suffix - b i 6 e p / ı ı 6 e p /-ıber/iber/ is especially common with forms of the

imperative mood. Such forms express a request or command for initiation or
continuation of an action. Appropriate English equivaients are 'keep/keep on doing
(something)' and 'go ahead and do (something)'.

CeH raByHM O T aS ep , MeH xa 6 ap Tyıyn reneüMH. (G)

/0en ga:wunı ota:ber, men habar tutup geleyin./
You keep weeding the melons, and let me find out and come back.
[o T a -tıö ep /ota-ıber/ Tceep w e e d in g ']

A, Ben» ara, remin, m y cTyıifla O T y p u ö e p H H . (G)

/A, Weli:a:ga, gelirj, su 0tullo oturuberii]./
Ah, Weli-aga, come in, go ahead and have a seat in this chair.

Xep kmm HaMe flHİice 3 iıMn6 epcHH. (N) /Her kim na:me diy0e diyiberOin./
Everyone should go ahead and say what they want.

The suffix -aBep(ıı)/eBep(n) /-awer(i)-owör(ü)/ewer(i)-öwör(ü)/ (-aBep(n)/aBep(H)

/-a:wer(i)/â:wer(i)/ after stems ending in a vovvel) also is used with ali persons of the
imperative to express a request, plea or instruction 'to go on/keep on doing
(something)' or 'to go ahead and do (something)'.
 Descriptive Verbs 317

Bonap, ycca x;aH, MeH TH3paK rHfleBepaiİHH. (G)

/Bolya:r, u00o ja:n, men ti:5râ:k gidewerâ:yin./
Allright, dear master, let me get on with it as quickly as possible.

AKHa6aT a*,e, oraynbi 6wp OBMaBepvı, 6 h3 cchmh ornyua 6ener ax u p tı. (O)
/A:knaba:t eje, ogluıjı bir öwmâ:weri, bi8 0enir) ogluıjo belet a:hm ./
Aknabat-eje, don’t go on praising your son, after ali we know your son u eli.

flypfla a üt , ap n ıp HppaK rejıesepcHH. (G)

/Durda: ayt, ertirr i:rrâ:k gelewer6in./
Teli Durdı he should go ah ead an d come earlier tomorrow.

9xjm reKTapjıapbn»ibi3bin noTpaT 6ıuıeH KspeHfls öepnenflHnmeM a3aBepn;.

(TV7.5) tS e p n e H U H n u ıe M < 6 e p n e H H H rr a m xeM]
/Â:hli gektarlanmıSııj potrot bilen ka:rennâ: berlenniginem ya8aweri./
[berlenniginem < berlennigini hem]
Go on and write down that ali the hectares of our land also have been given for
iease and rent.

When -bi6ep/HGep /-ıber-uber/iber-über/ and -aBep(n)/cBep(ıı) /-awer(i)-ower(i)/

ewer(i)-öwer(i)/ are added to a verb ending in a vowel, that vowel is lengthened and
this suffix is written -aGep/aöep /-a:ber/ â:ber/, -aBen/aBep /-a:wer/â:wer/. The regation
partide -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ usually is added after these suffixes.

OHMaıctibiflapbU'biöepMau! You shouldn’t worry so much!

/Oncokh da:ngıberma:rj!/
rMfleBcpMaÜHiı. /Gidewermâ:yin./ Maybe I shouldn’t go.
TıiflCBcpMe! /Gidewerme!/ You really shouldn’t go!

The root of the verb öepıvıeK /bermek/ also has fused with the gerund form roıon
/goyup/ of the verb roMıvıaK /goymok/ 'to put' to form a new verb roüCiepMeK
/goybermek/ 'to suddenly or abruptly do (something)'. An analogous fıısion is
represented in Üıe verb HÖepMCK /i:beımek/ 'to send to, to send off', which cordbines a
gerund form *ıy-ıp 'sending' of a verb that no longer occurs in Türkmen with ıhe root
of the verb GepMeK /bermek/.

^K,axan 3jK,e suibuı raScanu TaMa nıpMenı Gıınen paflHOHbm Hyp6an>mbi ıroBJian
roiiBepjiM. (G) /Jahan eje ya:sıl gaböalı ta:ma gi:rmegi bilen radionuıj nurbotunı
towla:p goyberdi./
As she entered her house witlı its green door, Jahan-eje gave the radio knob a
twist.
318 Turianen Referenee Grammar

On ÖHpfleH aiijjbin roM6epjtn. (G) /Ol birden aydıp goyberdi./

He blurted it out. ['He suddenly said it']

Cana canMaH, 6HpHHe 6 ep w n ro»6epM 6epM eKM Hflnp. (G)

/Sala: 0alma:n, bi:rine berip goyberibermekcidir./
He actually intends to go ahead and give (his daughter in marriage) to someone
without getting any advice.
^laptı ara hkh aflaMiı aTantt-rtB m aıcHHe x;ait TaMapnaınara roHaMMHJittra
n 6 ep 3M. (G) /C a:n a:ga iki a:damı atah-gı :8 ikiöine ja:y tayya:rlama:ga
gomomculugo i:berdi./
Chan-aga sent two people to the cemetery to prepare a grave for the father and the
daughter.
Tobh MeKfleöe HöepceMMMKaM? Cnopr 6unen m3HKJiamp,ıpcaMMbiKaM? (T16.4)
/Gowı mekdebe İ:ber0emmika:m? I0port bilen gı5ıklannxröammıka:m?/
I wonder if I should send him off to a good school? Should I get him interested in
sports?
 Deseriptive Verbs 319

Process of Action

An action in progress may be constant, continuous or regular in its occurrence, even

though it does not necessarily occur at any specific time. To express the process of 'to
go on doing (something)', 'to continue doing (something)', 'to keep doing
(something)', or 'to be doing (something)' in a continuous or regular way, the
deseriptive verbs rejiMeK /gelmek/ 'to come', ftopıvıeK /yörmök/ 'to vvalk, to proceed',
aypıvıaK /durmok/ 'to stand, to stop' and OTypMaK /oturmok/ 'to sit down' may
combine vvith other verbs in deseriptive formations.
Use of the verbs rejiMeK /gelmek/ 'to come' and iiapMeK /yörmök/ (a variant of the
verb ÜopeMeK /yörömök/ 'to walk', see 226) typically occurs vvith main verbs
expressing physical effort or motion. Their use as deseriptive verbs implies that the
action is constant or continuous until it reaches its goal, but not that it is occurring at
the time of speech or at a specific moment in time. Such formations usually are
equivalent to the present perfect continuous tense in English ("has been doing').

MeH EaflpaMa xep Barr xeM “MeH cerofHKM, ceH xeM MeromKH" flnilnn aöflnptiH.
Ey t a n öonca kkmkx;m Mbinflbip x a T H3biuibin, renneıunn rejıüapHc. (G)
/Men Bayrama her vvagt hem "Men Oenigki, Ben hem menirjki" diyip aydya:nn. Bu
yıl bol0o ikinji yıllır hat yaSısıp, geplelip gelyâ:ri0./
I’m alvvays telling Bayram T m yours and you’re mine." This year is the second
year that vve’ve been vvriting letters and talking to each other.

Xoaçaryjn>ı ÖHpHane B a r r f l a n 6spn AnTbiHbtH flaıubiHflan auibnc Gonan Conyn,

fl8JDmopxaH 6onyn fioptöapftH. (G) /Hojoguh bima.-ce vvagtdan ba:ri Altınırj
dasınnan a:sık bolon bolup, dâ:liporha:n bolup yöryâ:rdi./
For quite some time, Hojagulı vvas going around like a crazy man, aeting as
though he vvas very much in love vvith Altın.

3aBojwa, HHe, nniJian rejıHan. Oh 6auı Mbuı mııneflHM 3aBojma. IHy 3aB0ftna_■
mımeflitM h TytîcJieK Harpy3Ka repMeflHM. (TV12.4)
/Savvoddo, ine, i:sla:p gelya:n. On ba:s yıl i:sledim 5awoddo. Su 8awoddo
irsledim i hi:c tii:01ök nagruSka görmödüm./
I ’ve been vvorking on the (horse) farm, you see. Fve vvorked fifteen years, on the
farm. Fve worked on this farm and have never experienced any vvork that vvas too
hard. [Russian 3aB0fl 'plant, farm', m 'and', Harpy3Ka lıard labor']

ÜeHe ıuy Barr uioji $yT6ona-fla k sh raTHan tiepenoK. EUy xoBnyfla naranap
6ııneH oÜHan, canaKJiapbtHM 3TM3H meftflHn iiep-fls. (TV16.4)
/Yö:nö su vvagt sol futbolo-do ka:n gatna:p yörönotk. Su hovvludo ca:galar bilen
oyna:p, ©apaklarını etma:n seydip yö:r-dâ:./
But now he hasn’t been participating in that soccer much, either. He just plays
vvith kids in the neighborhood, and does that vvithout doing his lessons.
320 Türkmen Reference Grammar

In descriptive formations, the verbs aypM an /durmok/ 'to stand, to stop' and
OTypMaK /oturmok/ 'to sit down' also indicate repeated or continuous action, but do
not imply that a goal is being reached, English equivalents include 'to keep doing
(something)' and 'to continue doing (something)'.

E axaH a re3Jian o ry p M a H , SaTbipraJİJiiiK 6 ıın en mon epuepH s k m c k repeK . (N)

/Bahana gö81â:p oturmam, ba:tırgaylık bilen sol yerleri ekmek gerek./
We must n o t k e e p lo o k in g for an excuse and resolutely sow those lands.

Xaaa, s c a c t ı uıon 33XMeT HetcceK, roBbi m ım eceK , t o b m muıtan n y p ca K , flypM an

Hiunan n y p c a K , aftnbiK, xyflaa ıuyKYp, eröap. TV7.4)
/Hawa, e0a:0ı sol 8â:hmet ceköek, gowı i:sle0ek, gowı i:slâ:p durâok, durmam
i:slâ:p duröok, a:ylık, huda:ya şükür, yetyâ:r./
Yes, basically if we work hard, if we work well, i f w e k e e p w o r k in g well, i f w e
k e e p w o r k in g without stopping, the salary, thank God, is enough.

- E rc a ın a M , A p T b ac, A Ü H a c a n a r a p a u i b i n O T y p a H n u p . X aH M , h h # k t o ö h xaqaH
3flepHC? (G)
/"Yog0omom, Artık, A:yna 0aga garasıp oturonnur. Hanı, inni toyı hacan ederi0?7
"By the way, Artık, it s e e m s th a t Ayna h a s c o n tin u e d t o w a it for you. Well
now, when shall we make the wedding?"

The combination of a verb ending in the future indefinite tense suffix -a p /e p /-ar/er/
and a descriptive verb (ay p ıvıa K /durmok/, OTypıvıaK /oturmok/, S e p M e K /yörmök/)
ending in the habitual past tense suffix -a p flu / e p a H /-ardı/erdi/ indicates an action that
occurred repeatedly, constantly or habitually in the past. English equivalents include
Tcept doing (something)' and 'always did (somethmg)'.

3rep florpyctiHH aÜTcaK, Pe>K;en ıuy M a x a ııa MeıuiM OHyn aflbl MyraıuibiMtm
rbi3biflbip eHjjep Hepep^H. (G) /Eğer dogru0unı ay00ak, Rejep su mahala cenli
onui) a:dı mugollumur) gı:8ıdır öydör yörördü./
To teli the truth, up to the present time, Rejep k e p t t h in k in g that her name was
Teacher’s Daughter'.

On MbiflaMa sjih 6up KeceMeH MepeıaiM CbiMbiuınap ttopepn». (G)

/Ol mıda:ma eli bir keOemen cöröklü 0ımıslar yörördü./
He always walked around munching with a piece of bread in his hand ali the
while.

Both the main verb and the descriptive verb ( n y p M a K /durmok/, O T y p ı v ı a K

/oturmok/, üepMeK /yörmök/) may stand in the future indefinite tense to express an
action that will occur constantly or regularly in the future, which is equivalent to
English 'will be doing (something)'.
 Descriptive Verbs 321

On uioji ÖMp aüflaHMHM raÜTanap flypap. (G)

/Ol Sol bir aydanım gaytala:r dııror./
He’U be constantly repeating one and the same thing.
Hleftne 3flnrrce HcctiKJiapLinLi3 Majrr KHpatjucMaH, ojıapflaH ona-r hc rejıep nypap.
(N) /Şeyle edilöe ya00ıklanıjı8 calt kirjikmâ:n, olordon orjot ı:0 geler duror./
If done in this way, your pillows won’t get dirty quickly, and a fine scent \vill
come from them. [\vill be constantly. coming from them']
fleBneT enöaumttnapbi Barmtı-BarruHfla renep-reqep nypap. BaTaH 6onea
rajıap. (N)
/Dövvlöt yo:lbascıları wagtlı-wagtınna geler-gecer duror. Watan bol0o gaılar./
State leaders will be coming and going över time. As for the Homeland, it will
remain.
MajuiH-MyjiKJiM, xoBnyctuma xeMMme T33ea;e M am ra juınmınap nypaputı. (N)
/Ma:llı-mülklü, howlu6unno hemi-.se ta:8eje masr.n yalpılla:r durordı./
He had real property and a brand new car would always be shining in his
courtyard.
MeHHn araM rarii KaÜMK*;en, 6up KaÜMHMsre Sanmaca, Sup caraman KaiiıiHep
OTypap. (G) /Menir] ata:m gatı ka:yinjer), bir ka:yinma:ge baSlaOa, bir 0a:j;ıtla:p
ka:yiner oturor./
My gtandfather is a big grumbler, if he starts to grumble he’U be grumbling for
hours.
- r y te ryanaca epsn roBH, ühjihk hjim ramraHM Hep-fle iıepepııc, 3x;e. ((3)
/"Gü:S guSlo0o örâ:n gowı, yilik ya:lı gatıgını iyer-de yörörüO, eje.7
"Mama, it’s very good if they calve in Fail, we’ll be eating their delicious fat
cream ali the time." [ümjihk hjim raTtiK /yilik ya:h gatık/ 'soıır cream like maiTow'
= 'delicious']

The combination of a verb ending in the past indefinite suffix -nhi/p,ıt /-dı/di/ and a
descriptive verb ending in the same suffix expresses an action that occurred
continuously or repetitively in the past.

flypflM Konxo3fla Hume^M iiepflM. (G) /Durdı kolho88o i:sledi yördü./

Durdı continued working on the collective farm.
Ojıap rHTjjHJiep OTypflbiJiap. (G) /Olor gitdiler oturdulor./
They kept going and going.

The verbs aypMaK /durmok/ 'to stop, to stand', oTypMaK /oturmok/ 'to sİ!. to sit
down', fiopMCK /yörmök/ 'to walk, to move' and HTMaK /yatmak/ 'to lie dov/n' also
exist in contracted or special fomıs that are used in descriptive fonnations (for their
322 Türkmen Reference Grammar

forms, see 58, 225-228). The forms nyp /du:r/, O T b ip /otı:r/, Hep /yö:r/ and H T tı p
/yatı:r/ commonly serve as descriptive verbs that depict the process of doing something
constantly, continuously or regularly. Such actions originated in the past and continue
to occur in the present, although not at the moment of speech.
The use of these descriptive verbs in Türkmen is analogous to the use of verbs in
English expressions like 'stands there grinning', 'sits there reading', 'goes around
making trouble', or 'lies around feeling sorry for himself'. However, it is rare for the
tvvo languages to coincide in function or usage of such words.
Choice of one or another of these verbs in a descriptive formation depends partly on
the duration of the action and partly on its relevance to the time of speech. The
contracted form nyp /du:r/ 'standing' (abstractly: 'being, existing, living') tends to
refer to an action whose occurrence extends över a longer period of time but is not very
relevant to the present, the form ot tıp /otı:r/ 'sitting' (abstractly: 'occurring,
experiencing, undergoing') to an action whose regular occurrence is more immediate or
relevant to the present, and the form föep /yö:r/ 'walking, going' (abstractly:
'proceeding, acting, behaving') to an action that occurs över a longer period of time but
has little, if any, immediacy. Use of the form STtıp /yatı:r/ is infrequent in such
formations.

T63en 33k;3hhh ornyH flaH x e p xerm efle 6 n p xaT rennrı n y p . (G)

/GöBöl eja:nii] oglunnon her hepdede bir hat gelip du:r./
A letter comes from Gözel-eje’s son every week. ['(regularly) coming (every
week)']
n a rra nyınera aarycrtm {fnıpHMH ceKH3HHflen Gapn remin nyp. (TV7.3)
/Pagta punkta: awgu0tui] yigrimi SekiSinnen ba:ri gelip du:r./
Cotton has been coming to the (collection) point since August 28th.
['(continuously) coming (every day)']
n a rra MbiniM KaMnannHCbiıifla xa3 n p 3JT r y a ^ H 6 ifn e n roB tr H b iru n flypyc.
(TV14.2) /Pagta yıgım kampaniya6uına ha:8ir el gü:jü bilen gowı yığıp du:ru6./
In the cotton picking campaign, we’re now picking cotton well by manual labor.
['(regularly) picking (these days)']
X aK X ^ra3U H U eKeac,e ryH rHM TeneceH TenetJîoHHHM Kecaceıc fliıiUm, n u 3 a u ı u n
nypnap. (TV17.2)
/HakjagaSııjı yekeje gün gi:c tölööörj telefonurjı keBjek diyip, dıSasıp du:rlor./
If you pay your bili just one day iate, they keep after you saying they’re going to
cut off your teleplıone. ['(continuously) saying']
(TV13.5)
O h c o h k s h rypneM ereM ra fla ra ıı, n a x a p n ü ı m o T tıp n a n .
/On0or) ka:n giirlömögöm gadagan, nahar iyip otı:rka:q./
Then, to talk a lot also is forbidden, while you’re eating. ['(at times) while
eating']
 Deseriptive Verbs 323

H leflne a if r c a n , 0 3 a jı, c e ırrs ı6 p b afifla h k h M anaT ^aH 6epxc;eK fljritm m e p K H n o c tm a .

HHflH OKTOÖpt a ü fla M anaTflaH 6 ep at;eK flH İh ın O T tı p n a p . (TV7.2)
/Şeyle ay00aıj, oSol, öentyabr a:yda iki manatdan berjek diydiler kiloSuno. İnni
oktyabr a:yda üc manatdan berjek diyip otı:rlar./
So, before, in September, they said they vvould pay two manats per kilo. Now, in
October, they’re saying they’ll pay three manats (per kilo), ['(regularly) saying (in
October)*]
O ry3-K B ipK reKTap TeBepeK ep e ın y t t u n r y fo n Y K ö yrflait sK M era
nnaH Jiam nupun oTbipbic. (TV11.4)
/Otu8-kırk gektar töwörök yere sıı yıl gü:81iik bugdoy ekmeği pılanlasdınp otı:n0./
This year we’re planning to plant autumn wheat on about thirty or forty heetares
of the land. ['(regularly) planning (this year)']
- A, ray n a rra H H H k h jio cm H3He, X33Hp n a r r a 6 a x a c tı? - E a x a c M h k h MaHaTflaH
(TV7.3) /'A, su p a g ta m ırj k ilo 0 ı n â :c e , h â :8 ir p a g ta b a h a 0 ı? "
T e n a n o T tıp .
"Baha0ı iki manatdan tölarp otı:r."/
"And how much is a kilo of this cotton, the price of cotton now?"
'T hey’re paying the price of two manats per kilo." ['(regularly) paying']
ATaM raüpafla opaK o p y n H o p . K ojıxo3wnap ro B an a O T a n tt e p j ı e p . (G)
/Ata:m gayrada orok orup yö:r. Kolhogculor govvoco ota:p yö:rlör./
My grandfather is c u t t i n g grass in the northeast. The collective farmers a r e
w e e d i n g the cotton plants. ['(regularly) cutting/vveeding (these days)']

TI a r a n a p ı,iM a r y o a n b i n , ıu o n a p H T e p G ııe n a n ü a p y H . (O )
/Ğa:galanma guwonup, solon terbiyela:p yö:rün./
I ’m proud of my children and raising them properly. ['(regularly) being proud
and raising']
Khmh omyM E a ö p a M M ocK B am >m IHemcmı aflbm flaK bi T eaT p yMHrotmecHHue
(O) /Kici oğlum Bayram Mo0kwa:mr) S’s ’epkin a:dınna:kı teatır
O K an H o p .
uciliseOinne oka:p yö:r./
My youngest son Bayram is studying at the Shchepkin Theater Studio in
Moscovv. ['(regularly) studying']
TypKMeH xam cH raflbiM fleBypnepfleH 6spM ro » H -ry3M , reıiH-OBJiaK GaKbin
üopen MapBa xan K xacaıuıaHHp. (TV8.2) /Türkm en h a lk ı ga d ı:m dövvürlördön b â:ri
go yu n -g u S ı, g e d i-o w lo k bakıp y ö rö n carvva h a lk h a0 a:plan ya:r./
Since ancient times the Turkmen have been considered a nomadic livestock people
who t e n d sheep and goats. ['(regularly) tending']
KenpHHHn amaratHnaH cyB aK b trı îrrtıp. (G)
/Köpriinür) asa:gınnan 0uw akıp yatı:r./
The water is flowing under the bridge. [ambiguous: '(regularly) flowing' or 'is
flowing (now)']
324 Turkmen Reference Granunar

Direction of Action
To describe an action that is coming to an end but that has not been completed yet, one
of the motion verbs is used as a descriptive verb after a main verb ending in the gerund
suffix -tın/H n /-ıp/ip/. These motion verbs are FMTMeK /gitmek/ 'to go, to leave'
r e j i M e K /gelmek/ 'to come', r u p M e K /girrmek/ 'to enter, to come in' l U K M a K
/çıkmak/ 'to leave, to go out' and S a p M a K /barmak/ 'to go'. Such descriptive
formations indicate the direction of the process of an action.
Motion verbs indicate movement in a certain direction 'to, firom, in, out, (to) here,
(to) there'. The verb rMTMeK /gitmek/ 'to go' describes a movement along a path
leading from one place to another, vvith the implication that the path leads 'there' or
'away from us'. The verb rejiM eK /gelmek/ 'to come' indicates the same kind of
movement between two points, but one that is in a direction Tıere' or 'to us'.

Ttu n u n öaıutiHfla r y u r n a p y u y n r H a f o p j ı e p . (G)

/Gısııj basınna guslor ucup gidyâ:rler./
At the beginning of Winter the birds fly away.
rtn ııtın 6auıtiHfla ryıımap ynyn rejıfiapjıep. (G)
/Gısırı basınna guslor ucup gelyâ:rler./
At the beginning of Winter the birds fly here.

The verbs rM TM eK /gitmek/ and re jiM e K /gelmek/ also frequently combine vvith the
main verb ajiMaK /almak/ 'to take', which itself is never used as a descriptive verb (for
-b in /u n ajiM aK /-ıp/ip almak/ 'to do for oneself', see 304). Their frequent
combination, hovvever, has resulted in several fused verbs: aKMTMeK /akitmek/ 'to take
(there)' (< antın rMTMeK /alıp gitmek/ 'taking and going') and aKeJiMeK /âkelmek/ 'to
bring (here)' (< antın re jiM e K /alıp gelmek/ 'taking and coming').

E m3HH 6aiİJit[K;ıaptiM ti3tı e3yMM3fleH copaMaH, a jıu n rHflüapnMJiep. (N)

/BiSirj ba:ylıklaranı5ı ö:8iimü56ön 0o:roma:n, ahp gidyâ:rdiler./
They were tajring away our riches without asking us.
E h3m 6 n p epe xom naw tııc anuaM biHtı reıapM eK y ’m h antm rwTiK,eKnHJiep. (H)
/Bİ8İ b ir yere hoslosuk agsam ını geçirm ek ücü:n a h p gitjekdiler./
They had vvanted to take us some place in order to have a going-away party.

Tlıe verbs r a p M e K /gi:rmek/ 'to enter, to come in' and H biK M aK /çıkmak/ 'to leave,
to go out' nearly ahvays indicate the direction 'in' or 'out' of tlıe action of the main
verb.
Ey cece eflnepfleH, xy^penepfleH aflaMnap H a3jıaıntın MbiKAbinap. (G)
/Bu 0e0e öylördön, hüjrölördön a:damlar daSlasıp cıkdılar./
At this sound, people immediately ran out of the houses and rooms.
 Descriptive Verbs 325

When used as a descriptive verb, G ap ru aK /barmak/ 'to go, to get to, t o arrive
(there)' indicates the process of accelerating an action that is approaching a şoal. its
equivalents include 'more and more', 'ever (more)' and 'going on'.

A j i t m h repıce3HneH xapnnapbi S e n n a n , 6 MpH-6HpHHe roıuymabipurt 6apnp. ( G )

/Altın görköSülön harplan bellâ:p, bi:ri-bi:rine gosusdurup barya:r./
Altm remembers the letters of the alphabet she was shown and is joining them to
o n e a n o t h e r m o r e a n d m o re .

Mite, HHflH TYpKMeHHcraHun rapamcbrafleBJieT xeKMynqe e3yHMH caMnan i:jn,ı

ÖHJieH fiepan yrpaHfcina hkm übuı Hojıyn Gapap. (N)
/İne, inni Türkmönü00a:nıi) garas0ı5 döwlöt hökmünnö ö:5ünür) 0ayla:n yo :1ı
bilen yöra:p ugra:nma iki yıl do:lup barya:r./
Well, i t ’ s g o in g o n two years now since Türkmenistan, as an independent state,
started proceeding along a path that it chose itself.
326 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Completion of Action
To indicate that an action is completed or stopped, the verb ryTapMaK /gutormok/ 'to
complete, to finish' may be used in its primary lexical meaning. The verbs MbiKMaK
/çıkmak/ 'to go out' and GoiiMaK /bolmok/ 'to be, to become' funetion as deseriptive
verbs to indicate 'to do (something) completely' or 'to be in a finished state'.

ü b e c a ıiM H f l e n n p tiM M naıuıun ryTapfltı. (G)

/Pye0a:nıi] der) ya:nmı yaSılıp gutordı./
Exactly half of the play is finished being written.
I U y K i r r a S i t m k h ry H fle H o n a n r y T a p f c in n M p - a f l. (G)
/Su kita:bı iki günnön oka:p gutorupdur-oy./
Look, he apparently finished reading this book in two days.
Ily ııiK H H H H no33M H C H H i.ı, T oroıiLiH x e K a s m a p t n a . ı öH pH SM e r e 3 e K
onan i b i K H p .
(G) /Puskiniıj poeSiyaOını, Gogolut] heka:yalarım bimârce geSek oka:p cıkya:r./
He’s reading the poetry of Puslıkin and the stories of Gogol several times. [sense:
'from beginning to end']
A p T b n c A Ü H a H tı 6 oM flaH -6a m a c u H J i a n M b iK a ıifla H c o h , e H e 6 n p a a f l y p ^ a r b m t r ,
(G)
aT M H bi c y p * ;e rH H H 6 m jim s h , m k h a p a fl a c e p r e a f la H r a n f l u .
/Artık Atynanı boydon-basa 0ı:nla:p Cıkannan 0or), yene bira:5 durjogunı, atını
Oürjögünii bilmâ:n, iki a:rada 0erge5Sa:n gatllı./
After he had thoroughly examined Ayna from head to foot, Artık remained in
doubt, not knowing whether to stay for a while or to ride off on his horse.
Hiıın G o n g u . ( G )
A H H a r y n u H a ü b iH H /A :n n a g u lı c a :y ım iç ip b o lh ./
Annagulı finished drinking his tea.

In deseriptive formations, the verb raJiMaK /ga:lmak/ 'to remain' emphasizes the
occurrence of an action in the sense of 'to get in a state of (something)'.

Mm x a ı o .ı M aH aT O B iK Jiapna G e p n e ıı M a x a n b m n a c y f tm y p H ir F r M n e p f le ım e p u e c H H e
30 n p o ı ı e ı i T 0 3 a m c b iC H h j i h T y r y j i b i n r a n a p M b i ? (N)
r e tm p H J if la H
/İ:s haki manatlıklarda berlen mahalmna 0ii:sürüntgülör depderceOine gecirilyâm
30 proöent o8olkı0ı ya:lı tutulup garlaımı?/
Will the 30 percent which is transferred to savings accounts come to be taken out
like it was before when salary was paid in manats?
Apaccaibuibnc fly 3 ry H n e p H H H M a ra n b tK fla n eBpeTMeım. O h c o h y n a n a H c o n b h h h k
Gonyn r a n a p . (BH) /Ara00a£ılık düSgünlöriinü ca:galıkdan öwrötmölü. On0oq
ulolonSoi] ennik bolup ga:lya:r./
One must teach the rules of cieanliness from childhood. Later, after one grows up,
it gets to be a habit.
Verbals
The category of verbals consists of those verb forms that cannot appear as final verbs of
a sentence. Non-fûıal verbs include the infinitive, participles and gerunds. Because they
share some formal characteristics, verbal nouns may be treated together with the
verbals. Türkmen expresses one kind of infinitive (-M a vJ MeK /-mak/mek/), two verbal
nouns (-M a/M e /-ma/me/, - m i ii /miii /-ıs/is/; also - a c / e c /-a0/e0/), participles in the
present, past and future tenses (-H H /Ü 3H /-ya:n/yâ:n/, -a H /e H /-an/en/, -jr ç a K /jK e ıc
/-jak/jek/; also - a p / e p /-ar/er/, - h m k / a m k /-dık/dik/), and gerunds in two basic forms
( - u n / u n /-ıp/ip/, - a /e /M /-a/e/y/; also - a j ı u / e j ı ı ı /-alı/eli/, - a r a j ja ( H ) / 3 r e g e ( H )
/-a:gada(n)/a:gede(n)/).

infinitive
The infinitive or "non-fınite" form of the verb is the part of speech that names an
action. In English, the partide 'to' as in 'to do (something)' marks the infinitive which
has six forms: 'to write, to be vvriting, to have written, to have been vvriting, to be
written, to have been written'. The relationship between the English and Türkmen
infinitives is shown in the following table.

Active Pctssive

İndefinite to write to be written

infinitive H3M3K /yaSmak/ H3BDiMaK /yaBılmak/

Continuous to be writing
infinitive H3LIII OTypMaK -
/yaSıp oturmok/

Perfect to have vvritten to have been written

infinitive sratm 6onMaK sBtrıiMn ÖoJiMaK
/ya5ıp bolmok/ /yaSılıp bolmok/

Perfect to have been writing

continuous ası,in oTypMan.1 öojiMaıc -
infinitive /yaöıp oturmogı bolmok/

From this table it is evident that Türkmen has only one infinitive form -Mafç/MeK
/-mak/mek/, vvhich is equivalent to the English indefinite infinitive. The other
Türkmen forms are only constructions that translate English infinitives, but are not
infinitive forms themselves. Moreover, use of the indefinite infinitive is not common
328 Türkmen Reference Grammar

in Türkmen, which prefers to express this infinitive vvith a form for the indirect
object.1

MeH x aT 93MaK HcneMapm I vvant to vvrite a letter.

/Men hat yafimak i01eya:rin./

MeH xaT a 3 M a r u HcneMapuH. I vvant to vvrite a letter. [preferred]

/Men hat ya5ma:gı i01eyâ:rin./

MeH CH3HH OHM I vvant you to make him vvork.

nmneTjiMpMerMHH3M HcneflspMH.
/Men 0i8irj om i:sletdirmegir)i5i
İ01eyâ:rin./

M eH oH yn KBMeKJieınMerHHe I am expecting lıer to help me.

rapamaptm. /Men onuq
kömöklösmögünö garasya:nn./

In Turkmen, the infinitive may be used as the indefinite infinitive in the functions
of subject, object and attribute of a sentence. It is expressed by adding the suffix
-MaK/ıueK /-mak/mek/ in the positive and -Ma3jıtiK/Me3JiHK /-maSlık/meSlik/ in the
negative to the stem of a verb.
When serving as the subject of a sentence, the verb ending in the infinitive suffix
-M aıc/ıueK /-mak/mek/ may take possessive suffixes as part of a noun phrase.

ATa, MeHMH M o n n a ö a p a c t i M re n e H O K , c e S s Ö H o ıta M a K k b i h . (G)

/Ata, menirj mo:lla: bara0ım geleno:k, 0eba:bi okomok kı:n./
Father, I don’t vvant to go to the molla, because studying is hard.

rynneHHaMbi Apaöurç ajıun rH T M erw onap yMHH xyfla HMaH öonflbi. (G)
/Güllönna:mı Arabıi) ahp gitmegi olor ücü:n juda: yaman bollı./
Arap’s abduction of Güiennam vvas too evil for them. ['A rap’s taking away']
3n6eTae, HapenepHirç epHHe eTHpHnMejiH MexjıeT.nepnHHrç aHbiK ropKe3HJlMern
(N) /Elbetde, ca:relerii) yerine yetirilmeli möhlötlörünüi) anık
roB U 3a T .
görköSülmögü gowı 6a:t./
Of course it’s a good thing that the times when the measures have to be canied out
are clearly indicated. ['the clearly indicating o f times']

1 In most cases, ıhe süfliX -MaK/MeK /-mak/mek/ behaves as a veıbal noun, but ıhe use of this suffix as
ıhe indefinite infinitive is sufficienı basis for treating it as an ejcpıession o f the infinitive. Hovvever, the
verbal noun suffix -Ma/Me /-ma/me/, which rpaMMamuKa 334 treated as a shortened form of the
infinitive, never appeaıs in this limited use as an indefinite infinitive.
 Verbals 329

Tonum fleBJieTJiepHMiBHn xaÜLiuiH 6ow m a 5 MynnyK Be 10 MynnyK ny ıtnaptın

ynaHtiJitmı MexneTHHH SMpueMe yaanTMaK HMetmoB 6ap. (N)
/Gorjsı döwlötlörümü8ür| haıyısı boyunco 5 mürçlük we 10 mür)lük pullonıi)
ulonulus möhlötiinü bimeme uSoltmok niyetimiS ba:r./
At the request of our neighboring states, we intend to extend a little the period that
5,000 and 10,000 banknotes can be used. [ 'e x t e n d i n g a little the period i:, our
intention']

Ts3eqe MUJieMeK aMaratiMtı a-fla KeHeqe? (TV12.4)

/Ia:Sece i:slemek armatlımı ya:-da kö:nöcö?/
Is it easier to work in the new way, or in the old way? [V orking is easieı in the
new way or in the old?']

TypKMeH ToMnapfcDiBi KOMcoMon roiitı flMeH aT ÖHnen remıpMeK en 6on, rmttp.

(TA16.4)
/Türkmön toylorunı komGoınol toyı diyen a:t bilen geçirmek yoıj bolupdu:./
It became the custom to hold Türkmen vveddings under the name of Komsomol
weddings. ['holding Türkmen weddings became the custom']

When a verb ending in the infinitive suffix is used as an attribute in a noun phrase
that expresses the possessive relationship, it stands in the genitive case (-M artın/
Meran /-maguj/megij]/).

©«pMafla eHyMnepM raBTajjaH HumeMcrıın ennapu-fla re3JieHHJrifep. (TYİ 1.4)

/Firmada öaıümlörü gaytadan kslemegig yo:l!on-da gö81önülyâ:r./
Ways also are being sought t o p r o c e s s produets on the farm. ['ways of
Processing']

A verb ending in the infinitive suffix frequently serves as the object of the predicate
of a sentence. When it funetions as the direct object, it stands in the accusauve case
(- M a rb i/M e ru /-magı/megi/).

Bh3 my fituı Jleöan napraa rypaMacımtın flepneB KOMMccHaci.nn.in miumi :n

espeHMeru re3 enynne TyTaptıc. (N) /Bİ8 su yıl Lebap partiya guromoOuııuj]
derrjevv komi00iya0ınırj i:sini öwrönmögü göS ögünno tutya:nö./
This year we’re planning to study the work of the inspeetion committee ol' the
Lebap paıty organization. ['planning the studying']

Ory3-KiipK reKTap TeBepeK epe my tibuı ryiianYK öyrflaö 3KMerw ımamıa ııifluptııı
oTtıptıc. (TV11.4) /Otu8-kırk gektar töwörök yere su yıl gü:Slük bugdoy elanegi
pılanlasdınp otı:rı0./
This year we’re planning t o p l a n t autumn wheat on about thirty or forty hs:ctares
of the land. ['plaıming the planting']
330 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

floıpyctı, MeH e3YM mon ryppYUnepHH ranumMartiHtm Tapan napu fltiM . (N)
/Dogrvdı, m en ö:5iim so l gü rrü ıjlö riiıj ga rlısm ag jn jrj tarapd a:n d un ./
The truth is I myself supported the cessation of those talks. ['supporter of the
leaving off“]

When a verb ending in the infinitive suffix expresses the indirect object of the
predicate of a sentence, it stands in the dative case (-Mara/rnare /-ma:ga/ma:ge/). This
formation is equivalent to the English indefinite infinitive.

3pTHp HpfleH MaünapbiHtı mıwn yrpaM ara X33np Bonaynap. (G)

/Exti:r i:rden £a:ylannı i£ip ugroma:ga hâ:8ir bolhılor./
Having had their tea early in the moming, they were ready to s ta rt off.

t l a p t ı a r a h k h a n a M tı aT ara. 1- n .13 HKHCHHe 5Kaü T a tin p jıa M a ra ro H a M m .m i.ira

H6epflif. (G)
/Ğa:n a:ga iki a:damı atalı-gı:8 ikisine ja:y tayya:rlama:ga go:nomculugo i:berdi./
Charı-aga sent two people to the cemetery to prepare a grave for the father and the
daughter.
3aflt>t corç cen necen eM , 6apı>ı6Hp, s h k h flyp K yra.1 6epMe3. OımaH eıpn oh m
Y 3 y n eH
6 aınqa y aM eaırare M am m iM antt. (N) /ÜSiilön Sardı doi] depledcıjem, barrıbir, örjkii
durkunı berm e8. Onnon ötrii o n ı b asd a iiB m öSliige ça lışm alı./
Even if you attach the broken-off thing later, it won’t produce the former shape.
Because of this, you should just try not to break it to begin with.

- E e p eK eıu ıa! - flHÜnn, a^aM cu r t ır t ıp t m n t ıp .- flHflMeK, ceH OHfla, 3X,eMHH

6H3HHKHfle snuaMarUHa rapuiH flan-fls. (N) rBerekella:!" diyip, a:dam8ı
gıgınpdır. "Diymek, 0en onno, ejemir) biSirjkide yarsamagına garsı darl-lâr."/
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. "That means you really don’t mind my mother
living with us." ['opposed to her living with us']

On flHi(e 6 ax w M p aK 06 a eTMare xoBnyrapfltı. (BH)

/Ol dige bahımra:k o:ba: yetmâ:ge howlugya:rdı./
He was rushing to get to the village even sooner.

«MHe MeHHH MaranapbiM h3XHHH? MeH, MeHHH huihm H 3xhhh? MeHHH 3fleH 3aflUM
H3XJBIH?» flHÖHn, 3ÜÜ3M aflaM ÖHp o n flyH fls rH T M eratıe TaüapnbtK re p ö sH hjim.
(TV16.1)
/'İne menig cargalanm narhili? Men, menir) irsim narhili? Menit) eden Sardun
narhili?" diyip, eyyârm ardam bir ol dünyâ: gitmegine tayyarrlık göryârn yarlı./
As if already preparing to leave for the other vrorld, a person thinks "And how are
my children? How are my affairs? How are the things I’ve done?" ['preparing for
his leaving']
 Verbals 331

3 p n ı p MepxeMeTOM MUXMaHtm JIe6an B e jıa sm m a c a n a p a y rp a M a rtiH a

(TP12.5)
ra p a ıu H n a p .
/Ertirr merhemetli nu:hma:nıi) Lebap wela:yatuıa 0apara ugromoguno garasılya:r./
Tomorrow it’s expected that the gracious guest will set off on a trip to Lebap
province. ['expecting his setting ofF]

«IUy aparaTHaııiLiKJiapbtn MyHflan GettnsK-fls eejJYPHJiMerHHe uiYÖxeneHMece

öonap.» (TV14.3)
/"Su a:ragatnaSıklant] munnon beylâ:k-dâ: ö00ürülmögünö sübhölönmöOö bolor."/
"it may not be doubted that these relations will develop in the future." ['no doubt
in th eir developing']

A verb ending in the infinitive suffixis equivalent to the adverb modifıer of the
predicate of a sentence, either when placed in the locative case (-MaKHa/Meıcne /-makda/
mekde/) or when followed by postpositions (ymhh /üciirn/ 'to, in order to, for', ajibi
/ya:h/ 'like', and others) (also see 411, 414).

EeKpeueflsKH C. A. Hbisrac® aflbmflaKbi aTMbinbiK 3aB0flbuma TypKMen axan-TeKe

arnapbiHbi ecftypMeKne 3xnn Taranna sflHnMsp. (N)
/Bekreweda:ki 0.A. Nıya:8ov a:dmna:kı atĞıhk 8awodunno türkmön ahal-teke
atlarını ö00ürmökdö ahli tagalla: edilya:r./
Every effort is being made to breed Turkmen ahal-teke horses at the horse farm
named after S.A. Nıyazov in Bekrewe. ['in breeding']

Xa3Hp uıon c0BX03a aflbtubi suRupun, ar3a SoJiaÜMaKna mu 6ap. (N)

/Hâ:8ir sol 0owho8o a:dıi)i yaSSınp, agSa: bola:ymakda i:s ba:r./
Now there is a problem even in signing up for that state farm and becoming a
member.

îîeHe M y n a rapaMa^aH, Ilpe3MfleHTHH repıce3Meflnp TaöuiHpMKJiapMHbi epHHe

eTnpMeKf(e repneTHH xannun-cannbtnnbK sflHJiHn rejiHiriiap. (TV14.2)
/Yörnö moıjo garamaSSan, PreSidentiij görköSmödiir tabsınklannı yerine
yetiımekde gömötü:n ha:llırj-0alhr]lık edilip gelinyâ:r./
But in spite of this, there has been blatant negligence in carrying out the
instructions and assignments of the President.

MeHe HHflHfleH Sefijreıc cecH nu HHKapMaH orypM aK 6 m3« h y ™ onapbin

aüflsm napbina «xa» 6epıweK a n u 6 n p 3aT öon apflbi. (N )
/Yö:nö iıuıiden beyla:k 0e0ir)i Çıkarmam oturmok biSitj iicü:n olorurj aydya:nlanna
"hâ:" bermek ya:lı bir 8a:t bolordı./
But to sit without saying a vvord from now on,vvould be for us something like
saying "Yes" to what they are telling us. ['like giving a "yay"]
332 Türkmen Reference Grammar

BaTaHUMU3a uraKec erce, xeMM3MH3e e-ritap. Bh3 rapaıucfci3jn,ırbiMti3w

6epK H T M £Kejıtı 6wneH 6apaptıc. (N) /Watanmu8a sike9 ye80e, hemmâ:mi8e
yetyaîr. Bi8 GarasOıSlıgunıSı berkitmek yo:h bilen barya:n0./
If it damages our homeland it damages tıs ali. We are going along the path of
consolidating our Independence. ['by the path of consolidating']
Tammnapa tsjihm ÖepMeK a-fla onapflaH T a jıa n stm ck ymhh onapii repeıoiH
OKyB acöaraıapu SıuıeHeM-a yıc^yH 3TMeramnp. (N)
/Ta:h:plara ta:Iim bermek ya:-da olordon talap etmek ücü:n olon gerekli okuw
e0ba:plan bilenem-â: üpjün etmelidir./
In order to educate students or to make demands on them, we must supply
them at least with the textbooks they need.
TeTOpMnflaH xa c u n u 6oKflemcıt3 Kaöyjı 3tmck yhhh 6y epfle 3epyp ıuepraep
flepefluruoiflHp. (TV8.3) /Getirilyâ:n haSılı bökdönc8ü5 kabu:l etmek ücihn bu
yerde 8eru:r sertler dörödüliipdür./
The necessary conditions are being created here for receiving vvithout hindrance the
harvest brought in. ['in order to receive']
Mımauıep Miue THTMeK yhhh TaüapnaHapnap. (TV7.3)
/İ:sciler i:se gitmek ücii:n tayya:rlanya:rlar./
The workers are preparing to go to work.

Forms o f the İnfinitive Suffix

Türkmen indicates the infinitive by adding the suffix -Man/Men /-mak-mok/mek-mök/
in the positive and -Ma3JibiK/Me3JiHK /-ma81ık-mo81uk/me81ik-mö81ük/ in the
negative to the stems of verbs.
Uncharacteristically, the vowel in the infinitive suffix becomes a long vowel when
the dative case suffîx is added (-Mara/Mare /-ma:ga/mâ:ge/). This occurs, perhaps, due
to analogy with the verbal noun in -Ma/Me /-ma/me/, whose vowel also becomes long
when the dative case suffix is added (-Ma/Ma /-ma:/mâ:/) (see 59).
The infinitive suffix appears with ali Türkmen verbs for the purpose of citation in
dictionaries. Any of the five voice suffixes (active, passive, reflexive, cooperative,
causative; see 530) may be added directly to the verb stem prior to the addition of the
suffix -Man/MeK /-mak/mek/ (for example, active 3TMeK /etmek/ 'to do', passive
3flMJiMeK /edilmek/ 'to be done').
The infinitive also may be used in descriptive formations (-Mara/Mare öaııuıaMaK
/-ma:ga/ma:ge başlamak/ 'to begin to do (something)' ete.; see 311) and in modal
formations (-Man/MeK 6ojiMaK /-mak/mek bolmok/ 'one may/can do (something)',
-MaK/MeK repeK /-mak/mek gerek/ 'it is necessary to do (something)', -MaK/MeK
m ymkhh /-mak/mek mümkürn/ 'it is possible to do (something)', - M a r u / M e m
HCjıeMeK /-magı/megi iOlemek/ 'to want to do (something)'; see 305, 306, 308, 309).
For paradigms of the infinitive with possessive and case suffîxes, see 654-655.
 Verbals 333

Verbal Nouns
Türkmen has the verbal noun suffbces -M a/ıvte /-ma/me/ and -(H)liui/(ü)hi'1 /-(y)ıs/
(y)is/, which share certain features with the infinitive in -M aıt/M eK /-mak/mek/. Both
the verbal nouns and the infinitive take possessive and case suffbces and both may
serve as subjects and objects of sentences. Hovvever, the verbal nouns and the infinitive
differ in that nouns ending in -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ or -um /m n /-ıs/is/ plus possessive
suffbces reflect the process of an action, whereas words ending in -MaK/M«K /-mak/
mek/ plus possessive suffbces indicate only that the othervvise undefined action is
possessed by a definite person. In addition, the verbal nouns cannot bı: used in
constructions with r e p e K /gerek/, m y m k h h /mümkürn/ or H C jıeM eK /islemek/, as can
the infinitive.

H 3M acbi /yaSmaflı/ mmıeMecH /ı:slem_e0i/

his writing (process) her working (process)
H3tnnw /yaSısı/ HuıneöıuM /i:sleysi/
her writing (process) his working (process)
s3Mana /yaSmagı/ HinneMerH /i:slemegi/
her vvriting (undefined) his vvorking (undefined)

Verbal Noun in -mcümb l-ma/mel

Addition of the suffbc -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ to a verb stem foıms a verbal noun, that is, a
word which names the act or result of an action while funetioning as a noun.

3 3 M aK / y a S m a k / t o s t u d y H3Ma /yaSma/ ( a c t / r e s u l t o f ) w ritin g

O K anaK /okomok/ t o read O K aM a / o k o m o / ( a c t / r e s u l t o f ) r e a d i n g
H n ın e M e K / b i l e m e k / t o w o r k J tu iJ ie M e / i : s l e m e / ( a c t / r e s u l t o f ) v v o r k j ı g
rep M eK /g ö ı m ö k / to s e e re p M e /g ö ı m ö / (a c t/re s u lt o f) s e e in g

With the accusative case suffbc (-MaHbi/M3HH /-ma:nı/mâ:ni/), a verbal noun may
serve as the direct object of a predicate or enter into noun phrases that serve as the
subject.

TeÖMTbt ıctmibuibiKiıapa rapa.Ma3.aaH, HiuHiuıepnH ap.Macbi-HJiTanMacbi es. (N)

/Tebiıgı kı:ncılıklara garamaSSan, irscilerii] a:rnıa6ı-yaltanmaei yo:k./
In spite of Üıe natural difficulties, the workers are not getting tired out.
[literally: 't h e i r g e t t i n g w e a r y a n d t i r e d does not exist']
EpH, BbinrupMaHU öauıapMacan m ptm MHnrbipun re3*;eK. (N)
/Yeri, yılgırma:m basarmaöaıj nardip yılgınp geSjek./
Well, if you can’t manage a smile, how will you go through life smiling'1 ['if you
can’t manage smiling'J
334 Turkmen Reference Grammar

CeH x a ftc w n a ü t ı HHM3HH x a n a s n ? TeKMH, rapaM bi? (TV17.3)

/0en hayGı ca:yı icmâ:ni ha:laya:ıj? Görkmü, garamı?/
Which kind of tea do you like to drink? Green or black? ['do yon like drinking
vvhich kind of tea?']
üpoeKTfle 6aıura-fla Ken aBTO6yc, T p o n n e flö y c c a T b iH a j i M a M b n 6ap. (TV9.2)
/Proyektde b asg a-d a köp aw töb u 0 , tırolleybu O 0atın alm a:m ı5 ba:r./
It’s planned that we’re buying a lot more buses and trolleys. [literally: 'our
buying exists in the projected plan']
Oh MiumaH 6spM 6np xonoflHntHHrnMH3 6ap. By xenfle HmjıeMecHHH roitfltı.
HsMe 3TCeMK3M? T a 3eCHHM anaHBMMbl H peM O H T 3TflHpeÖHHMH? (T17.2)
/0:n yıllan ba:ri bir holodiinigimiS ba:r. Bu hepde i:îleme0ini goydı. Na:me
e00emkâ:m? Ta:8e0ini alayınmı ya: remont etdireyinmi?/
We’ve had our reftigerator for ten years. It stopped working this week. What
should I do? Should I get a new one or have it repaired? ['(something) stopped its
working']

Forms o f the Verbal Noun in -malue l-malmel

The suffix -Ma/Me /-ma-mo/me-mö/ is added directly to the stem of a verb to create a
verbal noun. its vowel is lengthened when the first and second person possessive
suffixes are added (for example, ajiMaMbn /alma:mı5/ 'our taking'), and when the
genitive, accusative and dative case suffixes are added (for example, kim sim /icma:ni/
'the drinking') (see 57, 59). The verbal noun in -M a/M e /-ma/me/ does not appear with
the negation partide -Ma/Me /-maAne/.
For paradigms of the verbal noun in -Ma/Me /-m a /m e /, see 656-657.

Verbal Noun in -umluut 1-ıs/iSI

The suffîx -biuı/Hiıı /-ıs/is/ is added to verb stems to create verbal nouns that name the
fact or marnıer of an action. In some cases, such verbal nouns reflect a wish or attempt
to realize an action.

H3Maıc /yaSmak/ to study H3trm /yaSıs/ (fact/manner oi) writing

O K aM aK /okomok/ to read /okoyus/ (fact/manner of) reading
O K a iib iıu
HiujıeMeK /i:slemek/ to vvork m nm ttm u /i:sleyis/ (fact/manner of) vvorking
re p M e K /göımök/ to see r e p n m /görül/ (fact/manner of) seeing

The verbal noun in -biıu/Hin /-is/il/ may appear as the subject or object of a
sentence, but not as its attribute or predicate.

MeH ce H Jfff fiojınıyrça flyıuyHiın SuneMOK. (G)

/Men Oenirj bolsurjo düşünüp bilemo:k./
I cannot understand your behavior. ['way of being']
 Verbals 335

AMaHMH enflauıjıapbi 6nnen 6wne yrpaMattmbina onyn 3:x,ecn

MK*;ajiHKCU3naTOM. (G)
/Ama:nır) yo:lloslon bilen bile ugromoysuno onur) eje0i ı:njalık0ı81anm./
Aman’s not going off together with his companions has his mother worried.

Horptı, onapttH roBjıynıaM, 6e3ejımneM, oÜHajibimaM 6auıra-6aıura. (N)

[roÜJiymaM < rofinyıutt xeM, ete.] /Dogn, olorurj goylusom, beSelisem,
oynolusom baSga-basga./ [goylusom < goylusı hem, ete.]
True, the way they are staged, decorated and performed is quite different. ['the way
of their staging, decoration.and performing']

IIIoHMa ram a anMaıc yınn my BanrçjaH epnep 3Knme TaJfsp (SojiManbi. (N)
/Sonco galla almak ücü:n su wagtdan yerler ekise tayyarr bolmolı./
To get such a yield the land should be ready for planting starting now.

0HflYpHJix;eK 6eH3HH BUiMH 3cacnanm.ıpManapa reps, 3KononncH TaMflan jKyna.

apacca, s n o a ttu m y^m h 3bHfflCH3 6onap.(N)
/Ö:nnürüljök benSin ilmi e8a:01annırmalara görâ:, ekologiki ta:ydan juda: ara80a,
yarsayıî ücü:n 8ıya:n0ı8 bolor./
Accordrng to scientific tests, the gasoline that will be produced will be very elean
ecologically and will not be harmful for the living.

TypKMeH6aııiHHHH ÖejıneüuiH suibi, scactı Mecene H3Me? (T l 1.4)

/Türkmönbası:nıq belleysi ya:h, e0a:0ı meBele nâ:me?/
As Türkmenbashı pointed out, what is the basic issue? ['as the pointing out of
Türkmenbashı']

Forms o f the Verbal Noun in -Hut/uuı l-ıs/isl

For this verbal noun, the variant -bun/um /-ıs-us/is-ül/ is added to the stems of verbs
ending in a consonant, while the variant -ftunı/iiiftn /-yıs-yus/yis-yüs/ is added to
those ending in a vowel (see 69). Plural, possessive and case endings and the negation
partide -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ may be added to this verbal noun.
Addition of a possessive suffîx or the negation partide to -ütım/tİHin /-yıs/yis/
results in the loss of its vowel and the spellûıg -üıu- /-yi-/, except in the third person
plural (see 60). Addition of a possessive plus case form to the variant -um/um /-ıs/is/
results in the loss of its vowel in spoken Türkmen, although the vowel usually is
written in Standard Türkmen; for example, H3biınbinnaH [yaSsırjdan] 'from your
writing'.
For paradigms of the verbal noun suffixes, see 658-659. For the verbal noun suffix
-ac/ec /-a0/e8/, which is used as the suffıx of desire, see 291-292.
336 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Participles
Participles are non-final verbs that show a past, present or future action. In English,
participles may serve as attributes or as adverb modifiers. Turkmen participles may
function as equivalents to the English active (sujih /ya8ya:n/ '(who is) writing') and
passive (îDbiJiHH /yaSıIyarn/ '(which is being) written') forms, but they have a wider
usage than their English counterparts.
Turkmen has three main participle forms whose basic distinction is betvreen present,
past and future tenses. Each of these forms potentially may occur in any of the five
voices (see 530), although some verbs may not do so due to their lexical meanings.

Present Past Future

-hh/ üsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/ -an/m /-an/en/ -açaK/açeK /-jak/jek/

In Turkmen, participles may serve as any part of the sentence (subject, object,
predicate, attribute), although their function as predicates is not common. Participles
most frequently occur as attributes of a sentence. These funcdons are represented in the
table (see 337).

Present Participle in -sMİüaıı l-ya:nlyâ:nl

The present participle indicates an action that is continuing or being completed at the
time of speech. It may be used as an attribute, subject or object in a sentence.

OKanH aflaM a person who is reading

/okoya:n a:dam/ ('a reading-person')

OKaMâHH aflaM a person who is not reading

/okomoya:n ardam/ ('a not-reading-person')

oıcacbi reuüaıı aflaM a person who vvants to read

/oka:0ı gelyârn ardam/ ('a to-read-wanting-person')

oKan ChjiHsh aflaM a person vvho can read

/okarp bilyârn ardam/ ('a to-read-knowing hovv-person")

HinjıeftaH aflaM a working person

/i rs leyâ m ardam/ ('a person who works')
 Verbals 337

Functions of Participles
Participle as Attribute

rejıiian noean maça rarmp. The train (that is) arriving is law.
/Gelyâm poye8[S] gi:ja: ga:lya:r./

Tenen noe3fl nraça ranflu. The train that arrived was late.
/Gelen poyeö[8] gi:ja: ga:llı./

rejı*,eK noe3fl nras,s ranap. The train that will arrive is late.
/Geljek poye8[8] gi:ja: ga:lya:r./

TeJlKaH noe3RH repMapmı. I see the train (that is) arriving.

/Gelyâm poyeSSi göryâ:rin./

MeH rejıeH noeaflH repflyM. I saw the train that arrived.

/Men gelen poyeSSi gördüm./

MeH ren»,eK noe3fln repepMH. Fil see the train that will arrive.
/Men geljek poyeSSi görörün./

Participle as Object

Men rejıiısHiı TaH aspbiH . I know the person (who is) conıing.
/Men gelyami tanaya:nn./

Men rejıeHH TaHaapbiH. I knovv tlıe person wlıo came.

/Men geleni tanaya:nn./

MeH OHyn rejıiı shhijh repüapHH. I see him coming.

/Men onui) gelyâmini göryâ:rin./

MeH onyn reneıiHHM repflyM. I saw him come.

/Men onur) gelenini gördüm./

Participle as Subject

rapauiflH KHM? Who is the person waiting?

/Garasyam kim?/

OTypaHJiap ry/ıyıuAHnep. Those sitting (there) laughed

/Oturonlor gülüsdülör./ together.
338 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Turkmen forms the present tense participle by adding the suffuces -hh/üsh /-ya:n/
yâ:n/ in the positive and -Masm/MeUau /-maya:n/m eyâ:n/ in the negative to the stems
of verbs. When used as an attribute, the present participle generally is equivalent to an
English relative clause formed with 'who, what, which, when, that'. Sometimes, such
a phrase is equivalent to an English adjectival phrase.

MeH cana T93e flypMyuı yrpyHfla ropemiiaH anaM jıaptı repKe3eftHH. (G)
/M en Gatja ta:8e dutmuş ugrunno görösya:n a:damlan görköSöyün./
Let me show you people w ho a re struggling for a new life.

Ey ryH aflaMJiap ry n suıap yuyptiHfla flaraflfcinap, »ryHKH 6apxa ryflMneHHn

CapHH ejı onaptı xoBcana canbmfltı. (G) /Bu:n a:damlar gün ya:sa:r u£urunno
da:gadılar, çünkü barha gü:clönüp baryam yel olon how9ola: Oalıpdı./
Today the people dispersed just as the evening began, because the w ind w hich
kept getting stro n g er womed them.

K apxaH afla MinjıeİiaH HiUMHnepfleH-fle r o m n e fls n . (N )

/Ka:rha:nada i:sleyâ:n i:scilerden-de nâ:gi:le da:l./
T h e en terprise a lso is n ot d issa tisfîe d vvith the vvorkers w orking at the enterprise.

O n a H H açajıtnc GepM eitan, V K y cu H tı TyTnypM asiH n e p T -a x n a jıa T A H H aryn a-m tt

r a n t ı n H iıiK u n u . (N ) /Orjo ı:n ja lık b erm e y a m , u :k u 0 um tu tdu rm oya:n dert-
a h w a :la t A :n n a g ü l a :tü g ı:5 ıg ısk ıd ı./
T he to rm en t w hich gives him no peace and does not let him sleep is his love for
a girl named Annagül.

I llo n B a r r artiH Bi ö a rn a n , mhcjih yw ap r y m su m e n r a r o n y n reJiMaH iîmnHge

re3H (N ) / S ° l w a g t atın ı b a:g la :p , m i01i u c o r gu s y a :lı y e rjil g o p u p
g e ly â m y iğ id e gö 5 ü düsdü./
TTıen h e tied u p h is h o rse and n o tice d a young m an galloping lig h tly as a b ird in
flig h t,

Em3 my Mecene ömtsH nabnaıam m , my ryH flBBner ceKToptmfla Htnjıetöan

thkm hmhjihk aTeJibecH 6wneH xycyctı ceKTopfla Huıjıeüan nıeflne aTentia Baptın
repflYK- (TV 12.4)
/Bi8 su me0ele bilen gıBıklanıp, su:n döwlöt âektorunno i:sleyâm tikincilik
atelyeOi bilen hu0u:0ı Oektordo i:sleyâ:n Şeyle atelyâ: banp gördük./
We became interested in this issue and today went to see a sewing shop
operating in the state sector and such a shop o perating in the private sector.

OHconaM, HeMe, ene-fle 6np scactı 6k3Mi( xa3np yHC Gepiîan sanbiMtıs - Gyrffaii.
(TV 12.4)
/OnOorjom neme, yene-de bir e0a:0ı biöirj hâ:8ir ün0 beryam 8a:dımı8- bugdoy./
And then, you know, another basic thing we devote attention to now is wheat.
 Verbals 339

reTMpnjıiİ3H x acujıu B eK H eıraara Kaöyn STMeK ymhh 6 y epfle 3e p y p mepTJiep

(TV8.3) /Getirilyarn h a :0 ılı bökdön c0 ü8 k ab u :I e tm e k ü cü :n bu
flspeflmiMiiflM p.
y e rd e 8eru:r sertler dörödülüpdür./
The necessary conditions are being created here for receiving without hindrance the
harvest brought in.

51k h h B a r ı c a AınraSa-ma x 33itp K H 3a M a H tm T a n a 6H H a J i a ü t i K r e J iB a H

nojiHKjiHHHKa Humsn 6auınap. (TV9.4) /Yakı:n wagtda Asgabatda hâ:8irki
8ama:mi) talabma laıyık gelyâ:n polikiinika i:sla:p basla:r./
A polyclinic that meets modern demands soon will begin operating in Ashgabat.

When a present participle in -Hn/MaH /-ya:n/yâ:n/ serves as a subject, it may take

plural and possessive suffixes.

KsÖMpnepH ceMsp, ceÜMettsujıepH xeM Sap. (G)

/Kâ:birleri 0öyya:r, 0öymöyâ:nleri hem ba:r./
Some of them love him, but also there are those who don’t love him. ['those
(among them) who don’t love']
M6epÜ3H k h m ? HsöejuDi! Hııpeflen H6epmıÖ3p? HaSeram! (N)
/İ:beryâ:n kim? Na:belli! Nireden i:berilyâ:r? Nâ:belli!/
Who is the sender? Unknown! Where is it sent from? Unknown!

Mkmhsrji Tonapa raptonnepeM e3apactmfla mca SenYiıflap. (N) [rnpüsHnepeM <

nıpÜ3HnepH x e M ] /İkinji toporo gi:rya:nlerem ö:8a:ra0mna ika: bö:lünya:r./
[gi:ryâ:nleıem < gi:ryâ:nleri hem]
Those who belong to the second group also are divided into two among
themselves.

M o H e M e ır n u 6y e p f l e H H İbrçeK 6 o j i h h 3a n t i M 6a ı u r a . ( O )
Yö:nö meniıj bu yerde diyjek bolya:n 8a:dım basga./
But the thing I wish to talk about here is different.

Corç H3M e 6o n aH M H M 6 h ji Ö 3H e K . I l l o n n f f lH n f lH p . (TV13.3)

/0oi] n â m e bolonum bilyâ:n yo:k. Sol gidipdir./
Noone knows what happened after that. Apparently he left. [There is noone who
knows']

The present participle suffîx is used in fonnations of paired verbs such as renüsH-
rHUİiaH /gelyâ:n-gidyâ:n/ 'coming and going' and anHH-öepfösn /alya:n-beryâ:n/
'taking and giving, buying and selling'. When the positive and negative participle
forms of a verb occur together, they express the idea of 'whether...or not...'
340 Türkmen Reference Grammar

IUy HceTOHU anaHHUiBnaH conpa MHe Tenet^oHtra, HmnetbHAKnum-

H iuJieM eiiaH flH rH H H SapnaMaJiH. (TV17.4) /Su zetonı alamgıSSan Ooıjro ine
telefomi) i:sleyâ:nnigini-i:slenıeya:nnigini ba:riamalı./
After you get these tokens, you have to check whether the telephone is working
o r n o t.

Forms o f the Present Participle

The present participle is indicated by the suffix -hh/Msh /-ya:n/yâ:n/ in the positive and
-MaHH/ıneüaH /-maya:n-moya:n/meyâ:n-möyâ:n/ in the negative.
When a verb stem ends in the consonant t / t / or k /k/, this consonant becomes R /d/
or r /g/ with the addition of -hh/İİsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/; for example, atin«H /aydyam/ <
aÖ T M aK /aytmak/ 'to teli', n a p u r a H /da:ngya:n/ < fla p b iK M aK /da:nkmak/ 'to worry'.
The present participle in -«h/üsh /-ya:n/yâ:n/ has the same form as the contracted
first person singular of the present indefinite tense in -ım /tta H /-ya:n/ yâ:n/ (see 222),
but only the latter may occur as a final verb.

M eH KHTan oKasın. I ’m reading a book.

/Men kita:p okoyarn./ [present indefinite]

Kuran oKaaH who is reading a book

/kita:p okoyarn/ [present participle]

M eH o6a raflüan. I ’m going to a village.

/Men o:ba: gidyârn./ [present indefinite]

o6a rvmKaıı •who is going to a village

/o:ba: gidyâ:n/ [present participle]

The present participle is one of the components of the subjective present continuous
tense in -nHflup/Ü3Hf(Hp /-ya:nmr/yâ:nnir/ (see 229). It also is used in conditional
clauses (see 282) and in object phrases with - r m k / h m k /-dık/dik/, + j i u k / j i h k /+lık/lik/
and -SH<ıa/tt3H <i3 /-ya:nca:/yâ:n£â:/; see 480, 482, 504).
 Verbals 341

Past Participle in -an/en l-anlenl

The past participle indicates an action that vvas completed in the past, although its
effects may be felt at the time of speech. In Turkmen, the past participle is the most
commonly used of the participles and may serve as the subject, object, and aıtribute of
a sentence.

OK3H aflaM a person vvho read

/oka:n a:da m/ ('a read-personO
oKaMaflUK aflaM a person vvho did not read
/okomoduk a:dam/ ('a read-not-person')

OKacbi reaeıı aflaM a person vvho vvanted to read

/okoöı gelen a:dam/ ('a to-read-wanted-person')
OKacu rejiMeflHK aflaM a person vvho did not vvant to read
/okoöı gelen ardam/ ('a to-read-v/anted-not-person')
onan ÖHJieH aflaM a person vvho could read
/oka:p bilen ardam/ ('a to-read-knevv how-person')
oKan Bmumcbhk aflaM a person vvho could not read
/okarp bilen ardam/ 'a to-read-knew how-not-person')
renen xenne last week
/gecen hepde/ ('week that passed')
ropyjiMeaHK mır an unprecedented vvork
/görülmödük iri/ ('a work that has not been seen')

Turkmen marks the past participle with the suffuc -aH/eH /-an/en/ in the positive
and -MaRMK/MeAHK /-madık/medik/ in the negative. When used as an attribute, this
form generally is equivalent to an English relative clause formed vvith 'vvho, what,
which, when, that did (something)'.

OHyn M33jıeuıeH ro3Jiepn anne AKHaöafltı caflrapflu. (G)

/Onur) marSlesen göSlörü diıje A:knaba:dı öaygardı./
His watering eyes perceived only Aknabat. ['eyes vvhich watered']
Bwp 6ap 3KeH, 6np eK 3KeH, ÖHp aanun Kejıx,e 6anap flHeH o rn u 6ap skch. (G)
/Bir ba:r eken, bir yo:k eken, bir ayarlıg Kelje battır diyen oglı ba:r eken./
Once upon a time, there was a woman whp had a son nam ed Kelje-batır.
Oji rııjteH epHHflen xjw renMe3. (G) /O l giden yerinnen hi:c gelmeS./
He will never come back from the place vvhere he’s gone.
342 Türkmen Reference Grammar

caxun Gonan O p cte n m 10-20

Y j i h T e 6 n r t ı Be H u rre n n e K T y a n v e u iM e n e p e
fcmuaH con e a rıe p H H e yntı 6 n p rapiffi>tqaıu öonaSMarMHHaH M eK H H İİsp n ep . (N)
/Ulı tebi:gı we intellektual Çeşmelere öahıp bolon Orflyetir) 10-20 yıllan 0oıj
ö:81örünö ulı bir garsıdaS bola:ymagmnan cekinyâ:rler./
They are scared that Russia, which pössesses great natural and intellectual
resources, may become a great rival in 10-20 years.

Sııım snıı apKa an>niflfei. flapTrbram.ın.1 öoıoma oHJiapna Atma «en Gonan eHe
flepT üliji înuaMaK ranfltı. (N) /Elli ya:s arka atıllı. Dartgmhgı boyunco ornlorco
yıla deg bolon yene dö:rt yıl ya:samak ga:llı./
Fifty years transpired. Another four years that vrere equal to dozens of years in
their tenseness remained to live.

EepeH ryppyHHHH3 ymhh K e n car Sonyn. (N)

/Beren gürrügügüS ücü:n köp 0ag bolurj./
Thank you so much for the talk you gave. ['talk which you gave']

-By BpTeKMHH OKaMagUK a 3UIHTMeflHK TypKMeH a3-a3fltıp.(N)

/Bu ertekini okomoduk ya: esitmedik türkmön a:8-a:88ır./
There are extremely few Türkm en who have not either read or heard this fairy
tale.

rom a 6y epfle 3iıiHTMe{tnK fliuınepHHH suihtah. (H)

/Gojo bu yerde esitmedik dillerini esitdi./
Here, the old man heard languages that he had not heard before.

Cn3e MsnHMfliıp, 6«3 hh TypKMeH 6eÖMK ıuaxbiptiMH3 Gonan MarruMryjiM

roKJien THpecHHneH ESonan. (TV4.2) /8i8e mâ:limdir, biSirj türkmön beyik
sa:hı:nmıS bolon Magtımgulı görklörj ti:re0innen bolon./
You might know that Magtımgulı, our great Türkmen poet, was from the Gökleng
tribe. ['Magtımgulı, who is our great Türkmen poet']

TypKMeH efiyne MbiXMaH 6onyn Gapan ajjaM rantman rnpeıme canaM 6epnn
rnpMemı. (TA15.2) /Türkmön öyünö mı:hma:n bolup baran a:dam gapıdan
gi:renne 0ala:m berip gkrmeli./
A person who goes as a guest to a Türkmen home has to say hello when he enters
through the door.

When the past participle in -an/eH /-an/en/ functions as the subject of a sentence, it
may take plural and possessive suffixes.

Hly flypMyui.ua, my eline HCİ73HH«H3 6oJiap. (G)

/Su durmusdo, su öydö İ91â:nii]i5 bolor./
In this life, in this home, w hat you have wished for will be.
 Verbals 343

MeHHH attflaHMM 6onnyMH? (G) /Menii] aydanım bollumı?/

Did what I say happen?
ÂaupraHaH aq ranap. (G) /A:8ırganan a:c ga:Iar./
Who has experienced little stays hungry. [proverb]
MnuıeMejjHK flmııneMe3. (G) /İplemedik di:slemeS./
Who does not work does not eat. [proverb]
-.Shkh renHiı rııgeH khm? - On cema* hhihh flsn, xoBnyflaH hhk . (N)
/"Yaıjkı gelip giden kim?" "Ol 0enii) i:siıj dâ:l, howludon cık."/
"Who’s that who just came and left?" "It’s none of your business, get out of my
yard."
XeMMe reneHJiep xoıııan 6onyn rHj$ap. (TV8.4)
/Hemme gelenler hosa:l bolup gidyâ:r.
Everyone who comes goes away satisfied.

The past participle often serves as object of the predicate of a sentence. In such
cases, it may take plural, possessive and case suffixes.

AMaHJM h3xhjim ttepsHHHH, h3Xhjih ee reneHHHH, hsxmjim OTypun-TypaHbintı,

H3XHnw HİİHn-H'ieHMHM, xaTfla HflaHbiHM, flbim anaHbiHbi-fla 6wnMeflH. (G)
/Amamh na:hili yörâmini, na:hili öyö gelenini, nâ:hili oturup-turonum, nathili
iyip-icenini, hatda: ya:danmı, dımc alanını-da bilmedi./
Amanlı didn’t know how he went, how he got to his house, how he sat down
and got up, how he ate and drank, or even vvhether he was tired or rested.
3rep SBtiJiManbiK Goncan, oHjja xoBJiyıd (H)
/Eger yaSılmadık bol0or), onno hovvluk!/
If you have not subscribed, then hurry! ['if you are one who has not
subscribed']
Bax, Ketime, ceH HOMe yhhh Mera TaHaıvıajjbiK 6 ojihh? (H)
/Wah, Keyik, 0en nâ:me üçüm meni tanamadık bolya:ıj?/
Oh, Keyik! Why are you acting like someone vvho doesn’t recognize me?
On Men jıypMynıa HUKaHUMbi örnıenoK 3Ken. (O)
/Ol mer) durmuso çıkanımı bileno:k eken./
It tumed out he didn’t knovv I ’d götten m arried.

Coueuifle BenaT CoJiaHJiapM uıon Taüfla açaftnanflbipnap. (TV13.3)

/0öwö5dö wepa:t bolonlon Sol ta:yda ja:yla:pdırlar./
They buried those vvho perished in the battle (of Gökdepe) there.
344 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Unlike other participles, the past participle in - a H /e H /-an/en/ may stand as the final
verb form of a sentence. However, in these rare cases, the participle characterizes the
subject (note English 'the window is broken') and does not express an action ('the
window was broken by me').

Ym MaraM 6ap. Y j i h o ra y M e ü n e H e H , rarabiM Li flyp M ym a MbiKapjpjM.

(O) /Ü£ da:gam ba:r. Uh oğlum öylönön, gı:5ımı durmuso çıkardım./
I have three children. My oldest son is married, I married off my daughter.

KaKaM yprna rırrflH , M en KaKaM. KtıpK sm ıtiHfla. Ö3H 6np M yn flOKy3 My3
yrçyıojyK übinfla 6 o n a H . (TV13.3) /Ka:kam urso gitdi, merj ka:kam. Kırk yarsınna.
Ö:8ii bir mür) doku5 yü5 iicünjü yılla bolon./
My father went to war, my father. At the age of forty. He was born in 1903.

O h c o h Kan rypneM ereM ragaraıı, naxap uttun o r a p K a n . (TV13.5)

/On0orj ka:n gürlömögöm gadagan, nahar iyip otı:rka:i]./
Then, to talk a lot also is forbidden, while you're eating.

Forms o f the Past Participle

Turkmen forms the past participle by adding the suffix -a H /e H /-an-on/en-ön/ to verb
stems. When the stem ends in a vowei, this vowel is lengthened to a / a /a:/â:/ and the
suffix is written -aH/aH /-a:n/â:n/.
The negative past participle usually is formed with -MaubiK/MeftiiK /-m adık-
moduk/medik-mödük/, which consists of the negation partide -Ma/Me /-ma/me/ and
the no-longer used participle form - a m k / h h k /-dık/dik/. However, the negative form
-MaaİMBH /-ma:n/mâ:n/ may be used by some vvriters and speakers.

TenMeRHriiHH3H aımrrflHM. I heard y o u didn’t come.

/GelmedigirjiSi esitdim./
~ TenMaıınnn3M siuht^ mm.
/ - Gelmâ:nii]i5i esitdim./

Tlıe past participle suffix is a component of the negative present perfect tense suffıx
-aaoK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/ (see 235) and of the subjective present perfect suffix
-anflbip/eHHHp /-anmr/ennir/ see 236). It also is used in conditional clauses (see 283)
and in object phrases with - r u k / a h k /-dık/dik/, + j i u k / j i m k /+ lık/lik/ and
-aHflaıı/eııjjeH c o h /-annan/ennen 0orj/; see 480, 482, 503).
 Verbals 345

Fuıure Participle in -otçaıcİJHçeK. 1-jakljekl

The future participle functions to show action that definitely will take phıce in the
future. It occurs as an attribute, as well as the subject or object of a sentence.

OKajrçaK aflaM a person who will read

/okojok a:dam/ ('a will-read-person')

0KaMax^aK aflaM a person who will not read,

/okomojok a:dam/ ('a will-not-read-person')

oKacbi rejıw,eK aflaM a person who will w ant to read

/oka:0ı geljek a:dam/ ('a to-read-will-want-person/)
oKacu renMe)K,eK aflaM a person who won’t w ant to read
/oka:0ı gelmejek a:dam/ ('a to-read-will-want-not-person')

OKan 6«Jiw,eK aflaM a person who will be able to read

/oka:p biljek ardam/ ('a to-read-knows how-will-person')
OKan 6nnMe>K,eK aflaM a person who won’t be able to read
/oka:p bilmejek ardam/ ('a to-read-knows how-not-will-person')

In Türkmen, the future participle is formed by adding the suffix -«an/JK eK

/-jak/jek/ in the positive and -Maw,aK/MeK,eR /-majak/mejek/ in the negati ve to the
stem of a verb. When used as an attribute, this form generally is equival<:nt to an
English relative clause formed with 'who, what, which, when, that will do
(something)'.

By um c a n a , M ana 6am apT W ,aK Hm flan. (G)

/Bu irs 0aqa, mağa basartjak i:s dâ:l./
This job is not a job that will be successful for you and me.

OHyn ajiMajK,aK raJiacu6apMW? (G) /Onur) almajak gala:öı barımı?/

Is there any fortress that he will not take?

MyHyH e3H xeM :s;eMraeTHMM3H T33ene*,eK ıjH'um cbiscaTflbip. (N)

/Munurj ö:Sü hem jemgıyetimiSi tâ:Selejek gürclü 0ıya:8atdır./
This itself also is a strong p o lic y that w i ll renew our society.

Ene-fle moHyn sum areımenep caTHH ajı*,aK aflaıvuıapa H3xhjih Macnax2.T

6epÜ3HH3? (TV8.4)
/Yene-de sonuıj ya:h atelyeler 0atın aljak a:damlara nârhili maölahat beryârijiö?/
And how would you advise people who will buy shops like this one?
346 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

When a verb vvith the future participle suffix -irçaK/jrçeK /-jak/jek/ appears as the
subject of a sentence, it may take possessive suffbces.

Acun 6 m3hh 6auıapaWa^aruMM3 uıo-fla. (G)

/A0Iİ biSir) balara:yjagunıS so-da:./
And this is just exactly what we’U be able to do.

Ce6a6M onapetra hiuhu ouMaw,arLi repHYn flyp ax6eTHH. (O)

/0ebâ:bi olor8u8 i:5ir) oıjmojogı görnüp du:r a:hbeti:n./
The reason is it’s obvious that the vvork is not going to be managed vvithout them.
['the w ork’s not being managed']

The future participle in -jrçaK/jrçeK /-jak/jek/ also may serve as the object of a
sentence and take plural, possessive and case suffixes.

ApTMK Ait nama 6oi5flaıı-6auıa ctnuıan HBncaHnaH coi(, eHe 6ııpa3 nypjrçarbiH tı,
an.nn.ı cyp^eruHH 6mjim3H, hkh apafla cepre3flan rangu. (G)
/Artık A:ynanı boydon-baSa 0ı:nla:p Çıkarman 0oi), yene bira:8 durjogunı, atım
Oürjögünü bilma:n, iki a:rada 0ergeS8a:n ga:llı./
After he had examined Ayna from head to foot, Artık remained in doubt, not
knovving whether to stay for a vvhile or to ride ofT on his horse. ['vvhether he vvill
stay or ride off']

3n6eTfle, Hpfle-nmfle 6y 3aTJiaptın AYsen^eruıiH SunasH. ÜeHe nppaK

fly3enflMJice ro B tı-fla . (O) /Elbetde, i:rde-gi:cde bu 8a:tlanıj düSöljögünü bilya:n.
Yö:nö i:rra:k dii8öldül0ö gowı-da:./
Of course I knovv that sooner or later these things will be corrected. Hovvever, it
vvould be much better if they vvere corrected sooner.

Forms o f the Future Participle

The future participle is indicated by adding the suffix -M&K/iKfiK /-jak-jok/jek-jök/ to
the stems of verbs. The negative of the future participle is formed by adding
-MajrçaK/MeaçeK /-majak-mojok/mejek-uıöjök/.
The suffıx -M,aKİm,eK /-jak/jek/ also serves as the marker of the definite future tense
vvhich may funetion as the predicate of a sentence (see 264). The future participle
funetions as subject, object and attribute of a sentence, takes possessive and case
endings, and has the negative form -MaHçaK/MeaçeK /-majak/mejek/. The definite future
tense, on the other hand, funetions as a predicate, does not take possessive and case
endings, and has the negative form -iK,aK/jK,eK flan /-jak/jek da:l/.
The future participle suffix is a component of the unrealized past perfect tense suffix
-JK.aıcaı.ı/jK.eKHH /-jakdı/jekdi/ (see 257). It also is used in conditional clauses (see 284)
and in object phrases (vvith -huk/ ahk /-dık/dik/; see 480).
 Verbals 347

Future İndefinite Participle in -ap/ep l-arlerl

Although it is not common in modern Turkmen, a future indefinite participle may stili
be encountered in vrating, speech and set phrases, especially in proverbs and sayings.
The future indefinite participle refers to an action that occurs in the present and will go
on occurring in the future, although not at any specific point in time.

ryn ep afla m /gü lör a:dam/ a person w h o la u g h s

('a laughs-person ')

ryn M e3 aflaM /gülmöS a:dam / a person w h o d o e s n ’ t la u g h

('a laughs-n ot-person ')

anap cy B /akar 0uw/ flo w in g w ater

('flow s-w aterO

TyKeH M es flepT /tükönmöS dert/ e n d le s s su fferin g

('en d s-n o t-su fferin g')

Turkmen marks the future indefinite participle with the suffıx -ap/ep /-ar/er/ in the
positive and -Map/ıvıep /-mar/mer/ (first and second persons) or -Ma3/ıwe3 /-ma8/me8/
(third person) in the negative. When used as an attribute, this participle generally is
equivalent to an English relative clause formed with 'who, what, which, when, that
does (something)'. Use of the future indefinite participle is restricted to its functions as
the attribute and, even more rarely, as the object of a sentence.

Ey ryH anaMnap ryH smıap ynypbiHfla fla ra fltm ap , ııyıncH 6 a p x a ry ü ^ n e n u n 6apsm

en onapu xoB can a c a n tır m u . (G) /Bu:n a:d am lar g ü n y a :sa :r ucurunn o d a:gad d ar,
çü n kü barha g ü :clö n ü p b ary a:n y e l o lo n h o w 0 o la: Salıpdı./
Today the people dispersed just as the evening began, because the wind which kept
getting stronger worried them. ['at a moment w h e n th e d a y is a liv e ']

U lo n B a rr a -ru m ı 6 a rn a n , mhcjih ywap ryuı ant! e ıy ın ronyn re n ü a n ÜMTMfle re3H

flyuiflH . (N ) /Sol w a g t atını b a:gla :p , m i01i u c o r gu s y arlı yejrjil g o p u p g elyâ rn
y iğ id e gö8U düsdü./
Then he tied up his horse and noticed a young man who came galloping lightly as
a bird in flight. ['like a bird that flies']

Ona flepeK MapKctm, SurentcMn, Jlenınmn onMe3-üıiTMe3 ı^eanaptratı sn«t;an-

»Hac,an flymyHflMpftapHHnep. (TA16.4) /O tp derek MarkOır), EngelOirj, Leninii]
ölmö8-yitme8 ideyalannı ya:nja:p-ya:nja:p düsünnürya:rdiler./
In their place, they pounded the immortal, everlasting ideas of Mara, Engels and
Lenin into them. ['ideas whieh d o n o t d ie a n d d o n o t e n d ']
348 Türkmen Reference Grammar

The participle in -ap/ep /-ar/er/ also may be used with a negative participle in
-Ma3/Me3 /-ma8/meS/ to form verb pairs vvith special meanings.

Xouafla cti3UJiap-cn3tiJiMa3 eBycnuı SapflLt. (G)

/Howa:da 8ı8ılar-8ı5ılmaS öwü0gün ba:rdı./
There was hardly a breath of wind in the air. ['wind which one feels and does not
feel']

Forms o f the Future indefinite Participle

In Türkmen, the future indefinite participle is formed by adding the suffbc -ap/ep /-ar-
or/er-ör/ in the positive to a verb stem. Addition of this suffıx to a stem ending in a
vowel results in a long vowel, and the suffix is written -ap/ap /-a:r/â:r/. The negative
of the future indefinite participle is -Map/Mep /-mar-mor/mer-mör/ in the first and
second persons and -Ma3/Me3 /-ma5-mo6/meS-mö5/ in the third person.
The future participle in /-jak/jek/ indicates completion of an action at a
definite time in the future, while the future indefinite in -ap/ep /-ar/er/ marks an action
that occurs without any fixed reference to time.

r e j ı x ; e K a fla M /geljek a:dam/ a person who will come

renep aflaM /geler a:dam/ a person who comes
renMeaçeıc aflaM /gelmejek a:dam/ a person who will not come
renMe3 aflaM /gelmefi a:dam/ a person who does not come

Present Perfect Participle in -duvlduK l-dıkldikl

The present perfect participle in - a h k / h h k /-dık-duk/dik-dük/ was common in the
"classical" Türkmen literary language based on Chagatay that was in use from the 18th
to the early 20th centuries.2 In the cuırent Standard language, hovvever, its use is rare
and confined to stories set in the past, to the speech of the older generation, or to a few
set phrases.

TnTjınrnn 6oncyHÎ (G) /Gitdigii) bol0un!/

Be gone! ['may it be that you have gone']

- EpM, Mbipaım, 6y H3Me stahthh öonflbi? - UIaxLiM, MeH-a ıreMe KeM*;e mu

3flenflHrHMH 6nneMOK. (N) /'Yeri, Mıraü, bu nâ:me etdigig bolh?" "Sa:huıı,
men-â: nâ:me kesse i:s edennigimi bilemok."/
"Well, Mırah, what is it that you’ve done?" "My lord, me, I don’t know what
stupid thing I’ve done." ['what is it that you have done?' and 'the thing that I
have done']

2 See rpaMMamum 359-361.

 Verbals 349

Illonyn y w H opaaa TyraH aflafcinap xeM cara-namma xatf upbi 6ap xeM
AraıaTaranan öyüpyrtiHU eprnıe eTnpnnrıın. (TV13.4)
/Sonui] ticü:n ora:Sa tutyam a idamlar hem Oagatlıgtga hayın ba:r hem Alla:tagala:j)
buyruğum yerine yetirdigir)./
That’s why people who fast- it has benefit for your health and also you’ve
fulfilled the will of God-on-high.

In the current Standard language, the negative form in -Ma^uK/MenuK /-ınadık-

moduk/medik-mödük/ of the present perfect participle has become the pı rferred
negative for the past participle in -aH/eıı /-an/en/ (see 344), while the positive form in
-r m k /hhk /-dık/dik/ funetions as the qualification partide -abiK/flHK /-dık/dik/ 'that'
(see 480).3

3 T h e p a r t i d e < m lh h /m h u i /-m ıs /m is / (s e e # ) a t o n e tim e a iso f u n c tîo n e d a s a p a s t p a rtic ip le in 7 ü rk m e n ,

a s i n o th e r T u r k ic la n g u a g e s (f p a M M a m u K a 3 6 1 - 3 6 2 ). T h i s i s e v id e n t f r o m s u c h s e t p h r a s e s as
reH M Hin sA eÖ H üT U M ua /g e c m is e d e b iy a :ü m ı5 / " o u r p a s t l ite ra tü re ' a n d f r o m fo rm s th a t h a v e b e c o m e
n o u n s in to d a y ’s la n g u a g e , s u c h a s flypMyın / d u rm u ş / 'li f e ' a n d reHM Hm /g e c m is / 'th e p a s t'.
350 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Gerunds
Gerunds (also called converbs) are non-final verbs that express action vvhich adds to or
clarifies the action of the main verb of a sentence, but that do not indicate person,
number or tense. They function to connect two sentences whose actions are sequential
or simultaneous and to modify the main action of a sentence.
Turkmen has the gerunds -biri/un /-ıp/ip/ and -a/e/fi /-a/e/y/, vvhich are not
conjugated. Their function is equivalent to English complex sentence connectors and to
adverb modifiers of time, reason, cause and manner. However, Turkmen gerunds differ
from adverbs in that they have a closer connection vvith the main verb of a sentence and
enter into a number of constructions to describe action and express nuances of mood.

Gerutıd in -unlun l-ıplipl

The Turkmen gerund formed with the suffix -un/un /-ıp/ip/ has three main usages.
One usage is to connect two sentences whose actions are sequential by replacing the
verb marker (tense, person, number) of the first sentence with the gerund suffix - t ı n / m ı
/-ıp/ip/. The verb of the second sentence concludes the action and expresses tense,
person and number. The most frequent English equivalents are '-ing' or 'and' in the
structure 'do (one action) and then do (another action)'.

On eüyHe remin, Haxap 6ifliBipfln. He came home and cooked

/Ol öyünö gelip, nahar bilirdi./ dinner. [or: 'Corning home,
he cooked']

On 6y xa6apu 3mıtflHn, Hearing this news, he went to

MyranjiMMbin am m a öapflbi. the teacher. [or: H e heard this
/Ol bu haban esidip, news and went']
mugollumuıj ya:mna bardı./

floraHHM KirrannapbiHtı My brother got his books and

anun, MeKfle6e n rw i- went to school.
/Dogonum kita:plarmı alıp, [or: 'Getting his books, my
mekdebe gitdi./ brother went']

EHe KennecMHM accbira roıon, ryKeHHKCHs ronoıpe ruTjpı. (G)

/Yene kellesini ya60ıga goyup, tükönükOüS pikire gitdi./
He put his head on the pillow again and became absorbed in endless thought.

H a M a a o K a M a 3 fla H 0 3 a n TapeT r u n u n , 3H flaM M H M apaccanaM anu.

(TP13.4) /Nama:8 okomoSSon 080I tâ:ret gıhp, ennarmııjı ara00alamah./
Before praying, you must perform ablutions and cleanse your body.
 Verbals 351

3K,eMajı 3x;e tscmh ttbuırbipun, aflaMctmtruKtmbi Taccbnaıasm neft nanaaça

6aiUMHH aTRbi. (N )
/Jema:l eje tâ:0i:n yılgmp, a:dam0ınır)kım ta00ı:klaya:n dey calaja basını atdı./
Jemal-eje smiled charmingly and slightly nodded her head like she was
confîrming what her husband said.

Coh, yseneH s th aiibtn, coMcamm aptıchma roüaptiH. (TV5.3)

/0oi) üwölön eti alıp, 0om0a:rui) ya:n0ına goyyarraı./
Then I take the ground meat and put it on one half of the somsa.

niojı KapTOMKaubBM anun, « H taa , MeH nbtnaH ep^e snııasm. MeH cıoe flernniJin.
IlbinaH epHMeM arbipap» fln{fwn fiapun aüaatiManbi. (TV9.4)
/Sol kartocka:r)i8ı alıp, "inha:, men pıla:n yerde ya:saya:n. Men 0i8e degisli. Pıla:n
yerimem a:gırya:r" diyip banp ayda:ymalı./
You should take that card of yours (to the doctor) and go and say "Here, I live
at such-and-such a place. I'm supposed to see you. And my such-and-such a place
hurts."

When the verb of the second of two connected sentences lacks an expressed subject
or object, it stands together vvith the verb of the first sentence. This structure
nonetheless connects sequential actions and corresponds to the English structure 'do
(one action) and then do (another action)'.

On MbipantJ ceHflYpun srrflH. He tumed off the light and

/Ol £ıra:nı Oönnüriip yatdı./ vvent to bed.

33H 3 xaHbHt MbirbmuaK übirHasmuHbi blum# un, ınorça 6apun romynMaKmJHbiM.

(G) /E8i:8 ha:mi) yıgıncak yıgnaya:nmı esidip, soıjo banp gosuhnokcudum./
Hearing that Eziz Khan vvas gathering the people, I decided to go and join him.

Eh3 ım m Tase HecjDt ecHYPHn eTHiıiflHpM enn. (N )

/Bi8 inni tâ:Se neOli ö:00üriip yetisdirmeli./
We now have to raise and educate a nevv generation.

On KetısHHH la T p t ır t m a eTHrı camıaHjtbi. (BG)

/Ol köcâ:nirj Catrıgına yetip Oaklannı./
He reached the intersection o f the Street and stopped.

Xo3Hp on HiUMHH r y T a p b i n reJimiflH. MeHH repyn epsH 6ereHfliı. (TV16.2)

/Hâ:8ir ol i:Sini gutorup gelipdi. Meni görüp öra:n begenni./
Now she had finished vvork and had come home. Seeing me she vvas very
happy.
352 Türkmen Reference Grammar

On AYHİt3HHI( mprnapuHMH mkh fty3e ronafcmua ajiHLin repKesıuiHH. (TV12.5)

/Ol dünyâ:nirj yu:rtlorunu[) iki yü8ö goloyunno almp görköSülIü./
I t was received and shown in close to two hundred countries of the world.

Bh3 my Mecene 6«neH rbi3tiKJiaHLm, ıuy ryH fleBneT ceıcroptiHfla mıiJieüsH

thkhhhhjihkaTenbecH 6wıeH xycycH ceKropna jmuıeftaH uıeftne aTenüa 6apun
repnYK- (TV12.4)
/Bi5 su me0ele bilen gıSıklamp, su:n döwlöt 0ektorunno i:sleyâ:n tikincilik
atelyeöi bilen hu0u:0ı Oektordo i:sleyâ:n şeyle atelyâ: banp gördük./
We became üıterested in this issue and today went to see a sewing shop
operating in the State sector and such a shop operating in the private sector.
['we went and saw' = 'we went to see']

In some cases, the Türkmen gerund corresponds to the English gerund in '-ing', or
to a phıase other than the structure 'do (one action) and then do (another action)'.

3 prap HpneH HaünapbiHM HMun yrpaMara xs3np 6onflynap. (G)

/E r ti: r ir r d e n c a :y la n n ı iç ip u g r o m a :g a h a :8 ir b o llu lo r ./
Having had their tea early in the moming, they were ready to start off. ['drinking
tea, they...']

Ulon 3aTnapbt repyn, e3YM-s3yM KeacMrüapuH. (N)

/Sol 5a:tlan görüp, ö:8üm-ö:Süm kejigyâ:rin./
Seeing those things, I my own self protested.

MbiXMaHXa n a c t n m a epiieuıun, » ıa ö MMeHCOH, maxepe re3eneH*;e

O ji “ A ıu ra ö a T "
HMKflbl. (BH)
/Ol "Asgabat" mı:hma:nha:na0mna yerleşip, ca:y icen0oq, sahere geSelenje cıkdı./
After he settled in at the Ashgabat Hotel and drank some tea, he went for a walk in
the city. ['settling in, he...']
C aparra senan, a p a n n a p Mapa r a p a n x e p e K e r 3 f l m m n p n e p . (TP13.3)
/Oaragtı eyelarp, araplar Mara: tarap hereket edipdirler./
After occupying Saragt, the Arabs moved tovvard Man. ['occupying Saragt, the
Arabs...'}
Xa3»p on HiıiMHMryrapbin renmiflH. MeHM r e p p , 3*;eM MLmrtıpflbi. (TV16.2)
/Ha:8ir ol irsini gutorup gelipdi. Meni görüp, ejem yılgırdı./
Now she had finished work and had come home. Seeing me, my mother smiled.

In its negative form (-Man/MaH /-ma:n/ma:n/), the Türkmen gerund expresses the
same basic function of connecting sequential actions, one negative, the other positive,
as in 'not do (one action) and then do (another action)'. As a rule, this corresponds to
an English phrase with a gerund like 'without doing (something)'.
 Verbals 353

Biohu 6atoi.KJiapBiMi.abi e3yMJiaweH copaMaH, am m nfflfiapfljuıep. (N)

/BiSirj ba:ylıMarunı8x ö:8ümü88ön öo:roma:n, alıp gidyâ:rdiler./
Ilıey were taking away our riches vvithoııt asking us.
Mene my Barr iuoji (j>yT6ona-fla ksh ra-raan flepeHOK. Illy xoBJiyfla varanap
ÖHJieH oiİHan, canaKJiapBiHBi 3TM3H meöflraı üep-fla. (TV16.4)
/Yö:nö su wagt Sol futbolo-do ka:n gatnatp yöröno:k. Su howludo ca:galar bilen
oyna:p, Sapaklarını etmâ:n seydip yö:r-dâ:./
But now he hasn’t been participating in that soccer much, either. He just plays
with kids in the neighborhood, and does that w ithout doing his lessons.

In its second main usage, the Türkmen gerund is used to connect simukaneous
actions by subordinating one action to a second main action whose verb expre:sses the
tense, person and number. In such fonnations, the action of the verb ending in a gerund
characterizes the action of the main verb or defines some attendant circumstances. The
actions of such fonnations are performed at the same time and cannot be separated.
These fonnations may be understood in terms of the English structure 'do (one action)
while doing (another action)', vvhere the gerund corresponds to 'do (one action)' and the
main verb to 'wkile doing (another action)'. This gerund is equivalent to English
adverb modifiers of manner, and may be equivalent to gerunds ending iıı '-ing',
adverbs ending in the suffix '-ly', in phrases beginning with 'with (the affect» of one
action, another action is performed)', or in other forms.

Tem an rapa». He entered staggering.

/Tenta:p gi:rdi./ ~ 'Staggering, he entered.'
Onap flbiMLin oTypjtbijıap. They sat there silentiy.
/Olor dımıp oturdulor./ ~ While sitting, they were silent.
ry jıy n rHTflH. She laughed and w ent away.
/Gülüp gitdi./ ~ She went away laughing.
[ambiguous in Turkmen]

3M sm Kopıiflopfla npMMyctm ycTyHHacH *e#HeK JiaKup-naKBip anan

rafinaruara 6amnaflBi. (G) /Eyyâ:m koridordo primu0urı ü6ünnâ:ki ca:ynek iakır-
lakır edip gaynama:ga baSladı./
The kettle on top of the primus in the hallvvay already began to boil with a
hissing sound. ['while beginning to boil, it hissed']
AnHaryny-fla oHyn bi3biHna jıen-jıen 3ffnn Öapapabi. (G)
/A:nnagulu-do onur] ı:Sınna lep-lep edip barya:rdı./
And Annagulı was following him with lumbering steps. ['while followin,2, he
lumbered']
354 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Onap * ,aK T tiJifla m tın ryjiYUiJIHnep, OrynreaeıiH my tfH y p r e T ,m iJ ie p . (G)

/Olor jakgıllasıp güliisdülör, OgulgöSölü mü.'nürgötdülör./
They laughed uproariously, and they embarrassed Ogulgözel. [Vhile laughing,
they roared']

flyenep ıırtm a 6 a K b in MOKHyjıep-fle, SypyHJiapMHLi autıuiMara 6auıııafltuıap. (G)

/Düyölör ı.-guıa bakıp £ökdii]ör-dö, burunlorunı a£ı5ma:ga başladılar./
The camels knelt down, turning their heads toward the lead (camel), and they
began to dilate their nostrils. [Vhile kneeling, they tumed']

r e n i m a ın a K C a K u n , o s a f la H KennecHHH H a s ım chjikhii, o H y n c o p a rn a p b m a
y o rarı 6epfopnH. (G) /Gelin asa:k bakıp, owodon kelleOini nâ:81i Silkip, o n u ı j
0o:rogloruno joga:p beryâ:rdi./
The young woman was answering his questions, looking downward and
shaking her pretty head flirtatiously. ['while answering, she looked dovvnvvard and
shook her head']
üneııyMa ra-raaıııaHnap TypıcMeHMCTaH HeMOKpaTbnc napnMCbiHiın eam nunu C.
A. HtMaoBBm m>iKhiuihiHbi ync Gepurı RunneRHTiep. (N)
/Pilenumo gatnasanlar Türkmönii00a:n Demokratik partiyaOımi] baslığı 0.A.
Nıya:8ovui] çıkısını iin0 berip diıjlediler./
Those who took part in the plemım listened attentively to the speech of S.A.
Nıyazov, leader of the Democratic Party o f Türkmenistan. [Vhile /istening, they
paid attention']

Onyn 6«p T a p a n b iH f la A M b ifle p a H b iı* M e n e c y B U m a r n a n a K H p n tı. (H)

/Onui) bir tarapuına Amıderya:nıı}mele 0uwı sagla.-p akaya:rdı./
Along one side (of the village) the yellowish waters of the Amudarya flowed in a
rush. [Vhile flowing, it rushed']

On rappM aflaMfltı - HHflH 6yniH owpyne flaüxaH>n.ratiK 3«nrı rempeH aflaM.

(TV4.1) /Ol garn a:damdı- inni bütii:n ömrünö dayharncılık edip geçiren ardam./
He was an old man-now a man who spent his whole life farming. [Vhile passing
through life, he did']
Ona flepeK MapKCbin, 3HrenbCKH, JleHHinoı enMe3-üınMe3 HfleanapMHH HHJKan-
m u^an ayuıynp(Hp{İ3pt(HJiep. (TA16.4) /Orjo derek MarkOırj, Engel6irj, Leninii)
ölmöfi-yitmeS ideyalannı ya:nja:p-ya:nja:p düsünnüryâ:rdiler./
In their place, they pounded the immortal, everlasting ideas of Marx, Engels and
Lenin into them. [V hile criticizing and criticizing, they explained']

An especially common formation is the combination of the gerund form fionyn

/bolup/ 'being, having become' with verbs, which is equivalent to English 'as' or to
adverb modifers.
 Verbals 355

Eepfliı a r a Sonca ouyrç s k Ms h M a m ra tı-M a H tu iM ryppyunepHHe arçK -T anK 6onyn

r a n a t ı . (G)
/Berdi aıga bol0o onui) edya:n ma:mlı-ma:nıh gürrüıjlörünö arjk-tarjk bolup gatllı./
As for Berdi-aga, h e vvas stili a m a z e d by the profound conversations he’d had.
['as one amazed']

O ra y M M ap tifla M y ra ju ib iM 6 o n y n m njıeiiap, 6 3 U ih h x ;h opTa MeKflenfle.

(TV2.1) /Oğlum Manda mugollum bolup i:51eyâ:r, ba:siııji orto mekdepde./
My son tvorks as a teacher in Man, in school Nr. 5.

IüeH6e ryHM M a n ıra n a 6 o n y n , xeMM3MM3 Bııne q a ö ım iia p ııc . (T17.1)

/Senbe günü masgala bolup, hemım:mi5 bile ca:y icyâ:ri0./
On Saturdays ali of us drink tea together as a family.

In its third usage, the Türkmen gerund in -un/un /-ıp/ip/ connects a verb that
expresses the maüı action of a sentence to a second verb that describes the manner or
mode vvith vvhich the main action is performed. In this usage, the gerund is a
component of deseriptive formations such as -tm/mı GauuıaMaK /-ıp/ip başlamak/ 'to
begin to do (something)' (see 311) and of modal formations such as ~bin/ıtn öunMen
/-ıp/ip bilmek/ 'to be able to do (something)' (see 301).
In the follovving example, on onan /ol oka:p/ stands for oji oKanu /ol okodı/ 's/he
read', vvhich is the main action whose performance is modified by the second verb
re p n H /gördü/ 's/he saw'. Here, the verb re p M e K /görmök/ 'to see' does not funetion
in its primary meaning, but rather expresses the experimental mode of 'to try to do
(something)'. English has a similar usage: 'see if you can read' = 'try to read'.

On OKan repflH. /Ol oka:p gördü./ He tried to read.

In the follovving sentence, the construction rypneuiMn OTypflunap /gürlösüp

oturdulor/ could be equivalent to an English gerund funetioning as an adverb ('they sat
talking') or to a deseriptive formation ('they continued to talk'). Hovvever, the sense is
not 'they talked and they sat'.

Şafttın 6aniiiHfla y3aK rypjıem nn oTypRbiJiap. (G)

/Ğa:yıg basuına uSok gürlösüp oturdulor./
T h ey sat talking for a long time över tea'. [or: 'They continued to talk for a
long time över tea']

Among other uses of the gerund in -un/un /-ıp/ip/, paired verbs also may appear in
the negative form (-Man/M3H /-ma:n/mâ:n/) to indicate actions that occurred repeatedly
över a long period of time.
356 Turkmen Reference Grammar

3 K ,a M a n 6onca SR aıuaH-H JiTaH M aH, Semen, ynw r y B a m ı Sünen xep r e n e H e

flY iu y H H H p ın n SepMapflH. (G) / J a m a : l b o ! 6 o y a : d a m a : n - y a i t a n m a : n , b e l k i , u l ı
g u w o n c b ile n h e r g e le n e d ü s ü n n ü r iiî b e ry â :rd i./
And Jamal, apparently without getting tired of it, explained it with great joy to
eveıy one who came.

rejiM3H-rejiM3H corç renflH. (G) /Gelmâ:n-gelma:n 0oi) gelli./

He didn’t come and didn’t come and finally he came.

The combination of two verbs with positive and negative gerunds, each ending in
the question partide - m m / m h /- m ı/m i/, expresses 'whether or not'.

rejiHnMH-rejiM3HMH 6HJieM30K. (G) /Geüpmi-gelmâ:nmi bilem8o:k./

We don’t know vvhether she’s come or not.

A n u n M M -a JiM a H M b i Semra flan. (G) /Alıpmı-alma:nmı belli dâ:l./

It’s unknown whether he took it or not.

The gerund suffix may be used to form paired verbs from two verbs of similar or
opposite meanings.

yaaKJiM ryH tlaptı aramın epıcyMecHHe rejntn-rHflHn flypflynap. (G)

/USoklı gün Ğa:rıa:ga:mr) yerkümö0ünö gelip-gidip durdulor./
Ali day long they went back and forth to Chan-aga’s earth house. ['coming and
going']
T y p K M e n reHYKMp, nypa-Gapa flyseaep niflep-fla. (G)
/Türkmön göîüdür, duro-bara düSölör gider-dâ:./
This is a Turkmen camp of nomads, just going along, little by little growing
roots. ['stopping and going']

The Turkmen gerund in -bin/Hn /-ıp/ip/ is one of the most common forms in the
language, and it is not unusual to find two or more gerund formations in one sentence.
İn the following example, the gerund in T y p y n /turup/ connects the sentence 'Yalkap
stood up (from his place)' to the main sentence 'Yalkap went out to welcome them' (=
first usage). The gerund in xoınnauıun /hoslosup/ connects the action of 'welcoming'
as simultaneous to the action of 'going out', that is, the two occur at the same time (=
second usage). The gerund in m J K b i n /çıkıp/ connects this main verb to the descriptive
verb o f the sentence rıtT M eK /gitmek/ 'to go to, to go away (from us)', which describes
the direction of action, so that the two verbs together mean 'to go out' (= third usage).

Amcan Sonca eprameH T y p y n , xoiDiiamun MUKtın rHTjnı. (H)

/Yalka:p bo!0o yerinnen turup, hoSlosup Çıkıp gitdi./
And Yalkap stood up and went out to welcome them.
 Verbals 357

Forms o f ıhe Gerund in -unlun /-ıp/ipl

This gerund is formed by adding the suffix -u n lu n /-ıp-up/ip-üp/ to verfc stems.
When added to a verb ending in a vovvel, that vovvel is lengthened to a/a /a:/a:/ and
this suffix is vvritten -an/an /-a:p/â:p/; for example, OKan /oka:p/ < OKaMaK /okomok/
'to read', nmjıan /i:sla:p/ < HinJieMeK /imlemek/ 'to work'.
ITıe negative of this gerund is formed by replacing -bin/mı /-ıp/ip/ vvith the partide
-MaH/M3H /-ma:n/mâ:n/ or, very rarely, vvith -Ma3jjaH/Me3ReH /-ma85an-nto85on/
me58en-mö88ön/. This suffix does not take tense, person or number suffixes, an i verbs
vvith this suffix cannot appear at the end of a sentence.4

Gerund in -ale/ü l-alelyl

Of far less frequent occurrence, the Turkmen gerund in -a/e /-a-o/e-ö/ (after stems
ending in a consonant) or -Ji /-yİ (after stems ending in a vovvel) expresses arı action
that occurs at the same time as the action of the main verb and continues foı a long
duration. Often, the verb to vvhich it is attached is reduplicated.

tÎYBpe-ÜYBpe HflaflHM. (G) /Yüvvrö-yüvvrö ya:dadım./

I got tired ru n n in g an d run n in g .
Aıubip florptı aüfls. flafoaHU cara-cara ryppyK ctn p a fleımepflitnH3. (G)
/A:sır dogn aydya:. Dayha:nı 0aga-0aga gumık öıgra dö:nnördüıjü8./
Ashır speaks true. You have milked and milked the fanner and tumed him into a
dried-up covv. ['m ilking and m iiking the fanner, you have tumed']

With this gerund, Turkmen may link together two verbs whose meanings are either
elose or opposite to one another to form a nevv semantic unit.

MeHiın cana atifta-jjHe remıiMM. (G) /Menirj 0ar)a ayda-diye gelsim./

I’m telling you this constantly. ['my telling and saying to you is
constant']
CeH repe-6nJie 6y Miıraepe h3xmjih en öepflMH? (G)
/0en görö-bile bu i:slere narhili yo:l berdirj?/
How could you knovvingly permit these acts? ['seeing and knowing']
Onap OTypa-Typa 03 6apMa;ıtı epmıe öapflunap. (G)
/Olor oturo-turo ö:8 barmah yerine bardılar./
They calmly arrived at the places they were supposed to go. ['sitting and
standing']

4 Certain non-standard forms of this gerund are preserved in modemized versions of the chı ;sics of
Turkmen literatüre o f the İ8th-I9tfı centuries; for example, -H un/ttün /-yıp/yip/ or -tıfia H ^ ea ıı /-
358 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Gerund in -cuuleAul-alılelil
The infrequently used Turkmen gerund -antı/ejiH /-alı—olı/eli—ölü/ functions to limit
time in the meaning 'since' or 'for'. This gerund also may be used vvith the
postposition 6apıı /bâ:ri/ (see 423).

Onap niflenn, 'pı ryH re»WH. (G) /Olor gideli, üc gün gecdi./
It has been three days since they left.

IIoe3fl nypantı, sptiM caraT Gonflbi. (G) /Poye8[8] durolı, ya:rım 0a:gat bollı./
ITıe train has been standing for half a hour.

Gerund in -asadafh)İ3zede(H)l-a:gada(n)/a:gede(n)l
A verb to vvhich the rarely encountered gerund in - a r a fla ( H ) / a r e p ıe ( H ) /-a:gada(n)/
â:gede(n)/ is attached indicates an action that happens immediately prior to the action
of the main verb of a sentence.5

MtıpaT HUiflen renarege, paflHo amyıeMare OTypflit. (T)

/Mıra:t i:sden gelâ:gede, radio: dii]lema:ge oturdı./
As soon as Mırat came (home) from work, he started listening to the radio. [or:
"The moment Mırat came home']

ıba:n/ibâ:nl may be seen for the positive, and -Matt/Mett /-may/mey/ or -MaduH/ınetlHH /-mayın/ meyin/
for the negative. See CaMofönoBHH 1914a: 029-031, A3biMOB 1966: 103, and rpaMMamuKa 372-373.
5 SeeAabiMOB 1966: 103, rpaMMamaca 374-375.
 ADVERBS

Adverbs express relationships primarily of time, place, degree and manner, as well as
various nuances of circumstance, cause, resıılt, condition, exception, concession,
purpose and means. They modify the action of verbs, the quality of adjectives or the
manner of other adverbs.
Türkmen adverbs fulfill these same functions. They may appear before verbs and
adjectives or before other adverbs as complements to components of the sentence.

Types of Adverbs
In origin, adverbs may be pure adverbs, or nouns or adjectives serving as adverbs.
Adverbs also may be derived from other parts of speech through lexical and
grammatical suffîxes, or combined with other words to form compounds, combination
words and expressions.

Simple Adverbs
Türkmen has few simple adverbs that appear only as adverbs (for example, se n /köp/
'much'), but has a number of words belonging to other parts of speech that function as
adverbs. Just as in English, the semantics of Türkmen nouns and adjectives may lead
to their funcüoning as adverbs.

Hly ryH ohh HTflaH mncapMapım. I won’t forget it today.

/Su:n onı ya:tdan çıkarmamı./

D ly ryH M HTflaH *n>ncapMapMH. I won’t forget today.

/Su:m ya:tdan îıkarmarın./

Derived Adverbs
Türkmen adverbs are derived from nouns and adjectives primarily through the addition
of grammatical rather than lexical suffixes. Some of the most common adverb-forming
sufftxes are case endings, specifically the locative case suffix in + a a / j j e /+da/de/, the
ablative case suffix in +naH/jıeH /+dan/den/ and the third person possessive form of the
dative case suffix in + t n ı a / n H e /+ma/ine/, along with older, rarely productive case
suffixes like the equative ('like, as, in') in + q a / « ı e /+£a/6e/; the instrumental ('in,
through, during') in + u h / h h /+ı:n/i:n/ (compound variant: + J ia Ü M H /.rıe Ü M H
/+Iaym/Ieyin/); and the directives ('toward, to') in + a p t ı / e p n /+arı/eri/ and + m k / h k
/+ı:k/i:k/ (see 545).
360 Tıırkmen Reference Grammar

ro n a itfla /go lo yd o/ soon HKfaMfla /yakr.nna/ recen tly

önpfleH /birden/ su d d en ly T33efleH /tâ:5eden/ again
arm aM bm a /agsam ına/ in th e e ve n in g 3ap6uH a /8arbma/ at on e stroke
ryHHH /günü:n/ in th e d a y e i t e H /öylâ:n/ in the âftern oon
SYTHHHeÖHH /bütü:nlöyiin/ c o m p le te jy BarrnaHbtH /w agtlaym / tem porarily
KeH ene /kö:n öcö/ in the o ld w a y TypKMeHHe /türkm öncö/ in T ü rk m en
H^epH /içeri/ (to th e) in sid e, into flauıapbi /dasan/ o u tsid e, ou t
ıraepHK /ilerirk/ forw ard raüpaK /gayxa:k/ backw ard

Combined Adverbs
Adverbs also may be formed by combining words into compoıınds (coHafiaıta
/0oıjoboka:/ 'in the end' < cona /0oıjo/ 'to the after' + 6aıca /baka:/ 'looking'),
combination words (a 3 -K e M /a:5-kem/ 'a little bit' < a 3 /a:8/ 'little' + KeM /kem/ 'less')
or set expressions ( s k u h B a r T g a /yakı:n wagtda/ 'soon' < ü k m h iyakr.nl 'close' +
Barr /wagt/ 'time').
 Adverbs 361

Classification of Adverbs
Türkmen adverbs may be classified according to their semantic propeıties as rel crring to
time of action, sequence of action, place of action, direction of action, degree c f action
and manner of action.

Adverbs o f Time
The largest group of Türkmen adverbs refer to days and to the times of a day. They
include simple adverbs (up /i:r/ 'early', flyiİH /dü:n/ 'yesterday'), derived adverbs
(etİJiaH /öyla:n/ 'in the aftemoon', ryHHH /günü:n/ 'in the dayO, compound (( tipHryn
/bi:rü:n/ 'day after tomorrovv', rw>K,apa /gi:ja:ra/ 'early evening') and combination
(ryn-ryHAen /gün-giinnön/ 'day by day', HpHe-rH4fle /i:rde-gi:cde/ 'sooner or later')
adverbs, and set expressions (flyÜH u p u e n /dü:n irrden/ 'yesterday moming', 3 p T i ı p
eöjıeflen con /erti:r öylödön 0or)/ 'tomorrow aftemoon').

6y ryH /bu:n/ today my ryH /su:n/ today

6y ryH K H r y H /bu:nkı gün/ today my ryHKH ryH /su:nkı gün/ today
3pTecn /erte0i/ the next day mon racam ın aprapıt
/5ol gi:ja:niJ3 erti:ri/ the next day
apTHp/bpTe /erti:r/erte/ tomorrow, flyte /dü:n/ yesterday
moming
ÖMpMryH /bi:rii:n/ day after tomorrow ennMH /öqqü:n/ day before yesterday
coHKycuryH /0or)ku0u:n/ day after euKycHryH /öıjldi0ü:n/ day before
day after tomorrow day before yesterday

«p /i:r/ early im /gi:£/ late, in the evening

flanflaH /daıjdan/ very early, at dawn rax;apa /gi:ja:ra/ early evening
jıpfleH /i:rden/ early moming anuaM /ağsam/ evening, in the evening
Hp ömıeH /i:r bilen/ early moming araıaMapa /agsama:ra/ in the evening
apTHp anuaM /erti:r ağsam/ aruıaMUHK /agsamlık/ in the evening
tomorrow evening
sprap MpneH /erti:r i:rden/ 6y m *;e /bu gi:je/ tonight
tomorrow moming
Hpfle-nmfle /i:rde-gi:cde/ sooner or flyÜH HpfleH /dü:n i:rden/ yesterday
later moming
Hp-y-rmt /i:r-u-gi:c/ sooner or later flyÜH anuaM /dü:n ağsam/ yesterda y
evening

ABflbncepHM 3Ke 6y ry H xhm epe nrrMeflH. (G)

/Abdıkeri:m eke bu:n hi:5 yere gitmedi./
Abdıkerim-eke did not go anyvvhere today.
362 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

JHy ryHKH ryH MeH em e TypKMeHMCTaHaaKH Shjihm cııcreMa öapafla 6hpkh am a

ryppyn 3flHn 6epx;eK. (TP12.3) /Surnkı giin men 0iSe TUrkmönü00a:nna:kı bilim
0i0tema ba:rada birki agıS gürriij] edip berjek./
Today, I will make a brief presentation to you about the educational system in
Türkmenistan.
By ryn-3pTe Kepıca çaptı yrpaMaKHtı. (N) /Bu:n-erte Kerkar 0a:n ugromokcı./
He plans to set off for Kerki today or tomorrow.

3pTHp HpneH MaflnapfciHBi H«naı yıpaMara X33up Sonuynap. (G)

/Erti:r i:rden caıylarını iCip ugroma:ga hârSir bollulor./
Having had their tea early in the morning, they vvere ready to start off.

MaprapHTa apTecn renMeflH. (G) /Margarita erte0i gelmedi./

Margarita didn’t come the next day.

IH oJI rH*,3HHH 3pTHpH OKTHÖpMH ÖHTpHMHCHflM. (G)

/Sol gi:jâ:nir| erti:ri oktyabni] yigriıniOidi./
The next day was the tvventieth of October. ['morning of that night']

3jı6eTfle, Hpne-rımne 6y 3aT;ıaptın ny3ejı*;ernHM Gmıüsn. Mene HppsK

fly3ennHnce roBM-fla. (O) /Elbetde, i:rde-gi:2de bu Şartlatır) düSöljögünO bilyârn.
Yörnö irrrârk dü5öldül0ö gowı-dar./
Of course I knovv that sooner or later these things vvill be corrected. Hovvever, it
vvould be much better if they vvere corrected sooner.

Onr «Jlp-y-nm Men xeM m y MeuiMSH caKacbiHflaH cyB »raepHH» fl Mitim,

xtwninifla roTepflH MepflH. (N ) /Ol: "î:r-u -g i:c m en h e m 5u £e§ma:r) 0aka0ınnan
0 u w içe rin " d iy ip y ıy a rlın n a götö rd ii yörrdü./
He vvas carrying in his thoughts the idea that sooner or later he also vvould drink
vvater at the source of this spring.

flyiİH ysHHnM ry H ToM^a 6onflyM-fla, armaMJifciK a3-KeM hmhjihh- (BG)

/Dürn uSırnü gün toydo bollum-do, agsamlık arS-kem icilli./
I vvas at the celebration yesterday ali day and in the evening a little bit vvas drunk.

İîeHe tok>h xe3HnımrHHH aruıaM reneH MHXMaHnap repBapjıep. (TV15.3)

/Yörnö toyuıj heSilligini ağsam gelen mırhmarnlar göryârrler./
But only the guests vvho come in the evening see the toy’s festivities.

3 p T np armaMflaH ncna roiİMan, ornaHU 6H3e enıp. (G)

/Ertirr agsamdan girjar goymarn, oglonı biSe yetir./
Not later than tomorrow night, bring the boy to us.
 Adverbs 363

- Hyita xeM m y ra B y H Sara M aH axqaHU H B eıra , 6 y ryH o h b i a j m m a H c a T a p n a p - n a .

(N) /~Dü:n hem su ga:wun bâ:î manatdanm weli, bu:n om altıdan 0atya:rlar-la."/
"Just y e s t e r d a y this melon went for five manats, but today they’re selling it for
six."

efine /öylö/ aftemoon ryHopTaH /günorta:n/ noon, mid-day

eftnaH /öylâ:n/ in the aftemoon ry H ryııınyKfla /gün guslukdo/ lunch time
wp eMne(TOH) fı:ı öylö(lâ:n)/ r m eüJie(:n3H) /gi:c öylö(lâ:n)/ late
early aftemoon aftemoon
nıy ryH etinan /su:n öyla:n/ my ryH eüneaen coh /su:n öylödön 0or]/
this aftemoon this aftemoon
spTHp oMjish /erti:r öylâ:n/ 3prnp eftneflen coh /erti:r öylödön 0or)/
tomonow aftemoon tomorrow aftemoon

ryuniö /günnü:S/ daytime n e ç e /gi:je/ night, nighttime

ry m iH/günüm/ in the day rn 5«;e-nıpHM /gi:Je-girim/ night
nt^e-ryuHura /gi:je-günnü:5/ HptiM rwjK,e /ya:nm gi:je/ midnight
night and day

ryH-rYHfleH /gün-günnön/ 6y/my xerçne /bu/su hepde/ this week

day by day
6y/my aM /bu/su a:y/ this month 6y/uıy Mtuı /bu/su yıl/ this year

By rifjR e » n a n n m r a ıa p c H H - n a , MyHyH ce6s6w HSMe? (G)

/Bu gi:je yaman gatı gacya:r0ır)-la, munur) 0eba:bi na:me?/'
Aah, you’re running off much too soon tonight, why is this?

THJHe spuM 6onynflbi. 06a qn>mflbi. flane XanHa3aptm xaTapw «TMaHflH.

BarmtniHH cecn remin flypnu. (G) /Gi:je ya:nm bolupdı. 0:bo yatıpdı. Dirje
HarlnaSang hatarı yatmarnm. Bagsımi) 8e0i gelip du:rdı./
It was midnight. Ih e encampment was asleep. Only in the tents of Hataazar were
they not asleep. The voice of the singer was coming (from there).

Mıue ra-raaııiHH Maranapbm cam>ı ryH-ryHueH KeneıütapflH. (G)

4:5e gatnaîya:n £a:galarıq 0a:nı gün-günnön köpölyâ:rdi./
The number of children engaged in work was increasing day by day.

By xenne m ra e M e c H H H r o ö f ltı.
O h J im m a H 6 a p H 6 w p x o jio ^ h h b h m t h m h 3 6 a p .
(Tl 7.2) /Om yıllan ba:ri bir holodilnigimiS ba:r. Bu hepde İ:sleme0ini goydı./
We’ve had our refrigerator for ten years. It stopped woıking this w e e k .
364 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Maxnactı, my iibin HoBpy3 öafipaMtma Sartnunamnı re*uıpnjra;eK cnopT

sptınınapima MeKHe6HMM3HH oKyBMbinapu yatı xeBec örnıen ra-raauıapnap. (N)
/Mahlaöı, su yıl Nowru5 bayramına bağışlanıp geciriljek ı0port ya:nslarına
mekdebimiSiıj okuwculon ulı höwö0 bilen gatnasarlar./
Briefly, the pupils of our school will participate with great enthusiasm in the
sports contests that will be held in honor of the Novvruz holiday this y e a r .

Adverbs ofSeguence
Adverbs which express the sequence or number of times of an action include simple
adverbs (HHflH /inni/ 'now'), derived adverbs (hhhhkh /inniki/ 'next time', euyMAen
/örjünnön/ 'beforehand'), compound (cona6ana /Oorjobaka:/ 'in the end') and
combination (x3.iih - iiihhhh /hâ:li-sinni/ 'from time to time') adverbs, and set
expressions (co^ km BarTfla /0or}kı wagtda/ 'lately').

X 9 3 M p / h â :S ir / n o w X 3 3 n p a ;e K /hâ:Sirjek/ just n o w
HHflM / i n n i / n o w , ihoji B a r r ( n a p ) / s o l w a g t( la r ) / th e n ,
a t th e p re s e n t tim e a t th a t tim e
nıyıu-ıııy Barr / s u s - s u wagt/ o n B a r r ( n a p ) / o l w a g t( l a r ) / th e n ,
r ig h t n o w at that time
my B a r r /s u w a g t/ n o w

X 3 3 u p TYpKMeHJicTaHLiH rYJineMsH B a r r u reım H. (N )

/Hâ:5ir Türkmönü00a:nırj güllöyâ:n wagtı gelli./
Now, the time for Turkmenistan’s flourishing has come.

Xa3iıpw,eK 6apıat, Hıma MHxa{tnoBHa. (N)

/Hâ:5irjek barya:n, Nina Miha:ylowno.
I’m coming just now, Nina Mikhaylovna.

Mhrh Men H3Me 3TMenM? fcÎ3biMa eBpYnun, canaM öepMejiHMM? (BG)

/İnni men nâ:me etmeli? LSıma öwrülüp, 0ala:m bermelimi?/
What am I to do n o w ? Should I tum around and say hello?

ÜeHe ıny Barr ınon 4>yı6ona-,na ksh raraan MapenoK. (TV16.4)

/Yö:nö su wagt sol futbolo-da kâm gatna:p yöröno:k./
But n o w he hasn’t been participating in that soccer much, either.
TYnycTaH aflU M a .uyumu. On mym-my Barr HHpefleıca? (BG)
/Gülü00a:n yaıdıma düsdii. Ol sus-su wagt niredekâ:?/
Gülüstan fell into my memory. I wonder where she is r i g h t n o w ?
 Adverbs 365

AHHaryjiM mon B a m ıa p sffun oh ceKH3 Humaptumaflbi. (G)

/A:nnagulı sol wagtlar edil on 0efci8 ya:slarınnadı./
Annagulı was just about eighteen-years old t h e n .

3 f lw ı ın o n B a r r flexHCTaH xap6ı>ı 6a6axaa n y r r a 6epKMfliırınn, ui3xep-rajı.ı

eBpynınmMp. (N)
/Edil sol vvagt Dehi00a:n harbi ba:batda pugto berkidilip, sâher-gala: övvriilüpdür./
Just about th a t tim e , Dehistan was strongly foıtified in a military way and was
tumed into a city-fortress.
Bm3-3 o j i B a r T ornaH, ohm c o p a M a j ib m b ir iin a M 6 n n M 3 H f ln p n c . (TV13.3)
/Bi8-â: ol vvagt oglon, onı 0o:romoludugunom bilmâ:nniri0./
Us, we vvere boys th e n , and probably didn’t realize that vve should have asked
about him.
Bı» o j i B a r T J i a p 8 - h >k;h ı c n a c a a o K a a p flM K . (O)
/BiS ol wagtlar 8-nji kıla00a okoya:rdık./
We vvere in the 8th grade then.

îujm /yağı/ justno w ameıc /entek/ yet, stili

an(K)ux;a /yaıj(k)ıja/ just now xeHH3 /heni:5/ yet, stili
an-anbi /yap-yagı/ just recently fleppeB /derrew/ at once, immedia :sly

- JIhku rerotn raflen k h m ? - On ceıutH h u i h h flsn, x o s n y f l a H hmk. (N)

/'Yarjkı gelip giden kim?" "Ol ©enir] i:siq dâ:l, howludon cık."/
"Who’s that vvho just came and vvent?" "It’s none of your business, get cut of my
yard."
Xamı 3TMe-fle ııtinSep, MeH fli(i>u^a niiflHM. (G)
/Hayal etme-de iyiber, men yarjıja iydim./
Don’t slovv dovvn, keep on eating, I’ve just now eaten.
Hn-flnu r t n p a K 3anac uıaüjıapbi e3flepenu<H3e neüflaJiaHflpMbiuıı.ınu3 auttun h t
anaH canana flennepflHnep. (N) /Yap-yarjı gıtrark 8apa0 saylan ö:8 deregirj ioe
peyda:lanya:rmısır|iS diyip it alan 0anaja dönnördülör./
Just recently, they tore me to pieces, saying that I supposedly use the spıre parts
in short supply for my own profit.
AüflbiM aüflsnı 3HTeK hui 6oncyn H-fla m CGÜrycHHiı ra3aHaH 6oncyH, onaptrn
xepcHHfle e35onyuiJitmbiK 6ojwp. (N) /Aydım aydya:n entek ya:s bolöun ya:-da i:l
0öygü0iinü gaSanan bol0un, oloruıj herOinne ö:5bolusluluk bolya:r./
Whether people vvho sing are s t ili young or have gained the love of tlıe people,
each one of them has individuality.
366 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Hypstrubi e3yHMi; nyrapm x ,ym aifflbiM a#z?acHHi>n( rentiaHHimom, itene xe n m

Ken tıxnac, 33Xmct MeKMenunınnHH aÜTflM. (N)
/Nutryagdı ö:8ünürj du:ta:rdo juda: aydım aydaOınır) gelyâ:nnigini, yö:nö heni:8
köp ıhla:0, Sahmet îekmelidigini aytdı./
Nuryagdı said that he himself is eager to sing a song on dutar, but that he stili has
to be very dedicated and industrious.

On neppeB Mine 6amna6ep3ü;eKj(H. (G) /Ol denew i:îe baslarberjekdi./

He had intended to go ahead and start work at once.

enöıep) /örj(lör)/ before, ago coh /0oıj/ finalîy

MyHHaH en /munnon örj/ ago co n p a /0orjro/ later, afterw ard
en-ennep /örj-örjlör/ in the past OHflaıt/uıoımaH coh /onnon/
enyufleH /öıjünnön/ beforehand Sonnon Boi)/ a fter that
eHfle /örjdö/ ahead ohcoh /on0oi]/ then
enypTM /öıjürtü/ before, earlier than c o n -c o n n a p /0orj-0oi)lor/ later on
enfleH /örjdön/ long ago c o H m B a rrfla /0orjkı w agtd a/ la te ly
03an / 080I/ before, ago con aöaK a /0oqobaka:/ in th e end
03annap /oSollor/ earlier, at one time 6 n p MaK /bir c ak/ lo n g a g o
3ÜÜ3M /eyya:m/ already ı ÖMpeMflsM /bireyyâ:m / lo n g a go

©H flMHe 3Tpan Mepxe3H 6onaH 6onca, X33Hp 6y nocenoK BenasrrMH xeM MepKe3H
Sonfltı. (N) /Öi) dirje etra:p merkeSi bolon bol0o, ha:8ir bu poOolok wela:yatırj
hem merke8i bolh./
If it only had been the çenter of the district before, this settlement also would be
the çenter of the province now.

Eh3hh rniKpnMH3qe, TypKMeH ce3H 6h3MH 3paMM3wn 6mphh^h Myntttınnbm,iHi>n<

opTanapbinfla, TaKMtnıaH 1.5 myu tthuı MeMecH MyHflaH en HbncaH Sonca repeK.
(TV13.5) /BiSirj pikrimiSce, türkmön 6ö5ü biSiıj eraanıSıg birinji müıjyıllıgmıi}
ortolorunno, takmıman 1.5 mür) yıl £eme0i munnon örj çıkan bol0o gerek./
In our opinion, the word Türkmen probably evolved in the middle of the first
millennium A.D. or about 1.5 thousand years ago.

IHy flepMamaHanapna ennep-3 Ken flepMaıt 6apflaM Beıra, uıy Barr 6up flepMaH
eTMe3iiMinıreM 6onap. (TV9.4) [öapflaM < 6api(M xeM]
/Su derma:nha:nalarda örjiör-â: köp derma:n ba:rdam weli, su wagt bir dermarn
yetmeSciligem bolya:r./ [ba:rdam < ba:rdı hem]
There were a lot of medicines in these drugstores before, however, these days
there’s a shortage of some medicines.
 Adverbs 367

Mynyii e a i f reveu ifem n aıca r a p a H tm u a o h n p o q e ı r r e n jje B apsam u r a n u amansıp.

(TV8.3)
/Munur) ö:Sü geSen yılla:ka: gararmrjda o:n proSent öi]dö barya:nnıgım a:ıjladya:r./
This shows that it [the cotton yield] is 10 percent ahead compared to that of last
year.
3 r e p peMOHT HinnepH reMHpnnce, cyB K ecn n *;eK 6 o n ca , eu yııae H ra3eTnepne a
TejıeBiifleımene xariKa xa6ap öepHJiiiap. (TV17.2) /Eger remont irileri gecirilOe,
0uw keöiljek bol0o, örjünnön gaSetlerde ya: telewideniyede halka habar berilyâ:r./
When repair works are done, if the water is to be tumed off, word is given
b e fo r e h a n d to the people in the newspapers or on television.

TypKMeHHCTaHfla erç-enJiep rBranapBi e p s n annca, xaTffla oh flep r-oH 6auı

HiıınapLiHflaKa flypM ym a tancapaH 3KeHJiep. (TV 16.1)
/Tiirkmönü00a:nna ör)-öi)lör gı:Slan öıam ya:ska:, hatda: on dö:rt-on bâ:s
ya:slannnaka: durmuso cıkaryam ekenler./
I n the past in Türkmenistan, they vvould marry off girls while very young,
apparently even while they were fourteen- or fifteen-years old.
Bnp fttuı MeMecH 03an 6onaH BaKa. (N) /Bir yıl demesi oSol bolon wa:ka./
This is an event that happened about a year ago.
"M n e mchhh rçarajıapMM H3XHJiH? M eH , mchhh muihm H3Xmjim? MeHHH 3fleH 3® um
HsxMnH?” ahMuti, 3Öİİ3M aflaM 6np o n nyufo r H T M e n r a e TaiıapntiK repMsH hjibi.
(TV16.1)
/"İne menii) ca:galanm nâ:bili? Men, menig i:îim na:hili? Menig eden Sa:dun
nâ:hili?" diyip, eyyam a:dam bir ol dünya: gitmegine tayya:rlık göryâm ya:lı./
As though already preparing to leave for the other world, a person thinks "And
how are my children? How are my affairs? How are the things I’ve done?"
renM 3H-renM 3H coh renflH. (G) /Gelmâ:n-gelmâ:n 0oıj gelli./
He didn’t come and didn’t come and finally he came.
m o lla n con TaMtm ıronıe MKHÖHp-MKHÖHpfleH nMOHepnep rapraı Samnafltmap.
(G) /Sonnon 0oi] ta:mıi) içine ikibi:r-ikibi:rden pionerler gi:rip./
After that, the pioneers started coming into the house two by two.
SM M aıctı c o n - c o n n a p Kenyn cyBBi 6wp rynpaT 6nneH öynaH Bin 6amnaHMBiuı.
(BH) /Emma:kı 0orj-0oıjlor kö.-lüg 0uwı bir gudrat bilen bulonup baslammıs./
But th e n la t e r o n , by some power, the water of the lake apparently started to tum
muddy.
C o h k b i BarTfla AMaH MeKflerme repyHMetop-ne öonacBi. (G)
/0oıjla wagtda Amam mekdepde görünmöyâ:r-le bolo0ı./
It vvould appear that Aman has not been in school la te ly .
368 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

MeHe TaKCH T y T ^ a K 6oncanti3, car 3iranH3H ranfltıpLin, o h c o h a yp a n n a MeH

ntmaH epHK 6apsm ahMhii afiflİftManıı. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö takOi tutjok bolOoıjuS, 0ag
elirjiSi gallmp, on0oq duronno men pıla:n yeri:k barya:n diyip aydatymalı./
But if you want to stop a taxi, you should raise your right hand, then when it
stops, you should say you’re going tö such-and-such a place.

BoccaH a*;e orayıam n rm e n iH e flYUiYHMe3nHK sflraı, GauiflaH rapuibintiK

repKe3nn yrpaH 6onca xeM corçaöaKa on-fla pa3tmj>nc BepflH. (G)
/Bo00a:n eje oglunui) gitmegine düsünmöSlük edip, basdan garsılık görköSüp
ugra:n bolOo hem Bogobaka: ol-lo ra:8ılık berdi./
Although Bossan-eje started protesting at first, aeting as though she didn’t
understand her son’s leaving, in the end she also agreed.

©ÖMY3e reneH ö o n c a flM H to ,6 w p q a K ÖHJiep r n n e p n m y e . (G)

/ÖymüSö gelen bolOodurjuS, bir £ak biler giderdirjiS./
If you had come to our home, I’m sure you wou!d have known long ago.

6actiM /6axı.iM /ba0ım /bahım / so o n hjikm /ilki/ first, at first

BarTfla /yakı:n w ag td a / so o n
h k l ih apaflaH /a:radan/ in th e m ean tim e
my snctiHfla /su yakı:n na/ v e r y so o n un conyHfla /ir) Oorjunno/ fin a lly

Hklih Barraa Aıuradaı^a X33npftn 3aMata.m Tana6trna naütiK renflsH

nonHKiiMHHKa ınuron öarnnap. (TV9.4) /Yakı:n wagtda Asgabatda ha:Sirki
Sama:nıq talabuıa la:yık gelyâ:n poliklinika isla:p basla:r./
A polyclinic that meets modem demands soon will begin operating in Ashgabat.

A ö x a n tiM , MeH my flKMHfla o 6 a M U 3 a n r r a ç e K . (G)

/A:yha:mm, men su yakı:nna o:ba:mı8a gitjek./
Ayhanım, I will go to our village very soon.

A p a fla H y j- f le p T tihin renffH, oBaflaH oraaHflaH x a 6 a p eK. (O )

/Aıradan ü£-dö:rt yıl ge£di, owodon oglonnon habar yo:k./
In the meantime, three or four years have passed and there’s no news from the
handsome young man.
H jikh mon aflaMHrç “Ax, ax" flueır cecH 3iuMflHnfliı. (BH)
/İlki sol a:damıi] "Ah, ah" diyen 0e0i esidilli./
At first that man’s voice saying "Ah! Ah!" vvas heard.

Mn c o n y H fla n a rra H M 3aBOfla a r a m 6 a p a p n a p . (T7.3)

/İr) Oorjunno pagta:nı Sawodo ahp barya-.rlar./
Finally, they take the cotton to the plant.
 Adverbs 369

raÜTaflaH /gaytadan/ a gain KSTe(-fle) /ka:te(-de)/ sometimes

T33eflen /tâ:8eden/ again , an ew KSBarr /kâ:w agt/from time to time
en e(-fle) /yene(-de)/ (on ce) m ore, /hâ:li-sinni/
anoth er fro m tim e to tim e
eHe B h p ryH /yen e b ir gün/ MLiflaM(a) Jınıda:m(a)/ aiways,
a noth er d a y co n stan tly
HHHHKH(ne) /inniki(le)/ n e x t tim e xeM Hiue /hemr.se/ a lw a y s
K e n BarrflaH /köp w agtdan/ yaaK B a rrn ap /uSok w agtlar/
for a long time fo r a lo n g tim e
Ken Barrnan /köp wagtla:p/ y3aK B arTJiaötm /uSok w agtlayııı/
fo r a lo n g tim e for a long time

HoöaT raÜTaftan re3yHH lOMflbi. (TJ) /No:bot gaytadan göSünü yumdu/

Nobat closed his eyes again.

O h c o h o p a 3 a T y r c a r ç , a fla M T a a e fle H 6 n p a y h Ms M iıe n a n u . (TV13.4)

/On0or) ora:8a tu00oi], a:dam tâ:8eden bir dünyâ: i:nen ya:lı./
And if you fast it’s as though a person is bom again.

3eM 3eM eH e6up r e 3 e K x a m w n f l a f lH . (BG) /SemSem yene b i r geSek h a s s ı l ü d ı . /

The monitor hissed one more time. [3eM3eM /SemSem/ 'monitor lizard']

CeHM 6a3apnaflbm reHenMeflHM, HHnHKHJie e 3yM niTMeceM fSoıiMaflbi. (G )

/0eni ba:8arladıp gönönmödiim, innikile ö:5üm gitmeOem bolmodı./
I’m not pleased with letting you do the shopping, next time I’ll have to gı>
myself.

5taynfct ona Eacap flH&ın aT saKHiiflu xeM X3J1H-uihham OHyn ÖHneH

oÜHaııiMaHfci roBbi repepflM. (N) /Ya:iuh ogo Ba0ar diyip a:t dakıpdı hem hâ:li-
sinni onuıj bilen oynosma:nı gowı görördü./
The old man had stuck the name Basar on him and he used to like playing vvith
him from time to time.

EMp safla acyfla Berenösn Be Kare 63-e3yMfleH aaaaçbiraM 6onca pa3bt öoh j h . (N)
/Bir 8a:da juda: hegenyâtn we kâ:te ö:8-ö:8Umdön a:8ajıgam botöo ra:5ı bolyatn./
I’m very happy about one thing and sometimes I’m even a little bit satisned with
myself.
On MbinaMa 3ıra 6«p KeceMeH Hepesım cbiMbiıunap üepepflH. (G)
/Ol mıda:ma eli bir keSemen Söröklü Sımışlar yörördü./
He always walked around munching with a piece of bread in his hand ali tlıe
while.
370 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

''îeM eH , MeH c e ım nen BarTJian repMeflHM. (TV7.1)

/Çemen, men 0eni köp wagtla:p görmödüm./
Chemen, I haven’t seen you for a long time.
M en e y 3 aK B arrnaÜ M H 6 n p ep ıo c rnT3*;eK Öoncarç, ca M o n e n n a rw T cen t o b m
6 o n a p e iiflite c 6 h 3-s . (TV9.2) /Yö:nö u 5 o k w a g tla y m b ir y e ri:k g itje k bolöorj,
O am olotlı gi00erj g o w ı b o lo r ö y d y â :0 bi8-â:./
But if you want to go somewhere for a long time, us, we think it’s better if you
go by plane.

Adverbs o f Place
The Turkmen adverbs of place are formed by combinations of the demonstrative
pronouns 6y/ray /bu:/su:/ 'this' and ojı/mon /ol/sol/ 'that' plus ep /yer/ 'place' or Taft
/ta: y/ 'place, direetion' in the locative case (+na/fle /+da/de/). In addition to these, the
words nam apaa /dasarda/ 'outside' and HHHHne /icinne/ 'inside' are used.

6y epfle /bu yerde/here 6y Taftfla /bu ta:yda/ here

my epfle /su yerde/ here my raflffla /su ta:yda/ here
on epfle /ol yerde/ there on TaBfla /ol ta:yda/ there
uıon epfle /sol yerde/ there uıon TaHfla /sol ta:yda/ there
6wp epfle /bir yerde/ somewhere xeMMe epfle /hemme yerde/ everywhere
flamapfla /dasarda/ outside HHepfle /iîerde/ inside

Toa^a 6y epfle sıuHTMeflHK flHnnepMHM auıırrflH. (H)

/Gojo bu yerde eritmedik dillerini esitdi./
Here, the old man heard languages that he had not heard before.
Cm3 6apge ropiİ3HH3 onaptm «tara Barramfla oHııasm otaaBaıtuapLiHM repöanM3.
(TV 13.3)
/0İ8 bâ:rde görya:rjiS oloruıj ca:ga wagtmna oynoya:n oynowa:clanm görya:rji5./
Here, you see, you see the toys vvith vvhich they played in their childhood.
On 3KHHH 3jih a p a ra tı ropan ftepce, on epfle yünıyn srran 3aT öapfltıp eiİTflyK,
3MMa 6apbin repeete on epfle xmm 3aT eK sıceH. (G)
/Ol ekini eli yaraglı go:ra:p yö:r0ö, ol yerde ü:süp yatan 8a:t ba:rdır öytdük,
emma: banp gör0ök ol yerde hi:ö 8a:t yo:k eken./
As he vvas guarding the erop vvith vveapon in hand, vve thought there had to be
piles of things there, but vvhen vve vvent to see, it tums out there vvas nothing
there at ali.
CeBeuifle B e n a T SonaHJiaptt mon Taüfla a;aMjıaımttpnap. (TV13.3)
/öövvösdö vvepa:t bolonlon sol ta:yda ja:yla:pdırlar./
They buried those vvho perished in the battle (of Gökdepe) there.
 Adverbs 371

fla m a p g a 6onca uıeMamm ryBBYJfflHCH ryÖMneHHn, e f ty n tıpaHMacii apTapflH.

(G) /Daşarda bolöo sema:lig güwwüllü0ü gü:clönüp, öyüi) ıranmaOı artya:rdı./
As the roar of the wind rose o u t s i d e , the vibration of the house was becoming
stronger and stronger.

ÜMepnsKH oıypareıapMH Baptntttu carntm>raa mmHnep. (G)

/İcerdâ:ki oturonlorui) ba:nnır| Sağlığına icdiler./
They drank to the health of ali those sitting inside.

Adverbs o f Direction
A set of adverbs that indicate the direction of an action is formed vvith the suffix
+ mk/ hk /+ı:k/i:k/, vvhich represents an older directive case that is little-used in modem
Turkmen. AU o f the adverbs with this suffbc indicate '(direction) toward (a place)'.
Another series of adverbs that indicate '(direction away) from (a place)' combines the
demonstrative pronouns 6 y/my /bu:/su:/ 'this' and o jj/m o j ı /ol/sol/ 'that' plus e p /yer/
'place' or T a ü /ta:y/ 'place, direction' vvith the ablative case suffix + a a n / j j e H
/+dan/den/.

6y/my epHK /bu/su yeri:k/here 6 y/ıuy T a f lin c

/bu/su ta:yı:k/ here
on/uıon epHK /ol/sol yeri:k/ there ojı/mojı TaütiK /ol/sol ta:yı:k/ there
Hnp3K /nira:k/ (to) where epHK /yeri:k/ (to the place) where
nıepHK /iceri:k/ inside flaıııaptiK /dasan:k/ outside
6apH(K) /ba:ri(:k)/ (to) here auptiK /arjn:k/ (to) there
SeünaK /beyia:k/ toward here lııeünaK /Seylâ:k/ toward here
mıepHK /ileri:k/ forvvard ratipaK /gayra:k/ backward
eKaptnc /yokon:k/ upward aıuaK /asa:k/ downward

O ım aH con 6 h3 my xeTO H H H H xa ray T a iib iK aTstptıc. (TV17.4)

/Oıınon 005 bi5 su zetonı inha: su ta:yı:k atya:n0./
After that, vve insert this token here in this place.

M yxaM M eT 2c;aH-a, M yxaM M eT açaH-a! HupaK raiTiHKa, n ,i3 , c y u y u g a rb in

rupactm a rMflaJİMeflHK 6ony6 njıcetiflnp. (G) /Muhommet ja:n-a:, Muhommet
Ja:n-a:! Nira:k gitdika:, gı:S, 0uwuıj dagııj gıra0ma gida:ymedik bolubilBeydir./
Muhammet-ja-a-n, Muhammet-ja-a-n! W here could he have gone, girl? God forbid
that he’s gone to the vvaterl

İîe H e TaKCH TyraçaK öoncarçbra, car 3Jimit(H3h ranfltıptm, ohcoh flypaıma MeH
TMHaH epHK 6 apsm flHİtan atiflatİMarm. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö tak0i tutjok bol0or|u8, 0ag
eliıjiSi gallınp, on0oi] duronno men pıla:n yeri:k barya:n diyip ayda:ymalı./
But if you vvant to stop a raxi, yon should raise your right hand, then when it
stops, you should say you’re going to such-and-such a place.
372 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Orynx£*aT xeM H3bi ÖMiıen rynYMCHpan, HHepuK rapflH. (G)

/Ogulhayat hem ı:Sı bilen güliim0ürâ:p, iceri:k gi:rdi./
Ogulhajat went inside behind him, also smiling.

MeH-a 6ıuiMeflMM, apmın, aauıapbiK flartı WKaHflbip-fla. (G)

/Men-â: bilmedim, arcın, dasaruk dağı Cıkannır-da:./
Me, I don’t knovv, the elder just went outside or somewhere like that.

Afi oryn, Gap» ren! (G) /Ay oğul, bâ:ri gel!/

Hey, son, come över here!

3rep-fle antıpna aflaM TpyÖKaHM anca, uıy aceTOH a m a n niflfep. Ara. M h h ii

Gonca rypneııiHÖepMenH. (TV17.4) /Eger-de arjırda a:dam nrubka:m al0a, su zeton
asa:k gidyâ:r. Ana. Inni bol0o gürlösübenneli./
And if a person on the other end picks up the phone, this token goes dovvn. There
it is. And now you have to go ahead and talk.

6y/uıy epfleH /bu/su yerde/ 6y/my Taüflan /bu/su ta:ydan/

from here from here
on/fflon epfleH /ol/sol yerden/ on/uıon TaflflaH /ol/sol ta:ydan/
from there from there

ABTo6yc uıy epaen oh önpflen oh mhh>t mınreHfle yrpasıp. (TV3.2)

/Awtobu0 su yerden on bi:rden o:n minut i:slâ:nne ugroya:r./
The bus leaves here at ten minutes past ten.

By Taiıflan ınszepıı cbnraaMaK mymkkh. (TV4.4)

/Bu ta:ydan sâheri 0ı:nlamak mümküm./
From here one can observe the city.

Eaıura TponneiiGyc « a ra on Taiîaan flepsııoK. (TV12.3)

/Basga tırolleybuO dağı ol ta:ydan yöra:no:k./
No other trolleybuses and such ran from there.

Ohcoh 3*;eMMn 63MxeM, uıy IIeBpH3e flHÜÎİapnep, my Taiifla KypopT ep, acnbi
ınon TaÜAan. (TV13.1) /On8or) ejemir) ö:8ü hem, su Pöwrü:5ö diyyâ:rler, su
ta:yda kurort yer, a01ı sol ta:ydan./
And my mother herself- this they cali Pöwrize, a vacation spot here - is originally
from there.

3 fliın rnon Barmu 63ynfle akmh Gııp e p a e H xyMYPflM sıuHflMJiKaH sum Gonflbi.
(G) /Edil sol wagtıi) ö:Sünnö yakı:n bir yerden hümttrdü esidilyâ:n ya:h bollı./
Just at that moment, whispering seemed to be heard from somewhere nearby.
 Adverbs 373

Adverbs o f Degree
The adverbs.of degree inelude simple adverbs (Kan /köp/ 'much', t o b u /gov,./ 'vvell,
good'), derived adverbs (a3a«itiK /a:8ajık/ 'a little bit', 6YTHHJieö(HH) /bütü:nlöy(ün)/
'completely'), compound ( x e M M e T a p a n n a ttu H /hemmetaraplayın/ 'comprehcnsively,
on ali sides') and combination (Gııpas /bira:5/ 'a little', 6 ap u -eru /ba:n-yo:gı/ 'only')
adverbs, and set expressions ( y 3 a s B a r r a a t t u H /u8ok vvagtlayın/ 'for a long time').
They may be grouped into those vvhich indicate the degree, ranging from less er to
greater, of the intensity or thoroughness vvith vvhich an action is performed.

Ken /köp/ much, a lot of a3 /a:8/ little

K3H /ka:n/ many, much 6npa3 /bira:8/ a little, a bit
epaH /öra:n/ very a3-KeM /a:8-kem/ a little bit
rara /gatı/ quite, really a 3 i* ;t iK /a:5ajık/ ju s t a little bit
ere /ötö/ too much Haiia(x;a) /cala(ja)/ a bit, slightly
açyfla /juda:/ quite, too MHH3H/irjrjâm/ really, very

T o k e u y M n e p H H , n p -H Ö M H m n e p H H K o n 6 o n c a , M a n n a p i i.in i .iK x e M e c t f s p .
(TP12.2) /Gö:k ö:nümlörür), i:r-iymi51erir) köp bol0o, ma:lla:rcılık hem Ö6yâ:r./
When you have a lot of vegetables and fruit, anim al husbandry also develops.

îîaHe my B arr ınon 4>yr6ona-fla K3H ra ra a n ü e p e H O K . (TV16.4)

/Yö:nö su vvagt sol futbolo-da ka:n gatna:p yöröno:İc./
But now he hasn’t been participating in that soccer much, either.

E m3hh epan ar36i6np KonneKTHBMMH3 6ap. (N)

/Bi8iq örâ:n agSıbir kollektivvimiS ba:r./
We have a very unified collective.

T a n j K e ç e n 6oncantn-fla M iue rMfln6epii3pcnrçıi3MH? (T17.3)

/Gatı keöel bol0oıju8-do i:se gidiberyâ:r0iıji8mi?/
Do you stili go ahead and go to vvork even if you’re really sick?

Xoua 6y ryneM r a T b i n>i3*;aK eMflifon. (H) /Hovva: bu:nom gatı gıSjak öydyâ:n./
I think it vvill get pretty hot today.

3 r e p K e n n s H ıımrnfle 6 u p 3 a T 6 a p 6 o n c a , öcüne r a T b i a n > ıp M a3 fli.ı. (H)

/Eger kellâ:i} icinne bir 8a:t ba:r bol0o, beyle gatı a:gırma88ı./
If there was anything in your head, it vvouldn’t hurt so bad.

rynneHHaMH Apa6tm antın ruTMenı onap y ™ JKyna SMaH 6oJifltt. (G)

/Güllönna:mı Arabır) alıp gitmegi olor iiSü:n juda: yaman bollı./
Arap’s abduetion of Gülennam vvas too evil for them.
374 Türkmen Reference Grammar

r o b a m ın m m M anaca caHfltıpan, xoBcajıactı 6apxa aprapatı. (G)

/Goja:nıi] imi £alaja 0annıra:p, how0olo8ı barha artya:rdı./
The body of the old man was trembling slightly, his alarm was increasing.

Ten ona 6wpa3 rapaıuaJiM. (G) /Gel ogo bira:S garasah./

C’mon, let’s wait for him a bit.

fly fa y3biHntt ryH Toiifla 6on;ıyM-fla, armaMjn>nc aa-KCM umumu. (BG)

/Dii:n uSı:n!ı gün toydo bollum-do, agsamlık a:5-kem icilii./
I was at the celebration yesterday ali day and- in the evening a little bit vvas
dnınk.
İîeHe 6h3 maxep aflaMnaptma cepeıceıc, ohaa a3a^t>K yü-ırenunc 3aT repyn
6nnepHc. (TV13.2)
/Yö:nö biS Saher a:damlanna 0ere00ek, onno a:5ajık ü:tgösük Sa:t görüp bileri©./
But if vve take a look at city people, then we can see that some things are ju st a
little bit different.

roBH /govvı/ well, good HMaH /yaman/ bad(ly), too, very

onaT /orjot/ well, fine 3p6eT /erbet/ bad(ly), poorly

Tenen 6ojıcanti3, roebi 3flnncnHM3. (H) /Gelen bol0oi]u8, gowı edip0irji5./

If you had come, you vvould have done vvell.

TapnaBaM yuypctra oBaflaH aT 6onyn enımflH. 03eM ynyrti3 khmhh orçaT

rbuibncjıımbi. (N)
/Garlawa:c ucurtuS owodon at bolup yetisdi. Ö:8öm ulugı:8 kimim orjot gılıklıdı./
Garlavach grew up as an extremely beautiful horse. She also was vvell-behaved like
a grovvn girl.
By nraçe snvıaH r a r a ranapctırç-na, MyHyn ceöaöîf H3Me? (G)
/Bu gi:je yaman gatı ga£ya:r0ır|-la, munurj 0eba:bi nâ:me?/
Aah, you’re running off much too soon tonight, why is this?

6yTHHneö(HH) /bütü:nlöy(ün)/ completeiy TyKen /tüköl/ entirely

xanuc /ha:lı:0/ quite, completeiy 6aptı-era /ba:n-yo:gı/ only
xeMMeTapannaÖMH /hemmetaraplayın/ comprehensively

-Chshh MtiKapm ftynynH3fle CyTHHJieft flepeK eK. Onannu3 xhh 3afla srpaHOK. (N)
[onauHbra < ojıapiiHbra] /"Qi8iq cıkaryaın yüpüıjüBSö bütümlöy derek yo:k.
OlogrjuS hi:£ 8a:da yarano:k.7 [oloıjguS < olorurpıS]
"The thread you’re producing is completeiy vvorthless. It’s not good for anything."
 Adverbs 375

- Beft-Befl-efl, xajibic xeM HflaflLtM. (G ) rW ey-wey-ey, ha:lı:0 hem ya:dadım.'7

"Oof! I ’m eompletely exhausted!"

3n6eTfle 6y 3aTnap xaKtfflfla ra c ra B arrttu HTOHfle xeMMeTapaıuıaftbiH aMflbm

6oıt*;aK j j s j t . (TP12.2) /Elbetde bu 8a:tlar hakmna gı:0ga wagtıtj icinne
hemmetaraplayın aydıp boljok da:l./
Of course it wili not be possible in a short period of time to speak
com prehensively about these things.

E arnibi 6 o n M a K y r o H a fla M a 6 a p u -e rtı y u caHbi 3 â T re p e K M H U i. (N)

/Bagtlı bolmok ücü:n a:dama ba:n-yo:gı üc 8a:nı 8a:t gerekmiş./
They say that a person needs only three things to be happy.

6e8ne /beyle/ so MOHMa /monco/ so much

ıueiîne /şeyle/ such, so, as omaKJibi /oncoklı/ so much

M y iv iK r a tr a fla p , M a r a n t t 03 3 H e c n H H n 3 M flH p M e rn x e K M a H flb ip . « a r a yMHH

3He cy ü flH h j i h ın e iin e s m u t ı Hspce 6 o n M a3 . (N )
/Mümküngadar, ca:ga:nı ö:5 eneOinii] emdirmeği hökma:nnır. Ğiinkü, ca:ga ücü:n
ene 0ü:dü ya:lı şeyle yagsı nâ:t0e bolmoS./
As far as possible, the breast-feeding of a child by its own mother is mandatory.
Because, there can be nothing as good for a child as mother’s milk.

3 r e p K e m r e n H 'h J H fle 6 n p sar 6 a p 6 o n c a , Betine r a T t ı a r u p M a s f lM . (H)

/Eger kellarrj icinne bir 8a:t ba:r bol0o, beyle gatı a:gııma88ı./
If there was anything in your head, it vvouldn’t hurt so bad.

3n6eTfle, eB Jie H o r n a H MOHMa S o n a ı m u p . ( N )

/Elbetde, öwlön oglon monSo bolonnur./
Of course, the boy who received so m u c h praise was satisfied.

OımaKJibi flapbiriiSepMsn! (G) /Oncoklı da:ngıberma:i)!/

You shouldn’t worry so m u c h !

Adverbs o f Manner
The adverbs of manner include simple adverbs (T H 3 /ti:S/ 'quickly', Ö H Jie /bile/
'together'), derived adverbs ( H a J l T ( p a K ) /calt(ra:k)/ 'quickly', 6 n p a e n /birden/
'suddenly', 9 3 y M e /ö:Sücö/ 'by oneself', s u i b i p u H /yasırı:n/ 'secretly'), compound
(HKH*i3K /ikicâ:k/ Tıead-to-head') and combination (arçK Co/ıyn /agk bolup/ 'in
surprise', r e j ı n n - r n f t n n /gelip-gidip/ 'back and forth'; see 354, 356) adverbs, and set
expressions (TH 3 B a r r f l a /ti:8 wagtda/ 'quickly as possible'.
376 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

6npfleH(K3> /birden(kâ:)/ su d den ly TanOa /tapba/ abruptly

TH3(psK) /ri:8(râ:k)/ q u ic k (ly ) «aırrCpaK) /calt(ra:k)/ quickly
■ne B a n s a /ti:8 w agtd a/ q u ic k ly aıutıptm /yasının/ secretly
ajjcaT /arjöa:t/ e a s ily aMaTJibi /a:matlı/ easily
yn yflaH /uludon/ h e a v ily , d e e p ly 6 ep K /berk/ finnly, stemly
6 n n e /bile/ togeth er, as o n e B3YHC /ö:Sücö/ by oneself
h k jfö k /ikica:k/ head-to-head ÖY36e-öy3 /yü8bö-yü5/
face-to-face

HoöaT 6ııpflen roiöipe öaTfltı. (TJ) /No:bot birden pikire batdı,/

Nobat suddenly sank into thought.

O ji 6wp 3aT Hfltına flYmeH a n tı, c e c ın n ı T an G a KecflH. (BG)

/Ol bir Sa:t ya:dma dilsön ya:lı, 0e8ini tapba ke00i./
As though he remembered something, he abruptly stopped speaking.

XaHU, 6eaH STcen , TH3 6oji. (G) /Hanı, beya:n e09er), ti:S bol./
Well, if you’re going to teli me, be quick about it.

Onyn TH3paK eöyHe erecH rejıKspflu. (G)

/Onug ti:8râ:k öylinö yeteöi gelyâ:rdi./
He was eager to get home as quickly as possible.

Th3 Barrua hilmuioh flY3 rYHe canMaıç rep eK . (G)

/Ti:S wagtda i:sir|8i düSgünö 0almak gerek./
You need to put your affairs in order as quickly as possible.

ille t in e 3fln n ce sıcctn oıapLin b B n a jlT KHpa^tKMSH, onapflaH orçaT t ı c re jıe p flypap.
(N) /Şeyle edil0e ya66ıklarır|i5 calt kirjikma:n, olordon oıjot ı:0 geler duror./
If done in this way, your pillows won’t get dirty quickly, and a fine scent vvill
come from them.

ArapHH flsnıiH arçcaT corpyımbi. (BG) /A:gırya:n di:si arj0a:t Oogrulh./

His aching tooth was extracted easily.

MyxaT, H3Me 6efae yjıyflan rcm ajıapctm? (G)

/Muha:t, na:me beyle uludon dem alya:r0ır)?/
Muhat, why are you breathing so heavily?

Oji 6m3H epsn 6epK lyrapatı. (N) /Ol biSi örâ:n berk tutya:rdı./
He was very strict with us.
E h 3 rno B a rr 6mıe (BH) /BiS so
«aM jp u m o ı u p f l t K . vvagt b ile c a :y iç ip o tı:rd ık./
At that tim e vve vvere d rin k in g tea together.
 MODAL WORDS

Modal vvords have two basic functions: to express the speaker’s attitude tovvard what
she or he is saying, and to add some shade of emotional or other meaning to ;ı word,
phrase or sentence.
Nearly ali Türkmen modal vvords are adverbs and, in origin, more than half are
borrovved from Persian or Arabic. Modal words retain a single form and appear as
vvords vvith independent lexical meanings, for example, in short response ('Iıardly',
'yes', 'only', ete.). The modal vvords in Turkmen may be grouped in categorit.:; based
on attitude or shade of meaning.

Affirmation
Turkmen uses modal vvords to affirm the existence, presence, fact or ıruth of
something. These vvords are 6ap /bar/ 'there is, there are', xaBa /havva/ 'yes', ;ca /ha:/
'well, yeah', fionap /bolya:r/ 'okay, ali right' and go rp u /dogn/ 'that’s right, trae'.

6ap lba:rl
The word 6ap /ba:r/ 'there is, there are' is placed at the end of a sentence to afifıım the
existence of something. When Bapıubi /ba:nnı/ 'is/are there?' is used to ask v/hether
someone has something or vvhether something exists somevvhere, the short response
6ap /ba:r/ 'there is/are' may be understood as 'yes'.

KaÖMpnepH ceMMsp, ceiiMeftsHiıepH xeM Bap. (G)

/Ka:birleri 0öyyâ:r, 0öymöyâ:nleri hem ba:r./
Some of them love him, but there are also those vvho don’t love him.

OıiflaH flamapbi-fla, cy&ıponuKJiepfle mmbshhh 6on xacı>un>iHbi arotara

MYMKHHMMnMK 6ap. (N) /Onnon dasan-da, Bubtuopiklerde mi:vvâ:nii] bol }ıi:9ılını
alma:ga mümkü:ncüluk ba:r./
And outside of this, there’s also the possibility of getting an abundant harvest of
fruit in the subtropics.

Ul3Xep epjıepmme ope MHnnero - oh 6am nponeH T flartı GapMbiKa ffnüUaıı.

(TV13.1) /Saher yerlerinne or0 milleti - on bâ:s pro0ent dağı ba:rmıka: diy yâ:n./
The Russian nationality in city places-1 guess there’s 15 percent or so.

- flepT caHtı SeÜHK ToxyM araap Sap flHÜflspnep-fls. (TV12.4)

/D ö:rt 0a:m beyik tohum atlar ba:r diyyâ:rler-da:."/
"They say there are just four great breeds of horses."
378 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Modal Words
6 ap /ba:r/ th ere is, xaBa /havva/ y e s, xs /ha:/ yeah , öonap
Affirmation
/ b o ly a :r/ a ii rig h t, o k a y , flo r p t ı /d o g rı/ th a t’s rig h t, true

eK /yo:k/ no, there is not, fls n /dâ:I/ is not, Tac /ta8/

Negation
nearly, almost
a x t ıp w /a:hın/ a fte r ali, bcjimh /w elin/ s tili, 3KeH /eken/
Confîrmation
it tu m s/tu m ed out

3Ji6eTfle /elbetde/ certainly, of course, xeKMaH /hökm a:n/

Certainty
definitely, mandatory
demen /belki/ m a y be, perhaps, M YM KH H /m üm kii:n/m aybe,
p o s sib ly , 3XTHMan /ahtim a:!/ p ro b a b ly , MerepeM /m egerem /
Supposition
perh aps, MeMeıiH /cem eli/ lik e ly , re p e K /gerek / m u st h a v e ,
p ro b a b ly , lik e ly , otİT(MeK) /öyt(mök)/ think (something)
epw /yeri/ w e ll, c o m e on, xaHBi /hanı/ w e ll, 6aKanBi(H)
Motivation
/baka:lı(n)/ w e ll

xac /ha :0/ the most, v e r y , x a c-fla /ha:0-0a/ e v e n (m ore),

xaT fla /hatda:/ e v e n , 3flHn /edil/ ju st, Tyttc /tü:0/ e x a c tly ,
p a c /ra:0 /ju st, x aK b rr /hakı:t/ the m inu te, sM aH /yam an/
Intensifıcation re a lly v e ry , actın/acn a /a0ıl/a01a:/generally, scacaH
/e0a:8a:n/ b a sic a lly , xepH 3 /hem ii:/ it’s g o o d that, 6 ap /bar/
go, ren /gel/ co m e , ro it /g o y / stop , r e p /gör/ s e e , Mep
...+Ma/n3 /ta:...+2a:/câ:/ (rig h t u p ) u n til
/yör/ c ’ m on , Ta

flHUe /diıje/ o n ly , x y T /hut/ that v e r y , e x a c tly , 6epH(H)

Limitation
/beri(n)/ o n ly , Bin aöra-fla /ıla:yta-da/ e sp e c ia lly

yMyınaH /um u:m on/ g e n e ra lly , rapa3 /garaS/ in sh o ıt, arHBi

Generalization /yagnı/ that is, in oth er w o rd s, flHİİMeK /diym ek/ that
m ea n s, ıuoH yn yMHH /sonurç ücü:n/ th at’ s w h y ,
th erefore, ıueMnenMKfle /seylelik d e/ as a resu lt

HHe /ine/ se e , here, B m xa /inha:/ h ere (it is), aHa /ana/ there
Demonsıraıion
(it is), x aH x a /hanha/ ö v e r th ere (it is)
 Modal Words 379

Türkmen does not have a verb like English 'to have'. To express Tıave, don’t have',
Turkmen commonly uses constructions in which a noun is combined vvith the vvords
6 ap /ba:r/ 'there is/are' or eK /yo:k/ 'there is/are not' (see 110).

(Pronoun+)Noun+Possessive + 6ap Pronoun+Locative+Noun+6ap

(Memul) KHTan+tiM 6ap. MeH+fle KHran 6ap.

/(Meniı]) kita:p+ım ba:r./ /Men+de kitarp ba:r./
(my) book+my there islexists me+on book there islexists
I have a book. 1 have a book.

In the most common formation, the noun takes a possessive suffıx to identify the
possessor (+ mm / hm /+ım/im/, ete.; see 107), and may or may not be preceded by a
personal pronoun in the genitive case (MeHHH 'my', ete.; see 187).

M y H y rç a M S u p e ı r r e K c e f r â n n e p H 6ap. ( N ) /M u n u rç o m b ir e n te k 8 e b â :p le r i b a : r ./
And this has several causes.

- H jikh 6wneH-3 my ıcapne oh 6aıu îttin cTax.tiMi.in 6apflbm.iHH Hmaflatora.

(TP13.2) /"İlki bilen-a: su ka:rde on ba;5 yıl ı60ajımıi) batrdıgını yartladayın."/
"First of ali, let me remind you that I have fifteen years experience on the job."

- Kojno3HMH3fla MynqeH roBparaçHK xoas;ajn>ıruMbi3 6ap. (TP12.2)

fKolhoSumuSSo ii£ müıjdön gowra:g}ık hojolugumuS ba:r."/
"We have a few more than 3,000 farms on our collective farm."

- Tapa3, xep aflttu, aflaMMH afltiHMuaM, msxepHH aflttHtmaM 6wp Taptncbi

6ap-fla. (TV8.1)
/"GaraS, her a;dııj, a:damıt) a:duıır)am, sâherir) atdımrjam bir ta:n:hı ba:r-da:."/
"In short, every name, both a person’s name, and a city’s name, has some
history."

In another construction, the locative case form of a personal pronoun identifies the
possessor. When this formation is used with the plural pronouns 6 h 3 /biS/ 'we' or CH3
/0İ8/ 'you', it may be understood as refening to the existence of something 'among us'
or 'among you'.

Bn3jje 6afijıaııiMara mymkhjfjhhhk Hsns RuAcen 6ap. (N)

/BiSSe ba:yla5ma:ga mümküıncülük na:£e diy0er) ba:r./
The possibility for enrichment is limitless among us. [on 'we have limitless
possibilities']
380 Turkmen Reference Grammar

E n 3 fle TypKMeH 3JiHiı6MİiHHfle oTy3 ceKM3 caHU x ap n , OTy3 a n rb i c a n t ı c e c 6 a p .

(TV1.1)
/BiBSe türkmön elipbiyinne otuz SekiS 0a:nı harp, otuz altı 0a:nı 0e0 ba:r./
We have thirty-eight letters and thirty-six souııds in the Turkmen alphabet.
[or: 'there are 38 letters and 36 sounds among us']

The third person (but not the first or second person) past indefinite tense marker - hm
/-dı/ may be added to 6ap /ba:r/ to indicate the existence of something in the past.

IHoji yüuiMeran apacbiHfla ApTbtK xeM 6apAbi. (G)

/Sol ü:smögüi) a:ra0ınna Artık hem ba:rdı./
Artık was among that gathering too. [There was Artık among']

MiimaK 6aıunaHMarbiHa 3HTeK Barr 6ap^u. (BH)

/Yıgnak başlanmağına entek wagt ba:rdı./
There was stili time before the meeting started.

Forms of the verb 6 ojiM a K /bolmok/ 'to be(come)' also may be used to express the
existence or possession of something.

On epfle TypKMeHim mhjuih TaraM n aptı Gojıap. (TV3.5)

/Ol yerde türkmönürj milli: tagamlan bolor./
There will be Turkmen national dishes there.

fly3 MYHe roııaS MJiaTbi 6onan Mypranfla »çopan xeM-«e öetaejaı sruH-auuuoıep
ratipbi lopTJiapflan reTMpHneHOK.(TV 11.4) /Yü8 mürjö goloy i:la:tı bolon
Murga:pda joga:p hem-de beyleki egin-esikler gayrı yu:rtlordon getirileno:k./
In Murgap which has a population of close to 100,000, socks and other clothing
have not been imported from foreign countries.

m aa lhawal
The vvord xana /hawa/ 'yes' is used to affırm the content or reality of something said
or thought.

- AKcyBa 6apflH aBToöyc yuMH önner öapMbi? - XaBa, Sap. (T2.2)

/A:k0uwo barya:n awtobu0 iicii:n bilet ba:rmı?" "Hawa, ba:r.7
Ts there a ticket for the bus going to Aksuw?" "Yes, there is."

- IIIeüjıeMK? CeH flo rpb t öHniispcHUMH OHyn 6ap#btrbiHbt? - XaBa, Mana 3*;eM
aÜTflbi. (TV17.5)
/'Seylemi? 0en dogn bilyS:r0ir|nıi onurj ba:rdıgmı?" "Hawa, maqa ejem aytdı."/
'Really? Do you know for certain that there’s one there?" "Yes, my mother told
me."
 Modal Words 381

x3 /hâ:l
The interjection xa fim:/ 'yeah, uh-huh' may serve as a more casual form of affi rmation
than xasa /hawa/.

- CeH uıy KMTaötı OKafltıi(MBi? - Xa. (G) /"0en su kita:bı okodujguıı?" "Ha .7
"Have you read this book?" "Yeah."

- nan.mıaxHM, c e m n aKbintın MamtnmMp, ceH 6np 3aT TanBiHtmctm,

fl3nnpsncnn. - Xa? (N) /"Pa:tısahım, öenirj akılır) ca:sıpdır, 6en bir 5a:t taptnıpOır),
dâ:lirâ:p9ir)." "Hâ:?"/
"My lord, your mind is deranged, you’ve caught something, you’ve gone ir ad."
'Yeah?"

Xa, Men rotKiipHMHe 6h my epfleH ksh flam flsn. (TV7.5) [6m = 6y]
/Hâ:, mer) pikirimce bi su yerden kâm das da:l, ha:?/ [/bi/ = /bu:/]
Yeah, I think this isn’t very far from here.

âoAnp lbolya:rl, doepu tdogrıl

The word fiojınp /bolya:r/, literally 'it becomes', is the common Türkmen exjıession
for agreement and affîrmation, and is equivalent to 'okay, ali right'.

Eojıap, car 6onyn. XeKMaH TOMurna 6apapim. (N)

/Bolya:r, 6ag bolui). Hökma:n toyuıjuSo barann./
Ali right, goodbye. I’ll definitely come to your wedding.

E m ce, ceH t o s mrns^K 6oJicarç M ana açan 3T, BojmpMtı? (T15.3)

/Bike, 0en toyo gitjek bolöorç marja Jat) et, bolya-.rmı?/
Bike, if you're going to go to the toy, cali me, okay?

The adjective Jto rp u /dogrı/ 'that's right, true, exactiy' may be used at the
beginning of a sentence as an affiımative response, or it may be placed before a v/ord or
phrase within the sentence to emphasize it.

florpbi, onaptın arna6acw x33Hp 6onenMH flypMymfla amaap. (N)

/Dogn, olorui) aglabaSı hâ:5ir boleli:n dunnusdo ya:saya:r./
T h at’s right, most of them now live a satisfying life.

©Hkm m e r a 6 a sap tın 6a3apnaHLmaHtma florpbi y u ryH r e m in , flep flyıot;n r / n e My3

y p yn flH . (G) /Örjkü gün g e ç ip , dö:rdün jü
gı:0 g a ba:8arıi) b a:S arlan ılam n a d o g n tic
yü8 urupdı./
gü n ö
Exactly three days had gone by since the previous short market day, and the fourth
day came to pass.
382 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Negation
The word eK /yo:k/ 'there is/are not' expresses non-existence and a negative response,
while H3J1 /dâ:l/ 'is/are not' negates affirmative statements. The word Tac /ta0/ 'almost,
nearly' is used with uncompleted actions.

eK lyo:kl
The modal word eK /yo:k/ is the common Turkmen way of saying 'no', usually in
response to a question about the presence or existence (fiapMU? /ba:rmı?/) or the
absence or non-existence (e K M tı? /yo:kmı?/) of something, but often as a negative
response to any question.

- On eüneıtifspMH? - E k, eK, on eüneHeHOK. (G)

/'O l öylönya:rmi?" "Yo:k, yo:k, ol öylönöno:k."/
'İs he getting married?" "No, no, he isn’t getting manied."

On 3KHHM3JIH a p a ra tı ropan Hepçe, on ep m yümyn srran 3aT 6apnup 6İİijjyk,

3MMa 6apı,tn repceK on epfle xhh 3aT eK 3KeH. (G)
/Ol ekini eli yaraglı go:ra:p yö:r0ö, ol yerde ü:süp yatan 5a:t ba:rdır öytdük,
emma; banp görOök ol yerde hi:£ 8a:t yo:k eken./
As he was guarding the crop vvith vveapon in hand, vve thought there had to be
piles of things there, but when vve vvent to see, it tums out there’s nothing there at
ali.

IHy epfle apacca cy B eKflyn.mı.1 ÖHneMOKfltiM. (Tl 7.3)

/Su yerde ara60a 0uw yo:kdugunı bilemo:kdum./
I didn’t knovv that there isn’t any clean water here.

Xs3np ceHTa6pı. aMw SonaHcou, aa, eK , OKTSöpt afltı 6onaHcon narra übitiim h
M6BM ajınp. (TV7.3) /Hâ:8ir Oentyabr a:yı bolon0oıj, aa, yo:k oktyabr a :y ı.
bolon0oıj pagta yıgımı möw£ alya:r./
Now, because it’s the month of September, uh, n o - because it’s the month of
October, the cotton harvest is in high gear.
Onap «paflHaTopMH MaT am>ırmı>ıp» fliıMapnep. «''laT anaH 6onca roBy-fla,
SeHçepaiİHH» flHÖflHM. Onap «paflHaTop eK» flHÖflHJiep. (TV17.2)
/Olor "radiatoruıj £at a£ıpdır" diyya:rler. "Ğat a£an bol0o gowu-da:, bejera:yiq"
diydim. Olor "radiator yo:k" diydiler./
They say 'T onr radiator’s cracked." I said "Fine, so it’s cracked. What about Fıxing
it?" They said "No radiators."
 Modal Words 383

Turkmen uses the word eK /yo:k/ 'there is/are not' in several constructions to
express 'not to have' (Bap /ba:r/; see 110).

(Pronoun+)Noun+Possessive+ex: Pronoım+Locative+Noun+eK

(Meıcnö iarran+biM eK. Men+fle KMTan eK.

/(Meniıj) kita:p+ım yo:k./ /Men+de kita:p yo:k./
(my) book+my there is not me+on book there is not
I don’t have a book. I don’t have a book.

The most common means of indicating non-possession of something is through a

noun ending in a possessive suffix (+ mm / hm /+un/im/, ete.; see 107) foIlowed by c k
'there is/are not', and optionally preceded by a personal pronoun in the genitive case
(MeHHH 'my', ete.; see 187).

Orypapa ar^aMuM eK . (G) /Oturoro yağdayım yo:k./

I have no chance to sit down. ['to be one who sits down']

M eH H H 6 y cy B fla xhji3m eK . By c y B ^ a , HeMe, ceHHH xaK M H eK M U ? (G)

/Menirj bu 6uwdo hi:la:m yo:k. Bu 6uwdo, neme, Öeniıj hakir} yo:kmı?/
I have no share in this water. Do you not have some- what’s the word?- rights
in this water?

A second formation uses the locative case form of a personal pronoun to identify
who does not possess an item.

- CoHaıttDH ’renecJıoH HOMepram a ö f l u n öepcene. Menne eK. (TV 17.4)

/'öonarnırj telefon nomerini aydıp bertene. Menne yo:k.“/
"Would you teli me Sona’s telephone number? I don’t have it."

The third person form of the past indefinite tense marker -flu /-dı/ may be added to
eK /yo:k/ to indicate the non-possession or non-existence of something in the past.

X n ı 3aT eKflbi flHÜaMöaH. Onap H3Me? (G)

/Hi:2 5a:t yo:kdı diyâ:yyâ:ıj. Olor nâ:me?/
You’re saying there was nothing. What are those?

Ö3A ldâ:ll
Turkmen does not have a copula 'am, is, are' (but see 465), so that a simple sentence
may consist only of a subject and a predicate whicb is expressed by a noun, adjective
or other part of speech. The modal word flan /dâ:l/ 'am/is/are not' serves as the
negative predicate of such a simple sentence.
384 Türkmen Reference Grammar

FH3J13II OTypMaran x a * ;a T U eK, erçKH c o b c t fleBpyHflSKH hjm arflas ^ on a m an

renMeK HcneMsu ryMMnep xeM eK nan. (N) /GiSla:p oturmogur) ha:]atı yo:k, öıjkü
0owet döwrünnâ:ki ya:lı yagdaya dolonup gelmek İ01eyâ:n gü:clör hem yo:k dâ:l./
There’s no need to hide that it is not that there are no forces who wish to tum back
to the previous situation as it vvas in the Soviet period.

- EepeKennai-flHİbtn, a#aMCH rtnrtıpBm ntıp. -flırifM eK, ceH onna,

6n3itnKHfle a ın a M a ra H a r a p ıııu nan-fl3.(N) /'Berekella:!" diyip, a:dam0ı
gıgınpdır. "Diymek, 0en onno, ejemii) biSirjkide ya:samagına garsı dâ:l-lâ:.7
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. "That means you really don’t mind my mother
living vvith us?" ['you a r e n o t o p p o s e d t o ']

tîa p tı HyptiMOB yccaTJiapflan eBpeHMeK xmm Barr attun HaJiflHp fliıMıtn

aÜMapnu. (N)
/Ca:n Nu:n:mov u00a:tlardan öwrönmök hi:c wagt ayıp dâ:llir diyip aydya:rdı./
Chan Nurımov was saying that one should never feel ashamed to leam from
masters. [ 'i t is n e v e r a s h a m e ']

The modal word fla.ni /dâ:l/ is used in the construction HMue.-.flajı, 3ÜceM
/diqe...dâ:l, eydem/ 'not only..., but'.

I I I oji pyBpMKafla flHHe EBinaH AH H arypöaH flan, sü ceM oftn a H tm 6 kji İ İ 3H, ö o n y n
re«rö3H BaKajıap öapafla e s roiKiıpıiHH H n-ynyca # y h ih y k iim jp ın fle a flfltm Biu iü s h
aflaM nap m e ik b iiu STflHJiep. (N) /Sol rubrikada d ig e Yowson A :n n a g u rb a :n d â:l,
e y 0 e m o :y lo n u p b ily a :n , b o lu p g e£ ya :n w a :k a la r ba:rada ö:8 p ik ir in i i:l-u lu 0 o
düsnüklü d ille a y d ıp b ily â :n a :d a m lar cıkıS etdiler./
Under that heading, n o t only Yowshan Annagurban, b u t also those persons who
can teli their own views about the events taking place in a language that is
comprehensible to the nation made speeches.
CyB flMue 3KepaH«iLUitnc «an, sftceM ManflapMum ırtı, MiiBemııranı,
öarabiK'itınEirtı ecflypMeK y ^imh xeM repeK. (H) /0uw dirje ekeratncılık dâ:l, ey0em
m a:lla:ıcılıgı, m i:w eciligi, ba:hk£ılıgı ö00ünnök ü£ü:n hem gerek./
Water is necessary for developing not only field agriculture, but also animal
husbandry, horticulture and the fishing industry.

The modal word flan /dâ:l/ may be used with the third person form of the past tense
marker -flH /-dı/.

TaparHM ropKaK aanflM. (G) /Garayagdı gorkok dâ:lli./

Garyagdı was not a coward.
 Modal Words 385

Illeöne uıyM xa6ap Tanan aflaMHHH Wnrpen:*;eK xeM 6o«qynap, sıo ıa Benıı on
xa6ap&ı renıpeH Man caKran flaüxaH ryn3Kap flanflH. (G)
/Şeyle sum habar tapan a:dammı yigrenjek hem bollulor, emma: weli ol ha bin
getiren ca:l 0akgal dayharn giina:kâ:r dâ:lli./
They were just on the point of hating the man who found out such bad news , but
then, this gray-bearded peasant who brought the news was not guilty.

mac Itadl
The word Tac /ta0/ adds a negative shade of meaning to states of mind or to the
performance of actions. It is placed before adverbs or verbs and usually is equiv;ılent to
English 'nearly, almost, hardly'. For example, the verb ruHunflH /gidipdi/ 's/ne left,
s/he’s gone' refers to a completed action, while Tac m nm ınn /ta0 gidipdi/ 's/he nearly
left' refers to an action that was possible but did not come about.

On MHruaıcflaH Tac rjurça ranan 3Ken. (G)

/Ol yıgnakdan ta0 gi:jâ: ga:lan eken./
It tumed out he was rtearly late for the meeting.

Illon ce3nepnn antıpctısifla Ken aflaMnaptın tncöan cytyhhhm KeMana reTMp>K,eK

ap3yBJiaptın 6apm>ın>ntu Tac HflUMbUflan quKapnpuc etiflüsH. (N)
/Sol 0ö51öriii) aqır0ınna köp a:damlarır| ıkba:l Oütüniinü kema:la getirjek
ar8uwlorui] ba:rlıgım ta0 ya:drmıSSan cıkarya:n0 öydyâ:n./
I think we almost forget tlıat behind these words there are a lot of peoples’ dreams
of bringing to perfection the column of fate.
386 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Confirmation
Turkmen expresses confirmation that a statement is true with the modal words a tı p n
/a:hın/ 'after ali, but' and B e jm (H ) /weli(n)/ 'nonetheless, but', and that a situation
vvhich one doubted or did not expect is true with 3Keıı /eken/ 'it tums out that'.

axupu(H) la:hırı(:n)/
The vvord a x u p u /arhırı/ (variants: a u p u n /a:hm:n/), auptiM /a:hm:m/) 'after ali,
but' is placed at the end of a sentence when the speaker confirms that something is
true.
- CeH 6H3HH HHCTHTyrtiMBntm mu aKTOB MinrapjıepHHHH ÖHpH axwpbi. (G)
rOen biSirj in0titutumu8uj} ig aktiw i:5gâ:rlerinig bi:ri a:hm .7
'T o u ’re one o f the most aetivist workers o f our üıstitute, after ali,"

MeH aÜTflMM axwpw. (G) /M en aytdun a:hın./

I told you so.

M e n e aflaMopvıırmreM r e p e K BenHH, h i ii 3TMereM repeK a x u p b iH . (N )

/Yö:nö a:damkâ:rciligem gerek welin, i:s etmegem gerek a:hın:n./
While humanism is necessary, it is also necessary to work, after ali.

eeAUH lwelinl
The vvord BejiHH /welin/ (variant: Be/iH /weli/) 'stili' is placed after the word whose
truth it confirms.
OKyBMHfcra eenuH my ry H tobm renUM. (G)
/OkuwuquS welin su:n gowı gecdi./
Stili, your elass was fine today. ['passed well']

Xa, my epnep B e n im Tytic t o io h 6aKap ana ep 3Ken. (G)

/Hâ:, su yerler welin tü:0 goyun bakar ya:h yer eken./
Yeah, these places stili seem to be the right places to pasture sheep.

3kch lekeni
The modal vvord 3kgh lekeni is placed after the predicate of a simple sentence to
express the speaker’s confirmation, based on revealed facts, that something is true.
Usually, it can be translated 'it tums/tumed out that', 'I found out that', 'it seems
that', 's/he seems to be', 'really', and so on.
3MMa OHyn 0MpH rtıcra 3Ken. (N) /Emma: onui) ömrü gı:0ga eken./
But his life turned out to be shoıt.
 Modal Words 387

On Men flypMyıua Htacammh Ghuchok 3Ken. (O)

/Ol mei) durmuSo çıkanımı bileno:k eken./
I t tum ed out he didn’t know I’d götten married.

The word 3 K eH /eken/ may take possessive endings as those of nouns, or personal
endings as those of the past indefinite tense. The rwo sets of endings are
interchangeable, and the use of one or the other a matter of personal preference.

Singular Plural

Possessive Personal Possessive Personal

1 SKeHHM 3KeHHM 3KeHHMM3 3KEHHK

/ekenim/ /eknim j /ekenimiS/ /ekenik/
2 3KeHHH 3Kemm SKeHHHJD 3KeHMHJ13
/ekeniıj/ /ekenii}/ /ekeniıjiS/ /ekeniıjiS/
3 SKeHH 3KeH 3KeHM 3KCHJiep
/ekeni/ /eken/ /ekeni/ /ekenler/

CeH T yJfc repemH ÜJfruT 3KeHHH. (G) /0en tü:0 gerekli yiğit ekeni]]./
You seem to b e exactly the young man we need.

Mapajı, ceH A M a m j, florpynaH aM m ı n üypeKfleH c & M s h 3 K e n u i{ . (G )

/Maral, 0en Ama:m, dogrudonom Sın yiirökdön 0öyya:n ekenirj./
Maral, it seems that you really love Aman with ali your heart.

Oıman ra f tın ryTyntm ömraçeK flan skchhm . (N)

/Onnon ga£ıp gutulup biljek da:l ekenim./
It turned out I couldn’t escape him by running away.

TypKMeHMCTaHfla en-ennep raranaptı epan smııca, xaTfla oh flepr-OH Sauı

smiJiapMHflaKa flypMyıua WKapmı S K e ıtn e p . (TV16.1)
/Türkmönü00a:nna örj-örjlör gı:Slan öra:n ya:ska:, hatda: on dö:rt-on bâ:s
ya:slannnaka: durmuso cıkaryam ekenler./
İn the past in Türkmenistan, they would marry off girls while very young,
apparently even while they were fourteen- or fifteen-years old.

A negative conclusion may be foımed by placing aM /dâ:l/ 'is/are not' in front of

3KeH /eken/. In this case, the speaker concludes that the negative is true, not that it is
not true.

MeHHH coBanHM epcıra »an 3K6h-ob. (G> /Meniıj 0owa:lım yeıÖiS da:l eken-o:w./
It turns out my question wasn’t groundless, hey?
388 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Certainty
To express certainty that a statement is true, the words 3Ji6eTfle /elbetde/ 'certainly'
and xeKMaH /hökma:n/ 'definitely', both Arabic in orgin, may be used.

SAÖemde /elbetdel, xokmcih lhökm a:nl

The words 3jı6eTfle /elbetde/ 'certainly, of course' and xokm3H /hökma:n/ 'definitely,
mandatory, for sure' attach certainty to the whole sentence.

EeÜTMeK, 3JifieT«e, enim Hm flau. (G) /Beytmek, elbetde, yerjil i:s da:l./
Doing this certainly is not an easy thing.

O ji fiıınrr MeHM ceeH 6onca, xokmsh T a n a p . (G)

/Ol yiğit meni 0öyön bol0o, hökmaın tapar./
If that young man loves me, he’ll definitely fînd me. ['if he loved me']

Eojıap, c a r 6ojıyi(. XoKMan Toıonu3a Gapapbin. (N)

/Bolya:r, 0ag bolurj. Hökmatn toyuıju6o barann./
Okay, goodbye. I ’ll definitely come to your wedding.

MyMKHHraflap, ııaraHtı 03 SHecHHMH 3MflwpMern xeKMaHfltıp. tJyHKH, Hara y u m

3He cyMflH süiti uıeüne sonıtı Hspce 6onMa3. (N)
/Mümkü:ngadar, ca:ga:nı ö:8 eneSinir) emdirmeği hökma:nnır. Ğünkü, ca:ga ücü:n
ene 0ü:dü ya:lı Şeyle vagsı nâ:r0e bolmoS./
As far as possible, the breast-feeding of a child by its own mother is m andatory.
Because, there can be nothing so good for a child as mother’s milk.

repeK. M hhm m y 3ax raîİT ajıaH M a3 hjiei u i o h h m sü M e n u .

A h t h ö h o t o k X0KMeH
(TV17.3)
/Antibiotik hökma:n gerek. İnni su 5a:t gaytalanmaS ya:h som ica:ymeli./
You definitely need antibiotics. Now you should take them so that this thing
won’t come back.
 Modal Words 389

Supposidon
Türkmen may use various words of Persian or Arabic origin (GejiKH /belki/ 'perhaps,
maybe', m y m k h h /jnümkü:n/ 'maybe, possibly', 3 X T im a n /ahtimatl/ 'probably',
M erep eM /megerem/ 'maybe, perhaps'), or Türkmen words (HeMejiH /cemeli/ 'likely',
r e p e K /gerek/ '(it is) necessary', eÜ TM eK /öytmök/ 'to think') to express a supposition
that a state of being or action is true, although confîrming evidence is lacking.

6eAK.it Ibelkil, mymkuh lm üm kü:nl

The word GejiKH /belki/ 'perhaps, maybe' is placed at the beginning of a sentence and
the word mymkhh /mümküın/ 'maybe, possibly' at the end of a sentence to exptess an
assumption or belief that the statement is true.

EejiKH, XaiiHa3ap flyıı o m u y' hih ce3 aÜTMara reneH flup. (G)
/Belki, Ha:lnaSar dul ogh ücü:n 0ö5 aytma:ga gelennir./
Maybe, Halnazar has come to speak on behalf of his son, the widower.

III ohh 6esm 3Tcen, 6ejiKH, onapaM aKUUBiHa aftnaHap. (N)

/Som beya:n e00ei), belki, olorom akılına aylanar./
If you explain it, p erh ap s they too will come to their senses.

Sup cett 6MJien ce3JieHiMentM-fle m y m k h h . (G)

/Bir 0Ö8 bilen 0ö51ösmögüm-dö mümkü:n./
Maybe I’U say a few words.

axmuMOA lahtima:U, MezepeM imegereml

The modal words axTHMan /ahtima:l/ 'probably' and M erep e M /megerem/ (variants:
M erep /meğer/, M e rp /megr/) 'maybe, perhaps' function to express belief that a state of
being or action is true, but are placed at the end of a phrase or sentence.

5I3HH aflaM, M erepeM , reT ep nM 6onaH jp.ıp. © B yH ^ en 6onsnm bip. Ap3yBHMJi

6ojı«HflMp. (N) /Ya8ya:n a:dam, megerem, götöriim bolya:nnır. Öwünjöıj
bolya:nnır. Ar8uw£ul bolya:nnır./
A person who writes, p e r h a p s , probably is easily flattered. He’s probably
boastful. He’s probably fuil of fantasies.

Ain.i-Tynam.in cohh 1991-w&p atuiflaKM an tt xen3KwıHKJUı xaflucajıap

ryTapMarbt axTHMan. (TV11.2) /A:pı-tupa:nuıj Ooıjı 1991-nji yılla:kı ya:h
helâ:k£ilikli ha:dı:0alar bilen gutomıogı ahtima:!.
It’s probable that the results of the hurricane will end with disastrous even:; like
those in 1991.
390 Türkmen Reference Grammar

HeMeAu t cemeli!
The word MCMeıiH /cemeli/ 'likely, apparently' is used in constructions with the
infinitive in the dative case form (-Mara/Mare /-ma:ga/mâ:ge/) or with the future
indefinite participle -ap/ep /-ar/er/ to express the likelihood or probability of an action.

By epne fliıne 6np KamrraH 6ap 3KeH, on 6onca, Mana rapamtm nypaH (kumara
«leMejîM. (G) /Bu yerde dirje bir kapitan ba:r eken, ol bolflo, mağa garasıp duron
bolmatga cemeli./
There happens to be only one captain here, and likely he’s waiting for me.

zepeK!gerek!
The vvord r e p e K /gerek/ '(it is) necessary' (see 307) may be used as a modal word to
express supposition about the occurrence of an action. It is placed at the end of a
sentence, usually after a verb in the past tense. Occasionally, the supposition takes the
form of a question.

HsTflHU, MeHHn attflaHbtM renHH r e p e K . (G) /Nâ:tdirj, meniıj aydanun gelli gerek./
You see, what I said must h a v e happened.

Onap pa3M Gojiflyuap re p e K ? (G) /Olor ta:8ı bollulor gerek?/

They must h a v e been pleased?

OrnyM, aMaHafltın 3JiHne roByıunu r e p e K . (G)

/Oğlum, amanadır; eliğe gowusdt gerek./
My son, your wish m ust have been fulfilled.

eümMeK löytmökl
Conjugated forms of the verb oÜ TM eK /öytmök/ 'to think' express supposition about
an action or state.

Ch3 onap H3XWiH 6axa anaHflbip eMnttsıv»? (G)

/0i8 olor nâ:hili baha alannır öydyâ:ıjiS?/
What marks do you think they must have got?

IHon ce3nepnn antıpctnm a k o t a^aMnaptın tncöan cytyhhhh KeMana rerop^eK

ap3yunapMH 6apjıttn.tHbt Tac aflttMbi3flaH MHKapapttc eiigfon. (N)
/Sol 0ö81örüi] ai]ir€mna köp a:damlanrj ıkba:l Bütününü kemada getirjek
aröuvvlorurj ba:rhgını ta© ya:dun>88an cıkarya:n0 öydyâ:n./
I think we almost forget that behind these words there are a lot of peoples’ dreams
of bringing to perfection the column of fate.
 Modal Words 391

Motivation
As a form o f motivation or prompting, the words epu /yeri/ 'well?, come on', x am ı
/hanı/ V eli' and ÖaKajjM /baka:lı/ 'well' may preface a sentence.

epu lyeril, x û h h Ihanıl

The words epw /yeri/ V eli?, come on' and x a u u /hanı/ V eli' are used with the
intention of motivating the person addressed to do something or to prompt another
action. They are placed at the beginning of a sentence and followed by an intonational
pause. In some cases, epH-epn /yeri-yeri/ may act as a negative objection.

Epw, xaB , A pT fciK , ceH HSMe flypcyn? (G) /Yeri, ha:w, Artık, 0en nâ:me duröui]?/
Well, hey, Artık, what are you standing here for?
Epu, SneKy™, H3Me xa6aptn(H3 Sap. (G) /Yeri, Enekütü, nâm e habarujıS ba:r./
Well? Eneküti, what news do you have?
- C eHÖH3MH MHcnnyTBiMH3bin hh aKTUB HiıırspnepHHMH 6wpM axHpw.
- EpH-ep». (G)
/'Ben biSir) İn0titutumu5uq irj aktiw i:sga:rlerinii) bi:ri a:hın." "Yeri-yeri."/
'You’re one of the most activist workers of our institute, you know."
"Oh, come on."
XaHbi, 6esoı 3Tcen, th3 6on. (G) /Hanı, beya:n e00erj, ti:8 bol./
Come on, if you’re going to explain, be quick about it.
«XaHbi, r e p e ım , cb ra ara n ıiH n rep ce M , 6 h p 3aT Mtncca, a m m a renepHH»
(N) /"Ham görölü, 0ı:namsıp gör0öm, bir 8a:t cık0a, yamıga gelerin" diydi./
He said "Well, vve’ll see. When I give it a try, if anything happens, I ’ll come to
you."

6aKOAu(n) lbaka:lı(:n)/
The modal word G a K a ııu /baka:h/ (variant before words beginning with a consonant:
CaKajıuH /baka:lı:n/) literally means 'let’s have a look', but is used as the equivalent
of V eli'. It is placed after a verb in the infotmal imperative form.

Uly B arT oSana 6wp ce p e T S a K a ü b i. (G) /Su vvagt o :b a :g a bir Beret baka:lı./
Well, now, let’s take a look at your village.
A ü t G aKajiLiH c e H , n y p n y a ç t n c , n e n e n o s y B a re ım M H ? ( G )
/Ayt baka:lı:n Ben, Durdujuk, neneıj okuwo gelliıj?/
Well, you, little Durdı, teli me, how did it happen you came to school?
392 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Intensification
To emphasize or intensify an item or statement, Türkmen use the words x a c /ha:6/
'very, most', x a c - n a /ha:0-0a/ 'even more', x a T j r a /hatda:/ 'even', 3 « h j i /edil/ 'just,
exactly', T y ö c /tü:0/ 'exactly', p a c /ra:0/ 'just, exactly', x a K U T /hakı:t/ 'just, exactly',
H M aH /yaman/ 'really very, too', a c t u ı /a0ıl/ 'just, simply, generally', s c a c a n
/e0a:0a:n/ 'basically' and xepH3 /hemâ:/ 'good that, great that', informal imperative
forms of various verbs (6ap /bar/ 'go', ete.), and the construction T3...+«ıa/n3
/tâ:...+ca:/câ:/ '(to perform an action right) up to'.

xac /ha:dl, xac-da lha:B-6al, xamda Ihatda.i

The words x a c /ha:0/ 'very, too, most' (see 149), x a c - g a /ha:0-0a/ 'even more' and
x a T fla /hatda:/ 'even' are placed before adjectives, adverbs or verbs to form intensifîed
or superladve degrees of the qualities expressed by those words.

K eM nyn bi hhhhkm reneM fle, xac K enpsK reTMpepMH. (G) [reneM fle < renenMMfle]
/ K e m p u :d ı in n ik i g e le m d e , ha:0 k ö p ra :k getirerin ./ [ge le m d e < gele n im d e ]
When I come next time I’ll bring a whole lot more candy.

A M aıuiH h 3 x h jih ü e p a m m u , H3XHJiH e e reneHHHH, h s x h iih OTypbm-TypaHHHH,

HaxMJDf vM a-m & aam , xaTfla sm aHtm tı, fltu m anan uH tı-fla ÖHJiMeflit. (G)
/Ama:nh nâ:hili yörâ:nini, nâ:hili öyö gelenini, nâ:hili oturup-turonum, nâ:hili
iyip-icenini, hatda: yadanmı, dı:nc alanını-da bilmedi./
Amanlı didn’t know how he went about, how he got to his house, how he sat
down and got up, how he ate and drank, or even vvhether he was tired or rested.

AiîflLmiJiapHHa, n aflT a m jM tıan a K H rypjıan -y-ryp yjiH H MiiXMaHxaHarıapbin a ra tı,

ııi3 x ep H Kactm ua fla m a p tı lo p r a y n a p tm HiuuetiaH epnepH re n ö a u iH öon ap a x a c - jja
HKHHMMlll. (N)
/Aydıslanna, pa:ytagümı88a:kı gurlon-u-gurulya:n ım:hma:nha:nalanr) agSı, saher
yakaOınna dasan yu:rtlulorui) i:sleyâ:n yerleri gepbası boloro ha:0-0a yakı:nmıs./
According to talk, the entrances of the hotels built or being built in our capital,
and the places where the foreigners vvork on the outskirts of the city, apparently are
even closer to being the main topic of conversation.

TYpKMeıuıcTaHfla en-erçnep ru a n a p u epaıı smuca, x a T fla oh aepr-OH 691u

smraapBiHflaKa flypMyma mjKapan aıceHJiep. (TV16.1)
/Türkmönü00a:nna öjg-örjlör gı:51an örâ:n ya:ska:, hatda: on dö:rt-on ba:s
ya:slannnaka: durmuso cıkaryam ekenler./
In the past in Türkmenistan, they would marry off girls while very young,
apparently even while they were fourteen- or fifteen-years old.
 Modal Words 393

adım /edil/, myüc lıü:6I, pac lra:dl, xam m lhakı:ıl

The modal words 3flH.ii /edil/ 'just, exactly', TyMc /tü:0/ 'exactly', pac /ra:6/ 'just' and
xaKbiT /haki:t/ 'just, exactly' are placed before the vvord vvhich they stren|;:hen or
intensify.

AHHaryjiLi ihoji Barrnap 3jjnjı oh ceKM3 amnapiumaflbi. (G)

/A:nnagulı sol wagtlar edil on 0eki8 ya:slannnadı./
At that time Annagulı was ju s t about eighteen-years old.

3flH.il iiioji B aırtm e3yıwe hkhh 6np epfleH xyMypflH suumunUsH o n u 6o.iflbi.
(G) /Edil sol wagtıi) ö:8iinnö yakım bir yerden hümürdü esidilyâ:n ya:lı bollı./
Just at that moment, whispering seemed to be heard somewhere nearby.

blHxa 6 h3 X33«p "-îap^eB ıuaxepHHifn ajytjı rtıpacbiHfla epneıuflaıı

‘TYpKMeHHCTaH” kojixo3mhmh MeftflaHbnma. (TV7.2) /inha: bi8 ha:8ir Ğa:rj;w
saherinii) edil gıra0ınna yerlesya:n 'Türkmönii00a:n" kolhoSunurj meydamııına./
Here we are now on a field of the Türkmenistan Collective Farm located ju st on
the outskirts of the city of Charjew.

CeH Tytfc repejcmı Uunır aKemm. (G) /0en tü:0 gerekli yiğit ekenii]./
It seems you’re exactly the young man we need,

Xa3np xoBJiyKMan, pac ajucbiMnan rencHH. (G)

/Hâ:8ir howIukma:rj, ra:0 alkımla:p gel0in./
Now, don’t rush it, just let him come a little closer.
XaKMT MyHflan öapflMM, rii3HHbi repflyM. (G )
/Hakı:t munnon bardım, gı:8ım gördüm./
The minute I got there, I saw her daughter.

jLuaH /yaman/
The adverb hmsh /yaman/ 'really very, too' is used to intensify the degree of a .juality
or action. The adverbs opan /örâ:n/ 'very, quite', ü^yna /Juda:/ 'too, quite' and .ınnan
/iıjrjâm/ 'very, too' also are used before adjectives to intensify their meaning (set: 150).

By n o çe «Man raTbi raMapcbin-na, MyHyH ceöaöM usmc? (G)

/Bu gi:je yaman gatı gacya:r0ıi)-la, munug 0ebâ:bi nâ:me?/
Aah, you’re running off really too soon this evening, why is this?

CepeT, my rbi3bin ıceflueK sıvıan oBaflaH, üeHe rbiMMaTMMKa fliıüiıau. (TV5 .4)
/0eret, su gıSıl köynök yaman owodon, yö:nö gımmatmıka: diyyâ:n./
Look, this red dress is really pretty, but I wonder wlıether it’s expensive?
394 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

acwı laOül, acacan Ie6a:6a:nl, xepm Ihernâ.i

The words a c u n /aöıl/ (variant: a c j ı a /a01a:/) 'just, simply, generally', 3 c a c a n
/e0a:0a:n/ 'basically' and x e p n a /hemâ:/ 'good that, great that' may be used modally to
underline the meaning of a sentence.

3cep flHÜHn HfcipmaH 3aTiıapbiM xhh 3aflMH arattiHHaH flan-ne, x m 3aT flsn-ne
acun flHÖtepHH. (N) /E0er diyip cırsan Sa:tlanm hi:c 5a:dıq alnuınan dâ:l-le, hi:c
6a:t da:l-le a9ıl diyyâ:rin./
I’m saying that things I scribbled and called literary works really are not worth
anything, really they’re simply nothing.
MarrbtMrynbi-IIbtparbi scacaııaM ıuy X33MpKH TypKMeH fliınıtHe snctm nmme 03
romrynapbiHH asap. (TV10.1) /Magtımguh-Pıra:gı e0a:0a:nam su ha:8irki
türkmön diline yakı:n dille ö:8 goigulorum ya8ya:r./
Magtımguh-Pıragı basically writes his poems in a language elose to this modem
Türkmen language.
Xepna HKHMH3HH xhm epnMM3e xjw 3aT 6ojiMaımtıp. (G)
/Hemâ: iki:mi8ir) hi:£ yerimiSe hi:£ 8a:t bolma:nnır./
It’s great that nothing has happened to either one of us.

Sap Ibar/, zeA Igell, zoü Igoyl, zep Igörl, üep lyörl
The informal imperative forms of the verbs 6 a p M a K /batmak/ 'go', re jiM e K /gelmek/
'come', r o iİ M a K /goymok/ 'leave, put', r e p M e K /görmök/ 'see, look', and JiopıvıeK
/yörmök/ 'walk, go' serve to intensify or underline thoughts expressed in a sentence. A
wide range of English equivalents is possible: 'look here, come on, c’mon, leave it, go
on, go ahead', ete.
2 K ,an ^M - ceH cttpıcaB, OKan 6wnMepcHH, 6 a p noKTopa n rr. (G)
/îarçcı - 0en 0ırkaw, oka:p bileröirj, bar doktoro git./
Jangchı, you’re sick and you won’t be able to study. Go on, go to the doctor.
oıyrı, caıaıc Gauibtnflan O T y p ! (BG) /Gel, oğul, öa£ak basınnan otur!/
T en,
Come, son, sit at the head of the dining eloth!
Mywa aÜT, roü Sup-HKH xen m u n öepcHH. (G)
/Mur)o ayt, goy bir-iki heq £ahp ber0in./
Teli him, why doesn’t he play a few tunes for us.
By Barrnap Y3yK a r t ı p o M -n ra a ıp n e p m r a i f l e , eaıutnmaH r e p HSMenep r e ı n t n
reMÜspflH. (G)
/Bu wagtlar USuk ağır o:y-pildrler iîinne, basınnan gör nâm eler gelip gecyâ:rdi./
At that time Uzuk was deep in her thoughts, who knows what vvas going through
her head.
 Moda] Words 395

m 3...+ H aİH 3 llâ : ...+ c a : /c â : l

The word T a /tâ:/ '(right up) to, (right) up to' may be placed before a verb ending in the
present participle suffix -hh/İİ3h /-ya:n/yâ:n/ plus the suffix +Wm3 /+ca:/câ:/ (see 504)
and before words or phrases followed by the postpositions MeniiH /Senli/ 'as far as, to,
up to, until' or rojıaü /goloy/ 'about, near, around' (see 417, 420). Such constructions
indicate that an action is perfonned up to the point that another action or state occurs.

B a p flM -re n flM « k b i h e p n e p H H f le n c o B y n r a , en T a ra b u iM a c a , o n a p T a ınettne e p raöaT

renösHia tonaptraa rm uenn. (G) /Bardı-gelli yakı;n yerlerinsen 0owulgo, y o : l
t a p ı h n a ö a , o l o r ta : ş e y l e y e r g a b a t g e l y a : n c a : r.Slanna g i t m e l i . /
In case a road that tums away from the land hereabouts is not found, they will
have to retrace until they come upon such a place.

CyxaH raTbi B em ııp aT 6aMu aTapfltı. O hh yrpaflaH k m i u h 6onyn, T a o ö a f la H

ranflannan rırrflH. (G) /6u:ha:n gatı Bekmıra:t ba:yj atardı. Onı ugrodon
kişi bolup, ta: o:bodon cıkya:nca:, gapdalla:p gitdi./
Suhan-gatı set Bekmırat-bay on his way. Pretending to see him off, he
accompanied him until he was leaving the village.

9p-xeneö h k h m s k o T y p b m , T a flan a T jn m a HÜfliuıep. (G)

/Â:r-heley ikica:k oturup, tâ: daıj atya:nca: iydiler./
The husband and the wife sat, just the two of them, and ate right up until dawn.
396 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Limitation
To express a limitation on the extent of an action, Turkmen uses the vvords p(nne /diıje/
'only, as possible', xyT /hut/ 'only, just, that very', 6 epuH /berin/ 'just, at least, only'
and biJiaÖTa-na /ıla:yta-da/ 'especially', as well as various adjectives, adverbs and
other parts of speech

dutfe Idigel, xym Ihutl, 6epu Iberil, tuıaüma-da lıla:yta-dal

The vvords a n n e /dige/ 'only, as possible', xyT /hut/ 'only, just, that very', öepHH
/berin/ (variant: 6 epıı /beri/) 'just, at least, only' and LinaÜTa-fla /ıla:y ta-d a/
'especially' are placed before nouns to single them out or limit their reference.

XyT rnoHyu y 'n n teM xeft-fle OHyn cHitcaTMHa t o b h rapaMaH, o h h m u S ıu ıe ii

roıiflaM aır CojıapM tı? (N ) /Hut sonur) ü cü :n ö m h e y -d e onurj 0 ıya:0 atın a g o w ı
garam a:n , o m i:s b ile n g o llo m a :n b olorm ı?/
And exactly because of that, is it possible not to like his policy, not to support it
vvith (one’s) vvork?

Kot»hmh yrpyufla 6epw aüfltiM aMflbm öapMacana. (G)

/Köcâ:nii) ugrunno beri aydım aydıp barmaOana./
Only vvould y o u p le a se n ot g o sin g in g a lo n g the Street.

O ji HHne 6aXMMpaıc 06a e T M s r e xoBJiyrHpfli>ı. (BH)

/Ol diıje bahımra:k o:ba: yetmâ:ge howlugya:rdı./
He vvas rushing to get to the village as soon as possible.

The vvords Tyıcejı /tüköl/ 'complete(ly)', 6np /bir/ 'one, at least', eKe(^e) /yeke0e)/
'single, just one', hjihus /yalrjıS/ 'only, sole' and 6 a p u - e r u /ba:rı-yo:gt/ 'only,
merely' also serve to delimit or distinguish a person or thing.

ToficaH a, rti 3 , Maütmtı 6 «p jpıcH H -jıe. (G) /Goy0ono, gı:S, c a :y ın ı bir ic0in-le./
Leave him be, girl, and at least let him have his tea, ali right?

XaK:*,ara3LinM e n e ^ e ryH r m T e n e ce n TejıecjjoHMUH Kecat,eK flMÜMn, flu 3 au n .m

aypnap. (TV17.2)
/HakjagaSıgı yekeje gün gi:c tölöOörj telefonuıjı keOjek diyip, dıSasıp du:rlor./
I f y o u p a y y o u r b ili ju s t o n e d a y late, th e y k e e p a fte r y o u sa y in g th e y ’ ll cu t o f f
y o u r teleph on e.

B a r n n .ı öojiM aK y h h h aflaMa 6apı,ı-eru y i cama 3aT repeKMMiu. (N)

/Bagtlı bolmok ücü:n a:dama ba:n-yo:gı üc 0a:nı 8a:t gerekmiş./
They say that a person needs only three things to be happy.
 Modal Words 397

Generalization
To summarize or generalize a whole, Türkmen uses the words yMyMaH /umu:mon/ 'in
general, generally', rapa3 /gara8/ 'in short', a r a u /yagnı/ 'that is, in other words' and
HH Ü M eK /diymek/ 'that means', and the expressions rn o H y n y m ı n /sonu i; iicü:n/
'that’s why, therefore' and m e ftjıe JiH K fle /seylelikde/, m e ftjıe jiH K 6 n j ı e n /seylelik
bilen/, HeTH*,ene /neti:jede/ and raoHyn HeTiım,ecHH(ie /sonuıj neti:je0inn;/, ali of
which mean 'as a result (of), so, consequently'.

yMyMaH tumu.'monl
The modal word yMyMaH /umuımon/ 'in general, generally' is placed at the beginning
of a sentence or phrase to express generalization.
MeH oönacTa, pafioHa, yMyMaH H6epeH epHHH3e rcrrMsre pa3bi. (G)
/Men oblo99o, rayono, umu:mon i-.beren yerirjiSe gitmâtge ra:8ı./
I agree to go to the oblast, the rayon, generally, vvherever you send me.

yMyMaH, flen-flymnaptiMLin apacLnma nrrapafla ca3 <ıaju>ın öepepflHM, k î

Ba rra a p x nanemin öepepflitM. (N) /Umu:mon, derj-duslorumui] a:ra0ınna gitarada
0a:5 £alıp bererdim , ka: vvagtlar hiıjlenip bererdim ./
Generally, I used to play guitar among people my own age and sometime:; I
would sing in a lovv voice.

YMyMaH, T YpKMCHMCTaHLiH MyHflaa 6aıura-aa xeM 6 h3MH TantnuıaptiMtıa opTa

OKyB jK,aünapu ryTapaH oKyBWJiap e3JiepıiHHH Gmnmnepmm apTfliipMaı; ytoh
TypKHefle oKaapnap. (TV9.5) /Umu:mon, Türkmönü0Ba:mi) munnon basj .ı-da
hem biSii] ta:h:planmı5 orto okuvv ]a:ylan gutoron okuvvculor ö:Slöriinür)
bilimlerini andırmak ücir.n Türküyödö okoya:rlar./
Generally, besides this, Turkmenistan’s (and) our students, the pupils wlıo finish
secondary educational establishments, study in Turkey in order to increase their
knovvledge.

zapa3 /garaSI
The modal vvord rapaa /garaS/ 'in short, in brief, anyvvay, on the vvhole, ali tlıe same,
somehovv' expresses summary of a vvhole.

Tapa3, aTaciiHM eKMpepe 6axaHa TanflwpMaa;aK 6oırap#kiM. (N)

/GaraS, ataOrnı yekirere bahana tapdumajak bolya:rdun./
In short, I vvas trying not to let him find an excuse to torment his grandff.ıher.

Tapa3, flepn» enoc. (N) /GaraS, derdi yetik./

In short, he has enough problems.
398 Türkmen Reference Grammar

- T a p a 3 , xep afltru, a^aMttif ajjMHtmaM, maxepnn ajjLrnbiHaM 6np Tapttxii

6ap-fla. (TV8.1)
/"GaraS, her a:dıi), a:damır) a:dınır]am, saherir) a:duni)am birta:n:hı ba:r-da:."/
'İn short, every name, both a person's name, and a city’s name, has some
history."

Ohcoh uıoHfla, r a p a a , ııi3xepfle 6oncarç uıyHyH ajıtraçaK »tepetc KapTOMKa 6epflbp -

öepepflMJiep. (TV13.3) /OnOog sonno, garaS, saherde bol0or) sunur] ya:lıjak cörök
kartocko beryârr - bererdiler./
And then, a n y w a y , if you were in the city, they give bread ration cards about this
size- they used to give them.

RZHu lyagnıl, duüMeıc Idiymek/

The words « rn u /yagnı/ 'that is, in other words' and nnftıvıeK /diymek/ 'that means'
(= 'to say') are used to qualify a statement as a generalization.

IH o ji KOMneHcamiMHMH 200 MaHafla Menim rrynyHH 6wp6afla TeneHM m ıeıriı 3flHJieıt

S o n ca, uıoHflan a p u iK nyn yH H 3 fi tu m a n co n , arntı 1 9 9 4 - h ^ h ita u ıtın 1 -h *;h
pyrcaT 3flnn#n. (N )
MapTttHflan Saııuıan a jiM a ıaiiira (ynaH M ajcm ıra)
/Sol kompenOaOiyamrj 200 manada cenli pulum birba:da tölönülmölü edilen
bol0o, sonnon artık pulum 3 yıllan 0oq, yagnı 1994-njü yılııj 1-nji martmnan
baSla:p almaklığa (ulonmoklugo) rug0ot edilli./
Although it was established that one could be paid at once an amount up to 200
manats of the compensation, it was stipulated that one could receive (use) the
excess money beginning after 3 years, t h a t is, beginning March 1,1994.

TYpKMeHMCTanttH TeppırropflctiHtın eTMMin npoıteHTH HsreıiHKHeH, «rntı

TaparyM MojınyınnfleH tıöapaT. (TV8.5) /Türkmönü00a:mi) territoriyaOınu) yetmiş
pro0enti câ:gelikden, yagnı Garagum îöllügiinnön ıba:ıat./
Seventy percent of Turkmenistan’s territory consists of sand, that is, of the
Garagum desert.

Benaniin Mauıranacfct Haxapa, srnbi hMmhtc rMpnex,HHMH sıpiicbiHtı xapax^aT

3flÖ3HHHp. (TV16.3)
/Wepa:nıi) masgalaöı nahara, yagnı iymite gi:rdejinii) yaarıOını haraja:t edyâ:nnir./
Wepa’s wife probably spends half of the income on meals, in other words, on
food.

- BepeKenJia!-flHÜnn, aflaMCbt rtrrtrpfcirmbip. - J]nüıvteK, ceH orçua, sjksmhh

ÖM3HHKHfle snıraMartma rapuıtı (N) /"Berekella:!" diyip, a:dam0ı gıgınpdır.
"Diymek, 0en onno, ejemirj bi8ir|kide yarsamagına garsı dâ:l-lâ:."/
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. 'T h a t means you really don’t mind my modıer
living with us?" ['you are not opposed to']
 Modal Words 399

utonyhf yvuu Isonurj ii£ü:nl

The expression ra o H y n Y1,1,11 /Sonur) ücii:n/ 'that's why, therefore' (literally: 'because
of that') is used as a preface to a generalization or conclusion.

UIoHyn yhhh xeM öeiineKU BenasrrnaptiHaM en dauratuıapıiH tın 6y Mecejıene

oÜJiaHMaKnbirtT repeK. (TP12.2) /Sonut) ücü:n hem beyleki wela:yatlanqam
yo:lbascılaraıır) bu me0elede o:ylonmoklugı gerek./
Therefore, it’s necessary for leaders of the other provinces to think about this
issue.

IIIoHyn Y'iHHeM Men 6np fl«Jtx;eK aafltiM, rene^enı TypKMeHHCTaHibin ran>ı

ynnaKaH. (TP12.2) /Sonug ücü:nöm meıj bir diyjek 8a:dım, gelejegi
Türkmönii00a:nıi) gatı ullaka:n./
And t h e r e f o r e , one thing I would like to say, Türkmenistan’s future is very great.

Hloııyn yiimh opa3a tjtsih aflaMnap xeM caraTmırtma xafltıptı 6ap xeM
ArnıaTarajıan 6yftpyn,lHM eprate enıpflMmn. (TV 13.4)
/Sonut] iicü:n ora:Sa tutya:n a:damlar hem ©agatlıgııja hayın ba:r hem Alla:tagala:rj
buyruğum yerine yetirdigii)./
T hat’s why people who fast- it has benefît for your health and also you’ve
fulfilled the will of God-on-hıgh.

lueıuıeAUKde Iseylelikde!
The expressions n ie Jin e jiM K n e /seylelikde/, ıu e B jıe JiH K 6 n n e n /seylelik bilen/,
/neti:jede/ and ı u o n y n n eT H irçecM H fle /sonur) neti:je0inne/ ali have the
H e T H jrç e fle
meaning 'as a result (of), so, consequently'.

fflettJiejiM K H e, aflMHHHCTpaTHBMspe ynaHtınaHHaH con xycycw

KoonepaTHBnepaeH, cjjHpManapnaH Be accouHanusmapnaH fleBJieT 6ıo;*;eTHHe rapeH
nyn cepnumecw 355 Myn MaHaT 6onflfei. (N) /Seylelikde, admini0tıratiw câ:re
ulonulonnon 0oq hu0u0ı kooperadwlerden, firmalardan we a06o0ia0iyalardan
döwlöt bujetine gi:ren pul 0erisde0i 355 nriirj manat bollı./
As a result, after administrative measures were employed, the amount of money
coming into the budget from private cooperatives, fiıms and associations
amounted to 355 thousand manats.

meftneJiHK 6wıen, MeHTeneBHfleHHİİsHH 6npKYi Mbuı jjojim eBpeHeMcon,

e3Ğaui6iMa renneuniK anntrM. (N) [espeneMCorç < enpeHeHHMfleHcon]
/Seylelik bilen, men telewideniyâ:ni birkü6 yıl do:lı övvrönömOojj ö:5basıma
gepleSik a£dım./ [övvrönömSog < öwrönönümdön 0or|]
Consequently, after I leamed ali about television for a couple of years, I had my
own program.
400 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

HeTiiJK,ejıe, 3Tpan öoıoma atifla ceKH3 m m jjjihoh MaHafla öapaöap xaptrr

flonaHHiuuru 3flraıHsp. (TV11.4) /Neti:jede, etra:p boyunco a:yda 0eki8 million
manada barabar h a n :t dolonusugı edilyâ:r./
As a result, each month throughout the district there is a circulation of goods
equivalent to eight million manats. •

n io H y n H 6T H iK ,ecH H ae u i3xepw n r e K c a T S H n ap eK n a p tra tm TeK *,enepH fitın a ıı

sJiaH m u 6 o n y n fly p . (TV14.2) /Sonui) n e ti:je0 in n e saherirj g ö :k 0atya:n
larok lo ru n u ıj te k je le ri yıla tn y a la n y a :h b o lu p du:r./
As a result of that, the shelves of the city’s vegetable shops are as bare as though
a snake licked them elean.
 Modal Words 401

Demonstration
The modal words MHe /ine/ and u n x a /inha:/ "here (it is)' express gesturing ttı persons
or items near the speaker, while a Ha /ana/ and x a H x a /hanha/ 'there (it is)' indicate
gesturing to persons or items more distant from the speaker.

une linel, unxa lınha.i

The vvord HHe /ine/ means 'see, you see' is used in the sense of 'see, here it is', vvhile
u n a /inha:/ usually indicates a gesturing in the sense 'here it is'.

MHe Myna jiHCTOBKa flidiMapnep. (G) /İne muqo li0towko diyyâ:rler./

Here, this is vvhat they cali a leaflet. ['They cali this here a leaflet']

MHe, 6y ryH xeM TypKMeıoıcTaHMH Mepıce3H aS-namma aT ManHMbirbtH

«.aHKeepnepM Ho6aıaaKM aMnasa ütınıaım tm ap. (TV10.4)
/İne, bu:n hem Türkmönü00a:mi) merkeSi aylavvına at capısıgıi) ja:nköyörlörü
no:botda:kı aylavva yıgnannılar./
Here today, horse racing fans have gathered for the next horse race at the Central
racetrack of Türkmenistan.

EflH HiittimnaH Ğanuıan, HHe, MeKflen ftbuuıapbi 6amnaap. O-fla oh ötına ronaii
anap. (TV16.1) /Yedi ya:sınnan basla:p, ine, mekdep, mekdep yıllan baslaya:r.
O-do o:n yıla goloy alya:r./
Beginning from age seven, you see, school years start. And that takes cicise to ten
years. —

H ly xeroH U anam.iHU3flaH conpa Hne Tene4)OHbU( HumeflaHflHTHHM,

MmneMeteHflHTHHM 6apnaManw. (TV17.4) /Su zetom alanırjıSSan 0orjro ine
telefonur) i:sleya:nnigini, i:slem eyâ:nnigini ba:rlam alı./
After you get these tokens, see, you have to check vvhether the telephone is
vvorking or not.

A n j3 , U H x a ropenoKM tı, ryH Huibinflbip. (G)

/A gı:5, inha: görör|o:kmı, gün yasıpdır./
Ah girl, here, don’t you see it, the sun has set.

IIIoji KapTomcaHbBEJ ajibrn, «LlHxa, Men ııunaH epfle HiuaflH. MeH CH3e flenoımH.
IlkmaH epHMeM ariipap» ffn&m 6apbin aflflaflM anu. (TV9.4)
/Sol kartockoguSı alıp, "inha:, men pıla:n yerde ya:saya:n. Men 0i8e degisli. Pıla:n
yerimem a:gırya:r" diyip banp ayda:ymalı./
You should take that card of yours (to the doctor) and go and say "Here, I live in
such-and-such a place. I’m supposed to see you. And my such-and-such a place
hurts."
402 Türkmen Reference Grammar

ana /anal, xanxa Ihanhal

The modal words ana /ana/ 'there it is' and xaHxa /banha/ 'över there it is' render the
sense of gesturing. A rarely encountered word xonxa /ho:lha/ refers to 'way över there
it is'.

- Ana, KaKa, xon ran tın trn araMHfla rapaByn flypaH AHHaryntmtıp, fluflıın, otta
3IIHHH y3aTfltı. (G) /A n a , ka:ka, ho:l gapı:nııj agSınna garawul duron
A:nnaguhıdur," diyip, ogo elini uSotdı./
'T here he is, father, the sentry, standing at that door there, is Annagulı," he said,
gesturing at him.

3rep-fle arçtıpfla aflaM Tpy6ıcaHM anca, ıııy xctoh amaK ntflüap. Ana. Mmm
gonca rypneuiHÖepMenH. (TV17.4) /Eger-de ağırda a:dam tırubka:nı al9a, su zeton
asa:k gidyâ:r. Ana. İnni bol0o gürlösiibermeli./
And if a person on the other end picks up the phone, this token goes down. There
it is. And now you have to go ahead and talk.

XaHxa Hypx;eMan aaçe flaraM mıuıeıımn Mepnep. (G) [flaraM < fla ra xeM]
/Hanha Nu:rjema:l eje dagam i:slesip yö:rlör./ [dagam < dağı hem]
Nurjemai-eje and others are working över there.
 INTERJECTIONS

Interjections may be described as utterances that express basic emotional outlooks or

reactions toward a statement. Establishing equivalents for interjections between
languages is extremely diffîcult, because the emotional nuance of an interjection in any
context will depend on intonation, body language and other variables.
Türkmen has a full range of interjections, each comprising a few sounds, with a
slight preference for vovvels like a /a/ and e /e/ which require little shaping of the
mouth, and for consonants like n /p/ and x /h/ which are uttered with an expulsion of
air. interjections share with particles the expression of nuances of attitude tovvard
people, things and events. They differ from particles in that they are words with
independent lexical meaning, the majority of them stand at the beginning of a sentence,
and they are follovved by an intonational pause.
interjections are unchangeable words and may be classified into forms of one-
syllable (Bax /Wah/ 'Ah'), extended syllables (Be-e /Be-e/ 'Hmm'), multi-syllables
( A x o b /Ahovv/ 'Hey') and repeated syllables (Baii-öaiı /Ba:y-bâ:y/ 'Oo-wee').
According to their meaning, they may be grouped into those which express the inner
feelings or reactions of a person (Iİ3X /Pâ:h/ 'Pooh' for disgust) and those which
express command, appeal and the like (IImnT-nnmT /Pist-pist/ 'Ssst-ssst' to shoo a
eat away). Everyday greetings also may be regarded as inteıjections (see 565).

- BaK-Jie, r e m e l e ! roüSepcene sjihmh! Bsk, ear-ett... (G)

/"Wak-le, gelneje! Goyberöene elimi! Wâ:k, wâ:g-ey..."/
"Ouch, auntie! Let go my hand. Ow, ow-ee ..."

- Bax, H3Me yıiMH uıy M a x a jı M y ra n u tiM tiH raratı eK . (G)

/"Wah, nâ:me ücii:n su mahal mugollumuıj gı:8ı yo:k."/
"Oh, why isn’t the teacher’s daughter here right now?" [regret]

Bax, GanaM , ceH H n e p n rç e MeH e n e H SoncaM ö o n M aaM H ?! (G)

/Wah, barlam, 6enirj yerirje men ölön bolöom bolmoyarmı?!/
Oh, my child, wouldn’t it have been better had I died instead of you!

n a x , TtıpaT xeM ©Be3H Tepornbi ajıtı TaHaap, xeprn3 0Be3H Bm^fcçjsıpMH on.
(G)
/Pa:h, Gı:rat hem Öwö8ü Görogh ya:h tanayatr, hergi:8 Öwö8ü ı:njtdya:nnı ol./
Pooh! Gırat knows Öwez as well as he knows Görogh, and never would he hurt
Öwez. [Gırat is a horse in the Göroglı epic]

- Ait sajına, a3ap 6epMecenH3-Jie. (G) /"Ay walla, a8a:r bermeBeıji8-8e.7

"Oh, my God, leave me alone, ali right?" ['would you please not give me
heartache']
404 Turkmen Reference Grammar

- Be... 6e... 6e..., Kaıca, ceH flaHHpeflHHMH? (G)

/"Be...be...be..., ka:ka, 6en dâ:liredir|nıi?7
"Whoa-oa-oa, father, have you gone crazy?"

- Beft-neft-eft, xanitc xeM smaflMM. (G) /"Wey-wey-ey, ha:lı:8 hem ya:dadun."/

"Oof! I ’m completeiy exhausted!"

- Alo, cyiİJKH xeM renıpeBepH. (G) /A yu, 0U:jü hem getireweri."/

"Yo, bring on some candy, too."

- A io b , Meper, hhah mips 6apapctm, «taübin 6onca raitHan nyp-na. (G)

f Ayuw, Meret, inni nirâ: barya:r6ııj, ca:yır| bol0o gayna:p du:r-lo.7
"Whoa, Meret, where are you going no w, you know your tea is boiling."

T yü-työ, Tyft-Tyii - flnönn cecjıeHfliı. (G) /'Tü:-tii:, tü:-tü:" diyip 0e01enni./

He called them, saying "chick-chick." [calling chickens]

Er-3-eH, 6eüne 3aT repeiMMe flsn! (G)

/Yo:g-e-yey, beyle 5a:t geregime dâ:ll/
No way, uh-uh, I don’t need such things!

Be-e, e;maıutiM H3Me ymın ona «rHrae?» flHİlflHKa? (N)

/Be-e, yo:llosum na:me ücü:n orjo "gitme" diydikâ:?/
Hmm, I wonder why my husband told him not to leave?

- To6a, Toöa, Toöa. XyflaütrH ra3a6tnmaH ropKMafltmMH? - fljriiflH. Ouyu

«.oraÖLma rapauıun nypMaH, ceftreT 6epıoı, rox,aHBt epıtHflen Typy3ftfci. (N)
/To:bo, to:bo, to:bo. Hudaryırj gaSabınnan gorkmodurjmı?" diydi. Onui) joga:bma
garasıp dumıa:n, flöygöt berip, gojonı yerinnen turuSSı./
"My, my, my. Were you not afraid of God’s anger?" he said. Without waiting for
an answer, he helped the old man get up.

AH, o6a xox,ajıtırbi aöflaMH3fla usMe? (TV12.4)

/Ay, o:bo hojolugı aydamıSSa nâ:me?/
Ah, what do vve mean when we speak of agriculture?

Xa3np ceHTHÖpb aötı 6onancon, a-a, eK, 0KTfl6pı. a t a 6onaHcon narra Amtiimh
M6BM aııap. (TV7.3) /Ha:5ir Oentyabr a:yı bolonOorj, a-a, yo:k, oktyabr a:yı
bolonöog pagta yıgımı mövvc alya:r./
Now, because it’s the month of September, u h , u h , no, because it’s the month of
October, the cotton harvest is in high gear.
 p o s t p o s it io n s

Postpositions are structure vvords that combine vvith nouns, pronouns, adjectives,
numerals and participles to express relationships betvveen parts of a se.ntence.
Postpositions conespond to English prepositions which also combine vvith nouns and
other parts of speech ('by the car', 'behind the house', 'according to you', ete.). In
Turkmen, these words alvvays appear after the nouns, that is, in poi/position, rather
than in preposition, as in English.
From the formal point-of-view, the vowels of postpositions do not change like
those of suffixes. Stress generally falls on the preceding noun or other part o i' speech
with vvhich the postposition combines. A fevv postpositions have several variuıts (for
example, xaKbiHfla /hakınna/, xaKfla /hakda/ 'about'), just as do a fevv English
prepositions (for example, 'til, until').
Postpositions require the use of a certain case ending on the preceding noun. Most
postpositions vvhich originally vvere nouns require the nominative case on preceding
nouns and the genitive case on preceding pronouns, vvhile most postpositions vvhich
originally vvere verbs require the dative or ablative cases on preceding nouns.
Postpositions may be classifıed according to the case they require.
In addition to postpositions defined as above, Turkmen nouns vvhich form part of
noun phrases may be equivalent to prepositions in English and are treated helovv as
Auxiliary Nouns.

Postpositions with the Nominative Case

A number of postpositions are placed after nouns appearing in the nominative case, that
is, vvithout suffix. Hovvever, personal and demonstrative pronouns alvvays stand in the
genitive case when follovved by the postpositions Sünen /bilen/ 'vvith', /ücü:n/
'for' and xaKUHfla /hakınna/ 'about'.

SaSaTfla /barbatda/ abou t, in th e vvay o f caiİMH /0a:yın/ as

Sapaca /batrada/ about, regarding ce S sn rm /0ebâ:pli/ because
6 n n e n /bilen/ w id ı, and, b y , as, in, on Tapaıibiıiflaıı /tarapuınan/ by
S o ıo m a /boyunco / Y'OiH /ü£ü:n/ fo r, to.
in acco rd an ce vvith in o rd er to , b ecau se
fleft /dey/ lik e xaKtiH fla /hakınna/ about
« eK /dek/ lik e X 0K M yH fle /hökm ünnö/ as,
khmhh /kim i:n/ lik e in th e c a p a c ity as
M M iıacuSeTUH /m ına:0ı:betli/ HiiH /ya:h/ lik e , as if/though,
in c o n n e ctio n vvith su ch as, s o th at
406 Türkmen Reference Grammar

GaGaTga /barbatda/ 'aboııt, in the way o f

On Mana OpctıeT 6 a 6 a T n a ryppyn öepepflH, MeneM ona TYpKMeHMCTaH GaGa-rga

aüj(apfltiM.(N) /Ol maıja Oröuyet ba:batda gürriii) bererdi, menem oıjo
Ttirkmönü80a:n ba:batda aydardım./
He used to talk to me about Russia and I used to teli him about Türkmenistan.
3flwı hioji Barr flexwcTaH xap6tı Ga6aT(ia n y rra GepKiiflKJiHn, ui3xep-rana
eBpYnHnnıtp. (N)
/Edil sol wagt Dehi00a:n harbi: ba:batda pugto berkidilip, saher-gala: öwrülüpdür./
Just about that time Dehistan was strongly fortified in a military way and was
tumed into a city-fortress.

Sapana /ba:rada/ 'about, regarding' [variant: G apacunna /ba:ra0ınna/]

Typpyuhs 6y ornaH G apacunga 6onca, oHfla on metine: kbh BarruaH 6ap« on

oraaiftin anrbnmaH 6m s MaTepHan reırifap. (G)
/GürrüıjüS bu oglon ba:ra0mna bol0o, onno ol şeyle: ka:n wagtdan ba:ri ol
oglonurj ayagmnan bi6e material gelyâ:r./
If your talk is about this young man, then the situation is this: for a long time
materials have been gathering about that young man. [literally: 'materials are
coming from the feet of']
IOpflyMtt3tm snımap CapajjaKU KaHym.nn.in TacjıaMacH fleBneT flepeaçecHHne
Gıtpusue re 3eK apa am am MacnaxaTJiaııiHjxaHflaH coh, Kauyıı Kaöyn sflMiiflH. (N)
/Yu:rdumuSur) ya:slar ba:rada:kı Kanu:nunui] ta01ama0ı döwlöt derejeOinne
bimâ:ce gegek a:ra almp maOlahatlasılannan 0oi), Kanu:n kabu:l edilli./
After the draft of our country’s Law regarding youths was proposed and discussed
several times on the state level, the Law was adopted.
EenKH, TeneGacnernmcfleH coh e3yHM3fle ranaH TacH pnep 6 a p a c u H n a oKBtxj,tnapa
ryppyH 6epepcnnM3?! (N) /Belki, teleba:01esikden 0orj ö:Sür)ü88ö ga:lan tâ:0i:rler
ba:ra0ınna oİa:jılara glirrürj berer9it)i8./
Perhaps after the television contest you’ll talk to readers about the impressions
left on you?
MeH 6y Çapana 03anKtt HHKHnmapMMfla afiflimniiM, raÜTanan OTypMaütiH. (N)
/Men bu b am d a oSolkı çıkışlarımda aydıpdım, gaytala:p oturma:yın./
I spoke about this in my previous speeches, don’t let me keep repeating myself.
IHy rynKM ryH MeH CH3e T ypKMeHMCTaHflaKw 6un hm cncreMa Gapaga 6npKH artra
ryppYH 3flwn Cephese. (TP12.3) /Su günkü gün men 0iSe Türkmönü90a:nna:kı
bilim 0i0tema ba:rada birki agıS gürrür) edip berjek./
Today, I will make a brief presentation to you about the educational system in
Türkmenistan.
 Postpositions 407

Haxap SauiMHfta xep xm m ryppYH 3Rwnüsp: yMyMaH surnatinap 6apaga, joii

öapaga, Mauırajıa Gapaga Be ıuona Men3em. (TA15.2)
/Nahar basınna her hi:li gürriir) edilyâ:r: umu:mon yagdaylar barrada, i:s ba:rada,
masgala ba:rada we sorjo meıj8es./
Över dinner, ali sorts of things are talked about: about conditions in general,
about vvork, about the family, and so forth.

ÖHJieH /bilen/

(1) 'with, and' [joint action; personal pronouns take genitive case vvith ÖHJien /bilen/]

A M aH iin ejifla u ın ap tı GıiJien 6mıe yrp aM aftııa m a OHyn 3^ecn

tur^ajıtnccbonaHabi. (G)
/Ama:mq yo:lloilon bilen bile ugromoysuno onur) eje0i ı:njalık0ı81anm./
Aman’s not going off together with his companions has his mother vvorried.

■SrnyjiH ona Bacap %uMn u t flaKtmfltı xeM x 3 jih -iiih h h h onyn G m ıeH
oönaııiM aHbi r o B tı repepflH. (N) /Ya:sulı oıjo Ba0ar diyip a:t dakıpdı hem ha:li-
sinni onuq bilen oynosma:nı gowı görördü./
The old man had stuck the name Basar on him and he used to like playing wıth
him from time to time.

Eh3 xe3Hp my Taöfla HiııneftsH MacTep 6 hjich cex6erfleııı GonMaKtaı. (TV7.4)

/BiS hâ:5ir su ta:yda i:sleya:n maBter bilen ©öhbötdös bolmok£ı./
Now we vvould like to have a conversation with the manager vvho works here.

(2) 'with, and'

H Io ji M aKcaT Gh jic h TypKMeH flSBneT MeflimıiHa H H c n n y r a H a OKyBa nıpflH. (N )
/Sol mak0at bilen Tilrkmön döwlöt mediOina in0titutuno okuwo gi:rdi./
With that goal he started studies at the Turkmen State Medical Institute.

tok coraH Sepımce, naxap-fla yıcpon cemince, xac T am u m 6onap.

I l ı t t ı Gh jic h
(TP5.5)
/Ya:nı bilen gö:k 0ogon berilBe, nahar-da ukrop 0epil0e, ha:0 tagamlı bolor./
If green onions are placed on the side, and also dili is sprinkled on the dish, it
vvill be most delicious.

OuptviaHiEH KonneKTOBH 6arm>uiMKBHp 3KepaHm,un>iK 6nneH 6 n p xaTapfla

(TV 1 1 .4 )
M arm apH tm M n .1 en a roMMan.1 xeM MaKcaT sflHiiflH.
/Firma:mi) kollektiwi ba:gcılıkdır ekera:ncıltk bilen bir hatarda ma:lla:rcılıgı yo:lo
goymogı hem makOat edinni./
The farm collective has made its goal the starting up of animal husbandry along
vvith horticulture and field agriculture.
408 Türkmen Reference Grammar

MeH CH3H X33MP T ypK M eH SJIHIIÖHjİH ÖHJieH TaHİIUmUp:*;aK. (TV1.1)

/Men 0i8i ha:Sir türkmen elipbiyi bilen tanısdırjak./
Now I will acquaint you with the Turkmen alphabet.

(3) 'with, by' [instrument; this word rarely is used in the meaning 'by' for means of
transportation, although one exception is otjiei 6n/ıen /o:tlı bilen/ 'by train',
vvhich is preferred över OTJiynM /o:tlulı/]

iîıuyjıtı ntnıartı 6 hjigh 6np 3araap KecHUiflHpMare OTyputı. (BG)

/Ya:sulı pıcagı bilen bir 5a:tlar ke0isdinnâ:ge oturdı./
The old man began cutting up some things with his knife.

Miliyim 6y cbipu «opT ce3 Bhjich flyuıyHflHpflH. (BH)

/Ya:sulı bu 0ırı dö:rt 0ö5 bilen düsünnürdii./
The old man explained this secret vvith four words.

Ilarra ölh-mm KaMnanHactuma xs3Hp an ryfia;n SıuıeH to b h fitıran flypyc.

(TV14.2) /Pagta yıgım kampaniyaSınna hâ:8ir el gü:jü bilen gowı yığıp du:ru0./
In the cotton-picking campaign, we’re now picldng cotton well by manual labor.

(4) 'with, as' [simultaneous action with infinitive in -Man/Men /-mak/mek/]

3K,axaH 32t;e srnibm raöcanbi TaMa rapınera SıiJieH pa^Hoıiiin HypöamHbi TOBnan
roflöepflH. (G) /Jahan eje yarsıl gab0alı tam a gi:rmegi bilen radio:nuQ nurbotunı
towla:p goyberdi./
As she entered her house with its green door, Jahan-eje gave the radio knob a
twist.

fleBneTMMH3Hn rapauıcbBJibirtiHH anMartı 6hjich xep 6hphmh3Hh flypMyuı-

tiMH3fla oıuıapqa npoöneMajıap fly3e mbikam. (N) /Döwlötiimü8üi) garas0ı81ıgını
almağı bilen her bi:ri:miSii] durmusumuSSo o:nlorco problemaılar yüSö cıkdı./
With our state’s acceptance of independence, dozens of problems emerged in the
life of every one of us.

(5) 'together with' (in combination with GnpjlHKfle /birlikde/ 'togetlıer']

3MMa ıııonyn 6nııen ÖHpjiHKae my ıcapapun 6np 6yTeBH ManaT

rHHHUUDmiHH ryrapHtrKntı 6eneHflMniHM Sejınsn reKMeıntUHpMC. (N)
/Emma: sonui] bilen birlikde su kara:rırj bir bütövvü manat gkgisligini
gutomuklı börlönnügünü bella:p gecmelidiri0./
But together with that we must note that this decision has completeiy
divided the expanse of the all-ruble zone.
 Postpositions 409

6oH )H H a /boyunco/ 'in accordance with, in, with'

M hjjh AneKcaH flp 6 y ep e e 3 x y K y r a C o ıo H u a ren flu . (N)

/İnni AlekBandır bu yere ö:5 huku:gı boyunco geili-/
Aleksandr came here now i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h his rights.

3juih anı apna aTbuiflbi. flapTrboraHra 6oıoma onnapna ötm a «en GonaH t:He
flapT tibuı sunaMaK ranfltı. (N) /Elli yars arka atıllı. Dartgınlıgı boyunco ornlorco
yıla det] bolon yene dö:rt yıl yarsamak ga:llı./
Fifty years transpired. Another four years that were equal to dozens of years in
their tenseness remained to live.

HyKaHflaH KapronKa GoıOHMa 11.400-flen jcenpaK aflaM a3bnc anap. (N)

/Dükarnnan kattocka boyunco 11.400-5ön köprark ardam arSık alyarr./
More than 11,400 people get food with ration cards at the store.

fje ü /dey/ 'like' [with participles -a ıı/tia n /-yarn/yarn/, -a H /e H /-an/en/]

JK,ewan 3*,e Tacım fibinrHpbm, aflaMCMiiMHKtiHi,ı TaccmuıasH neti nanaas.a

6aım>iHu aTflbi. (N)
/femarl eje tarSirn yılgınp, ardamâınırgkmı ta00ırklayarn dey calaja basını aidi./
Jemal-eje smiled charmingly and slightly nodded her head like she was conr'jming
what her husband said.

E k , 3uıi(qeM0K, ü o n e Tapnap KYM yuı cyB a S a ra p a H a n b i fleü s b u iy h aTap. (N)

/Y o rk , e sid em ork , yö rn ö tarrlar k ü m ü s 0 u w o batıran y a rlı d e y övvsün a tya rr,'
No, I haven’t heard, but the strings are shining like as though dipped in mercury.

(jeK /dek/ 'like'

K eiİH ^ eK A en 6 erc*;eıai3n renııiHHeM 6 ııp r b o a flerMsp. (N )

/Keyijek dek bökjöklarp gelsirjem bîr gı:8a degyârr./
And the way you come jumping like a little deer is worth (the price of) a girl.
[= 'I app reciate se e in g the w a y y o u c o m e ']

khmhh /kimim/ 'like'

T apjıaB an y n y p c b B oBaflaH aT 6 o n y n enrHniflH. ©3eM y n y r t o k h m h h on aT

rbuiMKUbiflu. (N)
/Garlawa:2 ufiurfluS owodon at bolup yetisdi. Ö:8öm ulugırS kimim orjot gılıkJıdı./
Garlavach grew up as an extremely beautiful horse. She also was well-behav;d like
a grown girl.
410 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

MUHactıöeTJiH /mına:0ı:betli/ 'in connection with'

«TypKMeHHeraHtîa munap Bapaflaıctı fle a n eT cbiaca-rtı xaKMrçqa»

TypKMeHHCTanLiH K aH y u tm tiH ıca6yn 3flWiMenı M biH acbiöeTjnı CH3e T apauıcbra
BaTaH tiM ti3U n 3xjih jnunapuHHH aflMHflaH eHe 6wp re3eK Tanpw sjjKacbiH
aönaptıc. (N) /"TUrkmönü00a:n ya:slar ba:rada:kı döwlöt 0ıya:0atı hakınna"
Türkmönü08a:nıq Kanu:nunui) kabu:l edilmeği muıa:6ı:betli 8i5e GarasOıS
WatanımıSıq âhli ya:slarmıi] a:dınnan yene bir geSek tajjrı yalkaOın aydya:nö./
I n c o n n e c tio n w it h the adoption of Turkmenistan’s Law "On the State Policy
Regarding Youths in Türkmenistan," we thank you [S. Nıyazov] once again in the
name of ali the youth of our Independent Homeland.

Bepfla Hmıı onaT Be n o epmıe empManımrH MUHacufieTjiM cbinar 6epMera

MaKyJi GunflHK. (T) /Berdâ: i:si orjot we ti:8 yerine etiryâ:nligi mma:0ı:betli 0ı:lag
bermegi ma:ku:l billik./
We agreed to give Berdi an award in c o n n e c tio n w it h his completing the work
vvell and quickly.

c a iib iıı /0a:yın/ 'a s ' [vvith p a r tid e -flbiK/flHK /-dık/dik/]

3 c e p « e T a p tın 3flHJiîİ3H çe n e n i ra3an n aııiflbirbi cattbiH, Sanıibm bm aM ,

TBBepentHflsKM flHipran oTypaH ituniTnepH neM p y x -x ii:*;y B n a p tı re re p n ro m
Gauınafltı. (N) /E0erde ta :n :p edilya:n 0öwös g a S a p la sd ıg ı 0a:yın, b ag sın ıgam ,
diglarp otu ron y ig itle riıje m ru :h -h ıju w io n g ö tö rü lü p b aşlad ı./
tö w ö rö g ü n n â :k i
As the fıght deseribed in the work became more fıerce, the emotions of the singer
and the young people sitting around him listening also began getting carried away.

ceÖannH /0ebâ:pli/ 'because' [vvith past participle -an /en /-an/en/]

Men xeM MaıurajıaMbi3fla ynycbi 6 onaıibiM ce ö sn n H , Hiue nrrM sHKaM, ry u fle

eftnepM c y n y p u n , Haxap 6nuın pifn, GİİnaıuiHre Haxap TaiÎHHnan nfflitaH. (TV16.2)
/Men h em masgala:mıS5a ulu0ı b olon u m 0eba:pli, i:se gitma:nka:m, giin n ö ö ylö rü
Oüpürüp, nahar b isirip , ö y lâ :n lig e n ah ar ta :y ın la :p gid ya:n ./
And because I ’m the oidest in our family, each day before I go to work, I sweep
the rooms, cook, and prepare food for the aftemoon.

Tapanuııaan /tarapmnan/ 'by' [as agent of the passive voice; rare]

UIeiîx Hex,MeflflMH Ky6pa 6y ceBeuıe siih nparnu raTHauibiımbip Be MOHronnap

(N) /Seyh Nejmeddin Kubra: bu 0öwösö eli yaraglı
T a p a n u ıın a ıı e jm Y P Hnı«iflHp.
gatnasıpdır we mongollor tarapınnan öllüriilüpdiir./
Sheyh Nejmedin Kubra apparently took part in this fîght with weapon in hand and
vvas killed by the Mongols.
 Postpositions 411

3MMa on Myııyn MtıpaT Tapanunjıan n6epııneHflKniHe MHaHnpfltı. (G)

/Emma: ol munurj Mıra:t tarapınnan i:berilennigine manya:rdı./
But he believed that this had been sent by Mırat.

YHHH / ü c ü : n /

(1) 'for, on behalf of' [personal pronouns take the genitive case]

Eejncıt, Xajma3ap flyn oratı Y'JHH ce3 aÜTMara reneHjjHp. (G)

/Belki, Ha:lna5ar dul ogh ticü:n 0ö8 aytma:ga gelennir./
Maybe, Habıazar has come to speak on b eh alf o f his son, the widower.

EepeH rYppYH«tHH3 YMMHKen car öonyn. (N)

/Beren giirrürjüıjüS ücü:n köp 0ag boluıj./
Thank you so much for the talk you gave.

By rfcBBiKH&r C B r a x a r a a p /jmıe cman Y 'tH H flM p. [N]

/Bu gıSıkh 0ıya:hatlar dirje öiSirj ücü:nnür./
These interesting trips are just for you. [advertisment]

3 a T T e n e M e n H j p n cy B y i H H . 3M M a m y cy B reTOpeH nepH y « im h , m y jıa p tın

(TV 17.2)
T y p 6 a c tın a , KpaH Ttnta, m oi(a 6 «3 T e n e M e n H 6onapH C .
/8a:t tölömölü da:l 0uw ticü:n. Emma: su 0uw geçirenleri ücü:n, suloruıj
turboOuno, kırantma, 5ojjo biS tölömölli bolya:n0./
We don’t have to pay a thing, f o r water. But f o r their bringing in this water, and
their pipes and their faucets, for this we have to pay.

A K c yB a 6apsnt aBTOöyc y * i h h öm reT 6apMM? (T2.2)

/A:k0uwa baryam awtobu0 üciim bilet ba:rmı?/
Is there a ticket for the bus going to Aksuw?

(2 ) ' i n o r d e r t o , f o r ' [v v ith i n f i n i t i v e -M a ıc /M e K / - m a k / m e k / ]

TöHJiMCHHe ıu3xepnn e n a rra TpaHcnopTtiHfla ramaMaK y^ hh T33e Tenernep

rHpH3HJiflH. (TV11.2) /TibiliOide saherii] yo:logcı tıranOportunno gatnamak ücü:n
tâ:8e tölöglör gi:riSilli./
New fees have been introduced for travel on Tbilisi’s passenger transport.

Ait, moHyn am>ı a n a n co n , apaccan aM aK y * n m , Kese OTueK y*ihh,

T a ü tm n aM aK ym iH ın y n ap su ra 3aT Bffifnftsp. (TV10.2)
/Ay, ytirjti sonurj ya:lı alarjOotj, araOSalamak ticü:n, keçe etmek ücü:n, ta:ymlamak
ücü:n sulor ya:h Sa:t edilyâ:r,/
Uh, after you get wool like this, things such as these are done in o rd e r to clean it,
in o rd e r to make felt, in o rd e r to prepare it.
4 12 Türkmen Reference Grammar

(3) 'because' [with participles -m /iiau /-yan/yâ:n/, -aH/eH /-an/en/]

CojrraHceHyH Mbipanbiıibi repeHMHe maTJiaıc*;aK sura srce-fle, e3yHHn enyMmm

HCII9HH YHHH ra3a6bIHM HMHHe CblTflbipbtn ÖHJIMSHflMp. (N)
/0olta:n0öyiin Mıra:lını görönünö sa:tlanjak ya:lı e00e-de, ö:5üniii] ölümünü
İ81â:ni ü£ü:n gaSabmı içine Bıgdınp bilmâ:nnir./
Although Soltansöyün acted as though he was glad to see Mıralı, he couldn’t
contain his anger because he [Mırah] wanted him [Soltansöyün] dead.

Hmh30b ryitaiH aflaM. MeHe on rHfleHflen coh epmte rensçeıc anaMMit h3xhhh
eomçaKflHTbiHM 6nnMeÖ3HflHTMMH3 y^hh anana ranapHc. (N)
/Nıya:8ov gü:clü ardam. Yörno ol gidennen 0og yerine geljek ardanım nârhili
boljokdögunı bilmeyarnnigimiS ücürn aladar garlyarnO./
Nıyazov is a strong man. But we remam concemed because we don’t know what
kind of man will take his place after he’s gone.

xaKbinaa /hakınna/ 'about, on' [variant: xaKga /hakda/]

HunneMeK xaKbiHfla aiiflaHLiMfla xmh ÖHpıiHM Tonapnapa öenMeöapHH. (N)

/Diıjlemek hakınna aydanunda hi:c bi:ri:ni toporloro bö:lmöya:rin./
When I teli them about listening, I don’t divide any of them into groups.
.Hıııyjibi ranaMflaınnapbiMbin 6npn apafla sfleöıtHT xaKbmnaKbi ryppynnepHn
rajibnubin öapsmJibirtiHflaH 3eüpenflH. (N) /Ya:suh galamdaslanmır) bi:ri a:rada
edebiyart hakınna:kı gümiglöriig ga:hsıp baryarnhgmnan Seyrenni./
One of my old pencilmen meanwhile has complained that talks on literatüre are
being reduced.

T^aranap xaKga an afla 3TMeKflen 3epyp mu 6onMa3! (BG)

/Ğa:galar hakda alada etmekden 5eru:r i:s bolmoS!/
There’s nothing more necessary than caring about children!

E h3hh uıy ryHKM ryppYHHMM3 TypKMeHMCTaHbin MaHaflbt xaKbnifla omep.

(TV2.2) /BiSiıj su:nkı gürrüıjümüS Türkmönü00a:mıj manadı hakınna gider./
Our talk today will be about Turkmenistan’s manat.

xoKMYHfle /hökmünnö/ 'as, in the capacity as'

MHe, HHflH TypKMeHMCTaHtın rapauıcti3 fleBJieT xeKMYHfle e3yHMH caftnaH entı

ölülen Mepsn yıpaHtma iikh tibin flonyıı öapsrp. (N)
/İne, inni Türkmönü00a:nııj garas0ı8 döwlöt hökmünnö ö:Sünüıj 0ayla:n yo:lı
bilen yörâ:p ugra:nma iki yıl do:lup barya:r./
Well, it’s going on two years now since Türkmenistan, as an independent state,
started proceeding along a path that it chose itself.
 Postpositions 413

hjim /ya:lı/ [variant: anan /ya:lak/ (< *ya:h+kı)]

(1) 'like' (simile)

3nnw Sımeıı anmutnıiMH apanLiruHfla ceH ııe - x s sun, He-fle rappbr - ryHiıep raByH
6ana flypyrifltıp. (N) /Elli bilen altmısır) a:ralıgınna 0en ne-ha: ya:s,
ııiHpecM h j i u
ne-de gam - günnör gavvu:n si:re0i ya:b bala durupdur./
When you’re between fifty and sixty you’re not really young or old- the days seem
to tum to honey like the juice of a melon.

©HKM ajroaK, reıuıeMceK K aıca^an flan «nbifltı. (N)

/Örjkü alçak, geplem0ek Ka:kajan da:l ya:lıdı./
He didn’t seem like the old sociable, talkative Kakajan.

©HKMHaMajnutKJiepHH x n q 6wpH xeM MepeflOB anw Be3HnecmmeH neiiflana.-i bm

SMUMeflH. (H) /Örjkü nacalniklerirj hi:c bi:ri hem Mere:dov ya:h we5i:pe0inrıen
peyda:lanıp bilmedi./
None of the previous officials was able to profit from his position like Mersdov.

©HKh 3aMaHJiapfla aflaMJiap flim e m yjıap flJibi e üfle a m a n atıp n ap -fla. (TV6.4)
/Örjkü 6am a:nlarda aıd am lar d iıje su lor y a :h ö y d e ya:sapd ırlar-da./
In former times people lived only in homes [yuıts] like these.

JİHe u ıy n a p anan cyH raT HiurapnepM M enim reBHyMfleH t y p a p . (TV12.4)

fin e su lo r y a :la k O ungot i:sg â :rle ri m en ig g ö w n ü m d ö n turya:r./
You see, I like performers of the aıts İlke these.

(2) 'as if'

On ctıpKaBa e3 Maracu ajibi cepeTfliı. (G)

/Ol 0ırkawa ö:6 ca:ga0ı ya:h Oeretdi./
He took çare of the sick person as if he were his own child.

Mana flypM yuifla p a x a T iıtK eK ajibiflbi. (N)

/Marja durmusdo ra:hatlık yo:k ya:lıdı./
It seemed as if there vvas no peace in life for me.

Sup rap ceH oraapa, 6rıp r e p c e n ry n n e p e M eı^ sn flypaH 6y 3Hafitı Harbnnnap 3hhii
3*;aHjn.ı HJiMflbinap. (G) /Bir gör0örj otloro, bir gör0örj güllörö merj8â:p durcn bu
ena:yr nagrslar edil ja:nh ya:lıdılar./
Now resembling grass and novv flovvers, these omaments seemed just as if they
were alive.
414 Turianen Referenee Grammar

(3) 'as, as though, such as' [with verbal noun in -u m la m /-ı5/iS/ or infinitive in
-Man/MeK /-mak/mek/]

Xac TaKMTU, maxep HJiaTfcutbi reK xeM-fle 6aKia 3KHH eHyMnepH 6nnen 6eKflenq-
CH3 yrraçyH stmgk flJibi Ba»^uı m ne KeMÖaxa rapajwp. IHonyn Heno*;ecHHtıe
ıu3xepıın reK caraH napeKnapbiHBirç Teıc*;enepH Htuıan sınan smu 6onyn flyp.
(TV14.2) /Ha:0 ta:kı:gı, Saher i:la:tım gö:k hem-de bak£a ekin ö:nümlörü bilen
bökdöncöiiS iipjün etmek ya:lı wa:jıp i:se kem baha garalyarr. Sonur) netiyeBinne
saherirç gö:k 0atya:n laroklorunui) tekjeleri yda:n ya:h bolup du:r./
To be more exact, important work such as the unhindered supply of the city
population with fruit and vegetable produets is being looked upon vvith negleet.
As a result, the shelves of the city’s vegetable shops are as bare as if a snake had
licked them elean.

b l H x a repymıiHHS m u, 6y ep#e ep KsperçgecHHe anan m navhinap xe u narra

t a r t ı n üep. (TV7.2) /inha: görüsürjüS ya:h, bu yerde yer kâ:renne0ine alan
pagtaîılar hem pagta yığıp yö:r./
Here, as you can see, the cotton workers vvho have leased space on this land also
are picking cotton.

(4) The postposition s ij im /ya:lı/ often occurs after participle forms. In these cases, the
participle and postposition together form a construction vvith the meanings 'as
though' and 'so that'.

(a ) ' a s t h o u g h ' [ w i t h p r e s e n t p a r t i c i p l e - h h /M s h / - y a : n / y a : n / ]

03YMH 0BÜ3H 5UiaM fiojrap, JieHe Huınn xaTtlpacBiHa a ra a n reHsefinn. (N) [smaM <
hjibi xeM] /Ö:8ümü öw ya:n ya:lam bolya:r, yö:nö i:sii) ha:tı:ra0ma ag8a:p
ge£â:yeyin./ [ya:lam < ya:lı hem ]
It appears as though I’m praising myself, but let me say a few vvords in memory
of the work.

ByTHH flYMÖaHMH OB33BI ınon ranaran moıımeH h b ik j ih HJibifltı. (BH)

/Bütikn dünyâ:nir) owa:Sı sol gapagııj iCinnen cıkya:n yadıdı./
It vvas as though the voice of the whole worId was coming from inside that cover.

“ M H e M eH M n n a r a n a p t i M H 3 X K îih ? M e H , M e n n n h u i h m H a i n i m ? M eH H H 3 f le n 3ajjBiM
h 3Xmjih?” flHİtnn, 3KÜ9M aflaM 6 n p oji ay11®3 n rrM e ran e T a ftsıp n B iK r e p t e H « J ib i.
(TV16.1)
/İn e meniıj ca:galanm nâ:hili? Men, menir) i:sim na:hili? Menii) eden Sa:dun
nâ:hili?" diyip, eyya:m a:dam bir ol dünya: gitmegine tayya:rlık görya:n ya:lı./
As though already preparing to leave for the other world, a person thinks "And
how are my children? How are my affairs? How are the things Fve done?"
 Postpositions 415

(b) 'a s th o u g h ' [w ith past p a rticip lc -aH/eH /-an/en/]

fls jie M yM iTsn, r a c r a H a ç tı tracaH h jiu 6 o n y n Bautnaflbi. (N )

/Da:dem ü:tga:p, gı0ganjı çıkan ya:lı bolup başladı./
My dad changed and it began to seem as though he tumed greedy.

3MMa xeM M enep«H ifY3Y*WeH ra p a r t ın fly p a tı smbiflbi. (BH)

/Emma: hemmeleriıj yiiSünnön ga:r yağıp duron ya:kdı./
But it seemed as though everyone vvas angry. [{fy3yHfleH rap strMaK /yüSünnön
ga:r yağmak/ 'to snow from the face o f = 'to be angry']

3MMa C aparra 3Jme caKJiaMaK MJiaTa SamapTMaHflbip Be apaıuıap MJian>ı

yıiflaıiTyTMa fliten nnu rbiptmfltıpnap. (TP13.3) /Emma: 0aragtı eUe Oaklamak
i:la:ta basartma:nnır we araplar i:la:tı u:cdontutmo diyen yadı gmpdırlar./
But the inhabitants did not succeed in holding Saragt and the Arabs slaughtered
almost every single inhabitant. ['as though one said without exception' = 'almost
every single']

(c) 'as though' [with definite future participle -jrçaK/irçeK /-jak/jek/]

CoırraHceÜYH M bipanbinbi repeHHHe nıa-nm orçaK su ıtı a rce -fle , esyHHH gjiymmhm
Hcn sın t y »ihh ra3a6biHM HUMHe cbirfltıpbin ÖHJiMsHflHp. (N )
/0oIta:n0öyün Mıra:lını görönünö sa:tlanjak ya:lı e00e-de, ö:Sünürj ölümünü
İ01â:ni ü£ü:n gagabını içine Oıgdınp bilmâ:nnir./
Although Soltansöyün acted as though he vvas glad to see Mıralı, he couldn’t
contain his anger because he [Mıralı] vvanted him [Soltansöyün] dead.

A rap ryunep reMMew,CK nnbiflbi. (O) /Ağır günlör gecmejek ya:hdı./

It vvas as though the diffıcult days vvould not pass.

(d) 'so that, such that' [vvith future indefinite participle -ap/ep /-ar/er/, ~Ma3/ıwe3
/-ma8/meS/]

CyB M»ıep hjiei öoıiMaHMbim. Ha ceösnflen 6eitne öonsnbiH bi xhh k h m 6nnnn

GHnMSHflHp. (BH) /0uvv içer ya:lı bolmaaımıs. Na: 0eba:pden beyle boIya:nım hi:c
kim bilip bilmâ:nnir./
They say that the vvater vvas not fit to drink. No one could fînd out vvhy it vvas so.
[Huep HJiM öojiMan /içer ya:lı bolma:n/ 'it vvas not such that one vvould drink']

A h t h ö h o t h k xeıcMeH repeK . M ım ıı ıu y 3aT raîİTaııaıiM as hjim uiohm MMsÖMenH.

(TV 17.3)
/Antibiotik hökma:n gerek. İnni su 8a:t gaytalanmaS ya:h som icâ:ymeli./
You definitely need antibiotics. Novv you should take them so that this thing
vvon't come back.
416 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Postpositions with the Dative Case

Several of the postpositions that require using the dative case suffix + a / e /+a/e/ on the
preceding noun derive from verbs of vision and indicate direction: 6 a K .a u /baka:n/
'toward' (< S a K M a K /bakmak/ 'to look at'), r a p a M a a j j a n /garamaSSan/ 'in spite of' (<
r a p a r n a K /garamak/ 'to look at'), r o p a /görâ:/ 'according to' (< r e p M e K /görmök/ 'to
see') and c e p e ^ e n f l e /öeredenne/ 'compared to' (< c e p e T M e K /öeretmek/ 'to watch').
Others indicate direction or orientadon toward something: r o j ı a i i /goloy/ and a k l i h
/yakı:n/ 'close to', c a p u /0a:n/ 'toward' and m c h j i h /cenli/ 'as far as'.

6aKa(H) /baka:(n)/toward repa /göra:/ according to

6aKMaH /bakma:n/ although flepeK /derek/ instead of
6aKMa3flan /bakmaSSan/ jı a ü iK ( n M K f l a ) /la:yık(lıkda)/
in spite of in conformity with
rapaMaşnaH /garamaSSan/ Men3eıu /meıjSes/ like,
in spite of resembling
rapaMaH /garama:n/regardless çaptı /0a:n/ toward
rapanfla /garaıjda/ cepe^eHHime /Oeredeniıjde/
in comparison with - compared to
rapaHMHUa /garanırjda/ cepeTMe3 /öeretmeS/ in spite of
compared to
rapııiH /garsı/ against, opposed to MeHiiM /Cenli/ up to, to, until, as far as
rojıaS /goloy/ close to sdcmh /yakı:n/ close to

6aK aH /baka:n/ 'toward, in the direction of, -ward' [< SaK M aK /bakmak/ 'to look';
variant: 6 a K a /baka:/]
Ontı uıon caraflb m e s y u fle caTbirnbr apaöactma c a m n , e e CaKaıı yıpaT flb inap.
(G) /Om sol 0a:gadıi) ö:5iinnö Oatıgcı arabaöma ©alıp, öyö bakam ugrotdulor./
They put him on the seller’s cart at the şame hour and sent him toward home.

ra p a M a s fla n /garamaSSan/ 'in spite of' [< rapaMaK /garamak/ 'to look at']
3K ,. T y p 6 a H r L [ jib ia ;o B a i[ L in u io b ü m M iu n e M e r a H e r a p a M a 3 H a H , o H y n 6 3
npoSneMajıapbi, e3yHH TonrynnHpHH MecenenepM 6ap. (N)
[]. Gurba:ngılı:jova:nııj sowlı i:slemegine garamaSSan, onuıj ö:S problema:lan,
ö.-Sünii tolgunnurya:n meSeleleri ba:r./
In spite of her successful work, J. Gurbangıhjova has her own problems and
concems that trouble her.
T e ö ı ı r b t K B i m M n t n a ı a p a r a p a M a 3 j t a n , m i P D i n e p j m a p M a c H - s n r r a H M a c u eK . ( N )
/Tebi:gı kı:ncılıklara garamaSSan, isçileri^ a:rma0ı-yaltanma0ı yo:k./
In spite of the natural difficulties, the workers are not getting tired.
 Postpositions 417

Mene Myna rapaMa3«an, IIpe3MfleHTHH repK eaM efliîp T a6 uaıptn cn apb iH tı t.pHHe
errapMeKHe r e p n e n iH x aıuiBin-caıuıtınnbiK sflH jnm renm riiap. (T V 14 .2 )
/Yö:nö muıjo garamaSSan, PreSidentirç görköSmödür tabsınklamu yerine
yetirmekde gömötikn ha:llıi]-0allırjlık edilip gelinyâ:r./
But in spite of this, there has been blatant negligence in carrying out the
instructions and assignments of the President.

rapanuHjja /gara:nıi]da/ 'compared to' [< rapaıuaK /garamak/ 'to look at']

Myuyn S3H reuen HtınflaKa ra p a H u ım a oh npoııeırr eıme 6apjnmı.ın>tHbi

annaflap. (TV8.3) [MtuiflaKa < übinflaKM+a] /Munui) ö:5ü gecen yılla:ka:
gara-.nıgda o:n proöent örjdö barya:nnıgım a:i)ladya:r./ [yüla:ka: < yılla:kı+;ı]
This shows that it [the cotton yield] is 10 percent ahead compared to that of last
year.

rap ın u /garsı/ 'against, opposed to'

Eııp aflaM 6aM Gonca, My3 a#aM rapun. Bap aflaM naram a Tapanflaptı 6onct , İiy3
aflaM ona rapınu. (G) /Bir a:dam ba:y bolSo, yü5 ardam gan:p. Bir a:dam pa:tısa
tarapda:n bolöo, yiiS a:dam ogo garsı./
If one man is rich, a hundred men are poor. If one man is for the Tsar, a hun tired
men are against him.

- EepeKenna! - fliıünn, aflaM ctı rbtrbiptınflbip. - flHÜMeK, ceH OHfla, 3x,eMMiı

6M3HHKMfle H iuaM aruH a rapınu flan-fla. (N) /"Berekella:!" diyip, a:dam0ı
gıgınpdır. "Diymek, 0en onno, ejemir) biSiıjkide ya:samaguıa garsı dad-la:."/
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. "That means you really don’t mind my mother
living vvith us." ['opposed to her living vvith us']

Onap 03JiepHHM xajiKLm, fleraeTMH 6sx6nflHHe rapınu roitflynap, fl3brap>ınap

rypaMactnibiH sflösH TaraJinajıapbiHiin Tepcıoıe roüflyjıap. (N)
/Olor ö:6Iörünü halkırj, döwlötürj ba:hbi:dine garsı goydulor, yaSıjılar
guromoöunug edyâ:n tagallarlannıi] ter0ine goydulor./
They put themselves in opposition to the inteıests of the people and the sta:e, and
they opposed the efforts being made by the Organization of Writers.

rojıafi /goloy/ 'close to'

İîys Myne rojıaü nnan,ı Sojıaıı Mypranfla açopan xeM -fle öetoeKM snm-sum tnep
raöptı ropraapflaH reTMpHneHOK. (TV11.4) /YiiS mürjö goloy i:la:tı bolon
Murga:pda jora:p hem-de beyleki egin-esikler gayn yu:rtlordon getirileno:k./
In Murgap vvhich has a population of close to 100,000, socks and other clothı ng
have not been imported from foreign countries.
418 Türkmen Reference Grammar

OjiflYHflajom ıoprJiapfciHHH hkh Hy3e ronaitbiHJia amitin repKe3iınfln. (TV12.5)

/Ol dünya:niq yu:rtlorunui] iki yüSö goloyunno alnıp görköSüllü./
It vvas received and shown in close to two hundred countries of the world.

re p a /görâ:/ 'according to, in accordance with' [< ropMeK /görmök/ 'to see']

OHyrç anaH xa6apbina ropa, TeKenepıın x e M M e c w rcarajıana raTHauraçaKMHiu. (G)

/Onurj alan habanna görâ:, tekelerii) hemmeOi go:8goloi]0gatnassakmıs./
According to the information he r e c e i v e d , ali the Teke supposedly vvould
participate i n the uprising.

Konxo3 enöaıımhicMHhtu a # T M a rw H a ropa, M e m e m i 3ona^a 50 reıcrap ep

yn m u ım a u a n ıp . (N) /KolhoS yo:lbascı0ınırj aytmagma görâ:, medeni: Sonodo
50 gektar yer ulonulma:n yatnr./
According to what the collective farm leader says, 50 hectares of iand lie fallow in
the cultivated zone.
XyT m o r ç a repa-fle o n a p axjm yKBmnaptmtı xeM öauıapHtiKnaptmıı,
3exM H nepH H H xeM h h u i h k xbDnyBnapMHM a T a B a - r a m m r a p a m c M 3 H t ır H H H
6 e p K M T M 3 re re H y K f lH p u /ıe H xux,yB 6meH x,ownpnap. (N) /Hut s o ı j o g ö r â : - d e o lo r
â h l i u k ı: p la n n ı h e m b a S a m ık la n n ı, 8 e h i:n le r in i h e m y a :s lık h ıj u w l a n m a ta
W a t a n ı r ) G a r a s 0 ı 8 I ı g ı m b e r k i t m a : g e g ö n i i k d ü r ü i ö n h ıju v v b i l e n j o : s y a : r l a r . /
Exactly in accordance vvith this, they are inspired with the desire to direct ali
their abilities, skills, talents and youthful energies to strengthening the
Independence of the Fatherland.

TaptıxMtmaptın ^ a K n a M a r t iH a repa, r e H e p a n C K O ö e n e B T e ıc f le n e rajıactmna o h

Sam Myn aflaMtı ntpttıifltıp flHÜHn MaK aflHiröap. (TV13.3)
/Ta:n:hcılanq caklamagma göra:, general Okobelev Gö:kdepe gala:0mna on ba:s
müj] a:damı gmpdır diyip cak edilyâ:r./
According to the calculations of historians, it’s surmised that General Skobelev
slaughtered 15,000 people at the fortress of Gokdepe.

TypKMeHHHflaÖHHe repa 6 h3 epfle HİİMn-ımüopHc. (TA15.2)

/Türkmöniirı dâ:bine göra: bi8 yerde İyip-icyâ:ri0./
In accordance with Turkmen custom, we eat and drink on tlıe floor.

flepeK /derek/ 'instead of'

İîeHe Myna jj e p e K on fleBneTJiepnn 63 nynyntı MiiKapMa'^aKflfcirtı 6apafla
K en H JiH a M a T a n a n (N) /Yö:nö m u ı j o d erek o l dövvlötlöriirj ö:8 p u l u m
c ık a rm a ja k d ıg ı b a :ra d a k e p i:ln a :m a ta la p e td i./
But instead of this, he demanded a guarantee that other states vvould not issue
their own money.
 Postpositions 419

Ona « e p e n MapKctm, 3Hrera>CHH, JleHHHHn enMe3-MırrMe3 Hflefmapmıtı s n t* ;a n -

saraçan flYuiYTOHpüspflHnep. (TA16.4) /Orjo derek MarkOıi], Engel0ii], Leninig
ölmöS-yitmeS ideyalannı ya:nja:p-ya:nja:p düsiinniiryâ:rdiler./
Instead of that, they pounded the immoml, everlasting ideas of Marx, Engels and
Lenin into them.

iia H u ıu ib iK Q a /Ia:yıklıkda/ 'in conformity with' [variant: n a iib iK /la:yık/]

IIpe3HfleHTMMH3Mn 1 9 9 3 - r a y t Mm jim h M a p ra n n a MtncapaH K apaptm a
naJffciKJiUKfla C yftu iY p M irm ın e p 6anKmn>ın c e p m jm K a T n a p tı S o r a m a
xacannanaH Be Hopwre C T em apa remıpHJiiioH KOMnencaqnsiHtm cyMMacbiHbi xeM
SejıneHHJieH BarTMHflaH 1 S u n e n T e r a n 6aumaMaKjn>tra CYÜuıypMHTnınep
6ama>ma p y rc a T SepHJijiM. (N)
/PreSidentimiSii) 1993-njü yılır) 1-nji martınna çıkaran kara:nna la:yıklıkda
0ü:sürüntgüIör bankımı) Sertifikadan boyunco hada:planan we yörü:te uOcotloro
gecirilyam kompen0a0iyanır) 0ummo0unı hem bellenilen wagtmnan 1 yıl örj
töla:p baslamaklıga 0ü:siirüntgülör bankına rug9ot berilli./
In conformity with the decree issued by our president on March 1, 1993, the
Savings Banks are allowed to begin paying the amounts of compensation
calculated according to Savings Bank certifîcates and transferred to special accounts
one year earlier than the designated time.

5Ikmh Barr^a Amra6aTfla xs3HipKH 3aMaıtun TanaöHHa jıaHtiK rejribH

nonraamHHKa mımon 6aumap. (TV9.4) /Yakı:n wagtda Asgabatda hâ:8irki
5ama:nıq talabına la:yık gelyii:n poliklinika i:sla:p basla:r./
A polyclinic that meets modem demands soon will begin operating in Ashgabat.
[naÜBiK ren ü sH /la:yık gelyâ:n/ 'that c o n fo r m s to']

Men3em /mer]Se5/ 'like, resembling, similar to'

Onap hjikh KHpara flHİİHJiifap, ınon pemenca Mensem 3a-nıap 6ap. (TV6.4)
/Olor ilki kiraga diyilyâ:r, iol resotko meq8es 8a:tlar ba:r./
First of ali, these are called kiraga, those things that look like lattice-work.
[KHpara /kiraga/ = repere /gerege/ 'lattice-work wall of a yurt']
Haxap 6aınt>ınqa xep xhjim ryppyn sflHJitisp: yMyMaH aı^aHnap 6apafla, um
öapafla, Mamrana 6apaqa Be ıuona Mensem. (TA15.2)
/Nahar basınna herhi:li gürrüg edilya:r umamon yagdaylar ba:rada, i:s ba:rada,
masgala ba:rada we Sotjo meıjSes./
Över dinner ali sorts of things are talked about: about conditions in general, about
work, about the family, and so forth. [literally: 'and sim ilar to this' = 'and so
forth']
420 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

c a p u /0a:n/ 'toward'
O H yn flepeflHX,HimrH raJiKbiHtııua capu flosaM s flto p . (N )
/O nug d ö rö d ü jü lü gü g a lk m ısa ö a :n d o w a :m e d y â :r./
His Creative w o ık c o n tin u es toward re n e w al.
By ryH-apTe KepKs c a p u yrpaMaiMM. (N)
/Bu:n-erte Kerkâ: 0a:n ugromokci./
He plans to set off tovvard Kerki today or tomoırovv.

cepejıeHHHfle /Oeredeniıjde/ 'compared to' [< cep eT M eK /0eretmek/ 'to vvateh, look at']
M um u rypaJitıuifciHfla s n km komcomojm cep en eıiH n n e, flyönjiM TanaByflbiHbin
6 a p fltırtiH H a yü fly M . (N) /î:siıj gu ro lu su n n o öıjk ü k om O om oio 0eredeninii)de,
d ii:p lü tapa:w udun ui) b a:rd ıgım d u yd u m ./
Compared to the former komşomol, I felt that there vvas a fundamcntal difference
in the organization of work.

MeıiJiu /cenli/ [variant: «teH /cen/]

(1) 'up to, to, until, as far as (time)'

3 r e p flo rp y c u H tr aift-caK, Pe*,en ıuy Maxajıa nemin onyn afltı MyrajınuMHH
(G) /Eger dogruSunı ay00ak, Rejep su mahala cenli
r u 3 i.w t ıp eiifle p ftepepflH .
onur) a:dı mugolhımug gı:Sıdır öydör yörördü./
To teli the truth, up to the present time, Rejep kept thinking that her name was
'Teacher’s Daughter."
X a q a ııa qcH iiu 6 m3 M en m uıepe 6 am aH tırı oT yp M an u ? (N )
/Hacana cenli bi8 meıjlilere ba:glanıp oturmok?/
How long must we depend on groups like the Mengli? ['until wlıen'=Tıow long']
(2) 'as far as, to, up to, until (place)'
Bartmınan, T efen e mchjih ÖHnerHH 6axacbi Hsqe ManaT? (T2.2)
/Bağışla: r), Tejene cenli biletil) bahaBı na:ce manat?/
Excuse me, how much is the price of a ticket as far as Tejen?

s ik m h /yakı:n/ 'close to'

M en e öııpneM e r a p Gacan aK caK ran n ap tm 6 a u ıra 6 n p xeKasrrbi-fla xaKbucaTa HKbiıı.

(N)
/Yö:nö birneme ga:r ba0an a:k0akgaIIarır) basga bir heka:yatı-da hakı:kata yakı:n./
But some other stories of certain weathered elders also are close to the truth. [rap
6acau aKcaıcraJuıap /ga:r ba0an akOakgallar/ 'white beards covered vvith snovv']
 Postpositions 421

Postpositions with the Ablative Case

Most of the postpositions that require nouns ending in the ablative case: suffix
+dan/fleH /+dan/den/ are adjectives and adverbs. Only the postposition 6 t m nan
/basla:p/ 'starting from' originates from a verb (< SauuıaMaK /başlamak/ 'to bt;gin, to
start').

anpH(K) /arjn(:k)/ beyond Kanıapu /dasan/ outside of

apTbiK /artık/ more than 03ajı/o5ol/before
Sanıra /basga/ besides, other than e3re /öSgö/ other than
Sanman /basla:p/ starting from eıpH /ötrii/ because of
SapH /bâ:ri/ since, for con(pa) /0oq(ro)/ after
roBpaıc /gowra:k/ more/better than «Ha /yarja:/ due to

anpbi /arjn/ 'to the other side of, beyond' [variant: anpuK /agrr.k/]

Xs3Kp flepT üy3AeH-fle arçpbi KenejrrflMK. (TVİ1.4)

/Hâ:8ir dö:ıt yü88ön-nö aıjn köpöltdük./
Now, we’ve increased them to beyond four hundred.

Onap M a ıı ır a j ıa H U flepaflan anpuK reMHpflunep. (T)

/Olor masgala:nı derya:dan agn:k geçirdiler./
They moved the family to the other side of the river.

apTbiK /artık/ 'more than, in excess of'

TîöK,nrYn TyTaH r y p M y n iH f la ı ı n n a n a a n acce s p u M a p T U K raine a n f lb i. (G)

/Ta:]igül tuton gurcugunnon plannan e00e y a : n m aıtık pide alh./
Tâjigül got from the silkworms she was keeping one and a half times cocooııs in
excess of the plan.

6amra /basga/ 'besides, other than'

A pıura flatibicu SııneH pa3fcmauiMaKjjaH öauıra nape ranMaflbi. (G)

/Artığa da:yı0ı bilen ra:8ılasmakdan basga ca:re ga:lmadı./
There was no other course for Artık than to agree with his uncle.

B y jı a p f la H 6 a m r a - f l a MycyıiManbin Gep^aS am eım napanapu 6apflup. (TP 13.4)

/Bulordon basga-da mu0ulma:nır) berja:y etmeli parSlan ba:rdır./
And besides these, Muslims have (other) obligations they must fulfill.
422 Türkmen Reference Grammar

6 am nan /baSla:p/ 'starting from' [< fiamjıaMaK /başlamak/ 'to begin, to start']
Mum» 6np Myn noKy3 flys TorcaH Ö3innHSK;M-TorcaH aım tH ^ ıı OKyB MbuibinaaH
Gaınnan, 6 h3hh flYmeBH MeKflennepHMH3ifH OKyB übuibmbih flOBaMübirtı flOKy3
Mbui 6onaçaK. (TP12.3)
/İnni bir milrj dokuS 3018 togBon bâ:5inji-tog9on alttnjı okuw yılmnan basla:p,
biSir) dünyewi mekdeplerimiBir) okuw yılınırj dowa:mhgı dokuS yıl boljok./
Now, starting from the 1995-96 school year, the number of school years of our
secular schools will be nine years.
Efliı HintmaaH Banman, nne, MeKflen Miinnaptı 6 auınasıp. O-fla oh fcın a ronafi
anap. (TV16.1) /Yedi ya:sınnan basla:p, ine, mekdep, mekdep yıllan baslaya:r.
O-do o:n yıla goloy alya:r./
Starting from age seven, you see, school years start. And that takes close to ten
years.

Capıt /bâ:ri/
(1 ) 'since'
Ek, YMcaryn, MeH srrManflMM, 3pTnpjıen fiapn'KeııiRM cMMttnaçbipan flypanjjaH
coh, 6np a3ax,HK rtımapafitınflbrM. (G) /Yo:k, UmSogiil, men yatma:nnım.
Ertiırden bâ:ri kella:m 0ımıljıra:p duronnon 0oi], bir a:8ajık gı:sara:yıpdım./
No, Umsagiil, I hadn’t gone to bed. Because my head had ached since moming, I
just took a little nap.
MeH PeaçeımypfltiHM orjıamibncflaH 6apn TanaspflbiM. (H)
/Men Rejepdurdıtnı oglonlukdon bâ:ri tanaya:rdım./
I have knovvn Rejepdurdı since we vvere boys.
Ilarra nyHKTa aBrycTHH üurpm af ceKH3MHfleH 6ap« rem in flyp. (TV7.3)
/Pagta punkto awgu00ut) yigrimi OekiSinnen bâ:ri gelip du:r./
Cotton has been coming to the (collection) point since August 28th.
TypKMeH xamcBt raflbiM fleBypnepaen 6apn roıoH-ry3bi, remt-oBJiaK Satarn itepm
MapBa xamc xacannaHîip. (TV8.2) /Türkmön halkı gadı:m döwürlördön bâ:ri
goyun-gu8ı, geci-owlok bakıp yörön carwa halk ha0a:planya:r./
The Türkmen people since ancient times have been considered a nomadic livestock
people who tend sheep and goats.
By xanBtnapBtMBi3 6 ıi3ne onnen 6 apn, acBipnap 6 apn floKantın remin, 6h3hh 6 y
3irejıepMMH3flei{, MaManapBtMBBflaH ranan 6 «3e 6 np 3jı-x yHapjf 6 oımp. (TV 10.2)
/Bu ha:lılanmıS bi88e örjdön ba:ri, aOırlar bâ:ri dokolup gelip, biSirj bu
enelerimiSSen, ma:malarunıSSan ga:lan bi8e bir el-hüna:ri bolyarr./
These carpets have been woven among us since olden times, for centuries, and
have been left to us as a handicraft by our mothers and grandmothers.
 Postpositions 423

(2) 'for' [also may be used vvith the nominative case]

X o a t ; a r y n b i 6 n p n 3 n e BarTflaH Capu A u th h m h n a m tm fla n a u u iK S onaH 6 o n y n ,

f l3 J u m o p x a H ö o n y n ü e p i ta p f l H . ( O ) / H o j o g u l ı b i m â : c e w a g t d a n b â : r i A ltı m ı]
d a s ın n a n a :s ık b o lo n b o lu p , d a :lip o rh a :n b o lu p y ö r y â :r d i./
For quite some time, Hojagulı was going around like a crazy man, acting as
though he vvas very much in love vvith Altın.

Men ıııy tJ>a6pHKae itapHMH floxy3 itbin 6apw mnneflapHH. IIIonyH ÜHrpHMH 6np
iitm tm u xantı flOKafltiM. (TV12.4) /Men su pabrikde yigrimi dokuS yıl barri
i:sleyâ:rin. Sonur) yigrimi bi:r yılını ha:lı dokodum./
I’ve been vvorking in this factory f o r twenty-nine years. I vvove carpets for tvventy-
one of those years.

By xanHJiapBiMM3 6H3fle ensen 6spn, actıpnap 6apw flOKantm remin, 6h3hh 6y

3HejıepMMH3fleH, MaMajıapttMLDflan ranan 6n3e 6np 3Ji-xyH3pH 6ojrap. (TV10.2)
/Bu ha:lılanmı5 biSSe ögdön bâ:ri, aOırlar ba:ri dokolup gelip, biSirj bu
enelerimi88en, ma:malarımı8San ga:lan biSe bir el-hüna:ri bolya:r./
These carpets have been vvoven among us since olden times, fo r centuries, and
have been left to us as a handicraft by our mothers and grandmothers.

(3) 'since' [vvith gerund -antı/ejııı /-alı/eli/]

Hhhphmm3 rapanıctıs 6onyn, spKHHJimc meMaııtı e B c e j ı a Bapıı mhjudi

cnopTCMeHJiepHMH3 xajncapa aptım naptm a ranıauntn, TYpKMeHHCTamtn cnopT
aöpaflHHU nyıriis apeHacmma eKapbi reTepMsre p p rm MYMKHH*ranHKJiep anflttnap.
(N) /Diya:nmı8 garasOıS bolup, erkinlik sema:lı övvOölü bâ:ri milli:
I0ıpor80menlerimi8 halka:ra ya:nslarına gatnasıp, Türkmönü00a:nır) ıOıport
a:brayını dünya: arenaOınna yokon götörmâ:ge do:lı mümkü:nciilüklör alhlar./
Since our native country became independent and the wind of independence has
blown, our national athletes have taken every opportunity to participate in
intemational toumaments and to raise high in the vvorld arena the sports reputation
of Türkmenistan.

ypyıu Typantı Capu, 6wp Tonap ryH reuniHH. (BH)

/Urus turolı bâ:ri, bir topor gün gecipdi./
Many days had passed since the vvar began.

roBpaK /gowra:k/ 'better than, more than' [< roBtı /govvı/ 'good']

Toü 3flemiMe yn tfbLFinaH xeM rospaK Barr renUM- (TV16.2)

/Toy edenime üc yıllan hem govvra:k wagt gecdi./
Better than three years have passed since I got married.
424 Turkmen Reference Grammar

- Konxo3biMbi3fla y«i Myn«en roBparjrçuK xoas;ajiBirBtMbi3 6ap. (TP12.2)

/'KolhoSumuSSo ü2 müıjdön gowıa:gjjık hojolugumuS ba:r."/
"We have a bit better than 3,000 farming units on our collective farm."

J ia ıu a p u /dasarı/ 'outside of, besides'

O H fla n f la ıu a p u - f la , cyÖTporaiKJiepfle mhbshhh 6on xactuifctHtı ajiMara

MYMKHOTHnMK 6 ap. (N) /Onnon dasarı-da, 0ubtıropiklerde mi:wâ:nii] bol ha:0ılını
alma:ga mümkü:n-ülük ba:r./
And, outside of this, there’s also the possibility of getting an abundant harvest of
fruit in the subtropics.

03ajı /080I/ 'before, prior to'

HaMa3 OKaMa3HaH 03an TapeT rwm.ni, 3HflaMtmw apaccanaMantı. (TP13.4)

/NamatS okomo85on o5ol ta:ret gılıp, enna:miQi araOOalamalı./
Before praying, you must perform ablutions and cleanse your body.

esre /ö5gö/ 'except, besides'

MynflaH e 3re anutııu TanflbinMH? (T) /Munnon ö 6gö yalrjıs tapdıgmı?/

Did you find any mistakes besides this?

BTpM /ötrü/ 'because of'

Oıma nepHnep: - Bh3 mfflM nrrceK-fle, aTaMM3tm ailyroı TanMapuc. O H flaH e x p n

6 m3 ch3hjj ÖHJieH rHT^eK - flHöflHnep. (G) /Onno peniler: "Bi5 inni gi00ek-de,
ata:mıSır) öyünü tapmanO. Onnon ötrü biS 6iSir| bilen gitjek" diydiler./
Then the spirits said "Even if we go now, we wouldn’t find our father’s house.
Because of that, we’U go with you."

Y3ynen 3aflLi con ceıuıeceneM, 6 apy 6 np, ghkh flypKyHtı 6epMe3. Oıman BTpıı
ohm öaıufla Y3Me3Jmre ııanttıuMantı. (N) /ÜSülön 6a:dı 0or) 8eple0eıjem, ba:nbir,
örjkü durkum bermeS. Onnon ötrü om basda üSmöSlügö çalışmalı./
Even if you attach the broken-off thing later, it won’t produce the former shape.
Because of that, you should just try not to break it to begin vvith.

c o n / 8 orj/ [variant: c o rç p a / 0oqro/]

(1 ) 'after'

Bm3 acun-xa MtıxMaHtm xa6 aptnttı 6 np ryHfleH c o n ajısmflBipbic. (G)

/BiS a0ıl-ha: mı:hma:nıi) habannı bir günnön 0or) alya:nmn0./
We generally ask a guest about his news only after one day. ['get the news from a
guest']
 Postpositions 425

Benıaı, TeJie63cneuiHKfleH coh 03ynH3ae ranan Tacııpnep Sapactmaa oıa,DKi.raapa

6epepcHHH3?! (N) /Belki, telebâ:01esikden floıj ö:8üi)ü88ö ga:lan tâ: :i:rler
ry p p Y H
baıraSmna okrjılara gümir) bereı8i]ji8?/
Perhaps after the television contest you’U talk to readers aboııt the impressions left
on you?

(2) 'after' [with past participle -aH/eH /-an/en/]

©3yHH 6y epe aTanjjatı coh, xhm 3aTflaH, xhm KMMflen ropKMaca 6on*;aK. (O)
/Ö:Süi]ü bu yere atarjdan 0oq, h i:2 8a:tdan, hi:c kimden gorkmo0o boljok./
A fter you get to this place, you shouldn’t be afraid o f anything or anyone.

Em3hh wpflyMbi3a rernm repennepıiHfleH coh, aflaMnaptm ÖY3-re3nepHHe j-ıpan,

eıcapfct 6axa 6epftapjıep, (N) /BiSirj yu:rdumuSo gelip görönlöriinnön 0oıj,
a:dam)anr| yüS-gö81örünö garaip, yokon baha beryâ:rler./
A fter they’ve come and seen our country, they look at the faces of people ;md give
high marks.

Illy jKeTOHbi ajıam>rnbi3aaH corçpa nne TeneıJoHbin HiunefisufliıniHM,

MiuneMeüsHflMrHiiM 6apnaManu. (TV17.4) /Su zetom alamgıSSan 0or|ro ine
telefonur) i:sleyâ:nnigini, i:slemeyâ:nnigini ba:rlamalı./
A fter you get these tokens, you have to check whether the telephone is working or
not.

Mrne rHTM3HK3M onapbi lOBMara BarrtiM öojiMaap, mıifleH reneMflen coh

joBflpbnr. (T16.2) [reneMflen < renenHM^eH] /tise gitmâ:nkâ:m olorı yuwnıa:ga
vvagtun bolmoya:r, i:sden gelemden 0or) yuwya:nn./ [gelemden < gelenimden]
I don’t have time to wash them before I go to work, I wash them a fte r I co me
from work.

(3) 'after' [with past participle -aH/eıı /-an/en/, but without ablative case suffix j

Oji “Aıura6aT” MMXManxaHacbnma epneuuuı, >ıafî ımencoH, msxepe naeneKaçe

MUKfltı. (BH) [HueHCOH < MMenflen con] /Ol "Asgabat" mı:hma:nha:na0mna
yerleşip, ca:y icenOorj, sahere geSelenje cıkdı./ [icenOoıj < icennen Ooıj]
A fter he settled in at the Ashgabat Hotel and drank some tea, he went for a .valk in
the city.

A&, öyhh ıuonyn hjiu ajıancoi(, apaccanaMaK yTOH, Keqe stmck y' ihh,
TaMbmnaMaK y^ mii ıııynap s jih 3aT sflunifep. (TV10.2) [anancon < anaHbinuan coh]
/Ay, yürçii sonug ya:h alarjöoi), ara00alamak ücü:n, keçe etmek ücii:n, ta:y lalam ak
ücU:n sulor ya:h Sa:t edilya:r./ [alai)0oıj < alanııjdan 0 ojj]
Uh, a fter you get wool like this, things such as these are done in order to :lean it,
ûı order to make felt, in order to prepare it.
426 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Bm3Hh 0KyB'aiJiapM M M 3 oKyBJiapH, floK y3 Abui o K y B tı lyrapaH CO H , efcapbt oKyB

3K,aMnapBiHa OKyBa rupMsre xeMMe r p a x fla w ıa p t m flen xyKyKJiaptı 6apflbip.
(TP12.3) [r>nrapaHcon < ryTapaHflan c o n ] /BiSii] okuw£ulorumu5 okuwlon, dokuS
yıl okuwı gutoronSor), yokon okuw ja:ylanna okuwo gi:rmâ:ge hemme
grazdanlarıi] deıj huku:klan ba:rdır./ [gutoronGor) < gutoronnon 0orj]
After our pupils finish their studies, after nine years, ali cıtizens have an equal
right to enter into institutions of higher education.

ana /yağa:/ 'due to'

Byjıap uıeüflH n pa3wnaıubra, apTecH aflaMflaH ana xnptmflttKMH öonaH M eöflana

6apttımtıpnap. (G) /Bulor seydip ra:6ılasıp, erteöi a:damdan yarja: hın:nnıkın
bolon meyda:na banpdırlar./
They agreed to do so and the next day they came to the square vvhich vvas crovvded
with people. ['crowded due to people']

T a p u n n.!3BtHH eM yne re ın p e H ryHYHfleH 6 y a n a aanBtHBt 6 aön ap a xanBi

flOKaMara n6epM 3Hflnp. (G) /Gan:p g ıS ılı ö y iin ö getiren gün ünn ön bu y a ğ a :
a y a :lın ı b a :y la ra h a :lı d o k o m a :g a i:b eım a:n n ir./
Starting from the day the old man brought home the gold, he didn’t send his wife
to the rich people to weave carpets. ['due to this from the day']

3 m e M e ÜBUinan, x a ifla ü tu u ıa n xeM SKHflHJiMeüaH x a n a -x y n a jıa p a a n arça x e p

epfle- x e p epfle ıawenp3K flen e 3Mene rejnniflH p. (N)
/En£eme yılla:p, hatda: yılla:p hem akidilmeyâ:n hapa-hupolordon yaıja: her
yerde- her yerde kiceıjrâ:k depe emele gelipdir./
In some places, it seems that little hills have come into being everywhere-
everywhere- due to the trash that has not been carried away for several years-yes,
for years.
 AUXILIARY NOUNS
A limiteti set of nouns whose meanings concem position- frequently on the body-
combine vvith nouns and other parts of speech to indicate spatial relationships of the
kind often expressed by prepositions in English ('inside the house', ete.). Hovvever,
such combinations are noun phrases in vvhich the first noun stands in possessive
relationship vvith the second noun, and therefore takes the genitive case, which is
vvithout suföx when the possession is indefinite and vvith the suffix + lih/ hh /+ııj/ir)/
vvhen the possession is definite (see 116). The second noun of these phrases ends in the
third person possessive suffibc +m/h /+ı/i/ plus one of the case suffixes, normally the
locative case variant +Hjja/Hae /+nna-nno/nne-nnö/.

areMHfla /ag8ınna/ at the entrance of opTaciinfla /ortoOımno/

antıpcttHfla /aıjırömna/ behind in the middle of
apactrafla /a:ra0ınna/ among enyHfle /örjilnnö/ in front of
apKacbiHHa /arkaömna/ behind, enyctıpacwHHa /örjü0ı:ra0mna/
in b a c k of on the eve of
öaııiMHna /baiınna/ at the TapanttHfla /tarapınna/ along the
beginning of, över side of
6010Hfla /boyunno/ on, along yrpyHfla /ugrunno/ along
Bam.ınqa /wagtuma/ during, in ynypHHHa /ucurunno/ at the
ranflantiHfla /gapdalınna/ next to time vvhen
rapıutıctiHfla /garsı0ınna/ opposite ycTyufle /ü00ünnö/ on, upon, över
ronaiİMHfla /goloyunno/ near acacMHfla /e0a:0nına/ at the base of
ınmHHe /icinne/ in, inside HHMima /ya:nınna/ beside, at the
ttY3yHHe /yüSünnö/ on the side of side of

areMHfla /agSınna/ 'at the entrance of' ('at the mouth of') [< arbi3 /agıS/ 'mouth']
MeH KaKaMa flyflu pecTopaıttiH ar3UHfla Ken rapaııifltiM. (T)
/Men ka:kama dü:n reOtoronurj agSuına köp garasdun./
I waited for my father a t the entrance of the restaurant for a long time yesterday.

aHbipcbiıifla /aıjır0uına/ 'behind' ('on the other side of') [< aHbipcbi /atjırfh/ 'the other
side of']
IIIoji ceanepm aHM pcuHfla K e n aflaMJiapbtn biKÖan cyTyHMHM KeMajıa rerapaçeK
ap3yBJTapt[n öapım rbtHbt Tac spiHMHŞflaH HbtKapnpbic eMflMsu. (N)
/Sol OöSlörüg agıröınna köp a:damlani] ıkba:l Sütününü kema:la getirjek
ar5uwloruıj barrlıgını ta0 ya:dımı55an £ıkarya:n0 öydya:n./
I think vve almost forget that behind these vvords there are a lot of peoples’ dreams
of bringing to perfeetion the column of fate.
428 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

apacbiH aa /a:ra0ınna/ 'among' ('in the space betvveen of') [< ap a /a:ra/ 'space
between'}

HIoji yfluiMerıın a p a c b i H a a ApTMK xeM öapfltı. (G )

/Sol ii:smögür) a:ra6ınna Artık hem ba:rdı./
Artık was among that gathering too.

YMyMaH, flen-flyııiJiapbiMUU apacuHna nrrapafla ca3 Mantın öepepflHM, ks

Barraap XHnneHHn öepepflHM. (N) /ümu:man, der)-du:slorumuq a:ra0ınna gitarada
0a:5 calip bererdim, ka: wagtlarhirjlenipl5ererdim./
Generally, I used to play guitar among people my own age and sometimes I
would sing in a lovv voice.

apKacbiHfla /arkaOınna/ 'behind, in back of' [< apna /arka/ 'back']

M e H c e m m 6 ıu ı e H sprop arıuaM TeaıptiH a p K a c t i H f l a flyıuyıuaptiH. (T)

/Men 0eniıj bilen erti:r ağsam teatrıj) arkaBınna du:susorun./
I’ll meec you behind the theater tomortow evening.

fiambiHna /basınna/ 'at the beginning of, över' ('at the head of') [< 6am /bas/ 'head']

FtıuibiH öanınHAa ıymnap yıy n rejıüspnep. (G)

/Gısııj basınna guslor ucup gelyâ:rler./
At the beginning of Winter the birds fity here.

^ a ü u n ö a m u H A a y3aK rypjıemun O Typfltuıap. (G)

/Ca:yırj basınna uSok gürlöSüp oturdulor./
They sat and talked for a long time över tea.

H a x a p ö a ın tiH fla x e p xhjim r y p p y n s f l i t r r ü s p : yMyMaH Hi^aflJiap öapafla, mui

(TA15.2)
S apafla, M am rana öapafla B e morça M eıp e ııı.
/Nahar basınna her hi:li güırüi) edilyâ:r. umu:mon yagdaylar ba:rada, i:s ba:rada,
masgala ba:rada we sorjo merjSes./
Över dinner ali sorts of things are talked about: about conditions in general, about
vvork, about the family, and so forth.

SoıoHfla /boyunno/ 'along' [< 6ott /boy/ 'length, stature']

M a B t ı s p c a p t r a t ı , A M t i f l e p a B oıO H fla e H y n - e c Y n f lH . ( G )
/Mawı a:röa:ndı, Amıderya: boyunno ö:nüp-ö0iipdü./
M am was Ârsan. He was bom and raised along the Amudarya.
 Auxiliary Nouns 429

B a r T b iH f la / w a g t ı n n a / 'd u r i n g , i n ' ( ' i n t h e t i m e o f ') [ < B a r r / w a g t / 't i m e ']

Ch3 ö g p fle r e p f o ı t ı o , o n a p tın Mara BarTbiHRa oÜHaaH oMnaBannapuHLi rop03HM3,

(TV13.3)
/0iS ba:rde göryâ:ıji8 olorurj ca:ga wagtınna oynoya:n oynowa:clannı göryt.:r)i8./
You see here, you see the toys with vvhich they played during their childhood.

rangajiLiHna /gapdahnna/ 'next to' ('on the side of') [< ra n n an /gapdal/ 'side ]

O H ynranuajiLinaa g a m - a r r r b i s m ı n t ı o r a a i D K ti K 6 h j k h JK ^ eM an 6wp 3 a r ı n ı p
öapafla xe3im 3flnn rypJiemMspflHnep. (TV16.2) /Onur) gapdahnna bâ:s-alu ya:sh
oglonjuk bilen Jema:l bir 6a:tlar baırada heSil edip gürlösyâ:rdiler./
Next to her the fi ve- or six-year old boy and Jemal were having fim talkinı; about
some things.

rapuıucuH fla /garsıOınna/ 'opposite of' [< ra p n ıu /garsı/ 'opposing place']

O j i mchiih rapıubicbiHfla n ypflbi. (T) / O l m enir) g a rs ıö ın n a durdı./

She stood opposite me.

rojıaHunflan /goloyunno/ 'near' ('in the proximity of") [< ronaft /goloy/ 'prırcimity']

OSaHbin rojıaübiHftan KaHan reMttap. (T) /0:ba:nıi) goloyunnon kanal gec yâ:r./
The canal passes n ear the village.

MMHHAe /icinne/ 'in, inside' [< hm /ic/ 'interior']

3jı6erfle 6y s a m a p xaKbtHfla rbicra BanrbiH HMHHfle xeM M e TapannaiitiH j iîfltın

(JonaçaK flajı. (TP12.2) /Elbetde bu Sa:tlar hakınna gı:0ga vvagtuj icinne heırune
la ra p la y m aydıp boljok da:l./
Of course it will not be possible in a short period of time to speak
comprehensively about these things.

By3YHne /yüSünnö/ 'on the face of' [< My3 /yü8/ 'face']
3 Manastın apxa üyaYHAe TYpKMeHHcraHbtH repÖH, nıeftne xeM raflb in b i
jijih

(TP2.2) /Elli manadıi) arka yüSünnö

smbirapjBtKnepHH 6 n p n ep neıu fliipıırıeH .
Türkmönü00a:nır) gerbi, şeyle hem gadırmı ya:dıgâ:rliklerii) bi:ri yerlesdinlen./
On the back face of the 50 manat are placed the seal of Türkmenistan as v; eli as
one of the ancient monuments.
430 Turkmen Reference Grammar

opTactiHjıa /ortoöunno/ 'in the middle of' [< opTa /orto/ 'middle']

t t a a CH3 xs3Hp roptonra reKflene rajıactiHbm opracbinaa ynnaıcaH Me-raçırr

canbiHap. (TV 13.3) /inha: 6İ8 hâ:8ir göryâ:i]i8 Gö:kdepe gala:0ınırj ortoöunna
ulloka:n metjit 0ahnya:r, gurulya:r./
Here you see now a huge mosque is being erected in tlıe middle of the Gökdepe
fortress.

O H y n a e / ö r j i i n n ö / 'i n f r o n t o f ' [ < e n / ö r j / 'f r o n t ']

B I n x a Mafl - flHÜnn, mkh r ç e r S e p M aiİM a m b i H b i n e n Y ii e OKJiaflbi. (G)

r in h a : c a :y " d iy ip , ik i C e tb e r c a :y ı a y a :h n ıi) ö rjü n ö o k lo d ı ./
Saying "Here is tea," he tossed 200 grams of tea in front of his wife.

eHYCbipacbinna /öi]ü0ı:ra0ınna/ 'on the eve of' [< enycupa /öi]U0ı:ra/ 'the eve of' <
en /öi)/ 'front' and the gerund form cbipa /0ı:ra/ of cupMaK /0ı:rmak/ 'to pass (of
time)', chus 'passing before']

M o n r o n n a p b i n X o p e 3 M e > ıo 3 y n n ıp M e K J ie p m tH H e n y c b i p a c u n n a r a f ltJ M H
T Y p r e m if le ( x 3 3 n p ı o t K e H e Y p r e m a e ) a m a n B e h i i u i s h a n H M J ia p b in a p a c b m .u a
U I e i t x H e jç M e f l flHH K y ö p a f l a n S a m r a - f l a , o u y u o rçaT m a rH p rn e p H H M H 6 H p w M6h
H a x , w 6 A 6 y n J J Ç a ım a T a n i b i M e u ıx y p auibiM ö o n y n f l b i p . ( N )
/Mongollorur) HoreSme coBup gi:rmeklerinirj örjli0ı:ra0ınna gadı:mı Gürgöncdö
(hâ:8irki Kö:nöürgöncdö) ya:sa:n we i:slâ:n a:lımlanıj a:ra0uına Seyh Nejmeddin
Kubrodon basga-da, onug orjot sa:girtlerinii] bi:ri İbn Najıb Abul Jannat a:tlı
meshu:r a:lun bolupdur./
On the eve of the Mongol invasion of KJıorezm, among the scholars who lived
and worked in ancient Giirgench (modem Köneiirgench), there was a famous
scholar named Sheyh Nejmeddin Kubra and, besides him, one of his best students
ibn Najıb Abul Jannat.

T a p a n m ı ş / t a r a p ı n n a / 'a l o n g t h e s i d e o f ' [ < T a p a n / t a r a p / 's i d e ']

O u y u Ö H p T a p a ı ı u i i n a A M t if le p s m u H M e n e c y B b i u ı a r n a n aK H p flb i. ( H )
/Odujj bir tarapınna Amıderyaaıııj mele 0uwı sagla:jj akya:rdı./
Along one side of it [the village], the yellowish waters of the Amudarya flowed in
a rush.

yrpyıına /ugrunno/ 'along' ('in the direction o f) [< yryp /uğur/ 'direction']

Keusımn yrpyıifla 6epw aiiflbiM aflflbin öapMacana. (G)

/Köca:nii] ugrunno beri aydım aydıp barmaOana./
Only w o u ! d y o u p l e a s e n o t g o s i n g i n g along t h e S tr e e t?
 Auxiliary Nouns 431

y ıy p tm u a /ucurunno/ 'at the time when' [< y ıy p /ucur/ 'time']

By ryHSflaMnap ryH smap yjypuHfia flarafltmap, uyu km 6apxa ı-yüııneıiMn 6apsm

en onapj.1 xoBcana canttıtflbi. (G) /Bu:n a:damlar gün ya:sa:r ucurunno da:gadüar,
çünkü barha gü:clönüp barya:n yel olon hovv0ola: ©alıpdı./
Today the people dispersed just as the evening began, because the wind vvhich kept
getting stronger worried them. ['at the time when the sun set']

ycTyuae /ü80ünnö/ 'on, upon, över' ('on the surface o f) [< ycT /Ü0[0]/ 'surface']

MeHeM mecaH ycTyHHe ramren 6amnaflMM. (O)

/Menem pye0a:r) ü00ünnö i:51â:p başladım./
And I began vvorking on the play.
TaparyM acMaHtnam ycTyufle 6 wpfleHK3 enHn*,eK narı Synymap neiifla 6onntr.
(BH) /Garagum a0ma:nınıi] ü00ünnö birdenkâ: yerjiljek ca:l bulutlor peyda: bollı./
Ali of a sudden, rather light gray clouds appeared in the sky över the Garagum.
[sense: 'on the surface of the sky']

rejiH ajiBDKtı renHHauttu öapanfla, 0Hyn ycTyH f(en 3aT ceMÜapnep: cyfc^H , KGKe,
OBHyK matıti, oftııaBaM. (TV15.3) /Gelna:hjı gelni alıp baranna, onuj]
ronıiM e,
ü00ünnön Sa:t 0ecyâ:rler. 0ü:jü, kö:kö, pişme, ovvnuk sayı, oynowa:c./
When those taking the bride have brought the bride, they strevv things över her:
candy, cookies, pastries, coins and toys.

3c a c tiH fla /e0a:0ınna/ 'a t th e b a se o f, on th e b a sis o f ' [< a c a c /e0a:0/ 'b a se ']

Mhuiim flsn-neccypnap 6m3HH nporpaMMaMU3tm 3cact,iHfla nypsıp. (N)

/Milli: dâ:p-de00u:rlor biSirj programma:mı8ır) e0a:0ınna durya:r./
National tıaditions lie at the base of our program.

üHbiHfla /ya:nmna/ 'beside, by the side of' [< sm /ya:n/ 'side']

- lOpa, MeH aptiM caraT MeMecıı ceHHH flHtınfp oT M ptra. 3 M s m smeMe

MyıuflepMnepMH remm niTflK. (TP13.2) /T u ra, men ya:nm 0a:gat cemeGi 0enir)
ya:nır|da otı:nn. Eyya:m enceme müsderilerir) gelip gitdi."/
"Yura, I’ve been sitting by your side for about half an hour. Already, many of
your customers have come in."

3 r e p - fle MeH ca n a HHCTHTyTfcin HHbinna rapam caM fkm apM H ? (T)

/Eger-de men 0arja inötitutni] ya:nınna garasöam bolya:rmı?/
Is it okay if I vvait for you by the side of the institute?
 CONJUNCTIONS

Conjunctions serve to connect two or more words, phrases or sentences together.1In

Türkmen, conjunctions fulfili the same function and correspond to English
conjunctions of the type 'if , 'and' or 'but'. In addition, certain conjunctio.ı words,
particles and suffkes, and expressions of the English type 'the reason is', 'as for' or 'in
other words', may be treated together with true conjunctions.
True conjunctions share common features with other structure words, in :fıat they
lack an independent lexical meaning and occur only in combination with words and
sentences. In addition, they are unchangeable in sound structure and do not take lexical
and, for the most part, grammatical suffixes. In structure, they are singlı: lexical
elements, or appear in combination with one another.
Conjunction words, on the other hand, belong to other parts of speech and may
have independent lexical meanings when used in isolation. Some of these takt: lexical
and grammatical suffıxes that are subject to vowel and consonant haımony nıle;,.
Türkmen conjunctions may coordinate two or more elements of a plinse, two
phrases or two sentences, or they may subordinate one or more sentences to another
sentence. Conjunctions may be classified according to these functions (see tabi:, 434).

Coordinating Conjunctions
Words, particles and suffixes that relate components of a sentence or connect two
independent clauses together are called coordinating conjunctions. They may connect
like (homogeneous) components, place components in contradiction to one another, or
correlate components.

Connection
The true conjunction B e /we/ 'and' (variant: y /uf) connects homogeneous components
of a sentence or two sentences together. The particles xeM/-aM/eM /hem/-.îm/em/,
-aa/fle /-da/de/, and -flbip/anp /-dır/dir/, the postposition ÖHJieH /bilen/, and t h e word
formation suffix + j i u / jim /+h/li/, also function to connect words. Ali of these elements
usually are equivalent to English 'and' or 'also, too'.
The conjunction Be /we/ 'and' joins homogeneous components of a sentence to
indicate enumeration and succession of people, places, things or aetions. Whe.n there
are more than two components, the conjunction is placed between the last tv o while
the previous ones are linked by intonadon. For the most part, use of this conjunction
is confined to vvritten Türkmen.

K oM aH flM p 6 y a s u ı t m x e p e K e x n e p H H H ömıımm B e ohbi T a H an flM . (G)

/Komonnir bu aya:hr) herekeüerini bilipdi we om tana:pdı./
The commander had known the movements of this woman and recognized her.
434 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Conjunctions

COORD1NATING
Connection Contradiction Correlation

Be, y /we, u / and, Mene /yö:nö/ but, only, a(-fla) /ya:(-da)/ or,
xeM/-aM/eM /hem / 3MM3 /emma:/ but, H(-fla)...a(-fla)
-ara/em / and, a l s o , however, siiceM /e y0em/ /ya:(-da)...ya:(-da)/ either
xeM-fle /hem-de/ and also, (not only) but, rather, ...or, - m h / mm (a(-fla)...
uıeitne xeM / ş e y l e h e m / BenH(H) /weli(n)/ -m ii / mh) /-mı/mi
as well as, -fla/fle /-da/de/ however, #eHe Berat (ya:(-da)... -mı/mi)/)
and, too, -fl&ıp/flup /yö:nö weli/ while, either...or, Ks(Te)
/-dır/dir/ and, ö m ı e H nonetheless, 3MMa Beroı ...KaCre) /ka:(te)...kâ:(te)/
/bilen/ and, +mı/mf /emma: weli/ but then, now this...now that,
l+lı/li/ and bcjikh fiene /welin yö:n ö/ xa... xa(-fla) /ha:...
but only, a /a/ but, ha:(-da)/ whether
erca(M) /yog0o(m)/ this.-.orthat, xana...xana
if not, 6onca(-fla) /ha:Ia...ha:la/ whether
/bol0o(-do)/ as for, and, this...or that, fla/fle
6oJiMaca /bolmoOo/ ...fla/fle /da/de...da/de/
otherwise, orçna(-fla) whether ...or, xeM...xeM
/onno(-no)/ but, stili, /hem ...hem/ both...and,
uıeöne-fle 6onca /3eyle-de He... He /ne...ne/
bol0o/ even so, Myrça neither...nor,
rapaMa3flaH/murço Ma/Me...Ma/Me /ma/me
garamaSSan/ but anyway ...ma/me/ by...by,
6np ...6np /bir...bir/
first.. .then

SUBORDINATING
Condition Contingency Causation Quotation

3 re p (-fle )/e g e r(-d e )/ x a u a H /h a c a n / ny H K H / ç ü n k ü / f lid İ H n / d i y i p /

( a n d ) i f , S a p f lH - w hen b ecau se, ce 6 a6 n s a y in g , th a t,
re n flH /b a r d ı- g e lli/ /0 e b â :b i/ th e «H eH /d i y e n /
in case reason is, because named, called
 Conjunctions 435

IHeMjıenHKfle, aflMHHHCTpaniB Mape ynaHtmaıman con xycycw KoonepaTHBnepfleH,

4>HpManapflaH Be accoiJiHaniKiJiapflaH fleBJieT 6tox,emHe ntpeH nyn cepnniflecn 355
MyH MaHaT Sonflbi. (N) /Seylelike, admini9tıratiw câ:re ulonulonnon 9orj huöuöı
kooperatiwlerden, firmalardan vve a08o9ia9iyalardan döwlöt bujetine giren pul
0erisde0i 355 miiıj manat bollı./
As a result, after administrative measures were employed, the amount of money
coming into the budget from private cooperatives, firms and associations
amounted to 355 thousand manats.

Benamın, Maxpıt*;eMajibnı B e KejDKiSHHH nrrMejiH yrypnapH 6npfl«. (G)

/Wepa:mi), Mâhrijema:hi] we Keljâ:nir) gitmeli ugurlon birdi./
Vepa, Mahrijemal and Kelje were to go in the same direction.

The conjunction y /u/ 'and, or' vvas used in the classical Turkmen language in
Arabic seript, and stili appears in some styles of modem literatüre. It is a variant of the
conjunction B e /vve/ (both derive from Arabic).

OrnaHy-rbi3 önrpnMM Gsuı aflaM füonyn, 6m yıiHBepcHTe-ruH cJıımojıoniK

4>aKyın»TeTHHHH flHJi-3fle6nsrr 6 anyMHHfle 6sın Mbuınan 6w ıe OKaflbiK. (G)
/Oglonu-gı:8 yigrimi bâ:s a:dam bolup, bi8 uniwer9itetirj filologik fakultetinit] dil-
edebiya:t bölümünnö bâ:s yılla:p bile okoduk./
We twenty-five people, young men and women, studied in the department of
language and literatüre of the philological faculty of the university for five years.
Oji: «Mp-y-rHM Men xeM my MeuiMsn caKacbuman cyB ımepMH» flMÜMn, xbismı.mfla
reTepflH üopflH. (N) /Ol "İ:r-u-gi:c men hem su cesmâ:rj 0aka9uınan 9uw içerin"
diyip, hıya:luına götördü yö:rdü./
He was carrying in his thoughts the idea that sooner or later be also vvould drink
vvater at the source of this spring.

The partide xeM/-aM/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'also' funetions to connect tvvo items in a

series, tvvo parts of a sentence or tvvo sentences, in the sense o f 'in addition to' another
person, item or action vvhich usually are mentioned in a previous context. its English
equivalents are 'and' and 'also'. In spoken Turkmen, this partide usually is pronounced
vvithout the initial x /lı/ and even in vvriting is joined to the end of vvords as -aın/eM
/-am-om/em-öm/.

MbirbiMMbmapbiu apacMHfla Typöaıı xcm 6apflbi. (G)

/Yıgımcılarır) a:ra0ınna Gurba:n hem ba:rdı./
Gurban also vvas among the harvesters.

IHona Men3eıu x;aö oji TOBepeKfle eKflypaM. (G)

/Soıjo merjSes ja:y ol tövvörökdö yo:kdurom./
Tlıere’s no house like this in those parts, either.
436 Türkmen Reference Grammar

y>oiH x e M 6 e & ıe K H EenasrmaptınaM enSauiMHnapHHMn 6 y Mecenefle

U lo n y n
oünanMaKntırBi repeK. (TP12.2) /Sonurj ü£ü:n h e m beyleki wela:yatlanqam
yo:lbasĞılarınıq bu me0elede o:ylonmoklugı gerek./
That’s also why it’s necessary for leaders of the other provinces to think about this
issue.

Tok eHYMJiepım, Hp-HÜMHiıınepHH Ken Sonca, Manflap«mıi)UK xeM ectiap. (TP12.2)

/Gö:k ömümlörüi), i:r-iymisleriq köp bolöo, ma:lla:rcıhk hem Ö0yâ:r./
When you have a Iot of crops and fruit, animal husbandry also develops.

ToM afleHHMe ütuiflan xeM roBpaK B arr renaw. (TV16.2)

/Toy edenime üc yıllan hem gowra:k wagt gecdi./
And more than three years have passed since I got married.

O r jıa H H X e M O H f le p r- O H ajrra smmapLiHfla e { in e H f ln p ı n m n p ıı e p . (TV16.1)

/Oglom hem on dö:rt-on altı ya:slarınna öylönniirüpdürlör.
They also married off boys at the age of fourteen to sixteen.

b t a a repYiıiHHH3 aım, 6y epfle ep KspeHHecıme anan narraHHnap xeM narra

t a r a n Hep. (TV7.2) /inha: görüsiigüS ya:h, bu yerde yer ka:renne0ine alan
pagtacılar hem pagta yığıp yö:r./
Here, as you can see, the cotton vvorkers who have leased space on this land also
are pickiag cotton.

The partide xeıw /hem/ also is used in the expressions xeM-ne /hem-de/ 'and also'
and ıu etine xeM /şeyle hem/ 'as well as' (üterally: 'also like this'), vvhich connect like
components of a sentence.

Illeitae narraH tt flennuısn öactmaıma, narraHHn reBpyMM om enfisp, x e \ ı - j j e on

to b u epnem fcp. (TV7.3) /Şeyle pagta:m depgilâ:p baOılanna, pagta:nııj göwrümü
kicelyâ:r, hem-de ol gowı yerlesyâ:r./
When the cotton is stâmped down like this, the volüme of the cotton decreases
and it also sits well.

3nnn Manaflbm apKa ay3YHfle TypKMeHHCTant^ repÖH, metine xeM rafltiMtı

sjflMrspnınuıepMHHH 6npw epneıufliıpııneH. (TP2.2) /Elli manadıç arka yüSünnö
Tiirkmönü00a:mq gerbi, şeyle hem gadı:mı ya:dıgâ:rliklerinii) bi:ri yerlesdirilen./
On the back face of the 50 manat are placed the seal of Türkmenistan as well as
one of the ancient monuments.

M eH KaKaM 6mıeH, ax;eM S rn ıe H , m e tin e xeM floraH&iM Be jkhehm Ö M nen

suuaapLiH. (TV4.5)
/Men karkam bilen, ejem bilen, şeyle hem dogomım we jigim bilen ya:saya:nn./
I live with my father, with my mother, as -well as with my brothers and sisters.
 Conjunctions 437

The paıticle -Ra/fle /-da/de/ can be used as a conjunction in the meaning 'and'. It is
attached by a hyphen to the first verb of homogeneous predicates of a sentence.

flyenep H r u m 6 a ı c u n TOKflyjıep-ne, öypyHnapuHH a M tm iM a r a 6 a ı ı ı n a f l t ı n î p. (G)

/Düyölör ı:gına bakıp £ökdülör-dö, burunlorunı acısma:ga başladılar./
The camels knelt down, tuming their heads toward the lead (animal), and tlıey
began to dilate their nostrils.

On eHe 6 w p flS B yM MepeK M iiK a p flb i- n a , ar3bma canflu. (G)

/Ol yene bir döwüm cörök cıkardı-da, agSına öalh./
He took out another piece of bread, and he put it into his mouth.
lOpflaMaH 6onca ynyflaH 6np fleM anflbi-aa, coparam tı raÜTanaMaflbi. (BH)
Yu:rdoma:n bo!0o uludon bir dem allı-da, 0o:rogunı gaytalamadı./
Yurdaman took a deep breath, and he did not repeat his question.

On armam rucflu-fla, iituırbip:*aKnan: - Be MyHH H3Xioih flyınynn(HpceMK3M -

flHÜflH. (IP13.2)
/Ol eğnini gı00ı-da, yılgırjakla:p; "Be mum na.hili düsünniir0ömkâ:m" diydi./
He shrugged his shoulders, and said vvith a smile "Hovv can I explain it?"

Another function of the partide -jja/ne /-da-do/de-dö/ is to connect two actions,

one of vvhich is expressed in a preceding context, in the sense of English 'too'.

Xs 3np onu-fla r e 3 j ıe 0 3 p M H iıı n e p . (G) /Hâ:Sir onı-da gö81öyâ:rmisler./

Now apparently they’re looking for him, too.

AflaMJiap! üeıarH MHpaSbin ce3yıiM 3iıiHTflnn>i3, hhum M e m ıif ce3yMe-fle ly.aaıc

acun! (G)
/A:damlar! Pökgü mi:ra:bıi) 0ö5ünü esitdirçiS, inni menig 0öSiimö-dö gulok .10113!/
Gentlemen, you’ve heard the vvords of Pökgi the inigator, novv listen to my
vvords, too!

IHy 3amapa 6 m m ymiMia-fle ryııaKap. (N)

/Su 5a:tlara biSirj ücümü8-8ö güna:ka:r./
The three of us are guilty of these things, too.

KaTe mefine-He 6oncyn x o b . (N) /Kâ:te şeyle-de b olö u n ho:w./

Hey, it should be like this too, sometimes.

The partide -fjbip/jjnp /-dır/dir/ also may serve to connect homogeneous

components in the meaning 'and' vvhen it is added to the fîrst of tvvo linked items, as
in ny3flyp 6ypn /du:58ur burç/ 'salt and pepper' and ra3eTRHp acypııajuıap /guSetdir
zumallar/ 'nevvspapers and magazines'.
438 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

(G)
E a n .ip fli.ip M ep rae p xeM x o B n n tı a m a ö n a p fla TaHanap.
/Ba:tırdır mertler hem howplı yagdaylarda tanalya:r./
Both the hero and the brave person are recognized in times of danger.
Haxap Hitan o n ıp K a n r e n e B H 3 0 p repM eK n-fla KHTannup r a 3 e T O KaM aK 6 o n M a 3 .
(N) /Nahar iyip otı:rka:jj televviSor görmök ya:-da kita:pdır gaSet okomok bolmoS./
You can’t watch television or read a book or nevvspaper while eating dinner.

The postposition ö h jic h /bilen/ 'with' may act as a conjunction in the meaning
'and' when it appears between homogeneous parts of a sentence (also see 407). It is
found in common expressions like ny3 6 hjich 6ypq /du:S bilen burç/ 'salt and pepper'
and corau Gıınen noMHflop /öogon bilen pomidor/ 'onion and tomato'.

OpcrenflM GıtneH H s 3h k e3nepHHHn K epn e oryrtrıapbiHbi repecnepn renüapflH . (G)

/Orflgelli bilen Nâ:6ik ö:61öriinüq körpö ogullorum göröGlörü gelyâ:rdi./
Orsgeldi and Nâzik vvere vvanting to see their toddlers.
3nnıt BuneH anrM tnutm apanttrbiH.ua ceH He-X3 snn, He-fle rapptt - rymıep raByn
uınpecH anbi 6ana flypynflbip. (N) /Elli bilen altmısıi) a:rahgmna 0en ne-ha: ya:s,
n e -d e g a m - güniör ga:wun si:reöi ya:lı b ad a durupdur./
When you’re betvveen fifty and sixty you’re really neither young nor old- the days
seem to tum to honey like the juice of a melon.

The attribute suffix + j i u /jih /+lı/li/ may connect homogeneous subjects or objects
of a sentence. This usage generally occurs vvith terms of relationship.

'la p b t a ra h k h aflaMt! aT ajıu -n .13 h kh ch h c x ;a ü TafisıpnaMara ron aM ib in b ira

HÖepflH. (G) /C a:rı a :ga ik i a :d am ı atah -gı:8 ik iB in e ja :y ta yy a :rla m a :g a
g o :n o m c u lu g o i:berdi./
Chan-aga sent tvvo people to the cemetery to prepare a place for both the father
and the daughter.
3 n e J l H r b i 3 h k h c h Mbipaflbin enyH a h k h T a M flb ip M ep eK smflbmap. (G)
/Eneli gı;8 iki0i Mıra:dıi] yo:Iuno iki tamdu- cörök yapdılar./
The mother and the daughter both made tvvo batehes of bread for Mırat’s trip.

Contradiction
Conjunctions that connect tvvo sentences by indicating a contradiction or opposition
betvveen them are Mene /yö:nö/, 3MMa /emma:/ and sttceıvf /ey0em/. The modal vvord
DejiH (n) /weli(n)/ and its combined forms MeHe BenH /yö:nö vveli/ and 3M M a BeJiH
/emma: vveli/, the partide a /a/, and the vvords and expressions e r c a /yog0o/, Gonca
/bol0o/, 6 o n c a - f l a /bol0o-do/, ö o n M a c a /bolmoflo/, o H fla (- fla ) /onno(-do)/, m e ü jıe - g e
Gonca /seyle-de bol0o/ and Myna r a p a M a 3 f la H /mur)o garamaSSan/ also fulfill this
funetion.
 Conjunctions 439

When the conjunction Sene /yörnö/ appears at the beginning of the second of two
sentences, the first of which is in a preceding context, it indicates contrast or
contradiction in the meaning 'but'.

ftone my B a r r ıuon (Jjyrtkma-fla k s h raınan MepeHOK. (TV16.4)

/Yö:nö su wagt sol fiıtbolo-da: kâm gatna:p yöröno:k./
But now he hasn’t been participating in that soccer much, either.

tione M yrça flepeK on «eBJiernepHm es nynyııu m,xapua7K,amurbi Sapafla

KenjumaMa Tanan 3 T fln . (N) /Yörnö mugo derek ol döwlötlöriii] ö:8 pulum
cıkarmajakdıgı ba:rada kepi:lna:ma talap etdi./
But instead of this he demanded a guarantee that other states wouid not issue their
own money.

- CeH f ly p M y n ıa *a>tKXhm,Mhü Miıttım, o j i T ymapnan c o p a f l t ı .

- yttKBrnflMM. ttan e eTeH ilıuı aM ptm tnufltnc. Ce6s6n MaraMtn eKfltı. (H)
/'Sen durmuso cıkdırjmı?" diyip, ol Gülna:rdan 0o:rodı.
"Ğıkıpdım. Yörnö ötön yıl ayrılısdık. 8ebâ:bi ca:ga:nuS yo:kdı."/
"Are you married?" he asked Gülnar.
1 was married. But last year we got divorced. The reason is we had no children."

İtene uym rapaMaşnaH, IIpe3HneHTMn repK e3M eflnp Ta6uibiptiKnapbiHM epHHe

eTHpMeıme re p n e m H xaruibm-cajıın,JHjn>iK 3flnnnn rejntHÜap. (TV14.2)
/Yörnö murjo garamaSSan, PreSidentii] görköSmödür tabsınklannı yerine
yetirmekde gömötüm ha:lhi)-0allır)lık edilip gelinyâ:r./
But in spite of this, there has been blatant negligence in carrying out the
instructions and assignments of the President.

When iienc /yö:nö/ occurs at the beginning of the second of two connected
sentences, it indicates qualification or mitigation in the meaıiing 'only'. This
conjunction is closer in meaning to English 'only' (also see BejiHH Kene /welin yö:nö/
below) than to 'but'.

CepeT, ıuy rbötiJi KetfHeK «Man oBaflaH, K e n e rtiMMaTMHKa flHÜfeH.

(TV5.4) /Beret, su gıSıl köynök yaman owodon, yö:nö gunmatmıka: diyyan./
Look, this red dress is very pretty, only I wonder whether it’s expensive?

B e to K ©36erncTarçaaH rerooı a n a p n a p , tteHe ö h s h h ©3yMM3MH 6eifneKH

ra m n a n c a n a p r a T H r o B H 6 o jx * ;a K . (İP İ 2.2)
B e n a a T n a p b tH fla H
/Beylâ.-k Ö:5bögü00a:nnan gelip alya:riar, yö:nö biSiıj ö:8ümü8üj) beyleki
wela:yatlannnan gelip alBalar gatı gowı boljok./
They come here from Özbekistan and buy (vegetables), only it vvould be much
better if people came from our own other provinces and bought them.
440 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

When the conjunction 3 MMa /emma:/ appears at the begiıuıing of the second of two
sentences, the first of which occurs in a preceding context, it is equivalent to English
'but'. When it appears at the beginning of the second of two linked sentences, it is
equivalent to Tıowever'. In both cases, 3Mina /emma:/ signals that the thought or
action of the second sentence is differentiâted from or countered to that o f the first.
This conjunction is eloser to 'hovvever' in both usages and more emphatic than üone
/yö:nö/.

3MMa aflaMnap OHyn n .13 m anıran aflbirbiHtı fleppeB TaHafltmap. (G)

/Emma: a:damlar onur) gı:S masgaladıgını derrew tanadılar./
But people understood immediately that this was a girl.

SıuMaıoj c o n -c o n n a p Kenyrç c y B u 6up ryflp aT 6nneH öynantın SaumaHM&nıı.

(BH) /Emma:kı 0oi)-0oi]lor kö:lüi] 0uwı bir gudrot bilen bulonup baila-.nmıs./
But then later on, by some power, the water of the lake apparently started to tum
muddy.

By cbmar ÖHpHsıe re3eK raiİTananflu, SMMa neflfla öepMefljı. (G)

/Bu 0ı:nag bimâ:ce geSek gaytalannı, emma: peyda: bermedi./
This experiment has been repeated several times, however it did not give any
results.

-Be-e, MeHHH o r n y M u n A M e p r a c a nifleHHHe oh ryH 6ojiflw, 3MMa oıiflaH xmh xmjim

xa6ap eK. (N) /'Be-e, menirj oglumui) Amerika: gidenine o:n gün bollı, emma:
onnon hi:c hi:li habar yo:k./
"Hmm, ten days have passed since my son went to America, however, there’s no
news at ali from him."

When the conjunction süceM /eyOem/ '(not only) but' is placed at the beginning of
the second of two sentences, the first of which is in a preceding context, it is
equivalent to English 'but'. 9iiceM /Ey0em/ also is used in the constructions 'not
on!y...but' and 'not... rather'.

3üccm, TypKMeHMH nbiraMÖep uıaxbipu M arruM rynu pyxynqa xyflaa

siKLiHJiauibin, n ı y H t ı KyitceMsıiMMflM ıraMe? (N) /Ey0em, türkmönüi] pı:gamber
sa:hı:rı Magtımgulı ru:hunno huda:ya yakımlasıp, Suni kü:0ömâ:runidi nâ:me?/
But, didn’t Magtımguh, the prophet-poet of the Turkmen, draw nearer to God in
his soul, and long for this?

C y B AMue sK ep aım m iM K 3ÜceM M a iifla p tü in u rtı, MHBeHiiJinrH,

6aJitiKMMJiHrbi ecflypM eK ymhii xeM repeK. (H) /0uw d iıje e k e ra :n cılık d â:l, eyO em
m a :lla :rc ıh g ı, m i:w e c ilig i, b a :lık c ılıg ı ö 0 0 ü n n ö k ü cü :n h e m gerek./
Water is necessary for developing not only field agriculture, but also animal
lıusbandry, hoıticulture and the fishing industry.
 Conjunctions 441

3üceM, flMue reK MeceJieceMMM? (N) /Ey0em, dige gö:k me8ele0emmi?/

B ut, is it only a question o f vegetables?

Ten 6y hkh uıaxcwn xaüctıctiHi>m Auimk Aüfliin ımpflHTKHfle flajı-fle, 3 üci:m

AuıtK Aiifltm irap flnÜMJiöaH maxcb[n sımeMe actıpnapflaH öapH axa-
6aSanapL[MM3 TapanHHflaH KepaMarau a#aM xeKMYime, flnöcen xopMaraaı [turan
renHHHsHJDirHHfle. (N)
/Gep bu iki sahöııj hayöıöımi] A :sık A:ydır) pirrdiginne dâ:l-le, eyöem A:sık:
A:ydır) pi:r diyilyâ:n sahSıi] en£eme aSırlardan ba:ri ata-ba:balaranı6 tarapırrıan
kera:matlı atdam hökmunnö,diy0ei) hoımotlonulup gelinyâ:nliginne./
The question is n o t which o f these two persons is Ashık Aydmg-pir, ra tlıc r it is
hat the person called Ashık Aydıng-pir has been respected in his capacity at a holy
man by our ancestors for many centuries.

The modal word nejiHH /w elin/ (variant bgjim /vveli/) 'however, while, and yet' (see
386) also may express contrast and contradiction between homogeneous predicates o f a
simple sentence, or between clauses o f a compound sentence.

- fly ita xeM my raByH 6mh ManaTflanafci Bejuı, 6y ryH OHtt anrtmaH caTspiiap-na.
(N) /"Dü:n hem su ga:wun bâ:i> manatdannı weli, bu:n om altıdan 0atya:rlaı-la."/
"Just yesterday this melon went for five manats, how ever, today they’re s ; lling it
for six." [or: V h ile today'] [compound sentence]

©3yMM flyH^afle hu S a m ıtı a#aM xacan 3flüapflHM. ^ a r a r a n ttı Bejuııı, e3y vihh
ajıHtımaıuiLirtiMH moıtfla 6ıuiflHM. (N) /Ö:8ümü dünyâ:de irj bagtlı a:daır ha:0ap
edyâ:rdim. Ğa:ga ga:llı welin, ö:8ümüq yalqı5anlıgımı sonno billim./
I considered m yself the happiest person in the world. I became pregnant, however,
and I realized then that I had made a mistake. [simple sentence]

floraHornannapLiM toh renMecıoı-s reJiMeflimep b&jihh, «O hmm orypjıaHH ii,

MyHLiM İİHTflM» fliıMıuT, toMh 6ynan 6nnflwıep. (N)
/Dogonoglonlorum toyo gelme6in-â: gelmediler welin, "Onum ogurlonnı, tnunum
yitdi" diyip, toyı bula:p billiler./
My cousins didn’t even come to the toy, an d yet, they vvere able to spoil tlıe toy
by saying "That of mine vvas stolen, this o f mine vvas stoien." [simple sentence]

I l l y flepManxaHanapfla erçnep-s K e n flepınaH GapflaM Basın, m y Barr 6«p flejjM an

erM e3w m reM öojıap. (TV9.4) [öapflaM < öapflbi xeM]
/Su derma:nha:nalarda örjlör-â: köp derma:n ba:rdam weli, su wagt bir derir ;ı:n
yetmeSciligem bolyaır./ [ba:rdam < ba:rdı hem]
There vvere a lot of medicines in these drugstores before, hovvever, these da »s
there’s a slıortage of some medicines. [or: 'vvhile these days'] [compound sentence]
442 Türkmen Reference Grammar

In combination with 3MM3 /emma:/ or Mene /yö:nö/, the modal word BejiHH
/welin/ expresses the equivalent of English 'nonetheless, notwithstanding', 1)111 then',
'but orily' and 'while'.

fİoHe BeiiHH, rtiHaHcaK-fla, MyrajuifeiMnapun KsSııpuHfle rneflne cMnaxnapbin

eKflyn.nn.1 CSenneMemı 6onap. (G) /Yö:nö welin, gı:nan0ak-da, mugollumlorur]
ka:birinne şeyle öıpatlarır) yo:kdugum bellemeli bolya:r./
Nonetheless, unfortunately one must note the lack of such qua!ities among certain
teachers.

tteH e BejiHH ınoıı poBasrriin TMMcanMHH MemiH e3yM-3 ıneftnepsK ay^ T O H m .

(N) /Yo:nö welin sol rowa:yatııj tım8a:lmı menir) ö:8üm-â: seylerârk döiiinnüm./
Nevertheless, my own self, I understood the point o f that legend more like this.

0 « s e ç ilin in M aflfltı G afin b irtı 6 ap, tio ııc p y x w TaftflaH BejiHH x ,y fla r a p t m . (N )
/Ö y eyeBinir) m ad d i b a :y lıg ı b a:r, y ö :n ö ru :hı ta:yd an w e lin ju d a : ga n :p ./
The home-owner has material wealth, nonetheless, he’s very poor from the
spiritual point-of-view.

tteHe aflaMKapniöiMreM re p e K BejiHH, hiii 3-mereM rep eK axı>ıpHH. (N)

/Yö:nö a:damkâ:r£iligem gerek welin, i:s etmegem gerek a:hınn./
Notwithstanding that humanism is necessary, it’s also necessary to work, after
ali.
Hleftne mysı xa6ap TanaH aflaMbntbi flwrpeH>K;eK xeM Gonaynap, 3MMa B ejin on
xa6apw renıpeH Man cara-an flatixaH ryHSKop flanflu. (G)
/Şeyle sum habar tapan a:damını yigrenjek hem bollulor, emma: weli ol haban
getiren 6a:l 0akgal dayha:n günâ:ka:r dâ:lli./
They were just on the point of hating the man who found out such bad news, but
then, this gtay-bearded peasant who brought the news was not guilty.

3 » ;e , o h h 3TMeK 6on^aK BejiHH, iio n e Cana H3Me flneprcs? (G)

/Eje, onı etmek boljok welin, yö:nö 0apa: na:me diyerka:?/
Mother, we can do this, but only, what will Sapa say? [or: '\vhile we can do this']

The partide a /a/ functions to express an appeal and may serve to contrast two
sentences when it appears at the beginning of the second of them. Combined vvith
G onca /bolOo/ (variant: C o n ca M /bol0om/) 'as for', its contrastive nature is
emphasized.

- A, ıny narram m kjuioch HSMe, X33np narra 6axacw? (TV7.3)

/'A, su pagta:nır) kilo0ı na:ce, hâ:8ir pagta bahaOı?"/
"But how much is a kilo of this cotton, the price of cotton now?"
 Conjunctions 443

X aB a,KaıcaM Xbipt>map I a a ç a p yccaH rtr a b iH a . A MeH 6ojıcaw X bipbiqap ATa

Kaccan rit3fc[Ha. (G) /Hawa, ka:kam hmda:r Gajar u00a:g gı:5ına. A men bol0om
hmdarr Ata ka00a:rj gı:Sma./
Yes, my father is attracted to Gajar-ussa’s daughter. But as for me, I’m attracted
to Ata-kassa’s daughter.

The conjunction word erca /yog0o/ (variant: ercaM /yogOom/) 'if not, otherwise',
which is a conditional form of the modal vvord eK /yo:k/ 'there is/are not', funetions in
the role of a conjunction. It is placed before the last of tvvo or more homogeneous
predicates.

3 ü naTbtıuaM, cana eKe flepMaH 6ap, ihohm 3Tcen ryTyrrspcbîH, ercaM enöapcjın.
(G)
/Ey pa:tısam, 0ar)a yeke derma:n ba:r, som e00er) gutulya:r0ırj, yogOom ölyâ:r0ir)./
Hey, my king, there’s Only one medicine for you, if you take it, then you’ll
recover, othervvise, you’ll die.

3nnepHHM3H reTepHH, e rc a M HHe nnBHmo! (G)

/EllerirjiSi götörüi), yogOom ine gitdirjiS!/
Raise your hands, or you’re done for. ['if not, you’re gone from here']

The conjunction vvords Gonca /bol0o/ 'as for, and', Gonca-fla /bol0o-do/ 'anyvvay'
and GoJiMaca /bolmoOo/ 'otherwise, or else' indicate contradiction, differentiation or
contrast.

CeH TH 3 u ı y e p f l e ıı r e T e p ı t n , G o n M a c a h i u h u h r a f t T a p a p b r a . (G)
/0en ti:8 su yerden götürül, bolmo0o i:siqi gaytarann./
Get avvay from here quick, othervvise it’ll be avvful for you. [miiimhh raftrapMaK
/i:sirji gaytarmak/ 'to break up someone’s affair' = 'to be avvful']

fleBJieT en6aumtınapL! BarrnM-BarrMHfla renep-renep flypap. BaTaıı Gonca

rajıap. (N)
/Dövvlöt yo:lbas£ılan wagth-wagtmna geler-gecer duror. Watan bol0o ga:lar./
State leaders vvill come and go in their time. As for the Homeland, it vvill
remain.
IDy ryuııep Sonca, 3aBOflMH TaptrxMHfla yror 6np BaKa 6onyn re^Msp. (N)
/Su güniör bo!0o, Savvodug tan:hınna uh bir wa:ka bolup gecyâ:r./
And these days, a great event is taking place in the history of our plant.

X s 3 H p G o n c a M eH CH3e M a H a m a p H re p K e 3 e p H H Be O H flaK tı 6 e n jiM K n e p H

(TP2.2)
flyııiY H H H pepH H .
/Hâ:8ir bol0o men 0i5e manatlan görkö8örün vve onna:kı bellikleri düsünnürörün./
And now I’ll shovv you the manats and explain the symbols on them.
444 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Eonca-fla, roBH f l t m anaç. (BG) /Bol0o-do, gowı dı:nc alya:6./

Anyway, we’re having a good rest.
3rep-fle antıpfla aflaM TpyöKaHtı anca, ıuy xeT0H auıaK ranüsp. AHa. Mhhh
Gonca rYpjıeniHÖepMejiH. (TV17.4) /Eger-de arçırda ardanı tırubka:m al0a, su zeton
asa:k gidya:r. Ana. İnni bol0o gürlösübemıeli./
And if a person on the other end picks up the phone, this token goes down. There
it is. And now you have to go ahead and talk.

When placed at the beginning of the second of two connected sentences, the adverb
OHfla(-fla) /onno(-do)/ 'then' may act as a contrastive conjunction equivalent to 'stili,
but'.

Mnı ryHH 6ııp aöftaM 6anmaHtmnı.ıp, OHfla-aa kojixo3 npaBneHHecmutu r a fiti

YMcyMnMKfljı. (G) /l:s günü bir eyyâ:m baslanıpdır, onno-do kolhoS
prawleniye0inir) ja:yı ümSümlükdü./
The working day began a while ago, stili the office öf the kolhoz management
board was silent.

The expressions nıefijıe-ne Öojıca /seyle-de bol0o/ (literally 'if it be thus') and
Myrça rapaıua3aaH /murjo garamaSSan/ (literally 'without looking at this') are used to
contrast two sentences and are equivalent to English 'even so' and 'but anyway'.
r tıa mon 6ara reuMeKMM öonflLt, 3MMa raMiranaptt reBHeMeflK. nieMne-ae Gonca
n .13 6ara 6apbm, ouyu flamana öeünK xasrr cajiflbiptın, HmaMara 6auınafltı. (G)
/Gı:5 sol ba:ga göcmekci bolh, emma: ga:ymlan göwnömödü. Seyle-de bolöo gı:6
ba:ga banp, onurj dasına beyik ha:yat 0allırıp, ya:sama:ga başladı./
The girl wanted to move to this garden, but her in-laws didn’t want this. Even so,
the girl moved to the garden, fenced it in and began to live there.
TyH xac rnapınniflH, ınyna rapaMa3qaH 6h3 ena flyufflYK- (G)
/Gün ha:0 gi:jigipdi, murjo garama8San bi8 yo:lo düsdük./
It had already become late, but we set off anyway.

Correlalion
The constructions a(-na)...H(-fla) /ya:(-da)...ya:(-da)/ 'either...or', -mm/mh (fl(-fla)...
-mm/mh) /-mı/mi (ya:(-da)...-mı/mi)/) 'either...or', Ka(Te)...Ka(Te) /ka:(te)...kâ:(te)/
'now this...now that, sometimes this...sometimes that', xa...xa(-aa) /ha:...ha:(da)/
'whether (this)... or (that)', -fla/-«e...-Aa/-ne /-da/de...-da/de/ 'whether...or, either... or',
xeM...xeM /hem...hem/ 'both...and', He(-fle)...ne(-ne) /ne(-de)...ne(-de)/ 'neither...nor',
-Ma/Me...Ma/Me /-ma/me...-ma/me/ 'by...by' and önp...6np 'first this...then that'
serve to correlate two or more components of a sentence or two sentences.
 Conjunctions 445

The conjunction a /ya:/ (variant: a-fla /ya:-da/) 'or' indicates the offer of an option
and is placed before the second of two conelated components in a sentence or be.tvveen
two connected sentences. This conjunction also may be placed at the beginning of a
sentence, when the other half of the option is in the preceding context. When used with
a negative verb, this construction is equivalent to 'nor'.

Oji ap3a r o n Meıc^eK E jijih m m fl ceH, fle p n e jıa ö ce , Enim a go ra n 6epx;eKMM s ceH
agoran 6ep:*;eKMH7 (G) /Ol arSa: g o l c e k je k Y e llim i ya: 8 en , d em e lâ :y0 e , Yelli
jo g a :p b e rje k m i ya: 0en jo g a :p b erjekm i?/
Will it be Yelli or you signing the application? If they eheck, which of you will
answer-Yelli or you? ['will Yelli answer or will you answer?']

Y ry p cto 6onaiiMacbiH »-Ra c e H 03yu xaK r e 3 y u f l e H m iih tah h m h ? (G)

/Ugur8u8 bola:yma0ın ya:-da 0en ö:5ür) hak göBünnön esitditjmi?/
Maybe it’s not true, or did you hear it yourself from reliable sources?

R OKa6epceMMMK3M, MbipaT? (G) /Ya: oka:ber0emmika:m, Mıra:t?/

O r, Myrat, should I continue studying?

Tajibinnapa tsiuim SepMeK a-fla onapflan Tajıan 3Tmök y^ iih onapbi repeıam OKyB
3c6annapM 6mıeHeM-3 yn*,yH 3TMejiHflHp. (N)
/Ta:lı:plara tâ:lim bermek ya:-da olordon talap etmek ücü:n olorı gerekli oku w
e6ba:plan bilenem-a: üpjün etmelidir./
In o rd e r to e d u ca te students o r to m a k e d em and s o n them , w e m ust su p p ly them at
least w ith th e te xtb o o k s th e y n eed .

Ek, o n ceanep flsJi a-fla 6 y ceanep MeHMH xep 6up a ü f lb in a H x o m ce3t;

neB xe
anjıaTMaap. (N) /Yo:k, o l pöwhö 0ö51ör dâ:l y a : - d a b u
r o M n a p b i n fte p e m iH n iM M
0ö51ör menir) her bir a y d ı l a n h o s 0ö8ö gomporup yörönlügümü ai)latmaya:r./
No, those are not timid words, nor do these words indicate that I’ve been )>utting
on airs vvith every pleasant word I’ve said.

3 tjim 6epern ru3n.ni T a M f lu p a suibm a-fla ne*,HH nyxoBKacbma canun

6nuınpceneM öojıap. (TP5.5) /Etli börögü gıSgın tamdıra yapıp ya:-da pejii)
duhowko0uno 0ahp bisirOerjem bolor./
You can bake meat böreks by lining them in a hot tamdır o r by putting then in
the öven of a gas stove.

The construction a(-j(a)...fl(-na) /ya:(-da)...ya:(-da)/ 'either...or' indicates a ırhoice

between two components of a sentence.

By Tonapnap a KapaTOBa, a-fla MauıaflOBa ÜY3neHÜspflnJiep. (G)

/Bu toporlor ya: Kara:towa, ya:-da Masa:dowa yü61önya:rdiler./
These groups were addressing either Karatov or Mashadov.
446 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

C o M c a B flH Jieım e H-jja cknpbiH 3th h h a -fla r o t a y n 3thhm yn aH tm G o n a p . (TV5.3)

/0om0o e d i l n n e y a : - d a O ıg n i) e t i n i y a : - d a g o y n u t j e t i n i u l o n u p b o ly a :r ./
When somsa is made, one can use either beef or lamb.

The question partide -m u/m k /-mı/mi/ also is used in questions that seek to
identify tvvo or more possibilities, and may be added to the first of tvvo or to each of
the altematives. This partide may occur vvith fl-fla /ya:(-da)/ or'.

A n n a My3 aflaM tm re ro m e bmaHapMtı, 6wp anaMbm rerm He? (N )

/Alla: yiiS a:damıi) gepine ınanarmı, bir a:damırj gepine?/
Will God believe the vvord of a hundred people or the vvord of one person?

Oh ö tu ifla iî G spif 6 « p xojıoflMniHHrMMH3 S ap . By xenne HiııneMecHHM rotınbi.

HsMC 3TCeMK3M? Ts3eCHHH aJiaÜblHMM n peMOHT 3TflMpeÜHHMH? (T17.2)
/0:n yıllan bâ:ri bir holodilnigimiS ba:r. Bu hepde i:Sleme0ini goydı. Na:me
e08emka:m? Tâ:8e0ini alayınmı ya: remont etdireyinmi?/
We’ve had our refrigerator for ten years. It stopped vvorMng this vveek. What
should I do? Should I get a new one or have it repaired?

C e H x a i f c t ı m&hi h m m s h h x a n a a n ? T eK M H , r a p a M t i ? (TVI7.3)
/0en hayöı ca:yı icmâ:ni ha:laya:r)? Gö:kmü, garamı?/
Which kind of tea do you like to drink? Green or black?

When the question partide - m m / m h /-mı/mi/ is added to the positive (-u n ln n

/-ıp/ip/) and negative (-M3h/m3H /-ma:n/ma:n/) gerund forms of a verb, the
construction is equivalent to English 'vvhether or not'.

A m > m M U -a n M â H M b i G e n n s i f l a n . (G) / A l ı p m ı - a l m a : n m ı b e lli d â :l./

It’s unknovvn vvhether he took it or not.

rejiMnMH-reHMSHMM 6uneM30K. (G) /Gelipmi-gelma:nmi bilem5o:k./

We don’t know whether she’s come or not.

Tlıe adjective K3 /ka:/ 'some' may be used in the construction K3...K 3 /kâ:...ka:/ or
its common variants K3...K3TC /kâ:...kâ:te/, K 3T c...K 3T e /kâ:te...kâ:te/ and K3Te...K3Te
Bojjca /kâ:te...ka:te bol0o/ to correlate alternate actions. English equivalents inelude
'first...then', 'novv (this)-.novv (that)' or 'sometimes (this)-.sometimes (that)'.

Onyn opraK bi aKbiMMHfla a rau n ap , MacıiHKJiap K3 HyMİfopfliı, K3 m m k s p u m . (G)

/Onur) orto k ı akım m n a a ğ a ç la r, m aO lık lar k a: ciim y â:rd i, k a: cık ya :rd ı./
Tlıe trees and corpses first submerged, then came to the surface of the river in its
middle current.
 Conjunctions 447

O pa3 K a oöajıapfcin, K a ry M y n HMMH^eıı, k s t c ryM yrç 3Tern 6juıeH c y p y n , ryH

6aTMa3i.nn.in en HHMHfla e3 oöanapMHHH 6np neTHHfleH nıpflH. (G)
/Ora:6 ka: o:bolorurj, ka: gumurj icinnen, ka:te gumur) eteği bilen 0üriip, gün
batmaSmıi] örj yamuına ö:8 o:bolorunurj bir cetinnen gi:rdi./
Oraz sometimes drove through villages, sometimes in deserts and sometimes on
the edge of deserts, and entered from one edge of his village just before the sun
set.

The adverb K3Te /kâ:te/ 'sometimes' also may function as a conjunction on its own,
and is equivalent to 'and sometimes'.

ATaeB onapa ra3eT, KOTe xeM Kirran OKan öepflM. (G)

/Ata:yev oloro gaSet, ka:te hem kita:p oka:p berdi./
Atayev read nevvspapers to them, and sometimes books too.

Tlıe construction xa...xa(-fla) /ha:...ha:(-da)/ or xajıa...xajıa /ha:la...ha:la/ may be

used to correiate altematives and is equivalent to English 'whether (this)...or (that)'.

Xa traan, xa-fla tmamıa, cemin lOMinynki örnup^eK flsn, flanMHflen florptı

xa6ap. (G)
/Ha: man, ha:-da inanma, 0enii) yumlurjı bitirjek dâ:l, dâ:linnen dogn habar./
W hether you believe it or not, I won’t do your work for you, and this is definite.

The partide -ga/ge /-da/de/ may be added to two or more nouns to indicate
relationships like 'whether...or' and 'either...or'.

By ryH mocjıep-na, Monan-aa, Konxo3 Ganıjıtırtı-aa actm xgmm3MH3 83epKJin nen

xyKyKJiu xo»;aMbiH. (G) /Bu:n sofor-do, copon-no, kolhoS basügı-da a0ıl
hemmâ:mi8 öSerkli derj huku:klı hojoyun./
Today, basically ali of us- whether driver or herdsman o r head of a collective
farm- are our own masters with equal rights.

Men-a J(anaTapM-fla repeMOK, TyneHH-fle. (G)

/Men-a: Dagatan-da görömo:k, tüpör)ü-dö./
Me, I haven’t seen Dangatar or the gun either.

The partide xeın /hem/ 'also, too' (variants: -aM /eM /-am/em/) may be placed before
like components of a sentence as an equivalent to 'both...and...'

Ey aiîflHM MeHH x e M 6ereHjjHpj(M, x e M KeHe sıpaMM T33eneflH. (G)

/Bu aydım meni hem begennirdi, hem kö:nö yaramı ta:8eledi./
This song both made me happy and opened old vvounds.
448 Turkmen Reference Grammar

XeMMe kumuhhh reÜHHiueM, YCT-6aııuıaptiHa cepeflHumepH xeM repenne

anapntiKJiH. (N) [reiiHHiueM < reMroıuiH xeM] /Hemme kisi:nirj geynisem, Ü0[0]-
baslanna Oeredisleri hem göröllö alarlıklı./ [geynisem < geynisi hem]
Both the way everyone dresses and the way they take care of their appearance
should set an example.

Tapa3 xep afltm, aflaMtm aflbimmaM, maxepjm aflHHimaM 6np Tapuxtı 6ap-fla.
(TV8.1)
/GaraS her a:dıi), a:damıq a:dımıjam, sâherii) aıdınııjam bir tan:hı: ba:r-da:./
In short, every name, both a person’s name and a city’s name have some history.

The conjunction He /ne/ 'not, neither' (from Persian) may be placed before two or
more nouns or adjectives to express 'neither...nor'.

OrypaH aflaMnap He anıibman, He aMaHflan 6np artra ce3 aÜTMafltı. (G)

/Oturon a:damlar ne yagsıdan, ne yamandan bir agıS 065 aytmadı./
The people who were sitting didn’t say a single word neither good nor bad.

3jihh 6ııneH anTMMiiHH apantırtınfla ceH ne-xa hui, He-fle rapptı - ryHiıep raByn
HiHpecH anbi 6ana flypynflbip. (N) /Elli bilen altmışı^ a:ralıgınna 0en ne-ha: ya:s,
ne-de gam - günlör ga:wun si:re0i yadı bada durupdur./
When you’re between fifty and sixty you’re really neither young nor old- the
days seem to tum to honey like the juice of a melon.

The adverb-forming suffix +Ma/ıne /+ma-mo/me-mö/ (variant: +6a/6e /+ba-bo/be-

bö/) (see 547) is used between repeated words, mostly nouns, to indicate that an action
is performed in tums, step-by-step or from one unit to the next unit. In writing, the
partide is added to the first word, while the second vvord is separated by a hyphen.

niojı Barrnap MeHH ui3xepMe-maxep, 6a3apMa-6a3ap arrapHnflbipnap. (G)

/Sol vvagtlar meni sâherme-saher, ba:Sanna-ba:8ar agtanpdırlar./
Apparently at that time they looked for me city by city, market by market.

One of the usages of the numeral 6ııp /bir/ 'one' is to indicate that an action occurs
once. When it is used vvith two verbs, the construction G up-Sup /bir...bir/ indicates
'once (this)-.once (that)' or 'first (this)...then (that)'. The duplicated numeral may be
accompanied by other vvords to form such correlations as 6 n p canap...6np can ap /bir
0apar...bir Oapar/ 'one time (this)...one time (that)', 6 n p repcen...6H p re p c e n /bir
gör8öi]...bir görOöıg/ 'now...now' (literally 'if you see once (this)-.if you see once
(that)') and aftjıecHHe 6np...6eüjıecwHe 6 n p /eyleOine bir...beyle0ine bir/ (variant:
6 a p 3ÜnecMHe...6Hp ÖeÜJiecMHe /bir eyleOine...bir beyleOine/) 'once in this vvay...
once in that way'.
 Conjunctions 449

Xs3Mp EaüpaMfein My3» 6up rboapflbi, 6wp arapfltj. (G)

/Ha:6ir Bayramır) yüSü bir gıSardı, bir a:gardı./
Now Bayram’s face tumed first red, then vvhite.

Bııp repcen oraapa, 6wp repcen ryımepe Men3an jjypaH 6y 3Haütı H aram ı ap
3flnn açaıuiH suıtmunap. (G) /Bir görfSöi} otloro, bir göröör) güllörö mei]8a:p
duron bu ena:yı nagıslar edil ja:nh yaılıdılar./
Now resembling grass and now flowers, these omaments seemed as if they ı/eıe
alive.

On 6«p canap nanaB, öHp canap xeM Ke6a6, stjih qepeK - xep xai4cHHflaıı
ııöüapflH. (G)
/Ol bir öapar palaw, bir Sapar hem keba:b, etli cörök - her hayöınnan iyyâ:rdt./
He was eating some of each kind- now palaw, and now kebab and pastry s :jffed
with meat.
450 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Subordinating Conjunctions

Words that subordinate dependeıit clauses to the main clauses of complex sentences are
called subordinating conjunctions. In Turkmen, true conjunctions of this type are
borrowed from Persian and Arabic. The use of subordinating conjunctions is modeled
after foreign sentence paitems and is found in vvritten Turkmen infrequently and in
spoken Turkmen rarely.

Condition
The conjunction a r e p /eger/ 'if' and the phrase G a p n b i - r e J i f l H /bardı-gelli/ 'in case, i f
subordinate conditional clauses to main clauses in complex sentences.
The conjunction a r e p /eger/ 'if' (from Persian) may be placed at the beginning of a
conditional clause to emphasize the conditional nature of the action. Use of this
conjunction (vvith or vvithout OHfla /onno/ in 'if...then' constructions) is confined to
the vvritten language and occasionally to individuals speaking on television (as in the
last of the follovving examples). Rather, most speakers prefer a conditional clause
expressed grammatically vvith the conditional suffix -ca/ce /-0a/0e/ alone (see 277).

3 re pOranım ohm Tyccar 3TMare cbinanbiıııaH öoncaflu, onna MeKHCTJiep

ro3ranan Typy3apflbiJiap. (N) /Eger 6talin om tu00og etma:ge 0uıanı0an bolOodı,
onno ceki0[0]ler go:8goloq turuSordulor./
If Stalin vvould have poisoned him, t h e n the Chekists vvould have risen in
rebellion.

3 r e p Ö M neT 6 n p H-fla Ö H puaM e r y H e n y H U e H ajibMHH ö o n ca , OHfla roıuM aqa 0,50

ManaT MeMÖepHiifle kom m cchoh übtrbiM anbiHsıp. (T P 2 .1)
/Eger bilet bir ya:-da bimâ:ce gün öıjünnön alınyatn bol0o, onno gosmoco 0,50
manat möcbörünnö komi00ion yıgım alınya:r./
I f a ticket is purehased one or several days prior (to departure), t h e n an additional
.50 manat is collected as commission.

3rep-ne xycycbieTmtmoc 6m e neöfla Gepiîan 6onca, öeitneıoı nyflaKnapu xeM

xycycbicbieTliHnvıre reuHpMeıuiHK repeK. (TV8.4) /Eger-de hu0u0uyetcilik bi5e
peyda: berya:n bol0o, beyleki pudoklon hem hu0u6uyetcilige geçirmeklik gerek./
If privatization is to benefit us, it vvill be necessary to transfer the other branehes
(of industry) to private ownership as vvell.

The conjunction vvord CapAtı-rejınH /bardı-gelli/ (variant: G apdu-flaru /bardı-

dagı/, literally: 'he vvent and ali') is a compound verb that literally means 'gone and
come (back)'. It is placed at the beginning of conditional clauses to indicate the
conditional ('if') or contingent ('in case') nature of the action.
 Conjunctions 451

Eapgbi-renan hkbih epnepHHfleH co B y n ra , en TantuiMaca, onap Ta meilne ep ra 6aT

renftsHMS bianaptma orm eım . (G) /Bardı-gelli yakı:n yerlerinnen 0owulgo, yo:l
tapıImaOa', olor tâ: şeyle yer gabat gelya:n£a: ı:Slaruıa gitmeli./
In case a road that tums away from the land hereabouts is not found, they will
have to retrace until they come upon such a place.

Contingency
Under the influence of Russian sentence pattems, Standard written Türkmen and some
speakers of the language may use the interrogative pronoun xaqaH /hacan/ 'vvhen' as a
subordinating conjunction in a time clause.

XaHan ıroı ropnaıiflaH con, etaepHHe raMflim renöapflH. (G)

/Hacan ici gorlonnon 0oq, öylörünö gaydıp gelyâ:rdi./
When he felt hungry, he retumed home.

Orypun>trbin coHynna xaqaH-Aa MHXMaH raür*;aK SonaHna on «Car

OTyptın!» flnMap. (TV15.2) /Otursugurj 0onui)do hacan-da mı:hma:n
gaytjak bolonno ol "0ag oturur)!" diyyâ:r./
And at the end of his visit, when a guest is about to leave, he says "Stay healthy!"

Causation
The conjunction myhkh /çünkü/ 'because, as' and the conjunction word eeöaöıı
/0ebâ:bi/ 'the reason is, because' may be used to connect a subordinate clause of cause
or reason to the main clause of a sentence.
The conjunction myhkh /çünkü/ 'because, as' (from Persian) subordinates a clause
that explains the reason or cause for the action of the main clause. Use of this
conjunction is infrequent and, for the most part, confined to Türkmen translations or
vvritten works based on foreign models (as the second of the two examples).

MyMKHHraflap, MaraHM 03 3HecHHHH SMaHpM enı xeKMaHH6ip. M y h k h , Mara ym hh

3He cyfiHH hjili u ıefln e a rrn tı H apce 6ojiMa3. (N )
/Mümküngadar, ca:ga:nı ö:5 eneOinig emdirmeği hökma:nmr. Ğiinkü, ca:ga ücü:n
ene 0ü:dü yadı şeyle yagsı nâ:ı0e bolmoS./
As far as possible, the breast-feeding of a child by its own mother is mandatory.
Because, there can be nothing as good for a child as mother’s milk.

By ryH aflaMnap ryH arnap yM yptm fla flaraflbinap, m y h k h 6 a p x a ryÜM nerom 6apaH
caju>mnu. (G) /Bu:n a:d am lar gü n ya :sa r u:curunno da:gad ılar,
e n on ap H x o B ca n a
çünkü barha gü :£ lön ü p barya:n y e l olon how0ola: 0ahpdı./
Today the people dispersed just as the evening began, because the wind which
kept getting stronger worried them.
452 Turkmen Reference Grammar

The vvord ceöaöa /0ebâ:bi/, vvhich literally means 'its reason, its cause' (ceöan
/öebâ:p/ 'reason, cause' is from Arabic), is not properly a conjunction. Rather, it is a
noun in possessive relationship vvith a statement in a preceding context ('the reason for
X is'), its English equivalent is 'the reason is'.
CeöaGıı eıjeM MeH Gaııı Mtın TeBepenı suıınap 6 h jk h HiunemflHM. (N)
/9ebâ:bi öıjöm men bâ:s yıl tövvörögii ya:51ar bilen i:slesdim./
The reason is I worked vvith youths about five years.
- CeH flypMyuıa utiKfltmMtı? ahKhh, on rynuapflaH copafltı.
- 'I mkhhhum . İîeHe eTeH Hhji aMpııntııufliK. CeGaGu Marajuto eıcflEt. (H)
/"0en durmuso cıkdırjmı?" diyip, ol Gülna:rdan 0o:rodı.
"Cıkıpdım. Yö:nö ötön yıl aynlısdık. 0ebâ:bi ca:ga:mı8 yo:kdı
"Are you married?" he asked Gülnar.
"I was married. But last year vve got divorced. The reason is vve had no children."
Ce6 a6 n on xajiKLin xaKUKU flypMyııiMHH repjce3HiMMp. ÛHyn 35iyenMKnepjiHH,
xopxryKnapuHM, yMyMaH aijflaHHMBBfla, xaKMKtı flypMyuiH repıce3M3HH
GauıapaH ınaxı>rp. (TV10.1) /öebâ.-bi ol halkıg hakırkı durmuîunı görköSüpdür.
Onuıj ejeSliklerini, horluklorum, umuımon aydanımıSSa, hakı:kı durmusı
görkö8mâ:ni başaran sa:hı:r./
The reason is that he (Magtımgulı) depicted the true life of the people. He vvas a
poet vvho succeeded in depicting their vveaknesses, their trials and tribulations, and
in general terms, their true life.

The vvord ce 6 a 6 w / 8 ebâ:bi/ also may be equivalent to English 'because' vvhen it is

placed at the beginning of a subordinate clause vvhich provides the reason for the action
or idea in the main clause.

Ara, Memat Monna öapactiM reneHOK, ce6 a6 u oıeaMaıc k u h . (G)

/Ata, menir) mo:lla: bara0ım geleno:k, 0ebâ:bi okomok kı:n./
Father, I don’t vvant to go to the molla, because studying is hard.
X s 3np ep n n Kenycjı 06 a x oaçan u rM H a XH3MaT ajjHap, ceGaGu cyB 6 ap. By cyBtı
FaparyM KaHanH rentpMap. (TP12.2) /Hâ:5ir yerirj köpü0ü o:bo hojoluguno
hıSmat edyâ:r, 0ebâ:bi 0uvv ba:r. Bu 0uwı Garagum kanalı getiryâ:r./
Now most of the land serves agriculture, because there is vvater. The Garagum
Canal brings this vvater.
AKflene 3Tpa6tma re^yn renflioc, ceGaGu oryjınapuM uıy epjaıe narra
- X aB a,
3aE0fltmfla
mujıeMap. (TV11.3) /"Havva, A:kdepe etrarbma göçüp gellik, 0ebâ:bi
oguüorum su yerde pagta fiavvodunno i:sleya:r./
"Yes, we moved to Akdepe district, because my sons vvork in the cotton plant
here."
 Conjunctions 453

Quoıation
Türkmen reports direct and indirect speech in several ways, using forms of tlıe verb
HHÜMeK 'to sây'. In one construction, a form of this verb with tense and person ending
follows the direct quote. In written Turkmen, such speech is set in quotation marks
(«...») or betvveen hyphens

«Xam>ı repejm, cLiHantrıutın repceM, 6np 3aT »aiKca, smuKa rejıepıın» ah Nah.
(N) /“Hanı görölü, 0ı:nanısıp görflöm, bir 8a:t cık6a, ya:mrja gelerin" diydi./
He said "Well, we’ll see. When I give it a try, if anything happens, I’ll come to
you."

- Myna flym Y H Ü apM H H ? - H H İiö a p . (N) [ - m h h < - m h c h h ]

u ij o düsünyâ:ımii)?" diyya:r./ [-mil] < -mi0ir)]
/" M
He says "Do you understand this?"

- To6a, Toöa, Toöa. Xy#afoın ra3a6ı>ınflan ropKMaflunMH? - flufiflu. (N)

/"To:bo, to:bo, to:bo. Huda:yır) gaSabınnan gorkmodugmu?" diydi./
"Oh my, my, my. Were you not afraid of God’s anger?" he said.

ryJi ConTaHce^YHMH anrae KaıcHn, -%k 3J1mhh ! MeH rupH aıc xeM 6oncaM ,
m ep n raT KanyHUHa r e p s HMKajıaıuMacan, MeHHH a m jM a renM epcH «! - A H Ü n jiH p .
(N) /Gül 0olta:n0öyünüq eline kakıp "Cek eliği! Men gımakhem bolOom, s;ri:gat
kanumuno göra: nika:lasma0ai], menü) yarnıma gelmerOiıjl"/
Slapping Soltansöyün’s hand, Gül said "Hands off! Although I ’m a slave, i:î you
don’t marry me according the to laws of the Shariat, you vvon’t get near me!"

U l o n K a p T o m c a iib B U a m m , « B lH x a , M eH n t m a H e p f l e a ı ııa a H . M e H C H 3e fler.-i umu.

flüttün ö a p u r ı aKaaiİMajıu. (TV9.4)
E b u n a H e p H M eM a r a p a p »
/Sol kartockoqu5ı alıp, "inha:, men pıla:n yerde ya:saya:n. Men 0i8e degisli. Pıla:n
yerimem a:gırya:r."/
You should take that card of yours (to the doctor) and go and say "Here, I liv e in
such-and-such a place. I ’m supposed to see you. And my such-and-such a pia;e
hurts."

- f l e p T c a H b t 6 e ü j o c T o x y M a r a a p 6 a p flM B M a p jıe p -fls . (TV12.4)

/"Dö:rt 0a:m beyik tohum atlar ba:r diyya:rler-dâ:."/
"They say there are just four great breeds of horses." [the person being quotecl in
an interview is quoting what "they say"]

This construction also may be used for indirect quotes, except that in v/ritten
Turkmen the quotation marks are omitted.
454 Türkmen Reference Grammar

A h h k 6ııneM 0K, MeHe TaKMtraaH 6 su ı İty3 MaıtaT f l a r a 6 ap flHÜHH. (TV5.4)

/Anık bilemork, yö:nö taknurnan bâ:s yii5 manat dağı ba:r diydi./
I don’t knovv for sure, but she said it’s [its price is] around 500 manat or so. [the
person speaking is quoting what "she said"]

IHeflne 3 T c e « , 03an, c e H T » 6 p b a ü n a h k m MaHarnan 6 e p a c ,e K HHttjyınep KHHOCblHa.

MıiflH O K T flö p b atim M aH a-m aH S e p a ç e K nııSun oTbipnap. (TV7.2)
/Şeyle e00ei], oSol, Oentyabr a:yda iki manatdan berjek diydiler kiloöuno. Inni
oktyabr a:yda ü£ manatdan berjek diyip otıtrlar./
So, before, in September, they said they would pay two manats for one kilo.
Now, in October, they’re saying they’ll pay three manats (per kilo), [the person
speaking is quoting what "they said" and "they’re saying"]

XaK*;ara3btnbt e ıcex;e ryH n w TGireceH TejıecjjoHbiHbt jcecaçeK m üftn, fftaaıuBm

flypnap. (TV 17.2)
/HakjagaSııjı yekeje gün gi:c tolöSöi] telefonuıjı kcOjek^diyip, dıSasıp durrlor./
If you pay your bili just one day late, they keep after you saying they’ll cut off
your teiephone. [the person speaking is quoting what they’re "saying"]

In another construction, a direct quote is follovved by the gerund form guttun an[j
the main verb of the sentence. In these cases, nııinın 'saying' may be omitted in
English.

- E ythh S ip e r e a r« 3 cyBbi 6wıeH a ra p - nııflnn, cyüaçH ryppyne öanuıaau. -

EanHM, Auıra6aTflan renflHM /im^ hhmh? (N)
/'Bütü:n Etregi agı8 0uwı bilen yakya:r" diyip, 0ü:jü gürrüıjö başladı. "Balım,
Asgabatdan gellim diydigmi?"/
He began the conversation pleasantly, saying "It supplies ali of Etrek with
drinking water- honey, did you say you came from Ashgabat?"

M eH Ea#paM a x e p B a r r x c m « M c h ceHMHKH, ceH xeM m oîmîjkm» a u ttu n

atİHHpbin. Ey itbuı 6 o n ca h k h h ^ h MbiJiflbip x a T a sbiuibin , r e n n e ıım n ren öap H c.
(G) /Men Bayrama her wagt hem "Men Oenigki, 0en hem menirjki" diyip
aydya:rın. Bu yıl bol0o ikinji yıllıı hat yaSısıp, geplesip gelya:ri0./
I’m always telling Bayram "I’m yours and you’re mine." This year is the second
year that we’ve been writing letters and talking to each other. ['telling, saying']

- CeH nypMyuıa «ibiKflbiHMbi?- flMÜHn, on rymıapflaH copanbi. - ^îbtKMnnbtM.

MeHe OTeH übuı aföpbinbiiHHHK. Ce6s6H naraMbra eKfltı. (H)
/'0en durmuso cıkdırjmı?" diyip, ol Gülnarrdan 0o:rodı. "Ğıkıpdım. Yö:nö ötön
yıl ayrılısdık. 0eba:bi ca:ga:mı8 yo:kdı."/
"Are you married?" he asked Gülnar. T was married. But last year we got divorced.
The reason is we had no children." ['asked, saying']
 Conjunctions 455

Turkmen also renders in direct quotation what in English is indirect speech. In the
follovving examples, the speech in quotation marks is a direct quote, while the English
is indirect speech. In such cases, a n t t a 'saying' is equivalent to English 'that'.

On x h m B a r r l u e ü n e ınaTm.iKntr r y u n e p H K m a a f l t r G o n a p t m a n i t a n
nnKnpneHMeiİ3pan. (G)
/Ol hi:c wagt şeyle sartlıklı günlöriiıj sa:ya:dı bolorun diyip pikirieruneyâ:rdi./
He never thought that he would be a vvitness to such happy days. ['thought,
saying "I will be a witness"']

ün-HUbi rtrrpaıc 3 anac uıaünapbi e 3 fleperMHM3 e neJjflajm rapMtm ıiTUto aninin h t

a n a H c a n a n a ao n n ep atu ıep . (N ) /Yap-yarjı gıtra:k Sapa 0 sa y la n ö :8 deregigiSe
peyda:lanya:rmı$ırjı8 d iyip it alan 0 anaja dönnördülör./
Just recently, they tore me to pieces, saying that I supposedly use the spare parts
in short supply for my own profit. ['tore me to pieces, saying "Apparently you
use"']

«Te6wrw ra 3 t ı 1993-H2K;H übinbirç 15-h3k;m HonSptma M eran MeıcepHc» anönn,

Bana öepnHjıep. 3 h t c k xeM ryTapaııoKnap. (N) /"Tebi:gı ga8ı 1993-njü yılıg
15-nji noyabrma Senli Sekeri©" diyip, wa:da herdiler. Entek hem gutorono:klor./
They promised that they would extract natural gas by November 15, 1993. They
stili haven’t finished. ['they promised, saying "we will extract"']

On: « M p - y - m M M eH x e M ıny m ö iu m s h c a K a c b iH fla H c y B H M e p n n » aninin,

xuffJibi!raa roTepflH Hopa». (N) /Ol "İ:r-u-gi:S men hem su cesmâ:ıj 0aka0ınnan
0uw içerin" diyip, hıya:hnna götördü yö:rdü./
He was carrying in his thoughts the idea that sooner or later he also would drink
water at the source of this spring. ['he carried th e idea, saying "I shall drink'"]

Mene TaKCH Tyraçaıc 6oncanbi3 car 3J1mhh3H ranflbipbin, ohcoh flypanfla «MeH
nbinau epmc Sapsın» ftyıimn atiaaİİMaJiu. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö takOi tutjok bolöoguS
0ag eliıjiSi galhrıp, on0oıj duronno "men pıla:n yeri:k barya:n" diyip ayda:ymalı./
But if you vvant to stop a taxi, you should raise your right hand, then vvhen it
stops, you should say you’re going to such-and-such a place. ['should teli, saying
T m going'"]
TapbiXMbinapbtıt MaKnaMaruna repa, reııeral CKOÖeneB Teıcflene ranacbnma oh fouı
Myn aflaM bi rbipbinflbip aniiıın >ıaK aannilap. (TV13.3)
/Ta:n:hcılani] Saklamağına görâ:, general 0kobelev Gö:kdepe gala:0mna on bâ:s
müi] a:damı gmpdır diyip Sak edilya:r./
According to historians, it is surmised that General Skobelev slaughtered 15.000
people at the fortress of Gokdepe. ['surmised, saying "he slaughtered'"]
456 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

in d ire c t s p e e c h a lso m a y b e reported b y a tta ch in g th e p a r tid e - r u k /h h k /-dık/dik/

to th e q u o te d s p e e c h , follo vved b y a fo rm o f th e v e r b aiiT M aK /aytm ak/ 'to te li, to s a y '
vvith ten se and person en d in g.

M upajıtı roıoHnapH necte caT*;aKflurMHBj aüntınnup. (N)

/Mırarlı goyunlon neöye öatjakdıgmı aydıpdır./
Mırah apparently said that he’ll seli the sheep on credit.

IIIoHfla-fla onap x m 3aT ÖHJiMeMaHaHKJiepHHH aÜ TfltiJiap. (O)

/Sonno-do olor hi:c 5a:t bilmeyâ:nniklerini aytdılar./
Even then, they said that they didn’t knovv anything.

Similarly to jpeH /diyen/ named, called', vvhich is the past participle fornı of the
verb HHÜMeK /diymek/, the constructions used for direct speech also may be used to
name persons, places and things.

Enp 6ap sıcen, 6np eK 3KeH, 6ııp aannn Keresçe öaribip fliıen ornht 6ap 3Ken. (G)
/Bir ba:r eken, bir yo:k eken, bir ayarlıi) Kelje ba:tır diyen oglı ba:r eken./
Once upon a time, there vvas a vvoman vvho had a son named Kelje-batır.

lin y itti ona Eacap flHİinn aT RaKBinUM xeM X3JUi-ııınHflH OHyn önneH
oÖHaıuMaHfci roBH repepflH. (N) /Yarsuh orjo Ba0ar diyip art dakıpdı hem hârli-
sinni onui] bilen oynosmarnı govvı görürdü./
The old man stuck the name Basar on him and he liked playing vvith him from
time to time, ['stuck the name, saying' = 'the name called']

O h co h saçeMMH e3H xeM, ın y IIeBpH 3e flHföfopjıep, m y T aöfla KypopT ep , a cjiH

u ıo n Taüflan. (TV13.1) /On0oi] e je m iıj ö:8ü h e m , su PövvrürSö d iyy arrle r, su taryda
kurort y e r, a01ı s o l tarydan./
And my mother herself- this they cali Pövvrize, a vacation spot here - is
originally from there.

ScacaHaM ra3-He6MT EanKaH Benasrrbnman qbiKap. Heöınflar jyıÜHBeM uıonyn

Y^mh flnKnjıÖ3p. (TV8.1) /E0a:0a:nam ga8-nebit Balkan vvelaryatmnan cıkyarr.
ebitdatg diyibem sonuq ücü-.n diyilyâ:r./
And gas and oil basically come out of the Balkan province. That’s why it’s also
called Nebitdag ("Oil Mountain"). ['and it’s said, saying' = 'it’s called']
 PARTİCLES

Particles function similarly to modal words and interjections in expres;;mg the

speaker’s attitude or emotional response toward the tnıth or reality of a statement. They
also may establish or strengthen connections between parts of a sentence.
In structure, Türkmen particles are one- or two-syllable elements that share several
common features:
1. they have meaning only in combination with words, phrases or sentences, and
thus cannot occur alone in speech;
2. with some exceptions, they are vowel-haımonic with the words to which ıhey
are attached.
3. with few exceptions, they do not receive stress;
4. and they confoım to the intonation of the words to which they are attached.
These features distinguish particles from modal vvords which have meaning, a single
form and their own stress and intonation, as well as from interjections w hkh may
occur alone, generally have a single variant, may be stressed and are followed by an
intonational pause.
Nearly ali particles appear in the position after a word, phrase or sentence (-a/a
/-a:/-â:/, -aÜT/eÜT /-ayt/eyt/, -«a/«a /-da:/da:/, -abik/jimk /-dık/dik/, -flbip/flu a /-dır/
dir/, -Ka/Ka /-ka:/ka:/, -jıa/jıe /-la/le/, -naiı/jıeü /-lay/ley/, -Ma/ıwe /-ma/me/, -mli/mm
/-mı/mi/, -mliui/mmih /-mıs/mis/, -xa/xa /-ha:/hâ:^, although two (a/3 /a/e/, aH/eH
/ay/ey/) appear in the position before a word, phrase or sentence.
In Standard written Türkmen, one group of these particles is \vritten together with
the words to which they are attached (-hmk/jjhk /-dık/dik/, -nbip/flnp /-dır/dir/, -Ka/na
/-ka:/ka:/, -Ma/Me /-ma/me/, -mm/mm /-mı/mi/, -MbiKa/MHKa /-mıka:/mika:/, Mbirn/
MHin /-mıs/mis/), while another group is separated from the word by a hypherı (—a/a
/ —a:/â:/, -aH /eH /-ay/ey /, -a k 'r/e iİT /-ay t/ey t/, «fla/ff» /-d a:/d a:/, -jıa /jıe / - la/le/,
-jıaH /jıeü /-lay/ley/, - x a / x a /~ha:/ha:/, -x a B /x 0 B /- 0 B /~ha:w/ho:w/o:w/), which does
not affect their pronunciation. Several particles may be placed independentiy before
vvords (a/a /a/e/, aH/eH /ay/ey/).
Most particles express nuances of mood, either attitudes regarding reality or
emotional outlooks. Some particles also or only function grammatically to question or
negate statements (-Ma/ine /-ma/me/, -mu/mh /-mı/mi/), or to qualify the pıcdicate
nature of a verbal or nominal serving as an object (-hlik /h h k /-dık/dik/, -Ka/Ka
/-ka:/ka:/). Only four of the particles may take possessive and case endings (-hi.ik/hhk
/-dık/dik/, - f l b i p / f l n p /-du:/dir/, -Ka/Ka /-ka:/kâ:/, -M b iıu /M iıııı /-mıs/mis/), and two
may take personal endings (-flb ip /flH p /-dır/dir/, -M biüi/M H m /-mıs/mis/).
The Türkmen particles may be grouped into categories according to the modal or
grammatical fiınctions they serve in the phrase or sentence.
458 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Particles
ATTITUDINAL EMOTIONAL GRAMMATİCAL
Emphasis Appeal Question
—fla/ga /-da:/dâ:/ just, —a/a /—a:/â:/ (focu s), -mm/mh /-mı/mi/
really, —na/jıe /--la/le/ a/s /a/e/ ah (y o u ), ’ e y
(for) sure, really, don’t (y o u ), aö/sfl /ay/ey/ h e y,
you know, ~xa/xa ~xaB/xoB/-QB /—ha:w /
/—ha:/ha:/ really, xeM h o :w / -o :w / h e y , —na/ne
/hem/ just, —fla/fle /--la/le/ a li right?,
/--da/de/ just, even —ııaö/jıet} /—îay/ley/
see?

Speculation Realization Negation

-Ka/K3 /-ka:/ka:/1 —a/a /—a:/a:/ but, yeah -Ma/Me (-Map/Mep/
w o n d e r, -caMKaM/ but, —aÜT/eÖT /—ayt/eyt/ Ma3/Me3, -M3H/M3H)
ceMKSM /-0am ka:m / h o w co u ld ? /-ma/me (-m ar/mer/
0 em kâ:m / sh o u ld I?, m aS/meS, -ma:n/mâ:n)
-Mtnca/MHK3 /-mika:/
m ik a :/ 1 w o n d e r,
-MMKa/MKKS eiİTMeK/
fliıiİMeK /-m ıka:/m ika:
öytm ö k/d iym ek /
I wonder, I think,
I gu e ss

Confırmation Surprise Qualifıcaıion

-flkip/fliıp /-dır/dir/ it is, —ati/eii /—ay/ey/ lo ok , -flbiK/flHK /-dık/dik/
is/are, d o n ’ t fo rg e t, now that (+J1MK/JIHK
m ig h t b e /+lık/lik/), -Ka/K3
/-ka:/ka:/ w h ile

Assertion
-
- m h u i /m h u i /-mıs/m is/
apparen tly, th e y sa y
 Particles 459

Particles That Express Attitudes

One group of particles funetions to express the attitude of a speaker tovvard the truth or
reality of facts and statements. Some of these emphasize or intensify the truth of a
statement ( - f l a / n a /-da:/dâ:/, - j ı a / j ı e /-la/le/, - x a / x s /-ha:/hâ:/), vvhile others reflect the
speaker’s speculation about (-K a/K 3 /-ka:/kâ:/, -MLiKa/MMKa /-nuka:/mikâ:/ 'I vvonder, I
guess'), confirmation (-a u p /aH p /-dır/dir/ 'is/are') or assertion (-MMm/MHm
/-mıs/mis/ 'apparently, they say') of facts or reality.

Emphasis
Several particles emphasize the fact, truth or certainty of the vvords or phrases to vvhich
they are attaehed. These particles inelude -f la /fla /-da:/dâ:/, - j ı a / j ı e /-la/le/ and - x a / x a
/-ha:/hâ:/, as vvell as the particles x e M /hem/, - n a / f l e /-da/de/ in special uses. They
correspond to English 'really', 'just', 'even', and so on.

-dalda l-da:lda:l
The partide -aa/aa /-da:/dâ:/ generally emphasizes or confirms the fact or action
associated vvith the predicate to vvhich it is attaehed by a hyphen. The variant
-aanLi/aaıiH /-da:nı/dâ:ni/ also is frequent in spoken Turkmen. English equivalents to
this kind of emphasis inelude 'just', 'really' and, most frequently, a certain intonation
pattem.

CH3 M ana e n xapasj>ı T a n tm 6epHH-aa. (G) /0iS m arja y o :l h arjı tap ıp berirj-da:./
Just fîn d me some tra vel m o n e y .
MmjHKHMM3e caK 6 o n ap w c-fla. (G) /İnnikim iSe S a k boloruS-Sa:./
We’ll just be careful next time.
3 ö c e M ceHHH aüfltnıiBiHa r e p s , oöanfla 6aM eıc-aa? (G )
/EySem Senir) aydısııja göıa:, o:ba:i)da ba:y yo:k-da:?/
So, according to what you say, there just aren’t any rich people in your village?
EpH ceH önp ceM 6on-aa. (G) /Yeri Sen bir Sem bol-la:./
If you could just shut up.
S ö c e M ceH e 3 y n raftnkin 6Hjr*;eK-fl3? (G)
/EySem Sen ö:Süg gaydıp biljek-dâ:?/
So, you really can’t go back yourself?
- EepeKeJUial-flHÖHn, aflaM ctı rbîriiptmatıp. -flMSMeK, ceH oHfla, saçeMHH
6n3nnKMjje snııaM artm a rapnıtı flan-aa. (N) / ’Berekella:!" diyip, a:dam0ı
gı:gınpdur. "Diymek, Sen onno, ejemir) bi5iqkide yalamağına garsı dâ:l-la:."/
"Bless you!" her husband shouted. "That means you really don’t mind my mother
living vvith us."
460 Türkmen Reference Grammar

3 n 6eT fle, npfle~rnM#e 6y 3 a T n a p b in nyaemKemmi ö h jiM s h . M eH e H p p sK ^ e n a H n c e

roBH-Ra. (O) /Elbetde, i:rde-gi:£de bu 8a:tlani] düfiöljögünii bilyâm. Yö:nö i:rra:k
düSöldülBö gowu-da:./
Of course I know that sooner or later these things will be cörrected. However, it’s
much better if they’re cörrected sooner.

Saranıma, MeH nı^ıın 6nn^eK flan-aa, ösnıfle hulhm Bap-fla. (TV3.3)

/Bağışla, men gidip biljek dâ:l-lâ:, bâ:sde i:sim ba:r-da:./
Sorry, I ju st won’t be able to go, I’m really busy at 5.

flHÜMeK, oh ceKH3 caraT-fla? (TV2.3) /Diymek, on 0eki5 0a:gat-da:?/

That means it [the train] just takes eighteen hours?

- flepT caHH 6eHmc TOxyM araap 6ap flHİöispJiep-fla. (TV12.4)

/T)ö:rt 0a:nı beyik tohum atlar ba:r diyyâ:rler-dâ:."/
"They say there are just four great breeds of horses."

- MeHHHKH 6up flennıiM eflMp-fla, ıcaKacbi. ( T V 1 8 .5 )

/'Menirjki bir degismedir-dâ:, ka:ka0ı."/
T m ju st joking, father."
EeJiKM, fly3enep-fla. (TV18.5) /Belki, dü8ölör-dâ:./
Maybe it really will get better.

Cepflap, Haxap MÜMeroı sıceHHH-jta- (TV18.3) /0erda:r, nahar iymeli ekeniıj-da:./

Serdar, you really should eat some food.

In printed form, the long back vovvel variant of the emphatic partide (-Ha /-da:/) is
indistinguishable from the short back vovvel variant of the connection partide (-na
/-da-do/ 'and, too', see 437). Hovvever, -fla/fla /-da:/dâ:/ occurs only with predicates,
vvhereas - m im /-da-do/de-dö/ occurs only in cases vvhere it may be replaced by the
partide xeM/-aM/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'and, also'.

-mj/ab l-lallel
Wlıen attached to other particles, modal words or postpositions, the partide -jıa/jıe
/-la-lo/le-lö/ indicates certainty in the sense of '(for) sure' or 'really'.

CtırpbiM 6ap-Jia. (G) /0ıgran ba:r-la./

Sure I’ve got a cow.
On HMaH ynyflbip-.na. (G) /Ol yaman uludur-lo./
He is too old, for sure.
CeneM S e m i n f l a u ı epae flo n - J ie , (G) /0enem belli das yerde dâ:l-le./
And you’re really not far avvay either.
 Particles 461

3cep flntİHn MLipınaH 3araapuM xmh 3afltın ajiHbnman flsn-ne, xım saT fls.ı-ne
acun flHÜflspMH. (N) /E0er diyip Cırsam 5a:tfanm hi:£ Sa:dır) alnınnan dâ:l-Ie, hi:c
6a:t dâ:l-le a0ıl diyyâ:rin./
I’m saying that things I scribbled and called literary works really are not uorth
anything, really they’re simply nothing.

MfcipanM ConTaH ceM yne rapan: -Bhü, m a3afla, 6artnıman, HaMe, wsxep,at: eH yn-
eceHMHH3 yh h h m m - 63 xanKi.iHM3i.in flsöıınfleH xa6 ap u n b i3 eK jm bi-na. (K.ı
/Mıra:lı 0olta:n0öyünö gararp: "Wiy, sa:8a:da, bağışla: ıj, nâ:me, sâherde ö nüp-
ö9önüi]ü8 iiciknmü - ö:8 halkırjıSır) dâ:binnen habarurjıS yo:k yadı-la."/
Mıralı glanced at Soltansöyün (and said) "Mmm, please pardon me, prina:, but
why is it- is it because you were raised in a city?- it’s as though you really have
no knowledge of your own people’s customs."

YMyMan 3 ü n ın n K -Jie. (TV18.5) /Umu:mon eygilik-le./

In general, it’s really good.

When added to a verbal form, the partide -jıa/jıe /-la/le/ expresses a mild ıeproach
for the action mentioned. The strength of the reproach is modulated by intonauon.

Apm oH , MHflM HSMe 3TMeJin, 6 y ryH 6 h3 Mtumbi3a yrpaH su ru

6oıwyK-Jia. (G)
/Arcın, inni nâm e etmeli, bu gün biS yıllıSa ugra:n ya:lı bolluk-lo./
Elder, what shall we do now? It’s really like we’ve crossed stars today.

By n t * ; e HMaH ra ru ra«wpcMH-Jia, MyHyn c e 6 s 6 n H3Me? (G)

/Bu gi:je yaman gatı gacya:r0uj-la, munuıg 0ebâ:bi nâ:me?/
You’re really running off too soon tonight. What’s the reason for this?

TyneHHH cecıı aflaMMH üypermuı ap^aK-Jia. (G)

/Tüpönüg 0e0i a:damırj yürögünü ya:rjak-la./
Don’t you knovv gun shots can frighten people?

Baü, My3yMe rapa MeK^MH-ne, öanaM. (G) /Way, yüöümö gara cekdiıj-le, bı.dam./
Oh, don’t you know you’ve disgraced me, my child?

-xalx9 l-ha:Jhâ:l
Adding the partide -xa/xa /-ha:/hâ:/ to a vvord, separated by a hyphen, emphasizes its
certainty or immediacy.

Xafl rtıpa-ruM , rtıpaTMM, hhah-X3 KeMHH ranan flwı 6onca repeK. (G)
/Hay Gı:ratım, Gı:ratım, inni-hâ: kemir) gadan dâ:l bol0o gerek./
Ah, my Gırat, my Gırat, I believe that you don’t need anything else right now.
462 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Xfci3Man>ın repYHce-xa rafliiptm 6mmep, erca-fla 6on*,artın Serum, (G)

/HıSmatıi) görün0ö-hâ: gadınt) bilner, yog6o-do boljoguıj belli./
If your services are really seen, then your value will be appreciated, otherwise your
fate is sealed.

MeHHH nMKHpMMMe, xep HH'HiK-fle 6onca îlepTryn öııneH aparaTuauiHK

rypaMSK-xa 3epyp. (G) /Meniq pikirimce, her nicik-de bol0o Dörrtgül bilen
e:ragatnasık guromok-ha: 8eru:r./
In my opinion, we really need to establish communication vvith Dörtgül, no
matter what.

The particles xeM /hem/ and -«a/ne /-da-do/de-dö/ also may be used to emphasize
the vvord to vvhich they are attaehed in the meanings 'just' and 'even'. The partide
-na/ue /-da/de/ is used in a concessive construction (see 281), as a conjunction (see
437) and to intensify the meanings of some adverbs or other vvords (ene-ae /yene-de/
'once more', xac-na /ha:0-0a/ 'even more', 3rep-ge /eger-de/ 'and if', ete.). In some
instances, this partide may indicate no more than the kind of pause in speech that
some English speakers fiil vvith 'and', others vvith 'um-um', 'yeah', 'ya’ knovv', or the
like.

IIIeMne myM xa6ap TanaH aflaMbmtı ÖHrpeıc*;eK xeM 6onflynap, 3MMa BenH on
xa6aptı renıpeH qan caKran flaMxaıı ryHSKap flOTflH. (G)
/Şeyle sum habar tapan a:damını yigrenjek hem bollulor, emma: vveli ol haban
getiren ca:l Oakgal dayha:n güna:kâ:r da:lli./
They were just on the point of hating the man vvho found out such bad nevvs, but
then, this gray-bearded peasant vvho brought the nevvs vvas not guilty.

- Hy«h xeM ıuy raByH 6snı MaHaTflaHflbi BenH, 6y ryH ohh ajrrbrflaH ca-rapnap-na.
(N) /"Dü:n hem su ga:wun ba:s manatdannı vveli, bu:n om altıdan 0atya:rlar-la."/
"Just yesterday this melon vvent for five manats, but today they’re selling it for
six."
Cn3e TennefleH-ne rfcMMaT 3araapfci SepflHM. (G)
/0i8e teqi]eden-de gımmat 8a:tlan berdim./
I gave you things even more valuable than money.

araiM f 6 e p e n 6axacbi AKiraöafltrH y jıy M C H J m rM H M xac-jja

r y p S a H T M J ib i'i
(G)
a p T f lb ip f lH .
/Gurba:ngılıc a:ga:niQ beren bahaOı A:kna:badır) ulumOulugunı ha:0-0a artdırdı./
The appreciation shovvn by Gurbangılıch-aga inereased Aknabat’s pride even more.
 Particles 463

Speculaıion
To express s.peculation about the truth of a state of being or event, Türkmen uses the
particle - K a /K 3 /-ka:/kâ:/, often in combination with the question partide - mli/ mh
/-mı/mi/.

-MİK3 l-ka:Ikâ:l
The particle - K a /ıra /-ka:/ka:/ is added to a predicate to express speculation or doubt
about the nature or outcome of an action. It is frequently attached to pronouns, where
its best English equivalent is 'I wonder (what, how, when, why, ete.)'. Spoken variants
of this particle are -KaH/K3H /-ka:n/kâ:n/ and -KaHbi/KSHH /-ka:m/kâ:ni/.

O H y n HOM e xı>!5Uibi 6 a p K a ? ( O ) / O n u ı j n â m e h ı y a : l ı b a : r k a : ? /
I w onder what his thoughts are?

On K H M K 3H -efl? (G) /Ol k i m k a : n - e y ? /

Now, I w o n d e r who could that be?

B e - e , e u f l a n r tiM u s M e ymhh o n a « r ı r r a e ? » fliıftflH K a? ( N )

/Be-e, yo:llosum na:me ii£ü:n oqo "gitme?" diydika:?/
Hnrnı, I wonder why my husband told him not to leave?

By HSMefleHKa? (O) /Bu na:medenka:?/

And why is this, I wonder?

By H 9M 3H H H y p n ıy K a ? (BH) /Bu na:ma:nir) ursuka:?/

What kind of war is this anyway?

TY -rıycT aH s m ttM a Ayum»- On u ı y n ı - ı u y B a r r H M pefleK S ? (BG)

/G ü lü 0 9 a :n y a :d ım a d ü s d ii. O l s u î- s u w a g t n ir e d e k â :? /
Gülüstan fell into my memory. I wonder where she is right now?

The form -caMKBM/ceMK3M /-0amka:m-0omka:m/9emka:m-0ömkâ:m/, which

contains the first person conditional suffix follovved by this particle wıth the first
person possessive suffix, is equivalent to English '(what) should I?'

HsMe HHÜceMKaM? (G) /Nâ:me diy0emka:m?/

What should I say?

O h M H nnaH 6 ap H 6np xonoflH Jiı> H H rH M H 3 6 a p . B y x e n f l e H in n eM ecH H H ro ftflM .

(T17.2)
H s M e 3TC eM K 3M ? Ta3eCH H M ajiaÖ fclH M tt H peM O H T 3TflHpe{İH HM H ?
/0:n yıllan ba;ri bir holodılnigimiB ba:r. Bu hepde i:sleme0ini goydı. Na:me
e00emka:m? Tâ:5e0ini ala:ymmı ya: remont etdireyinmi?/
We’ve had our refrigerator for ten years. It stopped working this week. What
should I do? Should I get a new one or have it repaired?
464 Turkmen Reference Grammar

-Mum/Mutça i-mıka:/mikâ:/
The partide -M U K a/M H K 3 /-mıka:-muka:/mikâ:-rnükâ:/ (variant: -MtiKaH/MHKan
/-mıka:n-muka:n/mika:n-mükâ:n/) which is composed of the question partide -mu/mh
/-mı/mi/ and the partide - K a / ı » /-ka:/kâ:/, may be added to tense and conditional
suffixes to express speculation about an action or state vvhose outcome is unknown. its
English equivalents include 'I wonder if', 'might/could it be' and 'do you know if'.

EHe-fle aflam repeK SonaprubiKa? (G) /Yene-de a:dam gerek bolomıuka:?/

I wonder if they need more people?

By yTaö3K;aKMHKaH-aMT, a& er-a tmaHBiM eK. (G)

/Bu uta:yjaknuka:n-ayt, ay yo:g-a: inanım yo:k./
I wonder how this one could win? No way, I don’t believe it.

SI OKafiepceMMMKSM, MbipaT? (G) /Ya: oka:bereemmika:m, Mıra:t?/

Or I wonder, Mırat, should I keep studying?

F o b u MeKfleöe ııSepceMMiiKaM? Cnopr Bııneıı n,i3biKnajmMpcaMM«KaM? (T16.4)

/Gowı mekdebe i:ber0emmikâ:m? ıOport bilen gı5ıklannır8ammıka:m?/
I vvonder if I should send him off to a good school? Should I get him interested
in sports?

When the partide -M b iK a/M H K a /-mıka:/mikâ:/ is followed by the verb aiİTMeK

/öytmök/ 'to think, to suppose' or aııÜMeK /diymek/ 'to say', it may indicate
speculation or suppostion. English equivalents include 'I wonder whether', 'I think', 'I
guess' and 1 reckon'.

MeHeM-a uıeüjıeMHKS HHİıttapıiH. (G) /Menem-â: seylemika: diyyâ:rin./

Me, I also wonder whether it’s so.

Mkhmm3hh flocTJiyrbiMbBBiH 6wpfleHK3 roıoH ÖHJien rypflyn, to jik h 6ııneH ınnpnn

flocTJiyrbiHa Men3apMHKaH aiÎAÖaH. (G) /İki:mi8ir) do9[0]lugumu5uıj birdenkâ:
goyun bilen gu:rduıj, tilki bilen siıriıj do9[0]luguno mei]5â:nnrka:n öydya:n./
I think our friendsbip suddenly has the appearance of the friendship of a sheep and
a wolf, or that of a fox and a lion.

CepeT, uıy rbi3Bin KeÜHeK BM aıı oBaflaH, Mene m M M aTM tiKa HHÖKan. (TV5.4)
/Oeret, su gıSıl köynök yaman owodon, yö:nö gunmatmıka: diyyâ:n./
Look, this red dress is really pretty, but I wonder whether it’s expensive? .
LUsxep epnepMHfle opc MiuıneTH - oh 6sııı npoııenT flarbi öapMUKa HHÖİian.
CTV13.1) /Saher yerlerinne or0 milleti - on bâ:s pro9ent dağı ba:rmıka: diyyâ:n./
The Russian nationality in city places-1 guess there’s 15 percent or so.
 Particles 465

Confirmation
To indicate confirmation or subjective certainty that a statement is true, Türkmen adds
the partide -flbip/flnp /-dır/dir/ to the predicate of a sentence.

-dupldup l-dır/dirl
The partide -flbip/fliıp /-dır-dur/dir-dür/ generally funetions to express confirmation
that an action has occurred or that something is true. Hovvever, it is used slightly
differently in Standard and in spoken Türkmen. In the written and, occasionally, spoken
language, this partide serves to associate the subject and predicate of a sentence as an
equivalent to English 'am', 'is', and 'are'. In this case, it usually serves to confiım the
fact of something in an emphatic manner.

AHa, Kaıca, xon ranbnrbin aratnma rapaByn flypan Aımaryntmtıp, ahAmi, ona
3JIMH11 y3aTan. (G) /Ana, ka:ka, ho:l gapı:nıi) agSınna garawul duron
A:nnaguludur, diyip, oıp elini uSotdı./
"Tlıere he is, father, the sentry, standing at that door there, is Annagulı," he said,
gesturing at him.

Tantııuıapa tsjihm öepMetc H-fla onapflaH Tajıan btmck \m tn oJiaptı repeıcraı oKyB
3c6anjıapbi 6nneneM -a yna^yıı 3TM ennflnp. (N)
/Ta:h:plara ta:lim bermek ya:-da olordon talap etmek ücü:n olon gerekli oku w
e0ba:plan bilenem-a: üpjün etmelidir./
In order to educate students or to make demands on them, we must supply ı rıem at
least with the textbooks they need. ['it is an obligation to supply them']

3fliıneH Maıibicbiıma HMnepHfl

Co B eT C o ıo3L iıibin C03yn yMyMbi K aöyjı
SonMaıiflura e p a ıt aüflbinnup. (TV14.5) /6 ow et 0 oyu5un ui) 0ö8üi) um u:m ı k ab u :l
ed ilen m arn ıSm na im p e riy a b o lm a :n n ıg ı öra:n a:ydırjdır./
It is very clear that in the generally accepted meaning of the word the Sovieı
Union was not an empire.

In the spoken and, occasionally, vvritten language, the partide -flbip/nıtp /-dır/dir/ is
used in cases vvhen a fact is questioned or in need of confirmation. Equival :*nts in
English vary from emphasis (italics) to 'really (is)', 'actually (is)', 'remember', 'don’t
forget', 'but, (it is)', and the like.

Ojıapun HTJiepeM-s 6apnup. (G) /Olorur) iüerem-â: ba:rdır./

But, don’t forget, they also have dogs.
Caııa caJiMaH, 6npnııe 6epMn roM6epn5epMeKmıflnp. (G)
/0ala: 0alma:n, birrine berip goyberibermekcidir./
He actually intends to go alıead and give (his daughter in marriage) to someone
vvithout getting any advice.
466 Türkmen Reference Grammar

- 3M, Mtıpajıtt, ceHHH epun on epH flaJiflHp. (N)

/'Ey, Mıra:lı, öenirj yerirj ol yeri da:llir."/
"Hey, Mırah, your place really isn't here."

A less common nuance of the particle -flbip/flHp /-dır/dir/ is to add a shade of

uncertainty to the word to which it is attached, but mainly in those cases where the
speaker expects confirmation. An appropriate English equivalent is 'might'.

XaHa aflaM repeKHHp. (G) /Ha:na aidam gerekdir./

The khan might need some people.

-Xo-on ryHÖaTap Menar Haiteanbi 3yppY*,eK eft 6n3m<Knanp. (N)

/"Ho-ol günbatar cetki naySah Sürriijök öy biSirjkidir.7
"That conical-shaped house with the spire to the west över there might be ours."

CH3e M3JiHM{pıp, 6 h3hh TypKMeH SeÜHK uıaxtıpiiM ti3 SonaH M arrtiM ryjn.ı
reKJien THpecHHfleH 6onan. (TV4.2) /0i5e ma:limdir, biSirj türkmön beyik
sa:hı:nmı8 bolon Magtımgulı gö:klöq tirreöinnen bolon./
You might know that Magtımgulı, our great Türkmen poet, was from the Gökleng
tribe.

The particle -gup/HHp /-dır-dur/dir-dür/ is added directly to the predicate of a

sentence and takes personal endings. To form the past tense, the past indefinite tense
marker -flbi/mı /-dı/di/ plus indications of person and number are added to this particle.
The negative is formed vvith flan /da:l/ followed by -flbip/j(np /-dır/dir/ or -flfci/flH
/-dı/di/ plus person endings, and is written separately.

Present Tense

Singular Plural

1 -flblpMH/flHpHH -flblpHc/flMpMC
/-dmn-durun/dirin-dürün/ /-dm0-duru0/dirie-dürü0/
2 -flblpCbm/flHpCHH -flblpCbmtI3/flHpCHHM3
/-dıröıg-duröui]/ /-du6ır)i8-duı6ui]u5/
diröig-dürflürj/ diıfliqi5-düröür]ü5/
3 -flbip/flup -flbipnap/flHpnep
/-dır-dur/dir-dür/ /-dırlar-durlor/dirler-dürlör/

1 flsnflHpMH /dâ:llirin/ flanflHpMc /da:lliri0/

2 flanflHpcHH /dâ:llir8ii]/ fl3nflHpcH«H3 /dâ:Uir0ir)i8/
3 flanflHp /da:llir/ flsjiflMpnep /da:llirler/
 Particles 467

Past Tense
Singular Plural

1 -flblM/flHM -flbac/flHK
/-dım-dum/dim-döm/ /-dık-duk/dik-dük/
2 -flbin/flro< -flbff(bl3/flMHH3
/dıj)—durj/dio-dürj/ /-dıgı5-durju5/dii)i8-dür)ü8/
3 -m /m -flbuıap/flMjıep
/-dı/di—dü/ /-dılar-dulor/diler-dülör/

1 fl3JWMM /dârllim/ flsrmHK /darllik/

2 flsnflHH /darllii]/ /da:llir)i8/
3 flanHH /dârlli/ flanfliuıep /darlliler/

Assertion
Turkmen expresses assertion, that is, a statement which cannot be verified or confiımed
personally by a speaker, through the addition of the partide - m m u i / m m iu /-mıs/mis/ to
the predicate of a sentence.

-MHiuİMutu l-mıslmisl
The partide -Mbim/Mifin /-mıs-mus/mis-müs/ most commonly is added to verbs and
sometimes to nouns to indicate that a fact is asserted or reported rather than evident or
vvitnessed, Personal endings may be added dircctly to the form.
Use of this partide does not imply doubt, but does entail that the speaker has
inferred or can support the assertion only by second-hand information that vvas reported
as true. The partide also may be used to state confidence or belief in an assumption,
inference or conclusion. English equivalents may inelude 'they say that', 'apparently',
'evidently', 'let’s assume', or expressions connected vvith 'supposed to'.

Konxo3bin 6 a ıu n w rw k h m m h io h h - A T a M u o ıtiH . (G )
/KolhoSur) baslığı kimmisin - Atamışın./
They say Ata Somebody is head of the collective farm.
Ahb, moHyn 03anaM 6 « p asıntı 6 a p M b n n , i t e H e M a u ı r a n a c t ı 6 o n M a a M b iu iM b i-
(G) /Ana, sonurj oSolom bir aya:lı barrmıs, yörnö masgalaöı
H3M eM M .
bolmoyarmısmı- nârmemi./
Well, they say he has a vvife from before, but apparently his vvıfe is unable to
have a child, or something like that.
E h3 ona H3Me ytoh car 6on aiİTMajıtnvibiuıtiMbi3. (G)
/BiS orjo narme ücü:n 0ag bol aydnalımısmuS./
What are w e s u p p o s e d t o thank him for?
468 Turkmen Reference Grammar

OHyn anaH xa6apbma ropa, TeKenepHH xeMMecw roaranana raTiıam^aKMLim. (G)

/Onug alan habanna göra:, tekelerii] hemmeOi go:8golor)o gatnassakmıî./
According to the Information he received, ali the Teke supposedly would
paıticipate in the uprising.

TY-TDK;eMajı xaH aK naram a 6MJieH «oraH OKamaHMunibiH. (G)

/Güljöma:l lıa:n a:k pa:tısa bilen dogon okosonmusun./
Supposedly Güljemal-han fratemized with the Tsar. [derisive]

XaMana, IUıtpıiH öııpu 6wıeH xanamun rımıtnMHiuHU. (G)

/Hama:la, Şirin bi:ri bilen lıa:lasıp gidipmisin./
Let’s assume Shirin has gone off with someone she likes. ['liked someone and
gone off]

Ep r a m 6ojıca, eKy3 eKyafleH repepMHin. (G)

/Yer gatı bolöo, ökU8 öküSSön görörnriis./
They say that an ox blames an ox if the ground is hard.

fltungoıaH nnepH üy3e yrpaH KepBemı enöapc caıoıan, flar enyHH Geseman
UTaHMbiuı. (N) /Dıyakdan ileri yüSö ugra:n kerweni yolborâ Oakla:p, da:g yorlunı
böwötlâ:p yatanmış./
They say that a tiger stopped the caravan which set foıth from Dıyak and that it
laid itself down and blocked the mountain road.

B a ım ı 6onMaK y^mh aflaMa 6apw-erbi ylı caHbi 3aT repeKMHin. (N)

/Bagtlı bolmok üçüm ardama ba:rı-yo:gı üc 0a:nı Sa:t gerekmiş./
They say that a person needs only three things to be happy.

AüfltmmapMHa, naMTarTbiMM3flaKbi rypnaH-y-rypyjmn MbixMaHxaııanapbiH aran,

ıuaxep HKactuma flauıaptı lopraynaptm mımetoH epnepH renöamtı 6onapa xac-fla
StKblHMblIII. (N)
/Aydıslanna, pa:ytagtımıS8a:kı gurlon-u-gurulya:n mı:hma:nha:nalanıj agSı, sâher
yakaöinna dasan yu:rtlulorur) i:51eyâ:n yerleri gepbası boloro ha:0-0a yakımmış./
According to talk, the entrances of the hotels built or being built in our Capital,
and the places where the foreigners work on the outskirts of the city, apparently
are even closer to becoming the main topic of conversation.

The partide -mmui/mhiu /-mıs/mis/ also may be used in telling stories or in

sayings, as an indicator that the narrative asserts a fact that is removed from the world
of real action experienced by a reader or listener.

TypT apKacbiHflaH ryuı floÜM yuı. (G) /Gu:rt arkaOınnan gus doymuş./
Thanks to the wolf the bird has become full.
 Particles 469

3tviMaKU con-connap Kenyn cyBtı 6«p ryapaT ÖMjjeH öynanttrı öaıunaHMbi m.

(BH) /Emma:kı 0ot)-0or)lor kö:lüq 0uwı bir gudrot bilen bulonup baslarnn ıs./
But then later on, by some power, the water of the lake apparently started to tum
muddy.

The association of this particle with reported or hearsay information is sc. strong
that Turkmen has a reduplicated form that functions as a noun meaning 'rumor

«Oıifla Muınetiaıınep raHLinMbmı» avıeıı muui-muui aftpaflbi. (G)

/'Onno i:sleyâ:nler ga£ıpmıs" diyen mis-mis yayıadı./
There was a rum or that the people vvorking there ran away.

Muuı-Mbiuiiiap xeMMe epe aöpanflup. (G) /Mıi-mıslar hemme yere yayra:pdır./

Rumors have spread every where.

The particle -mhui/mhui /-mıs-mus/mis-müs/ may take person and number

suffixes. The third person singular has the uncommon ending - u h / uh /-ın/in/.

Singular Plural

1 - m h u ib im / m m u im m - m h u i h k / m h iiih İC
/-mısım/miSim/ /-mıSık/misik/
~ MbnUWMbI3/MHUIMMM3
/-mısımıS/misimiS/
2 -MMlUbüt/MMlUMH -MbmibmbI3/MMllIMHM3
/-mısıi]/misiq/ /-mı§ırjı8/misir)i5/
3 -MbllUHH/MHlIIMH -MbllllbUl/MMIIlMH
/-mısın/misin/ /-mısın/misin/
~ -Mbimnap/MHiujıep
/-mıslar/misler/
470 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Particles That Express Emotions

Another group of particles funetion to express the emotional reactions of a speaker

tovvard facts and reality. The addition of such particles indicate a speaker’s appeal ( - a / a
/-a:/â:/, a / 3 /a/e/, aü/eü /ay/ey/, x o n / x a B / - o a /ho:w/ha:w/-o:w/, -m in e /-la/le/, -jıa M /
j ı e i i /-lay/ley/ 'me, hey, ali right?, see?') for attention to be focused on someone or
something, or the disappointment ( - a / s /-a:/a:/, - a i i r / e ü T /-ayt/eyt/ 'but, yeah but, how
could') or surprise ( - a ü / e ü /-ay/ey/ 'look, now') of a speaker toward an undesired or
unexpected state of being or action.

Appeal
The particles - a / a /-a:/â:/, a / 3 /a/e/, a ü / e t t /ay/ey/, x a B /x o B /- o B /ha:w/ho:w/-o:w/,
-m in e /-la/le/ and - n a t t / j ı e t t /-lay/ley/ place the focus of attention on the speaker,
person addressed, or the action. English equivalents inelude 'me', 'hey', 'see?', and so
on.

-al3 l-a:lâ:l
The partide - a / a /-a:/a:/ frequently is added to the pronouns M eH /men/ T and 6 h 3
/biS/ 'we' to focus attention on the speaker. An appropriate English equivalent for this
usage is '(as for) me, I' and '(as for) us, we'.

Mcıı-a fla n a T a p b i-fla repeMOK, TYneHM-fle. (G)

/Men-a: Dagatarı-da görömo:k, tüpörjii-dö./
Me, I haven’t seen Dangatar or the gun, either.

Mene BejiHH uıon poBasrn>m TBiM cantiHtı MeHHH 03YM-3 meftnepaK flYUIY!WlfM .
(N) /Yö:nö weli:n sol rowa:yatır) tım0a:lım meniıj ö:5üm-â: seylerârk düsünnüm./
But as for me, myself, I understood the point of that legend more like this.

BH3-a on narr ornaıı, oiih copaMajıuflurmıaM GjuiMSHflHpHC. (TV13.3)

/Bi8-a: ol vvagt oglon, om 9o:romoludugunom bilma:nniri0./
Us, we were boys then, and probably didn’t realize that we should have asked
about him.

Mene y3aK BarrnaübiH 6np epHK n r r x ,e K 5 on cai(, caM on eT n tı nrreen tobh 6o n ap

efiflM ac 6113- 0. (TV9.2) /Yö:nö u S o k w a g tla y ın b ir yerirk g itje k bolOorj, O am olotlı
g i 00ei] g o w ı b o lo r ö y d y â :0 bi 5-a:./
But if you want to go somewhere for a long time, us, we think it’s better if you
go by plane.

Another funetion o f’the partide - a /o /-a:/â:/ is to focus on a limited action or thing,

wlıich usually is equivalent to English 'at least'.
 Particles 471

(G)
S a n ır a 3 afltı SamapMacaMaM, k s t m c h y p M a c tm -a Sam ap ap tiH .
/Basga 5a:dı baSannaSamam, kâtım en urmo9un-a: basarya:nn./
Even though I can’t do other things, I can do the hoeing, a t least.

T a n tn u ıa p a t s u h m GepMeK a-fla onapflaH Tanan 3TMeK y im h onapbi r e p e ıa m okjtb

3 c6aım apw SıuıeHeM-a yroSY11sTMejnınsıp. (N )
/Ta:h:plara tâ:lim bermek ya:-da olordon talap etmek iiciirn olon gerekli okuw
e0ba:plan bilenem-a: iipjiin etmelidir./
In order to educate students or to make demands on them, we must supply them at
least vvith the textbooks they need.

MeH cemin YMMlleMoflyp-6ynyp ajm6-a ÖHJiepflHM. (H)

/Men 0enir) ücü:nöm odur-budur alıb-a: bilerdim./
I could at least buy this or that for you, too.

The partide -a/a /-a:/a:/ also may be added to the name of a person being called for
the purpose of getting his or her attention. It is equivalent to dravving out the
pronunciation of a name in English.

-ryp6aH-a! - HaMe? (G) /"Gurba:n-a:!" "Nâ:me?7

"Gurba-a-n!" "What?!"

M y x a M M e r açaH-a, M y xa M M e r x,a ıı-a ! H upaK n n jjıiK S , n a , c y s y ii Harbili

rbipacbma mnaMMeflHK SonyÖHJiceüflHp. (G) /Muhommet ja:n-a:, Muhommet
Ja:n-a:! Nira:k gitdika:, gı:8, 0uwuq dagıj] gıraOına gidarymedik boIubil6eydir,/
Muhammet-ja-a-n, Muhammet-ja-a-n! Where could he have gone, girl? God forbid
that he’s gone to the water! [literally: 'would that it could be that he didn’t just go
to the edge of the water or something like this']

Attached to a verb in the informal imperative, the partide -a/a /-a:/â:/ focuses
attention on the person addressed as an appeal that some request or wish will be
fulfilled.

AH, c a r Ğ on -a, h h h m ! (G) /Ay, 0 ag b ol-a:, in im !/

Oh, thank you so much, little brother! ['may you be healthy']

Oryn aııibt y3tm 6on-a! (G) /Oğul ya:sı u8ı:n bol-a:!/

Congratulations on having a son! ['May your son live a long life!']

Use of the partide -a/a /-a:/â:/ in the form of a question focuses attention on a
statement. In this usage, it is equivalent to informal English 'right?'

3 p T n p KJFOi öasapflup-a? (G) /Erti:r kici ba:8ardır-a:?/

The small market is tomoırow, right?
472 Tıııkmen Reference Grammar

als lale!
The particle a / a /a/e/ 'ah, ’ey' is placed before proper names and nouns designating
individuals to indicate expectation or acknowledgment of a person’s presence. This
particle, which is pronounced with the follovving word, should not be coufused with
the interjection A /A/, which is followed by a pause.

A BenH ara, renim, ıuy C T y n fla O T y p t ı d e p n n . (G)

/A Weli: a:ga, gelil), 5u u60ullo oturuberir)./
Ah, Weli-aga, come in and have a seat in this chair.

3 rapptt SontıueBiiK, c m a p aratı 6113e rapuiH ypmapna khm 6onyncwnti3? (G)

/E gam bolsewik, 0İ8 yaraglı bi5e garsı ursorco kim bolupöurjuS?/
'Ey, old bolshevik, who are you to fight against us with a weapon in your hand?
[ypuıapua /ursorco/ 'like someone who fights']

aühü layleyl
Placing the particle aH/eH /ay/ey/ before a noun designating a person or thing indicates
an appeal to that person or thing to give attention to the speaker. This particle, which
is pronounced without a pause between it and the follovving word, should not be
confused with the interjection AM /Ay/, which is follovved by an intonational pause.

AK oryjı, öspn ren! (G) /Ay oğul, bâ:ri gel!/

Hey, son, come över here!

AH h h h m , cypY JiM r o iİ H ti M 6 o ı m a c a - f l a , y n c a H H r e 3 M0H5«;yn.i anw M araM 6 a p .

(G)
/Ay inim, 0ürülü goynum bolmo0o-do, üc 0a:nı gö8 mornjugı ya:lı ca:gam ba:r./
Hey, brother, though I don’t have herds of sheep, I do have three fine children.
['three children like the bead of the eye' = good luck chaım]

xae/xoe/-oe lha:wlho:wl-o:wl
The particle x a B /x o B / -o B /ha:w/ho:w/-o:w/ may be attached to a name or pronoun or to
the predicate of a sentence as a means of focusing attention on the person or action
appealed to. It is equivalent to English 'Hey!' Use of one or another variant of this
particle depends on individual speakers.

MeHMH coEajıtiM epciö flan 3Ken-0B. (G)

/Menig 0owa:lım yeı6i8 da:l eken-o:w./
Hey, it looks like my question was not groundless.

A xaB, a fla M n a p ! Ey ümji M H p a ım b t r tı AımaGere öepaejııun! (G)

/A ha:w, a:damlar! Bu yd mi:ra:phgı A:nnabege bera:yeli:r|!/
But hey, gentlemen! What about giving the post of irrigator to Annabek this year!
 Particles 473

K hm-ob cen? (G) /Kim-o:w 0en?/

Hey, who are you?

Xait MoMMyK, e T - x a B . EeBeT rırrflH-xaB. (G)

/Hay Mommuk, yet-ha:w. BowÖt gitdi-ha:w./
Ho, Mommuk, hey get över here! Hey the dam burst!

KaTe ıııeftne-fle 6oncyıı x o b . (N) /Kâ:te seyle-de bolöun ho:w./

Hey, sometimes it should be like this, too.

- I IIo ji epnepfle repcenm, nsMe, copaınflbiptm, öenKSM xyflaii 6apflbip-fla, oejiKsM

TantuıcMH-fla, x o b . (TV13.3) /"Sol yerlerde göıöögüS, nâme, 0o:rosdurui].
belkâ:m huda:y ba:rdjr-da:, belkâ:m tapılBınna, ho:w."/
"If you see him anywhere, you know, ask around, maybe there really is a ged,
hey-maybe he really should be found."

-jtaUe /-la/le/
Attaching the partide -jıa/jıe /-la-lo/le-lö/ to a|verb in the imperative form cır in the
second person conditonal softens a command or demand by adding a nuance of appeal
or request that is equivalent to English 'ali right?'

XaHH, HypMSMMeT, flyp-Jia, Mana-fla 6up e n 6 ep . (G )

/Ham, Nu:rmâ:mmet, dur-lo, maıja-da bir yo:l ber./
Come on, Nurmâmmet, stop, ali right? Give me a chance (to speak),too.

Fen-eM, CyxaH raTbmtm antma 6actiMpaK 6apa{ibuı-fla, HeHeHCH 6onca-fla, «uimh

anbipcuna eTeÜHH-Jie. (G) /Gel-ey, 0u:ha:n gatı:nıi] ya:nma ba0ımra:k barayın-na:,
nener|0i bol0o-do, i:sir) aıjıröına yeteyin-le./
C’mon now, why don’t I just go to Suhan-gatı right away, and no matter v'lıat it
is, let me get to the bottom of this business, ali right? [anbipcuna /arju^ma/ 'to
its other side']

Kirranjıapbuju3bi r e p K e s ı m - J i e . (G) /Kita:plarıi)i5ı görkö8ürj-lö./

Show me your books, ali right?

- Aü Bajuıa, a3ap 6epMecenM3-Jie. (G) /'Ay vvalla, a8a:r berme0er)i5-le.7

"Oh, my God, leave me alone, ali right?" ['would you please not give me
heartache']

- rypöaHMyxaMMeT, MeH C r a fle H Sup 3aT copaüuH-Jia. (TV12.4)

/'Gurba:nmuhommet, men 0iSSen bir 8a:t 0o:ra:ym-la.7
"Gurbanmuhammet, let me ask you something, ali right?"
474 Türkmen Reference Grammar

-jıaüUeü l-laylleyl
The partide -Jiatt/nett /-lay/ley/ also may be added to the verb of a sentence as an
appeal to focus attention on something. This partide does not always conform to
vovvel harmony.

Bait, Opa3 K aıc a, TypGan ypfltı-JieH. KennsMe t s h k 6m ıeH ypfltt-jıeü. (G)

/Way, Ora:8 ka:ka, Gurba:n urdı-ley. KeUa:me tayak bilen urdı-ley./
Oh, Oraz-kaka, Gurban beat me, see? He beat me on the head vvith a stick, see?

Realization
The particles -a/a /-a:/â:/ and -aÜT/eiİT /-ayt/eyt/ add the nuance of disappointed
realization or bevvilderment to a speaker’s thoughts. Their English equivalents are 'but',
'yeah, but', 'how could', and the like.

-a/s /-a:/â:/
The partide -a/a /-a:/a:/ may be added to a verb, noun or other part of speech to express
disappointed realization vvhen undesired or unexpected circumstances arise. its English
equivalents are 'but' and 'yeah, but'.

Onaptm HTJiepeM-a Gapfliip. (G) /Oloruıj itlerem-â: ba:rdır./

But don’t forget, they also have dogs.

ApMaHJitı rona flYiıiflYr ‘3' (G) /Arma:nlı golo diisdüg-a:./

Yeah, but vve were captured before vve could do what vve vvished to do. [apMauntı
/arma:nlı/ 'having an unfiılfilled desire'J

Eeifaıe 6epK tmaM M eiffle HM pefleH , HsflHn flepsGHimHK-a? (N)

/Beyle berk inam menne nireden, nâ:dip dörâ:billik-a:?/
But from vvhere and hovv could such deep trust in me arise?

-aümleûm l-aytleytl
The partide -atİT/ctİT /-ayt/eyt/ functions to add a shade of bevvildered realization to
the speaker’s thoughts, and may be equivalent to English Tıovv could'.

Ey yTaMjf;aKMtrKaH-aÜT, att er-a tm a m m en. (G)

/Bu uta:yjakmıka:n-ayt, ay yo:g-a: manim yo:k./
I wonder how could this one vvin? No vvay, I don’t believe it.
Es, x3H H fleH fopu 6y m b h m h n sx JtM M M e re n M 3 H flH p -e fiT . (G)
/Bâ:, hâ:liden ba:ri bu menig pâhimime gelma:nnir-eyt./
Oof! How could it not have occurred to me for so long?
 Particles 475

Surprise
The reaction of surprise toward an action may be accompanied by the use of the particle
-ait/eti /-ay/ey/.

-aüleü l-aytey/
When added to the predicate of a sentence, the particle -aii/eiı /-ay/ey/ denotes a shade
of surprise that is equivalent to English 'look' or 'now'.

IUy KHTaSfci hkh ryuflen O K a n ryTapı>rn£Mp-aii. (G)

/Su kita:bı iki gilnnön oka:p gutorupdur-oy./
Look, he apparently finished reading this book in two days.

fİYperHMM Hpfltın-aü. (G) /Yürögümii ya:rdıi)-ay./

Look, you startled me.

Bax, MeroiH MaraayarbiMM caHflaH Mincapfltraap-eft. (G)

/Wah, menii] ca:gajıgımı 0a:nnan cıkardılar-ey./
Ah, look, they’re corrupting my baby.

On KHMK3H-eW? (G) /Ol kimka:n-ey?/

Now, I wonder who that could be?
476 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Grammatical Particles
Several particles funetion grammatically to question ( - m u /m i i /-mı/mi/) or to negate
(-Ma/ıwe /-ma/me/, -Maıı/MSH /-ma:n/mâ:n/, -Map/Mep/Ma3/Me3 /-mar/mer/ma8/me5/)
statements, and to qualify verbals and nominals ( - h u k / r h k /-dık/dik/ 'that', -K a/ıcs
/ka:/kâ:/ 'while') serving as objects of a predicate. Particles used to connect or correlate
parts of a sentence are discussed under Conjunctions (see 444).

Question
General uncertainty or ignorance may be expressed by asking a question. In Turkmen,
the use of the question or interrogative partide -m u /m h /-mı/smi-nıü/ is required when
one asks a general question vvhose answer may be 'yes' or 'no', or a choice between
two items ('X or Y?'; see 215, 493), or vvhen asking a "tail" question ('aren’t you?',
'right?'). It is not used to ask questions when one of the interrogative pronouns (xaqaH
/hacan/ 'when?', hbmc /nâ:me/ 'what?', k u m /kim/ 'who?', ete.) occur in the same
sentence, because those pronouns anticipate specific kinds of answers. The partide
-mm/mm /-mı/mi/ is written together with the word which is placed in question form.
Usually, the partide - m u /m h /-mı/mi/ appears at the end of an interrogative
sentence, but it also may occur after a word or phrase put in question.

EactiM renepcıiHMM? (G) /Ba6xm gelerfiiıjmi?/

Will you come back soon?
Ara-xaB, eüfleMHH? (G) [-mhh < -mhcmi(] /Ata-ha:w, öydömüi)?/ [-mirj < -miöii)]
Ata, hey, you’re at home? ['are y o u at home?']

The question partide -m m /m h /-mı/mi/ may express a rhetorical question to which

no answer is expected.
Maptıap 6aü flanMH? AnnaMupaflu yHyTflUHMU? (G)
/Ca:nyar ba:y dâ:lmi? Alla:mıra:dı unutduıjmı?/
Is Chanyar not a rich person? Have you forgotten Allamırat?
TanptiHtiH 6oji epH öıuıen j^oıuryunM cysyHa-fla 6aÜJîtnc repeKMM? (G)
/Tasjn-.mıj bol yeri bilen joısgunlı 6uwuna:-da ba:yl»k gerekmi?/
Do God’s fertile earth and his rushing waters need (any further) wealth?

A question may be emphasized by placing the modal word a x u p u /a:hın/ 'after ali'
or the interrogative pronoun H3Me /na:me/ 'what' after the question partide - m u /m m
/-mı/mi/.
Ewp Gaptın, xeMMecHHH aıiMKiıan raJiflbiöepaeHfle GojiMaapMbi axtıpu? (G)
/Bir gi:je banp, hemme0ini anıkla:p gaydıberâ:yenne bolmoya:rmı a:hm?/
Is it really not possible to go for a night, to find out everything and come back?
 Particles 477

E h3 ereH fltuı Ilamtı Keıra MMpan 3flHH*;eKflHK, 6h3mh ahchhm h 3 renuHMiı

H9Me? MııparniHK HyHHa IlaKa eTflM. (G) /Bİ8 ötön yıl Passı Keli mi:ra:p
edinjekdik, biSirj diyenimiS ge£dimi nâ:me? Mi:ra:plık Nunna Paka yetdi./
We had wanted to make Pashshı-kel the irrigator last year, but did what we
wanted really count? The position of irrigator went to Nunna Pak.

When used with a negative verbal form, the particle - m m / m h /-mı/mi/ may e:: press a
rhetorical question with the nuance of unexpectedness or suddenness.

F a fltıp n tı CyöceKeıu, HKtnma enyM flyıuyn, KeneypreHM paitoHLiHLirç ycT\nqeH

öapaÜMaHMU? (G) /Gadırlı 0üb0ökös>, yakı:nna yo:lum düşüp, Kö:nöürgönc
rayonunurj ü00ünnön bara:yma:nmı?/
Dear Sübsekesh, going on my way recently, w hat did I come upon but the region
of Köne Ürgench! ['did I not come upon?']
SficeM , TypKMeHHn ımıraMöep maxı>ıpu MarrHMiyjiH pyxyıifla xyflaa
HKBiKJiauıun, mym,ı KyileeMSHMHflH H3Me? (N) /Ey0em, türkmönüg pı:garr ber
sa:hı:rı Magtımgulı nr.hunno huda:ya yakr.nlasıp, Suni kü:8öma:nmidi nâ:ıne?/
But didn’t Magtımgulı, prophet poet of the Türkmen, suddenly draw near rr to
God in his soul, and long for this?

Adding the question particle - m m / m h /-mı/mi/ to the verb of a sentence, fc Ilovved

by H3Me /na:me/ 'what' plus this particle, attaches a shade of vagueness. The foıınation
is equivalent to 'or something, or something or other, or something like that'.

AHa, uıoHyn 03anaM 6np aanw 6apMtmı, flene M aıuranactı 6ojiM aaM uniM tı-
H3MCMH. (G) /Ana, sonui) oSolom b ir aya:lı ba:ım ıs, yö:nö m asgalaöı
boImoya:mısmı-na:memi./
Well, they say he has a wife already, but apparently his wife is unable to have a
child, o r s o m e t h i n g li k e t h a t .

The particle - m m / m m /-m ı/m i/ may indicate that the action to be performed is
contingent on another action in the sense that in case one action is performed, then
another action is incumbent upon someone. This formation is equivalent to English
'should one do (something), (then)'.
By lOMym cana öyüpyım biMLi, cen eprnıe eTHpMejut. (G)
/Bu yumuş 0arja buyrullumı, 0en yerine yetirmeli./
Should this task be entrusted to you, (then) you must carry it out.

Ce3 öepflHHMH - C63ynne Tanbin, 6ok>h ajiflbU(Mbi - epMHe eTMp. (G)

/0ö8 berdiıjmi - 6ö5ür)dö tapıl, boyun allııjmı - yerine yetir./
Should you give your word, (then) keep it, should you give a promise, (then)
fulfill it.
478 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Negation
The partide -M a /in e /-ma-mo/me-mö/ or its variants -M aıı/ıvraH /-ma:n/ marn/ and
-Map/Mep/Ma3/Me3 /-mar-mor/mer-mör/maB-mo8/meS-möS/ (the latter only for the
future indefinite tense and participle suffix - a p / e p /-ar/er/) serve as the Standard means
of indicating negation of verbs in Türkmen (see 212).

Beöne 3p6eT saTJiapa ch3 HeneH en 6epflnnn3, MbinıaKJiapbiHbi3 3a#binti3

(G) /Beyle erbet Sa:tlara 0İ8 nenerj yo:l berdiıjiS, yıgnaklarırjıS
G o iiM an p M U ?
8a:dırjıS bolmoya:rmı?/
How could you have let such bad things happen, haven’t there been any meetings
or anything like that?
A 6flbiK epnM 3Ke 6 y r y n x m e p e rıiTM ejtM . (G)
/Abdıkeri:m eke bu:n hi:c yere gitmedi./
Abdıkerim-eke did not go anywhere today.
On x h m B a r r ıııetae ınaTJibiKJiM rymıepnn maanM 6onapbin hm İİhti
nHKHpneHMeüapflH. (G)
/Ol hi:c wagt şeyle sartlddı giinlöriirj sa:ya:dı bolorun diyip pikirlenmeya.’rdi./
He never thought that he would be a witness to such happy days.,
MeH 6y S a p a c a 03auKH MMKHiunaptiMfla aüflbinflbiM , ra tö T a n a n oTypM attbiH .
(N) /Men bu ba:rada oSolkı çıkışlarımda aydıpdım, gaytala:p oturma:yın./
I told about this in my previous speeches, don’t let me keep repeating myself.
K m , my rantiflaH rap, xhm 3aT«aH ropKMa. (G)
/İne, su gapıdan gi:r, hi:c 8a:tdan gorkmo./
Now, go through this door and don’t be afraid of anything.
Ona MH3K.ajibnc S e p M e ö a n , y ıc y c b iH tı T y T a y p M a a H flepT-axBanaT AHHaryn aTJiM
rbisbiH bintKbmbi. (N) /Orjo ırnjalık bermeyâ:n, u:ku0unı tutdurmoyarn dert-
ahwa:lat A:nnagül a:tlı gı:5ıxj ıskıdı./
The torment vvhich gives him no peace and does not let him sleep is his love for
a girl named Annagül.

Ohm Q3yn 3Y3eTMeceH. XHq k h m HY3eTMe3>xaH oryn. (BH)

/Om ö:8üi] düSötmöOöi], hi:£ kim düSötmöS, ham oğul./
If you don’t correct it yourself, no one else tvill correct it, dear son.
OHyn ajiMamaK ranacu 6apMM? (G) /Onui] almajak gala:0ı ba:rmt?/
Is there any fortress that he won’t take?
- By 3pTeKHHH O K aM a n u K a auiH TM eflH K TypKMeH a3-a3flbip. (N)
/"Bu ertekini okomoduk ya: esitmedik türkmön a:5-a:85ır.7
"There are very few Turkmen who have not either read or heard this fairy tale."
 Paıticles 479

OHyn 6axacbi a3tijiMaHf(up. (G) /Onug bahaSı ya8ılma:nnır./

its price m ust n o t have been w ritten.

f ly ı ıiM a H ti M t iH 83 a a r t i M t i H a u ı a r t ı ı m a f l B i r b m u 6njiM3HflHpnH. (G)

/DuSmarmmıi] ö:8 ayagıımi) asa:gınnadıgını bilma:nnirin./
I t seem s I d id n ’t realize that the enemy was right under my feet.

Û3an XMH-xaMan uıeMne 3araap SojiMaHHM. (N)

/OSol hi:c-hacan şeyle Şartlar boimarnm./
Such things had never happened before at ali.

B h 3 h h 6aüJitnoıapı>tMti3H 03yMH3fleH copaMaH, a m in n m ö o p flu n e p . (N )

/BiSirj baryhklarunıSı 8:8ümü88ön 0o:roma:n, alıp gidyarrdiler./
They were taking away our riches without asking us.

3rep Kemren MMMnne Sup 3aT 6ap Sonca, öeiine ran>ı arupMa3flu. (H)
/Eger kella: rj icinne bir 8a;t barr bolBo, beyle gatı argınnaSSı./
If there were anything in your head, it wouldn’t hu rt so bad.

2Çamn>ı - cen CHpKaB, onan 6nnMepcnn, Sap floKTopa itit. (G)

/Jagcı - 0en 6ırkaw, okarp bilmeröıi], bar doktoro git./
Jangchı, you’re sick, and you won’t be able to study. Go on, go to the doctor.

Ona flepetc MapKctm, SHrentcMU, JlemiHiın ejiMe3-ttnTMe3 Mfleanaptoaı snr*;an-

sncuan flyuıyHflKpMspfliınep. (TA16.4) /Oıjo derek Mark8ıq, EngelOirj, Leninir)
ölmöS-yitmeS ideyalannı yarnjarp-yarnjarp düsünniiryârrdiler./
In their place, they pounded the immortal, everlasting ideas of Marx, Engels and
Lenin into them. ['ideas w hich do not die and do no t en d ']

The modal word Han /dâ.i/ 's/he/it/they is/are not' (see 213, 383) also may be used
to negate some verb forms, but commonly this word along with eK /york/ 'there is/are
not' (see 382) are used to negate nouns and other non-verbal parts of speech serving as
predicates.

OHyn reneHHHH-renMeflMruHM BenH MeH öHroneK fları. (G)

/Onug gelenini-gelmedigini weli men biljek darl./
However, I won’t know whether he came or not.

3aT TGjıeMejiH a a n cyB y t o h . 3M M a ıııy cyB re ım p en n ep H yin en , m y n a p tm

TypSacH H a, KpaHTHHa, morça 6 h3 TeneMeını S o n s p tıc . (TV17.2)
/5a:t tölömölii darl 0uw ii£ü:n. Emma: 5u 0uw geçirenleri iletim, sulorui]
turboOuno, kırantına, lorjo biS tölömölii bolya:rx0./
W e d o n ’t have to pay a thing for water. But for their bringing in this water, and
their pipes and their faucets, for this we do have to pay.
480 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Qualification
Several particles serve to qualify the nature of the action or State expressed by verbals
and nominals serving as objects o f a predicate. The particle - h l i k /a h k /-dık/dik/
stresses that a participle or nominal has the character of a predicate ('that it is"), and the
particle -Ka/Ka /-ka:/kâ:/ indicates that the action of a verb form is occurring at the
same time as ('while it isO or before ('before it is') the action of a predicate.

-duKİduK /-dık-dukldik-dükl
The Türkmen object may be expressed by a participle which possesses both nominal
and verbal characteristics, ör by a nominal (noun, pronoun, ete.). Use of the particle
-H u k /a h k /-dık-duk/dik-dük/ stresses that the participle or nominal has a verbal
character. This particle may take possessive and case endings.
Türkmen has two ways to express the object of a predicate through a present, past or
future participle. In sentences of the first type below, the object 'their not knowing
anything' is expressed by a present participle in the negative (-MetiaH /-meya:n/) with
the third person plural possessive (+JiepH /+leri/) and accusative case (+HH /+ni/)
endings. Sentences of the second type below have the same composition, but with the
additional element of the particle -flH K /-dik/, which emphasizes that the participle
funetions more as a predicate in the sense of 'they don’t know anything'.

IU oH fla-fla onap xjhh 3aT Even then they said they don’t
öHiiMeftaHJiepHHH aÜTABinap. know anything. ['spoke about
/Sonno-da: olor hi:c 8a:t their not knowing anything']
bilmeyaınlerini aytdılar./

IlIoHna-fla onap xhh 3aT Even then they said that they
ÖHJiMeüaHflHKnepMiH aiiTfltınap. don’t know anything.
/Sonno-da: olor hi:c 8a:t
bilmeyâ:nniklerini aytdılar./

The following examples illustrate the use of the particle - auk/hhk /-dık/dik/ with
each of the present, past and future participles.

IlIeSne flHÜİtauıep KeMCMfinnÜ3HflMrnnn ömıenoK, ahjihhm h, cyH raTiiH bm ,

MeflenHeTMiiHn ü h tm iöapmiflbirbiHU 6wıeHOK.(N)
/Şeyle diyyâ:nler kem0idilya:nnigini bileno:k, dilimi), 0ungotunuq, medeniyetinig
yitip barya:ndıgmı bileno:k./
Those who say so don’t realize that they’re being humiliated, they don’t realize
that their language, art and culture is being lost.
 Particles 481

Uly xeTOHH anaHtınti3flaH conpa HHe Tene<j>oHHH HinjıeKaHflMrHHH,

HmneMeitaHjmrHHH SapnaMantı. (TV17.4) /Su zetom alanı rjiS5an öogro ine
telefonuıj-i:sleya:nnigini, i:slemeyâ:nnigini ba:rlamalı./
After you get these tokens, you have to check vvhether the telephone is vvorking
o r not.

H a p sa n ana eTe reneHflHrHHH ÖHnan, auıatabi floflarfcmtı flnuınefliı. (G)

/Narjan apa ötö gecennigini bilip, asa:kı do:dogunı dirsledi./
Realizüıg th a t she had given aw ay too much, Narjan-apa bit her lower lip

lOpflyMtöbm xaöctı 6ııp epMHe 6apcan, tucfltıcaflbieTfle, Meflemıerfle, 3xıuı

6a6aTJiapfla epsH ynw 6ımajıapbin ry pyjıanfltırtıntı, epsH yjıtı esrepmıuiH *_nepnn
jjopeaHJleHgHrHHH repMeK 6ojwp. (TV11.3) /Yu:rdumu5ui] lıayöı bir yerine
baröar), ıkdı0a:dıyetde, medeniyetde, ahli barbatlarda örâ:n u h binadanr]
gurulonnugunı, örâ:n u h öSgörüslüklöriirj dörödülönnügünii görmök bolyarr./
W herever you go in our country, one can see th a t very large buildings havı; been
constructed and great changes have been created in economics, in culttıre a n d i n
ali fields.

Mbipajıtı roıoHnapu necbe caTW,aKflurbiHu a i^ ta m tıp . (N)

/Muratlı goyunlon neûye Öatjjakdıgını aydıpdır./
Mıralı said th a t h e ’U seli the sheep on credit.

Mcjmh B a m ı fleBJierfleH Kap3 nyn am in, mu conyıma-aa 6eprnım öonyn ra/ısuı

xo3K,aıtHKiıapun xa3HpKK m epm ep^e sypMyına y K u n n u öonyn 6HnMeK,e\ıaHrH
03-e3YHflen flYuiHYKimflHp. (TV14.2) /İ01a:n wagtı döwlötdön karö pul ahp, jrj
6or]unno-da: bergili bolup ga:Iya:n hojoluklorur) hârSirki sertlerde durmuso ukırplı
bolup bilmejekdigi ö:6-ö:5ünnön düsniiklüdür./
İt is self-evident th a t the farms which are getting loans from the state at any lime
they vvant and vvinding up in debt, will n o t be able to a d a p t to modem
conditions.

The partide -hlik/ juik /-dık/dik/ also may be added to a verbal form ending in the
suffix o f obligation -Mantı/ıvıeJiM /-m alı/m eli/, when this suffix function;; as a
participle and is accompanied by an interrogative pronoun.

OpTa MeKfleÖH TaMaMJia:s;aK yuypfciMnaptı Ajitbih xaMcu Kspe Gam

roniMajiLifluru öapafla y3aK otinaHfltı. (N) /Orto mekdebi tamarmlajak ucurumlon
Altın hayöı ka:re bas gosmoludugı barrada uSok orylonnı./
Altın thought for a long time about vvhich profession teenagers graduating frtım
secondary schools should choose.
482 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

lIIo H fla i m e MHHyT r y p n e ıu e H ö o n c a H b B , xeM eMH3Me T 8 j ıe M e n n n n r n ıu o n

(TV17.2) /Sonno n â :c e m i n u t g ü r lö s ö n b o i0 o q u 5 , h e m e m n â :m e
T afifla a ö f l t u ı a p .
tö lö m ö lü d iig ü Sol ta :y d a a y d ıly a :r ./
Then, however many minutes you spoke, it is said there w hat you have to pay.

When added to a noun, pronoun, adjective, adverb or modal word serving as the
object, the particle - huk/ hhk /-dik/dik/ stresses that they have the character of
predicates.

T la T b iu ıa : «Xs, hhhh 6 m h h h m , ı n o n ro » ;a H M H K H M R H rH H H » f lH ih ı n , K e u ı r y H e
re ım rm n p . (N )
/Pa:tısa "Hâ:, inni billim, sol goja:mi) kimdigini" diyip, kösgünö gelipdir./
The king entered his palace and said "Yeah, now I know vvho that old man is."
Ch3hh ce3YHM3HH TscHpHHHH mhhsh yııyjibirbiHbi yuy-maH. (N)
/0i5irj 0ö5üi]ügiiq tâ:0i:riniq igr)â:n uluduğum unutma:^./
Don’t forget t h a t the influence of your vvords is very g r e a t .
©nue aypaH Be3Hnenep, 3flnnMejiM Hiıınep enHH-eımaü jjan. C«3, sotragbinap,
MyuyH mefljıejUHraHe 6npMirx;n noBaTfla e3yHH3 B e x a jn c u M M 3 a
HY^Y^upMe™- (N)
/Öıjdö duron we8i:peler, edilmeli irsler yeıjil-yelpa:y da:l. 0i5 yaSıjdar, munuıj
seyledigine birinji no:botdo ö:5iii)ü6 düsünmölü we halkımıSa düslinnürmölii./
The tasks that face us and the work vvhich must be done are not simple. You
vvriters first of ali must understand yourselves t h a t this is so and then explain it to
our people.
OHyn araMflUrblHU f le p p e B T a H a flH M , (H) /Onug a : g a m d ı g u ı ı d e rre w ta n a d ım ./
Irecognized immediately t h a t h e v v a s m y o l d e r b r o t h e r .
«TYpKMeHHCTaHHH oaaıiKM CCCPfle h k h rpaatsaHJiKra pa3biMbuıtıx 6epeH
6enji3n renceıc 6onap.» (TV14.5)
eK e -T 3 K H eB JieT fjM rH H H
/Tiirkmönü09a:mg oSolkı e0-8-0erde iki gırazdanlıga ra:Sıcıhk beren yeke-ta:k
dövvlötdügünü bellâ:p gecöek bolor."/
'İt should be noted t h a t Türkmenistan i s the only s t a t e in the former USSR vvhich
agreed to dual citizenship."
- Mjikh 6nJien-3 uıy Kapfle 15 flbin CTaxbiMbin CapfluruHM srrnaflaifbiH. (TPI3.2)
fİlk i bilen-â: su ka:rde 15 yıl ı08a2ımıi] ba:rdıgını ya.-tladayın."/
"First of ali, let me remind you t h a t I h a v e 1 5 years experience on the job."

The suffîx +jilik/ jihk /+hk/lik/ (see 518) funetions similarly as the particle
-HbiK/flHK /-dık/dik/ when added to a participle or nominal serving as the object of a
sentence, except that +JlbiK/nnK /+lık/ltk/ emphasizes their nominal character in
contrast to -flbuc/flHK /-dık/dik/, vvhich stresses their verbal character.
 Particles 483

UIoHfla-fla onap x m 3aT Even then they said they don’t

SıuiMetîaHnepHHM aÜTfltınap. know anything.
/Sonno-da: olo rh h c Ba:t
bilmeyâ:nierini aytdılar./

IlloHfla-fla onap xh« 3aT Even then they said th a t they

ÖHJiMeJfeHJiHKJiepmiH aüTfltınap. don’t know anything. ['spoke about
/Sonno-da: olor hi:c 8a:t their not knowing anything']
bilmeya:nniklerini aytdılar./

Konxo3 6amntın>ı MHXMaıo>ın nracnp flepactınfla üysijanjiMrHHM 6nnw- (G)

/KolhoS baslığı mı:hma:nıi) pikir derya:0ınna yü8ya:nligini billi./
The head of the collective farm understood that the guest was lost in his thoughts.
['that he was swimming in the river of his thoughts'] [nominal character:
'understood about his guest’s svvimming in the river of his thoughts']
©3yMM flYHİfşne »n 6arnn>ı aflaM xacan sflitspflHM. Mara r a n ttı Bejııın, e3yM«n
sınntımaHJiurbiMM uıoHfla (N) /Ö:8ümü dünyii:de iç bagth a:dam
ha6a:p edyâ:rdim. Ğa:ga ga:llı weli:n, ö:5iimüq yalıjısanlıgımı sonno billim./
I considered myself the happiest person in the world. When I became pregnant, I
realized then that I had made a mistake. [nominal character: 'realized about my
having made a mistake']
By Mecenefle Taşran kkm y ^ y n u n 6apjıurbiHU xhm xaqan HTflan utiKapMaH- (N)
/Bu meöelede tayagır) iki ır.junui] ba:rhgım hi:c hacan ya:tdan çıkarma:!}./
In this problem, never forget that a stick has two points. [nominal character.
'never forget about a stick’s having two points']

-ko/k3 l-ka:/kâ:/
The particle -K a/i» /-ka:/ka:/ is added to verbs (especially to the contracted verbs iiop
/yö:r/, nyp /du:r/, OTbip /otı:r/, HTbip /yatı:r/) and a few other parts of speech to
indicate that a State of being or action is true or being performed at the same time or
'while' another state or action is true or being performed. Person is indicated by
attaching possessive suffixes to this particle.

CartapMMpaT xaHbin ranacbi cajiHbin Hepıra ksh reaeK repynflH. (G)

/0apaımıra:t ha:nıjj gala:0ı 0alnıp yö:rka: ka:n ge8ek göriipdü./
Saparmırat had seen the Khan’s castle many times vvhile it was being
constructed.

flypcyH ııi3xepneKa o6am>ı repM era Ken ap3yB 3flepfln. (G)

/DurOun sâiherdekâ: o:ba:nı görmögii köp ar5uw ederdi./
While in the city, Dursun used to long to see the village.
484 Turkmen Reference Grammar

IIIyHHa saraç apKactnifla nypKa, mu fleBnerıı aara MSKepıtn 6 onMa3 . (G)

/Sunco halk arka0ınna du:rka:, ya:s döwlötii ayağa cököriip bolmoS./
It is impossible to force a young state to its knees when so many people support
it. ['while so many people stand behind it']

On my r y p p Y K J ie p H 3 A İia p K a a n n e p m u f x e p e K e T n e n f ln p i İ 3 p f ln . (H)
/Ol su gümiijlörü edyâ:rka: ellerini hereketlenniryâ:rdi./
While giving these accounts, he vvas gesticulating with his hands.
T y p K M e H H C T a n fla e n - e n n e p r a a n a p i t e p s n s u m a , x a T f la oh fle p T -o n S a m
(TV16.1)
H U iJia p b iH fla K a f ly p M y m a MBiıcapHH S K e H Jie p .
/Türkmönü00a:nna örj-öıjlör gı:51arı örâ:n ya:ska:, hatda: on dö:rt-on bâ:s
ya:slannnaka: durmuso cıkarya:n ekenler./
In the past in Türkmenistan, they vvould marry off girls vvhile very young,
apparently even whiie they were fourteen- or fîfteen-years old.

flypflyresen önnen rypjıeuiHn OTbipKaM, 6np r e a y M ömıen f l a m - T e B e p e r e x e M

chh 3flîİ3pflHM. (TV16.2) /DurdugöSöl bilen gürlösüp otı:rka:m, bir göSüm bilen
das-töwörögö hem 0ı:n edyâ:rdim./
While sitting there talking vvith Durdıgözel, I also kept one eye on the
surroundings.

O h c o h k s h r y p n e M e r e M r a f l a r a H , H a x a p u t t u n O T u p K a r ç . (TV13.5)
/OnOoıj kâ:n gürlömögöm gadagan, nahar iyip otı:rka:i)./
Then, to talk a lot also is forbidden, while you’re eating dinner.

Combination of this partide with the negative past participle in - M a n / M a n

/-ma:n/mâ:n/ forms the ending -MaHKa/M3HK3 /-ma:nka:/mâ:nkâ:/, which indicates
that an action is performed 'before' the main action of the sentence. Person is indicated
through the addition of possessive suffixes to this ending.

Opa3 r y H f lo r y n - f l o r M a H K a ena flyutU M . (G)

/Ora;5 gün dogup-dogma:nka; yo:lo düsdü./
Oraz hit the road just as it became light. ['before the sun rose-didn’t rise']

C eH rejiM3HK3H n iflu n flitn e p . (G) /0en g e lm a:n k â :ıj gid ipd iler./
They left before you came.

MeH x e M M a m r a jıa M B B f la y n y c t ı SonaniiM c e S s ı u i H , ı r n ı e t h t m s h k s m , ryıtfle

eMnepıı cynypHn, H a x a p ÖHiıiHpMn, e f l j ı s H j r a r e H a x a p T a if e iH n a n r a n t e H . (TVI6.2)
/Men hem masgala:mı88a ulu0ı bolonum 0eba:pli, i:se gitmâ:nka:m, günnö öylörü
Oüpürüp, nahar bisirip, öylâ:nlige nahar ta:yınla:p gidyâ:n./
And because I’m the oldest in our family, each day before I go to work, I sweep
the rooms, cook, and prepare food for the aftemoon.
 SYNTACTIC SYSTEM

The syntax of a language concenıs how its words are combined with each other lo build
phrases and sentences. In normal speech, words typicaliy do not exist in isulation,
although they may convey a complete thought in exceptional circumstancas (for
example, Tirel')- Rather, vvords are components of phrases and, in their tum, phrases
are components of sentences. By itself, a phrase usually does not constitute a sentence,
again except in certain circumstances (for example, "The buteher’s wife' in respoııse to a
question like 'Who killed Mr. Robinson?'). Sentences provide more information than
phrases and, by defûıition, convey a complete thought.
Sentences may be simple or composite, depending on whether they have one. or two
subjects and predicates. In tum, composite sentences may be compound or complex,
depending on how they are related to one another. The components of composite
sentences are called clauses. A compound sentence has two or more independent
clauses, while a complex sentence has a main and one or more subordir.ate or
dependent clauses.
This seetion is a brief presentation of the main types of syntactic relationships
between components of phrases and sentences in Standard Türkmen.
486 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

PHRASES

As opposed to compound and combination vvords vvhich are words with new meanings
or references, phrases are word combinations in which vvords are connected into units
that have meaning but express an incomplete thought. The components of phrases or
vvord combinations may be changed, vvhereas those of compound and combination
vvords may not be, vvithout creating nevv lexical meanings. Syntactic phrases also
should be distinguished from set expressions or fixed phrases, vvhose components
cannot be changed and vvhich belong to the phraseology of a language.

Compound Word: Aöryjı /A:ygiil/ Aygül (female name)

(= aM/a:y/ moon + ryn /gül/ flovver)

Combination Word: MaKcaT-MiipaT /mak6at-mıra:t/ aim, goal

(= MaKcaT /maköat/ goal + MtıpaT /mıra:t/ vvish)

Syntactic Phrase: AMrynHn MaKcaT-MHpafl&ı Aygül’s goal

(Word Combination) /A;ygüliıj maköat-mıra.'dı/

Set Expression: rynaK acMaK /gulok a0mak/ to listen

(Fixed Phrase) (= rynaK /gulok/ ear/ + acMaK /aömak/ to hang)

Such vvord combinations may be classified into tvvo main types according to vvhich
part of speech the main component refers to. A noun phrase contains a nominal as its
main vvord, vvhile a verb phrase contains a verbal as its main vvord. Nominals consist
of nouns and other non-verbal parts of speech, while verbals consist primarily of verbs.
Phrases contain one main or independent component plus one (simple) or more
(exıended) dependent components. The syntactic relations betvveen the main and
dependent components of noun and verb phrases may be deseribed in terms of
juxtaposition, agreement and government, terms vvhich are explained belovv. These
connections are expressed through vvord order, suffixes and structure vvords.
 Syntactic System 487

Noun Phrase Structure

In noun phrases, the main or independent component usually is expressed by a noun,

while the dependent component may be expressed by a noun, pronoun, adjective,
numeral, or participle. In Türkmen, the dependent word or vvords ahvays come before
the main word.

Noun + Noun: Kem iftipactt /köcö cıra0ı/ streetlight

Ke»wn Mtıpactt /köca:ıj cıraOı/ the street’s light

Pronoun + Noun: oHyn Mtıpactı /onur) cıraöı/ its light

Adjective + Noun: sırra ntıpa /yagtı cıra/ bright light

Numeral + Noun: HKHHaçn Mtıpa /ikinjfî cıra/ the second light

Participle + Noun: m m MBipa /yanya.-n cıra/ the buming light

The components of noun phrases may be connected to one another through

juxtaposition, agreement or govemment.

Jıoaapositiotı
Juxtaposition (also called parataxis) is actively used to form noun phrases in Türkmen.
İn this relationship, the connection between components is shown by placing them in a
certain order, rather than by the use of grammatical suffixes. The main component
usually is a noun, while the dependent component may be a noun, demonstrative
pronoun, adjective, numeral or participle.

Noun + Noun: flaın jpraap /da:s di:wa:r/ stone wall

Pronoun + Noun: 6y e# /bu öy/ this house

Adjective + Noun: aK MamUH /a:k maşım/ white car

Numeral + Noun: mkm aT /iki at/ two horses

Participle + Noun: reneH aflaM /gelen ardam/ the person who came
488 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Agreement
Agreement in person and number is used to show the connection between components
of a noun phrase. Turkmen shows such agreement when the main component of a noun
phrase appears in the first or second person and the dependent component appears in the
same person and number. In such cases, the dependent component is a pronoun in the
genitive case. Agreement is shown only by the possessive suffix attaehed to the main
component (KHTan /kita:p/ 'book'), which demands that the pronouns mateh them in
person and number (first person singular + i j m /+ım/ and MeH /men/ T , ete.).

Pronoun + Noun: MeHHH KHTa6itM /menir) kitarbım/ my book

Pronoun + Noun: 6 m3HH KHTaÖHMtn /biSirj kita:bmn6/ our book

Pronoun + Noun: ceHHH KHTaöfciH /0enir) kita:bıi]/ your book

Pronoun + Noun: CH3MH KHTa6tınti3 /0i5ii] kita:bır)iS/ your book (plural)

When the main component stands in the third person singular or plural, both are
expressed grammatically by a single suffix, the third person possessive suffix +li/ h
/+ı/i/. In this case, the dependent component matehes the main component in person,
but not in number.

Pronoun + Noun: OH yn HHpacM /onui] cıra0ı/ its light

Pronoun + Noun: OJiapttH Mtıpactı /oloruıj cıraOı/ their light

This kind of agreement is used in the possessive relationship, where the main
component appears in the third person singular or plural (marked by the possessive
suffix +m/h /+ı/i/), and the dependent component appears in the genitive case (with or
without the suffix +mh/hh /+ırj/ir)/) and agrees in person ( K e n e /köcö/ 'street' is an
"it"), but not in number.

Noun + Noun: KG^e qupacı>ı /köcö cıra0ı/ Street light

Noun + Noun: Kenan HHpacbt /kö£a:g cıraOı/ the street’s light

Noun + Noun: KeMenepMH utıpacu /köcölörüi] cu-a0ı/ the streets’ light

 Syntactic System 489

İn ali these cases, the dependent component appears in the genitive case because the
main component demands the use of this case. Hovvever, this relationship i s one of
govemment (see the following), rather than of agreement. Agreement refers only to the
fact that the pronoun MeH /men/ T is first person singular in agreement «ith the
possessive suffbc +mm /+ım/, and so on, and that the noun KBMe /köcö/ 'street' is third
person singular because it is an "it."

Government
When the main component of a phrase, because of its lexical and grammatical meaning,
demands that the dependent component appear in a certain case (except the nominative
case), that demand govems the dependent component. Government typically oı:curs in
the possessive relationship expressed by noun phrases, where the dependent component
must appear in the genitive case. Hovvever, this type of connection also may t<: found
vvith the other cases.
In the possessive relationship, the main component of the noun phrase appears vvith
the third person possessive suffıx (+ u /n /+ı/i/) and demands that the dependent
component appear in the genitive case. A definite possessive relationship demands the
addition of the genitive case suffix (+ uh / h h /+ııj/ii)/), vvhile an indefinite po.ısessive
relationship does not (see 116).

Noun + Noun: M eK fleÖ H H flH p e K T o p ii / m e k d e b i i ] d i r e k t o n /

th e d ire c to r o f th e s c h o o l

Noun + Noun: MeK#en flH p e K T o p tı / m e k d e p d ire k to n / school d i r e c t c r

The main component of a noun phrase also may gövem other cases (acc jsative,
dative, locative, ablative) of the dependent component of a noun phrase. This lype of
govemment is found primarily in relativeiy fixed expressions or constrııctions,
proverbs and sayings, and in belles-lettres and classical literatüre, vvhere the main
component may be an adjective in the function of a predicate.

Noun + Adjective: ceae 3xra6ap /0ö5ö ahtiba:r/ good faith

('trusting in the vvord')

Noun + Adjective: YH OTaraan uöapaT /iic otogdon ıba:rat/

consisting o f three rooms

Noun + Adjective: flauiflan r a r a /da:sdan gatı/harder than stone

490 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Verb Phrase Structure

The main component in verb phrases is expressed by a verb, vvhile the dependent
component may be expressed by a noun, adverb, or verbal (infinitive, participle,
gerund). Each of these parts of speech aiways precedes the verb.

Noun + Verb: M y ra jiH M M fla H copaM aıc /mugollumdon 0o:romok/

to ask a teacher

Adverb + Verb: ı ı a r r r O K aM aK / c a l t o k o m o k / t o r e a d q u i c k l y

İnfinitive + Verb: o K a M a r a ra T M e ıc / o k o m a : g a g i t m e k / t o g o t o s t u d y

Participle + Verb: o K a sn Jia p b M b i re p M e K /o k o y a tn la n n ı g ö r m ö k /

to s e e th e m r e a d in g

Gerund + Verb: a u b i n O K aM aK / a ç ı p o k o m o k / t o o p e n a n d r e a d

The components of verb phrases are connected to one another through juxtaposition
and govemment.

Juxtaposition
Juxtaposition is actively used to form verb phrases in Türkmen. The dependent
component usually is expressed by a nominal, adverb or one of the verbal forms,
although it may be expressed by other parts of speech as well.

Noun + Verb: n a x a p x s 3 H p jıe M e K / n a h a r h a : 5ir l e m e k / to p r e p a r e d i n n e r

Adverb + Verb: X 33Mp ö o J iM a K / h a : 6 i r b o l m o k / t o b e r e a d y

Gerund + Verb: H b tK b in rH T M eK / ç ı k ı p g i t m e k / t o g o o u t

Numeral + Verb: hkh H pM aK / i k i y a : r m a k / t o s p l i t i n t w o

Adjective + Verb: f lo ı p b i a t t m a K / d o g n a y t m a k / to s p e a k tr u e

The semantic relationship between juxtaposed components is close, sometimes to

the point that both components lose their independent lexicai meaning and become
compound nouns or verbs with a new lexical meaning.
 Syntactic System 491

x ,o r a n 6epMeK /]oga:p b erm ek/ to a n sw e r (< to g iv e an answ er)

H 3iin ÖHiiMeK /yağıp b ilm ek / to b e lite ra te (< to k n o w h o w to vvrite)

6aurryTaH /bastutan/ le a d e r (< w h o h o ld s th e lead)

Government
In Tıırkmen, government is the most widely used means of connecting the components
of verb phrases. The lexical meaning of the main component demands that the
dependent component appears in a certain case (for example, the dative and ablative
cases; see 128, 141), vvhich is grammatically expressed by the addition of case suffixes
(except indefinite objects). The main component also may gövem the use of a certain
postposition vvith the dependent component.

KHTan OKaMaK /kita:p okomok/ to read a book

KHTaöH OKaMaK /kita:bı okomok/ to read the book

Mara3HHe rurMeK /magaSine gitmek/ to go to the store

re p M a re r a m e K / gö rm â:ge gitm ek/ to g o to se e

repM eK yuHH rHTMeK /görm ö k ü cü ın gitm ek/ to go in o rd er to see

m sx e p fle snuaMaK /sâherde y a:sam ak/ to liv e in th e c it y

MHifleH rejiM eK /i:sden ge lm e k / to c o m e (h om e) fro m w o rk

492 Turkmen Reference Grammar

SENTENCES

Word and phrase combinations that express a complete thought and are spoken vvith
complete intonation even vvhen they consist of one word (for example, T ire!') are
called sentences. Sentences themselves are of various types vvhich may be classified
according to their purpose or their structure.

Types of Sentences

Sentences may be classified in several vvays, depending on whether one approaches

them as acts of communication or as constructions vvithin the syntactic system of a
language.

Classification According to Purpose

One way to classify sentences is according to the purpose of the act of speech.
Sentences may state the positive or negative of a fact, an action or a state of being
(ıdeclarative), or they may suggest, command or request (imperative) an action or a
state of being, or they may question (interrogative) a fact, an action or a state of being.

Declarative: MeH 3prHp Mapa nmepHH. /Men erti:r Mara: giderin./

Fm going to Man tomorrow.

İmperative: CeH apTHp Mapa rejiMe. /6en erti:r Mara: gelme./

Don’t go to Man tomorrow.

interrogative: CeH Mapa xaqan rnflepci«(? /6en Mara: hacan gideröii)?/

When will you go to Man?

A declarative sentence usually is a statement made to provide information, either in

a positive or in a negative sense.

Baruuına Ben», uıy a;m>iH>K;Li ryH Memut muimm 6ap, öapurı ömraçeK flSJi.
(TV3.4) /Bağışla weli, su altmjı gün menig i:sim ba:r, banp biljek da:l./
Sorry, but I’m busy this Saturday, and I vvon’t be able to go.

Em3 öaflpaMa TaüapnbtK repyn flepyc. (G) /Bi8 bayrama tayya:rlık görüp yö:rü8./
We’re making preparations for the holiday.

imperative sentences typically suggest, urge, command, request or instruct. They

may be positive or negative, as vvell as interrogative in sense.
 Syntactic System 493

3K ,a M a u H y p f ltıe B H a , 3pmp florpbi c a r a T Y*ifle M a n a rapauibnt. (G) -

/Jama:l Durdı:yevna, erti:r dogn 0a:gat ücdö marja garasırj./
Jamal Durdıyevna, wait for me at three o’clock sharp tomorrovv.

- Conanbin T e n e ıJ ıo H HOMeprauı aflflun 6 e p c e n e . Meuae e K . (TV17.4)

/"0ona:mi) telefon nomerini aydtp beröene. Menne yo:k."/
"Would you teli me Sona’s telephone number? I don’t have it."

There are four types of interrogative sentences which seek general, special,
altemative or confirming information in response. One type asks a general question
which requires only a 'yes' or 'no' answer. In such a sentence, the question particle
-m u / mh /-mı/mi/ appears on the predicate, and the answer may be xaBa /ha '»/a/ 'yes',
6ap /ba:r/ 'yes (there is)' or eK /yo:k/ 'no (there is not)'.

- AKcyrn S a p a n a B T o ö y c y^hh ö n n e T ö a p M b i? - XaBa, 6 a p . (T2.2)

/"A:k0uwo barya:n awtobu0 ücü:n bilet ba:rmı?" "Hawa, ba:r."/
'İs there a ticket for the bus going to Aksuw?" "Yes, there is."

- O n eitaeHÖapMH? - E k, Sk, oji eöneHeHOK. (G)

/"Ol öylönyâ:rmi?" "Yo:k, yo:k, ol öylönönork."/
Ts he getting married?" "No, no, he isn’t getting married."

A second type requires special information as a response. In Türkmen, an

interrogative pronoun (khm /kim/ 'who?', HDMe /na:me/ 'what?', ete.) is usec to elicit
this kind of information. In such interrogative sentences, the predicate does not have
the question particle - mu /mh /-mı/mi/.

Ch3 xennefle hsmc ryH HiımeMsuıa? (TV12.3)

/0i5 hepdedenâ:ce gün i:sleyâ:ıji8?/
How many days a week do you work?

Cm3 onap H3XHim 6axa anaHflbip eüfliİ3HH3? (G)

/0İ8 olor nâ:hili baha alannır öydyâ:tji8?/
What kind of marks do you think they got?

A third type presents an altemative, that is, an "either-or" situation. In this type, the
question particle - m u / mm /-mı/mi/ may be added only to the first of ıhe two
altematives, with the word word s-na /ya:-da/ 'or' between them, or it may be added to
both of the altematives, vvithout the word a-fla /ya:-da/ 'or' between them.

Ts3e«ıe vtuıneMeK aMaTHMMbi a-fla KeHeue? (TV12.4)

/Tâ:8ece i:slemek aımathmı ya:-da kö:nöcö?/
Is it easier to work in the new way, or in the old way?
494 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

CeH xaflcı>ı n a M tı j m m s h h xajıaan? T o r m m , rapaMM? (TV 17.3)

/Ben hay8ı caryı icmâ:ni ha:laya:ıj? Görkmü, garamı?/
Which kind of tea do you like to drink? Green or black?

The fourth type of interrogative sentence is disjunctive, but may be called a "tail"
question, since it appears after a statement as a means of seeking confirmation. In
Turkmen, the words florpyMM /dogrumı/ 'right?' or uıefijıeınH /seylemi/ 'is it so?' are
placed at the end of the sentence to express 'isn’t it?, aren’t you?' or the like.

- ffleüneMH? CeH florpbi 6«nfiapcHH|MH oHyn SapflbirtiHH? (TV5.4)

/"Seylemi? 0en dogn bilyâ:r8irjmi onur) bardıgını?"/
"Really? Do you know for certain that there’s one there?"

Classification According 10 Structure

Another way to clâssıfy sentences is according to their structure, that is, according to
whether they are simple or composite sentences. Simple sentences have one subject and
one predicate. Composite sentences combine tvvo sentences in one of two ways, either
by connecting them so that they consist of two independent clauses (com pound
sentence) or by subordinating one or more sentences to another sentence so that it
consists of a main clause and one or more subordinate clauses (complex sentence).
Turkmen sentences consist primarily of simple and compound types of sentences.
However, compound sentences joined by conjunctions or juxtaposition are rarely used
in spoken or even m itten Turkmen (see 433), and true complex sentences are used only
by those speakers vvho follovv the pattems of other languages (Russian, English,
Persian) in vvhich they exist. The follovving examples of compound and complex
sentences are not typical of Turkmen sentence structure.

Simple: On rejfflH. /Ol gelli./ She came.

Ona aÜTfliiM. /Oıjo aytdım./1 told her.

Compound: On r e n f lH B e ona aih-flMM. /Ol g e l l i vve orjo aytdım./

She came and I told her.

Complex: XasaH on r e n f l H ona aiiTflbiM. /Hacan o l g e l li o ıjo aytdım./

When she came, I told her.

Turkmen does not have a true complex sentence. In English, a complex sentence is
one composed of one or more subordinate clauses and a main clause, where the
predicate of the subordinate clause may appear as the predicate of a simple sentence; for
example, in the English subordinate clause 'if he comes', the predicate 'comes' may be
the predicate of a simple sentence.
 Syntactic System 495

Rather, in Turkmen, the verb form of the equivalent to a subordüıate clause actually
is a non-final verb form (see 277, 350) vvhich cannot function as the predicate of a
simple sentence.

MeH renceM o n a x a6 ap 6epepHH. If I come, Fil infoım her.

/Men ge l0 e m o ıjo h ab ar bererin./
[*MeH ren ceM . /*Men gel0em ./ *'If I come' is not a sentence in
Turkmen.]

MeH rejiHn ona xa6ap SepfliiM. I came and informed her.

/Men gelip oıp habar berdim./
[*MeH renim, t*Men gelip./ *'I coming' is not a sentence
in Türkmen.]

MeH r e j ıe m iM f le o n a x a 6 a p 6epflH M . When I came, I informed her.

/Men g e l e n i m d e o r jo h a b a r b e r d i m . /
[*Men rejıeıt. /*Men g e l e n . / *’I is vvho came' is not a
sentence in Turkmen.]

In the Turkmen sentences above, vvhat appear to be subordinate clauses may be

vievved as objects of the predicates in essentially simple sentences. Such sentences may
be thought of as "semi-complex" sentences vvhich provide two sets of information (for
example, 'I came' and 'I informed her'), but vvhich express only one predicate
grammatically (past indefinite tense in xa6ap 6epq»M /habar berdim/, future indefinite
tense in xa6ap fiepcpnıı /habar bererin/). Despite this important difference in sentence
type betvveen Turkmen and English, it is a straightforvvard matter to find English
equivalents for such Turkmen sentences.
496 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Simple Sentences

Simple sentences usually have a single subject and single predicate, although some
may have two or more (homogeneous) subjects or predicates. They may be unextended
(only subject and predicate) or extended (also object and/or adverb modifier and/or
attribute).

Parts o f a Sentence
The main parts of a sentence are the subject and predicate, while many sentences also
may have secondary parts, including an object, adverb modifier and/or attribute. In
English, these terms refer to the topic of a sentence or to the one perfonning the action
(subject), the comment on the topic or the action performed by the subject (predicate),
and the result or goal of the action performed (object). In addition, a subject or an
object may be modified or qualified by a word or phrase (attribute), just as a vvord or
phrase may modify or qualify a verb serving as a predicate (adverb modifier).
In Türkmen, the subject, which is the doer or type of action of a sentence, usually is
expressed by a noun or pronoun, although adjectives or participles also may serve as
subjects.

Aannap lOpflaMaHHH eftyue rnpmncp. (BH)

/Aya:llar Yu:rdoma:mr) öyünö gi:rdiler./
The women entered Yurdaman’s home.

Eh3 6a#paMa TaflspnMK repyn üepyc. (G) /BiS bayrama tayya:rhk görüp yö:rii0./
We’re making preparations for the holiday.

riJ3UJiJiap aKnaptı eımıuıep. (G) /Gı5ıllar arkları yeğdiler./

The reds beat the whites.

The predicate, which is the action of a sentence, usually is expressed by a verb,

although nouns, adjectives and other parts of speech also may serve as predicates. A
Türkmen sentence may lack a stated subject, if it is understood in the personal ending
of the verb expressing the predicate.

IVfeMMCT 6aM flyün xapMaHa rıiflHnfliı. (G) /Mâ:mmetba:y dü:n harmana gidipdi./
Mâmmet-bay went to the harvest yesterday.

CanaKnaptiMa Ke.vıeK ÖepepftH. (H) /Sapaklarıma kömök bererdi./

She used to help me with my lessons.

By ryH xoBa cajiKtm. (BG) /Bu:n howa: Ballan./

Tbe weather is cool today.
 Syntactic System 497

The object, vvhich is the person, place or thing to which the action is direcıed, may
be expressed by a noun, pronoun, adjective or participle. In Turkmen, object phrases
also are equivalent to adverb modifiers in English.

MHepflsKH oTypannaptm 6apbintın car;ibirtına ımfliınep. (G)

/İcerda:ki oturonlorurj ba:nnıq Bağlığına icdiler./
They drank to the health of ali those sitting inside.

yeMen, MeH ceHH Ken Barraan rep.MeflHM. (TV7.1)

/Çemen, men Seni köp wagtla:p görmödüm./
Chemen, I haven’t seen you for a long time.

CeBeume BenaT 6 o jıan n ap u rnon Tatifla ^aünaım bipnap. (TV13.3)

/0öwösdö wepa:t bolonlon sol ta:yda ja:yla:pdırlar./
They buried those vvho perished in the battle (of Gökdepe) there.

By ryn-3pTe KepKs çaptı yrpaMaKvu. (N) /Bu:n-erte Kerkfi: 0a:n ugromokcı./

He plans to set off for Kerki today o r tom orrow .

The attribute, vvhich qualifîes the subject or object of a sentence, may be e:<pressed
by an adjective, pronoun or participle.

Ouyu AMepmca 6y canapu Tapı>ıxu canapflup. (N)

/Onur) Amerika: bu 0apan ta:rı:hı 0apardır./
This trip of his to America is a historic trip.

İîeHe MeH ceHHrç TenetJjoH HOMepmpı SrateMOK-fla. (TV3.3)

/Yö:nö men 0enii) telefon nomeriıji bilemo:k-da:./
But I don’t even knovv your telephone number.

EepeH ryppYHnnn3 ymm Ken car 6onyrç. (N)

/Beren gürrürjiirjiıS ücii:n köp 0ag bolur)./
Thank you so much for the talk you gave. ['talk -vvhich you gave']

ITıe subject, predicate, object or attribute of a sentence each may be exprt: ;sed by
two or more homogenous parts of speech ('X and Y does Z', 'X does Y and :;oes Z',
"X does the Y and the Z', ete.).

OHyn opTaKU aKtiMbiHfla ara<uıap, MacjibiKJiap ks MyMflapflH, Ka qbiK«pjıw. (G)

/Onur) ortokı akımmna ağaçlar, maOlıklar ka: cümya:rdi, ka: cıkya:rdı./
The trees and corpses first submerged, then came to the surface of the riv:r in its
middle current. [homogeneous subjects]
498 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

I l l e ö n e n a r r a H b i f l e n n ı n s r ı 6 a c b i n a n f l a , n a r r a H b i n r e B p y M H l o m e n t t a p , x e M - f le o n
roBtı e p n e u ı t e p . (TV7.3) / Ş e y l e p a g t a m ı d e p g i l â : p b a O ıl a n n a , p a g t a : m r ) g ö w r i i m i i
k i£ e ly â :r, h e m - d e o l g o w ı y e r le s y â :r ./
When the cotton is stamped down like this, the volüme of the cotton d e c re a se s
a n d it also s i t s well. [homogeneous predicates]

MeH K aK aM 6 n .rı e n , 33K,eM f i ı u ı e ı ı , ıneftne xeM R o ra H tiM B e HÇHrHM C h j i c h

snuaapbin. (TV4.5)
/Men ka:kam bilen, ejem bilen, şeyle hem dogonum we jigim bilen ya:saya:nn./
I live w i t h m y f a t h e r , v v ith m y m o th e r, as well as w ith m y b r o th e r s a n d
s i s t e r s . [homogeneous objects]

Ona tiH H ^ a n b iK Ö e p M e f ia n , y u y c u H t ı T y r n y p ı u a ı i H nepT-axBanaT AHHaryn a ra tı

rbt3bin biuiKMflbi. (N) /Ogo ı:njalık bermeyâ:n, u:ku0unı tutdurmaya:n dert-
ahwa:lat A:nnagiil a:th gı:5ıi) ıskıdı./
The torment which gave him no peace and wouId nol let him sleep was his
love for a girl named Annagüi. [homogeneous attributes]

Order o f the Parts o f a Sentence

The order of the parts of a sentence differs from language to language and often is
referred to as word order. In Türkmen simple sentences, the subject is placed at the
beginning and the predicate at the end. In extended sentences, the object is placed
betvveen the subject and predicate, the attribute is placed in front of the part it modifies,
vvhile the adverb modifier may be placed in several positions. The following examples
illustrate the order of elements in many Turkmen sentences.

Subject + Predicate
HocryM renflH.
/Do:00um gelli./
My friend arrived.

Subject + Object + Predicate

HocryM AuıraGafla renjm.
/Do:00um Asgabada gelli./
My friend came to Ashgabat.

Attribute + Subject + Object + Predicate

AüflbiM affflsm flocTyM Auıra6afla rerypf.
/Aydun aydya:n do:00um Asgabada gelli./
My friend who sings came to Ashgabat.
 Syntactic System 499

As a rule, an object of time or place is placed directly before the predicate. In the
folIowing example, the adverb /dü:ıı/ expressing the object of time is placed
before the predicate to emphasize that the action happened yesterday.

Attribute + Subject + Object + Object o f Time + Predicate

A ü flb tM a ftflS H
flo c T y M Amraöafla fly{İH reıwn.
/Aydım aydya:n do06um Asgabada dü:n geLli./
My fiiend who sings came to Ashgabat yesterday.

The object may appear after the predicate of a sentence for emphasis or effect, and
especially in the flovv of speech as a kind of afterthought.

- BaK-ne, reırnej^e! F oiiöepceH e eajiHMHİ Bsk, Bar-eü... (G)

/"Wâ:k-le, gelneje! GoyberBene elimi! Wârk, wâ:g-ey..."/
"Ouch, auntie! Would you let go my hand! Ow, ow-ee ..."

MeH rennsMOK, oryjı. -0nRLL*;a m m ^aKtıptrMtB rennejjüs Metin. (BG)

/Men geplâ:mo:k, oğul. Yaıjıja içen cakınmıS gepledyâ: meni./
I’m not speaking, son. That wine of ours I just drank is making speak me.
[imitates the effects of alcohol on speech]

BH3fle AmraöaTfla flOKanap, ray xajibi. (TV12.4)

/Bi88e Asgabatda dokolyarr, su harlı./
It’s woven among us in Ashgabat, this carpet.

3 a T T e n e M e n H fls n , cyo y ' i h h . (TV17.2) /8art tö lö m ö lü dârl, 0 uw iicürn./

We don’t have to pay a thing, for vvater.

It is extremely rare to hear or read a Türkmen sentence in which the subject is placed
after the predicate, although a few examples may be found.

X hm BarraM 3XMMeTHitM ÜHTHpMe3 oji MarTHMryntiMbratiH 3cepnepn.

(TV12.4) /Hirc wagtam ahmiyetini yitimıeS ol MagtımguhrmıSıi] eöerleri./
They will never lose their signifıcance, the works of that Magtımgulı of ours.

Sup HpHM reırrap anfltrM MeH. (TV7.3) /Bir ya.-ran gektar allım men./
I leased one-and-a-half hectares.
500 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Agreement Between Subject and Predicate

Agreement in number between the subject and predicate of a sentence varies in
Turkmen. As a rule, the plural suffix +nap/nep /+lar/ler/ is not added to the third
person form of the verb which serves as. predicate vvhen the plural subject of the
sentence is vievved as a group rather than as individuals, and it is added vvhen the plural
subject is vievved as individuals in a group.

OryfleHTJiep OKasp. ^laraııap xanaap.

/Otudentler okoyarr./ /Ğa:galar 0ii:jü ha:laya:r./
Students study. Children like candy.

CryfleHTJiep oKaapnap. Marajıap cyfiaîjt xajıaapnap.

/Studentler okoya:rlar./ /Ca:galar 0ü:jü ha:laya:rlar./
The students study. The children like candy.

Words Not Connected With Parts o f a Sentence

Certain kinds of words convey a complete thought or response and therefore are not an
integral part of the syntax of a simple sentence. Such vvords include those that
introduce ('see', V eli'), address ('Jemal', 'Mırat'), answer ('yes', 'no') or exclaim
(interjections).

EpM, SııeKyTH, naNte xa6apbinti3 6ap. (G) /Y e ri, Enekütii, nâtme lıabarıgıS ba:r./
Well, Eneküti, vvhat nevvs do you have?

•leMeıı, Men c e ı m Ken Banman re p M e flH M . (TV7.1)

/Çemen, men 0eni köp vvagtla:p görmödüm./
Clıemen, I lıaven’t seen you for a long time.
 Syntactic System 501

Composite Sentences

Composite sentences may be of two types: compound and complex. The term clause is
used to refer to the components of a composite sentence.

Compound Sentences
A compound sentence consists of two or more independent clauses whose relationship
to one another is one of coordination. One way to coordinate or connect these clauses is
through the use of conjunctions. As noted elsewhere (see 433), the use of such
conjunctions (nearly ali of which are borrovved from Persian and Arabic) is modeled
after non-Turkmen syntactic pattems.

on epfle Y İfu ıyn srraH 3aT Sapflbip efi'-nyK,

O ji 3KHHH 3JH1 a p a r a t ı ro p a n ü e p c e ,
on epfle x n ı 3aT eıc siten . (G)
3MM3 6 a p tm re p c e K
/Ol ekini eli yaraglı go:ra:p yö:röö, ol yerde ü:süp yatan 8a:t ba:rdır öytdiilc,
emma: banp göröök ol yerde hi:C Sa:t yo:k eken./
As he vvas guarding the crop with weapon in hand, we thought there werc piles of
things there, but when we went to see, it tums out there’s nothing there at ali.
•Hmyjıtı ona BacapflMÜMn a T fla K tın fltı xeıvı x3Jin-uiHJtKH oıtyn ÖHJieH ofiııau iM au tı
roBii repepflH. (N) /Ya:sulx orjo Ba0ar diyip a:t dakıpdı hem hâ:li-sinni onug
bilen oynosmaaıı gowı görördü./
The old man had stuck the name Basar on him, and he used to like playing witlı
him from time to time.

Clauses of a compound sentence also may be connected through juxtaposiı ıon, that
is, by vvord order. In speech, this kind of connection may be indicated by a pause in
intonation, vvhereas in writing, it usually is indicated by a comma. Such sentences also
conform to foreign sentence struetures.

B arr reuep, Memın r t a t i M a M yjıajıap. (O) /Wagt geçer, menii] gı:5ımam ı: lolor./
Time vvill pass and my daughter also vvill grovv up.

O ji M ana O p c tte T 6a6aTfla r y p p y n 6epepflH, MeHeM o n a TypKMeHMCTaH 6ai3aTfla

(N) /Ol marja Orfluyet ba:batda günrürı bererdi, menem o g o
aftflapflHM.
Türkmönü06a:n ba:batda aydardun./
He used to talk to me about Russia and I used to teli him about Türkmenistan.
502 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Complex Sentences
Complex sentences coılsist of one main or independent clause and one or more
subordinate or dependent clauses of condition, concession, cause, time and so on. In
English, the predicate of the dependent clause may serve as the predicate of a simple
sentence. In Türkmen, clauses of condition and concession are very similar to English
subordinate clauses of the same kind, with the exception noted above (see 495).

O hm 03yH HyseTMecerç, x m khm fly3erMe3, xan oryjı. (BH)

/Onı ö:8ürj düSötmööör), hi:2 kim düSötmöS, ha:n oğul./
I f y o u d o n ’t c o r r e c t i t y o u r s e l f , n o o n e else w i l l c o r r e c t i t , d e a r son.

Ym ryn reMce-j|e, S u ı p e T 06a f lo n a n M a flb i. (TJ)

/Üc gün gec0e-de, Esret o:ba: dolonmodı./
Although three days have passed, Eshret has not retumed to the village.

True subordinate clauses of cause and reason are encountered in Türkmen only in the
speech o f those heavily üıfluenced by foreign sentence pattems or in works translated
from other languages, as in the follovving example.

Ey r y H aflaMJiap r y H s m ıa p yuypbm/ıa f l a r a f l t m a p , H yHK H 6 a p x a r y M v i i e n n n 6 a p flH

en onaptı x o B c a n a canbmflbi. (G) /Bu:n a : d a m l a r gün y a : s a r u:curunno d a : g a d ı l a r ,
ç ü n k ü b a r h a g ü :c lö n ü p b a r y a : n y e l o l o n h o w 0 o la : B a lıp d t./
Today the people dispersed just as the evening began, because the wind which
kept getting stronger vvorried them.

Türkmen object phrases of time in simple sentences correspond to English

subordinate clauses of time in complex sentences. Such phrases are formed by adding
participle suffixes plus case suffixes or particles to the stems of verbs, and include
those formed with the participle formations - a ııa /e H e /-ana/ene/ '(time has passed)
since', -aHfla/eıifle /-anna/enne/ 'when (someone) did (something)', - a n n a ı ı / e n g e n con
/-annan/ennen 0oi)/ 'after one did (something)', -ManKa/M3HK3 /-ma:nka:/ mâ:nka:/
'before one did (something)' and -flHMa/HaHMa /-ya:nca:/yâ:nca:/ 'until one does
(something)', and with the particle -Ka/K3 /-ka:/ka:/ 'while one does (something)'.
To express '(time has passed) since', Türkmen uses a construction consisting of a
verb ending in the past participle suffix in the dative case (-aHa/eHe /-ana/ene/), along
with the verbs 6onMaK /bolmok/ 'to become', reMMeK /geçmek/ 'to pass' or nonMaK
/do.-lmok/ 'to fiil'.

AHHaryjibiH T toH n rouıyH ryjuıyrtm a rMHCHHiıe Mbin apbiM Gojıynflbi. (G)

/A:nnagulı:i] GıSıl Gosun gulluguno gidenine yıl ya.-nm bolupdı./
It had been a year and a half since Annagulı went to serve in the Red Army.
 Syntactic System 503

E H P H -6 H P H M H 3 H repM3HHMH3e 6 s ıp T o n a p Barr ö o n f ltı. (TV7.5)

/Bi:ri-bi:rimi5i görmâ:nimi8e bir topor wagt bollı./
It’s been quite a while s i n c e v v e ’v e s e e n o n e a n o t h e r .

The locative case suffix may be added to the past participle suffix (-aHna/enne
/-anna/enne/) to express 'when (someone) did/has done (something)' or 'when
(something) is done'. Possessive suffixes may be added to the verb to indicate its
subject. In spoken Turkmen, addition of these suffixes often results in the loss of a
syllable (for example, -anna/enne /-agda/erjde/ < -anbinaa/eumîne /-ami]da/enir)de/).

Hecwn 6ojıca, Kapxana nuıe 6aınjıanga ayhMs c T a n f l a p ı t i H a raSaT r e n i i s H

nonaTflaH ram a Be neıt*;npe GjıoKJiapuHtr TafiapnaM aKqH. (N)
/Ne0i:p bolöo, kâ:rha:na i:se basla:nna dünyâ: ıötannartma gabat gelyâ:n polotdon
gapı we penjire bloklorunı tayya:rlamakcı./
God willing, w h e n t h e e n t e r p r i s e s t a r t s t o w o r k , it plans to produce steel door
and window units which conform to world standards.
C o M ca 3uunen/je n-fla curpun sthhh h-a a ro ö H y n 3 t h h h ynam m 6omp. (TV5.3)
/8om0o e d ile n n e y a:-d a 0 ıgn i) e tin i y a :-d a goynur) e tin i u lo n u p bolya:r./
When somsa is made, one can use either beef or lamb.

The ablative case suffıx may be added to the past participle (-annan/ennan /-annan/
ennen/) to indicate the time 'after' or 'the moment that (= as soon as)' the action
occurred. As a rule, hovvever, the postposition con /0or|/ 'after' is used with this
construction (see 425).

06a ,qaif aTanflan ^an,iJi-x,yryn ronryH ÖMJieH epflm. (G)

/0:bo dai] atannan jagıl-jugul gopgun bilen ö:rdü./
The village rose vvith a hue and cry at the break of dawn. [ ' a t th e m o m e n t davvn
broke'j
KaKaM on xa6apu auiHaenaen smme K e tra ç e anbin yrpa6epnn. (G)
/Ka:kam ol haban esidennen eline kepje alıp ugra:berdi./
As soon as my father h e a r d that nevvs, he took a shovel in his hand and set off.

To express the idea that an action is performed 'vvhile' another action is performed,
Turkmen uses a construction consisting of a verb ending in the partide - K a / ı t a
/-ka:/kâ:/, vvhich may take personal endings to indicate the doer of the accompanying
action. This partide also may be attached to nouns and adjectives (see 483).

CanapMHpaT xanun ranactı caıiHbin HepKS ksh re3eK repynflH. (G)

/0aparmtra:t ha:nır) gala:0ı 0alnıp yö:rkâ: ka:n geSek görüpdü./
Saparmırat had seen the Khan’s castle many times vvhile i t vvas being
c o n s tru c te d .
504 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Jlypflyra3ejı 6nrreH r y p n e u iH n OTbipKaıvı, 6«p re 3 y M önnen flam-TSBepere xeM

cbih 3flÜ3pflMM. (TV16.2) /DurdugöSöl bilen gürlösüp otı:rka:m, bir göSüm bilen
das-tövvörögö hem 8ı:n edyâ:rdim./
While sitting there talking with Durdıgözel, I also kepi one eye on the
surroundings.

The negative past participle in -MaH/M3H /-ma:n/mâ:n/ combines with the particle
-Ka/K3 /-ka:/ka:/ to form the ending -MaHKa/M3HK3 /-ma:nka:/ma:nkâ:/, which is
added to verb stems to express 'before one did (something)'. Possessive suffixes may
be added to this compound suffix to indicate the subject of the phrase.

C e H reJlM3HK3H rM flM n flu n e p . (G) / 8 e n g e lm a :n k a :i) g id ip d ile r ./

They left before you came.
MeH xeM MauırarraMti3fla yjıyctı öo/ıaııttM ceöaıuM, tw e ™tm3HK3m, ryufle
eönepH cynypHn, Haxap 6mnnpsın, eöjısınmre Haxap Tafitmnan niflifaH. (TV16.2)
/Men hem masgala:mıS5a ulu0ı bolonum 8eba:pli, i:se gitma:nka:m, günnö öylörü
Süpürüp, nahar bisirip, öylârnlige nahar ta:ymla:p gidya:n./
And because I ’m the oldest in our family, each day before I go to vvork, I svveep
the rooms, cook, and prepare food for the aftemoon.

The combination of the present participle suffix -mı/tıaıı /-ya:n/yâ:n/ witlı the suffix
+MaA» /+ cat/Sa:/1 produces the form -HHHa/İisnMs /-ya:nca:/yâ:ncâ:/, which is used to
create object phrases of time in the meaning 'until one does (something)'. Often, the
preposition t s /ta:, 'until, to' (of Persian origin) is used in this construction.

CyxaH r a m EeKMBipar ö aütt aTapfltı. O hm yrpaflan kmium 6onyn, T3 ofiayaH

MUKHHMa, ranflannan rHTflH. (G) /8u:ha:n gatı Bekmıra:t ba:yı atardı. Om
ugrodon k ili bolup, ta: o:bodon cıkya:nca:, gapdalla:p gitdi./
Suhan-gatı set Bekmırat-bay on his way. Pretending to see him off, he
accompanied him until he left the village.
Sp-xeneM mamaıc oıyptm, T3 Ran aTiuma HİlflHJiep. (G)
/Â:r-heley ikicâ:k oturup, ta: dar) atya:nca: iydiler./
The husband and the wife sat, just the tvvo of them, and ate right up until dawn.
['until the breaking of davvn']
*lop6a fiHinüaHHa, nec oTfla rafluaflbiöepMenH. (TP5.5)
/Co:rbo bisyâ:ncâ:, peö o'.tdo gaynadıbermeli./
You just have to let the soup boil on lovv heat until it’s done.

I This suffix does nol receive stress and should not be confused vvith the equative case suffix -m a/ne
/+ca/câ/; see rpaMjuamuıca 364.
 LEXICON

Words may be classified into Iexical groups according to whether they share tlıe same
meanings but different sounds (synonyms), or the same sounds but different me anings
(homonyms). Türkmen is rich in synonyms, or words with the same meaning but
different sounds (as English 'bucket', 'pail'). Of course, it is rare that the twcı words
have precisely the same reference or usage; for example, eü /öy/ 'home' (originally
'tent') refers to both the place and the idea, whereas TaM /ta:m/ 'home' (or -’inally
'structure with mud vvalls') refers to the physical structure. Many synonyms have arisen
as a result of borrowing vvords from Persian and Russian. In such cases, the synonyms
may be much eloser or identical in reference, but nonetheless differ in usage; for
example, »3 /ya:8/ 'Spring' (Türkmen), which is used to designate the season, and
6axap /bahar/ 'Spring' (Persian), which is used for stylistic purposes in literatüre.
Some synonyms have a more elaborate explanation. For example, Turları ;n has
three vvords for 'vvolf, one of which- 6epn /bö:rü/)- originally conveyed the primary
meaning of 'vvolf', vvhile the other two originally designated less significant ercatures.
The vvord mojk.ck /mö:]ök/ 'vvolf' actually referred to 'bug' (compare Turkish böcek
'bug'), vvhile the vvord ry p T /gu:rt/ even today may refer both to 'vvolf and to its
original meaning of 'vvorm'. Such changes in meaning came about as a result of taboo,
that is, the substitution of a vvord designating the name of a presumed ancestor whose
pronunciation vvas prohibited. The taboo associated vvith the 'w olf belongs to the
distant past of components of the Türkmen and other Central Asian peoples who traced
their mythical ancestor to a mating vvith a vvolf. It vvas regarded as bad luck to >ay the
name 'vvolf', and so the vvord vvas replaced by the names of creatures like the 'bııg' and
'vvorm' vvhich evil forces vvould not trouble themselves to harm.
The Türkmen lexicon has relatively few homonyms, that is, vvords vvith the same
sound but different meanings (as English 'rain', 'rein', 'reign'). In Tuı İanen,
homonyms usually do not belong to the same part of speech; for example, Jty.i /yüS/
'face' and By3 /yü8/ 'hundred', or ht /it/ 'dog' and mt ! /it!/ 'push!'. Some homonyms
vvere created by borrovving vvords from Persian vvith the same sounds as Tuıkmen
words; for example, rmji /dil/ 'tonguc' and ann /dil/ 'Iıeart' (Persian).
As any language, Türkmen is rich in Iexical or fixed phrases, that is, combiıutions
of vvords vvhich express nevv meanings. Türkmen fixed phrases are idiomatic or
metaphorical in nature, that is, their meanings are not predietable from the usual
meanings of their components; for example, MysyuHen ra p arınan /yüSürjdön ga:r
yağmak/ 'to be angry' (literally: 'to snovv from one’s face'), or nenan r o r e eTMes
/depa:r) gö:gö yetmek/ 'to be joyous, to be in seventh heaven' (literally: 'for one's lıill
to reach the sky').
This chapter focuses on the composition, derivation and borrovving of vvords as
sources of the Türkmen lexicon, as vvell as on seleeted thematic groups as a lexical
refleetion of Türkmen culture.
506 Türkmen Reference Grammar

WORD COMPOSITION

Turkmen words may be composed by means of compounding, vvord combination,

intensification or duplication of vvords, auxiliary verbs, and processes that create
acronyms, clippings and neologisms.

Compound Words

Compounding, or the fusion of two vvords to form a new meaning, is a rich source of
Turkmen vvords and proper names. Compounds are composed o f various parts of
speech, a selection of vvhich is presented in the table (see 508).
The second noun of some compounds may have the third person possessive suffbc
and stand in possessive relationship vvith the first noun (see 116).

TYpKMeH6aııiBi /Türkmönbası/ title of the current (1996) president of

Türkmenistan, Saparmırat Nıyazov; also name of port on the Caspian
sea (formerly Krasnovodsk) (< TYpKMeH + 6aıu+bi /türkmön + bas+ı/ head of
the Turkmen)
MauıranaGauıtı /masgalabası/ family head (< Maıurana + 6aın+tl /masgala +
bas+ı/ head of the family)
flepTryjiM /Dö:rtgulı/ man’s name (< flepT + ryn+M /dö:rt + gul+ı/ slave of the
Four (Prophets))
uıaentı /sayolı/ boulevard (< lua + en+bi /sa: + yo:l+ı/ king’s road)

Similarly, a number of compounds are formed vvith a noun phrase, in vvhich the
first of tvvo nouns or noun and verbal noun contains the third person possessive suffbc
(see 146). Sometimes this suffix is lost or transferred in the fusion.

H*tanM /ica:lı/ sp y (< m + u + a n a /ic+ i + a:la/ w h o se in sid es a re m o tle y )

raHBröHp /ga:nıbi:r/ related (< raH + tı + 6wp /ga:n+ı + bir/ w h o se b lo o d is on e)
sıuıynM /ya:sulı/ o ld , o ld m an (< hhi+m + y n t ı /ya:s+ ı + ulı/ vvhose a g e is great)
areLiSupnH K /agSıbitrlik/ u n ity (< a r t o + b t + 6np m iK /agı8+ı + birlik / vvhose
m outh s are on e)
raH M TiBM a /ga:nıgı8m a/ h ot-tem p ered (< ra H + tı + rtraM a /ga:n+ı + gıSm a/
th e b lo o d ’ s b o ilin g )
fleMrucMa /demgıöma/ asthma (< fleM+ıı + rttcMa /dem +i + gıöma/ the breath’s
squeezing)

The immediate origins of a compound may be recognizable as a verb phrase, often

including a paıticiple form of the verb. This group includes a remarkable compound for
'lady bug' that consists of a compound sentence.
 Lexicon 507

oKapankirenıpcYMTÖepeÜHH /okora:i)igetir0ü:tbereyin/ la d y b u g (< oKaparçu +

r e x n p .+ cyÜT + öepettHH /okora:rjı + g e tir + 0 ü:t + b e re yin / 'B r in g y o u r b o w l
and I ’ II g iv e y o u m ilk ')
CYÜfleMflHpu^Hnep /8ü:dem dirijiler/ m a m m a l s (< cyÜT + 3MflnpM5K;nııep /0ü:t +
em dirijiler/ those vvho give suckle)
ö a u iT y T a H /bastuton/ leader (< G a m + T y T a H / b a s + tuton/ w ho held the l e a d )
ryneGaKap /günöbakar/ sunflow er (< ryHe + 6aKap /giinö + bakar/ w hat looks at
the sun)
O T ie T e p / e l y e t e r / a c c e s s i b l e ( < a n + e T e p / e l + y e t e r / w h a t t h e h a n d r e a c h e s )
r e jiH a n k r a ç M / g e l n a l ı j ı / p e r s o n ( s ) w h o t a k e t h e b r i d e ( < r e m ı n + n a n - t ı ^ t ı / g e l i n + i
a h j ı / \v h o ta k e ( s ) t h e b r id e )

The fusion of tvvo nouns or other vvords into a single lexical unit may alter the
sound structure of the second or even the first noun to the point of obscuring the origin
of the compound.

eHHHH /ögıjüaı/ day before yesterday (< ohkh + ryH /örjkti + gün/ previous day)
ennwn /öi]r)ü:l/ year before that (< ohkh + Mtın /örjkü + yıl/ previous year)
Auıra6aT /Asgabat/ Capital of Türkmenistan (< aıuuK + aöaT /a:sık + abat/
love abode)
/Gı8ılarba:t/ city in Türkmenistan (< rtrabiJi p a 6 a T /gıSıl ı a b a : t /
r ti3 tın a p 6 a T
red fortress)
508 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Compound Words
Noun + Noun Noun + Verb
Kemeöaıu /kepcebas/ cobra ryHflorap /günnogor/ East (< ryH
(< Kemıe + 6aın /kepçe + bas/ spade + florap /gün + dogor/ the sun rises)
+ head) rynSaTap /günbatar/W est (< ryH
asKran /ayakga:p/ shoes (< asuc + ran + 6aTap /gün + batar/ the sun sets)
/ayak + ga:p/ foot + sack) Ajına6epflH /Alla:berdi/ m an’s name
H3ryn /Ya:8gül/woman’snam e (< ajına + SepflH /Alla: + berdi/ God
(< st3 + ry n /ya:8 + gül/ Spring + + gave)
flower)
Adjective + Noun Numeral + Verb
flonHypeK /dorjyürök/ cruel, heartless ösuıaTap /bâsatar/ rifle (used in
(< flon + itypeK /doi] + yürök/ frozen WW I and II) (< 6auı + aTap /bâ:s
+ heart) + atar/ that shoots five [bullets])
xoıu6arr /hosbagt/ happy (< xom + ajiTaTap /altatar/revolver (< ajm.1
6 a rr /hos + bagt/ good + fortune) + aTap /altı + atar/ that shoots six
fleMMpra3fciK /demirgaSık/ north [bullets])
(< fleMHp + ra3tiK /demir + ga8ık/ yu fliuap /ucya:sa:r/three-year old
iron + stake = North Star, Polaris) (animal) (< y<t + aınap /üc + ya:sa:r/
that lives three [years])
Numeral + Noun Verb + Verb
flOKy3İibmntiK /dokuSyülık/ nine- söepMes ^berm ek/ to serve, to give
year (secondary school) (< flotcy3 to (< ajibin SepMeK /alıp + bermek/
+ Hmiuimk /dokuS + yılhk/ nine- to take and give)
year period) SKHTMeK /âkitmek/ to take to
YMÖypmıyK /ücburcluk/ triangle (< ajibin THTMeK /ahp gitmek/
(< yii + 6yp'iııyK /üc + burcluk/ to take and go)
three + comered item) sKenMeıc /âkelmek/ to bring to
ourynriYK /o:ngünlük/ decade (of (< a n iin renMeK /ahp + gelmek/
week) (< on + rynııyK /o:n + to take and come)
günlük/ ten-day period)
Adjective + Adjective Pronoun + Adjective
ÖMTMreanM /yitigöSliî/ vigilant e3epKim /ö:8erkli/ autonomous
(< Mhth + re3HH /yiti + göSlü/ (< 03 + spKJiH /ö:8 + erkli/ self
sharp + eyed) + authoritative)
HKMÜy3iiM/ikiyüSlü/ hypocrite e3 iirru flpJiu /ö:8ıgtıya:rlı/
(< hkm + tty3jm /iki + yüSlü/ two independent (< 03 + HTTbiapnbi
+ faced) /ö:8 + ıgtıya:rlı/ self + willed)
 Lexicon 509

Combination Words

Combination vvords are very similar to compounds, except that they have no: fiısed,
such that one or both elements are altered in structure or lost their primary stress. Such
combinations are vvritten vvith a hyphen. One type of combination creates a group noun
by pairing two nouns of independent meaning that designate items, aspects or
attributes that belong to the group.

,ay3-TaraM /du:5-tagam/ food (= salt + taste)

ot- müm /ot-iym/ fodder (= grass + food, provisions)
aflbmı-6epnm /ahs-beris/ trade (= taking + giving)
M aKcaT-M tıpaT /m ak0at-m ıra:t/ aim (= g o a l + w ish )
remı-OBJiaK / g e ci-o w lo k / g o a ts (= g o a t + k id )
roH>H-ry3bi /goyu n -guSı/ s h e e p (= sh e e p + lam b)

Another type combination word creates a collective noun often vvith n plural
meaning from two synonyms.

aöaft-cbiacaT /abay-0ıya:8at/ threats (= threat + threat)

cec-ce3a /0e0-0e6a:/ sound(s) (= sound + sound)
on-6y /ol-bu:/ something/someone or other (= that, s/he/it + this, s/he/i [)

Tvvo nouns that have some frequent or close association may be combined ıvithout
losing their individual meanings.

oraaH-rbra /oglon-gı:S/ boys and girls ric*;e-rYitHH3 /gi:je-günnü:6/night ınd day

3n-aaK /el-ayak/ hand and foot afi-ryn /a:y-gün/ moon and sun
MMrH-MtTH/iygi-icgi/ food and drink yıibi-KiMK /ulı-kici/ big and small

A few such combinations may occur in a single usage, others may have obscure
meanings, vvhile stili others consist of elements that do not occur alone and therefore
have no independent meaning.

TaraM-Tarcbip eK /tagam-tag0ı:r yo:k/ not tasty (of food) (= taste +

fault, deficiency)
3neK-*tejıeK 3TMeK /elek-£elek/ to b e w id e ( o f e y e s) (= s ie v e + barrel; com pau ;
English 'eyes big as saucers')
OBpaM-OBpaM 3TMeK / o w ro m -o w ro m etm ek/ to b re a k into p ie ce s (oBpaM /ow rom /
d o e s not o c c u r alone)
510 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Intensified Words
A particular means of vvord composition consists of vvords whose first or second
members are a full or partial reduplication of their primary members. Such
reduplications, as well as words combined with a set of intensifying particles,
strengthen or intensify the basic lexical meaning of vvords.

Reduplication
Pairs of words may be created through full or partial reduplication of a word. The
reduplicated vvord carries the primary lexical meaning, vvhile the duplicated element
intensifies some aspect of its meaning. Full reduplication usually intensifies the
number or the essential quality of items duplicated.

r a H a p -ra ııa p /g a n a r - g a n a r / s a c k s of ( r a r a p /g a n a r/ sa c k )
flH JiK M -flHU H M / d i l i m - d i l i m / i n s l i c e s ( a m j i h m / d i l i m / s l i c e )
6eneK-5eneK /bö:lök-bö:lök/ in pieces (öeneK /bö:lök/ piece)
cyW^M'Cy5i»;H /0ii:jii-0ü:jii/ overly svveet (cyüaçH /0ii:jü/ svveet)

One type of partial reduplication pairs a vvord vvith an altered form of the vvord and
creates a kind of "sing-song" combination. The alteration may consist of the
replacement of the unrounded root vovvel of the vvord vvith a high rounded vovvel in its
pair, or it may involve the replacement of the first consonant of the vvord vvith m /m/,
n fpf or c /0/.

rappu-ryppu /garrı-gum/ old ones (rappbi /gam / old)

qara->ıyra /ca:ga-cu:ga/ little ones, children (Mara /ca:ga/ child)
cyu-nyu /0uw-puw/ vvater and such (cyB /0uw/ vvater)
raıiT-MaıiT /gant-mant/ candies, candy and such (ranr /gant/ sugar)
(variant: raıiT-caıiT /gant-0ant/)
uaxap-naxap /nahar-pahar/ dinner, food and such (ııaxap nahar/ food, meal)
(variant: ııaxap-caxap/nahar-0ahar/)

Another form of partial reduplication consists of reduplicating the initial consonant

plus vovvel or initial vovvel alone of an adjective and adding the consonant n / p/. This
form produces a superlative degree of the quality of the adjective. Equivalent
expressions are common in English as vvell.

an-aK /ap-a:k/ snovv vvlıite ra n -n ıp a /gap-gara/ coal black

an-auıun /yap-ya:sıl/ bright green ru n -rb ip M b o b i /gıp-gırmı8ı/ bright red
c a n - c a p w /öap-0a:n/ bright yellovv r a n - r a p a i ( K t r /gap-gararjkı/ piteh darfc
e n - e n M iı /yep-yeıjil/ easy as pie T a n -T a K b ip /tap-takır/ smooth as silk
cyn-cyM^H /0üp-8ü:jii/ svveet as honey » ıt m - 'iM ir u M / c i p c i n i m / absolute truth
 Lexicon 511

Intensifying Syllables
The elements u y a /duw/, m a p /îa:r/, c a n /öag/ and w u m /cim/ for the most part are
obscure in origin and have no meaning by themselves. They are paired wıth a very few
adjectives to form superlative degrees. The element ayB /duw/ occurs only in ayB aK
/duw a:k/ 'pale white, ghost white', m a p /sar/ only in m a p r a p a /sa:r gara/ 'jet black,
raven black', c a n /0arj/ (Persian sang 'stone') only in c a n ra T tı /9arj gaa/ 'rock hard'
and MUM /£ım/ only in mum rti3biJi /cim gıSıl/ 'bright red' and mum aK /cim a:k/
'snow white'.

M y p 3 3 H H H My3H ny® a K 6011501, r a m ı r a ^ t m , flo fla ıc n a p fc i 6 H p H -6 H p H H e j ı e r a s n ,

T H T p sn S a ıu n a f ltı. (G) /M ü r 8 â : n i r ) y ü 8 ü d u w a : k b o lu p , g a m ı g a c ıp , d o :d o k lo n
b i:r i-b i:r in e d e g m â :n , titra :p b a ş la d ı./
Miirzâ’s face became pale white, his blood drained, and his lips went slack and
began to qtıiver.

M k h c h h h h x e M ö y 3 H h m m r t o b i j ı S o j i h m . (G) /îk iO in irç hem yüSü cim gıSıl bolü./

The faces of both of them tumed bright red.
512 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Auxiliary Verbs
A common means of creating verbs consists of combining a noun and one of the
common helping or auxiliary verbs. Although a great number of such verbs exists in
Türkmen, both the kinds of nouns and the set of verbs vvhich may be used are limited.
The aujdliary verbs are confûıed to the more commonly used verbs OTMeK /etmek/
'to make, to do, to perfoım', öoıiMaK /bolmok/ 'to be, to become', reJiMeK /gelmek/
'to come' and repMeK /görmök/ 'to see', and to a set of less productive verbs anMaK
/almak/ 'to take', aTMaK /atmak/ 'to throw, to shoot', fiepMeK /bermek/ 'to give',
ra/iMaK /ga:lmak/ 'to stay', cajiMaK /0almak/ 'to put, to place', TyTMas /tutmok/ 'to
hold, to keep', mckmck /çekmek/ 'to pull, to dravv' and HbiKMaK /çıkmak/ 'to go out'.

artıueK le tm e k l
The verb 3TMük /etmek/ 'to make, to do, to perform' may combine vvith nouns,
primarily those borrovved from Persian and Russian, to denote the action connected
vvith such nouns. The meanings of these formations usually but not alvvays are
equivalent to the corresponding verbs formed from the same vvords with the suffix
+ jıa -/ jıe - /+la/le-/ or +JiaH/jıeH- /+lan/len-/- Formations of both.types may be noted
vvith one and the same word, v/hile some exist only in one type or the other.

öepöaT /berba:t/ d estro yed r a n u p /gadir/ resp ect

6 ep 6aT 3TMeK /berba:t etm ek/ to d estro y raflLip s t m c k /gadir etm ek/ to re sp ect
6ep6aTnaM aK /berbartlam ak/ to d estro y rafltıpnaMaK /gadırlam ak/ to resp ect

raüpaT /gayıa:t/ effort, bravery T a ö a p /tayya:r/ re a d y

raiıpaT stmck /gayra: t etmek/ r a ita p s t m c k /tayya:r etm ek/
to make an effort to m a k e re a d y
raüparaaHMaK /gayra-.tlanmak/ TaSapnaM aK /tayya:rlam ak/
to be brave to prepare, to c o o k

yna;YH /üpjün/ equipment peMOHT /remont/ repair

yro^YH 3TMeK /üpjün etm ek/ to su p p ly peMOHT 3TMeK /rem ont etm ek/ to rep a ir
YiE*;YHIleMeK /üpjünlöm ök/ to su p p ly peMOirnıaMaK /remontlomok/ to repair

HOBaM /dow a:m / c o n tin u atio n TaHKMT /tankı:t/ criticism

flOBaM 3TMeK /dow a:m etm ek/ TaH KiiT 3TMeK /tankı:t etm ek/
to co n tin u e to criticiz e
AOBaMjıaMaK /dow a:m lam ak/ TaHKLtTJiaMaK /tankı:tlam ak/
to co n tin u e to criticize

pei(K /rerjk/ c o lo r r e p e u ı /görös/ stru g g le

(peHK «ıanMaK /rei)k çalm ak/ to color) repeuı STMeK /görös etmek/ to struggle
peHKJieMeK /rerpdemek/ to c o lo r (repeuiMeK /görösm ök/ to stru ggle)
 Lexicon 513

However, in some cases, the verb 3TM eK /etmek/ retains its primary meanir.g of 'to
make' and may be exchanged with the verb HcaMaıı /ya8amak/ 'to make, to erekte', its
combination vvith a noun differs in meaning from a verb formed from that noun vvith
the suffbc +Jia/ne- /+la/le-/.

Opa3 roıoH n apa 6 a r st ^ m . Oraz made a tether for the sheep.

/Ora:5 g o y u n lo ro b a:g etdi./
Opa3 roıonnapu öarnaflbi. Oraz tethered the sheep.
/Ora:5 goyunlon ba:gladı./

The verb 3TMeK /etmek/ may be used vvith nouns denoting profession to indicate
the performance of an occupation, or vvith adjectives to signify situation, s tate or
circumstances.

qonaHqujıtiK STMeK /coponculuk etmek/ to be a shepherd

aüfltın 3TMeK /a:ydıi) etm ek/ to make clear, precise
6ejıeK-6eneK stmck /bö:lök-bö:lök etmek/ to break in pieces

Onomatopoeic verbs vvhich imitate the sounds made by creatures, phenoırıena or

actions may be formed by combining imitative syllables vvith the verb OTMeK /etmek/-

Ma 3TMeK /mâ: etmek/ to bleat ('make mâ') [English 'baa']

üut - iilit 3TMeK /pıt-pıt etmek/ to purr, hum (of an engine) [English 'putt-putt'j
xtımu-DbmiLi stmck /hısı-wısı etmek/ to speak in vvhispers [English 'huslı']
mhb-mmb stmck /miw-miw etmek/ to miaovv (cat)

S ojmok Ibolmokl
The combination of the verb ConMaK/bolmok/ 'to be, to become' vvith a noun or
adjective forms a verb with the meaning 'to be X, to become X ' The use of suclı verbs
permits the expression of tense.

Opa3 M e p T 6onap. /Ora:S m e r t bolor./ Oraz will be btave.

Opa3 K e p öonfltı. /Ora:5 kö:r bollı./ Oraz became blind.

İn many cases, the combination of 6 ojim3K /bolmok/ vvith a noun or adjective has
the same meaning as a compound vvith the passive verb 3flHJiMCK /edilmek/ to be
done, to be made', or vvith a reflexive verb derived from the noun.

x a p q G ojiM aK / h a r e b o l m o k / = x a p q / h a r e e d i l m e k / t o be s p e n t
s^ h ü m c k

M e u ıry jı 6 o n M a K /m e s g u :l b o lm o k / = MeuırynnamnaK / m e s g u : l l o n m o k /
t o b e e n g a g e d in
514 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

zeaueK Igelmekl
The verb rejiMeK /gelmek/ 'to come' combines vvith some nouns iri the dative case to
form fîxed phrases; for example: ee rejiMeK /öyö gelmek/ 'to come home', 3Mejıe
rejiMeK /emele gelmek/ 'to form' and xyma rejiMeK /hu:Io gelmek/ 'to come to
mind'.

Opa3 ee renflH. Oraz came home.

/Ora:6 öyö gelli./
Ey3 cyBflaıı 3Mene renitep. Ice forms from vvater.
/Bu:8 0uwdon emele gelyâ:r./

Othervvise, this verb combines vvith nouns to form nevv verbs vvhose meanings
cannot be predieted completely from the literal meanings of their components.

f ly m r e n M e K / d u : s g e l m e k / to c o m e a e r o s s , t o n ı n i n t o ( f ly u ı / d u : s / e n c o u n t e r )
K a ü b iu r e jiM e K / k a : y ı l g e l m e k / t o b e s a t i s f i e d , t o b e p l e a s e d ( K a t a n / k a : y ı l /
a g r e e a b le )
n a ftb tK renMeK /la:yık gelmek/ to correspond to, to suit ( n a ttM K /la:yık/ good)
up s h o r t (K eM / k e m / d e f ı c i e n c y )
K eM r e n M e K / k e m g e l m e k / t o b e m i s s i n g , t o c o m e

zepMeıc Igörmökl
The verb repMeK /görmök/ 'to see' may combine vvith abstract nouns or adjectives to
form nevv verbs. These vvords may stand either in the nominative or in the accusative
case. The meanings of most of these verbs may be predieted from the literal meanings
of their components.

roBtı r e p M e K / g o w ı g ö r m ö k / t o l i k e ( 't o s e e w e l l ')

HM aH r e p M e K / y a m a n g ö r m ö k / t o d i s l i k e ( 't o see b a d l y ')
r e n r e p M e K / g e r j g ö r m ö k / t o b e s u r p r i s e d ( 't o l o o k s t r a n g e l y ')
TaiiapnbiK repMeK /tayya:rlık gömıök/ to prepare ('to see it ready')
MaKyn repMeK /ma:ku:l görmök/ to approve ('to see as acceptable')

To distinguish the literal from the compound meaning of such verbs, it is necessary
to use the verb in the passive voice.

Eh3 öaüpaMa TattnpjibiK repitapHC. (G) /BiS bayrama tayya:rlık göryâ:ri0./

We are preparing for the holiday.

%3 aıanmme TattnpjıuK repyııttap. (G) /Ya:5 ekisrne tayya:rlık görülya:r./

The preparation for the spring sovving is being done.
 Lexicon 515

A se rie s o f o th e r v erb s a ls o m a y c o m b in e vvith n ou n s to fo rm n e w v e rb s vvhose

m ea n in g s are co n n e cte d to their com p on en ts.

a jM a K /alm ak/ to ta k e , to get: a h h m anM aK /dt:nc alm ak/ to re la x , to rest, jjeM anMaK
/dem a lm ak/ to breath e, rapııibi anMaK /garsı alm ak/ to m eet

aTMaK /atm ak/ to throvv, to toss: r e n aTMaK /gep atm ak/ to p ester, to n a g at, BBiuyH
aTMaK /öw sün atm ak/ to b e irridescen t/opalescen t, to c h a n g e c o lo r as a rainbovv

SepM eK /berm ek/ to g iv e : a g o ra n öepM eK /jo ga :p bertnek/ to ansvver, to let g o , s a fla

6epM eK /w a:d a b erm ek/ to m a k e a p ro m ise , to p ro m ise , canaM 6epM eK /6 ala :m
b e ım e k / to greet

raJiMaK /ga:lm ak/ to sta y : xaü paH ranM aK /hayra:n ga :lm a k / to be su rprised, to be
a sto n ish ed , r e n raJiMaK /ger) ga:lm a k/ to b e surprised

canM aK /ö a lm a k / to pu t, to p la c e : cast canM aK /0 a:ya S a lm a k / to c a st a shadovv,

AY3ryH e canM aK /dü8günö/ to put in ord er, to a rran ge, afla canM aK /ya:da öa lm a k/
to rem em b er, r y n a K cajiM aK / g u lo k Salm ak/ to o b e y , to h eed , to listen to

TyTMaK /tutm ok/ to h o ld , to k eep : My3 TyTMaK /yii5 tu tm ok / to ad d ress, to a p p e al,

x a 6 a p TyTMaK /habar tutm ok/ to in q u ire, apKa TyTMaK /arka tu tm ok/ to d efen d , to
protect

tfeKMeK /Sekm ek/ to p u ll, to d raw : apM an h g k m c k /arm am çe k m e k / to fe e i so rry , a x

MeKMeK /ah ç e k m e k / to sig h , to m o an , «duihm MeKMeK / çilim çe k m e k / to s m o k e
('to pu ll on a c ig a te tte ')

UHKMaK /çıkm ak/ to g o out: ycTyH m h k m 3 k /ü00ün ç ık m a k / to w in , ö y 3 e MbiKMaK

/yüSö çık m a k / to appear, to a tis e , ra p u iH MHKMaK /garsı çık m a k / to b e again st
516 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Neologisms, Clipped Words and Acronyms

The Turkmen Standard language has thrived for seventy years or more vvithout having
recourse to the coinage of nevv vvords to enrich its lexical resources. Although "nevv"
vvords are appearing in vvritten vvorks as replacements for Russian or Turkmen vvords
(for example, ceH e /0ene/ 'date', replacing Russian h m c j i o /cislo/ 'date', or Tyr /tu:g/
'flag', replacing Türkmen CaiiflaK /baydak/ 'flag'), these appear to be resurreetions of
vvords belonging to the Central Asian heritage of the Türkmen.
A clipped vvord is one vvhich loses one or more of its syilables, but none of its
meaning. With the exception of t h j i /til/ 'phone' from T e n e c jj o H /telefon/ 'telephone',
these pracdcally do not exist in Turkmen. Hovvever, it vvas a common Soviet practice
to form compounds of two or more Russian vvords by clipping syilables from one or
more of them. Such compounds vvere used vvidely and a few are vvell-established in
Turkmen.

neflH H C T H T yT /pedin0titut/ pedagogical institute

(< n e n a ro r a M e c K M İ t H H C T m y r (pedagogiceskij institut))
K o n x o 3 / k o l h o B / c o l l e c t i v e farm
(< K O flneK T H B H oe x o 3ü M c tb o (kollektivnoje xozjajstvo))
p a i 4c e n t x 030T fle n /ray0elho8otdel/ district agricultural department
(< paiiomttiM cejThcKHÖ x o 3a ü c T B e H H tıii O T jıeJi (rayonnyj sel’skij
xozjajstvennyj otdel))

The process of acronymy involves using the first letter of each vvord in a phrase or
title as a nevv vvord that stands for the phrase or title. Acronyms are rare in Turkmen,
although certain circles used and stili may use some that were common in Soviet
parlance.

FYM = TocyflapcTBeHHuK yHMBepcantHbrö MarasHH

/gum/ (Gosudarstvennyj Universal’nyj Magazin State Department Store)

In the Soviet period, there also vvere cases of naming children after the acronymns
formed by the first initials of the names of majör figures or organizations.

Mmc = MapKC 3Hreıibc JleHMH CTanMH

/Mel0/ (Marks Engel’s Lenin Stalin)
Bmı = BnaflHMMp H jibmm JleHMH
mı/ (Vladimir İl’ic Lenin)
K hm = KoMMyHHCTMHecKHÜ HnTepHaLUioHajı MonofleacM
/Kim/ (Kommunisticeskij İntemacional Molodjozi = Communist
International Youth)
 Lexicon 517

VVORD DERIVATION

Because Turkmen is the type of language whose words mostly consist of rooıs and
suffixes, tlıe primary means of forming new words is through the addition of suffîxes
to roots or stems (= root alone, or root plus one or more lexical suffixes). Such
suffixes are called lexical or derivaıional suffixes. Roots and stems may be nouns,
pronouns, adjectives, adverbs, quantifıers, verbs or verbal forms.

ot- /öt-/ (to) pass (root/stem ) T33e /tâ:Se/ n e w (root/stem )

e T e n re /ötölgö/ p a ssa g e T33ejiMK /ta:5elik/ in n ovation , re fo ım
e T e r m ı /ötögcü/ p asser-b y, tra ve lle r T 33e jıe M e K /tâ:5elem ek/ to reform , to rc n e w
e T M y ı u /ötm üş/ th e past T33eneHMeK /tâ:Selenm ek/ to b e r e n e w e j
o ’rypM eK /ötürm ök/ to le t pass T33eJieMe /tâ:Seleme/ ren ew al

Each derivational or lexical suffix has a meaning that is attached to the root cr stem
to form a noun, verb, adjective or adverb with a new meaning. Sometime:. it is
difficult to pinpoint the exact meaning of a suffix, but its word-formation character is
always clear.
Only a few derivational suffixes are added to most words in a class. For ex;ımple,
the voice suffixes (passive -hji/hji- /-ıl/il-/, cooperative -uui/hui- /-ıs/is-/, ete.) A'hictı
form new verbs from existûıg verbs may be freely added to numerous verbs (iıTMaK
/atmak/ 'to shoot', aT U JiM aK /atılmak/ 'to be shot', aT biiH M aK /atışmak/ 'to fire on
one another', ete.). For this reason, dictionaries do not list ali the derived voice forms
of verbs. Apart from such cases, hovvever, most suffixes are associated only ıvith a
limited number of vvords within a class of words.
Derivational suffixes may be regarded as produetive or as non-produeti /e. A
produetive suffıx is one which a Turkmen speaker may use freely in forming a word
from any class of vvords associated vvith the suffix or vvith a nevvly botrovved vvord (for
example, Ay3JiaMaK /du:81omok/ 'to salt' < 3y3 /du:8/ 'salt', M0T0pjıtı /motorlı/
lıaving a motor, motorized' < Russian motop /motor/ 'motor'). Speakers may or may
not regard a vvord vvith a suffix that is rarely or no longer used as a vvhole or as a
derived vvord (for example, oünaBaM /oynowa:£/ 'toy' < ofinatnaK /oynomcJc/ 'to
play' and the non-produetive Persian suffıx -ealı /-wa:c/).
The majority of lexical suffixes form nouns from existing nouns (shown by +.uıffix)
or verbs (shovvn by -suffbc), or they form verbs from existing verbs (shovvn by -suffix-)
or nouns (shovvn by +suffix-).
518 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Nouns from Nouns

Nouns may be formed from other nouns (or from verbs) through the addition of
derivational suffixes to stems. The most common lexical suffixes of this kind are the
agent ( + m m /h h /+£ı/ci/), association ( + j i m k /j i h k /+lık/lik/), industry ( + h u jiu k /
mmjimk /+cılık/cilik/), companion ( + a a u ı/ g e u ı /+das/des/) and various diminutive
( + W h c /+ca/ce/, + ^ a r a 3 /+jaga5/, +)K,aK/jK,eK /+jak/jek/, +:w,m k /}K,h k /+jık/jik/)
suffixes.

Agent Sujfvc
One of the most productive Türkmen suffixes is + h u / i h /+cı/ci-cü/, which forms
nouns indicating a member of a profession or a 'doer' of the noun to which it is
attached. Because this doer may be vievved as an agent, this suffıx may be called the
'agent suffix'. English equivalents include '-er/-ess, -man/-woman, -ist, -an, -ant'.

Miu /'vs/ work /i:sci/ worker

h iii ' ih
öaribfK /ba:ük/ fish öajibtKibi /ba:lıkcı/ fisherman
poMan /romon/ novel poMaıi'ttı /romoncı/ novelist
Tapbtx /ta:n:h/ history Tapbix«tbi /ta:n:hcı/ historian
xacan /ha0a:p/ account xacarwbi /haöarpcı/ accountant

This suffix also may be used to indicate that an individual is characterized by the
quality or condition of a noun.

re n /g e p /ta lk retiMH /gepci/ gossip

a;iflaB /a:ldaw/ deception a/maBUbi /a:ldawcı/ cheater
ac,eflen /jedel/ argument, dispute ^ejjenuvı /jedelci/ disputant

Association Suffix
Addition o f the suffîx h-jim k / jimk /+hk-Iuk/Iik-Iük/ to a noun creates a noun that
designates a collective or larger association, that is, 'a thing associated with and that
includes (the noun)'.

Mara /ca:ga/ child narartbiK /ca:galık/ childhood

ro:*;a /gojo/ old man ro»;ajibiK /gojoluk/ old age
an /el/ hand(s) 3JIJIHK /ellik/ gloves
aruıaM /ağsam/ evening araıaMnbiK /agsamlık/ dinner
co3 /068/ word cesuyK /OöSlük/ dictionary

Wlıen this suffix is added to words associated with the calendar, it designates 'a
period of (days, months, years)' or '(a day’s/month’s/year’s) worth'.
 Lericon 519

ryH /gün/ day ryHJiYK /günlük/ a day’s wonh, period of a day

a{t /a:y/ month atarnc /a:ylık/ salary ('a month’s worth')
M&iji /yıl/ year MtmutiK /yıllık/ a year’s worth, period of a year

Adding this suffix to a noun designating a natural object may indicate 'a place
associated with/characterized by (the noun)'.

«ar /da:g/ mountaüı flarntiK /da:glık/ a mountainous place

anut /agac/ tree araMHMK /ağaçlık/ grove (a place wlıere there are a
lot of trees)
y3yM /üSüm/ grape(s) Y3yMJDiK vineyard (a place where there are many
grapes)

Industry Suffix
The compound suffix +'tbUihiK/'WjıuK /+cılık-culuk/cilik-cüliik/ forms nouns
designating the industry or profession associated with the nouns.

Y3yM /üSüm/ grape(s) Y3YMMMJIMK/üBümcülük/ viniculture

Majiflap /ma:lla:r/ animal-breeder Manflap'itmbiK /ma:llarcılık/ animal husbandry
flaifxan /dayha:n/ farmer flaifxanntıntiK /dayha:ncılık/ farming

This suffix also may form nouns that refer to 'something associated vvith the
condition or state of (the noun)'.

ohym /ö:nüm/ product eHYMMMUMK/ö:nümcülük/ production

xoccap /ho:00a:r/ relative(s) xoccapm.tni.tK /ho:00a:rcıhk/ patronage
xycyctıeT /Iıu8u0uyet/ privacy xycycbie-niHnHK /hu0u0uyetcilik/ privatization
rypKMeH /türkmön/ Türkmen TypKMeHMHJiMK /türkmöncülük/
Turkmen culture

Companion Suffix
Adding the suffix +nam/jjem /+das-dos/des-dös/ to a noun forms. words Üıat identify
a companion, fellovv or nıate.

BaTaH /watan/ homeland BaTaıiflaıu /vvatannas/ compatriot, countryman

eri /yo:l/ road ejiflanı /yo:llos/ companion, comrade, spouse
Hin /i:s/ vvork Hiıifleuı /i:sdes/ colleague
canaK /8apak/ lesson canaKflauı /Oapakdas/ classmate
3aMan /5ama:n/ time 3aMaHflaıu /8ama:nnas/ a contemporary
rapuıtı /garsı/ opposite (side) rapuıtm anı /garsıdas/ rival
520 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Diminutive Suffbces
Türkmen has several suffixes that denote a diminished state or condition associated
vvith the noun, and thus may be called "diminutive" suffixes. These include the suffixes
+qa/qe /+ca-co/ce-cö/ and +x,ara3 /+jaga5-jogo8/ vvhich designate smaller versions or
amounts of the nouns to vvhich they are attached.

KJfran /kitarp/ book KMTaıwa /kita:pca/ pamphlet

xanLi /ha:lı/ rug, carpet xant[qa /ha:lıca/ a small rug
9KY3 /öküS/ ox, bull eKY3Me /öküScö/ a bull-calf
aT /at/ horse a-rx;ara3 /atjagaS/ filly
m ü /ca:y/ tea naibK,ara3 /ca:yjaga5/ a spot of tea

The suffix +w,aK/*,GK /+jak-jok/jek-jök/ and its variant +JK,biK/*,HK /+ jık -

jfuk/jik-jük/ create nouns vvith a diminutive meaning. Nouns ending in the consonant k
/k/ usually lose this sound vvith the addition of these suffixes.

ojoh /oyun/ game own*;aK /oyunjok/ plaything, small toy

nara /ca:ga/ child Mara^MK /ca:gajık/ kid, kiddie
canflbiK /öannık/ chest caHHMayaıc /0anmjık/ small chest
HYiueıc /düsök/ floor covering jjymeasiHK /düsöjük/ small floor covering

The suffixes + )huk/^m k /+jık/jik/ and + ^ a n /+ja:n/ (= w,an /ja:n/ 'soul') may be
added to proper names or to kinship teıms to impart an affectionate (fıypocoristic)
nuance.

TypöaıofyjK /Gurbarnjık/ dear Gurban TG3ejı*;HK /GöSöljük/ dear Gözel

Hypa;aH /Nu:rja:n/ dear Nur 33fçe3*;aH /ejeja:n/ mama, mommy

Persian Suffixes
At one time, the Persian language exerted an important influence on the Turkmen
lex'ıcon, primarily through the bi-lingual Turkmen-Persian vvriters of the period of
classical Turkmen literatüre (18th-19th centuries). Along vvith the borrovving of
numerous Persian vvords, Turkmen also borrovved Persian derivational suffîxes, a fevv
of vvhich may stili be used, vvhile the majority of vvhich are non-producdve and appear
almost exclusively vvith Persian or Arabic vvords.
Tlıe suffixes + n a p /+da:r/, + K a p / r a p /+ka:r/ga:r/, + K e u ı /+kes/ and + 6 a n / D a n
/+ba:n/wa:n/ form nouns that indicate members of professions, ovvners, doers and
agents.
 Lexicon 521

M an /ma:l/ ca ttle Manmap /ma:lia:r/cattle-breeder

Tapan /tarap/ sid e Tapaımap /tarapda:r/ paıtisan
flYKaH /diikarn/ sh o p flyKaıiflap /düka:nna:r/ shop-keepeı
açeH asT /jena:yat/ e rim e ^enasmcap /jena:yatkâ:r/ criminal
ceB.ua /0öwda:/ trade ceBflarap /0öwda:gâ:r/merehant, ttuder
3ep /Ser/ g o ld 3eprep /5erga:r/ jeweller
3 sx MeT /5â:hmet/ lab or 33XMencem /Sâ:hmetkes/ laborer
apa6a /araba/ cart apaöaKeuı /arabakes/ caıt-driver
6ar /ba:g/ gard en 6ar6aH /ba:gba:n/ gardener
c a a /0a:ya/ shade cagB an /0a:yawa:n/ umbrelJa

The suffix +xop /+ho:r/ creates nouns that designate persons who are addbted to,
given to or love a feeling or substance.

apaK /arak/ vo d k a apaKXop /arakho:r/ aicoholic

raH /ga:n/ b lo o d raHXop /ga:nho:r/ bloodsucker
napa /pa:ra/ b ribe n ap ax o p /pa:raho:r/ bribe-taker
«taS/ca:y/tea ıta ö x o p /ca:yho:r/ tea-lover
M y rr/ m u g t/ gratis, free-o f-eh a rge M yrntop /mugtho:r/ parasite

The suffix +xaııa /+ha:na/ forms nouns that indicate the place or institutioıı of the
noun to vvhich it is attached.

KHTaıt /kita:p/ b o o k KjrranxaHa /kita:pha:na/ library

K3p /ka:r/ p ro fessio n K apxana/ka:rha:na/ enterprise
K eçen /keöel/ sick n ess KecenxaH a/ke0elha:na/ hospital
auı /as/ fo o d amxana /asha:na/ kitehen
rapaB yn /garavvul/ guard rapaBynxaHa /garawulha:na/guardlmuse
MtıxMaH /m ı:hm a:n/ g u e st MtiManxaııa /mı:hma:nha:na/ hotel

The suffix +ucTan/MCTan /+ı00a:n-u00a:n/i00a:n-ü00a:n/ forms the n; .Ties of

countries or localities associated with the nouns to which they are attached.

TypKMeH /türkmön/ Türkmen TypKM eroıcTaH /Türkm önü00a:n/

Türkmenistan
ra3aK /gaSak/ Kazak ra3artıcTaH /Ga5agı00a:n/ Kazakismn
n.ıpn.13 /gırgıS/ Kirgiz rı.ıpra3fciCTaH /Gırgı5ı00a:n/ Kirgi?.istan
e3ÖeK /ö:5bök/ Uzbek 0 36ern cT aH /Ö:8bögü00a:n/ Uzbeki itan
ts»;hk /ta:jik/ Tajik Ts^MTHCTaH /Tâ:jigi00a:n/ Tajikisnm
OBraH /owga:n/ Afghan ÛBraHiıcTaH/O w ga:nı0 0a:n/ Afghaııistan
rypa^H /gürjü/ Georgian rypapıcTaH /Gürjü00a:n/ Georgia
3pMeHH /ermeni/ Aımenian 3pMeHMCTaH /Ermeni00a:n/ Armen ia
'leu /cöl/ desett nenycTan /cölü00a:n/desert, wastel.ınd
522 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Several other Persian suffıxes that appear in Persian, Arabic and, very rarely,
Turkmen vvords are non-productive.

ıu e p T /s e r t / c o n d itio n u ıe p ra a M a /s e r tn a r m a / c o n tr a c t
sx t /â h t/ a g re e m e n t M T ic a M a / a l ı t n a r m a / v v ritte n a g r e e m e n t ,
contract
o ıo n /oyun/ ga m e oıon 6a3 /oyunba:8/ hustler
Macrapa /m aSgara/ d isgrace M a c r a p a 6a 3 /ma0garaba:8/ fo o l, je ste r
c a 3 /0a:8/ m u s i c c a 3a ı m a /0a:8anna/m usician
açeM /jem/ a li 3s;eMeıma /jem enne/ p u b lic
n a r r a /pagta/ cotton n a r ra s a p /pagta8a:r/ cotton fie ld
r y n /gül/ flovver ryn 3 ap /güISarr/ flovver garden
K yjı /kül/ aslı(es) K y n flaH /küllarn/ ashtray
r y n /gül/ flovver ryJiflaH /güllarn/ v a se
aflaM /ardam/ p erson, m an a flaM 3 ar/a:dam 8 a:t/hu m an , son o f m an

Russian Sııffixes
A host of Russian words appear in written Turkmen, many of vvhich bear Russian
suffixes. Hovvever, these have not become produetive means of forming new vvords.
Turkmen even replaces some Russian suffixes vvith its own; for example, Turkmen
M 0T 0p libi /motorcı/, but Russian m o t o p h c t /motorist/ 'motorist' (< m o t o p /motor/
'motor'), or m a x r a m ,ı /sahtacı/, but Russian m a x T e p /saxt'or/ 'miner' (< u ıa x T a
/saxta/ 'mine').
 Lexicon 523

Nouns from Verbs

Türkmen also forms new nouns from verb roots and stems by means of the addition of
suffbces. The exact funetion of certain suffıxes is difficult to label in English, but the
majority of them designate the process, result, means, place or agent of an action.

Process/Result o f Action
Attaching the suffix -mm/ hm /-ım-um/im-üm/ (stems ending in a vowel take -m /-m/)
to verb stems forms nouns that denote the process or result of an action.

rap K M aK /gırkm ak/ to sh ear rapK M M /gırkım / sh earing, h aircut

lOByTMaK /yu w utm ok/ to s w a llo w lOB^yM /yu w du m / sw a llo w , m o u th fu l
3ttneMeK /eylem ek/ to tan siîneM /eylem / tanning
ÖHJiMeK /bilm ek/ to k n o w 6hjihm /bilim / k n o w le d g e
GHMeK /ö:nm ök/ to g ro w enyM /ö:nüm / prod u ce, produet

The suffix -r /-g/ is added to verb stems ending in a vovvel to form nouns that
designate the process or result of an action.

copaMaK /0o:romok/ to ask copar /0o:rog/ question

HcneMeK /iOIemek/ to want, to wish nc.ner /İ01eg/ wish
TeneMeK /tölömök/ to pay T a n e r /tölög/ payment

Adding the suffix -m/ h /-ı/i-ii/ to verb stems ending in a consonant forms nouns
that designate the process or result of an action.

ranM aK /gapm ak/ to c lo se r a n t ı /gapı/ d o o r

ropKMüK /gorkm ok/ to fe a r ro p K tı /gorfa/ fe a r
cypM eK /0ürmök/ to d riv e (an im als) c y p n /0ürii/ herd

The suffıx -yB/yB /-uw/üw/ (stems ending in a vowel take -b /- w/) derives nouns
from verbs to denote the process of an action. It should be noted that O K y B /okuw/
'studies' actually derives from a no longer extant variant (*okı- 'to read') of the stem of
OKaMaK /okomok/ 'to study, to read'.

snınaK /yaSm ak/ to w rite s3 yB /ya5uw / vvriting

ropaM aK /go:rom ok/ to protect rop aB /go:row / proteetion
OKaMaK /ok om o k / to stu dy, to read OKyB /okuw / stu dies
524 Türkmen Reference Grammar

The suffix -m /-S/ may be added to verb stems that contain the reflexive suffix
/-m/in-/ (see 532) to form nouns denoting the process or result of an action.
- u h /h h -
Such verbs often do not occur in a root form.

ra3aH M aK /ga5an m ak/toeam raaaım /gaSanc/ w ag e(s), profit(s)

flaaHMaK /dayanm ak/ to lean on, to rest on fla ş ım /dayanc/ support, rest
MHaHMaK /inanm ak/ to b e lie v e ım a ım /ınanc/ trust, fa ith
6ereHMeK /beğenm ek/ to b e g la d 6 e r e ıw /begenc/ jo y , h app in ess
öKyHMeK /ökünm ök/ to re g ret 6Kyhm /ökünc/ regret
eıyHMeK /ötünm ök/ to a p o lo g iz e e T y ım /ötiin î/ fa re w e ll, a p o lo g y

Nouns designating the result of an action are produced through addition of the
suffix - u h /h h /-m-un/in-ün/ (stems ending in a vovvel take - h /-n/) to verb stems.

3KMeK /ekmek/ to sow skhh /ekin/crop(s)

THKMeK /tikmek/ to sew thkhh /tikin/ stitch
HYBMeK /düwmök/ to tie in a knot HYBYH /düwün/ knot

Addition of the suffix -rutilrım /-gm-gun/gin-gün/ to a verb creates a noun that

expresses the result of an action.

HHMaK /yanm ak/ to b u m h h th h /yangm / fire

rti3M aK /gıSm ak/ to g e t h ot rtra rtm /gı5gın/ h eat
cypMeK /eürmök/ to drive a w a y CYpryH /0ürgün/ e x ile

The suffix - u k /h k /-ık-uk/ik-ük/ (stems ending in a vovvel take -K /-k/) frequently

is added to verb stems ending in the cooperative suffix -uiu/hdi- /-ıs/i§-/ (see 533) to
form nouns denoting the result of mutually undertaken actions. In addition, this suffix
may form nouns indicating the means of an action.

tuıajıaıuM aK /darlaşm ak/ to agree tm a n a u ıtiK /ıla:lasık/ agreem en t

ren n euiM eK /geplesm ek/ to ta lk to geth er renneuiH K /gep lesik/ talk, d iscu ssio n
eTM eK /ötm ök/ to pass enryK /ötük/ passagevvay, o p en in g

MeanslPlaceiAgent o f Action
Adding the suffix -aK /eıc /-ak-ok/ek-ök/ (stems ending in a vovvel take -k /-k/) to a
verb stem creates nouns that designate the means or place of an action.

ranM aK /gapm ak/ to cover ranaıc /gapak/ lid

flapaMaK /daramak/ to co m b flapaıc /darak/ comb
aTMaK /yatm ak/ to lie dovvn srraK /yatak/ stable
ftttrttH M aK /ytgm m ak/ to gather iıt ın ıa K /yıgnak/ m ee ü n g
 Lexicon 525

Attachment of the suffbc -M}K,u / hh^h /-ıjı-ujı/iji-üjü/ (stems ending in vo'wels may
take -M^ u /Kjhh /-yjı/yji-yjjü/ or - m ^ u / h^ h /-ıjı/iji/ with lengthening of vovvel) to
verbs creates'nouns that designate doers or agents of an action. This suffbc is especially
produetive for the derivation of scientific terms.

ajiMaK /almak/ to take, to buy anujK,tı /alıjı/ buyer

H3M3K /yaSmak/ to write a3tt*;fci /yaSıjı/ writer
cypMeK /0ürmök/ to drive cypy:*;n /öürüjü/ driver
oKaMaK /okomok/ to read okmx;i>i /oki:jı/ reader
repKe3MeK /görkö5mök/ to show repKe3JC*jt /görköSiijü/ inde*
6ar;ıaMaK /barglamak/ to connect 6arnaibK$ı /ba: glayjı/ conjunc tion

The suffîx - ru n /r ım /-gıc-guc/gic-güc/ forms abstract nouns or nouns that

designate the means of an action.

oTypMaK /oturmok/ to sit o ry p rtra /oturguc/ chair

cy3MeK /0ü5mök/ to filter cyaryH /0ü8güc/ filter, skimni er

The suffbc -an/eM /-ac-oc/ec-öc/ may be added to verb stems to ind cate the
instrument by which an action is performed.

rHCMaK /gı0mak/ to squeeze rtıcay /gı0ac/ tongs

repMeK /görmök/ to see repeM /göröc/ pupil

The suffbc - a n r a / e n r e /-alga-olgo/elge-ölgö/ (stems ending in vovvels take - n r a /jır e

/-Iga-lgo/lge-lgö/) forms nouns from verbs to designate the place of an action.

AypMaK /durmok/ to stop, to stand flypanra /durolgo/ station, bus-stop

MMKMaK /çıkmak/ to go out HHKajıra /cıkalga/ exit

Only a fevv Turkmen nouns designating the instrument of actions are derived from
verbs through the addition of the Persian suffbc -Baq /-wa:c/ to verb stems.

otaaMaıc /oynomok/ to play oÜHaBan /oynowa:c/ toy

TyTMaK /tutm ok/ to hold TyraBaM /tutowa:c/ handle
enneMeK /yelpemek/ to fan enneBaM /yelpewa:c/ fan
526 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Other Suffixes
Turkmen nouns have been derived from verbs through the addition of the infinitive
(-Man/MeK /-mak/mek/), verbal noun (-Ma/ine /-ma/me/, -um /um /-ıs/is/), participle
(-a p /e p /-ar/er/, -aH/eH /-an/en/, - m h u i / mmiu /-mıs/mis/) and past indefinite tense
(-flM/flM /-dı/di/) suffixes to verb stems.

MaKMaK /çakm ak/ to strike »jaKMaK /çakmak/ flint, lighter

3KMGK / e k m e k / to S ow , to fa r m 3KMejc /ekmek/ farming
H3MaK /yaSm ak/ to w rite H3Ma /yaSma/ writing, manuseript
repK e3M eK /görköSm ök/ to sh ow repK e3M e /görköSmö/ indication
HTMaK /yağm ak/ to precip itate strbiıu /yagıs/ precipitation, rain
m p M eK /gi:rm ek/ to g o in ra p m ıı /gi:ris/ introduetion
a»iMaK /a£mak/ to open aMap/acar/key
yuM aK /uçm ak/ to fly yMap /ucor/ airplane
nıpMeK /gi:rm ek/ to g o in nıpae^H /gi:rdeji/ income
HMKMaK /çıkm ak/ to g o out »ftiKfla2Kj>ı /cıkdajı/ exp en se(s)
fly p w a K /durm ok/ to stand, to stop flypMyuı /durmuş/ life
reMMeK /geçm ek/ to eross reMMHiu /gecmis/ the past
ranM aK /gapm ak/ to c lo se ranaH /gapan/ trap
arapMaK /a:garm ak/ to b e co m e w h ite arapaH /a:garan/ cream from
camel’s milk
übirtiH M aK /yıgm m ak/ to gather ttbirtiHflBi /yıgınm/ collection

Many common Turkmen nouns are derived from verbs by means of suffixes that are
little or non-produetive in the language. The following examples are a small seleetion
of such derivations.

flyÜMaK /duymok/ to fe e l iiy ö r b i /duygı/ fe e lin g

mmmck /içm ek/ to drin k m m /iegi/ beverage
rynMeK /gülmök/ to laugh rynKM /gülkü/ laughter
6aTMaK /batmak/ to sin k 6aT ra /batğa/ sw a m p
raMMaK /gacm ak/to flee, to run away rauraK /gacgak/ fu g itiv e , deseıter
HÜMeK /iym ek/ to eat h İIm h t /iym it/ fo o d
flyuiYHMeK /düsünmök/ to understand HYUiyHJKe /düsünjö/ th ought, co n ce p t
rapM eK /gi:rm ek/ to en ter r n p u e x } i /girrdeji/ in co m e
canM aK /9alm ak/ to put in canrbtT /0algıt/ tax
TanaM aK /tarlamak/ to rob TanaH Aa:lai]/ rob b ery
uıarnaMaK /sağlamak/ to p ass över ıuarnaB yK /saglaw u k/ w aterfall
ron ypM aK /gowurmok/ to fry roB ypflaK /gow urdok/ fried m eat
aünanMaK /aylanmak/ to go around afinanM aM /aylanm ac/ bend, cu rve
dacMaK /ta:lamak/ to step 6 a c r a n 'ia K /baögancak/ step, le v e l
 Lexicon 527

Verbs from Nouns, Adjectives and Other Words

Numerous verbs are derived from nouns, adjectives, adverbs and numerals through the
addition of suffixes. The most common of these is the suffıx +jıa/jıe- /+la/le-/-

The Suffix +MiİAe- l+lalle-l

The most common means of forming verbs consists of adding the suffix +jıa/ne- /+la-
Io/ie-lö-/ to nouns, adjectives, adverbs and other parts of speech. Such verbs express an
action connected to the primary meaning of the word to which they are attached.

fly 3 /du:5/ salt flysnaMaK /du:81om ok/ to salt

joMyp-rra /yu m u ıtgo/ e g g (s) » M yp T ran aM aK /yu m u rtgolom ok / to la y e g g s
cy B /0uw/ w a te r cyBnaM aK /0 u w lom ok/ to irrigate, to w ater
nepfle /perde/ curtain nepfleneM eK /perdelem ek/ to co n ceal
oBaflan /ow od on/ b eau tifu l osaflannaM aK /o w o d on lom ok / to b eau tify
sjk;m3 /eji:5/ w e a k 3*,H3neMeK /eji:81emek/ to w eaken
X33iıp /hâ:8ir/ n o w X33HpneMeK /hâ:8irlem ek/ to m ak e read y
h km /iki/ tw o MKMJieMeK /ik ilem ek / to b e in tw o s
T y p K M e m e /türkm öncö/ TypKMenMeneMeK /türkm öncölöm ök/
in Türkmen to sp e a k Türkmen

The suffıx + jıa/ne- /+la/le-/ forms part of the compound suffix +jıaH/jıeH- /+lan-
lon/len-lön-/, vvhich also contains the reflexive suffıx -h - /-n-/- When added to nouns
and adjectives, +Jian/nen- /+lan/len-/ creates intransitive verbs.

ar /at/ horse amaHMaK /atlanmak/ to sit on a horse

aKtın /akıl/ intelligence ajctınnaıtMaK /akıllanmak/ to see reason
re3ejı /göSöl/ beautiful re3ejuıeHMeK /göSöllönmök/ to grow prettier

The suffîx + j ı a / n e - /+la/le-/ also forms part of the compound suffix + j ı a u ı / j ı e ı n -

/+las-los/les-lös-/, which contains the cooperative suffix -m- /-S-/. Tlıis suffix creates
both transitive and intransitive verbs dıat signify a change in the state of something.

xteT /cet/ edge, border MeTJieuiMeK /cetlesmek/ to avoid

6ynyT /bulut/ cloud öyjıyrjıaınMaK /bulutlosmok/ to get cloudy
y3aK /uSok/ far, distant y3aıaıauiMaK /uSoklosmok/ to move off
528 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Other Suffixes
Adding the suffix +a/e- /+ a-o/e-ö-/ to nouns and adjectives creates verbs designating
actions connected to processing or gaining the quality or state of the word to which it
is attached. This suffix replaces the final vovvel of the stem to vvhich it is attached.
6a ü /ba:y/ rich 6aaMaK /ba:yamak/ to become rich
ojoh /oyun/ game oÖHaMaK /oynomok/ to play
enini /yerjil/ easy, light enneMeK /yerjlemek/ to become easier, lighter
Maflbuı /mayii/ vvarnı M ato a M a ıc /maylamak/ to grovv vvarm
rapptı /gam / old rappaMaK /gartamak/ to grovv old
m x , u /gi:ji/ itch, rash rniK,eMeK /gi:jemek/ to itch, to scratch

The suffix +ap/ep- /+ar-or/er-ör-/ (stems ending in vovvels take -p /-r/) forms verbs
that express the act of becoming or gaining the quality or State of the vvord to vvhich it
is attached. Verbs formed from adjectives vvith this suffix are equivalent to a phrase
consisting of the adjective and the verb ö o jırn a K /bolmok/ 'to become'. The final
-bik/hk- /-ık/ik-/ of a stem is replaced by this suffix.

aK / a : k / v v h ite arapMaK / a : g a r m a k / t o b e c o m e v v h ite , t o v v h ite n

eft l'oyl h o m e eepM eK /ö y ö rm ö k / to g e t m a r r i e d ('gain a h o m e ')
K e ç e /keöe/ h o r i z o n t a l K e c e p M e K / k e S e r m e k / to s t r e t c h out
Mojıa /colo/ e m p t y , u n p o p u l a t e d M o n ap M aK / c o l o r m o k / to b e c o m e e m p t y
r b iu ib iK / g ı : s ı k / c r o o k e d rb iıu a p M a K / g ı : s a r m a k / t o b e c o m e c r o o k e d
n e 33HK / p e 58i k / f l u f f y ne33epMeK / p e S S e r m e k / t o b e c o m e f lu ffy (h a ir)

Tlıe suffix +an/ejı- /-t-al—ol/el—öl-/ (stems ending in vovvels take -ji /-!/) is added to
nouns, adjectives and adverbs to create intransitive verbs that express the act of gaining
the quality of an adjective. This suffuc replaces the final vovvel of a stem.

r a p a /g a r a / b la c k rap an M aK /g a r a lm a k / to b e c o m e b la c k
eK / y o : k / a b s e n c e , n o n - e x i s t e n c e e r a jiM a K / y o : g o l m o k / t o p e r i s h
K e n /k ö p / m u c h , a lo t KenenM CK / k ö p ö l m ö k / t o m u l t i p l y
flMpM / d i : r i / l i v i n g fliıp u riM e K / d i : r i l m e k / t o b e c o m e a n i m a t e d
K e n e /k ö : n ö / o ld , w o m o u t K e n e n M e K / k ö : n ö l m ö k / t o g e t o ld / v v o m o u t
y jib i /ulı/ big ynajiM aK /ulolmok/ to get big
r e m i /g ö n ü / s tr a ig h t re n e n M e K /g ö n ö lm ö k / to b e c o m e s tr a ig h t

Tlıe suffix -Aa/fle- /-da/de-/ forms part of the compound suffixes +biJifla/nnae-
/+ılla-ullo/ille-üllö-/ and +bipfla/ııpne- /+ırda-urdo/irde-ürdö-/, vvhich are added to
expressive and onomatopoeic vvords to form verbs for actions connected to the primary
meaning of the vvords to vvhich they are attached. Usually, the roots of such verbs do
not occur alone and cannot be defined precisely.
 Lexicon 529

x opK y n n aM aK /h o rk u llo m o k / to sob noBypflaMaK /lovvurdomok/ to blink

Ba 33£ u m a M a K / w a 88ı l l a m a k / to buzz xamtumaMaK /hassıllamak/ to h ıss

The suffix +cbipa/cMpe- /+0ıra-0uro/0ire-0ürö-/ may be attaehed to nouns or

adjectives to form verbs that express the ideas of feeling or feigning the con didon or
quality indicated in the words to vvhich it is attaehed. Addition of this suffîx to a
negative participle in -MajjbiK/MeflHK /-madık/medik/ creates a verb with the meaning
'to pretend not to do (something)'.

x a n /h a :n /k h a n x a n c t ı p a M a K / h a : n 0ı r a m a k / to p r e t e n d t o b e a ]c h a n
eK e /y e k e / o n e , a lo n e e K e c ııp e M e K /y e k e O i r e m e k / to f e e l l o n e l y
jm t h h /i£ g i:n / s in c e re jıuT H H C H peM eK / İ c g i : n 0i r e m e k / t o a p p e a r t o be s i n c e r e
Ö H iiM eK / b i l m e k / t o k n o w Ö H JiM efliiK CH peM eK / b i l m e d i k O i r e m e k / to p r e t e n d
not to know
JiÜMeK /iymek/ to eat M İİM eflK K cnpeM eK / i y m e d i k O i r e m e k / to p r e t e n d
not to eat

A number of Turkmen suffixes that derive verbs from nouns and other vvords are
little or non-produetive. Some of them replace the final vowel or - mk / hk - /-ık:/ik-/ of
the stems to vvhich they are attaehed. The following examples are a small sele-.ction of
such formations.

cy B /0uw/ vvater cyBcaMaK /0uw0omok/ to thirst

K y ö /kii:/ th o ught K y ö c e M e K /kü:0ömök/ to vvant, to long for
raH /ga:n/ b lo o d raiDK;apMaK /gamjaımak/ to bleed slightly
aK /a:k/ w h ite aıo*;apMaK /a:kjarmak/ to look a little whitc.
fle p /der/ svveat flepx,HpeMeK /derjiremek/ to svveat a little
x a a n /hayal/ slo w xasm»gbipaMaK /hayaljıramak/ to feel avvkv, nrd
u c /j :0/ sm e ll ucbipraM aK /ı:0ırgamak/ to sniff around
fly iin ı /dü:s/ dream flYfcuypreMeK /dü:sürgömök/ to be deliriots
6wp /bir/ o n e ÖHpMKMeK /birikmek/ to ünite
reH H /gönü/ straigh t, d irect reHyKMeK /gönükmök/ to straighten out
capbt IQar.nl yellovv caprapMaK /0argarmak/ to tum yellow
S3t>iK /yaSık/ fau lt, o ffe n se H3rapMaK /yaSgarmak/ to blame
ra p a jy c u /gararjkı/ dark(ness) rapaiiKbipaMaK /garatjkıramak/ to tum dark
fls jn ı /dâ:li/ c ra z y flajrapeMeK /dâ:liremek/ to go crazy
6epK /berk/ firm öepKHTMeK /berkitmek/ to make firm
KeM /kem/ d e fic ie n c y KeMCMTMeK /kemSitmek/ to denigrate, to offend
MyK /yük/ lo a d iiyKcyHMeK /yük0ünmök/ to consider a burden
flbo /dı:5/ k n ee(s) fltl3apjıaM aK /dı:5arlamak/ to tie the knees (camel)
c h /0ı/ (w h is tlin g so u n d ) CbirbtpMaK /öıgırmak/ to vvhistle
n biuı /pis/ (sn o rtin g sou n d) nuıuKtıpMaK /pıskırmak/ to snort (animals)
530 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Verbs from Verbs

Lexical suffixes that form verbs from existing verbs may be divided into the very
productive group of voice suffixes and a no longer very productive group of descriptive
suffixes.

Voice Sııffixes
Ali verbs express a voice, that is the speaker’s relationship to the action (see 211).
Türkmen indicates voice with the addition of lexical suffixes which form verbs with
new meanings from other verb stems. The meanings of these derived verbs usually may
be predicted from the meanings of the voice suffixes; for example, 6epMeK /bermek/
'to give' in the active voice predictably will be 6 e p n jlM e K /berilmek/ 'to be given' in
the passive voice. In some cases, the English equivalents of the derived verbs may not
be so obvious; for example, MUiJieMeK 'to work' in the active voice is HinJieTMeK 'to
cause to work' but also 'to operate (for example, machinery)' in the causative voice.
Wlıereas English only has active and passive voices, Türkmen expresses five voices
üırough the addition of suffixes. Tlıe five voices may be described and illustrated in the
following way:

Active: The action of a sentence is directed from the subject to the

object, if there is an object: re p M e K /görmök/ 'to see',
KecMeK /ke0mek/ 'to cut'.

Passive: The action of a sentence is directed from the object, if there is

an object, to the subject: rep y jiM eK /göriilmök/ 'to be seen',
KecHJtMeK /keOilmek/ 'to be cut'.

Reflexive: The action of a sentence is directed from the subject back to

the subject: repYHMeK /görünmök/ 'to appear' (< 'to be
visible' < 'to see oneself'). (KecHHMeK /keöinmek/ 'to cut
oneself' is possible, but not used.)

Cooperative: Tlıe action of a sentence is mutually directed between, or

performed by or in the aid of two or more persons expressed
by the subject: repYmMeK /göriismök/ 'to see one another',
kcchhimck /keOismek/ 'to help someone cut'.

Causative: The subject makes or directs the indirect object to perform the
action of a sentence: ropnYPMeK /gördiirmök/ 'to cause
someone to see', KecjjHpMeK /ke80irmek/ 'to cause someone
to cut'.
 Lexicon 531

Because their meanings usually are predictable, many derived verbs that express one
or more of these voices are not entered separately in dictionaries, and those which are
entered separately are referred to the entries for the root or stem forms of the verbs.

Active Voice
Turkmen verbs without a voice suffıx express the active voice, which indicates that the
subject performs the action of a sentence. Active verbs may be transitive, which means
that they can take a direct object (for example, 'to wash the dishes'), or intransitive,
which means that they cannot take a direct object (for example, 'to go').

Transitive: MeH ran-ManaKnaptt ıoBflyM. /Men ga:p-ca:naklan yu w du m ./

I washed the dishes.

intransitive: AuıraÖafla rnqWapnH. /Asgabada gidyârrin./

I’m going to Ashgabat.

Passive Voice
The passive voice indicates that the subject undergoes or receives the action performed
by the object of a sentence. Although the logical subject of a passive sentence (for
example, 'it was heard') usually is not expressed in Turkmen, it may be introduced by
a noun or other part of speech in the dative case suffix +a/e /+a/e/ ('it was heard by X')
or sometimes by the postposition TapanuHflaıı /tarapmnan/ ('it vvas heard by X') (see
410).

Active: MeH ran-MaııaKJiaptı löBflyM. /Men ga:p-ca:naklan yuvvdum./

I washed the dishes.

Passive: Fan-naHaKJiap raByJifliı. /Ga:p-ca:naklar yuwullı./

The dishes vvere washed.

IHeMx Hex;MeflflHH Kyöpa 6y ceBeıue o tu aparatı raTHaııiBinflup Be Monronnap

(N) /Seyh Nejmeddin Kubra: bu 0öwösö eli
T a p a n tiH fla n e n fly p n n n n fin p .
yaraglı gatnasıpdır vve mongollor tarapmnan öllürülüpdür./
Sheyh Nejmedin Kubra apparently took part in this fıght vvıdı weapon in lıand and
was killed by the Mongols.

On flYHÜsının lopTJiaptiHMH mkm tiy s e ro n a te H H a ajiH bin ropKe3WiHH. (TVI2.5)

/Ol dünyârnir) yurrtlorunuıj iki yü8ö goloyunno alnıp görköSüllü./
I t vvas r e c e iv e d a n d sh ovvn in close to tvvo hundred countries of the world.
532 Türkmen Reference Grammar

3pTH p MepxeMerJiH MBKMaHtm Jleöan B e n asro m a ca n a p a yrpaM an.iH a

ra p a m u iia p . (TP12.5)
/Eıti:r merhemetli mı:hma:nır) Leba:p wela:yatma Sapara ugromoguno garasılya:r./
Tomorrow it is expected th a t the gracious gııest will set off on a trip to Lebap
province.

The passive voice is indicated by adding the suffix -uji/hji- /-ıl-ul/il-ül-/ (stems
ending in a vovvel take -ji- /-l-f) to verb stems ending in any consonant except ji /I/,
and the suffix - mh/ hh - /-m-un/in-ün-/ to stems ending in n ki-

rypMaK /gurm ok/ to build rypyjiMaK /gurulm ok/ to b e b u ilt

copaM aK /0o:rom ok/ to a s k copanMaK /0o:rolm ok/ to b e asked
öanM CK /bö:lm ök/ to d iv id e GenyHM eK /börlünm ök/ to b e d iv id e d
SamjıaMaK /başlam ak/ to b egin SaıunaHMaK /başlanm ak/ to be b egu n

Reflexive Voice
The subject of a verb in the reflexive voice is the same as the object, that is, the subject
experiences the effects of an action or performs an action for her/himself. In Türkmen,
the reflexive voice suffix is added only to verbs that are transitive. Such verbs become
intransitive with the addition of this suffix.

Active/Transiıive: MeH ran-HaHaıoıapbi lOBflyM. /Men ga:p-ca:naklan

yuwdum./1 washed the dishes.
On ıuKa<|>u roaraflbt. /Ol ıikapı go:Sgodı./
She moved the bookcase.

Rejlexivellntransitive: MeH roByHflbiM. /Men yuwunnum./

I washed (myself).
On ro3raHfltt. /Ol go:Sgonnı./ He moved
(himself)-

3 xjih 3aT ona sır repyımH. (G) /Âhü Sa:t orp ya:t görünnü./
Ali these things seemed unfamiliar to him.

IIIohu 6esm 3Tcen, S en ö t, onapaM aKbuıtm a attJiaHap. (N)

/Som beya:n e00ei], belki, olorom akılma aylanar./
If you explain it, perhaps they too will com e to their senses. ['tum themselves to
their senses']
 Lexicon 533

Türkmen marks the reflexive voice by adding the suffîx - u h / hh - /-ın-un/in-ün-/

(stems ending in a vowel take -h - l-n-f) to verb stems ending in any consonant except
h /n/, and the suffix -bijı/nn- /-ıl-ul/il-ül-/ to stems ending in H /n/.

KiBM aK / y u w m o k / to w a s h (so m e o n e ) H>ByHMaK / y u w u n m o k / to w a s h

(oneself)
anM aK / a l m a k / to ta k e , to b u y a n u H M a ıc / a l ı n m a k / to t a k e ,
to buy ( f o r o n e s e lf)
flu n e M e K / d i l e m e k / t o a s k ( s o m e o n e ) flim eH M C K / d i l e n m e k / t o a s k ( f o r
o n e s e lf ), to b e g

Some verbs with the suffix - u h / hh - /-m/in-/ may express either the passive or the
reflexive voice, which can be distinguished only by context or sentence strucuıre; for
example, 6aniJiaMaK /başlamak/ 'to begin (something)', 6auiJiaHMaK /başlanmak/ 'to
begin (itself), to be begun'.

Active: On iftira artı eauınaflM. /Ol yıgnagı başladı./ He began tlv.

meeting.

Passive: ÖBiraaK 6aıunaHflLi. /Yıgnak baslannı./The meeting was

begun.

ReJIexive: MbinıaK Bauınanflbi. /Yıgnak baslannı./The meeting began.

Cooperative Voice
The cooperative voice indicates that the subject performs an action at the sarııe time
that another person performs it (mutually, reciprocally, together, against), or performs
an action in the aid of another person.

Active: Men ra n -H a ııa K J ia p & ı jO BflyM . /Men ga:p-ca:naklan

yuwdum./1 washed the dishes.
On ouyu n,i3Luıı>ı rysuaioıaflBi. /Ol onuıj gı:5ını gujokloılı./
She hugged her daughter.

Cooperative: Men ra n -H a H a ıc J ia p b i lo B y u iflb iM . /Men ga:p-ca:naklan

yuvvusdum./1 washed the dishes (with him/her).
[or: I helped her/him vvash the dishes.)
Onap ry*;aKnauiflbLrıap. /Olor gujoklosdulor./
Tlıey hugged each other.
534 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

O-rypaHJiap rYJiYinflHjıep. (G) /Oyuronlor gülüsdülör./

Those vvho were sitting laughed together.

Ce6s6H eneM MeH 6suı «Bin Tenepern smınap 6wneH nuiJieuınnM. (N)
/0ebâ:bi öıjöm men bâ:s yıl töwörögü ya:slar bilen i:slesdim./
The reason is that I vvorked vvith youths before for about five years. ['vvorked
together vvith']

The cooperative voice sometimes is called the "reciprocal" voice, and is indicated by
adding the suffix -u m /u m - /-ıs-us/is-üs-/ (stems ending in a vovvel take -ın- /-s-/) to
verb stems.

ypMaK /urmok/ to strike ypyuiMaK /urusmok/ to fight (each other)

ryriMeK /giilm ök/ to laugh ryüYiHMeK /giilüsmök/ to laugh together

Causative Voice
The causative voice indicates that the subject causes, makes or lets another person or
thing perform the action o f a sentence. In Turkmen, addition o f a causative voice suffix
to a verb stem makes an intransitive verb transitive.

Rejlexivellntransitive. ran-’mıaKJiap JOByHManpnap. /Ga:p-ca:naklar

yuwunmoya:rlar./Dishes don’t vvash themselves.
OJiapBm eiln s h h h . /Oloruıj öyü yannı./
Their house bumed.

CausativelTrarısitive. 3x;eM Mana ran-uanaKnapBi lOBBypfltr.

/Ejem marja ga:p-ca:naklan yuvvdurdı./
My mother made me vvash the dishes.
On etin smflLipfltı. /Ol öyü yanmrdı./
He bumed the house.

Tapa3, aTactmBi eKHpepe 6axana TanatıpMa*,aK SoiMpntiM. (N)

/GaraS, ata8ını yekirere balıana tapdırmajak bolya:rdım./
In a vvord, I vvas trying not to lei him find an excuse to torment his grandfather.

OHyn ca3H 6«p aflaMBi rynuypHn oTBip, 6wp anaMbi arnapıtın oTBip. (BH)
/Onurj 0a:5ı bir a:damı güllürüp otı:r, bir a:damı a:gladıp otı:r./
His music m akes one person laugh and another person cry.
 Lexicon 535

Turkmen indicates the causative voice by adding the suffix -flup/j(np- /-d ır-d u r/
dir-dür-/ to verb stems (stems ending in a vovvel and sometimes Jl /l/ or p /r/ take -t*
/-t-/).

ecMeK /ö9mök/ to grow ecnypMeK /ö90ünnök/ to raise

ÖHJiMeK /bilmek/ to know 6ıt;rflnpMeK /biliirmek/ to inform
HinneMeK /kslemek/ to work HiımeTMeK /i:sletmek/ to operate
nyııiMeK /düsmök/ to fail flyıuypMeK /diisiimıök/ to let fail, to drop

A number o f common verbs contam originally causative voice suffixes that are little
or non-productive in modem Türkmen. Such suffixes include -u p /u p - /-tr-ur/ir-ür-/,
-ap/ep- /-ar-or/er-ör-/, -nap/flep- /-dar-dor/der-dör-/, -H3/H3- /-ı8-u8/iS-ü5-/, -Ka3/Ke3-
/-ka8-ko8/ke8-köS-/ and -w t/h t- /-ıt-ut/it-iit-/.

srrMaK /yatmak/ to lie down srrtıpMaK /yatm nak/ to put to bed,

to la y d o w n
raöTM aK /gaytm ak/ to return raiiTapMaK /gaytarm ak/ to ca u se to retu m
HHMeK /i:nm ek/ to d esce n d m m epM eK /irnnerm ek/ to lo w e r
ropKM aK /gorkm ok/ to b e afraid ropKy3M aK /gorkuSm ok/ to frigh ten
repM eK /görm ök/ to se e repKe3M eK /görköSm ök/ to sh o w
a m a K /akm ak/ to flo w aKbrrMaK /akıtm ak/ to ca u se to flo w ,
to pou r

Compound Voice Sujfbces

W hen two or even three voice suffixes are combined in one verb stem, they are added
in the order: reflexive + cooperative or causative + passive. In such cases, the basic
voice o f the verb is determ ined by the last m arker added. The com bination
-bimgLip/nuınnp- /-ısdır/isdir-/ may indicate a cooperative or causative voice, but in
many verbs it also denotes continuous or repetitive action (see 536).

Causative-Passive: repflypmiMeK /gö rd iirü lm ö k /to cause to be seen

Causative-Cooperaıive. flymynflMpHinMeK /düsiinniirüsmök/ to explain
to each other
Cooperative-Causative. TaHimiflupMaK /tanısdırmak/ to introduce
Cooperative-Causative. KecrannHpMeK /keöisdirmek/ to cut (continuously)
536 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Descriptive Sujfixes
A num ber o f verbs are derived from other verbs vvith suffixes that describe the
frequency or intensity witb which the actions expressed by the verbs are performed.
Most o f these descriptive suffixes are little or no longer used.
The most active su£fix that forms verbs whose actions are performed continuously
or repeatedly is - b i m a b i p / n w n n p - /-ısdır-usdur/isdir-iisdür-/ (stems ending in a vowel
take - u iH b ip /m n H p - /-sdır-sdur/sdir-sdür-/) which is a compound o f the cooperative
(-b in ı/M iu - /-ıs/is-/) and the causative (-flb ip /flH p - /-dır/dir-/) suffixes.

6o3MaK /boSmok/ to eliminate 6o3yııifltıpMaK /boöusdurmok/

to cross out
KecMeK IksBmek/ to cut = KecıııunııpMeK /keöisdirmek/ to cut up

Suffixes that vveaken the normal process or effect o f an action also may indicate a
certain disdain for the action. These little or non-productive suffixes are based on
-«.bipa/j^Hpe- /-jıra-juro/jire-jürö-/ (or - c u p a / c ı ı p e - /-eıra-0uro/6ire-0ürö-/), and
include -biH ^upa/H H ^npe- /-m jıra-unjuro/injire-ünjürö/, -biM^bipa/ıiMaçupe-
/-ım jıra-um juro/im jire-üm jürö/ and -biMCLipa/MMCHpe- /-ım 0ıra-um 0uro/im 0ire-
timSürö/.

MpKHJiMeK /irkilmek/ to doze HpKHJDSHpeMeK /irkiljiremek/

to doze a little
HHflaHMaK /ya:nnanmak/ to linger smflaıtK,bipaMaK /yatnnanjıramak/
to hesitate
arnaMaK /a:glamak/ to cry arnaM*;bipaMaK /a:glamjıramak/
to whimper
rynMeK /gülmök/ to laugh r Y J i y MCMP e M e K /gülümOUrömök/ to grin

The compound suffixes -aHKbipjıa/eHKMpjıe- /-ar|kırla-or|kurlo/er|kirle-ör]kiirlö-/

(stems ending in a vowel take -HKbipjıa/HKHpjıe- /-rjkırla-gkurlo/ıjkirle-ıjkürlö-/) and
-Mapna/Mepjıe- /-m arla-m orlo/m erle-m örlö-/ express the strengthening of an action
and its approach to completion.

reMMeK /geçmek/ to pass, to cross rene^KiipneMeK /gecegkirlemek/

to almost cross
HTflan MtiKMaK /ya:tdan çıkmak/ snjfaH HMKanKBipnaMaK /ya:tdan
to forget cıkarjkırlamak/ to almost forget
6acMaK /ba0mak/ to step on GacMapnaMaK /baOmarlamak/ to torture
lOBMaK /yuvvmok/ to wash WBMapnaMaK /yuwmorlomok/
to smooth över
 Lexicon 537

A group o f suffixes containing the element - m i m - /-la/le-/ also create v:rbs that
show the repetitiveness o f an action. These suffıxes inelude -(a)jıa/(e)jıe- /-(a )la -
(o)lo/(e)le-(ö)lö-/, -rbiaa/rmıc- /-gıla-gulo/gile-gülö-/, -Kana/Kene- /-kala-kolo/kele-
kölö-/, -Mana/Mejıe- /-m ala-m olo/m ele-m ölö-/, -aKJia/e&ne- /-akla-oklo/ekk-öklö-/,
-JK,aKJia/»;eKJie- /-jakla-joklo/jekle-jöklö- and -*,a(iia)/(«,e)jıe- /-Ja(la)—
jo(lcı )/je(le)~
jö(lö)-/.

cMJEKMeK /Silkmek/ to shake cjünceneMeK/Silkelemek/ to shake,

to quiver
6acMaK /baSmak/ to step on GacrtraaMaK /baSgılamak/ to trample
OBMaK /ovvmok/ to make small OBKanaMaK /owkolomok/ to grind,
to crumble
re3MeK /geSmek/ to stroll re3MeneMeK /geSmelemek/ to walk
up and dovvn
MTMeK /itmek/ to push HTeKJieMeK /iteklemek/ to push and shove
ĞöKMeK /bokmek/ to jump GeK^eKneMeK /bökjöklömök/ to hop,
to skip
flepMeK /dö:rm ök/ to pick at flepv«;e(ne)MeK /dö:rje(le)mek/ to pick at,
to disturb
538 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Adjectives from Nouns

Formation of new adjectives from nouns is one o f the most productive derivational
processes in Türkmen. The most prevalent o f adjective-forming suffîxes are + jili/jih
/+h/li/ and +cb!3/cn3 /+6 i8/0İ5/ vvhich indicate the presence or absence o f the quality of
the nouns to vvhich they are attached. In addition to such suffixes described be!ow, the
adjective-form ing suffix +paK/paK /+ra:k/ra:k/ is used as a comparative suffix (see
147).

Attribute Suffvc
The attribute suffıx +Jibi/J1M /+ lı/li-lü / is added to nouns to form adjectives that
express the meaning 'having the quality of' the nouns to vvhich it is attached. Frequent
English equivalents include the suffixes '-y ' and '-ed'.

ryHeuı /günös/ sun ryn eııın H /günöstü/ su n n y

ö y n y T /bulut/ c lo u d ö y jıy r n b i /bulutlı/ clo u d y
6 a r r /bagt/ h ap p in ess 6 a r n ib i /bagtlı/ h app y
3exHH /5ehi:n/ talent 3 exw ın H /Sehi:nli/ talented
aKbin /akıl/ in te llig e n ce aKbinnbi /akılh/ sm art, in te llig e n t

This suffix often has the meaning lıaving' in the sense of 'possessing' the quality
of something, and may be equivalent to English 'vvith' or the adjectival suffix '-ed'.

yq ra im i x;aii /üc gatlı ja:y/ three-storied building

flepr o ra rn u KBapmpa /dö:rt otoglı kıvvartira/ four-room(ed) apartment
xoBnyjibi *;aiı /hovvlulı ja:y/ building with a courtyard
»larajıu asm /çargah aya:i/ vvoman with children

The suffix +jibi/jın /+lı/li/ also is used in an instrumental sense of 'by means of,
by, with', especially for expressing means of transportation.

aBTo6ycnbi /awtobu01ı/ by bus MaıubiHJibt /ması:nlı/ by car

ııoe3;ınM /poye5[8]li/ by train caMOJiemu /Oamoloth/ by plane

Another use of the attribute suffix is to denote nationality or place o f origin. When
added to place names, this suffix indicates an individual who is 'from such and such a
place' or 'has the quality of the place'.

On oüpaıuibi. /Ol eyranlı./ He/she is Iranian.

E h3 aıuraSarnunap. /Biz asgabatlılar./ We are Ashgabatians.
Onap flantbinap. /Olor da:glılar./ Tlıey arc mountain people.
 Lexicon 539

The suffix + jih/jih /+lı/Ii/ generally cannot be attaehed to a eountry name ending in
+MCTaH/HCTaH /+ıe0a:n/i00a:n/ (see 521) to express place o f origin. It may be attaehed
when the root of the eountry name does not occur independently; for example, the root
of TYPKMeHHCTan /Türkm önü00a:n/ is the independent word ty p k m c h /tiirkmön/,
but naKHCTauntı /paki00a:nlı/ exists because the root *pak o f IlaKHCTaH /Paki00a:n/
does not occur independently.
The sufix + Jitı/n n /+lı/li/ also is used to form proper names from nouns; for
example, the names Tamın /Tâ:eli/ (< T3H /tâ:£/ 'birthmark') and X an nu /H a:llı/ (<
xajı /ha:l/ 'mole') may be given to both females and males.
Adding the suffıx +Jlbl/JIH /+lı/li/ to a verb ending in the future indefmite participle
(-ap/ep /-ar/er/), or to this participle plus the association suffîx + jjuk /jiuk /+ lık/Iik/
(see 518), produces forms equivalent to English 'should do (something)'.

İlen e aflaMormı ÖHraHafluptiH flHÜHn, 6nraHa öojıyn SıtJiMeftsH öonapntı. (N)

/Yö:nö a:damoglı bi:ga:nadınn diyip, bi:ga:na bolup bilmeyâ:n bolorh./
But a man should not be able to say he’s a stranger and remain a stranger.

XeMMe khihmhhh rcüımuıeM, ycT-öam napbiH a cepeflHmnepıt xeM repeıme

a jıa p n b iK / ıu . (N)
/Hemme kisimig geynisem, ü0[0]-baslanna Oeredisleri hem göröllö alarlıklı./
Both the way everyone dresses and the way they take care o f their appearance
should set an example.

Privation Sujfix
The suffix +cbi3/cn3 /+0ı8-0u5/0i8-0ü8/ creates adjectives that express 'lacking' or 'the
want of' the quality of the nouns to which it is attaehed. Typical English equivalents
are the suffixes '-less' and 'un-'.

öynyr /bulut/ cloud 6ynyTCbi3 /bulutOuS/ clo u d le ss

cy B /0uw / water cyBcy3 /0u w0u8/ w aterless
m u /!:§/ work MincH3 /i:S0i8/ u n em p lo ye d
cec/0e0/sound ceccıi3 /0e00i8/ sile n t

This suffıx also expresses the idea o f 'not p o s se ssin g ' th e q u a lity o f a n ou n . In su ch
cases it is equivalent to English V ithout'.

ryüM /gü:c/ strength rYMqcY3 /gü:£0iiS/ without strength

HaMbtc /na:mı0/ h onor, sh am e HaMHCcbo /na:mı00ı8/ without honor,
vvithout shame
3hhh /Siya:n/ harm 3btsHCbi3 /8ıya:n0ı8/ without harm,
harmless
540 Tuıtanen Reference Grammar

Relation Suffix
The suffix +ku/kh /+ kı/ki-kü/ forms adjectives with the meaning 'which/that is' or
'related to' the quality o f the words to which it is attached. English equivalents include
the su ffk '- ’s'.

flyÜH /dü:n/ yesterday a yü h k h /dii:nkü/ yesterday’s

flaın /das/ outside flauiKM /daskı/ outer
mh /i£/ insides hhkh /içki/ inner
x33Mp /ha:8ir/ now x33HpKiı /hâ:8irki/ modem

The compound suffix +naKtı/H3KH /+da:kı/dâ:ki/, which is com posed o f the

locative case suffix +na/jje /+da/de/ and + kli/kh /+kı/ki/, creates phrases that mean 'X
that is in/on/at Y ' (see 133); for example, TYpKMeıiMCTaıiftaKbi 6 hjihm CMCTeMa
/T ürkm önüe6 a:n n a:k ı bilim Öi0tem a/ 'th e educational system (th at is) in
Türkmenistan'.

Other Sufpxes
Less produetive adjective-forming suffixes include + * ,a n /» ,e n /+Jaq—jorj/Jer)—jörj/,
which shows the character of or inclination towards the quality o f a noun; +naıc/jıeK
/+lak-lok/lek-lök/, which highlights the basic feature o f a noun; and +*n.ın/qyjı /+ cıl-
cul/cil-cül/, which refleets the character o f a noun.

raxap /gahar/ anger raxapx;an /gaharjai)/ angry

Hiıı /i:s/ work nıiL*,en fv.ssei)/ business-like
racuH /gaöuı/ wrinkle racbiımaK /gaBmlak/ wrinkled
3T /et/ meat TraeK /etlek/ fleshy
ap3yB /aröuvv/ wish ap3yBW .11/aröuwcul/ wishfiıl
y itr il /iinjü/ anxiety Yl{xX'a m /Unjücül/ anxious, agitated

The agent (+HbiAm /+cı/ci/), association (+nbiK/jiHK /+lık/lik/) and companion

(+nam /nem /+das/des/) suffıxes, which form nouns from nouns (see 518-519), also
may be used in an adjectival sense.

aöflbiMHU n.13 / ay d ım cı gı:8/ singing girl, songstress

k y m y u ih h y c c a /küm üseü u00o/ silver-working master, silversmith
a ra m n jK e p /ağaçlık yer/ forested place ('place of trees')
flo ıu ıy K M aTa /d o:n lu k m ata:/ robe material ('material for a robe')
r Y to n y K 6yraaM /gü:81ük b u gd o y/ autumn vvheat ('wheat o f Autumn time')
peHKHeuı MaTa /reıjkdes m ata:/ ÜYpeKfleuı enflaın /yürökdös yo:llos/
m ateria l o f o n e c o lo r like-minded spouse
 Lexicon 541

Persian Sujfuces
Along vvith numerous adjectives borrovved from Persian, many common Türkmen
vvords incorporate Persian adjective-forming suffixes. Only a fevv o f these suffües may
be productive among some Türkmen.

TypK /türk/ sim p leto n TypKaHa /türka:na/ g u llib le

H yp /nu:r/ lig h t H y p a m /nu:ra:na/ fin e -lo o k in g
T a p trx /ta:n:h/ h isto ry T a p u x t ı /ta:n:hı/ h isto rica l
m jih m /ılım / S cien ce b ijim h /ilm i/ s c ie n tific
flHH /di:n/ re lig io n flMHflap /di:nna:r/ relig io u s
6 hjihm /bilim / k novvledge GmiMMflap /bilim darr/ lea m ed
M tıxM aıı /m ı:hm a:n/ g u est MMXMaHnapa3 /mı:hma:npara6/
h o sp ita b le
BaTaH /vvatan/ homeland BaTaHnapa3 /vvatanparaS/ patriotic
M 3xpıı /mâhri/ sy m p ath y , k in d n ess M3xpMÖaH /m âhriba:n/ sym path etic
Heıue /nese/ n arcotic HeıneGeHT /nesebent/ drug-addicı

Persian Prefıxes
Türkmen also borrovved a fevv Persian adjective-forming prefixes that occur mosı: y vvith
Persian, but also vvith some some Türkmen vvords. These prefixes are 6 h+ /bi: t-/ 'un-,
-less, vvithout' (equivalent to Türkmen + cm 3 /ch 3 /+0ı8/0i8/), 6 eT + /bet+/ 'uıı-, bad'
and H3+ /na:+/ 'un-, not'.

xa6ap /habar/ Information 6 n x a 6 a p /bi:habar/ u n in foım ed

Tapan /tarap/side ö jrrap a n /bi:tarap/neutral
«Y3rYH /düSgiin/ order, discipline 6nflY3ryH /bi:dii8gün/ undisciplinc.d
rtuıtuc /gılık/ behavior SeTrtuıtiK /betgılık/ ill-m an n ered
6 a rr /bagt/ happiness 6 e T 6 a rr /betbagt/ u n happy, u n fo n u n a te
paxaT /ra:hat/ comfort HapaxaT /na:ra:hat/ u n com fortable
florpH /dogn/ right, true H Sflorptı /na:dogrı/ in correct, u n tıue
T a ım ıu /tanış/ acquaintance HSTaHLiıu /nâ:tanıs/ u n fam ilia r

The Türkmen suffixes +iimk/jihk /+lık/lik/ and -i-hujiuk/hhİIUK /cılık/cilik/ may

be added to vvords vvith these Persian prefixes to form abstract nouns.

Ö M caSup /bi:0abır/ im patien t ö ııca ötıp jiM K /bi:9abırlık/ im patien ce

ÖHrapan /bi:tarap/ neutral ÖHTaparuibiK /bi:taraplık/ n eutrality
HSTaKttK /nâ:ta:kı:k/ in accu rate HaTüKtiKJibiK /na:ta:kı:klık/ in accu ra cy
H sc a r /na:0ag/ ili, u n h ealth y Hscarnbuıtuc /nâ:0 agcıhk/ p oor health
6eTÖarr /betbagt/ un happy, 6eT6arTMMnwK /betbagt£ılık/ m isfortu ne
unfortunate
542 Turianen Referenee Grammar

Russian Adjectives
Turkmen has borrowed a number of adjectives from Russian. In assimilating these
vvords, Turkmen drops the Russian adjectival suffıxes +bnbiM/bnas/bHoe an d
+CKHJİ/cKan/cKoe, and treats the stems as adjectives, vvhile it replaces the Russian
adjectival suffıxes +HHnW/«ma»/lınoe and +«ıecKHİi/HecKa»/HecKoe vvith -k /-k/.

Russian Adjective Turkmen Assimilation

nıunicipal KOMMyHanbHbiü KOMMyHan /kommunal/

reactionary peaKUMOHHbiü peaıaiHOH /reak0ion/
democratic fleMOKpaTMtecKHÖ fleMOKpaTMK /demokratik/
ancıent aHTHUHbÖİ ühthk /antik/
 Lexicon 543

Adjectives from Verbs

The suffixes - a n / e K /-ak-ok/ek-ök/ (stems ending in a vowel take - k /-k / ) , - r a ı c / r e K
/-gak-gok/gek-gök/, -ru p /rtıp /-gır-gur/gir-gür/ and -w,an/}K,en /-jaq—jor)/Jer)— Jörj/ are
added to verb stems to create adjectives that emphasize the main feature o f an action, or
an inclination toward an action. The suffix -an/eK /-ak/ek/ also may be added to the
negative future indefinite paıticiple (-Ma3aK/MC3eK /-maöak-moSok/meSek-ınöSök/) to
form attributes; for example, H3Ma3aK ajjaM /yaSmaSak ardam/ 'a person who doesn’t
like to write'.

arcaM aK /agOamak/ to lim p arcaK /ag0ak/ lam e

TaüMaK /tarym ak/ to slip TaüraK / tarygak /slip p ery
an tıu iM aK /yap ışm ak/ to c lin g to sm u ıııraK /yap ısgak/ c lin g in g
ajiMaK /alm ak/ to tak e a n r tıp /algır/ c ra fty , cu n ning
rMTMeK /gitm ek/ to g o r a m ı p /gitgir/ q u ick -fo o te d
6aıuapM aK /basatm ak/ to b e ca p ab le 6amapJKan /basarjai]/ capab le
©ByHMeK /öw ü nm ök/ to be b o astfu l G B y u ^ e n /öwünjör)/ b oastful

Adding the suffıxes - m k / h k /-ık-uk/ik-iik/, -rtiH/rMH /-gın-gun/gin-giin/ and

-TUİrn /-gı/gi/ (stems ending in a vowel take - r /-g/) to verb stems creates adjectives
that express the result of actions.

a'iMasc /açmak/ to open a ııtiK /acık/ open

fleBMeK /d ö w m ök / to break fleııyK /döw ük/ broken
3pMeK /ermek/ to melt 3prw n /ergin/ m elted
ecMeK /ö0mök/ to grow ecryH /ö0gün/ q u ick -g ro w in g
raüııaMaK /gaynamak/ to boil raÖHar /gaynag/ b oiled
ıonyjiMaK /yuwu\mok/ to be washed lO B yn ru /y u w u lgı/ laundered

The verbal noun (-Ma/ıvıe /-m a-m o/m e-m öf) and the future indefinite participle
(-ap/cp /-ar/er/) suffıxes, as well as a participle-based (-aran/eren /-agan-ogon/egen-
ögönf) suffix, also may form adjectives from verbs.

GacMaK /ba0m ak/ to press d ow n 6acMa /ba9m a/ printed

opM eK /örrm ök/ to braid epMe /örrmö/ braided
aKMaK /akm ak/ to flo w aKap /akar/ flo w in g
ryJiMeK /gü lm ök/ to lauglı r y n e p /gülör/ la u g h in g , frien d ly
nenM eK /depmek/ to kick fle n e re ıı /depegen/ k ick in g
yMpMCK /iirrmök/ to bark y tip e re ıı /ürrögön/ barkin g
544 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

A few Turkmen adjectives are derived from verb stems with suffixes that are no
longer actively used in word formation. The following represents a small seleetion of
such words.

6yjıaHMaK /bulonmok/ to become muddy ö y n a m a K /buloncok/ muddy

ÜHJiMaHMaK /yılmanmak/ to become smooth ütınMamaK /yılmancak/ smooth
HJifltıpaMaK /yalhramak/ to sparkle HJiflfctpaByK /yalhrawuk/ sparkling
nıaütrpflaMaK /sayırdamak/ to squeak maütıpflaByK /sayırdawuk/ squeaky
mcraHMaK /gıOganmak/ to be greedy rucraHM /gı0ganc/ greedy
sÖMeHMeK /eymenmek/ to be afraid 3ÜMeım /eymenc/ fearful
 Lexicon 545

Adverbs from Nouns, Adjectives and Other Words

The most im portant group o f Türkmen suffîxes which create adverbs from nouns,
adjectives and other parts o f speech are case suffixes, vvhich belong to the category of
grammatical, rather than lexical suffixes. These suffixes express the locative '> g a/g e
/+da/de/), ablative (+Aan/fleH /+dan/den/) and dative (+biHa/nHe /+ ına-uno/iııe-ünö/
cases, with third person possessive) cases, as well as several cases vvhich nc longer
function as such in m odem Türkmen. These latter are the equative case (+qa/i)<: /+c a-
co/ce-cö/ 'like'), the instrumental case (+ m h / hh /+ı:n/i:n-ü:n/ 'by means o f ) and the
directive (+ ap b i/e p n /+an-orı/eri-örü/, + u k / h k /+ı:k/i:k/ 'toward, to') cases.
Adverbs formed vvith the locative case suffîx +aa/fje /+ d a-do /d e-dö / are fixed
words that describe the time or manner of action.

AKtiH /yakı:n/ near siKtınfla /yakı:nna/ recently

ronaft /goloy/ close ronaiifla /goloydo/ soon
axwp /a:hır/ final, end axwpfla /a-.hırda/ finally
a3 /a: 8/ little, k s h /ka:n/ much asfla-Kanfle /a:88a-ka:nne/ more or less

The most widespread use of a case suffix to form adverbs is with the ablati ı e case
suffix +flaH/fleH /+dan-don/den-dön/, which is added to nouns, adjectives, a d verbs
and numerals. Such adverbs express time or manner o f action.

Hp /i:r/ mom ing Mpfleıı /i:rden/ early

öypeK /yürök/ heart ÜYpeKfleH /yiirökdön/ sincerely
T33e /ta:8e/ new T33eflen /tâ:5eden/ anew
ftbira /yıgı/ thick, dense İibirbi-Mbirbiflan /yıgı-yjgıdan/ often
ra n /gi:rj/ wide, broad n ın a en /g iz d en / widely, broadly
o3an / 080I/ before 03an#aH /oSollon/ earlier, long sim:e
6 np /bir/ one öııpfleıı /birden/ suddenly

Adding the third person possessive form o f the dative case suffıx in + lih a/m ıe
/+ m a-uno/ine-ünö/ to nouns creates adverbs that refer to the time, seasons, gaal or
purpose o f action.

armaM /ağsam/ evening arm aM uıta /agsamına/ in the evening

TOMyc /tom uö/ Summer TOMcyHa /tomöuno/ in the Sunime r
KeHn/keyp/mood Keiimtue /keypine/ freely
3apn /Sarp/ blow 3ap6tiHa /Sarbuıa/ at one stroke
546 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

W hen the third person possessive form o f the dative case suffix (+tiHa/HHC
/+m a/ine/) is added to terms for the Cardinal direetions that end in the association
suffix (+ jiuk / jihk /+ lık/lik/), it creates adverbs indicating movement in these
direetions.

ryıiflorapjibirtrHa /giinnogorluguno/ eastwardly, to the east side

HJiepnHrHHe /ilerligine/ southwardly, to the south side
rYHÖaTapnitTMHa /günbatarlıgma/ westwardly, to the west side
ra{tpanttrb[Ha /gayralıgma/ northvvardly, to the north side

A dding the equative suffix + n a /q e /+ c a-co /ce -c ö / to nouns, adjectives and

pronouns forms adverbs that indicate equation or comparison ('like', 'in the manner
o f , 'according to'). When added to words ending in a vowel, the consonant h /n / is
inserted between the vovvel and this suffix. This suffix does not receive stress.

hhjimc /îrjlifl/ English w(HHCwe /îrjliöce/ in English ('as the English")

pyc /ru0/ Russian pycua /ru0£o/ in Russian ('as the Russians')
MeHHH /m enig/ mine Meımn'ie /menirjce/ according to me
ceH /0en/ you cenne /0ence/ like you
m y /su:/ this vıym ıa /sunco/ this much, so much

The equative suffıx +Ma/«ıe /+ca/ce/ also may be added to several participle forms to
form adverb m odifiers of manner. The suffix -apıa/epne /-a rc a -o rc o /e rc e -ö rc ö /
(negative: -Ma3Ma/Me3*ıe /-maSca-mo8co/meS£e-mö8cö/) is equivalent to English 'it’s
(not) w orth doing (som ething)' (anapna /alarca/ 'it’s worth buying', a n M a 3 ia
/almaSca/ 'it’s not worth buying'), and -flUKMa/fliiKMe /-dıkca-dukco/dikce-dükîö/ is
equiva!ent to English 'the more one does (something)' (repnyrHMMe ropecHM reJiMap
/gördügümcö göröOüm gelyâ:r/ 'the more I see you, the more I want to see you').
The instrum ental suffix + u h / hh /+ı:n/i:n-ii:n/ forms adverbs o f time, but also
adverbs that express the form, character o r strengthening o f an action. It is also used
with verbal nouns ending in -mui/hui /-ıs/is/ to indicate the passage to a destination.

so /ya:S/ Spring H3MH /ya:8ı:n/ in the Spring

rtım /gts/ Winter rbiuiM iı /gısı:n/ in the W inter
ryH /giin/ day ryHMH /günü:n/ in the day
3n /el/ hand 3JIHH /eli:n/ personally
rHflHHi /gidi?/ going rafluiHH /gidsi:n/ on the way (there)
öaptım /b an s/ going öapmbtH /barsı:n/ on the way
renm u /geliş/ coming renıuMH /gelsi:n/ on the way (here)
 Lexicon 547

The directive suffixes + a p u / e p n /+ arı-o n /e ri-ö rü / and + m k / h k /+ı:k/i:k/ (see

371), sometimes in combination, create adverbs that express the direction of an action.
The roots of such adverbs do not always occur independently.

hm /ic/ inside flaıu /das/ outside

ımepn /ıceri/ (to tlıe) inside, in flauıaptı /dasan/ (to the) outside, out
m e p u K /icerirk/ inside flauıapMK /dasan.-k/ outside

aupu /aıjn/ (to) there 6 ap n /ba:ri/ (to) here

auptiK /aıjn:k/ (to) there 5apH(K) /bâ:ri(:k)/ (to) here

HJiepH /ileri/ fonvard e'KapM /yokorı/ upward

HnepMK /ileri:k/ fonvard eKapHK /yokorı:k/ upward

raiipaK /gayra:k/ backward auıaK /asa:k/ downward

The suffix +Jiaü(LiH)/jıeH(nıı) /+lay(uı)-loy(un)/ley(in)-löy(iin)/ is added to nouns

and adjectives to create adverbs of degree and manner.

Barr /wagt/ time BarrnaiİMM /vvagtlayın/ tem porarily

ait /a:y/ month attmUbnt /a:ylayın / b y the m onth
KGiiMyıııiK /köpcülük/ majority KemıynHKneMnH /köpciilüklöyün/
in a m ass
6 ythh /bütti:n/ ali, whole 6yTYHneB(HH) /bütU:nlöy(ün)/
co m p le te iy
Aya /yüS/ face ÜYsncU /ytiSlöy/ su p e rficia lly

The suffix + /ıan /n a n /+la:p/lâ:p/ consists o f the verb formation suffix + na/jıe-
/+la/le-/ plus the gerund suffıx - u n / ıın /-ıp/ip/ and is added to nouns and numerals to
form adverbs of distribution and manner (see 161).

ryHnan /günlarp/ for days xenflensn /hepdela:p/ for weeks

caraTnan /0a:gatla:p/ for hours aünan /a:yla:p/ for montlıs
MyHnan /mürjlaıp/ by the thousands ntmflanan /pıya:dala:p/ on foot

Adding the suffix +Ma/Me /+m a-m o/m e-m ö/ (variant: +Ga/6e /+ba-bo/be-bö/) (see
448) to the first member of paired words forms adverbs of time and manner.

ryH öe-ryH /günbö-gün/ from d a y to d ay ftb iJ i6 a -ta n / y ılb a -yıl/ from y e a r to y e a r

eiİM e-eü /öym ö-öy/ h o u se to h o u se My36e-ftY3 /yüSbö-yiid/ fa ce to fa ce
T an6a Aapba/ abru p tly r y n ö e /güpbö/ su d d e n ly
548 Türkmen Reference Grammar

BORROWING

The majör sources o f borrowed vvords in Türkmen are the Persian, Arabic and Russian
languages. Persian and Arabic words entered Türkmen primarily through the Chagatay
literary language, while Russian words mostly consisted o f internarional terminology
and words connected vvith the Soviet system. In coming years, Turkish may become a
new source of borrovvings into Türkmen (for example, Türkmen gonaypıvıa 'ice cream'
< Turkish d o n d u rm a). =

Persian and Arabic

Contact betvveen speakers o f Persian and Türkmen is centuries old, and the impact of
Persian vocabulary on the Türkmen lexicon is profound. N ot only did Türkmen
direcdy borrow Persian terms for items and ideas of daily life, but it also incorporated
numerous Persian and Arabic vvords from the classical heritage o f Chagatay and Persian
literatüre in Central Asia.
Vocabulary from Persian and Arabic extends into every sphere of Türkmen society
and culture, as the follovving üst illustrates (P = Persian, A = Arabic).

fleBJieT /dövvlöt/ state (A) Benasrr /w ela:yat/ p ro vin ce (A)

xajnc /halk/ people (A) 3Tpan /etra:p/ d istrict (A)
MHJineT /millet/ nationality (A) ın a x e p /saher/ c it y (P)
aflaM /a:dam/ person, man (A) Barr /vvagt/ tim e (A)
asın /aya:l/ woman (A) caraT /0 a:gat/h ou r (A)
Mamrana /m asgaia/fam ily (P) x en fle /hepde/ w e e k (P)
flocT /do:0[0]/ friend (P) nacb in /pa0ıl/ season (A)
it;opa /jo:ro/ friend (P) a c tıp /a0ır/ ce n tu ry (A)
MMXMaıı /mı:hma:n/ guest (P) fleBYp /döw ür/ a g e , era (A)
6a3ap /ba:8ar/ market (P) nrncHp /pikir/ th ou g h t (A)
raccan /ga00a:p butcher (A) aKMn /akıl/ in te llig e n c e (A)
MyKflap /m ukda:r/ amount (A) y e y n /u0u:l/ m eth od (A)
6axa /baha/ price (P) Karti3 /ka:gı5/ paper (P)
rtiMMaT /gımmat/ expensive (A) smmönM /elipbiy/ alphabet (A)
ap3aH /ar8a:n/ cheap (P) xaT /hat/letter(A )
Haxap /nahar/ food (P) KHTan /kita:p/ b o o k (A)
MMBe /m i:we/ fruit (P) MeKflen /m ekdep/ sch o o l (A)
n arra /pagta/ cotton (P) Kop /ka:r/ p ro fe ssio n (P)
flepa /derya:/ river (P) cyH raT /0ungot/ art (A)
xona /howa:/ vveather (A) K au yH /k a :n u :n /la w (A)
acMan /a0man/ sky (P) binbiM /ılım / S cie n ce (A)
 Lexicon 549

The Persian and Arabic influence also is evident in certain grammatical areas,
particularly in quantifying pronouns, modai words and conjunctions.

xeMMe /hemme/ every (P) anöeTfle /elbetde/ certainly (A)

xep /her/ each (P) xqkmsh /hökma:n/ definitely (A )
xıw /hi:c/never, not (P) yMyMaH /umu:mon/generally (A)
3MMa /em ma:/ but (A) 6enKH /belki/ perhaps (P)
srep /eger/ if (P) mymkhh /mümkü:n/ possibly (A)
Be /w e/ and (A) acacan /e6a:0a:n/ basically (A)

So assimilated is the Persian and Arabic component vvithin the Turkmen lt;xicon
that occasionally one finds vvords such as ÖHBenantiK /bi:wepa:lık/ 'infidelity', vvhich
combine a Persian prefix (6 h + /b i:+ / 'vvithout'), an Arabic noun (B e n a /« e p a :/
'loyalty') and a Turkmen suffix (+jjmk /+lık/).
550 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Russian

The Russians introduced a large number o f new technologies, serviceş, sociopolitical

organizations and cultural understandings to the Turkmen and other Central Asian
peoples. M ost o f the vvords associated with this new way o f life vvere Russian in
origin, and the others impoıted through Russian from other European languages.

aBTOÖyc /awtobu0/ bus 6aHK /bank/ bank

ManiHH /ması:n/ car KOMMTeT /komitet/ committee
aflpec /adre0/ address cyfl /0ud/ court
KBapTMpa /kıwartira/ apartment peKJiaMa /reklama/ advertisement
TeneBH3op /telewiSor/ television poMaH /romon/ novel
Me6en /mebeî/ furniture raseT /gaget/ newspaper
xonoflHJitHHK /holodilnik/refrigerator 3CTpafla /eOtu'ada/ popular music
TapenKa /tarelka/ dishes khho /kino/ movie
KMno /kilo/ kilo(gram) KJÖKa /yubko/ skirt
KapTouiKa /kartosko/ potato nHBO /pivvo/ beer

In some cases, Russian and Turkmen synonyms co-exist for the sam e things. Use o f
one or the other term may depend on several variables, including an individual’s desire
to appear "Turkmen."

Russian Turkmen

airplane caM oneT /0am olot/ y>wp /ucor/

train noe3H /poyeS[S]/ OTJlbl /oth/
sto ry, flo o r 3Taac /etaz/ raT /gat/
veranda BepaHfla /weranda/ sü bü h /eywa:n/
citizen rpaJKflaıı /gırazdan/ pasrr /ra:yat/
co u n c il coB eT /0owet/ ren eıu gerjes/
provin ce oS ııacT b /oblas0[0]/ Eenasrr w ela:ya t/
d istrict p a îio ıı /rayon/ 3Tpan /etrarp/

U nlike the Persian-Arabic component, few Russian words have been entirely
assimilated into the Turkmen lexical and sound systems. Russian words borrowed
before the 1920s tend to be assimilated to Turkmen sound structure, and so are spelled
according to their pronunciation, while those borrovved since that time usually are
vvritten as they are in Russian even if they are partially or fully assimilated to Turkmen
sound structure by many speakers. Increasingly, printed media contain spellings o f a
few of these words in the form in which they are pronounced.
 Lericon 551

Russian Turkmen

telephone Teneıj>oH /telefon/ TenetJ)OH /telpun/

driver m ocjjep /sofor/ m ocjjep /sopur/
table cT o n /0tol/ ctoji /u00ol/
gla ss craKaH /ötakan/ cTaKaH /ı00akan/
bed KposaTb /krow at/ K poB aT(t) /kırow ot ~ k erew at/
class KJiacc /kla0[0]/ KJiac /kıla0/
car, m ach in e Marntma /masına/ MamtiH /ması:n/
n ew spaper ra3eTa /gaSeta/ ra3eT /gaSet/
R u ssia n p y c /ru9/ p y c , o p c ~ o p y c /oı0 ~ oru0/
R u ssia P occhh /R o0 0 iya/ P occhh, O p c ıe T /Or0yet/
p h ilo so p h y (pmıococpmı /filo0ofiya/ (pnnoccHpım, mmcene /pilöepe/
552 Türkmen Reference Grammar

THEMATIC GROUPS

The Türkmen lexicon embodies the Turkmens’ assimilation o f both the natural world
and human culture in general, and the reflection of their own culture in particular. To
illustrate the interplay between lexicon and culture, several thematic groups composed
of vocabulary for natural phenomena and cultural structures are presented here.

Verb Groups

Verbs may be grouped according to their sem antics into verbs vvhich designate
movement ('to go', 'to come'), sensation ('to feel', 'to see'), speech ('to say', 'to teli'),
various emotions ('to iove', 'to hate'), mental processes ('to understand', 'to think'),
and various other groups.

Verbs ofMotion
Verbs which describe actions and movements performed by the body include those
involving sensations and bodily functions (see 561), and the follovving motion verbs.

ruTM eK /gitm ek/ to le a v e for, 6apMaK /barm ak/ to go/get to,

to go to to come there
renMeK /gelmek/ to arrive, iiepeMeK /yörömök/ to proceed,
to come here to walk
ntiflflanaMaK /pıya:dalamak/ buıraMaK /ılgamak/ to run
to go on foot

Türkmen has three basic motion verbs whose meanings do not coincide exactly witlı
tlıose o f English motion verbs. The verb t h t m c k /gitmek/ refers to departure from one
place and movement to another place. It is used when someone is leaving to go to a
place, but does not imply arrival at that place. its equivalents in English are 'leaving
for' and 'going to'. The verb öapıvıaK /barmak/ refers to movement betvveen two points
to a certain destination. This verb implies arrival at that place. its English equivalents
are 'getting to', 'going to' and 'coming to'. The verb rejiMeK /gelm ek/ also refers to
movement betvveen two points, but toward a speaker, that is, one who is 'arriving' and
'coming to (here)'.
As an illustration, consider the case o f a husband and wife who live in Ashgabat.
The woman decides to visit her mother in Marı. If her husband asks her when she is
going (XanaH rHfliian? /Hacan gidya:rj?/ "When are you going?'), then he will use the
verb rMTMeK /gitmek/, as will she in her reply (MeH 3pTnp rııaiıaıı /M en erti:r
gidya:n/ 'I ’m going tom orrow '). They use rHTMeK /gitm ek/ because both are in
Ashgabat and talking about the wife leaving Ashgabat to go somevvhere else. If they
speak about the time o f her arrival in Marı, then both will use the verb 6 apM att
 Lexicon 553

/barmak/ (CeH caraT Hauefle öapım ? /öen 8a:gat na:cede barya:i)?/ "What time do you
get/anive there?', C araT enu^e 6apaH /8a:gat yedide barya:n/ 'I get/arrive there at 7
o’clock'). Thjs verb is used because both are in Ashgabat and speaking about going to
M an, rather than simply leaving Ashgabat.
I f the woman and her m other are speaking on the phone about the visit, then the
daughter vvill use the verb ÖapruaK /barmak/ to say that she is coming to Man (MeH
M ap a spTMp fia p « H /M en Mara: erti:r barya:n/ T m coming to M an tom orrow'),
vvhereas her mother vvill use the verb rejiMeK /gelmek/ to ask what time she is arriving
there (CeH caraT HaMe^e rejıüaH? /8en 8a:gat na:Cede gelyâri)?/ 'W hat time vvill you
get/arrive here?'). The daughter uses ÖapıvıaK /barmak/ because she refers to movement
to a destination where she is not, vvhile the mother uses rejiMeK /gelmek/ because she
refers to movement to where she is at the time o f speaking. The same set o f verbs vvill
be used in a telephone conversation betvveen husband and wife when he uses (IapMaK
/barmak/ to ask her what time she arrived, and she uses renMeK /gelmek/ in her reply.
If the husband telis his wife that, vvhile she is in M an, he is going to make a
business trip to Dashhovvuz, then both vvill use the verb th tm ck /gitm ek/ in referring
to this trip (M en J)awxoBy3a rHTMejiH /M en 5a:shovvu5o gitmeli/ 'I have to go to
Dashhovvuz', Xa*tan rHflBaH? /Hacan gidyâ:q?/ 'W hen are you going?'). They use this
verb because both are referring to movement to a destination vvhere neither is.
The use of these verbs o f motion for a similar set o f circumstances may be presented
in the follovving exchanges.

In Ashgabat

MeH Mapa sp rap m uiispm ı. CeH caraT HSMefle Bapapctm?

/Men Mara: erti:r gidyâ:rin./ /0en 8a:gat na:cede barya:ı6ır|?/
I’m going to M an tomorrovv. What time vvill you get there?

in Ashgabat In M an

MeH Mapa 3pTiıp 6apapbuı. Ceıı caraT nsnefle renüapcHH?

/Men Mara: erti:r barya:rm./ /8en 0a:gat nâ:cede gelyâ:r8ii]?,'
I’m coming to M an tomorrovv. What time vvill you get here?

In Ashgabat In Mart

Men flauntonysa 3p-rnp ruflfepMH. CeH caraT Hanefle öapapcbm?

/Men Da:showu5o erti:r gidyâ:rin./ /8en 8a:gat nâ:cede barya:ı8ır)?/
I'm going to Dashhovvuz tomorrovv. What time vvill you get there?

Ceıt xa>ıaıı raiİTbin reniispcıın? Men ap rap raU ran öapapbm.

/0en hacan gaytıp gelya:r8ir)?/ /M en erti:r gaytıp barya:nn./
When are you coming back? I’m coming back tomorrovv.
554 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Verbs o f Speech
The verb aııitıvıeK /diymek/ nearly alvvays is equivalent to English 'to say', including
in the form flitÜHn /diyip/ 'saying' (see 454). In some phrases, renJieıueK /geplem ek/
'to speak' also may mean 'to say' (for example, Tenjıe-na /Geple-da:/ 'WeII, say it').
M ost usages of aüTMaK /aytm ak/ correspond to English 'to teli' (for example,
AifTMapMMCi.ru? /A ytm arm ıöıi]?/ 'W o n ’t you teli m e?'). Usually, renjıeMeK
/geplem ek/ 'to speak' is used in phrases involving language (TypKMCHMe renneMeK
/türkmöncö geplemek/ 'to speak in Türkmen') and rypJieuiMeK /gürlösmök/ 'to speak
with, to talk w ith ' is used for tw o people speaking together ( r o n ın u 6 n /ıen
rYpneniMeK /gotjsı bilen gürlöSmök/ 'to speak with a neighbor'). The verb ce3JieMeK
/ööSlömök/ 'to speak' is not com monly used in Turkmen.

flHÜMeK / d iym ek/ to s a y a ft m a K /aytm ak/ to teli, to s a y

ren n eM eK /geplem ek/ to speak rypneuiMeK /gürlöîm ök/ to speak/talk w ith
ce3neMeK /0ö81ömök/ to sp ea k ryp n eın eK /gürlömök/ to speak/talk to
ryppYH 3TMeK /gürrü r) etm ek/ ryppYivıeuiMeK /gürrii rjlösmök/
to teli about to talk w ith

Verbs ofE m otion and Understandıng

Turkmen verbs that express common human preferences and emotions, as well as some
of the basic mental processes, include the following.

roBtı rep M eK /g o w ı görm ök/ to lik e xanaM aK /harlam ak/ to lik e

coÜM eK /0 öym ök/ to lo v e KyiiceM eK /kü:0öm ök/ to d esire
3p6eT repM eK /erbet gö rm ö k / to disiike tarpeH M eK /yigren m ek/ to h ate
übiJirbipMaK /yılgırm ak/ to sm ile ryn M eK /gü lm ök/ to la u g h
‘TtiTMaK /cıtm ak/ to fro w n arnaM aK /arglam ak/ to c r y
ıuaraaH M aK /şartlanm ak/ to be happy öereHMeK /beğenm ek/ to b e glad
flaptncM aK /darrıkm ak/ to w o rry rtm aHM aK /gırnanm ak/ to b e sad
HYiııynMeK /düsünm ök/ to understand ettTM eK /öytm ök/ to th in k
ai(MaK /arrjmak/ to com preh en d anm tıpM aK /argîırm ak/ to d istin gu ish
vaK 3TMeK /Bak etm ek/ to su p p o se lretî 3TMeK /cen etm ek/ to sp ecu late
 Lexicon 555

Time and Calendar

İn addition to its several ways o f telling time, Türkmen has two sets of designations
for the days of the week, but only one set each for the months and seasons o f the year.

Time o f the Day

Türkmen may teli time in a variety o f ways, but a common and simple way to ask and
teli tüne is the follovving.

C a r a T H a n e ? W h a t t i m e is it ? C ara T mkm. T w o o ’c l o c k .
/0 a :g a t n a :c e ? / /0 a :g a t ik i./

C a r a T H a le fle ? A t w h a t tim e ? C a r a T H K H fle. A t t w o o ’c l o c k .

/0 a :g a t n â :c e d e ? / /0 a :g a t ik id e ./

Türkmen count minutes as belonging to the next hour, rather than to the previous
hour. For example, the minutes between 8 and 9 o ’clock are regarded as belonging to
the 9th instead of to the 8th hour, so that the times 8:10 and 8:50 are said as follows.

fl0Ky3flaH o h MMHyT H iuneSap floıcyaflaH 3nmı MHHyT m ım eitep

/doku88on o:n minut i:sleyâ:r/ /dokuSSon elli minut i:sleyâ:r/
nine-from ten minute work-ing nine-from fıfty minute work-ing
it (=time) is working on 10 it (=time) is vvorking on 50
minutes of (hour) 9 = 8:10 minutes o f (hour) 9 = 8:50

Times past the half-hour m ay be said using the word KeM /kem / 'less' or the
privation suffix + cm3/cm3 /+0ıS/0i5/ '-less, without'.

oh MHHyn.ı KeM flOKy3 OH MHHyTCBB flOKy3

/o:n m in u tı k e m dokuS/ /o:n m inu töu S dokuS/
10 minute-its less 9 10 minute-less 9
(hou r) 9 le ss its 10 m in u tes = 8:50 (hour)9 w ith o u t 10 m in u tes = 8:50

In addition, times past the half-hour may be told using 6 ap /ba:r/ 'there is/are' or
ra iin u /ga:lh/ 'remained' in the following constructions.

flOKy3 öojiMara o h MHHyT 6ap fl0fcy3 6onM ara o h MHHyT ran n tt

/dokuS bolma:ga o:n minut ba:r/ /dokuS bolma:ga o:n minut ga:lh/
9 be-ing-to 10 minute there are 9 be-ing-to 10 minute remain-ed
there are 10 minutes to being 9 = 8:50 10 minutes stili to being 9 = 8:50
556 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Days o f the Week

The most common Turkmen expressions for asking and ansvvering the day (ryH /gün/)
of the week (x e n fle /lıepde/ < Persian) are the follovving:

Hly ry H xenfl3HHH x a ü c ı ı ryHH? What day of the vveek is today?

/Su:n hepdâmii) hayöı g ü ıiü ? /

IHy ryH xa{icbr ryH? What (day) is today?

/Su:n hayöı gün?/

Illy ryH flymenöe ryHH. Today is Monday.

/5u:n du:senbe günü/

Illy ryH xenflsmtn hkhjdkji ryHH. Today is Tuesday.

/Su:n hepdârnii] ikinji günü/

Hly ryH y«tyK*iH ryH. Today is Wednesday.

/Su:n ücünjü gün/

Turkmen has tvvo sets o f vvords to designate days o f the vveek. One set is borrovved
from Persian and six o f its days are based on the word uıen6e /senbe/ 'Saturday', vvith
the Persian numerals eK /yek/ 'one', ny /du:/ 'tw o', cm /6i:/ 'three', Hap /ca:r/ 'four'
and neH /pen/ 'five' prefixed to ıueH6e /senbe/ for 'Sunday' through 'Thursday'.
T riday' in this system is called by the Persian vvord aHHa /a:nna/.
A second and slightly more common set o f vveek days is based on the ordinal forms
o f Turkmen numerals, vvhich are placed before the vvord ryH /gün/ 'day' for Monday
('first day') through Saturday ('sixth day'), vvhile 6 a 3 a p ryHH /ba:Sar günü/ 'm arket
day' is used for 'Sunday'.

Persian Days Turkmen Days

Saturday meHÖe /senbe/

Sunday eıcuıeHÖe /yeksenbe/
Monday flymeHÖe /du:senbe/ 6 hphkx ;h ry H /bırinji gün/
Tuesday CHiueHöe /8i:senb e/ m k h h jk ,h r y H /ikinji gü n/
Wednesday MapmeHöe /ca:ı5enb e/ y ır y ıo ç H r y H /ücünjü gün/
Thursday nemueHÖe /pensenbe/ fle p fly H *;H ry H /dö:rdünjü gün/
Friday aHHa /a:nna/ 63 u i h h x ;h r y H /ba:sinji gün/
Saturday aırrtiH5K;bi ry H /altrnjı gün/
Sunday 6a3ap ryH H /ba:8ar günü/
 Lexicon 557

D ay o f the Month
The commoıj Turkmen expressions for asking and answering the day of the month (aK
/a:y/) are the following:

Illy ryH aih>m ımecH? W hat day of the month is today"

/Sum a:yıq nâ:ce0i?/
Illy ryH HaMecH? What (day o f the month) is toda y?
/Su:n nâ:ceöi?/
U ly ryH aübin oh 6npn. Today is the llth .
/Su:n a:yırj on bi:ri./
Illy ryH oh 6mpmhjk;h aBrycT. Today is August 11.
/Su:n on bi:rinji awgu0[0]./

Months
The Turkmen system o f month names is borrovved from Russian without any changes.

flHBapt /yanvvar/ Jamıary monb /iyul/ July

cjjenpank /pevvral/ February aBrycT /awgu0[0]/ August
MapT /mart/ Maıch ceHTs6pb /8entyabır/ Septembeı
anpent /aprel/ April OKTaöpt /oktyabır/ October
Maü /m ay/ May Hoa6pı> /noyabır/ November
HioHt /iyun/ June fleKaöpt /dekabır/ December

Seasons
The common formation for phrases involving seasons consists o f the noun (ra /ya: 5/
'Spring', TOMyc /tomuö/ 'Summ er', ry to /gü:8/ 'Autum n', rbiuı /gıs/ 'W in ter) plus a
possessive and a dative case suffîx. The seasons also may be stated vvith tlıe vvord
nacbin /pa0ıl/ 'season' (Arabic), or, much less commoniy, vvith the locative case
suffix.

m ııib iH a ( - r a n m a ) in Winter rbirn ııacntiHfla in VVintertime

/gısına ~ gısda/ /gı5 paölınna/
a3tm a (~ H3fla) in Spring H3 nacnbiHfla in Springtime
/ya:5ına ~ ya:5Sa/ /ya:8 pa01ınna/
TOMcyHa ( - TOMycfla) in Summer TOMyc nacnbiHfla in Summertime
/tomSuno - tomu00o/ /tomu0 paOhnna/
rytt3yH e (~ ryü^ ne) in Autumn ryÖ 3 nacnbiıma in Autumn
/gü:8ünö ~ gü:88ö/ /gü:8 paOünna/
558 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Year
Türkmen distinguishes the calendar year (tibijı /yıl/) from the year o f one’s age (»ra
/ya:s/). Because Türkmenistan follows the European calendar (MMiianu übiJiu /mila:dı
yılı/), dates are reckoned in terms o f the Christian era (a p a /era/). In this calendar, a
year may be counted 6 h3HH 3paMU3«aH öh /bi8ii) era:mı88an ör)/ 'before our era' =
'B .C .', or GH3HH 3paMU3flan c o h /biSirj era:mı88an 0or)/ 'after our era' = 'A.D'.
For special religious or scholarly purposes, a year may be reckoned according to the
Islamic calendar (xwiK,pn H un xaca6u /hijri yıl ha0a:bı/) whose era (A.H.) begins
with the flight (xm npn /hijri/) o f Muhammed from Mecca to Medina on 16 July 622.
For example, the phrase XH^pn K ajıennapunbin 1411-imkh Mbijibi /hijri kalennannıi)
1411-nji yılı/ 'the year 1411 of the Hijra calendar' is equivalent to AH 1411 (AD
1990).

Cardinal Directions

Türkmen has two distinct sets o f terms for the four directions. One set is based on the
position o f the sun in the sky, and consists of the compounds ryünorap /günnogor/
'(where) the sun rises' = 'east', ryHopTa /günorto/ '(where) the sun is in the m iddle' =
'south' and ryn öaT ap /günbatar/ '(w here) the sun sin k s' = 'w est'. This system
includes the compound neMHpraabiK /demirgaSık/ 'iron (tent) stake' = 'north', vvhich
is the old nomadic term for the North Star, the brightest light in the northem sky.
A second set of terms for the C ardinal directions is not commonly used in Türkmen.
It is based on the vertical position o f the sun, that is, on vvhether it is moving eKapu
/yokorı/ 'upw ard' = 'east' or auıaK /asa:k/ 'downward' = 'w est', or moving HJiepH
/ileri/ 'forw ard' = 'soutlı' or ralipa /g ayra/ 'backw ard' = 'n o rth ' to its original
position. O f these words, raiipa /gayra/ may stili be heard, but often in the narrower
meaning o f 'northeast'.
 Lexicon 559

Money, Weights and Measures

Turkmen terms for money, weights and measures reflect modern systems o f currency
and measurement, ineluding the metric system.

Money
In 1993, Turkmenistan’s government replaced the Russian ruble system with its own
currency system. The MaııaT /m anat/ 'm anat' (< Russian MOHeTa /m oneta/ 'money,
cash'), the same term that had been used as an equivalent for Russian py6ub /rubl’/, is
the basic unit o f the new currency which appears in banknotes and coins in a variety of
denom inations. The T eıtne /terjrje/ 'tenge' (< Russian n e ıib rn /den’gi/ 'm oney,
currency'), vvhich replaces the Russian vvord Kenyıt /köpük/ (< KoneÜKa /kopejka/
Tcopeck, coin'), desıgnates one o f the 100 units o f value comprising a ıvıanaT /manat/,
appears in coins in a variety of denominations.
The general Turkmen term for money is nyjı /pul/, vvhich is used in the expressions
Karbi3 nyn /ka:gıS pul/ 'paper m oney, banknote', maüu nyjı /sayı pul/ 'coin' and
OBHyK nyjı /ow nuk pul/ 'change'. Hard currency is referred to by the Russian term
BajııoTa /waluto/.
A few words surviving from an older system o f coinage are stili used by some
Turkmen in the new system (as English 'diıne'), ineluding anSacbl /apba:0ı/ '20 tenge
coin' and maftbt /sayı/ '5 tenge coin'.

Weights and Measures

The metric system is the official weight and measure system o f Türkmenistan. Terms
used in this system were adopted from Russian, but some divisions combine Turkmen
with the Russian terms (see table, 560)
Most goods are made available in pre-measured amounts and quantities, so that
Turkmen rarely use terms for smaller amounts. Occasionally, an individual may buy
hkh İİY3 rpaM ar /iki yü8 gıram ya:g/ '200 grams o f oil', or the like. Even in the
marketplace, Turkmen typically buy goods in half-liter or half-kilo or higher amounts.
Standard phrases o f measurement are associated with a fevv items. For example, a
Turkmen is just as likely to say Gam Kace tybh /bâ:s kâ:0e tüwü/ 'five cups o f rice' as
6«p khjio tybh /bir kilo tüvvü/ 'one kilo o f rice'. (For the measurement of tea, see
167.)
A fevv traditional terms for measures stili may be used by some Turkmen. The vvord
ryjıa»t /guloc/ 'arm length' refers to a way o f measuring eloth and other items vvith the
length of the arm, from the shoulder to the tips of the fingers. An interesting vestige of
the days of the caravan trade through the territory o f Türkmenistan is the teım mmöhji
/menSıl/, which refers to the period o f travel from early mom ing until around 2:00 in
the aftemoon, vvhen extreme heat forced the caravan to halt.
560 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Türkmen Weights and Measures

W et Goods
(gasoline, m ilk, vegetable oil, ete.)

tohhh (t ) /tornıo/ ton

Jurrp (ji) /litir/ üter
aptiM jn np (0,5 ji) /ya:nm litir/ h a lf a üter
MspıeK (0,25 ji) /cârıyek/ quarter üter
rpaM (r) /gıram/ gram

Dry Goods
(meat, flour, sugar, rice, tea, produce, ete.)

TOHHa (t) /tonno/ ton

KMJiorpaM ( k t ) /kilogıram / k ilo g ra m (km jio ( k ) /kilo/ k ilo ) = M yn rpaM
/m ü g gıram / 1,0 00 gram s
ıteHTHep (n) /öentner/ cen tner
ap tiM k h jio (0,5 k ) /ya:n m k ilo / h a lf a k ilo
rpaM (r) /gıram / gram

Distance

KHnoMeTp ( k m ) /kilom etir/ k ilo m ete r = M yn MeTp /mürj m etir/ 1,0 00

m eters
MeTp (m) /m etir/ meter = oh fleıpiMeTp /o:n deâim etir/ 10 decimeters,
Ky3 caHTHMeTp /yüS 6antim etir/100 centimeters, M yn MiuınHMeTp
/müq m ilimetir/ 1,000 millimeters
fleıjHMeTp (hm) /deOimetir/ d ec im e te r = oh caHTHMeTp /o:n öantim etir/
10 cen tim eters
caırrHM eTp (cm) /öantim etir/ cen tim eter = ü y3 MiııuiHMeTp /yü5
m illim etir/ 10 0 m illim ete rs
MHJiJBiMeTp ( m m ) /m illim etir/ m illim e te r
 Lexicon 561

Human Body
Türkmen possesses a full range of terms for aspects of the human anatomy, senses and
functions. Nearly ali o f these terms are Turkmen words, most of which are known in
other Turkic languages.

Anatomy
The majority o f Turkmen names for parts o f the body (TeH /ten/ or h h /i:n/ 'body',
röB pe /göw rö/ 'torso '; Persian ö e ^ e n /beden/ 'body' also is used in the ;<;nse of
'organism') are pure Turkmen words. Where synonyms exist for a body part, orıe o f the
synonyms has some special usage; for example, 6anı /bas/ 'head' is used anatcmıically
and Rejine /kelle/ 'head' (Persian) usually in a mental sense (Kejuıe miKup sjjföap
/kelle pikir edyâ:r/ 'the head thinks') and in certain expressions (Kejuıe arbipap /kelle
a:gırya:r/ 'the head aches'); and repjjeH /gerden/ 'shoulder' (Persian) is used in certain
phrases (re p o n u n ÖHJien HeKMeK /gerdenirj bilen çekm ek/ 'to carry 0:1 o n e’s
shoulder s'), whereas 3 rıııı /eğin/ 'shoulders' is an anatomical term for the sl.oulders
and shoulder blades. Turkmen anatomical teıms are presented in the table (see 562).

Senses and Bodily Functions

Turkmen verbs for the various actions of the senses and perception include rapMeK
/götm ök/ 'to see', tıc aniMaK /ı:0 alm ak/ 'to sm ell', dnıMTMCK /esitm ek/ 'to hear',
AaTMaK /da:tm ak/ 'to taste' and aiiJieıvıeK /ellem ek/ 'to touch'. In addition, the
follovving phrases express the functions of the sensory organs: öypyH, a ru 3 n en ajıap
/burun, agı5 dem alyarr/ 'the nose and mouth breathe', h m ui flH m /ıe ita p /di:s di:.;;leya:r/
'the teeth bite', jjhji r e n j ı e f i s p /dil gepleyâ:r/ 'the tongue speaks' and flepH a y iisp
/deri duyya:r/ 'the skin feels'.
Turkmen verbs that express the daily functions o f an individual incinde the
following.

osHMaK /o yo n m o k / to a w a k e n yKJiaMaK /u:klom ok/ to sle e p

TypM aK /turm ok/ to g e t u p (stand up) «TMaK /yatm ak/ to g o to bed (lie d ov.ii)
MÜMeK /iym ek/ to eat »ByHM ajc /yu w un m ok/ to w ash
MHMeK /içmek/ to drink cyBa flYmMeK /6uwo düsmök/ to take a bath

Turkmen may use the polite expression a«K enyua rMTMeK /ayak yo:luno gitmek/
'to go to the bathroom' (literally: 'to go along the foot path'; compare Englislı 'to go
to the povvder room'), o r the more direct phrase stSaıta rMTMeK /ya:bana gitrnek/ 'to
go to the bathroom ' (literally: 'to go to the field'). The common verbs for bodily
functions are the following.

HÖaH 3TMeK /ya:ban etm ek/ to d efe c a te CMUMaK /0ıcm ak/ to shit
6yınyK M aK /bu :su km ok/ to urin ate ch üm ck /0 iym ek/ to piss
562 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Türkmen Anatomy

Gam /bas/ head rapMH /garın/ stom ach (outer)

My3 /yüS/ fa c e r e ö e K /gö:b ök/ n av e l
M annaö /m aglay/ forehead reT /göt/ butt
Meıcre /cekge/ tem ple ro n /gol/ arm (s)
re3 /gö5/ eye(s) TrıpceK /tiı0ek/ e lb o w (s)
ra6aıc /ga:bak/ ey e lid 6wneK /bilek/ w rist
KMpnHK /kirpik/ eyeiash (es) 3Ji /el/ hand(s)
ram /ga:s/ e y e b ro w (s) ası /a:ya/ p alm (s)
6 yp yıc /burun/ n o se GapMaK /barmak/ fmger(s)
an.13 /agıS/ m outh flbipHaK /dımak/ nail(s)
flOflaK /do:dok/ lip(s) asiK /ayak/ leg(s), foot (feet)
;jHn /dil/ to n gu e 6yT /bu:t/ thigh(s)
Anın /di:s/ tooth (teeth) flti3 /dı:8/ knee(s)
aıtaK /yarjak/ ch eek(s) 6ajiflbip /ballır/ shin, c a lf
3H /a:j]/ lo w e r ja w TonyK /topuk/ ankle(s)
3HeK /eıjek/ chin eıcaçe /ökjö/ h eel(s)
ry n a K /gulok/ ear(s) itaöaH /da:ban/ sole(s)
can /0 ac/hair (head) flepH /deri/ skin
caıcran /0akgal/ beard cyıiK /9üi]k/ bon e(s)
M ypT /murt/ m o u stach e ran M pra /gapırga/ rib
6 o w h /boyun/ n e c k cmump /0ii)ir/ sinevv
e n c e /yei]9e/ n ape ( o f n eck) raH /ga:n/ blood
6 o ra 3 /bogoS/ throat, laryn x 6eÜHM /beyni/ brain
GoKypnaK /bokurdok/ throat iiypeK /yürök/ heart
3 v m /eğin/ shoulder(s) efİKen /öykön/ lung(s)
arb ip H ii /y ağ ım ı/ b ack 6arı>ıp /bağır/ liver
r e s y e /göw ii0/ breast GeBpeK /bövrök/ kidney(s)
fle ıu /dö:s/ eh est MM /ic/ stom ach (irnıer)
6 u n /bi:l/ w a ist MMera /icegi/ intestine(s)
 Lexicon 563

Families
Since at least the Middle Ages, Türkmen society has been a patrilineal and exogamous
society, by which is m eant that descent and inheritance is reckoned on the male line
(patrilineage), and that m am age is arranged outside one’s kin-group (exogamy).

Kinship
Türkmen has two sets o f words for 'grandm other' and 'grandfather', depending on
whether relationship is identified patemally or matemally.

Father's Side M other’s Side

3ne /ene/ grandmother MaMa /ma:ma/

aTa /ata/ grandfather 6a6a /ba:ba/

Türkmen has one set of words for 'mother' and 'father' because this relationship is
inherited on an individual basis: 3 * ,e /eje/ 'm other' and Kana /ka:ka/ 'father'. It is
interesting to note, however, that the expression for 'parents' is 3 H e - a T a /ene-ata/, a
composite of s n e /ene/ 'grandm other' and a T a /ata/ 'grandfather' on the fatlıer's side,
instead o f a combination o f 3 jrç e /eje/ 'm other' and K a ıca /ka:ka/ 'father'. Tlıere is a
historical basis fo r this usage, since the earlier vvords for 'm other' and 'father' in
Türkmen and other Turkic languages were 3ffe /ene/ and a T a /ata/. This set o f vvords
vvas removed one generation when the Türkmen adopted the new terms 3jrçe /eje/ and
K a n a /ka:ka/.
The parents’ child (wara /ca:gaf) or grandchild (a r T U K /agtık/) may be a daughter
(rhi3 /gı:8/) or son (oryjı /oğul/), granddaughter (ru3 a r T t iK /gı:8 agtık/) or grandson
(oryjı arTM K ). An offspring calls his o r her father’s mother s n e /ene/ and father’s father
a T a /ata/, vvhile his or her mother’s mother is M aM a /m a:m a/ and mother’s father is
6 a 6 a /ba:ba/. An offspring addresses his or her father’s brother by name plus the vvord
K a n a /katka/ and father’s sister by name plus s jr ç e /eje/, vvhile his or her m other's
brother is flaHbi /da:yı/ and mother’s sister is flaiiaa /dayBa/. An offspring calls his or
her older brother a r a /a:ga/ or 3p K eK floran /erkek dogon/ and older sister rti3 floraH
/gı:8 dogon/ or, if she is married, a n jı f l o r a n /aya:l dogon/. An offspring’s younger
brother is hiih /ini/ or w,nrn /jigi/ and younger sister is y» /uyo/ or j^ h h i /Jigi/.

Marriage
Türkmen uses distinct phrases for married men and vvomen: oÜJieııeH /öylönön/
'm arried (m an)' (< o fijıe ıiM C K /öylönm ök/ 'to m ake a hom e for oneself') and
fly p M y u ıa MMKaıı /durm uso çıkan/ 'm arried (w om an)' (< flypMynıa MblKMaK
564 Turkmen Reference Grammar

/durmuso çıkm ak/ 'to go oııt into life'). This reflects the pattem o f the traditional
patrilineal society o f the Turkmen in which newly married women go to live with the
husband’s family, where she observes a careful protocol o f reference and address with
her new relations. O f course, some o f these pattems and terms differ from region to
region.
In her new family, a woman may refer to her 'parents' as rattbiH aTaM /ga:yın atam/
'm y father-in-law' and rafttiH 3Hgm /ga:ym enem/ 'my mother-in-law', but to address
them directly she uses the name of their youngest son plus the terms Kaıca /ka:ka/ and
3*,e /eje/. Thus, if the youngest son is named BaiipaM /Bayram/, she calls her father-
in-law BaiipaM KaKacbi /Bayram ka:ka0ı/ 'B ayram ’s father' and her mother-in-law
Eaiipaın 3JK,ecw /Bayram ejeöi/ 'Bayram’s mother'. In the case that her husband has no
younger brother, she addresses her in-laws using the name o f one o f their grandsons;
for example, A M autın aT acu /Ama:nır) ataOı/ 'A m an’s grandfather' and ÂMaHurç
3Hecw /Ama:nıi] eneöi/ 'A m an’s grandm other', or simply as a T a c u /ata0 ı/ Tıis
grandfather' and 3H£CH /ene0i/ 'his grandmother'. Both "parents" cali her reJiHH /gelin/
'young woman, bride'.
If her husband has an older brother, the wife addresses him as rattbiH a ra /ga:ym
a:ga/ 'older brother-in-law', his younger brother as ü y b y p ^ h /yüvvurjü/ '(younger)
brother-in-law' (literally: 'run-aroundO, his older sister as raftbiH SKe^H /ga:yın/ 'little
mother-in-law' and his younger sister as 6ajiAU3 /ba:llı5/ 'younger sister-in-law'. The
older brother and sister cali her by name and refer to her as rejiHUMH3 'our bride'. The
younger brother and sister cali her reJinejK,e /gelneje/ 'little woman, little bride'. Even
the sons of her husband’s older brother cali her rejıne3K,e /gelneje/, while she calls them
İİYbY P*h /yüwiirjii/. Moreover, if the wife o f her husband’s older brother is older than
she, then she addresses her by her son’s name (for example, TypSaH 33K,ecn /Gurba:n
ejeöiD', othervvise, the two address each other as 3J1TH /elti/. K the wives of her
husband’s other brothers are older, then they cali her 33rçeru3 /ejegı:5/ 'girl-m other'
(literally: mother-daughter').
 Lexicon 565

Greetings, Farewells and Best Wishes

The Turkmen people have a great variety o f formulaic phrases for greetings and vvell-
wishes at their disposal. One and the same phrase may be used in contexn where
English-speakers wou!d use different phrases, and vice-versa. When Turkmen gıeetings
are translated literally, they sound awkward or old-fashioned in English. In mo st cases,
an appropriate equivalent may be found, although it may be applicable only to .specific
contexts. As illustrations, one may hear the follovving congratulations at weddings.

TejınHH a a n .1 flYmYMJIMCH Soncyıı. ra3birtmfla rappacuH.

/Gelnii) ayağı düsümlüSü bolöun./ /GaSıgınna garraöın./
May the bride’s feet be suitable. May (the bride) get old at her «take.
= May the bride bring good luck = May she and her mate grow
to the home. old together.

A common Turkmen greeting is A pM anepıın /A:rma:werii)/ 'D on’t get tired', to

vvhich the appropriate response is B ap 6 o ji /Ba:r bol/ 'B e present'. W hat appear to be
apt equivalents to these phrases are 'D on’t vvork too hard' and 'D on’t vvorry, I won’t',
vvhich, in English, nearly alvvays are said in farevvell!

Greetings and Farevvells

Generally, Turkmen greet each other at ali times of the day according to a traditionai
protocol that govems usage betvveen men and vvomen, betvveen young and old, and in
form al and informal contexts. M any Turkmen phrases for greetings belonj; to the
Islamic heritage. Younger people and people vvho knovv one another vvell often use the
informal greeting CaJiaM /0ala:m / 'H i' or 'Hello', but there is an elaborate protocol for
the use o f its longer forms 3ccajıaBMajıeÜKHM /E00alawma:leykim/ 'Peace be upon
you' and BajıefiKMtvraccajıaM /W a:leykime00ala:m/ TJpon you be peace', anıl other
expressions, vvhich every member and student of Turkmen culture must leam.
Conventions based on age, gender and familiarity determine the forms Türkmen use
to greet one another. The factor o f age govems greetings betvveen men to the degree
that, in nearly every situation, tlıe younger man must greet the older man first, or he
vvill be considered ill-bred.

Younger man: CaJiaBManeÜKMM. /0alwma:lyekim./

Older man: BaneÜKHM. /Wa:leykim./

Younger man: SccanaBManeÜKHM. /E00alawma:leykim./

Older man: BajıeÜKHMeccajıaM. /Wa:leykime60ala:m./
566 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Relative age also determines forms when women greet one another, vvith tlıe
younger woman being expected to initiate the greeting. This protocol is so important
that two vvomen (but also men) may have to discuss each other’s ages in order to
determine their roles. In such exchanges, the expressions CajıaMSJiHK /0aIa:ma:lik/,
vvhich is used exclusively by vvomen, and rypryHMbicbin? /Gurgunmuöui]?/ ('Are you
lıealthy?' = 'How are you?') or the variant AMaıiMUctıu? /A ma:nmı0ıq?/ ('Are you
well?') are employed.

Y o u n g e r vvom an: C an aM sm iK . /0ala:m a:lik./

Older woman: rypryHMbicbin? (~ AMaıiMbicbiH?)
/GurgunmuBurj?/ (~ /Ama:nmı0ıi]?/)

Gender is the crucial factor in most greetings betvveen men and women, although
age and familiarity also may be relevant. W hen a man o f any age greets an older
vvoman, he accom panies his greeting vvith an extension o f his right arm, palm
dovvnvvard, so that the vvoman may lightly grasp his sleeve on his lovver arm (or upper
arm if he is wearing a short-sleeved shirt) with both o f her hands as she returns the
greeting. In many cases vvhen an older man and a younger woman encounter one
another, the vvoman is expected to greet the man first, but this usually is not followed
by the sleeve-touching ritual. Fevver and fewer younger Türkmen women, especially in
the cities, observe this protocol today.

O ld e r m an: CajıaBManeftKHM. /0 alw m a:lyekim ./

Older vvoman: rypryHMbicbin? /Gurgunmu0uq?/

Younger man: 3ccanaBManeiÎKHM. /E09alawma:leykim./

Younger/older vvoman: rypryHMbicbin? (~ AMaHMbicbin?)
/GurgunmuOur)?/ (~ /Ama:nmı0ır)?/)

Younger vvoman: CarıaManmc. /0ala:ma:lik/

Older man: rypryHMbicbin? /GurgunmuOui)?/

Various forms o f address based on the factor of age may be used in stores, on the
Street and in other daily situations, by people who are not acquainted. An older male
may be addressed as a ra /a:ga/ 'older brother', JMiyJibi /ya:suh/ 'elder', flaiibi /da:yı/
'uncle', aTa /ata/ 'grandfather (father’s side)', or 6a6a /ba:ba/ 'grandfather (m other’s
side)'; an older fem ale as naÜ3a /daySa/ 'aunt', re jın e * ,c /gelneje/ 'auntie', 3He /ene/
'grandm other (father’s side)', or Maıvıa /m a:m a/ 'grandm other (m other’s side)'; a
younger m ale as hhhm /ini:m / or JKHrHM /jigi:m / 'm y younger brother'; and a
younger fem ale as a rbi3 /a gı:S/ 'hey, girl', JKurıiM /jigi:m / 'my younger sister' or
y«M /uya:m / 'm y sister'. Males o f approximately the sam e age may address one
another as gocTyM /do:00um / 'my friend', ra p g a n ı /gardas/ 'brother', or e n n a m
 Lexicon 567

/yo:llos/ 'mate, comrade', and females of the same age as JnopaM /jo:ra:m/ 'm y firiend'
or y«M /uya:m / 'my sister'.
W hen hosts greet guests, they may use the Turkmen expressions Xom ro p ay K /Hos
gördük/ TVe see you w ell' (= 'Good to see you') and Xom rejiflnmi3 /Hos gellirjiS/ or
Xora renMncHH /Hos gelipeiıj/ 'You cam e w ell' (= 'Glad you cam e'). A t such
gatherings or in the presence o f older people, husband and wife may address one
another as K a K a c b l /ka:ka0ı/ Tıis/her father' and 3 iK ,e c n /eje0i/ 'her/his m other', with
reference to the children o f the couple.
The prevalent phrase for saying goodbye is C a r öojıyu /0ag bolui]/ 'Be healthy' (=
'G oodbye') or its less formal variant C a r 6on /0ag bol/ 'Sö long'. Similarly, X om
/H os/ 'G ood' is a quick 'Bye', and Xom ra n tın /Hos ga:lıi]/ 'Stay well' is 'Take care'.
Lı taking farevvell, Turkmen also use the compound C ar-aM an (6onyn) /0ag-am a:n
(bolurj)/ '(Be) healthy' (= T ak e care o f yourself'), or the following expressions.

E u y n ti3 aK 6oucyH . C a n ıtiK fla re p m e ıu ın .

/Yo:lur)u8 a:k bol0un./ /Oaglıkda görsölü:ıj./
May your road be vvhite. May vve see each other in health.
= Have a good trip. = Take care o f yourself.

Turkmen lacks phrases for 'Good mom ing', 'Good day', 'Good night', and so forth.
U nder the influence of Russian culture, a few nevvly formed expressions or those
translated from Russian appear among the intelligentsia.

3pTnpM nn3 x a ü t ıp n t ı ö o n c y n . Car-aM aH a n ı n T yp y n .

/Erti:rir)i8 hayırlı bolOun./ /0ag-ama:n yatıp tururj./
May your moming be good. Go to bed and wake up in health.
= Good moming. = Good night.

Best Wishes and Other Phrases

Turkmen use a host of formulas for conveying congratulations and well-wishes in
family and social situations.

Afltma se 6oJicyH. r y ra tı öoncyn.

/A:dına eye bol0un./ /Gutlı bol0un./
May s/he be master of her/his name. May .it be blessed.
= May he have a long and happy life. = Looks good on you. (~ Good luck!)
[birth o f daughter or son] [said to compliment nevv clothing]

A o r n a n ryH yn l y n ı t ı 6oncyH . T s 3 e fe m t ın t r a ı y r m ı 6oncyH .

/Doglon günüi] gutlı bol0un./ /Ta:8e y ılııjıS gutlı bol0un./
May your day of birth be blessed. May your nevv year be blessed.
= Happy birthday. = Happy Nevv Year.
568 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

The most common phrase for expressing gratitude is C a r 6oJiyn /8ag bolurj/ 'Be
healthy' (= 'Thank you') or its short form C a r 6 oji /0ag bol/ (= 'Thanks'), along with
K an c a r 6on /K öp âag bol/ 'B e a lot healthy' (= 'M any thanks'). Less frequent
phrases inelude (MeH cn3e) MinıueTfjap /(Men 0i5e) minnetda:r/ '(I’m) grateful (to
you)' (= 'I appreciate it'), Xyflaa uiYKyp /H uda:ya şükür/ 'Thanks be to G od' (=
"Thank G od') and Tarçpbi suiKacuH /Tarjn yalkaOın/ 'M ay God be merciful (to you)'
(= 'Thank you very much'), to which the appropriate response is Esme a m a c u n /Bile
yalka0m/ 'M ay He be merciful (to us) together' (= 'D on’t mention it'). Turkmen does
not have distinet vvords for 'please' and so on, but instead expresses politeness in
endings added to verbs (see Mood).
The vvord n e c ıı6 e /ne0i:be/ 'fa te ' or its variant ııe c u n /ne0i:p/ are used in
expressions conneeted with plans or purehases. If invited somewhere, one may say
Hecu63M GoJica, renepHH /Ne0i:bâ:m bol0o, gelerin/ 'If if is my fate, I ’ll com e' (or
the equivalent MuıaJina /İ:salla/ İ f God wills'). The expression Hecıın 3Tchh /Ne0i:p
e00in/ 'M ay (God) make (it your) fate' may be said to someone who has purehased
some new item (elothing, rug, ete.) to approximate the wish 'I hope it lasts a lifetime'.
O f the many other Turkmen fonnulaic expressions, the follovving may be heard with
some frequency.

Bauı YCTYiıe. XeBec öıuıen.

/Bas ü00ünö./ /Höwö0 bilen./
Upon the head. With pleasure.
= For sure. (~ Sure thing.) = Gladly.

flerM ecm ı. BepeKeıma.

/Degme8in./ /Berekella:./
Let (its eye) not reach. God bless.
= Knock on wood. = Good job.
['eye' o f an evil spiritj

The vvord TYBeJieMe /tüwölömö/ literally means 'an act o f spitting' (< TY<jJJieMeK
/tüflöm ök/ 'to spit') and is accompanied by a pretense o f spitting several times. It is
used to protect from the evil eye when giving someone a compliment ('Bless you!'). In
the same situation, a Turkmen may say Xaıibi, TyÜKYp! /Hanı, tü:kür!/ 'W ell, spit!'
(< TyiİKYpMCK /türkürmök/ 'to spit'), but without the pretense o f spitting.
 PARADIGMS

The follovving tables present paradigms for noun, pronoun and verb suffixe: On the
assumption that such paradigms w ill be consulted only by those users interssted in
Standard Türkmen in Cyrillic script, examples are not transcribed. The exampl:s which
accompany the tense/aspect/mood suffixes illustrate front-back and unrounded rounded
vow el harm ony, lengthening o f stem -final vow els, and voicing o f stem -final
consonants between vowels.
570 Türkmen Reference Grammar

NOUN PARADİGMS

Possessive Şuffixes
After Consonants
P erso n S in g u lar P lural
1 +bIM, +HM, +yM, +YM +MMH3, +HMH3, +yMfc!3, +YMM3
2 +blH, +HH, +yn, +YH +HHH3, +HHH3, +yHU3, +YHH3
3 + u , +H (onapu«...) + ıı, + h

After Vowels After the Vowe! e

P erso n S in g u lar P lural P erson S ingular P lural

1 +M +MM3, +MH3 1 +3M +3MM3
2 +H +HH3, +HH3 2 +3H +3HH3
3 +ctı, +cn (onapbiH—) + cu , + ch 3 +ecn (onapun...) +ecn

After Consonants
B ack U nrounded Vowels Back Rounded Vowels

ranaM pencil flocrr friend

nuıaMHM ranaMtiMtıs flocryM fl0CTyMW3
ra/ıaMMM ranaMMHMS flocTyn flocryHbi3
rajıaMH ojıapbirç ranaMiı flocru o n ap u n flocru

Front Unrounded Vowels Front R ounded Vowels

flHUI tooth ro3 eye

TB3YM rB3yMM3
RMUIHK resy n re3ynn3
anım ı o n ap u n hhihh re3H onapbiH re3H

After Vowels
B ack U nrounded Vowe!s Front Unrounded Vowels

ya older sister Keqe Street

yHM y»Mbl3 KaaaM KBM3MH3
yan yanbi3 KBVOH KBH3HH3
yacu onapbiH yacbi KBMecM o n a p u n KeMecH
r a n tı door neKrH ball
ranbiM rantiMM3 neKrıiM nöKrHMM3
ran u H ra n tm tıa nBKrMH neKrnHM3
ranucM o n a p u n ra n u c u neKrycH onapbiH neKrycH
 Paradigms 571

Case Suffixes

Genitive Case Suffix

+mh/hH A fter Consonants +hmh/hhh A fter Vowels
MyrajınuM MyrannuMbin KaKa KaKaHbTH
teacher the teacher’s father . the father’s
MarasHH Mara3HHHH Ksce K3C3HMH
store the store’s teabowl the teabowl’s
TOÖ TOIOH r o n ıru ronıryHMH
party the party’s verse the verse's
eö efiyrç neıcru nsKryHHK
home the home’s ball the ball’s
aa asiHtiH
palm the palm’s
KSMe K0M3HHH
Street the street’s
pafliıo paflHOHMH
radio the radio’s
»yite
camel the camel’s

Accusative Case Suffıx

+ u /n A fter Consonants + hu / hh A fter Vovvels

MyrajınbiMbi MarasHHH KaKaHM K3C3HH

the teacher the store the father the teabowi
TOİtbl eiİH rouıryHbi neKryHH
the party the home the verse the ball
amiti K043HM
the palm the Street
paflHOHbl flyîisHH
the radio the camel
572 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Case Suffixes

Dative Case Suffix

+a/e A fter Consonants + a/s A fter Vowels

MyrajınuMa Mara3HHe KaKa K3CQ

to the teacher to the store to the father to the teabowl
TOH ee rouıra neıcra
to the party to the home to the verse to the ball
aa K043

+Ha/He A fter Possessive +bi/n to the palm to the Street

paflvıo flyiio
KasaHbi K3C3HH to the radio to the camel
the father the teabowl
aaHU K9M3HM
the palm the Street
rouıryHbi nesr^HH
the verse the ball
paflHOHbl AYİİ3HH
the radio the camel

Locative Case Suffix

+fla/fle A fter Consonants and Vovvels +Hfla/Hfle A fter Possessive + u / m

Toitna e üfle TOlOHfla eiiyHfle

at the party at home at his/her party in his/her home

roıurbifla Kenefle roıurycbiHfla KBMeCHHfle

in the verse on the Street in hıs/her verse on his/her Street

Ablative Case Suffix

+flan/fleH A fter Consonants and Vowels +HflaH/HfleH A fter Possessive + u /n
TOİİflaH eiffleH TOKJHflaH eKyufleıı
from the party from home from his/her party from his/her home

rouırynaH Kenenen romrycbiflaK Kaltecnnnen

from the verse from the Street from his/her verse from his/her Street
 Paradigms 573

Spellings of Case Suffîxes

Words With Root a W ords W ith Root ı.

N o m inative aT horse öanuK fish

G enitive aTMH o f the horse 6ajibirıiH o f the fish
A ccusative aTU the horse Sajıuru the fish
D ative aTa to the horse öajıura to the fish
L ocative aTfla on the horse öajlUKfla on the fish
A blativ e aTAaH from the horse 6ajıu*maH from the fish
W ords W ith Root e/a W ords W ith Root *

N o m inative flenH3 sea AHU! tooth

G en itiv e flen3iın o f the sea flHUiMH o f the tooth
A ccusative Aen3H the sea flMuiM the tooth
D ative flense to the sea an in e to the tooth
L ocative flenH3fle in the sea flMiUAe on the tooth
A blativ e fleni!3flen from the sea flHtufleH from the tooth

W ords W ith Root o W ords W ith Root y

N o m inative opyH place cyB water

G en itiv e opHyn of the place cyByn of the vvater
A ccusative oputı the place cyBU the water
D ative opııa to the place cyBa to the water
L ocative opyHfla in the place cyBfla in the water
A blativ e opyuflaH from the place cyBflaH from the water
Words W ith Root e W ords W ith Root y /jü

N om inative KOByuı shoes Ayüıu dream

G en itiv e KOBiuyH o f the shoes AyHuıyıı of the dream
A ccusative kobuih the shoes AyüıuM the dream
D ative KeBuıe to the shoes flyiiuıe to the dream
L ocative KOByuifle in the shoes Ayütune in the dream
A blativ e KOByuifleH from the shoes nyHmflen from the dreım
574 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Spellings of Case Suffixes

Words W ith Final a W ords W ith Final bi

N o m in ativ e KaKa father roHiubi neighbor

G en itiv e KaıcaHHH of the father roHiHUH of the neighbor
A ccusative KaKaHM the father roHiutiHbi the neighbor
D ative KaKa to the father roHtua to the neighbor
L ocative Kasana on the father roHUiyna on the neighbor
A b iativ e KasaflaH from the father roHiuyflaH from the neighbor
W ords W ith Final e /s Words W ith Final n
N o m in ativ e Kene Street açyöH pocket
G en itiv e KBM3HHH of the S treet JKyÖMU of the pocket
A ccusative K0H3HH the Street 3KY6MHH the pocket
D ative KBM3 to the Street sçyöo to the pocket
L ocative Kenefle in the Street 3C,Y6yfle in the pocket
A b iativ e KenefleH from the Street 3Ky6YAeH from the pocket
W ords W ith Final o Words W ith Final tt

N o m in ativ e khho movie afi home

G en itiv e khhohuh o f the movie eüyH of the home
A ccusative KHHOHtı the movie oSh the home
D ative khho to the movie ee to the home
L ocative KHHOfla in the movie eiifle in the home
A biativ e KHHOflaH from the movie eBfleH from the home
Words W ith Final e W ords W ith Final a

N o m inative flye camel ya older sister

G en itiv e flyöaHHH of the camel yHHHH of the older sister
A ccusative ayöaHH the camel ysiHbi the older sister
D ative flyiia to the camel ya to the older sister
L o cativ e flyefle on the camel yafla on the older sister
A biativ e flyefleH from the camel yaflaH from the older sister
W ords W ith Final Btı W ords W ith Final fia

N o m in ativ e ryiibi (water) well flYHİİs wor!d

G en itiv e ryüUHbiK of the (water) well AyHİfaHHH oftheworld
A ccusative ryifHHbi the (water) well flYHİİsHH the world
D ative rya to the (water) well AYHİto to the world
L ocative ryiibina in the (water) well nynitone in the world
A biativ e ryJİHflaH from the (Water) well flyuösfleH from the world
 Paradigms 575

Spellings of Possessive and Case Suffbces

First Person Singular
Nominative romıiBiM my neighbor eftyM my home
Genitive roHuiHMUH of my neighbor eüyMHH of my home
Accusative roHUitiMU my neighbor eityMH my home
Dative roHiıiHMa to my neighbor eityMe to my home
Locative roHiuuMfla on my neighbor e îf y M f le in my home
Ablative rorçıutiMflan from my neighbor eiiyMfleH from my home
Second Person Singular .
Nominative roHiUMH your neighbor eîfyH your home
Genitive roHiıiMUHH of your neighbor eflyttıiH of your home
Accusative ronıuıiHM your neighbor eftynu your home
Dative roHUiMHa to your neighbor ettyHe to your home
Locative ronıııuıma on your neighbor ailyuue in your home
Ablative rorçuıutmaH from your neighbor BÜyHfleH from your home
Third Person Singular
Nominative roHinucM his/her neighbor eftıı her/his home
Genitive roHtuyctiHbin of her/his neighbor söynHK of his/her home
Accusative roHuıyctiHbi his/her neighbor eltyHH her/his home
Dative roHmycbina to her/his neighbor eiiyHe to his/her home
Locative roHiııycuHfla on his/her neighbor eüyHfle in her/his home
Ablative ronuiyctiHflan from her/his neighbor eilyHfleH from his/her home
First Person Plural
Nominative roHUibiMki3 our neighbor 9İİMY3 our home
Genitive ronuıt]Mti3tın of our neighbor 0ÜMY3HH of our home
Accusative ro!(wtiMH3M our neighbor OÜMY3H our home
Dative ronuıtiMti3a to our neighbor eiİMy3e to our home
Locative roHuiMMbi3fla on our neighbor eÖMy3fle in our home
Ablative ronniMMbisflaH from our neighbor e0MY3fleH from our home
Second Person Plural
Nominative ronuıunu3 your neighbor eituys your home
Genitive ro«uJMHH3HH of your neighbor BÖHY3MH of your home
Accusative roHuıUHtısbi your neighbor 6ÖHY3H your home
Dative rorçuiEinbisa to your neighbor eifny3e to your home
Locative roHiutiHbisfla on your neighbor eiİHYSfle in your home
Ablative ro n u ib in b i3 fla n from your neighbor eünY3fleH from your home
Third Person Plural
Nominative roHUiycH their neighbor bHh their home
Genitive roHiuycbiHbiH of their neighbor eöyHHH of their home
Accusative roHtnycuHH their neighbor siiyıiH their home
Dative roumycbina to their neighbor süyııe to their home
Locative roHuıycuHfla on their neighbor etiyune in their home
Ablative roHinycbiHflaH from their neighbor GİiyuneH from their home
576 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Spellîngs of Plural, Possessive and Case Suffıxes

First Person Singular
N o m in ativ e rorçıuyııapuM m y neighbors efmepnM m y homes
G enitive roHUiynaptiMHH o f m y neighbors aiijıepHMiiH o f m y homes
A ccusative roum ynaptiM tı m y neighbors eftjıepHMH m y homes
D ative roHUiynapUMa to my neighbors eiinepıiMe to m y homes
L ocative ronuıyJiapuM fla on m y neighbors eÜJiepMMfle in m y homes
A blativ e roHiuyjıapuMflaH from m y neighbors eitnepMMfleH from my homes
Second Person Singular
N o m in ativ e ro u m y n ap uh. your neighbors etinepım your homes
G enitive ronıuyjıapbm (un) o f your neighbors eönepHn(Hn) o f your hom es
A ccusative roH iuynapuH U your neighbors eSnepMUM your homes
D ative roH iuyjıapuna to your neighbors eitn ep n « e to your homes
L ocative ro n u ıy n ap u ım a on your neighbors eiijıepm tne in your homes
A blativ e ronuıyjıapuHflaH firom your neighbors aiİJiepHnaeH from your homes
Third Person Singular
N o m in ativ e ro u m y jıa p u his/her neighbors etfjıepM his/her homes
G en itiv e roHiuynapbiHbiH o f her/his neighbors eitnepmiHH o f her/his homes
A ccusative ro n u ıy jıap u H tı his/her neighbors ettjıepHHM his/her homes
D ative ro«uiynapw H a to her/his neighbors aitnepMHe to her/his hom es
L ocative roHiııyjıapuHfla on his/her neighbors eiînepHHfle in his/her homes
A blativ e roHUiynapbiHflaH from her/his neighbors BİİnepıııifleH from her/his homes
First Person Plural
N o m in ativ e roHfflynapUMUs our neighbors eünepnMH3 our homes
G en itiv e rowuynapbiMbi3bin our neighbors eîtnepHMH3HH o f our hom es
A ccusative roHiuyjıapuMH3bi our neighbors eüJiepHMH3iı our homes
D ative ronmynapbiMU3a our neighbors eitnepjiMH3e to our homes
L ocative roHUiynapuMH3fla our neighbors eftjjepnMH3fle in our homes
A blative roHUiynapbiMbi3flaH our neighbors eiinepHMH3fleH from our homes
Second Person Plural
N o m in ativ e roHiuyjıapbinbi3 your neighbors eftjıepnnH3 your homes
G en itiv e r0HmynapbiHti3biH o f your neighbors eilnepHHH3HH of your homes
A ccusative roHiuyjıapbiiiM3bi your neighbors 0İfjıepnHH3H your homes
D ative roH iuynaptji(H 3a to your neighbors eÜJiepHHH3e to your hom es
L ocative roHUiyjıapbinbisfla on your neighbors e{tnepnnn3fle in your homes
A blative roHUiyjıapbinusflaH from your neighbors eilneptmn3fleH from your homes

Third Person Plural

N o m inative roKüiyjıapw their neighbors eöjıepH their homes
G en itiv e roumynapUHUH o f their neighbors eönepMHMH o f their homes
A ccusative roHUiyjıapbiHM their neighbors eitnepnHH their hom es
D ative roHmynapbiHa to their neighbors efljıepsrHe to their homes
L ocative roHUiyjıapbinua on their neighbors eif/ıepıınfle in their homes
A b lativ e roHtuyjıapbiHflaH from their neighbors ettnepHHfleH from their homes
 Paradigms 577

PRONOUN PARADİGMS

Personal Pronouns

Person/Case Singular Plural

Nominative M eni 6u3 we
Genitive MeHMH my, of me ÖM3HH our, of us
1 Accusative MeHH me 6h3M us
Dative Mana to me ÖM3e to us
Locative MeHfle on me ÖM3fle on us
Abiative MeHfleH from me 6n3fleıı from us
Nominative ceH you CH3 you
Genitive ceHHH your, of you cm3mh your, of you
2 Accusative ceHM you CH3H you
Dative cana to you cH3e to you
Locative ceHae on you cH3fle on you
Abiative ceHflen from you cM3neH from you

Nominative ojishe/he/it OJiap they

Genitive onyn her/his/its OJiaptm their, of n e m
3 Accusative ohh she/he/it OJiapu them
Dative ona to her/him/it oJiapa to them
Locative oHna on her/him/it ojıapaa on them
Abiative onflan from her/him/it OJiapflaH from them
578 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Demonstrative Pronouns

Possessive Suffîxes

6y my on ıuon
th is th is th at th at
1 S ingular MymiM myrnjM OHblM UlOHblM
this o f m ine this o f m ine that o f mine that o f mine
2 S ingular MyHHH uıyııuH OHblH UIOHHH
this o f yours this o f yours th at o f yours that o f yours
3 S ingular MyHycu, MyHcbi uıyHycbi, uıyncu OHycH, OHCbl UIOHyCbl, UlOHCbl
this o f his/hers/its this o f hers/his/its that o f his/hers/its that o f hers/his/its
1 Plural MyHUMUS UiyHbIMU3 OHbIMU3 UIOHMMU3
this o f ours this o f ours that of ours that o f ours
2 Plural MyHUHbia uıyHbm m OHUHH3 IUOHbIHbI3
this o f yours this o f yours that o f yours that o f yours
3 Plural MyuycM, MyHctr myuycbi, uıyHcbi ouycbi, o ucu ItlOHyCH, BIOHCH
this o f theirs this o f theirs that o f theirs that o f theirs

Case Suffixes

N o m in ativ e 6y my an rnojı
th is th is th at th a t
G en itiv e MyHyn uıyHyH OHyu uıoHyn
o f this o f this o f that o f that
A ccusative Mynbi uıyHbi OHbl UIOHbl
this th is th at th at
D ative Myua uıyua ona morça
to this to this to that to that
L ocative MyHfla uıyıma oHfla uıoHfla
in this in this in that in that
A biativ e uyum u uıynflaü OHflaH UIOHflaH
from this from this from that from that
 Paradigms 579

Reflexive Pronoun

Possessive Suffixes
Person S ingular P lural
1 03YM m y self 63YMH3 ourselves

2 93yH y o u rself 03YHH3 yourselves

3 93H herself, him self, itself esnepH them selves

Case Sujfixes
Case S ingular P lural
N om inative esyM I m yself B3yMH3 we ourselves
93YH you yourself 03YHH3 you yourselves
03H s/he/it h er/him /itself e3Jiepn they them selves

G enitive 63yMHtt m y se lf's 03YMM3MH ou rselv es’

B3yn y o u rself’s B3yHH3HH y o u rselv es’
93YHHH h er/h im /itself's e3JiepHHmt them selves’

A ccusative 03yMH m y self 03YMH3H ourselves

e3yHM y o u rself 03YHM3I1 yourselves
03yHM h im /h er/itself 03nepMHH them selves

D ative osyMe to m yself 03yMH3e to ourselves

03yne to yourself 03yHH3e to yourselves
e3YHe to her/him /itself 03nepHHe to themselves

L ocative o-jyMfle in m yself 03yMH3fle in ourselves

esy lifle in yourself 03ynn3fle in yourselves
esystfte in him /her/itself 03JiepHHfle in them selves

A blativ e osyMfleH from m yself 03yMH3fleH from ourselves

03YHfleH from yourself 03YHH3fleH from yourselves
03yHfleH from her/him /itself 03JiepnHfleH from them selves
580 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

interrogative Pronouns

KUM wlıo?
P ossessive Suffbces Case Suffixes

1 S ingular KMMHM who o f m ine . G enitive KMMHH whose

2 S ingular KMMHH who o f yours A ccusative KUMU vvhom
3 S ingular BİMM who o f hers/his/its D ative KHMe to whom
1 P lural KHMHMH3 vvho o f ours L ocative KHMfle on/w ith vvhom
2 Plural KHMMHH3 who o f yours A blative KHMfleıı from vvhom
3 P lural KHMJiepH vvho o f theirs

H3MB what?
P ossessive Suffixes Case Suffixes

1 Singular H3M3M what o f m ine G enitive H3M9HMH o f vvhat

2 Singular H3M3H vvhat o f yours A ccusative H3M3HH vvhat
3 S ingular HSMeCH w hat o f his/hers/its D ative H3M3 to vvhat
1 P lural H3M3MH3 vvhat o f ours L ocative Ha.Mefle in/w ith vvhat
2 P lural H3M3H113 vvhat o f yours A blative HSMegeH from vvhat
3 P lural HSMenepH vvhat o f theirs

xaücH which?
P ossessive Suffixes Case Suffixes

1 Singular xaficuM vvhich o f m ine (do not occur)

2 Singular xaiicbiH vvhich o f yours
3 Singular xaücucu vvhich o f hers/his
1 P lural xa&ctiMti3 vvhich o f us
2 P lural x a(icu n u 3 vvhich o f you
3 P lural xaöcunapu vvhich o f them
 Paıadigms 581

interrogative Pronouns

Hupe yvhere?
Possessive Suffixes Case Suffixes

1 S ingular H H p aM ray w hereabouts G enitive HHp3HHH from where

2 S ingular HHpSH your vvhereabouts A ccusative HHpsHH the place, vvhere
3 S ingular HHpeCH h is/h e r/its D ative HHp3 where to
vvhereabouts L ocative H H p efle at where
1 Plural HHp3M M 3 our vvhereabouts A blative HHpefleH from vvhere
2 Plural H H p 3H H 3 your whereabouts
3 Plural H HpeuepH their w hereabouts

Hsne how much?

P ossessive Suffixes C ase Suffixes

1 Singular H313M how much o f mine G enitive H3*I3HHH o f how muclı

2 Singular H3> «n how much or yours A ccusative H3H3HH how much
3 S ingular HSHecH how much o f hers/his D ative H3M3 to how much
1 Plural H 3H3M H3 how m uch o f ours L ocative H aye fle in/with how n u c h
2 Plural H3H3HH3 how much or yours A blative HSHeflen from how m jch
3 P lural H 3M enepw how m uch of ıheirs

H3Henyçu vvhich one?

Possessive Suffixes Case Suffixes

1 P lural H3<tew^MMH3 w hıch o f us G enitive H3HeHa;MHMH o f which one

2 P lural H3MeHx;MHH3 vvhich o f you A ccusative tm eıu^HHH which or.e
3 P lural Hs'jemçucH which o f them D ative H3<teraç3 to vvhich one
L ocative HSHeHatiHfle in vvhich one
A b lativ e HsHeıoçMaeH from whn:h one
582 Türkmen Reference Grammar

VERB PARADİGMS

Present indefinite Tense

Statement

S ingular P lural

1 -HpblH, -iiapHH -apbic, -ibpııc

2 -qpoHH, -topçun -spcbintl3, -itapcHmo

3 -np, -Hap -apnap, -Hapnep

H3üpbIH S3apblC
I write we write
S3HpctlH H3SpcUHtI3
you write you write
soap Haapnap
s/he writes they write
repitapMH repüopHc
I see we see
repifapcmı repHapcnHH3
you see you see
ropiisp repSapnep
s/he sees they see
oKanpıiH otcaap u c
I read we read
oK aspctm oKaapcbiHbis
you read you read
OKaap OKaapJiap
s/he reads they read
MiuneiiapKH HUiJieftapMC
I work we work
HUiJieffapcHH nmneiiapcnm3
you work you work
nuınedop m ujıeilapjıep
s/he works they work
aünapbiH aftnapuc
I say we say
aiinupcbiH aftflHpCbIHbl3
you say you say
aönap aiiflHpjıap
s/he says they say

S3MaK to write repMeK to see oKaMaıc to read KuuıeMeK to work aÖTMaıcto say
 Paradigms 583

Present indefinite Tense

Negative Statement

Singular Plural

1 -Maapbm, -MeitopıiH -Manpuc, -MeSspHC

2 -M aspcun, -MeöapcMH -MaapctiHbls, -MeMopcHHHS

3 -Maap, -Meüap -Maapjıap, -Meîtspjıep

B3M3BpbîH a3Maapuc
I don’t write vve don’t write
H3Maapcun a3MaapcttHH3
you don’t write you don’t vvrite
H3Masp H3Maapnap
s/he doesn’t write they don't vvrite
repMeilspHH rnpMeiiapHC
I don’t see we don’t see
repMeitspcHH ropMeilapcMHHS
you don’t see you don’t see
repMeiiop repM eiispjıep
s/he doesn’t see they don't see
oKaMaspbiıı oKaMaapuc
I don’t read we don’t read
OKaMaapcııu OKaMaapcMHM
you don’t read you don’t read
oKaManp OKaMaapnap
s/he doesn’t read they don’t read
HuiJieMeHapmı HiujıeMetiapHc
1 don’t work vve don’t vvork
HUiJieMeiiopcnH HUIJieMeİİ3pCHUll3
you don’t vvork you don’t vvork
MiuneMeflap nıuneMeitapnep
s/he doesn’t vvork they don’t vvork
alİTM asıptııı aiİTMaapuc
I don't say vve don’t say
aiİTM aapcbiH aitTMaapcbiut>i3
you don't say you don’t say
aiİTManp aiİTMaspJiap
s/he doesn't say they don’t say
ü3MaK lo wrilc ropMCK lo see okumsk lo read KUiJieMeıc to work aÜTMaıc lo say
584 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Present indefinite Tense

Question

Singular Plural
1 -flpUHMU, -İİSpHHMH -HpMCMbl, -ttopHCMM
2 -apctiHMU, -itapcHHMH, -SipCblHbI3Mbl, -03pCHHH3MH,
(-flpMUCUH, -ibpMHCHH -SlpMMCtJHU3, -fcpMHCKHIia)
3 -apMfel, -iiapMH -apjıapMbi, -öapJiepMM
smptJHML] H3HpbICMU
do I write? do we write?
a3apcuHMW H3HpCUHbl3MbI
do you write? do you write?
aaapMbi H3HpnapMU
does s/he write? do they write?
rapitapHHMM repöapMCMM
do I see? do we see?
rapüspcMHMM repflapcHHH3MH
do you see? do you see?
repüspMM repiiapnepMH
does s/he see? do they see?
oKaapuHMu OKaapbicMbi
do I read? do we read?
oKaapctiHMtı 0KaapcbiniJ3Mbi
do you read? do you read?
OKaapMU OKaapjıapMbi
does s/he read? do they read?
MUlJiettspHHMli HUiJieöapHCMH
do I work? do we work?
HUiJieüapcHHMH HUIJ]eiİ3pCMHH3MH
do you work? do you work?
HUineftapMM MiuneüapnepMH
does s/he work? do they work?
aiSaspuHMu afiaapucMU
do I say? do we say?
aüflapcuHMid aitnapcM{$bi3Mbi
do you say? do you say?
aiiflapMbi aiiflapnapMbi
does s/he say? do they say?
a3MaK to wriie repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HtımeMeK to work afrrMaK to say
 Paradigms 585

Present indefinite Tense

Negative Qııestion

Singular Plural
1 -MaapMHMM, -MeiiapMHMiı -MaapbicMbi, -MeiıopHCMH
2 -MaapcbiHMbi, -MeflspcHUMH, -MaqpcbiHbi3Mbi, -MeiiapcMitH3wıı,
(-MaapMbicbiH, -MeiispMUCHH -MaapMbICbIHbI3, -MCİbpMHCHİUI î)
3 -MaapMbi, -MeifapMH -MaapjıapMbi, -MeiiapjıepMH

H3MaapbIHMbI H3MaqpbicMbi
don’t I write? don’t we write?
H3MaapcbiHMbi B3MaapCblHb13MbI
don’t you write? don’t you write?
a3MaapMU a3MaapaapMU
doesn’t s/he write? don’t they write?
repMeiiapHHMH repMeöapHCMM
don’t I see? don’t we see?
rspMeöapcHHMM r8pMeitapcHHM3MH
don’t you see? don’t you see?
repMeöapMM repMeöapjıepMH
doesn’t s/he see? don't they see?
OKaMaapuHMbi OKaMaapucMbi
don’t I read? don’t we read?
OKaMaapcbiHMbi OKaMaapcbiHbi3MLi
don't you read? don’t you read?
OKÜMaspMU OKaMaapnapMbi
doesn’t s/he read? don’t they read?
HlUJieMeÖapMHMH HiujıeMeöapHCMH
don’t I work? don’t we work?
HuıneMeiiapcHKMH HIUJieMeîİ3pCHHH3MH
don’t you vvork? don’t you work?
HUiJieMeiiapMH HumeMetiapnepMH
doesn’t s/he work? don't they work?
aüTMaapbiHMbi aitTMaapucMbi
don't I say? don’t we say?
aitTMaapcbiHMbi aftTMaapcbiHbi3Mbi
don’t you say? don’t you say?
aiiTMaapMbi aiiT M aap n ap M b i
doesn’t s/he say? don't they say?
S3MaK to write repMeK to see ok&msk to read HmneMeK to work atfTMaıc to say
586 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Present Indefinite Tense: Contracted Forms

Statement

S in g u lar P lural

1 -BH, -İİOH -HC, -İİ3C

2 -an, -ifan -BHH3, -İİ3HM3

3 -sı, -its -aJiap, -its/ıep

B3BH repilsH B3HC rep itac

H3an repfioH B3flf(M3 rap{İ3KH3
S3a rep ita B3SJiap repifanep

OKaHH nm nelhu OKaflc hilimlise

oicam( HUiJieilaH 0K3HHH3 HtUJieit3HM3
oıcaa HUiJieiia □Kaanap mjıııeifanep

aituau aitnac
aiiflHH aitflsHH3
aftna adflBJiap

Negative Statement

S in g u lar P lural

1 -MaBH, -Meilon -Maac, -Meitac

2 -M2BH, -MeiiaH -MaaHfci3, -MeÜ3HH3

3 -Man, - Meiia -M aanap,-M ettonep

B3MaSH rep M eö aH B3Maac repMeiloc

H3 Maan ropMeiioH B3MaaHbi3 repMeiiarçn3
»3Maa repMefta a3M2BJiap repM eüanep

OKaMaaH MiuneMeHsH OKaMaac m ım eM ettac

OKaMaHH MUineMeilaH OKaMaanbi3 Hum eMeÜ 3HM3
oKaMaa HUiJieMeits OKaMaanap H iE JieM elbu ep

aiİTMaaH afiTMaac
aüTMasH aÜTMaaHt.13
atİTMaa aitrMaBJiap

st3Maıc to vvrite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HinneMeK to w ork aftTMatc to say
 Paradigms 587

Present indefinite Tense: Contracted Forms

Qııestion

S in g u lar P lural

1 -BHMbl, -İtaHMM -BCMbl, -İtaCMH

2 -ÜOHMH -BHbI3MbI, -İİ3HH3MH

(-«MblOblH, -Ü3MHCMH -aMbicbiHbi3, Ü3MHCHHH3)

3 -HMfcl, -Jİ3MH -anapMbi, -ftsnepMH

8 3BHMbI re pil sumu 93aCMU repüacMH

H3Sİ<Mbl repöoHMH H3aHH3Mbl ropiİ3!(H3MH
H3HMbI repttsMH asanapMbi repiiojıepMH

OKaBHMbl HUIJieÜSHMH osaacMbi HUiJiettacMH

OKaSHMbl MUineiiaHMH 0KaaHU3Mbi Hmneiİ3HH3MH
OKaBMb] HttinefisMH OKaanapMbî HUineöanepMH

attnaHMbi aitflncMU
aitaHUMbi aiiflHHbI3MbJ
aiiflHMH aitnanapMbi

Negative Question

S in g ular P lural

1 -MaHHMbl, -MeiiaHMH -MaacMbi, -MeöacMH

2 -MaaHMbi, -MeifsıtMH -MaaHW3Mbl, -MefiaHH3MH

(-MdHMblCblH, -MeJtSMMCHH -MaaMbicuHbi3, MeÜ3MHCHHH3)

3 -MaflMbi, -MeöaMH -MaanapMH, -MetisJiepMM

a^MaaHMU rspMeüaHMH asMaacMbi repMeilocMH

a3MaaHMu repMeitsHMH H3MaflHbI3Mbl repMettsHH3MH
H3MaaMbi repMeüsMH aSMaanapMbi repMeîisnepMH

oKaMaüHMbt HUiJieMeöaHMH OKaMaacMtı HuıneMeitacMH

OKaMaanMbi HUineMeitaHMH 0KaMaaHW3Mbi HLUJieMeK3HH3MH
oKaMaaMbi HUiJieMeiiaMH OKaMaaJiapMbi HUiJieMeitsnepMH

attTMaaHMbl aitrMaacMbi
aitTMaüHMbi aîİTMaaHW3Mbi
aiİTMaaMbi aÜTMaanapMbi

sBMaıc to write repMeKto see OKaMaKto read HiıiJieMeıc to work aifrMaKto say
588 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Present Continuous Tense: Contracted Verbs

S tat eme nt Question

S inguJar P lural S in g u lar P lural

1 -biH , -yH -bic, -yc 1 -blHMbl, -yHMbl -blCMbl, -ycMbi

2 - cuh , -oyu -cbiHbia, -cynbi3 2 -CblHMH, -CblHbI3MbI,
-cy H M U -cy n u 3 M b i
3 - -nap
3 -MU -jıapMbi

nypyn nypyc aypyHMbi aypycMbi

I ’m standing w e’re standing am I standing? are w e standing?
aypeyh flypoyHb!3 a y pey h m bi flypoynbi3Mbi
y o u ’re standing yo u ’re standing are you standing? are you standing?
ayp flypnap flypMbi nypuapM bi
s/h e ’s standing th ey ’re standing is s/he standing? are they standing?

OTblpblH OTbip bIC OTbîpblHMbl OTbipbiCMbI

I ’m sitting w e’re sitting am I sitting? are w e sitting?
OTbipUH OTbipbiC OTbîpblHMbl OTbipbiCMbI
y o u ’re sitting y o u ’re sitting are you sitting? are you sitting?
OTbip OTbipnap OTbip Mbi OTbipJiapMbi
s/h e ’s sitting th ey ’re sitting is s/he sitting? are they sitting?

srrbipbitı HTblpblC HTbip blHMbl HTblpblCMbl

l ’m lying w e're lying am I lying? are we lying?
srrbipobiH HTblpCbIHH3 HTblpCHHMbl HTMpCbIHM3Mbl
you’re lying you’re lying aıe you lying? are you lying?
flTbip sT b ip n a p HTbipMM STblpnapMb!
s/h e’s lying th ey ’re lying is s/he lying? are they lying?

MypM'dK to stand OTypMaK to sit HTMaK to lie

 Paradigms 589

Past Continuous Tense: Contracted Verbs

Statement Question

S in g u lar P lural S ingular P lural

1 -flbIM, -nyM -flblK, -flyK 1 -flblMMbl, -flblKMbl,

-flyMMH -flyKMU
2 -flbin, -flyn -flblHbl3, -flynb!3
2 -flblHMbl, -flUHblSMU,
3 -flu -flbinap, -flynap
-ayHMbi -flyHbi3M;»ı

3 -flblMbl, -flbinapMi.!,
-ay mu -ayjıapMU

AypayM nypnyK jıypflyMMbi nypflyKMH

I w as standing we were standing was I standing? were we standing?
nyp«yH aypflyHbis aypnyuMbi nypnyHbi3MiJ
you w ere standing you were standing were you standing? w ere you smnding?
flypaM Aypflynap aypflyMb) flypaynapM >ı
s/he was standing they were standing was s/he standing? were they stsnding?

OTbipfltJM OTbipflbIK OTbipflbIMMbI OTbipflbIKMti

I was sitting we were sitting was I sitting? were we situng?
OTtipflUH 0TbipflbIHbI3 OTbipflbIHMbI 0TbipflUHbI3MbI
you w ere sitting you were sitting were you sitting? w ere you sitting?
OTBipflhl oTbipflbinap OTbipflblMbl OTblpflblJiapMbl
s/he w as sitting they were sitting was s/he sitting? were they sitting?

BTblpHtlM srrupnbiK HTLipflLIMMbl HTbipflblKMbl

I was lying w e were lying was I lying? were we lyiııg?
HTbipflblH aTbipflbinbi3 artjpnbiHMbi aTbipflbIHbI3Mbl
you were lying you were lying were you lying? were you ljin g ?
SjTUpaU HTbipflbinap srrbipflbiMbs aTupAMnapı.' u
s/he was lying they were lying was s/he lying? were they lying?

nypMaK to stand OTypMaK to sit HTMaK to lie

590 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Statement
Singular Plural
1 -HHflMpblH, -İİSHflHplIH -HHflblpblC, -liSHnHpHC

2 -HHÜMpcUH, -KamiHpCMH, -HHflb7pCblHb]3, -Ö3HqHpCHHM3,

-HHCblH, -Îİ3HCHH -HHCbIHbI3, -{İ3HCHHH3

3 -HHnup, -«sunup -HHfltıpnap, -flsHHMpnep

H3HHHbipblH H3HHflbipbIC
I'm probably writing we're probably writing
asanntıpcbiH H3ÜHflbipCbIHbI3
y o u 're probably w riting you’re probably vvriting
H3BHHHP sraHHflbJpjiap
s/he’s probably writing they’re probably writing
repifSHflHpHH repilaHflHpHc
I ’m probably seeing we’re probably seeing
repiİSHflHpCHH repJİ3HflnpcHHM3
you’re probably seeing you’re probably seeing
r0pİİ3HflHp repiisHflHpnep
s/he’s probably seeing they’re probably seeing
OKaflHfliiptTH OKaHHflbipblC
I ’m probably reading vve're probably reading
□Kanun bipcbiH OKaHHflblpCbIHM3
you’re probably reading you’re probably reading
oKanımbip OKanHflupnap
s/h e ’s probably reading they’re probably reading
HUIİleÖSHflHpHH HmneiİsHnHpilc
I ’m probably vvorking we're probably working
itmnetlsunupcHH HUIJ7eiİ3HaMpCHHH3
you’re probably working you’re probably working
muneMsHiiHp HiuneiisHflHpjıep
s/he’s probably working they’re probably working

attflRHflbipUH ailflHHUbipbic
I'm probably saying we’re probably saying
a ü n s u f lb ip c b iH aitflHHJ(I.lpCb!HbI3
you're probably saying you’re probably saying
aJtflHHflbip altaaHflbipnap
s/he’s probably saying they're probably saying
&3Maic ıo vvrite repMeK to see oKaMaK to read HürıreMefc to worfc a#TMaıc to say
 Paradigms 591

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Negative Statement 1
Singular Plural
1 -ManHfltıpbiH, -MeiiaHflHpHH -MaHHflblpblC, -MeÖSHflHpHC
2 -MasıımtıpcbiH, -MeiioHflMpcHH, -M aqH ;lblpC I,lH bI3, -Meiİ3HHHpCHHH3,
-MaaHCUH, -MeifoHOHH -MaHHCbIHH3, -Meiİ3HCHHlI3

3 -MaaHflup, -MeiİSHflHp -MaHHflHpnap, -Meibımupjıep

asMaattatıptiH H3Maflnqbipbic
I ’m probably not vvriting vve’re probably not writing
saMasHAupcuH S3MaHHflbipCblHbI3
y o u ’re probably not vvriting you’re probably not writing
H3MaHHflblp H3MaaHflbipjıap
s/he's probably not writing they’re probably not vvriting

repMeaoHflHpHH rspMeftaHflHpHC
I'm probably not seeing we’re probably not seeing
repMeftsHfliıpcHn repMeiİ9HflHpCHHH3
you’re probably not seeing you’re probably not seeing
repMeiısHflHp re p M e ü s H f lu p jıe p
s/he’s probably not seeing th ey 're probably not seeing

oKaManıiflbipbiH oKaMaHHflbipuc
I'm probably not reading vve’re probably not reading
OKaMaanatıpcbin OKaMaHHflblpCblHt!3
you’re probably not reading you’re probably not reading
oKaMasmflbip o K a M a s H f lb ip n a p
s/he's probably not reading they’re probably not reading
HUIHeMeiİ3HflHpHH MUIUeMeÜSHflMpHC
I'm probably not vvorking vve’re probably not vvorking
MmjıeMettsHflHpcHH HUlJieMeiİ3HflHpCHHH3
you’re probably not vvorking you’re probably not vvorking
HUineMeiiaHflHp HUineMeitsHflHpnep
s/h e’s probably not vvorking they’re probably not vvorking
aiİTMaflHUbipbiH aÖTMammbipMc
I’m probably not saying vve’re probably not saying
aÜTMaHHflbipcMt{ aîİTMaSHflblpCbIHH3
you're probably not saying you’re probably not saying
aitrMasHflfeip aitTMasımbipnap
s/he’s probably not saying they’re probably not saying
H3MaK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HmneMeK to work aitrMas to say
592 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Negative Statement 11
Singular Plural
1 -AH flSJIflUpHH, -Ö3H fl3HflHpHH -AH «MflHpHC, -İİ3H flS-TIflHpMC
2 -HH flSJJflHpCHH, "ÜS» flSJMMpCMIt, -HH fl3UHMpCHHH3, -Ö3H fl3JlflHpCHHH3,
-3H flSJİCHK, -İİ3H flonCHH -HH -ÜSH A3HCHHM3

3 -HHflSJffiHp, -İÎ3H flanflHpnep -HH flSJlflMpJlep, -İİ3H flSJlflHp

H3HH flSJlflHpMH H3HII flSJIflHpHC
I ’m probably not vvriting we’re probably not vvriting
H3HH H3HHfl3JIflHpCHHH3
you’re probably not writing you’re probably not vvriting
H3AH asJifliıp H3HHflSJlfllipnep
s/he’s probably not vvriting they’re probably not vvriting
repjian flsnfliıpıın rapiisH HsnflHpuc
I’m probably not seeing vve’re probably not seeing
repifaH flanıiHpcHH repiİSH fl3İIflH pCH H H 3
you’re probably not seeing you’re probably not seeing
repttan flajıaHp repiisu flsjiflnpnep
s/he's probably not seeing they’re probably not seeing
oKaaH aannupıiH OKaHH fl3jlflnpnc
I ’m probably not reading vve’re probably not reading
OKaan flanflHpcMH OKaHH H3JlflHpCllHH3
you’re probably not reading you’re probably not reading
OKaHHflSJIflMp OKaHH fl3JIflHpJlep
s/he’s probably not reading they’re probably not reading
HuıneiiaH nsJiflHpıtH HmneiisH aaJiflHpMC
I’m probably not vvorking vve’re probably not vvorking
HUIJieİtaH flSJlflHpCHH HUineİiaH fl3HRHpCHHH3
you’re probably not vvorking you’re probably not vvorking
HIUJleibH flSJIAHp HuıneftsH flanflHpnep
s/he’s probably not vvorkitıg they’re probably not vvorking
aÖHSH flSJlflKpHH aitflHH flSimHpM C
I ’m probably not saying vve’re probably not saying
afiflHH flSJlflH pcH H aitflHH fl3HflHpCHHH3
you’re probably not saying you’re probably not saying
aitflHH flaifflMp aiiflSH flsjiflMpJiep
s/he’s probably not saying they’re probably not saying
ü3Maıt to vvrite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HiıuıeMeK to vvork aftmaK to say
 Paradigms 593

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Question
Singular Plural
1 -SHflblpHHMbl, -HHflbipblCMbl, -Ö3HflUpMCMH
2 -HHflblpOblUMbl, -İİ3HflHpcHI(MH, -HHflbipCblHbl3MH, -ÖaHfllipCMHHliMH,
-HHCUHMbl, -ÖOHCMHMM -HHCbmbI3MU, -İİ3HCHHH3MH
(-HHAbipMblCUH, -itaHflMpMMOHH, -aHAbipMHCb!HU3, -ÖSHflHpMHCV UM3,
-HHMUOblH, -Ü3HMHCHH -HHMbICbIHbI3, -Ö3HMHCHHH3)
3 -HHAblpMbl, -SİOHJJHpMH -SHflbipJiapMbi, -iiaHflHpjjepMH

a3SHAbipWHMbl HSHHAbipblCMbl
am I m aybe writing? are we m aybe writing?
H38HflbipCbIHMbI !I3HHAblpCUHH3MbI
are you m aybe vvriting? are you m aybe vvriting?
H3SHAbipMbI H3SIHAbipAapMbI
is s/he m aybe writing? are they m aybe vvriting?

repİİOHflHpHHMM repJtSHAHpHCMH
am I m aybe seeing? are vve m aybe seeing?
repttaıiflHpcHHMH repÜ3HflHpCHHH3MH
are you m aybe seeing? are you m aybe seeing?
repüoHflupMH repiteHflMpJiepMH
is s/he m aybe seeing? are they m aybe seeing?

OKaSHAbipblHMb] OKaaıiflbipbiCMbi
am I m aybe reading? are vve m aybe reading?
OKaSJIlAbipCbltlMbl OKafltlAbipCblHbI3Mbl
are you m aybe reading? are you m aybe reading?
OKasuiAbipMbi OKaaHAbipnapMbl
is s/he m aybe reading? are they m aybe reading?

HuıneiiaıiAHpHHMM HllIiiettsHAMpMCMM
am I m aybe working? are vve m aybe vvorking?
HUIJlOİİOHflHpCHHMH HUlAeiİ3HAHpCHI|l<3Ml<
are you m aybe vvorking? are you m aybe vvorking?
HUiAeif aıiAMpM H HUjjıeüsHflHpnepMH
is s/he m aybe working? are they m aybe vvorking?

aHAfliiAbipbiliMbi aÜAflHAbipbicMbi
am I m aybe saying? are vve m aybe saying?
aÜAfliiAbipcbiilMU aÜAfil!AblpCblHbl3MbI
are you m aybe saying? are you m aybe saying?
uÜASHAbipMbi aiiflHiiflbipnapMbi
is s/he m aybe saying? are they m aybe saying?
somuk to write ropMCK to see ofcaMaıeto read HiımeMeK to vvork aÖTMUK to say
594 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Negative Question I
Singular Plural
1 -M a a H ab ip iJH M L I, -M eftsH flH pH H M H -MaHHflblpblCMbl, -MeİİSHaHpHCMH

2 -MaHHBMpOUHMU, -MeHsHflHpCHHMH, -MaqHflbipCblHbI3MbI, -Meiİ3HnHpCHHH3MH,

-MaaHCMUMU, -MeÜSHCHUMH -MaqHCbIHbl3Mb], -Meiİ3HCHHH3MH
(-MaüJiaupMHCMH, -MeÖSHflMpMBCHH, -MaHHWpMHCMHH3, -Meft3HflHpMHCMHM3,
-MaSIHMUCblH, -MeÖSHMHCHH -MaHHMbICbIHU3, -Mei(3HMHCHHH3)

3 -MaHHflUpMM, -MeBsHflMpMH -MaHHflbipnapMU, -MettsHflHpnepMH

H3MaHH3bipHCMM
aren’t I maybe writing? aren’t we maybe writing?
HSMaHHflbipcHHMU fl3MaflHflbipCbmbl3MbI
aren’t you maybe vvriting? aren’t you maybe vvriting?
HSMaanabipMtı H3MaaHflbipJTapMLI
isn’t s/he maybe writing? aren’t they maybe writing?
repMeÜSHHHpHHMH repMeitaHflMpMCMM
aren’t I maybe seeing? aren't we maybe seeing?
repMeftsHBHpcHHMH repMeÜ3HJtHpCMHH3MM
aren’t you maybe seeing? aren’t you maybe seeing?
repMeiisHfliıpMH rep MeitaHflHpnepMH
isn ’t s/he maybe seeing? aren’t they maybe seeing?
OKaMaaHflblpblHMbl oKaMaHHfli.ipi.ieMH
aren’t I maybe reading? aren’t we maybe reading?
OKaMaaHHHpcHHMu 0KaMaaHfltıpcb!Hbi3Mbi
aren’t you maybe reading? aren’t you maybe reading?
OKaMaanflbipMbi oKaMaaHflMpjıapMU
isn't s/he maybe reading? aren’t they maybe reading?
HUIJieMeftSHflHpHHMH HUineMeitaHflHpHCMH
aren’t I maybe working? aren’t we maybe working?
HüiJieMeaaHflHpcHHMH HUineMeft3HflHpcHHH3MH
aren’t you maybe working? aren’t you maybe vvorking?
HumeMeaaHflHpMH mmmîMefioHjuîpnepMm
isn’t s/he maybe working? aren’t they maybe working?
aitTMaanflbipLiHMbi aitTMaanflbipbiCMbi
aren’t I maybe saying? aren't we maybe saying?
aîtTMaSHflbipcblHMbı afİTMaanHbipcbinbi3Mbl
aren’t you maybe saying? aren't you maybe saying?
aiİTMaanflbipMbi aitTMasHflbipjıapMM
isn’t s/he maybe saying? aren't they maybe saying?
«3MaK to write repMeıc to see oıcaMaK to read noıneMeK to work aftmajc to say
 Paradigms 595

Subjective Present Continuous Tense

Negative Question II
Singular Plural
1 -HH flSJIflHpHHMK, -İİ3H flSJIflHpKHMH -HH flSJIflHpHCMH, -Ö3H flSJlUHpHCMH

2 -HH flMflHpCHHMH, -İt3Hfl3IIflHpCHHMH, -HH fl3HflHpCHHH3MM, -Ü3H fl3nflHpCHHH3MM,

-HH flsncHHMH, -İİ3H flaJIOHHMH -HH fl3nCHHH3MH, -İİ3H E3J1CHHH3MM
(-HH flsnflHpMHCHH, -Ö3H flSIfflHpMHCHH, -HH fl3IlHHpMHCHHH3, -İİ3H fl3nflHpMHCHHH3,
-HH -İİ3H J3JIMHCMH -HH fl3IIMHCHHH3, -Ö3H fl3JlMMCHHH3)
3 -HH flSİIflHpMH, -Ü3H HSJlflHpMH -HH flOJTflHpIiepMH, -İİ3H flSJlflHpjiepMH

H3HH flSJIflHpHHMH 33HH fl3I®npMCMH

aren ’t I m aybe writing? aren’t we m aybe writing?
H3HH flsnflMpCHHMH H3HH fl3JlflHpCHHH3MM
aren ’t you m aybe writing? aren 't you m aybe writing?
H3HH pMH H3HH flSflflHpjiepM H
isn ’t s/he m aybe writing? aren’t they m aybe writing?

repitan flanflHpKHMH repBsH nsnnHpHCMH

aren’t I m aybe seeing? aren’t we m aybe seeing?
repiİ3H aanflHpcHUMH re p itS H A3HnHpCHHM3MH
aren ’t you m aybe seeing? aren’t you m aybe seeing?
rspitaH flaımııpMH repitsH flsnflnpnepMH
isn ’t s/he m aybe seeing? aren ’t they m aybe seeing?

OKaHH flSJUJHpHHMH OKaHH flSTOHpHCMH

aren 't I m aybe reading? aren’t we m aybe reading?
OKaHH fl3njîHpcMItMH 0K3HH HajlfllipcMHH3MH
aren ’t you m aybe reading? aren’t you m aybe reading?
OKaHH flSJIflHpMSI OKaaH nsnflHpjıepMH
isn 't s/he m aybe reading? aren’t they m aybe reading?

HUineÖ3H fl3JlHHpHHMH HiUJieilan flsnflHpHCMH

aren’t I m aybe working? aren’t we m aybe working?
HiUJieitsH flonflHpcHUMH HIUJieİİSH fl3TOHpCHHH3MH
aren ’t you m aybe vvorking? aren’t you m aybe working?
HiUJieiisH flanflHpMH H iujıeibH flaJiflHpjıepMH
isn ’t s/he m aybe working? aren’t they m aybe working?

aitaHH flSJlflMpHHMH aÜflHH flSIfflHpHCMH

aren 't I m aybe saying? aren’t w e m aybe saying?
aSflHH flSJIflHpCHHMH aftflHH fl3JIflHpCHHH3MH
aren ’t you m aybe saying? a re n 't you m aybe saying?
attflHH flSJlflHpMH aiiflHH flSUUMpJtepMH
isn ’t s/he m aybe saying? aren’t they m aybe saying?
93M3K to write repMeK to see O KaMaK to read M iım e M e K to work aitrMaK to say
59 6 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Present Perfect Tense

Negative Statement
S ingular Plural
1 -aMOK, -eMOK -aMbI30K, -eMH30K
2 -anoK, -eHOK -aHbI30K, -eHH30K
3 -aHOK, -eHOK -aHOKJiap, -eHOKnap

sıaaMOK H3aMbI30K
I haven’t written vve haven’t written
smrçoK S!3attbI30K
you haven't written you haven’t written
B3aHOK A3aH0Knap
s/he hasn’t written they haven’t written
repeMOK repeMH30K
I haven’t seen we haven’t seen
repeHOK repenn30K
you haven’t seen you haven't seen
repeHOK repeHOKJiep
s/he hasn’t seen they haven’t seen
OKaMOK 0KaMbl30K
I haven’t read we haven’t read
OKaHOK OKaHbl30K
you haven’t read you haven’t read
OKaHOK OKaHOKJiap
s/he hasn’t read they haven’t read
H1UJI3M0K HU1J13MH30K
I haven’t worked we haven’t worked
HUJÜ3H0K MU1J13HM30K
you haven't worked you haven’t worked
MU1JI3H0K ııuiJiaHOKnap
s/he hasn’t worked they haven't worked
aiiflaMOK ailflaMbi30K
I haven’t said vve haven’t said
aitaarçoK aiiflanbi3QK
you haven’t said you haven’t said
afiflaHOK aiiflaHOKüap
s/he hasn’t said they haven’t said
513M3K to vvrite repMeK to see oKanaK to read HinneMeK to vvork aifr-M3K to say
 Paradigms 597

Present Perfect Tense

Negative Queslion
Singular P lural
1 -aM O KM M M H, -eMOKMbl -aMU30KMbI, -eMH30KMbl
2 -aHOKMbl, -eHOKMbl -aF(U30KMbI, -eH H 30K M H

3 -aHOKMM, -eHOKMbl -aHOKJiapMbi, -eHOKJiapMbi

SSaMOKMbl S3aMbI30KMbI
haven’t I written? haven’t we written?
93aHOKMbI S3aKbI30KMbI
haven’t you written? haven’t you written?
SmHOKMbI H3aH0KnapMU
hasn’t s/he written? haven’t they vmtten?
repeMOKMU repeMH30KMW
haven’t I seen? haven’t we seen?
repenoK M U repeHH30KMM
haven’t you seen? haven’t you seen?
repeHOKMbi repeHOKJiepMU
hasn’t s/he seen? haven’t they seen?
OKaMOKMbl 0KaMbI30KMbl
haven't I read? haven’t we read?
OKaHOKMb! 0KaHbX30KMbl
haven’t you read? haven’t you read?
OKaHOKMbI OKaHOKJlapMbl
hasn't s/he read? haven’t they read?
HU1H3M0KMU HU1JI3MH30KMM
haven’t I worked? haven’t we worked?
ııııiJianoKMbi HUIJI3HM30KM1J
haven’t you worked? haven’t you worked?
HIUJ13H0KMU HUIJISHOKJiapMbl
hasn’t s/he worked? haven't they worked?
aiiflaMOKMbl aiİflaM bI30X M bI
haven't I said haven’t we said?
aifflaHOKMU aüflanbi30KMbJ
haven't you said haven’t you said?
aftflaHOKMbl aÜAaHOKiiapMbi
hasn’t s/he said? haven’t they said?
83MaK to wıite repMeK to see ûKaMaK to read MmneMeK to work aÜTMaıc to say
598 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

Statement

S ingular P lural
1 -anflbipbm, -eHHHpMH -aHflbipbic, -enflHpHC
2 -aHflbipcbin, -enflHpcnH, -aHİIblpCbIHbl3, -eHflHpCHHH3,
-ancun, -eHCHH -aHCblHH3, -eHCHHH3

1 3 -anflbip, -eHflMp -aHflbipnap, -eH flH pnep

nsaHflbipbiH H3aımbipbic
I must have written we must have written
a3aHflupcuH q3aHflbipcbiHbi3
you must have written you must have written
H3aHflbip smHflbipnap
s/he must have written they must have written
ropeıınnpnH repeHflHpne
I must have seen we must have seen
repenflHpcHK repeHHHpcHHH3
you must have seen you must have seen
repeHflHp repeHflHpnep
s/he must have seen they must have seen
OKaHflbipblH OKaHflblptlC
I must have read we must have read
OKaHflbipcuH 0KaHflbipCbIHbI3
you must have read you must have read
oK aıiflbip oKanflbipjıap
s/he must have read they must have read
HUIJlOliaHpHlI HUMOHflHpHC
I must have worked we must have worked
HUinaıiflHpcHH HUIJ13HflHpCHHH3
you must have worked you must have vvorked
HlllJ13liflHp HUinaunHpnep
s /h e m u s t h a v e vvorked they must have worked
aiiflaHflbipbiıı aiiflaHflbipbic
I must have said we must have said
aHflaıiflbipcbm aitflaıiflbipQ UH b]3
you must have said you must have said
aiiflaıiflbip aiiflaıiflbipjıap
s/he must have said they must have said
B3MaK to write ropMetc to see OKaMaK to read MtrnıeMCK to work attTMaıc to say
 Paradigms 599

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

Negative Statement l
Singular Plural
1 -MaHflbipblH, -MSHflMpHH -MaHflbipblC, -MSHflHpHC

2 -MaHflHpCblH, -MSHflHpcMH. -MaHAbipCbIHtl3, -M3HHHpCHHH3,

-MaHCblH, -M3HCHH -MaHCbIHbI3, -M3HCHHH3
3 -Manflbip, -MaHjjHp -MaHflbipJiap, -MSHHHpJiep

S 3M aH flb]pblH HSMaHflblpblC
I m ust not have written vve m ust not have vvritten
a3MaHflbipobiH H3M aH flblpCLlH bI3
you must not have vvritten you m ust not have vvritten
B3Manabip a3MaHflupnap
s/he m ust not have vvritten they m ust not have vvritten

repMSHflHpHH repM3H««pnc
I must not have seen vve must not have seen
repMSHHHpcHH repM3HflHpCHHM3
you must not have seen you must not have seen
repM3HA«p repM3Hflnpnep
s/he must not have seen they must not have seen
OKaMaHflbipblH oKaMaHflbipuc
I must not have read vve must not have read
oıaMaHflbipcbiH 0KaManqupcbinbl3
you must not have read you must not have read
OKaMaıiflbip OKaManflbipjıap
s/he must not have read they must not have read
HUineMSHflHpHH HlUHeMOHflHpHC
I must not have vvorked vve must not have worked
HUIJleMSHHHpCHH HUIJieM3HflMpCHHH3
you must not have vvorked you must not have vvorked
HumeMSHflHp nuıneM3nnnpnep
s/he must not have vvorked they must not have worked
aitTMaHflbipblH attTMaHflbipuc
I must not have said vve must not have said
aiîTMaHflupcbin aiİTMaHflbipcbiHbis
you must not have said you must not have said
aiİTMaHflbip a iİT M a H flL ip Jia p
s/he must not have said they must not have said
A3M3K to vvrite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HnmeMeK to vvork aftmaK to say
600 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

Negative Statement II
S in g u lar P lural
1 -aH fl3imnpKH, -eH flanaııpHH -aH asrmupHc, -eH fl3Jinııpnc
2 -aH flaunHpcHH, -eHflsJiflHpcHH, -an H3JiHHpcHHH3, -sh A3imKpcnHH3,
-aH flancHH, -eH flsnoHH -aH fl3JicHHH3, -eH {(3Jichhh3
3 -aH -eH flsflflHp -aH HSjiflHpnep, -eH flanflHpnep
asan flannupBiH H3aHflSUUblpblC
I must not have vvritten we must not have vvritten
asaH flaımupctm H3aHflSJlflUpCUHbI3
you must not have written you must not have vmtten
S3aH flSJlflblp A3aH flaJiAHpJiap
s/he must not have written they must not have written
repeH flsnnHpHH repeH flsrfflHpHc
I must not have seen we must not have seen
repeH flsjjanpcHH repeH fl3JiflHpcHHM3
you must not have seen you must not have seen
repeH flsnflHp repeH fl3JiflHp.ııep
s/he must not have seen they must not have seen
OKaH AanfltıpuH OKaH aanflupuc
I must not have read we must not have read
OKaH flSJlflUpCblH OKaH fl3JlflblpCHHI>13
you must not have read you must not have read
OKaH AsJiflup OKaH flanflbipjıap
s/he must not have read they must not have read
HUIJ13H ASJIflHpHH H1UJ13HASİlAHpUC
I must not have worked we must not have vvorked
HUIJ13HflSJIflHpcHH
you must not have vvorked you must not have vvorked
HU1J13H flOJIflHp MU1JI3H aoJiflHpnep
s/he must not have vvorked they must not have vvorked
aiiflaH flanatıpbin aüflaH jjsiuupbic
I must not have said vve must not have said
aKflaH «3JiflbipcwH aiiflaH fl3JiflbipcbiHbi3
you must not have said you must not have said
aüjjaH nsuflfcip aiiflaH flsnflbipnap
s/he must not have said they must not have said
S3M3K io wriıe repMeK to see okümsk to read HaıneMeK to work aÜTMaK to say
 Paradigms 601

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

Q ııestion

S ingular P lu ra l
1 -ailflbipblHMbl, -eHflHpHHM H -aH flbipblO M b], -eU fliipH CM H

2 -a ıiflu p o b iH M b i, -eım ııp c H H M H , -aHflbipCbIHbl3MbI, -eHflHpOHI I13MM,

-aHCUHMH, -eHCHHMM -aHCbIHbI3MbI, -eHCHKH3MH
(-aHAupMHCblK, -eHflMpMMCMH, -aHflblpMbICbIHb!3, -eHflHpMHi:.1HM 3,
-aH M U C b in , -eHMHCHH -aHMUCbIHW3, -eHM H0HHM 3)
3 -aHflbipMU, -eilflHpMH - a H f lb ip n a p M b i, -eH flH pJiepM H

HSaHflbipblHMbl S 3aH flblpbIC M bl

must I have written? must we have written?
fl3aiWbipCbIHMbl H3aHHbipCbIHbI3M bI
must you have written? must you have written?
fl3 a n flb ip M b i a s a n a b ip /ıa p M b i
must s/he have written? must they have vvritten?
repeHflHpHHMH repenflHpMCMM
must I have seen? must we have seen?
repeHflHpcHHMH repeHHMpcMHH3MM
must you have seen? m ust you have seen?
repeHflHp m h repeHfliıpJiepMH
must s/he have seen? must they have seen?
OKaHAblpUKMbl OKaHflbipblCMb!
must I have read? must we have read?
OKaHAbipcbiHMbi OKaHUblpCblHblSMbl
must you have read? must you have read?
OKaiIflbipHbl OKaHflbipJiapMbi
m ust s/he have read? must they have read?
HUinanmıpHHMM MUinaHflHpHCMH
must I have worked? must we have vvorked?
HUinSHaMpCHHMH MmnsHanpcvmvi3MH
must you have vvorked? must you have vvorked?
HIUJISHAHpMM nuiJiamMpJiepMH
must s/he have worked? must they have vvorked?
aiiflaHflbipbiHMbi aitflanflbipbicMbi
must I have said? must we have said?
aitnaHflbipcbiHMbi aitflaHHbipcbiHbi3Mbl
must you have said? must you have said?
aöflaHflbipMbi aüflaHAupjıapMbi
must s/he have said? must they have said?
83MaK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read ııtuneMeK to work aiİTMaK to say
60 2 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

N egative Question 1

Singular Plural
1 -M aH flfclpU H M bl, -MSHflHpHHMM -M aH flbipblC M b], -MSHflHpHCMH

2 -M a H flU p C tlH M U , -MSHflKpCHHMH, -MaHflbipCblHblSMbl, -M0HflHpCHHM3MM,

-MaHCblHMbl, -M3HCMHMH -MaHCblHM SM bJ, -M3HCMHH3MH
(-M aH flH pM H C b lH , -MaHflHpM HCHH, -M aH flb ip M b IC b l« b l3 , -M3HflHpMMCHHH3,
-MaHMblCblH, -MSHMMCHH -MaHMblCbIHbI3, -M3HMMCKHH3)
3 -ManaUpMtl, -MSHflHpMH -M a H flb ip n a p M b i, -M o ıiflH p n e p M H

«3M aH flbipbIH M b! R3M aHKbipbICM bI

m u s t I h a v e n o t v v r itte n ? m u s t vve h a v e n o t v v r itte n ?
H3MaHflbipCblHM b! H3MaHAbipCbIHU3MbI
m u s t y o u h a v e n o t w r itte n ? m u s t y o u h a v e n o t v v r itte n ?
H3MaHflblpMbI 8 3 M a H flb ip j7 ap M U
m u s t s /h e h a v e n o t w r itte n ? m u s t t h e y h a v e n o t v v r itte n ?

repMSHflHpHHMH rep M 3 H flH p H C M H

must I have not seen? must vve have not seen?
repM3HflHpCHHMH repM 3H flM pC H H H 3M H
must you have not seen? m ust you h av e no t seen?
rep M 3 H flH p M H r e p M o n f lH p jıe p M H
must s/he have not seen? m u st th e y h a v e n o t se e n ?

O K aM aH flbipblH M bl O K a M aH flb ip u cM b i
m u st I h a v e n o t rea d ? . m u s t vve h a v e n o t r e a d ?
OKaManflbipcblHM bl 0K aM aH flbipC bIH bI3M bI
must you have not read? must you h a v e not r e a d ?
OKaMaHflbipMU OKaMaunbipnapMU
must s/he have not read? must they have not read?
HUineM3HflHpHHMM HUineM SH flHpH CM H
must I have not worked? must we have not worked?
HOineM 3HflHpCM HM H MUineM3itnMpOHHVI3MH
must you have not worked? must you have not vvorked?
H UIJieM 3HflHpM H H U IJleM SH flH pJiepM H
must s/he have not worked? must they have not vvorked?
aÜ TM aM flbipblH M bl a îfT M a n flb ip b ic M tı
must I have not said? must vve have not said?
aiİT M aH flbipC blH M bl aîtTM aH flbipC blH U SM LI
must you have not said? must you have not said?
a iİT M a a a b ip M b i a iİT M a ım b ip jıa p M bi
must s/he have not said? must they have not said?
H3MaK to vvrite repMeK 10 see OKaMaK to read mımeMeK to vvork aÜTMaK to say
 Paradigms 603

Subjective Present Perfect Tense

Negative Question II
Singular Plural
1 -aH flMfliipHHMM, -eH flaJlflHpHHMH -a H flaJlflHpHCM H, -eH flSIfflHpHCMH

2 -aH flsuıjHpcHHMH, -en ;pnflKpcni(Mn, - a n fl3/IflH pcH H H 3M H , -eH fl3JW HpOHHH3M H,

-aH flsncHHMH, -en aojichhmh -a H flancH H H 3M H , -eH flaJICHHH3MH
(-aHflSJIflHpMHCHH, -eH flSJMHpMHCMH, -aH HanflHpM HCHHM 3, -eH flOJIflHpMHCllHHS,
-3H flSJIMMCHH, -SH flSUMHCHH - a n flaJlMHCHHM3, - e n flSJIMHCMHHS)

3 -aH flonflHpMH, -eH flanflupM« -aH n a iiflH p jıe p M H , -eH flaU flH p ııep M H

S3aH flaJlflblpblHMbl 83aH aaJKbipbicMbi

must I have not written? m ust vve have not vvritten?
S33H flSIIflUpcUHMbl H33H nanablpcUHU3MU
must you have not vvritten? m ust you have not vvritten?
asan nanflbipMbi H3aH a a n f lb jp n a p M b i
must s/he have not vvritten? m ust they have not vvritten?

repeH ffonanpııHMH repen aaiJflHpMCMH

must I have not seen? m ust vve have not seen?
repeH flaJinHpcHHMH repen aannnpcHHH3MH
must you have not seen? m ust you have not seen?
repeıı flonaupMH repeH aaıiflHpjıepMM
must s/he have not seen? m ust they have not seen?

OKaH flOJIflUpblUMU oKaıı aa/m uptıcM bi

must 1 have not read? m ust vve have not read?
OKaH flanflbipcbinMbi OKaH flanflbipcbiHbi3Mbi
must you have not read? must you have not read?
OKaH flanflbipMbi OKan flanflbipnapMbi
must s/he have not read? m ust they have not read?

HU1JI3H flOJUHpHHMH Hiımaıı nanflHpHCMH

must 1 have not vvorked? m ust vve have not vvorked?
Huınaıı ;ıo;mnpci(i(Mn HUIJlaH flaJWHpcHHH3MH
must you have not vvorked? must you have not vvorked?
HIUJ131I flOJlflMpMH Huınan flojiflMpnepMH
must s/he have not vvorked? m ust they have not vvorked?

aüflai! nonAMpbiHMbi aünai! flaJiflbipbicMbi

must 1 have not said? m ust vve have not said?
attflan aanBbipcblHMbi aiiflaH H3JlflbipcblHW3MH
must you have not said? m ust you have not said?
aitflaıı floıiflbipMbi aitnaH naJiflbipjıapMbi
must s/he have not said? m ust they have not said?
D3MaK io wnıc ropMeK lo see ok:îm ;ik io read MiııneMeK io vvork hHtm uk to say
604 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Past indefinite Tense

S ta te m e n t

S ingular P lural

1 -H U M , -flHM -flblK, -flH K

.2 -atın, -a m -flbIH U3, -AHHH3

3 -flU , -flH -H u n a p , -AM nep

s a fltiM a sflb iK
I w r o te w e w ro te
aa flb in fl3Hb!«U3
y o u w ro te y o u w ro te

aW bi a s flb in a p
s/h e w r o t e th e y w ro te

r e p f ly M re p a y K
Isa w w esaw
re p n Y H rep aYH H 3
you saw you saw
repflM repaynep
s/h e s a w th e y sa w

OKaflbIM O K aflb lK
I re a d w ere a d
o s a flb iH 0 K a flb lH U 3
y o u read y o u re a d
O Kaflbl O K a flb iJia p
s/h e r e a d th e y r e a d

HlUJieflHM H u m e flH K
I w o rk e d w e w o rk e d

num enim n m n e fliiH H 3

y o u w o rk e d y o u w o rk e d
M UinejjH MuiJieflMnep
s /h e w o r k e d th e y w o rk e d

aJİTflblM aiİTflbIK
I s a id w e s a id
a ih 'flb i(( aiİTflbIH bl3
y o u s a id y o u s a id
aiİTflbi a iİT flb in a p
s /h e s a id th e y s a id

raMaz: 10 write repMeK to see okzm&k. to read HiuneMeK to work a#TMaK to say
 Paradigms 605

Past indefinite Tense

Negative Statement
S in g u lar P lural
1 -MaflUM, -MeflllM -MaflfclK, -MeflHK
2 -MaflUH, -MeflHH -MaflUI{fcI3, -MeflHHH3

3 -Maflbi, -Meflvt -Maflunap, -Meflunep

H3MaauM İJ3MaflbIK
I d id n ’t vvrite we didn’t write
H3MaflLIÜ
you d id n ’t w rite you d id n ’t write
H3MaflbI HSMaflbinap
s/he d id n ’t write they d id n ’t vvrite

repMeflMM repMeflHK
I d id n ’t see w e d id n ’t see
repMeAHu repMeflMHH3
you d id n ’t see you d id n ’t see
repMe.au repMenunep
s/he d id n ’t see they d id n ’t see

OKaManbiM oıtaMa;nMK
I did n ’t read w e dıdn’t read
OKaMaflbiH oKaManuHua
you d id n ’t read you d id n ’t read
OKaMaflu OKaMaAUJiap
s/he did n ’t read they d id n ’t read

HUIJieMeflMM MUlJleMeflHK
I did n ’t vvork we didn’t vvork
MUineMeflun wU!JieMeflvinss3
you d id n ’t vvork you d id n ’t vvork
HUi/ıeMeflH HUiJieMeflHJiep
s/he did n ’t work they d id n ’t vvork

aih'MaflbiM aÜTMaflbiK
I d id n ’t say w e didn’t say
aiiTMaabm aÜTMa0UHU3
you did n ’t say you d id n ’t say
aÖTMaau aÜTMaflbmap
s/he d id n ’t say they d id n ’t say
A3MaK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HUineMeK to work a#TM3K to say
606 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Past Indefinite Tense

Question
S ingular P lural

1 -flblMMbl, -flHMMH -flbIKMU, -flHKMH

2 -JH1IMH, -flHHMH -flbIHb]3Mbl, -flHHH3MH

3 -flbJMbl, -flMMH -flbiJiapMbi, -flHnepMH

H3flbIMMbI 33flb]KMbl
did I write? did we write?
H3flbIHMbI H3flbIHbl3MH
did you vvrite? did you vvrite?
«ÎTlblMbl a3flHjıapMU
did s/he vvrite? did they vvrite?

repnyM m m repayıcMM
did I see? did we see?
ropayHMH repflYHH3MH
did you see? did you see?
ropayMH rGpnY^epM"
did s/he see? did they see?

OKanblMMbl OKaflblKMbl
did I read? did vve read?
OKanbiHMbi OKaflfc!HbI3Mb!
did you read? did you read?
OKaflbIMbI OKaflbiJiapMbi
did s/he read? did they read?

HmjieflHMMH MIineflHKMH
did I work? did we vvork?
MUineflHHMH nuıneflnmi3MJi
did you vvork? did you work?
HlIIJleHHMH HUineflMJiepMH
did s/he work? did they work?

aihnbiMMH aiİTflbiKMbi
did 1 say? did w e say?
aitTflblHMbl aiİTflbJHblSMbl
did you say? did you say?
aihnuM bi aitrabinapMU
did s/he say? did they say?
«3Maıc to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HnuıeMeıc to work afrrMaK to say
 Paradigms 607

Past indefinite Tense

Negative Question
S in g u lar P lural

1 -MaatlMMU, -MeflHMMH -MaablKMbl, -MeflHKMH

2 -MaflblUMbl, -MeflHHMH -MaAbIHbl3MbI, -M eflHI(H3M It

3 -MaflbIMbI, -MeflHMM -MaflbinapMbi, -MenıınepMH

R3MaflbIMMbI S13MİWHKMbI
didn’t I vvrite? didn’t w e write?
ü3MaflbIHMU S3MaflbIHbl3MH
d id n 't you write? d id n ’t you write?
H3MaflbIMbI s3ManbinapMbi
didn’t s/he write? didn’t they vvrite?

repM eflM M M H rep M e flH K M H

didn’t I see? didn’t w e see?
rspMeflHHMH repM eflM H H SM H
d id n 't you see? d id n ’t you see?
repMejiHMM ro p M e flH fle p M H
didn’t s/he see? d id n ’t they see?

O K aM aublM M U OKaMaflblKMbl
didn’t I read? didn’t vve read?
OKaMaRUHMbl 0KaMaAbiHbi3Mbi
didn’t you read? d id n ’t you read?
OKaManuMbi OKaMaflbinapMbi
didn’t s/he read? d id n ’t they read?

HUineM eflHM M H HUIJleMeflHKMH

did n 't I vvork? didn’t we vvork?
HHJJieMeaHUMM HUİJleM eflHHH3M H
didn’t you vvork? d id n ’t you work?
HUIJieMeflHMH M iu n eM eflM n ep M H
didn’t s/he work? d id n 't they vvork?
aitTM aflblM M bl aiİTMaflbiKMbi
didn’t I say? didn’t w e say?
aÖTMaauHMtı aiİTMaflbIHbl3MbI
didn’t you say? didn’t you say?
aİtTMaUblMbl a ifT M a a b iJiap M b i
didn’t s/he say? did n ’t they say?

H3MaK to vvrite repMeK to see oıcaMaK to read HiımeMeK to work aftTMas: to say
608 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Habitual Past indefinite Tense

Statement
Singular Plural
1 -apflbiM, -ep^HM -apAUK, -epAHK
2 -apflbiH, -epAMU -apAbiHHS, -epAHHH3
3 -apAU, -epAH -apAUJiap, «epAHiıep

A3apAbIM fl3apAbiK
I used to write we used to write
S3apflb]H fl3apAbIHb!3
you used to write you used to write
srapAU sıaapAunap
s/he used to write they used to write
repepAHM repepAHK
I used to see we used to see
repepflMH repepAHHH3
you used to see you used to see
repepAH repepAMJiep
s/he used to see they used to see
oıcapAfciM oKapAUK
I used to read we used to read
oıcapAHH OKapAUHU3
you used to read you used to read
OKapAbi oKapAunap
s/he used to read they used to read
mıiJispAHM MlUJlOpAHK
I used to work we used to work
HUIİISpAHK HIUJI3PJXHHH3
you used to work you used to work
MUIİÎOpAM HUinapAMAep
s/he used lo work they used to work

a^İAapAbiM atİAapAkiK
I used to say we used to say
aiİAapAfem aMAapAMHH3
you used lo say you used to say
aitAapAU aiİAapAMJiap
s/he used to say îhey used to say
£3M itfc ıo v v riic ro p M e K to se e o k u m u k to rea d H tu n e M e K to w o r k h Ü t m u k t o s a y
 Paradigms 609

Habitual Past Indefinite Tense

Negative Statement
S in g u lar P lural
1 -M a3flbIM , -M eaflHM -M a3flU K , -M e3fliIK

2 - M a a n u H , -M ra a H H -M a a B H H U 3 , -Me3HHHM3

3 -M a3flbl, -M e3flH - M a s f lb in a p , -M e s flH jıe p

H3M a3flHM H3M a3flI4K

I d i d n ’t u s e t o v v rite w e d i d n ’t u s e t o v v rite
H3M a3flbIH H3M a3flbIHM 3
y o u d i d n ’t u s e to v v rite y o u d i d n ’t u s e t o v v rite
H3Ma3flbI 3 3 M a s f lb in a p
s / h e d i d n ’t u s e t o v v rite t h e y d i d n ’t u s e to v v rite

r e p M e a f liiM r e p M e 3 f liıK
I d i d n ’t u s e t o s e e vve d i d n ’t u s e t o s e e
r e p M e a f lu n r e p M e 3 flH H H 3
y o u d i d n ’t u s e t o s e e y o u d i d n ’t u s e to s e e
r e p M 6 3 f ln r e p M e 3 ,q n J ie p
s / h e d i d n ’t u s e t o s e e t h e y d i d n ’t u s e t o s e e

O K aM aSflHM 0 K a M a 3 flU K
I d i d n ’t u s e t o r e a d vve d i d n ’t u s e t o r e a d
O K aM asau K O K aM a3flbIH U 3
y o u d i d n ’t u s e t o r e a d y o u d i d n ’t u s e t o r e a d
O K a M a3 flu O K a M a 3 fln Jia p
s / h e d i d n ’t u s e t o r e a d t h e y d i d n ’t u s e t o r e a d

HUIJieM eSflHM HIUJieM esBMK

I d i d n ’t u s e t o w o r k vve d i d n ’t u s e t o v v o r k
H uiJieM egflH H H IlineM e3flM H H 3
y o u d i d n ’t u s e t o v v o rk you d id n ’t use to vvork
n m neM e3H n nıuneMe3flnnep
s/he d id n ’t use to work t h e y d i d n ’t u s e t o v v o rk

aiİTM a3flbiM aiiT M a3 flb iK

I d i d n ’t u s e t o s a y vve d i d n ’t u s e t o s a y
a 8 T M a 3 flb in a iiT M a a flu H b ra
you d i d n ’t use to say y o u d i d n ’t u s e t o s a y
a itr M a s f lb i a ifT M a sflb U ia p
s / h e d i d n ’t u s e t o s a y t h e y d i d n ’t u s e to s a y

A3MaK to write repMeK to see oıcaMaıcto read HtnneMeK to work aİtmaK to say
610 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Habitual Past indefinite Tense

Q u e s tio n

S in g u lar P lural
1 -ap flH M M b l, -epflH M M H -ap flb lK M b l, -epflK K M H

2 -ap flb lH M H , -epflKHM M -a p flb m b I3 M b l, -epA HH H3M H

. 3 -ap flb lM b l, -epUHMM - a p f lb in a p M b t, -ep A H Jiep M H

H 3apflbIM M H 83apflb1KM bI
d id I u s e to w r ite ? d i d vve u s e t o v v r ite ?
s3apnunM H S3apH I,IH bI3M H
d i d y o u u s e to w r ite ? d id y o u u s e to w r ite ?
H 3apflblM bI n s a p A b in a p M U
d i d s / h e u s e t o v v rite ? d id th e y u s e to w r ite ?

repepnM M M H re p e p flH K M H
d id I u s e to s e e ? d id w e u s e to s e e ?
r e p e p f lH H M tı rep e p n n H H 3 M H
d id y o u u s e to s e e ? d id y o u u s e to s e e ?
r e p e p f lH M H r e p e p f lm ı e p M H
d id s /h e u s e to s e e ? d id th e y u s e to s e e ?

O K apAblM M bI O K apflbiK M bl
d id I u s e to re a d ? d id vve u s e to r e a d ?
oK ap flb iH M b i 0 K a p flU H b I3 M U
d i d y o u u s e to r e a d ? did you use to read?
O K a p fltlM U O K a p f ltm a p M t!
d id s /h e u s e t o r e a d ? d id th e y u s e to r e a d ?

H lUJlspflHM M H HUIJMpflMKMH
d id I u s e to w o rk ? d i d vve u s e to v v o rk ?
HUIJlapAMHMH
d i d y o u u s e to v v o rk ? d i d y o u u s e t o v v o rk ?
m nnopn»M » H U iJiap A H n ep M H
d id s /h e u s e to w o r k ? d id th e y u s e to w o r k ?

a iifla p flb iM M b i ailflap flb iK M b l

did I use to say? did vve use to say?
a itn a p flb iH M H aitflap A b iH b i3 M b l
d id y o u u s e to sa y ? d id y o u u s e to sa y ?
a ifn a p flb iM b i a ü fla p flb in a p M M
d id s /h e u s e to s a y ? d id th e y u s e to s a y ?

fl3Maıt to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HtujıeMeK to vvork aÜTMaK to say
 Paradigms 611

Habitual Past indefinite Tense

Negative Question
Singular P lu ra l
1 -MaŞIJblMMM, -Me3flHMMH -MaSflHKMbl, -Me3flHKM H
2 -Ma3I(bIHMbI, -MeSmHHMH -M a3(HHHbI3M bI, -Me3flHHK3MH
3 -MaaflUMbi, -MeanHMH -MaSflHJlapMM, -MeSflHJiepMH

S3Ma^qtlMMH H3M a3flblKM H

didn’t I use to vvrite? didn’t we use to write?
a3MÜ3flUHMU H3Ma3BHHM3Mbl
didn’t you use to write? didn’t you use to write?
H3Ma3f1bIMU H 3M a3A bm apM bI
didn’t s/he use to write? didn’t they use to write?
repMe3nHMMH rep M e a flH K M H
didn’t I use to see? didn't we use to see?
repMe3flHHMH repMe3flMHM3MH
didn't you use to see? didn’t you use to see?
r0pMe3fldMH rapMe3flHJiepMH
didn’t s/he use to see? didn't they use to see?
0K aM a3flbIM M bI O K aM aaflbiK M H
didn’t I use to read? didn’t we use to read?
O K aM a3flM H M U 0K aM a3flbIH U 3M bI
didn’t you use to read? didn’t you use to read?
0 K a M a 3 fltlM H O K a M a s n b in a p M b i
didn’t s/he use to read? didn’t they use to read?
HUIJleMeŞUMMMM H iu n eM esaM K M H
didn’t I use to work? didn’t we use to work?
HiııneMe3flHHMH HUlJieMe3flM«M3MH
didn’t you use to work? didn’t you use to work?
MuıneMeaAHMH HUHieMe3AMJiepMH
didn’t s/he use to work? didn't they use to work?
aitTM a3flW M M H aitT M a^n b lK M b l
didn’t I use to say? didn’t we use to say?
aÜTMaaabiHMU aÜTMa3flUHH3MU
didn’t you use to say? didn't you use to say?
aÖTMaaınuMM a ir r M a s u b in a p M b i
didn’t s/he use to say? didn’t they use to say?
S3M3K to write repMeK to see OKaMas to read «mneMeK to work aitmaK to say
61 2 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Subjective Past indefinite Tense

Statement
S in g u lar P lural
1 - b i n f l u p u n , -H nflH pH H - b i n f l u p t ı c , -M nflH pH c

2 -tlH H tip C U H , -MüflHpCMH, - u n f lb ip c b iH b ia , -H rm n p c m < ıi3 ,

-u n c u n , -u n cu n -binCbIHbI3, -MnCHHH3
3 -unflup, -rn iflH p -Hnflbipjıap, -MnflHpjıep

fl3 u n flL ip tm H3binflbipblC

a p p a re n tly I w r o te a p p a re n tly w e w ro te
a s tı r i f lb i p c u H ıi3 b in A u p c u H b i3
a p p a re n tly y o u w ro te a p p a re n tly y o u w ro te
sautiflup a a tın u u p n a p
a p p a re n tly s /h e w ro te a p p a re n tly th e y w ro te

rep ^ n A H p u H re p y n flH p M c
a p p a re n tly I s a w a p p a re n tly w e s a w
rG pynflH pcH H re p y n A n p c M H M 3
a p p a re n tly y o u sa w a p p a re n tly y o u sa w
repynflHp repynflupnep
a p p a re n tly s /h e sa w a p p a r e n t l y t h e y savv

o K a n n b ip b iH O K a n n u p tıc
a p p a re n tly I r e a d a p p a re n tly w e r e a d
O K a n flu p c b iH 0 K a n f lu p c b iH b i3
a p p a re n tly y o u re a d a p p a re n tly y o u re a d
O K anaup O K a rm u p n a p
a p p a re n tly s /h e re a d a p p a re n tly th e y re a d

MUIJW nflHpHH H u iJian flH p H C

a p p a re n tly I w o rk e d a p p a re n tly w e w o rk e d
HmjıanflHpcMH HlUJ13nj|HpCHHH3
a p p a re n tly y o u w o rk e d a p p a re n tly y o u w o rk e d
H iıiiia n f lu p H m n a n flH p n e p
a p p a r e n tly s /h e v v o rk ed a p p a r e n tly th e y v v o rk ed

aitabinuMpuH a i t n u r m b i p b ic
a p p a r e n t ly I s a id a p p a r e n tly w e s a id
a iİK b in flb tp c b iH a { tK tın flb ip c u H b i3
a p p a r e n tly y o u s a id a p p a r e n t ly y o u s a id
a ftflb iım b ip a S flu n a u p J ia p
a p p a r e n tly s /h e s a id a p p a re n tly th e y s a id

A3MaK to vvriîe repMeK to see OKanaK to read HHineMCK to work aftmaK to say
 Paradigms 613

Subjective Past indefinite Tense

Negative Statement
S in g u lar P lural
1 -MaHflblpblH, -MSHflHpHH -M aH JtbipblC , -MSHflHpHC

2 -M a H B U p cH H , -MSHAHpCHH, -M aH flblpC U H W 3, -M 3H flH pCIIH H3,

-M aH CblH , -M3HCHH -M a H c b in b ia , - m o h c h h h s

3 -Manjlblp, -MSHflHp -M aHfltıpnap, -MSHflHpJiep

H3MaHflMpHH H3M aH flHpM C

apparently I didn’t write a p p a r e n t l y vve d i d n ’t v v rite
H3MaHflb]pcblH H3MaHflfeipCbIHU3
apparently you didn't vvrite a p p a r e n t l y y o u d i d n ’t v v r ii:
H3Mannbip H 3 M a H flu p n a p
apparently s/he didn’t vvrite apparently they didn't vvriıo
rep M S H flH p M H repMSHflMpHC
a p p a r e n t l y I d i d n ’t s e e a p p a r e n t l y vve d i d n ’t s e e
repMSHflHpCHH rep M 3 H flH p c H H M 3
a p p a r e n t l y y o u d i d n ’t s e e a p p a r e n t l y y o u d i d n ’t s e e
r e p M 3 t if l n p r e p M S H f lu p j ıe p
apparently s/he didn’t see a p p a r e n t l y t h e y d i d n ’t s e e

OKaMaHflbipbJN O K a M aıiflb ip b ic
a p p a r e n t l y I d i d n ’t r e a d apparently vve d i d n 't r e a d
OKaMaHAupcHH OKaManflbipcbiHbi3
a p p a r e n t l y y o u d i d n ’t r e a d apparently y o u d i d n ’t read
o K a M a ım u p OKaMaHflbipjıap
a p p a r e n t l y s / h e d i d n ’t r e a d apparently they d i d n ’t reao
MUineM3iwMpıııı HtUJleMSHJtHpHC
a p p aren tly l d id n ’t w o rk apparently we didn’t work
H [U /leM 3llflH pCH U HIUIieM3HaMpCHHH3
a p p aren tly y o u d id n ’t vvork apparently you didn’t vvorl
KUlJieM3HflHp MUIJleMSHflHpJlep
apparently s/he didn’t vvork apparently they didn’t vvork
aiiTMaıiAbipbm a H T M a ı m t ıp u c
a p p a re n tly I d i d n ’t say a p p a r e n t l y vve d i d n ’t s a y
a iİT M a ıiflL ip c b in a£fT M aH flbipcbiH M 3
a p p a re n tly y o u d id n 't say a p p a r e n t l y y o u d i d n ’t s a y
aUTMaıiflup a iİT M a n n u p J ia p
a p p a r e n t l y s / h e d i d n ’t s a y a p p a r e n t l y t h e y d i d n ’t s a y

R3M3K to write ropMCK (o see oksmek to read HiuncMeıc to work hütmük to say
614 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Subjective Past indefinite Tense

Question
S in g u la r P lu ra l

1 -birfflbipblHMbl, -HnflHpilHMH -binflblpblCMbl, -MITOMpMCMM

2 -fcirm bipM & ıcM Kı -im n u p u m m , -binfltipMHCHKbI3,
-blnMblCblH, -HnMHCHH -binMbICbIHbI3, -HnMMCHHH3
(-binflfclpCblHMbl, -HnflHpCHHMH, -binflbipCbIHbI3MbI, -HnflH pCH HK3M H ,
-bincuHMbi, -HncHUMM -bincbIHbI3MbI, -HncHHH3MH)
3 -binflUpMbl, -HnflHpMM -binflupjjapMbi, -MnnnpnepMH
H3linntipMHMbI SI3blnflbipblCMbI
d i d i t t u m o u t I v v ro te ? d i d i t t u m o u t vve v v ro te ?
HSbinMblCMH 93blnMbICtIHU3
d id it tu rn o u t y o u w ro te ? d id it t u m o u t y o u w r o te ?
H 3 b in fltlp M tI asbinflbipnapMbi
d id it tu m o u t s /h e w ro te ? d i d i t t u m o u t t h e y v v ro te ?

repynnHpHHMH repynflHpHCMH
d id it t u m o u t I s a w ? d i d i t t u m o u t vve s a v v ?
re p y n M H C M H rep y n M M C H H H 3
d id it t u m o u t y o u s a w ? d i d i t t u r a o u t y o u sav v ?
r e p Y fM H p M H repyıtniipnepMH
d id it tu rn o u t s /h e s a w ? d i d i t t u m o u t t h e y sa v v ?

OKanflbiptiHMbi OKanflbipucMtı
d id it tu m o u t I re a d ? d id it tu m o u t w e re a d ?
OKanMMCbm 0 K a n M b ic b i« b i3
d id it tu r n o u t y o u re a d ? d id it tu rn o u t y o u re a d ?
OKanflbipMbi OKanflbipnapMbi
d id it tu rn o u t s /h e re a d ? d i d it t u r n o u t t h e y r e a d ?

HIUJ13HHHPHHMH HUIJlanflM pHCMH

d id it tu rn o u t I v v o rk ed ? d i d i t t u r n o u t vve v v o r k e d ?
MiUJiariMHCHH H IU n3nM H CH HH3
d id it tu rn o u t y o u w o rk e d ? d id it t u r n o u t y o u v v o rk ed ?
H iıın a n flH p M H HiunanflHpjıepMH
d id it tu m o u t s /h e w o r k e d ? d id it tu m o u t th e y v v o rk ed ?

aifAbiımupuHMbi aitnunfltıpbicMbi
d id it tu rn o u t I s a id ? d i d i t t u m o u t vve s a i d ?
aifnbiıiMbicbm a ö flb in M b ic b iH b i3
d id it tu m o u t y o u s a id ? d i d it t u r n o u t y o u s a i d ?
a if n u n f lb ip M b i a tt u b in flU p n a p M b i
d id it tu rn o u t s /h e s a id ? d id i t t u r n o u t th e y s a id ?

«3MaK to vvrite repMeK io see oKaMaK to read HmneMeK to work aîfrMaK to say
 Paradigms 615

Subjective Past Indefinite Tense

N egative Q uestion
Singular Plural
1 -MaHflHpfelHMH, -MSHflHpMHMH -MaHfllipblCMH, -MSHflHpHCMH
2 -MaHnbipMHCHH, -M3HÜHPMHCHH, -M aH flblpM blC bIH bl3, -M3HJIHPMHCHHH3,
-M aH M U CblH , -M3HMMCHH -M aH M bIC bIH bl3, -M3HMHCHHH3
(-MaHflbipCblHMbl, -MOHflHpCHHMH, -MaHflbipCbIHbI3MbI, -M3HflKpCHHM3MH,
-M aH CblH M bl, -M3HCHHMH -M aH C blH H 3M U , -M3HCHHH3MH)

3 -MaHUbipMbl, -MOHflKpMH -MaHflbipjiapMbl, -MSHHHpJiepMH

nsMaünupuHMbi a3MaHflbipbicMbi
didn’t it tura out I wrote? didn't it tum out we wrote?
H3MaHMbICbIH a3MaıiMbicbinbi3
didn’t it tum out you wrote? didn’t it tum out you wrote?
H3MaHflblpMbl HSMaımbipnapMbi
didn’t it tum out s/he wrote? didn’t it tum out they wrote?
rspMOHflHpHHMH repM3HflHpHCMH
didn’t it tum out I saw? didn’t it tum out we saw?
repMSHMHCHH repM 3HM M CM HM 3
didn’t it tum out you saw? didn't it turn out you saw?
repMSHflHpMH re p M O H flu p J ie p M H
didn’t it turn out s/he saw? didn’t it tum out they saw?
OKaMaHflbipiIHMbl OKaManflbipbicMtı
didn’t it tum out I read? didn’t it tum out we read?
OKaMaHMUCblH OKaMaHMİJCbIHbI3
didn’t it tum out you read? didn’t it turn out you read?
O K a M a ıiflu p M b i o K a M a ıiflb ip n a p M b i
didn’t it tum out s/he read? didn't it tum out they read?
HUIJieMSHflHpHHMH HUIJleMSHflHpHCMH
didn’t it turn out I worked? didn’t it tum out we worked?
HUineM3HMMCHHH3
didn’t it tum out you worked? didn't it turn out you worked?
Hlim eM O H flH pM H M IU JieM SH flH pjlepM H
didn't it turn out s/he worked? didn’t it turn out they worked?
aÜ T M aH flU pblH M bl aiİTMaıiflbipbicMbi
didn’t it tum out I said? didn’t it tum out we said?
aÜTM aH M blCblH attrM aH M U O b iH b ra
didn’t it tum out you said? didn’t it tum out you said?
aîtTMaHflbipMbl aiİTMaHflbipiiapMu
didn’t it tum out s/he said? didn’t it turn out they said?
5t3MaK to wriıe repMeK to see oıcaMaK to read nuıneMeK to work aÜTMaıe to say
616 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Past Continuous Tense

Statement
S in g u lar P lural
1 -spflbiM, -ftapflMM -HpflblK, -iiapflllK
2 -HpflHH, -itapAHH -apauHU3, -iispflHHvıa
3 -apflbi, -Hapflu -apflbinap, -Kspannep

aaapflbiM aaapflbiK
I was writing w e were writing
«3HpflblH a3apflbiHU3
you were writing you w ere writing
H3apflbl aaapflbijıap
s/he was writing they were writing

repitepflMM repiiapflMK
I was seeing we were seeing
repiiapflHH rep«3paH«H3
you w ere seeing you w ere seeing
rapüapflH repîtapflHJiep
s/he was seeing they were seeing

OKaapflbiM OKaapflUK
I was reading we were reading
OKaapflbiH OKaapflbiHU3
you were reading you w ere reading
oKaapflbi OKaapflbiuap
s/he was reading they were reading

HuıueiiapflHM HUlJieÖspflMK
I was working we were working
HiıiJieüapflHH HUlJleiİ3pflHHH3
you were working you were working
HiUJieilapflH HUineibpflHJiep
s/he was working they were worlcing

aitnapflbiM aitflapntiK
I was saying we were saying
aiiflspfltın aiiflapflbiHbi3
you w ere saying you w ere saying
aitflapflbi aitnapflbijıap
s/he was saying they were saying
S3M3K to wıite repMeK (o see OKaMaK to read HumeMeK to work attTMaK to say
 Paradigms 617

Past Continuous Tense

Negative Statement
Singular Plural
1 -MaapnuM, -MeiıapflHM -MaapflUK, -MeiiapflUK
2 -Maapnun. -MettapauH -M a a p flU H U 3 , -M eftspflH H H i

3 -Maspflu, -MeitapflH -Maapflbmap, -M e ifsp flH Jie p

A3MaapAbiM !I3MUSlp;ji,IK
I wasn’t writing we weren’t writing
fl3MaflpflUH a3MaapAui(U3
you weren't writing you weren’t writing
H 3 M a n p a tı a 3 M a a p a u J ia p
s/he wasn’t writing they weren't writing
repMeiispflHM repMeilopaHK
I wasn’t seeing we weren’t seeing
repMeiiopflMH repMeüspAHHX3
you weren’t seeing you weren’t seeing
repMeöspflH repMeöapflHJiep
s/he wasn’t seeing they weren’t seeing
o tca M a a p flb iM oKaMaapAUK
I wasn’t reading we weren’t reading
OKaMaapnuü O K a M aa p flb iH b is
you weren't reading you weren't reading
OKaMaapabi OKaMaapAunap
s/he wasn’t reading they weren’t reading
HUJJieMeiiapflHM HUlJleMeiiapflHK
I wasn’t working we weren't working
HLUJieMeÜSpflHH HiuneMeiİ3pflMHH3
you weren't working you weren’t working
MinjıeMeüapAM ııu ın e M e H a p B H J ie p
s/he wasn't working they weren't working
a iİT M a a p n u M aifT M a a p A U K
I wasn’t saying we weren’t saying
aÜ T M a a p a b iH aÜ T M a a p A u m > i3
you weren’t saying you weren't saying
a ü T M a sp flb i a Ü T M a a p A U iia p
s/he vvasn’t saying they weren’t saying
S3M3K to wıite repMeK to see osaMaK to read HtımeMeK to work aftrMaK to say
6 18 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Past Continuous Tense

Question
S in g u lar P lural

1 -apflblMMbl, -ifopflHMMH -HpflblKMbl, -itapflHKMH

2 -npaHHMbi, -JtspflHHMM -HpflbIHbI3MbI, -{İ3pflHHH3MH
3 -a p flb iM b i, -öapflH M M -HpflbinapMbi, -üapnHnepMH

H38pflbIMMbl H3HpflblKMbI
was I writing? vvere we vvriting?
H3BpflbIHMb1 H3HpflblHbI3MbI
were you vvriting? vvere you vvriting?
H3apflbIMbl fl3HpflbinapMM
was s/he vvriting? vvere they vvriting?

rspitspflHMMH repHapflHKMH
vvas I seeing? vvere vve seeing?
repilapflHUMM r e p M a p f ln n n 3 M i ı
were you seeing? vvere you seeing?
repflapflHMH repiiapaMJiepMH
was s/he seeing? vvere they seeing?

oKanpflbiMMbi O K aapflbiK M bi
vvas I reading? were vve reading?
oKaapflbTHMH O K anpflbiH bi3M bi
were you reading? vvere you reading?
oKaapflbiMH oKaapflbiJiapMbi
vvas s/he reading? vvere they reading?

HuıneiiapaHMMH HUIJieilOpflMKMH
vvas I working? were vve vvorking?
HUineiispflHHMM HUUlett3pflHHK3M H
vvere you vvorking? vvere you vvorking?
HiujıeiiapflHMH HiuueiiapflHJiepMH
vvas s/he vvorking? vvere they vvorking?

a iijıa p n b iM M U aHnapflblKMbi
was I saying? vvere vve saying?
aitnapflbinMbi aitu n p flb iH b i3 M b i
vvere you saying? v v e re you saying?
aiin a p flb iM b i a iif la p n b in a p M b i
vvas s/he saying? w e r e th e y s a y in g ?

s 3muk to write ropMeıc to see OKaMaK to read mu/ıeMefc to work aih*Maıc to say
 Paradigms 619

Past Continuous Tense

Negative Question
S in g u lar P lural

1 -M a a p flU M M U , -M eitepflH M M H -MaHpflbIKMH, -M eiispflH K M H

2 -M a 3 p flU « M b I, -M eilspnH H M M -M aH pH bIH bI3M lJ, -M eiİ3pflM HH3M H

3 -M a a p flH M b i, -M eü ap flH M H - M a a p n t m a p M b i, -M e ita p n H Jie p M H

HSM aSpflblM M bl S SM aitpflblK M H

w asn’t I vvriting? vveren’t vve vvriting?
a a M a a p flU H M U a 3 M a a p jjH H H 3 M b i
vveren’t you writing? w eren’t you m itin g ?
H 3M M pflbIM U a 3 M a a p n u jıa p M b ]
vvasn’t s/he writing? vveren't they writing?

rep M e ita p flH M M M rep M e ita p flH K M M

w asn’t I seeing? vveren't w e seeing?
repMeifopnıiHMH ro p M e iia p j(H H H 3 M H
vveren’t you seeing? w eren’t you seeing?
re p M e iis p f lH M H repMeitapflHJiepMH
w asn 't s/he seeing? w eren’t they seeing?

oKaMaapflUMMtı O K aM asp flb lK M b l

w asn’t I reading? w eren’t vve reading?
OKaMaapauHMU 0 K aM aspflH H jbI3M bI
w eren’t you reading? vveren’t you reading?
OKaMaHpflbiMfci O K a M a s p f lu n a p M t ı
w asn 't s/he reading? vveren’t they reading?

H iıın eM eiisp flH M M H HmneMeüapnHKMH

w asn 't I vvorking? w eren’t vve working?
M UIJieM eitspflM HM H m u JieM eS sp flM H H S M H
w eren 't you working? vveren’t you vvorking?
H tu n e M eö sp n H M M muneMeitepflHiıepMH
w asn’t s/he working? vveren’t they vvorking?

aiİTM aH pflbIM M ti a fiT M aap flb iK M b i

vvasn’t I saying? vveren’t vve saying?
aJİTM aapflM H M bi aiİT M a a p ab iH H 3 M b i
w eren’t you saying? vveren’t you saying?
atİTM aflpH biM U a itrM a n p jiM J ia p M H
w asn 't s/he saying? vveren’t they saying?
A3MaR to write repMeıc îo see OKaMaK to read unuıeMeK to work aMTMas to say
620 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Past Perfect Tense

Statement
S in g u la r P lu ra l

1 - tin flU M , -MIIflHM -b in flb IK , -H nflH K

2 -H n flH H , -HJIflMH -UTOİJHU3,

3 - u n n u , - u rm H -b iT O b lJia p , - ıı ıi f li ıj ıe p

B3UTO11M H3binflbIK
I h a d v v ritte n w e h a d w ritte n
H 3 tırw u n H3Haqb]Hbl3
y o u h a d w r itte n y o u h a d v v r itte n
ü3binfltı H 3 b iım u n a p
s /h e h a d w r itte n th e y h a d w r itte n

repyriflHM repyıifliiK
I h ad seen w e h ad seen
re p y n flH U repynflnnn3
you h ad seen you h a d seen
rap y n R H rep y n n u n e p
s /h e h a d s e e n th e y h a d se en

o K a n flb iM O K an flb lK
I h a d read w e h ad read
o x a n flb in 0KanflbiHbi3
y o u h a d read yo u h a d read
o K a n flu O K a riflb iJia p
s /h e h a d re a d th e y h a d re a d

HUiJianflHM ilU İIS n flH K

I h a d w o rk ed w e h a d w o rk e d
ıminanflHH H U inonflH H H 3
y o u h a d w o rk ed y o u h a d w o rk e d
H U iJianflH H U iJisn flH Jiep
s /h e h a d w o r k e d th e y h a d w o rk e d

a iiflb irm u M a iia b in flb iK

I h a d s a id w e h a d s a id
a itn u n f lb iH a ifj(b irm b in b i3
y o u h a d s a id y o u h a d s a id
a iifltın a u a ö a u n jıu n a p
s /h e h a d s a id th e y h a d s a id

H3MaK io vvrite repMeK to see osaMaK to read MUineMeK to work aftrMaK to say
 Paradigms 621

Past Perfect Tense

Negative Statement
Singular Plural
1 -M aH flblM , -MSHflMM -M alIflb lK , -MSHflHK

2 -M aH flH H , -MSHflHH -M a H fltIH U 3 , -M3HflHHH3

3 - M a H n b in a p , -M S H flvınep

H3M alW HM SBMaHflblK

I h a d n ’t w r i t t e n w e h a d n ’t w r i t t e n
»3M aH H bm 33M aH flbIH bI3
y o u h a d n ’t w r i t t e n y o u h a d n ’t w r i t t e n
H3MaHnu H3MaHfltmap
s / h e h a d n ’t w r i t t e n t h e y h a d n ’t w r i t t e n

repM S H flU M r e p M s ıif lH K

I h a d n ’t s e e n w e h a d n ’t s e e n
ra p M 3 H fliif ( repM3HHHHH3
y o u h a d n ’t s e e n y o u h a d n ’t s e e n
rep M O H fl» rep M 3 H flM H e p
s / h e h a d n ’t s e e n t h e y h a d n ’t s e e n

O K aM anflbiM O K aM aH flblK
I h a d n ’t r e a d w e h a d n ’t r e a d
OKaMaHflUH O K aM an flb iH b is
y o u h a d n ’t r e a d y o u h a d n ’t r e a d
O K aM aH flU O K a M aH flb m ap
s / h e h a d n ’t r e a d th e y h a d n ’t r e a d

HUJJieMOHflHM MUIJIeMSHflHK
I h a d n ’t w o r k e d w e h a d n ’t w o r k e d
HlUJieM 3H «HH HUIJjeM3HflHHM3
y o u h a d n ’t w o r k e d y o u h a d n 't w o rk e d
HUlJieMSHflH munehtam m ep
s / h e h a d n ’t w o r k e d t h e y h a d n ’t w o r k e d

aftTM aHflblM aiİTM aH flbiK

I h a d n ’t s a i d w e h a d n ’t s a id
a ftT M aH flb i« aiJTMaHflHHbi3
you h ad n ’t said you h ad n ’t said
a Ü T M a ım tı aÜTMaHflbinap
s/he h a d n ’t said they h a d n ’t said
A3M3K to write repMeK to see osauaK to read HumeMeK to work aütm ek to say
622 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Past Perfect Tense

Q uestion

Singular Plural
1 -birfflHMMH, -HRflHMMH -birlflblKMbl, -HnflMKMH
2 -tınflbiHMu, -HUBHIJMH 'blHUbXHbl3Mbl, -HrfflHI(H3MH
3 -MFlUblMbl, -HnAHMH -binnbiJiapMta, -nriflHJiepMH

a3tniflbiMMbi A3binflbIKMbI
had I written? had we written?
H3UnflblHMbI SI3binflbIHbI3MbI
had you written? had you written?
S3bIHHblMbl HSbiriflbiJiapMbi
had s/he written? had they written?
repynflHMMH repynflHKMH
had I seen? had we seen?
repynflHHMH r0pYnflHHH3MH
had you seen? had you seen?
repynflMMM repynflHflepMH
had s/he seen? had they seen?
oKanflbiMMbi OKaruuKMbi
had I read? had we read?
OKanauHMbi OKanflbiHbi3Mbi
had you read? had you read?
OKariflbiMbi oKannbinapMu
had s/he read? had they read?
MUlJlannHMMH HUlilSIIflHKMli
had I worked? had we worked?
MlUJianjlHHMH HUII)3nflMHH3MH
had you worked? had you worked?
KUiJianaıiMH hiuJiatiflHJiepM»
had s/he worked? had they worked?
ailflbirm biM M bi aiiflb in jib iK M b i
had I said? had we said?
aitflbirmbiHMbi a itn u n f lb in b i3 M b i
had you said? had you said?
aiiflunflbiMbi aüflbinflbmapMU
had s/he said? had they said?
g3Matc to vvrite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HiııneMeK to vvork aftTMaK to say
 Paradigms 623

Past Perfect Tense

Negative Question
Singular Plural
1 -MaHflblMMbl, -MSHflKMMH -MaHflblKMbl, -MSHflHKMH
2 -MaHflblHMbl, -MSHflHHMH -MaHflblHtI3Mbl, -M3HflHHH3MH
3 -MaHBblMU, -MSHflHMH -MaHflbmapMbi, -M3H®uıepMH

nsMaımuMMU H3MaHHblKMbl
hado’t I written? hadn't we written?
S3M aH flblH bI3M bl
hadn’t you written? hadn’t you written?
SOMaHflbIMbI H3MaHflbinapMbI
hadn't s/he written? hadn’t they written?
repMSHflHMMH repM3HflHKMH
hadn’t I seen? hadn't we seen?
repManflHKMH repM3HflHHH3MH
hadn’t you seen? hadn't you seen?
repMSHflHMH repM3HflMnepMH
hadn’t s/he seen? hadn’t they seen?
oKaMaıiAbiMMU OK aM aH AblKM U
hadn’t I read? hadn’t we read?
OKaMaıratiHMH 0KaMaHflb!HH3MH
hadn’t you read? hadn’t you read?
oKaManflbiMüi oKaMaHAbinapMbi
hadn’t s/he read? hadn’t they read?
HUIJieMSHflHMMM HUlJieMSHHHKMM
hadn't I worked? hadn't we worked?
HiujıeMsıiflMUMH HUIHeMaHflMHM3MH
hadn’t you vvorked? hadn’t you worked?
HUUİCMOlIflHMII HUlJieMStlflMilepMH
hadn’t s/he worked? hadn't they worked?
aHTM aiIflblM M bl aiİT M aiiflblK M bl
hadn’t l said? hadn ’( we said?
aÜTMaımbiUMH a{İTMaHflblHbI3Mbl
hadn’t you said? hadn't you said?
aÜTMatmbiMbi attTManflbiJiapMbi
hadn’t s/he said? hadn’t they said?
st3MaK lo writc ropMCK io see otcaMaK io read MUineMeK to work aKTMas to say
6 24 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Statement
S in g u la r P lu ra l

1 -jfÇaKflbIM, -XfiKn.KU -JHaKBblK, -3^eKJtHK

2 -x;aKfluiii>i3, -açeKflHHH3
3 -ac;aKHU, -açeKMH -a ç a ıc n H jıa p , - * ;e K f ln j] e p

H32S;aKflbIM H3»;aKHbiK
I h a d in te n d e d to w r ite w e h a d i n t e n d e d t o v v rite
S3*,aK flLJH S 3 * ;aK flb iH b i3
y o u h a d in te n d e d to w r ite y o u h a d i n t e n d e d t o v v rite
H 3*;aK jiH H3x;aKHMnap
s /h e h a d in te n d e d to w r ite t h e y h a d i n t e n d e d t o v v rite

repx;eKflHM repaçeKflMK
I h a d in te n d e d to s e e w e h a d in te n d e d to s e e
re p a ç e K f lH H rep at;eK flH H M 3
y o u h a d in te n d e d to s e e y o u h a d in te n d e d to s e e
r e p a c e K f lH rapaceKflMJiep
s /h e h a d in te n d e d to s e e th e y h a d in te n d e d to s e e

OKHjiÇaKflMM OKaaçaımbiK
I h a d in te n d e d to r e a d vve h a d i n t e n d e d t o r e a d
OKasçaKKUH 0Ka»;aKflHHU3
y o u h a d in te n d e d to r e a d y o u h a d in te n d e d to r e a d
OKaaçaKflbi OKaaçaKMunap
s /h e h a d in te n d e d to r e a d th e y h a d in te n d e d to re a d

mıınezçeKAnM M tu/ıeaçeK B H K
I h a d in te n d e d to w o r k vve h a d i n t e n d e d t o w o r k
HUiJiea^eKHHH HLUJie*,eKflHHH3
y o u h a d i n t e n d e d t o v v o rk y o u h a d i n t e n d e d t o v v o rk
nm ne>K ;eK flH HiıiJiex,eKflHJiep
s / h e h a d i n t e n d e d to w o r k t h e y h a d i n t e n d e d t o v v o rk

aİİTİK.aKH!>IM a flrra ç u m b iK
I h a d in te n d e d to s a y vve h a d i n t e n d e d t o s a y
a{İTJK;aKHtm aiftiac;aım ı>M M 3
y o u h a d in te n d e d to s a y y o u h a d in te n d e d to s a y
a ir r x ;a K f lb i aitraçaKHbUiap
s /h e h a d in te n d e d to s a y th e y h a d in te n d e d to s a y

83MaK 10 wxite repMeK to see ok&msk to read HinneMeK to work aÜTMaK to say
 Paradigms 625

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Negative Statement I
S in g u lar P lu ra l
1 -MaaçaKAHM, -Mex;eKflHM -MaaçaKflLiK, -M ex;eK anK

2 -Max;aKatıH, -MeaçeKflHH -Max;aKflbmij3, -Mex;ejQiHHH:ı

3 -MaJK^KflU, -MejReKflH -MaaçaKHunap, -Me*;eKflHJiep

H3Max;aımb]K
I had not intended to write we had not intended to write
»3Ma»;aKjsuH H 3 M a^ aK flb IH b I3
you had not intended to write you had not intended to vvrite
a3Max^Knu S)3Ma^aıoibMap
s/he had not intended to vvrite they had n ot intended to wri:c

repMex;eKflHM repMeaçeıcnHK
I had not intended to see we had not intended to see
re p M e a c ;e K fln rç r e p M e :s ;e K f ln n H 3
you had not intended to see you had n ot intended to see
repMeaçeKflu r a p M e * ; e K f lH n e p
s/he had not intended to see they had not intended to see

OKaMaaçaKBbiM OKaMaaçaKflMK
I had not intended to read we had n ot intended to read
OKaMaaçaKHMH OKaMa3K;aKHbiHbi3
you had not intended to read you had not intended to read
OKaMaa^agAM OKaMa^asALinap
s/he had not intended to read they had not intended to reac

HUiJieMeîiçeKflHM HUiJieMejKeKflHK
I had not intended to w ork we had not intended to work
HuuıeMeaçeKaMH M U ineM ex;eK aH H M 3
you had not intended to vvork you had not intended to worl:
muueMejf;eKHn MmneMej^eKflHiıep
s/he had not intended to work they had not intended to work

aÜTMaHQaKflUM aftTMax,aKHUK
I had not intended to say we had not intended to say
aiİTMajKaKflbin a{tTMa^aKnuHbi3
you had not intended to say you had not intended to say
ain-M a:x;aK flbi aÜTMa3;aKHUJ]ap
s/he had not intended to say they had not intended to say
83M3K to wıite repMes to see OKaMaK to read HmneMeK to work a#TMaK to say
626 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Negative Statement 11
S in g u lar P lural
1 - x a K JiojiflH M , - j k p k flsn flH M - * ;a K «anflM K , -3K;eK flonflH K

2 -ayuc flsnflMH, -x;eK nanflHH -açaK -jçeıc fl3JWHHH3

3 - 2S3 K flSJiflM, fls n flH - * ;a K f la n A H n e p , -X fiK n o n f lH u e p

flM Ç aK flaiH H M H 3*;aK floflflU K

I h a d n o t in te n d e d to w r ite vve h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v rite
S 3 * ;a K a s n flH H
y o u h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v rite y o u h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v rite
H 3*;aK flaJiflM a 3 j^ a K fla n flM Jie p
s / h e h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v rite th e y h a d n o t in te n d e d to w r ite

r e p a j e K flojiflMM r e p a ç e K A anflM K
I h a d n o t in te n d e d to s e e vve h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o s e e

re p x ;e K n a n n u n r e p a ç e K A3JiflHHH3
y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to s e e y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to se e
r o p jts e K flsJiflH r e p a ç e K A a n f lH n e p
s /h e h a d n o t in te n d e d to s e e t h e y h a d n o t i n t e n d e d to s e e

O K aaçaK a s n n H M O K aaçaK A M flH K

I h a d n o t in te n d e d to r e a d vve h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o r e a d
0 K aa;aK fl3 H H M H 0 K a x ;a K f la n f lH m i3
y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to re a d y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to r e a d
o K a a ç a K a s j ia h O K aaçaK n a J iflH J ie p
s /h e h a d n o t in te n d e d to re a d th e y h a d n o t in te n d e d to r e a d

M U m eaçeK a s u h h m H U iJieaçeK flanflM K

I h a d n o t i n t e n d e d to w o r k vve h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v o rk
M iu jıe a ç e ıc num m H i n n e ^ e K fla rm ıiH H S
y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to w o rk y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to w o rk
HUUieJKeıc A3TOH munex;eK A sn A H Jie p
s / h e h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v o rk t h e y h a d n o t i n t e n d e d t o v v o rk

aÖTHçaıc A3J1AHM a tto r ç a K a s j ia h k

I h a d n o t in te n d e d to s a y w e h a d n o t in te n d e d to s a y
a f t r a ; a ı c a s i ih h h a ttT X ;a K fl3JIflHHH3
y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to s a y y o u h a d n o t in te n d e d to sa y

a ö r a ^ iK A a n B H a i h a ç a ı c A sn flM Jiep
s /h e h a d n o t in te n d e d to s a y th e y h a d n o t in te n d e d to s a y

03MaK to write repMeK to see oKaMaK to Tead HmneMeK to work aftTMaK to say
 Paradigms 6 27

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Question
S in g u lar P lural

1 -vKaKfltlMMbl, -SÇeKflHMMM -X,aKHbIKMbI, -ÎÇeiCflHKMH

2 -^aKflLinMbl, -3K;eKnHHMM -JK;aKflb1HbI3MbI, -3*;eKflHHM3MH
3 -açaKflMMH, -JKeKflHMH -iKaKflbinapMbi, -^eKflHJiepMH

snjçaıcflbiMMM H3)K;aKflbIKMbI
had I intended to write? had we intended to write?
H3*;aKflUHMbl H33K;aKAbIHbl3MbI
had you intended to write? had you intended to write?
H3X ;aK flHM U S33ü;aKHbiJiapMbi
had s/he intended to vvrite? had they intended to write?

rep3ü;eKHHMMw repaçeımıiKMH
had I intended to see? had w e intended to see?
repaçeKflHHMM rep*;eKnnKM3MH
had you intended to see? had you intended to see?
rep^eKflHMH repaçeKflunep mh
had s/he intended to see? had they intended to see?

OKax;aKflHMMbi OKax;aKAb!KMbi
had I intended to read? had w e intended to read?
OKaxaKjjL]HMU 0üax;aKflbiHbi3Mbi
had you intended to read? had you intended to read?
oıcax;aKAbiMbi OKaaçaKabmapMbi
had s/he intended to read? had they intended to read?

Hiunex;eKflHMMM HnuıeaçeıcflHKMM
had I intended to work? had we intended to work?
HUUiea;eKj(HHMH HUIJiex;eKflHHM3MH
had you intended to work? had you intended to work?
M mjjeaçeKHMM H h u ın ea ç e K flM J ie p m w
had s/he intended to work? had they intended to vvork?

a iir* ;a K flb iM M b i a îtra ç a fc a b iK M b i

had I intended to say? had vve intended to say?
aiİTJnaKflbiHMbi aitaçaKnuHbi3Mbi
had you intended to say? had you intended to say?
aitosaKUbiMbi afrracaKjjbinapMbi
had s/he intended to say? had they intended to say?

H3MaK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HUineMeK to work aftmaK to say
62 8 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Negative Question I
S ingular P lu ra l
1 -MaaçaKHtJMMU, -Me^eKHHMMH -MaaçaKflUKMU, -MeaçeKflHKMH
2 -MaacaKflbinMtı, -Ma*;aKfltınu3Mbi, -Mea;eKAHHM3MH
3 -Maa^asnuMU, -MeaçeıcflHMH -Ma3K,aKflbinapMU, -MeaçeKflHJiepMH
s3Ma*;aKfltiMMbi S3Ma3C.aKnUKMbl
had I not intended to vvrite? had vve not intended to write?
A3Ma*;aKfli>ıHMbi H3MaXaKflbIHbI3MbI
had you not intended to write? had you not intended to vvrite?
S3Max;aKflb]MU H3Ma*;aKabi-napMbi
had s/he not intended to write? had they n ot intended to vvrite?

rapMe^eKaHMMM repMe^eKflHKMH
had I not intended to see? had w e not intended to see?
repMeaçeKHHUMH repMe3çeıqjHHH3MH
had you not intended to see? had you not intended to see?
repMeaçeKflHMH rapMeaçeKflHnepMH
had s/he not intended to see? had they not intended to see?
0KaMa:*;aKBbiMMLi OKaMa^aKHUKMu
had I not intended to read? had vve not intended to read?
0KaMa3çaKHUi(Mbi 0KaMaaçaKflMHM3Mbi
had you not intended to read? had you not intended to read?
OKaMa3K,aKAUMbi O K a M a x ,a ım b iııa p M b i
had s/he not intended to read? had they not intended to read?

HuıneMeaçcKflHMMH HUlJieMeJneKHMKMH
had I not intended to work? had vve not intended to vvork?
Hiu;ıeMex.eKAHHMH nujneMe»;eKflHKH3MH
had you not intended to work? had you not intended to vvork?
HUineMe*,CKBHMM HUiJieMeateKflHJiepMM
had s/he not intended to work? had they not intended to work?

aiİTMabatça biMMbi aiİTMaayUCflblKMbl

had 1 not intended to say? had vve not intended to say?
aiiTMaaçakamumu aiİTMax;atmbi!{ü3Mbi
had you not intended to say? had you not intended to say?
aiİTMax;aKflbiMbi aiİTMaaçaıCAbiJiapMfai
had s/he not intended to say? had they not intended to say?
A3MUK to write ropMCK to see OKaMaK to read uuiJieMeıc to work aİrrMaK to say
 Paradigms 629

Unrealized Past Perfect Tense

Negative Question 11
S in g u lar P lu ra l
l -aÇaK flSJIflHMMH, -X;eKa3JlflMMMH -X;aK flSUHHKMM, OK.eK flaJIflMKMH
2 aSJlflMHMM, -açeK fl3JJBMHMH -a^ a K -3ReKfl3JlflHH H3M H

3 -x;aK as JIHHMh, -açeıcflSJiflHMH -açaıc ASUHHJiepMH, -xeK flsnnu.'iepMH

H33K3K flOIIAHMMIJ S3*;aK flSJmHKMbl

had I not intended to vvrite? had vve not intended to vvrite ?
s3x;aK flanflHHMbi H32ÇaK fl3J1flHHM3MU
had you n o t intended to write? had you not intended to w ri:s?
H33K,aKBanflHMH aaaçaK flanflHnepMtı
h ad s/he not intended to write? had they n ot intended to vvr ı e?

re p ^ e K flSJlflHMMH repaçeıc ksuhhicmh

had I not intended to see? had vve not intended to see?
repaçeıc flajiflHHMH repx;eK flaımnnn3MH
had you not intended to see? . had you not intended to see?
rep ^ e K flsJtflHMH repaçeK flsnflHJrepMM
had s/he not intended to see? had they n ot intended to see'.'

OKa^aK H3J1AHMMU OKaa;aK am shkm li

had I not intended to read? had vve not intended to read';
OKaaças flanflUHMU OKaaçaıc JpJlflHHHSMbl
had you not intended to read? had you not intended to read?
OKEDKaK aSHAHMU OKaacaK flanflHJiepMU
had s/he not intended to read? had they not intended to re a j?

tıumeaçeK a 3Jwhmm >i HiınıeaçeK « stomkmm

had I not intended to vvork? had vve not intended to vvork?
nmneac;eK flaJiflHHMiı H u ın e a ç e K fl3jJHHHH3MH
had you not intended to vvork? had you not intended to vvork?
HiuneaçeK flsjiflHMM nıujıeac;eK flajmıtnepMH
had s/he not intended to vvork? had they not intended to vvorlc?

aitaçaK flsnflUMMU a itra c ,a K flan flH K M iı

had I not intended to say? had vve not intended to say?
aifrayiK flaJlflHHMH atasjlK fl3JI,HMHH3MW
had you not intended to say? had you n ot intended to say'.1
aftraçaK flMflHMU aitraçaK flaJMHJiepMM
had s/he not intended to say? had they not intended to say?
Ü3MÜK io vvrite repMeK to see oKaMaK to ıead HOineMeK to work aÜTMaK to say
630 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Future indefinite Tense

Statement
S in g u lar P lural

1 -apbiH, -epHH -apbic, -epHC

2 -apcblH, -epcHH -apcbiHbi3, -epcMHH3

3 -ap,-ep -apnap, -epjıep

S3apblH Hsapbic
I ’ll write w e'll write
nsapcbiH Haapctı 1(113
you'11 write you'11 vvrite
H3ap asapjıap
s/he '11 vvrite they’ll write

repepHH repepııc
I'lî see we’ll see
repepCHH repepcHHH3
you’ll see you'11 see
repep repepnep
s/he’ll see they’ll see

OKapblH OKapbic
I'll read we’ll read
OKapcbiH oKapcbiHbia
y o u ’ll read you'll read
oıcap oKapnap
s/he'11 read they’ll read

HUinspMH HlUJIOpHC
I ’ll w ork vve'11 vvork
HUinopcHH HiunapcHHM3
you’ll vvork you’ ll vvork
MUinap HUinopnep
s/he’il work they'11 ıvork

aitaapbiH aitflapbic
I’ll say vve'H say
aHnapcbin aMflapcbiHM3
you’ll say you’ll say
aüflap ailflapnap
s/he’ll say they’ll say
H3Maıc to w rite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HUineMeK to w ork a#TMaıc to say
 Paradigms 631

Future indefinite Tense

Negative Statement
S in g u lar P lural

X -MapblH, -MepHH -Mapbic, -Mepnc

2 -MapcHH, -MepcHH -M a p c b iH b i3 , -M epcH HM 3

3 -Ma3, -M e 3 -Ma3Jiap, -Meanep

H3MapUH H 3M apbIC
I w on’t vvrite w e w o n 't vvrite
si3Mapcbin H 3M apCblH bI3
you vvon’t write you vvon't write
S3M33 3 3 M a 3 Jia p
s!he w o n’t vvrite they vvon’t vvrite

repM epH H repMepHc

I w o n 't see vve w on’t see
repMepcHH r e p ı n e p c H f iH S
you vvon't see you w on’t see
repMe3 repMe3Jiep
s/he vvon’t see they vvon’t see

OKaMapuH O K a M a p b lc
I w on't read vve vvon’t read
oKaMapcbm 0KaMapcbiHbi3
you w o n’t read you vvon’t read
oKaMa3 0 K a M a 3 iıa p
s/he w on’t read they vvon’t read

H u ın e M e p H H muneMepMC
I vvon’t vvork vve vvon’t work
MlB/ıeMepcHH MiuneMepcHHHS
you w o n’t work you vvon’t vvork
HiuueMe3 MulJieMe3nep
s/he w o n’t w ork they vvon't vvork

aiİTMapuH a ö T M a p b ic
I w on’t say we vvon’t say
aÖTMapcuH a Ö T M a p c b iH b is
you w o n’t say you vvon't say
aitTMaa aifTMa3/ıap
s/he vvon't say they vvon’t say

A3MSK to vvrite repneK lo see OKaMaK to read HinneMeK to work aÜTMüK to say
63 2 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Future indefinite Tense

Question
S in g u lar P lural
1 -apblHMH, -epHHMH -aptlCMbl, -epiiCMH
2 -apcunMH, -epcıı hmH -apCUHbOMbl, -epCHHM3MH
(-apMbicun, -epMHCHH, -apMMCbiHM3, -epMHCHHHa)
3 -apMU, -epMM -apjıapMbi, -epnepMH
HSapblHMbl a3apucMbi
will I write? will we write?
MapcbmMH S3apCblHbl3MU
will you write? will you vvrite?
HSapMbl HaapjıapMbi
will s/he write? will they write?

repepMHMM repepHCMH
will I see? will we see?
repepcHUMM repepcHusıaMH
will you see? will you see?
repepMM repepjıepMH
will s/he see? will they see?

O K apblH M bl OKapblCMbl
will I read? wili we read?
oKapcbiHMM OKapCblHU3MU
will you read? will you read?
OKapMbI oKapjıapMbi
will s/he read? will they read?

HUIJISpHHMM MUlJlapHCMH
w ill I work? vvjll vve vvork?
MUIJlapcHHMM KUinapCHlfMSMH
will you work? will you vvork?
HUJJlsp.MH M U JJiapnepM H
will s/he work? will they work?

a ii B a p u n M i J aitnapucMbi
will I say? will we say?
a ü n a p c b iH M b i a it n a p c b m u 3 M b i
wiil you say? will you say?
aiınapMU aitflapjıapMbj
will s/he say? will they say?
83MÜK to vvrite r e p M e K to see OKaMaıcto read HiımeMeK to work aitTMaK to say
 Paradigms 633

Future indefinite Tense

Negative Question
S ingular P lu ra l
1 -MapblHMbl, -MepHHMH -MapblCMbl, -MepMCMH
2 -MapcblHMbi, -MepOHHMH -MapCbIHU3MbI, -MepOHHH3M«
-MepMHCHH
(-M ap M b lO U H , -MapMWCblHU3, -MepMHCHHH3)
3 -Ma3MU, -Me3MH -M a s n a p M b i, -M e3JiepM H

H3MapbIHMbI H3M apbICM bI

won’t I wrke? vvon’t vve vvrite?
33MapcbIHMbI S3MapCE,lHbI3MbI
won’t you write? vvon’t you vvrite?
S)3Ma3MU so M aauapM bl
won’t s/he vvrite? vvon’t they vvrite?
repMepHHMH repMepııcMM
won’t I see? vvon’t vve see?
rep M ep cH H M H repMepcMH«3MH
won’t you see? vvon’t you see?
repMe3MM repMe3JiepMH
won’t s/he see? vvon’t they see?
□ K a M a p u ıiM b i O K aM apucM bi
won’t I read? vvon’t vve read?
O K a M ap c b iıtM U o sc aM a p c L iıtb i3 M b j
won't you read? won't you read?
0K3Ma3Mbl O K a M a3 n a p M W
won’t s/he read? won't they read?
MiuneMepmiMH MUineMepMCMH
won’t I work? vvon’t vve vvork?
HumeMepcHUMH MUIJleMepCHUH3MH
won’t you work? won’t you vvork?
HUineMC3MM HuıneMe3iiepMH
won’t s/he vvork? vvon’t they vvork?
aÜTMapuıiMbi aiİTMapbicMbi
vvon't I say? vvon’t vve say?
aÜTMapcbi!(MU a(İTMapcuKbi3Mbi
vvon’t you say? vvon’t you say?
aiİTMa3MW aiİTMa3JiapMbi
won’t s/he say? vvon’t they say?
A3MUK to w r i l e ropMeK to see O K aM a K to read H iu n e M e K to woric s Ü t m u k to say
634 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Definite Future Tense

Statement
S ingular P lural

1 (MeH) -açaK, -açeK (6 h3) -açaK, -açeK

2 (ceH) -acaK, (cH3) -açm , -at;eK

3 (on) -açaK, -*;eK (o/ıap) -a;aK, -açeK

Men iJ3açaK 6 h 3 B3at;aK

I ’ll vvrite w e’ll vvrite
ceH sreaçaK ch3 H3aqaK
y ou’U w rite y o u ’ll vvrite
oji HsaçaK onap fl3*;aK
s/h e’11 vvrite th ey ’fl vvrite

Men repaçeK 6 m3 repaçeK

I ’U see ıve’U see
ceH repaçeK c m repaçeK
y o u ’ll see y o u ’ll see
on repaceK onap repaçeK
s/h e ’ll see th ey ’ll see

Men OKaaçaK 6 h3 OKaaçaK

I ’U read w e’ll read
ceH OKajçaK CH3 OKaaçaK
y o u ’ll read y o u ’11 read
oji OKaaçaK onap OKaaçaK
s/h e ’ll read th ey ’ll read

MeH mıiJieaceK 6 h3 HUineac;eK

I ’ll vvork vve’U vvork
ceH HUiJieaçeK ch3 HuiJiea;eK
y ou’ll vvork y o u ’ll vvork
oji Hiujıe^eK onap HuıneaçeK
s/h e ’ll vvork th ey ’ll vvork

Men aörac,aK 6h3 aftraçaK

I ’ll say vve’ll say
ceH aitracaK CH3 aÜTaync
y o u ’ll say you’ll say
on aÜTaçaK onap aüTaçaK
s/h e ’ll say th ey ’ll say
H3MaK i o w r iıe re p M e K to s e e OKaMaK t o r e a d H iım e M e ıc t o w o r k aHi M'iK t o say
 Paradigms 635

Definite Future Tense

Negative Statement
S in g u lar P lural

1 (MeH) -xaK flon, -x;eK nan (6h3) -açaK nan, -ac;eK flajı

2 (ceH) -x,aK flsjı, -sçeıc flsJi (ch3) -açaKnan,-açeKflan

3 (on) -açaıc Ran, -açeK nan (onap) -açaKflaJi,-açeKflaJi

MeH fl3*,aKflaJi 6 h3 fl3»;aK nan

I won’t write vve vvon’t vvrite
ceHasaçaınan ch3 Haaçaıcaan
you won’t write you won’t write
oji H3x;aKflan onap H3*;aK nan
s/he won’t write they won’t vvrite
MeH repaçeıcnan 6 h3 repaçeK nan
I won’t see we won’t see
ceH repaçeıc «an cıra repsçeK nan
you won’t see you vvon’t see
on repx,eK nan onap repaceK non
s/he won’t see they won’t see
MeH OKaa^aKnan 6 h3 OKa3K,aKnan
I vvon’t read we vvon’t read
ceH OKaaçaıc nan cn3 OKaMaK usu
you won’t read you vvon't read
on osa^aK nan onap o K a a ç a ıc n a n
s/he won’t read they won't read
MeH Hiııne^eK nan 6 h3 vııunex;eK nan
I vvon't vvork we won’t vvork
ceH Hinnea^eKnan cH3 Hiune*;eK nan
you vvon’t work you vvon’t vvork
on Hiunex;eKn3n onap HUUieaçeK nan
s/he vvon't work they vvon’t vvork
MeH a it a K a K nan 6 h3 aitr^aK nan
I won’t say we won’t say
ceH attra;aK flan CH3 aiİTJnaK flan
you won’t say you vvon’t say
on a t a n a * : nan onap aitnçaK fla.n
s/he vvon't say they vvon’t say
83MaK to vvrite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HlüneMCK to w ork aih'MaK to say
63 6 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Definite Future Tense

Question
S in g u lar P lural
1 (MEH) -OK,aKMH, -X,EKMH (6m3) -jçaKMbi, -oçeKMM
2 (c e H ) -* ;a K M b i, -x;eKM M (CH3) -3*aKMH, -OKSKMH
3 (on) -a^aKMbi, -açeıcMM (onap) -3t;aKMbi, -açeKMH

MeH S32ÇaKMld 6H3 HSİÇaKMbl

w İH I vvrite? vvill vve vvrite?
ceH SBOgaKMM CK3 S3JKaKMM
vvill you vvrite? vvill you vvrite?
oji H3*;aKMbi onap S3xcaKMtı
vvill s/he write? vvill they vvrite?
MeH repx,eKMH 6 h3 repaçeKMH
vvill I see? vvill vve see?
ceH repsçeKMH CH3 repx;eKMH
vvill you see? vvill you see?
on r e p x e K M H onap repaçeKMM
vvill s/he see? will they see?
MeH 0Kaa;aKMbi 6h3 oKa^aKMU
vvill I read? vvill vve read?
ceH OKaaçaKMbi chs 0Kax;aKM bi
vvill you read? vvill you read?
on OKax,aKMbi onap oıcaaçaıcMH
vvill s/he read? vvill they read?
MeH Huınea^eKMH 6H3 HinneaçeKMH
vvill I vvork? vvill vve vvork?
ceH HinjıejiçeKMH c«3 M iuneaceK M H
vvill you vvork? vvill you vvork?
on Miune^eKMü onap HinneaseKMH
vvill s/he vvork? vvill they vvork?
Men aif-racaKMbi 6h3 aÜTjKaK
vvill I say? vvill vve say?
ceH a itr s a K M b i CM3 attr*;aK
will you say? vvill you say?
on aÜTx;aKMbi onap aitafçaıc
vvill s/he say? vvill they say?
A3 M 3 K t o w r i t e r e p M e K t o s e e o s a M a s t o r e a d M m n e M e K t o w o r k a J h 'M a K t o s a y
 Paradigms 637

Definite Future Tense

Negative Question
S in g u lar P lural
1 (MeH) -a;aKH3nMH, -3K,eKflanMH (6h3) -:x,aK flanMH, -3K,eKflanMM
2 (ceH) -3^aKfl3/iMH,-x.eK«3J1MH (cn3) -2t,aKjjanMH, -açeıcnsnMH
3 (oji) -açaKasiiMM,-a!;eKflonMH (onap) -açaKnajiMH, -ajeıcflajiM «

MeH HS^aK flaJIMM 6 m3 H3x;aK nanMM

won’t I write? won’t we wrıte?
ceH H3*;aK rohmh CH3 H3X;aKflanM H
won’t you write? won’t you write?
OUH3*;aKfl3JlMH onap H3*;aK flaHMiı
won’t s/he write? won't they write?
MeH repMeK as/imm 6h3 rep^eK flanMH
won’t I see? vron't we see?
ceH repaçeK nanMM CM3 rep^eK flSJiMH
won’t you see? won*t you see?
oji repaçeK pnM » onap repjçeK nanMH
won’t s/he see? won’t they see?
MeH OKa*aK flsJiMH 6 h3 OKa^aK flanMH
won't I read? won’t we read?
c e H OKax,aK flojjMM ch3 OKaacaK nanMH
won’t you read? won’t you read?
on oKaacaKflsnMM onap OKaMaK flanMH
won't s/he read? won't they read?
MeH Hmnex.eK flanMH 6h3 HUtne»;eK flaJiM H
won’t I work? won’t we work?
ceH HmneaçeKflajiMH CH3 HiuneaçeK flanMH
won’t you work? won’t you work?
on nmne*eK jsjim » onap Huıne^eK flanMH
won’t s/he work? won’t they work?
MeH aiİT*.aK flanMH 6 h3aitra;aK nanMH
won't I say? won’t we say?
ceH aii-raçaK nanMH CH3 aiirx,aK nanMH
vvon’t you say? won't you say?
on aft-DKaKasjimh onap aitraçaK flanMH
won’t s/he say? won’t they say?
H3M3K to wriıe repMeK to see OKaMaK lo read HiuneMeK to work aitrMaK to say
638 Türkmen Reference Grammar

First Person imperative Mood

Suggestion
S in g u lar D ual P lural
-aftblH, -eiİHH, -3İİHH -ajıtı, -enH, -aıiH -ajibiH, -emiH, -sjihh

naaiibin H3ajlbl naanbiH

let m e write let us (two) write let us (ali) write

repeiİHH rspe/iH repeunH

let me see let us (two) see let us (ali) see

OKaÖblH OKajıu OKajIMH

let m e read let us (two) read leı us (ali) read

HMJ1DİİHH HUIJ13/IH HUIJ73J1HH

let m e w ork let us (two) work let us (ali) work

aiiflaiıuH aitnany aitnantlH

let m e say let us (two) say let us (ali) say

Negative Suggestion
S in g u lar Dual P lural
-Maiiblll, -M3İİHH -MaJlbl, -M3J1H -ManbiH, -M3J1H

H3MaÜbIM H3MaJlbl H3MaJIbIH

let m e not write let us (two) not vvrite let us (ali) not write

repM3ÜMH rop Monu repM3Jinn

let me not see let us (two) not see let us (ali) not see

oKaMaiibm OKaMajibi O KaM aJlbiK

let m e not read let us (two) not read let us (ali) not read

muijicms Mhh HUineM3JIH HuıneMsnHH

let me not work let us (two) not work let us (ali) not vvork

aHTMaîibiıı aÜTManbi aiİTMa/ibin

let me not say let us (two) not say let us (ali) not say
5t3MaK l o w rite ropMCK t o s c c oK a M U K t o r e a d MuuıeMeK t o vvork aföTMaıc 10 s a y
 Paradigms 639

First Person imperative Mood

Question
S in g u lar Dual P lural
-aÖfclHMtl, -eîtMHMH, -3ÜHHMH -aJIHMbl, -ejlKMM, -aJlHHMM, -enHMH, -sjiiimh

H3aitbIHMbl H3ajIblMH s3anbiHMU

shall I write? shall we (two) write? shall we (ali) write?

repeitHHMH re p e mt mü repenHHMM
shall I see? shall vve (two) see? shall we (ali) see?

OKaitblHMbl OKaJIblMH OKajı HHMbi

shall I read? shall we (two) read? shall vve (ali) read?

HUIJIs S h HMK HUIJ13J1HMH HUIJlsnHHMH

shall I work? shall vve (two) work? shall we (ali) work?

afiflaü biHMbi aHflanbiMbi aitnanbiHMU

shall I say? shall we (two) say? shall we (ali) say?

Negative Question
S in g u lar Dual P lural
-MaÜUHMH, -M3ÖHHMH -ManbTMbl, -M3JIHMH -MaJIbIHMbİ, -M3J1HMH

OTMa/iblHMbl H3MajIHMtl ASMajIMHMM

shall I not write? shall we (two) not vvrite? shall we (ali) not write?

ropM3ÖHHMH repManHMH repMSJlMHMH

shall I not see? shall we (two) not see? shall vve (ali) not see?
OKaMaSbîHMH OKaMaübiMbi OKaMajibiHMH
shall I not read? shall vve (two) not read? shall we (ali) not read?
HIUJieMSİİHHMH HUIJleM3JIHMH HUIJleMSJIHHMH
shall I not vvork? shall we (tvvo) not vvork? shall we (ali) not work?
aÜTMaÖİIHMM aSTMajibiMbi aSTMaJiMHMbi
shall I not say? shall we (tvvo) not say? shall we (ali) not say?
03MaK {o write repMeK to see osaMaK to read HumeMeıc to vvork a#TMaK to say
64 0 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Second Person imperative Mood

Command
In fo rm al/S ingular In siste n t Form al Plural
(no ending) -ruH, -rHH, -ryH, -ryH -HH, -HU, -y«, -YH

93 H3TLIH S 3U H
vvrite! you gotta write! please vvrite!

re p rep ry H rep y n
see! you gotta see! please see!

OK a OKartiH OKan
read! you gotta read! please read!

«nine H iu jıe rH H HUIJ13H

work! you gotta vvork! please vvork!

aitr aitTruH a ftf lb in

say! you gotta say! please say!

Negative Command
In fo rm al/S ingular In siste n t F orm al P lural
-Ma, -M e -MarbiH, -M erH H -M a n , - M a n

H3Ma H3MartiH H3Man

d o n ’t vvrite! you m u sn 't vvrite! please do n ’t vvrite!

rap M e repMerHH repM su

d o n ’t see! you m usn’t see! please d o n ’t see!

oKaMa O K a M arU H O K a M an
d o n ’t read! you m usn’t read! please d o n ’t read!

HiUJieMe HuıneMerHH HiUJieMsn

d o n ’t vvork! you m usn’t work! please d o n ’t work!

aiİT M a aiİTMartiH aiİTMan

d o n ’t say! you m usn’t say! please do n ’t say!

S3M3K to wıite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HmneMeK to work aftrMaK to say
 Paradigms 641

Third Person imperative Mood

Wishllnstruction
Singular Plural
-chh, -chh, -cyıı, -cyH -ctjHJiap.-cHiinep, -cytuıap, -cymıep

H3CblH H3CblHJlap
let her/him write let them write
repcyH repcyH/ıep
let him/her see let them see
OKacuH OKacbiHJiap
let her/him read let them read
MiıınecHH HiiiJiecHHJiep
let him/her vvork let them vvork
aÖTCblH aiİTcuHJiap
let her/him vvork Set them vvork

Negative WishHnslnıction
Sittgular Plural
-M aC blH , 'M eC H H - M a o b iH iıa p , -M e c H H Jie p

HSM acblH si3 M a c b lH Jia p

let him/her not vvrite let them not vvrite
rep M e c H H r e p M e c H H J ie p
let her/him not see let them not see
O K aM acuH O K a M a c b iH iıa p
let him/her not read let them not read
HlilJleMeCHH H iu n e M e c n H J ie p
let her/him not vvork let them not vvork
aÜ T M acbiH aiİT M acb ım ıap
let him/her not vvork let them not vvork
H3MaK to vvrite repMeK to see okamsk to read HtniieMes to vvork aftTMaK to say
642 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Conditional Mood

Statement
S ingular Plural
1 -caM, -ceM -caK, -ceıc
2 -can, ~cen -cantJ3, -ceHH3
3 -ca, -ce -canap,-cenep

srıcaM R3C&K
if I wri!e İf we write
a3can H3caHU3
if you write if you write
S3ca H3cajıap
if s/he writes if they write
repceM repceK
ifI see if we see
repcen rep cen H 3
if you see if you see
repce repce jıep
if s/he sees if they see
oKacaM oKacaK
if I read if we read
OKacan 0Kacanu3
if you read if you read
oKaca OKacajıap
if s/he reads if they read
MUineceM HtuneceK
if I work if we work
HUineceH MUineceHH3
if you work if you work
Hurnece Huınecenep
if s/he works if they work
aiİTcaM aiİTcaK
if I say if we say
aifrrcaH a#TcaHU3
if you say if you say
attrca aiİTcajjap
if s/he says if they say
S3 M3 K to w r i t e re p M e K to s e e O K aM aK t o r e a d n u m e M e K t o w o r k aÜ T M aK t o s a y
 Paradigms 643

Conditional Mood

Negative Statement
S in g ular P lural
1 + M a ca M , + M eceM + M acaK , + M eceK

2 + M a c a u , + M eceH + M a c a H i.i3 , + M e c e n H 3

3 + M aca, + M ece 4 M a c a j ı a p , + M e c e jıe p

H3M acaM H 3M acaK

i f I d o n ’t w r i te i f w e d o n ’t w r i t e
H 3M acaH 93M acaH H 3
if you d o n ’t write i f you d o n ’t write
H 3M aca H 3 M a c a jıa p
i f s / h e d o e s n ’t w r i t e i f t h e y d o n ’t v v rite

rep M eceM ropMeceK

i f I d o n ’t s e e i f vve d o n ’t s e e
rep M ecen re p M e c e H M B
i f y o u d o n ’t s e e i f y o u d o n ’t s e e
rep M e c e rep M e c e n e p
i f s / h e d o e s n 't s e e i f t h e y d o n ’t s e e

O K aM acaM O K aM acaK
i f I d o n ’t r e a d i f vve d o n ’t r e a d
OKa M a ç a n O K aM acaH ua
i f y o u d o n 't r e a d i f y o u d o n ’t r e a d
O K aM aca oK aM acanap
i f s / h e d o e s n ’t r e a d i f t h e y d o n ’t r e a d

H illjicM ece.M H U iJieM eceK

i f I d o n 't w o r k i f w e d o n ’t v v o rk
muneMeceH H U iJie M e c e n H 3
i f y o u d o n 't w o r k i f y o u d o n ’t v v o rk
H iiU leM e c c H um eM ecenep
i f s / h e d o e s n 't v v o rk i f t h e y d o n ' t v v o rk

aiiT M acaM a iİT M a c aK

i f I d o n 't s a y i f vve d o n ’t s a y
a tİT M a c a n a iİT M a c ai(M 3
i f y o u d o n ’t s a y i f y o u d o n ’t s a y
aiİT M a c a a iİ T M a c a J ia p
i f s / h e d o e s n ’t s a y if they don’t say
3 3 M aK i o w r i l e ro p M C K t o s e e o k s m u k l o r e a d H tu /ıe M e K t o v v o r k uÜ TM afC t o s a y
644 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Subjunctive Mood

Statement
Singular Plural
1 -CaMfltlM, -CCMflHM -CaKflfJK, -ceKflHK
2 -caflun, -ceflHH -cafltınua, -ceflHHH3
(-caHflUH, -ceHUHH -caHHbiHbi3, -ceHflHHHs)
3 -caflu, -ceflu -cafltınap, -ceAHJiep

S3CaMflbIM HacaKflbiK
if only I had written if only we had written
B3caauH H3caflanbi3
if only you had written if only you had written
33CaflbI sncaflbinap
if only s/he had written if only they had written
repceMflHM repceKflMK
if only I had seen if only we had seen
repceflHn repceflnnıi3
if only you had seen if only you had seen
repceflM repceflHJiep
if only s/he had seen if only they had seen
OKacaMflUM OKacasnuK
if only I had read if only we had read
oicacaflbm 0KacaflbiHH3
if only you had read if only you had read
OKaca^bi OKacaflbiJiap
if only s/he had read if only they had read
MUlJieceMflMM MuiJieceKHMK
if only I had worked if only we had worked
HmjıeceflMH MiıiJieceflHHH3
if only you had worked if only you had worked
KiUJieceflM HUiJieceflHnep
if only s/he had worked if only they had worked
aüTcaMflfeiM a iiT caıcflb iK
if only I had said if only we had said
aÖTcaflUH aİ!TcaflbiHU3
if only you had said if only you had said
aitTcaflbi aÖTcafltuıap
if only s/he had said if only they had said
Ü3MUK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HinneMeK to worfc aifTMaK to say
 Paradigms 645

Subjunctive Mood

Negative Statement
S in g u la r P lu ra l

1 + M acaM flU M , +M eceM flH M + M a c a K s tiK , + M eceK flH K

2 + M a c a f l u n , + M eceflH H + M a c a a t ı n u 3 , + M e c e f ln n « 3
( + M a c a n n u n , + M e c e n q ı ın + M a c a n H 3 flH H U 3 , +M eceH H 3flM H H 3)

3 + M a ç a f ltı, + M e ce jjH + M a c a f lb m a p , -t-M ece;i>uıup

BSM acaM flU M a3M acaK H biK

i f o n l y I h a d n ’t w r i t t e n i f o n l y vve h a d n ’t v v r itte n
a 3 M a c a f ltı» H 3M aC aflH H H 3
i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t v v r itte n i f o n l y y o u h a d n ' t v v r itte n
H 3M acaflH H 3 M a c a flb iJia p
i f o n l y s / h e h a d n ’t v v r itte n i f o n l y t h e y h a d n ’t v v r itte n

re p M e c e M flH M ra p M e c e K f lH K
i f o n l y I h a d n ’t s e e n i f o n l y vve h a d n ’t s e e n
r e p M e c e flH H rap M e c e flM H M 3
i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t s e e n i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t s e e n
r e p M e c e f lH r a p M e c e f lH J ie p
i f o n l y s / h e h a d n ’t s e e n i f o n l y t h e y h a d n ’t s e e n

O K aM acaM RbiM O K aM acaK flbiK

i f o n l y I h a d n ’t r e a d i f o n l y vve h a d n ' t r e a d
O K aM acaflU H 0K aM acaA U H U 3
i f o n l y y o u h a d n 't r e a d i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t r e a d
O K a M a c a fliı O K a M a c a f ltn ıa p
i f o n l y s / h e h a d n ’t r e a d i f o n l y t h e y h a d n ’t r e a d

H iıiJieM eceM flH M H U lJieM eceK flH K

i f o n l y I h a d n 't v v o rk ed i f o n l y w e h a d n 't v v o rk ed
H iu n e M e c e flH K H U lJie M e c e flH U ia
i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t v v o r k e d i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t v v o r k e d
H iu n e ıu e c e flH M ü ijje M e c e flM Jie p
i f o n l y s / h e h a d n ’t v v o r k e d i f o n l y t h e y h a d n ’t v v o r k e d

aÜ TM acaM flU M aiİTMacaKflbiK

i f o n l y I h a d n ’t s a i d i f o n l y vve h a d n ’t s a id
aÜ T M acaflbiH a itT M a c a flb ii(b i3
i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t s a i d i f o n l y y o u h a d n ’t s a i d
a Ü T M a c a flu a f t r M a c a f lb u ı a p
i f o n l y s / h e h a d n ’t s a i d i f o n l y t h e y h a d n ’t s a i d

S3M&K to wıite repMeK to see OKaMaK to read nnuıeMeK to work aÖTMas to say
64 6 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Desiderative Mood

Statemenl
S in g u lar Plural
1 -asHHM, -seflMM -aajibiK, -aefliiK
2 -aaflblH, -seflHH -aHflb!Hb!3, -oeflHf(M3
3 -asmn, - x m -aHflbinap, -aeflHnep

fl3aHflblM S3aRflbIK
I hope I’ll write I hope we'il write
S13aHflbIH asasmbiHtn
I hope you’ll write I hope you’ll write
H3aqflbi n3aüflbmap
I hope s/he’ll write I hope they’ll write
repaeflHM repseflMK
I hope TU see I hope we'll see
repaefljfrç rep3eflMHH3
I hope you'll see I hope you’ll see
repseflH repsejjHJiep
I hope s/he'll see I hope they’ll see
OKaHflUM OKasmbiK
I hope I ’ll read I hope we'll read
oKasflbiH 0KaaflHHbi3
I hope you’ll read I hope you'll read
oKaaflbi oKaaflbiJiap
I hope s/he’ll read I hope they’ll read
HumseflMM MinnoeflHK
I hope FH work I hope we’ll work
HUlJMeflMH HtunaeflMHH3
I hope you’ll work I hope you'll work
msınsem nmnsenHnep
I hope s/h e’ll vvork I hope th ey '11 work

aitflasınbiM aünasmbiK
I hope I’Il say I hope w e’ll say
aitaasmbiu aftflasWbiHbi3
I hope y o u 'll say I hope you’ll say
aitnasiflu aitflasflbmap
I hope s/he’U say I hope they’ll say
5I3M&K to wriîe repMeK to see oıcaMaK to read HiîmeMeıc fo work aitmaz to say
 Paradigms 647

Desiderative Mood

Negative Statement
S in g u lar P lural

1 + M a sflb lM , +M 36flHM + M a s f ltiK , +MaeflHK

2 +Maaflbin, +M 3eflH H + M a a fltırç b i3 , +M 3eflm <H 3

3 +Maaflbi, +Moe,qn +Masflbinap, +M3eflHnep

a3MasflHM H3MaaflMK
I hope I won ’t wri£e I hope vve won ’t vvrite
H3Maafltın a3MaaflbiHU3
I hope you w o n 't write I hope you vvon’t vvrite
H3Ma8flbl a3Maaflbinap
I hope s/he w on’t write I hope they vvon’t vvrite

repMaeflHM repMaeflHK
I hope I vvon't see I hope we w on’t see
rapMaeflMH repM 3ennHH3
I hope you vvon't see I hope you vvon't see
repMaeflM repM aeflHJiep
I hope s/he vvon’t see I hope they w on’t see

OKaMasmuM OKaMasflbtK
I hope I vvon't read I hope vve vvon’t read
oKaMaafltm OKaMaHntJHU3
I hope you w on’t read I hope you vvon’t read
OKaMaafltı ofcaMaaflbmap
I hope s/he vvon’t read I hope they vvon’t read

HiuneMaeflHM HtuneMseflHK
I hope I vvon't work I hope vve vvon’t work
MtujıeMaeflHH mııneMaejjMHM3
I hope you vvon’t vvork I hope you vvon't vvork
HiımeMseflH mu.neM3eflnnep
I hope s/he vvon't vvork I hope they w on’t vvork

aitrMasmuM aÜTMasmtiK
I hope I vvon’t say I hope w e vvon't say
aÜTMaa^LiH aÜTMaanunua
I hope you vvon't say I hope you vvon't say
aiİTMaaflfci aÖTMaaflbinap
I hope s/he vvon't say I hope they vvon’t say
H3 M 3 K t o v v r i t e r e p M e K t o s e e O K a M a K t o r e a d m u n e M e K t o w o r k aiîTMaK t o say
648 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Suffix of Desire (-ac/ec rejiMeıt)

Present indefinite Tense

S ingular P lural

93acuM reniiap 83aouMH3 renüsp

I w ant to write we w ant to write

rapecHM renftap repecHMH3 renlisp

I want to see w e want to see

OKactm rejıüsp 0KacMHH3 renftap

you want to read you want to read

hiujiochh ren Hap h i i i /I3 c m h h 3 re n ifa p

you want to work you want to w ork

aiiflacbi renitsp aiiflacjıapu rejıitap

s/he vvants to say they vvant to say

Past indefinite Tense

S ingular P lu ra l

s 3 a c b iM r e n flH H3aoMMbi3 r e n f lH
I wanted to write we wanted to write

ra p e c H M r e n f l u rep ecM M M 3 r e n f l i ı
I wanted to see we wanted to see

o ıc a c b iH r e n f l i ı O K acb iH U 3 r e n f lH
you wanted to read you wanted to read

h u ij is c h h r e n f lH HUIJ13CMHH3 re n f lH
you wanted to work you wanted to work

aiiflacu r e n flH a ti f la c n a p b i r e n f lH
s/he wanled to say they wanted to say
soMaK 10 wriıe repMeK to see OKaMaKto read HiuneMeK to woık aftmaK to say
 Paradigms 649

Suffîx of Intention (- m s ik h h /m g k h h )

Present indefinite Tense

Singular P lu ra l

Meu H3Maıcqu 6 h3 Î33M3KMU

I vvould like to vvrite we would like to vvrite

MeH repMeKMM 6 h3 repMeKMM

I vvould like to see vve vvould.like to see

ceu OKaMaKibi CH3 OKaMaKHbl

you vvould like to read you vvould like to read

ceH HuıneMeKHH CH3 MIUHeMeKHH

you vvould like to vvork you vvould like to vvork

on aÜTMaKHU ojıap aÖTMaiMLi

s/he vvould like to say they vvould like to say

Negative Present indefinite Tense

Singular P lural

MeH H3MaKHUfl3J] ÖH3 H3MaKHH flajı

I don’t intend to vvrite vve don't intend to vvrite

MeH repMeKMH flan 6 h3 repMeKHH flajı

I don’t intend to see vve don't intend to vvee

ceH OKaMaKMU m a CH3 OKaMaKHH flajı

you don’t intend to read you don’t intend to read

ceH HuıneMeKHH flajı CM3 HUIJleMeKMHflaJl

you don’t intend to vvork you don’t intend to vvork

on aiİTMaKHU flan ojıap aÜTMaKMLi flajı

s/he doesn’t intend to say they don’t intend to say
x3MaK to write repMeK to see OKaMac to read HnuıeMeK to vvork afchrMaKto say
650 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Suffix of Obligation (-Majibi/MejiH)

Present indefinite Tense

S ingular P lural

MeHH3Manu fiila aaMaıibi

I have to write we have to write

MeH repMenH 6h3 repMenH

I have to see we have to see

ceH oKaMajıu CH3 OMManu

you have to read you have to read

ceH HuıneMenH ch3 H u ın e M e n H

you have to vvork you have to vvork

on aöTManu onap aitraaıibi

s/he has to say they have to say

Negative Present indefinite Tense

S ingular P lural

MeH H3Maflbi flan 6h3 H3Manu nan

I don't have to vvrite we don’t have to vvrite

MeH repM enH jw n 6h3 repMenH flan

I don’t have to see we don’t have to see

ceH O K aM an b i flsn cm3OKaManbi jjan

you don’t have to read you don’t have to read

ceH HuıneMenH flan CM3 HuıneMenH nan

you don’t have to work you don’t have to work

on aÜTM anbi flan onap aifrMantı nan

s/he doesn’t have to say they don’t have to say
33M3K to write repMeıc to see OKaMaK to Tead HmneMeK to work aftTMaK to say
 Paradigms 651

Suffix of Permission (-aü/aü)

Suffix o f Permission witlı First imperative

S in g u lar Dual Plural

sraasitbiH Hsaajibi a3aHJiı>m

m ay/why d on’t I write? m ay/why do n ’t vve (two) write? may/vvhy don’t w e (ali) write?

rapseÜHH repsenH repsejiMH

m ay/w hy d o n ’t I see? m ay/why do n ’t we (two) see? may/vvhy do n ’t vve (ali) see?

O K asÜ H H O K a n n tı oKasnfeirç
m ay/w hy d on’t I read? m ay/why do n ’t w e (two) read? m ay/why don’t we (ali) read?

MuınseiİHH HUinaenH m n jıa e jiH H

m ay/w hy don’t I work? m ay/why do n ’t w e (two) work? m ay/why don’t we (ali) work?

aitflaalibiH aftflasjıu aflflaaJiMrç

m ay/w hy d on’t I say? m ay/w hy do n ’t we (tvvo) say? m ay/why d o n 't w e (ali) say?

Negative Suffix o f Permission v/ith First imperative

S in g u lar Dual Plural

93Ma9İtUH a3Masnfci 83MaanuH

I m ay not write, vve (tvvo) m ay not vvrite, vve (ali) m ay not vvrite,
why d o n ’t I not vvrite? vvhy d o n 't we (tvvo) not vvrite? vvhy don’t vve (ali) not vvrite?

repMoeitHH rep M o eım repMaenHH

I m ay not see. vve (tvvo) m ay not see. vve (ali) may not see
why d o n ’t I not see? vvhy d o n 't vve (tvvo) not see? vvhy don’t vve (ali) not see?

OKaMaattMH OKaMaanM OKaMasuııiH

I m ay not read, vve (tvvo) m ay not read, vve (ali) m ay not read.
why d on’t I not read? vvhy do n ’t vve (tvvo) not read? why don’t vve (ali) iıot read?

HiujıeMaejİHH HUineMsenH HumeMaenMH

I m ay not vvork. vve (tvvo) m ay not vvork, vve (ali) m ay not vvork
why d o n 't I not vvork? vvhy don’t vve (tvvo) not vvork? vvhy don’t vve (ali) not vvork?

aitTMaaitıiH aiİTMaanu aiİTMaajıtiH

I m ay not say, vve (tvvo) m ay not say, vve (ali) m ay not say,
vvhy don’t I not say? vvhy do n ’t vve (tvvo) not say? vvhy don’t vve (ali) not say?

A3 M3 K to w r i ı e r e p M e K t o s e e o s a M a ı c t o r e a d n m n e M e K t o v v o r k a i h ’M a K t o say
652 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Suffix of Permission (-aü/aü)

Suffix o f Permission vvith Second imperative

Singular Plural
smft &3aüuti
you may write, why not write? you may write, what about writing?

repaö repaiİHH
you may see, why not see? you may see, what about seeing?

OKafö OKattbirç
you may read, why not read? you may read, what about reading?

HU1J13Ü ıımngiiıiH
you may work, why not work? you may work, what about working?

aiiflaii aitflaiiun
you may say, why not work? you may say, what about saying?

Negative Suffix o f Permission with Second imperative

Singular Plural
H3MaÜ H3MafİbIH
you may not write, why not not write? you may not write, what about not writing?

repMaü rspMs8nn
you may not see, why not not see? you may not see, what about not seeing?

OKaMaü OKaMaübiH
you may not read, why not not read? you may not read, what about not reading?

HIUJleMSÜ HiuneMsÜHH
you may not work, why not not work? you may not work, what about not working?

aiİTMaii aiİTMaiiuıt
you may not say, why not not say? you may not say, what about not saying?
B3 M aK to w r i t e re p M e K to s e e oKaMaK to r e a d H u u ıe M e K to work afrrMaK to s a y
 Paradigms 653

Suffbc of Permission (-aft/aü)

Suffix o f Permission with Third imperative

S in g u lar P lural

snattcbiH H3aifcuHJiap
s/he m ay w rite, vvhat about her/his vvriting? they m ay write, w hat about their vvriting?

repoiicıiH repaiicHHJiep
s/he m ay see, w hat about her/his seeing? s/he m ay see, vvhat about their seeing?

OKattcbiH OKaücbiHJiap
s/he m ay read, what about her/his reading? they m ay read, vvhat about their eading?

HIUJI3ÜCHH HUIJI3«CHHJlep
s/he m ay work, what about her/his working? s/he m ay vvork, w hat about their ■vorking?

aiiflaiicbiH aitaaScMHnap
s/he m ay say, what about her/his saying? they m ay say, vvhat about their s ying?

Negative Suffix o f Permission vvith Third İmperative

S in g u lar P lu ra l

a3Maiicbin H3MaÜCUHJiap
s/he m ay not vvrite, they m ay n ot vvrite,
vvhat about her/his not vvriting? vvhat about their not vvritinj’’

repM aücH H repMoiicHHJiep

s/he m ay not see, they m ay not see,
vvhat about her/his not seeing? vvhat about their not seeing'1

oKaMaücuu OKaMaticbiHJiap
s/he m ay n o t read, they m ay not read,
vvhat about her/his not reading? vvhat about their not reading: ?

HiımeMsMcmı HUHieMsflcHHJiep
s/he m ay not vvork, they m ay not vvork,
vvhat about her/his not vvorking? vvhat about their not vvorkin e ?

aiİTMaücuH aüTMaiicuHnap
s/he m ay not say, they m ay not say,
vvhat about her/his not saying? vvhat about their not saying'1
83MaK t o w riıe repM eK to s e e OKaMaK to r e a d HiııneMCK to vvork aMTM.iK 10 s a y
654 Turicmen Reference Grammar

infinitive Sufîfix (-Maıc/Meıc)

infinitive vvith Possessive Suffixes

F irst singular 83MarbiM ray writing oKaMaruM my reading

Second singular HSMarbin your writing OKaMaruH your reading
Third singular 83Marbi her/his writing O K a M a r u his/her reading
F irst p lural H3MartiMH3 ourwriting OKaMarHMbis our reading
Second plural H3MarMHbi3 your writing OKaMartmbi3 your reading
Third plural H3MaKnapbı their writing OKaMaKJiapu their reading

F irst singular repMerHM my seeing HiujıeMerHM my working

Second singular repMerHH your seeing MiujıeMerHH yourworking
Third singular repMerH her/his seeing MuıneMern his/her working
F irst plural repMernMH3 our seeing numeMerHMH3 our working
Second plural repMerMHH3 your seeing HuıneMerHHM3 your vvorking
Third plural repMeKnepH their seeing MinneMeKnepH their vvorking

infinitive vvith Case Suffixes

N o m in ativ e 83M3K vvriting OKaM aK r e a d in g

G en itiv e H3Marbin of the vvriting OKaMarun o f the reading
A ccusative H3Marbi the writing O K a M a ru the r e a d in g
D ative nsM ara to the writing oK a M a ra to th e r e a d in g
L ocative MMaKfla in the vvriting O K a M a K fla in th e r e a d in g
A b lativ e B3MaKnaH from the vvriting OKaMaK^aH from the reading

N o m inative re p M e K s e e in g umneMeK w orking

G en itiv e o f the s e e in g
re p M e rH H MuıueMerHH o f the working
A ccusative rep.Merıı the seeing HiıiJieMerH the vvorking
D ative re p M a re to th e s e e in g HuıneMsre to the vvorking
L ocative repM eKjje in the seeing HtuneMeKfle in the vvorking
A b lativ e repMeımeH from the seeing MiUJieMeKfleH from the vvorking
S3MHK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read mımeMeK to vvork
 Paradigms 655

infinitive Suffix ( - m ü k / mkîk )

infinitive with Possessive and Case Suffixes

N o m in ativ e H3MartiM OKaMarbiMbis

m y vvriting our reading
G en itiv e S3MartiMbiH 0KaMaruMbi3bin
o f m y ıvriting o f our reading
A ccusative H3MarbIMbI OKaMaruMHSbi
m y vvriting our reading
D ative H3MartiMa 0KaMan>iM«3a
to m y vvriting to our reading
L ocative H3MaruMfla 0KaMarbiMM3fla
in m y vvriting in our reading
A blativ e B3MarbiMflaH 0KaMarbiMM3flaH
from m y writing from our reading

N o m inative rapMerHH nruneMerHi(H3

your seeing your vvorking
G enitive repMerHHHH HUIJieMerHHM3HH
o f your seeing o f your working
A ccusative rapMerıiHH HiuneMerKHH3H
your seeing your working
D ative repMerHHe HtuneMerMHH3e
to your seeing to your working
L ocative repMemHfle HUineMeranH3fle
in your seeing in your working
A blativ e rapM eraaneH HUHieMerHHH3AeH
from your seeing from your vvorking

N om inative s3Man>ı OKaMaKJiapbi

her/his w riting their reading
G enitive H3Marb1HHH OKaMaKnapuHbin
o f his/her w riting o f their reading
A ccusative HSMarblHH OKa.MaKJiapbiHbi
her/his writing th eir reading
D ative S3Marbina OKaMaKJiapbiHa
to his/her vvriting to their reading
L ocative si3MaruHna OKaMaKJiapbinna
in her/his vvriting in their reading
A blative asMaruHAan OKaMaKnapuHflaH
from his/her writing from their reading

H3MaK to write rapMeıc to see OKaMaK to read HiuJieMeK to work

656 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Verbal Noun Suffîx (-M a /in e )

Verbal Noun with Possessive Suffixes

F irst singular 83M3M my writing OKaMaM my reading

Second singular H3Man your writing OKaMan your reading
T hird singular 83MacH her/his vvriting oKaMactı his/her reading
F irst plural H3MaMH3 our writing 0KaMaMti3 our reading
Second plural R3MaHU3 your vvriting 0KaManu3 your reading
Third plural H3Manapw their vvriting oKaManapu their reading

First singular repMeM my seeing HiııneMeM my vvorking

S eco n d 'sin g u lar repMeH your seeing HUiJieMen your working
T h ird singular repMecıı her/his seeing u m n e M e c ı ı hıs/her vvorking
F irst plural repMeMH3 our seeing HiıiJieMeMH3 our vvorking
Second plural repMenH3 your seeing ııuıneMenH3 your working
T hird plural repM enepH th e ir seein g MiujıeMenepM their vvorking

Verbal Noun with Case Suffixes

N o m inative ü3MaK vvriting OKaMaK reading

G en itiv e 83MaHbiu o f the vvriting OKaMaHUH o f the reading
A ccusative H3MaHM the vvriting oKaMaHU the reading
D ative H3Mara to the vvriting OKaMara to the reading
L ocative B3Maaa in the vvriting OKaMafla in the reading
A biativ e H3Maflan from the vvriting oKaMaaaH from the reading

N o m inative repM eK se e in g M U ineM eKvvorking

G en itiv e repMeHHH o f the seeing o f t h e vvorking
H iu jıe M e H H H
A ccusative repMeHH the seeng HinjıeMeHH the working
D ative re p M s re to th e seein g MUineMare to the vvorking
L ocative repr,ıefle in the seeing MinneMene in the vvorking
A biativ e repM eflen from the seeing ııuıneMefleH from the vvorking
S3M3E to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HiuneMeK to work
 Paradigms 657

Verbal Noun Suffîx (-Ma/ıvıe)

Verbal Noun with Possessive and Case Suffixes

N o m in ativ e S3MaM 0KaM aM U3

m y vvriting ou r reading
G enitive 83M aM lIH OKaMaMbl3blt{
o f m y vvriting o f our reading
A ccusative H3MÜMU OKaMaMU3bI
m y vvriting our reading
D ative H3MaMa OK aM 3M b]3a
to m y vvriting to our reading
L ocative H3M aM fla O K aM aM bO jja
in m y vvriting in our reading
A b lativ e H3MaMflaH O K a M a M u a fla n
from m y vvriting from our reading

N o m inative rep M e n M iu n eM en M 3
your seeing your vvorking
G enitive re p M e H H H H U ineM eı<H 3H H
o f your seeing o f your vvorking
A ccusative rep M e n » MUİJieMeHM3H
your seeing your vvorking
D ative r e p m e ne H in n e M e H H 3 e
to your seeing to your vvorking
L ocative re p M e ım e H iu n eM eH H S fle
in your seeing in your vvorking
A blativ e rep M en n eH M iuneM eH H 3fleH
from your seeing from your vvorking;

N o m in ativ e H3MaCU O K aM anapu

his/her vvriting their reading
G enitive SI3MaCtIHHH o K a M a n a p b iH U H
o f her/his vvriting o f their reading
A ccusative H3MaCUHM OKaManapuHbi
his/her vvriting their reading
D ative H 3 M a c tm a O K a M a n a p b iH a
to her/his vvriting to their reading
L ocative ü 3 M acU H fla O K a M an a p b iH fla
in his/her vvriting in their reading
A blativ e B 3 M a c u m ıa H O K a M a n a p b iH fla n
from her/his vvriting from their reading

A3MÜK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HmneMeK to work

658 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

Verbal Noun Suffix (-biıu/mıı)

Verbal Noun with Possessive Suffixes

First singular tmıuibiM my vvriting OKaftmuM my reading
Second singular H3LiuibiH your vvriting oıcaHuifeiH your reading
Third singular S3UU1M her/his vvriting oKaömtı his/her reading
First plural H3biııibiMU3 our writing 0KaiimHMbJ3 our reading
Second plural S3UUIHHH3 your writing oKaifııibinbi3 your reading
Third plural H3biuiJiapu their writing OKaiibimnaptı their reading

First singular repyaiMM my seeing nmnsltuıuM my vvorking

Second singular repyuiMH your seeing HtunsifuiHH your vvorking
Third singular repyum her/his seeing MuınsüuiH his/her working
First plural repyuiHMM3 our seeing MmnaifıuHMH3 our vvorking
Second plural repytUHHH3 your seeing HuiJiaituiHHH3 your vvorking
Third plural repyınnepH their seeing HiEJieifHumepM their vvorking

Verbal Noun with Case Suffixes

Nominative H3HUI vvriting OKaiibiıu reading

Genitive H3Hiubm of the vvriting oKaiîbin of the reading
Accusative H3MUIIJ the writing oKaîiuıu the reading
Dative asuıua to the vvriting oKaihııa to the reading
Locative H3fciuifla in the writing otcaiîbluma in the reading
Ablative smmmaH from the vvriting OKaiibiuiflaH from the reading

Nominative repyuı seeing HuıneitHtn vvorking

Genitive rop ytuun of the seeing munaliuiHH of the vvorking
Accusative repyııiM the seeing HinJiaituiM the vvorking
Dative repyıue to the seeing Hiujıoiluje to the vvorking
Locative repyume in the seeing Muıjıeiltmifle in the vvorking
Ablative repyuifleH from the seeing HUjneitbmifleH from the vvorking
«3MaK to vvrite repMes to see OKaMaK to read MiımeMeK to vvork
 Paradigms 659

Verbal Noun Suffix (-l h u / h u i )

Verbal Noun with Possessive and Case Suffixes

N om inative B3bIIIIblM OKaÜUIbIMbl3

my writing ou r reading
G enitive H3HUI1.IMUH 0KaiimtiMU3bin
o f m y writing o f our reading
A ccusative Ü3UIUUMU 0KattuibIMbI3bI
m y writing our reading
D ative ü3biınuMa 0KaîiuibiMbi3a
to m y writing to our reading
L ocative a3b!IUHMna 0KaÖUIbIMbI3fla
in m y writing in our reading
A biative !13bIUIbIMflaH 0KaihııtiMti3flaH
from m y vvriting from our reading

N o m inative repyııiHH MUIİI3ÎİU1HHH3

your seeing your working
G enitive repyniHHHH
o f your seeing o f your vvorking
A ccusative repyuiHHH HIEH3İtUIHHH3H
your seeing your vvorking
D ative repyuiH ne HtUJI3İİUIHHH3e
to your seeing to your vvorking
L ocative rep y ıu n n ae HUIJI3ftUIHHM3fle
in your seeing in your vvorking
A biative repyıuHHfleH
from your seeing from your vvorking

N o m inative H3bIUIbI oKaifbiuınapıı

her/his writ'ıng their reading
G enitive H3bIUIbIHbIH OKaftbiuiJiapbiHbiH
o f his/her vvriting o f their reading
A ccusative S3blUlblHbI oKaiibinmaptiHbi
her/his vvriting their reading
D ative 33blUIblHa OKaübiıunapbiHa
to his/her writing to their reading
L ocative ü3biınbiHna OKaiiuuınapbiHfla
in her/his writing in their reading
A biativ e H3bIUlbIHflaH OKaiibiranapbinnaH
from his/her vvriting from their reading

H3MaK to write repMeK to see OKaMaK to read HUineMeK to work

 BIBLIOGRAPHY

This bibliography focuses on grammatical and a few historical works devotcd to the
modem Türkmen language and its dialects. The first list consists o f books and aıticles
in Turkm en and Russian, but omits nearly ali articles th at appeared in various
proceedings of the Turkmen Academy of Sciences and educational conferences, or in
Turkmen newspapers and magazines. Moreover, only a few o f the primers, tey.tbooks,
manuals, phrasebooks and glossaries intended for leam ing Turkmen are listsd. The
second list consists of works vvritten in other languages, including various publications
on the history o f the Turkmen. Both lists om it alm ost ali o f the literatüre on
comparative Turkic linguistics which may çite Turkmen data.
In the brief summary of the study of Turkmen which appears in the Introduction
(see 22), many o f the grammatical works in these lists are commented upon. Hovvever,
I have not had access to the great majority o f the Turkmen-language monographs noted
below.

Works İn Turkmen and Russian Languages

A 6flyjuıaeB, <D.A. (1961) X o p e3 M cm e zo so p u y3 6 eK cm zo st3UKa, ToımceHT: «<J)aıı».

A öflynnaeB , O .A . (1967) 0 o n e m u m xope3M C m x zoeopoe, T o ıu K eırn «<X>aH».
A raöeK O B , C. (1904) Y n eS n u K mypKMeHCKOzo n a p e n u a (a x c u -m e K m c K u ü d ua.ıeıan) c
n p ıv ıo x e H u e M c â o p n u m nocjtoeuif u nozoeopoK mypKM en 3aK acnuücıcoü oö jıa cm u ,
A m xa6a# .
AraflxanoB, C.r. (1973) CeAbdycyKudu u TypKMenun e XI-X1I ee., Aıuxa6afl.
A raflxanoB , C T . (1975) Ory3CKaa npoöneMa m 3aflamı ee M3yHeHHe, b: A.H.
K ohohob (pefl) TmpKOAOZUHecKue c6opH.uK 1973, MocKBa: «HayKa», I'rıaBHaa
Peflaıci(HH Boctomhoö JlHTepaTypH, 6-23.
AraflxaHOB, C T . (1991) rocydapcmeo ceAbdscymdoe u Cpedmat A3ur e Xl-Xil gemx,
MocKBa: «HayKa».
A3Hmob, II. (1944a) TypKMen duA unde ucaua C63AepÖ9Ku tponem uK u yüm zeı^M eA ep,
Aınra6aT.
A3HMOB, II. (19446) T ypK M en d u A u n d e atfaçfiuKCAepuif e 3 a p a mupKeuıun zeA uıu
dy3zynAepu, A u ıra 6 a T .
A3biMOB, II. (1944b) TypKM en duA unde x c u u m p w \ ncaAHuıu, Aıura6aır.
A3MMOB, II. (1947) IlpeçfiuKcaiiusı e mypKMencıcoM s s u k c , Amxa6afl.
A3H M OB, II. (1950) T yp K M en ö u a u ( C b 3 H caüoıçu zouıyjiM cuıap), A m raö aT :
T YpKMenoKyuıneflHeniHp.
A3MMOB, II. (1954) X a3upK u 3 om oh m ypK M en duA unutf cu nm aK cucu âotom cı .lu c z m a
KOHcnetan, AmraöaT.
A3HMOB, II. (1959) Xd3upKu 3omüh mypKM en öuau. T u p u ıu . J le K c u m , Aıuraöar.
AstiM O B, II. (pefl) (1960) Xs3upKu 3 omüh mypKM en öuau, AmraSa-r.
662 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

A se im o b , İ L , 2 Ç . AMaHcapfcieB (19 6 0 ) Xa3upm 3aMan mypKMen dıuıu, A ıu ra ö aT .

A3biMOB, II. (pefl) (19 6 2 ) X a 3 u p m s e m a n mypKM en öuau. C ım m aK cuc, A ıu ra ö aT .
A3MMOB, İ L , A i k . A M a n c a p tıe B , K . C ap b ieB ( 1 9 6 6 ) TypKM encKH İt sabtK , b: H .A .
EacKaKOB (pefl) TıopKCKue jvsuku , Si 3MKH napoflOB C C C P , 5 . M ocK B a: « H ayK a» , 9 1 -
111.
M3eecmun
A3BIMOB, II. ( 1 9 6 7 ) TypKM eH 3fle6w flHJiHHHH fln an eK T a ca cb i xaKMHfla,
AKadeMuu Hayıc TypnMencKOü C C P . Cepua o6utecmeennux Haytc, N8 1: 6 1-6 9 .
A 3 eim ob , Fi. (1 9 6 9 ) C o B e T fleBpyH /ie rypKM eH n ı m m ıı tn e n p e m m n m T a p iM b in fla n
rb ic ra ^ a o ıe p K , b: II. A3m m ob, TypKMen öu jiuhuh M eceA ejıepu, A ıu ra 6 a T : «BIjimm»,
11-9 7 .
A 3 h m o b , ü . (pefl) ( 1 9 9 1 ) P y c c m n p e m m ypK M en-öuAum aoB, A m x a ö a fl: «B Ijihm ».
AjiH eB, A ., K . E op n eB (19 2 9 ) PyccKO-ntypKMeHCKUü CAOeapb, A m xa 6 a fl.
A nnaH a3apoB , O . ( 1 9 7 5 ) r ip o ıu e d ıu e e epeM sı e coepeM eH noM mypK-uencKOM
AumepamypHOM satace, A ıu x a ö a a : « B Ijih m » .
A n M sM M eflroB , A ., P . H ta a p o B ( 1 9 8 9 ) P fn A u c n e -m y p K M e m e ce3 A yK , A ıu ra ö a T :
«Marapbic{>».
A ırrae B , C .A . (19 5 6 ) 3e$eM U 3M U e mypKMemKOM X3buce, A ıu x a6 afl.
A jiT a e B , C . (19 8 6 ) B orıpocu mypKMencKOÜ AeKCUKOzpaçfmu, A ı n x a 6 a f l : « B I j i h m » .
AM aH capneB , JK,. (19 7 0 ) TypKMen duaAeKmoAOzusıcu, A ıu ra ö a T : «TypKMeHMCTaH».
A m ıaH yp oB , A . (1961) ffıvıuıt cesAyK cocmagu xaKUHÖa, A ıu ra ö a T .
AHHaHypoB, A ., P . EepflH eB, H . fly p flb ie B , K . HlaMbipaflOB ( 1 9 7 2 ) TypKMen öuauhuh
gpcapu ducuıemıu, A ıu ra ö aT .
AH H aH ypoB , A . ( 1 9 7 7 ) T ypK M en öuau h u h R 3yuı sıdbizapAUKAepuHÖe uiu au zuh
anaA unıuK çfiopMaAapH, A ıu ra ö a T .
AH H aH ypoB, A . (1 9 8 4 ) T ypK M en öuauhuh si3yuı stöuzapA U K A epunöe cocm aeA U
uuutuKAep, A u ıra 6 a T : « B Ijih m » .
AHHaeBa, P . ( 1 9 8 5 ) 0pa3eOAOZunecKue y c m o ü m g u e CAoeocoHemaHun e naM nm nuK ax
mypKMeııCKOio s a n m , A m xa ö afl: «B Ijihm ».
A p a sK y jib te B , C . ( 1 9 6 1 ) r a p a z a A n a s u c m a n A C C P -n u tf J J e p m z y A p a ııo n H H d a m
nıypKM en zennem uK A epu , A ıu raöaT .
A p a 3 K yn b ieB , C . (pefl.) ( 1 9 7 7 ) T y p m e n öuauhuh z u c z m a öuaA eK m oA O zm c e 3 A y zu ,
A ıu ra ö a T .
A p H a 3 a p o B , C . (19 8 2 ) TypKMen öuA unöe ce3A eüuuı uıuAUKAepu: öetfem öupM e ıiAanöa,
A ıu r a ö a T : « B Ijim m » .
ATa3K.aHOB, M . (1 9 5 8 ) T y p m e n öuauhuh cevttıp d u a n e a n u (M 0p$0A 0zusı ee AeKCum ),
A ıu raö aT -M ap b t.
ATaHbM30B, C . ( 1 9 8 1 ) T y p m e m c m a H U H monoHUM uscu, A ıu ra ö a T : «B Ijihm ».
AraHHsBOB, C . (19 8 8 ) CAoeapb mypKMeHCmx anmonuMOB, A ıu x a ö a fl: « B Ijih m » .
ATaHMH30B, C . ( 1 9 9 2 ) T ypK M en aöaM a m A a p u n u H öym yndupuuiAu c e S A y z u ,
A ıu ra ö a T : «TypKMeHMCTaH».
A T a e B , T . (1 9 8 2 ) T ypK M en öuauhuh xyHapMeHmHUAUK jıeK cuK acunuH C 8 3 A yzu ,
A u ır a ö a T : « B Ijim m » ,
 Sources 663

A T ae B , X . ( 1 9 9 3 a ) TypKM eH M M paHa ( 1 9 1 7 - 1 9 3 9 ) , b: X . A T aeB (p en ) T y p K M e n u

3apy6ejtCH0Z0 B o c m o m (o n e p m o m ypK M enax M paHa, Acf)2aHucmaHa, Mpaıca, C u p u u ,
T yp ifu u u K u m a n ), A ıu ra ö a T : «TypKM eHHcraH», 2 1 - 7 5 .
A TaeB , X . (1 9 9 3 6 ) T y p K M e m ı-c a n a p H ( c a n tıp tt) K ır r a a , b: X . ATaeB (pen) TypKM enu
3 a p y â e x n o z o B o c m o m (o n e p m o mypKMeHax M paııa, A fa a n u c m a n a , M p a m , C u p u u ,
T yp ifu u u K u m a n ), A ıu ra ö aT : «TypKM eHHcraH», 268 -290.
A T aeB a, X . A . ( 1 9 6 1 ) TypKMeH ö u a u h u h AeKCUKacutMH 03 u h k u p e c y p c A a p u n u fi
x a c a 6 m a ec y u ıu , ^IspaçeB.
Axanjn> ı, C . (1 9 5 8 ) M cu a ıyd K a m z a p u n u tf co3A yau ee m ypK M en ö u a u , A ıu ra ö a T :
TypKMeHHCTan C C P fclJibiMJiap AKafleMHHCbiHbiH HeniHpsrrbi.
AMbinoBa, T . ( 1 9 5 1 ) O n p ed eA u m eA tn tıe CJioeoconemaHun e coepeMeHHOM mypKMeHCKOM
ıi3HKe, A ıu x a 6 a fl.
AMMJioBa, T . ( 1 9 7 7 ) X a3upK u 3aM.au m ypK M en d u A u n d e d y p n y m tu C63 dy3yM A epu,
A ıu ra ö a T : «BInbiM».
A iu h h h , O . f l . (1 9 7 8 a ) A n eK caH flp HnKOJiaeBM<j CaM oftnoBHU, 18 8 0 -19 3 8 , b: A .H .
K o h o h o b (pefl) TıopKOAOSuueCKuü c S o p n m 1 9 7 4 , M o cK B a : « H a yK a » , D ıa B H aa
PeflaKHHH B o c t o t o o ü JlH T ep ary p tı, 8-27.
AmHMH, O .f l . (19 7 8 6 ) C ro ıco K TpyflOB A . H . C a M o to o B im a (c yKa3am ıeM penen3nW Ha
hmx) m m iT epaT ypa o neM, b: A .H . K o h o h o b (pefl) T topK O A O zm ecm ü c â o p m K 1 9 7 4 ,
M ocK B a: « H ayK a», rn aB H aa P eflaK u ıta B o c to m h o ü JIırrepaTypbi, 2 63-29 2.
E aö aeB a, A . (19 9 2 ) TypKM enu AçfrzaHucmana, A ıu ra 6 a T : « E h jih m » .
BarbieB , X . (1 9 6 5 ) Ojiomckuü ducuıemı mypKMeHCKOZo saum , A ıu x a ö a fl.
E a ü n tıe B , X ., B . K a p p b ie s (19 4 0 ) T yp K M em e-p ycn a ce3AyK, A ıu ra ö aT .
B a itn u e B , X . (1 9 4 8 ) X s3 u p K u so m o h m ypK M en d u jıu n u if spaM M am um cH H H H z u c z a
K ypcu, I. MopçfsoAOzun, A ıu ra ö a T .
EaMnbieB, X . ( 1 9 5 6 ) TypKMeH duAunde zouimo uuvıuKAep, A ıu ra ö a T .
BacKaKOB, H .A . ( 1 9 4 9 ) O ö oco6enH ocTH X ro B o p a ceBepoKaBKa3CKHX TypKMeHOB
(TpyxM eııoB ), Jİ3HKÜ C eeep n o so K a e m s a u JJa zecm a u a 2: 14 0 -18 2 .
EacıcaKOB, H .A ., M ..H. X aM 3aeB (pefl) (19 5 6 ) P ycaco-m ypK M encK uü CAOeapb, M ocK B a:
FocyflapcTBeHHoe M aflaTentcTBO MH0CTpaHHbix h HauHOHanbHtıx C n oB apeö.
BacK aK O B , H .A . ( 1 9 6 5 ) K u c m o p u u usyH en u n mypKMencKOZO si3UKa, A u ıx a ö a fl:
«TypKMeıntcTaH».
BacKaKOB, H .A ., B .A . K a p p tıe B , M .J L X aM 3aeB (pefl) (1 9 6 8 ) TypKM encKO-pyccKuü
cjıoeapb, M ocK B a: « C oseT C K aa SmiHKJioneflHa».
B acK aK O B , H .A ., M .51. X a M 3 a eB , B . ^ a p b ia p o B
(p e fl) ( 1 9 7 0 ) T p a M M a m u K a
mypKMencKozo s a m a , I. 0 o n e m u m u MopçflOAOZusi, A u ıx a ö a fl: « L I j i h m » .
BeM coB , B . (p efl) (1 9 8 9 ) T ypK M en ö u a u h u h op<j>ozpaçfiuK c e jA y z u , A u ır a ö a T :
« T YpKMeHHCTaH».
BenaeB, A . ( 1 9 1 3 ) PyccKO-mypKMeHcymo H 3 u m , A ıu x aö a fl.
E e r a e B , A . ( 1 9 1 5 ) T p a M uam uK a m ypK M encm zo u s u m , A ıu x a ö a fl.
BepflMeB, f l . (1 9 5 8 ) X s3upK ü 3 o m o h mypK M en duA unde i o u m a C03Aep, A ıu ra ö aT .
E epflueB , f l . (1 9 5 9 ) X a 3 u p m 3aM an m ypKM en duA unde u u ia u k ze p n y u u ıe p u , tfepaçeB .
664 Turkmen Reference Grammar

BepfliieB, P., C. KypeHOB, K. IIIaMHpaflOB, C. Apa3KyntıeB (1970) T y p K M e n

ÖUAUHUIİ duaAeKmAepuHMj o n e p m , AıuraöaT: «BIjimm ».
BepflHeB, P. (1988) T ypK M en d u A u n u if duaAeKtruıepmıde e e zenAeiuu.KAepuH.de
uıuAuKJiep, Auıra6aT.
Eepe3HH, M. (1845) roflMHHtıfi orueT nyfeınecTByıomero no B o c-ro K y ManıcTpa
Ka3aH CK oro H M nepaTopcKoro yHHBepcMTeTa, JKypnaA M m ucm epcm ea Hapodomzo
IIpoceetifeHUJi 45.
Eepe3HH, M. (1857,1862, 1876,1890) T ypeifK aa xp ecm oM am un, /-///, Ka3aH.
Eop;*,aKOB, A. (1978) X 3 3 u p m 3em aH m ypK M en d u A u n d e um arruıapu, A m raöar:
«BIjimm ».
Eopa^asoB, III. (1 9 8 9 ) T ypK M en dujıuHutj. d etfu 3 e e d e p n A eK cu K a cu n u n su c e a n a
C 03jıyzu, Am raöar: «BIjibim».
E peren, İO. ( 1 9 5 9 ) STHHMecKaa KapTa kkkhoK TypKMeHHM m XopecaHa b X Y II-
X Y III bb, K p a m m e C ooSufenun U n c m u m y m a 3m nozpaıf> uu AH CCCP 3 1 : 14-2 6.
B ojihh, C.JI, (pefl) ( 1 9 3 9 ) M a m e p u a /ıu n o u c m o p u u m ypK M en u T ypK M enuu, I-II,
MocKBa: M3flaTenbCTBO AxafleMHH HayK CCCP, 19 3 9 .
Fafl^KHeBa, H .3 . (1975) IJp o â jteM U mıopKCKoH a p e a M n o ü A u m e u c m u K U .
C p ed n ea 3 u a m cK uü apeaA, MocKBa: «HayKa», 171-176.
r a * ,a p o B a , E. (1968) Ilp o m e d m e e epeM n u3T>sıeumeMH0Z0 n a K A o n en m e nucbMennbuc
naMJimHUKtvc mypKMencKOZO s a n m X y i I I - X I X e e ., A m xa 6 a fl: «TypKMeHMCTaH».
TaaçapoBa, E. (1990) TypKMen duAunuif saye aduzapAUKAepunde uutAuzutf emen
30M0H çfjopMcuapH, AıuraöaT: «BIjimm».
TenflHMiipafloB, A. (1983) T ypK M en a d e ö u duAunde e a p u a n m A a u tM a , AuıraBa-r:
«BIjimm ».
FejiflHMupaflOB, A. (1988) H e n e p a d e ö u n m u H öuau e e s d e ö u nopMa, A ıuraöar:
«BIjimm».
ry3tı«meB, T. (1983) TypKM en öuauhuh s a y e jtduzapAUKAepunde opm aK muAUKAep,
AıuraBa'r: «BIjimm».
ry3tiHMeB, T. (1984) TypKM en ö u a u ilu h s a y e jtduzapAU KAepunde üoneK eü ce3AeM Aep:
eypAyuı m u tın ep u , AuıraöaT: «BIjimm ».
FypöaHOB, A., II. KyppaeB (1949) TypKM en öuauhuh ep a M M a m u m cu , I. MopıfioAOZun,
AıuraöaT.
rypöanoB, T. (1992) K e n e mypK M en s a y e n , AıuraöaT: «-Siutimk» >Kypnantı.
TypflOB, A. (1983) ConocmaeumeAbHası munOAOZua epaMMamuneCKia. cfiopM amAuüCKux
u m ypK M encK ux ZAaz0A0e, Aıuxa6afl: MHHHCTepcTBO B tıcıu ero m CpeflHero
CneyııajibHoro 06pa30BaHMfl TCCP.
FypflOB, A. (1986) C m pyK m ypa u c e M a n m u m zpaM M amuHecıaa: <f>opM amAuücKOZO u
mypKMencKOZO jauıcoe, AmraöaT: «BIjimm ».
TypflOB, A. (1987) PpaMMammecKue ocnoebt anaAU3a m eK cm a, Aıuxa6afl: «BIjimm ».
fleMMflOB, C. (1976) TypKMenCKue O B A a d u , Aıuxa6afl.
flacmcHeB, A. (1991) OnepKU n p o u c x o x d e n u jı u çjjopM upoeanun nıypKMencKoıo n a p o d a e
3tıaxy CpedneeeKOBbsı, Auıxa6aT: «TypKMeHHcraH».
 Sources 665

flM irr p ıte B , H .K . ( 1 9 5 5 a ) flo n r H e rn a c H H e b rypKMeHCKOM H3HKe, b: H .K .

flM jn p H e ş (pefl) MccAedoeanujt no cpaeuumeMHOü zpaMMamuKe mmpKCKux h3uıcoB, I.
O onem uK a, M ocK B a: M3flaTenBCTBO AxafleMMM H ayıc C C C P , 1 8 2 - 1 9 1 .
flMHTpHeB, H .K . (1 9 5 5 6 ) C o r a a c H u e ç m ş b tk>pkckm x a3M Kax, b: H .K . Jİ \iHTpneB
(p e fl) H ccA edoeanuH no cpaenumeAbHOü zpaMMamuKe mtopKCKux su u k o b , I.
OonemuKa, M ocK B a: IfeflaTenkcT B o AKafleMMM H ay K C C C P , 2 4 9 -2 5 3 .
HMHTpMeB, H .K . (pefl) (1 9 5 5 b ) MccAeöoeanuH no cpaanum eAbnoü zpaMMamuKe
mtopKCK.ux H3hkob, I. 0OHemuKa, MocKBa: M3flaTem>cTBo AıcafleMHH HayK "CCP.
flMHTpHeB, H .K . (pefl) (1 9 5 6 ) M ccAedoeanusı no cpaanumeAbHOü zpaMMamuKe
m topK cm x A3UK08, II. MopçfjOAOzun, MocKBa: Jİ3flaTeJifcCTB0 AKafleMiiH HayK
C C C P.
flMHTpMeB, H .K . ( 1 9 6 1 ) fle ra ıiM n p o c T o ro n p e fln o a c e m ıa , b : H .K . H .A .
EacKaKOB, E .M . Y öpaTOBa (pefl) MccAedoBanus. no cpaenumeAbHoü zpaMMamuKe
mwpKCKux st3UK0B, III. CuHmaKcuc, M o cK B a: M sfla T e n tcT B o AK afleM iiH H a y K
C C C P , 19 -4 9 .
flMHTpHeB, H .K . (1962a) OcHOBHbie B o rıp o ctı TypKMeHCKOro CHHTaKcuca, b: 3 . B .
CeBopTSH H .K . f fM u m p u e e . C m poü mtopKCKux jl3 u kob , M o c K B a :
( p e fl)
M sflaTeıibCTBo B o c to k h o M JlMTepaTypbi, 395-430.
flM HTpHeB, H .K . (19626) 3ByK 8 b coB peM eH H tıx TiopKCKHX s3 H K a x , b: 3 . B .
C eB opTH H ( p e fl) H .K . ffM u m p u e e . C m poü mtopKCKux x 3 u kob , M o c K B a :
M 3flaTentcTB0 B o c t o h h o ü JlırrepaTypu, 12-18.
flM H TpııeB, H .K . (1962b) CNepK K>XH0TK>pKCK0fl M HM onoraH, b: 3 . B . C c b o p t h h
(p efl) H .K. ffM u m p u ee . Cmpoü mmpKCKux m3 ukob , M o cK B a : M3flaTt;JibCTBo
B o c t o t o o ü JIwrepaTypu, 85-108 (102-108).
flM jn p M eB a , J I .B . (1978) M a T e p H a m ı k onHcaHHio p yK o rm cH o ro H acn efliıa A .H .
CaM otooBM M a, b: A .H . K o h o h o b (pefl) T ıopK O A O zm ecm ü cffopuuK 1 9 7 4 , M ocK B a:
« H ayK a», r n a s H a a PeflaıcıiMH B o c to 'ih o İ İ JlH TepaTypH , 293-302.
fly p flb ie a , M . (1991) TypKMenu (noucK u npeÖKoe m ypm encK ozo napodu u ezo
ucmopunecKOü npapodunu), A u ıx a6 afl: « X ap n » .
A y p f l i i e s , M . ( 1 9 9 2 ) TypKM enu
K u m a n (C a A a p u ), A ıu r a ö a T : T yp K M eH C K aa
AxajrreKMHCKaa AcconHaıiHa.
JHypflbieB, M ., İH. Ka#npoB (1991) ffynüadaK u m y p K M e m e p (m apuxu-deM ozpa$uK
chh ), AıuraöaT: «Xapn». [Also in Russian: TypKMenu Mupa, Aıuxa6aT: «Xapn».]
EpeMeeB, fl.E . (1969) lO pm m (TypeifKue KonesnuKu u noAyKoueenuKu), I.locKBa:
«HayKa». FjıaBHaa PeflaKiyra B octohhoö JİHTepaTypn.
JK,yMarenMeBa, E., T. C om ıesa (1994) TypKMeme-pycHa zuczana meMamuK ce3Ayzu,
AıuraöaT: «MmaM».
K a p a ö a e B , E . ( 1 9 9 3 ) TypKMeHbi (TiopKMeifti) Typmm, b: X . A T a e B (pefl) TypKMenu
3apy6exHOZO Bocmom (ouepKu o mypKMenax Mpana, AçfrzaHucmana, MpaKa. Cupuu,
Typifuu u Kuman), A ı u r a ö a T : «TypKMeHMCTaH», 2 1 5 - 2 6 7 .
K a p n o B , H M . (1 9 2 9 ) TypKMeHHH h TypKMeHU (McTopHKo-3THorpa<j»pıecKM# oqepK),
TypKM euoeedeHue, N° 1 0 -1 1 .
666 Türkmen Reference Grammar

K o h o h o b , A .H . ( 1 9 5 8 ) PodocAOenası mypKMen. Conunem e A6y-A~ra3u xana

xu6uhcko2o, M ocKBa- JleHHHrpafl: JfafflaTemcTBO AjcafleMHH H ayıc C C C P .
K o h o h o b , A .H . ( 1 9 7 5 ) A neK caH flp üeTpoBHH IIoDienyeBCKHİİ. 13 /V 18 9 4 -6 /X 19 4 8 ,
b: üoıjenyeB C K H tt, A J I . ( 1 9 7 5 ) MsöpaHHue m p y d u , (P eflaK T opu: İ L A . A 3 h m o b ,
A .H . K o h o h o b ), A m x a 6 a fl: « L Ijih m » , 7 - 2 1 .
K o h o h o b , A . H . ( 1 9 8 2 ) M cm opusı u3yneH un mwpKCKux s a n m a e P o cc u u .
JJoOKmn6pbCKuü nep u o d , JleH H H rpafl: « H a y K a » , JleH H H rpaflcK oe oT flen eH n e.
[MapaHHe BTopoe]
K y3eeB , PJT. ( 1 9 7 4 ) r ip o u c x o x d e n u e SauiKupcKOzo n a p o d a . 3m H m ecm ü co c m a e ,
ucm opuH pacceAeHUH, MocKBa: «H ayK a».
KynbMaHOB, T . ( 1 9 9 1 ) FeomıeHCKuU duaAeKm mypKMencKozo jt3 u m , A u ıx a 6 a fl:
« L Ijih m » .
Kyp6aHOB, A . ( 1 9 5 5 ) B T opoii jnnn-BHcTHMecKHÖ c-be3fl TypKMeHHCTaH, B o n p o cu
JJ3UK03HÜHUH, N° 2.
KypeHOB, C . ( 1 9 6 2 ) CmagponoAb m ypK M enA epu x e u - d e OAapun M ed en u öaüA H zu,
A ıu raö aT .
KypeHOB, C . ( 1 9 7 1 ) TypKMeH duAunuif y3UH ee zucza HeKUMAUAepu, A ıu raö aT .
KypeHOB, C. (1977) TypKMeH duAunde ügneKeû x a â a p ee copaz ce3AeMAepunun
m m onaifuncu (sKcnepuMeHmaA-^onemuK depffe s), A m raöaT : « L Ijih m » .
K ypeHOB, C . ( 1 9 7 9 ) TypKM eH d u A u n d e otçozan e e ö yü p yıc çf}p a 3 a A a p u H u n
uHmoHaifuncu (sKcnepuMeHmoA-cjioHemuK deptjee), A m raöaT : «L I j ih m ».
K ypeH O B , C . ( 1 9 9 0 ) TypKMeH d u A u n d e zurç neKuMAUAepun a K y c m u m
xapcuanepucmuKacH (3KcnepuMenmajı-ıfionemuK dept(ee), A ıuraöaT : « L Ijih m » .
JleöeflO B , H.<D. ( 1 9 5 4 ) TypKMeHCKue n a p o d n u e cko3 ku M apm ıcK ozo p a u o n a (c
neduCAOeueM u eeoÖHOü cm am teü H.K. JjMumpueea), M ocKBa- Jlen raırp afl.
M aB tıeB , H . (1 9 8 7 ) TypKMeH ö u a u h u h a p a ö m u duaA em ıu, A m raö aT : « L Ijih m » .
Maflpax,HMOB, A . (1 9 8 3 ) O ry3C K oe H apeuH e y3Ö eK coro H3HKa: TiopKCKHe h3M kh
0ry3CK0Ü r p y n n tı, C o e e m c m sı TmpmAOzua, N° 2, 79 -8 4 .
MamaKOB, X . A . ( 1 9 7 5 ) TypKMeH dıtAUHUif HeKuMCia cecA ep u n u n çfjoneMa cocm aeu,
A ıu raö aT .
MeHrejiMeBa, T. (19 6 6 ) HeKOTOpbie (JjoHeTHMecKHe, MopcjKm onınecKHe m n eK cm ecK ste
ocoöenH ocTH ca K ap cK o ro flMajıescra TypKMeHCKoro H3MKa, b: M .IH . IIlMpanHeB (pefl)
B onpocu duaAeKmoAOzuu mmpKCKux st3um e, I Y , B a K y : H3flaTejibCTB0 AKafleMHH
H a y K A 3 ep 6 aö flxa H C K ofl C C P , 1 1 7 - 1 2 9 .
M ecryflO B , B . (1 9 8 2 ) Co 3Aym ıepde uMAUKAepuff o m u m - v e AeKCuKozpaçfmpAeHiuıuıu
npuHifuruepu: mypKMen öu a u h u h Mamepua/M, A ıu raö aT : « H jih m » .
M ecryflO B , B . (1 9 8 8 ) TypKMeHcm-pyccmCı yneÖHHü CAOeapb, M ocK B a: «PyccKMÖ
H3HK».
M o m ıae B , A . ( 1 9 7 7 ) JUnH Tenknocn, oflHopoflHHX rnacH H X b flB y c n o x n t ıx cn o B a x c
oflMHaKOBoM C T pyK T ypoit (Ha M aTepH ane TypKM eH CKoro H3MKa), CoeemcKan
TiûpKOAOZun, N° 4: 5 2 -6 5 .
 Sources 667

MonnaeB, A. (1980) A ry cm m ec m sı m paK m epucm um ydap hhx u ffe3ydapnux zjıacnux e

deycA03tcnux CAOeax mypKMencKOZo sau n a (K eonpocy o p u nw m ecK oü opsaH ioaifuu
p en eeo zo tıomoKa), Auıxa6afl: « B Ijilim » .
MypaflOBa, C. (1971) O TepMHHononra TypKMeHCKoro KOBpoTKaMecTBa, b: H.A.
BacKaKOB (pefl) Ttoptccmsı AeKCUKOAOZusı u AeıccuKOzpacfiusı, M ocraa: «HayKa», 243-
255.
MyxaMeflOBa, 3.B . (1971a) H .K. flMMTpııeB m TypKMencKaa tJ)Hnonorna, b : 3 .B .
CeBopTHH (pefl) C m pyK m ypa u ucm opusı mıopKCKux sa u n o e , MocKBa: «HayKa», 30-
32.
M yxa M e a o B a, 3 .B . ( 1 9 7 1 6 ) O HeK0T0ptıx niflpoHHMax 3anaflHoM TypKMeHMH, b : 3 . B .
CeBopTSH (pefl) C m pyK m ypa u ucm opusı m m p K c m x sauıcoe, M ocK B a: « H ayK a», 1 7 9 -
186.
M y x a M e flo B a , 3 . B .
( 1 9 7 3 ) M ccA e d o ea H u n n o u c m o p u u m ypK M encK oeo s a u n a
oduH adifamozo-Hem upH adtfamozo e e m e , Auncaöafl: «BIjimm».
MyxaMej;oBa, 3.B . (1974) IfayMeHHe TypKMeHCKoro s3biKa 3a nocneflHHe rofltt,
M 3eecm ust A m d e M u u H ayK TypKMencKoü C C P . C epusı O ö m e c m e e n n m HayK, N° 6:
64-68. [Reproduced in: P IA C N e v sle tte r , Nr. 11, 1977, 9-13.]
MyxaMeflOBa, 3 .B . (1977) C6pya m yKpameHita TypKMeHCKoro koh «, A lta ica .
P r o c e e d in g s o f th e 1 9 th A n n u a l M e e tin g o f th e P e r m a n e n t In te r n a tio n a l A lta is tic
C o n fe r e n c e H e ld in H e ls in k i 7 -1 1 J u n e 1 9 7 6 , M em oires de la Societe Finno-
Ougrienne 158, Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Senra, 189-195.
MyxtıeB, X., C. KypenoB (1988) TypKM en dujınuA epu, Auıraöa-r: «M arapu^t».
MtıpaflOB, A. ( 1 9 8 5 ) T ypK M en d u A u n d e ucuM Aepde c e ü a y A u zu ff e e k c m a u s u h
atpıaduAUUiH , AuıraöaT: «BIjiiim».
MtıpaflOB, A. (1989) TypKM en duA unuff c63Aeüum M ed en u em u ö o to m a a m o m u p A eH en
6u 6AU0ipaçf)USi, 1 9 2 0 - 1 9 8 3 , AmraöaT: «BIjimm».
HapTueB, H. (1959) TypKM en dım uH uif capuK duaAeKmu, ^tapaçeB.
HapTtıeB, H. (1 9 8 8 ) C m p o ü ca o o kh o so npedAODKenusı e coepeM em O M ntypKMencKOM
sa u K e, Aıuxa6afl: «LInbiM».
HenecoBa, P. (1986) ConocmaeumeAbHası MopçfioHOAOzusı o h ia u U cko io u mypKMencKozo
saum e, Amxa6afl: «BIjimm».
HypMyxaMMe,goB, A. (1982) TypKM en duAunde cyüK eut e e conopAu He>aiMCu3Aep,
Amraöa-r: «BIjimm».
HypMyxaMMeflOB1 A. (1982) TypKM en dıuıunde 6 u p e e Ken cunm azM ojıu çfipcaaAaputf
uurnoH atfusıcu, AıuraBaT: «BIjimm».
0Be3OB, A. (1989) TypKM en duA unde c e 3 y if ee c e s jy K c o c m a e u ff e c y u ıu n u tf eA jıapu,
Auıra6a-r: «BIjibim».
OBe30B, A., X. TaflxapoB (1993) TypKMem>t MpaKa, b: X . ATaeB (pefl) T yp K M en u
3 a p y ffe x n o z o Bocm oKa (ouepKu o m ypK M enax H p a n a , Açpzanucmana, MpaKa, C u p u u ,
T yp ifu u u Kuması), Auıraöa-r: «TypKMeHHcraH», 137-187.
neıosiHeB, M. (1962) X 9 3 u p m 3o m o h mypK M en d ıvıu n d e ca n jıa p , ^Isp^eB.
6 6 8 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

IleKHiHeB, M . ( 1 9 7 1 ) 0 6 HppHraınHOHHoM TepMHHonoruH TypıtM eH CKoro S3UKa, b:

H .A . EacKaKOB (pefl) TmpKCKaa AeıccuKOAOzuM u AeKCUKOzpaçfiusı, M ocK B a: «H ayK a»,
2 5 5 -2 6 4 .
üeiDKM eB, M . ( 1 9 9 1 a ) TypK M en öuauhuh npoçfieccuOHOA A eK C u m cu (3KepaHHUAUK
AeKCUKacuabtH MHcaAUHÖa), A ıu ra ö a T : «M arapw<jj».
Ileıo K H eB , M . ( 1 9 9 1 6 ) fic m o p m e c K o e p a 3 e u m u e u c o s p e M e m a n c m p y ıc m y p a
3eMAedeAbuecKoü Aeıccm u e mypKMeHCKOM n3ttKe, A u ıx a ö a fl: « Lİjilim » .
IIo K p o B C K a s, n .A . ( 1 9 6 1 ) TepMHHbi poflcTBa b tk>pkckhx 8 3 U K a x , b: E .M .
Y öpaT O B a (pefl) M c m o p m e c m e p c a e u m u e a c k c u k u mmpKCKux H3UK08, M ocK Ba:
H3flaTenbCTBo AjcafleMiiM H ayK C C C P , 1 1 - 8 1 .
rio ııen yeB C K H ft, A .I I . ( 1 9 3 6 a ) O o n em u K a m ypK M encK ozo n s u K a , A u ıx a 6 a fl. [=
IIouenyeBCKHfi 19 7 5 : 25-60 .]
n oije n y eB C K H Ü , A .I I . ( 1 9 3 6 6 ) J J u a A e x m u m ypK M encK ozo m u m , A u ıx a 6 a fl. [=
IIoııeJiyeBCKMti 1 9 7 5 : 7 1 - 1 2 2 .]
nou enyeB C K H Ü , A .I I . ( 1 9 4 3 ) O c n o e u cunm aK C uca m ypK M encKozo A u m e p a m y p n o zo
a3UKa, A m x a 6 a fl. [= üoıjenyeBCKHM 1 9 7 5 :1 6 7 - 2 6 8 .]
nouenyeBCKMÜ, A .Ü . (1 9 4 5 a ) Onbrr M3yueHHa apTHKynauHM 3ByK0B TypKMeHCKoiî
pe«iH MeTOflOM nanaTorpaMM, M 3 eecm u n TypKMeHCKOZO O u a u o a ü A m ö e M u u H ayK
C C C P , N° 3 -4 . [= IIouenyeBCKMîi 19 7 5 : 6 1-6 8 .]
IIoueJiyeBCKM İt, A .I I . ( 1 9 4 5 6 ) H eK O T op tıe pyflHMeHTapHbie n afle acH n e tJıopMtı b
TypKMeHCKOM s e tn c e , H3eecmux TypKMencmzo (Puauoao AmöeMuu HayK C C C P , N°
5-6. [= noııejıyeBCK H Ü 19 7 5 : 12 3 -12 9 .]
IIo n e n y e B C K H Îl, A .I I . (19 4 7a) IIp o H cxo a cfle H H e n sm H u x m y K a 3 a T e n tn u x
MecTOHMeHHö h ctophh T yp K M eH C K oro
(M a T e p n a n tı k H3WKa), b: A .I I .
ÜOLiejıyeBCKMM, M36paHHue m p y d u , 1 9 7 5 : 13 0 -1 4 6 .
IIoijeJiyeBCKMft, A .I I . (1 9 4 7 6 ) K B o n p o cy o 33bhchm m x HOMMHanbHBix n pefln o*eH M ax
b TypKMeHCKOM a3H K e, T p y ö u (fiuAOAOBunecKozo 0aKyAbm em a A uıxa6adcK 0Z 0
ro c ö yö a p cm eenH O zo n e ö a zo zm e c K O zo H n c m u m y m a , N° 2 . [= IIonenyeBCKM fi 1 9 7 5 :
284-290 .]
IIouejıyeBCK H İİ, A .I I . (1 9 4 8 ) K B o n p o c y o n poH cxo*fleH M H <J)opMbi H acT o aıu e ro
BpeMöHM b TiopKCKHX a3b iK ax roro -a aııa fliıo # r p y ıın u , b: A .I I . IIoq en yeB C K H ü ,
Ü 36paH H ue m p y ö u , 1 9 7 5 : 1 4 7 -1 6 3 .
IIoyenyeBCKM İİ, A .I I . ( 1 9 7 5 ) M sB p a ım u e m p y ö u , (PeflaKTopbi: E t.A . A3m m ob, A .H .
K o h o ho b ), A ıııx a 6 a fl: « b ln tiM » .
Iloı^enyeBCKiiM , 3 . A . ( 1 9 7 6 ) CpaBH H TejibH aa cTeneH b m acJıcJjHKc -paK, b: 3 .P .
TeHHmeB (pefl) TmpKOAOzmecKue u ccA eöoB anm , MocKBa: «HayKa», 1 8 1 - 1 9 3 .
PeacenoB, H. ( 1 9 9 3 ) T ypK M eH C m ü jtsu K . Y n e S n u K d a A e 3poCAU x, A ıu r a ö a T :
«MarapbH})».
P e30AM H un 2 - z o A U H zeucm unecK oao CT>e3Öa T C C P n o eonpocaM o p c fıo z p a ğ u u ,
nyH K m yaifuu u mepMuHOAOZuu mypKM encKozo Aumepamypnozo H 3 u m , A ıu x a 6 a fl,
1954.
 Sources 669

PeıueTO B, B .B . ( 1 9 5 5 ) O flManeKTHOö ocHOBe yaG eK CK oro jıırrep a T yp H o ro H3inca,

Bonpocu muK03HaHUR, 1: 10 0 -10 8 .
PeıueTOB, B .B ., III. IIIoa6flypa*MOHOB (1978) fo S e /c duaAeıcmoAOZusıcu, TouııceHT:
«S'KHTyBHH».
CaMoünoBHM, A .H . (19 0 6 ) K ıu ır a paccıca30B o 6MTBax TeKMHijeB (n p eflB ap m e n t n o e
cooSmeHMe), 3 a n u cm Bocm m m zo omdejıenun Pyccmzo apxe 0A0zmecK 0za oöıifecmea
16: 0 2 0 1 -0 2 1 1 .
CaM oüJioBMn, A .H . ( 1 9 0 7 ) T yp K M en cK irii no3T-6ocH K K e p - M o n n a h e r o ııecHH o
p y c c ı a a . (STHorpatjjHHecKMÖ Ha6pocoK), JKuean cm apum 1 6 :2 1 5 - 2 2 5 .
CaM oftnoB M M , A .H . (19 0 8 a ) S T H orpacJjH M ecK oe M en om i M3 flHe,3 h k k o b
nyTem ecTBO BaBuıero n o TypKMeHMH, JKuean cmapuııa 17 : 1 2 2 -1 2 5 .
CaMOÖJlOBHH, A .H . (1 9 0 8 6 ) Ilep cH flC K o e «C3pr3pflân»-TeKM H CKoe « C 3 p r;3 flâH » ,
3 a n u cm Bocmomtozo omdeAenua Pyccmzo apxeoA O zm ecm zo oöuıecmea 18: 01(57.
CaM ofönoBJM , A .H . ( 1 9 0 9 a ) M3 TypKMeHCKofl cTapHHM, I. CKa3aHHe o ııp n x o fle
TeKMHueB b A x a n , b : CâopnuK e necmb ceMudecnmuAemusı T.H. Ilomanuna, C t .
n e r e p c ö y p r , 5 5 9 -5 6 4 .
CaMo^noBMM, A .H . (19 0 9 6 ) M3 TypKMeHCKoü cTapMHLi, II. M epBCKHe BocnoMnuaHHsı,
JKuean cmapuna 18: 78 -8 5 .
CaMoMnoBHM, A .H . (1 9 0 9 b ) üepejKM TOK maMaHCTBa y TypKM eH CKoro njıeMeHH
Moyflyp, 3mHozpaçf)u'ieCKoe o â o sp e n u e 4: 172 .
CaM ottnoBH U , A .H . (1 9 Q 9 r ) TypK.MeHCK.we p a 3 B iıe u e H n a, E ycezodnuK PyccKozo
anmponoAOZuuecKOZo oSufecmea npu CamcmnemepcSypzcKOM ymeepcumeme 3: <55-82.
CaM0İin0BH4, A .H . (1 9 1 0 a ) M aT ep jfan b l n o cpeflHea3MaTCK0-Typei(K0Ö HHTeparype, I.
K p a n c a s o m ıct, cpeflnea3HaTCKMX p y K o n ııceiı coöpam iH A . CaMOÖJiOBHMa, SanucKu
BocmoHHOza om deAem n Pyccmzo apxeOAOzmecmzo oâufecmea 19 :0 0 1-0 3 0 .
CaMoünoBHH, A .H . ( 1 9 1 0 6 ) K cTan>e « Y K a sa T e n t k necHHM M axTyM K ynH », Sa n u cK u
BocmoHHOzo omdeAeuuH P y c c m z o a p x e o A o zm e c m zo oöuıecm ea 19: 0 216-0 218.
CaMoÜJiOBMM, A .H . (1910b) Y K a3aT en ı, k ik c h h m M axTyM K yjiH , 3atıuCKu B ocmohhozo
om deA enua PyccKozo apxeO A O zm ecm zo oöufecm ea 19:0125-0148.
CaMoJinoBHM, A .H . ( 1 9 1 2 ) TypKMeHCKKe 3aroB opbi (3aıaiMHaHMa b TpaHCKpmmHH c
nepeBOflOM Ha pyccKOM a3bnce), M u sa n c m a p u n a 2 1 : 1 1 7 - 1 2 4 .
CaM oflnoBH H , A .H . ( 1 9 1 3 a ) H a p e *m a H oraitııeB m TypKMeHOB CT an ponoJibC K oü
rySepnHH, 3anucKu Bocmomtoeo omdeAeHun Pyccıcozo apxeoADZu necm zo oöuıecm ea 2 1:
Jixxiii-Jixxy.
CaM oünoBH H , A .H . ( 1 9 1 3 6 ) Cpe.nn cTaBporıonbCKM x TypKMeHOB m H oraöut:B m y
KpbiM CKiıx TaTap (O T 4 e T o KOMaHflHpoBKe b 1 9 1 2 r .) , M3eecmun PyccKozo
KOMumema öah uaynenusı Cpedneü u Bocmovnoü A3uu 2|2: 5 4 -7 4 .
CaMOMnoBHn, A .H . ( 1 9 1 4 a ) Aâdy-c-Cam map k o 3 u . K nuza p a c c m 3 0 e o 6umeax
m e K u n u e s. TypK M encK an ucm opuH ecK an n o sM a X IX eeıca, C t. neTepcöypr:
H 3flaTeJibCTBO OaKynTeTa Boctomhhx 5Î3tiK 0B CaıiKT-rieTepcSypıcKoro
YHMBepcMrera.
670 Türkmen Reference Grammar

CaMoftnoBHM, A.H. (19146) MaTepnantt no cpeflnea3naTCKo-TypeıHKoM jiHTepaType,

II. TpeTte flonoımeHHe k yKa3aTejııo neceH MaxTyMKyJlH, III. Cthxh floyneT-
MaMefla mojijih, oma MaxTyMKynn, 3anuC K u Bocmonnozo o m dejıenuR PyccKOZo
apxeoJiozmecwso oöufecrma 22:128-153.
CaM oünoBH M , A .H . ( 1 9 1 4 b ) C K a3 K a « C o p o K HeöHJiHH» no TypKM eHCKOM y,
y36euKOM y h KMprH3CK0My BapHairraM, sKueaıı cmapurn 2 1 : 4 7 7-4 8 4 .
CaM oünoBH M , A .H . ( 1 9 2 9 ) O 'iepK H n o HcTopHH TypKMeHCKOö jM T e p a T y p tı, I.
BBefleHMe b h c t o p h io TypK M en cK o ö jıırrep aT ypb t h nMctMeHHocTM; II. K HCTopıiH
poMaHa « IO cy4 ) M A xM efl» , TypKMemsı 1 : 1 2 7 - 1 4 6 , 1 4 6 -1 6 7 .
C a n a p o B a , 3 . (1 9 8 2 ) n o n y c n o x H M e npeflnoxeH H H b aHruMücKOM m TypKMeHCKOM
fl3 tn cax (Ha M aTepHane 06ıeK T H 0-npeflHKaTHBHbix KOHCTpyKUMİİ e npHMacTHeM),
Pİ3aecmusı AmdeMuu HayK TypKMeHCKOü CCP. C epun 06ı^ecmeenHUx HayK, F 3 4:
7 2 -7 8 .
C a n a p o B a , 3 . ( 1 9 9 1 ) Mh4>mhmtmb b aurjiHÜCKOM m TypKMeHCKOM a 3 H K a x , b: P T .
H e n eco B a (pefl) MemodoAozmeCKue npoÖAeMu conocmaeumeAbnozo uccjıedoeanua
pa 3H0CucmeMHbtx sauK oe, A ıu x a 6 a fl: « L Ijih m » , 2 1 - 3 1 .
C an ap oB a, 3 . (19 9 2 ) ConocraBHTem Hbröf a m m 3 ı m e ı m u x cnoB ocoH eTam ıtt m y p o x a x
rpaMMaTMKH aurnutfcKOM h TypKMeHCKOM H3HKax, b: M .E. E e n u te B (pefl) Teopun u
n p a K m u m zpaM M am uK u pa3H0CucmeM H Hx h 3 u k o b . CGopuuK nay< m ux m p y d o e ,
A uıraG aT; MHHHOTepcTBO H apoflH oro OSpasoBam tsı TypKMenHCTana, 3 1-4 0 .
C an ap oB a, 3 . (19 9 0 ) Tpex3AeMeHmHue oS^em ıım e CAoeoconemanusı ohsau Uckozo sabim
u ux coom eem cm eusı e coepeM ennoM mypKMencKOM si3UKe (na MamepuaAe
ıtHtfiuHumuea u npm acm usı), A ıu x a 6 a fl: MHHHOTepcTBO H ap oflH oro OöpaaoBaHH»
TCCP.
CapbieB , T . ( 1 9 7 2 ) TypKMen 3Öe6u dimimde C03 dy3yMAepu, A u ır a ö a r .
TypK M enu
C axaT M w p aflO B , A . ( 1 9 9 3 ) TypKM eH M C H p rn ı, b: X . A T a e B (p e fl)
3apy6eXH0Z0 Bocmom (onepm o mypKMenax Mpana, Açpzanucmana, M pam , Cupuu,
Typifuu u Kuması), A ıu ra6aT : «TypK M em ıcT an», 18 8 -2 14 .
CeBopTflH, 3 . B . ( 1 9 7 1 ) JlH H rB H cnm ecK oe HacneflHe H .K . HMHTpHeBa h coBpeMeHHan
T io p K o n o n iü , b: 3 .B . CeBopTHH (pefl) CmpyKmypa u ucmopusı mıopKCKia sabim e,
M ocK B a: « H ayK a», 7 - 1 9 .
C e e r o B , M ., H . P e * ;e 6 o B (1 9 9 3 ) T 33e mypKMen 3Aurı6uüu, A u ır a 6 a r : « P y x » .
T e ııiin ıe B , 3 . P . ( 1 9 7 6 ) C m poü c c iA a p cK O Z o s a u m , M o cK B a : « H a y K a » , F n aB uası
PeflaKi(nsî B o c t o v h o ü JiM TepaTyptı.
TaM M bipaflOB, T . (19 7 1) 3de6u duA unuff AeKcuKacuH un c o ee m Ö eepyH de
H o p M a jıa n u m u , A u ıra ö aT .
Ts'iM bipaflOB, T . (1 9 7 6 ) TypKMen 3ÖeSu dıuıunutf. opçfioamstcu, A ıu ra 6 a T : « H jieim » .
TsuM M paflO B , T . ( 1 9 8 4 ) TypKMen 3 Ö e 6 u öuauhuh coeem Ö eepyH de e c y tu u ee
H o p M a j ı a n u m u , A u ıra ö aT : « B Ijih m » .
TsuM bipaflO B , T . ( 1 9 8 7 ) TypKMen aâeffu öuauhuh n y H K m y a ifu O H n o p M O A a p u n u i i
(fiopMupAenuıuu, A u ıra 6 a r: « B Ijih m » .
 Sources 671

O y p c o B a , J I.B . (1 9 8 9 ) (bonem ım ecK ası uH m ep/fiepeM fusı e pyccKOü p e t u m ypK M en,

A m x a6 afl: «L I j ih m ».
XaM 3aeB , M .H . (pefl) ( 1 9 6 2 ) TypKMen ö u a u h u h ce3Ayeu, A ıu ra ö a T : TypKMeHMCTaH
C C P tlü H M n a p AKafleM M CH H i.ru H en m paTH .
XaM 3aeB , M - fl. (pefl) (1 9 6 3 ) CpaeHumeAbHan zp a M M a m u m pyccıcozo u m y p K M e n c K o z o
S3HK08, A ın x a 6 a fl.
X aM 3aeB, M .f l. (1 9 6 9 ) T ypK M en ö u a u h u h M Op^OAO zuJtcunuH e e cunm aK C ucuH utf
M eceAeAepu, A ıu raö aT .
XaM3aeB, M .51., P . BepflHeB ( 1 9 7 2 ) K p a m m ü ouepK mypKMencKozo s a t ım , A n ıx a ö a fl.
Xa3paTOBa, P . ( 1 9 7 1 ) B u p a x e n u a MnootcecmeeHHOcmu e UMenax mypKMencKozo s a u m ,
AıuraöaT.
X o:*;aeB , B . (1 9 6 8 ) H eK O T o p tıe B o n p o c H HaıaıoHeHHJ! TypKM eH CKoro HSHKa, b:
M .I I I . IIlM paroıeB (pefl) B o n p o c u m m e z o p u ü e p e M e m u naKAO H enm zaü zoao e
mmpKCKUx s a u m x (M amepuaAU coeeıyaH un), E aıcy: « 3jim » , 1 5 7 - 1 6 7 .
Xoxç;aeB, B . ( 1 9 7 7 ) T y p r n öu ju ıep u tf zy n o p m a -z y H â a m a p m o n a p u n ö a opm aK u u a u k
çpopMüAapH, AıuraöaT: «BIhmm».
XoiK,aeB, B. (1 9 7 8 ) X d 3 u p m 30M an m ypK M en d u A m ö e uuuiuk çjjopMaAapbi, AıuraöaT:
«BIjimm».
XocpoB M , A .M . ( 1 9 5 7 ) TypKM en d u A u n ö e x a A uutA urnep, M spaçeB.
Xyfla{tK ynM eB , M . (19 6 2 ) nodpcutcameAbuue cao sü e mypKMencKOM si3UKe, A ıu x a ö a fl:
M cflaTentcTBO A K afleM ioı H a y K T C C P .
X yflaK K yıxtıeB , M ., B . Xo>s;aeB ( 1 9 6 7 ) H eK om opue e o n p o c u p a s e u m u n mypmeHCKOZo
A um ep a m yp n o zo s a u m e coeemcKyto 3noxy, A ıııxaöafl.
XyflafiKynHeB, M . ( 1 9 7 9 ) X g 3 u p m 3aM an m ypK M en ö uA unöe anaA um uK uuuıuKAep,
AıuraöaT.
XtiflHpoB, M .H . ( 1 9 4 7 a ) TypKM en d m ı u H Ö e K B u e m u ce3Aep M e c e A e c u , AıuraöaT.
X ttfltıp o B , M .H . (1 9 4 7 6 ) TypKM en öuauh Ö3ku oenyK ce3A ep, A ıu ra ö a T .
X M fltıp o B , M .H . (1 9 4 7 b ) TIoCAeAOZAap e e OAapHH yA a n u A H u vıa p u , A ıu ra ö aT .
XbtflbipoB, M .H . ( 1 9 4 7 r ) TypKM en öuauh Ö3ku coıo3Aap, A ıu ra ö a T .
X fcifliip oB , M .H . ( 1 9 5 8 -6 2 ) TypKM en ö u a u h u h m a p a m d a n M am epuaA A ap, 1-111,
A ıu raö aT .
X b ifltıp o B , M .H . (19 5 8 ) TypKM en a d e S u öuau e e o n yn öuaAeKm Aepu, A ıu ra ö a T .
X b iflbipoB , M .H . ( 1 9 5 9 ) Oprna A ju ü h u h X U -X Y a c u p A a p ö a m Kum an a d e S u n m u n u ti
öuAUHe mypKM en öuauhuh za m n a u ıu z u , A ı u r a ö a T .
X u flu p o B , M .H ., K . B e re ıt* ;o B (1 9 6 0 ) X s 3 upKu 3aM an m ypK M en ö u au. (PonemuKa,
AıuraöaT.
XBiflMpoB, M .H ., K . B e r e m s e m (1962) X a3upK U 3 a u a n m yp K M en öuau
[MopçftOAOZusı], AıuraöaT.
X H flM poB , M .H . ( 1 9 7 1 ) K hctophh r o y n e ım a (j)opMH H acT oaıuero BpeMeHH rn a r o n a
b lo r o -sa n a fliıo ö ıp y n n e TiopKcıanc s s u k o b , C oeem cK an TmpKOAOZun, N° 6.
^ a p tjH p o B , B . ( 1 9 5 7 ) X33upKU 3 o m o h m ypK M en d u A u n d e u u ia u k â e p e jtç e sıe p u ,
AıuraöaT.
6 7 2 Türkmen Reference Grammar

^ a p tıa p o B , E . ( 1 9 6 9 ) rym pm a-zyH Ö am ap m yp K u d u A A ep d e u u ia u k 3 a M a n A a p u ,

A m raö aT : « L I h h m ».
t îa p u a p o B , E . ( 1 9 7 2 ) H 3 HCTopHH TypKMeHCKoro ancJ>aBHTa, b: H .A . BacKaKOB (pefl)
B o n p o c u coeepıueH cm eoeaH ujı a A tfta eu m o e mıopKCKUx s a m o e C C C P , M o cK B a:
« H ayıc», 1 4 9 -1 5 6 .
^ ap b iflp o B , E . ( 1 9 7 3 ) Op(jrarpac{ıHH TypKM eH CKoro H3biKa, b: K .M . M y c a e B (pefl)
Opçfioepa<puu mıopKCKux A u m e p a m y p n u x so h k o b C C C P , M ocK B a: « H a yK a » , 2 0 5 -
2 18 .
M ap tıa p o B , E ., T . C apb ieB (pefl) ( 1 9 7 7 a ) TypKMeH ö u a u h u h zp a M M a m u m c u , II. C g3
d y 3 yMUHWf ge ÛBHeıceü ce3AeM uif cunmaKCucu, A m raö aT : « tln b iM » .
^ apuapoB , E. (19776) O c o 6 c h h o c t h ynoTpeöJieHHH on p e fle jıe H H o ro ö y fly m e r o
BpeMeHH b TJopKCKMX a3biK ax, CoeemcMH TıopKOAOZusı N° 2: 15-23.
^ a p b ia p o B , E . (1977b) Pa3BHTHe TypKM eHCKoro H3MK03HaHJM b CoBeTCK yıo 3 iıo x y ,
in J. Ja n h u n en (e d ) A lta ic a . P r o c e e d in g s o f ıh e 1 9 th A n n u a l M e e tin g o f th e
P e r m a n e n t I n te r n a tio n a l A lta is tic C o n fe r e n c e H e ld in H e ls in k i 7 -1 1 J u n e 1 9 7 6 ,
M e m o ir e s d e la S o c ie t e F in n o -O u g r ie n n e 158, H e ls in k i: S u o m a ia is -U g r ila in e n
S eu ra, 59-65.
^îapbisjpoB, E ., C . A jrra e B a (1 9 8 6 -1 9 8 7 ) EoAbuıoü pyccKO-mypKMeHCKuü CAoeapb, /-//,
M ocK B a: «PyccKMÜ H3HK».
HlaMbipaflOB, K., A. MöpaübiMOB (1956) TypKMeH dıuıunde cunarruıap, AıuraöaT.
H Ihm kbbhm , n . (1899) IîpaıcmuHecKoe pyKoeodcmBO ö a h 03HaK0MjıeHujı c napenueM
mypKM en 3aKacnuücıcoü oÖAacmu, A ıu x a6 afl.
İH ep ö aK , A . ( 1 9 7 0 ) C paenum eA bH ası tfsonem uKa mmpKCKUx n3UKoe, JleHHHrpafl:
«H ayK a». JleHHHipaflCKoe OTfleneHHe.
m e p ö a K , A . ( 1 9 7 7 , 1 9 8 1 , 19 8 7 ) O n e p m no cpaemmeAbHOÜ M opçfıojıozuu mıopKCKux
S13HKOB (Mma), (TjtazoA ), (H a p e n u e , C A y x e 6 H u e u a c m u p e n u , u3o6pa3um eA bH tte
CAoea), Jlen jın rp afl: « H ayK a», JleHMmpaflCKoe OTfleneHHe.
IIlepöaK, A. (1994) B e e d e n u e e cpaenum eAbH oe l a y n e m e mtopKCKia n3UKoe, CaHKT-
ü e T e p ö y p r: «HayKa».
lOMyflOBa, H .M ., O . H t a u e B a , 3 . ^ a p u e B a , X . H e n eco B a , T . Capb ieB a, E . A T aeB
( 1 9 9 3 ) TypKM encK uü H3UK. M umencueHUÜ Kypc o 6 y n e u u n pa3Z080pn0My sa u K y.
yneÖHoe tıocoöue, A ıuraöaT : «LInxaM ».
.H rM ypoB, A . ( 1 9 9 3 ) T ypKM eHbt AtJjraHHCTaHa, b : X . ATaeB (p e fl) T y p K M e n u
3 a p y 6 e x H û z o B o c m o m (o n e p m o mypKMeHax MpaHa, AcfiaaH ucmana, M p a m , C u p u u ,
T yp ifu u u K u m a n ), A m raö aT : «TypKMeHHcraH», 1 0 1 -1 3 6 .
Ü3ÖepflHeB, A . (1981) A p a n zpaçftuKacuHÖa n e ıu u p ad u A en m y p K M e m e K um anA ap,
A ıu raö aT : «B I j iu m ».
 Sources 673

Works in Other Languages

Adamovic, M. (1981-82) Die al ten Oghusen, Materialia Turcica 7-8,26-50.

Agadzhanov, S.G. and A. Karryev (1978) Some Basic Problems o f the Ethnogenesis of
the Turkmen, in: W. W eissleder (ed) The Nomadic Altenıative: Modes and Models o f
Interaction in the African-Asian Deserts and Steppes, The Hague: Mouton, 167-177.
Agadzanov, S.G. (1989) Selğııkiden und Turkmenien im 11.-12. Jaivhundert,
Turkmenenforschung, 9. Berlin: Reinhold Schletzer. [Translation of AnmacaHOB
1973.]
Agadshanovv, S.G. (1994) Der Staat der Seldschukiden und Mittelasien irr 11.-12.
Jahrhundert, Turkmenenforschung, 17. Berlin: Reinhold Schletzer. [Trans lation of
AraflacaHOB 1991.]
Aschnin, F.D. (1961) Die Demonstrativpronomina im Turkmenischen, Açta C .ientalia
Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 12: 117-136.
Azmun, Y. (1966) Türkmen Halk Edebiyatı Hakkında, in: Reşid Rahmeti Arat için,
Ankara: Türk Kültürünü Araştırma Enstitüsü, 32-83.
Azmun, Y. (1989) Who Was Makhtum Kuli 1, Journal ofTurkish Studies 13: -14.
Azmun, Y. (1995) Songs from the Steppes o f Central Asia. The Collected Poems o f
Makhtumkuli, Translated by Y. Azemoun, Versified by B. Aldiss, Loncon: The
Society of Friends o f Makhtumkuli.
Baitschura, V. (1976) Instrumentalphonetische Beitrâge zur Untersuchang des
Wortakzentes und der Sprachmelodie im Turkmenischen, Napoli: Istituto
Universitario Orientale.
Baldauf, I. (1993) Schriftreform und Schriftwechsel bei den muslimischen fuıssland-
und Sovjettiirken (1850-1937): Ein Symptom ideengeschichtlicher und
kulturpolitiseher Enhvicklungen, Bibliotheca Orientalis Hungarica, 40. Badapest:
Akademiai Kiadö.
Banguoğlu, T. (1959) Oğuzlar ve Oğuzeli üzerine, Türk Dili ve Araştırm alan Yıllığı
Belleten, 1-26.
Banguoğlu, T. (1960) Oğuz lehçesi üzerine, Tiirk D ili ve Araştırmaları Yıllığı
Belleten, 23-48.
Barthold, V.V. (1927) Turkomans, Encyclopedia o f İslam, Leiden: E.J. Brill, 4: 896-
898.
Barthold, V.V. (1962) A History of the Turkman People (An Outline), in: V. and T.
Minorsky (eds) Four Studies on the History o f Central Asia, 111, Leiden: E . j . Brill,
73-170. <1929>
Basilov, V. (1984) Honor Groups in Traditional Turkmenian Society, in: A. Ahmed
and D. Hart (eds) İslam in Trihal Societies, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 220-
243.
Bazin, L. (1959) Le Turkmene, in: J. Deny et al. (eds) Philologiae Tıırcicae
Fıındamenta, I, Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner, 308-317.
674 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

Beller-Hann, I. (1992) The Oghuz Split: The Emergence o f Turc Ajami as a Written
Idiom, Materialia Tıtrcica 16: 114-129.
Benderoğlu, A. (1976) Irak Türkmen Dili. D il Bilgisi ve Karşılaştırma, Bagdad.
Benzing, J. (1939) Über die Verbformen im Türkmenischen, Mitteilungen des Seminars
fiir Orientalischen Sprachen. Ostasiatische Studien/Westasiatische Studien 42: 1-56.
Benzing, J. (1964) Die türkmenisehe Literatür, in: L. Bazin et al. (eds.) Philologiae
Turcicae Fundamenta, II, Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner, 721-741.
Berdi Murat, A. (1975) Türkmenistan and the Turkmen, in: Z. Katz (ed) Handbook o f
M ajör Soviet Nationalities, Nevv York: The Free Press, 262-282.
Beresine, I. (= Eepe3HH) (1849) Recherches sur les dialeetes nnısulmans, /. Systeme des
dialeetes tures, Kazan.
B ertel’s, Je.E. (1954) The Study of the History of Turkoman Classical Literatures in
the Soviet Union, in: Papers Presented by the Soviet Delegation at the XXIII
International Congress o f Orientalists, Moskva: 49-78.
Bosworth, C.E. (1968) The Political and Dynastic History o f the Iranian World (A.D.
1000-1217), in: J.A. Böyle (ed) The Cambridge History o f Iran, V: The Saljııq and
Mongol Periods, Cambridge University Press, 1-202.
Bosworth, C.E. (1995) The SaldjOkids, Encyclopedia o f İslam, New Editioıı, Leiden:
E J . BrilI, 8 : 936-959.
Bozkurt, M.F. (1975) Untersuchungen zum Bojnıırd-Dialekt des Chorasantiirkischen,
Dissertation, Göttingen.
Bregel, Y. (1960) The Peoples of Southern Türkmenistan and Khorasan in the 17rh and
18th Centuries, Central Asian Review 8 : 264-272. [Abridged translation of Bperen
1959.]
Bregel, Y. (1981) Nomadic and Sedentary Elements Among the Turkmens, Central
Asiatic Journal, 25: 5-37.
Bregel, Y. (1995) Central Asia, VII. In the 12th-13th/18th-19th Centuries,
Encyclopedia Iranica, Costa Mesa, CA: Mazda, 5: 193-205.
Buluç, S. (1966) Kerkük hoyratlarına dair, in: Reşid Rahmeti Arat için, Ankara: Türk
Kültürünü Araştırma Enstitüsü, 142-154.
Buluç, S. (1979) Irak’ta hanekin türk ağzı üzerine, in: I. Milletler Arası Türkoloji
Kongresi (İstanbul, 15-20 X. 1973), II, İstanbul: Tercüman Gazetesi ve Türkiyat
Enstitüsü, 600-603
Cahen, C. (1965) Ghuzz, Encyclopedia o f İslam, New Edition, Leiden: E.J. Brill, 2:
1106-1110.
Cahen, C. (1968) Pre-Ottomaıı Tıtrkey. A General Survey o f the Material and Spiritual
Culture and History, c.1071-1330, Nevv York: Taplinger.
Carrere d ’Encausse, H. (1994), Systematic Conquest, 1865 to 1884, in: E. Allvvorth
(ed) Central Asia. 130 Years o f Russian Dominance. A Historical Overview, Third
Edition, Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 131-150.
Chodzko, A. (1842) Specimens o f the Popular Poetry ofP ersia, London.
 Sources 675

Clark, L. (1979) [Review of M. W eiers, Die Sprache der M oghol der P rovim Herat in
Afghanistan; W. Heissig, Schriftliche Quellen in Mogoli, i ; M. Weiers, Schriftliche
Quellen in Mogoli, 2-3 (Opladen, 1972-1977)], Canada-Moııgotia Review 5: 68-85.
Dankoff, R. (1972) Kâsyarî on the Tribal and Kinship Organization o f the Turks,
Archivum Ottomanicum 4: 23-43.
Dankoff, R. (1973) The Alexander Romance in the Dhvân LııghSt at-Turk, Humaniora
Islamica 1: 233-244.
Dankoff, R. (in collaboration with J. Kelly) (1982-85) Mahmüd al-Kâsyarî.
Compendium o f the Tıırkic Dialects (Dîwâıı Lugât at-Turk), I-III, Sources of Oriental
Languages and Literatures, 7. Cambridge: Harvard University Printing Office.
Dmitrijevv, N.K. (1928) Skizze der südtürkischen Mimologie, \Viener Zeitschrift fiir
die Kimde des Morgenlandes 34: 18-47. [= flMHTpHeB 1962b.]
Dmitrijew, N.K. (1929) Th in the Modern Turkish Languages, Le Monde Oriental 23:
40-47. [An early version of flMHTpHeB 19626.]
Dmitrijevv, N.K. (1933) Turkmenische Lieder, Islamica 6:112-130.
Dobos, E. (1974) An Oghuz Dialect of Uzbek Spoken in Urgench, Acı a Orientalia
Academiae Scientiarıım Hungaricae 28: 75-97.
Doerfer, G. (1969) Die Turksprachen Irans, Türk Dili ve Araştırmaları Yıllığı Belleten,
1-23.
Doerfer, G. (1971) Irano-Altaistica (Turkish and Mongolian Languages of Persia and
Afghanistan), in: Cıırrent Trends in Lingııistics 6 : 217-234.
Doerfer, G. (1973-74) Bericht über eine linguistische Forschungsreise in Iran, Türk Dili
ve Araştırmaları Yıllığı Belleten, 199-202.
Doerfer, G. (1975-76) Das Vorosmanische (Die Entwicklung der oghusischen Sprachen
von den Orchoninschriften bis zu Sultan Veled), Türk Dili ve Araştırmaları Yıllığı
Belleten, 81-131.
Doerfer, G. (1976a) Die "vier Wörter” mit b- > v, Null, in: Gy. Kâldy-Nagy (ed)
Hımgaro-Tıırcica. Studies in Honoıır o f Jıılius Nemeth, Budapest: Lorând Eötvös
University, 135-147.
Doerfer, G. (1976b) Woher stammte ibn Muhannâ?, Archciologische Mitteilungen aus
Iran. Nene Folge 9: 243-251.
Doerfer, G. (1977) Das Chorasantürkische, Türk Dili ve Araştırmaları Yıllığı Belleten,
127-204, map.
Doefer, G. (1987) Mahmüd al-Kâs-yarî, Aryu, Chaladsch, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher.
Nene Folge 7: 105-114.
Doerfer, G., W. Hesche (1989) Südoghıısische Materialien aus Afghanistan und Iran,
Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz.
Doerfer, G. (1990a) Die Stellung des Osmanischen im Kreise des Oghusischen und
seine Vorgeschichte, in: Gy. Hazai (ed) Handbuch der tiirkischen
Sprachwissenschaft, I, Bibliotheca Orientalis Hungarica, 31. Budapest: Akademiai
Kiado, 13-34.
676 Türkmen Reference Grammar

Doerfer, G., W. Hesche, J. Ravanyar (1990b) Oghusica atıs Ira/ı, Wiesbaden:

Harrassowitz.
Doerfer, G. (1991) Göttinger turkologische Forschungen in Iran, in: I. Baldauf et al.
(eds) Türkische Sprachen und Literaturerı, Wıesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 103-111.
Doerfer, G. (1992-93) Chorasantürkisch aus dem 'Türkenkessel", Central Asiatic
Journal 36: 44-71; 37: 323.
Doerfer, G., W. Hesche (1993) Chorasantürkisch. Wörterlisten, Kıırzgrammatiken,
Indices, Turcologica, 16. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz.
Doerfer, G. (1995) Central Asia, XTV. Turkish-Iranian Language Contacts,
Eııcyclopedia Iraııica, Costa Mesa, CA: Mazda, 5: 226-235.
Dshikijew, A. ( i 994) Das Tıtrkmenische Volk im Mittelaher, Turkmenenforschung, 18.
Berlin: Reinhold Schletzer. [Translation o f flîKMKHeB 1991.]
Dulling, G.K. (1960) An Introduction to the Türkmen Language. A B rie f Sıımmary o f
the Grammar o f the Tıırkmen Language with Selected Extracts in Prose and Verse,
Oxford: Central Asian Research Centre.
Eckmann, J. (1964) Die tschaghataische Literatür, in: L. Bazın et al. (eds) Phiiologiae
Turcicae Fundamenta, II, Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner, 304-402.
Ermers, R. (1995) Tıtrkic Forms in Arabic Structıtres. The Description o f Tııı kic by
Arabic Grammariatıs, Proefschrift, Katholieke Universiteit Nijmegen.
Farmayan, H. (1981) Turkoman Identıty and Presence in Iran, Iran 4: 45-63.
Fâszy, S. (1977) Bojmırdi, ein tiirkischer Dialekt in Xorâsân, Ostpeı sien, Dissertation,
Zürich.
Feldman, W. (1992) Interpreting the Poetry of Makhtumquii, in: Jo-Ann Gross (ed)
Mıısiims in Central Asia: Expressions o f Identity and Change, Durham, NC: Duke
University Press, 167-189.
Fierman, W. (1991) Language Planning and National Developmem. The Uzbek
Experience, New York: Mouton de Gruyter.
Frank, A.J. (1995) Türkmen Reader, Kensington, MD: Dunwoody Press.
Franz, E. (1971) Die Turkmenen Afghanistans, Sociologus, 181-187.
Franz, E. (1972a) Zur gegenwartigen Verbreitung und Gruppierung der Turkmenen in
Afghanistan, Baessler Archiv. Neıte Folge 20: 191-238.
Fıanz, E. (1972b) Ethnographische Skizzen. Zur Frage der Turkmenen in Afghanistan,
Orient 4: 175-184.
Gabain, A. von (1959) Ein türkmenisches Volksmarchen, Ural-Altaische Jahrbûcher
31: 95-111.
Golden, P. (1972) The Migrations of the Oğuz, Archivum Ottomanicum, 4: 45-84.
Golden, P. (1992) An Introduction t o the History o f the Tıtrkic Peoples. Ethnogenesis
and State-Formation in Medieval and Early Modern Eıırasia and the Middie East,
Turcologica, 9. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassovvitz.
Guzev, V.G. (1990) Untersuchungen zur Türksprache Kleinasiens vom 13. bis zum 16.
Jahrhundert, in: Gy. Hazai (ed) Handbuch der tiirkischen Spraclnvissenschaft, /,
Bibliotheca Orientalis Hungarica, 31. Budapest: Akademini Kiado, 35-62.
 Sources 677

Hahn, R. (1988) Notes on the Origin and Development of the Salar Language, A tta
Orienlalia Academiae Scientianım Hungaricae 42: 235-275.
Hanser, O. (1977) Turkmen Manual. Deseriptive Grammar o f Contemporary Literary
Turkmen. Texts. Glossary, Beihefte zur Wiener Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des
Morgenlandes, Band 7. Wien: Verlag des Verbandes der vvissensclıaftiichen
Gesellschaften Osterreichs.
Hofman, H.F. (1969) Turkish Literatüre. A Bio-Bibliographical Survey, UM: 1-6,
Utrecht: the Library of the University of Utrecht.
İnalcık, H. (1973) The Ottoman Empire. The Classical Age: 1300-1600, Londön:
Weidenfeld and Nicolson.
Irons, W. (1975) The Yomut Turkmen: A Study o f Sociai Organization among a
Central Asian Turkic-speaking Population, Museum of Anthropology.
Anthropological Papers, 58. Ann Arbor: The University of Michigan.
Irons, W. (1984) Turkmen, in: R.V. Weekes (ed) Müslim Peoples. /t World
Ethnographic Survey, II, Westport, Connecticut, 804.
îz, F. (1965) Dede Korkut, Encyclopedia o f İslam, New Edition, Leiden: E.J. Brill, 2:
200 .
Johanson, L. (1978-79) Die westoghusische Labialhaımonie, Orientalia Succana 27-
28: 63-107.
Johanson, L. (1981) Pluralsııffıxe im Südwesttürkischen, Abhandlungen der Akademie
der Wissenschaften und der Literatür, Mainz, Geistes- und sozialvvissensırhaftliche
Kiasse, Nr. 9.
Johanson, L. (1989) Aorist and Present Tense in West Oghuz Turkic, Journal o f
Turkish Studies 13: 99-105.
Johanson, L. (1993) Rumî and the Birth of Turkish Poetry, Journal o f Turkology 1:
23-37.
Köprülü Zade, F. (1927) Turkoman Literatüre, Encyclopedia o f İslam, Leiden: E.J.
Brill, 4: 898-899.
Korkmaz, Z. (1972) Kâşgarlı Mehmut ve Oğuz Türkçesi, Türk Dili 253: 3-19.
Leiser, G. Salur, Encyclopedia o f İslam, Nevv Edition, Leiden: E.J. Brill, 8 : 1005-06.
Melikoff, I. (1995) Oghuz-nâma, Encyclopedia o f İslam, Nevv Edition, Leiden: E.J.
Brill, 8 : 163-164.
Menges, K.H. (1939) Einige Bemerkungen zur vergleichenden Grammutik des
Türkmenischen, Archiv Orientâlni 11: 7-34.
Menges, K.H. (1951) Research in the Turkic Dialects of Iran (Preliminary Report on a
Trip to Ossia), Oriens 4: 273-279.
Mirador, A. (1989) Türkmen Dilinin Sözleyiş Medeniyeti Boyunça Annvtirlenen
Bibliografya (1920-1983 yy.), Ankara: Ilım.
Pritsak, O. (1959a) Das Kiptschakische, in: J. Deny et al. (eds) Philologiae Turcicae
Fundamenta, I, Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner, 74-87.
Pritsak, O. (1959b) Kâsğarîs Angaben über die Sprache der Bolgaren, Zeitschrift der
Deutschen Morgenland'ıschen Gesellschaft 109: 92-116.
678 Turkmen Reference Grammar

Riisiinen, M. (1960) Tüıkische Miszellen, I. Die Vokaliangen der ersten Silbe im

Türkmenischen, Stııdia Orientalia 25/1: 3-19.
Reichl, K. (1982) Türkmenische Mârchen, mit Übersetzımg, Glossar ıınd
Anmerkungetı, M aterialiaTurcica, 4. Bochum: Studienverlag Dr. N. Brockmeyer.
Riza, A. [Ali Riza Yalgın] (1931-33) Cenupta Türkmen oymakları, /-///, İstanbul.
Roux, J.-P. (1970) Les traditions des nomades de la Tıtrqııe meridionale, Paris:
Adrien-Maisonneuve.
Saray, M. (1984) Russo-Turkmen Relations up to 1874, Central Asian Sıtıvey 3:14-
48.
Saray, M. (1989) The Turkmens in the Age o f Imperialism: A Study o f the Turkmen
People and Their Incorporation into the Russian Empire, Ankara: Turkish Historical
Society Printing House.
Schiefner, A. (1859), Über die Sprache der Turkmenen. Aus einem Briefe des Heım
Ilminsky an A. Schiefner, Orenburg, den 29. December, 1859, Melanges Asiatiques
4: 63-74
Shcherbak, A.M. (1993) On the Chief Totem o f Ancient Turks, Türk Dilleri
Araştırmaları 3:203-211.
Sümer, F. (1980) Oğuzlar (Tiirkmenler). Tarihleri, Boy Teşkilatı, Destanları, İstanbul.
Tulu, S. (1989) Chorasantiirkische Materialien aus Kalât bei Esfarâyen,
Isiamkundüche Untersuchungen, 128, Berlin: Klaus Schvvarz.
Tulu, S. (1993) Folkloristische Sprachproben im Chorasantürkischen, in: B. Kellner-
Heinkele (ed) Altaica Berolinensia. The Concept o f Sovereignty in the Altaic World,
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 295-297.
Tyson, D., L. Clark (1994) Türkmen. Language Competencies fo r Peace Corps
Volunteers in Türkmenistan, U.S. Peace Corps. Washington, D.C.: U.S.
Government Printing Office. [Second Edition]
Vilmbery. A. (1879) Die Sprache der Turkomanen und der Diwan Machdumkulis,
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlândischen Gesellschaft 33: 388-444.
Weiers, M. (1973) Eine fünfsprachige Wörtersammlung aus dem Gebiet der Moghol
von Herat in Afghanistan, Zentralasiatische Studien 7: 502-523.
Wood, W. (1990) Turkmen Ethnohistory, in: H.J. Swinney (ed) Vanishing Jewels:
Central Asian Tribal Weaviııgs. A Catalog o f an Exhibition by the Rochester
Mııseum & Science Çenter, Rochester, NY: Flovver City Printing, Inc., 27-44.
Zajaczkovvski, W. (1971) Die türkmenischen Personennamen, Folio Orientalia 13:
323-342.
 INDEX

This index lists suffixes and gram matical words discussed in the chapters o f this
reference grammar. Suffbces are cited alphabetically according to their back vowel
(a/bt/y /a/ı/u/) variants. For various structures and subjects, see the Table o f Contents.

a /a/ 'but' 442 (contradition conjunction)

ah /a/e/ 'ah (you), ’ey (you)' 472 (appeal particle)
+a/e /+ a -o /e -ö / 126 (dative case); 53, 130 (variants), 59 (vowel lengthening: +a/a
/+a:/a:/), 69 (insertion o f consonant after vowel), 82 (orthography), 416 (vvith
postpositions), 531 (agent of passive), 571-576 (paradigms)
+ a /e re p e K /+ a /e g erek / 'to w a n t/n e e d (so m e th in g )' 305 (m o d a l fo rm atio n : d e sire ), 307
(m o d a l fo rm atio n : n eed )
se e + a /e / + a - o / e - ö /
+a/e- /+ a-o/e-ö-/ 528 (verb-formation: gaining a quality)
-a/e/ö /-a-o/e-ö/y/ 357 (gerund)
-a/s /-a:/a:/ 'at least' 470, 471 (appeal particle), 'but, yeah but' 474 (realization particle);
35 (long vowel), 46 (unstressed)
a Sonca /a boI0o/ 'but as for' 442
-a 6 ep/s 6 ep /-a:ber/a:ber/ see -bi6 ep/M6 ep /-ıber-uber/iber-iiber/
-aBep(H)/eBep(n) /-awer(i)-owöı(ü)/ewer(i)~öwör(ü)/ 'to go on/keep on doing, to go
ahead and do' 316 (descriptive suffix); 316 (vowel lengthening: -aBep(H)/sBep(n)
/-a:wer(i)/a:wer(i)/), 300 (with sufFıx o f permission)
-anma(n)/3refle(ır) /-a:gada(n)/a:gede(n)/ 358 (gerund)
-araH/ereıı /-agan-ogon/egen-ögön/ 543 (adjective-formation)
arebnma /agSmna/ 'at the entrance of' 427 (auxiliary noun)
aft/aü /ay/ey/ Tıey' 472 (appeal particle)
-aif/eü /-ay/ey/ look, now ' 475 (surprise particle)
-aii/aM /-a:y/a:y/ 298 (suffix of permission); 35 (long vovvel), 55 (variants), 84
(orthography), 272, 298 (vvith imperatives), 280, 299 (with conditional), 299 (vvith
suffix o f obligation), 651-653 (paradigms vvith imperatives)
-aÜMa/oÜMe /-a:yma/a:yme/ 300 (negative suffıx of permission)
-aiİMaiibi/sÜMenH flon /-a:ymalı/a:ymeli dâ:l/ 300 (suffix o f permission vvith negative
suffıx of obligation)
-afiT/eÜ T /-ayt/eyt/'lıovv could?' 474 (rea liza tio n p article)
aÜTMaıc /a y tm a k / 'to teli, to s a y ' 554 (v e rb o f s p e e c h )
-aübuı/eüHiı /-ayın-oyun/eyin-öyün/ 268 (1 singular imperative mood); 53 (variants),
57 (vovvel lengthening: -aJfbUi/sJİHH /-a:ym /â:yin/), 82 (orthography), 638-639
(paradigms)
aütıpMaK /aym nak/ 'to subtract' 167 (arithmetic)
680 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

-aK/eK /-ak-o k /e k -ö k / 5 2 4 (noun-formation: means/place o f action), 5 4 3 (adjective-

foımation)
-aKna/eKne- /-akla-oklo/ekle-öklö-/ 537 (verb-formation: repetitiveness o f action)
+an/en- /+ al-ol/el-öl-/ 528 (verb-formation: gaining a quality)
-(a)na/(e)ne- /-(a)la-(o)lo/(e)le-(ö)Iö-/ 5 3 7 (verb-form ation: repetitiven ess o f action)
-aiira/ejıre / - a lg a -o lg o / e lg e -ö lg ö / 5 2 5 (noun-form ation: p la c e o f action)
anMaK /alm ak/ 'to tak e, to g e t ' 5 1 5 (a u x ilia ry v e rb ), s e e - liii /h ii anM aK /-ıp/ip alm ak/
- a jıtı/ e n ıı / - a lı- o h / e li-ö lü / 268 (1 d u a l im p e ra tiv e m o o d ); 5 4 (va ria n ts), 5 7 (vovvel
len gth en in g: -an u / aım /-a:lı/a:Ii/), 8 4 (orth ograp h y), 6 38 -6 3 9 (parad igm s)
-arau/eraı / -a h -o lı/ e li-ö lü / 358 (gerund)
- a ım / e m 6 a p n /-alı/eü bâ:ri/ 's in c e ' 423 (postposition )
-a n u n / e n ım /-alı:rj—olı:rj/eli:q—ölü:ıj/ 268 (1 p lu ra l im p e ra tiv e m ood ); 3 5 (lo n g vovvel),
53 (varian ts), 5 7 ( v o w e l len gth en in g: -a n tm / sm ın /-a:lı:rj/a:li:ıj/), 82 (orth ograp h y),
638 -639 (paradigm s)
-aM/eM- /-am/em-/ 2 1 5
(1 singular personal ending for -aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/eno:k/)
-aMOK/eMOK /-am o:k-om o:k/em o:k-öm o:k/ 2 3 1 (negative 1 singular present perfect
tense)
-aM (H )3/eM (n)3- /-a m (ı)8 -o m (u )5 /e m (i)8 -ö m (1 i)8 -/ 2 1 5 (1 p lu ra l p e rs o n a l e n d in g fo r
-aHOK/eHOK /-an o :k /e n o :k /)
-aM M 3 0 K /eM M 30K /-am ı8o:k-om u5o:k/em i8o:k-öm ü8o:k/231 (n e g a tiv e 1 p lu ral p re se n t
perfect tense)
-aH/eH /-an -o n /en -ön / 3 4 1 (past particip le); 53 (variants), 5 7 (vovvel len gth en in g: -hh/ sh
/-a:n/â:n/), 82 (o rth o graph y), 3 4 4 (in se n te n ce -fin a l p o sition ), 5 2 6 (n oun -form atio n )
-aH/eH öoıiMaK /-an/en b olm ok/ 'to preten d to d o ' 3 1 0 (m o d a l form ation : pretense)
-aH/eH G on ca /-an/en b oi0 o/ 283 (past co n d itio n a l m o o d )
-aH/eH fleü /-a n /e n d e y / 'lik e ' 409 (p o stp o sitio n )
-aH/eH flanflHp /-an/en dâ:llir/ 2 3 7 (n eg ativ e 3 sin g u la r su b je ctiv e presen t p e rfe c t tense)
-aH/eH ceöaıuiM /-an/en 0 ebâ:pli/ 'b e c a u s e ' 4 1 0 (postposition )
-aH/eH c o n /-an/en doıj/ 'a fte r' 4 2 5 (postposition )
-aH/eH y*w h /-an/en ücü:n / 'b e c a u se ' 4 1 2 (postpo sition )
-aH/eH srntı /-an/en ya:lı/ 'as though' 4 1 5 (postposition)
-aH/en- /- a n /e n - / 215 (3 sin g u la r p e rso n a l e n d in g f o r -aHOK/eHOK/-ano:k/eno:k/)
aHa /a n a / 'th e r e (it is ) ' 402 (m o d a l w ord)
+aHa /+a:na/ 5 4 1 (Persian a d je ctiv e-fo rm in g suffbc)
-aııa/eHe /-ana-ono/ene-önö/ 'since' 50 2 (o b ject phrase)
+ anfla /+anna/ 5 22 (P ersian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
-anfla/eHHe /-an n a-on n o/en n e-ö nn ö/ 'w h e n ' 503 (o b je ct ph rase)
-aHflaıı/eHflaH /-annan-onnon/ennen-önnön/ 'a fter' 503 (o b je ct phrase)
-aHflaH/eHflaH c o n /-annan/ennen 0or|/ 'a fte r ' 42 5 (p ostp osition ), 503 (o b ject phrase)
-anflLip/enflH p /-an n ır-on n u r/en n ir-ön n ü r/ 2 3 6 (3 sin g u la r s u b je c tiv e presen t p e rfe c t
ten se); 2 3 7 (vovvel len gth en in g: -aH fltıp /sım u p /-a:runr/a:nnir/), 598-603 (parad igm s)
 Index 681

-aHflupJiap/eHHiıpnep /-annırlar-onnurlor/ennirler-önnürlör/ 236 (3 plural subjective

present perfect tense)
-aHflfcipcBiH/eHflHpcHH /-anmr0ıi]-onnur0urj/ennir0irj-önnür0ürj/ 236 (2 singular
subjective present perfect tense)
-aHflfcipCBim,i3/eHHHpcMHH3 /-annır0ıi)i5-onnur0ui)uS/enniı0ii)iS-önnür0üi)iio/ 236 (2
plural subjective present perfect tense)
-aHflBipbiH/eHHHpHH /-annu-m-onnurun/ennirin-önnürün/ 236 (1 singular subjective
present perfect tense)
-aHABipwc/eHflnpnc /-annm0-onnuru0/enniri0-önnürü0/236 (1 plural subjectm; present
perfect tense)
-aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k-ono:k/eno:k-öno:k/ 231 (negative 3 singular present perfec t tense);
35 (long vovvel), 233-234 (contrasted w itb present and past indefinite and
continuous tenses), 235 (vow el lengthening: -aHOK/aHOK /-a:no:k/â:no:k/), 235
(origin o f forms), 596-597 (paradigms)
-aHOKflBi/eHOKflBi /-ano:kdı-ono:kdı/eno:kdı-öno:kdı/233 (3 singular presen perfect
tense in the past)
-aHOKnap/eHOKJiap /-ano:klor-ono:klor/eno:klor-öno:klor/ 231 (negative 3 plural
present perfect tense)
-aH(oK)nap/eH(oK)jıap /-an(o:k)lor-on(o:k)lor/en(o:k)lor-ön(o:k)lor/ 215 ( 3 plural
personal ending for -anoK/eHoK /-ano:k/eno:k/)
-an/en- /-arj—or(/erj-öi]-/ 215 (2 singular personal ending for -anoK/enoK /-ano:k/t;no:k/)
-aıı/sn /-a:rj/a:rj/ see -bih /hh /-ııj-uıj/iıj-tit)/
-anKbipna/enKHpne- /-ar)ku-la-oqkurlo/eqkirle-örjkürlö-/ 536 (verb-formation: strength-
ening o f action)
-anoıc/enoK /-arp:k-orjo:k/ei)o:k-ör]o:k/ 231 (negative 2 singular present perfecı: tense)
anpBi(K) /arp(:k)/ 'beyond' 421 (postposition)
-an(bt)3/eH(M)3- /-ar|(ı)5-oi](u)5/eıj(i)8-öi)(ü)8-/ 215 (2 plural personal ending for
-aHOK/eHOK /-ano:k/ eno:k/)
-anBi30K/eı<H30K /-ai)i8o:k-oi)uSo:k/er|i 6o:k-öıjüSo:k/ 231 (negative 2 plural present
perfect tense)
anBipcBfflfla /açırâınna/ 'behind' 427 (auxiliary noun)
-an/an /-a:p/a:p/ see -hm /m /-ıp-up/ip-üp/
-aunBl/aTOH /-a:pdı/a:pdi/ see -BiıiflBi/urmH /-ıpdı-updı/ipdi-üpdü/
-aifflBip/snnHp /-a:pdır/a:pdir/ see -trnflbip/nn[,nııp /-ıpdır-updur/ipdir-üpdür/
ap/anap /a:r/alar/ 's/he w ill take' < anMaK /almak/ 58, 263 (vowel lengthening)
+ap/ep- /+ar-or/er-ör-/ 528 (verb-formation: gaining a quality)
-ap/ep /-ar-or/er-ör/ 259 (3 singular future indefinite tense); 46 (stressed), 57 (vovvel
lengthening: -ap/sp /-a:r/â:r/), 262 (contrasted with present indefinite tente), 262
(voicing o f stem-final consonant), 263 (vovvel lengthening vvith loss o f st :m-final
consonant), 265 (contrasted with definite future), 630-633 (paradigms)
682 Türkmen Reference Grammar

-ap/ep /-ar-o r/er-ö r/ 3 4 7 (fu tu re in d e fin ite p a rtic ip le ); 5 7 (vovvel le n g th en in g : -ap /sp
/-a:r/a:r/), 3 48 (c o n tra ste d w ith fu tu re p a rtic ip le ), 5 2 6 (n o u n -fo rm a tio n ), 5 4 3
(ad jective-fon n atio n )
-a p / e p fly p a p /-ar/er d uror/ 'w ill b e d o in g ' 3 20 (d e s c r ip tiv e fo r m a tio n fo r re g u la r/
co n stan t a ctio n in th e fu tu re)
-ap/ep n yp ap flb i /-ar/er durordı/ Tcept d o in g , a lw a y s d id ' 3 2 0 (d e scrip tiv e fo rm a tio n fo r
repeated/constant action in the past)
-a p / e p f ly p f lt ı /-ar/er durdı/ 'k ep t/ co n tin u e d d o in g ' 3 2 1 ( d e s c r ip tiv e fo r m a tio n fo r
repeated/continous a ctio n in th e past)
- a p /e p ftepflH /- a r /e r y ö r d ü / 'k e p t/c o n tin u e d d o in g ' 3 2 1 (d e s c r ip tiv e fo rm a tio n fo r
re p e a te d /c o n tin u o u s a c tio n in th e past)
-a p / e p it e p e p /-ar/er yö rö r/ 'w i ll b e d o in g ' 3 2 0 (d e s c r ip tiv e fo rm a tio n fo r reg u la r/
co n stan t a ctio n in th e fu tu re)
-ap/ep üepepflH /-ar/er yörördü / Tcept d o in g , a h v a y s d id ' 3 20 (d e scrip tiv e fo rm a tio n fo r
repeated/constant a ction in th e past)
-ap / e p OTypap /-ar/er oturor/ 'vvill b e d o in g ' 3 20 (d e s c r ip tiv e fo rm a tio n fo r regu la r/
co n stan t a ctio n in th e fu tu re)
-ap/ep OTypapfltı /-ar/er oturordı/ 'k e p t d o in g , alvvays did' 3 2 0 (descriptive formation
fo r repeated/constant a ction in th e past)
- a p /e p OTypflbi /- a r/e r o tu r d ı/ 'k e p t/c o n tin u e d d o in g ' 321 (d e s c rip tiv e fo rm a tio n fo r
re p e a te d /c o n tin u o u s a c tio n in th e past)
-ap/ep neMejiH /-ar/er ce m e li/ 'lik e ly ' 390 (m o d al vvord)
-ap/ep suibi /-ar/er y a :lı/ 's o that, su ch th at' 4 1 5 (p o stp osition )
-ap/ep- /-ar-or/er-ör-/ 5 3 5 (verb-form ation: ca u sa tive v o ice )
apacbiHfla /a:ra0mna/ 'a m o n g ' 428 (a u x ilia ry noun)
-apflH/epflM /-ard ı-o rd ı/e rd i-ö rd ü / 2 4 1 (3 sin g u la r h a b itu a l past in d efin ite ten se); 2 43
(vovvel le n gth en in g: -apflbi/spflH /-a:rdı/â:rdi/), 2 5 1 (con trasted vvith past con tin u o u s
ten se), 2 79 , 283 (vvith co n d itio n al), 6 0 8 -6 11 (parad igm s)
-apflbiıc/epnHK /-ard ık -ord u k /erd ik -örd iik / 2 4 1 (1 plural h ab itu al past in d efin ite tense)
-apflH Jiap/epflM nep / - a r d ıla r-o rd u lo r/ e rd ile r-ö rd iilö r/ 2 4 1 (3 p lu ra l h a b itu a l p a st
in d efin ite tense)
-apflMM/epflHM /-ard ım -o rd u m /e rd im -ö rd ü m / 2 4 1 (1 sin g u la r h a b itu a l p a st in d efin ite
tense)
-apflbtH/epflraî /-ardııj-ordurj/erdig-ördüıj/ 2 4 1 (2 sin g u la r h ab itu al past in d efin ite ten se)
-apflMHbt3/epflHHM3 /-ardır)i8-ordurju8/erdiıji8-ördür|üS/ 2 4 1 (2 p lu ra l h a b itu a l past
in d efin ite tense)
apKacbiiffla /arka0ıxma/ 'b eh in d , in b a c k o f 428 (a u x ilia ry n oun)
+ apna/epne- /+ arla-orlo/erle-örlö-/ 5 2 9 (verb-form ation)
-apnap/epnep /-arlar-orlor/erler-örlör/ 2 5 9 (3 plural future in d efin ite tense)
-apnbt/epnıı /-arh-orlı/erli-örlü/ 'sh o u ld d o ' 539
-apnbiKnbi/epnMKim /-arlıklı-orlukh/erlikli-örlUklü/ 'sh ou ld d o ' 539
-apcbiH/epcmt /-ar6ır)-or0U!]/er0ii]-ör0üi]/259 (2 sin gu la r fu tu re indefinite tense)
 Index 683

-apcfctnM3/epcH!(H3 /-ar0ırjı5-or0ui]u5/er6İ!]i5-öreür)ii5/ 2 5 9 (2 p lu ra l fu tu re in d efin ite

tense)
apTttK /artık/ 'more than' 4 2 1 (postposition)
-apHa/epne / -arca-o rco/erce-ö rcö / 'it ’ s w orth d o in g ' 546
+ a p tr / e p jf / + a n -o r ı/ e r i- ö r ü / 5 4 7 (a d v e r b -fo r m a tio n : d ir e c tiv e ) ; 5 3 (v a ria n ts ), 8 4
(orthography)
-aptm/epHH /-an n -on m /erin -ö rü n / 2 5 9 (1 sin g u la r fu tu re in d efin ite tense)
-apbic/epHO /-an0-onı9/eri0~örü0/ 2 5 9 (1 plural fu tu re in d efin ite tense)
- a c / e c / - a 0 -o ö / e 0 -ö 0 / 2 9 1 (in s u f f i x o f d e s ir e fo r m a tio n ) ; 5 3 ( v a r ia n ts ), 8 4
(orth o grap h y), 2 92 (v e rb a l n o u n ), 2 9 2 ( v o w e l len gth en in g: -a c/ sc /-a:0/a:0/)
-acn ap tr/ecn ep H renMeK /-a0 ian -o 0 1o n /e0 1eri-ö 0 lö rü g e lm e k / 2 9 1 (3 p lu ra l su ffb c o f
desire)
-acbi/ecH renMeK / -a 0 ı-o 0 ı/e 0 i-ö 0 ü g e lm e k / 2 9 1 (3 sin g u la r s u ff ix o f d e s ire ), 648
(paradigm s)
acbin/acna /a9ıl/a01a:/ 'g e n e ra lly ' 3 9 4 (m o d al w o rd )
-acbiM/ecMM renMeK /-a0ım ~ o0um /e0im -ö0iim ge lm e k / 291 (1 sin g u la r s u ffix o f desire)
-acbiMM3/ecHMH3 renMeK /-a0 ım ı8 -o 0 u m u 8 /e 0 im i5 -ö 0 iim ü S g e lm e k / 2 9 1 (1 p lu ra l
s u ffîx o f desire)
-acbiH/ecMH renMeK /-a0ııj-o0ur)/e0ir)-ö0ür) ge lm e k / 2 9 1 (2 sin g u la r s u ffıx o f desire)
-acbtnbt3/ecHHH3 renMeK /-a0ırjıS-o0ur)u8/e0ii]i8-ö0ür)ü8 g e lm e k / 2 9 1 (2 plural s u ffix o f
desire)
aTMaK /atm ak/ 'to th row , to to ss' 5 1 5 (a u x ilia ry v erb )
axbipbi /a:hın/ 'a fte r a li' 386 (m o d al w ord )
-an/eıı / -a c-o c / e c-ö c / 5 2 5 (noun-form ation: instrum ent o f action )
-aflflbi/seflH /-a:yadt/â:yedi/ 2 8 9 (3 sin g u la r d e s id e ra tiv e m o o d ); 35 (lo n g vovvel), 55
(variants), 84 (orth ograph y), 6 4 6 -6 4 7 (paradigm s)
-aflabK/aeflMK /-a:yadık/â:yedik/ 2 8 9 (1 plural d esid erative m o o d )
-asM binap/seflm ıep /-a:yadılar/â:yediler/ 289 (3 plural d esid erative m ood )
-asmbiM/aeflHM /-a:yadım /a:yedim / 2 8 9 (1 sin g u la r d esid e rativ e m ood )
-aflHbm/aeflHn /-a:yadııj/a:yedir)/ 2 89 (2 sin gu la r d esid e rativ e m o o d )
-aaflbtnbi3/3eflMHM3 /-a:yadır)iS/a:yedir)i8/ 289 (2 plu ral d esid erativ e m ood)
-aaJİHH/se^HH /-a:yaym /a:yeyin / 300 (s u ffıx o f p e rm issio n w ith 1 sin g u la r im p e ra tiv e
m o od )
-a ü n b i(f0 /3 en n (ı0 /-a:yalı(:i])/a:yeli(:r))/ 30 0 ( s u ffıx o f p e rm issio n vvith 1 d ual/plural
im p erativ e m ood)

+ 6a/6e /+ b a -b o /b e -b ö / s e e +Ma/Me /+ m a -m o /m e-m ö /

6a6aTfla /ba:batda/ 'abou t, in th e w a y o f 406 (postposition)
+6a3 /+ba:8/ 5 22 (P ersian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
6aKa(H) /baka:(n)/ 'toward, in the direction of, -vvard' 4 1 6 (postposition)
6aKanbi(H) /baka:lı(n)/'well' 3 9 1 (modal vvord)
684 Turkmen Reference Grammar

SaKMan /bakma:n/ 'although'416 (postposition)

6aKMa3fl8H /bakma65an/ 'in spite of' 416 (postposition)
+6aH/BaH /+ba:n/wa:n/ 520 (Persian noun-fom ıing suffix), 541 (adjective-fonning
suffîx)
6 ap /ba:r/ 'there is/are' 377 (modal vvord); 110, 379 ('to have'), 555 (telling time)
6 a p /b a r / 'g o ' 394 (m o d a l w o rd )
Gapafla /ba:rada/ 'about, regarding' 406 (postposition)
6 apactınna /ba:ra0ınna/ 'about, regarding' 406 (postposition)
Gapflbi-renflM /bardı-gelli/ 'in case' 450 (as condition conjunction)
öapMaK /barmak/ 'to come there, to go to, to get to' 552 (verb of motion), see -tın/m ı
SapMaK /-ıp/ip barmak/
6apbi /ba:n/ 'ali' 172 (collective pronoun)
öapbi-erbi /ba:n-yo:gı/ 'only, merely' 396 (modal word)
öauıra /basga/ 'besides, other than' 421 (postposition)
öauuıaMaK /başlamak/ 'to begin', see -Mara/Mare 6auınaMaK /-ma:ga/ma:ge baSlamak/,
- h m / u n öamnaMaK /-ıp/ip başlamak/
6 auuıan /basla:p/ 'starting from' 422 (postposition)
Sauibiıifla /b a s ın n a / 'at th e b e g in n in g of, ö v e r' 428 (a u x ilia ry noun)
öesçap/öeîKiepep /b e jiirr/b e je re r/ 's/he vvill fix' < 6e>K,epMeK /b e je r m e k / 263 (vovvel
len g th en in g )
ÖeüflHp /beydir/ 'thus, in this way, such' 193
öeiijıe /beyle/ 'such' 193
5eünernrnne /beylegigine/ 'here, in this direction, this way' 193
SefaeKM /beyleki/ 'other (than), except' 193
6 eMii3K /beylark/ lıere, in this direction, this way' 193
öenKM /belki/ 'maybe, perhaps, hopeftılly' 389 (modal word); 289 (vviüı desiderative)
+6ch t /+bent/ 541 (Persian adjective-fonning suffix)
6ep/6epep /be:r/berer/ 's/he vvill give' < 6epMeıc /bermek/ 58, 263 (vovvel lengthening)
6epn(n) /beri(n)/ 'only' 396 (modal word)
GepMeK /bermek/ 'to give' 515 (auxiliary verb), see -aBep(M)/eBep(n) /-awer(i)-owör(ii)/
ewer(i)-öwör(ü)/, roööepMeK /goybermek/, ıı6epMCK /kbermek/, -bi6 ep/« 6 ep /-ıber-
uber/iber-über/, -bin/Hn öepMetc /-ıp/ip bermek/
6 er+ fbet+l 'un-, bad' 541 (Persian prefix)
6 h+ /bi:+/ 'un-, -less, vvithout' 541 (Persian prefix)
6 m3 /biö/ 'vve' 181 (personal pronoun), 577 (paradigm)
ÖM3MU/biSir)/ 'our' 187 (genitive case)
6 n 3nep /biSler/ 'vve (ali)' 187
6 nneıı /bilen/ 'vvith, and, by, as, in, on' 407 (postposition), 'an d ' 438 (as connection
conjunction)
Bmıeıı ÖMpJiHKfle /bilen birlikde/ 'together vvith' 408 (postposition)
6hjim6k /bilm ek/ 'to knovv', see -bin/un GvııiMeK /-ıp/ip bilmek/
 Index 685

6 u p /bir/ ' 1 ' 1 5 4 (u sa g e s); 3 5 , 1 5 1 ( v o w e l len g th en in g in co m b in e d n u m era ls), 's a m e '

1 5 5 , 1 7 2 (vvith in te rro g a tiv e p ro n o u n s), 's o m e ' 1 5 6 , 1 7 3 ( in d e fin ite p ro n o u n s),
'o n e, a t le a s t' 3 9 6 (as m o d a l vvord)
6 n p ...6 n p /bir...bir/ 'first...th e n ' 448 (as co rrelatio n c o n ju n ctio n )
6ııp-6H p /bir-bir/ 'o n e b y o n e ' 160 (distributio n)
6 ııp r e p c e n ...6 H p re p ce rç /b ir gör0 ö r|...b ir görO öıj/ 'n o w ...n o w ' 448 (as co rre la tio n
con ju nctio n)
6wp 3aT /bir 6a:t/ 'so m e th in g ' 1 7 5 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
S u p c a n a p ...6 jıp c a n a p /bir 8 ap a r...b ir 0apar/ 'o n e tim e (th is)...o n e tim e (th a t)' 448 (as
correlation co n ju n ctio n )
6«p Tonap /bir topor/ 'a g ro u p o f ' 1 7 3 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
6wp 3M necnne...6np öetaecHHe /bir e y le 0 in e ...b ir b eyleöin e/) 'o n c e in this w a y ..o n ce in
that w a y ' 448 (as co rrelatio n con ju n ctio n )
6 n p apfciM /b ir y a:rım / 'o n e a n d a h a lf ' 166
6npa3 /bira:8/ 's o m e , a little, a f e w ' 1 7 3 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
S ııp eırreK /birentek/ 's e v e r a l' 1 7 3 (in d efin ite pronoun)
6 h p h /bi:ri/ 'o n e o f (so m eth in g )' 1 5 5 , 's o m e b o d y ' 1 7 5 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
ÖHpH-ÖMpM /bi:ri-bi:ri/ 'o n e a n o th er' 1 5 5
ÖHpMryH /birü:n/ 'd a y a fte r t o m o ıro w ' 58 (vovvel len gth en in g)
6ııpKK /birki/ 'a f e w ' 1 7 3 (in d e fin ite p ronou n )
ÖMpKyn /birküc/ 'a c o u p le o f ' 17 3 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
6npneM e /b im em e/ 'so m e , a little ' 1 7 3 (in d e fin ite pronoun )
ÖHpHOMe /b im ace/ 'so m e , s e v e ra l' 1 7 3 (in d efin ite pronoun)
6MpxMJDi /birhi:li/ 'so m e w h a t' 1 7 3 (in d efin ite pronoun)
6 htm h /bitim / 'w h o le , n o t b ro k e n ' 16 3 (fra ction s)
6 o n a p /bolor/ 'th ere w iil b e ' 2 6 1
ö o n a p flu /bolordı/ 'w o u ld b e ' 242
Ö o jıa c tı /bolo0ı/ 'it w o u ld seem /appear that’ 2 9 2
6onM a3 /bolm oS/ 'th ere vvill n o t b e ' 2 6 1
6oJiMa3flbi /bolm oSSı/ 's/he w o u ld n o t b e ' 2 4 2
ö o jiM a K / b o lm o k / 'to h a v e / e x ist' 380 , 't o b e , to b e c o m e ' 5 1 3 ( a u x ilia ry v erb ), se e
-bm /m ı 6onM aK /-ıp/ip b olm ok/
6 o n M aca /bolm o0o/ 'I su p p o s e , I th in k ' 2 8 5 , 'othervvise, o r e ls e ' 443 (as c o ııtra d itio n
co n ju n ctio n )
S ojiM aca 6MpnflMp //bolmoOo bi:ridir/ 'm a y b e it is o n e o f, I w o n d e r i f ' 285
6 o n c a ( -fla ) / b o l0 o (-d o )/ ' i f it is ' 280 , 'a s fo r , a n d , a n y w a y ' 4 4 3 (a s corıcrad ition
con ju n ctio n )
ö o jıy n /bolup/ 'b e in g ' 1 5 9 (c o lle c tiv e n u m erals)
6 o n a p /bolya:r/ 'a li rig h t, o k a y ' 3 8 1 (m o d al w ord )
5 o p /6 o n a p /b o :r/b o lo r/ 'it w ill b e ' < öojiMaK /b o lm o k / 58, 2 63 (vovvel le n g th e n in g )
öoıoHfla / l» y u n n o / 'o n , a lo n g ' 428 (a u x ilia ry n o u n )
öoıoHMa /b o y u n c o / 'in a c c o rd a n c e vvith' 409 (p o stp o sitio n )
6 8 6 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

S e n eK /b ö:lök/ 'p a rt' 1 6 4 (fraetions)

öen M eK /börlm ök/ 'to d iv id e ' 1 6 7 (arith m etic)
6 y /b u :/'th is ' 190 (demonstrative pronoun); 35 (long vovvel in isolation), 's/he' 185,
578 (paradigm)
6 y ryH /bu:n/ 'to d a y ' 58 (vovvel len gth en in g)
6 y epm e /bu y eri:k/ 'h ere , in this d ireetio n , this w a y ' 19 3
6 y n a p /bulor/ 'th ey/th ese [person s/th in gs]' 185
öynaptın /bulorur)/ 'their [persons]' 187, 'their [things]' 195 (genitive case)
SyTHH /bütiiın/ 'w h o le , e n tire ' 1 7 2 ( c o lle c t iv e pronou n ); 16 3 (co n fu sio n vvith 6 hthh
/biti:n/ 'vvh ole, n ot b ro k e n ')
6yTMH aptiM /bütü:n/ 'one and a half' 166
6spH /ba:ri/ 'since, for' 422 (postposition)

-b /-w / see -yB/yB /-uw/üw/

BamjHfla /wagtınna/ 'd u rin g, in ' 4 2 9 (a u x ilia ry n oun)
-BaM /-w a:c/ 5 2 5 (Persian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffîx )
Be /w e/ 'and' 433 (connection conjunction)
Bejnf(H) /w eli(n)/ 's t ili' 386 (m o d al vvord), 'h ovvever' 441 (as co n trad ition co n ju n ctio n )
BejiHH IfeHe /vvelin yö:n ö / 'b u t o n ly ' 442 (con trad ition co n ju n ctio n )
-Byıc/BYK /-wuk/wük/ 526 (noun-formation), 544 (adjective-fonnation)

-r l - g l 523 (noun-formation: process/result o f action), see - m /r a /-gı/gi-gü/

-ra/re /-ga-go/ge-gö/ 526 (noun-formation)
-raK/reK /-gak-gok/gek-gök/ 526 (noun-formation), 543 (adjective-formation)
rannM /ga:lh / 'rem ained' 555 (telling tim e)
ranMaK /ga:lm ak/ 'to stay, to rem ain' 515 (auxiliary verb), see -u n /m ı ranMaK /-ıp/ip
ga:lmak/
-ramaK/reHneK /-gancak-gon£ok/gencek-göncök/ 526 (noun-formation)
ranflajıtmfla /gapdaluına/ 'next to' 429 (auxiliary noun)
+ rap /rep- /+gar-gor/ger-gör-/ 529 (verb-formation)
rapa3 /garaS/ 'in sh o rt' 397 (modal vvord)
rapaMa3flan /garamaSSan/ 'in spite öf' 416 (postposition)
rapaMaH /garama:n/ 'regardless' 416 (postposition)
rapantiHfla /garanııjda/ 'compared to' 417 (postposition)
rapaHfla /gararjda/ 'in comparison vvith' 416 (postposition)
rapıUM /garsı/ 'against, opposed t o ' 417 (postposition)
rapuiBictiHna /garsıömna/ 'opposite' 429 (auxiliary n oun)
r a n .ı /gatı/ 'extremely, quite' 150 (superlative degree)
r e n /gel/ 'com e' 394 (modal word)
renMeK /gelm ek/ 'to come here, to arrive' 514 (auxi!iary verb), 552 (verb of motion),
see - y m jr n ı renMeK /-ıp/ip gelmek/
 Index 687

renneMeK /geplemek/ 'to speak' 5 5 4 (verb o f speech)

rep/renep /ge:r/geler/ 's/he will come' < renMeK /gelmek/ 5 8 ,2 6 3 (vovvel lengthening)
repeK /gerek/ 'need, (it’s) necessary' 390 (modal vvord), see +a/e repeK /+a/e gerek/,
-MaK(jn.nc)/MeK(nHK) repeK /-mak(lık)/mek(lik) gerek/, -ca/ce repeK /-0a/0e gerek/
nıpMeK /gi:rmek/ 'to enter', see -u n / ıın rıtpMaK /-ıp/ip gi:rmek/
raTMeK /gitm ek/ 'to g o to, to leave for' 5 5 2 (verb o f m o tio n ), s e e - ıın / ifn rHTMas
/-ıp/ip gitmek/
ronpaK /gowra:k/ 'more/better than' 4 2 3 (postposition)
ro B tt repMeK /gowı görmök/ 'to like' 303 (modal formation: affinnation)
roti /goy/ 's to p ' 3 9 4 (m o d al word)
roööepMeK /goybermek/ 'to suddenly or abruptly do' 3 1 7
roÜMaK /goymok/ 'to put, to place', se e -bin/im roÖMaK /-ıp/ip goymok/
rojıaü /goloy/ 'close to ' 4 1 7 (postposition)
ronaiİMHfla /goloyunno/ 'near' 4 2 9 (auxiliary noun)
rouiMaK /gosmok/ 'to add' 16 7 (arithmetic)
rep /gör/ 'see' 3 9 4 (modal vvord)
repMeK /görmök/ 'to see' 5 1 4 (auxiliary verb), see rosıı repMeK /gowı görmök/,
-u n / m ı repMeK /-ıp/ip görmök/
reps /görâ:/ 'according to' 4 1 8 (postposition)
reTsp/reTepep /göta:r/götörör/ 's/he vvill bring' < reTepMeK /götörmök/ 2 6 3 (vovvel
lengthening)
r e r a p / r e * iY p e p /göci:r/gö£ürör/ 's/he wiîl m ove (tr.)'< reuypMeK /göcürm ök/ 263
(vovvel lengthening)
ryT ap/ryT apap /guta:r/gutoror/ 's/he vvill finish' < ryTapMaK /gutorm ok/ 5 8 , 2 6 3
(vovvel lengthening)
ryTapMaK /gutormok/ 'to fınish', see -tm /ım ryTapMaK /-ıp/ip gutormok/
rypjıeniMeK /gürlösmök/ 'to speak/talk with' 5 5 4 (verb o f speech)
-r t ı/ n t / -gı/gi-gü / 5 26 (n oun -form ation), 543 (a d je ctive -fo ım a tio n )
-rtın a / rn u e - / -g ıla -g u lo / g ile -g iilö -/ 5 3 7 (verb -form atio n: rep etitiven ess o f action)
rfcrana /gılla/ 'sh arp, e q u a lly ' 16 5 (in ten sifier)
-rtiH /rım /-gın-gun/gin-gün/ 2 7 1 (2 insistent imperative mood); 45 (unstressed), 640
(paradigms)
-rMH/rıiH / -g m -g u n / g in -g ü n / 5 2 4 (n o u n -fo rm atio n : re su lt o f a ctio n ), 543 (a d je ctiv e -
form ation)
+ n .ıp /rn p - / + gır-gu r/gir-gü r-/ 529 (verb -fo ra ıa tion )
-rtıp / r a p / -gır-gu r/gir-gü r/ 543 (ad jective-fo rm ation )
-n>rr/rHT /-git—gut/git—güt/ 5 26 (noun-formation)
- n n / r m / - g ıc - g u c / g iî-g ü c / 5 2 5 (n oun -form ation: m ean s o f action )
+ rsp /+ga:r/ see +K3p/rap /+kâ:r/gâ:r/
6 8 8 Turkmen Reference Grammar

+ fla / fle / + d a -d o / d e -d ö / 1 3 1 ( lo c a tiv e c a s e ); 5 3 , 13 5 (v a ria n ts ), 6 9 (in se rtio n o f

c o n so n a n t a fte r v o v v e l), 82 (o rth o g ra p h y ), 3 7 0 (a d v e r b fo r m a tio n ), 4 2 7 (vvith
a u x ilia ry n ou ns), 5 4 5 (ad verb-form ation ), 5 5 7 (seaso n s), 5 7 1 - 5 7 6 (p arad igm s)
+fla/fle 6ap/eK /+da/de ba:r/yo:k/ 'to h a v e ' 1 3 4
-fla/fle /-d a -d o / d e-d ö / 'an d , t o o ' 4 3 7 (as c o n n e ctio n co n ju n ctio n ), 46 0 (con trasted vvith
-fla/fls /-da:/dâ:/), 'ju st, e v e n ' 4 6 2 (em ph asis), 46 (unstressed)
-fl'd/fle...-fla/fle /-da/de...-da/de/ 'w h e th e r...o r' 4 4 7 (as co rrelatio n con ju n ctio n )
-fla/fls /-da:/da:/ 'ju st, r e a lly ' 4 5 9 (em p h asis p a rtid e ); 3 5 (lo n g vovvel), 46 (u nstressed),
272 (vvith im p erativ e), 2 8 9 (vvith d esid e rativ e)
fla r t ı /dağı/ 'o r so , and su c h ' 16 3 (ap proxim ation ), 1 7 7 (in d efin ite pronou n ph rases)
-p .a xf,ı/p p x,K /-d a jı-d o jı/ d e ji-d ö jü / 5 2 6 (n oun -form ation)
-flaıc/fleK /-d a k-d o k/d ek-d ö k/ 5 26 (n oun -form ation)
+flaKbi/fl3KH /+da:kı/dâ:ki/ 1 3 3 , 5 4 0 (compound relation suffbc); 3 5 (long vovvel), 5 5
(variants), 84 (orthography), 1 3 5 (vvith a n tr /ya:lı/), 18 6 (vvith personal pronouns),
19 4 (with demonstrative pronouns)
+flaH/fleH /+ d a n -d o n /d en -d ö n / 1 3 5 (a b la tiv e ca se); 53, 1 4 1 (va ria n ts), 69 (in sertion o f
co n so n a n t a fte r vo vvel), 82 (o rth o gra p h y ), 13 9 , 1 4 7 (co m p a riso n ), 1 3 9 (fra ctio n s),
1 5 9 (d istrib u tio n n u m e ra ls), 1 6 3 (fra c tio n s), 3 7 1 (a d v e r b fo rm a tio n ), 4 2 1 (vvith
p ostp ositio n s), 5 4 5 (ad verb-fo rm atio n ), 5 7 1 - 5 7 6 (parad igm s)
+flaH/fleH biöapaT /+dan/den ıbarrat/ 'co n sists o f ' 13 7
+flaH /+ da:n/ 5 2 2 (Persian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
-flaHbt/flsHM /-da:nı/dâ:ni/ 'just, really' 4 5 9 (emphasis partide)
+ flap /+da:r/ 5 2 0 (P ersian n o u n -fo rm in g s u ffix ), 5 4 1 (a d je ctiv e -fo rm in g su ffix )
-flap/flep- /-dar-dor/der-dör-/ 5 3 5 (verb -foım ation : ca u sa tiv e v o ic e )
+ flaıu/fleıu /+ d a s-d o s/ d e s-d ö s / 5 1 9 (n o u n -fo rm atio n : co m p a n io n ); 53 (va ria n ts), 82
(orth ograph y), 540 (ad jective-form ation )
flam apb i /d asan / 'o u tsid e o f ' 4 2 4 (po stpo sition )
n eft /dey/ 'lik e ' 409 (p o stp o sition )
« eK /dek/ 'li k e ' 409 (p o stp ositio n )
flen /d es]! 'e q u a l' 16 5 (in ten sifier)
a e ı« H p /değdir/ 'is e q u a l to ' 1 6 7 (arithm etic)
flepeK /derek/ 'in stead o f ' 4 1 8 (postposition )
flMen /diyen/ 'n a m e d ,ca lle d ' 4 5 6 (in qu otation s)
flM ta n /diyip/ 's a y in g , th at' 4 5 4 (as qu otatio n co n ju n ctio n ); 'to h op e, sa y in g th at' 289
«HÖMeK /d iym ek/ 'that m ea n s' 398 (m o d al vvord), 'to s a y ' 5 5 4 (ve rb o f sp e e ch )
flMne /dirje/ 'o n ly ' 396 (m o d al vvord)
AMUe—flan , 3ÎıceM /dirje...dâ:l, ey0 em / 'n o t o n ly ..., b u t' 384, 440
flo rp yM H /d ogn ım ı/ 'rig h t? ' 49 4 (in terro ga tive sen ten ces)
flo r p t ı /d ogn / 'th a t’ s right, true, e x a c t ly ' 381 (m o d al vvord)
a o jifljb ip / flo jifly p a p /d o:lh :r/d ollu ro r/ 's/he vvill f i i l ' < flo n fly p M a K /d o :llu rm o k / 2 63
(vovvel len gth en in g)
flyB /duvv/ 5 1 1 ( in t e n s if y in g sy lla b le )
 Index 689

flyp /du:r/ 's/he’s standing' 224 (present continuous tense); 58 (voweI lengthening),
225 (contracted form), 227-228 (table of forms), 483 (vvith -Ka/ıcs /-ka:/kâ:/), 588
(paradigms)
flyp fltı /du:rdı/ 's/he was standing' 226 (contracted form), 589 (paradigms)
AypMaK /durmok/ 'to stand', see -ap/ep flypap /-ar/er duror/, -ap/ep flypapjibi /-ar/er
durordı/, -ap/ep flypflbi /-ar/er durdı/, -Mara/Msre flypMaK /-ma:ga/mâ:ge durmok/,
-bm/Mn flyp /-ıp/ip du:r/, -bin/jın flypMaK /-ıp/ip durmok/
-flbi/flH /-dı/di—dü/ 238 (3 singular past in defin ite tense); 54 (variants), 84
(orthography), 233 (vvith negative present perfect tense), 239 (vvith non-verbs), 240
(with contracted verbs), 240 (in proper names), 251 (contrasted vvith past continuous
tense), 293 (vvith suffix o f intention), 296 (with suffix o f obligation), 380 (with 6ap
/ba:r/), 383 (with eK /yo:k/), 384 (with flan /dâ:l/), 466 (with confirmation particle),
526 (noun-formation), 604-607 (paradigms)
-flbi/flH repeK /-dı/di gerek/ 'must have/probably/likely did' 390 (modal word)
-flbiK/flHK /-dık-duk/dik-diik/ 238 (1 plural past indefinite tense)
-flbiK/flMK /-dık-duk/dik-diik/ 348 (present perfect participle), 'that' 480 (qut ification
particle); 456 (in quotations), 481 (vvith suffix of obligation)
-flbiK/flHK caitbiH /-dık/dik 0a:yın/ 'as' 410 (postposition)
-flMKMa/flMKMe /-dıkca-dukco/dikce-dükcö/ 'the more one does' 546
-flbinap/flmıep /-dılar-dulor/diler-dülör/ 238 (3 plural past indefinite tense)
-flbiM/flMM /-dım-dum/dim-düm/ 238 (1 singular past indefinite tense)
-flbm/flHn /-dırj—durj/diıj—dür)/ 238 (2 singular past indefinite tense)
-flbinbi3/flHHH3/-dır)i6-dur)u5/dir)iS-dUrjü8/238 (2 plural past indefinite tense)
-flbip/flvıp /-dır-dur/dir-dür/ 'it is, is/are, don’t forget, m ight be' 465 (confirm ation
particle); 46 (unstressed), 294 (vvith su ffix o f intention), 296 (vvith suffix o f
obligation), 'and' 437 (as connection conjunction), 466-467 (paradigms)
-flbip/flHp- /-dır-dur/dir-dür-/ 535 (verb-formation: causative voice); 54 (var ants), 83
(orthography)
; p ıı /da:l/ 'is/are not' 383, 479 (modal word); 213 (with tense/aspect forms), 294
(negative suffix o f intention), 296 (negative suffix o f obligation), 387 (with 3KeH
/eken/), 466 (with -flbip/nnp /-dır/dir/)

eKe(ine) /yeke(je)/ 'single, just one' 396 (modal vvord)

cKe-eKe /yeke-yeke/ 'one by one' 160 (distribution)
ene 6np /yene bir/ 'another' 155
ene-fle /yene-de/ 'once more' 462
epu /yeri/ 'well, come on' 391 (modal vvord)
epH-epH /yeri-yeri/ 'oh, come on' 391 (modal vvord)

erca(M) /yogöo(m)/ 'if not, othervvise' 443 (contradition conjunction), 34 (shori vowel)
eK /yo:k/ 'tlıere is/are not' 382, 479 (modal vvord), 110, 383 ('to not have')
690 Türkmen Reference Grammar

- * ; a M e /-ja-jo/Je-jö/ 5 2 6 (n oun -form atio n)

+2K;ara3 / + ja g a 8 - jo g o 5 / 5 2 0 ( n o u n -fo rm a tio n : d im in u tiv e ) ; 18 6 ( w ith p e rs o n a l
pron ou n s), 1 9 4 (w ith d em o n stra tive pronoun s)
+3K;aK/x,eK /+jak-jok/jek-jök/ 5 2 0 (noun-formation: diminutive)
-2;aK /5K ;eK / - ja k - jo k / je k - jö k / 2 6 4 ( d e f in it e fu tu r e te n s e ); 53 ( v a r ia n t s ) , 82
(o r th o g r a p h y ), 2 6 5 (c o n tra s te d vvith fu tu re in d e fin ite te n se ), 2 7 9 , 2 8 3 (w ith
co n d itio n al), 6 3 4 -6 3 7 (parad igm s)
-sçaıc/^ eK / -ja k -jo k / je k -jö k / 345 (fu ture participle)
-:*;aK/:*;eK Sonca /-jak/jek bol6o/ 2 8 4 (future conditional mood)
-^ajc/açeK « a n /jak/jek da:]/ 2 65 (n eg a tiv e d efin ite fu tu re tense)
- x $ K /x fiK flanflH /-jak/jek da:lli/ 2 5 7 (n e g a tiv e 3 sin g u la r u n re alize d past p e rfe c t tense)
-x;aK /*;eK a n t ı /-jak/jek y a :h / 'a s th o u g h ' 4 1 5 (p ostp osition )
->F;aKaı>t/»;eKfln / - ja k d ı- jo k d ı/ je k d i-jö k d ü / 2 5 7 (3 s in g u la r u n re a liz e d p a st p e rfe c t
ten se), 6 2 4 -6 2 9 (paradigm s)
-»;aKfltnc/a;eKHHK / -ja k d ık -jo k d u k / je k d ik -jö k d ü k / 2 5 7 (1 plu ral u n re alize d past p e rfec t
tense)
-;«;aK#Mnap/:*;eKflnnep /-jakdılar-jokdulor/jekdiler-jökdülör/ 2 5 7 (3 plural unrealized
past perfect tense)
-a;aKHHM/3«;eKflHM / -ja k d ım -jo k d u m / je k d im -jö k d ü m / 2 5 7 (1 sin g u la r u n re a lize d past
perfect tense)
- 2 t;aKflHn/x;eKflMH /-jak d ırj-jo k d u rı/ jek d i^ -jö k d ü rı/ 2 5 7 (2 s in g u la r u n re a liz e d p a st
perfect tense)
-x,aKflfcmbt3/2c,eKflHHM3 /-jakdıqıS-jokduj]uS/jekdir)i5-jökdür)ü8/257 (2 plu ral u n realized
past p e rfec t tense)
-3K;aKna/x;eKiıe- /-jak la -jo k !o / 5 e k le -jö k iö -/ 5 3 7 (verb -form atio n : rep etitiven ess o f action )
-XaKM 6mtt/x,eKM HflH / -ja k m ıd ı-jo k m u d ı/ je k ın id i-jö k n ıü d ii/ 258 (q u estio n fo rm o f 3
sin gu la r u n realized past perfect tense)
-aq a(n a)/(*;e )n e - / - ja ( la )-jo (lo )/ je (le )-jö (lö )-/ 5 3 7 (v e rb -fo rm a tio n : re p e titiv e n e ss o f
action)
+5K;an /+ja:n/ (= x;aH /ja:n/ 'sou lO 5 2 0 (n oun -form ation: a ffe ctio n ate )
+3K,aııjy^ert, /+jaq—Jorj^ferj—jjörj/540 (ad jective-fo rm atio n : ch ara cter of/in clination tow ards
a q u ality)
-x;an/*;eH /-jaıj-jorj/jerı-jöıj/ 543 (ad jective-form atio n )
+x;ap/sK;ep- /+jar-jor/Jer-jör-/ 529 (verb -form atio n)
+x ,uk / x ,kk / + jık -ju k / jik -jü k / 5 2 0 (n o un -form atio n : d im in u tive )
+as;Mpa/;*;ifpe- /+jıra-juro/jire-jürö-/ 5 2 9 (verb-formation)
-^btpa/açH pe- /-jıra-ju ro /jire-jü rö -/ 5 36 (verb -form ation: w e a k e n in g o f action )

+3ap /+ 5a:r/ 5 2 2 (Persian n o u n -form in g su ffıx )

3aT /8a:t/ 'th in g ' 1 7 6 (in d e fin ite pronoun phrases)
+3aT /+8a:t/ 522 (P ersian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
 Index 6 9 1

HÖepMeK / i:b en n ek/ 'to sen d to , to sen d o f f ' 3 1 7

MKHÖHp /ildbi:r/ 'in twos, in pairs' 16 0 (distribution)
hkh6 hp - hkh6 hp /ikib i:r-ikib i:r/ 'tw o b y t w o ' 16 0 (distribution)
hkji6 h p -yii 6 hp /iWbi:r-ücbi:r/ 'in tvvos and threes' 16 0 (distribution)
hkhch /iki6i/ 'both' 1 5 9
HHe /ine/ 'see, here' 40 1 (modal vvord)
hh /ir)/ 'most' 1 4 9 (superladve degree)
MUrçan /iıjrjâ:n/ 're a lly , v e r y ' 15 0 (su p erla tive d eg ree)
HcneMeK /iölemek/ 'to want', see -MamİMem HcneMeK /-magı/megi iölemek/
HMHKne /icinne/ 'in, inside' 4 2 9 (auxiliary noun)
HUineüap /isleya:r/ 'working' 5 5 5 (telling time)

-W/ - y İ see -a/e/ö /-a-o/e-ö/y/

-öagbi/ttaçK /-yjı/yji-yjü/ see - w x j x / k x ? i /-ıjı-ujı/iji-üjü/
iİHTHp/JtMTHpep /yiti:r/yitirer/ 's/he will lose' < ÖHTHpMeK /yitirm ek/ 2 6 3 (vowel
lengthening)
İîeHe /yö:nö/ 'but, only' 439 (contradition conjunction)
{tene Benw /yö:nö weli/ 'while, nonetheless' 4 4 2 (contradition conjunction)
üep /y ö s / 58 (vovvel lengthening), 2 2 5 (contracted form), 2 2 7 -2 2 8 (table of forms),
483 (vvith -Ka/Ka /-ka:/ka :/), see -un/m ı üep /-ıp/ip yö:r/
üep /yör/ 'c ’m o n 3 9 4 (modal word)
iiepeMeK /yörömök / 'to vvalk' 2 2 7 -2 2 8 (table o f forms)
HepMeK /yörmök/ 'to vvalk, to proceed', see -ap/ep HepflH /-ar/er yördü/, -ap/ep Mepep
/-ar/er yörör/, -ap/ep ilepepflH /-ar/er yörördü/, -H n/n n Mep /-ıp/ip y ö :r/, -tm/Hn
MepMeK /-ıp/ip yörmök/
öya /yü5/ '1 0 0 ' 16 3 (fractions), 1 6 7 (percentages)
MY3Y W e /yüSünnö/ 'o n th e sid e o f ' 42 9 (a u x ilia ry n oun)
- ümui/ ühiu /-yıs-yus/yis-yüs/ (verbal noun), see -hui/ hhi /-ıs-us/is-üs/

+ k /+:k/ see + h k / hk /+«:k/i:k/

-k /-k/ 2 1 4 (1 p lu ra l p erson a l en din g)
-k l - k l see -aıc/eK /-ak-ok/ek-ök/, -mk/hk /-ık-uk/ik-ük/
-Ka/K3 /-ka:/ka:/ 'I vvonder' 4 6 3 (speculation p artide), 'vvlıile' 483 (qualification
partide); 3 5 (long vovvel), 46 (unstressed), 2 5 0 (vvith past continuous tense), 503
(object phrases)
-Ka3/Ke3- /-ka8-ko5/ke5-kö8-/ 5 3 5 (verb-form ation: ca u sa tiv e v o ic e )
-Kana/Kene- /-kala-kolo/kele-kölö-/ 5 3 7 (verb-formation: repetitiveness o f action)
-KaH(H)/K3H(H) /-ka:n(ı)/ka:n(i)/ 'I vvonder' 463 (speculation partide)
KeM /kem / 'less' 5 5 5 (telling time)
+Keuı /+kes/ 5 2 0 (Persian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
khm /kim/ 'vvh o?' 202 (in terroga tive pronoun), 5 7 7 (parad igm )
6 9 2 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

KMMflMp S u p u /kimdir bi:ri/ 'somebody' 1 7 5 (indefinite pronoun)

khmmh /kimi:n/ 'like' 40 9 (postposition)
KenejrrMeK /köpöltmök/ 'to multiply' 1 6 7 (arithmetic)
K y n n u /külli/ 'w h o le ' 1 7 2 ( c o lle c tiv e pronoun)
+kh/km /+kı/ki-kü/ 5 4 0 (adjective-formation: relation); 5 4 (variants), 84 (orthography),
18 9 (wıth personal pronouns in genitive case), 1 9 5 (with demonstrative pronouns in
genitive case)
-kh / km /-kı/ki—kü/ 5 2 6 (n ou n -fom ıation )
K sö ııp /ka:bir/ 'so m e , d iffe re n t’ 1 7 3 (in d efin ite pronoun)
+K3p/rep /+kâ:r/ga:r/ 5 20 (Persian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
KOTe /ka:te/ 'so m e tim e s' 4 4 7 (as co ıre la tio n con ju n ctio n )
K3(Te)...K9(Te) /kâ:(te)...ka:(te)/ 'n o w th is...n o w th at' 4 4 6 (as co rrela tio n con ju n ctio n )

-ji /-!/ s e e + ajı/ejı- / + a l-o l/ e !-ö l-/

-ji- /-!-/ s e e -uji/hji- /-ıl-ul/il-iil-/
+ jıa/n e- /+Ia—lo /le—lö -/ 5 2 7 (v e rb -fo rm a tio n ); 53 (v a ria n ts), 82 (o rth o g ra p h y ), 5 1 2
(e q u iv ale n t to 3TMejc /etmek/)
-n a / n e / -la -lo / le -lö / '( fo r ) su re, re a lly , d o n ’ t y o u k n o w ' 4 6 0 (e m p h a sis p a rticle ), 'a li
rig lıt? ' 473 (ap p e al particle); 46 (unstressed)
-Jiaö/neü /-lay/ley/ 's e e ? ' 4 7 4 (ap peal particle)
JiaüttK /la:yık/ 'e x a c t ly ' 16 5 (in ten sifier)
jıaübiK(jıtiKfla) /la:yık(lıkda)/ 'in conformity with' 4 1 9 (postposition)
+naÜ(kiH)/jıefi(HH) /+ lay (m )-lo y(u n )/ley(in )-löy(ü n )/ 5 47 (adverb-form ation)
+JiaK/neK / + la k -lo k / le k -lö k / 540 (ad jective-form ation )
+jıaH/j»H /+la:n/lii:n/1 6 2 (ap pro xim ation n u m erals); 5 5 (variants), 8 4 (orth ograph y)
+jıaH/jıeH- /+ lan -lo n /len -lö n -/ 5 2 7 (verb -form atio n ), 5 1 2 (e q u iv ale n t to 3TMeK /etmek/)
+Jian/nan /+la:p/lâ:p/ 1 6 1 (ap p roxim atio n n u m erals); 3 5 (lon g v o w e l), 5 5 (variants), 84
(orth ograph y), 5 4 7 (adverb-form ation)
+Jiap/nep /+lar-lor/ler-lör/ 10 1 (p lu ral); 5 3 , 10 6 (variants), 82 (orthography), 161
(approximation numerals), 500 (agreement), 5 7 6 (paradigms)
-Jiap/nep /-lar-lor/ler-lö r/ 2 1 4 (3 plu ral p erson a l en din g)
+JiapHa/nepq;e / + la rc a -lo rco / le rc e -lö rc ö / 1 6 1 ,1 6 2 (ap proxim ation n u m erals)
+jıauı/jıeıu- /+las-los/ies-lös-/ 5 2 7 (verb-formation)
-nra/jıre /-lga-lgo/lge-lgö/ see -anra/eJire /-alga-olgo/elge-ölgö/
+nı>ı/nH Z+lı/li—lü/ 538 (ad je ctive -fo rm atio n : attribute); 5 4 (varian ts), 84 (orth ograp h y),
1 9 4 (w ith d em on strative pronouns), 'a n d ' 438 (as con n e ctio n co n ju n ctio n )
+jim k/jihk / + lık - lu k / lik -lü k / 5 1 8 (n o u n -fo rm a tio n : a sso c ia tio n ); 5 4 (va ria n ts ), 83
(o rth o g ra p h y ), 18 6 (vvith p erson a l p ron ou n s), 'th at' 482 (as q u a lific a tio n p a rticle ),
540 (ad jective-form ation )
 Index 693

-m /-m / 214 (1 singular personal ending)

-m l - m l se e -mm/mm / -ım -u m /im -iim /
+Ma/Me /-t-ma-mo/me-mö/ 547 (adverb-formation); 448 (as correlation conjunction)
-Ma/Me /-m a-n o /m e-m ö / 333 (verbal noun); 57, 59 (vovvel lengthening), 526 (noun-
formation), 543 (adjective-formation), 656-657 (paradigms)
-Ma/Me /-ma-mo/me-mö/ 478 (negation partide); 45 (unstressed), 212 (with verb
suffixes), 270 (negative 2 singular/informal imperative mood)
-Mara/Msre /-ma:ga/mâ:ge/ 127, 330, 332 (infinitive in dative case); 55 (variants), 84
(orthography)
-M a ra / M sre Ö aıunaM aK /-m a :ga /m a :ge b aşlam ak / 'to b e g in to d o ' 311 ( d e s c r ip tiv e
form ation)
-M ara/M areflypM aK /-ma:ga/mâ:ge durm ok/'to begin doing'314(descriptive ibrmation)
-M a ra / M a r e O T yp M aK /-m a:ga/m â:ge oturm ok/ 'to begin doing' 314 (descriptive
formation)
-Mara/Mare y rp a M a K /- ma:ga/mâ:ge ugromok/ 'to b e g in to d o ' 311 ( d e s c r ip tiv e
formation)
-Mara/Msre HeMeım /-ma:ga/mâ:ge cemeli/ 'likely to do' 390 (modal vvord)
-M ara/M erH / -m a g ı-m o g ı/ m e g i-m ö g ü / 329 (in fin itiv e in a c c u s a tiv e ca se)
-Marbi/Mera HcneMeK /-magı/megi islemek/ 'to vvant to do' 305 (modal formation:
desire)
-M arbiH /M eraH / - m a g m -m o g u n / m e g in -m ö g ü n / 271 ( n e g a tiv e in siste n t im p e ra tiv e
m o od )
-Man.ru/MerMH /-m agııj-m ogu r)/m egir)-m ögü ıj/ 329 (in fin itiv e in g e n itiv e ca se)
-Maflbi/MeflH /-m ad ı-m o d ı/m ed i-m ö d ü / 238 (n e g a tiv e 3 s in g u la r past in d e fin iıe tense)
-MafltiK/MAUHK / -m a d ık -m o d u k / m e d ik -m ö d ü k / 341 ( n e g a t iv e past p a rtic ip le ), 349
(o rig in o f form )
-MaflbiKCbipa/MeflMKCMpe- /-madık0ıra-moduk0uro/medik0ire-mödük0ürö-/ 5 29 (verb-
formation: pretending not to do)
-Maac,aK/Mea;eK /-majak-mojok/mejek-möjök/ 345 (negative future participle)
-Ma3/Me3 /-maS-mo5/mefi-mö8/ 478 (negation partide); 259 (negative 3 per:;on future
indefinite tense), 347 (negative 3 future indefinite participle)
-Ma3/Me3 anbi /-ma8/me8 ya:lı/ 'so that, such that' 415 (postposition)
-Ma3aıc/Me3eK /-ma8ak-mo8ok/me8ek-möSök/ 543 (adjective-fomnation)
-Ma3flaH/Me3meH /-ma88an-mo8Son/me8Sen-mö8Sön/ 357 (negative gerund)
-Ma3flbi/Me3flM /-ma8Sı-mo88ı/meSSi-möS5ü/ 241 (negative 3 singular habitual past
indefinite tense)
-Ma3JibiK/Me3JiHK /-maShk-moSluk/me5lik-mö81ük/ 327 (negative infinitive)
-Ma3«a/Me3Me /-maSca-mo8co/me8ce-mö6cö/ 'it’s not vvorth doing' 546
-msü/msM /-ma:y/mâ:y/ 300 (negative suffix o f permission)
-MaflbiH/MsiÎMH /-m a:ym /m â:yin/ 268 (n eg ativ e 1 singular im p e ra tiv e m o o d )
-MaK/MeK / -m a k -m o k / m e k -m ö k / 327 (in fin itiv e ), 333 (con trasted vvith v erb a l n ou ns),
526 (n oun -form ation), 654-655 (paradigm s)
694 Türkmen Reference Grammar

-Mas/MeK Sm ıeH /-m ak/m ek b ilen / 'w ith , a s ' 408 (postposition )
-Maıc/MeK ö o n M a s /-m ak/m ek b o lm o k/ 'to b e p rop er to d o ' 308 (prop riety)
- m z k / m c k 6 o n a p / 6 o n a p /-m a k/m ek b o ly a :r/ b o lo r/ 'y o u / o n e c a n d o ' 308 (m o d a l
fo rm a tio n : p o s sib ility )
-MaK/MeK repeK /-mak/mek gerek/ 'it is necessary to do, need to do' 30 6 (modal
formation: need)
-Maıc/MeK mymkhh /-mak/mek mümkü:n/ 'it’s possible to do, one can do' 309 (modal
formation: possibility)
-MaK/MeK y iih h /-m ak/m ek ücti:n/ 'to/in o rd er to d o, fo r ' 3 3 1 , 4 1 1 (postposition)
-Maıc/MeK m u /- m a k /m e k ya :Iı/ 'as, as though, such as, lik e ' 3 3 1 , 4 1 4 (postposition)
-MaKfla/MeKfle /-m a k d a-m o k d o /m e k d e-m ö k d ö / 3 3 1 (infinitive in locative ca se)
-M aK M M /M eK tm /-m akcı-m okcı/m ekci-m ökcü/293 (s u ffix o f intention), 6 49 (p arad igm s)
-MaKJiMK/MeKJiHK repeK /-maklık/meklik ge re k / 'it is necessary to d o, need to d o ' 306
(m o d al formation: need)
-Mana/Mene- /-mala-molo/mele-mölö-/ 5 3 7 (verb-formation: repetitiveness o f action)
-Mantı/MeıiM /-m alı-m olı/m eli-m ölü/ 2 9 4 (s u ffix of obligation), 2 96 (as attribute), 6 50
(paradigms)
-Majibt/Memı 6oJiMaK /-malı/meli bolmok/ 295 (future o f suffix o f obligation)
-Maıibi/MeıiH 6 o n ca(flw ) /-malı/meli bol6o(dı)/ 'h a v e to do' 296
-Mantı/MSJIM /-ma:lı/mâ:li/ 268 (negative 1 d u a l imperative mood)
-Manbin/ManMu/-ma:lı:i]/mâ:li:r)/268 (negative 1 plural imperative mood)
-M aH /M su /-m a:n/m â:n/ 4 7 8 (n e g a tio n p a rtic le ); 3 5 (lo n g v ovvel), 5 5 (v a ria n ts), 84
(orth o gra p h y ), 2 6 3 (sp ok en fo rm o f n e g a tiv e 1 sin g u la r fu tu re in d efin ite ten se), 3 4 4
(n e g a tiv e past participle), 3 52 , 3 5 5 (n eg a tiv e geru n d )
-Maımbt/MsıiflH /-ma:nnı/ma:nni/ 253 (n eg a tiv e 3 sin g u la r past p e rfec t ten se)
-Maıiflbip/MeıiflHp/-ma:nnır/ma:nnir/237 (n e g a tiv e 3 sin g u la r s u b je c tiv e presen t p e rfect
ten se), 244 (n e g a tiv e 3 sin g u la r su b je c tiv e past in d efin ite tense)
-MaıiKa/MaıiKa /-ma:nka:/ma:nka:/ 'before' 4 8 4 (vvith qualification particle), 50 4 (object
phrases)
-MaıiMbicbin/MaıiMHCMu /-m a:nnH0ıi]/nıa:nm i0irj/ 2 4 6 (q u e stio n fo rm o f n e g a tiv e 2
sin g u la r s u b je c tiv e past in d efin ite tense)
-Maıibi/MaıiH /-ma:nı/mâ:ni/ 3 33 (verb al noun in accusative c a se )
-Maııu/MaıiM roBbi ropM eK /-m a:nı/m â:ni g o w ı g ö rm ö k / 'to lik e to d o ' 30 3 (m o d al
formation: affirmation)
-Maıibi/MOHH xaxıaMaK /-ma:nı/ma:nt lıa:lamak/ 'to like to do' 303 (modal formation:
affirmation)
-Man/Mou /-m a:r)/m â:i)/271 (n eg a tiv e 2 plu ral/foım al im p e ra tiv e m o o d )
-Map/Mep / -m ar-m o r/m er-m ö r/ 478 (n eg ation p article); 2 5 9 (n e g a tiv e 1 and 2 persons
fu tu re in d efin ite ten se), 3 4 7 (n eg ativ e 1 and 2 futu re in d efin ite particip le)
-Mapna/Mepne- / -m a rla -m o rlo / m e rle -m ö rlö -/ 5 3 6 (v e rb -fo rm a tio n : stre n g th e n in g o f
action)
-Maca/Mece /-m a0 a-m o0 o/m e0 e-m ö0 ö/ 2 7 7 (n eg a tiv e 3 sin g u la r co n d itio n al m ood)
 Index 695

-Maca/Mece 6onMaK /-m a0a/m e8e b o lm o k / 'to r e s o lv e to d o ' 3 1 0 (m o d a l fo rm a tio n :

resolve)
-Macaflbi/MeceflM / -m a 9 a d ı-m o 0 o d ı/ m e 0 e d i-m ö 0 ö d ü / 2 8 7 ( n e g a t iv e 3 s in g u la r
su b ju n c tiv e m o o d )
-Mactra/MecH3 /-m a0ı8-m o0u8/m e0i5-m ö0üS/ 2 9 6 (n eg a tiv e s u ffix o f o b liga tio n )
-MacHH/MecMH / -m a 0 ın -m o 0 u n /m e 9 in -m ö 9 ü n / 2 7 4 ( n e g a tiv e 3 sin g u la r im p e ra tiv e
m o od)
-MacbiHJjap/MecHHnep /-m a0 m lar-m o0 u nlor/m e0 in ler-m ö9 ü n lör/ 2 7 4 (n eg a tiv e 3 p lu ra l
im p erative m o o d )
- M m lu e n /-m a c-m o c/ m e c-m ö c/ 5 2 6 (noun-form ation)
-Masmii/MsejjH /-m a:yadı/m â:yedi/ 2 8 9 (n eg a tiv e 3 sin gu la r d esid e ra tiv e m o o d )
-Masm/Metisu /-m a y a:n -m o y a:n /m ey a:n -m ö y a :n / 336 (n eg a tiv e presen t participle)
-MasiHfltıp/MeMsHflHp / -m a y a :n n ır-m o y a :n n ır/ m e y â :n n ir-m ö y â :n n ir/ 2 2 9 (n e g a tiv e 3
sin g u la r su b je c tiv e presen t co n tin u o u s ten se)
-Mastp/Meitap /-m aya:r-m oya:r/m eyâ:r-m öyâ:r/ 2 1 9 (negative 3 singular present
indefinite tense)
-MaHpfltı/MeüspflM / -m a y a :rd ı-m o y a :rd ı/ m e y â :rd i-m ö y â :rd i/ 2 4 7 (n e g a tiv e 3 sin g u la r
past co n tin u o u s ten se)
MerepeM /megerem/ 'perhaps, likely' 389 (modal word); 46 (stress on first syllable)
MeH /men/ T 1 8 1 (1 sin g u la r p e rso n a l pronou n ), 5 7 7 (parad igm )
MeHHH /menii)/ 'my' 18 7 (genitive case)
M en /mer)/ 'm y ' < M eHun /menirj/ 188
MeH3em /mei)8es/ 'like, resembling' 4 1 9 (postposition)
-M»;Lipa/Ma;ııpe- /-mjıra-mjuro/mjire-mjiirö/ see -bM^bipa/HM^Hpe-/-ımjıra-urnjuro/
imjire-ümjürö/
-MCttpa/MCHpe- /-m 0 ıra-m 0 uro/m 0 ire-m 0 ürö/ se e -HMCtıpa/HMCHpe- /-ım Bıra-um Guro/
im O ire-üm O örö/
MyH- /mun-/ < 6y /bu:/ 193
Niynyn /munui)/ 'its' 195 (genitive case)
MyHa rapaM a3flan j m m p garam aSSan/ 'b u t a n y w a y ' 4 4 4 (as con tradition con ju n ctio n )
mymkhh /m üm kihn/ 'm a y b e , p o s s ib ly ' 389 (m o d al w ord )
-mu / mh /-mı/mi-mü/ 4 7 6 (question particle); 46 (unstressed), 2 15 (vvith verb forms),
493 (interrogative sentences)
-mm/mh...-mm/mm /-m ı/m i...-m ı/m i/ 'e ith e r ...o r' 4 4 6 (as c o rrela tio n con ju n ctio n )
-mh/mm HBMe /-m ı/m i nii:m e/ 'o r so m e th in g (o r other/like th at)' 4 7 7
-MbiKa(n)/MMK3(H) /-m ü ca:(n )-m u k a:(n )/m ikâ:(n )-m ü kâ:(n )/1 vvonder' 4 6 4 (sp ecu lation
particle); 4 6 (unstressed)
MbinacBiöeTJm /mma:0ı:betli/ 'in connection w ith' 410 (postposition)
- mmt/ mmt /-mjt-mut/mit-müt/ 5 2 6 (noun-formation)
- mbiui/ mmiu /-mıs-mus/mis-miis/ 'apparently, they say' 4 6 7 (assertion particle); 46
(unstressed), 469 (paradigms), 5 2 6 (noun-formation)
696 Türkmen Reference Grammar

- h /-n/ see - bih /mh /-ın-un /in-iin /

-H- /- n - l s e e +naH/neH- /+ lan -lon /len -lön -/, -h h / h h - /-m -un/in-ün-/
+Ha/He /+na-no/ne-nö/ (d a tive case), s e e +a/e /+a/e/
+HaMa /+na:m a/ 5 2 2 (P ersian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffix )
+Hfla/nfle /+ nn a-n n o/n n e-n n ö/ (lo c a tiv e ca se ), se e +fla/fle /+ d a-d o/d e-d ö/
+HflaH/nqeH /+ n n an-n n on /nn en -n n ön / (a b la tiv e c a se ), s e e +flaH/fleH / + d a n -d o n / d e n -
dön/
ite...H e /n e ...n e / 'n e ith e r...n o r' 448 (as c o n e la tio n c o n ju n c tio n )
HeMe /nem e/ 'u h , u n u n , y o u k n o w ' 203
HeHen(cıı) /neneıj(0i)/ lıo v v ? ' 2 0 7 (in te n o g a tiv e pronoun)
H era açefle /neti:jede/ 'as a re su lt' 399 (m o d al w ord )
+H x;tı/K*;H /+ njı/n ji-n jü/ se e + m h :*£ i/hh :x ;h / + m jı-u n jı/ in ji-ü n jü /
-H*;bipa/HJK;Hpe- / -n jıra -n ju ro / n jire -n jü rö / s e e -ı>mx;ı.ıpa/HH3;Mpe- / -m jıra -u n ju ro /
in jire -ü n jü rö /
HHpe /nire/ 'w h e r e ? ' 2 0 4 (in te rro g a tiv e p ro n o u n ); 46 (stress on first s y lla b le ) , 581
(paradigm )
hmmhk /nicik/ 'h o w ? ' 2 0 7 (in terrogative pronoun)
+ h m /hh /+nı/ni-nü/ (a c c u sa tiv e ca se ), s e e + m /h /-h /İ- ü /
+hu h /hm h l+ m t] -nug/nir) -n ü i)/ ( g e n itiv e ca se ), se e +hh/m h /+ırj—urj/iıj—lir)/
H3 /na:/ 'w h a t? ' 2 0 7 (in terro ga tive pronoun)
H3+ /na:+/ 'u n -, n o t' 5 4 1 (P ersian p refix)
H3Me /nâ:me/ 'what?' 202 (interrogative pronoun), 580 (paradigm)
H3Me ym hh /nâ:me ücü:n/ 'what fo r? , why?' 203 (interrogative pronoun)
HSMefleH /nâ:meden/ 'w h y ? ' 202 (in te n o g a tiv e pronoun )
HSMefliip 5 » p 3aT /n â:m ed ir b ir 8a:t/ 'so m e th in g o r oth er, v vh atev er' 1 7 5 (in d e fin ite
pronoun)
HSTMeK /n â :tm e k / 'to d o w h a t? ' 2 0 7
H aTyöcjiH /nâ:tü:01ü/ 'w h a t k in d o f ? ' 2 0 7 ( in te n o g a tiv e pronoun)
h 3X hjim /nâ:hili/ 'h o w ? , w h a t k in d o f? ' 2 0 5 ( in te n o g a tiv e pronoun )
H aue /nâ:ce/ 'h o w m a n y ?, h o w m u c h ? ' 20 4 ( in te n o g a tiv e pron ou n ); 46 (stress on first
s y lla b le ), 5 5 5 (tim e o f d ay ), 5 5 7 (d a y o f m o n th ), 5 8 1 (parad igm )
HM erofgn /nâ:cenji/ 'w h ic h o n e ? ' 204 (in te n o g a tiv e pronoun ), 5 8 1 (parad igm )

+H /+i]/ 5 9 , 1 2 1 (sh ortened ge n itive )

-H /-i]/ 2 1 4 (2 sin g u la r p erso n a l en din g)
-H /-i)/ 5 2 6 (n oun -form atio n)
-HKbtpna/nKMpne- /-r)kırla-r)kurlo/i)kirle-qkürlö-/ see -anKLipna/eHKMpne- /-a rjk ırla -
oi]kurlo/eqkirle-ör)kürlö-/
-HH3/HH3 /-tjı8-t)u5/tji8-t3Ü8/ 2 1 4 (2 plu ral personal en din g)
 Index 697

o /o/ 'th a t' 19 2 (d em o n strativ e pronoun )

+oB/eB /+ow/ew/ (male patronymic) 5 9 (vowel lengthening)
+0Ba/eBa /+ow a/ew a/ (fe m a le p atro n ym ic) 59 (vovvel len gth en in g)
03an /o8ol/ 'b e fo r e ' 4 2 4 (p o stp ositio n )
o n /ol/ 's/he/it' 1 8 4 (3 sin g u la r p erson a l p ronou n ), 'th a t' 19 0 (d em on strative pronoun),
5 7 7 , 5 78 (p arad igm s)
onap /olor/ 'they [persons]' 1 8 4 (3 plural personal pronoun), 'they/those [persons/
dıings]' 1 8 5 , 5 7 7 (paradigm)
onapun /oloruıj/'their' 18 7 , 19 5 (genitive case)
on /o:n/ '1 0 ' 34, 1 5 1 (vovvel shortening in combined numerals)
oh- /on-/ < on /ol/ 19 3
OHfla(-fla) /onno(-no)/ 'then' 2 8 1 , 'but, s tili' 4 4 4 (as contradition conjunction)
oıtyn /onui]/ Tıer, his, its' 1 8 7 , 19 5 (genitive case)
oh /or)/ 'his, her, its' < onyn /onui)/ 188
opTacbiHfla /ortoâunno/ 'in the middle o f ' 430 (auxiliary noun)
OTypMajc /oturmok/ 'to sit', see -ap/ep OTypap /-ar/er oturor/, -ap/ep OTypap. j bi /-ar/er
oturordı/, -ap/ep OTypflbi /-ar/er oturdı/, -Mara/Mare OTypınaK /-m a:ga/ma:ge
oturmok/, -un/un OTypMaK /-ıp/ip oturmok/, -un/un OTtıp /-ıp/ip otı:r/
orwp /otı:r/ 's/he’s sitting' 2 2 4 (present continuous tense); 58 (vovvel lengthening),
2 2 5 (contracted form), 2 2 7 -2 2 8 (table of forms), 4 8 3 (vvith -Ka/Ka /-ka:/ka:/), 588
(paradigms)
oTbipflu /otırrdı/ 's/he vvas sittin g ' 2 26 (con tracted fo rm ), 589 (p arad igm s)

03 /ö:S/ 's e lf' 1 9 6 ( re fle x iv e p ronou n ), 5 7 9 (parad igm s)

e 3 r e /ö8gö/ 'o th e r th an ' 4 2 4 (postposition )
©ÜTMeK /ö ytm ö k / 'to d ıin k ' 3 9 0 (m o d a l vvord), 4 6 4 (vvith sp e cu la tio n particle)
enYH ije /öıjünnö/ 'in fro n t o f ' 430 (a u x ilia ry n oun)
eHYCBipactDm a /öi]ü0ı:ra0ınna/ 'o n th e e v e o f ' 430 (a u x ilia ry n oun)
epaH /örâ:n/ 'v e r y ' 1 5 0 (su p erlative degree)
OTpu /ötrii/ 'b e c a u s e o f ' 4 2 4 (postposition)

+ napa3 /+paraS/ 5 4 1 (P ersian a d je c tiv e -fo n n in g su ffix )

nbUiaH('ja) /pıla:n(ca)/ 'su ch -an d -su ch , and s o o n ' 1 7 6 (in d efin ite pronoun)
ıibinaHbi...nbinaHbi /pıia:m ...pıla:n ı/ 'so -a n d -so ' 1 7 6 (in d e fin ite pronoun)

+p- l+r-l see +ap/ep- /+ar-or/er-ör-/

+pa/pe- /+ ıa-ro/re-rö-/ 5 29 (verb -form atio n)
+paK/paK /+ra:k/ra:k/ 1 4 7 (c o m p a ra tiv e d eg re e ); 3 5 (lo n g v o vv e l), 5 5 (va ria n ts), 6 7
(con so n an t v o ic in g ), 84 (orth ograph y), 14 9 (su p erla tive d eg re e ), 16 3 (appro> ım ation)
p a c /ra:0/ 'ju s t' 3 93 (m o d al vvord)
698 Turkmen Referenee Grammar

+ca/ce- /+ 8a-0 o/0 e-0 ö-/ 5 29 (verb -form atio n)

-c a / c e / - 0 a -0 o / 0 e - 0 ö / 2 7 7 (3 s in g u la r c o n d it io n a l m o o d ) ; 53 ( v a r ia n t s ), 82
(orth ograp h y), 2 06 (vvith in terro ga tive pronouns), 6 42 -6 43 (p arad igm s)
-c a / c e 6 o n a p /-0a/0e b o ly a :r/ 'y o u c a n d o , it m a y b e d o n e ' 3 0 9 (m o d a l fo rm a tio n :
p o s s ib ility )
-ca/ce repeK /-0a/0e gerek / 'likely/surely/probably do' 304 (modal formation:
conjecture)
-ca/ce roBM 6oJiMaK /-0a/0e g o w ı b o lm o k / 'ıt would be better i f ' (28 5 )
-ca/ce flHÜMeK /-0a/0e d iy m ek / 2 8 5 (uncertainty)
-ca/ce H aflüs(p) /-0a/0e na:dya:(r)/ 'sh o u ld n 't o n e d o ? ' 286
-ca/ce xeM /-0a/0e xem / 281 (c o n ce ssiv e clau se)
-ca-.ua/ce-fle /-0a-d a-0 o-do/0 e-de-0 ö-d ö/281 (co n ce ssiv e clau se)
-caflL i/ceflu / -0 a d ı-0 od ı/0 ed i-0 ö d ü / 2 8 7 (3 sin g u la r s u b ju n c tiv e m o o d ); 53 (varian ts),
84 (orth ograph y), 6 4 4 -6 4 5 (paradigm s)
-caflHK/ceflHK /-0 ad ık-0 odu k /0 ed ik -0 ö d ü k/ 2 8 7 (1 plu ral su b ju n ctiv e m o o d )
-caflbuıap/ceflHJiep /-0ad ılar-0 od ulor/0 ediler-0 öd illör/ 2 8 7 (3 plu ral su b ju n ctiv e m o o d )
-caflbiM/ceflHM /-0 ad ım -0 o d u m /8 ed im -0 ö d ü m /2 8 7 (1 sin g u la r su b ju n ctiv e m ood)
-cajj(bin/ceflHU /-0adıi]-0odur)/0ediıj-0ödür]/ 2 8 7 (2 sin g u la r su b ju n ctiv e m o o d )
-caflbiHbi3/ceflHHH3 /-0adırjı8-0odur]u8/0edii)i8-0ödür)ü8/ 2 8 7 (2 p lu ra l s u b ju n c tiv e
m ood)
c a ü b in /0a:ym / 'a s ' 4 1 0 (postposition )
-caK/ceK/-0 a k -0 o k / 0 e k -0 ö k / 2 7 7 (1 plu ral co n d itio n al m o o d )
-caKflbi(K)/ceKHM(K) / -0 a k d ı(k )-0 o k d u (k )/ 0 e k d i(k )-0 ö k d ü (k )/ 2 8 7 (1 plu ral su b ju n ctiv e
m o od)
-can ap /cen ep /-0alar-0 olor/0 eler-8 ölör/ 2 7 7 (3 plural co n d itio n al m o o d )
canMaK /0alm ak/ 'to put, to p la c e ' 5 1 5 (a u x ilia ry verb)
-caM/ceM /-0 am -0 om /0 em -0 öm / 2 7 7 (1 sin gu la r c o n d itio n al m o o d )
-caMflii(M)/ceMfl«(M) / -0 a m d ı(m )-0 o m d u (m )/0 e m d i(m )-0 ö m d ü (m )/ 2 8 7 (1 sin g u la r
su b ju n c tiv e m o o d )
-caMKaM/ceMKSM / - 0 a m k a :m -0 o m k a :m / 9 e m k â :m - 0 ö m k â :m / 's h o u ld I?' 463
(speculation)
-caHa/ceHe /-0ana/0ene/ 2 7 2 (e n co u ragin g req u est in 2 im p e ra tiv e m o o d ); 4 5 (stressed
first sy lla b le )
caH aK/0a:nak/ 16 9 (co u n tin g w ord)
caH tı /0a:nı/ 169 (cou n tin g w ord )
c a n /0aq/ 5 1 1 (in ten sify in g sy lla b le )
- c a n / c e n /-0ar]-0or)/0er)-0ör)/ 2 7 7 (2 sin g u la r co n d itio n a l m o o d ), ' i f y o u w an t to do
(so m eth in g ), th e n ...' 305
-canflM (n)/ceım n(n) /-0aqdı(rj)—0oqdu(q)/0er|di(i])—0ögdil(r))/ 2 8 7 (2 sin gu la r su b ju n ctive
m ood)
-caHM3/cenK3 /-0ar)i8-0or)u8/0ei]i8-0öi]ü8/ 2 7 7 (2 plural co n d itio n al m o o d )
 fcıdex 699

-caHti3fltı(Hbi3>/ceHH3flM(nH3) /-0aqı58ı(ıp5)-0or|u85u(r)u8)/0er]iS5i(r|i5)-0öi]ii55ü(qüS)/
2 8 7 (2 plu ral su b ju n ctiv e m o o d )
-can b i3 -n a /c en M 3 -n e /-0 ai)i8-la-0 oi)u S-Io/0 egi8-le-0öi]ü 8 -lö/ 2 7 2 (p o lite re q u e s t in 2
im p e rativ e m o o d )
-canM 3Jlan/cenH 3ji 3H /-SarııSla:r(—öorjııSla:g/0er)iSlâ: jg—0örjü81â:rj/ 2 7 2 (p olite request in 2
im p erativ e m o o d )
capb i /0a:rı/ 'tovvard' 420 (postposition )
ce6s6H /0ebâ:bi/ 'th e reaso n is, b e c a u s e ' 4 5 2 (as ca u sa tion con ju n ctio n )
ceösruiH /0eba:pli/ 'b e c a u s e ' 4 1 0 (postposition )
ceH /0en/ 'y o u ' 182 (2 sin g u la r p erso n a l pronoun), 5 7 7 (parad igm )
c e m in /0enirj/ 'y o u r ' 1 8 7 (g e n itiv e ca se)
cepefleHHHKe /Oeredenirjde/ 'co m p ared to ' 420 (postposition )
cepeTM e3 /0eretme8/ 'in sp ite o f ' 4 1 6 (postposition )
c e n /0erj/ 'y o u r'< ceHHH / â e n iq / 188
CH3/ 0 i8 / 'y o u ' 182 (2 plural p erso n a l pronoun), 5 7 7 (parad igm )
CM3MH /OiSirj/ 'y o u r ' 1 8 7 (g e n itiv e c a se )
c r a n e p /OiSler/ 'y o u ( a li)' 18 7
co n (p a) /0orj(ro)/ 'a fte r' 4 2 4 (postposition )
ce3neM eK /OöSlömök/ 'to sp e a k ' 5 5 4 (ve rb o f sp eech )
+cm/cm /+01/0İ-0U/ (3 sin gu lar/plu ral p o s se ssiv e ), se e + h /h /+ı/i-ü /
+cbt3/cM3 /+0ı8-0u8/0i8-0ii8/ 5 3 9 (a d je c tiv e -fo rm a tio n : p riva tio n ); 5 4 (v a ria n ts), 83
(o rth o gra p h y), 18 6 (w ith personal pronou n s), 5 5 5 (tellin g tim e)
+CMH/CHH- /+0ın-0un/0in-0ün-/ 5 2 9 (verb -form atio n)
- c h h / c h h /-0m/0in/0un/0ün/ 2 7 4 (3 sin g u la r im p e ra tiv e m o o d ); 5 4 (v a ria n ts ), 83
(orth ograph y), 6 4 1 (parad igm s)
+cbiHa/cHite /+ 0ına-0 uno/0 ine-0 ünö/ se e +bma/HHe /+ uıa-un o/in e-ü n ö/
+ cb in aa/cH im e /+ 0m na-0unno/0inne-0ünnö/ se e +w nfla/nım e /-H n n a -u n n o /in n e -iin n ö /
-cu H n ap /cH H Jiep /-0uılar/0inler/0unlor/0ünlör/ 2 7 4 (3 p lu ra l im p e ra tiv e m o o d ); 5 4
(variants), 83 (orth o graph y), 6 4 1 (paradigm s)
-cmu/cmh /-0u]-0ui]/0ii]-0üi)/ 2 1 4 (2 sin gu la r perso n al en din g)
-cM H bo/cH ura /-0ii]t8-0urju8/0ir)i8-0ür)ü8/ 2 1 4 (2 plural personal en din g)
+cbipa/cHpe- /+ 0ıra-9uro/0ire-0ürö-/ 5 29 (verb -form atio n: fe e lin g o r fe ig n in g a q u ality)
-cbipa/cnpe- /-0ıra-0uro/0ire-0iirö-/ 536 (verb-form ation: w e a k e n in g o f action)
+ c u t /c h t - /+ 0ıt-0ut/0it-0üt-/ 5 29 (verb -fo rm atio n )

-t - /- t- / 5 3 5 (v erb -fo rm atio n : c a u sa tiv e v oice a fte r vovvel an d so m e tim e s n/p /I/r/)
TaKMMiıaıı /tak m ı:n an / 'a p p ro x im a te ly ' 16 2 (ap p ro x im atio n )
T a p a n ı,n ifla /tarapınna/ 'a lo n g the sid e o f ' 430 (a u x ilia ry noun)
•rapanbiuflaıı /tarapm nan/ 'b y ' 4 1 0 (p o stp ositio n ), 5 3 1 (agen t o f p a ssiv e)
Tac /ta0/ 'n e a rly , a lm o st' 385 (m o d al vvord)
TenıtM / te lim / 's e v e ra l' 1 7 6 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
700 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

TeBepeK /töwörök/ 'about' 16 2 (approximation)

TyrM aK /tutm ok/ 't o h o ld , to k e e p ' 5 1 5 ( a u x ilia ry v erb )
TyTyut /tutuş/ 'entire' 1 7 2 (collective pronoun)
T y tic /tü:0/ 'e x a c t ly ' 3 93 (m od al w o rd )
ts ...+Ma/H3 /ta: ...+ ca:/câ:/ '(rig h t u p ) u n til' 3 9 5 (m o d al w ord )

y /u/ 'a n d ' 4 3 5 (co n n e ctio n con ju n ctio n )

-yöep/yöep /-uber/über/ see -tı6ep/ıı6ep /-ıber-uber/iber-über/
-yB/yB /-uw/üw/ 5 2 3 (n oun -form atio n: p ro cess o f a ction )
yrpaMaK /ugromok/ 'to start o ff, see -Mara/Mare yrpaMaK /-ma:ga/mâ:ge ugromok/,
-u n / im yrpaMaK /-ıp/ip ugromok/
yrpynua /ugrunno/ 'along' 430 (auxiliary noun)
yMyMaH /umu:mon/ 'generally' 3 9 7 (modal vvord)
yMbiT 6ap /umı:t ba:r/ 'to have hope' 289
yMHT 3TMeK /umı:t etmek/ 'to hope' 289
yuypbinna /ucurunno/ 'at the time when' 4 3 1 (auxiliary noun)

yJiYUi /ülüs/ 'p o r tio n ' 1 6 4 (fraetions)

ycTYH fle /üeeiinn ö/ 'on , u p o n , ö v e r ' 4 3 1 (a u x ilia ry n ou n)
yMÖnp /ücbi:r/ 'in threes' 16 0 (distribution)
Y«oih /ücir.n/ 'for, on behalf of, in order to, because' 4 1 1 (postposition)

-x a / x s /-ha:/hâ:/ 'r e a lly ' 4 6 1 (em ph asis p a rticle), 46 (unstressed)

-x a ...-x a (-fla ) /-ha:...-ha:(-da)/ V h e t h e r this...or th at' 4 4 7 (as correlation conjunction)
-xaB/x0B/-0B /-ha:w/ho:w/-o:w/ 'hey' 4 7 2 (appeal particle)
xaBa /lıaw a/ 'y e s ' 380 (modal w ord)
x a S c b i /hayöı/ 'w h ic h o n e ? ' 2 0 5 (in te r ro g a tiv e p ro n o u n ), 5 5 6 (d a y o f w e e k ) , 580
(paradigm )
xaM cbiflbip 6 n p n /hayOıdır/ 'so m e th in g, a certain o n e ' 1 7 5 (in d e fin ite pronoun)
xaK fla /hakda/ 'a b o u t' 4 1 2 (postposition )
xaKbiHfla /hakınna/ 'a b o u t' 4 1 2 (postposition )
xaKUT /lıakı:t/ 'th e m in u te ' 3 93 (m od al w o rd )
-xana...-xana /-ha:la...-ha:la/ 'whether this...or that' 4 4 7 (as correlation conjunction)
xanaMaK /ha:lamak/ 'to like' 303 (modal formation: affîrmation)
+xaHa /+ha:na/ 5 2 1 (P ersian n o u n -form in g su ffix )
x a ııx a /hanha/ 'ö v e r th ere (it is ) ' 402 (m od al w ord )
x an b i /hanı/ 'w e ll' 3 9 1 (m o d al w o rd )
x a c /ha:0/ 'th e m o st, v e r y ' 392 (m o d al w o rd ); 149 (su p e rla tive d eg re e )
x a c -fla /lıa:0-0a/ 'e v e n (m o re)' 3 92 , 46 2 (m o d al vvord)
xaTfla /hatda:/ 'e v e n ' 3 9 2 (m o d al w ord )
x a q a n /h a c a n / 'w h e n ? ' 20 5 (in terrogative pronoun), 4 5 1 (as c o n tin g e n cy con ju n ctio n )
 Index 701

xeM/-aM/eM /hem/-am/em/ 'and, a lso , too' 4 3 5 (as connection conjunciion); 46

(unstressed), 1 1 2 (with 3 possessive), 1 2 5 (with accusative), 18 6 (vvith personal
pronouns), 'just' 4 6 2 (emphasis)
xeM...xeM /hem...hem/ 'both...and' 4 4 7 (as correlation conjunction)
xeM-fle /hem-de/ 'a n d a ls o ' 4 3 6 (as connection conjunction)
xeMMe /h e m m e / 'every, a li' 1 7 2 (collective pronoun); 4 6 (stress o n first sy lla b le )
xeMMe 3 a T /hemme 5a:t/ 'everything' 1 7 2 (collective pronoun)
x e p /her/ 'every, each' 1 7 0 (collective pronoun)
x e p 6wp /her bir/ 'every' 1 7 0 (collective pronoun)
xep hmmhk /her niöik/ 'no matter vvhat, nevertheless' 1 7 0 (collective pronoun)
xep H3Me /her nâ:me/ everything, anything, vvhatever' 1 7 0 (collective pronoun)
x e p H3lıe /h e r n â :£ e / lıovvever m u c h ' 17 0 (c o llectiv e pro n o u n )
x e p x a iic t ı /her h ay0 ı/ 'e v e ry , e a ch , vvhichever' 1 7 0 (c o lle c tiv e pronoun)
x e p x hjih /her h i:li/ 'a li sorts o f ' 1 7 0 ( c o lle c tiv e pronoun)
x ep ıi3 /hem â:/ 'it ’ s g o o d th at' 3 9 4 (m o d al vvord)
xmh /hi:I/ 'k in d , q u a lity ' 3 5 (sh ort vovvel in p ronou n s)
x n q /hi:c/ 'n o n e, a n y, n e ve r, at a li' 1 7 8 (n eg a tiv e pronoun)
x im 6w p 3aT /hi:c b ir 8a:t/ 'n o o n e th in g ' 1 7 9 (n e g a tiv e pronoun)
xmm 6npn /hi:c bi:ri/ 'no, none' 1 7 9 (negative pronoun)
xmh B a r r / h i:c vvagt/ 'n e v e r' 1 7 9 (n eg a tiv e pronoun )
xmh ep /hi:c yer/ 'novvhere' 1 7 9 (negative pronoun)
xhh 3 aT /h i:c 5a:t/ 'n o th in g ' 1 7 9 (n eg a tiv e pronoun )
x«>[ Kec /hi:c keö/ 'nobody' 1 7 9 (negative pronoun)
x n q k h m /hi:c k im / 'n o o n e ' 1 7 8 (n eg a tiv e pronoun )
xhh tyM ciui /hi:c tü:01ii/ 'n o fo rm o f ' 1 7 9 (n e g a tiv e pronoun)
xhu xaMcLi /hi:c hay0 ı/ 'n on e o f ' 178 (n e g a tiv e pronoun)
xmh xaqan /hi:c hacan/ 'never' 1 78 (negative pronoun)
xhh xhjih /hi:c hi:li/ 'no kind o f' 1 7 9 (negative pronoun)
xoji /ho:l/ 'th at' 19 3 (d em o n strativ e pronoun)
+ x o p / + h o :r/5 2 1 (P ersian n o u n -fo rm in g s u ffix )
x@KMaH /hökma:n/ 'definitely, certainly, absoiutely, mandatory' 388 (moda i vvord);
2 73 (vvith im p e ra tiv e form s), 300 (vvith s u ffix o f p erm ission )
xeK M YH ae /hökm ünnö/ 'a s, in th e c a p a c ity a s ' 4 1 2 (po stposition )
x y T /hut/ 'e x a c tly , n a m e ly , tlıat v e r y ' 396 (m o d al vvord); 1 6 5 (in ten sifier)
x a /ha:/ 'y e a h , u h -lıu h ' 381 (m o d al vvord)
X33Mp /hâ:8ir/ 'n o w ' 46 (stress o n first sy lla b le )

-m / -c / 5 2 4 (n oun -form ation: process/result o f actio n ), 5 4 4 (a d jective-form ation ,

+ u a A ıe / + c a - c o / c e - c ö / 5 2 0 (n o u n -fo n n a tio n : d im in u tiv e ), 5 4 6 (a d v e rb -fo rm a tio n :
e q u a tiv e ); 5 3 (varian ts), 82 (orth o graph y), 18 6 (vvith p e rso n a l pronou n s), 19 4 (vvith
d em on stra tive pronouns)
702 Türkmen Referenee Grammar

+na/n3 /+ca:/£â:/ see t s ...+ıtaAo /tâ: ...+£a:/ca:/, -snm a/üsıro /-ya:nca:/yâ:nca:/

M artıp/uarupap /ca:gı:r/cagırar/ 's/he will invite' < MartıpMaK /ca:gırmak/ 2 6 3 (vowel
lengthening)
+Maıc/«ıeK /+£ak-cok/cek-£ök/ 5 4 4 (adjective-foımation)
MeKMeK /çekm ek/ 'to p u ll, to d ra w ' 5 1 5 (a u x ilia ry v erb )
MeMenH /cem eli/ 'lik e ly ' 390 (m o d al vvord)
'leM ecH /cem e0i/ 'a b o u t' 1 6 2 (ap proxim ation )
weımM /cen li/ 'u p to, to, until, as fa r a s ' 4 2 0 (p o stp o sitio n )
T O T Ö ep /cetb er/ '1 0 0 g r a m s ' 16 7
+ m h /hh /+cı/£i-£ü/ 5 1 8 (n o un -form atio n : agen t); 5 4 (varian ts), 84 (orth o gra p h y), 540
(ad jective-form ation )
•ibiKap/MbiKapap /cıka:r/cıkarar/ 's/he w ill ta k e o u t' < HbiKapMaK /çıkarm ak/ 58, 2 63
(v o w e l len gth en in g)
MbiKMaK /çıkm ak/ 'to g o o u t' 5 1 5 (a u x ilia ry v erb ), s e e -bin/nn MbiKMaK /-ıp/ip çık m a k /
+>ibin/Hyn / + cıl-£ u l/cil-£ ü l/ 5 40 (a d jective-form atio n )
+Mtım>nc/MHnMK /+ £ ılık-cu lu k/£ ilik-£ ü lük / 5 1 9 (n oun -form ation: in d ustry)
m .tM / c ım / 5 1 1 (iflte n sify in g sy lla b le )
uymcH /çünkü/ 'b e c a u s e ' 4 5 1 (cau sation con ju n ctio n )
M apıeK /£â:ryek/ 'q u arter' 1 6 4 (fraetion w ord )

+ u ı- /+s-/ se e +nam /neux- / + la s-lo s/ le s -lö s-/

-m - /-s-/ s e e - m iu /mui- / -ıs-u s/ is-ü s-/
ıııa p /sa:r/ 5 1 1 (in te n sify in g sy lla b le )
-uiflbip/ıuflMp- /-sdır-sdu r/sd ir-sd ü r-/ s e e -biıuflbip/mımup- /-ısdır-u sd u r/isd ir-ü sdü r-/
ıueföjıe /şeyle/ 'su c h , lik e th is ' 19 3
ıu e ü n e xeM / şe y le hem / 'a s vvell a s ' 4 3 6 (as co n n e ctio n con ju n ctio n )
ıııeM ne-fle 6 o n c a / s e y le -d e bol0 o/ 'n o n e th e le ss, e v e n s o ' 19 3 , 4 4 4 (as co n tra d itio n
con ju n ctio n )
m e ö (n e )fln n /sey(le)d ip / 'in th is w a y , lik e s o ' 19 3
ııteMnenHK önneH / S ey lelik b ilen / 'in this/that w a y ; as a resu lt' 19 3 , 399 (m o d al vvord)
HieMnenjtKfle / se y le lik d e/ 's o , as a resu lt' 19 3 , 399 (m o d al vvord)
meüneMM / ie y le m i/ 'is it s o ? ' 4 9 4 (in terro ga tive sen ten ces)
m e ifiB K /seylâ:k/ 'here/there, in this/that d ireetion , this/that w a y ' 193
u ıo /so:/ 'th a t' 19 2 (d em o n strativ e pronoun)
ıu o n /sol/ 'th a t' 19 0 (d e m o n strativ e pronoun); 's/h e' 18 5 , 5 78 (p arad igm s)
rn on ap /solor/ 'th ey/th o se [person s/th in gs]' 18 5
ıu o n a p ttu /solorur)/ 'th e ir [person s], th eir [th in gs]' 18 7 , 19 5 (g e n itiv e ca se )
iho h - /ion -/ < u ıo n /sol/ 19 3
ıııoH yn /Sonu t)/ 'its ' 1 9 5 (g e n itiv e case)
uıoHyn H enıa;ecM H fle /sonui] neti:je0 inne/ 'a s a re su lt' 3 99 (m o d al vvord)
m oH yn YtWH /sonur) ü£ü:n/ 'th at’ s vvhy, th erefo re ' 3 99 (m o d al vvord)
 Index 703

u ıy /su:/ 'th is ' 1 9 0 (d e m o n strativ e pronou n ); 3 5 (lo n g vovvel in iso la tio n ), 's/h e ' 18 5 ,
578 (parad igm )
u ıy ryH /su:n/ 'to d a y ' 58 (vovvel len gth en in g)
u ıy n /sul/ 'th at' 1 9 2 (d em on strative pronoun )
ıu y n a p /sulor/ 'th ey/th ese [person s/th in gs]' 185
u ıy jıa p iin R u lo n u ]/ 'th eir [person s], th eir [th in g s]' 1 8 7 , 1 9 5 (g e n itiv e ca se)
myH- /sun-/ < uıy /su:/ 19 3
rn y u y u /sunuq/ 'its ' 19 5 (g e n itiv e c a se )

+ bi/n /+ı/i—ii/ 1 0 9 (3 sin gu la r/p lu ra l p o s s e s s iv e ); 5 4 , 1 1 2 (va ria n ts), 6 9 (in sertio n o f

co n so n a n t a fte r vovvel), 83, 8 4 (o rth o g ra p h y ), 1 1 6 ( p o s s e s s iv e re la tio n sh ip ), 14 6
( a d je c tiv e fo rm a tio n ), 488 (agreem en t), 489 (g o v e m m e n t), 506 (com p ou n d s), 5 70 -
576 (parad igm s)
+m /h Z + ı/i-ü / 1 2 1 (a c c u sa tiv e c a s e ); 5 4 , 1 2 5 (va ria n ts), 5 9 (vovvel le n g th e n in g ), 69
(in sertion o f con son an t a fter vovvel), 80, 8 1 , 84 (o rth o grap h y), 5 7 1 -5 7 6 (p arad igm s)
+m/h /+ ıfı/ 541 (Persian a d je c tiv e -fo n n in g s u ffix )
-bi /m /-ı/i-ii/ 5 2 3 (n oun -form ation: process/resu lt o f actio n )
-bi6ep/H6ep /-ıbe r-u b e r/ib e r-ü b e r/ 'g o on/ahead and d o, start/keep/keep on d o in g ' 3 1 5
(d escrip tiv e su ffîx ), 3 1 7 (vovvel len gth en in g: -aöep/aöep/-a:ber/a:ber/)
-Biaçtı/naçM /-ıjı—u jı/iji—üjfü/ 5 25 (n oun -form atio n: a ge n t o f a ction )
-H3/H3- /-ı8-uS/i8-ü8-/ 5 3 5 (verb -form atio n: ca u sa tive v o ic e )
+ hk / hk /+ı:k/i:k-ü:k/ 3 7 1 , 5 4 7 (adverb-formation: directive); 3 5 (long vovvel), 5 4
(variants), 84 (orthography)
+bik/ hk- / + ık -u k / ik -iik -/ 5 29 (verb -fo rm atio n )
-bik/ hk /-ık-uk/ik-tik/ 524 (n oun -form ation: m ean s o f actio n ), 5 4 3 (ad jective-fo rm atio n )
-mji/ hji- /-ıl—u l/il—ili-/ 5 3 2 (ve rb -fo rm atio n : p a s s iv e v o ic e ), 5 3 3 ( r e fle x iv e v o ic e a fte r
stem s en d in g in h /n/); 5 4 (varian ts), 83 (o rth ograph y)
B in aM T a-fla / ı l a : y t a - d a / 'e s p e c i a l l y ' 396 ( m o d a l w o r d )
+Buifla/Hime- /+ ılla -u llo / ille -ü lIö -/ 528 (form ation o f exp ressiv e/o n o m a to p o eic verb s)
+ bim/ hm / + ım -u m / im -ü m / 1 0 7 (1 s in g u la r p o s s e s s iv e ) ; 5 4 , 1 1 2 (v a ria n ts ), 83
(orth ograph y), 5 70 -5 76 (paradigm s)
-bim/ hm /-ım-um/im-üm/ 523 (noun-formation: process/result of action)
-tiM*;tıpa/HMJK,Mpe- /-unjıra-umjuro/imjire-ümjürö/ 536 (verb-formation: weakening
of action)
-BiMCBtpa/HMCHpe- /-ım 9 ıra-u m 0 u ro/im 0 ire-üm 0 ürö/ 5 3 6 (ve rb -fo rm atio n : w e a k e n in g
o f action)
+ bimbi3/mmh3 /+ ım ı8 -um u8 /im i8-üm üS/ 10 7 (1 plural p o s se ssiv e ); 54, 1 1 2 (va ria n ts),
5 6 (vovvel len gth en in g), 80, 81 (orth ograp h y), 5 7 0 -5 7 6 (p arad igm s)
+bih/ hh /+ı:n/i:n-ü:n/ 5 4 6 (adverb-formation: instrumental); 35 (long vovvel), 54
(variants), 84 (orthography)
704 Turkmen Reference Grammar

-uh / hh / -m -u n /in -ü n / 2 1 4 ( 1 sin g u la r p e rs o n a l e n d in g ), 4 6 9 (3 sin g u ia r/p lu ra l o f

a ssertion p a rtid e)
-uh /hh /-m-un/in-ün/ 5 2 4 (noun-formation: result of action)
-uh /hh- /-ın -u n /in -ü n -/ 533 (verb -fo rm atio n : r e fle x iv e v o ic e ), 5 3 2 (p a ssiv e v o ic e a fter
stem s en d in g in n /!/); 5 4 (varian ts), 83 (o rth ograp h y)
+UHa/HHe /+m a-uno/ine-ünö/ 5 4 5 (adverb-formation), 5 5 7 (seasons)
+UHfla/HHfle /+mna-unno/inne-ünnö/ 4 2 7 (with auxiliary nouns)
+biH*;bi/MH*;H / + m jı- u n jı/ in ji- ü n jü / 1 5 7 ( o rd in a l n u m e ra ls); 5 4 ( v a ria n ts ), 8 4
(orth ograph y), 556 (days o f w e e k )
-buraçbipa/HHjKiMpe- /-mjıra-unjuro/injire-ünjiirö/ 5 3 6 (verb-formation: weakening of
action)
b m x a /inha:/ 'here (it is ) ' 40 1 (modal w_ord)
+ u h / hh /+ıq-uıj/ii]-üi)/ 10 8 (2 singular possessive); 5 4 , 1 1 2 (variants), 83
(orthography), 5 7 0 -5 7 6 (paradigms)
+ uh / hh /+ıg—u rj/irj—ür)/ 1 1 6 (genitive case), 1 1 6 (possessive relationship); 5 4 , 1 2 1
(variants), 5 9 (vowel lengthening), 69 (insertion of consonant after vowel), 80, 8 1,
83 (orthography), 1 6 4 (fractions), 4 2 7 (vvith auxiliary nouns), 488 (agreement), 489
(govemment), 5 7 1 -5 7 6 (paradigms)
- m h /h h /-ıi)-ui]/ii)-ür|/ 2 7 1 (2 p lu ra l/fo rm a l im p e ra tiv e m o o d ); 4 5 (u n stresse d ), 5 4
( v a ria n ts ), 5 7 ( v o w e l le n g th e n in g : - a n / a n /-a:rj/â:rj/), 83 ( o rth o g ra p h y ), 6 4 0
(paradigm s)
+unbi3/Hi(H3 /H-ırjıS—uqu5/ii]iS—ürjüS/ 108 (2 p lu ra l p o s se ssiv e ); 5 4 , 1 1 2 (va ria n ts), 56
(vovvel len gth en in g), 80, 81 (o rth ograph y), 5 7 0 -5 7 6 (parad igm s)
-bin/Hn /-ıp-up/ip-üp/ 3 5 0 (gerund); 5 4 (variants), 5 7 (vovvel lengthening: -an/sn
/-a:p/a:p/), 83 (orthography), 3 5 5 (in descriptive formations), 3 5 6 (paired verbs)
-biri/un ajiMaK /-ıp/ip almak/ 'to do (something) for oneself 3 0 4 (modal formation:
benefît)
-bin/un SapMaK /-ıp/ip bamvak/ 'to do more and more' 3 2 5 (descriptive formation)
-bin/Mn 6aıunaMaK /-ıp/ip başlamak/ 'to begin to do' 3 1 1 (descriptive formation)
-u n /H n GepMeK /-ıp /ip b e rm e k / 'to d o (so m e th in g ) f o r so m e o n e ' 3 0 4 (m o d a l fo rm atio n :
benefît)
-biıı/Mn öhjim ck /-ıp/ip bilm ek/ 'can/able to d o ' 301 (m odal form ation: ability)
-btn/ıın 6onMaK /-ıp/ip bolmok/ 'you/one can do, it’s okay/possible to do' 3 0 7 (modal
formation: possibility), 'to be in a fînished state' 32 6 (descriptive formation)
-bin/un raıiMaK /-ıp/ip ga:lmak/ 'to get in a state of doing or being' 3 2 6 (descriptive
formation)
-bin/mı renMeK /-ıp/ip gelmek/ 'to have been doing' 3 1 9 , 'to move to/here/to us' 3 2 4
(descriptive formation)
-bin/m ı rapMaK /-ıp/ip gi:mıek/ 'to move in' 3 2 4 (descriptive formation)
-b in /n n rıiTMaK /-ıp/ip g itm e k / 'to s u d d e n ly o r a b ru p tly d o ' 3 1 4 , 'to m o v e to/there/
avvay fro m u s' 3 2 4 (d e scrip tiv e form ation)
-bin/un roiiMaK /-ıp/ip goymok/ 'to do quickly orhastily' 314 (descriptive formation)
 Index 705

-bui/hii repMeK /-ıp/ip görmök/ 'to try to do, to give (something) a try' 305 (modal
formation: experiment)
-tın/un ryTapMaK /-ıp/ip gutormok/ 'to fin ish doing' 3 2 6 (descriptive formation)
-tm / n n flyp /-ıp/ip du:r/ 's/he’s standing' 2 2 5 (present continuous tense), 'to be doing
regularly/continuously' 322 (descriptive formation)
- u n / m flypM aK /-ıp/ip durm ok/ 'to k eep /con tin u e d o in g ' 320 (d e scrip tiv e form ation )
-bin/Mn Mep /-ıp/ip y ö :r/ 'to b e d o in g r e g u la r ly / c o n t in u o u s ly ' 3 2 2 ( d e s c r ip tiv e
form ation)
-bin/raiMepMeK /-ıp/ip yörm ök / 'to have been doing' 3 1 9 (descriptive formation)
-bin/unOTypMaK /-ıp/ip oturmok/ 'to keep/continue doing' 3 20 (descriptive foımation)
-un/un OTbip /-ıp/ip otı:r/ 's/he’s sitting' 2 2 5 (present continuous tense), 'to be doing
regularly/continuously' 3 22 (descriptive formation)
-bin/un yrpaM aK /-ıp/ip u gro m o k / 'to b egin to d o ' 3 1 1 (d e scrip tiv e form ation )
-bm /ıuı HHKMaK /-ıp/ip çık m a k / 'to m o v e o u t' 3 24 , 'to d o c o m p le te ly , to fın ish d o in g '
3 2 6 (d e scrip tiv e form ation)
-bin/un srrbtp /-ıp/ip yatı:r/ 's/h e’ s ly in g d o w n ' 2 2 5 (presen t co n tin u o u s ten; o), 'to be
d o in g re g u la rly / co n tin u o u sly ' 322 (d e sc rip tiv e form ation )
-bUiHbt/HnflH /-ıpdı-updı/ipdi-üpdü/ 2 53 (3 singular past perfect tense), 2 5 6 (vowel
lengthening: -anflbi/anflH /-a:pdı/a:pdi/), 2 8 3 (with conditional), 6 2 0 -6 2 3
(paradigms)
-Mimbiıc/MnflHK /-ıp d ık -u p d u k / ip d ik -ü p d ü k / 2 5 3 (1 p lu ra l past p e rfec t tense)
-binflbmap/raiHMnep /-ıpd ılar-u pd u lo r/ip diler-ü pd ü lör/ 2 5 3 (3 p lu ra l past p erfect tense)
-binflbiM/HHHHM /-ıp d ım -u p d u m /ip d im -ü p d ü m / 2 5 3 (1 sin g u la r past p e rfect tense)
-binflbin/HHHHn /-ıpdır|—updurj/ipdirj—iipdüi]/ 2 5 3 (2 sin g u la r p a st p erfect tense)
-iniflbiHii3/miflHHM3 /-ıpdırjı8-updui)u5/ipdii]iS-üpdiii]ii8 / 2 5 3 ( 2 p lu ra l past p e rfe c t
tense)
-binflbip/miflHp /-ıpdır-updur/ipdir-üpdiir/ 2 4 4 (3 singular subjective past indefinite
tense), 2 46 (vovvel lengthening: -anflbip/srm ııp /-a:pdır/a:pdir/), 6 1 2 - 6 1 5 (paradigms)
-binflbipnap/nnflnpnep /-ıpdırlar-updurlor/ipdirler-üpdürlör/ 2 4 4 (3 plural subjective
past indefinite tense)
-binflbipcbiH/HnflHpcHH / -ıp d ır9 ııj-u p d u r0 u i)/ ip d ir0 ij)-iip d ü r0 ü i]/ 2 4 4 (2 s in g u la r
s u b je c tiv e past in d efin ite tense)
-Hnflbipcbinbi3/«nflHpcMHH3 /-ıpdu'0 ır)i8 -updur6urju8 /ipdir0 igiS-iipdür0 üi]üo/ 2 4 4 (2
p lu ral su b je c tiv e past in d efin ite tense)
-binflbipbiH/unflHpMH /-ıpdınn-updurun/ipdirin-üpdürün/ 2 4 4 (1 singular s jb je c t iv e
past indefinite tense)
-brn flb ip b ic/ffim n n jıc /-ıpd ırı0 -u pd u ru 0 /ipd iri0 -iipd ürii0 / 2 4 4 (1 p lu ra l subjec rive past
in d efin ite tense)
-bUiMbicbm/HiiMHCMU /-ıpm ı0 ıi)-u pm u 0 u r)/ipm i0ii]-ü pm ü8 ü i]/2 4 6 (qu estion ib ra ı o f 2
sin g u la r s u b je c tiv e past in d efin ite ten se)
-bincblH/raıCHH /-Ip0ıi]-up0u[]/ip0ii]-üp0üx)/ 2 46 (sp o k e n fo rm o f 2 sin g u la r s jb je c t iv e
past in d efin ite ten se)
706 Turkmen Reference Grammar

-MncMHBi3/jtncHHH3 /-ıp9ır|i5-up9uQu5/ip0ii]i5-iip0ür]tiS/ 2 4 6 (sp o k e n fo rm o f 2 p lu ra l

s u b je c tiv e p a st in d efin ite ten se)
-w p/np- /-ır-ur/ir-iir-/ 5 3 5 (verb -form atio n: c a u sa tiv e v o ic e )
+bipra/Hpre- /+ ırga-urgo /L rge-ürgö-/ 5 29 (verb -form atio n)
+btpfla/Hpfle- /+ ırd a-urdo/irde-ü rdö -/5 28 (form ation o f exp ressiv e/o n o m a to p o eic verb s)
-h c /hc /-ı8 -u 0 /i0 -1i0 /2 14 (1 plu ral p e rso n a l e n d in g)
+MCTaH/HCTaH /+I00a:n-u00a:n/i00a:n-u00a:n/ 5 2 1 , 5 3 9 (Persian n o u n -fo rm in g su ffîx )
+ m t/h t- /+ ıt-u t/it-ü t-/ 5 29 (verb -form atio n )
- m t /h t - /-ıt-u t/it-ü t-/ 5 3 5 (verb -fo rm atio n : c a u sa tiv e v o ic e )
-biıu/jıııı / -ıs-u s/ is -ü s/ 3 3 4 (v e rb a l n o u n ); 60 ( v o w e l lo ss), 69 (in sertio n o f co n so n an t
a fte r vovvel), 5 2 6 (n oun -form atio n), 6 58 -6 5 9 (parad igm s)
-Miu/Hin s i m /-ıs/is y a :lı/ 'a s, as th ou gh , su ch a s ' 4 1 4 (p ostp osition )
-hui/hhi- / -ıs-u s/ is -ü s-/ 5 3 4 (v e rb -fo rm a tio n : c o o p e r a tiv e v o ic e ); 5 4 (v a ria n ts), 83
(orthography)
-Lium bip/raıiHHp- /-ıs d ır- u s d u r/is d ir - ü s d ü r -/ 5 3 6 (v e rb -fo rm a tio n : c o n tin u o u s/re p e titiv e
actio n )
-biuibiıc/MiıiHK /-ısık -u su k /isik -ü sü k / se e - m k /h k /-ık-u k/ik-iik/
-biııibiH/HiHHH /-m :n -u 3 ı:n /ısi:n -iisü :n / 5 4 6 (ad verb -fo rm ation )

3 rep (-fle) /eger(-de)/ '(an d ) i f ' 2 8 1 ,4 5 0 , 462 (co n d itio n con ju n ctio n )
3flHU /edil/ 'e x a c tly , ju s t' 3 93 (m od al vvord), 1 6 5 (in ten sifier)
3flwnMeK /edilm ek/ 'to b e d on e, to b e m a d e ' 5 1 3 (e q u iv ale n t to 6oJiMaK /bolm ok/)
3Ö /ey/ s e e aJt/sft /ay/ey/
sü n ecH H e 6 n p ...6 e ü n e c n n e 6wp /eyleO tne b ir...b e y le 0 in n e bir/ 'o n c e in th is w a y ...o n c e
in that w a y ' 448 (as co rrelatio n co n ju n ctio n )
sü ce M /ey0em / '(n o t o n ly ) but, rather' 440 (con trad ition con ju n ctio n )
3KeH /eken/ 'it tum s/tu m ed o u t' 386 (m o d al w o rd ), 3 8 7 (parad igm )
a n ö e rfle /elbetde/ 'c e rta in ly , o f c o u rse ' 388 (m o d al w o rd )
3MMa /em m a:/ 'b u t, h o w e v e r ' 4 4 0 (co n trad itio n con ju n ctio n )
3MMa BenM /em m a: w e li/ 'b u t th e n ' 44 2 (con trad ition con ju n ctio n )
3HMe /ence/ 'se v e ra l, a f e w ' 1 7 6 (in d efin ite pronoun)
s m e M e /e n c e m e / 'a n u m b er o f ' 1 7 6 (in d efin ite pronoun)
scacaH /e0a:0a:n / 'b a s ic a lly ' 3 9 4 (m o d al w o rd )
scacbtHfla /e0a:0m na/ 'at th e b a se o f ' 4 3 1 (a u x ilia ry noun)
s c c e apbiM /e00e/ 'o n e and a lıa lf' 166
3TMeıc /etm ek/ 'to m a k e , to d o ' 5 1 2 (a u x ilia ry verb)

sKenM eK /âkelm ek/ 'to b rin g (h ere)' < a m in reroteK /alıp gelm ek / 3 2 4
aKMTMeK /akitm ek/ 'to tak e (th ere)' < anbin rMTMeK /ahp gitm ek / 3 24
3 xjih /ahli/ 'a li' 1 7 2 (c o lle c tiv e pronoun)
axTHMan /ahtim a:!/ 'p r o b a b ly ' 389 (m o d al w ord)
 Index 707

) /ya:(-da)/ 'o r ' 44 5 (correlation co n ju n ctio n ), 49 3 (in terro ga tive sen ten ces)
sı(-fla)...fl(-fla) / y a :(-d a )...y a :(-d a)/ 'e ith e r...o r' 4 4 5 (correlation con ju n ctio n )
-a / ö s /-ya:/yâ:/ 2 2 2 (co n tracted fo r m o f 3 sin g u la r p resen t in d e fin ite ten se), 5 8 6 -5 8 7
(paradigm s)
hthm /yagnı/ 'tlıat is, in other vvords' 398 (modal vvord)
rkmh /yakı:n/ 'close to' 420 (postposition)
sm aK /ya:lak/ 'like' 4 1 3 (postposition)
m m /ya:h/ 'lik e , as if/th ou gh , su ch as, so th at' 4 1 3 (p o stp o sitio n )
HMaH /yam an/ 'r e a lly v e r y ' 393 (m o d a l vvord)
- sih/ü s h /-ya:n/ya:n/ 3 3 6 (presen t p a rticip le); 3 5 (lo n g vovvel), 5 5 (va ria n ts), 6 7 , 340
( v o ic in g o f ste m -fin a l co n son an t), 84 (orth o gra p h y ), 340 (con trasted vvith 1 sin g u la r
con tracted present in d efm ite ten se), 3 59 (paired verbs)
-sh / üsh 6 o n c a /-ya:n/yâ:n b olS o/ 282 (present co n d itio n a l m ood )
-sm/if3H neft /-ya:n/ya:n dey/ 'like' 40 9 (postposition)
-hh/ üsh flaJiflMp /-ya:n/yâ:n n a:llir/ 2 3 0 (negative 3 singular subjective present
continuous tense)
-mı/itaH y « h h /-ya:n/ya:n ücü:n/ 'b e c a u s e ' 4 1 2 (postposition )
-aıı/üsH a n t ı /-ya:n/yâ:n ya:lı/ 'a s th o u g h ' 4 1 4 (po stpo sitio n )
-HHflbip/üsuflHp /-ya:nnır/ya:nnir/ 2 2 9 (3 sin g u la r s u b je c tiv e present con tin u o u s ten se),
590 -59 5 (paradigm s)
-H H flbipnap/üaH flM pnep / -y a :n n ırla r/ y a :n n irle r/ 2 2 9 (3 p lu r a l s u b je c tiv e p re s e n t
co n tin u o u s ten se)
-HHflHpcMH/iiaHflHpcHH /-ya:nm r0 ıi]/yâ:n n ir0 iıj/ 2 2 9 (2 sin g u la r s u b je c tiv e p resen t
co n tin u o u s tense)
-HHfltıpcMHbi3/{İ3HflMpcHHH3 /-ya:nmr0ıi]i6/yâ:nmr6ir)i5/ 229 (2 plural su b je ctiv e present
co n tin u o u s tense)
-HHflMpHH/flsHflHpMH / -y a :n n ırın /y â :n n irin / 2 2 9 (1 s in g u la r s u b je c tiv e p r e s e n t
co n tin u o u s tense)
-HHflMpbic/MsıiHHpHC /-ya:nnırı0 /ya:nnirie/ 2 2 9 (1 p lu ra l su b je c tiv e present co n tin u o u s
tense)
-H inıa/iİ3H M 3 /- y a :n c a :/y â :n c â :/ 'u n t il ' 5 0 4 (o b je c t p h r a s e ) , s e e T3 ...-m aAıa /tii:
...+ c a :/c â :/
aHbiHfla /ya:nınna/ 'b e sid e, at the sid e o f ' 4 3 1 (a u x ilia ry noun)
snia /yarja:/ 'd u e to ' 42 6 (postposition )
- s ıp /ü s p /-ya:r/ya:r/ 2 1 9 (3 sin g u la r p resen t in d e fin ite ten se); 2 1 (d ia le ct fo rm s), 3 5
(lo n g vovvel), 4 6 (stressed), 55 (variants), 6 7 , 2 2 2 ( v o ic in g o f ste m -fin a l co n son an t),
84 (orth ograph y), 2 62 (contrasted vvith fiıtu re in d efin ite ten se), 58 2 -5 8 5 (parad igm s)
-apflBi/MspflH /-ya:rdı/yâ:rdi/ 2 4 7 (3 sin g u la r p a st co n tin u o u s te n se ), 2 5 1 (con trasted
vvith p a st in d efin ite and h ab itu al ten ses), 6 1 6 - 6 1 9 (parad igm s)
-apflMK/itepflHK /-ya:rdık/yâ:rdik/ 247 (1 plural past co n tin u o u s tense)
-Hpfltmap/MspflHJiep /-ya:rdılar/yâ:rdiler/ 247 (3 plu ral past con tin u o u s tense)
-apflbiM/ftapflHM /-ya:rdım / ya:rd im / 247 (1 sin g u la r past con tin u o u s tense)
708 Turkmen Reference Grammar

-apflbin /üsp fliın /-ya:rdırj/ya:rdii]/ 2 4 7 (2 sin g u la r p a st con tin u o u s tense)

-spflfciHM3/Ü3pflHi<H3 /-ya:rdıi)i6/yâ:rdir)i5/ 2 4 7 (2 plural past con tin uous tense)
-spnap/M spnep /-ya:rlar/yâ:rler/ 2 1 9 (3 plu ral presen t in d efin ite tense)
-apMMflbm/öapMMflMK; /-ya:rm ıdtr)/yâ:nnidirj/ 2 5 1 (q u e stio n fo rm o f 2 sin g u la r past
co n tin u o u s tense)
-spMim/fepMHH /-ya:rmır)/yâ:ıınii]/ 222 (question form o f 2 singular present indefinite
tense)
ap n b i /ya:rpı/ 'h a lf' 1 6 5 (fraction vvord)
-apcbiH/ifepcHn /-ya:rflıi]/yâ:ıQii]/ 2 1 9 (2 sin gu la r present indefinite tense)
-apcbmbi3/M3pcMHH3 /-ya:r6ırjı5/ya:r8irji5/ 2 1 9 (2 plural present in d efin ite tense)
a p r a /ya:rtı/ T ıa lf' 1 6 5 , 16 6 (fra ctio n vvord)
ap b i /ya:n / l ı a l f ' 1 6 5 , 16 6 (fra ctio n vvord), 1 6 7 (te llin g tim e)
apbiM /yarnm / T ıa lf' 16 5 , 16 6 (fraction vvord)
-apbiH/ftapMH /-ya:nn/yâ:rin/ 2 1 9 (1 singular present indefinite tense)
-aptıc/M apnc /-ya:rı0 /yâ:ri0 /2 19 (1 plu ral present in d efin ite tense)
HTflbi /yatdı/ 'vvas tired o f d o in g, d id to e x h a u s tio n ' 2 26
STMaK /yatm ak/ 'to lie d o w n ', s e e -bm /nn a r a p /-ıp/ip yatı:r/
a T b ip / y a tı:r/ 's/ h e ’ s ly in g d o vvn ' 2 2 4 (p re se n t c o n tin u o u s te n s e ); 58 (v o v v e l
le n g th e n in g ), 2 2 5 (co n tracte d fo rm ), 2 2 7 -2 2 8 (ta b le o f fo r m s ), 48 3 (vvith -Ka/K3
/-ka:/kâ:/), 588 (parad igm s)
HTiipflH /yatı:rdı/ 's/he was lying dovvn' 2 26 (contracted form), 58 9 (paradigms)